Manuel technique du serveur PowerEdge R210 poweredge-r210-technical-guidebook-en_fr.pdf - Manuels - DELL
DELL sur FNAC.COM
- Revenir à l'accueil
Manuel technique du serveur PowerEdge R210
This document is for informational purposes only. Dell reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein. The content provided is as is and without express or implied warranties of any kind.
Voir également :
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/__ovh_icons/text.gif)
DELLmanuelsutilisate..> 13-Jun-2014 20:35 12M
Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 13-Jun-2014 20:35 4.4M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 13-Jun-2014 20:33 4.1M
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 13-Jun-2014 20:32 4.1M
Dell-Laser-Printer-3..> 13-Jun-2014 20:31 3.8M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 13-Jun-2014 20:30 3.9M
Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 13-Jun-2014 20:30 3.5M
Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 13-Jun-2014 20:29 3.7M
Dell-Liste-des-manue..> 13-Jun-2014 20:28 3.5M
Dell-Vostro-V131-Man..> 13-Jun-2014 20:28 3.4M
DellDimension1100Ser..> 13-Jun-2014 20:27 3.4M
Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 13-Jun-2014 20:27 3.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:26 3.4M
Imprimante-personnel..> 13-Jun-2014 20:25 3.4M
Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 13-Jun-2014 20:25 3.3M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 13-Jun-2014 20:24 3.3M
Dell-PowerVault-NX40..> 13-Jun-2014 20:24 3.2M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 13-Jun-2014 20:23 3.2M
Dell-Dimension-9200-..> 13-Jun-2014 20:23 3.2M
Dell-Divers-Manuels.htm 13-Jun-2014 20:22 3.2M
AlienwareAurora-R3.htm 13-Jun-2014 20:22 3.2M
Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 13-Jun-2014 20:21 3.2M
Imprimante-laser-de-..> 13-Jun-2014 20:20 3.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:20 3.2M
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 13-Jun-2014 20:19 3.2M
AlienwareAuroraAuror..> 13-Jun-2014 20:19 3.1M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 13-Jun-2014 20:18 3.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 13-Jun-2014 20:18 3.0M
Dell-Dimension-E520-..> 13-Jun-2014 20:17 3.0M
Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel..> 13-Jun-2014 20:17 3.0M
Chassis-RAID-Dell-Po..> 13-Jun-2014 20:16 3.0M
AlienwareAurora-R4.htm 13-Jun-2014 20:16 2.9M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 13-Jun-2014 20:15 2.9M
Dell-Inspiron-700m-M..> 13-Jun-2014 20:15 2.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 13-Jun-2014 20:14 2.9M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 13-Jun-2014 20:14 2.9M
Dell-Logiciel-de-ges..> 13-Jun-2014 20:13 2.9M
Dell-Photo-Printer-7..> 13-Jun-2014 20:13 2.8M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 13-Jun-2014 20:12 2.8M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 13-Jun-2014 20:12 2.8M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 13-Jun-2014 20:11 2.8M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 13-Jun-2014 20:11 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:10 2.8M
Dell-moniteur-D1920-..> 13-Jun-2014 20:10 2.7M
AlienwareArea-51Area..> 13-Jun-2014 20:10 2.7M
Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ma..> 13-Jun-2014 20:09 2.7M
Dell-Baie-de-stockag..> 13-Jun-2014 20:09 2.7M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 13-Jun-2014 20:08 2.7M
Dell-Streak-Manuel-d..> 13-Jun-2014 20:08 2.7M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 13-Jun-2014 20:07 2.6M
Imprimante-Dell-Phot..> 13-Jun-2014 20:07 2.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:06 2.6M
Dell-Clavier-Axim-Ma..> 13-Jun-2014 20:06 2.6M
Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 13-Jun-2014 20:06 2.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:05 2.5M
alienwareX51.htm 13-Jun-2014 20:05 2.5M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 13-Jun-2014 20:04 2.5M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 13-Jun-2014 20:04 2.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:03 2.5M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 13-Jun-2014 20:03 2.3M
Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 13-Jun-2014 20:02 2.3M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 13-Jun-2014 20:02 2.2M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 13-Jun-2014 20:02 2.2M
Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel..> 13-Jun-2014 20:01 2.2M
Dell-Inspiron-1100-M..> 13-Jun-2014 20:01 2.2M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 13-Jun-2014 20:01 2.1M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 13-Jun-2014 20:00 2.1M
Dell-Inspiron-9400-E..> 13-Jun-2014 20:00 2.0M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 13-Jun-2014 20:00 1.9M
Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 13-Jun-2014 19:59 1.6M
Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell..> 13-Jun-2014 19:59 1.2M
Dell-Inspiron-1525-1..> 13-Jun-2014 19:59 1.5M
Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 1.0M
listedesproduitsDELL..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 871K
Dell-Dimension-3100-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 906K
Liste des produits D..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 871K
![[ ]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/__ovh_icons/unknown.gif)
sitemapDELL.xml 13-Jun-2014 19:58 418K
Lien-Manuels-Utilisa..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 90K
rechercheDELL.htm 13-Jun-2014 19:58 7.7K
2715LinksysWireless-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 5.0K
970SacocheMeridianII..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 5.0K
2714LinksysWireless-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.9K
957Sacochedetranspor..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.9K
3288D-LinkXtremeNGig..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.8K
1873LinksysWireless-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.8K
3107Sacochemessagerp..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.8K
1249iDRAC6Enterprise..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.8K
1250iDRAC6Express-Ki..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.8K
1248iDRAC6Express-Ki..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.8K
1288LogitechWireless..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.7K
clicDELL.htm 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.7K
1244Cartedegestionde..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.7K
1214DellNotebookEsse..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.7K
2888TargusUSB2.0Dock..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.6K
DellEView-Standpouro..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.6K
1278LogitechWireless..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.5K
3020MicrosoftArcKeyb..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.5K
1631Adaptateurpourim..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.4K
1622KensingtonSD400D..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.4K
1170Carteadaptateurc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
1171Carteadaptateurc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
317Dell-19-en-1-Lect..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
327Lecteurdecarte19-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
326Lecteurdecarte19-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
1164Adaptateuradapta..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
322Dell-19-en-1-Lect..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
321Dell-19-en-1-Lect..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
320Dell-19-en-1-Lect..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
1251iDRAC6Express-Ki..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
1701Ampoulederechang..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
1703Ampoulederechang..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.3K
316Dell-19-en-1-Lect..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.2K
660CartoucheHDamovib..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.2K
1077AdaptateurDispla..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
982Sacochedetranspor..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
762Onduleurfaiblepro..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
984Sacochedetranspor..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
1900AMERICANPOWERCON..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
1302Dell-A940A960-Co..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
3213NETGEARProSafeJG..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
1240DELLCartedegesti..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
609Cartouchedenettoy..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
950Stationd''accueil..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
352Dell-500Go-7200tp..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
1332Dell-964-Couleur..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
761Onduleurde2700Wfo..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
983Sacochedetranspor..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
760Onduleurde1920Wfo..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
759Onduleurde1000Wfo..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1151Graphics6GBNVIDI..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
325LecteurdecarteLec..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1467Dell17201720dnca..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1388Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1439Dell17101710ncar..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1418Dell17001700ncar..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1509Dell2330ddn&2350..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
3736IomegaStorCenter..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
3735IomegaStorCenter..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1580Dell5230dn5350dn..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1387Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1386Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1385Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1394Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1150Graphics1GBNVIDI..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
3651IomegaStorCenter..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1466Dell17201720dnca..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
3434StarTech.com4Por..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1384Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1538Dell3330dncartou..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1586Dell3335dncartou..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1383Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1532Dell2230dcartouc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1414DellS2500cartouc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1406Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1400Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1393Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1392Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1382Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1410DellP1500cartouc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1582Dell5230dncartou..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1391Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1587Dell3335dncartou..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1536Dell3330dncartou..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
557Dell16xLecteurdeD..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1415DellS2500cartouc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1411DellP1500cartouc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1405Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1404Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1399Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1398Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1390Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1381Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1380Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
772Onduleurde1000Wfo..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
770Onduleurde1920Wfo..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1403Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1397Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1389Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1379Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
771Onduleurde500Wfor..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
613DellCartouchedene..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1329Dell-964-Couleur..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1227Sansfilmini-cart..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1396Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1378Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
345Disquedur500GoSAT..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1401Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1395Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1377Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1224Sansfilmini-cart..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
232PET100doubleCoreX..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1615DellUltraSharpU2..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
231PET100doubleCoreX..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
376Disquedur160GoSAT..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1402Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
254DoubleCoreXeonE31..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
209DoubleCoreXeonE31..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
735Dell-Blocd''alime..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
492250GoSATA72k6cm25..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
260DoubleCoreXeonX52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
253DoubleCoreXeonX52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
246DoubleCoreXeonX52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1152Graphics1GBNVIDI..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
229PET100doubleCoreC..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
198DoubleCoreXeonE52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
195DoubleCoreXeonX52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
354Dell-250Go-7200tr..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
422500GoSATA72k9cm35..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
3341IomegaScreenPlay..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1511Dell2330ddn&2350..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
188DoubleCoreXeonE31..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
255ProcesseurCore2Du..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
204DoubleCoreXeonL52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
228PET100SimpleCoreC..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
telecharger.php 12-Oct-2012 11:44 960
![[DIR]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/__ovh_icons/folder.gif)
rechercheDELL_files/ 12-May-2012 14:26 -
test.htm 13-Dec-2011 18:39 745
4220AlienwareM14X.ht..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 2.9K
4221AlienwareM18x.ht..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.3K
4222AlienwareM11.htm..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.2K
4223AlienwareM11xR3...> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 2.9K
4224Alienware17x.htm..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.4K
4225AlienwareM17x.ht..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4226XPS15-Essentiel...> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4227XPS15.htm.htm 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4228XPS15Performance..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4229XPS15Premium.htm..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4230XPS15-Multimédia..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4231XPS15-Premium.ht..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4232XPS17-Essentiel...> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4233XPS17-Efficacité..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4234XPS17Multimédia...> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4235XPS17Premium.htm..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4236XPS17-3D.htm.htm 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4237XPS17-Multimédia..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4238XPS17-Premium.ht..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4239Imprimantephotoà..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4240DellProjecteuràc..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4241DellProjecteurS5..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4242Imprimantephotoà..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4243Imprimantephotoà..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4245Imprimantephotoà..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4244Imprimantephotoà..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
3637NETGEARN300Wirel..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.1K
3638NETGEARWN2000RPT..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.2K
3639NETGEARProSafeGS..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.3K
3640NETGEARProSafeXS..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.1K
3641NETGEARProSafeGS..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.2K
3643NETGEARProSafeGS..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.2K
3642NETGEARWirelessR..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.2K
3644TrustWirelessSli..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.2K
3645TrustWirelessDes..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.1K
Technical Guide
1-socket 1U rack
server providing
the features you
need without a
lot of the
unnecessary
extras.
Dell PowerEdge R210
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 2
This document is for informational purposes only. Dell reserves the right to make
changes without further notice to any products herein. The content provided is as is
and without express or implied warranties of any kind.
Dell, PowerEdge, PowerVault, OpenManage, and ReadyRails are trademarks of Dell,
Inc. Citrix® and XenServer™ are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. and/or one or more
of its subsidiaries, and may be registered in the United States Patent and Trademark
Office and in other countries. ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Intel, Xeon, and Pentium are registered
trademarks and Core is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other
countries. HP and COMPAQ are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. Broadcom is
a registered trademark and NetXtreme is a trademark of Broadcom Corporation and/or
its affiliates in the United States, certain other countries and/or the EU. CommVault
Galaxy® or Simpana® are registered trademarks of CommVault Systems, Inc. InfiniBand
is a registered trademark and service mark of the InfiniBand Trade Association. Matrox
is a registered trademark of Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd. Microsoft and SQL Server
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries. Mellanox is a registered trademark of Mellanox
Technologies, Inc. and ConnectX, InfiniBlast, InfiniBridge, InfiniHost, InfiniRISC,
InfiniScale, and InfiniPCI are trademarks of Mellanox Technologies, Inc. Red Hat is a
registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Linux
is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Symantec and Backup Exec are trademarks
owned by Symantec Corporation or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries.
Novell, SUSE, PlateSpin, and PowerConvert are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
QLogic and PathScale are registered trademarks of Qlogic Corporation. VMware is a
registered trademark and vSphere is a trademark of VMware, Inc. in the United States
and/or other jurisdictions. Vizioncore, vRanger, vConverter, and vFoglight are
trademarks of Vizioncore Inc. in the United States of America and other countries.
Winbond is a registered trademark of Winbond Electronics Corporation. Other
trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the
entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell disclaims proprietary
interest in the marks and names of others.
©Copyright 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction or translation of any part
of this work beyond that permitted by U.S. copyright laws without the written
permission of Dell Inc. is unlawful and strictly forbidden.
Initial Release April 2010
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 3
Table of Contents
1 Product Comparison........................................................................... 7
2 New Technologies ........................................................................... 11
2.1 Overview................................................................................ 11
2.2 Detailed Information.................................................................. 11
2.2.1 System Management ............................................................ 11
2.2.2 Software RAID.................................................................... 11
2.2.3 eSATA.............................................................................. 13
3 System Overview ............................................................................ 14
4 Mechanical.................................................................................... 16
4.1 Chassis Description.................................................................... 16
4.2 Dimensions and Weight............................................................... 16
4.3 Front Panel View and Features...................................................... 17
4.4 Back Panel View and Features ...................................................... 18
4.5 Power Supply Indicators .............................................................. 18
4.5.1 Power Button LED ............................................................... 18
4.5.2 System Status/ID LED ........................................................... 18
4.6 NIC Indicators .......................................................................... 18
4.7 Side View ............................................................................... 19
4.8 Internal Chassis View ................................................................. 20
4.9 Rails ..................................................................................... 21
4.10 Fans...................................................................................... 22
4.11 Control Panel LED ..................................................................... 22
4.12 Security ................................................................................. 22
4.12.1 Top Cover Lock Mechanism .................................................... 22
4.12.2 Bezel............................................................................... 22
4.12.3 Trusted Platform Module (TPM)............................................... 22
4.12.4 Power Switch Security .......................................................... 23
4.12.5 Intrusion Alert.................................................................... 23
4.12.6 Secure Mode...................................................................... 24
4.13 USB Ports ............................................................................... 24
4.14 Battery .................................................................................. 24
4.15 Field Replaceable Units (FRU)....................................................... 25
4.16 User Accessible Jumpers, Sockets, and Connectors ............................. 25
5 Power, Thermal, Acoustic ................................................................. 26
5.1 Power Supplies......................................................................... 26
5.2 Power Supply Connectors on the Planar........................................... 26
5.3 Environmental Specifications........................................................ 27
5.3.1 Temperature ..................................................................... 27
5.3.2 Relative Humidity ............................................................... 27
5.3.3 Maximum Vibration.............................................................. 27
5.3.4 Maximum Shock.................................................................. 27
5.3.5 Altitude ........................................................................... 27
5.3.6 Airborne Contaminant Level................................................... 27
5.4 Power Supply Unit (PSU) Specifications............................................ 28
5.5 ENERGY STAR® Compliance .......................................................... 28
5.6 Thermal ................................................................................. 28
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 4
5.7 Acoustics ................................................................................ 29
6 Processors .................................................................................... 31
6.1 Overview................................................................................ 31
6.2 Supported Processors ................................................................. 31
6.3 Processor Configurations ............................................................. 31
7 Memory........................................................................................ 32
7.1 Overview................................................................................ 32
7.2 DIMMs Supported ...................................................................... 32
7.3 Slots/Risers ............................................................................. 33
7.4 Speed.................................................................................... 33
7.5 Sparing .................................................................................. 33
7.6 Mirroring ................................................................................ 33
7.7 RAID...................................................................................... 33
8 Chipset ........................................................................................ 34
8.1 Overview................................................................................ 34
8.2 Direct Media Interface................................................................ 34
8.3 PCI Express Interface ................................................................. 34
8.4 SATA Interface ......................................................................... 34
8.5 AHCI ..................................................................................... 34
8.6 PCI Interface ........................................................................... 34
8.7 Low Pin Count (LPC) Interface ...................................................... 35
8.8 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) .................................................... 35
8.9 Compatibility Module ................................................................. 35
8.10 Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC) ........................... 35
8.11 USB Interface........................................................................... 35
8.12 Real-Time Clock (RTC)................................................................ 36
8.13 GPIO ..................................................................................... 36
8.14 Enhanced Power Management....................................................... 36
8.15 System Management Features ....................................................... 36
8.15.1 TCO Timer ........................................................................ 36
8.15.2 Processor Present Indicator.................................................... 36
8.15.3 Error Code Correction (ECC) Reporting ...................................... 36
8.15.4 Function Disable ................................................................. 37
8.16 System Management Bus (SMBus 2.0) .............................................. 37
8.17 Intel Anti-Theft Technology ......................................................... 37
8.18 Intel Virtualization Technology for Directed I/O................................. 37
8.19 JTAG Boundary-Scan .................................................................. 38
9 BIOS............................................................................................ 39
9.1 Overview................................................................................ 39
9.2 ACPI...................................................................................... 40
9.3 Power Management Modes ........................................................... 40
9.3.1 Dell Active Power Controller .................................................. 40
9.3.2 Power Saving BIOS Setting (OS Control) ..................................... 41
9.3.3 Maximum Performance ......................................................... 41
10 I/O Slots....................................................................................... 43
10.1 Overview................................................................................ 43
10.2 PCI Devices ............................................................................. 44
10.3 Boot Order.............................................................................. 47
10.4 NICs ...................................................................................... 47
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 5
11 Storage ........................................................................................ 48
11.1 Overview................................................................................ 48
11.2 Drives.................................................................................... 48
11.3 RAID Configurations ................................................................... 49
11.4 Optical Disk Drive (ODD) ............................................................. 49
11.5 Tape Drives ............................................................................. 50
12 Video and Audio ............................................................................. 51
12.1 Video .................................................................................... 51
12.2 Audio .................................................................................... 51
13 Rack Information ............................................................................ 52
13.1 Overview................................................................................ 52
13.2 Rails ..................................................................................... 52
13.3 Cable Management Arm (CMA) ...................................................... 52
14 Operating Systems .......................................................................... 53
15 Virtualization................................................................................. 55
16 Systems Management ....................................................................... 56
16.1 Overview................................................................................ 56
16.2 Server Management ................................................................... 56
16.3 Embedded Server Management ..................................................... 57
16.4 Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator ........................... 57
16.5 iDRAC6 Express ........................................................................ 58
16.6 iDRAC6 Enterprise ..................................................................... 58
17 Peripherals ................................................................................... 61
17.1 USB....................................................................................... 61
17.2 USB Device.............................................................................. 61
17.3 External Storage ....................................................................... 62
18 Packaging Options ........................................................................... 62
Tables
Table 1. Comparison of PowerEdge Server Features ......................................8
Table 2. Comparison Overview PERC S100 and S300..................................... 12
Table 3. eSATA Modes ........................................................................ 13
Table 4. Product Feature Summary ........................................................ 14
Table 5. Overall Dimensions and Weight .................................................. 16
Table 6. Specific Measurements ............................................................ 16
Table 7. TPM Pin Signals ..................................................................... 23
Table 8. Power Supply 24 Pins and Signals ................................................ 26
Table 9. Power Supply 4 Pins and Signals ................................................. 26
Table 10. PSU Specifications.................................................................. 28
Table 11. Acoustical Specifications .......................................................... 29
Table 12. Processor Information ............................................................. 31
Table 13. Supported Processor Configurations............................................. 32
Table 14. Wake Up Events and States ....................................................... 40
Table 15. Summary of R210 Power Management Features ............................... 41
Table 16. Power Profiles that R210 BIOS will Expose in BIOS Setup .................... 42
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 6
Table 17. I/O Slot Information ............................................................... 45
Table 18. PCI Card Dimensions ............................................................... 46
Table 19. Bandwidth, Quantities, and Priorities........................................... 46
Table 20. Available Drives..................................................................... 48
Table 21. RAID Configurations ................................................................ 49
Table 22. Supported Tape Drives............................................................. 50
Table 23. PowerEdge R210 Rail Information ............................................... 52
Table 24. Supported Microsoft Operating Systems ........................................ 53
Table 25. Supported Linux Operating Systems ............................................. 54
Table 26. Supported Virtualization OS ...................................................... 55
Table 27. Unified Server Configurator Features and Description ....................... 58
Table 28. Features List for BMC, iDRAC6, and vFlash..................................... 59
Table 29. USB Controller Priorities .......................................................... 61
Table 30. External Storage .................................................................... 62
Table 31. AMF Single Pack Dimensions and Weights ...................................... 63
Table 32. EMF Single Pack Dimensions and Weights ...................................... 63
Table 33. PowerEdge R210 Volatility ........................................................ 66
Table 34. Volatility: Data Writing and Purpose ............................................ 68
Table 35. Methodology for Data Input to Memory ......................................... 69
Table 36. Methodology for Memory Protection and Clearing ............................ 71
Figures
Figure 1. Server Dimensions .................................................................. 17
Figure 2. Front Panel View ................................................................... 17
Figure 3. Back Panel View .................................................................... 18
Figure 4. Power Button LED .................................................................. 18
Figure 5. Side View ............................................................................ 19
Figure 6. Internal Chassis View .............................................................. 20
Figure 7. R210 Static Rails .................................................................... 21
Figure 8. R210 Mounted In Four-Post Square-Hole Rack ................................. 21
Figure 9. System Fans ......................................................................... 22
Figure 10. Intrusion Switch.................................................................. 23
Figure 11. Internal USB Ports ............................................................... 24
Figure 12. Battery on Motherboard ........................................................ 25
Figure 13. PCIe x16 Riser Card ............................................................. 43
Figure 14. SAS 6/iR Adapter Card Installed............................................... 44
Figure 15. Rack Adjustability Range....................................................... 52
Figure 16. Packaging ......................................................................... 64
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 7
1 Product Comparison
Dell aims to add value to your business by including the features you need without a lot of the
unnecessary extras. Our goal is to deliver value through tailored solutions based on industry
standards, as well as purposeful, innovative design of our servers.
The Dell™ PowerEdge™ R210 was developed with a purposeful design, energy-optimized
technology, simplified systems management, and the flexibility that make it a great first rack
server for the small business or as a specialized application server or edge server for larger
corporations. Dell’s entry 1-socket 1U rack server, the PowerEdge R210, offers value, the
performance of Intel® Xeon® 3400 series processors, DDR3 memory, eSATA external storage
expandability, and enterprise-class manageability in an ultra-compact chassis.
Purposeful Design: The PowerEdge R210 follows the 11th generation PowerEdge portfolio
specifications and features the same system design commonality and reliability true to the
entire portfolio. All 11th generation PowerEdge servers are built to make the user experience
easier. We put all external ports, power supplies, and LED lights in the same location for
familiar experience as well as easy installation and deployment.
Robust, metal hard drive carriers and organized cabling are designed to help improve
component access and airflow across the server. The PowerEdge R210’s design also provides a
LED display positioned on the front of the server for ease of monitoring and troubleshooting
condition of the server. It was designed to meet the needs of many IT environments with a
short 15.5 inch chassis to allow for flexible deployment almost anywhere, including spaceconstrained
environments.
Energy Efficiency: The PowerEdge R210 incorporates Energy Smart design using a low 250 watt
power supply, low-flow fans and logical component layout of the internal components which
aids with airflow direction, helping to keep the server cool and reduce noise as much as
possible. The result is a server with the smallest power footprint within the 11th generation
PowerEdge server portfolio.
Simplified System Management: With the optional advanced embedded systems management
capabilities of Lifecycle Controller, Dell brings comprehensive enterprise class manageability
into the 1-socket space. Lifecycle Controller is delivered as part of the optional iDRAC Express
or iDRAC Enterprise in the PowerEdge R210. The Lifecycle Controller helps to simplify
administrator tasks by performing a comprehensive set of provisioning functions such as system
deployment, system updates, hardware configuration and diagnostics from a single intuitive
interface called Unified Server Configurator (USC) in a pre-OS environment. This helps
eliminate the need to use and maintain multiple pieces of disparate CD/DVD media.
Also part of the Dell OpenManage™ portfolio is the Dell Management Console which is included
with every Dell server and provides IT administrators with a consolidated console view of their
IT infrastructure.
Built with cost-effective RAID options to further protect your valuable data, new eSATA
external storage connectivity options, and the latest Intel® Xeon® processor technology, the
PowerEdge R210 is an ideal entry 1 socket 1U rack for small businesses and larger offices
needing flexibility and manageability in a very small chassis.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 8
Table 1. Comparison of PowerEdge Server Features
Feature R210 R200
(Predecessors)
R310
(Next level up)
Processor Quad-core Intel®
Xeon® processor 3400
series
Dual-core Intel®
Celeron® G1101
Dual-core Intel®
Pentium® G6950
Dual-core Intel® Core
i3 530
Dual-core Intel® Core
i3 540 processors
Single Quad-Core
Intel® Xeon® 3300
series
Single Dual-Core
Intel® Xeon® E3100
series
Single Quad-Core
Intel® Xeon® 3200
series
Single Dual-Core
Intel® Xeon® 3000
series
Single Intel® CoreTM 2
Duo® E4000 series
Single Intel® CoreTM 2
Duo® E7000 series
Single Intel® Pentium®
Dual-Core E2000
series
Single Intel® Celeron®
E1000 and 400 series
Quad-core Intel®
Xeon® processor 3400
series
Dual-core Intel®
Celeron® G1101
Dual-core Intel®
Pentium® G6950
Dual-core Intel® Core
i3 530
Dual-core Intel® Core
i3 540 processors
Front Side Bus DMI 1333MHz DMI @2.5 Gb/s
# Processors 1 1 1
# Cores Dual or Quad Dual or Quad Dual or Quad
L2/L3 Cache 4MB or 8MB 512K~6M Intel® Xeon®: 8M
DT proc: 4, 3 or 2M
Chipset Intel® 3420 chipset Intel® 3210
chipset+ICH9R
Intel® 3420 chipset
DIMMs 4 DDR3
Unbuffered w/ECC
1333/1066 MHz
4 DDR2
Unbuffered w/ECC
800/ 667MHz
6 DDR3
Unbuffered w/ECC or
Registered w/ECC
1333/1066MHz
Min/Max RAM 1GB/16GB 512MB/8GB 1GB/32GB
HD Bays 2 x 3.5” or
2 x 2.5”
2 x 3.5” 4 x 3.5”
Optional Hot-Swap
Support 2.5" HDDs via
Hot-Swap tray
HD Types Default SATA.
Optional SAS and SSD
via add-in controller
Default SATA.
Optional SAS via addin
controller
Default SATA.
Optional SAS and SSD
via add-in controller
Ext Drive Bay(s) 1 for slim ODD 1 for slim ODD 1 for slim ODD
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 9
Feature R210 R200
(Predecessors)
R310
(Next level up)
Embedded HD
Controller
Chipset based SATA Chipset based SATA Chipset based SATA
Optional Storage
Controller
NON-RAID:
SAS 5/E
LSI 2032 (For TBU
only)
RAID:
SAS 6/iR Adapter
PERC S100
PERC S300
PERC H200 PERC 6/E
PERC H800
NON-RAID:
SAS 5/E
LSI 2032 (For TBU
only)
RAID:
SAS 6/iR Adapter
PERC 6/E
NON-RAID:
SAS HBA LSI 2032 (For
TBU only), PERC H800
RAID:
SAS 6/iR Modular
PERC H200 (6Gb/s)
PERC H700 (6Gb/s)
with 512MB
PERC H700 (6Gb/s)
NV DRAM with 512MB
or 1G
PERC S100 (software
based)
PERC S300 Modular
(software based)
Availability ECC Memory, ADD-in
RAID, TPM/CTPM
ECC memory, Add-in
RAID, toolless
chassis
Hot-swap HDD;
Redundant PSU;
Quad-pack LED
diagnostic/LCD with
Hot-swap HDD
chassis
;ECC Memory
Server Mgt. BMC, IPMI 2.0
compliant; Full Dell™
OpenManage™ suite
Optional; iDRAC6
Express, iDRAC6
Enterprise, vFlash
DRAC4
Full Dell™
OpenManage™ suite
BMC, IPMI 2.0
compliant; Full Dell™
OpenManage™ suite
Optional; iDRAC6
Express, iDRAC6
Enterprise, vFlash
I/O Slots 1 x PCIe x16 (True
x16, Gen2); full
height, half length
Support x16
bandwidth card under
25W
Riser 1: One PCIex 8,
one PCIe x4 (w/ x8
connector)
Riser 2: One PCI-X
64/133 and one PCIe
x8
Riser 1: PCIe x16 (x8
routing), Full Height/
Half Length, Gen 2
Riser 2: PCIe x8 (x8
routing), Full Height /
Half Length, Gen 2
2 PCIe G2 slots:
Slot 1: PCIe x16 (x8
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 10
Feature R210 R200
(Predecessors)
R310
(Next level up)
RAID See Optional Storage
Controller row above
See Optional Storage
Controller row above
See Optional Storage
Controller row above
NIC/LOM 2x GbE LOM w/o TOE
Optional: various NIC
available
2x GbE LOM
Optional: various NIC
available
2x GbE LOM
Optional: various NIC
available
USB 2 front/2 rear/2
internal
2 front/2 rear 2 front/2 rear/2
internal
Power Supplies Non-redundant, 250W
(80+ Bronze)
Auto Ranging
(100V~240V)
Non-redundant, 345W Non-redundant, 350W
(80+ Bronze)
Optional redundant,
400W (80+ Silver)
Auto Ranging
(100V~240V)
Fans Non-redundant, nonhot
swappable
Non-redundant, nonhot
swappable
Non-redundant, nonhot
swappable
Form Factor 1U rack 1U rack 1U rack
Dimensions (HxWxD) 42.6 x 431 x 393.7
(mm) (w/o ear and
bezel)
1.67” x 17.1” x 15.5”
42.67 x 447.0 x 546.1
(mm) (w/o ear and
bezel)
1.68” x 17.6” x 21.5”
42.4 x 434.0 x 610
(mm) ( w/o bezel)
1.67” x 17.10” x
24.00”
Weight Max. 17.76 lbs
(8.058 Kg)
Max. 28.7 lbs
(13.01 Kg)
Max. 33.02 lbs
(15 Kg)
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 11
2 New Technologies
2.1 Overview
A number of new technologies are used in the PowerEdge R210, including:
• iDRAC6 (new Dell server remote management controller)
• Software RAID PERC S100 and PERC S300
• E-SATA connector
2.2 Detailed Information
2.2.1 System Management
The PowerEdge R210 supports iDRAC6 Express and Enterprise for advanced manageability. For
more information on iDRAC 6 options, please see Section 16, Systems Management.
2.2.2 Software RAID
Dell PowerEdge RAID controller portfolio now offers Enterprise Software RAID in the
PERC S100 and PERC S300 options. PERC S100 and S300 are supported in PowerEdge
11th generation value-based servers.
Software RAID code uses the CPU of the computer system to execute the RAID tasks
including leveraging the CPUs (calculating power as well as sharing memory), internal
bus resources, operating system, and all associated applications. Software-based RAID
uses drives which are attached to the computer system via a built-in I/O interface or a
processor-less host bus adapter (HBA). The RAID function becomes active as soon as
the operating system has loaded the RAID driver software.
Previous generations of PERC controllers have been based on Hardware RAID
technology, the PERC S100 and PERC S300 are based on Software RAID technology. The
software based RAID options provide a cost effective entry-level RAID. Both the
PERCS100 and S300 versions offer similar RAID level support, including RAID 0, 1, 5, 10.
In the case of the PERC S100, it offers a minimal RAID option where the I/O Controller
Hub (ICH) chipset of the motherboard enables a SATA RAID option. There is no new
hardware involved. The PERC S100 controller solution supports up to 4 cabled SATA
Hard Disk Drives (HDD) or Solid State Disk (SSD) drives and is ideal for SMB usage
scenarios.
For the PERC S300, the hardware component of the controller is based on the Dell SAS
HBA (leveraging SAS 6/iR) and allows for both SAS and SATA connectivity. PERC S300
controller solution supports up to 8 cabled or hot plug SAS/SATA Hard Disk Drives
(HDDs).
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 12
Table 2. Comparison Overview PERC S100 and S300
Feature/Spec S100 S300
Interface 3Gb SATA
(SATA II)
3Gb SAS/SATA
(SAS 1.1)
I/O Controller Intel® ICH10R Dell 3Gb/s SAS Adapter
(2 internal connectors with x4
SAS ports)
System
Communication
Integrated PCIe Lanes
Cache Memory N/A N/A
Battery-backed cache No No
Max Number of
Physical Drives
4 8
HDD Support SATA
(Cabled)
SAS & SATA
(Cabled or hot plug)
SSD Support SATA
(Cabled)
Not Supported
SED Support Not Supported Not Supported
RAID Levels 0, 1, 5, 10 0, 1, 5, 10
Non-RAID Volumes Yes Yes
Max Number of
Virtual Disks per
Controller
8 8
Global Hotspare
Support
Yes Yes
Operating System
Support
(Windows Server
Only)
Microsoft® Windows Server®
2003 R2 SP2, 32/64-bit,
Standard & Enterprise
Editions*
Microsoft® Windows Server®
2003 R2 SP2 32-bit Web
Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server®
2008 SP2, 32/64-bit, Standard
& Enterprise Editions
Microsoft® Windows Server®
2008 R2, 64-bit, Web,
Standard, and Enterprise
Editions
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003
R2 SP2, 32/64-bit, Standard &
Enterprise Editions*
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003
R2 SP2 32-bit Web Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008
SP2, 32/64-bit, Standard &
Enterprise Editions
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008
R2, 64-bit, Web, Standard, and
Enterprise Editions
Virtualization
Support
Not Supported Not Supported
Storage Management OpenManage™ 6.2 or later OpenManage 6.2™ or later
Note: Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 is supported with Service Pack 2. For the most
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 13
up-to-date information, see the Operating System Support Matrix for Dell PowerEdge
Systems on Dell.com.
2.2.3 eSATA
External Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (eSATA) serves as an external
interface for SATA technologies. For customers who want fast (up to 1.5Gbit/s), easyto-use
external storage that has advanced features such as S.M.A.R.T. (SelfMonitoring,
Analysis, and Reporting Technology) protection, eSATA may be a good
choice.
eSATA devices are not bootable when BIOS is set to RAID mode and are not supported
as a part of Virtual Disks when in RAID mode for S100.
To operate eSATA devices in the Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 4.8 environment, the BIOS
mode must be manually switched from default (AHCI mode) to ATA mode.
Table 3. eSATA Modes
Mode Bootable Hot-Pluggable Restrictions
ATA mode Yes No
AHCI mode Yes Yes RHEL 4.8 is not supported.
RAID mode (S100
enabled)
No No Linux and Virtualization OS are not
supported
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 14
3 System Overview
Table 4. Product Feature Summary
Feature Product Description
Form Factor Rack
Processors Quad-core Intel® Xeon® 3400 series processors
Dual-core Intel® Celeron® G1101
Dual-core Intel® Pentium® G6950
Dual-core Intel® Core™ i3 530
Dual-core Intel® Core™ i3 540 processors
Processor Sockets 1
Front Side Bus or
HyperTransport
DMI (Direct Media Interface)
Cache 8MB
Chipset Intel® 3420 chipset
Memory Up to 16GB (4 U-DIMMs): 1GB/2GB/4GB DDR3 1066MHz or
1333MHz
I/O Slots 1 PCIe x16 G2 slot
RAID Controllers Internal Controllers:
SAS 6/iR
PERC S100 (software-based)
PERC S300 (software-based)
PERC H200
External Controllers:
PERC 6/E with 256MB or 512MB of battery-backed cache
SAS 5/E
PERC H800
LSI2032 PCIe SCSI HBA
Drive Bays Cabled options available:
Up to two 2.5”/ 3.5” SAS, SATA or SSD drives
Maximum Internal
Storage
4TB
Hard Drives 3.5 inch SATA (7.2K rpm): 160GB, 250GB, 500GB, 1TB, 2TB
3.5 inch Near-line SAS (7.2 rpm): 1TB, 2TB
3.5 inch SAS (10K rpm): 600GB
3.5 inch SAS (15K rpm): 146GB, 300GB, 450GB, 600GB
2.5 inch SAS (10K rpm): 146GB, 300GB
Network Interface
Cards
1 Broadcom® NetXtreme™ 5709 with Dual Port Gigabit Ethernet
NIC, Copper, w/TOE PCIe x4
Broadcom® NetXtreme™ 5709 Dual Port Gigabit Ethernet NIC,
Copper, TOE/ISCI PCIe x4
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 15
Feature Product Description
Intel® PRO/ 1000PT Single Port Adapter, Gigabit Ethernet NIC, PCIe
x1
Intel® Gigabit ET Dual Port Adapter, Gigabit Ethernet NIC, PCIe x4
Intel® Gigabit ET Quad Port Adapter, Gigabit Ethernet NIC, PCIe x4
Power Supply Single-cabled power supply (250W)
Availability Quad-pack LED diagnostics, ECC Memory, add-in RAID, TPM/CTPM
Video Matrox® G200eW w/ 8MB memory
Remote Management iDRAC6 optional
Systems Management BMC, IPMI 2.0 compliant
Dell™ OpenManage™ featuring Dell Management Console
Unified Server Configurator
Lifecycle Controller enabled via optional: iDRAC6 Express, iDRAC6
Enterprise and vFlash
Rack Support Support for Static ReadyRails™ 4-post and 2-post racks
Operating Systems Microsoft® Factory Installed OS Options:
Microsoft® Windows® Small Business Server 2008, 64-bit Standard
and Premium Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 with SP2 32-bit Standard and
Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 with SP2 64-bit, Standard and
Enterprise Editions
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 32-bit, Web, Standard and
Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 64-bit, Web, Standard and
Enterprise Editions
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 SP2 32-bit, Web, Standard and
Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 SP2 64-bit, Web, Standard and
Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 64-bit Web, Standard and
Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Foundation R2
Microsoft® Non- Factory Installed OS Option:
Microsoft® Windows® Essential Business Server 2008 64-bit
Standard and Premium Edition
Factory Installed Linux OS Options:
Novell® SUSE® Linux® Enterprise Server 11
Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 5.3
Virtualization OS Option:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008, with Hyper-V™
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 16
4 Mechanical
4.1 Chassis Description
The PowerEdge R210 is a 1-socket 1U server. The configuration details are as follows:
• HDD Type : 2x 3.5” Cabled HDD or 2 x 2.5” cabled HDD
• PSU Type: Single Non-Redundant PSU
• Diagnostic: LED
4.2 Dimensions and Weight
Table 5. Overall Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (HxWxD)
(w/o ear and bezel)
1.68” x 17” x 15.5”
(42.6 x 431 x 393.7 mm)
Max Weight 17.76 lbs (8.058kg)
Measurements in Table 6 correspond to the diagram shown in Figure 1 below.
Table 6. Specific Measurements
Xa Xb Ya Yb Yc
Za
with bezel
Za
without
bezel Zb* Zc
L6 Sys
Wgt
(Kg)
434.0 482.58 42.4 N/A N/A 31.35 NA 393.7 397.49 5.95
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 17
Figure 1. Server Dimensions
* Zb goes to the nominal rear wall external surface where the motherboard I/O connectors
reside.
4.3 Front Panel View and Features
Figure 2. Front Panel View
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 18
4.4 Back Panel View and Features
Figure 3. Back Panel View
4.5 Power Supply Indicators
4.5.1 Power Button LED
The Power button controls the system's power, turning the unit on and off.
All PowerEdge servers have the Power LED light-pipe integrated in the Power button. The color
of the power LED is green. The lighting pattern must be in the form of a standard Power icon.
Figure 4. Power Button LED
4.5.2 System Status/ID LED
The System Status/ID LED, present on non-modular rack-dense and rackable tower PowerEdge
servers, has the following states:
• No light—System is in the off state (S5, or mechanical (no AC power)
• Blinking Amber—System fault/error condition.
• Steady Blue—Normal operating state (S0)
• Blinking Blue—System ID engaged
This LED remains powered during non-operational (standby, shutdown) modes to enable system
identification.
4.6 NIC Indicators
See the Hardware Owner’s Manual for information.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 19
4.7 Side View
Figure 5. Side View
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 20
4.8 Internal Chassis View
Figure 6. Internal Chassis View
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 21
4.9 Rails
ReadyRails™ static rails for tool-less mounting in 4-post racks with square or
unthreaded round holes or tooled mounting in 4-post threaded and 2-post racks
The R210 rails must first be attached to the sides of the system and then inserted into
the cabinet members installed in the rack. For additional information regarding rail
options for the R210, see Section 13.
Figure 7. R210 Static Rails
Figure 8. R210 Mounted In Four-Post Square-Hole Rack
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 22
4.10 Fans
There are three system fans located in the middle of the system.
Figure 9. System Fans
4.11 Control Panel LED
See the Hardware Owner’s Manual for information.
4.12 Security
4.12.1 Top Cover Lock Mechanism
The PowerEdge R210 uses a coin lock on the top cover. This lock must be unlocked and
the cover removed to access the internal components.
4.12.2 Bezel
The bezel lock is located on the front of the bezel and provides security for the system
by preventing access to optical disk drives and the Power button.
4.12.3 Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
The PowerEdge R210 uses a TPM 1.2 compliant encryption chip solution on the system
board with BIOS support worldwide, except for China where Trusted Computing Module
(TCM) is the standard. TPM is disabled by default.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 23
Table 7. TPM Pin Signals
Pin SIGNAL Pin SIGNAL
1 TPM_PRES_N 20 I2C_TPM_SCL
2 LPC_LAD0 19 P3V3
3 GND 18 I2C_TPM_SDA
4 LPC_LAD1 17 LPC_LAD3
5 SEEPROM I2C Address E0 16 GND
6 P3V3_AUX 15 SERIRQ
7 RST_TPM_R_N 14 P3V3
8 LPC_LFRAME_N 13 LPC_LAD2
9 GND 12 GND
10 TPM 33MHz Clock 11 TPM 14MHz Clock
4.12.4 Power Switch Security
The LED control panel is designed so the power switch cannot be accidentally turned
on or off. In addition, in BIOS there is an optional setting in the CMOS setup to disable
the power switch.
4.12.5 Intrusion Alert
The intrusion switch snaps into the chassis located under the side cover. The intrusion
switch detects and alerts the user that the side cover is open.
Figure 10. Intrusion Switch
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 24
4.12.6 Secure Mode
BIOS has the ability to enter a secure boot mode via setup. This mode includes the
option to lock out the power and NMI switches on the control panel or set up a system
password. See the BIOS specification in the Hardware Owner’s Manual for information.
4.13 USB Ports
The PowerEdge R210 has two internal USB ports.
Figure 11. Internal USB Ports
4.14 Battery
A replaceable lithium battery (CR2032) is mounted on the motherboard to provide
backup power for the real-time clock and CMOS RAM in the Platform Controller Hub
(PCH).
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 25
Figure 12. Battery on Motherboard
4.15 Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
The planar contains a 16K x 8 serial EEPROM to store FRU information including Dell part
number, part revision level, and serial number. This information is used by the SEL (system
event log) and the BMC (baseboard management controller).
Parts available for field replacement include:
• CMOS battery
• Expansion card
• Front bezel
• HDD
• I/O panel
• Memory
• ODD
• Power supply
• Processor
• Processor shroud
• System board
• System fan
4.16 User Accessible Jumpers, Sockets, and Connectors
See the Hardware Owner’s Manual.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 26
5 Power, Thermal, Acoustic
5.1 Power Supplies
The base system includes a single 250W power supply. This unit provides power to the planar
and the two internal hard drive bays. Power will be “soft-switched” allowing power cycling
using a switch on the front of the system enclosure or through software control (server
management functions). The power system is compatible with industry standards, such as ACPI
and Server 2000.
Standard VRD (Voltage Regulator Down) modules that conform to VRD11.1 specification are
used. This reduces the board layout complexity while offering design modularity. As processor
speeds increase, a newer VRD can be used to accommodate the power increase with no need to
re-spin the board. The VRD is integrated onto the planar and is not field upgradeable.
5.2 Power Supply Connectors on the Planar
There are 2 separate power supply connectors on the planar. One connector is an ATX
connector (2x12) and the other one is a 2x2 connector to provide an additional two pins for
+12V. The connector Pin definition (2 x 12 power connector) is not ATX standard.
The 2x12 connector provides 3.3V, 5V, 12V, and 12V standby to the system. (3.3V standby to
system is generated from 12V standby).
Table 8. Power Supply 24 Pins and Signals
Pin SIGNAL Pin SIGNAL
1 P3V3 13 P3V3
2 P3V3 14 P12V1
3 GND 15 GND
4 P5V 16 PS_ON_N
5 GND 17 GND
6 P5V 18 GND
7 GND 19 GND
8 PS_PWROK 20 P12V1
9 P12V_STBY 21 P5V
10 P12V1 22 P5V
11 P12V1 23 P5V
12 P3V3 24 GND
Table 9. Power Supply 4 Pins and Signals
Pin SIGNAL Pin SIGNAL
1 GND 3 P12V2
2 GND 4 P12V2
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 27
5.3 Environmental Specifications
5.3.1 Temperature
Operating: 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) with a maximum temperature gradation of 10°C
per hour (NOTE: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating temperature is
de-rated 1ºF/550 ft.)
Storage: –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) with a maximum temperature gradation of 20°C
per hour
5.3.2 Relative Humidity
Operating: 20% to 80% (non-condensing) with a maximum humidity gradation of 10%
per hour
Storage: 5% to 95% (non-condensing)
5.3.3 Maximum Vibration
Operating : 0.26 Grms at 5–350 Hz for 15 min
Storage: 1.54 Grms at 10–250 Hz for 15 min
5.3.4 Maximum Shock
Operating: One shock pulse in the positive z axis (one pulse on each side of the system)
of 31 G for 2.6 ms in the operational orientation
Storage: Six consecutively executed shock pulses in the positive and negative x, y, and
z axes (one pulse on each side of the system) of 71 G for up to 2 ms
Six consecutively executed shock pulses in the positive and negative x, y, and z axes
(one pulse on each side of the system) of 32 G faired square wave pulse with velocity
change at 270 inches/second (686 centimeters/second)
5.3.5 Altitude
Operating: 16 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) (Note: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the
maximum operating temperature is de-rated 1ºF/550 ft.)
Storage: 16 to 10,600 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)
5.3.6 Airborne Contaminant Level
Class: G2 or lower as defined by ISA-S71.04-1985
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 28
5.4 Power Supply Unit (PSU) Specifications
Table 10. PSU Specifications
Feature Non Redundant PSU
Dimensions L-2101 mm x W-106 mm x
H-40.0 mm
Status Indicators 1 x bi-color Light Emitting
Diode
Integrated Fans None
AC Cord Rating 15 Amps @ 120 VAC, 10
Amps @ 240 VAC
Input Voltage 90 – 264 VAC
Auto-ranging Yes
Line Frequency 47–63 Hertz
Maximum Inrush Current
Under typical line
conditions and over the
entire system ambient
operating range, the inrush
current may reach 25 Amps
for 10 ms or less.
Hot-Swap Capability No
Output Power 250W
Maximum Heat Dissipation
1039 BTU per hour
maximum
Efficiency
20% to 100% Load
82–85% @115 VAC
82–85% @ 230 VAC
1 Does not include the power supply handle or ejection tab
5.5 ENERGY STAR® Compliance
See the ENERGY STAR Compliance results on Dell.com.
5.6 Thermal
The thermal design of the PowerEdge R210 reflects the following:
• Closed loop thermal control algorithm. Closed loop thermal control
method uses feedback temperatures to dynamically determine proper fan
speeds.
• Comprehensive thermal management. The PowerEdge R210 controls
system cooling fan speed based on several different responses from critical
components’ sensors, such as CPU temperature, DIMM temperature, inlet
ambient temperature, and system configurations. The thermal management
adjusts proper cooling ability for the system according to what the system
really needs.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 29
• Optimized Ventilation. R210 chassis has a custom ventilation design for
optimized air flow path. Each component and peripheral is ensured
sufficient air to cool.
• Power-to-Cool. Dell continues to improve the design and cooling efficiency
for server products. The power-to-cool ratio of the PowerEdge R210 is
improved over that of its predecessor, PowerEdge R200.
5.7 Acoustics
The acoustical design of the PowerEdge R210 reflects the following:
• Adherence to Dell’s high sound quality standards. Sound quality is
different from sound power level and sound pressure level in that it
describes how humans respond to annoyances in sound, like whistles, hums,
etc. One of the sound quality metrics in the Dell specification is
prominence ratio of a tone, as listed in the table below.
• Noise ramp and descent at bootup. Fan speeds, hence noise levels, ramp
during the boot process in order to add a layer of protection for component
cooling in case the system were not to boot properly.
• Noise levels vs. configurations. The noise level of PowerEdge R210 is not
dependent upon the hardware configuration of the system. The table below
shows the noise levels of the PowerEdge R210 with maximum configuration.
Table 11. Acoustical Specifications
Configurations @ 23 ± 2 °C Operating
Mode
LWA-UL
(Bels)
LpA
(dBA)
PROMINENT
CPU DIMM ODD HDD TONES
Intel® Xeon®
X3450 2.66
GHz
4 x 4GB 1 X DVD+/-
RW
4 x 3.5” SAS
(450 GB/
15000 RPM)
Standby 2.8 16 None
Idle 6.5 49 None
Stressed
Processor
6.5 49 None
Definitions
Standby: AC Power is connected to Power Supply Units but system is not turned on.
Idle: Reference ISO7779 (1999) definition 3.1.7; system is running in its OS but no
other specific activity.
Stressed Processor: An operating mode per ISO7779 (1999) definition 3.1.6. The
software MemBW4 is activated to stress the processors.
LwA–UL: The upper limit sound power level (LwA) calculated per section 4.4.2 of ISO
9296 (1988) and measured in accordance to ISO 7779 (1999).
LpA: A-Weighted sound pressure level. The system is placed in a rack with its bottom
at 75 cm from the floor. The acoustic transducer is at front bystander position, ref
ISO7779 (1999) Section 8.6.2.
Prominent tone: Criteria of D.5 and D.8 of ECMA-74 9th ed. (2005) are followed to
determine if discrete tones are prominent. The system is placed in a rack with its
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 30
bottom at 75 cm from the floor. The acoustic transducer is at front bystander position,
ref ISO7779 (1999) Section 8.6.2.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 31
6 Processors
6.1 Overview
The PowerEdge R210 is a 1S, entry-level server based on the Intel FCLGA1156 to support Intel
Xeon 3400 series and Core i3 processors.
6.2 Supported Processors
Table 12. Processor Information
Model Speed Power Cache Cores Max.
Memory
Intel® Xeon®
X3430
2.4GHz 95W 8M 4C 1333MHz
Intel® Xeon®
X3440
2.53GHz 95W 8M 4C 1333MHz
Intel® Xeon®
X3450
2.67GHz 95W 8M 4C 1333MHz
Intel® Xeon®
X3460
2.8GHz 95W 8M 4C 1333MHz
Intel® Xeon®
X3470
2.93GHz 95W 8M 4C 1333MHz
Intel® Xeon®
L3426
1.86GHz 45W 8M 4C 1333MHz
Intel® Core™
i3 540
3.06GHz 73W 4M 2C 1333MHz
Intel® Core™
i3 530
2.93GHz 73W 4M 2C 1333MHz
Intel®
Pentium®
G6950
2.8GHz 73W 3M 2C 1066MHz
Intel®
Celeron®
G1101
2.26GHz 73W 2M 2C 1066MHz
Intel® Xeon®
L3406
2.26GHz 30W 4M 2C 1066MHz
6.3 Processor Configurations
The PowerEdge R210 is a single socket 1U rack server that operates in single processor mode
only. The memory controller is embedded in the processor.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 32
7 Memory
7.1 Overview
Features of the PowerEdge R210 memory include:
• 2 channels per processor
• Support for Unbuffered ECC DDDR3 DIMMs.
• Support for DDR3 speeds of 1066/1333
• 4 DIMM sockets (16GB Maximum capacity)
• Support for Single Rank and Dual Rank DIMMs
7.2 DIMMs Supported
The following DIMMs are supported by the PowerEdge R210:
• 1GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1066 w/ECC
• 1GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1333 w/ECC
• 2GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1066 w/ECC
• 2GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1333 w/ECC
• 4GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1066 w/ECC
• 4GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1333 w/ECC
Table 13. Supported Processor Configurations
System
Capacity
System
Memory
Speed
DIMM
Speed
DIMM_T
ECH
DIMM
Capacity
NUM_DI
MM Slot
NUM_
Rank
Data
Width
1GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 1 1 1 1 X8
1GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 1 1 1 1 X8
2GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 1 2 1,2 1 X8
2GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 1 2 1,2 1 X8
4GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 1 4 1,2,3,4 1 X8
4GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 2 2 1,2 2 X8
4GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 1 4 1,2,3,4 1 X8
4GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 2 2 1,2 2 X8
8GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 2 4 1,2,3,4 2 X8
8GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 4 2 1,2 2 X8
8GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 2 4 1,2,3,4 2 X8
8GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 4 2 1,2 2 X8
16GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 4 4 1,2,3,4 2 X8
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 33
System
Capacity
System
Memory
Speed
DIMM
Speed
DIMM_T
ECH
DIMM
Capacity
NUM_DI
MM Slot
NUM_
Rank
Data
Width
16GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 4 4 1,2,3,4 2 X8
2GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 2 1 1 2 X8
2GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 2 1 1 2 X8
4GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 4 1 1 2 X8
4GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 4 1 1 2 X8
7.3 Slots/Risers
The PowerEdge R210 planar provides four 72-bit (240-pin) sockets for DIMM memory
modules. These modules are DDR3-800/1066/1333 Unbuffered DDR SDRAM DIMMs. The
modules are configured as 72 bits wide to provide for ECC. The memory controller in
the CPU performs the ECC. The system supports a minimum of 1GB upgradeable to 16
of RAM, using the following DIMM sizes:
• 1GB, DIMM Module
• 2GB, DIMM Module
• 4GB, DIMM Module
7.4 Speed
The PowerEdge R210 supports 1066/1333MHz DDR3 memory.
7.5 Sparing
Not supported.
7.6 Mirroring
Not supported.
7.7 RAID
Memory RAID is not supported.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 34
8 Chipset
8.1 Overview
The PowerEdge R210 planar incorporates the Intel Ibex Peak as PCH chipset. The Ibex
Peak is a highly integrated I/O controller. The high-level features supported by the
chipset and implemented on the PowerEdge R210 are detailed in the sections that
follow.
8.2 Direct Media Interface
Direct Media Interface (DMI) is the chip-to-chip connection between the processor and Ibex
Peak chipset. This high-speed interface integrates advanced priority-based servicing allowing
for concurrent traffic and true isochronous transfer capabilities. Base functionality is
completely software-transparent, permitting current and legacy software to operate normally.
8.3 PCI Express Interface
The Ibex Peak provides up to 8 PCI Express Root Ports, supporting the PCI Express Base
Specification, Revision 2.0. Each Root Port supports 2.5 GB/s bandwidth in each direction (5
GB/s concurrent). PCI Express Root Ports 1-4 can be statically configured as four x1 Ports or
ganged together to form one x 4 ports. Ports 5 and 6 can only be used as two x 1 port.
8.4 SATA Interface
The Ibex Peak has two integrated SATA host controllers that support independent DMA
operation on up to six ports and supports data transfer rates of up to 3.0 GB/s (300MB/s). The
SATA controller contains two modes of operation – a legacy mode using I/O space, and an AHCI
mode using memory space. Software that uses legacy mode will not have AHCI capabilities.
The Ibex Peak supports the Serial ATA Specification, Revision 1.0a. The Ibex Peak also supports
several optional sections of the Serial ATA II: Extensions to Serial ATA 1.0 Specification,
Revision 1.0 (AHCI support is required for some elements).
8.5 AHCI
The Ibex Peak provides hardware support for Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI), a new
programming interface for SATA host controllers. Platforms supporting AHCI may take
advantage of performance features such as no master/slave designation for SATA devices—each
device is treated as a master—and hardware-assisted native command queuing. AHCI also
provides usability enhancements such as Hot-Plug. AHCI requires appropriate software support
(e.g., an AHCI driver) and for some features, hardware support in the SATA device or additional
platform hardware.
8.6 PCI Interface
The Ibex Peak PCI interface provides a 33 MHz, Revision 2.3 implementation. The Ibex Peak
integrates a PCI arbiter that supports up to four external PCI bus masters in addition to the
internal Ibex Peak requests. This allows for combinations of up to four PCI down devices and
PCI slots.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 35
8.7 Low Pin Count (LPC) Interface
The Ibex Peak implements an LPC Interface as described in the LPC 1.1 Specification. The Low
Pin Count (LPC) bridge function of the Ibex Peak resides in PCI Device 31:Function 0. In
addition to the LPC bridge interface function, D31:F0 contains other functional units including
DMA, interrupt controllers, timers, power management, system management, GPIO, and RTC.
8.8 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
The Ibex Peak implements an SPI Interface as an alternative interface for the BIOS flash device.
An SPI flash device can be used as a replacement for the FWH, and is required to support
Gigabit Ethernet, Intel® Active Management Technology and integrated Intel Quiet System
Technology. The Ibex Peak supports up to two SPI flash devices with speed up to 20 MHz, 33
MHz utilizing two chip select pins.
8.9 Compatibility Module
The DMA controller incorporates the logic of two 82C37 DMA controllers, with seven
independently programmable channels. Channels 0–3 are hardwired to 8-bit, count-by-byte
transfers, and channels 5–7 are hardwired to 16-bit, count-by-word transfers. Any two of the
seven DMA channels can be programmed to support fast Type-F transfers.
Channel 4 is reserved as a generic bus master request.
The Ibex Peak supports LPC DMA, which is similar to ISA DMA, through the Ibex Peak’s DMA
controller. LPC DMA is handled through the use of the LDRQ# lines from peripherals and special
encoding on LAD[3:0] from the host. Single, Demand, Verify, and Increment modes are
supported on the LPC interface.
The timer/counter block contains three counters that are equivalent in function to those found
in one 82C54 programmable interval timer. These three counters are combined to provide the
system timer function, and speaker tone. The 14.31818 MHz oscillator input provides the clock
source for these three counters.
The Ibex Peak provides an ISA-Compatible Programmable Interrupt Controller (PIC) that
incorporates the functionality of two, 82C59 interrupt controllers. The two interrupt
controllers are cascaded so that 14 external and two internal interrupts are possible. In
addition, the Ibex Peak supports a serial interrupt scheme.
All of the registers in these modules can be read and restored. This is required to save and
restore system state after power has been removed and restored to the platform.
8.10 Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC)
In addition to the standard ISA compatible Programmable Interrupt controller (PIC) described in
the previous section, the Ibex Peak incorporates the Advanced Programmable Interrupt
Controller (APIC).
8.11 USB Interface
The Ibex Peak contains up to two Enhanced Host Controller Interface (EHCI) host controllers
that support USB high-speed signaling. High-speed USB 2.0 allows data transfers up to 480 Mb/s
which is 40 times faster than full-speed USB. The Ibex Peak also contains up to seven Universal
Host Controller Interface (UHCI) controllers that support USB full-speed and low-speed signaling.
The Ibex Peak supports up to fourteen USB 2.0 ports. All fourteen ports are high-speed, fullspeed,
and low-speed capable. Ibex Peak’s port-routing logic determines whether a USB port is
controlled by one of the UHCI or EHCI controllers.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 36
8.12 Real-Time Clock (RTC)
The Ibex Peak contains a real-time clock with 256 bytes of battery-backed RAM.
The real-time clock performs two key functions: keeping track of the time of day and storing
system data, even when the system is powered down. The RTC operates on a 32.768 KHz
crystal and a 3 V battery.
The RTC also supports two lockable memory ranges. By setting bits in the configuration space,
two 8-byte ranges can be locked to read and write accesses. This prevents unauthorized
reading of passwords or other system security information.
The RTC also supports a date alarm that allows for scheduling a wake up event up to 30 days in
advance, rather than just 24 hours in advance.
8.13 GPIO
Various general purpose inputs and outputs are provided for custom system design. The number
of inputs and outputs varies depending on Ibex Peak configuration.
8.14 Enhanced Power Management
The Ibex Peak’s power management functions include enhanced clock control and various lowpower
(suspend) states (e.g., Suspend-to-RAM and Suspend-to-Disk). A hardware-based thermal
management circuit permits software-independent entrance to low-power states. The Ibex
Peak contains full support for the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI)
Specification, Revision 3.0a.
8.15 System Management Features
In addition to Intel AMT, the Ibex Peak integrates several functions designed to
manage the system and lower the total cost of ownership (TCO) of the system. These
system management functions are designed to report errors, diagnose the system, and
recover from system lockups without the aid of an external microcontroller.
8.15.1 TCO Timer
The Ibex Peak’s integrated programmable TCO (Total Cost of Ownership) timer is used
to detect system locks. The first expiration of the timer generates an SMI# that the
system can use to recover from a software lock. The second expiration of the timer
causes a system reset to recover from a hardware lock.
8.15.2 Processor Present Indicator
The Ibex Peak looks for the processor to fetch the first instruction after reset. If the
processor does not fetch the first instruction, the Ibex Peak will reboot the system.
8.15.3 Error Code Correction (ECC) Reporting
When detecting an ECC error, the host controller has the ability to send one of several
messages to the Ibex Peak. The host controller can instruct the Ibex Peak to generate
an SMI#, NMI, SERR#, or TCO interrupt.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 37
8.15.4 Function Disable
The Ibex Peak provides the ability to disable the following integrated functions: LAN,
USB, LPC, Intel HD Audio, SATA, PCI Express or SMBus. Once disabled, these functions
no longer decode I/O, memory, or PCI configuration space. Also, no interrupts or
power management events are generated from the disabled functions.
Intruder Detect. The Ibex Peak provides an input signal (INTRUDER#) that can be
attached to a switch that is activated by the system case being opened. The Ibex Peak
can be programmed to generate an SMI# or TCO interrupt due to an active INTRUDER#
signal.
8.16 System Management Bus (SMBus 2.0)
The Ibex Peak contains an SMBus Host interface that allows the processor to
communicate with SMBus slaves. This interface is compatible with most I2C devices.
Special I2C commands are implemented.
The Ibex Peak’s SMBus host controller provides a mechanism for the processor to
initiate communications with SMBus peripherals (slaves). Also, the Ibex Peak supports
slave functionality, including the Host Notify protocol. Hence, the host controller
supports eight command protocols of the SMBus interface (see System Management Bus
(SMBus) Specification, Version 2.0): Quick Command, Send Byte, Receive Byte, Write
Byte/Word, Read Byte/Word, Process Call, Block Read/Write, and Host Notify.
Ibex Peak’s SMBus also implements hardware-based Packet Error Checking for data
robustness and the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to dynamically provide address
to all SMBus devices.
8.17 Intel Anti-Theft Technology
The Ibex Peak introduces a new hardware-based security technology which encrypts
data stored on any SATA compliant HDD in AHCI Mode. This feature gives the end-user
the ability to restrict access to HDD data by unknown parties. Intel Anti-Theft
Technology can be used alone or can be combined with software encryption
applications to add protection against data theft.
Intel Anti-Theft Technology functionality requires a correctly configured system,
including an appropriate processor, Intel Management Engine firmware, and system
BIOS support.
8.18 Intel Virtualization Technology for Directed I/O
The Ibex Peak provides hardware support for implementation of Intel Virtualization
Technology with Directed I/O (Intel VT-d). Intel VT-d Technology consists of
technology components that support the virtualization of platforms based on Intel
Architecture Processors. Intel VT-d Technology enables multiple operating systems and
applications to run in independent partitions. A partition behaves like a virtual
machine (VM) and provides isolation and protection across partitions. Each partition is
allocated its own subset of host physical memory.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 38
8.19 JTAG Boundary-Scan
Ibex Peak adds the industry standard JTAG interface and enables Boundary-Scan in
place of the XOR chains used in previous generations of the Ibex Peak. Boundary-Scan
can be used to ensure device connectivity during the board manufacturing process.
The JTAG interface allows system manufacturers to improve efficiency by using
industry available tools to test the Ibex Peak on an assembled board. Since JTAG is a
serial interface, it eliminates the need to create probe points for every pin in an XOR
chain. This eases pin breakout and trace routing and simplifies the interface between
the system and a bed-of-nails tester.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 39
9 BIOS
9.1 Overview
The following features are supported by BIOS:
• System BIOS
• System Setup
• Onboard PCI video BIOS support
• SATA enabled for CDROM and HDD
• PCI FW3.0 compliant
• PCI-to-PCI bridge 1.0 compliant
• Plug and Play BIOS 1.0a compliant
• MP 1.4
• SMBIOS 2.5
• USB 1.1 with legacy USB support
• USB 2.0 support in BIOS during pre-boot
• Dell Server Assistant 7.0 support
• System Service support
• iDRAC supported
• Error logging via ESM
• ACPI 2.0 support (S0, OS-S4, S5 states)
• I2O v1.5 ready
• Selectable Boot support based on BIOS Boot Specification v1.01
• CD-ROM Boot 1.0
• Remote BIOS Update support
• Remote Configuration Interface (RCI) support
• Console redirection via COM1
• PXE support based on Preboot Execution Environment Specification v2.1
• 2-byte ID support
• ePPID support in flash
• Memory remapping support
• DDR3 UDIMM memory support
• UEFI shell Support
• IDRAC6/IDRAC6 Lite support
• VT-d
• IOAT
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 40
• AC recovery staggering Power-Up
• DIMM mismatch checking
• Support for multiple power profiles:
• Static Maximum Performance Mode
• OS Control (DBS)
• Active Power Controller
• Custom
9.2 ACPI
ACPI compliance: S0, S4, S5 supported
NO S1, S2, S3 (STR) support.
S4 will be supported by OS support only.
Table 14. Wake Up Events and States
Wake Up Events States Can Wake From
RTC S5, OS-S4
Power Button S5, OS-S4
RI# Not supported
PME# S5, OS-S4
KB Not supported
MOUSE Not supported
USB Not supported
WOL S5, OS-S4
9.3 Power Management Modes
9.3.1 Dell Active Power Controller
The Dell Active Power Controller (DAPC) is a Dell proprietary implementation that
provides improved performance/watt over the OS implementation of Intel’s DBS. DAPC
is implemented in system BIOS and uses hardware level counters, etc. to determine
hardware utilization. The BIOS uses this information to determine when to change the
processor’s operating frequency. The DAPC is OS independent and means that the OS
no longer has control. This provides a consistent power management solution
regardless of the installed OS. Some OS(s), particularly hypervisors, do not support
power management, thus DAPC provides a solution when there otherwise would not be
one.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 41
9.3.2 Power Saving BIOS Setting (OS Control)
Intel processors support Demand Based Switching (DBS) which enables the processor to
dynamically change its operating frequency in response to workload changes. The
industry standard implementation of this power management feature is in the
Operating System (OS). The OS monitors process/thread level utilization of the
processor and uses processor controls to change the processor’s operating frequency.
For heavy workloads, the OS will run the processor at higher frequencies for additional
performance. Lighter workloads do not need high performance, thus the OS will run
the processor at lower frequencies.
9.3.3 Maximum Performance
The Maximum Performance Mode disables power management. In this mode, the
processor frequency is statically set to the highest supported frequency.
The power management features are implemented via two categories: fixed or
generic. Fixed features use bits defined in the ACPI specification for specific
capabilities. The fixed feature bits give the OS complete control over the power
management of a device since the location of the bits is given to the OS in the FACP
table. Thus, a driver can directly access bits to control a device’s power management.
Generic features have defined enable and status bits, but the functionality is not fully
visible to the OS. Dell provides ASL code to handle the details of generic features,
allowing the OS to intelligently communicate with system-specific hardware.
Table 15. Summary of R210 Power Management Features
Feature Type Enable/Status
/Ctrl bit
location
Description
ACPI mode
switch
Fixed PCH The OS uses the SCI_EN bit to switch from
legacy mode to ACPI mode.
Sleep states Fixed PCH Supported states: S0(Working), S4-OS
(‘Hibernation’ in W2K), and S5 (Soft-off).
S1 (also called ‘standby’ or ‘suspend’) and S3
are not supported.
Power Button Fixed PCH In ACPI mode, OS has control of the power
button. In non-ACPI mode, SMI handler owns
power button events.
Real-Time
Clock
Fixed PCH The OS is able to configure the system to wake
on the RTC alarm.
Power Mgmt.
Timer
Fixed PCH 24-bit power management timer is used.
Power Mgmt.
Event (PME)
Generic PCH Each host bus’s PME# signal is routed to a
separate general-purpose event pin in the
chipset. When a device signals PME#, the system
wakes (if necessary), the OS detects the event,
and a Dell defined ASL routine handles the
event. Wake-on-LAN is one example of a PME.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 42
USB wake Generic N/A This feature is not supported on this system
since the S1 state is not supported.
DBS N/A Processor
MSRs
This feature does P state transition under
Windows
C State
Support
N/A Processor and
PCH registers
This feature allows multiple C state supports for
Processor. This feature will work under
Windows and ACPI OS that understand C states.
Power Profile
support
N/A Processor/IMC
and PCH
chipset
registers.
11G Servers will be the most energy smart
servers that Dell will ship. In addition to P,C
and T states, BIOS will expose the Power
Profiles to the OS. Each Power profile will have
a specific settings and it will fine tune
processor, MCH, IOH and South Bridge. For
detailed explanation on how this feature works,
please look at BIOS Power Management
specification located in Design Docs under R310
engineering.
Table 16. Power Profiles that R210 BIOS will Expose in BIOS Setup
Maximum Performance DBPM Disabled ( BIOS will set P-State to MAX)
Memory frequency = Maximum Performance
Fan algorithm = Maximum Performance
OS Control Enable OS DBPM Control (BIOS will expose
all possible P states to OS)
Memory frequency = Maximum Performance
Fan algorithm = Minimum Power
Active Power Controller Enable DellSystem DBPM (BIOS will not make all P states
available to OS)
Memory frequency = Maximum Performance
Fan algorithm = Minimum Power
Custom CPU Power and Performance Management:
Maximum Performance | Minimum Power | OS DBPM | System
DBPM
Memory Power and Performance Management:
Maximum Performance |1333Mhz |1067Mhz |800Mhz|
Minimum Power
Fan Algorithm
Maximum Performance | Minimum Power
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 43
10 I/O Slots
10.1 Overview
The PowerEdge R210 system provides:
• Riser support x16 PCIe card (Gen2 link x16)
• Support x16 bandwidth card under 25W
Figure 13. PCIe x16 Riser Card
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 44
Figure 14. SAS 6/iR Adapter Card Installed
10.2 PCI Devices
Xeon 3400 Series CPU PCI devices include:
• Intel QuickPath Architecture Generic Non-core Registers
• Intel QuickPath Architecture System Address Decoder
• Intel QuickPath Interconnect Link 0
• Intel QuickPath Interconnect Physical 0
• Integrated Memory Controller General Registers
• Integrated Memory Controller Target Address Decoder
• Integrated Memory Controller Test Registers
• Integrated Memory Controller Channel 0 Control
• Integrated Memory Controller Channel 0 Address
• Integrated Memory Controller Channel 0 Rank
• Integrated Memory Controller Channel 0 Thermal Control
• Integrated Memory Controller Channel 1 Control
• Integrated Memory Controller Channel 1 Address
• Integrated Memory Controller Channel 1 Rank
• Integrated Memory Controller Channel 1 Thermal Control
• DMI Root Port
• PCI Express Root Port 1
• PCI Express Root Port 3
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 45
• Core Addressing Mapping, Intel VT-d, System Management
• Core Semaphore and Scratchpad Registers
• Core System Control/Status Registers
• Core Miscellaneous Control/Status Registers
• Intel QuickPath Interconnect Link
• Intel QuickPath Interconnect Routing and Protocol
Core i3/Pentium/Celeron CPU PCI devices include:
• Host Bridge/DRAM Controller
• Host-to-PCI Express Bridge
• Internal Graphics Device
• Secondary Host–to-PCI Express Bridge
PCH and Slots devices include:
• Virtualization Engine Controller Interface (VECI)
• USB HS EHCI Controller #2
• PCI Express Port 1
• PCI Express Port 2
• PCI Express Port 3
• PCI Express Port 4
• PCI Express Port 5
• PCI Express Port 6
• PCI Express Port 7
• PCI Express Port 8
• USB HS EHCI Controller #1
• DMI-to-PCI Bridge
• LPC Controller1
• SATA Controller #1
o Non-AHCI and Non-RAID Mode (Ports 0,1, 2 and 3)
o Desktop Non-AHCI and Non-RAID Mode (Ports 0 and 1)
o AHCI Mode (Ports 0-5)
o AHCI Mode (Ports 0,1,4 and5)
o RAID 0/1/5/10 mode
• SMBus Controller
• SATA Controller #2
o Non-AHCI and Non-RAID Mode (Ports 4 and 5)
• Thermal Subsystem
• Slot 1 PCI-E x16 [IIO]
• BCM5716 (1)
• BCM5716 (2)
• Matrox® G200eW w/ 8MB memory
The onboard devices are SATA, USB (x4), SMBus, IOxAPIC, and the LOM.
Table 17. I/O Slot Information
PCI Slot # Mechanical Electrical Height Length
1 PCIe x 16 PCIe x 16 Gen 2 Full Half
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 46
Table 18. PCI Card Dimensions
Link Width Height Length
x1 Standard height, half
length card
111.15 mm (4.376
inches) max
167.65 mm (6.600 inches
max
X1, x4,
x8, x16
Standard height, full
length cards
111.15 mm (4.376
inches) max
312.00 mm (12.283
inches) max
Low profile cards 68.90 mm (2.731 inches)
max
167.65 mm (6.600 inches)
max
Table 19. Bandwidth, Quantities, and Priorities
Category Description Bandwidth Max
Qty.
Slot
Priority
Internal Storage
Controllers
Dell™ SAS 6iR Adapter (SASRAID)
PCIe x8 1 1
Dell™ PERC S300 (SW RAID) PCIe x8 1 1
Dell™ PERC H200 (HW RAID) PCIe x8 1 1
External Storage
Controllers
Dell™ SAS 5E Adapter PCIe x8 1 1
Dell™ PERC 6E Adapter 256MB PCIe x8 1 1
Dell™ PERC 6E Adapter 512MB PCIe x8 1 1
6Gbps SAS HBA PCIe x8 1 1
Dell™ PERC H800 PCIe x8 1 1
Optional NICs
Dell™ LSI2032 PCIe HBA SCSI
Adapter
PCIe x4 1 1
Intel® Gigabit ET Dual Port
Server Adapter
PCIe x4 1 1
Broadcom® NetXtreme™ II 5709
Dual Port Ethernet PCIe Card
with TOE
PCIe x4 1 1
Broadcom® NetXtreme™ II 5709
Dual Port Ethernet PCIe Card
with TOE and iSCSI Offload
PCIe x4 1 1
Intel® PRO/1000 PT Server
Adapter
PCIe x1 1 1
Intel® Gigabit ET Quad-Port
Server Adapter
PCIe x4 1 1
Broadcom® NetXtreme™ II
BCM5709 Quad Port Ethernet
PCIe™ Card with TOE and iSCSI
Offload
PCIe x4 1 1
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 47
10.3 Boot Order
The PowerEdge R210 supports only 1 PCIe x8 slot.
10.4 NICs
There is Broadcom 5716 chip on the PowerEdge R210 motherboard. The chip is connected to
the PCH via a PCI Express x4 gen2 link. Broadcom 5716 does not support TOE (TCP Offload
Engine).
The chip provides two Gigabit Ethernet ports. There are two RJ-45 connectors with integrated
magnetic and LED on the rear of the system. The firmware for the LOM chip resides in a flash
part.
The PowerEdge R210 supports Wake on LAN (WOL) from either port.
For listing of NICs supported on the R210, please see Section 10.1 Table 24
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 48
11 Storage
11.1 Overview
The PowerEdge R210 supports up to 2 HDDS:
• 2 x 2.5”/ 3.5” cabled SATA or SSD from motherboard SATA connector
• 2 x 2.5”/ 3.5” cabled SAS, SSD, or SATA via add-on storage controller
Customer must be selected at point of purchase. This is not an upgrade option for
APOS.
11.2 Drives
Table 20. Available Drives
Drive Specifications
HDD Bays 2 x 3.5" or 2 x 2.5”
Cabled only
HDD/SATA 3.5"/7.2K: 160, 250, or 1000GB, 2000GB
HDD/Near Line SAS 3.5"/7.2K: 1000GB, 2000GB
HDD/SAS 3.5”/15K: 146, 300, or 450GB, 600GB
3.5”/10K: 600GB
2.5”/10K: 146 or 300GB
HDD/SSD 2.5”: or 50GB, 100GB
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 49
11.3 RAID Configurations
Table 21. RAID Configurations
Non-Mixed
Drives, all SATA,
all SSD, or ALL
SAS
Config
Type
Configs
# Name
Description Min
HDD
Max
HDD
No HDD 0 NCZCBL No controller/No hard drive 0 0
SATA – No
Raid
1 MSTCBL On-board SATA Controller (Ibex Peak) 1 2
SATA Raid 2 MSTR0CBL Embedded SATA SW RAID – RAID0 2 2
3 MSTR1CBL Embedded SATA SW RAID – RAID1 2 2
SAS/SATA
RAID
4 ASSCBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, No RAID
(S300)
1 1
5 ASSCBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, No RAID
(S300) with 2 HDDs
2 2
6 ASSR0CBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, RAID 0 (S300) 2 2
7 ASSR1CBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, RAID 1 (S300) 2 2
8 ASSCBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, No RAID (SAS
6/iR /H200 )
1 2
9 ASSR0CBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, RAID 0 (SAS
6/iR /H200)
2 2
10 ASSR1CBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, RAID 1 (SAS
6/iR/H200 )
2 2
11.4 Optical Disk Drive (ODD)
The PowerEdge R210 will support up to 1 slim type internal optical drive and optional
external USB DVD-ROM. The PowerEdge R210 can boot from either the internal optical
drive or the optional external drive and supports the following:
• Configurations with no ODD
• Optional internal DVD-ROM (SATA)
• Optional internal DVD+RW (SATA)
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 50
11.5 Tape Drives
Table 22. Supported Tape Drives
PV DAS
PowerVault™ MD1000
PowerVault™ MD3000
PowerVault™ MD1120
External TBU
PowerVault™ RD1000
PowerVault™ 114X
PowerVault™ DAT 72
PowerVault™ LTO-3-060
PowerVault™ 110T LTO-3
PowerVault™ LTO4-120
External TBU/Automation
PowerVault™ ML6000
PowerVault™ 124T
PowerVault™ TL2000/TL4000
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 51
12 Video and Audio
12.1 Video
Matrox® G200eW w/ 8MB memory integrated in Winbond® WPCM450 (BMC controller):
• 640x480 (60/72/75/85 Hz; 8/16/32-bit color)
• 800x600 (60/72/75/85 Hz; 8/16/32-bit color)
• 1024x768 (60/70/75/85 Hz; 8/16/32-bit color)
• 1280x1024 (60/75/85 Hz; 8/16-bit color)
• 1280x1024 (60 Hz, 32-bit color)
12.2 Audio
The PowerEdge R210 does not support audio (sound card or speakers).
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 52
13 Rack Information
13.1 Overview
The ReadyRails™ static rail system for the R210 provides tool-free support for racks
with square or unthreaded round mounting holes (including Dell’s 42xx and 24xx series
racks) with an adjustment range of 60–87 cm. The rails also offer tooled mounting
support for 4-post threaded and 2-post (Telco) racks for added versatility.
13.2 Rails
The static rails for the R210 support tool-less mounting in 19”-wide, EIA-310-E
compliant square hole and unthreaded round hole racks via Dell’s ReadyRails™
mounting interface. The rails also support a “generic” mounting interface for tooled
mounting in threaded hole and 2-post (Telco) racks. Screws are not included in the kit
since threaded racks are offered with a variety of thread designations. Users must
provide their own screws when mounting the rails in threaded or 2-post racks.
Table 23. PowerEdge R210 Rail Information
Rail
Identifier
Mounting Interface Rail
Type
Rack Types Supported
4-Post 2-Post
Square Round Thread Flush Center
A4 ReadyRails™/Generic Static Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
The adjustment range of the rails is a function of the type of rack in which they are
being mounted. The min-max values listed below represent the allowable distance
between the front and rear mounting flanges in the rack.
Figure 15. Rack Adjustability Range
Rail
Identifier
Mounting Interface Rail
Type
Rack Adjustability Range (mm) Rail Depth
(mm)
Square Round Threaded Without
CMA
With
CMA Min Max Min Max Min Max
A4 ReadyRails™/Generic Static 608 879 594 872 604 890 622 —
13.3 Cable Management Arm (CMA)
The static rails for the R210 support a wide variety of racks and mounting
configurations but do not support the ability to extend the system out of the rack for
service. Thus, they do not provide support for a cable management arm (CMA).
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 53
14 Operating Systems
For the most up-to-date information, see the Operating System Support Matrix for Dell
PowerEdge Systems on Dell.com.
Table 24. Supported Microsoft Operating Systems
Operating
Systems
x86 or x64 Installation Factory
Install
Logo/
Certification
Windows®
Essential
Business
Server
X64
Standard
DIB N/A
Premium
Microsoft®
Hyper-V™
Server 2008
X64 Standard Download N/A
Windows®
Small
Business
Server 2008
X64
Standard
FI N/A
Premium
Windows
Server® 2008
x32-bit x86
Web
Standard Test Only WHQL
Enterprise
x64
(Hyper-V™ role
enabled except
for foundation)
Web
Test Only WHQL
Standard
Foundation
Enterprise
Windows
Server® 2003
R2
32-bit x86
Standard
Test Only WHQL
Enterprise
x64
Standard
Test Only WHQL
Enterprise
Windows
Server® 2008
SP2
X86
Web
FI WHQL
(WLK1.4)
Standard
Enterprise
X64
(Hyper-V™ role
enable)
Web
Standard
Enterprise
Windows
Server® 2008
R2 (Windows
7 includes
SP2 bits)
X64 (only)
(Hyper-V™ role
enabled except
for foundation)
Web
FI WHQL
(WLK1.4)
Standard
Foundation
Enterprise
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 54
Table 25. Supported Linux Operating Systems
Operating
Systems
x86 or x64 Installation Factory
Install
Logo/
Certification
Red Hat®
Enterprise
Linux® 4.8
x86-64 ES DIB, NFI Yes
x86 ES DIB, NFI Yes
Red Hat®
Enterprise
Linux® 5.3
x86-64 Enterprise FI Yes
x86 Enterprise DIB, NFI Yes
Novell®
SUSE® Linux®
Enterprise
S10 SP3
x86-64 ES DIB, NFI Yes
Novell®
SUSE® Linux®
Enterprise
S11
X86-64 ES FI Yes
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 55
15 Virtualization
Table 26. Supported Virtualization OS
Virtualization OS Install Method
VMware® ESX 4 update 1 DIB
Embedded VMware ESXi 4 update
1 Download version
VMWare ESX 3.5.1 Supported; not offered
through Dell (No FI nor DIB)
VMWare ESXi 3.5.1 Supported; not offered
through Dell (No FI or DIB)
PlateSpin® PowerConvert®
Website download
fulfillment; instructions are
DIB
Vizioncore™ suite:
vRanger™ Pro
vConverter™
vReplicator
vFoglight™
Website download
fulfillment; instructions are
DIB
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 56
16 Systems Management
16.1 Overview
Dell delivers open, flexible, and integrated solutions that help you reduce the
complexity of managing disparate IT assets by building comprehensive IT management
solutions. Combining Dell PowerEdge Servers with a wide selection of Dell-developed
management solutions gives you choice and flexibility, so you can simplify and save in
environments of any size. To help you meet your server performance demands, Dell
offers Dell OpenManage systems management solutions for:
• Deployment of one or many servers from a single management console
• Monitoring of server and storage health and maintenance
• System update, configuration change, and maintenance
Dell offers IT management solutions for organizations of all sizes—priced, sized, and
supported right.
16.2 Server Management
A Dell Systems Management and Documentation DVD and a Dell Management Console
DVD are included with the product. Content includes:
• Dell Systems Build and Update Utility: Dell Systems Build and Update
Utility assists in OS install and pre-OS hardware configuration and updates.
• OpenManage Server Administrator: The OpenManage Server Administrator
(OMSA) tool provides a comprehensive, one-to-one systems management
solution, designed for system administrators to manage systems locally and
remotely on a network. OMSA allows system administrators to focus on
managing their entire network by providing comprehensive one-to-one
systems management.
• Management Console: Our legacy IT Assistant console is also included, as
well as tools to allow access to our remote management products. These
tools are Remote Access Service for iDRAC and the BMC Management Utility.
• Active Directory Snap-in Utility: The Active Directory Snap-in Utility
provides an extension snap-in to the Microsoft Active Directory. This allows
you to manage Dell specific Active Directory objects. The Dell-specific
schema class definitions and their installation are also included on the DVD.
• Dell Systems Service Diagnostics Tools: Dell Systems Service and
Diagnostics tools deliver the latest Dell optimized drivers, utilities, and
operating system-based diagnostics that you can use to update your system.
• eDocs: The section includes PDF files for PowerEdge systems, storage
peripheral, and OpenManage software.
• Dell Management Console DVD: The Dell Management Console is a Webbased
systems management software that enables you to discover and
inventory devices on your network. It also provides advanced functions,
such as health and performance monitoring of networked devices and patch
management capabilities for Dell systems.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 57
• Server Update Utility: In addition to the Systems Management Tools and
Documentation and Dell Management Console DVDs, customers have the
option to obtain Server Update Utility DVD. This DVD has an inventory tool
for managing updates to firmware, BIOS, and drivers for either Linux or
Windows operating systems.
16.3 Embedded Server Management
The PowerEdge R210 implements circuitry for the next generation of embedded server
management. It is Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) v2.0 compliant.
The optional iDRAC (Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller) is responsible for acting
as an interface between the host system and its management software and the
periphery devices. These periphery devices consist of the PSUs, the storage backplane,
integrated SAS HBA or PERC 6/I, and control panel with display.
The optional upgrade to iDRAC6 provides features for managing the server remotely or
in data center lights-out environments.
Advanced iDRAC features require the installation of the optional iDRAC6 Enterprise
card.
16.4 Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator
Embedded management is comprised of four key components:
• Dell Lifecycle Controller
• Dell Unified Server Configurator
• iDRAC6 (Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller)
• vFlash (virtual flash media)
Lifecycle Controller powers the embedded management features. It is integrated and
tamperproof storage for system-management tools and enablement utilities (firmware,
drivers, etc.).
Dell Unified Server Configurator (USC) is a local 1:1 graphical user interface embedded
on Lifecycle Controller that aids in local server provisioning in a pre-OS environment.
For servers with iDRAC Express, the Lifecycle Controller offers OS install, platform
updates, platform configuration, and diagnostics capabilities. For servers without
iDRAC6 Express, this utility has limited functionality and offers OS install and
diagnostics capabilities only.
To access the Unified Server Configurator, press the key within 10 seconds of
the Dell logo’s appearance during the system boot process. Current functionality
enabled by the Unified Server Configurator is detailed in the following table.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 58
Table 27. Unified Server Configurator Features and Description
Feature Description
Faster O/S Installation Drivers and the installation utility are
embedded on system
Faster System Updates Integration with Dell support automatically
directed to latest versions of the Unified
Server Configurator, iDRAC, RAID, BIOS, NIC,
and Power Supply
Update Rollback Ability to recover to previous known good
state for all updatable components
More Comprehensive Diagnostics Diagnostic utilities are embedded on system
Simplified Hardware Configuration Detects RAID controller and allows user to
configure virtual disk and choose virtual disk
as boot device, eliminating the need to launch
a separate utility. Also provides configuration
for iDRAC, BIOS, and NIC/LOM.
16.5 iDRAC6 Express
The optional iDRAC6 Express is the first tier of iDRAC6 upgrades. In addition to
upgrading the system with a Lifecycle Controller, the iDRAC6 Express offers the
following key features:
• Graphical web interface
• Standard-based interfaces
• Server Sensor monitoring and fault alerting
• Secure operation of remote access functions including authentication,
authorization, and encryption
• Power control and management with the ability to limit server power
consumption and remotely control server power states
• Advanced troubleshooting capabilities
For more information on iDRAC6 Express features see table below.
16.6 iDRAC6 Enterprise
The optional iDRAC6 Enterprise card provides access to advanced iDRAC6 features. The
iDRAC6 Enterprise connects directly to the R210 planar and is mounted parallel to the
planar with stand-offs.
Key features for the iDRAC6 Enterprise include:
• Scripting capability with Dell’s Racadm command-line
• Remote video, keyboard, and mouse control with Virtual Console
• Remote media access with Virtual Media
• Dedicated network interface
Additionally, the iDRAC6 Enterprise can be upgraded by adding the vFlash Media card.
This is a 1 GB Dell branded SD card that enables a persistent 256 or 512 MB virtual
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 59
flash partition. A more detailed feature list for iDRAC6 Enterprise and vFlash is
included in the following table.
Table 28. Features List for BMC, iDRAC6, and vFlash
Feature BMC iDRAC6 Express
iDRAC6
Enterprise vFlash Media
Interface and Standards Support
IPMI 2.0
Web-based GUI
SNMP
WSMAN
SMASH-CLP
Racadm commandline
Conductivity
Shared/Failover
Network Modes
IPv4
VLAN Tagging
IPv6
Dynamic DNS
Dedicated NIC
Security and Authentication
Role-based
Authority
Local Users
Active Directory
SSL Encryption
Remote Management and Remediation
Remote Firmware
Update
Server power
control
Serial-over-LAN
(with proxy)
Serial-over-LAN (no
proxy)
Power capping
Last crash screen
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 60
Feature BMC iDRAC6 Express
iDRAC6
Enterprise vFlash Media
capture
Boot capture
Serial-over-LAN
Virtual media
Virtual console
Virtual console
sharing
Virtual flash
Monitoring
Sensor Monitoring
and Alerting
Real-time Power
Monitoring*
Real-time Power
Graphing*
Historical Power
Counters*
Logging Features
System Event Log
RAC Log
Trace Log
* BMC availability through OpenManage
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 61
17 Peripherals
17.1 USB
All PowerEdge systems have a minimum of 2 front-accessible USB 2.0 compliant ports
with enough spacing around to accommodate full usage of both connectors
simultaneously along with any/all other front panel features (Video connector,
buttons, LED’s, etc.) without mechanical interference. These ports are connected to
the same controller and not shared with internal or back USB ports
For security reasons, all external USB ports must have an enable/disable function.
Disabling USB controllers must observe the hierarchy in Table 29 (listed from lowest to
highest priority in a 4 controller design).
Internal USB ports connected to internal persistent storage devices have an
enable/disable function independent of the other ports present in the system.
Table 29. USB Controller Priorities
USB Controller Function If Disabled
4 (Lowest) Internal USB peripherals No other Controller is disabled
3 Front USB Controller 4 is disabled as well
2 Back USB Controllers 3 & 4 are disabled as well
1 (Highest) Remote Access (RAC) Controllers 2,3, & 4 are disabled as well
The above hierarchy dictates that connections that are lower in the hierarchy must be
disabled anytime a higher level connection is disabled (e.g., when Back USB is disabled
the Front USB ports are also disabled).
17.2 USB Device
Optional external USB DVD-ROM.
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 62
17.3 External Storage
Table 30. External Storage
External Optical Drive (Optional) USB DVD-ROM
PowerVault™ DAS
MD1000 JBOD
MD3000 RBOD
MD1120 – 2.5 SAS/SATA JBOD
External TBU
RD1000 USB
PV114T (2U)
DAT 72 SCSI
LTO3-060 SCSI
LTO3FH SCSI
LTO4-120 HH and FH SAS
External TBU/Automation
ML6000
PV124T
TL2000
TL4000
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 63
18 Packaging Options
Options for single pack and multipack are available. Multipack will support 4 units in one pack.
Table 31. AMF Single Pack Dimensions and Weights
INSIDE DIMENSIONS OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT
Length: 81.3 cm (32”)
Width: 59.4 cm (23.38”)
Depth: 23.5 cm (9.25”)
Length: 82.9 cm (32.63”)
Width: 61 cm (24”)
Depth: 26.7 cm (10.5”)
System packed out weight:
PowerEdge R210: 9.71 kg (21.42
lbs)
Cushion: 0.42 kg (.93 lbs)
Corrugated Box: 2.75 kg (6.05
lbs)
Total Weight: 12.88 kg (28.4 lbs)
Table 32. EMF Single Pack Dimensions and Weights
INSIDE DIMENSIONS OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT
Length: 61.9 cm (24.38”)
Width: 59.4 cm (23.38”)
Depth: 24.1 cm (9.50”)
Length: 63.5 cm (25.00”)
Width: 61 cm (24”)
Depth: 27.3 cm (10.75”)
System packed out weight:
PowerEdge R210: 8.56 kg (18.87
lbs)
Cushion: 0.36 kg (.80 lbs)
Corrugated Box: 2.06 kg (4.55
lbs)
Total Weight: 10.98 kg (24.2 lbs)
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 64
Figure 16. Packaging
Dell
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 65
Appendix A. Regulatory Certifications
• FCC (U.S. only) Class A
• ICES (Canada) Class A
• CE Mark (EN 55022 Class A, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3)
• VCCI (Japan) Class A
• BSMI (Taiwan) Class A
• C-Tick (Australia/New Zealand) Class A
• NRCS/SABS (South Africa) Class A
• CCC (China) Class A
• KCC (Korea) Class A
• UL 60950-1
• CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1
• EN 60950-1
• IEC 60950-1
• IRAM (Argentina)
• NOM (Mexico)
• Bellis (Belarus)
• Koncar (Croatia)
• TUV GS (Germany)
• SII (Israel)
• CKT (Kazakhstan)
• KEBS (Kenya)
• INSM (Moldova)
• Soncap (Nigeria)
• Nemko (Norway)
• GOST (Russia)
• KVALITET (Serbia, Bosnia, Herzegovina, Montenegro)
• UKRTEST (Ukraine)
• UZBEKISTAN GOST (Uzbekistan)
• KUCAS (Kuwait)
• KSA-ICCP (Saudi Arabia)
• MPT (Vietnam)
Dell
66
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide
Appendix B. R210 Volatility Tables
Table 33. PowerEdge R210 Volatility
NonVolatile
Volatile
RAM
Reference
Design
-ator
Q
t
y Size Type
Planar
System BIOS
SPI Flash Y SYS_S
PI 1 4MB Flash EEPROM (SPI
interface)
LOM
Configuration
Data
Y U7 1 512KB FLASH (NOR)
iDRAC6
Controller
ROM
Y U_IBM
C1
1 4KB ROM
iDRAC6
Controller
RAM
Y U_IBM
C1
1 8KB RAM
System CPLD
Y U_CPL
D1
1 1200 Macro cells Internal Flash EEPROM
System CPLD
Y U_CPL
D1
1 1KB RAM
iDRAC6
Express
Internal
Flash
Y U_EM
MC 1 1GB NAND FLASH
System RAM
Y
DIMM_
A1,
DIMM_
A2,
DIMM_
B1,
DIMM_
B2
4 up to 4 DIMMs 16GB RAM
TPM ID
EEPROM
(Plug in
module only)
Y U_SEE
PROM 1 256B EEPROM
TPM Binding
EEPROM (on
China planar
only)
Y U21 1 256B EEPROM
Dell
67
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide
NonVolatile
Volatile
RAM
Reference
Design
-ator
Q
t
y Size Type
iDRAC6
SDRAM Y U_IBM
C_MEM
1 128MB DDR2 RAM
iDRAC6 FRU Y U_IBM
C_FRU 1 4KB EEPROM
iDRAC6 Boot
Block Flash Y IBMC_
SPI
1 16MB FLASH (NOR)
Trusted
Platform
Module
Y N U_TPM
1
1 128 bytes EEPROM
Chipset
CMOS Y U_PCH
1 1 256B Battery-backed RAM
Control Panel
Internal USB
Y USB3
USB4 2 User selectable License key hard set
ROM or user choice
iDRAC6 Enterprise
vFlash Y J_SD
(conne
ctor) 1 1GB
Secure Digital NAND
Flash
Dell
68
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide
Table 34. Volatility: Data Writing and Purpose
Can user programs or
operating system write
data to it during normal
operation?
Purpose?
Planar
System BIOS
SPI Flash No Not used
LOM
Configuration
Data
NO iDRAC Internal RAM
iDRAC6
Controller ROM No System-Specific Hardware Logic
iDRAC6
controller RAM No Not used
System CPLD
(non-volatile)
No for iDRAC Operating
System; Yes for Managed
System Services
Repository
iDRAC Operating System plus Managed System
Services Repository (i.e., Unified Server
Configurator, OS drivers, diagnostics, rollback
versions of various programmables)
System CPLD
(volatile) Yes System OS RAM
iDRAC6 Express
Internal Flash No Not used
System RAM NO iDRAC internal RAM
TPM ID
EEPROM (Plug
in module
only)
No BIOS binding of plug in module to a particular
planar.
TPM Binding
EEPROM (China
only)
No BMC OS + VGA frame buffer
iDRAC6 SDRAM No motherboard electronic product identifier
iDRAC6 FRU
No
iDRAC boot loader and configuration (i.e. MAC
address), Lifecycle log.
nd system event log.
iDRAC6 Boot
Block Flash yes Storage of encryption keys
Trusted
Platform
Module
No BIOS binding of plug-in module to a particular
planar
Dell
69
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide
Can user programs or
operating system write
data to it during normal
operation?
Purpose?
Chipset
CMOS No BIOS settings
Control Panel
Internal USB Yes as allowed by OS Normal usage is read only software license
key, but not limited
iDRAC6
Enterprise
vFlash Yes when enabled,
installed, and the media
does not have the write
protect switch applied
Storage of logs, user images such as files,
drivers, and Operating Systems
Table 35. Methodology for Data Input to Memory
How is data input to this memory?
Planar
System BIOS SPI Flash Loading flash memory requires a vendor-provided firmware file and
loader program which is executed by booting the system from a
floppy or OS-based executable containing the firmware file and the
loader. System loaded with arbitrary data in firmware memory will
not operate
LOM Configuration
Data
Loading flash memory requires a vendor-provided firmware file and
loader program which is executed by booting up the system from a
floppy or OS based executable containing the firmware file and the
loader. LOMs loaded with arbitrary data in firmware memory will not
operate.
iDRAC6 Controller
RAM iDRAC embedded system
System CPLD Loading flash memory requires a vendor-provided firmware file and
loader program which is executed by booting up the system from a
floppy or OS-based executable (currently only DRMK utility support)
containing the firmware file and the loader. System loaded with
arbitrary data in CPLD memory will not operate.
iDRAC6 Express
Internal Flash Not used
System RAM
iDRAC OS: Loading flash memory requires a vendor-provided firmware
file and loader program which is executed by booting the system from
a floppy or OS-based executable containing the firmware file and the
loader. System loaded without a good iDRAC firmware image yields a
non-functional iDRAC.
Dell
70
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide
How is data input to this memory?
Managed Services Repository: Various partitions are loaded using
vendor-provided firmware file and loader program just like iDRAC OS.
TPM ID EEPROM (Plugin
module only) Factory loaded only
TPM Binding EEPROM
(on China planar only) BIOS only
iDRAC6 SDRAM Embedded iDRAC OS for 108MB and 8MB for VGA frame buffer
iDRAC6 FRU Factory and iDRAC embedded OS
iDRAC6 Boot Block
Flash
Loading flash memory requires a vendor-provided firmware file and
loader program which is executed by booting up the system from a
floppy or OS-based executable or out of band firmware updates
across the management network. Bad contents yield the iDRAC
inoperable and unrecoverable in the customer environment. The
lifecycle log is automatically updated by the iDRAC as various system
component firmware, hardware, and software versions change.
Trusted Platform
Module
Using TPM-enabled operating systems; except in China where TCM is
used.
Chipset
CMOS BIOS control only via input such as BIOS F2 menu user configuration
settings (such as boot order)
Control Panel
Internal USB Either read only license key or OS control copies
iDRAC6 Enterprise
vFlash Preloaded media before installation, or remote out-of-band upload of
user data (i.e., ISO images, files) or local server read/write capability
to use like a hard disk.
Dell
71
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide
Table 36. Methodology for Memory Protection and Clearing
How is this
memory
write
protected? How is the memory cleared?
Planar
System BIOS SPI
Flash
Software
write
protected
Not possible with any utilities or applications and system
is not functional if corrupted/removed.
LOM
Configuration
Data
No explicitly
protected but
special
applications
are needed to
communicate
through the
LOMs to
reprogram
this ROM
Not user clearable
iDRAC6
Controller ROM
protected
permanently
by hardware
Not clearable
iDRAC6
controller RAM n/a iDRAC reset
System CPLD
(non-volatile)
Requires
special system
specific utility
Not possible with any utilities or applications and system
is not functional if corrupted/removed.
System CPLD
(volatile) Not accessible Not clearable
iDRAC6 Express
Internal Flash
Writes are
proxied
through a
temporary
iDRAC
scratchpad
RAM and not
directly made
from an OS or
OS application
Not user clearable
System RAM OS control Reboot or power down system
TPM ID EEPROM
(Plug in module
only)
HW read only Not clearable, read only
Dell
72
PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide
TPM Binding
EEPROM (on
China planar
only)
Locked by
BIOS from
physical
access by
anyone after
boot
Not applicable, BIOS control only
iDRAC6 SDRAM n/a AC cycle for BMC OS and reset/power off server for VGA
frame buffer
iDRAC6 FRU writes
controlled by
iDRAC
embedded OS
EPPID is not clearable
iDRAC6 Boot
Block Flash
iDRAC
embedded OS
control of the
write
protection
Not possible with any utilities or applications and iDRAC
does not function as expected if corrupted/removed.
Lifecycle log is clearable only in a factory environment;
System Event Log is user clearable
Trusted
Platform Module
SW write
protected F2 Setup option
Chipset
CMOS
N/A, BIOS
only control
Planar NVRAM_CLR jumper or by removal of AC cord,
cover, and coin cell battery, then waiting 30 seconds prior
to replacement of battery, cover and AC cord.; F2 system
setup option is used to restore defaults
Control Panel
Internal USB OS control OS control format
iDRAC6 Enterprise
vFlash Media write
protection
switch or OS
control
iDRAC-based format, local OS format, deleted, or card
removed and formatted on a client
Dell™
POWEREDGE™
M610
technical guidebook
Inside the poweredge M610
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 1. System overview 5
A. Overview / Description 5
Section 2. Mechanical 6
A. Dimensions and Weight (blade only) 6
B. Front Panel View and Features 6
C. Side Views and Features 8
D. Security 8
E. USB Key 9
F. Battery 9
G. Field Replaceable Units (FRU) 9
Section 3. Power, Thermal, Acoustic 9
A. Environmental Specifications 9
B. Acoustics 10
Section 4. block diagram 10
Section 5. PROCESSORS 11
A. Overview / Description 11
B. Features 12
C. Supported Processors 12
D. Processor Configurations 12
Section 6. Memory 14
A. Overview / Description 14
B. DIMMs Supported 15
C. Speed 16
Section 7. CHIPSET 18
A. Overview / Description 18
Section 8. bios 19
A. Overview / Description 19
B. I C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) 20
Section 9. Embedded NICs / LOMs 20
A. Overview / Description 20
Section 10. MEZZANINE CARD SLOTS 20
A. Overview / Description 20
2
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
Section 11. STORAGE 21
A. Overview / Description 21
B. Storage Controllers 21
Section 12. video 22
A. Overview / Description 22
Section 13. OPERATING SYSTEMS 23
A. Overview / Description 23
Section 14. Virtualization 25
Section 15. SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT 25
A. Overview / Description 25
B. Server Management 25
C. Embedded Server Management 26
I. Unmanaged Persistent Storage 26
II. Lifecycle Controller / Unified Server Configurator 27
III. iDRAC6 Express / Enterprise 27
Section 16. Peripherals 29
A. USB peripherals 29
Section 17. DOCUMENTATION 29
A. Overview, Description, and List 29
Section 18. Packaging Options 30
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
4
The Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610
The Dell PowerEdge M-Series blade servers help cut operating expenses through energy efficiency,
product flexibility, and efficient use of data center space. When combined with Dell’s world-class
storage, management, and support offerings, the result is a total enterprise solution that can help
you simplify and save on IT expenses.
Strong IT Foundation
To build the most efficient data center solutions, Dell sought input from IT professionals. You asked for
reliability, scalability, energy efficiency, and a lower total cost of ownership. Our next-generation M610
blade servers deliver, becoming the cornerstone of a high-performance data center capable of keeping
pace with your changing business demands.
Purposeful Design
Designed with your needs in mind, these M-Series blades use the Intel®
Xeon®
5500 Series Processor.
This processor series adapts to your software in real time, processing more tasks simultaneously. Using
Intel Turbo Boost Technology, the M-Series blades can increase performance during peak usage periods.
When demand decreases, Intel Intelligent Power Technology helps reduce operating costs and energy
usage by proactively putting your server into lower power states.
To enhance virtualization and database performance, the M610 is designed with 50% more memory
capacity than its predecessor. This increased memory capacity saves money by enabling you to use
smaller, less-expensive DIMMs to meet your computing needs.
Scalability for Growth
As your application needs increase, M-Series blades allow you to scale up to 128 cores and 1536GB of
memory per 10U chassis, with opportunities for even greater capacities in the future. To keep pace with
changing requirements, you can effectively scale I/O application bandwidth with end-to-end 10Gbe or
FC8 solutions. Virtualize I/O within your M-Series chassis using Cisco’s Virtual Blade Switch technology,
and manage up to nine Cisco Ethernet switches as a single switch.
Additionally, use NPIV and Port Aggregator modes on a variety of switches to virtualize Ethernet or
Fibre Channel ports for integration into heterogeneous fabrics. By harnessing Dell’s FlexIO modular
switches, you can scale your I/O needs cost effectively, adding ports and functionality through switch
modules, including 10Gb uplinks and stacking ports instead of needing to buy complete new switches.
Simplified Systems Management
Gain more control with the next-generation Dell OpenManage™ suite of management tools. These tools
provide enhanced operations and standards-based commands designed to integrate with existing
systems for effective control. Dell Management Console (DMC) helps simplify operations and creates
stability by shrinking infrastructure management to a single console. This delivers a single view and
a common data source for your entire infrastructure management. Built on Symantec®
Management
Platform, it has an easily extensible, modular foundation that can provide basic hardware management
all the way up to more advanced functions, such as asset and security management. Dell Management
Console reduces or eliminates manual processes, enabling you to save time and money for more
strategic technology usage.
The Dell Management Console integrates with the Chassis Management Controller allowing a single
view of the chassis. The DMC allows the customer to manage the chassis as one entity, further
simplifying management.
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
5
Section 1. System Overview
A. Overview / Description
The PowerEdge M610 is the next generation of Intel single-slot blade with enhanced processors, RAM,
and management while still taking advantage of the M1000e chassis architecture. Along with the
M1000e, it leads the industry in high speed, redundant IO throughput and power consumption.
Feature Details
Processor Nehalem EP - 2-Socket Intel® Xeon® 5500 Series
Front Side Bus Intel Quickpath Interconnect (QPI) @ maximum of 6 GT/s
# Procs 2S
# Cores 4
L2/L3 Cache 4MB and 8MB
Chipset Intel Tylersberg
DIMMs 12 DDR3 – RDIMM or UDIMM
Min/Max RAM 1GB - 96GB
HD Bays 2 (2.5” only)
HD Types SAS/SATA/SSD
Int. HD Controller SATA
Opt. HD Controller CERC. PERC available end of June 2009
Video Matrox G200 (8MB memory)
Server Management
OpenManage
Dell Management Console
CMC on chassis
iDRAC Express
iDRAC Enterprise,
CMC (on M1000e)
Mezz Slots 2 x8 (PCI 2.0)
RAID 0, 1
NIC/LOM 2 Broadcom 5709 1Gb
USB 2 external
1 internal
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
6
Section 2. Mechanical
A. Dimensions and Weight (blade only)
Height: 38.5cm (15.2in)
Width: 5cm (2in)
Depth: 48.6cm (19.2in)
Weight: 11.1kg (24.5lbs.) - Maximum configuration
B. Front Panel View and Features
Figure: Front Panel Features PowerEdge M610
1. Blade Handle Release Button
2. Blade Power Indicator
3. Blade Power Button
4. USB Connectors (2)
5. Blade Status / Indentification Indicator
6. Hard Drives (2)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
7
FEATURE icon description
Blade Power
Indicator
Off – Power is not available to the blade, the blade is in standby
mode, the blade is not turned on, or the blade is installed
incorrectly. For detailed information on installing a blade, see
"Installing a Blade."
Green increasing from low brightness to full brightness – Blade
power on request is pending.
Green on – The blade is turned on.
Blade Status/
Identification
Indicator
Off – The blade power is off.
Blue – Normal operating state.
Blue Blinking – The blade is being remotely identified via the CMC.
Amber Blinking – Blade has either detected an internal error, or
the installed mezzanine card(s) does not match the I/O modules
installed in the M1000e enclosure. Check the CMC for an I/O
configuration error message and correct the error.
Blade Power
Button N/A
Turns blade power off and on.
• If you turn off the blade using the power button and the blade
is running an ACPI-compliant operating system, the blade can
perform an orderly shutdown before the power is turned off.
• If the blade is not running an ACPI-compliant operating system,
power is turned off immediately after the power button is pressed.
• Press and hold the button to turn off the blade immediately.
The blade power button is enabled by default by the System Setup
program. (If the power button option is disabled, you can only use
the power button to turn on the blade. The blade can then only be
shut down using system management software.)
USB Connector Connects external USB 2.0 devices to the blade.
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
8
C. Side Views and Features
D. Security
Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
The TPM is used to generate/store keys, protect/authenticate passwords, and create/store digital
certificates. TPM can also be used to enable the BitLocker™ hard drive encryption feature in Windows
Server®
2008. TPM is enabled through a BIOS option and uses HMAC-SHA1-160 for binding. There will be
different part numbers to accommodate different TPM solutions around the world.
Power Off Security
Through the CMC the front USB’s and power button can be disabled so as to not allow any control of
the system from the front of the blade.
Intrusion Alert
A switch mounted on the left riser board is used to detect chassis intrusion. When the cover is opened,
the switch circuit closes to indicate intrusion to ESM. When enabled, the software can provide
notification to the customer that the cover has been opened.
Secure Mode
BIOS has the ability to enter a secure boot mode via Setup. This mode includes the option to lock out
the power and NMI switches on the Control Panel or set up a system password.
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
9
E. USB Key
The PowerEdge M610 supports the following USB devices:
• DVD (bootable; requires two USB ports)
• USB Key (bootable)
• Keyboard (only one USB keyboard is supported)
• Mouse (only one USB mouse is supported)
F. Battery
A replaceable coin cell CR2032 3V battery is mounted on the planar to provide backup power for the
Real-Time Clock and CMOS RAM on the ICH9 chip.
G. Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
The planar contains a serial EEPROM to contain FRU information including Dell part number, part
revision level, and serial number. The Advanced Management Enablement Adapter (AMEA) also contains
a FRU EEPROM. The backplane’s SEP and the power supplies’ microcontroller are also used to store
FRU data.
Section 3. Environmental Specifications and Acoustics
A. Environmental Specifications
Environmental
Temperature
Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F)
NOTE: Decrease the maximum temperature by 1°C (18°F) per 300m (985 ft.) above 900m (2955 ft.)
Storage -40° to 65°C (-40° to 149°F)
Relative Humidity
Operating 8% to 85% (noncondensing) with a maximum humidity gradation of
10% per hour
Storage 5% to 95% (noncondensing)
Maximum Vibration
Operating 0.26 Grms at 10-350Hz for 15 mins
Storage 1.54 Grms at 10-250Hz for 15 mins
Maximum Shock
Operating One shock pulse in the positive z axis (one pulse on each side of the
system) of 41 G for up to 2 ms
Storage
Six consecutively executed shock pulses in the positive and negative
x, y, and z axes (one pulse on each side of the system) of 71 G for up
to 2 ms
Altitude
Operating -16 to 3048 m (-50 to 10,000 ft.)
Storage -16 to 10,600 m (-50 to 35,000 ft.)
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
10
B. Acoustics
The acoustical design of the PowerEdge M610 reflects the following:
• Adherence to Dell’s high sound quality standards. Sound quality is different from sound power
level and sound pressure level in that it describes how humans respond to annoyances in sound,
like whistles, hums, etc. One of the sound quality metrics in the Dell specification is prominence
ratio of a tone, and this is listed in the table below.
• Hardware configurations and types of applications affect system noise levels. Dell’s advanced
thermal control provides for optimized cooling with varying hardware configurations and
component utilizations. Most typical configurations will perform as listed in the table below.
However, some less typical configurations and components can result in higher noise levels.
Higher application loads, e.g., CPU utilization, can also result in higher noise levels.
Definitions
Idle: Reference ISO7779 (1999) definition 3.1.7; system is running in its OS but no other specific activity.
LwA-UL: The upper limit sound power level (LwA) calculated per section 4.4.2 of ISO 9296 (1988) and
measured in accordance with ISO7779 (1999).
Tones: Criteria of D.5 and D.8 of ECMA-74 9th ed. (2005) are followed to determine if discrete tones
are prominent. The system is placed in a rack with its bottom at 75 cm from the floor. The acoustic
transducer is at front bystander position, ref ISO7779 (1999), Section 8.6.2.
PowerEdge M610 typically configured blade in an m1000e chassis
Condition in 23±2° C ambient LwA-UL, bels Tones
Idle 7.4 No prominent tones
Section 4. Block Diagram
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
11
Section 5. Processors
A. Overview / Description
The Intel®
5500 series 2S processor (Nehalem - Efficient Processor (EP)), is the microprocessor
designed specifically for servers and workstation applications. The processor features quad-core
processing to maximize performance and performance/watt for data center infrastructures and highly
dense deployments. The Nehalem-EP 2S processor also features Intel’s Core™ micro-architecture and
Intel 64 architecture for flexibility in 64-bit and 32-bit applications and operating systems.
The 5500 series 2S processor (Nehalem EP) utilizes a 1366-contact Flip-Chip Land Grid Array (FC-LGA)
package that plugs into a surface mount socket. PowerEdge M610 provides support for up to two 5500
series 2S processors (Nehalem EP).
Nehalem-EP 2S Processor Features
Cache Size 32KB instruction, 32KB data, 4 or 8MB (shared)
Multi-processor Support 1-2 CPUs
Package LGA1366
Table: Nehalem-EP Features
Figure: PowerEdge M610 Main Components
1. 2 2.5” Hard Drives
Hard drive controller underneath
2. Internal USB
3. Chipset
4. 2 Processor Sockets
5. 12 DDR3 DIMM Slots
6. High-speed Mezz Card Slots
On-board NICs underneath
7. iDRAC6 Enterprise
8. Persistent Storage (underneath iDRAC6)
3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
12
B. Features
Key features of the 5500 series 2S processor (Nehalem EP) include:
• Four or two cores per processor
• Two point-to-point QuickPath Interconnect links at up to 6.4 GT/s
• 1366-pin FC-LGA package
• 45 nm process technology
• No termination required for non-populated CPUs (must populate CPU socket 1 first)
• Integrated three-channel DDR3 memory controller at up to 1333MHz
• Compatible with existing x86 code base
• MMX™ support
• Execute Disable Bit Intel Wide Dynamic Execution
• Executes up to four instructions per clock cycle
• Simultaneous Multi-Threading (Hyper-Threading) capability
• Support for CPU Turbo Mode (on certain SKUs)
• Increases CPU frequency if operating below thermal, power, and current limits
• Streaming SIMD (Single Instruction, Multiple Data) Extensions 2, 3, and 4
• Intel 64 Tecnology for Virtualization
• Intel VT-x and VT-d Technology for Virtualization
• Demand-based switching for active CPU power management as well as support for ACPI
P-States, C-States, and T-States
model speed power cache cores
X5570 2.93GHz 95W 8M 4
X5560 2.80GHz 95W 8M 4
X5550 2.66GHz 95W 8M 4
E5540 2.53GHz 80W 8M 4
E5530 2.40GHz 80W 8M 4
E5520 2.26GHz 80W 8M 4
L5520 2.26GHz 60W 8M 4
E5506 2.13GHz 80W 4M 4
L5506 2.13GHz 60W 4M 4
E5504 2.00GHz 80W 4M 4
E5502 1.86GHz 80W 4M 2
C. Supported Processors
D. Processor Configurations
Single CPU Configuration
The PowerEdge M610 is designed such that a single processor placed in the CPU1 socket will function
normally, however PowerEdge M610 systems require a CPU blank in the CPU2 socket for thermal
reasons. The system will be held in reset if a single processor is placed in the CPU2 socket.
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
13
Intel® Turbo Boost Technology
Improves application responsiveness
Delivers higher processor frequency on demand
Cores / Threads
2
(2 socket/HT on)
Core
0
IDLE
IDLE
IDLE
Core
0
IDLE
IDLE
IDLE
up to 10%
for 2 software
threads
Benefit
up to 6%†
for 16 concurrent
software threads
16
(2 socket/HT on)
BASE Freq
TURBO Freq
2.93 GHz
3.33 GHz
2.93 GHz
3.20 GHz
Core
0
Core
2
Core
1
Core
3
Core
0
Core
2
Core
1
Core
3
OR
Performance Enhancements
Intel Xeon® 5500 Series Processor (Nehalem-EP)
Intel® Turbo Boost
Technology
Increases performance by increasing processor
frequency and enabling faster speeds when
conditions allow
Higher performance
on demand
All cores
operate
at rated
frequency
Normal Core 1 Core 1 Core 2 Core 3
All cores
operate
at higher
frequency
4C Turbo Core 0 Core 1 Core 2 Core 3
Fewer cores
may operate
at even higher
frequencies
<4C Turbo Core 0 Core 1
Frequency
Intel® Hyper-Threading
Technology
Increases performance for threading applications
delivering greater throughput and responsiveness
Higher performance
for threaded workloads
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
14
model speed power cache cores
X5570 2.93GHz 95W 8M 4
X5560 2.80GHz 95W 8M 4
X5550 2.66GHz 95W 8M 4
E5540 2.53GHz 80W 8M 4
E5530 2.40GHz 80W 8M 4
E5520 2.26GHz 80W 8M 4
L5520 2.26GHz 60W 8M 4
E5506 2.13GHz 80W 4M 4
L5506 2.13GHz 60W 4M 4
E5504 2.00GHz 80W 4M 4
E5502 1.86GHz 80W 4M 2
CPU Power Voltage Regulation Modules (EVRD 11.1)
Voltage regulation to the 5500 series 2S processor (Nehalem EP) is provided by EVRD (Enterprise
Voltage Regulator-Down). EVRDs are embedded on the planar. CPU core voltage is not shared between
processors. EVRDs support static phase shedding and power management via the PMBus.
Section 6. Memory
A. Overview / Description
The PowerEdge M610 utilizes DDR3 memory providing a high performance, high-speed memory
interface capable of low latency response and high throughput. The PE M610 supports registered ECC
DDR3 DIMMs (RDIMM) or unbuffered ECC DDR3 DIMMs (UDIMM).
Key features of the PowerEdge M610 memory system include:
• Registered (RDIMM) and Unbuffered (UDIMM) ECC DDR3 technology
• Each channel carries 64 data and eight ECC bits
• Support for up to 96GB of RDIMM memory (with twelve 8GB RDIMMs)
• Support for up to 24GB of UDIMM memory (with twelve 2GB UDIMMs)
• Support for 1066/1333MHz single and dual-rank DIMMs
• Support for 1066MHz quad rank DIMMs Single DIMM configuration only with DIMM in socket A1
• Support ODT (On Die Termination) Clock gating (CKE) to conserve power when DIMMs are not
accessed
• DIMMs enter a low-power self-refresh mode
• I
2C access to SPD EEPROM for access to RDIMM thermal sensors
• Single Bit Error Correction
• SDDC (Single Device Data Correction – x4 or x8 devices)
• Support for closed loop
• Thermal Management on RDIMMs and UDIMMs Multi Bit Error Detection Support for Memory
Optimized Mode
• Support for Advanced ECC mode
• Support for Memory Mirroring
• Support for Memory Sparing
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
15
B. DIMMs Supported
The DDR3 memory interface consists of three channels, with up to two RDIMMs or UDIMMs per
channel for single-/dual-rank and up to two RDIMMs per channel for quad rank. The interface uses
2GB, 4GB, or 8GB RDIMMs. 1GB, or 2GB UDIMMs are also supported. The memory mode is dependent
on how the memory is populated in the system:
Three channels per CPU populated identically:
• Typically, the system will be set to run in Memory Optimized (Independent Channel) mode in
this configuration. This mode offers the most DIMM population flexibility and system memory
capacity, but offers the least number of RAS (reliability, availability, service) features.
• All three channels must be populated identically.
• Users wanting memory sparing must also populate the DIMMs in this method, but one channel
is the spare and is not accessible as system memory until it is brought online to replace a failing
channel.
• The first two channels per CPU populated identically with the third channel unused
• Typically, two channels operate in Advanced ECC (Lockstep) mode with each other by
having the cache line split across both channels. This mode provides improved RAS
features (SDDC support for x8-based memory).
• For Memory Mirroring, two channels operate as mirrors of each other — writes go to
both channels and reads alternate between the two channels.
• One channel per CPU populated
• This is a simple memory optimized mode. No mirroring or sparing is supported.
The PowerEdge M610 memory interface supports memory demand and patrol scrubbing, single-bit
correction and multi-bit error detection. Correction of a x4 or x8 device failure is also possible with
SDDC in the Advanced ECC mode. Additionally, correction of a x4 device failure is possible in the
Memory Optimized mode. If DIMMs of different speeds are mixed, all channels will operate at the fastest
common frequency. RDIMMs and UDIMMs cannot be mixed.
• If memory mirroring is enabled, identical DIMMs must be installed in the same slots across both
channels.
• The third channel of each processor is unavailable for memory mirroring.
• The first DIMM slot in each channel is color-coded with white ejection tabs for ease
of installation.
Figure: Memory Locations for Poweredge M610
B1
B6
A6
A1
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
16
Note: For QR mixed with a SR/DR DIMM, the QR needs to be in the white DIMM connector. There is no requirement in the order of SR and DR DIMMs.
NOTE: For Quad-Rank DIMMs mixed with single- or dual-rank DIMMs, the QR DIMM needs to be in the slot with the white ejection tabs (the first DIMM slot in each channel).
There is no requirement for the order of SR and DR DIMMs
Supported
Not Supported
• The DIMM sockets are placed 450 mils (11.43 mm) apart, center-to-center in order to provide
enough space for sufficient airflow to cool stacked DIMMs.
• The PowerEdge M610 memory system supports up to 12 DIMMs. DIMMs must be installed in each
channel starting with the DIMM farthest from the processor. Population order will be identified by
the silkscreen designator and the System Information Label (SIL) located on the chassis cover.
• Memory Optimized: {1, 2, 3}, {4, 5, 6}, {7, 8, 9}
• Advanced ECC or Mirrored: {2, 3}, {5, 6}, {8, 9}
• Quad Rank or UDIMM: {1, 2, 3}, {4, 5, 6}, {7, 8, 9}
C. Speed
Memory Speed Limitations
The memory frequency is determined by a variety of inputs:
• Speed of the DIMMs
• Speed supported by the CPU
• Configuration of the DIMMs
The table below shows the memory populations and the maximum frequency achievable for that
configuration.
dimm type DImm 0 dimm 1 dimm 2 number
of dimms 800 1066 1333
RDIMM
SR DR 2
DR DR 2
QR SR 2
QR DR 2
QR QR 2
SR SR SR 3
SR SR DR 3
SR DR DR 3
DR DR DR 3
dimm type DImm 0 dimm 1 dimm 2 number
of dimms 800 1066 1333
UDIMM
SR 1
DR 1
SR SR 2
SR DR 2
DR DR 2
RDIMM
SR 1
DR 1
QR 1
SR SR 2
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
17
NHM-EP Platform Memory Overview
• Platform capability (18 DIMMs):
– Up to 3 channels per CPU
– Up to 3 DIMMS per channel
• Memory Types Supported:
– DDR 1333, 1066, and 800
– Registered (RDIMM) and unbuffered (UDIMM)
– Single-rank (SR), dual-rank (DR), quad-rank (QR)
• System memory Speed (i.e. the speed at which the memory is
actually running) is set by BIOS depending on:
– CPU capability
– DIMM type(s) used (memory speed, U/RDIMM, SR/DR/QR)
– DIMM populated per channel
• All channels in a system will run at the fastest common frequency
1
2
3
NHM-EP NHM-EP
Up to 3
channels
per CPU
Up to 3
DIMMs per
Channel
1 2 3
Memory Population Scenarios
CPUs
• Maximum B/W:
– DDR3 1333 across 3 channels
– 1 DPC (6 DIMMs)
– Max capacity: 48 GB+ CPU
10.6 GB/s
10.6
10.6
CPU
E5550
and above
• Balanced Performance:
– DDR3 1066 across 3 channels
– Up to 2 DIMMs per Channel
(DPC) (12 DIMMs)
– Max capacity: 96 GB+
CPU
8.5 GB/s
8.5
8.5
CPU
E5520
and above
• Maximum capacity:
– DDR3 800 across 3 channels
– Up to 3 DPC (18 DIMMs total)
– Max capacity: 144 GB+ CPU
6.4 GB/s
6.4
6.4
CPU
All
NHM-EP
SKUs
• RAS capabilities:
CPU
Mirroring
Channel
0 & 1
mirror
each other
Channel
2 unused
CPU
Lockstep
Channel
0 & 1
operate in
lockstep
Channel
2 unused
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
18
Performance that adapts to your software environment
Delivering Intelligent Performance
Next Generation Intel® Microarchitecture
Threaded Applications
45nm Quad-Core Intel® Xeon® processors
Intel® Hyper-Threading Technology Controller
Performance On Demand
Intel® Turbo Boost Technology
Intel® Intelligent Power Technology
Bandwidth Intensive
Intel® QuickPath Technology
Integrated Memory Controller
Section 7. Chipset
A. Overview / Description
The PowerEdge M610 planar incorporated the Intel 5520 chipset (code named Tylersburg) for I/O and
processor interfacing. Tylersburg is designed to support Intel's 5500 series processors (code named
Nehalem-EP), QPI interconnect, DDR3 memory technology, and PCI Express Generation 2. The
Tylersburg chipset consists of the Tylersburg-36D IOH and ICH9.
The Intel 5520 chipset (code named Tylersburg) I/O Hub (IOH)
The planar uses the The Intel®
5520 chipset (code named Tylersburg) I/O Hub (IOH)-36D IOH to provide
a link between the 5500 series 2S processor (Nehalem EP) and I/O components. The main components
of the IOH consist of two full-width QuickPath Interconnect links (one to each processor), 36 lanes of
PCI Express Gen2, a x4 Direct Media Interface (DMI), and an integrated IOxAPIC.
IOH QuickPath Interconnect (QPI)
The QuickPath Architecture consists of serial point-to-point interconnects for the processors and the
IOH. The PowerEdge T610 has a total of three QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) links: one link connecting
the processors and links connecting both processors with the IOH. Each link consists of 20 lanes
(full-width) in each direction with a link speed of up to 6.4 GT/s. An additional lane is reserved for a
forwarded clock. Data is sent over the QPI links as packets.
The QuickPath Architecture implemented in the IOH and CPUs features four layers. The Physical layer
consists of the actual connection between components. It supports Polarity Inversion and Lane Reversal
for optimizing component placement and routing. The Link layer is responsible for flow control and the
reliable transmission of data. The Routing layer is responsible for the routing of QPI data packets. Finally,
the Protocol layer is responsible for high-level protocol communications, including the implementation of
a MESIF (Modify, Exclusive, Shared, Invalid, Forward) cache coherence protocol.
Intel Direct Media Interface (DMI)
The DMI (previously called the Enterprise Southbridge Interface) connects the Tylersburg IOH with the
Intel I/O Controller Hub (ICH). The DMI is equivalent to a x4 PCIe Gen1 link with a transfer rate of 1 Gb/s
in each direction.
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
19
PCI Express Generation 2
PCI Express is a serial point-to-point interconnect for I/O devices. PCIe Gen2 doubles the signaling bit
rate of each lane from 2.5 Gb/s to 5 Gb/s. Each of the PCIe Gen2 ports are backwards-compatible with
Gen1 transfer rates.
In the Tylersburg-36D IOH, there are two x2 PCIe Gen2 ports (1Gb/s) and eight x4 PCIe Gen2 ports (2
Gb/s). The x2 ports can be combined as a x4 link; however, this x4 link cannot be combined with any of
the other x4 ports. Two neighboring x4 ports can be combined as a x8 link, and both resulting x8 links
can combine to form a x16 link.
Intel I/O Controller Hub 9 (ICH9)
ICH9 is a highly integrated I/O controller, supporting the following functions:
• Six x1 PCIe Gen1 ports, with the capability of combining ports 1-4 as a x4 link
• These ports are unused on the PowerEdge M610
• PCI Bus 32-bit Interface Rev 2.3 running at 33MHz
• Up to six Serial ATA (SATA) ports with transfer rates up to 300 MB/s
• The PowerEdge M610 features two SATA port for optional internal optical drive or
tape backup
• Six UHCI and two EHCI (High-Speed 2.0) USB host controllers, with up to twelve USB ports
• The PowerEdge M610 has eight external USB ports and two internal ports dedicated for
UIPS. Refer to the Whoville Hardware/BIOS Specification for the USB assignments for
each platform
• Power management interface (ACPI 3.0b compliant)
• Platform Environmental Control Interface (PECI)
• Intel Dynamic Power Mode Manager
• I/O interrupt controller
• SMBus 2.0 controller
• Low Pin Count (LPC) interface to Super I/O, Trusted Platform Module (TPM), and SuperVU
• Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) support for up to two devices
• The PowerEdge M610’s BIOS is connected to the ICH using SPI
Section 8. BIOS
A. Overview / Description
The PowerEdge M610 BIOS is based on the Dell BIOS core, and supports the following features:
• Nehalem-EP 2S Support
• Simultaneous Multi-Threading (SMT) support
• CPU Turbo Mode support
• PCI 2.3 compliant
• Plug n’ Play 1.0a compliant
• MP (Multiprocessor) 1.4 compliant
• Boot from hard drive, external optical drive, iSCSI drive, USB key, and SD card
• ACPI support
• Direct Media Interface (DMI) support
• PXE and WOL support for on-board NICs
• Memory mirroring and spare bank support
• SETUP access through key at end of POST
• USB 2.0 (USB boot code is 1.1 compliant)
• F1/F2 error logging in CMOS
• Virtual KVM, CD, and floppy support
• Unified Server Configurator (UEFI 2.1) support
• Power management support including DBS, Power Inventory and multiple Power Profiles
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
20
The PowerEdge M610 BIOS does not support the following:
• Embedded Diagnostics (embedded in MASER)
• BIOS language localization
• BIOS recovery after bad flash (but can be recovered from iDRAC6 Express)
B. I
2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit)
What is I2C? A simple bi-directional 2-wire bus for efficient inter-integrated circuit control. All I2C-bus
compatible devices incorporate an on-chip interface which allows them to communicate directly with
each other via the I2C-bus. This design concept solves the many interfacing problems encountered when
designing digital control circuits. These I2C devices perform communication functions between
intelligent control devices (e.g., microcontrollers), general-purpose circuits (e.g., LCD drivers, remote I/O
ports, memories) and application-oriented circuits.
Section 9. Embedded NICs/LOMs
A. Overview/Description
Embedded Gigabit Ethernet Controllers with TCP Offload Engine (TOE) support
One embedded dual-port Broadcom 5709C LAN controller is on the PowerEdge M610 planar as an independent
Gigabit Ethernet interface device. The following information details the features of the LAN devices.
• x4 PCI Express Gen2 capable interface
• The M610 operates this controller at Gen1 speed
• Integrated MAC and PHY 3072x18 byte context memory
• 64KB receive buffer
• TOE (TCP Offload Engine)
• iSCSI controller (enabled through an optional hardware key)
• RDMA controller (RNIC) (enabled post-RTS through an optional hardware key)
• NC-SI (Network Controller-Sideband Interface) connection for manageability
• Wake-On-LAN (WOL)
• PXE 2.0 remote boot
• iSCSI boot
• IPv4 and IPv6 support
• Bare metal deployment support
• ISCSI offload - Used for offloading iSCI traffic as an iSCSI accelerator/HBA
SECTION 10. Mezzanine Card Slots
A. Overview/Description
The PowerEdge M610 contains 2 PCIe x8 Gen 2 mezzanine card slots. Each card is a dual port.
Every M610 blade can support up to 4 I/O ports (2 from each of the 2 mezzanine cards) plus the
two integrated NIC/LOM ports. PLEASE NOTE: For space, the size of new mezzanine cards has been
reduced and in the M610 only ONE of some older size cards can fit. Fabric C can fit any card. Fabric B
can NOT fit: FC4 HBAs, Infiniband HCAs or Broadcom 5708 1Gb NICs. Mezzanine card options include:
• Emulex and QLogic dual-port 8Gb FC HBA
• Broadcom 5709 dual-port Gb Ethernet w/ TOE and iSCSI offload
• Supports IPv6 offloads, improved virtualization performance, enables
M610 to support 2 Ethernet mezzanine cards, and lowers power consumption
• Mellanox ConnectX dual-port Double Data Rate (DDR – 20Gbps) Infiniband HCA or
Quad Data Rate (QDR – 40Gbps) HCA
• Broadcom dual-port 10Gb Ethernet w/ TOE and iSCSI offload
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
21
SECTION 11. Storage
A. Hard Drive Overview / Description
The PowerEdge M610 supports 2 2.5" hard drives. These drives can be either SATA, SAS or SSD.
Both RAID 0 and RAID 1 are supported as long as a RAID card is included.
Hard Disk Drive Carriers
Hard drives must use the new Dell drive carrier for 2.5" drives.
Empty Drive Bays
For the slots that are not occupied by drives, a carrier blank is provided to maintain proper cooling,
maintain a uniform appearance to the unit, and provide EMI shielding.
Diskless Configuration Support
The system supports diskless configuration with no storage controller installed in the system.
Hard Drive LED Indicators
Each disk drive carrier has two LED indicators visible from the front of the system. One is a green LED
for disk activity and the other is a bi-color (green/amber) LED for status information. The activity LED
is driven by the disk drive during normal operation. The bi-color LED is controlled by the SEP device on
the backplane. Both LEDs are used to indicate certain conditions under direction of a storage controller.
B. Storage Controllers
The PowerEdge M610 will support a variety of RAID cards
• A SATA controller comes standard and supports both the SATA drives and some SSD.
• CERC6 - The M610 supports this card with 128MB of RAID cache.
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
22
Section 12. Video
A. Overview / Description
The PowerEdge M610 Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller 6 (iDRAC6) incorporates an integrated
video subsystem, connected to the 32-bit PCI interface of the ICH9. This logic is based on the Matrox
G200 with 8MB of cache. The device only supports 2D graphics. The video device outputs are
multiplexed between the front and rear video ports. If a monitor is connected to the front video connector,
it will take precedence over the rear connection, thereby removing the display from the rear connection.
The PowerEdge M610 system supports the following 2D graphics video modes:
Resolution Refresh Rate (Hz) Color Depth (bit)
640 x 480 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32
800 x 600 56, 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32
1024 x 768 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32
1152 x 864 75 8, 16, 32
1280 x 1024 60, 75, 85 8, 16
1280 x 1024 60 32
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
23
section 13. Operating Systems
A. Overview / Description
The PowerEdge M610 supports Windows®
, Linux®
, and Solaris™ Operating Systems.
Windows®
Support:
x86
or
x64
INSTALLATION Factory
INSTALLATION
logo
certification schedule Test/
Validate support
Windows® Essential Business Server 2008
x64 Standard/
Premium Yes
Windows
Hardware
Quality Labs -
Windows 2008
Shipping Yes Yes
Windows Server® 2008 (x64 includes Hyper-V™)
x64
Standard
Yes
Windows
Hardware
Quality Labs -
Windows 2008
Enterprise Shipping Yes Yes
Datacenter
Windows Server® 2008
x86
Standard
Yes
Windows
Hardware
Quality Labs -
Windows 2008
Shipping Yes Yes
Enterprise
Windows® Web Server 2008
x86
and
x64
Web Yes
Windows
Hardware
Quality Labs -
Windows 2008
Shipping Yes Yes
Windows Server® 2008, SP2 (x64 includes Hyper-V™)
x64
Standard
Yes
Windows
Hardware
Quality Labs -
Windows 2008
Available in
August -
October
2009
Enterprise Yes Yes
Datacenter
Windows Server® 2008, SP2
x86
Standard
Yes
Windows
Hardware
Quality Labs -
Windows 2008
Available in
August -
October
2009
Yes Yes
Enterprise
Windows® Web Server 2008, SP2
x86
and
x64
Web Yes
Windows
Hardware
Quality Labs -
Windows 2008
Available in
August -
October
2009
Yes Yes
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
24
Red Hat® Enterprise Linux 4.7
x86
and
x64
ES/AS Available in
June 2009 n/A Available in
June 2009 Yes Yes
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.2
x86
and
x64
Standard/AP Yes n/A Shipping Yes Yes
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.3
x86
and
x64
Standard/AP Available in
June 2009 n/A Available in
June 2009 Yes Yes
Novell® SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2
x64 Enterprise Yes n/A Shipping Yes Yes
Novell SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11
x64 Enterprise Available in
June 2009 n/A Available in
June 2009 Yes Yes
Solaris™ 10 05/09
x64 Enterprise Drop in the box n/A Available in
June 2009 Yes Yes
Linux support:
Windows Server® 2008, R2, (x64 includes Hyper-V™)
x64
Standard
Yes
Windows
Hardware
Quality Labs -
Windows 2008
Release 2
Available in
November
2009 -
January
2010
Enterprise Yes Yes
Datacenter
x86
or
x64
INSTALLATION Factory
INSTALLATION
logo
certification schedule Test/
Validate support
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
25
Section 15. Systems Management
A. Overview / Description
Dell is focused on delivering open, flexible, and integrated solutions the help our customers reduce the
complexity of managing disparate IT assets. We build comprehensive IT management solutions.
Combining Dell PowerEdge Servers with a wide selection of Dell-developed management solutions, we
provide customers choice and flexibility – so you can simplify and save in environments of any size.
To help you meet your server performance demands, Dell offers Dell OpenManage™ systems
management solutions for:
• Deployment of one or many servers from a single console
• Monitoring of server and storage health and maintenance
• Update of system, operating system, and application software
We offer IT management solutions for organizations of all sizes – priced right, sized right, and
supported right.
B. Server Management
A Dell Systems Management and Documentation DVD and a Dell Management Console DVD are included
with the product. ISO images are also available. The following sections briefly describe the content.
Dell Systems Build and Update Utility: Dell Systems Build and Update Utility assists in OS install and
pre-OS hardware configuration and updates.
OpenManage Server Administrator: The OpenManage Server Administrator (OMSA) tool provides a
comprehensive, one-to-one systems management solution, designed for system administrators to
manage systems locally and remotely on a network. OMSA allows system administrators to focus on
managing their entire network by providing comprehensive one-to-one systems management.
Management Console: Our legacy IT Assistant console is also included, as well as tools to allow access
to our remote management products. These tools include: Remote Access Service, for iDRAC, and the
BMC Management Utility.
Active Directory Snap-in Utility: The Active Directory Snap-in Utility provides an extension snap-in to
the Microsoft Active Directory. This allows you to manage Dell specific Active Directory objects. The
Dell-specific schema class definitions and their installation are also included on the DVD.
Dell Systems Service Diagnostics Tools: Dell Systems Service and Diagnostics tools deliver the latest
Dell optimized drivers, utilities, and operating system-based diagnostics that you can use to update
your system.
eDocs: The section includes Acrobat files for PowerEdge systems, storage peripheral and
OpenManage software.
Section 14. virtualization
Supported embedded hypervisors:
• Microsoft®
Windows Server®
2008 Hyper-V™
• VMware®
ESXi Version 4.0 and 3.5 update 4
• Citrix®
XenServer™ 5.0 with Hotfix 1 or later
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
26
Dell Management Console DVD: The Dell Management Console is a Web-based systems management
software that enables you to discover and inventory devices on your network. It also provides advanced
functions, such as health and performance monitoring of networked devices and patch management
capabilities for Dell systems.
Server Update Utility: In addition to the Systems Management Tools and Documentation and Dell
Management Console DVDs, customers have the option to obtain Server Update Utility DVD. This
DVD has an inventory tool for managing updates to firmware, BIOS and drivers for either Linux or
Windows varieties.
C. Embedded Server Management
The PowerEdge M610 implements circuitry for the next generation of Embedded Server Management. It
is Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) v2.0 compliant. The iDRAC6 (Integrated Dell Remote
Access Controller) is responsible for acting as an interface between the host system and its management
software and the periphery devices. These periphery devices consist of the PSUs, the storage backplane,
integrated SAS HBA or PERC 6/i and control panel with semi-intelligent display.
The iDRAC6 provides features for managing the server remotely or in data center lights-out
environments.
Advanced iDRAC features require the installation of the iDRAC6 Enterprise card.
I. Unmanaged Persistent Storage
The unmanaged persistent storage consists of two ports:
• one located on the control panel board
• one located on the Internal SD Module (formerly UIPS).
The port on the control panel is for an optional USB key and is located inside the chassis. Some of the
possible applications of the USB key are:
• User custom boot and pre-boot OS for ease of deployment or diskless environments
• USB license keys for software applications like eToken™ or Sentinel Hardware Keys
• Storage of custom logs or scratch pad for portable user-defined information (not hot-pluggable)
The Internal SD Module is dedicated for an SD Flash Card with embedded Hypervisor for virtualization.
The SD Flash Card contains a bootable OS image for virtualized platforms.
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
27
II. Lifecycle Controller / Unified Server Configurator
Embedded management is comprised of several pieces which are very interdependent.
• Lifecycle Controller
• Unified Server Configurator
• iDRAC6
• vFLASH
Lifecycle controller is the hardware component that powers the embedded management features. It is
integrated and tamperproof storage for system-management tools and enablement utilities (firmware,
drivers, etc.). It is flash partitioned to support multiple, future use cases
Dell Unified Server Configurator is a 1:1 user interface exposing utilities from Lifecycle Controller. Customers
will use this interface to configure hardware, update server, run diagnostics, or deploy the operating
system. This utility resides on Lifecycle Controller. To access the Unified Server Configurator, press
key within 10 seconds of the Dell logo display during the system boot process. Current functionality
enabled by the Unified Server Configurator includes:
feature description
Faster O/S
Installation
Drivers and the installation utility are embedded on system, so no need to
scour DELL.COM
Faster System Updates Integration with Dell support automatically directed to latest versions of
the Unified Server Configurator
More Comprehensive
Diagnostics Diagnostic utilities are embedded on system
Simplified Hardware
Configuration
Detects RAID controller and allows user to configure virtual disk and
choose virtual disk as boot device, eliminating the need to launch a
separate utility
III. iDRAC6 Express/Enterprise
For the M610, all features of both the iDRAC6 Express and Enterprise are included with each server. The
iDRAC6 is a managed persistent storage space for server provisioning data and consists of 1GB flash and
VFlash. VFlash offers the hot-plug portability and increased storage capacity benefits of SD while still
being managed by the system. iDRAC6 is currently partitioned to support the following applications:
• Unified Server Configurator Browser and System Services Module (SSM) (25MB): The Unified
Server Configurator browser provides a consistent graphical user interface for bare metal
deployment and is ideal for 1-to-1 deployment. The SSM supports automatic 1-to-N deployment
• Service Diagnostics (15MB): Formerly on the hard drive as the Utility Partition, this is a bootable
FAT16 partition for Service Diagnostics
• Deployment OS Embedded Linux (100MB): Storage space to hold embedded Linux
• Deployment OS WinPE (200MB): Storage space to hold Windows Preinstallation Environment
• Driver Store (150MB): Holds all files required for OS deployment
• iDRAC6 firmware (120MB): Holds the two most recent versions of iDRAC6 firmware
• Firmware Images (160MB): Holds the two most recent versions of BIOS, RAID, embedded
NIC, power supplies, and hard drive firmware. This partition also holds the BIOS and option
ROM configuration data
• Life Cycle Log (2MB): Stores initial factory configuration as well as all detectable hardware
and firmware changes to the server since its deployment. The Life Cycle Log is stored on the
BMC SPI flash
• RJ-45 Management 10/100Mbps Ethernet port
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
28
• VFlash SD card connector - Launches with limited functionality but designed
for future expansion
• Other iDRAC6 features:
• Remote virtual floppy / CD / disk (with super floppy support)
• Graphics console redirection (also called remote virtual KVM-Keyboard / Video / Mouse)
(For M Series part of the M1000e)
• Virtual flash (requires VFlash card)
• Rip and replace
• RACADM Command Line Interface
Approximately 20% of the Flash space is reserved for wear leveling on the NAND Flash. Wear leveling is a
method designed to extend the life of the NAND Flash by balancing the use cycles on the Flash’s blocks.
For more information on iDRAC6 Express/Enterprise features see the table below.
Feature BMC iDRAC6
Enterprise
VFlash
Media
Interface and Standards Support
IPMI 2.0 4 4 4
Web-based GUI 4 4
SNMP 4 4
WSMAN 4 4
SMASH-CLP 4 4
Racadm command-line 4 4
Conductivity
Shared/Failover Network Modes 4 4 4
IPv4 4 4 4
VLAN tagging 4 4 4
IPv6 4 4
Dynamic DNS 4 4
Dedicated NIC 4 4
Security & Authentication
Role-based Authority 4 4 4
Local Users 4 4 4
Active Directory 4 4
SSL Encryption 4 4
Remote Management & Remediation
Remote Firmware Update 4 1 4 4
Server power control 4 1 4 4
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
29
Feature BMC iDRAC6
Enterprise
VFlash
Media
Virtual console sharing 4 4
Virtual flash 4
Monitoring
Sensor Monitoring and Alerting 4 1 4 4
Real-time Power Monitoring 4 4
Real-time Power Graphing 4 4
Historical Power Counters 4 4
Logging Features
System Event Log 4 4 4
RAC Log 4 4
Trace Log 4 4
Feature BMC iDRAC6
Enterprise
VFlash
Media
Serial-over-LAN (with proxy) 4 4 4
Serial-over-LAN (no proxy) 4 4
Power capping 4 4
Last crash screen capture 4 4
Boot capture 4 4
Serial-over-LAN 4 4
Virtual media 4 4
Virtual console 4 4
Section 16. Peripherals
A. USB peripherals
The PowerEdge M610 supports the following USB devices with its 2 externally accessible USB ports:
• DVD (bootable; requires two USB ports)
• USB Key (bootable)
• Keyboard (only one USB keyboard is supported)
• Mouse (only one USB mouse is supported
Section 17. Documentation
A. Overview, Description, and List
PowerEdge M610 and other 11G systems use the new Enterprise documentation set. The following is a
summary of some of the documents slated for the M610 product. For the complete list of documents,
including language requirements and delivery scheduling, refer to the Documentation Matrix and the
Documentation Milestones in the InfoDev Functional Publications Plan.
Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook
30
• Getting Started Guide: This guide provides initial setup steps, a list of key system features, and
technical specifications. This document is required for certain worldwide regulatory submittals.
This guide is printed and shipped with the system, and is also available in PDF format on the
Dell support site.
• Hardware Owner’s Manual: This document provides troubleshooting and remove/replace
procedures, as well as information on the System Setup program, system messages, codes,
and indicators. This document is provided to customers in HTML and PDF format at the Dell
support site.
• System Information Label: The system information label documents the system board layout
and system jumper settings and is located on the system cover. Text is minimized due to space
limitations and translation considerations. The label size is standardized across platforms.
• Information Update: This is a PDF document that provides information on late changes and
issues having significant customer impact which were discovered after document signoff.
• General System Information Placemat: This is a paper document that is provided with every
system. The document provides general information about the system, including software
license agreement information and the location of the service tag.
• Rack Placemat: This is a paper document that is provided with the rack kits. The document
provides an overview of procedures for setting up the rack.
Section 18. Packaging Options
The PowerEdge M610 can ship in three ways:
1. Integrated into the M1000e chassis in one large box
2. In a multi-pack box holding up to eight single-slot blades
3. As a single server in one box
DELL™
OPTIPLEX580
TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK
INSIDE THE OPTIPLEX 580
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 2
OVERVIEW
Mini Tower Computer (MT) View 4-5
Desktop Computer (DT) View 6-7
Small Form Factor Computer (SFF) View 8-9
MARKETING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
Operating System, Chipset 10
Processor 11-12
Advanced System Manageability Modes 12
Memory 13
Drives and Removable Storage 14
System Board Connectors 15
Graphics/Video Controller, External Ports/Connectors 16
Communications—Network Adapter (NIC), Modem 17
Audio and Speakers, Keyboard and Mouse 17
Security, Service and Support, Software 18
DETAILED ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS
System Dimensions (Physical) 19
System Board Connector Maximum Allowable Dimensions 19-20
System Level Environmental and Operating Conditions 21
Power 21-22
Audio 22
Communications 23-25
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 3
Graphics/Video Controller 25-30
Hard Drives 30-37
Optical Drive 37-40
BIOS Defaults 40-41
Chassis Enclosure and Ventilation Requirements 42-43
Acoustic Noise Emission Information 44-47
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 4
Mini Tower (MT) Computer View
Front and Back View
1 CD/DVD drive
2 CD/DVD drive eject button
3 CD/DVD drive panel
4 USB 2.0 connectors (2)
5 drive activity light
6 power button, power light
7 diagnostic lights (4)
8 headphone connector
9 microphone connector
10 network connectivity light
11 padlock ring
12 cover-release latch, security cable slot
13 voltage selector switch
14 power cable connector
15 back panel connectors
16 expansion card slots (4)
17 power supply diagnostic button
18 power supply diagnostic light
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 5
MT Back Panel Connectors
1 serial connector
2 link integrity light
3 network adapter connector
4 network activity light
5 line-out connector
6 line-in/microphone connector
7 USB 2.0 connectors (6)
8 VGA connector
9 eSata connector
10 DisplayPort connector
MT System Board
1 Fan connector (FAN_CPU)
2 Speaker connector (INT_SPKR)
3 N/A
4 Processor connector (CPU)
5 Processor power connector (12VPOWER)
6 Memory module connectors (4)
7 SATA connectors (SATA0, SATA1)
8 Front-panel connector (FRONTPANEL)
9 Power connector (POWER)
10 SATA connectors (SATA2)
11 SATA connectors (SATA3)
12 Intrusion switch connector (INTRUDER)
13 N/A
14 Battery socket (BATTERY)
15 PCI Express x16 connector (SLOT1)
16 PCI Express x4 connector (SLOT2)
17 PCI connector (SLOT3, SLOT4)
18 PS/2 or serial connector (SERIAL2)
19 Floppy drive connector (not offered)
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 6
Desktop (DT) Computer View
Front and Back View
1 CD/DVD drive
2 CD/DVD drive eject button
3 USB 2.0 connectors (2)
4 drive activity light
5 diagnostic lights (4)
6 power button, power light
7 network connectivity light
8 microphone connector
9 headphone connector
10 power supply diagnostic button
11 power supply diagnostic light
12 voltage selector switch
13 cover-release latch, security cable slot
14 padlock ring
15 power cable connector
16 back panel connectors
17 expansion card slots (3)
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 7
DT Back Panel Connectors
1 serial connector
2 link integrity light
3 network adapter connector
4 network activity light
5 line-out connector
6 line-in/microphone connector
7 USB 2.0 connectors (6)
8 VGA connector
9 eSata connector
10 DisplayPort connector
DT System Board
1 Fan connector (FAN_CPU)
2 Speaker connector (INT_SPKR)
3 Processor connector (CPU)
4 Processor power connector (12VPOWER)
5 Memory module connectors (4)
6 SATA connectors (SATA0, SATA1)
7 Front-panel connector (FRONTPANEL)
8 Power connector (POWER)
9 SATA connectors (SATA2)
10 N/A
11 Intrusion switch connector (INTRUDER)
12 Battery socket (BATTERY)
13 PCI Express x16 connector (SLOT1)
14 PCI Express x4 connector (SLOT2)
15 PCI connector (SLOT3)
16 PS/2 or serial connector (SERIAL2)
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 8
Small Form Factor (SFF) Computer View
Front and Back View
1 CD/DVD drive
2 CD/DVD drive eject button
3 USB 2.0 connectors (2)
4 drive activity light
5 diagnostic lights (4)
6 power button, power light
7 network connectivity light
8 microphone connector
9 headphone connector
10 power supply diagnostic button
11 power supply diagnostic light
12 voltage selector switch
13 cover-release latch, security cable slot
14 padlock ring
15 power cable connector
16 back panel connectors
17 expansion card slots (3)
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 9
SFF Back Panel Connectors
1 serial connector
2 link integrity light
3 network adapter connector
4 network activity light
5 line-out connector
6 line-in/microphone connector
7 USB 2.0 connectors (6)
8 VGA connector
9 eSata connector
10 DisplayPort connector
SFF System Board
1 Fan connector (FAN_CPU)
2 Processor connector (CPU)
3 Processor power connector (12VPOWER)
4 Memory module connectors (4)
5 SATA drive connectors (SATA0, SATA1)
6 Front-panel connector (FRONTPANEL)
7 Power connector (POWER)
8 SATA connectors (SATA2)
9 Fan connector (FAN_HDD)
10 Intrusion switch connector (INTRUDER)
11 N/A
12 Battery socket (BATTERY)
13 PCI Express x16 connector (SLOT1)
14 PCI Express x4 connector (SLOT2)
15 PS/2 or serial connector (SERIAL2)
16 N/A
17 Speaker connector (INT_SPKR)
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 10
Marketing System Configurations
NOTE: Offerings may vary by region. For more information regarding the configuration of your computer, click Start Help and
Support and select the option to view information about your computer.
Operating System
NOTE: One of the following Operating Systems will be preinstalled.
MT DT SFF
Windows 7® operating system Windows 7® Home Basic (32 bit),
Windows 7® Home Premium (32 bit),
Windows 7® Professional (32 and 64 bit),
Windows 7® Ultimate (32 bit)
Windows Vista® operating system Windows Vista® SP2 Home Basic (32 bit)
Windows Vista® SP2 Business (32 and 64 bit),
Windows Vista® SP2 Ultimate (32 bit),
Windows Vista® SP2 Business downgrade via
Windows 7® Professional
Windows Vista® SP2 Ultimate downgrade via Windows
7® Ultimate
Windows XP® operating system Windows XP® Professional SP3 (32 bit) downgrade via
Windows 7® Professional or Ultimate
Windows XP® Professional SP3 (32 bit) downgrade via
Windows Vista® Business or Ultimate
Other Ubuntu® Linux® (select countries)
FreeDOS for (n-series),
OS Media Support X X X
Chipset
MT DT SFF
Chipset AMD 785G
Non-volatile memory on chipset
BIOS Configuration SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) 8Mbit (1MB) located at SPI_1 on chipset
TPM 1.2 Security Device (Trusted Platform Module)1 16KB located at TPM on chipset
Non-TPM
Available in select countries
NIC EEPROM LOM configuration contained within SPI_1
1
TPM not available in some regions
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 11
Processor
NOTE: Global Standard Products (GSP) are a subset of Dell's relationship products that are managed for availability and
synchronized transitions on a worldwide basis. They ensure the same platform is available for purchase globally. This allows
customers to reduce the number of configurations managed on a worldwide basis, thereby reducing their costs. They also enable
companies to implement global IT standards by locking in specific product configurations worldwide. The following GSP
processors identified below will be made available to Dell customers.
NOTE:
Processor numbers are not a measure of performance.
Processor availability subject to change and may vary by region/country
MT DT SFF
AMD Phenom II Quad Core
AMD Phenom II Quad Core B95/ 3.0GHz, 8M X X X
AMD Phenom II Quad Core B93/ 2.8GHz, 8M X X X
AMD Phenom II Triple Core
AMD Phenom II Triple Core B75/ 3.0GHz, 7.5M X X X
AMD Phenom II Triple Core B73/ 2.8GHz, 7.5M X X X
AMD Phenom II Dual Core
AMD Phenom II Dual Core B55/ 3.0GHz, 7M X X X
AMD Phenom II Dual Core B53/ 2.8GHz, 7M X X X
AMD Athlon Quad Core
AMD Athlon II Quad Core 630/ 2.8GHz, 2M
X X X
AMD Athlon II Quad Core 620/ 2.6GHz, 2M
X X X
AMD Athlon Triple Core
AMD Athlon II Triple Core 435/ 2.9GHz, 1.5M
X X X
AMD Athlon II Triple Core 425/ 2.7GHz, 1.5M
X X X
AMD Athlon Dual Core
AMD Athlon II Dual Core B24/ 3.0GHz, 2M
X X X
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 12
MT DT SFF
AMD Athlon II Dual Core B22/ 2.8GHz, 2M X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP
AMD Athlon II Dual Core 250/ 3.0GHz, 2M X X X
AMD Athlon II Dual Core 245/ 2.9GHz, 2M X X X
AMD Athlon II Dual Core 240/ 2.8GHz, 2M X X X
AMD Sempron Single Core
AMD Sempron Single Core 140/ 2.7GHz, 1M X X X
Advanced System Manageability Mode
NOTE: Hardware management mode options allow you to select the right systems management feature support for your enterprise.
Dell’s innovative approach to scalable remote client management offers you a choice of built-in hardware management capabilities
across platform offerings.
The latest generation of Broadcom TruManage technology provides the capability to manage your install base of systems regardless
of the power state or hardware functionality of the system.
This functionality allows IT to address issues remotely rather than having to physically visit systems.
The OptiPlex™ 580 supports Broadcom® TruManage™ technology which supports the following features:
BIOS Management, asset reporting, remote troubleshooting and repair , power on f o r remote patching/updating.
*The functionality described above requires an appropriate software management console
MT DT SFF
Broadcom TruManage Systems Management Ready X X X
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 13
Memory
Your computer supports a maximum of 16 GB of memory when you use four 4-GB DIMMs; however, 32-bit operating systems, such
as the 32-bit version of Microsoft® Windows® XP, can only use a maximum of 4 GB of address space. Moreover, certain components
within the computer require address space in the 4GB range. Any address space reserved for these components cannot be used by
computer memory; therefore, the amount of memory available to the operating system is less than 4GB.
NOTE: The entire 16-GB memory range is available to 64-bit operating systems.
Memory modules should be installed in pairs of matched memory size, speed, and technology. If the memory modules are not
installed in matched pairs, the computer will continue to operate, but with a slight reduction in performance.
MT DT SFF
Type: DDR3 Synch DRAM Non-ECC Memory
DIMM Slots 4 4 4
DIMM Capacities Up to 16GB Up to 16GB Up to 16GB
Minimum Memory 1GB 1GB 1GB
Maximum Memory with 1066MHz speed memory 16GB1
16GB1
16GB1
Configurations:
1066MHz Memory configurations
16GB1
DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X
8GB1
DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X
8GB1
DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X
4GB1
DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X
4GB1
DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X
4GB1
DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X
3GB DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (3 DIMM) X X X
2GB DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X
2GB DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X
1GB DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X
1 The total amount of available memory will be less than 4GB. The amount less depends on the actual system configuration. To fully utilize 4GB
or more of memory requires a 64-bit enabled processor and 64-bit operating system.
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 14
Drives and Removable Storage
MT DT SFF
Bays:
3.5-inch bay (External) 1 1 1 (slimline)
5.25-inch bay (External) 2 1 1 (slimline)
Hard Drives Supported (Internal and External) 2 x 3.5”
Or
2 x 2.5”
1 x 3.5”
Or
2 x 2.5”
1 x 3.5”
Or
2 x 2.5”
Optical Drives Supported (External) 2 1 1 (slimline)
Interface:
SATA 4 3 3
3.5” Hard Drives:
160GB1
SATA 10K RPM HDD X X X
500GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
320GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
250GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
160GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
2.5” Hard Drives
128GB1
SATA Solid State HDD X X X
64GB1
SATA Solid State HDD X X X
320GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
250GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
160GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
3.5” RAID 1 Data Protection: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives)
160GB1
SATA 10K RPM HDD X
500GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X
320GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X
250GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X
160GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X
2.5” RAID 1 Data Protection: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives)
320GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
250GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 15
MT DT SFF
160GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
3.5” RAID 0 Performance: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives)
320GB1
SATA 10K RPM HDD X
1TB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X
500GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X
320GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X
2.5” RAID 0 Performance: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives)
500GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
320GB1
SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
Optical Drive: (SFF requires a slimline optical drive)
DVD+/-RW2
SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s
DVD-ROM3
SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s
DVD+/-RW2 with Blu-Ray-ROM SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s
1
For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less.
2
Discs burned with this drive may not be compatible with some existing drives and players; using DVD+R media provides maximum
compatibility.
3
DVD-ROM drives may have write-capable hardware that has been disabled via firmware modifications.
System Board Connectors
NOTE: See Detailed Engineering Specifications for maximum card dimensions support.
MT DT SFF
PCI Slot(s): number of 2 1 0
PCIe x16 Slot: number of 1 1 1
PCIe x16 (wired as x4) Slot: number of 1 1 1
Flexbay 1 1 1
Serial ATA (SATA) 4 3 3
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 16
Graphics/Video Controller
NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile
card.
MT DT SFF
Integrated ATI Radeon HD 4200 Graphics1
Integrated on system board with specific processors
Enhanced Graphic/Video Options
256MB AMD RADEON HD 3450 Graphics, dual DVI or VGA and TV Out Optional full height or low profile card
256MB NVIDIA 9300GE Graphics, dual DVI or VGA and TV Out Optional full height or low profile card
256MB AMD RADEON HD 3470 Graphics, dual DP Optional full height or low profile card
512MB AMD RADEON HD4550 Graphics, dual DP Optional full height or low profile card
512MB NVIDIA NVS420 Graphics, quad DP or DVI NA NA Low Profile
1 Up to 1.7 GB of system memory may be allocated to support integrated graphics, depending on operating system, system memory size and
other factors.
External Ports/Connectors
NOTE: MT supports full height cards, DT supports low profile cards or full height cards with optional riser. SFF supports low
profile cards.
See chassis diagrams section for port/connector locations MT DT SFF
USB 2.0 (includes two internal on MT, DT and SFF) 8 8 8
Serial One rear
PS/2 NA
eSATA One rear
Parallel NA
Network Connector (RJ-45) One rear
Video: (enabled with specific processors)
VGA One rear
Display Port One rear
Audio:
Microphone-in One minijack front
Headphone One minijack front
Stereo line-in/micropone One minijack rear
Speakers line out One minijack rear
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 17
Communications - Network Adapter (NIC) –
NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile
card.
MT DT SFF
Integrated Broadcom 5761 Ethernet LAN 10/100/1000 (Remote Wake Up, PXE
support) Integrated on system board
Broadcom NetXtreme 10/100/1000 PCIe Gigabit Networking Card (5722) Supports full
height
Low-profile or full
height card with
optional riser
Supports low
profile card
1
This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and
network infrastructure is required.
Communications – Wireless
MT DT SFF
Broadcom® 1505 PCIe WLAN card -802.11 draft-N WiFi (with Remote Wake Up
support) Optional full height or low profile card
Audio and Speakers
MT DT SFF
RealTek ALC269 High Definition Audio Integrated on system board
Dell AX210 USB Stereo Speakers Optional
Dell AX510/AX510PA Dell Flat Panel Display Soundbar Optional
Dell AY410 Sting 2.1 Muitimedia Speaker System Optional
Keyboard and Mouse
MT DT SFF
Dell USB Keyboard Optional
Dell USB QuietKey Keyboard Optional
Dell USB Multimedia Pro Keyboard Optional
Dell USB Entry Mouse Optional
Dell Laser Mouse Optional
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 18
Security
MT DT SFF
Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 1.21
Integrated on system board
Chassis Intrusion Switch Standard
Chassis lock slot Standard
1
TPM not available in some regions
Service and Support
NOTE: For more details on Dell Service Plans please to go to www.dell.com/service/service_plans/
MT DT SFF
3 Year Limited Warranty1
(3-3-0) Standard
3 Year Next Business Day On-site2
Service (3-3-3) Optional
Dell ProSupport Optional
1
For a copy of our guarantees or limited warranties, please write Dell USA L.P., Attn: Warranties, One Dell Way, Round Rock, TX 78682. For
more information, visit www.dell.com/warranty.
2
Service may be provided by third-party. Technician will be dispatched if necessary following phone-based troubleshooting. Subject to parts
availability, geographical restrictions and terms of service contract. Service timing dependent upon time of day call placed to Dell. U.S. only.
Software
MT DT SFF
Dell Client Manager Available via Dell.com
Dell Control Point Standard
Dell Backup & Recovery Manager Optional
Norton Internet Security 2010 90 Day Trial or Optional Subscription
McAfee 10 Security Center 90 Day Trial or Optional Subscription
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 19
Detailed Engineering Specifications
System Dimensions (Physical)
NOTE: System Weight* and Shipping Weight* is based on a typical configuration and may vary based on PC configuration. A
typical configuration includes: integrated graphics, one hard drive, one optical drive, and one diskette drive.
MT DT SFF
Chassis Volume liters 32.62 15.08 8.00
Chassis Weight*1 pounds/kilograms 25.3 / 11.6 16.5 / 7.26 13 / 5.90
Chassis Dimensions: (HxWxD)
Height inches/centimeters 15.8 / 40.8 4.4 / 11.4 3.5 / 9.26
Width inches/centimeters 7.4 / 18.7 15.4 / 39.9 11.8 / 31.4
Depth inches/centimeters 17.2 / 43.3 13.7 / 35.3 12.9 / 34
Shipping Weight*1 pounds/kilograms includes packaging materials 43.5 / 19.73 28.0 / 12.7 11.25/ 28.6
Packaging Parameters (HxWxD)2
Height inches/centimeters 22.06/ 56.0 20.35/ 51.7 20.75/ 52.7
Width inches/centimeters 20.94/ 53.2 20.04/ 50.9 16.38/ 41.6
Depth inches/centimeters 14.56/ 37.0 11.96/ 30.4 11.25/ 28.6
1 Weights are approximates and may change based on system configuration and included accessories.
2 Dimensions are DAO specific. Each region has unique packing.
System Board Connector Maximum Allowable Dimensions
MT DT SFF
PCI Slot(s) Dimensions: (HxL) 2 1 0
Height inches/centimeters 4.376/11.115 2.731/6.89
Length inches/centimeters 6.6/16.765* 6.6/16.765
PCIe x16 Slot Dimensions: (HxL) 1 1 1
Height inches/centimeters 4.376/11.115 2.731/6.89
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 20
Length inches/centimeters 6.6/16.765* 6.6/16.765
PCIe x16 (wired as x4)Slot Dimensions: (HxL) 1 1 1
Height inches/centimeters 4.376/11.115 2.731/6.89
Length inches/centimeters 6.6/16.765* 6.6/16.765
* Card length can be longer than standard Half-Length Card but cannot be a Full-Length Card.
** 6.9/17.53 in/cm is longer than the standard Half-Length Card
System Level Environmental and Operating Conditions
MT DT SFF
Temperature
Operating 10° to 35° C (50° to 95° F)
Non-Operating (Storage) -40° to 65° C (-40° to -149° F)
Relative Humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing)
Maximum vibration
Operating 5 to 350 Hz at 0.0002 G2/Hz
Non-Operating 5 to 500 Hz at 0.001 to 0.01 G2/Hz
Maximum Shock
Operating 40 G +/- 5% with pulse duration of 2
msec +/- 10% (equivalent to 20 in/sec [51
cm/sec])
Non-Operating 105 G +/- 5% with pulse duration of 2
msec +/- 10% (equivalent to 50 in/sec
[127 cm/sec])
Maximum Altitude
Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft)
Non-Operating –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 21
Power
MT
APFC EPA
DT
APFC EPA
SFF
APFC EPA
Power Supply Wattage 305W 255W 255W 255W 235W 235W
AC input Voltage Range 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac
90 –
264Vac
90 – 264Vac
AC input current (low ac
range/high AC range)
5.6/2.8 Arms 3.6/1.8 Arms 5.0/2.5 Arms 4.0/2.0 Arms
4.5/2.25
Arms
3.5/1.75 Arms
AC input Frequency 47 – 63 Hz 47 – 63 Hz 47 – 63 Hz 47 – 63 Hz 47 – 63 Hz 47 – 63 Hz
AC holdup time (80%
load)
16 ms 16 ms 16 ms 16 ms 16 ms 16 ms
Average Efficiency (
Energy Star Compliant)
85 – 88 – 85%
@ 20 – 50 –
100% load
85 – 88 – 85%
@ 20 – 50 –
100% load
85 – 88 – 85%
@ 20 – 50 –
100% load
Minimum Efficiency
(Active PFC) 65% 65% 65%
DC parameters
+3.3v output 8.0 A 8.0 A 5.0 A 5.0 A 5.0 A 5.0 A
+5.0v output 16.0 A 15.0 A 15.0 A 15.0 A 16.0 A 16.0 A
+12.0v output 15.0 A
&
10.0 A
13.0 A
&
7.0 A
18.0 A 18.0 A 17.0 A 17.0 A
+5.0v auxiliary output 4.0 A 4.0 A 4.0 A 4.0 A 4.0 A 4.0 A
-12.0v output 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A
Max total power 305 W 255 W 255 W 255 W 235 W 235 W
Max combined +3.3v /
+5.0v power
80 W 80 W 91.5 W 91.5 W 88 W 88 W
Max combined 12.0v
power (note: only if
more than one 12v rail)
240W 220W N/A N/A N/A N/A
BTUs/h (based on PSU
max wattage)
1603 BTU 1000 BTU 1341 BTU 1000 BTU 1235 BTU 921 BTU
Power Supply Fan
80 x 25mm 80 x 25mm 92 x 25mm 92 x 25mm
80 x 15mm
or
80 x 20mm
80 x 15mm
or
80 x 20mm
Compliance:
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 22
Energy Star Compliant No Yes No Yes No Yes
Blue Angel Compliant Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Climate Savers / 80Plus
Compliant
No Yes No Yes No Yes
FEMP Standby Power
Compliant
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
TCO Compliant Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
3.3v CMOS battery (type
and estimated battery life) 3-V CR2032 lithium coin cell. Est. 5 year life
Audio
Integrated RealTek ALC269 High Definition Audio MT DT SFF
High Definition Stereo support X X X
Number of channels 2
Number of Bits / Audio resolution 16, 20, and 24-bit resolution
Sampling rate (recording/playback) Variable
Any multiple or sub-multiple of 48kHz or
44.1kHz
Signal to Noise Ratio 98dB audio outputs, -98dB audio inputs
Analog Audio X X X
Dolby Digital
THX
Digital out (S/PDIF)
Audio Jack Impedance
Microphone 150 kΩ
Line-In 150 kΩ
Line-Out 190 Ω
Headphone .5 Ω
Internal Speaker Power Rating 2W
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 23
Communications - Integrated LAN
NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile
card.
Integrated Broadcom 5761 Ethernet LAN 10/100/1000 MT DT SFF
External Connector Type RJ45
Data Rates supported 10/100/1000 Mbps
Controller Details
Controller bus architecture (example PCIe 1.0a x1) Intel Gigabit LAN Connect Interface
(GLCI) and LAN Connect Interface (LCI)
Integrated memory N/A
Data transfer mode (example Bus-Master DMA) N/A
Power consumption (full operation per data rate connection speed) 781mW (Max.)
Power consumption (standby operation) with WOL enabled 200mW (Max, 100Mb)
66mW (Max, 10Mb)
Power consumption (standby operation) with WOL disabled in BIOS 0mW (Max)
Power consumption (standby operation) with WOL disabled with driver 47mW (Max)
IEEE standards compliance (example 802.1P) 802.3
Hardware Certifications (example FCC, B, GS mark…) N/A
Boot ROM Support EEPROM (located in SPI)
Network Transfer Mode (example Full Duplex, Half Duplex)
Network Transfer Rate (example 10BASE-T (half-duplex) 10 Mbps
10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps
100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps
100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 Mbps
1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps
10 Mb (full/half-duplex)
100 Mb (full/half-duplex)
1000 Mb (full-duplex)
Environmental
Operating temperature 0° C to 85° C (32° F to 185° F)
Operating humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing)
Operating System Driver Support Windows XP 32-Bit, Windows Vista
32-bit, Windows Vista 64-bit, Win7 32-bit,
Win7 64Bit.
Manageability (examples WOL, PXE..) WOL, PXE 2.1
Management Capabilities Alerting (examples ASF 2.0 AMT…) DASH 1.1/ ASF 2.0
1
This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and
network infrastructure is required.
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 24
Communications – Networking Card
NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile
card.
Broadcom 5722 NetXtreme 10/100/1000 PCIe Gigabit1
Networking
Card
MT DT SFF
Connector Type RJ45
Data Rates supported 10/100/1000 Mbps Half/Full duplex
Controller Details
Controller bus architecture (example PCIe 1.0a x1) PCIe 1.0a x1
Integrated memory 40KB
Data transfer mode (example Bus-Master DMA) Bus-Master DMA
Power consumption (full operation per data rate connection speed) 1.41W (427mA @ +3.3V)
Power consumption (standby operation) Less than 300mW
IEEE standards compliance (example 802.1P) 802.3z, 802.3x, Dynamic 802.3ad,
802.3 p, 802.1Q
Hardware Certifications (example FCC, B, GS mark…) FCC B, VCCI B, CE
Boot ROM Support No
Network Transfer Mode (example Full Duplex, Half Duplex) Full Duplex/Half Duplex
Network Transfer Rate (example 10BASE-T (half-duplex) 10 Mbps
10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps
100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps
100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 Mbps
1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps
10BASE-T (full-duplex - 20Mbps,
half-duplex – 10Mbps)*
100BASE-T (full-duplex – 200Mbps,
half-duplex - 100Mbps)*
1000BASE-T (full-duplex - 2000Mbps,
half-duplex – 1000Mbps)*
* Depends on the system environment.
Environmental
Operating temperature 0° C to 55° C (32° F to 131° F)
Operating humidity 5% ~ 85% (non-condensing)
Operating System Driver Support Windows XP 32-bit, Windows Vista
32-bit, Windows Vista 64-bit, Win7 32-bit,
Win7 64Bit.
Manageability (examples WOL, PXE..) WOL, PXE2.1, ACPI, CIM, SNMP
Management Capabilities Alerting (examples ASF 2.0 AMT…) None
1
This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and
network infrastructure is required.
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 25
Communications – Wireless
NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile
card.
Broadcom® 1505 PCIe WLAN card (802.11 N) MT DT SFF
External Connector Type ?
Controller Details
Controller bus architecture PCIe 1.1 x1
WLAN standards supported 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n
802.11b Data Rates supported 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps
802.11a Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps
802.11g Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps
802.11n Data Rates supported 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135,
130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2,
65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15,
14.4, 7.2 Mbps
Security 802.1x, WEP, WPA/WPA2, TKIP, CCX
v1, CCX v2, CCX v3, CCX v4, and CCX
v5 128-bit OCB mode AES, 802.11i
Operating temperature 0 - 70°C
Operating humidity 85% maximum non-condensing
Operating System Driver Support Windows XP 32-bit, Windows Vista
32-bit, Windows Vista 64-bit, Win7 32-bit,
Win7 64Bit.
Graphics/Video Controller
NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile
card.
Integrated ATI Radeon HD 4200 Graphics MT DT SFF
Bus Type Integrated
GPU core clock 350 MHz Integrated 24 bit RAMDAC
Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed XP: Up to 1GB shared system memory
with 2GB system memory
Vista and Win7: Up to 1.4GB shared
system memory with 4GB or more
system memory
Overlay Planes Yes
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 26
Maximum Color Depth 32 bit
Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85 Hz
Multiple Display Support Yes
Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support OpenGL 2.0/DirectX 10.1
Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Up to 2560x11600 @ 60Hz (DP)
Up to 1920x1200 @ 60Hz (DVI & VGA)
Up to 1600x1200 @ 85Hz (VGA only)
External connectors VGA, DisplayPort
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature Range 0° C to 70° C (32° F to 158° F)
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% (non-condensing)
Display Port
Bus Type AUX 1, 2, 4 lanes
Maximum supported resolution Up to 2560x1600 @ 60Hz
Maximum power consumption N/A
External connectors Display Port
Dongle Supported Display Port to DVI
Display Port to VGA
1 Up to 1.7 GB of system memory may be allocated to support integrated graphics, depending on operating system, system memory size and
other factors.
2
The Display Port controller does not support multi-monitor display in DOS, but it does in the OS after the driver is loaded.
256MB AMD Radeon™ HD 3450 Graphics dual DVI or VGA and TV
Out
MT DT SFF
Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16
GPU core clock 600Mhz
Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz
Maximum power consumption 22W
Overlay Planes Yes
Maximum Color Depth 32-bit
Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz
Multiple Display Support Yes
Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL
Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 27
256MB AMD Radeon™ HD 3450 Graphics dual DVI or VGA and TV
Out
MT DT SFF
Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz
External connectors DMS-591 and S-video
Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm
x 120mm
167.64mm x 120mm
Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 85mm
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C
Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH
Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft.
1
DMS-59 to VGA or DMS-59 to DVI adaptors required.
256MB nVidia 9300GE Graphics,
dual DVI or VGA and TV Out
MT DT SFF
Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16
GPU core clock 540Mhz
Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared)
Size and Speed
500Mhz
Maximum power consumption 25W
Overlay Planes No
Maximum Color Depth 32-bit
Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 120Hz for 1024x768 and lower
Multiple Display Support Yes
Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API
Support
DirectX 10.0 and OpenGL 3.1
Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh
Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital)
Analog 1920x1200x32bpp @ 60Hz
Digital - 1600x1200@60Hz w/o reduced blanking, or 1920x1200@60Hz w/reduced blanking
External connectors DMS-591
and S-video
Dimensions of full height card
inches/centimeters (L x H)
167.64mm x 120mm 167.64mm x 120mm
Dimensions of low profile card
inches/centimeters (L x H)
167.64mm x 85mm
Environmental Operating Conditions
(Non-Condensing):
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 28
256MB nVidia 9300GE Graphics,
dual DVI or VGA and TV Out
MT DT SFF
Operating Temperature Range -10°-55° C
Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH
Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft.
1
DMS-59 to VGA or DMS-59 to DVI adaptors required.
256MB AMD Radeon™ HD 3470 Graphics, dual DP MT DT SFF
Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16
GPU core clock 750Mhz
Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz
Maximum power consumption 18W
Overlay Planes Yes
Maximum Color Depth 32-bit
Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz
Multiple Display Support Yes
Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL
Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz
Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz
External connectors 2 Display Port
Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x
120mm
167.64mm x 120mm
Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 85mm
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C
Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH
Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft.
512MB AMD Radeon™ HD 4550 Graphics, dual DP MT DT SFF
Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16
GPU core clock 750Mhz
Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 800Mhz
Maximum power consumption 25W
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 29
512MB AMD Radeon™ HD 4550 Graphics, dual DP MT DT SFF
Overlay Planes Yes
Maximum Color Depth 32-bit
Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz
Multiple Display Support Yes
Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL
Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz
Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz
External connectors 2 Display Port(1)
Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x
120mm
167.64mm x 120mm
Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 85mm
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C
Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH
Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft.
(1) Dongles Supported: DP-VGA (RN699), DP-DVI (23NVR), DP-DL DVI (XT625), DP-HDMI(TK041)
512MB nVidia NVS 420 Graphics, quad DP or DVI SFF
Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16
GPU core clock 540Mhz
Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 700Mhz
Maximum power consumption 40W
Overlay Planes No
Maximum Color Depth 32-bit
Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 240Hz for 1024x768 and below
Multiple Display Support Yes
Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support DirectX 10.0 and OpenGL 3.0
Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) DP - 2560x1600@60Hz DVI -
1600x1200@60Hz w/o reduced blanking, or
1920x1200@60Hz w/reduced blanking
External connectors VHDCI (1)
Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x
120mm
167.64mm x 120mm
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 30
512MB nVidia NVS 420 Graphics, quad DP or DVI SFF
Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 85mm
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature Range -10°-55° C
Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH
Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft.
(1) Dongles supported: VHDCI-DP (J772M), VHDCI-DVI-D (F908M), DP-VGA (RN699)
Hard Drives1
3.5” 160GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 160,041,885,696
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 8 MB
Average Seek Time 8.5 ms
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 312,581,808
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W
DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 50
C to 600
C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290
C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400
C to 650
C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380
C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 31
3.5” 250GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 250,059,350,016
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 8 MB
Average Seek Time 8.5 ms
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 488,397,168
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W
DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 50
C to 600
C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290
C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400
C to 650
C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380
C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
3.5” 320GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 320,072,933,376
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 16 MB
Average Seek Time 8.5 ms
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 625,142,448
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 32
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W
DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 50
C to 600
C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290
C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400
C to 650
C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380
C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
3.5” 500GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 500,107,862,016
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 16 MB
Average Seek Time 8.5 ms
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 976,773,168
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W
DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 50
C to 600
C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290
C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 33
Temperature Range -400
C to 650
C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380
C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
3.5” 160GB SATA 10000 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 160,041,885,696
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.787 x 4 x 1 (includes sled)
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 16 MB
Average Seek Time 4.2 ms (average read)
Rotational Speed 10000 rpm
Logical Blocks 312,581,808
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W
DC Current 5V (.275A) and 12V (.585A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 50
C to 600
C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290
C
Altitude Range -1000 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400
C to 700
C
Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380
C
Altitude Range -1000 ft to 40000 ft
2.5” 160GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 160,144,285,696
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches)
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 34
Internal buffer size 16 MB
Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read)
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 312,581,808
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W
DC Current 5V (.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 50
C to 600
C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290
C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400
C to 650
C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380
C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
2.5” 250GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 250,059,350,016
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches)
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 16 MB
Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read)
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 488,397,168
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W
DC Current 5V (.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 50
C to 600
C
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 35
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290
C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400
C to 650
C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380
C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
2.5” 320GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 320,072,933,376
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches)
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 16 MB
Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read)
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 625,142,448
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W
DC Current 5V (.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 50
C to 600
C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290
C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400
C to 650
C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380
C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 36
2.5” 64GB SATA Solid State HDD
Capacity (bytes) 64,023,257,088
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 2.106 x 3.059 x 0.134
Interface type and Maximum speed SATA 3.0 Gbps
Internal buffer size 128 MB
Average Seek Time NA
Rotational Speed NA
Logical Blocks 125,045,424
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 0.125W, Active 0.135W
*Based on MobileMark 2007 scenario
DC Current 5.0V (0.35A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 0 to 70 C
Relative Humidity Range 10 to 90 %
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29 C
Altitude Range -200 to 5000 m
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -55 to 95 C
Relative Humidity Range 5 to 95 %
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38 C
Altitude Range -200 to 10,600 m
2.5” 128GB Solid State SATA HDD
Capacity (bytes) 128,035,676,160
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 2.106 x 3.059 x 0.134
Interface type and Maximum speed SATA 3.0 Gbps
Internal buffer size 128 MB
Average Seek Time N/A
Rotational Speed N/A
Logical Blocks 250,069,680
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 37
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 0.112W, Active 0.125W
* Based on MobileMark 2007 scenario
DC Current 3.3V (0.6A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 0 to 70 C
Relative Humidity Range 10 to 90 %
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29 C
Altitude Range -200 to 5000 m
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -55 to 95 C
Relative Humidity Range 0 C to 55 C / 90~98% RH
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38 C
Altitude Range -200 to 10,600 m
1
For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes and TB equals 1 trillion bytes; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating
environment and will be less.
Optical Drives
DVD +/- RW1
MT DT SFF
External Dimensions
inches/centimeters (With
Bezel – W x H x D)
149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/
190.5 (max)
149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/
190.5 (max)
128.0 mm (5.04)/
12.7mm (0.5 in)/
126.1mm (4.97in)
Weight (max)
pounds/kilograms 730g 730g 170g
Interface type and
speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s
Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard
Internal buffer size 2MB 2MB 1MB
Access Times (typical) (1/3 stroke) 130ms (1/3 stroke) 130ms (1/3 stroke) 150ms
Maximum Data Transfer
Rates
Writes 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD
Reads 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD
Power Source
DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V
DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA
(5V)
1200mA (12V)/ 900mA
(5V) 1000mA
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 38
DVD +/- RW1
MT DT SFF
Environmental
Operating Conditions
(Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature
Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH
Maximum Wet Bulb
Temperature 29C 29C 29C
Altitude Range -200 to 3048 -200 to 3048 -200 to 3048
Environmental
Non-Operating
Conditions
(Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature
Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C
Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH
Maximum Wet Bulb
Temperature 38C 38C 38C
Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m
1
Discs burned with this drive may not be compatible with some existing drives and players; using DVD+R media provides maximum
compatibility.
DVD-ROM MT DT SFF
External Dimensions
inches/centimeters (With
Bezel – W x H x D)
149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/
190.5 (max)
149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/
190.5 (max)
128.0 mm (5.04)/
12.7mm (0.5 in)/
126.1mm (4.97in)
Weight (max)
pounds/kilograms 730g 730g 165g
Interface type and
speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s
Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard
Internal buffer size 2MB 2MB 1MB
Access Times (typical) (1/3 stroke) 130ms (1/3 stroke) 130ms (1/3 stroke) 150ms
Maximum Data Transfer
Rates
Writes N/A N/A N/A
Reads 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD
Power Source
DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V
DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA
(5V)
1200mA (12V)/ 900mA
(5V) 800mA
Environmental
Operating Conditions
(Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature
Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH
Maximum Wet Bulb
Temperature 29C 29C 29C
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 39
DVD-ROM MT DT SFF
Altitude Range -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m
Environmental
Non-Operating
Conditions
(Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature
Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C
Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH
Maximum Wet Bulb
Temperature 38C 38C 38C
Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m
1
DVD-ROM drives may have write-capable hardware that has been disabled via firmware modifications.
DVD+/-RW with
Blu-Ray-ROM MT DT SFF
External Dimensions
inches/centimeters (With
Bezel – W x H x D)
149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/
190.5 (max)
149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/
190.5 (max)
128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm
(0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in)
Weight (max)
pounds/kilograms 830g 7830g 190g
Interface type and
speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s
Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard
Internal buffer size 4MB 4MB 2MB
Access Times (typical) (1/3 stroke) 160ms (1/3 stroke) 160ms (1/3 stroke) 180ms
Maximum Data Transfer
Rates
Writes 16x DVD/ 40x CD 16x DVD/ 40x CD 8x DVD / 24x CD
Reads 6x BD/16x DVD/40x CD 6x BD/16x DVD/40x CD 4x BD/8x DVD/ 24x CD
Power Source
DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V
DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA
(5V)
1200mA (12V)/ 900mA
(5V) 900mA
Environmental
Operating Conditions
(Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature
Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH
Maximum Wet Bulb
Temperature 29C 29C 29C
Altitude Range -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m
Environmental
Non-Operating
Conditions
(Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature
Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C
Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 40
DVD+/-RW with
Blu-Ray-ROM MT DT SFF
Maximum Wet Bulb
Temperature 38C 38C 38C
Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m
More details for optical drives can be found at:
http://support.dell.com/support/systemsinfo/documentation.aspx?c=us&l=en&s=gen&~cat=7
BIOS Defaults
Boot Fast Boot On
Numlock Key On
Wait For 'F1' If Error Enabled
POST Hotkeys Setup & Boot
Menu
Keyboard Error Report Enabled
1st Boot Device Diskette Drive
2nd Boot Device Hard Drive
3rd Boot Device Optical Drive
4th Boot Device Integrated NIC
Power AC Recovery Off
Auto Power On Off
Remote Wake Up On
Low Power Mode On
Suspend Mode S3 (STR)
Security Password Lock Lock
Chassis Intrusion On
No Execute On
TPM Security Off
CPU Information C1E Function Enable
Cool & Quiet Enabled
Virtualization Enabled
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 41
Onboard Devices GFX/Display Port X16
Integrated NIC On
Integrated Audio On
Video Memory Size Auto
Serial Port #1 3F8/IRQ4
LPT Port Mode PS/2
LPT Port Address 378h
USB Controller On
Front Dual USB On
Rear Dual USB On
Rear Quad USB On
SATA Configuration SATA Operation AHCI
HDD Acoustic Mode Bypass
SATA-0 Not Detected
SATA-1 Not Detected
SATA-2 Not Detected
SATA-3 Not Detected
External SATA Not Detected
System Management DASH/ASF
Configuration Disabled
Text Console
Redirection Disabled
Computrace
Configuration Computrace Operation Deactivate
Chassis Enclosure & Ventilation Requirements
Enclosure Ventilation If your enclosure has doors, they need to be of a type that allows at least 30% airflow through
the enclosure (front and back).
Enclosure Minimum Clearance Leave a 10.2 cm (4 in.) minimum clearance on all vented sides of the computer to permit the airflow
required for proper ventilation.
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 42
Recommended Enclosure Do not install your computer in an enclosure that does not allow airflow. This restricts the airflow
and impacts your computer’s performance, possibly causing it to overheat.
Open Desk Minimum Clearance If your computer is installed in a corner, on a desk, or under a desk, leave at least 5.1 cm (2 in.)
clearance from the back of the computer to the wall to permit the airflow required for proper ventilation.
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 43
Regulatory Compliance and Environmental
Product related conformity assessment and regulatory authorizations including Product Safety, Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC), Ergonomics, Communication Devices relevant to this product, along with additional product related conformity
assessment, and information encompassing Environmental, Energy Consumption, Noise Emissions, Product Materials
Information, Packaging, Batteries, and Recycling relevant to this product may be viewed in the Regulatory and Environmental
Datasheet for this product is located at:
http://www.dell.com/content/topics/global.aspx/about_dell/values/regulatory_compliance/dec_conform?c=us&l=en&s=corp&~c
k=anavml
Details of Dell's environmental stewardship program to conserve product energy consumption, reduce or eliminate materials for
disposal, prolong product life span and provide effective and convenient equipment recovery solutions may be viewed at
www.dell.com/earth by clicking the Design for Environment link on the webpage.
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 44
Acoustic Noise Emission Information
Optiplex 580 MT
Component Typical Configuration
CPU Phenom II X2 B24 65W
Memory 1 GB DDRIII 1333 MHz
HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA
RMSD DVD ROM
Graphics Adapter AMD Radeon HD3470 256MB
The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell Optiplex 580 MT is as follows1
:
(all values LWAd expressed in bels2
; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts; all values LpA expressed in decibels3
, re 2x10-5 Pa)
Sound Power
Sound Pressure at Operator Position
1
All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was
stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured
using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 2
Declared Sound Power rounded to the nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2
3 Declared Sound Pressure rounded to the nearest whole decibel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.4
Operating Mode
Typical Configuration
Declared Sound Power (LWAd)
Idle 3.6
HDD Operating 3.6
ODD Operating 5.1
90% CPU 3.6
Operating Mode
Typical Configuration
Sound Pressure at Operator
Position (LpA)
Desktop Desk side
Idle 27.0 21.0
HDD Operating 27.1 21.2
ODD Operating 42.4 36.8
90% CPU 26.7 21.2
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 45
Sound Pressure at Bystander Position
Optiplex 580 DT
Component Typical Configuration
CPU Athlon II X2 B22 65W
Memory 1 GB DDRIII 1333 MHz
HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA
RMSD DVD ROM
Graphics Adapter AMD Radeon HD3470 256MB
The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell Optiplex 580 DT is as follows3
:
(all values LWAd expressed in bels4
; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts; all values LpA expressed in decibels3
, re 2x10-5 Pa)
Sound Power
3
All tests are conducted according to IS 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was
stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured
using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 4
Declared Sound Power rounded to the nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2
3 Declared Sound Pressure rounded to the nearest whole decibel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.4
Operating Mode
Typical Configuration
Sound Pressure at
Bystander Position (LpA)
Desktop Desk side
Idle 22.0 19.7
HDD Operating 22.0 20.0
ODD Operating 37.4 35.8
90% CPU 21.7 19.7
Operating Mode
Typical Configuration
Declared Sound Power (LWAd)
Idle 3.8
HDD Operating 3.8
ODD Operating 5.2
90% CPU 3.8
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 46
Sound Pressure at Operator Position
Sound Pressure at Bystander Position
Optiplex 580 SFF
Component Typical Configuration
CPU Athlon II X2 B22 65W
Memory 1 GB DDRIII 1333 MHz
HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA
RMSD Slim DVD +/-RW
Graphics Adapter AMD Radeon HD3470 256MB
The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell Optiplex 580 SSF is as follows5
:
(all values LWAd expressed in bels6
; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts; all values LpA expressed in decibels3
, re 2x10-5 Pa)
5
All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was
stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured
using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 6
Declared Sound Power rounded to the nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2
3 Declared Sound Pressure rounded to the nearest whole decibel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.4
Operating Mode
Typical Configuration
Sound Pressure at Operator
Position (LpA)
Desktop Desk side
Idle 27.9 22.4
HDD Operating 28.3 21.6
ODD Operating 42.0 37.0
90% CPU 28.5 21.8
Operating Mode
Typical Configuration
Sound Pressure at
Bystander Position (LpA)
Desktop Desk side
Idle 23.8 21.7
HDD Operating 24.0 20.7
ODD Operating 36.7 34.0
90% CPU 23.9 20.7
OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 47
Sound Power
Sound Pressure at Operator Position
Sound Pressure at Bystander Position
Operating Mode
Typical Configuration
Declared Sound Power (LWAd)
Idle 3.8
HDD Operating 3.7
ODD Operating 4.9
90% CPU 4.0
Operating Mode
Typical Configuration
Sound Pressure at Operator
Position (LpA)
Idle 28.0
HDD Operating 28.1
ODD Operating 39.4
90% CPU 28.6
Operating Mode
Typical Configuration
Sound Pressure at
Bystander Position (LpA)
Idle 23.7
HDD Operating 24.0
ODD Operating 33.8
90% CPU 24.1
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
Dell
DELLTM
POWEREDGETM T710
TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK
INSIDE THE POWEREDGE T710
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
Dell
Table of Contents
1 Product Comparison .........................................................................................................................1
1.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................1
2 New Technologies.............................................................................................................................2
2.1 Overview/Description ................................................................................................................2
2.2 Detailed Information ..................................................................................................................2
2.2.1 Intel Xeon 5500 Series Processors ...................................................................................2
2.2.2 Intel 5520 Chipset .............................................................................................................3
2.2.3 PCIe Generation 2.............................................................................................................3
2.2.4 DDR3 Memory Technology ...............................................................................................3
2.2.5 16-Drive Active Backplane ................................................................................................3
2.2.6 Next Generation Broadcom 5709C LOMs.........................................................................4
2.2.7 Next generation Dell Embedded Server Management......................................................4
3 System Overview ..............................................................................................................................4
3.1 Overview/Description ................................................................................................................4
3.2 T710 Product Features Summary .............................................................................................5
4 Mechanical........................................................................................................................................6
4.1 Chassis Description ..................................................................................................................6
4.2 Dimensions and Weight ............................................................................................................6
4.3 Front Panel View and Features.................................................................................................7
4.4 Back Panel View and Features .................................................................................................7
4.5 Power Supply Indicators ...........................................................................................................8
4.6 Side Views and Features ..........................................................................................................8
4.7 Internal Chassis Views..............................................................................................................9
4.8 Rails and Cable Management...................................................................................................9
4.9 Rack View ...............................................................................................................................10
4.10 Fans ........................................................................................................................................10
4.11 Control Panel/LCD ..................................................................................................................11
4.11.1 Cover Latch.....................................................................................................................12
4.11.2 Bezel ...............................................................................................................................12
4.11.3 Hard Drive .......................................................................................................................13
4.11.4 Trusted Platform Management (TPM).............................................................................13
4.11.5 Power-Off Security ..........................................................................................................13
4.11.6 Intrusion Alert ..................................................................................................................13
4.11.7 Secure Mode...................................................................................................................13
4.12 Persistent Storage...................................................................................................................14
4.12.1 Managed Persistent Storage...........................................................................................14
4.12.2 SD Module (Unmanaged Internal Persistent Storage)....................................................15
4.13 USB Key (Unmanaged Internal Persistent Storage)...............................................................16
4.14 Battery.....................................................................................................................................16
4.15 Field Replaceable Units (FRU) ...............................................................................................16
5 Electrical..........................................................................................................................................16
5.1 Clock Circuitry .........................................................................................................................16
5.2 Volatility...................................................................................................................................16
6 Power, Thermal, and Acoustic ........................................................................................................16
6.1 Power Supplies .......................................................................................................................16
6.2 Power Supply Specifications...................................................................................................17
6.3 Power Efficiency......................................................................................................................18
6.4 Environmental Specifications ..................................................................................................19
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
Dell
6.6 Maximum Input Amps .............................................................................................................20
6.7 EnergySmart Enablement .......................................................................................................20
6.8 Energy Star Compliance .........................................................................................................20
6.9 Acoustics.................................................................................................................................20
7 Block Diagram.................................................................................................................................22
8 Processors ......................................................................................................................................22
8.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................22
8.2 Features ..................................................................................................................................23
8.3 Supported Processors.............................................................................................................23
8.4 Processor Configurations........................................................................................................24
8.5 Additional Processor Information ............................................................................................24
9 Memory ...........................................................................................................................................24
9.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................24
9.2 DIMMs Supported ...................................................................................................................24
9.3 Memory Population Scenarios ................................................................................................24
9.4 Slots/Risers .............................................................................................................................25
9.5 Speed/Memory Features.........................................................................................................25
9.6 Memory Population .................................................................................................................26
9.7 Memory Speed Limitations......................................................................................................26
9.8 Mirroring ..................................................................................................................................27
10 Chipset............................................................................................................................................27
10.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................27
10.2 Intel 5500 Chipset Dual I/O Hub (IOH)....................................................................................27
10.3 Intel Quickpath Architecture ....................................................................................................28
10.4 PCI Express Generation 2 ......................................................................................................28
10.5 Intel Direct Media Interface (DMI) ...........................................................................................28
10.6 Super I/O Controller ................................................................................................................29
11 BIOS................................................................................................................................................29
11.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................29
11.2 Supported ACPI States ...........................................................................................................29
12 Embedded NICs/LAN on Motherboard (LOM) ................................................................................29
12.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................29
13 I/O Slots ..........................................................................................................................................30
13.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................30
13.2 X16 Express Card Specifications............................................................................................30
13.3 Available PCIe Cards ..............................................................................................................31
13.4 Boot Order...............................................................................................................................32
14 Storage............................................................................................................................................32
14.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................32
14.2 3.5” X8 HDD Backplane ..........................................................................................................33
14.3 2.5” X16 HDD Backplane ........................................................................................................33
14.4 Storage Card Support Matrix ..................................................................................................33
14.5 Available Drives ......................................................................................................................34
14.6 RAID Configurations ...............................................................................................................35
14.7 Internal Storage Controllers ....................................................................................................42
14.8 LED Indicators.........................................................................................................................42
14.9 Optical Drives..........................................................................................................................42
14.10 Tape Drives.............................................................................................................................42
15 Video...............................................................................................................................................42
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
Dell
15.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................42
16 Audio...............................................................................................................................................43
17 Rack Information.............................................................................................................................43
17.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................43
17.2 Cable Management Arm (CMA)..............................................................................................43
17.3 Rack Configuration..................................................................................................................43
17.4 Rails ........................................................................................................................................44
18 Operating Systems..........................................................................................................................45
18.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................45
18.2 Operating Systems Supported ................................................................................................45
19 Virtualization....................................................................................................................................46
19.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................46
19.2 Virtualization Options Supported.............................................................................................46
20 Systems Management ....................................................................................................................47
20.1 Overview/Description ..............................................................................................................47
20.2 Server Management................................................................................................................47
20.3 Embedded Server Management .............................................................................................48
20.4 Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator..............................................................48
20.5 Optional iDRAC Express.........................................................................................................49
20.6 iDRAC6 Enterprise..................................................................................................................49
21 Peripherals......................................................................................................................................51
21.1 USB peripherals ......................................................................................................................51
21.2 External Storage .....................................................................................................................51
22 Packaging Options..........................................................................................................................51
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
1
DELL
1 Product Comparison
1.1 Overview
The PowerEdge T710 is the flagship of the Dell tower servers positioned above the PowerEdge T610
and replacing the PowerEdge 2900III. Table 1 shows a comparison between these versions.
Table 1. Comparison of T710 to PE2900-III and T610
Feature/Spec PE2900-III (predecessor) T710 T610
Processor
Quad-Core Intel® Xeon®
Processor 5400 Series,
Intel Xeon 5200 Series
Intel Xeon 5500 Series Intel Xeon 5500 Series
Front Side Bus 1066/1333 MHz QPI 4.8 – 6.4 GT/s QPI 4.8 – 6.4 GT/s
# Processors 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2
# Cores 2 or 4 per proc 2 or 4 per proc 2 or 4 per proc
L2/L3 Cache 2 X 3MB or 2 X 6MB
shared L2
256K L2 per core/4MB or
8MB shared L3
256K L2 per core/4MB or
8MB shared L3
Chipset Intel 5000X chipset Intel 5520 chipset Intel 5520 chipset
DIMMs 12 18 12
Min/Max RAM 1GB/48GB 1GB/144GB 1GB/96GB
HD Bays 8 or 10 X 3.5” 8 X 3.5” or 16 X 2.5” 8 X 3.5” or 2.5”
HD Types SAS, SATA SSD, SAS, SATA SSD, SAS, SATA
Ext Drive Bay(s) 2 X HH Perhiperal Bays 2 X HH Perhiperal Bays 2 X HH Perhiperal Bays
Int. HD Controller None None None
Opt. HD Controller Perc 5/i, Perc 6/i, SAS
6/iR, SAS 5/i Perc 6/i, SAS 6/iR Perc 6/i, SAS 6/iR
Availability
Hot Swap HDD, Hot Swap
Redundant Fans, Hot
Swap Redundant PS
Hot Swap HDD, Hot Swap
Redundant Fans, Hot
Swap Redundant PS
Hot Swap HDD, Optional
Hot Swap Redundant
Fans, Hot Swap
Redundant PS
Server Mgt. BMC, Optional DRAC5
iDRAC6 Express, Optional
iDRAC6 Enterprise,
Optional VFlash
iDRAC6 Express, Optional
iDRAC6 Enterprise,
Optional VFlash
I/O Slots 6 + Storage Controller
Slot
6 + Storage Controller
Slot
5 + Storage Controller
Slot
RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10 See RAID Configurations 0, 1, 5, 6, 10
NIC/LOM 2 X TOE/iSCSI 4 X TOE/iSCSI 2 X TOE/iSCSI
USB 2 Front, 4 Rear, 1 Internal 2 Front, 6 Rear, 1 Internal 2 Front, 6 Rear, 1 Internal
Power Supplies 930 W Redundant 1100 W Redundant 598 W Redundant
Fans Hot plug Redundant Hot plug Redundant Cabled, Optional Hot plug
Redundant
Chassis 5U Rackable Tower 5U Rackable Tower 5U Rackable Tower
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
2
DELL
Feature/Spec PE2900-III (predecessor) T710 T610
Unmanaged Internal
Storage Internal USB key SD card for virtualization
solutions
SD card for virtualization
solutions
2 New Technologies
2.1 Overview/Description
The T710 utilizes the following new technologies common to other Dell 11G servers:
• Intel Xeon 5520 Series processors
o New architecture with memory controller within each processor
o Dual and quad core
o Intel turbo mode allows increased processor speed
o Hyperthreading technology
o Quick Path Interconnect
• Intel 5520 chipset
o Dual IOH for maximum I/O capability
• PCIe Generation 2
• DDR3 memory technology
• 16-drive active backplane with expander
• Next generation Broadcom 5709C LOMs
• Next generation Dell embedded server management
o iDRAC express with Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator
o Optional iDRAC enterprise
o Optional v-flash
2.2 Detailed Information
2.2.1 Intel Xeon 5500 Series Processors
Intel Xeon 5500 series processors are the latest generation Intel processors for two-socket servers.
They are based on a new 45nm die technology and utilize integrated memory controllers on the
processor itself rather than a separate memory controller. QuickPath interconnect technology, the
speed of which varies with the processor model, replaces the familiar front-side-bus.
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
3
DELL
Figure 1. Intel Xeon 5500 Series Processors
• Intel Hyper-Threading Technology: enables more software threads to be running simultaneously
• Intel Intelligent Power Technologies: scales server power consumption to performance needs
• Intel Turbo Boost Technology: boosts frequency for active cores by up to 400 MHz for during
peak demand periods
See Section 8 “Processors” for more detail.
2.2.2 Intel 5520 Chipset
The Intel 5520 chipset is the companion to the new Intel Xeon 5500 series processor. It supports the
QuickPath interconnect technology and provides PCI Express Gen 2 capability for I/O. The T710
system is designed around dual Intel 5520 chipset I/O HUBs 36-D (IOH). See Section 27 “Chipset”.
2.2.3 PCIe Generation 2
PCIe Gen 2 provides the next generation of I/O bandwidth to the system. PCIe Gen2 doubles the
signaling bit rate of each lane from 2.5 Gb/s to 5 Gb/s.
2.2.4 DDR3 Memory Technology
Intel Xeon 5500 series processors support new DDR3 memory technology that replaces fully-buffered
DIMMs in the new Intel architecture. Native DDR3 memory capability improves memory access speed,
lowers latency, and allows more memory capacity (up to 18 DIMMs per two-socket platform). See
Section 9 “Memory”.
2.2.5 16-Drive Active Backplane
T710 includes an optional 16-drive active backplane that allows one controller to address all 16 drives.
See Section 14.3 “2.5” X16 HDD BACKPLANE”.
PCI Express
Gen 2
Intel Xeon
5500
Intel Xeon
5500
QPI
QPI up to 25.6 GB/sec bandwidth per link
DDR3 Memory
Up to 18 slots
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
4
DELL
2.2.6 Next Generation Broadcom 5709C LOMs
The Broadcom 5709C LOMs are the latest 1GBe offering. Two dual-port devices provide a total of four
LOM ports for the T710. They are TOE enabled, with iSCSI offload available as an option. See Section
12 “Embedded NICs/LAN on Motherboard (LOM)”.
2.2.7 Next generation Dell Embedded Server Management
The chart below shows the components of the new embedded server management capability. As a
700-series enterprise product, T710 comes standard with BMC and iDRAC Express. The iDRAC
Express hosts the Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator. Optional iDRAC Enterprise
provides out-of-band management capabilities and enables the optional V-Flash.
See Section 20.2 “Embedded Server Management”.
Figure 2. Embedded Server Management Capability
3 System Overview
3.1 Overview/Description
• Customer driven product priorities
o Best performance and availability in a two-socket tower
o Large Storage footprint, best I/O capability
• Product Positioning
o Industry leading performance and availability in a two-socket tower
o In direct competition with the HP ML370, IBM x3500
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
5
DELL
• Target Market
o Corporate workgroups in remote sites running critical apps requiring 24 x 7 uptime
o Supports applications across Data Access and Data Processing
o Virtualization
o Retail space, Digital signage, TV walls
• Key Features
o Dual IOH, up to 16 drives in one volume, 18 DIMMS, 4x LOMs, all HA in base, 4 x 25 W
PCI
3.2 T710 Product Features Summary
Table 2. PowerEdge T710 Features and Descriptions
Feature Details
Processor Intel Xeon 5500 Series,1,86GHz – 2.93GHz, 60W, 80W, 95W, See Section 8.3
“Supported Processors”.
Front Side Bus Intel Quick Path Interconnect (QPI) 4.8 – 6.4 GT/s
# Processors 1 or 2
# Cores 2 or 4
L2/L3 Cache 256 K per core L2, 4MB – 8MB shared L3
Chipset Intel 5520 chipset
DIMMs/Speed 1, 2, 4, 8 GB UDIMM and RDIMM @ 1066 and 1333 MHz
Certain memory configurations clock down to 800 MHz
Min/Max RAM 1GB/144 GB
HD Bays 8 X 3.5” or 16 X 2.5”, 3Gb SAS
HD Types SSD, SAS, SATA are supported
Ext Drive Bay(s) Two full height peripheral bays
Int. HD Controller None
Opt. HD Controller Perc 6/i or SAS 6/iR in dedicated storage slot
BIOS Dell BIOS core 11G implementation. See Section 11 “BIOS”.
Video Integrated Matrox G200 with iDRAC6
Availability Hot swap HDD, hot swap redundant power supplies, hot swap redundant fans
Server Mgt. iDRAC6 Express, Optional iDRAC6 Enterprise, Optional VFlash
I/O Slots 6 PCIe Gen 2 expansion slots + 1 dedicated controller slot
RAID 0, 1, 5, 10, 50, 60. See Section 14.6 “RAID Configurations”.
NIC/LOM 2 X Broadcom 5709 1GBe LOMs (4 ports total). TOE enabled, Optional iSCSI
offload
USB Two front, six rear, one internal
Power Supplies Optional redundant 1100 W. Climate Saver Gold
Front Panel Active LCD, rotates 90 degrees for rack mounting
System ID System ID for PR T710:: 0x029B
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
6
DELL
Feature Details
Fans 4 X hot swap redundant
Chassis 5U rackable tower
4 Mechanical
4.1 Chassis Description
The T710 system uses a tower or rack mount 5U chassis. It is classified by Dell as a rackable tower,
meaning it is optimized for tower operation
4.2 Dimensions and Weight
Figure 3. T710 Dimensions
Table 3. Detailed Dimensions
Xa Xb Ya Yb Yc
Za
with
bezel
Za
without
bezel
Zb Zc
217.9 mm 304.4 mm
431.3
mm
466.3
mm
471.3
mm
37 mm 35 mm
659.6
mm
694.8
mm
8.6 in 12.0 in 17.0 in 18.4 in 18.6 in 1.5 in 1.4 in 26.0 in 27.4 in
Weight (maximum configuration) 35.3 kg (78 lb)
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
7
DELL
4.3 Front Panel View and Features
Figure 4. Front Panel View and Features
4.4 Back Panel View and Features
Figure 5. Back Panel View and Features
PCIe Slots
iDRAC Enterprise
USB
LOMs
Control Panel
and LCD
Front
USB (2)
Peripheral
Bays, 2HH
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
8
DELL
4.5 Power Supply Indicators
T710 power supplies have embedded cooling fans and one bi-colored status LED.
Status States:
• Off – LED is dark
• AC source applied – solid green LED
• Fault of any kind – solid amber LED
• DC enable applied – solid green LED (no change from AC applied)
4.6 Side Views and Features
Figure 6. Side Views and Features
Figure 7. Fold-out Feet Add Additional Stability
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
9
DELL
4.7 Internal Chassis Views
Figure 8. Internal Chassis Overview
Figure 9. Internal Chassis Detailed View
4.8 Rails and Cable Management
The T710 Rack Kit has rack installation components, such as rails. The rack installation components
consist of sliding rack mount rails with the latest generation Cable Management Arm (CMA). T710
features slam latches to offer easier removal from the rack.
Processors
Backplane
Backplane Cables
DIMM Slots
Controller
Slot PCIe Slots
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
10
DELL
Figure 10. New Cable Management Arm
• All steel construction – eliminates creep/sag
• More open area for air flow
When the system is installed in a rack, please observe the following guidelines:
• Nothing should be located within 12” of the front of the unit that could restrict the air flow into the
system.
• Nothing should be mounted or placed behind the chassis that would restrict airflow from exiting
the system. Only Dell approved CMAs can be placed behind the chassis. All other objects
should be located at least 24” away from the rear of the chassis.
• When two systems are placed back-to-back, the separation between the units should be at least
24” if the exit airflow is equivalent for the two chassis. This allows exit air to escape without
creating an extreme back pressure at the rear of one of the chassis.
4.9 Rack View
Figure 11. T710 Rack View
For more rack, rail, and CMA information see Section 17 “Rack Information”.
4.10 Fans
Four 92mm single-rotor hot-pluggable fans are mounted in the rear of the cooling shroud. Each fan has
a single-wire harness that plugs into the planar fan connectors (FAN1 through FAN4).
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
11
DELL
Figure 12. Fans
The Embedded Server Management logic in the system controls and monitors the speed of the fans. A
fan speed fault or over-temperature condition results in a notification by ESM.
T710 Power Supply Units have integrated fans. The system requires a blank module in place of the
empty power supply slot.
System fan speed is pulse-width modulated. Optional redundant cooling is supported with only one
rotor failing at a time (system may throttle when a rotor fails).
Note
Do not place any physical obstructions in the front (at least 12”) or rear (at least 24”) of the T710
chassis. This may cause a decrease in airflow, resulting in an over-temperature condition.
Placement of non-redundant fans must be at the rearmost section of the shroud. Do not operate the
system without the cooling shroud installed.
4.11 Control Panel/LCD
The system control panel is located on the front of the system chassis to provide user access to
buttons, display, and I/O interfaces.
Figure 13. Control Panel/LCD View
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
12
DELL
Features of the system control panel include:
• 128x20 pixel LCD panel with controls
o Two navigation buttons
o One select button
o One system ID button
• ACPI-compliant power button with an integrated green power LED
• Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI) button (recessed)
• Ambient temperature sensor
• LCD panel can rotate 90 degrees for optional rack mounting of the server
• Two external USB 2.0 connectors
The LCD panel is a graphics display controlled by the iDRAC, unlike the 9G panel that had its own
CPLD. Error codes can be sent to the display by either ESM or BIOS.
BIOS has the ability to enter a “Secure Mode” through setup, which locks the power and NMI buttons.
When in this mode, pressing either button has no effect and does not mask other sources of NMI and
power control.
4.11.1 Cover Latch
A tool-less latch is integrated in the side cover to secure it to the tower chassis. It is lockable.
Figure 14. Cover Latch
4.11.2 Bezel
A metal bezel is mounted to the chassis front to provide the Dell ID. A lock on the bezel prevents unauthorized
access to system HDD(s). System status (via the LCD) is viewable when the bezel is
installed.
The bezel is standard for the T710 system.
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
13
DELL
Figure 15. T710 Bezel
4.11.3 Hard Drive
The front bezel of the system contains a lock. A locked bezel secures the system hard drives.
4.11.4 Trusted Platform Management (TPM)
The TPM generates/stores keys, protects/authenticates passwords, and creates/stores digital
certificates. TPM can also enable the BitLocker™ hard drive encryption feature in Windows Server
2008.
TPM is enabled through a BIOS option and uses HMAC-SHA1-160 for binding. There are different
planar PWA part numbers to accommodate the different TPM solutions. The Rest of World (ROW)
version has the TPM soldered onto the planar. The other version of the planar has a connector for a
plug-in module (Factory Install Only).
China TPM (TCM) is a post-RTS feature. Until China TCM is available, T710 units shipped to
customers in China contain a no TPM motherboard.
4.11.5 Power-Off Security
BIOS has the ability to disable the power button function.
4.11.6 Intrusion Alert
A switch mounted on the cooling shroud detects chassis intrusion. When the cover is opened, the
switch circuit closes to indicate intrusion to ESM. When enabled, the software provides notification that
the cover has been opened.
4.11.7 Secure Mode
BIOS has the ability to enter a secure boot mode via Setup. This mode includes the option to lock out
the power and NMI switches on the control panel or set up a system password.
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
14
DELL
4.12 Persistent Storage
T710 offers two types of persistent storage: managed (iDRAC6 Express/iDRAC6 Enterprise) and
unmanaged internal persistent storage.
One of the unmanaged ports is for an optional SD card and the other is for a USB key.
Figure 16. Persistent Storage Block Diagram
4.12.1 Managed Persistent Storage
iDRAC6 Express is a managed persistent storage space for server provisioning data. The base
iDRAC6 express consists of 1 GB flash, and the optional Vflash is an external SD card on the optional
iDRAC6 Enterprise. The optional vflash offers the hot-plug portability and increased storage capacity
benefits of SD while managed by the system.
iDRAC6 is currently configured to support the following applications:
• Unified Server Configurator Browser and System Services Module (SSM) (25 MB): the UEFI
browser provides a consistent graphical user interface for bare metal deployment and is ideal
for one-to-one deployment. The SSM supports automatic one-to-N deployment.
• Service Diagnostics (15 MB): formerly on the hard drive as the Utility Partition, this is a bootable
FAT16 partition for Service Diagnostics
• Deployment OS Embedded Linux (100 MB): storage space to hold Embedded Linux
• Online Diagnostics (35 MB): non-bootable FAT32 partition for Online Diagnostics.
• Deployment OS WinPE (200 MB): storage space to hold Windows Pre-installation Environment
• Driver Store (150 MB): holds all files required for OS deployment.
• iDRAC firmware (120 MB): holds the two most recent versions of iDRAC firmware
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
15
DELL
• Firmware Images (160 MB): holds the two most recent versions of BIOS, RAID, LOM, power
supplies and hard drive firmware. This partition also holds the BIOS and option ROM
configuration data.
• Life Cycle Log (2 MB): stores initial factory configuration as well as all detectable hardware and
firmware changes to the server since its deployment. The Life Cycle Log is stored on the BMC
SPI flash.
Approximately 20 percent of the flash space is reserved for wear leveling on the NAND flash. Wear
leveling extends the life of the NAND flash by balancing the use cycles on the flash’s blocks.
4.12.2 SD Module (Unmanaged Internal Persistent Storage)
The optional Internal SD module is a dedicated port for an SD flash card for embedded Hypervisor for
virtualization. The SD flash card contains a bootable OS image for virtualized platforms.
Figure 17. T710 SD Module
Figure 18. SD Diagram
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
16
DELL
4.13 USB Key (Unmanaged Internal Persistent Storage)
T710 has one internal USB port on the motherboard for any USB key based security or license
application.
Some possible applications of the USB key:
• User custom boot and pre-boot OS for ease of deployment or diskless environments
• USB license keys for software applications like eToken™ or Sentinel Hardware Keys
• Storage of custom logs or scratch pad for portable user defined information (not hot-pluggable)
4.14 Battery
A replaceable coin cell CR2032 3V battery mounted on the planar provides backup power for the RealTime
Clock and CMOS RAM on the ICH. The battery is located under the fan assembly at the rear of
the motherboard, near the rear USB ports.
4.15 Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
Hot swap HDD and SSD, fans, and power supplies are the primary field replaceable units on T710.
The planar contains a serial EEPROM to store FRU information including Dell part number, part
revision level, and serial number. The Advanced Management Enablement Adapter (AMEA) contains a
FRU EEPROM. The backplane SEP and the power supply microcontroller are also used to store FRU
data.
5 Electrical
5.1 Clock Circuitry
System clock circuitry is based on Intel CK410B+ synthesizer and DB1200/DB900 driver specification.
A clock synthesizer device is a single chip solution. The CK410B+ synthesizes and distributes a
multitude of clock outputs at various frequencies, timings and drive levels using a single 14.318 MHz
crystal.
• PCI Express Gen2 support
• Host clock support (133 MHz)
• Spread spectrum support
• 33 MHz, 48 MHz, 100 MHz clock support
• 14.318 MHz clock support
5.2 Volatility
See your Dell Representative for the current T710 Statement of Volatility.
6 Power, Thermal, and Acoustic
6.1 Power Supplies
The power supply subsystem consists of one or two AC-DC power supplies (1+1 redundant
configuration) connected to the planar through the PDB. The power supply only provides +12V and
+12Vaux. There are several voltage regulators in the system to supply different voltage levels needed
by different logic devices.
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
17
DELL
6.2 Power Supply Specifications
The T710 power supply is rated at 1100 W. It operates on input voltages ranging from 90 – 264 V, autoswitching
to the sensed line level.
• EMC classification is Light Industry
• FCC classification is Class A
Table 4. Power Supply Specifications
Minimum Typical Maximum
Vin (Voltage first range) 90 V 115/230 264 V
Vin (frequency) 47 Hz 50/60 Hz 63 Hz
Iin (90 VAC) – – 13.5 A
Iin(100 VAC) – – 12.0 A
Iin (180 VAC) – – 7.0 A
Initial In-rush Current – – 55 A
Secondary In-rush Current – – 35 A
The base redundant system consists of two hot-plug 1100 W power supplies in a 1+1 configuration.
The power supplies connect indirectly to the planar via the Power Distribution Board (PDB). Two power
cables connect between the PDB and the backplane. Another multi-drop cable also connects the PDB
to the optical and/or tape drives. The PS bay sheet metal prevents unsupported power supplies from
being installed in a T710 system.
T710 power supplies have embedded cooling fans and one bi-colored status LED.
Status States:
• Off – No LED
• AC source applied – Solid Green LED
• Fault of any kind – Solid Amber LED
• DC enable applied – Solid Green LED (no change from AC applied)
Starting with 11G, the power supplies no longer have a FRU EEPROM; FRU data is now stored in the
memory of the PSU Microcontroller. Additionally, the PSU Firmware can now be updated by iDRAC
over the PMBus. Power is soft-switched, allowing power cycling via a switch on the front of the system
enclosure or via software control (through server management functions). The power system is
compatible with industry standards, such as ACPI and the Microsoft Windows Server H/W Design
Guide.
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
18
DELL
Figure 19. T710 Power Supply
If using only one power supply, the single PSU should be installed in the PS1 bay and a PSU Close Out
(metal cover) is installed in the PS2 bay. The use of the PS1 bay for the single PSU configuration is
done for consistency only. Nothing prevents the use of the PS2 bay in a single PSU configuration.
6.3 Power Efficiency
Table 5. T710 Power Supply Efficiency
Efficiency at 115 V Input Voltage
20% Loading 87%
50% Loading 90%
100% Loading 87%
Efficiency at 230 V Input Voltage
10% Loading 80%
20% Loading 88%
50% Loading 92%
100% Loading 88%
One of the main features of the latest family of Dell servers is enhanced power efficiency. T710
achieves higher power efficiency by implementing the following features:
• User-selectable power cap (subsystems will throttle to maintain the specified power cap)
• Improved power budgeting
• Larger heat sinks for processors and IOH
• Accurate inlet temperature
• PSU/VR efficiency improvements
• Switching regulators instead of linear regulators
• Closed loop thermal throttling
• Increased rear venting/3D venting
• PWM fans with an increased number of fan zones and configuration-dependent fan speeds
• Use of DDR3 memory (lower voltage, UDIMM support)
• CPU VR dynamic phase shedding
• Memory VR static phase shedding
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
19
DELL
• Random time interval for system start
• Allows an entire rack to power on without exceeding the available power
• BIOS Power/Performance options page
• BIOS-based CPU P-state manager (power management in a virtualized environment)
• Ability to slow down or power down memory
• Ability to disable a CPU core
• Ability to turn off items not being used (i.e. USB ports, LOMs, PCIe slots, etc.)
• Option to run PCIe at Gen1 speeds instead of Gen2 (BIOS setup option)
6.4 Environmental Specifications
Table 6. Environmental Specifications
Temperature
Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) with a maximum temperature gradation
of 10°C per hour
Note: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating
temperature is de-rated 1°F/550 ft.
Storage -40° to 65°C (-40° to 149°F) with a maximum temperature
gradation of 20°C per hour
Relative Humidity
Operating 20% to 80% (non-condensing) with a maximum humidity
gradation of 10% per hour
Storage 5% to 95% (non-condensing) with a maximum humidity gradation
of 10% per hour
Maximum Vibration
Operating 0.26 Grms at 5 – 350 Hz in operational orientations
Storage 1.54 Grms at 10 – 250 Hz in all orientations
Maximum Shock
Operating Half-sine shock in all operational orientations of 31 G ± 5% with a
pulse duration of 2.6 ms ± 10%
Storage Half-sine shock on all six sides of 71 G ± 5% with a pulse
duration of 2 ms ± 10%
Square wave shock on all six sides of 27 G with velocity change
@ 235 in/sec or greater
Altitude
Operating -16 to 3048 m (-50 to 10,000 ft)
Note: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating
temperature is de-rated 1°F/550 ft.
Storage -16 to 10,600 m (-50 to 35,000 ft)
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
20
DELL
6.6 Maximum Input Amps
The T710 system exhibits the following maximum current draw at the stated voltages:
• 13.7A maximum at 90 VAC
• 12.0A maximum at 100 VAC
• 10.4A maximum at 115 VAC
• 5.75A maximum at 208 VAC
• 5.45A maximum at 220 VAC
• 5.2A maximum at 230 VAC
6.7 EnergySmart Enablement
T710 does not support a separate EnergySmart configuration as was offered with certain 10 G servers.
A 750 W EnergySmart power supply option is under investigation, but will not be available at RTS.
Certain other EnergySmart options may be made available in the future.
6.8 Energy Star Compliance
The final Energy Star specification for servers was issued in mid-May, 2009. Work is underway to
determine which configurations of T710 will be Energy Star compliant. This section will be updated
accordingly.
6.9 Acoustics
The acoustical design of the PowerEdge T710 reflects:
• Adherence to Dell’s high sound quality standards. Sound quality is different from sound power
level and sound pressure level in that it describes how humans respond to annoyances in
sound, like whistles, hums, etc. One of the sound quality metrics in the Dell specification is
prominence ratio of a tone, and this is listed in the table below.
• Office environment acoustics. Compare the values for LpA in Table 7 to see that they are lower
than ambient noise levels of typical office environments.
• Hardware configurations affect system noise levels. Dell’s advanced thermal control provides
for optimized cooling with varying hardware configurations. Some of the perhaps less intuitive
but potentially important decision-making configuration examples are listed below.
o Most typical configurations perform as listed in Table 7.
o However, some less typical configurations and components can result in higher noise
levels. Examples of acoustical performance for non-typical hardware configurations are
shown in Table 7.
o The dBA values are not additive, e.g., incorporating a change for 2 dBA reduction and
another change for 3 dBA does not generally produce a 5 dBA reduction.
• Noise ramp and descent at Boot-up. Fan speed noise levels ramp during the boot process to
add a layer of protection for component cooling if the system does not boot properly.
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
21
DELL
Table 7. T710’s Prominence Ratio to Tone
Operating
Mode
LwA-UL,
bels LpA, dBA Tones
PowerEdge T710 3.5” HDD System
Typical: 4x Y847J fans, 2x 80 W
M399F CPUs, 5x GX198 146 GB 15
KRPM HDDs, 6x 2-GB D841D
DIMMs, 2x 1100-W Y613G Power
Supplies, PERC6/i YK838 card, 2x
X3959 NIC PCI cards, 1x DVD Drive
at 23° C
Standby 2.7 13 No prominent
tones
Idle 5.9 40 No prominent
tones
Active Hard Disk
Drives 6.0 42 No prominent
tones
Stressed
Processor,
SPECPower at
50% loading
5.9 40 No prominent
tones
Non-Typical Hardware
Configurations; Same as Above
Except with Following PCI cards
10 Gb NIC, Idle 6.0 42 No prominent
tones
PERC6/E, Idle 6.0 42 No prominent
tones
4+ PCI cards
installed 6.2 44 No prominent
tones
PowerEdge T710 2.5” HDD System
Typical: 4x Y847J fans, 2x 80 W
M399F CPUs, 5x 2.5” 73 GB 15
KRPM SAS HDDs, 6x 2-GB D841D
DIMMs, 2x 1100-W Y613G Power
Supplies, PERC6/i YK838 card, 2x
X3959 NIC PCI cards, 1xDVD Drive
at 23° C
Standby 2.7 13 No prominent
tones
Idle 5.7 38 No prominent
tones
Active Hard Disk
Drives 5.7 39 No prominent
tones
Stressed
Processor,
SPECPower at
50% loading
5.7 38 No prominent
tones
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
22
DELL
7 Block Diagram
Figure 20. T710 Block Diagram
8 Processors
8.1 Overview
The Intel 5500 two-socket processor is the IA-32 microprocessor designed specifically for servers and
workstation applications. The processor is based on new Core micro-architecture; however, it is 100
percent compatible with existing IA-32 software. Selective Intel Xeon 5500 series two-socket SKUs also
support Turbo Mode. Turbo Mode is an OS-controlled operation that automatically allows the processor
to run faster than the marked frequency if the CPU is operating below power, temperature, and current
limits.
The Intel Xeon 5500 series two-socket processor utilizes a 1366-contact Flip-Chip Land Grid Array (FCLGA)
package that plugs into a surface mount socket.
Table 8. Intel Xeon 5500 Series Features
Intel Xeon 5500 series
Two-Socket Processor Features
Cache size
32 KB instruction
32 KB data
4 or 8 MB
(shared)
Multi-processor support 1-2 CPUs
Package LGA1366
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
23
DELL
8.2 Features
The Intel 5500 two-socket processor supports all Streaming SIMD Extensions (including SSE2, SSE3,
and SSE4) and Intel 64 instructions.
Key features:
• Four or two cores per processor
• Two point-to-point QPI links at 6.4 GT/s
• 1366-land FC-LGA package
• No termination required for non-populated CPUs (must populate CPU socket 1 first)
• Integrated QuickPath DDR3 memory controller
• 64-byte cache line size
• RISC/CISC hybrid architecture
• Compatible with existing x86 code base
• Optimized for 32-bit code
• MMX support
• Execute Disable Bit
• Intel Wide Dynamic Execution
o Executes up to four instructions per clock cycle
• Simultaneous Multi-Threading (SMT) capability
• Support for CPU Turbo Mode (on certain SKUs)
o Increases CPU frequency if operating below thermal, power, and current limits
• Streaming SIMD (Single Instruction, Multiple Data) Extension 4
• Intel 64 Technology
• Intel VT-x and VT-d Technology for virtualization support
• Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology
• Demand-based switching for active CPU power management as well as support for ACPI PStates,
C-States, and T-States
8.3 Supported Processors
All processors are branded as Intel Xeon and a 256K L2 cache per core. Please go to Dell.com or
contact your Dell representative for the most up-to-date offering.
Table 9. Supported Processors and Descriptions
Model Speed Power QPI L3 Cache Features Cores
X5570 2.93 GHz 95 W 6.4 GT/s 8 M Turbo +3, HT 4
X5560 2.80 GHz 95 W 6.4 GT/s 8 M Turbo +3, HT 4
X5550 2.66 GHz 95 W 6.4 GT/s 8 M Turbo +3, HT 4
E5540 2.53 GHz 80 W 5.86 GT/s 8 M Turbo +2, HT 4
E5530 2.40 GHz 80 W 5.86 GT/s 8 M Turbo +2, HT 4
E5520 2.26 GHz 80 W 5.86 GT/s 8 M Turbo +2, HT 4
L5520 2.26 GHz 60 W 5.86 GT/s 8 M Turbo +2, HT 4
E5506 2.13 GHz 80 W 4.8 GT/s 4 M – 4
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
24
DELL
Model Speed Power QPI L3 Cache Features Cores
E5504 2.00 GHz 80 W 4.8 GT/s 4 M – 4
E5502 1.86 GHz 80 W 4.8 GT/s 4 M – 2
8.4 Processor Configurations
T710 provides support for up to two Intel 5500 two-socket processors.
A single processor placed in the CPU1 socket functions normally; however, T710 systems require a
CPU blank in the CPU2 socket for thermal reasons. The system is held in reset if a single processor is
placed in the CPU2 socket.
8.5 Additional Processor Information
Voltage regulation to the Intel 5500 two-socket processor is provided by EVRD (Enterprise Voltage
Regulator-Down). EVRDs are embedded on the planar. CPU core voltage is not shared between
processors. EVRDs support static phase shedding and power management via the PMBus.
9 Memory
9.1 Overview
T710 utilizes DDR3 memory providing a high performance, high-speed memory interface capable of
low-latency response and high throughput. T710 supports Registered ECC DDR3 DIMMs (RDIMM) or
Unbuffered ECC DDR3 DIMMs (UDIMM).
The DDR3 memory interface consists of three channels. The maximum number of supported DIMMs is
dependent on the type of DIMM used
Table 10. DIMM Configurations
DIMM Type Maximum Configuration
Single or dual rank RDIMM 3 per channel per processor (18 total)
Quad rank RDIMM 2 per channel per processor (12 total)
Single or dual rank UDIMM 2 per channel per processor (12 total)
9.2 DIMMs Supported
T710’s DDR3 interface supports 2, 4, 8, or 16 GB RDIMMs and 1 GB or 2 GB UDIMMs.
9.3 Memory Population Scenarios
The memory mode is dependent on how the memory is populated in the system.
• Three channels populated per CPU
o Typically, the system runs in Independent Channel mode in this configuration. This
mode offers the most DIMM population flexibility and system memory capacity, but offers
the least number of RAS (reliability, availability, service) features.
o All three channels must be populated identically.
o Maximum memory bus speed is 800 MHz
• Two channels (CH 2 and CH 1) are populated identically per CPU; third channel is unused.
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
25
DELL
o When mirroring is enabled, the memory image in Channel 2 is maintained the same as
Channel 1.
o Typically, two channels operate in Advanced ECC (Lockstep) mode with each other by
having the cache line split across both channels. This mode provides improved RAS
features (SDDC support for x8-based memory).
o For memory mirroring, the two channels operate as mirrors of each other – writes go to
both channels and reads alternate between the two channels. The channels are no
longer in lockstep mode.
• One channel is populated per CPU
o This is a simple Memory Optimized (Independent) mode. Mirroring is not supported.
The T710 memory interface supports memory demand and patrol scrubbing, single-bit correction, and
multi-bit error detection. Correction of a x4 or x8 device failure is also possible through the lockstep
channel mode and the SDDC code. Additionally, correction of a x4 device failure is possible through the
independent channel mode.
9.4 Slots/Risers
The T710 has 18 DIMM slots on the motherboard. No memory risers are utilized. Nine DIMM slots are
associated with each processor. Both processors must be populated to utilize all 18 DIMM slots.
Figure 21. T710 Motherboard
9.5 Speed/Memory Features
Key features of the T710 memory system include:
• Registered (RDIMM) and Unbuffered (UDIMM) ECC DDR3 technology
• Each channel carries 64 data and eight ECC bits
• Support for up to 144 GB of RDIMM memory (with 18 x 8 GB RDIMMs)
• Support for up to 24 GB of UDIMM memory (with 12 x 2 GB UDIMMs)
• Support for 1066/1333 MHz single and dual rank DIMMs
• Support for 1066 MHz quad rank DIMMs
• 800 MHz DIMMs are only used in testing
• Single DIMM configuration only with 1 GB DIMM at socket DIMM A1
• Support ODT (On Die Termination)
• Clock gating (CKE) to conserve power when DIMMs are not accessed
• DIMMs enter a low power self-refresh mode
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
26
DELL
• I2C access to SPD EEPROM for access to RDIMM thermal sensors
• Single Bit Error Correction
• SDDC (Single Device Data Correction – x4 or x8 devices)
• Support for Closed Loop Thermal Management
• Multi Bit Error Detection
• Support for Memory Optimized Mode
• Support for Memory Mirroring
• Support for Independent channel mode
9.6 Memory Population
Across CPU sockets, DIMM populations can be different as long as the population rules for each socket
are followed. Additionally, both CPU sockets operate in the same RAS mode and are set up with the
same memory timing parameters.
• If DIMMs of different speeds are mixed, all channels operate at the fastest common frequency.
• RDIMMs and UDIMMs cannot be mixed.
• The first DIMM slot in each channel is color-coded with white ejection tabs for ease of
identification.
• The first DIMM slot in each channel is color-coded with white ejection tabs for ease of
installation.
• The DIMM sockets are placed 450 mils (11.43 mm) apart, center-to-center in order to provide
enough space for sufficient airflow to cool stacked DIMMs.
• The T710 memory subsystem supports up to 18 DIMMs. DIMMs must be installed in each
channel starting with the DIMM farthest from the processor. Population order will be identified by
the silkscreen designator and the System Information Label (SIL) located on the chassis cover.
See the figure below for DIMM naming and numbering.
o Memory Optimized (Independent): {1, 2, 3}, {4, 5, 6}, {7, 8, 9}
o Advanced ECC (Lockstep) or Mirrored: {2,3}, {5, 6}, {8, 9}
o Quad Rank or UDIMM: {1, 2, 3}, {4, 5, 6}
9.7 Memory Speed Limitations
The memory frequency is determined by a variety of inputs:
• Speed of the DIMMs
• Speed supported by the CPU
• Configuration of the DIMMs
Table 10 shows the memory populations and the maximum frequency achievable for that configuration.
Note
For Quad Rank DIMMs mixed with Single or Dual Rank DIMMs, the QR DIMM needs
to be in the slot with the white ejection tabs (the first DIMM slot in each channel).
There is no requirement for the order of SR and DR DIMMs.
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
27
DELL
Table 11. DIMM Population and Maximum Achievable Frequency
DIMM
Type DIMM 0 DIMM 1 DIMM 2 # of
DIMMs 800 1066 1333
UDIMM
SR – – 1
DR – – 1
SR SR – 2
SR DR – 2
DR DR – 2
RDIMM
SR – – 1
DR – – 1
QR – – 1
SR SR – 2
SR DR – 2
DR DR – 2
QR SR – 2
QR DR – 2
QR QR – 2
SR SR SR 3
SR SR DR 3
SR DR DR 3
DR DR DR 3
9.8 Mirroring
Memory mirroring is supported on memory configurations 29 (64GB) and 35 (32GB).
10 Chipset
10.1 Overview
The T710 motherboard incorporates the Intel 5500-EP chipset for I/O and processor interfacing. The
Intel 5500 chipset supports Intel’s 5500 two-socket processor family, QPI interconnect, DDR3 memory
technology, and PCI Express Generation 2. The Intel 5500 chipset consists of the Intel-5500 36D Dual
IOH and ICH9.
10.2 Intel 5500 Chipset Dual I/O Hub (IOH)
The T710 motherboard incorporates the Intel 5500 chipset 36D Dual IOH to provide a link between the
Intel 5500 two-socket processors and I/O components. The main components of the IOH consist of two
full-width QPI links (one to each processor), 72 lanes of PCIe Gen2, and a x4 ESI link to connect
directly to the South Bridge.
The IOH supports a special mode to work with DP processors that allow two IOHs to appear as a single
IOH to the processors in the system. This mode results in special behavior in the link and protocol
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
28
DELL
layers. Each IOH has a unique NodeID for communication between each other, but only the legacy
IOH’s NodeID are exposed to the CPU.
10.3 Intel Quickpath Architecture
The QuickPath Architecture consists of serial point-to-point interconnects for the processors and the
IOH. T710 has a total of four QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) links including one link connecting the
processors and links connecting both processors with the IOH and links connecting both IOHs. Each
link consists of 20 lanes (full-width) in each direction with a link speed of 6.4 GT/s. An additional lane is
reserved for a forwarded clock. Data is sent over the QPI links as packets.
The QuickPath Architecture implemented in the Intel 5500 chipset features four layers. The Physical
layer consists of the actual connection between components. It supports Polarity Inversion and Lane
Reversal for optimizing component placement and routing. The Link layer is responsible for flow control
and the reliable transmission of data. The Routing layer is responsible for the routing of QPI data
packets. Finally, the Protocol layer is responsible for high-level protocol communications, including the
implementation of a MESIF (Modify, Exclusive, Shared, Invalid, Forward) cache coherence protocol.
10.4 PCI Express Generation 2
PCI Express is a serial point-to-point interconnects for I/O devices. PCIe Gen2 doubles the signaling bit
rate of each lane from 2.5 Gb/s to 5 Gb/s. Each of the PCIe Gen2 ports are backwards-compatible with
Gen1 transfer rates.
10.5 Intel Direct Media Interface (DMI)
The DMI (previously called the Enterprise Southbridge Interface) connects the Intel 5500 chipset IOH
with the Intel I/O Controller Hub (ICH). The DMI is equivalent to a x4 PCIe Gen1 link with a transfer rate
of 1 GB/s in each direction.
Intel controller Hub 9/10 is a highly integrated I/O controller, supporting the following functions:
• Six x1 PCIe Gen1 ports, with the capability of combining ports 1-4 as a x4 link
o These ports are unused on T710
• PCI Bus 32-bit Interface Rev 2.3 running at 33 MHz
• Up to six Serial ATA (SATA) ports with transfer rates up to 300 MB/s
o T710 features two SATA ports for optional internal optical drive or tape backup
• Six UHCI and two EHCI (High-Speed 2.0) USB host controllers, with up to twelve USB ports
o T710 has eight external USB ports and two internal ports dedicated for UIPS and
embedded storage
• Power management interface (ACPI 3.0b compliant)
• Platform Environmental Control Interface (PECI)
• Intel Dynamic Power Mode Manager
• I/O interrupt controller
• SMBus 2.0 controller
• Low-Pin Count (LPC) interface to Super I/O, Trusted Platform Module (TPM), and SuperVU
• Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) support for up to two devices
o T710 BIOS is connected to the ICH using SPI
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
29
DELL
10.6 Super I/O Controller
The T710 system planar incorporates a SMSC LPC47M534 Super I/O controller to provide support for
the serial port and the keyboard controller.
The LPC47M534 is a plug and play compatible device that interfaces directly to the ICH through an
embedded LPC bus.
11 BIOS
11.1 Overview
The T710 BIOS is based on the Dell BIOS core and supports:
• IA-32 Intel 5500 Two-Socket Support
• Simultaneous Multi-Threading (SMT) support
• CPU Turbo Mode support
• PCI 2.3 compliant
• Plug n’ Play 1.0a compliant
• MP (Multiprocessor) 1.4 compliant
• Boot from hard drive, optical drive, iSCSI drive, USB key, and SD card
• ACPI support
• Direct Media Interface (DMI) support
• PXE and WOL support for on-board NICs
• Memory mirroring
• SETUP access through key at end of POST
• USB 2.0 (USB boot code is 1.1 compliant)
• F1/F2 error logging in CMOS
• Virtual KVM, CD, and floppy support
• UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) 2.1 support
The T710 BIOS does not support:
• Embedded diagnostics
• BIOS language localization
• BIOS recovery after bad flash (but can be recovered via iDRAC Express)
11.2 Supported ACPI States
PE T710 conforms to Advance Configuration and Power Interface Specification, v2.0c. and provides
support for ACPI P-States, C-States, and T-States.
12 Embedded NICs/LAN on Motherboard (LOM)
12.1 Overview
Two dual-port LAN controllers with support circuitry are embedded on the T710 system board as
independent Ethernet interface device. This provides four LOM ports at the rear of the server. Both
controllers are TOE enabled, with optional iSCSI offload engine.
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
30
DELL
The device is Broadcom 5709C Gigabit Ethernet controller. The following information details the
features of the LAN device:
• x4 PCI Express Gen2 capable interface
o T710 operates dual-port controllers at Gen1 speed
• MAC and PHY integrated
• 3072x18 Byte context memory
• 64 KB receive buffer
• TOE (TCP Offload Engine)
• iSCSI controller (enabled through an optional hardware key)
• RDMA controller (RNIC) (enabled through an optional hardware key)
• NC-SI (Network Controller-Sideband Interface) connection
• Wake-On-LAN (WOL)
• PXE 2.0 remote boot
• iSCSI boot
• IPv4 and IPv6 support
• Bare metal deployment support
13 I/O Slots
13.1 Overview
The T710 comes standard with six PCIe (gen 2) expansion slots on the motherboard. A separate
dedicated slot is provided on the motherboard for the HDD controller. All PCIe slots are x8 connectors,
except the x16 slot. Slot specifications are shown below. See the motherboard diagram for slot
locations.
• Slot 1 = half length, full height PCIe x4 link
• Slot 2 = Full length, full height PCIe x16 link
• Slot 3 = Full length, full height PCIe x8 link
• Slot 4 = Half length, full height PCIe x8 link
• Slot 5 = Half length, full height PCIe x8 link
• Slot 6 = Half length, full height PCIe x8 link
• Storage slot = PCIe x8 link
13.2 X16 Express Card Specifications
T710 supports x16 cards that meet the following requirements:
• Standard height (4.376”)
• Full length (12.283”)
• Support for full bandwidth of x16 Gen2 link
• No support for hot-plug or hot-removal
• Maximum power of 25W
• T710 provides +12V, +3.3V, and +3.3Vaux in accordance with Power Supply Rail Requirements
• x16 slot is not compliant with the PCI Express x16 Graphics 150W-ATX Specification
• x16 cards must be compliant with the PCI Express Card Electromechanical Specification Rev
2.0
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
31
DELL
• x16 cards must only occupy the space of one slot. Cards that occupy the space of two slots are
not supported
• x16 card is limited to 25 W initial start-up power until it is configured as a high-power device. If
no value is set for the Slot Power Limit, the card is limited to 25 W. The card must then scale
down to 25 W or disable operation per PCI Express Base Spec Rev 2.0
• x16 card must be able to support a maximum operating temperature of 55°C as defined in the
Dell PCI Environmental Spec and the PCI Express Card Electromechanical Spec. T710
provides a minimum transverse air velocity of x LFM (linear feet per minute) to the x16 card.
13.3 Available PCIe Cards
T710 supports the following cards. Maximum supported and slot priorities shown.
Table 12. T710 Supported PCIe Cards and Descriptions1
Category Card Priority Description Width Slot Priority2 Maximum
Cards
Internal Storage
(Integrated Slot)
100 Dell PERC 6/i Integrated
(No Sled) x8 Gen1 Integrated 1
200 Dell SAS 6/iR Integrated
(No Sled) x8 Gen1 Integrated 1
External
Controllers
300 Dell SAS 5/E x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 2#3
400 Dell PERC 6/E 512 x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 2#3
500 Dell PERC 6/E 256 x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 2#3
10 GB NICs
600 Intel 10G Base-DA SFP+
Dual Port Adapter x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 4
700 Intel 10G Base-T Single
Port NIC x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 43
800
Broadcom® NetXtreme II®
57710 Single Port 10G
Base-T Ethernet PCIExpress
Network Interface
Card with TOE and iSCSI
Offload
x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 43
900 Intel 10G Base-SR Optical
Single Port NIC x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 4
Internal Storage 1000 Dell SAS 5/iR x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 2#3
FC8 HBA Single
Port
1100 Qlogic QLE2562 8Gbps
FC HBA, Dual Port
x8
Gen1/x4
Gen2
Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5
1200 Emulex LPe12002 8Gbps
FC HBA, Dual Port
x8
Gen1/x4
Gen2
Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5
1300 Qlogic QLE2560 8Gbps
FC HBA, Single Port
x8
Gen1/x4
Gen2
Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
32
DELL
Category Card Priority Description Width Slot Priority2 Maximum
Cards
1400 Emulex LPe12000 8Gbps
FC HBA, Single Port
x8
Gen1/x4
Gen2
Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5
FC4 HBA
1500 Qlogic QLE2462 FC4
HBA, Dual Port x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5
1600 Qlogic QLE2460 FC4
HBA, Single Port x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5
1700 Qlogic QLE220 FC4 HBA,
Single Port x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5
1800 Emulex LPe11002 FC4
HBA, Dual Port x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5
1900 Emulex LPe1150 FC4
HBA, Single Port x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5
SCSI HBA 2000 LSI2032 PCIe SCSI HBA x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 2
1 GB NICs
2100 Intel PRO/1000VT 1G Cu
Quad Port NIC x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5
2200 Intel PRO/1000PT 1G Cu
Dual Port NIC x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3,1 6
2300
Broadcom 5709 IPV6 1G
CU Dual Port NIC
TOE/iSOE
x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3,1 6
2400 Broadcom 5709 IPv6 1G
Cu Dual Port NIC TOE x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3,1 6
1. For optimal performance, it is best to alternate slot population as Slot 6, 4, and 2, before starting Slot 5,3, and1.
2. Slot 1 should be used for 1G NIC's only preferably.
3. T710 supports up to four 25 W maximum power each (excluding internal storage slot) and up to two 15 W for the
remainder PCI-e cards regardless of which slots are populated. This restriction applies to any PCIe cards with a
maximum power over 15 W.
13.4 Boot Order
System boot order is settable in the BIOS
14 Storage
14.1 Overview
T710 supports a 16-drive backplane for 2.5” drives and an eight-drive backplane for 3.5” drives. There
are sixteen 2.5” or eight 3.5” hot-plug capable Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or Serial ATA (SATA) slots
with two LED indicators per slot, two Mini-SAS cable connectors for connecting the backplane to the
integrated SAS 6/iR or PERC 6/i, a 10-pin planar signal connector, and an 8-pin PDB power connector.
SAS 6/iR is only supported on the 3.5” HDD backplane.
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
33
DELL
14.2 3.5” X8 HDD Backplane
The 3.5” HDD backplane has:
• 3.5” HDD are supported in this configuration
• 2.5” SSD in 3.5” carrier. Also max of 2x 2.5” SAS HDD in 3.5” carrier for entry SAS HDD price
point
• Two Mini-SAS cables are used to connect both channels of the integrated SAS 6/iR or PERC 6/i
card to the eight-drive backplane.
• For SATA/SAS mixing, two SAS drives are supported. In this configuration, one pair of drives
will be SAS and the remaining six drives will be SATA.
14.3 2.5” X16 HDD Backplane
The 2.5” HDD backplane has:
• Only 2.5” HDD are supported in this configuration
• One Mini-SAS cable is used to connect one channel of the integrated PERC 6/I (only) card to
the sixteen-drive backplane.
• A SAS expander is used to map 16 HDD to the PERC (x4) controller
• For SATA/SAS mixing, two SAS drives are supported. In this configuration, one pair of drives
will be SAS and the remaining fourteen drives will be SATA.
14.4 Storage Card Support Matrix
Table 13. Storage Card Support Matrix
SKU
Product Usage T710
Support Slot PCIe
Con
PCI
Bracket
I/O
Con RAID BBU
PERC
SAS/SATA
PERC 6/i
Integrated
Internal
Backplane
Storage
(HDD, SSD)
Yes – Max 1 Storage
slot x8 No
x4 int 0, 1, 5,
6, 10,
50, 60
BBU
PERC 6/E
Adapter
External
SAS/SATA
Storage
Yes – Max 2
(MD1000
Pompano
and
MD1020
Ridgeback)
PCIe
slot x8 Yes x4 ext
x4 ext
0, 1, 5,
6, 10,
50, 60
TBBU
PERC 5/E
Adapter
External
Legacy
Storage
Yes – Max 2
(MD1000
Pompano
only)
PCIe
slot x8 Yes x4 ext
x4 ext
0, 1, 5,
10, 50 TBBU
SAS HBA
SAS/SATA
SAS 6/iR
Integrated
Internal
Backplane
Storage
(No tape or
SSD support)
Yes – Max 1 Storage
slot x8 No x4 int
x4 int 0, 1 No
SAS 5/iR
Adapter
Internal SAS
Tape Yes – Max 1 PCIe
slot x8 Yes x4 int N/A No
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
34
DELL
SKU
Product Usage T710
Support Slot PCIe
Con
PCI
Bracket
I/O
Con RAID BBU
SAS 5/E
Adapter
External SAS
(DAS, Tape) Yes – Max 2 PCIe
slot x8 Yes x4 ext
x4 ext None No
ICH
SATA
On Planar
via chipset
Internal SATA
Optical and/or
Tape
(No HDD)
Yes -
2 ports for
Optical
and/or Tape
N/A N/A N/A x1 int N/A N/A
LSI 2032
SCSI
LSI 2032
Adapter
Internal/Extern
al SCSI Tape
or External
legacy SCSI
storage
Yes - Max 2 PCIe
slot x4 Yes
SCSI(i
nt)
SCSI
(ext)
N/A N/A
14.5 Available Drives
Table 14. T710 Available Drives and Descriptions
Form Factor Capacity Speed Type
2.5” 25 GB N/A SATA SSD
2.5” 50 GB N/A SATA SSD
2.5” 100 GB N/A SATA SSD
2.5” 73 GB 15 k SAS HDD
2.5” 146 GB 15 k SAS HDD
2.5” 146 GB 10 k SAS HDD
2.5” 300 GB 10 k SAS HDD
2.5” 160 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD
2.5” 250 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD
2.5” 500 GB 7.2 k NL SAS HDD
3.5” 146 GB 15 k SAS HDD
3.5” 300 GB 15 k SAS HDD
3.5” 450 GB 15 k SAS HDD
3.5” 600 GB 10 k SAS HDD
3.5” 160 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD
3.5” 250 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD
3.5” 500 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD
3.5” 750 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD
3.5” 1000 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD
3.5” 500 GB 7.2 k NL SAS HDD
3.5” 750 GB 7.2 k NL SAS HDD
3.5” 1000 GB 7.2 k NL SAS HDD
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
35
DELL
14.6 RAID Configurations
T710 offers a wide array or RAID configurations from the factory to support the large drive capacity and the mixing of SSD, SAS, and SATA
drives. All configurations use the back plane connection type.
Table 15. T710 RAID Configurations
Configuration Type Configurations Description
Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS,
or all SSD
Mixed SAS/ SATA
Non-RAID mix of SSD with
SAS/SATA not supported
Min 2xSAS+1xSATA
2.5” (2.5” chassis):
Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA
2.5” (3.5” chassis):
Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA
3.5”:
Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA
Min HDD
Max HDD
2.5” chassis/3.5”
chassis
Min HDD
Max HDD
2.5”
chassis/
3.5”
chassis
SAS/SATA – No
RAID 0 MSS Integrated SAS/SATA
No RAID (SAS 6/iR)
2.5” = not valid
3.5” = 1
2.5” SSD = not valid
2.5” = not valid
3.5” = 8
2.5” SSD = not valid
2.5” = not valid
2.5” = not valid
3.5” = 3 3.5” = 8
2.5” SSD = not valid
2.5” SSD = not valid
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
36
DELL
Configuration Type Configurations Description
Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS,
or all SSD
Mixed SAS/ SATA
Non-RAID mix of SSD with
SAS/SATA not supported
Min 2xSAS+1xSATA
2.5” (2.5” chassis):
Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA
2.5” (3.5” chassis):
Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA
3.5”:
Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA
Min HDD
Max HDD
2.5” chassis/3.5”
chassis
Min HDD
Max HDD
2.5”
chassis/
3.5”
chassis
SAS/SATA - RAID 1 MSSR0
Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA
RAID 0 (SAS 6/iR)
Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA
RAID 0 (PERC6iI)
2.5” = not valid
3.5” = 2
2.5” = 2
3.5” = 2
2.5” = not valid
3.5” = 8
2.5” = 16/8
3.5” = 8
N/A
SAS/SATA - RAID 2 MSSR1
Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA
RAID 1 (SAS 6/iR)
Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA
RAID 1 (PERC6/i)
2.5” = not valid
3.5” = 2
2.5” = 2
3.5” = 2
2.5” = not valid
3.5” = 2
2.5” = 2
3.5” = 2
N/A
SAS/SATA - RAID 3 MSSR5 Integrated SSD/ SAS/SATA
RAID 5 (PERC 6/i )
2.5” = 3
3.5” = 3
2.5” = 16/8
3.5” = 8 N/A
SAS/SATA - RAID 4 MSSR6 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA
RAID 6 (PERC 6/i)
2.5” = 4
3.5” = 4
2.5” = 16/8
3.5” = 8 N/A
SAS/SATA - RAID 5 MSSR10 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA
RAID 10 (PERC 6/i )
2.5” = 4
3.5” = 4
2.5” = 16/8
3.5” = 8 N/A
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
37
DELL
Configuration Type Configurations Description
Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS,
or all SSD
Mixed SAS/ SATA
Non-RAID mix of SSD with
SAS/SATA not supported
Min 2xSAS+1xSATA
2.5” (2.5” chassis):
Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA
2.5” (3.5” chassis):
Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA
3.5”:
Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA
Min HDD
Max HDD
2.5” chassis/3.5”
chassis
Min HDD
Max HDD
2.5”
chassis/
3.5”
chassis
SAS/SATA - RAID 6 MSSR50 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA
RAID 50 (PERC 6/i )
2.5” = 6
3.5” = 6
2.5” = 16/8
3.5” = 8 N/A
SAS/SATA - RAID 7 MSSR60 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA
RAID 60 (PERC 6/i )
2.5” = 8
3.5” = 8
2.5” = 16/8
3.5” = 8 N/A
SAS/SATA - RAID 8 MSSR1R1
Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA
RAID 1/RAID 1 (SAS 6/iR,
PERC 6/i)
2.5” = 2+2
3.5” = 2+2
2.5” = 2+2
3.5” = 2+2 N/A
SAS/SATA - RAID 9 MSSR1R5 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA
RAID 1/RAID 5 (PERC 6/i)
2.5” = 2 + 3
3.5” = 2 + 3
2.5” = 2+14/6
3.5” = 2+ 6 N/A
SAS/SATA - RAID 13 MSSR1R6 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA
RAID 1/RAID 6 (PERC 6/i)
2.5” = 2 + 3
3.5” = 2 + 3
2.5” = 2+14/6
3.5” = 2+ 6 N/A
SAS/SATA – No
RAID 10 MSS-X Integrated SAS/SATA No
RAID (SAS 6/iR) – –
2.5” = not valid
3.5” = 3
2.5” = not valid
3.5” = 2+2
2.5”= not
valid
3.5”=6
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
38
DELL
Configuration Type Configurations Description
Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS,
or all SSD
Mixed SAS/ SATA
Non-RAID mix of SSD with
SAS/SATA not supported
Min 2xSAS+1xSATA
2.5” (2.5” chassis):
Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA
2.5” (3.5” chassis):
Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA
3.5”:
Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA
Min HDD
Max HDD
2.5” chassis/3.5”
chassis
Min HDD
Max HDD
2.5”
chassis/
3.5”
chassis
SAS/SATA - RAID 11 MSSR1R1-X
Integrated SAS/SATA RAID
1/RAID 1 (SAS 6/iR)
Integrated SAS/SATA RAID
1/RAID 1 (PERC 6/i)
– – –
2.5” = not
valid
3.5” = 2+2
2.5” = 2+2
3.5” = 2+2
SAS/SATA - RAID 12 MSSR1R5-X Integrated SAS/SATA RAID
1/RAID 5 (PERC 6/i) – – –
2.5” = 2 +
14/6
3.5” = 2 +
6
SSD/SAS - RAID 14 MSSR0R1-X
Integrated SSD/SAS RAID
0/RAID 1 (PERC 6/i) RAID
0 set is SSD, RAID 1 set is
SAS
– –
2.5” = 1 + 2
2.5” = 14 + 2
3.5” = 1 + 2 3.5” = 6 + 2
SSD/SAS - RAID 15 MSSR1R1-X
Integrated SSD/SAS RAID
1/RAID 1 (PERC 6/i) RAID
1 set is SSD, second RAID
1 set is SAS
– –
2.5” = 2 + 2
2.5” = 2 + 2
3.5” = 2 + 2 3.5” = 2 + 2
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
39
DELL
Configuration Type Configurations Description
Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS,
or all SSD
Mixed SAS/ SATA
Non-RAID mix of SSD with
SAS/SATA not supported
Min 2xSAS+1xSATA
2.5” (2.5” chassis):
Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA
2.5” (3.5” chassis):
Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA
3.5”:
Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA
Min HDD
Max HDD
2.5” chassis/3.5”
chassis
Min HDD
Max HDD
2.5”
chassis/
3.5”
chassis
SSD/SAS - RAID 16 MSSR1R5-X
Integrated SSD/SAS RAID
1/RAID 5 (PERC 6/i) RAID
1 set is SSD, RAID 5 set is
SAS
– –
2.5” = 2 + 3
2.5” = 2 + 14
3.5” = 2 + 3 3.5” = 2 + 6
SSD/SAS - RAID 17 MSSR1R10-X
Integrated SSD/SAS RAID
1/RAID 10 (PERC 6/i)
RAID 1 set is SSD, RAID
10 set is SAS
– –
2.5” = 2 + 4
2.5” = 2 + 14
3.5” = 2 + 4 3.5” = 2 + 4
SSD/SAS - RAID 18 MSSR1R50-X
Integrated SSD/SAS RAID
1/RAID 50 (PERC 6/i)
RAID 1 set is SSD, RAID
50 set is SAS
– –
2.5” = 2 + 6
2.5” = 2 + 14
3.5” = 2 + 6 3.5” = 2 + 6
SSD/SAS - RAID 19 MSSR10R50-X
Integrated SSD/SAS RAID
10/RAID 50 (PERC 6/i)
RAID 10 set is SSD, RAID
50 set is SAS
– –
2.5” = 4 + 6
2.5” = 8 + 8
3.5” = not valid 3.5” = not
valid
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
40
DELL
Configuration Type Configurations Description
Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS,
or all SSD
Mixed SAS/ SATA
Non-RAID mix of SSD with
SAS/SATA not supported
Min 2xSAS+1xSATA
2.5” (2.5” chassis):
Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA
2.5” (3.5” chassis):
Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA
3.5”:
Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA
Min HDD
Max HDD
2.5” chassis/3.5”
chassis
Min HDD
Max HDD
2.5”
chassis/
3.5”
chassis
SSD/SAS/
SATA RAID 20 MSSR0R1R5-X
Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA
RAID 0/RAID 1/RAID 5
(PERC 6/i)
RAID 0 set is SSD, RAID 1
set is SAS, RAID 5 set is
SATA
– –
2.5” = 1 + 2 + 3
2.5” = 4 + 2 + 10
3.5” = 1 + 2 + 3
3.5” = 2 + 2 + 4
SSD/SAS/
SATA RAID 21 MSSR1R1R5-X
Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA
RAID 1/RAID 1/RAID 5
(PERC 6/i)
RAID 1 set is SSD, second
RAID 1 set is SAS, RAID 5
set is SATA
– –
2.5” = 2 + 2 + 3
2.5” = 2 + 2 + 12
3.5” = 2 + 2 + 3
3.5” = 2 + 2 + 4
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
41
DELL
Configuration Type Configurations Description
Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS,
or all SSD
Mixed SAS/ SATA
Non-RAID mix of SSD with
SAS/SATA not supported
Min 2xSAS+1xSATA
2.5” (2.5” chassis):
Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA
2.5” (3.5” chassis):
Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA
3.5”:
Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA
Min HDD
Max HDD
2.5” chassis/3.5”
chassis
Min HDD
Max HDD
2.5”
chassis/
3.5”
chassis
SSD/SAS/
SATA RAID 22 MSSR10R1R5-
X
Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA
RAID 10/RAID 1/RAID 5
(PERC 6/i)
RAID 10 set is SSD, RAID
1 set is SAS, RAID 5 set is
SATA
– –
2.5” = 4 +2 + 3
2.5” = 8 + 2 + 6
or
2.5” = 4 + 2 + 10
3.5” = not valid
3.5” = not valid
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
42
DELL
14.7 Internal Storage Controllers
T710 supports a choice of two internal 3GB SAS HDD controllers. The internal controller is placed in
the dedicated storage slot on the motherboard.
14.8 LED Indicators
Each disk drive carrier has two LED indicators visible from the front of the system. One is a green LED
for disk activity and the other is a bicolor (Green/Amber) LED for status information. The activity LED is
driven by the disk drive during normal operation. The bicolor LED is controlled by the SEP device on
the backplane. Both LEDs indicate certain conditions under direction of a storage controller.
14.9 Optical Drives
SATA optical drives are optional and connect to the planar via a SATA interface. IDE optical drives are
no longer supported. The following optical drives are available on T710: DVD-ROM and DVD+RW.
If the optical drive is not ordered with the system, a blank is installed in its place. In the absence of tape
drive, an optional second SATA optical drive is installed in the bay adjacent to the first optical drive.
14.10 Tape Drives
Tape drives are optional and connect to the planar via SATA/SCSI controller card/SAS controller card.
IDE tape drive is no longer supported. The following tape drives are available for usage on T710:
internal SATA, SCSI, and SAS drives; external SCSI and SAS drives.
If the tape drive is not ordered with the system, a blank is installed in its place.
T710 supports a number of internal tape backup options, plus the RD1000 disk backup unit. Only halfheight
backup options are supported.
15 Video
15.1 Overview
The T710 system Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller (iDRAC6) incorporates an integrated video
subsystem, connected to the 32-bit PCI interface of the ICH. This logic is based on the Matrox G200.
The device only supports 2D graphics.
The integrated video core shares its video memory with the iDRAC’s 128 MB DDR2 application space
memory. This memory is also used for the KVM buffer.
The T710 system supports the following 2D graphics video modes:
Table 16. Video Descriptions
Resolution Refresh Rate (Hz) Color Depth (bit)
640 x 480 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32
800 x 600 56, 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32
1024 x 768 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32
1152 x 864 75 8, 16, 32
1280 x 1024 60, 75, 85 8, 16
1280 x 1024 60 32
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
43
DELL
16 Audio
T710 does not support audio (sound card or speakers) as a system feature.
17 Rack Information
17.1 Overview
T710 shares the same rail kit and CMA as T610. The rails and CMA are 3U tall, but accommodate
systems that are 3U or greater in height such as T710 and T610 (both 5U). The rack kit includes ears
that bolt on the chassis and engage the rail latches.
17.2 Cable Management Arm (CMA)
The 3U CMA for T710 contains the following cables.
Table 17. Cable Types and Amount Containable
Cable Type # of Cables
Power 2
SAS 10
CAT6 2
Status LED 1
KVM dongle 1
Total 16
See Section 4.8 “Rails and Cable Management” for a picture of the new CMA.
17.3 Rack Configuration
In the rack configuration, the top painted panel is removed and two ears are bolted to the chassis. The
ears contain the slam latches that engage the rail latches.
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
44
DELL
Figure 22. T710 Rack Ears
17.4 Rails
Sliding ReadyRails™ for 4-post Racks:
Figure 23. T710 Sliding ReadyRails
• Support for tool-less installation in 19” CEA-310-E compliant square hole 4-post racks including:
• Support for Dell Clydesdale Racks (4220, 2420)
• Support for Dell R2K Racks (4210, 2410)
• Support for Dell Marconi Racks (4200, 2400)
• Support for HP/Compaq 9xxx and 10xxx series racks
• Support for HP/Compaq 7xxx series racks without the CMA
• Support for tool-less installation in 19” CEA-310-E compliant round hole 4-post racks
Ears bolt to chassis for rack configuration
Ears Include slam latches to secure server in rack
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
45
DELL
• Support for full extension of the system out of the rack to allow serviceability of key internal
components
• Support for optional cable management arm (CMA)
• Rail depth without the CMA: 760 mm
• Rail depth with the CMA: 840 mm
• Square-hole rack adjustment range: 692-756 mm
• Round-hole rack adjustment range: 678-749 mm
18 Operating Systems
18.1 Overview
T710 supports all major enterprise server operating systems consistent with the Dell 11G server
portfolio.
18.2 Operating Systems Supported
Table 18. Microsoft Operating System
Operating Systems Installation Factory
Install Logo/Certification Schedule
Small Business Server
2008 X64 Standard
Premium
FI
FI WHQL RTS
Small Business Server
2003 R2 32-bit x86 Standard
Premium
FI WHQL RTS
Windows Server® 2008
and Windows Server
2008 SP2
32-bit x86
Standard FI
WHQL
RTS
Enterprise FI RTS
x64
Standard FI
WHQL
RTS
Enterprise
Datacenter
FI
FI
RTS
RTS
Windows
Server 2003
32-bit x86 Standard No
WHQL
RTS
Enterprise No RTS
x64 Standard No
WHQL
RTS
Enterprise No RTS
Windows
Server 2003 R2
32-bit x86 Standard FI
WHQL
RTS
Enterprise FI RTS
x64
Standard FI
WHQL
RTS
Enterprise FI RTS
Datacenter DIB RTS
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
46
DELL
Table 19. Linux Operating System
Operating Systems Installation Factory Install Logo/Certification Schedule
Red Hat® Enterprise
Linux® 4.7
ES/AS x86-64 DIB, NFI Yes
RTS
RTS
ES/AS x86 DIB, NFI Yes
RTS
RTS
Red Hat Enterprise Linux
5.3
x86-64 FI Yes
RTS
RTS
x86 DIB, NFI Yes
RTS
RTS
SUSETM Linux Enterprise
Server 10 x86-64 SP2 X86-64 FI (may change) Yes RTS
SUSE Linux Enterprise
Server 11 x86-64 FI Yes RTS
Table 20. Solaris Operating System
Operating Systems Installation Factory Install Logo/Certification Schedule
Solaris 10 (latest update) – DIB, NFI Yes Post RTS
19 Virtualization
19.1 Overview
T710 has a primary mission as a virtualization platform for remote locations. Accordingly, the T710
supports all major virtualization options available from Dell, including VMware, Citrix XenServer and
Microsoft Hyper-V Server. Embedded options are available for VMware and Citrix XenServer.
Embedded options require the optional SD card module to be installed.
19.2 Virtualization Options Supported
Table 21. Virtualization Options Supported
Operating Systems Factory Install Logo/
Certification Schedule
Support for VMware ESX TM 3.5 update 4
and ESX 4.0 FI Yes RTS
Support for Microsoft Hyper-V (Viridian) TM FI Yes RTS
Support for VMware ESXi TM 3.5 update 4
and ESXi 4.0 (embedded) FI Yes RTS
Support for Citrix XenServer Enterprise®
5.x (embedded) FI Yes RTS
Support for Microsoft Hyper-V server
(VSKU) (standalone) FI Yes RTS
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
47
DELL
20 Systems Management
20.1 Overview/Description
Dell aims on delivering open, flexible, and integrated solutions that help you reduce the complexity of
managing disparate IT assets by building comprehensive IT management solutions. Combining Dell
PowerEdge Servers with a wide selection of Dell-developed management solutions gives you choice
and flexibility, so you can simplify and save in environments of any size. To help you meet your server
performance demands, Dell offers Dell OpenManage™ systems management solutions for:
• Deployment of one or many servers from a single console
• Monitoring of server and storage health and maintenance
• Update of system, operating system, and application software
Dell offers IT management solutions for organizations of all sizes – priced, sized, and supported right.
20.2 Server Management
A Dell Systems Management and Documentation DVD and a Dell Management Console DVD are
included with the product. ISO images are also available. A brief description of available content:
• Dell Systems Build and Update Utility: Dell Systems Build and Update Utility assists in OS install
and pre-OS hardware configuration and updates.
• OpenManage Server Administrator: The OpenManage Server Administrator (OMSA) tool
provides a comprehensive, one-to-one systems management solution, designed for system
administrators to manage systems locally and remotely on a network. OMSA allows system
administrators to focus on managing their entire network by providing comprehensive one-toone
systems management.
• Management Console: Our legacy IT Assistant console is also included, as well as tools to allow
access to our remote management products. These tools are Remote Access Service, for
iDRAC, and the BMC Management Utility.
• Active Directory Snap-in Utility: The Active Directory Snap-in Utility provides an extension snapin
to the Microsoft Active Directory. This allows you to manage Dell specific Active Directory
objects. The Dell-specific schema class definitions and their installation are also included on the
DVD.
• Dell Systems Service Diagnostics Tools: Dell Systems Service and Diagnostics tools deliver the
latest Dell optimized drivers, utilities, and operating system-based diagnostics that you can use
to update your system.
• eDocs: The section includes Acrobat files for PowerEdge systems, storage peripheral, and
OpenManage software.
• Dell Management Console DVD: The Dell Management Console is a Web-based systems
management software that enables you to discover and inventory devices on your network. It
also provides advanced functions, such as health and performance monitoring of networked
devices and patch management capabilities for Dell systems.
• Server Update Utility: In addition to the Systems Management Tools and Documentation and
Dell Management Console DVDs, customers have the option to obtain Server Update Utility
DVD. This DVD has an inventory tool for managing updates to firmware, BIOS and drivers for
either Linux or Windows varieties.
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
48
DELL
20.3 Embedded Server Management
The PowerEdge T710 implements circuitry for the next generation of Embedded Server Management. It
is Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) v2.0 compliant. The optional iDRAC (Integrated Dell
Remote Access Controller) is responsible for acting as an interface between the host system and its
management software and the periphery devices. These periphery devices consist of the PSUs, the
storage backplane, integrated SAS HBA or PERC 6/I, and control panel with display.
The optional upgrade to iDRAC6 provides features for managing the server remotely or in data center
lights-out environments.
Advanced iDRAC features require the installation of the optional iDRAC6 Enterprise card.
20.4 Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator
Embedded management is comprised of several interdependent pieces:
• Lifecycle Controller
• Unified Server Configurator
• iDRAC6
• vFlash
Lifecycle controller powers the embedded management features. It is integrated and tamperproof
storage for system-management tools and enablement utilities (firmware, drivers, etc.). It is flash
partitioned to support multiple, future-use cases.
Dell Unified Server Configurator (USC) is a local 1:1 graphical user interface embedded on Lifecycle
Controller that aids in local server provisioning in a pre-OS environment. For servers with iDRAC
Express, the Lifecycle Controller offers OS install, platform updates, platform configuration, and
diagnostics capabilities. For servers without iDRAC Express, this utility has limited functionality and
offers OS install and diagnostics capabilities only.
To access the Unified Server Configurator, press the key within 10 seconds of the Dell logo’s
appearance during the system boot process. Current functionality enabled by the Unified Server
Configurator includes:
Table 22. Unified Server Configurator Features and Description
Feature Description
Faster O/S Installation Drivers and the installation utility are embedded on
system, so no need to scour DELL.COM
Faster System Updates Integration with Dell support automatically directed to
latest versions of the Unified Server Configurator,
iDRAC, RAID, BIOS, NIC, and Power Supply
Update Rollback Ability to recover to previous “known good state” for all
updatable components
More Comprehensive Diagnostics Diagnostic utilities are embedded on system
Simplified Hardware Configuration Detects RAID controller and allows user to configure
virtual disk and choose virtual disk as boot device,
eliminating the need to launch a separate utility. Also
provides configuration for iDRAC, BIOS, and NIC/LOM.
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
49
DELL
20.5 Optional iDRAC Express
The optional iDRAC Express is the first tier of iDRAC6 upgrades. In addition to upgrading the system
with a Lifecycle Controller, the iDRAC6 Express offers the following key features:
• Graphical web interface
• Standard-based interfaces
• Server Sensor monitoring and fault alerting
• Secure operation of remote access functions including authentication, authorization, and
encryption
• Power control and management with the ability to limit server power consumption and remotely
control server power states
• Advanced troubleshooting capabilities
For more information on iDRAC6 Express features see table below.
20.6 iDRAC6 Enterprise
The optional iDRAC6 Enterprise card provides access to advanced iDRAC6 features. The iDRAC6
Enterprise connects directly to the T710 planar and is mounted parallel to the planar with stand-offs.
Key features for the iDRAC6 Enterprise include:
• Scripting capability with Dell’s Racadm command-line
• Remote video, keyboard, and mouse control with Virtual Console
• Remote media access with Virtual Media
• Dedicated network interface
Additionally, the iDRAC6 Enterprise can be upgraded by adding the vFlash Media card. This is a 1 GB
Dell branded SD card that enables a persistent 256 MB virtual flash partition. In the future, vFlash will
be expanded to include additional features.
A more detailed feature list for iDRAC6 Enterprise and vFlash is included in the table below.
Table 23. Features List for BMC, iDrac, and vFlash
Feature BMC iDRAC 6 Express iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Media
Interface and Standards Support
IPMI 2.0
Web-based GUI
SNMP
WSMAN
SMASH-CLP
Racadm commandline
Conductivity
Shared/Failover
Network Modes
IPv4
VLAN Tagging
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
50
DELL
Feature BMC iDRAC 6 Express iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Media
IPv6
Dynamic DNS
Dedicated NIC
Security and Authentication
Role-based
Authority
Local Users
Active Directory
SSL Encryption
Remote Management and Remediation
Remote Firmware
Update
Server power
control
Serial-over-LAN
(with proxy)
Serial-over-LAN (no
proxy)
Power capping
Last crash screen
capture
Boot capture
Serial-over-LAN
Virtual media
Virtual console
Virtual console
sharing
Virtual flash
Monitoring
Sensor Monitoring
and Alerting
Real-time Power
Monitoring
Real-time Power
Graphing
Historical Power
Counters
Logging Features
System Event Log
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
51
DELL
Feature BMC iDRAC 6 Express iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Media
RAC Log
Trace Log
21 Peripherals
21.1 USB peripherals
The T710 system supports the following USB devices:
• DVD-ROM (bootable; requires two USB ports)
• USB Key (bootable)
• Keyboard (only one USB keyboard is supported)
• Mouse (only one USB mouse is supported)
21.2 External Storage
22 Packaging Options
The T710 is only available in a single system package. Multipack options are not available.
PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook
52
DELL
Appendix A. T710 Volatility Table
Table 24. T710 Volatility Table
NonVolatile
RAM
Volatile
RAM Reference Designator Qty
Planar, PE T710
System BIOS SPI Flash Y U55 1
Ethernet Controller Config Data Y TBD 2
ESM Firmware Y U18 1
System CPLD Y U53 1
MASER Daughtercard Internal Flash Y U_EMMC 1
MASER Daughtercard FRU Y U_FRU 1
TPM ID EEPROM (on TPM board) Y U_SEEPROM 1
TPM Binding EEPROM (on planar) Y U116 1
ESM SDRAM Y U13 1
ESM SEL/FRU Y U5 1
ESM Boot Flash Y U9 1
System RAM Y J40-48; J55-63 18
Control Panel
System Identification EEPROM Y U_SYS_ID 1
Backplane 2.5”/3.5”
PSOC Embedded Flash Y U_SEP 2/1
Power Supply
PSU Microcontroller Y TBD 1
PERC 6/i Integrated
ROMB NVSRAM Config Data Y U23 1
ROMB Firmware Y U24 1
ROMB Cache RAM Y U58-61 4
FRU Y U40 1
CPLD Y U_CPLD 1
SAS 6/iR Integrated
SCSI Controller Configuration Data Y U3 1
FRU Y U4 1
Integrated Mirroring NVSRAM Y U1 1
AMEA
SD Card Y J_SD 1
FRU Y U_FRU 1
PowerEdge M1000e
Technical Guide
The M1000e
chassis provides
flexibility, power
and thermal
efficiency with
scalability for
future needs.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 1
This document is for informational purposes only. Dell reserves the right to make changes without
further notice to any products herein. The content provided is as is and without express or implied
warranties of any kind.
Dell, PowerEdge, PowerConnect, RapidRails, VersaRails, FlexAddress, and OpenManage are
trademarks of Dell, Inc. Avocent is a registered trademark of Avocent Corporation or its subsidiaries.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities
claiming the marks and names or their products. Brocade is a registered trademark of Brocade
Communications Systems, Inc., in the United States and/or in other countries. Cisco and Catalyst are
registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and certain other countries. Citrix®
and XenServer™ are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. and/or one or more of its subsidiaries, and
may be registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. Egenera
registered trademarks of Egenera, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. InfiniBand is a
registered trademark and service mark of the InfiniBand Trade Association. Intel and Xeon are
registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Mellanox is a registered
trademark of Mellanox Technologies, Inc. Microsoft, Windows Server, Active Directory, and Hyper-V
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries. Platespin and PowerConvert are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc., in the United
States and other countries. Velcro is a registered trademark of Velcro Industries B.V. VMware is a
registered trademark and vCenter is a trademark of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other
jurisdictions. Dell disclaims proprietary interest in the marks and names of others.
©Copyright 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction or translation of any part of this work
beyond that permitted by U.S. copyright laws without the written permission of Dell Inc. is unlawful
and strictly forbidden.
Initial Release June 2010
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 2
Table of Contents
1 Product Comparison ...........................................................................................5
2 New Technologies..............................................................................................7
2.1 Overview ..................................................................................................7
2.2 Detailed Information ....................................................................................7
3 System Information ............................................................................................9
3.1 Overview ..................................................................................................9
3.2 Product Features Summary .............................................................................9
4 Mechanical.................................................................................................... 10
4.1 Chassis Description..................................................................................... 10
4.2 Dimensions and Weight................................................................................ 10
4.3 Front Panel View and Features ...................................................................... 10
4.4 Back Panel Features ................................................................................... 12
4.5 Power Supply Indicators............................................................................... 12
4.6 Rails and Cable Management......................................................................... 13
4.7 Rack Support............................................................................................ 16
4.8 Rack View ............................................................................................... 16
4.9 Fans ...................................................................................................... 17
4.10 Cabling................................................................................................... 21
4.11 Control Panel/LCD ..................................................................................... 22
4.12 Security.................................................................................................. 24
5 Power, Thermal, Acoustic .................................................................................. 26
5.1 Power Supplies ......................................................................................... 26
5.1.1 Supported Voltages .............................................................................. 27
5.1.2 Redundancy ....................................................................................... 27
5.1.3 Power Management .............................................................................. 29
5.2 Power Supply Specifications.......................................................................... 30
5.3 Heat Dissipation ........................................................................................ 30
5.4 Environmental Specifications......................................................................... 33
5.5 Power Consumption.................................................................................... 33
5.6 Maximum Input Amps .................................................................................. 33
5.7 Power-Up Sequence ................................................................................... 33
5.8 Acoustics ................................................................................................ 33
6 Processors and Memory ..................................................................................... 35
7 Midplane....................................................................................................... 36
8 Embedded NICs/LAN on Motherboard (LOM)............................................................. 39
9 I/O ............................................................................................................. 40
9.1 Overview ................................................................................................ 40
9.2 Quantities and Priorities .............................................................................. 41
9.3 Supported Mezzanine Cards and Switches .......................................................... 44
9.4 I/O Module Installation................................................................................ 45
9.5 FlexAddress ............................................................................................. 45
10 Storage ........................................................................................................ 51
11 Video........................................................................................................... 52
12 Rack Information............................................................................................. 53
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 3
12.1 Overview ................................................................................................ 53
12.2 Rails ...................................................................................................... 53
12.3 Cable Management Arm (CMA)....................................................................... 54
12.4 Rack View ............................................................................................... 55
13 Virtualization ................................................................................................. 57
14 Systems Management........................................................................................ 59
14.1 Overview ................................................................................................ 59
14.2 Server Management.................................................................................... 60
14.3 Enclosure Management................................................................................ 61
14.4 Integrated Keyboard and Mouse Controller (iKVM)................................................ 65
15 Peripherals .................................................................................................... 68
16 Packaging Options ........................................................................................... 69
Tables
Table 1. Comparison of PowerEdge 1855/1955 Chassis and M1000e Chassis ............................5
Table 2. Rack vs. Blade Server Rack-Level Specification Comparison ...................................6
Table 3. Feature Summary .....................................................................................9
Table 4. Dimensions ........................................................................................... 10
Table 5. Typical Modular Server System Rack Height and Cable Reduction........................... 13
Table 6. Fabric Specifications................................................................................ 43
Table 7. FlexAddress Features and Benefits ............................................................... 47
Figures
Figure 1. Server Density Comparison ..........................................................................5
Figure 2. M1000e Front View.................................................................................. 10
Figure 3. Possible Server Module Sizes, Front Panel View ................................................ 11
Figure 4. Example Server Module Configurations .......................................................... 11
Figure 5. Power Supply Indicators............................................................................ 12
Figure 6. Rack Cabling ......................................................................................... 14
Figure 7. RapidRails Rack Kit Contents ...................................................................... 15
Figure 8. VersaRails Rack Kit Contents ...................................................................... 15
Figure 9. M1000e in a Rack.................................................................................... 16
Figure 10. Rear View Showing Fans......................................................................... 17
Figure 11. Blades, Blanks, and 1 Open Slot Needing to be Filled ...................................... 18
Figure 12. Power Supply, Power Supply Blanks, and Open Slot Needing to be Filled ............... 18
Figure 13. I/O Module and Open Slot Needing to be Filled ............................................. 19
Figure 14. Installed CMC, I/O Module, and Power Supply Blanks ...................................... 20
Figure 15. Installed iKVM Blank ............................................................................. 20
Figure 16. Power Supply, CMC, and I/O Module Blanks.................................................. 21
Figure 17. Simplified Cabling................................................................................ 22
Figure 18. M1000e LCD Panel Recessed Position ......................................................... 23
Figure 19. M1000e LCD Panel During Usage ............................................................... 23
Figure 20. LCD Panel Capabilities........................................................................... 24
Figure 21. Power Supplies in M1000e....................................................................... 26
Figure 22. M1000e Power Supply Rear View............................................................... 27
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 4
Figure 23. Power Architecture .............................................................................. 28
Figure 24. PMBus Communication Channels ............................................................... 30
Figure 25. Server Cooling Air Profile ....................................................................... 31
Figure 26. I/O Module Inlet and IOM Locations ........................................................... 31
Figure 27. I/O Cooling Air Profile........................................................................... 32
Figure 28. Power Supply Inlet and Cooling Air Profile ................................................... 32
Figure 29. Midplane........................................................................................... 36
Figure 30. M1000e Midplane Front View ................................................................... 37
Figure 31. M1000e Midplane Rear View .................................................................... 38
Figure 32. M1000e I/O Modules ............................................................................. 40
Figure 33. High Speed I/O Architecture ................................................................... 42
Figure 34. Ethernet Growth Path ........................................................................... 43
Figure 35. Difference Between Passthroughs and Switch Modules ..................................... 44
Figure 36. FlexAddress Addresses........................................................................... 46
Figure 37. FlexAddress Screen in the CMC................................................................. 47
Figure 38. FlexAddress SD Card ............................................................................. 48
Figure 39. SD Slot on bottom of CMC....................................................................... 48
Figure 40. CMC FlexAddress Summary Screen............................................................. 49
Figure 41. CMC FlexAddress Server Detail Screen ........................................................ 50
Figure 42. Examples of Major Storage Platforms Supported ............................................ 51
Figure 43. M1000e RapidRails Static Rails ................................................................. 53
Figure 44. M1000e VersaRails Static Rails ................................................................. 54
Figure 45. M1000e Strain Relief Bar and Cable Enumerator Clip (12 Per Kit) ........................ 55
Figure 46. M1000e Mounted in the Rack ................................................................... 55
Figure 47. M1000e Strain Relief Bar and Cable Enumerator Clips...................................... 56
Figure 48. Examples of Major Virtualization Platforms Supported..................................... 57
Figure 49. Examples of I/O modules Recommended for Use in Virtualized Environments ......... 58
Figure 50. System Management Architecture Simplified Block Diagram .............................. 60
Figure 51. Chassis Management Controller................................................................ 63
Figure 52. CMC Module Features ............................................................................ 64
Figure 53. M1000e iKVM ...................................................................................... 65
Figure 54. Rear iKVM interface Panel ...................................................................... 66
Figure 55. Front Keyboard/Video Ports .................................................................... 66
Figure 56. Enclosure After Unpacking...................................................................... 69
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 5
1 Product Comparison
The Dell™ PowerEdge™ M1000e offers significant enhancements over its predecessor, the 1955, as
can be seen in the following table:
Table 1. Comparison of PowerEdge 1855/1955 Chassis and M1000e Chassis
Feature 1855/1955 Chassis M1000e Chassis
Blade Compatibility PowerEdge 1855/1955 PowerEdge M600/M605
11G and beyond
Form Factor 7U 10U
No. of Blades 10 16
I/O Module Bay 4 6
Fabric Types Supported 1 x Dual GbE
1 x Dual Xaui
1 Lane – GbE, FC2
4 Lane – 4 x IB
2 x 2 Lane to support:
GbE2 x 4
2 X 4 Lane to support:
1 Lane – GbE, 10GbE serial/KR, FC8/4/2/1
4 Lane – IB, 10GbE (Xaui. KR), 40GbE
Power Supplies 2 x (non-redundant) or 4 x 2100W PSUs 3 x non-redundant) or 6 x 2360W PSUs
Management Modules 1 (std) 2nd(optional) 1 (std) 2nd(optional)
KVM options 1 x Avocent® Analog or Digital KVM 1 x Avocent® Analog KVM (optional)
Putting 16 half-height blades in the PowerEdge M1000e is 60% more dense than using 1U servers.
Figure 1. Server Density Comparison
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 6
Greater density means:
• Smaller Footprint
• More Processing Performance
• More RAM capacity
• Lower Power Consumption per unit
• Easier Manageability
Dell’s blade server platform offers superior feature density over comparable rack servers, as can be
seen from 0. (Darker blue shading indicates increased memory density.)
Table 2. Rack vs. Blade Server Rack-Level Specification Comparison1
R410 R510 R610 R710 R810 R815 R905 R910 M605 M610 M710 M805 M905 M910
Form Factor Rack2 Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack 1/2
Blade
1/2
Blade
Full
Blade
Full
Blade
Full
Blade
Full
Blade
Processors
Manufacturer Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel AMD AMD Intel AMD Intel Intel AMD AMD Intel
Sockets 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 4 4
Max Cores
per 42U Rack
504 252 504 252 672 1,008 240 320 768 768 384 384 768 1,024
Memory
Max RAM per
rack, in TB
5 3 8 4 11 5 3 10 4 12 6 4 6 16
I/O
Max 1GB
Ethernet
Ports per 42U
Rack
252 378 504 420 588 588 320 440 512 640 576 512 512 640
Max 10GbE,
DDR IB, or FC
network
ports per
rack
84 168 168 84 252 252 140 220 256 256 256 256 256 256
Internal Storage3
Drives per
42U rack
168 252 252 168 126 126 50 160 128 128 128 64 64 64
Max 7.2k or
10k rpm
internal
storage per
rack
336 504 151 252 76 76 50 96 77 77 77 38 38 38
Max 15k rpm
internal
storage per
42U rack
101 151 37 76 18 18 15 23 19 19 19 9 9 9
Max SSD
internal
storage per
42U rack
17 25 25 17 13 13 0 16 13 13 13 6 6 6
1
This rack-level physical capacity specification summary does not factor in power and cooling.
2
42U is the most common rack size.
3
Storage measurements provided in Terabytes.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 7
2 New Technologies
2.1 Overview
The PowerEdge M1000e is designed to help customers be more efficient with time, power and
cooling, investment, and system performance. It is a breakthrough Dell engineered and patentpending
design that maximizes flexibility, power and thermal efficiency, system-wide availability,
performance, and manageability. The chassis integrates the latest in management, I/O, power and
cooling technologies in a modular, easy-to-use package. Designed from the ground up to support
current and future generations of server, storage, networking, and management technologies, the
PowerEdge M1000e includes the headroom necessary to scale for the future.
Dell optimized the PowerEdge M1000e Modular Server Enclosure and Server Modules to:
• Maximize flexibility—modular I/O, power, cooling, and management architecture.
• Maximize longevity—optimized power and cooling design supports current and future
generations of server modules and I/O. I/O bandwidth to support not only today’s generation
of 10Gb Ethernet, 20Gbps InfiniBand and 4Gbps Fibre Channel, but up to 40Gbps QDR
InfiniBand, 10Gbps Serial Ethernet, and 8Gbps Fibre Channel.
• Lower total cost of ownership (TCO)—lower cost than rack-mount servers with equivalent
features. Best in class power and cooling efficiency.
The PowerEdge M1000e Modular Server Enclosure solution supports server modules, network,
storage, and cluster interconnect modules (switches and passthrough modules), a high-performance
and highly available passive midplane that connects server modules to the infrastructure
components, power supplies, fans, integrated KVM and Chassis Management Controllers (CMC). The
PowerEdge M1000e uses redundant and hot‐pluggable components throughout to provide maximum
uptime.
The M1000e provides identical and symmetric fabric options B and C for each modular server.
Ethernet I/O switches support I/O sub-modules that provide external I/O flexibility of stacking ports,
10GE copper ports, or 10GE optical ports. True modularity at the system and subsystem level
provides simplicity of extension and enhancement, now and in the future.
The main benefits to customers of these features include improved:
• Data center density
• Power & cooling efficiency
• Flexibility
• Scalability
• Virtualization capability
• Ease of deployment
• Manageability
Together, these factors enable customers to do more with their server investment.
2.2 Detailed Information
Virtually unlimited in scalability, the PowerEdge M1000e chassis provides ultimate flexibility in server
processor and chipset architectures. Both Intel and AMD server architectures can be supported
simultaneously by the M1000e infrastructure, while cutting-edge mechanical, electrical, and
software interface definitions enable multi‐generational server support and expansion.
The chassis features:
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 8
• A high-speed passive midplane that connects the server modules in the front and power, I/O,
and management infrastructure in the rear of the enclosure.
• Comprehensive I/O options to support dual links of 40 Gigabits per second today (with 4x QDR
InfiniBand®) with future support of even higher bandwidth I/O devices when those
technologies become available. This provides high‐speed server module connectivity to the
network and storage now and well into the future.
• Thorough power-management capabilities including delivering shared power to ensure full
capacity of the power supplies available to all server modules.
• Broad management ability including private Ethernet, serial, USB, and low-level management
connectivity between the Chassis Management Controller (CMC), Keyboard/Video/Mouse
(KVM) switch, and server modules.
• Up to two Chassis Management Controllers (CMC‐1 is standard, CMC-2 provides optional
redundancy) and 1 optional integrated Keyboard/Video/Mouse (iKVM) switch.
• Up to 6 hot-pluggable, redundant Power Supplies and 9 hot-pluggable, N+1 redundant fan
modules.
• System Front Control panel w/ LCD panel and two USB Keyboard/Mouse and one Video ―crash
cart‖ connections.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 9
3 System Information
3.1 Overview
The Dell PowerEdge M1000e Modular Server Enclosure is a breakthrough in enterprise server
architecture. The enclosure and its components spring from a revolutionary, ground-up design
incorporating the latest advances in power, cooling, I/O, and management technologies. These
technologies are packed into a highly available rack dense package that integrates into standard Dell
and third-party 2000mm depth racks.
3.2 Product Features Summary
Table 3. Feature Summary
Feature Parameter
Chassis Size 10U high rack mount
Blades per Chassis 16 Half Height, 8 Full Height
Total Blades in a 42U Rack 64 Half Height, 32 Full Height
Total I/O Module Bays 6 (3 redundant or dual fabrics)
Total Power Supplies 6 (3+3 redundant)
Total Fan Modules 9 (8+1 redundant)
Management Modules and Interfaces 2 CMCs (1+1 redundant), 1 iKVM, Front
Control Panel, Graphical LCD Control
Panel
AC Redundancy 3+3
2+2
1+1
Each requires power supplies in slots
1, 2, and 3 to be connected to a
different grid as compared to those in
slots 4, 5, and 6.
DC Redundancy 1+1
2+1
3+1
4+1
5+1
Each with one extra power supply that
comes online if one of the existing
power supplies fails.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 10
4 Mechanical
4.1 Chassis Description
The Dell M1000e supports up to sixteen half-height or 8 full-height server modules. The chassis guide
and retention features are designed such that alternative module form factors are possible. The
chassis architecture is flexible enough that server, storage, or other types of front-loading modules
are possible.
4.2 Dimensions and Weight
Table 4. Dimensions
Dimension Measurement
Width, not including rack ears 447.5 mm
Height 440.5 mm
Depth, Rear of EIA Flange to Rear of Chassis 753.6 mm
Total System Depth (Front Bezel to PS Latch) 835.99 mm
4.3 Front Panel View and Features
Figure 2. M1000e Front View
The M1000e enclosure supports up to 16 half‐height or 8 full-height server modules, each occupying a
slot accessible in the front of the enclosure. The enclosure has also been designed to accommodate
other form factors, including dual-width modules.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 11
Figure 3. Possible Server Module Sizes, Front Panel View
Server Modules can be freely located within each 2 x 2 half-height quadrant. The mechanical design
of the M1000e has support structures for half-height server modules above or below double-width
server modules, and for half-height server modules side-by-side with full-height server modules.
Figure 4. Example Server Module Configurations
Server modules are accessible from the front of the M1000e enclosure. At the bottom of the
enclosure is a flip-out multiple angle LCD screen for local systems management configuration, system
information, and status. The front of the enclosure also contains two USB connections for USB
keyboard and mouse, a video connection and the system power button. The front control panel’s USB
and video ports work only when the iKVM module is installed, as the iKVM provides the capability to
switch the KVM between the blades. For more information, see System Control Panel Features in the
Hardware Owner’s Manual.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 12
Fresh air plenums are at both top and bottom of the chassis. The bottom fresh air plenum provides
non‐preheated air to the M1000e power supplies. The top fresh air plenum provides non‐preheated
air to the CMC, iKVM and I/O modules.
4.4 Back Panel Features
The rear of the M1000e Enclosure contains system management, cooling, power and I/O components.
At the top of the enclosure are slots for two Chassis Management Cards and one integrated KVM
switch. The enclosure ships by default with a single CMC, with the option of adding a second CMC to
provide a fully redundant, active‐standby fault-tolerant solution for management access and control.
Interleaved in the center of the chassis are fans and I/O modules. This arrangement optimizes the
balance of airflow through the system, allowing lower pressure build-up in the system and resulting
in lower airflow requirements for the fans. For more information, see Back-Panel Features in the
Hardware Owner’s Manual.
4.5 Power Supply Indicators
Figure 5 shows the power supply indicators. For more information, see Back-Panel Features in the
Hardware Owner’s Manual.
Figure 5. Power Supply Indicators
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 13
4.6 Rails and Cable Management
RapidRailsTM Static Rails for Square Hole Racks:
Supports toolless installation in 19‖ EIA-310-E compliant square hole 4-post racks including all
generations of Dell racks except for the 4200 & 2400 series
Has a minimum rail depth of 703 mm
Provides a square-hole rack adjustment range of 712-755 mm
Includes strain relief bar and cable enumerators for managing and securing cables
VersaRailsTM Static Rails for Square or Round Hole Racks:
Supports tooled installation in 19‖ EIA-310-E compliant square or unthreaded round hole 4-
post racks
Has a minimum rail depth of 703 mm
Provides a square-hole rack adjustment range of 706-755 mm
Provides a round-hole rack adjustment range of 706-755 mm
Includes strain relief bar and cable enumerators for managing and securing cables
One of the advantages of a modular server system is the reduction in cable management needs
within a rack system. The inclusion of fabric switches, integrated KVM and system management
aggregation at the CMCs provides six‐fold or better cable reduction. The following table shows a
comparison of a typical reduction available when using the M1000e Modular system with integrated
switches, compared to traditional ―rack and stack‖ components. The configuration in the table
assumes a server with four Ethernet ports and two Fibre Channel ports. In support of the M1000e,
Dell offers a modular system cable management system to ease system installation in Dell or other
industry-standard racks.
Table 5. Typical Modular Server System Rack Height and Cable Reduction
Component
Rack
Height
AC power
cables Ethernet Cables FC Cables KVM Cables
2 socket server 1Ux16 2x16 4x16 2x16 USBx16 + VGAx16
KVM 1U 1 ‐ ‐ USBx1 + VGAx1
Ethernet Switches 1Ux4 1x4 4x4 ‐ ‐
FC Switches 1Ux2 1x2 ‐ 2x2 ‐
Total Rack 23U height 39 AC cables 72 Ethernet Cables 36 FC Cables USBx17 + VGAx17
M1000e Equivalent 10U height 6 AC cables 16 Ethernet Cables 4 FC Cables USBx1 + VGAx1
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 14
Figure 6. Rack Cabling
RapidRailsTM Static Rails for Square Hole Racks supports toolless installation in 19‖ EIA-310-E
compliant square hole 4-post racks including all generations of Dell racks except for the 4200 &
2400 series. Minimum rail depth is 703 mm. Square-hole rack adjustment range is 712–755 mm.
The rail system includes a strain relief bar and cable enumerators for managing and securing
cables.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 15
Figure 7. RapidRails Rack Kit Contents
Figure 8. VersaRails Rack Kit Contents
See Section 12 for more details.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 16
4.7 Rack Support
The M1000e chassis offers the following options for rack support:
• RapidRails™ static rails for toolless mounting in 4-post racks with square holes
• VersaRails™ static rails for tooled mounting in 4-post racks with square or unthreaded round
holes
See Section 12 for more details.
4.8 Rack View
Figure 9. M1000e in a Rack
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 17
4.9 Fans
`
Figure 10. Rear View Showing Fans
The PowerEdge M1000e chassis comes standard with 9 hot-swappable, redundant fan modules that
are distributed evenly across the enclosure. The speed of each fan is individually managed by the
CMC. Together, these design innovations can provide:
• Significant power savings as compared to older servers
• Less airflow required as compared to the same number of similarly configured 1U servers
• A similar acoustic profile as compared to previous servers
Fans are N+1 redundant, meaning that any single fan can fail without impacting system uptime or
reliability. In the event of a fan failure, system behavior is dependent on the resultant temperatures
of the system, as monitored by the Server Module iDRAC and I/O Modules. The CMC continues to
interpret the airflow needs of each server and I/O module to control the fan speeds appropriately.
The system will not ramp the fans to full speed in the event of a fan failure unless deemed necessary
by on‐board monitoring. Failure of more than one fan will not automatically result in shutting down
of blade servers. This is because the blade servers have their own self-protection mechanisms to
prevent them from running too hot. The result of a failure of multiple fans would depend on the
configuration, ambient temperature, and workload being run. For example, the processors within a
blade are automatically throttled back by that server if they reach a thermal threshold and then shut
down if a critical over-temperature threshold is met.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 18
Note:
The blank blade, hard drive, and server I/O fillers for every blank slot are required for
cooling/airflow reasons.
Figure 11. Blades, Blanks, and 1 Open Slot Needing to be Filled
Figure 12. Power Supply, Power Supply Blanks, and Open Slot Needing to be Filled
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 19
Figure 13. I/O Module and Open Slot Needing to be Filled
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 20
Figure 14. Installed CMC, I/O Module, and Power Supply Blanks
Figure 15. Installed iKVM Blank
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 21
Figure 16. Power Supply, CMC, and I/O Module Blanks
4.10 Cabling
There are two types of external cabling simplification features offered:
• Stacked Ethernet Switching
o Internal switches have optional 10GbE uplinks and/or stacking connectors
o Manage/configure multiple switches as one with stacking
o Consolidate uplinks from multiple chassis into 2-4 x 10GbE ports
• Stacked CMCs
o CMC has a 2nd Ethernet port for connection to other CMCs in the rack
o CMC connects to the management network to manage all blade servers
o Saves port consumption on external switches
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 22
Figure 17. Simplified Cabling
4.11 Control Panel/LCD
The control panel contains the local user interface. Functions include chassis level diagnostic LEDs,
LCD panel, and power button. This device is hot-pluggable and is always powered, even in chassis
standby mode.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 23
Figure 18. M1000e LCD Panel Recessed Position
Figure 19. M1000e LCD Panel During Usage
The M1000e chassis LCD shows extensive information about the status of each hardware module,
network information for the CMC and each iDRAC, and status messages with detailed explanations in
plain language. Users may access a wide variety of information about modules via the panel,
including their type, user-defined name, configurations, service tag numbers, and IP address
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 24
information. The LCD panel can be retracted into the chassis body, or extended and angled once
deployed for full visibility no matter where the M1000e is mounted in the rack.
The LCD panel can be used as a diagnostic source and as a place to configure parameters of certain
chassis components as well as the server’s iDRAC network configuration.
Figure 20 shows some of the capabilities of the LCD control panel.
Figure 20. LCD Panel Capabilities
The primary function of the LCD panel is to provide real-time information on the health and status of
the modules in the enclosure. LCD panel features include:
• A deployment setup wizard that allows you to configure the CMC module’s network settings
during initial system set up
• Menus to configure the iDRAC in each blade
• Status information screens for each blade
• Status information screens for the modules installed in the back of the enclosure, including
the IO modules, fans, CMC, iKVM, and power supplies
• A network summary screen listing the IP addresses of all components in the system
• Real time power consumption statistics, including high and low values and average power
consumption
• Ambient temperature values
• AC power information
• Critical failure alerts and warnings
See the M1000e Configuration Guide and the CMC Administrator Reference Guide for more details on
the capabilities of the LCD panel.
4.12 Security
The M1000e offers many security features, including the ability to:
• Assign one admin per blade or one admin per multiple blades
• Grant permissions to some blades but not to others
• Customize administrative access for CMC, iDRAC, and I/O
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 25
Most of the security capabilities are driven by the CMC, which provides a mechanism for centralized
configuration of the M1000e enclosure’s security settings and user access. It is secured by a usermodifiable
password. The CMC’s security features include:
• User authentication through optional Active Directory and LDAP services or hardware-stored
user IDs and passwords
• Role-based authority, which enables an administrator to configure specific privileges for each
user
• User ID and password configuration through the Web interface
• Web interface supports 128-bit SSL 3.0 encryption and 40-bit SSL 3.0 encryption (for countries
where 128-bit is not acceptable)
• Configurable IP ports (where applicable)
• Login failure limits per IP address, with login blocking from the IP address when the limit is
exceeded
• Configurable session auto time out and number of simultaneous sessions
• Limited IP address range for clients connecting to the CMC
• Secure Shell (SSH), which uses an encrypted layer for higher security
• Single Sign-on, Two-Factor Authentication, and Public Key Authentication
• Disabling front panel access
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 26
5 Power, Thermal, Acoustic
Built on Dell Energy Smart technology, the M1000e is one of the most power-efficient blade solutions
on the market. The M1000e enclosure takes advantage of Energy Smart thermal design efficiencies,
such as ultra-efficient power supplies and dynamic power-efficient fans with optimized airflow
design to efficiently cool the chassis and enable better performance in a lower power envelope.
A modular system has many advantages over standard rack mount servers in terms of power
optimization, and this aspect was a focal point throughout the M1000e’s conceptualization and
development. The key areas of interest are power delivery and power management.
The M1000e provides industry-leading power efficiency and density, accomplished through highly
efficient components, improved design techniques, and a fresh air plenum that reduces the air
temperature to the power supply components. Lower operating temperature equates to higher power
density for the power supply (exceeding 21 Watts per cubic inch) and higher power efficiency (better
than 87% at 20% load and higher at heavier loads, approaching 91% efficiency under normal operating
conditions).
Power efficiency in the M1000e does not stop with the power supply. Every aspect of efficiency has
been tweaked and improved from previous designs—adding more copper to PC board power planes to
reduce I2R losses, improving inductors and other components, increasing efficiencies of DC‐DC
converters, and replacing some linear voltage regulators with more-efficient switching regulators.
See Section 15 for more information on external power connection accessories.
5.1 Power Supplies
The power distribution inside the M1000e Modular Server System consists of a power supply system
located in the rear bottom of the chassis.
Figure 21. Power Supplies in M1000e
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 27
Figure 22. M1000e Power Supply Rear View
The Dell power supplies utilize output Oring FETs to isolate the power supply from the 12V system
bus. If a single power supply fails its output Oring FET for that power supply will turn off removing
itself from the bus. Think of it as an electrical switch that turns off when the power supply fails.
5.1.1 Supported Voltages
Dell currently offers a power supply rated at 2360W 230V. With current sharing between power
supplies, total system redundant power is approximately 7080W in a 3+3 power supply configuration.
5.1.2 Redundancy
Power redundancy in the M1000e supports any necessary usage model, though the M1000e requires
three power supplies to power a fully populated system or six power supplies in a fully redundant
system.
AC redundancy is supported in the following configurations, each of which requires the power
supplies in slots 1, 2, and 3 to be connected to a different grid as compared to those in slots 4, 5,
and 6.
• 3+3
• 2+2
• 1+1
DC redundancy is supported in the following configurations, each with one extra power supply that
comes online if one of the existing power supplies fails:
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 28
• 1+1
• 2+1
• 3+1
• 4+1
• 5+1
When Dynamic Power Supply Engagement (DPSE) is enabled, the PSU units move between On and Off
states depending upon actual power draw conditions to achieve high power efficiency by driving
fewer supplies to maximum versus all with partial and less-efficient loading.
In the N+N power supply configuration, the system will provide protection against AC grid loss or
power supply failures. If one power grid fails, three power supplies lose their AC source, and the
three power supplies on the other grid remain powered, providing sufficient power for the system to
continue running. In the N+1 configuration only power supply failures are protected, not grid
failures. The likelihood of multiple power supplies failing at the same time is remote. In the N+0
configuration there is no power protection and any protection must be provided at the node or
chassis level. Typically this case is an HPCC or other clustered environment where redundant power
is not a concern, since the parallelism of the processing nodes across multiple system chassis
provides all the redundancy that is necessary.
The midplane carries all 12 Volt DC power for the system, both main power and standby power. The
CMCs, LCD and Control Panel are powered solely by 12 Volt Standby power, insuring that chassis level
management is operational in the chassis standby state, whenever AC power is present. The server
modules, I/O Modules, Fans, and iKVM are powered solely by 12 Volt Main power.
Figure 23. Power Architecture
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 29
5.1.3 Power Management
Power is no longer just about power delivery, it is also about power management. The M1000e
System offers many advanced power management features. Most of these features operate
transparently to the user, while others require only a one time selection of desired operating modes.
Shared power takes advantage of the large number of resources in the modular server, distributing
power across the system without the excess margin required in dedicated rack mount servers and
switches. The M1000e has an advanced power budgeting feature, controlled by the CMC and
negotiated in conjunction with the iDRAC on every server module. Prior to any server module
powering up, through any of its power up mechanisms such as AC recovery, WOL or a simple power
button press, the server module iDRAC performs a sophisticated power budget inventory for the
server module, based upon its configuration of CPUs, memory, I/O and local storage. Once this
number is generated, the iDRAC communicates the power budget inventory to the CMC, which
confirms the availability of power from the system level, based upon a total chassis power inventory,
including power supplies, iKVM, I/O Modules, fans and server modules. Since the CMC controls when
every modular system element powers on, it can set power policies on a system level.
In coordination with the CMC, iDRAC hardware constantly monitors actual power consumption at
each server module. This power measurement is used locally by the server module to insure that its
instantaneous power consumption never exceeds the budgeted amount. While the system
administrator may never notice these features in action, what they enable is a more aggressive
utilization of the shared system power resources. Thus the system is never ―flying blind‖ in regards
to power consumption, and there is no danger of exceeding power capacity availability, which could
result in a spontaneous activation of power supply over current protection without these features.
The system administrator can also set priorities for each server module. The priority works in
conjunction with the CMC power budgeting and iDRAC power monitoring to insure that the lowest
priority blades are the first to enter any power optimization mode, should conditions warrant the
activation of this feature.
Power capping is set at the chassis level for our blade servers and not at the blade server level, so
components like processer, memory can throttle down when necessary on lower priority blade
servers. An allocation is taken out for the infrastructure (fans, IO modules) and then the remainder is
applied to the blades, and then throttling is applied if required to get under the cap. If all the blades
are setup with the same priority, then it will start throttling down processor, memory, and so on. A
variety of BIOS settings will throttle the processor or not depending on load:
If power consumption demands exceed available power, the enclosure ―throttles‖ back the power
supplied to blades as prioritized in the CMC. The blades will not shut down; rather they will slow
down if necessary; Dell designed the system this way on purpose, in response to customer feedback
that they did not want the blades to shut themselves down under any condition. I/O modules, on the
other hand, will shut down prior to permanent damage, as they are less tolerant to power variation
than the blade server hardware.
The M1000e is compliant with the PMBus Specification 1.1, using this power management standard
for status, measurement and control. The M1000e power supplies continuously monitor AC input
current, voltage and power, enabling exposure of data to Dell™ OpenManage™ IT Assistant or to other
enterprise-level management tools. Real time power consumption is viewable per system.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 30
Figure 24. PMBus Communication Channels
All VMware® products include consuming the "current power consumption" and "current power
cap/limit" retrieval via Dell specific IPMI commands using iDRAC. They are using this to report the
total power consumed by the server and also using this as part of their calculations to
determine/approximate the VM-level power.
The Power Management chapter in the Dell Chassis Management Controller (CMC) User Guide
provides extensive information on power management.
5.2 Power Supply Specifications
Each power supply offers:
• 91%+ AC/DC Conversion Efficiency
• Dynamic Power Supply Engagement which automatically engages the minimum number of
supplies required to power a given configuration, maximizing power supply efficiency
The following are the PowerEdge M-1000e chassis power supply capabilities:
• 2360 watts maximum for each PSU
• 220 VAC (Volts Alternate Current) input (a single PSU runs between 180V and 260V AC)
• 50Hz or 60Hz input
• 14A maximum input
• 192A (Amps) @ + 12 Volts DC ( Direct Current) output Operational
• 4.5A @ +12 Volt output Standby
• 3 or 6 PSU configurations available
• PSUs are hot-swappable
5.3 Heat Dissipation
The cooling strategy for the M1000e supports a low‐impedance, high‐efficiency design philosophy.
Driving lower airflow impedance allows the M1000e to draw air through the system at a lower
operating pressure and reduces the system fan power consumed to meet the airflow requirements of
the system.
The low impedance design is coupled with a high‐efficiency air-moving device designed explicitly for
the PowerEdge M1000e chassis. The efficiency of an air-moving device is defined as the work output
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 31
of the fan as compared to the electrical power required to run the fan. The M1000e fan operates at
extreme efficiencies which correlates directly into savings in the customer’s required power‐to‐cool.
The high‐efficiency design philosophy also extends into the layout of the subsystems within the
M1000e. The Server Modules, I/O Modules, and Power Supplies are incorporated into the system with
independent airflow paths. This isolates these components from pre‐heated air, reducing the
required airflow consumptions of each module.
Figure 25. Server Cooling Air Profile
The Server Modules are cooled with traditional front‐to‐back cooling. As shown in the figure, the
front of the system is dominated by inlet area for the individual server modules. The air passes
through the server modules, through venting holes in the midplane, and is then drawn into the fans
which exhaust the air from the chassis. There are plenums both upstream of the midplane, between
the midplane and the blades, and downstream of the midplane, between the midplane and the fans,
to more evenly distribute the cooling potential from the three columns of fans across the server
modules.
Figure 26. I/O Module Inlet and IOM Locations
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 32
Figure 27. I/O Cooling Air Profile
The I/O Modules use a bypass duct to draw ambient air from the front of the system to the I/O
Module inlet, as seen in the figure. This duct is located above the server modules. This cool air is
then drawn down through the I/O Modules in a top to bottom flow path and into the plenum between
the midplane and fans, from where it is exhausted from the system.
Figure 28. Power Supply Inlet and Cooling Air Profile
The Power Supplies, located in the rear of the system, use basic front‐to‐back cooling, but draw
their inlet air from a duct located beneath the server modules, as seen in the figure above. This
insures that the power supplies receive ambient temperature air.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 33
This hardware design is coupled with a thermal cooling algorithm that incorporates the following:
• Server module level thermal monitoring by the iDRAC
• I/O module thermal health monitors
• Fan control and monitoring by the CMC
The iDRAC on each server module calculates the amount of airflow required on an individual server
module level and sends a request to the CMC. This request is based on temperature conditions on the
server module, as well as passive requirements due to hardware configuration. Concurrently, each
IOM can send a request to the CMC to increase or decrease cooling to the I/O subsystem. The CMC
interprets these requests, and can control the fans as required to maintain Server and I/O Module
airflow at optimal levels.
5.4 Environmental Specifications
See the Getting Started Guide on support.dell.com.
5.5 Power Consumption
Use the Dell Energy Smart Solution Advisor (ESSA) to see requirements for a specific chassis
configuration.
5.6 Maximum Input Amps
See Power Distribution Systems for the Dell M1000e Modular Server Enclosure – Selection and
Installation.
5.7 Power-Up Sequence
The following steps detail how and in what order the M1000e components are powered up:
1. The first power supply provides a small amount of electricity which starts up the first CMC.
2. CMC begins to boot and power up the power supply units.
3. Active and Standby CMC boot up Linux® operating system.
4. Active CMC powers up all remaining PSUs.
5. All six PSUs are powered up.
6. Server iDRAC are powered up. (In slot priority order from 1–9; i.e., highest priority 1 slots
first, then priority 2, etc. If all same priority, goes in slot order 1–16. Each one is spaced apart
by 500ms.)
7. iKVM is powered up.
8. IOM modules are powered up.
9. Depending upon Blade BIOS power setting (last power state, always on or always off), blade
iDRAC requests power up from CMC first come/first served in order from #6.
10. CMC powers up blades.
For full configuration, booting the enclosure takes between 2–4 minutes, followed by 1–4 minutes for
each blade.
5.8 Acoustics
The M1000e is engineered for sound quality in accordance with the Dell Enterprise acoustical
specification. Compared to previous generations of products, the fans have more levels of control
and finer tuning of the fan behavior. Firmware is optimized to choose the lowest fan speeds and
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 34
therefore the lowest acoustical output for any configuration (components installed), operating
condition (applications being run), and ambient temperature. Because acoustical output is
dependent and indeed minimized for each combination of these variables, no single acoustical level
(sound pressure level or sound power level) represents the M1000e, and instead boundaries on sound
power level are provided below:
• Lowest Fan Speed: Upper Limit A-weighted Sound Power Level, LwA-UL, is 7.5 bels
• Full Fan Speed: Upper Limit A-weighted Sound Power Level, LwA-UL, is 9.7 bels
• LwA-UL is the upper limit sound power level (LwA) calculated per section 4.4.2 of ISO 9296
(1988) and measured in accordance to ISO 7779 (1999)
• Acoustical models have been provided to predict performance between these bounds in the
ESSA tool: http://solutions.dell.com/DellStarOnline/Launch.aspx/ESSA
A few things to be aware of:
• Fans are loud when running at full speed. It is rare that fans need to run at full speed. Please
ensure that components are operating properly if fans remain at full speed.
• The CMC will automatically raise and lower the fan speed to a setting that is appropriate to
keep all modules cool.
• If a single fan is removed, all fans will be set to 50% speed if the enclosure is in Standby
mode; if the enclosure is powered on, removal of a single fan is treated like a failure (nothing
happens).
• Re-installation of a fan will cause the rest of the fans to settle back to a quieter state.
• Whenever communication to the CMC or iDRAC is lost such as during firmware update, the fan
speed will increase and create more noise.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 35
6 Processors and Memory
With the addition of the PowerEdge M910 server to the PowerEdge portfolio, the M1000e is now
scalable to 256 cores & 4TB of RAM: 4 sockets x 8 cores x 8 blades = 256 Cores; 32 DIMM sockets x
16GB DIMMs x 8 Blades = 4096GB or 4TB RAM.
See the Technical Guide for each of the compatible blade servers offered for more details on
processors and memory offered.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 36
7 Midplane
Though hidden from view in an actively running system, the midplane is the focal point for all
connectivity within the M1000e Modular System. The midplane is a large printed circuit board
providing power distribution, fabric connectivity, and system management infrastructure.
Additionally it allows airflow paths for the front-to-back cooling system through ventilation holes.
Figure 29. Midplane
As is requisite for fault-tolerant systems, the M1000e midplane is completely passive, with no hidden
stacking midplanes or interposers with active components. I/O fabrics and system management are
fully redundant from each hot pluggable item. The system management Ethernet fabric is fully
redundant when two CMCs are installed, with two point-to-point connections from each server
module.
The midplane serves as transport for a patent-pending, time-division–multiplexed serial bus for
general purpose I/O reduction. This serial bus contributes greatly to the midplane’s I/O lane count
reduction, which is typically burdened with a significant I/O pin and routing channel count of largely
static or low-speed functions. For instance, all Fibre Channel I/O Passthrough module LED and SFP
status information is carried over this bus, which alone eliminates over one hundred point-to-point
connections that would otherwise be required. The time division multiplexed serial bus is fully
redundant, with health monitoring, separate links per CMC and error checking across all data.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 37
Figure 30. M1000e Midplane Front View
The system is designed for receptacles on all midplane connectors and pins on all pluggable
components, so any potential for bent pins is limited to the pluggable field replaceable unit, not to
the system. This contributes to the high reliability and uptime of the M1000e modular system.
The midplane is physically attached to the enclosure front structural element. It is aligned by
guide‐pins and edges in all 3 axes. This provides close tolerance alignment between the server
modules and their midplane connections. The midplane has been carefully designed to minimize the
impact to the overall system airflow.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 38
Figure 31. M1000e Midplane Rear View
All M1000e midplane routing is fully isolated, supporting all chassis power, fabric, system
management, and fault-tolerance requirements.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 39
8 Embedded NICs/LAN on Motherboard (LOM)
See the Technical Guide for each of the compatible blade servers.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 40
9 I/O
9.1 Overview
Dell M-series provides complete, snap-in FlexI/O scalability down to the switch interconnects. Flex
I/O technology is the foundation of the M1000e I/O subsystem. Customers may mix and match I/O
modules, including Cisco®, Dell™ PowerConnect™, Fibre Channel, and InfiniBand options. The I/O
modules may be installed singly or in redundant pairs. See I/O Connectivity in the Hardware Owner’s
Manual for detailed information.
Figure 32. M1000e I/O Modules
These I/O modules are connected to the blades through three redundant I/O fabrics. The enclosure
was designed for 5+ years of I/O bandwidth and technology.
The I/O system offers customers a wide variety of options to meet nearly any network need:
• Complete, on-demand switch design
• Easily scale to provide additional uplink and stacking functionality
• No need to waste your current investment with a ―rip and replace‖ upgrade
• Flexibility to scale Ethernet stacking and throughput
• Partnered Solutions with Cisco, Emulex and Brocade
• Quad Data Rate InfiniBand Switch options available for HPCC
• Up to 8 high-speed ports
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 41
• Cisco® Virtual Blade Switch capability
• Ethernet Port Aggregator
• Virtualization of Ethernet ports for integration into any Ethernet fabric
• Fibre Channel products from Brocade and Emulex offering powerful connectivity to Dell/EMC
SAN fabrics
• High-availability clustering inside a single enclosure or between two enclosures
Each server module connects to traditional network topologies while providing sufficient bandwidth
for multi‐generational product lifecycle upgrades. I/O fabric integration encompasses networking,
storage, and interprocessor communications (IPC).
9.2 Quantities and Priorities
There are three supported high-speed fabrics per M1000e half‐height server module, with two
flexible fabrics using optional plug-in mezzanine cards on the server, and one connected to the LOMs
on the server. The ports on the server module connect via the midplane to the associated I/O
Modules (IOM) in the rear of the enclosure, which then connect to the customer’s LAN/SAN/IPC
networks.
The optional mezzanine cards are designed to connect via 8-lane PCIe to the server module’s chipset
in most cases. Mezzanine cards may have either one dual port ASIC with 4- or 8-lane PCIe interfaces
or dual ASICs, each with 4-lane PCIe interfaces. External fabrics are routed through high-speed, 10-
Gigabit-per-second–capable air dielectric connector pins through the planar and midplane. For best
signal integrity, the signals isolate transmit and receive signals for minimum crosstalk. Differential
pairs are isolated with ground pins and signal connector columns are staggered to minimize signal
coupling.
The M1000e system management hardware and software includes Fabric Consistency Checking,
preventing the accidental activation of any misconfigured fabric device on a server module. The
system will automatically detect this misconfiguration and alert the user of the error. No damage
occurs to the system, and the user will have the ability to reconfigure the faulted module.
M1000e I/O is fully scalable to current and future generations of server modules and I/O Modules.
There are three redundant multi‐lane fabrics in the system, as illustrated in Figure 33.
In its original configuration, the M1000e midplane is enabled to support up to four Gigabit Ethernet
links per server module on Fabric A. Thus, potential data bandwidth for Fabric A is 4 Gbps per halfheight
server module. A future midplane upgrade may enable higher bandwidth on Fabric A.
The M1000e provides full 10/100/1000M Ethernet support when using Ethernet passthrough modules
enabling you to connect to any legacy infrastructure whether using Ethernet passthrough or switch
technology. This technical advance uses in-band signaling on 1000BASE‐KX transport and requires no
user interaction for enablement.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 42
Figure 33. High Speed I/O Architecture
Fabric B and C are identical, fully customizable fabrics, routed as two sets of four lanes from
mezzanine cards on the server modules to the I/O Modules in the rear of the chassis. Supported
bandwidth ranges from 1 to 10 Gbps per lane depending on the fabric type used.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 43
Table 6. Fabric Specifications
Fabric Encoding
Symbol Rate
Per Lane (Gbps)
Data Rate Per
Lane (Gbps)
Data Rate
Per Link
(Gbps)
Lanes Per Link
Per Industry
Specification
PCIe Gen1 8B/10B 2.5 2 8 (4 lane) 1,2,4,8,12,16,32
PCIe Gen2 8B/10B 5 4 16 (4 lane) 1,2,4,8,12,16,32
SATA 3Gbps 8B/10B 3 2.4 2.4 1
SATA 6Gbps 8B/10B 6 4.8 4.8 1
SAS 3Gbps 8B/10B 3 2.4 2.4 1-Any
SAS 6Gbps 8B/10B 6 4.8 4.8 1-Any
FC 4Gbps 8B/10B 4.25 3.4 3.4 1
FC 8bps 8B/10B 8.5 6.8 6.8 1
IB SDR 8B/10B 2.5 2 8 (4 lane) 4,12
IB DDR 8B/10B 5 4 16 (4 lane) 4,12
IB QDR 8B/10B 10 8 32 (4 lane) 4,12
GbE: 1000BASEKX
8B/10B 1.25 1 1 1
10GbE:
10GBASE-KX4
8B/10B 3.125 2.5 10 (4 lane) 4
10GbE:
10GBASE-KR
64B/66B 10.3125 10 10 1
Figure 34. Ethernet Growth Path
The M1000e is designed for full support of all near-, medium- and long-term I/O infrastructure needs.
While the M1000e system’s bandwidth capabilities lead the industry, the M1000e is also intelligently
designed for maximum cost, flexibility and performance benefit.
While Fabric A is dedicated to the server module LOMs, requiring Ethernet switch or passthrough
modules for I/O slots A1 and A2, Fabrics B and C can be populated with Ethernet, Fibre Channel, or
InfiniBand solutions.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 44
I/O Modules are used as pairs, with two modules servicing each server module fabric providing a fully
redundant solution. I/O Modules may be passthroughs or switches. Passthrough modules provide
direct 1:1 connectivity from each LOM/mezzanine card port on each server module to the external
network. Switches provide an efficient way to consolidate links from the LOM or Mezzanine cards on
the server modules to uplinks into the customer’s network.
Figure 35. Difference Between Passthroughs and Switch Modules
For more information on the I/O module options, see the PowerEdge M-Series Blades I/O Guide.
9.3 Supported Mezzanine Cards and Switches
Dell supports one mezzanine design standard and one I/O Module design standard for true modular
computing.
The currently supported I/O modules include:
• PowerConnect M6220 Switch; GbE + 10GbE uplinks & stacking
• PowerConnect M6348 Switch; 48 1GbE ports + 10GbE uplinks
• PowerConnect M8024 10Gb Ethernet Switch (SFP+, CX4, & 10Gbase-T uplink module options)
• Cisco® Catalyst® 3032 switch; All 1GbE
• Cisco Catalyst 3130g Switch; All 1GbE + stacking
• Cisco Catalyst 3130x Switch; 1GbE+ 10GbE uplinks & stacking
• Cisco 3130g & 3130x switches can be combined in a stack
• 1Gb Ethernet Pass-Through Module
• 10Gb Ethernet Pass-Through Module (SFP+)
• Brocade® 8Gb Fibre Channel Switch
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 45
• 4Gb Fibre Channel Pass-Through
• Mellanox® DDR (20Gb) InfiniBand Switch
• Mellanox QDR (40Gb) InfiniBand Switch
See the Ethernet I/O Cards page on Dell.com for supported I/O hardware.
9.4 I/O Module Installation
For detailed information on installing the I/O modules in your system, see the I/O Modules section in
the Hardware Owner’s Manual for your specific PowerEdge server.
9.5 FlexAddress
FlexAddress™ delivers persistent storage and network identities, equipping a data center to handle
predictable or even unplanned changes—increase, upgrade, or replace servers without affecting the
network or storage and minimizing downtime.
Dell’s patent-pending FlexAddress technology allows any M-Series blade enclosure to lock the World
Wide Name (WWN) of the Fibre Channel controller and Media Access Control (MAC) of the Ethernet
and iSCSI controller into a blade slot, instead of to the blade’s hardware as was done in the past. By
removing the network and storage identity from the server hardware, customers are now able to
upgrade and replace components or the entire server without changing the identity on the network.
This technology works with any vendor’s installed I/O module as well as with Dell PowerConnect™
products.
FlexAddress delivers the ability to:
• Service a blade or IO Mezzanine card, upgrade the IO mezzanine cards to newer technology,
or upgrade the entire server with new technology while maintaining the mapping to Ethernet
and storage fabrics. This capability allows quick, painless connection and reduces downtime.
This capability is especially powerful when operating in a boot from SAN environment.
• Quickly obtain a list of all MAC/WWNs in the chassis by slot and be assured these will never
change
• Efficiently integrate into existing management and network infrastructure
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 46
Figure 36. FlexAddress Addresses
FlexAddress replaces the factory-assigned World Wide Name/Media Access Control (WWN/MAC) IDs
on a blade with WWN/MAC IDs from the FlexAddress SD card associated with that slot. This userconfigurable
feature enables a choice of iSCSI MAC, Ethernet MAC, and/or WWN persistence, and
thus allows blades to be swapped without affecting SAN Zoning, iSCSI zoning, or any MAC-dependent
functions. The write-protected FlexAddress SD card comes provisioned with unique pool of 208 MACs
and 64 WWNs. Other types of SD cards inserted into the CMC’s SD card slot are ignored.
FlexAddress can be ordered with a new enclosure or implemented on one already owned by a
customer through the purchase of a customer kit. If FlexAddress is purchased with the chassis, it will
be installed and active when the system is powered up. In the case of an existing enclosure,
FlexAddress requires the addition of one FlexAddress SD card to a CMC and an upgrade to the iDRAC
firmware, Ethernet and Fibre Channel controllers’ firmware, server BIOS, and CMC firmware. All
blades and CMC MUST have the correct versions of firmware to properly support this feature. When
redundant CMCs are installed, it is not necessary to put such an SD card in both CMCs, since the
WWN/MAC addresses are pushed to the chassis Control Panel upon enablement for redundancy; if
one CMC becomes inoperable, the other CMC still has access to the WWN/MAC addresses in the
Control Panel. Blades that are up and running are not affected as they already have their WWN/MACs
programmed into their controllers. If a replacement of the control panel is required, the SD card will
push the WWN/MACs back to it. It is important to note that the chassis Control Panel also stores CMC
configuration information, so it is advisable that customers keep a backup of the CMC configuration
file.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 47
The CMC manages the following functions specific to FlexAddress:
• Provides user interface for enabling or disabling the FlexAddress feature—on a per-blade-slot
basis, a per-fabric basis, or both
• Identifies and reports device information for each of the supported fabric types—LOMs,
Ethernet, and Fibre Channel mezzanine cards
• Validates all the components of the FlexAddress feature—SD card validation, System BIOS, IO
controller firmware, CMC firmware, and, iDRAC firmware versions
• Reports FlexAddress feature status for each of the blade slots
• Provides information for both server-assigned (factory-programmed) and chassis-assigned
(FlexAddress) addresses on each supported device
• Logs any system-level errors that may prevent the FlexAddress feature from being used on the
chassis or on a given device.
Figure 37. FlexAddress Screen in the CMC
Table 7. FlexAddress Features and Benefits
Features Benefits
Lock the World Wide Name (WWN) of the Fibre
Channel controller and Media Access Control (MAC) of
the Ethernet and iSCSI controller into a blade slot,
instead of to the blade’s hardware
Easily replace blades without network management
effort
Service or replace a blade or I/O mezzanine card and
maintain all address mapping to Ethernet and storage
fabrics
Ease of management
Easy and highly reliable booting from Ethernet or
Fibre Channel based Storage Area Networks (SANs)
An almost no-touch blade replacement
All MAC/WWN/iSCSIs in the chassis will never change Fewer future address name headaches
Fast & Efficient integration into existing network
infrastructure
No need to learn a new management tool
Low cost vs switch-based solution
FlexAddress is simple and easy to implement Simple and quick to deploy
FlexAddress SD card comes with a unique pool of
MAC/WWNs and is able to be enabled on a single
enclosure at a given time, until disabled
No need for the user to configure
No risk of duplicates on your network or SAN
Works with all I/O modules including Cisco, Brocade,
and Dell PowerConnect switches as well as pass-thru
modules
Choice is independent of switch or pass-through
module
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 48
Wake on LAN (WOL) is enabled after a power down and power up of the enclosure. FlexAddress on
Ethernet devices is programmed by the module server BIOS. In order for the blade BIOS to program
the address, it needs to be operational which requires the blade to be powered up. Once the powerdown
and power-up sequence completes, the FlexAddress feature is available for Wake-On-LAN
(WOL) function.
Following are the four steps required in order to implement FlexAddress on an M1000e:
A Chassis Management Controller (CMC) receives a FlexAddress feature card provisioned with
a unique pool of: 208 MACs and 64 WWNs.
Figure 38. FlexAddress SD Card
The FlexAddress card is inserted at factory or to an already installed chassis in an customer
location (note: to Enable FlexAddress on an existing chassis, blade BIOS, iDRAC firmware, HBA
and Ethernet controller firmware, and CMC firmware must be updated to the latest versions)
Figure 39. SD Slot on bottom of CMC
Select the slots and fabrics you want FlexAddress enabled on (see figure below). note blades
must be powered off and have the latest firmware in order for FlexAddress MAC/WWNs to be
deployed to them.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 49
Figure 40. CMC FlexAddress Summary Screen
FlexAddress MAC/WWNs are now deployed. CMC GUI shows users a summary of Server
Assigned (hardware based) and chassis assigned (FlexAddress) MAC/WWNs for the entire
chassis or per slot (see Figure Figure 41 below). Green Checkmarks denote which identifier is
currently being used.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 50
Figure 41. CMC FlexAddress Server Detail Screen
For more information, review the FlexAddress chapter of the CMC User’s Guide.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 51
10 Storage
The M1000e was designed primarily to support external storage over the network, which is the
primary requirement for customers seeking maximum density.
Figure 42. Examples of Major Storage Platforms Supported
The blade servers also support at least two internal hard drives which can be put into RAID if so
desired.
For details, see the Technical Guide for each of the compatible blade servers offered.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 52
11 Video
The iKVM supports a video display resolution range from 640x480 at 60Hz up to 1280 x 1024 x 65,000
colors (noninterlaced) at 75Hz.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 53
12 Rack Information
12.1 Overview
The RapidRails™ static rail system for the M1000e provides tool-less support for racks with square
mounting holes including all generations of Dell racks except for the 4200 & 2400 series. Also
available are the VersaRails™ static rails, which offer tooled mounting support for racks with square
or unthreaded round mounting holes. Both versions include a strain relief bar and cable enumerator
clips to help manage and secure the cables exiting the back of the system.
12.2 Rails
The RapidRails and VersaRails static rail kits for the M1000e are identical except for their mounting
bracket designs. The mounting brackets on the RapidRails static rails have hooks and a lock button
for supporting tool-less installation in 4-post racks with square mounting holes.
Figure 43. M1000e RapidRails Static Rails
The mounting brackets on the VersaRails static rails have threaded clinch nuts rather than hooks and
a lock button in order to support tooled installation in 4-post racks with unthreaded round mounting
holes. The VersaRails static rails can also be mounted in square hole racks if desired.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 54
Figure 44. M1000e VersaRails Static Rails
The VersaRails static rails are not intended to be mounted in threaded hole racks since the rails
cannot be fully tightened and secured against the rack mounting flange. Neither the VersaRails nor
the RapidRails kits support mounting in 2-post racks.
Mounting
Interface
Rail
Type
Rack Types Supported Rail Adjustability Range (mm)
4-Post 2-Post Square Round Threaded
Square Round Thread Flush Center Min Max Min Max Min Max
RapidRails Static √ X X X X 712 755 — — — —
VersaRails Static √ √ X X X 706 755 706 755 — —
The min-max values listed in the table above represent the allowable distance between the front and
rear mounting flanges in the rack.
12.3 Cable Management Arm (CMA)
Since the M1000e does not need to be extended out of the rack for service, neither the RapidRails
nor the VersaRails static rail systems support a cable management arm. Included instead are a strain
relief bar and cable enumerator clips to help manage and secure the potentially large number of
cables exiting the back of the system.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 55
Figure 45. M1000e Strain Relief Bar and Cable Enumerator Clip (12 Per Kit)
12.4 Rack View
The M1000e is installed on the rails by simply resting the back of the system on the rail ledges,
pushing the system forward until it fully seats, and tightening the thumbscrews on the chassis front
panel.
Figure 46. M1000e Mounted in the Rack
The strain relief bar and cable enumerator clips can be used to help manage and secure the power
cords and I/O cables exiting the back of the system as indicated below.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 56
Figure 47. M1000e Strain Relief Bar and Cable Enumerator Clips
More information can be found in the Rack Installation Guide.
Strain Relief Bar
Cable Enumerator Clips
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 57
13 Virtualization
The M1000e and the blade servers which fit in it have been designed for optimal use with all major
virtualization software platforms.
Figure 48. Examples of Major Virtualization Platforms Supported
The M1000e platform offers many benefits for virtualization:
• Data center Consolidation
o High Density Form Factor
o I/O Bandwidth & Switch Port Savings
o Large Memory Capacity
• Ease Of Mgmt/Deployment
o Management Options
o I/O Virtualization
o Chassis LCD Display
o Embedded Hypervisor
• Reduce Downtime
o Persistent Addresses
o Fully Redundant Power & Cooling
o Fully Redundant I/O
o Hot-Swappable Drives
• Power & Cooling Efficiency
o Super Efficient Power Supplies
o Optimized Airflow
o Best-in-class Fan Technology
Many of the I/O modules offered provide significant benefits for use in virtualized environments,
such as:
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 58
Figure 49. Examples of I/O modules Recommended for Use in Virtualized Environments
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 59
14 Systems Management
14.1 Overview
The M1000e server solution offers a holistic management solution designed to fit into any customer
data center. It features:
• Dual Redundant Chassis Management Controllers (CMC)
o Powerful management for the entire enclosure
o Includes: real-time power management and monitoring; flexible security; status/
inventory/ alerting for blades, I/O and chassis
• iDRAC
o One per blade with full DRAC functionality like other Dell servers including
vMedia/KVM
o Integrates into CMC or can be used separately
• iKVM
o Embedded in the chassis for easy KVM infrastructure incorporation allowing one admin
per blade
o Control Panel on front of M1000e for ―crash cart‖ access
• Front LCD
o Designed for deployment and local status reporting
Onboard graphics and keyboard/mouse USB connect to an optional system level Integrated KVM
(iKVM) module for local KVM access. Full USB access is available through the server module front
panel. In Figure 50 below, OSCAR (On Screen Configuration and Activity Reporting) is the graphic user
interface for the 4161DS or 2161DS-2 console switch used to share a single keyboard/mouse/LCD in a
rack with all the servers in the rack
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 60
Figure 50. System Management Architecture Diagram
Management connections transfer health and control traffic throughout the chassis. The system
management fabric is architected for 100BaseT Ethernet over differential pairs routed to each
module. There are two 100BaseT interfaces between CMCs, one switched and one unswitched. All
system management Ethernet is routed for 100 Mbps signaling. Every module has a management
network link to each CMC, with redundancy provided at the module level. Failure of any individual
link will cause failover to the redundant CMC.
14.2 Server Management
The server module base management solution includes additional features for efficient deployment
and management of servers in a modular server form factor. The base circuit, which integrates the
baseboard management controller (BMC) function with hardware support for Virtual KVM (vKVM) and
Virtual Media (vMedia), is the integrated Dell Remote Access Controller (iDRAC). iDRAC has two
Ethernet connections, one for each CMC, providing system management interface redundancy.
Highlights of the iDRAC solution include the following:
• Dedicated management interface for high‐performance management functions
• vMedia
• vKVM
• IPMI 2.0 Out-of-Band management
• Serial-over-LAN redirection
• Systems Management Architecture for Server Hardware (SMASH) Command Line Protocol (CLP)
• Blade status and inventory
• Active power management
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 61
• Integration with Microsoft® Active Directory®
• Security, Local and Active Directory
Traditional IPMI-based BMC features like hardware monitoring and power control are supported.
The LifeCycle controller on 11th generation servers offers additional features including:
• Unified Server Configurator (USC): Consolidated interface for OS install, hardware
configuration, updates, and diagnostics
o Reduces task time and speed of deployment
o Eliminates media for OS drivers during OS install and update
o Eliminates multiple control ROM options for hardware configuration
o Eases firmware updates with roll-back capability
• Embedded Diagnostics
• Parts Replacement: Automatically updates RAID/NIC firmware to previous levels after parts
replacement.
• Persistent Life Cycle Log
• Out-of-Band Configuration/Update: With the introduction of Lifecycle Controller (LCC) 1.3,
customers and console vendors can initiate and schedule an upgrade to device firmware and
pre-OS software out-of-band. This is useful during ―bare metal‖ deployment scenarios or
change management in operating systems where firmware updates were not possible in the
past (i.e., virtualization).
o Updates are staged on the Lifecycle Controller and applied immediately or during a
scheduled maintenance window.
o Lifecycle controller 1.3 supports updates with BIOS, diagnostics, driver pack, USC,
RAID controller firmware, iDRAC6 firmware, and NIC firmware.
More information on the iDRAC and Lifecycle Controller can be found on support.dell.com.
14.3 Enclosure Management
The CMC provides secure remote management access to the chassis and installed modules. The
M1000e must have at least one CMC and supports an optional redundant module, each occupying a
slot accessible through the rear of the chassis. Redundancy is provided in an Active—Standby pairing
of the modules and failover occurs when the active module has failed or degraded. The CMC
interfaces through dual stacking 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports and one serial port. The CMC serial port
interface provides common management of up to six I/O modules through a single connection.
The CMC provides many features, including:
Deployment
o LCD based deployment ―wizard‖
o Single secure interface for inventory, configuration, monitoring, and alerting for
server modules, chassis infrastructure and I/O Modules
o Centralized configuration for iDRAC, I/O Modules and CMC
o 1:Many iDRAC configuration
o 1:Many Blade Boot Device Selection
o 1:Many vMedia File share
o Customized Slot Naming
o IO Module Configuration and Launch
o WWN/MAC Display & Persistence w/ FlexAddress; Manages FlexAddress Ports
o Support for Network Time Protocol (NTP)
Monitoring and Troubleshooting
o User interface entry point (web, telnet, SSH, serial)
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 62
o Monitoring and alerting for chassis environmental conditions or component health
thresholds. This includes but is not limited to the following:
Real time power consumption
Power supplies
Fans
Power allocation
Temperature
CMC redundancy
o I/O fabric consistency
o Consolidated Status Reporting & Event Logs
Email & SNMP alerting
Support for Remote Syslog
Blade Events displayed in CMC
o Consolidated Chassis/Blade/IO Inventory
o ―Virtual Server Reseat‖ simulates blade removal/insertion
o Remotely blink LEDs to Identify Components
Updating
o Reporting of Firmware versions
o 1:Many iDRAC Firmware update
o Consolidated CMC and iKVM F/W update
o 1:Many update of drivers & Firmware via Remote File Share (w/ Repository Manager)
o 2 x 10/100/1000Mb Ethernet ports + 1 serial port
Real Time Power/Thermal Monitoring and Management
o Consolidated Chassis/Blade Power Reporting
o Power budget management and allocation
o Real Time System AC Power Consumption with reset-able peak and minimum values
o System level power limiting and slot based power prioritization
o Manages Dynamic Power Engagement functionality
o Manages fan speed control
o Power sequencing of modules in conjunction with the defined chassis power states
Separate management network
o Configuration of the embedded management switch, which facilitates external access
to manageable modules
o Provides connection from management network to iDRAC on each of the blades and
the management interfaces on the integrated I/O Modules
o 2nd Ethernet port supports daisy chaining of CMCs for improved cable management
Security
o Local Authentication &/or AD Integration
OpenLDAP coming in CMC 3.0
o Supports multiple levels of user roles and permissions for control of chassis, IO, &/or
server blades, including Microsoft Active Directory
o IPv6 Support
o VLAN tagging for iDRAC, CMC, and IOMs
o Two Factor Authentication w/ SmartCard
o Single Sign On using OS credentials (with AD)
o Private Key Authentication (PK Auth)
o Secure Web (SSL) and CLI (Telnet/SSH) interfaces
Support for Industry-Standard Interfaces
o SMASH CLP
o WSMAN
o CIM XML
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 63
o SNMP
The Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller (iDRAC) on each server module is connected to the
CMC via dedicated, fully redundant 100 Mbps Ethernet connections wired through the midplane to a
dedicated 24‐port Ethernet switch on the CMC, and exposed to the outside world through the CMC’s
external Management Ethernet interface (10/100/1000M). This connection is distinct from the three
redundant data Fabrics A, B and C. Unlike previous generations of Dell server modules, the iDRAC’s
connectivity is independent of, and in addition to, the onboard GbE LOMs on the server module. Each
server module’s iDRAC has its own IP address and can be accessed, if security settings allow, directly
through a supported browser, telnet, SSH, or IPMI client on the management station.
Figure 51. Chassis Management Controller
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 64
Figure 52. CMC Module Features
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 65
14.4 Integrated Keyboard and Mouse Controller (iKVM)
Figure 53. M1000e iKVM
The modular enclosure supports one optional Integrated KVM (iKVM) module. This module occupies a
single slot accessible through the rear of the chassis. The iKVM redirects local server module video,
keyboard, and mouse electrical interfaces to either the iKVM local ports or the M1000e front panel
ports. The iKVM allows connection to a VGA monitor, USB keyboard, and USB mouse without use of a
dongle. The iKVM also has an Analog Console Interface (ACI) compatible RJ45 port that allows the
iKVM to tie the interface to a KVM appliance upstream of the iKVM via CAT5 cabling. Designed with
Avocent technology, the ACI port reduces cost and complexity by giving access for sixteen servers
using only one port on an external KVM Switch.
The iKVM contains a ―seventeenth blade‖ feature, connecting the CMC Command Line Interface via
the KVM switch and allowing text-based deployment wizards on VGA monitors. iKVM firmware is
updated through the CMC.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 66
Figure 54. Rear iKVM interface Panel
The front of the enclosure includes two USB connections for a keyboard and mouse, along with a
video connection port, both of which require the Avocent iKVM switch to be activated for them to be
enabled. These ports are designed for connecting a local front ―crash cart‖ console to be connected
to access the blade servers while standing in front of the enclosure.
Figure 55. Front Keyboard/Video Ports
Dell modular servers also include vKVM as a standard feature, routing the operator’s keyboard
output, mouse output and video between the target server module and a console located on the
system management IP network. With up to two simultaneous vKVM sessions per blade, remote
management now satisfies virtually any usage model. vMedia is also now standard, providing
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 67
emulation of USB DVD‐R/W, USB CD‐R/W, USB Flash Drive, USB ISO image and USB Floppy over an IP
interface. Connection to vKVM and vMedia is through the CMC, with encryption available on a per
stream basis.
It is possible to connect the following Dell\Avocent KVMIP switches to the iKVM card in the M1000e
blade enclosure using a CAT5 cable.
• Dell:
o 2161DS-2
o 4161DS
o 2321DS
o 180AS
o 2160AS
• Avocent:
o All DSR xx20, xx30, xx35 models
o All Mergepoint Unity models
For other Avocent branded models, customers need to connect to the card using the USB adapter.
More information on the iKVM can be found in the iKVM training material on us.training.dell.com, in
the iKVM Module section of the Dell PowerEdge Modular Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual, in the
CMC User Guide, and at dell.avocent.com.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 68
15 Peripherals
Common peripherals for the M1000e include:
• An external USB DVD-ROM Drive is often used for local installation of OS or other software.
• A Dell 1U rack console which enables customers to mount a system administrator’s control
station directly into a Dell rack without sacrificing rack space needed for servers and other
peripherals. It features:
o 17" LCD flat-panel monitor with height adjustment
o Specially designed keyboard and trackball combination
o Twin PS/2 connectors
o SVGA video output
o 1U rack-mounting kit
o Simple installation
• Uninterruptible power supplies for racks, which provides a temporary power source to bridge
the critical moments after a power failure, allowing:
o Time to save and back up the data being processed
o Safely power down your servers
o Support for up to 5000 VA (3750 watts)
• Power distribution units (PDUs): use the Dell Energy Smart Solution Advisor (ESSA) to see what
a given chassis configuration will require.
o Single phase needs one PDU per chassis
Use 30A for a medium to lightly loaded chassis
Use 60A for a heavily loaded
o For 3 phase:
30A 3 phase for a heavily loaded single chassis
50 or 60A 3 phase for multiple chassis.
o Generally customers run 2 x 3 phase circuits to the rack via a PDU, then the PDU
breaks out single phases to each PSU.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 69
16 Packaging Options
Figure 56. Enclosure After Unpacking
The M1000e comes from the factory on a pallet with components installed. The components must be
taken out before it is installed in a rack. There are cardboard slings under the chassis to enable two
people to lift it.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 70
Appendix A. Regulatory Certifications
Please see the external Product Safety, EMC, and Environmental Datasheets on dell.com at:
http://www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance_datasheets.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 71
Appendix B. Status Messages
C.1 LCD Status Messages
See the M1000e Configuration Guide and CMC Administrator Reference Guide for details.
C.2 System Status Messages
See the CMC Administrator Reference Guide for details.
Dell
PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 72
Appendix C. Additional Information
Videos highlighting the major M1000e features are available on
http://www.dell.com/html/us/products/pedge/poweredge_mseries_blade_videos/poweredge.html
The PowerEdge M1000e Configuration Guide, Hardware Owner’s Manual and CMC Administrator
Reference Guide each contain a wealth of additional information about the PowerEdge M1000e’s
capabilities.
The blade training material on dtt.us.dell.comdtt.us.dell.com is also a useful reference.
TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK
INSIDE THE OPTIPLEX 780
TM
TM
DELL
OPTIPLEX 780
OVERVIEW
Mini Tower Computer (MT) View 3
Desktop Computer (DT) View 4
Small Form Factor Computer (SFF) View 5
Ultra Small Form Factor Computer (USFF) View 6
MARKETING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
Operating System, Chipset 7
Processor 8
Advanced System Manageability Modes, Memory 9
Drives and Removable Storage, System Board Connectors 10-11
Graphics/Video Controller 12
External Ports/Connectors 12
Communications—Network Adapter (NIC), Modem 13
Audio and Speakers, Keyboard and Mouse 13
Security, Service and Support, Software 14
DETAILED ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS
System Dimensions (Physical) 15
System Board Connector Maximum Allowable Dimensions 15
System Level Environmental and Operating Conditions 16
Power 17
Audio 18
Communications 18-22
Graphics/Video Controller 23-26
Hard Drives 27-39
Optical Drive 40-42
BIOS Defaults 43-44
Chassis Enclosure and Ventilation Requirements 45
Acoustic Noise Emission Information 46-49
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
3
FRONT VIEW
1 Optical Drive (optional) 7 Power Button, Power
Light
2 Optical Drive Eject Button 8 Diagnostic Lights (4)
3 Optical Drive Bay 9 Headphone Connector
4 Media Card Reader
(optional)
10 Microphone Connector
5 USB 2.0 Connectors (2) 11 Network Connectivity
Light
6 Hard Drive Activity Light
BACK VIEW
1 Power Connector 4 Power-Supply Vent
2 Back-Panel Connectors 5 Chassis Lock Loop
3 Expansion Card Slots (4) 6 Cover Release Latch
BACK PANEL CONNECTORS
1 Parallel Connector 7 Line-in Connector
2 Serial Connector 8 USB 2.0 Connectors
(6)
3 Link Integrity Light 9 VGA Video Connector
4 Network Connector 10 eSATA Connector
5 Network Activity Light 11 DisplayPort Connector
6 Line-out Connector
MINI TOWER COMPUTER (MT) VIEW
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
4
FRONT VIEW
1 Optical Drive (optional) 7 Network Connectivity
Light
2 Optical Drive Eject Button 8 Microphone Connector
3 USB 2.0 Connectors (2) 9 Headphone Connector
4 Hard Drive Activity Light 10 Media Card Reader
(optional)
5 Power Button, Power
Light
6 Diagnostic Lights (4)
BACK VIEW
1 Expansion Card Slots (3) 4 Chassis Lock Loop
2 Air Vent 5 Power Connector
3 Cover Release Latch 6 Back-Panel Connectors
BACK PANEL CONNECTORS
1 Parallel Connector 7 Line-in Connector
2 Serial Connector 8 USB 2.0 Connectors
(6)
3 Link Integrity Light 9 VGA Video Connector
4 Network Connector 10 eSATA Connector
5 Network Activity Light 11 DisplayPort Connector
6 Line-out Connector
DESKTOP COMPUTER (DT) VIEW
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
5
FRONT VIEW
1 Optical Drive (optional) 7 Power Button, Power
Light
2 Optical Drive Eject Button 8 Microphone Connector
3 USB 2.0 Connectors (2) 9 Headphone Connector
4 Network Connectivity
Light
10 Media Card Reader
(optional)
5 Diagnostic Lights (4)
6 Hard Drive Activity Light
BACK VIEW
1 Chassis Lock Loop 4 Back-Panel Connectors
2 Cover Release Latch 5 Expansion Card Slots (2)
3 Power Connector
BACK PANEL CONNECTORS
1 Parallel Connector 7 Line-in Connector
2 Serial Connector 8 USB 2.0 Connectors
(6)
3 Link Integrity Light 9 VGA Video Connector
4 Network Connector 10 eSATA Connector
5 Network Activity Light 11 DisplayPort Connector
6 Line-out Connector
SMALL FORM FACTOR COMPUTER (SFF) VIEW
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
6
BACK VIEW
1 Network Activity Light 9 Display Port Connector
2 Captive Thumbscrew 10 VGA Video Connector
3 Padlock Ring 11 Serial Connector
4 Security Cable Slot 12 USB Connector 2.0 (5)
5 Power Connector 13 Network Connector
6 Line-Out Connector 14 Link Integrity Light
7 Line-in/ Microphone Connector 15 WiFi Antenna (optional)
8 eSATA Connector
FRONT VIEW
1 Optical Drive 7 Headphone Connector
2 Power Button, Power Light 8 Microphone Connector
3 Drive Activity Light 9 USB Connector 2.0 (2)
4 Diagnostic Lights (4)
5 Network Connectivity Light
6 WiFi Activity Light (optional)
ULTRA SMALL FORM FACTOR COMPUTER (USFF) VIEW
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
7
MARKETING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
NOTE: Offerings may vary by region. For more information regarding the configuration of your computer, click
Start>Help and Support and select the option to view information about your computer.
OPERATING SYSTEM
NOTE: One of the follow ing Operating Systems will be preinstalled.
MT DT SFF USFF
Windows 7® operating system
Microsoft® Windows 7® Basic; Microsoft® Windows 7® Home Premium;
Microsoft® Windows 7® Professional (32 and 64 bit); Microsoft®
Windows 7® Ultimate (32 and 64 bit)
Windows Vista® operating system
Windows Vista® Business SP2 (32 and 64 bit), Windows Vista® Home
Basic SP2 (32 bit), Windows Vista® Business SP2 (32 bit) via Windows
7 Professional Downgrade Rights, Windows Vista® Ultimate
SP2 (32 bit) via Windows 7 Ultimate Downgrade Rights,
Windows XP® operating system
Windows® XP Professional SP3 via Windows Vista® Business or Ultimate
Downgrade Rights (32 bit), Windows® XP Professional SP3 via
Microsoft® Windows 7® Professional or Microsoft® Windows 7® Ultimate
Downgrade Rights (32 bit)
Other FreeDOS for (N-series), Ubuntu® Linux (China only)
OS Media Support X X X X
CHIPSET
MT DT SFF USFF
Chipset Intel Q45 Express Chipset w/ICH10DO
Non-volatile memory on chipset
BIOS Configuration SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) 64Mbit (8MB) located at SPI_FLASH on chipset
TPM 1.2 Security Device (Trusted Platform Module)1
16KB located at TPM1.2 on chipset
TCM (Trusted Computing Module) Available in China only
Non-TPM Available in select countries
NIC EEPROM LOM configuration contained within SPI_FLASH – no dedicated LOM
EEPROM
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
8
PROCESSOR
NOTE: Global Standard Products (GSP) are a subset of Dell’s relationship products that are managed for availability and synchronized
transitions on a worldwide basis. They ensure the same platform is available for purchase globally. This allows customers to
reduce the number of configurations managed on a worldwide basis, thereby reducing their costs. They also enable companies to
implement global IT standards by locking in specific product configurations worldwide. The following GSP processors identified below
will be made available to Dell customers.
NOTE: Processor numbers are not a measure of performance. Processor availability subject to change and may vary by region/
country.
MT DT SFF USFF
Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Processors
Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Q9650/3.00GHz, 12M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP
Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Q9550/2.83GHz, 12M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP
Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Q9400/2.66GHz, 6M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP
Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Q8400/2.66GHz, 4M, 1333FSB X X X
Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Q8300/2.50GHz, 4M, 1333FSB X X X
Intel® Core™ 2 Duo and Pentium® Dual Core Processors
Intel® Core™ 2 Duo E8600/3.33GHz, 6M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP
Intel® Core™ 2 Duo E8500/3.16GHz, 6M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP
Intel® Core™ 2 Duo E8400/3.0GHz, 6M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP
Intel® Core™ 2 Duo E7600/3.06GHz, 3M, 1066FSB X X X X
Intel® Core™ 2 Duo E7500/2.93GHz, 3M, 1066FSB X X X X
Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E6700/3.2GHz, 2M, 1066FSB X X X X
Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E6500/2.93GHz, 2M, 1066FSB X X X X
Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E6300/2.8GHz, 2M, 1066FSB X X X X
Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E5500/2.8GHz, 2M, 800FSB X X X X
Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E5400/2.7GHz, 2M, 800FSB X X X X
Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E5300/2.60GHz, 2M, 800FSB X X X X
Intel® Celeron® Processors
Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core 3300/2.50GHz, 1M, 800FSB X X X X
Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core 3200/2.40GHz, 1M, 800FSB X X X X
Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core 1600/2.40GHz, 512K, 800FSB X X X X
Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core 1500/2.20GHz, 512K, 800FSB X X X X
Intel® Celeron® 450/2.20GHz, 512K, 800FSB X X X X
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
9
MEMORY
Memory modules should be installed in pairs of matched memory size, speed, and technology. If the memory
modules are not installed in matched pairs, a slight reduction in performance may occur.
NOTE: This system supports both 1066MHz and 1333MHz DDR3 memory, how ever the memory w ill operate at
1066MHz speed due to chipset specifications .
ADVANCED SYSTEM MANAGEABILITY MODES
NOTE: Hardware management mode options allow you to select the right systems management feature support
for your enterprise. Dell’s innovati ve approach to scalable remote client management offers you a choice of
built-in hardware management capabilities across platform offerings.
The OptiPlex 780 supports Intel ®
vPro™ technology and Intel ® Standard Manageability w hich supports the follow
ing features: Asset reporting and inventor y capabilities, Remote troubleshooting and repair, Client System
Isolation, Remote patching/ updating
Intel® vPro™ technology adds these additional features: Client initialed “Fast Call for Help”/ beyond firew all
systems management capability, Microsoft N AP support, Hardened security monitoring, Support for the latest
generation of Intel® Core™ 2 Processors
MT DT SFF USFF
Intel® vPro Technology Enabled* (iAMT 5.x) X X X X
Intel® vPro Technology DIsabled * (iAMT 5.x) X X X X
Intel® Standard Manageability * X X X X
No Out-of-Band Systems Management X X X X
MT DT SFF USFF
Type: DDR3 Synch DRAM Non-ECC Memory 1066MHz and 1333MHz
DIMM Slots 4 4 4 2
DIMM Capacities Up to 4GB Up to 4GB Up to 4GB Up to 4GB
Minimum Memory 1GB 1GB 1GB 1GB
Maximum System Memory 16GB1
16GB1
16GB1
8GB
Memory configurations
16GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X
8GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X X
8GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X
4GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X
4GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X X
4GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X X
3GB DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (3 DIMM) X X X
3GB DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X X
2GB DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X X
2GB DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X X
1GB DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X X
1 The total amount of available memory will be less than 4GB. The amount less depends on the actual system configuration. To fully utilize 4GB or
more of memory requires a 64-bit enabled processor and 64-bit operating system.
*The functionality described above requires an appropriate software management console
-I nt el vPr o Tec h n ol o g y E n a b l ed : T hi s op ti o n en a bl es f ul l vPr o o u t of b a n d f u nc ti o na l i t y. R e q ui r es a vPr o pr o ce s s or .
-I nt el vPr o Tec h n ol o g y D i s ab l ed : T hi s op ti o n di sa bl es vP r o t ec h n ol o gy b u t al l ow s fo r t he l at er ena b l em e nt o f vP r o a s de -
s i r e d. R e q ui r es a vPr o pr o ce s s or
-I nt el S ta n d ar d M an a ge a bi l i t y: T h i s o p ti on de l i ver s a po r ti on o f b asi c ou t o f ba n d c a p ab i l i ti es ( se e a b o ve)
- N o O ut o f Ban d S ys t e m s M a n a ge me n t : Th i s op ti o n d oe s n o t s u p p or t ou t of b a n d m a na g em e nt. C a n n o t be e nab l ed a ft er
p o i nt o f sal e.
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
10
DRIVES AND REMOVABLE STORAGE
MT DT SFF USFF
Bays:
3.5-inch bay (External 19-1 Media Card Reader) 1 1 1 (slim-line)
5.25-inch bay (External Optical) 2 1 1 (slim-line)
Hard Drives Supported (Internal and External) 2 2 2 1
Optical Drives Supported 2 1 1 1
Interface:
SATA 4 3 3 2
3.5” Hard Drives:
160GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD X X X
80GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD X X X
1TB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X
2.5” Hard Drives:
320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X X
250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X X
160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X X
250GB1 SATA Full Disk Encryption HDD X X X X
160GB1 SATA Full Disk Encryption HDD X X X X
128GB1 SATA Solid State Drive X X X X
64GB1 SATA Solid State Drive X X X X
RAID 1 Data Protection: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives)
160GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD (3.5”) X
80GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD (3.5”) X
1TB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X
500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X
320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X
250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X
160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X
320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X
250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X
160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
11
DRIVES AND REMOVABLE STORAGE
MT DT SFF USFF
RAID 0 Performance: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives)
320GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD (3.5”) X
160GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD (3.5”) X
2TB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X
1TB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X
640GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X
500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X
320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X
640GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X
500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X
320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X
Optical Drive: (SFF/USFF require slim-line optical drive)
Blu-ray Writer (available in 2H 2010) SATA
1.5Gbit/s
SATA
1.5Gbit/s
SATA
1.5Gbit/s
SATA
1.5Gbit/s
DVD+/-RW2 SATA
1.5Gbit/s
SATA
1.5Gbit/s
SATA
1.5Gbit/s
SATA
1.5Gbit/s
DVD-ROM3 SATA
1.5Gbit/s
SATA
1.5Gbit/s
SATA
1.5Gbit/s
SATA
1.5Gbit/s
Media Card Reader:
Dell 19 in 1 Media Card Reader 480Mb/s
1
For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less.
2 Discs burned with this drive may not be compatible with some existing drives and players; using DVD+R media provides maximum compatibility.
3 DVD-ROM drives may have write-capable hardware that has been disabled via firmware modifications.
SYSTEM BOARD CONNECTORS
NOTE: See Detailed Engineering Specifications for maximum card dimensions.
MT DT SFF USFF
PCI Slot(s): number of 2 2 1
PCIe x16 Slot: number of 1 1 1
PCIe x1 Slot: number of 1 0 0
Flexbay 1 1 1
Serial ATA (SATA) 4 3 3 2
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
12
MT DT SFF USFF
Integrated Intel GMA 4500 Integrated on system board
Enhanced Graphic/Video Options
DVI (Digital) Adapter Card Optional card
1GB NVIDIA GeForce GT330 with DVI or VGA and S-Video Out
(adapters convert to dual DVI or dual VGA) Optional card
512MB ATI RADEON HD 4550 Graphics with dual DVI or VGA
and S-Video Out (adapters convert to dual DVI or dual VGA) Optional card
256MB ATI RADEON HD 3450 Graphics with dual DVI or VGA
and S-Video Out (adapters convert to dual DVI or dual VGA) Optional card
256MB ATI RADEON HD 3470 Graphics with Dual DP (adapters
convert to dual DVI or dual VGA) Optional card
256MB NVIDIA GeForce 9300 GE with dual DVI or VGA and SVideo
Out (adapters convert to dual DVI or dual VGA) Optional card
NVIDIA Quadro NVS 420 (adapters covert to quad DVI or DP) Optional card
GRAPHICS/VIDEO CONTROLLER
NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF
supports low profile card.
See chassis diagrams section for port/connector locations MT DT SFF USFF
USB 2.0 2 Front, 6 Rear, 1 Internal 2 Front, 5
Rear
Serial 1 rear, second port optional via card 1 Rear
eSATA 1 Rear 1 Rear
Parallel 1 Rear
Network Connector (RJ-45) 1 Rear
PS/2 Optional via add-in card
1394 Controller Optional via add-in card
Video:
VGA 1 Rear
DVI-I Optional via add-in card
DisplayPort 1 Rear
Audio:
Line in for microphone 1 Front
Line in for microphone or stereo 1 Rear
Line out for headphones or speakers 1 Front, 1 Rear
Risers: (replaces 1 PCI slot and 1 PCIe slot on DT system board)
Combo full height riser with 1 PCI and 1 PCIe connector X
Dual full height riser with 2 PCI connectors X
EXTERNAL PORTS/CONNECTORS
NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF
supports low profile card.
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
13
COMMUNICATIONS – MODEM
NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser.
MT DT SFF USFF
Intel® 82567LM Gigabit1 Ethernet LAN 10/100/1000 (Remote
Wake Up, PXE support and Intel Active Management Technology
support)
Integrated on system board
Broadcom NetXtreme 10/100/1000 PCIe Gigabit Networking
Card Optional via add-in card
1
This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network
infrastructure is required.
MT DT SFF USFF
V.92 Data/Fax Controllerless Modem Optional via add-in card
MT DT SFF USFF
Dell Wireless 1505 PCIe WLAN card (802.11n) Optional via add-in card
Dell Wireless 1510 miniPCIe WLAN card (802.11n) Optional
Dell Wireless 1520 miniPCIe WLAN card (802.11n) Optional via add-in card
COMMUNICATIONS – WIRELESS
MT DT SFF USFF
ADI 1984A High Definition Audio Codec Integrated on system board
Internal Dell Business Audio Speaker Optional
Dell AX210 2.0 Desktop Speakers Optional
Dell AX510/AX510PA Flat Panel Soundbar Speakers Optional
Dell AY410 30W 2.1 Stereo Speakers with Subwoofer Optional
AUDIO AND SPEAKERS
MT DT SFF USFF
Dell USB Entry Keyboard with optional palmrest Standard
Dell QuietKey Keyboard with optional palmrest Optional
Dell Multimedia Pro Keyboard Optional
Dell Smartcard Keyboard Optional
Dell USB Optical Mouse Optional
Dell Laser Mouse Optional
Dell Logo Mouse Pad Optional
KEYBOARD AND MOUSE
COMMUNICATIONS - NETWORK ADAPTER (NIC)
NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF
supports low profile card.
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
14
SECURITY
SERVICE AND SUPPORT
NOTE: For more details on Dell Service Plans please to go to: www.dell.com/service/service_plans
SOFTWARE
MT DT SFF USFF
Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 1.21
Integrated on system board
Trusted Computing Module (TCM) Integrated on system board (China only)
Chassis Intrusion Switch Optional
Dell Smartcard Keyboard Optional
Chassis lock slot and loop support Standard
1
TPM is not available in all countries. Depending on your country regulations, TCM or No-TPM system boards will be made available.
MT DT SFF USFF
3 Year Warranty1 Next Business Day On-site2
(3-3-3) Standard
ProSupport Optional
1
For a copy of our guarantees or limited warranties, please write Dell USA L.P., Attn: Warranties, One Dell Way, Round Rock, TX 78682. For more
information, visit www.dell.com/warranty.
2 Service may be provided by third-party. Technician will be dispatched if necessary following phone-based troubleshooting. Subject to parts availability,
geographical restrictions and terms of service contract. Service timing dependent upon time of day call placed to Dell. U.S. only.
MT DT SFF USFF
Dell Client Manager Available via Dell.com
Dell ControlPoint Standard
Norton 2009 Internet Security 30 Day Trial or Optional Subscription
McAfee 10 SecurityCenter 30 Day Trial or Optional Subscription
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
15
DETAILED ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS
SYSTEM DIMENSIONS (PHYSICAL)
NOTE: System Weight and Shipping Weight is based on a typical configuration and may var y based on PC
configuration. A typical configuration includes: integrated graphics, one hard drive, one optical drive, and
one diskette drive.
SYSTEM BOARD CONNECTOR MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE DIMENSIONS
MT DT SFF USFF
Chassis Volume (liters) 33.0 16.0 10.7 3.7
Chassis Weight (pounds/kilograms) 25.8 / 11.7 18.2 / 8.26 15 / 6.80 7.0/ 3.2
Chassis Dimensions: (HxWxD)
Height (inches/centimeters) 16.1 / 40.8 4.5 / 11.4 3.65 / 9.26 9.40/ 23.9
Width (inches/centimeters) 7.4 / 18.7 15.7 / 39.9 12.4 / 31.4 2.60/ 6.50
Depth (inches/centimeters) 17.0 / 43.3 13.9 / 35.3 13.4 / 34 9.30/ 23.6
Shipping Weight (pounds/kilograms - includes packaging materials) 43.5 / 19.73 28 / 12.7 21.3 / 9.66 13.5/ 6.12
Packaging Parameters (HxWxD)
Height (inches/centimeters) 22.38/56.85 20.63 / 52.4 20.88/50.04 18.69/47.5
Width (inches/centimeters) 22.25/56.52 20.31/51.59 19.38/49.23 15.75/40.0
Depth (inches/centimeters) 14.25 / 36.2 11.75/29.85 10.63 / 27 7.75/19.7
MT DT SFF USFF
PCI Slots 2 2 1
Height (inches/centimeters) 4.376 /
11.115 2.731 / 6.89
Length (inches/centimeters) 7.4 / 18.796* 6.6 / 16.764
PCIe x16 Slots 1 1 1
Height (inches/centimeters) 4.376 /
11.115 2.731 / 6.89
Length (inches/centimeters) 7.4 / 18.796* 6.6 / 16.764
PCIe x1 Slots 1
Height (inches/centimeters) 4.376 /
11.115
Length (inches/centimeters) 7.4 / 18.796*
Risers: (replaces 1 PCI slot and 1 PCIe slot on DT system board)
Combo Full Height Riser with 1 PCI and 1 PCIe connector (HxL) 1
Height (inches/centimeters) 4.376 /
11.115
Length (inches/centimeters)*,
** 6.6 /
16.764
Dual Full Height Riser with 2 PCI connectors (HxL) 1
Height (inches/centimeters) 4.376 /
11.115
Length (inches/centimeters)*,
** 6.6 /
16.764
* Card length can be longer than standard Half-Length Card but cannot be a Full-Length Card.
** 6.9/17.53 in/cm is longer than the standard Half-Length Card
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
16
SYSTEM LEVEL ENVIRONMENTAL AND OPERATING CONDITIONS
MT DT SFF USFF
Temperature
Operating 10° to 35° C (50° to 95° F)
Non-Operating (Storage) -40° to 65° C (-40° to -149° F)
Relative Humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing)
Maximum vibration
Operating 0.25 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 0.5 octave/min
Non-Operating 0.5 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 1 octave/min
Maximum Shock
Operating Bottom half-sine pulse with a change in velocity of
50.8 cm/sec (20 inches/sec)
Non-Operating 27-G faired square wave with a velocity change of
508 cm/sec (200 inches/sec)
Maximum Altitude
Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft)
Non-Operating –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
17
POWER
NOTE: These form factors utilize a more efficient Active Power Factor Correction (APFC) pow er supply. Dell
recommends only Uni versal Pow er Supplies (UPS) based on Sine Wave output for APFC PSUs, not an approximation
of a Sine Wave, Square Wave, or quasi -Square Wave. If you have questions, please contact the manufacture
to confirm the output type.
MT
APFC EPA
DT
APFC EPA
SFF
APFC EPA
USFF
EPA
Power Supply Wattage
305W 255W High
Efficiency 255W 255 W High
Efficiency 235W 235W High
Efficiency
180W High
Efficiency
AC input Voltage
Range
90 –
264Vac
90 –
264Vac
90 –
264Vac
90 –
264Vac
90 –
264Vac
90 –
264Vac 90 – 264Vac
AC input current (low
ac range/high AC
range)
5.6A / 2.8A 3.6A / 1.8A 5.0A / 2.5A 4.0A / 2.0A 4.5A /
2.25A
3.5A /
1.75A 2.6A / 1.3A
AC input Frequency 47HZ /
63HZ
47HZ /
63HZ
47HZ /
63HZ
47HZ /
63HZ
47HZ /
63HZ
47HZ /
63HZ 47 – 63 Hz
AC holdup time (80%
load) 16MSEC 16MSEC 16MSEC 16MSEC 16MSEC 16MSEC 16 ms
Average Efficiency
(Energy Star 5.0 Compliant)
87 – 90 –
87% @ 20
– 50 –
100% load
87 – 90 –
87% @ 20
– 50 –
100% load
87 – 90 –
87% @ 20
– 50 –
100% load
87 – 90 –
87% @ 20 –
50 – 100%
load
Typical Efficiency
(Active PFC) 65% 65% 65% N/A
DC parameters
+3.3v output 8.0A 8.0A 7.0 A 7.0 A 5A 5A N/A
+5.0v output 16A 16A 15A 15A 16A 16A N/A
+12.0v output 12vA/15A;
12VB/10A
12VA/13A;
12VB/7A 18A 18A 17A 17A
+12VA -
9.0 A &
+12VB - 7.0
A
Note: +12VB
Rated at
0.4A when in
Standby
Mode.
+5.0v auxiliary output 4.0A 4.0A 4.0 4.0 4.0A 4.0A N/A
-12.0v output 0.5A 0.5A 0.5A 0.5A 0.5A 0.5A 0.1 A
Max total power 305W 255W 255W 255W 235W 235W 180W
Max combined +3.3v /
+5.0v power 80W 80W 91.5W 91.5W 88W 88W N/A
Max combined 12.0v
power (note: only if
more than one 12v rail)
240W 240W N/A N/A N/A N/A 180W
BTUs/h (based on PSU
max wattage) 1603 BTU 1000 BTU 1341 BTU 1000 BTU 1235 BTU 921 BTU 723 BTU
3.3v CMOS battery (type and estimated battery life)
Power Supply Fan 80*25mm 80*25mm 92*25mm 92*25mm 80*15mm 80*15mm N/A
Compliance:
1watt requirement Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Blue Angel Compliant Select Select Select Select Select Select Select
Climate Savers /
80Plus Compliant No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes
FEMP (CECP) Standby
Power Compliant No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
18
AUDIO
COMMUNICATIONS - NETWORK ADAPTER (NIC)
NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF
supports low profile card.
INTEGRATED ADI 1984A HIGH DEFINITION AUDIO MT DT SFF USFF
High Definition Stereo support X X X X
Number of channels 2
Number of Bits / Audio resolution 16, 20, and 24-bit resolution
Sampling rate (recording/playback) Independent 8, 11.025, 16, 22.05, 32, 44.1,
48, 88.2, 96, 176.4, and 192 kHz sample rates
Signal to Noise Ratio 96+ dB audio outputs, 90+ dB audio inputs
Analog Audio X X X X
Dolby Digital
THX
Digital out (S/PDIF)
Audio Jack Impedance
Microphone 150 kΩ
Line-In 150 kΩ
Line-Out 190 Ω
Headphone .5 Ω
Internal Speaker Power Rating 2W
INTEGRATED INTEL® 82567 GIGABIT1
ETHERNET LAN 10/100/1000 MT DT SFF USFF
External Connector Type RJ45
Data Rates supported 10/100/1000 Mbps
Controller Details
Controller bus architecture (example PCIe 1.0a x1) Intel Gigabit LAN Connect Interface (GLCI) and
LAN Connect Interface (LCI)
Integrated memory N/A
Data transfer mode (example Bus-Master DMA) N/A
Power consumption (full operation per data rate connection speed) 680mW (Max.)
Power consumption (standby operation) 141mW (Max.)
IEEE standards compliance (example 802.1P) 802.3
Hardware Certifications (example FCC, B, GS mark…) N/A
Boot ROM Support EEPROM (located in SPI)
Network Transfer Mode (example Full Duplex, Half Duplex)
Network Transfer Rate (example 10BASE-T (half-duplex) 10 Mbps
10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps
100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps
100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 Mbps
1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps
10 Mb (full/half-duplex)
100 Mb (full/half-duplex)
1000 Mb (full-duplex)
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
19
COMMUNICATIONS - NETWORK ADAPTER (NIC) (CONT.)
COMMUNICATIONS – INTEGRATED LAN
NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF
supports low profile card.
INTEGRATED INTEL® 82567 GIGABIT1
ETHERNET LAN 10/100/1000 (CONT.) MT DT SFF USFF
Environmental
Operating temperature 0° C to 70° C (32° F to 158° F)
Operating humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing)
Operating System Driver Support
Windows® XP, Windows Vista® Ultimate, Windows
Vista® Business 32 bit/64 bit, Windows Vista
Home Basic
Manageability (examples WOL, PXE) WOL, PXE 2.1
Management Capabilities Alerting Intel® Standard Manageability, Intel Core 2 Duo/
Quad Processor with vPro Technology
1
This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network
infrastructure is required.
Broadcom NetXtreme 10/100/1000 PCIe Gigabit1 Networking Card MT DT SFF USFF
Connector Type RJ45
Data Rates supported 10/100/1000 Mbps Half/Full duplex
Controller Details
Controller bus architecture (example PCIe 1.0a x1) PCIe c1.0a x1
Integrated memory 64KBytes RX, 8KBytes TX
Data transfer mode (example Bus-Master DMA) Bus-Master DMA
Power consumption (full operation per data rate connection speed) 2.84W (860mA @ +3.3V)
Power consumption (standby operation) Less than 300mW
IEEE standards compliance (example 802.1P) 802.3, 802.2, 802.3x, 802.1p
Hardware Certifications (example FCC, B, GS mark…) FCC B, VCCI B, CE
Boot ROM Support No
Network Transfer Mode (example Full Duplex, Half Duplex) Full Duplex/Half Duplex
Network Transfer Rate (example 10BASE-T (half-duplex) 10 Mbps
10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps
100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps
100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 Mbps
1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps
10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps Max*
100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps Max*
100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 MbpsMax*
1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps Max*
* Depends on the system environment.
1
This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network
infrastructure is required.
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
20
COMMUNICATIONS – INTEGRATED LAN (CONT.)
BROADCOM NETXTREME 10/100/1000
PCIE GIGABIT1 NETWORKING CARD (CONT.)
MT DT SFF USFF
Environmental
Operating temperature 0° C to 55° C (32° F - 131° F)
Operating humidity 5% ~ 85% (non-condensing)
Operating System Driver Support
Windows® 7, Windows® XP, Windows Vista®
Ultimate, Windows Vista® Business 32 bit/64 bit,
Windows Vista Home Basic, Linux
Manageability (examples WOL, PXE) WOL, PXE2.1, ACPI
Management Capabilities Alerting (example ASF 2.0) None
1
This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network
infrastructure is required.
COMMUNICATIONS – MODEM
V.92 DATA/FAX CONTROLLERLESS MODEM MT DT SFF USFF
Bus PCI
External Connector RJ-11
Data Transmission PCM - Pulse Coded Modulation (V.92/V.90)
TCM - Trellis Coded Modulation (V.90/V.34/V.32 bis/V.32)
Data Speeds 56kbps receive, 48kbps transmit
Data Standards ITU V.92/V.90, V.34/V.32 bis/V.32
Fax Speeds 14.4kbps
Fax Mode Capabilities 2-wire, half-duplex, synchronous
Error Correction and Data Compression V.44, V.42, V.42bis, MNP 2-4, MNP 5
Power Management WOR (wake on ring) capable
Upgradeability Driver upgradeable
Video
V.80 Synchronous Access Mode (SAM) can be supported
by
software applications (not driver)
Operating Temperature 0~50 degree C
Operating Humidity 45 degree C 90% max
Operating System Support Windows 7,Vista 32/64, Windows XP 32/64
Operating System Driver Support Windows 7,Vista 32/64, Windows XP 32/64
Power Requirements +3.0V~+3.6V, 116.6mW max
Chipset Conexant SmartHSFs/LF (CX11256 & CX20493)
Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L X H)
L:
5.25/13.325
H:
4.73/12.002
Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L X H) L: 5.26/13.366
H: 3.12/7.923
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
21
COMMUNICATIONS – WIRELESS
NOTE: Native DisplayPort on system is not supported w ith optional w ireless card on the DT and SFF chassis.
DELL WIRELESS 1505 PCIE WLAN CARD (802.11N
WITH REMOTE WAKE UP SUPPORT) MT DT SFF
External Connector Type Custom WLAN Antenna Connector
Controller Details
Controller bus architecture Electrically compatible with the PCI Express Base Specification
v1.1 (x1 lane) and PCIe v1.0a.
WLAN standards supported 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n
802.11b Data Rates supported 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps
802.11a Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps
802.11g Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps
802.11n Data Rates supported
300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5,
90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4,
7.2 Mbps
Encryption WEP 64-bit and 128-bit,
TKIP, AES-CCMP 128-bit
Operating temperature 0 to +70 °C
Operating humidity Max Operating Humidity 85 %
Operating System Driver Support Windows 7, Windows XP 32/64, Vista 32/64
DELL WIRELESS 1510 PCIE MINI PCIE WLAN CARD
(802.11N) USFF
External Connector Type Custom WLAN Antenna Connector
Controller Details
Controller bus architecture Electrically compatible with the PCI Express Base Specification
v1.1 (x1 lane) and PCIe v1.0a.
WLAN standards supported 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n
802.11b Data Rates supported 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps
802.11a Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps
802.11g Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps
802.11n Data Rates supported
300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5,
90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4,
7.2 Mbps
Encryption WEP 64-bit and 128-bit,
TKIP, AES-CCMP 128-bit
Operating temperature 0 to +70 °C
Operating humidity Max Operating Humidity 85 %
Operating System Driver Support Windows 7, Windows XP 32/64, Vista 32/64
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
22
COMMUNICATIONS – WIRELESS
NOTE: Native DisplayPort on system is not supported w ith optional w ireless card on the DT and SFF chassis.
DELL WIRELESS 1520 PCIE MINI PCIE WLAN CARD
(802.11N) MT DT SFF USFF
External Connector Type Custom WLAN Antenna Connector
Controller Details
Controller bus architecture Electrically compatible with the PCI Express Base Specification
v1.1 (x1 lane) and PCIe v1.0a.
WLAN standards supported 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n
802.11b Data Rates supported 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps
802.11a Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps
802.11g Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps
802.11n Data Rates supported
300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5,
90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4,
7.2 Mbps
Encryption WEP 64-bit and 128-bit,
TKIP, AES-CCMP 128-bit
Operating temperature 0 to +70 °C
Operating humidity Max Operating Humidity 85 %
Operating System Driver Support Windows 7, Windows XP 32/64, Vista 32/64
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
23
GRAPHICS/VIDEO CONTROLLER
NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF
supports low profile card.
INTEGRATED INTEL GMA 4500 MT DT SFF USFF
Bus Type Integrated
GPU core clock Gen5 core @ 667 350 MHz Integrated and with
350MHz 24 bit RAMDAC
Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed
XP: Up to 1GB shared system memory with 2GB
system memory
Vista: Up to 2GB shared system memory with 4GB
system memory
Maximum power consumption 4 W
Overlay Planes Yes
Maximum Color Depth 32 bit
Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85 Hz
Multiple Display Support Yes
Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support OpenGL 2.0/DirectX 10.0
Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/
or digital)
Up to 2560x1600 @ 60Hz (DP)
Up to 1920x1200 @ 60Hz (DVI & VGA)
Up to 1600x1200 @ 85Hz (VGA only)
External Connectors VGA, DisplayPort
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature Range 0° to 106° C (32° to 223° F)
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% (non-condensing)
Altitude Range –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft)
DisplayPort
Bus Type AUX 1, 2, 4 lanes
Maximum supported resolution Up to 2560x1600 @ 60Hz
Maximum power consumption N/A
External connectors DisplayPort
DVI (Digital) Adder Card (MT,DT and SFF Only)
Bus Type sDVO
Maximum supported resolution Up to 1920x1566 @ 60 Hz
Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 5.75 x 2.75 /
14.61 x 6.99
Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 5.75 x 2.75 /
14.61 x 6.99
Maximum power consumption N/A
External connectors DVI
1 Up to 1.7 GB of system memory may be allocated to support integrated graphics, depending on operating system, system memory size and other
factors.
2 DVI and VGA can be used concurrently for multi-monitor display in DOS. The DisplayPort controller does not support multi-monitor display in DOS
3 Populating a discrete graphics card in the x16 slot disables onboard video.
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
24
GRAPHICS/VIDEO CONTROLLER (CONT.)
1GB NVIDIA GEFORCE GT330 MT DT SFF
Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16
GPU core clock 600Mhz
Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz
Maximum power consumption 22W
Overlay Planes Yes
Maximum Color Depth 32-bit
Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz
Multiple Display Support Yes
Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL
Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz
Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz
External connectors 1 DVI and 1 DisplayPort
Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0
Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 3.35 / 16.764 x 8.5
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C
Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH
Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft.
512MB AMD RADEON™ HD 4550
GRAPHICS DUAL DVI OR VGA AND TV OUT MT DT SFF
Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16
GPU core clock 540Mhz
Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz
Maximum power consumption 25W
Overlay Planes Yes
Maximum Color Depth 32-bit
Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz
Multiple Display Support Yes
Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL
Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz
Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz
External connectors 1 DVI and 1 DisplayPort
Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0
Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 3.35 / 16.764 x 8.5
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C
Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH
Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft.
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
25
GRAPHICS/VIDEO CONTROLLER (CONT.)
1DMS-59 to VGA or DMS-59 to DVI adaptors required.
256MB AMD RADEON™ HD 3450
GRAPHICS DUAL DVI OR VGA AND TV OUT MT DT SFF
Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16
GPU core clock 600Mhz
Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz
Maximum power consumption 22W
Overlay Planes Yes
Maximum Color Depth 32-bit
Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz
Multiple Display Support Yes
Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL
Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz
Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz
External connectors DMS-591
and S-video
Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0
Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 3.35 / 16.764 x 8.5
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C
Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH
Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft.
256MB NVIDIA GEFORCE 9300 GE MT DT SFF
Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16
GPU core clock 540Mhz
Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz
Maximum power consumption 25W
Overlay Planes Yes
Maximum Color Depth 32-bit
Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz
Multiple Display Support Yes
Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL
Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz
Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz
External connectors DMS-591
and S-video
Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0
Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 3.35 / 16.764 x 8.5
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C
Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH
Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft.
1DMS-59 to VGA or DMS-59 to DVI adaptors required.
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
26
GRAPHICS/VIDEO CONTROLLER (CONT.)
256MB AMD RADEON™ HD 3470 GRAPHICS W/ DUAL DP MT DT SFF
Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16
GPU core clock 750Mhz
Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz
Maximum power consumption 18W
Overlay Planes Yes
Maximum Color Depth 32-bit
Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz
Multiple Display Support Yes
Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL
Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz
Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz
External connectors 2 Display Port
Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0
Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C
Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH
Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft.
512MB NVIDIA QUADRO NVS 420 MT DT SFF
Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16
GPU core clock 550Mhz
Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 512MB, 700Mhz
Maximum power consumption 40W
Overlay Planes Yes
Maximum Color Depth 32-bit
Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 75Hz
Multiple Display Support Yes
Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support
Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 2560x1600 @ 60Hz (Digital)
Max : 1920x1200 @ 60Hz (Analog)
External connectors VHDCI to Quad DisplayPort
VHDCI to Quad single-link DVI-D
Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 2.731 / 16.764 x 6.936
Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 2.731 / 16.764 x 6.936
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C
Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH
Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft.
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
27
HARD DRIVES1
3.5” 160GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 160,041,885,696
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 8 MB
Average Seek Time 8.5 ms
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 312,581,808
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W
DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 5
0C to 600C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400C to 650C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
3.5” 250GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 250,059,350,016
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 8 MB
Average Seek Time 8.5 ms
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 488,397,168
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W
DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A)
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
28
HARD DRIVES (CONT.)
3.5” 250GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD (CONT.)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 5
0C to 600C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400C to 650C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
3.5” 320GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 320,072,933,376
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 16 MB
Average Seek Time 8.5 ms
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 625,142,448
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W
DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 5
0C to 600C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400C to 650C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
29
HARD DRIVES (CONT.)
3.5” 500GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 500,107,862,016
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 16 MB
Average Seek Time 8.5 ms
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 976,773,168
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W
DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 5
0C to 600C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400C to 650C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
30
HARD DRIVES (CONT.)
3.5” 1TB SATA 7200 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 1,000,204,886,016
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 32 MB
Average Seek Time 8.5 ms
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 1,953,525,168
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W
DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 5
0C to 600C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400C to 650C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
31
HARD DRIVES (CONT.)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 5
0C to 600C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400C to 650C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
3.5” 80GB SATA 10000 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 80,026,361,856
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 (includes sled)
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 16 MB
Average Seek Time 4.6 ms (average read)
Rotational Speed 10,000 rpm
Logical Blocks 156,301,488
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 7W, Active 10W
DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A)
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
32
HARD DRIVES (CONT.)
3.5” 160GB SATA 10000 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 160,041,885,696
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 (includes sled)
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 16 MB
Average Seek Time 4.6 ms (average read)
Rotational Speed 10,000 rpm
Logical Blocks 312,581,808
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 7W, Active 10W
DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 5
0C to 600C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400C to 650C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
33
HARD DRIVES (CONT.)
2.5” 160GB FULL DISK ENCRYPTION SATA HDD
Capacity (bytes) 160,041,885,696
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 (includes sled)
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 8 MB
Average Seek Time 8.5 ms
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 312,581,808
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W
DC Current 5V (.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 5
0C to 600C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400C to 650C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
1
For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less.
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
34
HARD DRIVES (CONT.)
2.5” 250GB FIPS FULL DISK ENCRYPTION SATA HDD
Capacity (bytes) 250,059,350,016
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 (includes sled)
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 16 MB
Average Seek Time 8.5 ms
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 488,397,168
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W
DC Current 5V (.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 5
0C to 600C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400C to 650C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
1
For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less.
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
35
HARD DRIVES (CONT.)
1
For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less.
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 0°C to 70°C
Relative Humidity Range 10 to 90%
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29°C
Altitude Range -200 to 5,000 m
Op Shock (@0.5ms) 1,500G
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -55°C to 95°C
Relative Humidity Range 5 to 95%
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38°C
Altitude Range -200 to 10,600 m
2.5” 64GB1 SATA SOLID STATE DRIVE
Capacity (bytes) 64,023,257,088
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 3.94 x 2.75 x 0.374
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
MTBF 1M hours
Average Seek Time n/a
Performance: Sequential Read/ Write 220/200 (MB/s)
Performance: SYSmark ‘07 Overall Score 156
Logical Blocks 125,045,424
Power Source
DC Power Consumption (Max) Idle 0.7W, Active 1.25W
DC Current 5V (0.8A)
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
36
HARD DRIVES (CONT.)
1
For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less.
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 0°C to 70°C
Relative Humidity Range 10 to 90%
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29°C
Altitude Range -200 to 5,000 m
Op Shock (@0.5ms) 1,500G
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -55°C to 95°C
Relative Humidity Range 5 to 95%
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38°C
Altitude Range -200 to 10,600 m
2.5” 128GB1 SATA SOLID STATE DRIVE
Capacity (bytes) 128,035,676,160
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 3.94 x 2.75 x 0.374
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
MTBF 1M hours
Average Seek Time n/a
Performance: Sequential Read/ Write 220/200 (MB/s)
Performance: SYSmark ‘07 Overall Score 156
Logical Blocks 250,069,680
Power Source
DC Power Consumption (Max) Idle 0.205W, Active 0.435W
DC Current 5V (0.8A)
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
37
HARD DRIVES (CONT.)
1
For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less.
2.5” 160GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 160,144,285,696
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches)
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 16 MB
Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read)
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 312,581,808
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W
DC Current 5V (.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 5
0C to 600C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400C to 650C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
38
HARD DRIVES (CONT.)
1
For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less.
2.5” 250GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 250,059,350,016
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches)
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 16 MB
Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read)
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 488,397,168
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W
DC Current 5V (.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 5
0C to 600C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400C to 650C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
39
HARD DRIVES (CONT.)
1
For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less.
2.5” 320GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD
Capacity (bytes) 320,072,933,376
Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches)
Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s
Internal buffer size 16 MB
Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read)
Rotational Speed 7200 rpm
Logical Blocks 625,142,448
Power Source
DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W
DC Current 5V (.8A)
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range 5
0C to 600C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Temperature Range -400C to 650C
Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C
Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
40
OPTICAL DRIVES
DVD +/- RW1 MT DT SFF USFF
External Dimensions
inches/centimeters
(Without Bezel – W x H x
D)
148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/
190.5 (max)
148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/
190.5 (max)
128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm
(0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in)
128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm
(0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in)
Weight (max) pounds/
kilograms 800g 800g 170g 170g
Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s
Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Standard
Internal buffer size supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent
Access Times (typical) supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent
Maximum Data Transfer Rates
Writes 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD 8x DVD / 24x CD
Reads 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD
Power Source
DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V 5V
DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA
(5V)
1200mA (12V)/ 900mA
(5V) 1000mA 1000mA
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature
Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature
29C 29C 29C 29C
Altitude Range -200 to 3048 -200 to 3048 -200 to 3048 -200 to 3048
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature
Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C
Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature
38C 38C 38C 38C
Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m
1 Discs burned with this drive may not be compatible with some existing drives and players; using DVD+R media provides maximum compatibility.
DVD-ROM MT DT SFF USFF
External Dimensions
inches/centimeters
(Without Bezel – W x H x
D)
148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/
190.5 (max)
148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/
190.5 (max)
128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm
(0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in)
128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm
(0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in)
Weight (max) pounds/
kilograms 750g 750g 165g 165g
Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s
Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Standard
Internal buffer size supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent
Access Times (typical) supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent
Maximum Data Transfer Rates
Writes N/A N/A N/A N/A
Reads 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
41
OPTICAL DRIVES (CONT.)
DVD-ROM (CONT.) MT DT SFF USFF
Power Source
DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V 5V
DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA
(5V)
1200mA (12V)/ 900mA
(5V) 800mA 800mA
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature
Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature
29C 29C 29C 29C
Altitude Range -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature
Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C
Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature
38C 38C 38C 38C
Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m
COMBO DVD/
CDRW MT DT SFF USFF
External Dimensions
inches/centimeters
(Without Bezel – W x H x
D)
148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/
190.5 (max)
148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/
190.5 (max)
128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm
(0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in)
128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm
(0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in)
Weight (max) pounds/
kilograms 750g 750g 165g 165g
Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s
Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Standard
Internal buffer size supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent
Access Times (typical) supplier dependent supplier dependent c supplier dependent
Maximum Data Transfer Rates
Writes 48x CD 48x CD 24x CD 24x CD
Reads 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD
Power Source
DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V 5V
DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA
(5V)
1200mA (12V)/ 900mA
(5V) 900mA 900mA
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature
Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature
29C 29C 29C 29C
Altitude Range -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature
Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C
Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature
38C 38C 38C 38C
Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
42
OPTICAL DRIVES (CONT.)
BLU-RAY WRITER MT DT SFF USFF
External Dimensions
inches/centimeters
(Without Bezel – W x H x
D)
148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/
190.5 (max)
148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/
190.5 (max)
128.0 mm (5.04in)/
12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm
(4.97in)
128.0 mm (5.04in)/
12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm
(4.97in)
Weight (max) pounds/
kilograms 750g 750g 165g 165g
Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s
Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Standard
Internal buffer size supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent
Access Times (typical) supplier dependent supplier dependent c supplier dependent
Maximum Data Transfer Rates
Writes 6X BD/16x DVD/40x CD 6x BD/16x DVD/40x CD 6X BD/8x DVD/24x CD 6X BD/8x DVD/24x CD
Reads 8X BD/16x DVD/40x CD 8x BD/16x DVD/40x CD 6X BD/8x DVD/ 24x CD 6X BD/8x DVD/ 24x CD
Power Source
DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V 5V
DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA
(5V)
1200mA (12V)/ 900mA
(5V) 900mA 900mA
Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature
Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C
Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature
29C 29C 29C 29C
Altitude Range -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m
Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing):
Operating Temperature
Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C
Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature
38C 38C 38C 38C
Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
43
BIOS DEFAULTS
Drives Diskette drive: USB
SATA Operation; RAID On
SMART Reporting: Disable
SATA-0: Enable
SATA-1: Enable
External SATA: Enable
System Configuration Integrated NIC: Enable
USB Controller: Enable
Parallel Port: PS/2
Parallel Port Address: 378h
Serial Port #1: Auto
Serial Port #2: Auto
Front USB: Enable
Rear Quad USB: Enable
Rear Dual USB: Enable
PCI Slots: Enable
Audio: Enable
Video Primary Video: Auto
Performance Multiple CPU Core: Enable
Intel® SpeedStep™:
Disable, unless the customer purchased a
SpeedStep™ capable processor.
C States Control: Disable
Limit CPUID Value: Disable
HDD Acoustic Mode: Bypass
Virtualization Support Virtualization: Disable
VT for Direct I/O: Disable
Security Administrator Password: Not set
System Password: Not set
Password Changes: Enable
TPM Security: Disable
CPU XD Support: Enable
Computrace®: Deactivate
SATA-0 Password: Not set
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
44
BIOS DEFAULTS (CONT.)
Power Management AC Recovery: Power Off
Auto On Time: Disable
Low Power Mode: Disable
Remote Wake Up: Disable
Suspend Mode: S3
Fan Control Override: Disable
Maintenance Service Tag: Set by the factory
Asset Tag: Optional User Entry
SERR Message: Enable
Post Behavior Fast Boot: Enable
Numlock LED: Enable
POST HotKeys: Enable
Keyboard Errors: Enable
MEBx HotKey Enable
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
45
CHASSIS ENCLOSURE & VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS
ENCLOSURE VENTILATION
If your enclosure has doors, they need to be of a type that allows at least 30% airflow through
the enclosure (front and back).
ENCLOSURE MINIMUM CLEARANCE
Leave a 10.2 cm (4 in.) minimum clearance on all vented sides of the computer to permit the
airflow required for proper ventilation.
RECOMMENDED ENCLOSURE
Do not install your computer in an enclosure that does not allow airflow. This restricts the
airflow and impacts your computer’s performance, possibly causing it to overheat.
OPEN DESK MINIMUM CLEARANCE
If your computer is installed in a corner, on a desk, or under a desk, leave at least 5.1 cm (2 in.)
clearance from the back of the computer to the wall to permit the airflow required for proper
ventilation.
REGULATORY COMPLIANCE AND ENVIRONMENTAL
Product related conformity assessment and regulatory authorizations including Product Safety, Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC),
Ergonomics, and Communication Devices relevant to this product may be viewed at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. The
Regulatory Datasheet for this product is located at http://www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Details of Dell's environmental stewardship program to conserve product energy consumption, reduce or eliminate materials for
disposal, prolong product life span and provide effective and convenient equipment recovery solutions may be viewed at
www.dell.com/environment. Product related conformity assessment, regulatory authorizations, and information encompassing
Environmental, Energy Consumption, Noise Emissions, Product Materials Information, Packaging, Batteries, and Recycling relevant
to this product may be viewed by clicking the Design for Environment link on the webpage.
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
46
ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION INFORMATION
Component Typical Configuration High-end Configuration
CPU E8500 Q9550
Memory 1GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x1) 2GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x2)
HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 250 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 (x2)
RMSD DVDRW/DVD dual config DVDRW/DVD dual config
Graphics Adapter GeForce 9300 GE Radeon HD 3470
OPTIPLEX 780 MT
The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell OptiPlex 780 MT is as follows:
(all values LWAd expressed in bels; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts)
Operating Mode Typical Configuration
Declared Sound Power (LWAd)
High-end Configuration
Declared Sound Power (LWAd)
Idle 3.8 N/A
HDD Operating 3.8 N/A
90% CPU 3.9 N/A
ODD Operating 5.1 N/A
The Declared A-weighted Sound Pressure Level in decibels (re 2x10-5 Pa), at Operator, Bystander, and Desk Side Positions are
measured in accordance with ISO 7779 7.6.1, 7.6.2, and C.15.2 and declared in accordance with ISO 9296 for this product is as
follows1
:
Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Pressure
(LpA)
High-end Configuration Declared Sound Pressure
(LpA)
Table-Top Floor-Standing Table-Top Floor- Standing
Operator
Position
(LpA)
Bystander
Position
(LpA)
Operator
Position
(LpA)
Bystander
Position
(LpA)
Operator
Position
(LpA)
Bystander
Position
(LpA)
Operator
Position
(LpA)
Bystander
Position
(LpA)
Idle 28.2 23.2 22.1 20.6 28.0 23.2 21.4 20.5
HDD Operating 28.1 23.1 22.5 20.9 28.0 23.0 21.4 20.4
90% CPU 30.8 26.1 23.6 22.0 32.2 26.8 27.6 26.3
ODD Operating 33.6 42.1 35.6 34.3 33.3
1 All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed
at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same
microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes.
2 Declared Sound Power rounded to nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
47
ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION INFORMATION
OPTIPLEX 780 DT
The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell OptiPlex 780 DT is as follows:
(all values LWAd expressed in bels; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts)
The Declared A-weighted Sound Pressure Level in decibels (re 2x10-5 Pa), at Operator, Bystander, and Desk Side Positions are
measured in accordance with ISO 7779 7.6.1, 7.6.2, and C.15.2 and declared in accordance with ISO 9296 for this product is as
follows1
:
1 All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed
at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same
microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes.
2 Declared Sound Power rounded to nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2
Operating Mode Typical Configuration
Declared Sound Power (LWAd)
High-end Configuration
Declared Sound Power (LWAd)
Idle 3.7 N/A
HDD Operating 3.7 N/A
90% CPU 4.1 N/A
ODD Operating 5.1 N/A
Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Pressure
(LpA)
High-end Configuration Declared Sound Pressure
(LpA)
Table-Top Floor-Standing Table-Top Floor- Standing
Operator
Position
(LpA)
Bystander
Position
(LpA)
Operator
Position
(LpA)
Bystander
Position
(LpA)
Operator
Position
(LpA)
Bystander
Position
(LpA)
Operator
Position
(LpA)
Bystander
Position
(LpA)
Idle 26.1 22.1 20.7 20.1 26.1 22.0 20.0 19.0
HDD Operating 25.9 22.0 20.8 19.9 26.0 21.9 20.2 19.1
90% CPU 32.4 26.4 24.3 23.4 35.0 29.0 26.5 25.0
ODD Operating 34.3 42.6 37.2 35.5 33.8
Component Typical Configuration High-end Configuration
CPU E8500 Q9550
Memory 1GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x1) 2GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x2)
HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 250 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 (x2)
RMSD DVDRW/DVD dual config DVDRW/DVD dual config
Graphics Adapter GeForce 9300 GE Radeon HD 3470
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
48
ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION INFORMATION
OPTIPLEX 780 SFF
The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell OptiPlex 780 SFF is as follows:
(all values LWAd expressed in bels; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts)
The Declared A-weighted Sound Pressure Level in decibels (re 2x10-5 Pa), at Operator, Bystander, and Desk Side Positions are
measured in accordance with ISO 7779 7.6.1, 7.6.2, and C.15.2 and declared in accordance with ISO 9296 for this product is as
follows1
:
1 All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed
at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same
microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes.
2 Declared Sound Power rounded to nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2
Operating Mode Typical Configuration
Declared Sound Power (LWAd)
High-end Configuration
Declared Sound Power (LWAd)
Idle 3.8 N/A
HDD Operating 3.7 N/A
90% CPU 4.1 N/A
ODD Operating 4.8 N/A
Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Pressure
(LpA)
High-end Configuration Declared Sound Pressure
(LpA)
Table-Top Floor-Standing Table-Top Floor- Standing
Operator
Position
(LpA)
Bystander
Position
(LpA)
Operator
Position
(LpA)
Bystander
Position
(LpA)
Operator
Position
(LpA)
Bystander
Position
(LpA)
Operator
Position
(LpA)
Bystander
Position
(LpA)
Idle 28.0 24.1 20.8 20.2 31.0 26.5 23.0 22.2
HDD Operating 28.2 24.1 20.6 20.2 30.7 25.9 23.0 22.2
90% CPU 33.0 28.2 24.1 23.6 42.1 35.0 31.3 29.4
ODD Operating
Component Typical Configuration High-end Configuration
CPU E8500 Q9550
Memory 1GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x1) 2GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x2)
HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 250 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 (x2)
RMSD DVDRW/DVD dual config DVDRW/DVD dual config
Graphics Adapter GeForce 9300 GE Radeon HD 3470
DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0
49
ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION INFORMATION
OPTIPLEX 780 USFF
The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell Optiplex 780 USFF is as follows:
(all values LWAd expressed in bels; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts)
The Declared A-weighted Sound Pressure Level in decibels (re 2x10-5 Pa), at Operator, Bystander, and Desk Side Positions are
measured in accordance with ISO 7779 7.6.1, 7.6.2, and C.15.2 and declared in accordance with ISO 9296 for this product is as
follows1
:
1 All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed
at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same
microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes.
2 Declared Sound Power rounded to nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2
Operating Mode Typical Configuration
Declared Sound Power (LWAd)
Idle 3.9
HDD Operating 3.9
90% CPU 4.4
ODD Operating 4.8
Component Typical Configuration
CPU E8500
Memory 2GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x1)
HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA2
RMSD DVDRW
Graphics Adapter Integrated
USER
MANUAL
ENG This user manual includes detailed usage
instructions for your camera. Please read this
manual thoroughly.
1
Copyright information
Camera specifications or contents of this manual may be changed
without prior notice due to upgrade of camera functions.
You are not allowed to reuse or distribute any part of this manual
without prior permission.
We recommend using your camera within the country where you
purchase it.
Use this camera responsibly and adhere to all laws and regulations
concerning its use.
PlanetFirst represents Samsung Electronics' commitment to
sustainable development and social responsibility through
eco-driven business and management activities.
Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of
the Microsoft Corporation.
Mac and Apple App Store are registered trademarks of the Apple
Corporation.
Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google, Inc.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photoshop, and Lightroom are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries.
microSD™, microSDHC™, and microSDXC™ are registered trademarks of
the SD Association.
HDMI, the HDMI logo, and the term "High
Definition Multimedia Interface" are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered
trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Trademarks and trade names used in this manual are the property of
their respective owners.
2
Health and safety information
Prevent damage to subjects’ eyesight.
Do not use the flash in close proximity (closer than 1 m/3 ft) to people or
animals. If you use the flash too close to your subject’s eyes, this can cause
temporary or permanent eyesight damage.
Keep your camera away from small children and pets.
Keep your camera and all accessories out of the reach of small children
and animals. Small parts may cause choking or serious injury if swallowed.
Moving parts and accessories may present physical dangers as well.
Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight or high
temperatures for an extended period of time.
Prolonged exposure to sunlight or extreme temperatures can cause
permanent damage to your camera’s internal components.
Avoid covering the camera or charger with blankets or clothes.
The camera may overheat, which may distort the camera or cause a fire.
Do not handle the power supply cord or the charger during a
thunderstorm.
This may result in an electric shock.
Always comply with the following precautions and usage tips to avoid
dangerous situations and ensure peak performance of your camera.
Warning—situations that could cause injury to yourself
or others
Do not disassemble or attempt to repair your camera.
You can damage the camera and expose yourself to the risk of an electric
shock.
Do not use your camera near flammable or explosive gases
and liquids.
This may cause a fire or explosion.
Do not insert flammable materials into the camera or store
these materials near the camera.
This may cause a fire or electric shock.
Do not handle your camera with wet hands.
This may result in an electric shock.
3
Health and safety information
If liquid or foreign objects enter your camera, immediately
disconnect all power sources, such as the battery or charger,
and then contact a Samsung service center.
Comply with any regulations that restrict the use of a camera
in a certain area.
Avoid interference with other electronic devices.
Turn off the camera when in an aircraft. Your camera can cause
interference with aircraft equipment. Follow all airline regulations and
turn off your camera when directed by airline personnel.
Turn off the camera near medical equipment. Your camera can interfere
with medical equipment in hospitals or health care facilities. Follow all
regulations, posted warnings, and directions from medical personnel.
Avoid interference with pacemakers.
Maintain a safe distance between this camera and all pacemakers to
avoid potential interference, as recommended by the manufacturer and
research groups. If you have any reason to suspect that your camera is
interfering with a pacemaker or other medical device, turn off the camera
immediately and contact the manufacturer of the pacemaker or medical
device for guidance.
Caution—situations that could cause damage to your
camera or other equipment
Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an
extended period of time.
Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious
damage to your camera.
Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended,
Lithium-ion replacement batteries. Do not damage or heat the
battery.
Inauthentic, damaged, or heated batteries may cause a fire or personal
injury.
Use only Samsung-approved batteries, chargers, cables, and
accessories.
Using unauthorized batteries, chargers, cables, or accessories can cause
batteries to explode, damage your camera, or cause injury.
Samsung is not responsible for damage or injuries caused by
unapproved batteries, chargers, cables, or accessories.
Use the battery only for its intended purpose.
Misusing the battery may cause a fire or electric shock.
4
Health and safety information
Do not touch the flash while it fires.
The flash is very hot when fired and may burn your skin.
When you use the AC charger, turn off the camera before you
disconnect the power to the AC charger.
Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock.
Disconnect the charger from the wall socket when not in use.
Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock.
Do not use a damaged power supply cord, plug, or loose outlet
when you charge batteries.
This may cause a fire or electric shock.
Do not allow the AC charger to come in contact with the +/-
terminals on the battery.
This may cause a fire or electric shock.
Do not drop or subject the camera to strong impacts.
Doing so may damage the screen or external or internal components.
Exercise caution when you connect cables and install batteries
and memory cards.
If you force the connectors, improperly connect cables, or improperly
install batteries and memory cards, you can damage ports, connectors,
and accessories.
Keep cards with magnetic strips away from the camera case.
Information stored on the card may be damaged or erased.
Never use a damaged battery or memory card.
This may result in electric shock or camera malfunction or cause a fire.
Do not place the camera in or near magnetic fields.
Doing so may cause the camera to malfunction.
Do not use the camera if the screen is damaged.
If the glass or acrylic parts are broken, visit a Samsung service center to
have the camera repaired.
5
Health and safety information
Check that the camera is operating properly before use.
The manufacturer takes no responsibility for any loss of files or damage
that may result from camera malfunction or improper use.
You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your
camera.
If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not
responsible for any loss of data.
Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight.
This may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction.
If the camera overheats, remove the battery and allow it to
cool down.
Prolonged usage of the camera may overheat the battery and raise
the internal temperature of the camera. If the camera stops operating,
remove the battery and allow it to cool down.
High internal temperatures may result in noise in your photos. This is
normal and does not affect your camera’s overall performance.
Avoid interference with other electronic devices.
Your camera emits radio frequency (RF) signals that may interfere
with unshielded or improperly shielded electronic equipment, such as
pacemakers, hearing aids, medical devices, and other electronic devices in
homes or vehicles. Consult the manufacturers of your electronic devices
to solve any interference problems you experience. To prevent unwanted
interference, use only Samsung-approved devices or accessories.
Use your camera in the normal position.
Avoid contact with your camera’s internal antenna.
Data transference and your responsibilities
Data transferred via WLAN could be leaked, so avoid transferring
sensitive data in public areas or on open networks.
The camera manufacturer is not liable for any data transfers that infringe
on copyrights, trademarks, intellectual property laws, or public decency
ordinances.
6
Icons used in this manual
Icon Function
Additional information
Safety warnings and precautions
[ ] Camera buttons. For example, [Shutter] represents the
shutter button.
( ) Page number of related information
ĺ
The order of options or menus you must select to perform
a step; for example: Select b ĺ Quality (represents
select b, and then Quality).
* Annotation
This manual is explained based on NX-M lenses. When you attach NX
lenses using the mount adapter, some shooting options or functions
may not be supported.
7
Contents
Chapter 1
My Camera
Getting started ............................................................................................ 27
Unpacking.................................................................................................................... 27
Camera layout .............................................................................................. 28
Using the DIRECT LINK button ............................................................................. 30
Setting the DIRECT LINK button ............................................................................. 30
Using the display ....................................................................................................... 31
Using the Self shot mode.......................................................................................... 31
Inserting the battery and memory card ................................................. 32
Removing the battery and memory card ......................................................... 34
Using the memory card adapter .......................................................................... 34
Charging the battery and turning on your camera .............................. 35
Charging the battery................................................................................................ 35
Turning on your camera ......................................................................................... 35
Performing the initial setup ...................................................................... 36
Selecting functions (options) ................................................................... 38
Selecting with buttons ............................................................................................ 38
Selecting by touch .................................................................................................... 38
Using m ................................................................................................................. 39
E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode .............................................................. 39
Using the Smart panel ............................................................................................. 40
E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode .......................................................... 40
Selecting a mode ......................................................................................... 41
Accessing a Mode screen ....................................................................................... 41
Mode description ...................................................................................................... 41
Tips
Concepts in Photography
Shooting postures....................................................................................... 13
Holding the camera ..................................................................................................... 13
Standing photography ............................................................................................... 14
Crouching photography ............................................................................................ 14
Aperture ........................................................................................................ 15
Aperture value and the depth of field .................................................................. 16
Shutter speed ............................................................................................... 17
ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 18
How the aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity
control exposure ......................................................................................... 19
Correlation between focal length, angle, and perspective ................ 20
Depth of field ............................................................................................... 20
What controls out-of-focus effects? ....................................................................... 21
DOF preview ................................................................................................................... 22
Composition ................................................................................................. 23
Rule of Thirds .................................................................................................................. 23
Photos with two subjects .......................................................................................... 24
Flash ............................................................................................................... 25
Flash guide number ..................................................................................................... 25
8
Contents
Display icons ................................................................................................ 43
In Shooting mode ..................................................................................................... 43
Capturing photos ........................................................................................................ 43
Recording videos ......................................................................................................... 44
About the level gauge ............................................................................................... 44
In Playback mode ...................................................................................................... 45
Viewing photos ............................................................................................................ 45
Playing videos ............................................................................................................... 45
Changing the information displayed ................................................................. 46
Lenses ............................................................................................................ 47
Lens layout ................................................................................................................... 47
Locking or unlocking the lens ................................................................................. 48
Lens markings ............................................................................................................ 49
Accessories ................................................................................................... 50
External flash layout ................................................................................................. 50
Connecting the external flash ................................................................................. 51
Mount adapter layout .............................................................................................. 52
Attaching the mount adapter ................................................................................. 52
Removing the mount adapter ................................................................................ 53
Shooting modes .......................................................................................... 54
Auto mode ................................................................................................................... 54
Smart mode................................................................................................................. 56
Using the Beauty Face mode ................................................................................... 56
Using the Best Face mode ........................................................................................ 57
Capturing panoramic photos .................................................................................. 58
Program mode ........................................................................................................... 59
Program Shift ................................................................................................................ 60
Minimum shutter speed ............................................................................................ 60
Aperture Priority mode ........................................................................................... 61
Shutter Priority mode .............................................................................................. 62
Manual mode.............................................................................................................. 63
Using Framing Mode .................................................................................................. 63
Using the Bulb function ............................................................................................ 64
Recording a video ..................................................................................................... 65
Available functions by shooting mode ............................................................. 66
Chapter 2
Shooting Functions
Size and Resolution .................................................................................... 69
Photo size ..................................................................................................................... 69
Quality ........................................................................................................................... 70
ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 71
White Balance .............................................................................................. 72
Customizing preset White Balance options ....................................................... 73
Picture Wizard (photo styles) .................................................................... 74
9
Contents
AF mode ........................................................................................................ 75
Single AF ....................................................................................................................... 75
Continuous AF ............................................................................................................ 76
Manual focus ............................................................................................................... 76
AF area ........................................................................................................... 77
Selection AF ................................................................................................................ 77
Multi AF ......................................................................................................................... 78
Face Detection ............................................................................................. 79
Normal........................................................................................................................... 79
Smile Shot .................................................................................................................... 80
Wink Shot ..................................................................................................................... 80
Touch AF ........................................................................................................ 81
Touch AF ....................................................................................................................... 81
AF Point ......................................................................................................................... 81
Tracking AF .................................................................................................................. 81
One touch shot .......................................................................................................... 82
MF Assist ....................................................................................................... 83
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) ............................................................. 84
Drive (shooting method) ........................................................................... 85
Single ............................................................................................................................. 85
Continuous Normal .................................................................................................. 86
Burst ............................................................................................................................... 86
Timer .............................................................................................................................. 87
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket) ............................................................. 87
White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket) ............................................................ 88
Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket) ........................................................ 88
Depth Bracketing ..................................................................................................... 89
Flash ............................................................................................................... 90
Reducing the red-eye effect .................................................................................. 91
Adjusting the flash intensity ................................................................................. 91
Metering ........................................................................................................ 92
Multi ............................................................................................................................... 92
Center-weighted ....................................................................................................... 93
Spot ................................................................................................................................ 93
Measuring the exposure value of the focus area ........................................... 94
Dynamic Range ........................................................................................... 95
Smart Filter ................................................................................................... 96
Exposure compensation ............................................................................ 97
Exposure lock ............................................................................................... 98
Video functions ........................................................................................... 99
Movie size..................................................................................................................... 99
When Video Out is set to NTSC ............................................................................... 99
When Video Out is set to PAL .................................................................................. 99
Movie quality ........................................................................................................... 100
Multi Motion ............................................................................................................ 100
Fader ........................................................................................................................... 101
Voice ............................................................................................................................ 101
10
Contents
Chapter 3
Playback/Editing
Searching and managing files ................................................................ 103
Viewing photos ....................................................................................................... 103
Viewing image thumbnails ................................................................................. 103
Viewing files by category .................................................................................... 104
Viewing files as a folder ........................................................................................ 104
Protecting files ........................................................................................................ 105
Deleting files ............................................................................................................ 106
Deleting a single file ................................................................................................. 106
Deleting multiple files .............................................................................................. 106
Deleting all files .......................................................................................................... 106
Viewing photos .......................................................................................... 107
Enlarging a photo .................................................................................................. 107
Viewing a slide show ............................................................................................. 107
Auto rotating ........................................................................................................... 108
Playing videos ............................................................................................ 109
Scanning backward or forward ......................................................................... 109
Adjusting the brightness of a video ................................................................ 110
Adjusting the volume of a video ...................................................................... 110
Trimming a video during playback .................................................................. 111
Capturing an image during playback ............................................................. 111
Editing photos ........................................................................................... 112
Cropping a photo ................................................................................................... 112
Rotating a photo .................................................................................................... 113
Resizing photos....................................................................................................... 113
Adjusting your photos .......................................................................................... 114
Retouching faces .................................................................................................... 115
Applying Smart Filter effects .............................................................................. 116
Chapter 4
Wireless network
Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings ............... 118
Connecting to a WLAN ......................................................................................... 118
Setting network options ......................................................................................... 119
Manually setting the IP address ........................................................................... 119
Using the login browser....................................................................................... 120
Network connection tips ..................................................................................... 121
Entering text ............................................................................................................ 122
Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go) ......................................................... 123
Using NFC features in Shooting mode ........................................................... 123
Using NFC features in Playback mode (Photo Beam)................................ 123
Using NFC features in Wi-Fi mode .................................................................... 123
Saving files to a smart phone automatically ....................................... 124
Sending photos or videos to a smart phone ....................................... 126
11
Contents
Chapter 5
Camera settings menu
User settings ............................................................................................... 146
ISO Customizing ..................................................................................................... 146
ISO Expansion ............................................................................................................. 146
ISO Step ......................................................................................................................... 146
Auto ISO Range .......................................................................................................... 146
Noise Reduction ..................................................................................................... 147
Bracket Settings ...................................................................................................... 147
Color Space ............................................................................................................... 148
Distortion Correct .................................................................................................. 149
Touch Operation ..................................................................................................... 149
iFn Customizing ...................................................................................................... 149
User Display .............................................................................................................. 150
Key Mapping ............................................................................................................ 151
Live view NFC........................................................................................................... 151
MobileLink/NFC Image Size .............................................................................. 151
Grid Line .................................................................................................................... 151
AF Lamp ..................................................................................................................... 152
Auto Self-Shot ......................................................................................................... 152
Lens Button Speed Settings ............................................................................... 152
Setting ......................................................................................................... 153
Sending photos or videos to multiple smart phones ........................ 128
Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release .............................. 130
Using the Baby Monitor ........................................................................... 132
Adjusting the noise level for alarm activation ............................................. 133
Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos ..................................... 134
Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC.................................. 134
Sending photos or videos to a PC .................................................................... 134
Sending photos or videos via email ...................................................... 136
Changing email settings ...................................................................................... 136
Storing your information ........................................................................................ 136
Setting an email password ..................................................................................... 137
Changing the email password .............................................................................. 138
Sending photos or videos via email ................................................................ 138
Using photo or video sharing services ................................................. 140
Accessing a sharing service ................................................................................ 140
Uploading photos or videos............................................................................... 141
Using Samsung Link to send files .......................................................... 142
Uploading photos to an online storage ......................................................... 142
Viewing photos or videos on devices that support Samsung Link ...... 143
12
Contents
Using or storing the camera ............................................................................... 167
Inappropriate places to use or store the camera ........................................... 167
Using on beaches or shores ................................................................................... 167
Storing for extended period of time ................................................................... 167
Using the camera with caution in humid environments ............................ 168
Other cautions ............................................................................................................ 168
About memory card .............................................................................................. 169
Supported memory card ........................................................................................ 169
Memory card capacity ............................................................................................. 170
Cautions when using memory cards .................................................................. 171
About the battery .................................................................................................. 172
Battery specifications ............................................................................................... 172
Battery life .................................................................................................................... 174
Low battery message ............................................................................................... 174
Notes about using the battery .............................................................................. 174
Cautions about using the battery ........................................................................ 175
Notes about charging the battery ....................................................................... 175
Notes about charging with a computer connected...................................... 176
Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care ............................ 176
Updating the firmware ............................................................................. 177
Before contacting a service center ........................................................ 178
Camera specifications .............................................................................. 181
Glossary ....................................................................................................... 186
Optional accessories ................................................................................. 192
Index ............................................................................................................ 193
FCC notice ................................................................................................... 196
Chapter 6
Connecting to external devices
Viewing files on an HDTV ........................................................................ 157
Transferring files to your computer ....................................................... 158
Transferring files to your Windows OS computer ....................................... 158
Connecting the camera as a removable disk ................................................... 158
Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP) .................................................. 159
Transferring files to your Mac OS ...................................................................... 159
Using programs on a PC........................................................................... 161
Installing programs from the provided CD ................................................... 161
Available programs when using i-Launcher .................................................... 161
Using i-Launcher .................................................................................................... 162
Requirements for Windows OS ............................................................................. 162
Requirements for Mac OS ....................................................................................... 162
Opening i-Launcher .................................................................................................. 162
Downloading the firmware .................................................................................... 163
Downloading the PC Auto Backup program ................................................... 163
Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ........................................................ 163
Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ............................................................... 163
Chapter 7
Appendix
Error messages .......................................................................................... 165
Maintaining the camera........................................................................... 166
Cleaning the camera ............................................................................................. 166
Camera lens and display ......................................................................................... 166
Image sensor ............................................................................................................... 166
Camera body ............................................................................................................... 166
13
Concepts in Photography
Holding the camera
Hold the camera and place your index finger on the shutter button. For
larger lenses, place your left hand under the lens for support.
Shooting postures
A correct posture for stabilizing the camera is necessary for taking a good
photo. Even if you hold a camera correctly, the wrong posture can cause
the camera to shake. Stand up straight and remain still to maintain a
steady base for your camera. When shooting with a slow shutter speed,
hold your breath to minimize body movement.
14
Concepts in Photography
Standing photography
Compose your shot, stand up straight with your feet shoulder-length
apart, and keep your elbows pointed down.
Crouching photography
Compose your shot, crouch with one knee touching the ground, and keep
a straight posture.
15
Concepts in Photography
Aperture
The aperture is one of the three factors that determine the exposure. The
aperture housing contains thin, metal plates that open and close to let
light through the aperture and into the camera. The size of the aperture
is related to the amount of light: a larger aperture allows more light and a
smaller aperture allows less light.
Aperture sizes
Minimum aperture Medium aperture Maximum aperture
Aperture opened slightly Aperture opened wide
The size of the aperture is represented by a value known as an "F-number."
The f-number represents the focal length divided by the diameter of the
lens. For example, if a lens with a 50 mm focal length has an f-number of
F2, the diameter of the aperture is 25 mm. (50 mm/25 mm = F2)
The smaller the f-number, the greater the size of the aperture.
The opening in the aperture is described as the Exposure Value (EV).
Increasing the Exposure Value (+1 EV) means the amount of light doubles.
Decreasing the Exposure Value (-1 EV) means the amount of light halves.
You can also use the exposure compensation feature to fine-tune the
amount of light by subdividing exposure values into 1/2, 1/3 EV, and so on.
+1 EV
F1.4 F2 F2.8 F4 F5.6 F8
-1 EV
Exposure Value Steps
16
Concepts in Photography
Aperture value and the depth of field
You can blur or sharpen the background of a photo by controlling the
aperture. It is closely related to the depth of field (DOF), which can be
expressed as small or large.
A photo with a large DOF A photo with a small DOF
The aperture housing contains several blades. These blades move together and
control the amount of light passing through the center of the aperture. The
number of blades also affects the shape of light when shooting night scenes. If
an aperture has an even number of blades, light divides into an equal number
of sections. If the number of blades is odd, the number of sections is double the
number of blades.
For example, an aperture with 8 blades divides light into 8 sections and an
aperture with 7 blades into 14 sections.
7 blades 8 blades
17
Concepts in Photography
Shutter speed
Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the
shutter. It controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture
before it reaches the image sensor.
Usually, the shutter speed is manually adjustable. The measurement of the
shutter speed is known as the "Exposure Value" (EV), which is marked in
intervals of 1 s, 1/2 s, 1/4 s, 1/8 s, 1/15 s, 1/1,000 s, 1/2,000 s, and so on.
Exposure
+1 EV
-1 EV
1 s 1/2 s 1/4 s 1/8 s 1/15 s 1/30 s
Shutter speed
Therefore, the faster the shutter speed, the less light will be let in. Likewise,
the slower the shutter speed, the more light will be let in.
The photos below illustrate that a slow shutter speed allows more time
for light to enter the camera. This adds a motion blurring effect to moving
objects. On the other hand, a fast shutter speed allows less time to let light
in and the photo more easily freezes subjects in motion.
0.8 s 0.004 s
18
Concepts in Photography
ISO sensitivity
The exposure of an image is determined by the sensitivity of the camera.
This sensitivity is based on international film standards, known as ISO
standards. On digital cameras, this sensitivity rating is used to represent
the sensitivity of the digital mechanism that captures the image.
ISO sensitivity doubles as the number doubles. For example, an
ISO 200 setting is capable of capturing images at twice the speed of an
ISO 100 setting. However, higher ISO settings can result in "noise"—small
specks, spots, and other phenomena in a photo that give the shot a noisy
or dirty appearance. As a general rule, it is best to use a low ISO setting
to prevent noise in your photos, unless you are shooting in darkened
environments or at night.
Changes in the quality and brightness according to ISO sensitivity
Because a low ISO sensitivity means the camera will be less sensitive to
light, you need more light to have an optimal exposure. When using a low
ISO sensitivity, open the aperture more or reduce the shutter speed to
allow more light to enter the camera. For example, on a sunny day when
light is abundant, a low ISO sensitivity does not require a slow shutter
speed. However, in a dark place or at night, a low ISO sensitivity will
result in a blurry photo. Therefore, it is recommended to increase the ISO
sensitivity by a moderate amount.
A photo captured with a tripod and high
ISO sensitivity
A blurred photo with a low ISO sensitivity
19
Concepts in Photography
How the aperture setting, shutter speed,
and ISO sensitivity control exposure
The aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity are closely
interconnected in photography. The aperture setting controls the opening
that regulates the light that enters the camera, while the shutter speed
determines the length of time that light is allowed to enter. ISO sensitivity
determines the speed at which the film reacts to light. Together, these
three aspects are described as the triangle of exposure.
A change in shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO sensitivity can be offset
by adjustments to the others to maintain the amount of light. The results,
however, change according to the settings. For example, shutter speed is
useful in expressing movement, aperture can control the depth of field,
and ISO sensitivity can control the graininess of a photo.
Settings Results
Aperture
value
Wide aperture
= more light
Narrow aperture
= less light
Wide = small depth of field
Narrow = large depth of field
Settings Results
Shutter speed
Fast speed
= less light
Slow speed
= more light
Fast = still
Slow = blurry
ISO sensitivity
High sensitivity
= more sensitive to light
Low sensitivity
= less sensitive to light
High = more grainy
Low = less grainy
20
Concepts in Photography
Correlation between focal length, angle,
and perspective
Focal length, which is measured in millimeters, is the distance between
the middle of the lens to its focal point. It affects the angle and perspective
of captured images. A short focal length translates into a wide angle,
which allows you to capture a wide shot. A long focal length translates
into a narrow angle, which allows you to capture telephoto shots.
9 mm angle 27 mm angle
Depth of field
Portraits or still-life photos mostly acclaimed by people are the ones on
which the background is out of focus so the subject looks pronounced.
Depending on the focused areas, a photo can be blurred or sharpened.
This is called 'a low DOF' or 'a high DOF'.
The depth of field is the focused area around the subject. Therefore, a
small DOF signifies that the focused area is narrow and a large DOF means
the focused area is wide.
A photo with a small DOF, which stresses the subject and makes the rest
of it blurred, can be obtained by capturing a photo close to the subject or
selecting a low aperture value. Conversely, a photo with a large DOF which
shows all the elements on the photo sharply focused can be achieved by
capturing a photo far from the subject or selecting a high aperture value.
Small Depth of Field Large Depth of Field
21
Concepts in Photography
What controls out-of-focus effects?
DOF depends on aperture value
The wider the aperture is (namely the lower the aperture value), the lower
the DOF becomes. Under the condition where the focal length is equal, a
low aperture value leads to a photo with a low DOF.
27 mm F3.5 27 mm F11
DOF depends on focal length
The longer the focal length is, the lower the DOF gets.
9 mm angle
27 mm angle
22
Concepts in Photography
DOF depends on the distance between the subject and the
camera
The shorter the distance between the subject and the camera is, the lower
the DOF gets. Therefore, taking a photo close to a subject can result in a
photo of low DOF.
A photo captured far from the subject
A photo captured close to the subject
DOF preview
You can press the Custom button to get an idea of what your shot will look
like before shooting. The camera adjusts the aperture to the predefined
settings and shows the results on the screen. Set the function of the
Custom button to Optical Preview. (p. 151)
23
Concepts in Photography
Composition
It is fun to capture a photo of the beauty of world with a camera. No
matter how the world is beautiful, however, a poor composition cannot
capture the beauty of it.
When it comes to composition, it is very important to prioritize subjects.
Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually,
abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition.
Rule of Thirds
To use the rule of thirds, divide the image into a 3x3 pattern of equal
rectangles.
To compose photos that best emphasize the subject, make sure the
subject is located at one of the corners of the center rectangle.
Using the rule of thirds will create photos with stable and compelling
compositions. Below are a few examples.
24
Concepts in Photography
Photos with two subjects
If your subject is in one corner of the photo, it creates an unbalanced
composition. You can stabilize the photo by capturing a second subject in
the opposite corner to balance the weight of the photo.
Subject 1
Subject 2
Subject 1
Subject 2
Unstable Stable
When taking landscape photos, centering the horizon will create an
unbalanced effect. Give more weight to the photo by moving the horizon
up or down.
Subject 1
Subject 2
Subject 1
Subject 2
Unstable Stable
25
Concepts in Photography
Flash
Light is one of the most important components in photography. It is not
easy, however, to have an enough amount of light anytime and anywhere.
Making use of a flash allows you to optimize light settings and create a
variety of effects.
Flash, also known as strobe or speed light, helps to create adequate
exposure in low-light conditions. It is also useful in light-abundant
situations. For example, flash can be used in compensating the exposure
of a subject’s shadow or capturing clearly both the subject and the
background in backlit conditions.
Before correction After correction
Flash guide number
The model number of a flash refers to the flash’s power, and the maximum
amount of light created is represented by a value known as a "guide
number". The bigger the guide number, the more light is emitted from the
flash. The guide number is achieved by multiplying the distance from the
flash to the subject and the aperture value when the ISO sensitivity is set
to 100.
Guide number = Flash to Subject Distance X Aperture value
Aperture value = Guide number/Flash to Subject Distance
Flash to Subject Distance = Guide number/Aperture value
Therefore, if you know the guide number of a flash, you can estimate an
optimum flash to subject distance when setting the flash manually. For
example, if a flash has a guide number of GN 20 and is 4 meters away from
the subject, the optimal aperture value is F5.0.
Chapter 1
My Camera
Learn about your camera’s layout, display icons, lens, optional accessories,
and basic functions.
My Camera
27
Getting started
Unpacking
Check your product box for the following items.
Camera AC adapter/USB cable Rechargeable battery Strap
Software CD-ROM
(User manual included)
Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM Quick Start Guide Quick Reference Guide
The illustrations may differ from your actual items.
The items may differ depending on your region.
You can purchase optional accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center. Samsung is not responsible for any
problems caused by using unauthorized accessories. For information about accessories, refer to page 192.
My Camera
28
Camera layout
No. Name
1 Shutter button
2 Power button
3 DIRECT LINK button
Start a preset Wi-Fi function. (p. 30)
4 External flash port cover
5 Microphone
6 Lens mount index
7 Internal antenna
* Avoid contact with the internal antenna while using a wireless network.
8 Lens release button
9 Image sensor
* Do not touch the image sensor.
10 Lens mount
11 NFC tag
12 AF-assist light/Timer lamp
13 Built-in flash
1 2 3 4 5
6
9
11 10 8
7
13
12
My Camera > Camera layout
29
No. Name
1 Speaker
2 Eyelet for camera strap
3 Video recording button
Start recording a video.
4
Status lamp
Indicate the status of the camera.
Blinking: When saving a photo,
shooting a video, sending data to a
computer, connecting to WLAN, or
sending a photo.
Steady: When there is no data transfer
or charging the battery.
5 f button
Select a shooting mode.
6
D button
In Shooting mode: Change the
information on the display.
In other situations: Move up.
7
F button
In Shooting mode: Select an AF mode.
In other situations: Move right.
8
o button
In the Menu screen: Save the selected
options.
In Shooting mode: Allow you to select
a focus area manually in some shooting
modes.
No. Name
9
Delete/Custom button
In Shooting mode: Perform the
assigned function. (p. 151)
In Playback mode: Delete files.
10
I button
In Shooting mode: Adjust the shutter
speed, aperture value, exposure
compensation, or ISO sensitivity.
In Playback mode: View thumbnails.
In other situations: Move down.
11
Playback button
Enter Playback mode to view pictures or
videos.
12
C button
In Shooting mode: Select a shooting
method or set the timer.
In other situations: Move left.
13 m button
Access options or menus.
14
Display (touch screen)
To take a self-portrait while looking at
yourself on the screen, flip the screen
up. (p. 31)
Touch the screen to select a menu or
an option. (p. 38)
3
2 1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
14 12 11 13
My Camera > Camera layout
30
No. Name
1 Tripod mount
2 Battery lock
3 Memory card slot
4
USB and shutter release port
Connect the camera to a computer or shutter release. Use a shutter release cable with a tripod
to minimize camera movement.
5 HDMI port
6 Battery slot
7 Battery cover
Using the DIRECT LINK button
You can turn on the Wi-Fi feature conveniently by pressing [DIRECT LINK].
Press [DIRECT LINK] again to return to the previous mode.
Setting the DIRECT LINK button
You can select a Wi-Fi function to launch when you press [DIRECT LINK]. (p. 151)
To set a DIRECT
LINK option, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Key Mapping ĺDIRECT LINKĺ an option.
1
5 6 7
4 3
2
My Camera > Camera layout
31
Using the display
You can take a self-portrait while looking at yourself on the display by
flipping the display up.
Using the Self shot mode
When the camera is off and you enabled the Self shot option (p. 152),
flipping the display upward turns the camera on and enters Self shot
mode.
In Self shot mode, the timer (3 seconds), one-touch shot, face detection,
and beauty face functions are automatically activated.
1 Flip the display upward.
180˚
2 Touch .
3 Drag the sliders or touch the +/- icons to adjust the softness
and brightness of the skin tone.
4 Press [o] or touch Set.
5 Touch the frame area on the display, or press [Shutter].
After 3 seconds, the camera automatically releases the shutter.
When the camera is off, flipping the display upward automatically turns the
camera on.
Keep the display closed when the camera is not in use.
Flip the display only within the angle allowed. Failing to do so may damage
your camera.
When the camera is not held and the display is flipped upward, use a tripod.
Otherwise, it may cause damage to your camera.
Do not flip the display up when an external flash is mounted on the camera.
Otherwise, it may cause damage to your camera.
My Camera
32
Inserting the battery and memory card
Learn how to insert or remove the battery and an optional memory card
into the camera.
1 Insert your finger into the groove and open the battery cover.
Be careful not to damage your fingernails when you open the battery cover.
2 Insert a memory card into the slot with the gold-colored
contacts facing up.
Insert the memory card fully until it locks into space.
3 Slide the battery lock to the left.
4 Insert the battery with the gold-colored contacts facing right.
Hold the battery cover open with your finger.
My Camera > Inserting the battery and memory card
33
5 Close the battery lock and slide it to the right.
6 Close the battery cover.
7 Press the battery cover firmly to ensure that it closes tightly.
My Camera > Inserting the battery and memory card
34
Removing the battery and memory card
Rechargeable battery
Battery lock
Slide the battery lock to the left to
release the battery.
Memory card
Push the card gently until it disengages
from the camera, and then pull it out of
the slot.
Using the memory card adapter
To read data with a PC or memory card reader, insert the memory
card into a memory card adapter.
Do not bend or pull the battery lock. Doing so may damage the lock.
While the status lamp of the camera is blinking, do not remove the memory
card or battery. Doing so may damage the data stored on the memory card or
your camera.
My Camera
35
Charging the battery and turning on your camera
Charging the battery
Before you use the camera for the first time, you must charge the battery.
Plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera, and then plug the
other end of the USB cable into the AC adapter.
Status lamp
Red light on: Charging
Green light on: Fully charged
Red light blinking: Charging Error
Use only the AC adapter and USB cable supplied with your camera. If you use
another AC adapter, the camera battery may not charge or work properly.
Turning on your camera
To turn on or off the camera, press [ ].
The initial setup screen appears when you turn on the camera for the
first time. (p. 36)
For some lenses, when you turn on the camera, the lens moves automatically. Do
not press or force the lens, as it may damage the lens.
My Camera
36
Performing the initial setup
When you turn on your camera for the first time, the initial setup screen
appears. The language is preset for the country or region where the
camera is sold. You can change the language as desired. You can also select
an item by touching it on the screen.
1 Press [I] to select Time Zone, and then press [o].
2 Press [D/I] to select a time zone, and then press [o].
Back Set
Time Zone
[GMT +00:00] London
[GMT -01:00] Cape Verde
[GMT -02:00] Mid-Atlantic
[GMT -03:00] Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo
[GMT -03:30] Newfoundland
3 Press [I] to select Date/Time Set, and then press [o].
4 Press [C/F] to select an item (Year/Month/Day/Hour/
Minute/Summer time).
5 Press [D/I] to set the option, and then press [o].
Back Set
Year Month Day Hour Min DST
Date/Time Set
The screen may differ depending on the language you selected.
6 Press [I] to select Date Type, and then press [o].
7 Press [D/I] to select a date type, and then press [o].
Back Set
Date Type
YYYY/MM/DD
MM/DD/YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY
My Camera > Performing the initial setup
37
8 Press [I] to select Time Type, and then press [o].
9 Press [D/I] to select a time type, and then press [o].
Back Set
Time Type
12 Hr
24 Hr
10 Press [m] to finish the initial setup.
My Camera
38
Selecting functions (options)
Selecting with buttons
Press [D/I/C/F] to move, and then press [o] to select an option.
Selecting by touch
Do not use sharp objects, such as pens or pencils, to touch the screen. You can
damage the screen.
Dragging: Touch and hold an area on
the screen, and then drag your finger.
Touching: Touch an icon to select a
menu or an option.
Flicking: Gently flick your finger
across the screen.
My Camera > Selecting functions (options)
39
When you touch or drag the screen, discolorations may occur. This is not a
malfunction, but a characteristic of the touch screen. Touch or drag lightly to
minimize the discolorations.
The touch screen may not work properly if you use the camera in extremely
humid environments.
The touch screen may not work properly if you apply screen protection film
or other accessories to the screen.
Depending on the viewing angle, the screen may appear dim. Adjust the
brightness or viewing angle to improve the resolution.
Using m
Press [m] or touch on the screen, and then change shooting
options or settings.
E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode
1 On the Mode screen, select Program.
2 Press [m] or touch .
3 Press [D/I] to move to b, and then press [o].
You can also touch b on the screen.
4 Press [D/I] to move to Photo Size, and then press
[o].
You can also drag the option list, and then touch an option.
AutoShare
Photo Size
Quality
ISO
Minimum Shutter Speed
Back Select
My Camera > Selecting functions (options)
40
5 Press [D/I] to move to an option, and then press [o].
You can also drag the option list, and then touch an option.
Press [m] or touch Back to go back to the previous menu.
(3:2) (5472x3648)
(3:2) (3888x2592)
(3:2) (2976x1984)
(3:2) (1728x1152)
(16:9) (5472x3080)
Photo Size
Back Set
6 Press [m] or touch Back to switch to Shooting mode.
Using the Smart panel
Touch on the screen to access some functions such as Exposure, ISO,
and White Balance.
E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode
1 On the Mode screen, select Program.
2 Touch .
3 Press [D/I/C/F] to move to EV, and then press
[o].
You can also select an option by touching it.
4 Press [D/I/C/F] to adjust the exposure value, and
then press [o].
You can also drag the dial on the screen to adjust the option.
EV : 0
Back Adjust
You can adjust some options by
dragging them.
My Camera
41
Selecting a mode
Select various modes and functions on the Mode screen.
Accessing a Mode screen
In Shooting or Playback mode, press [f]. Press [f] again to return
to the previous mode.
Auto Smart
Shutter Manual
Priority
Back Set
Program Aperture
Priority
Wi-Fi
Touch an icon to select a mode or function. You can also press
[D/I/C/F] to move a mode or function, and then press [o] to
select it.
Mode description
Mode Description
Auto
Capture a photo with a scene mode selected automatically
by the camera. (p. 54)
Smart
Capture a photo with options that are preset for a specific
scene. (p. 56)
Program
Capture a photo with settings you have adjusted manually
except the shutter speed and aperture value. (p. 59)
Aperture Priority
Set the aperture value manually while the camera
automatically selects an appropriate shutter speed. (p. 61)
Shutter Priority
Set the shutter speed manually while the camera
automatically selects an appropriate aperture value. (p. 62)
Manual
Adjust both the aperture value and the shutter speed
manually. (p. 63)
My Camera > Selecting a mode
42
Mode Description
Wi-Fi
MobileLink: Send photos or videos to a smart phone.
(p. 126)
Remote Viewfinder: Use a smart phone as a remote
shutter release and see a preview on your smart phone of
an image from your camera. (p. 130)
Group Share: Send photos or videos to multiple smart
phones. (p. 128)
Baby Monitor: Connect the camera to a smart phone and
monitor a location. (p. 132)
Auto Backup: Send photos or videos that you captured
with the camera to a PC wirelessly. (p. 134)
Email: Send photos or videos stored on the camera via
email. (p. 136)
SNS & Cloud: Upload photos or videos to file sharing
websites. (p. 140)
Samsung Link: Upload photos to Samsung Link online
storage or view files on other Samsung Link supported
devices. (p. 142)
My Camera
43
Display icons
Capturing photos
1
2
3
1. Shooting information
Icon Description
Shooting mode
Current date
Current time
Auto exposure lock (p. 98)
Available number of photos
Memory card inserted
Memory card not inserted*
: Fully charged
: Partially charged
(Red): Empty (recharge
the battery)
: Charging
Icon Description
Auto focus frame
Spot metering area
Camera shake
Level gauge (p. 44)
Histogram (p. 150)
Focus
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Exposure adjustment value
ISO sensitivity (p. 71)
* Photos that were captured without inserting a memory card
cannot be transferred to a memory card or a computer.
2. Shooting options
Icon Description
Photo size
Drive mode
Flash (p. 90)
Flash intensity adjustment
Metering (p. 92)
AF mode (p. 75)
Focus area
Icon Description
Face detection
White Balance (p. 72)
White Balance micro adjustment
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 84)
RAW file
Dynamic Range (p. 95)
3. Shooting options (Touch)
Icon Description
Change Smart mode**
Mobile Connection***
Touch AF options
Shooting options
Smart panel
** This icon appears only when you select Smart mode.
*** You can directly select a Wi-Fi function that connects to a
smart phone.
The icons displayed will change according to the
mode you select or the options you set.
In Shooting mode
My Camera > Display icons
44
2. Shooting options
Icon Description
Video size
AF mode (p. 75)
Metering (p. 92)
White Balance (p. 72)
White Balance micro adjustment
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 84)
Fader (p. 101)
Voice recording off (p. 101)
The icons displayed will change according to the
mode you select or the options you set.
About the level gauge
The level gauge helps you align the camera with
the horizontal and vertical lines on the display.
If the level gauge is not level, calibrate the level
gauge using the Horizontal Calibration function.
(p. 153)
Vertical
Horizontal
Ÿ Level Ÿ Unlevel
You cannot use the level gauge when you shoot
in portrait orientation.
Recording videos
1
2
1. Shooting information
Icon Description
Shooting mode
Cancel Touch AF. (Touch)
Current recording time/
Available recording time
Memory card inserted
: Fully charged
: Partially charged
(Red): Empty (recharge
the battery)
: Charging
Exposure value
ISO sensitivity (p. 71)
My Camera > Display icons
45
In Playback mode
Viewing photos
Information
Mode
F No
Shutter
ISO
Metering
Flash
Focal Length
White Balance
EV
Photo Size
Date
Icon Description
Current file/The total number of files
Folder number-File number
RAW file
Protected file
Continuously captured photos (they
will appear as a folder) (p. 104)
Playback/Editing/Setting menu (Touch)
Share a file. (Touch)
View image thumbnails. (Touch)
1
2
3
No. Description
1 Captured photo
2 RGB histogram (p. 150)
3
Shooting mode, Metering, Flash,
White Balance, Aperture value,
Shutter speed, ISO, Focal length,
Exposure value, Photo size, Date
Playing videos
Stop
Icon Description
Current file/The total number of files
Playback speed
Folder number-File number
Multi Motion
Current playback time
Video length
View previous file/Scan backward. (Each
time you touch the scan backward icon,
you change the scan speed in this order:
2X, 4X, 8X.)
Pause or resume playback.
View next file/Scan forward. (Each time
you touch the scan forward icon, you
change the scan speed in this order: 2X,
4X, 8X.)
Adjust the volume or mute the sound.
My Camera > Display icons
46
Changing the information displayed
Press [D] repeatedly to change the display type.
Mode Display type
Shooting
Basic shooting information (Shooting mode, Shutter
speed, Aperture value, Exposure value, ISO sensitivity, etc.)
Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons
(MENU, Fn, Mobile Connection, Touch AF) + Level gauge
Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons +
Current shooting options information (Photo size, Drive
mode, Flash, Metering, AF mode, etc.)
Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons +
Current shooting options information + Histogram + Date
and time
Playback
Basic information
Display all information about the current file.
Display all information about the current file including
RGB histogram.
No information (when connected to an HDTV or an HDMIenabled
monitor)
My Camera
47
Lenses
You can purchase optional NX-M lenses.
Learn about the functions of each lens and select one that suits your needs
and preferences.
Lens layout
SAMSUNG NX-M 9 mm F3.5 ED lens (example)
3
1 2
No. Description
1 Lens
2 Lens mount index
3 Lens contacts
My Camera > Lenses
48
SAMSUNG NX-M 9-27 mm F3.5-5.6 ED OIS lens (example)
5
3
1
2
4
No. Description
1 Zoom lock index
2 Lens
3 Zoom ring
4 Lens mount index
5 Lens contacts
Locking or unlocking the lens
To lock the lens, rotate and pull the zoom ring gently away from the
camera body. Align the zoom lock indexes as shown in the illustration.
To unlock the lens, rotate the zoom ring as shown in the illustration.
You cannot capture a photo when the lens is locked.
My Camera > Lenses
49
Lens markings
Find out what the numbers on the lens signify.
SAMSUNG NX-M 9-27 mm F3.5-5.6 ED OIS lens (example)
3 4 5
1 2
2
No. Description
1
Aperture value
A range of supported aperture values. For example, 1:3.5–5.6 means
the maximum aperture value range from 3.5 to 5.6.
2
Focal length
The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in
millimeters). This figure is expressed in a range: minimum focal length
to maximum focal length of the lens.
Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject
is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view.
3
ED
ED stands for Extra-low Dispersion. Extra-low dispersion glass is
effective in minimizing chromatic aberration (a distortion that occurs
when a lens fails to focus all colors to the same convergence point).
4
OIS (p. 84)
Optical Image Stabilization. Lenses with this feature can detect
camera shake and effectively cancel out the movement inside the
camera.
5
Ø
The lens diameter. When you attach a filter to the lens, make sure that
the diameters of the lens and the filter are the same.
My Camera
50
Accessories
Use accessories such as external flash that can supply a constant amount
of light. You can also use the mount adapter to attach NX lenses.
For more information about optional accessories, refer to the manual for
each accessory.
The illustrations may differ from the actual items.
You can purchase Samsung-approved accessories at a retailer or a Samsung
service center. Samsung is not responsible for damage caused by using
another manufacturer's accessories.
External flash layout
SEF7A (example) (optional)
1
4
3
2
No. Description
1 Flash fastening dial
2 Lamp
3 Flash connection
4 Flash port
My Camera > Accessories
51
Connecting the external flash
1 Open the external flash port cover.
2 Mount the flash by inserting it firmly into the external flash
port.
Hold the external flash port cover open with your finger.
3 Lock the flash into place by turning the flash fastening dial as
shown in the illustration.
The available options may differ depending on the shooting mode.
There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the
flash fires a second time.
Do not remove the flash forcefully. Doing so may damage the flash and
camera.
Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible flashes may damage
your camera.
My Camera > Accessories
52
Attaching the mount adapter
1 Remove the mount adapter caps and body cap.
2 Align the indexes (white) on the camera and the mount
adapter. Then, rotate the mount adapter as shown in the
illustration until you hear a click.
Mount adapter layout
Samsung NX mount adapter (example) (optional)
1
2
4
3
No. Description
1 Lens release button
2 NX-M lens mount index
3 NX lens mount index
4 Tripod mount
My Camera > Accessories
53
2 Press and hold the lens release button on the camera. Then,
rotate the lens as shown in the illustration.
Flash is not available when using the mount adapter.
The Continuous option in Drive is not available when using the mount
adapter.
Horizontal lines may appear on the photo when you use the mount adapter
and the subject is exposed to a fluorescent or mercury-vapor light source.
To resolve this, select b ĺ Banding Reduction ĺ On. This function may
cause the edges of the frame to appear dark.
3 Align the indexes (red) on the NX lens and the mount adapter.
Then, rotate the lens as shown in the illustration until you hear
a click.
Removing the mount adapter
1 Press and hold the lens release button on the mount adapter.
Then rotate the lens as shown in the illustration.
My Camera
54
Shooting modes
Two simple shooting modes—Auto and Smart mode—help you capture
photos with numerous automatic settings. Additional modes allow for
greater customization of settings.
Auto mode
In Auto mode, the camera recognizes surrounding conditions and
automatically adjusts factors that contribute to exposure, including
shutter speed, aperture value, metering, White Balance, and exposure
compensation. As the camera controls most of the functions, some
shooting functions are limited. This mode is useful for capturing quick
snapshots with the least amount of adjustment.
1 On the Mode screen, select Auto.
2 Align your subject in the frame.
3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus.
The camera selects a scene. An appropriate scene icon appears at
the screen.
A
My Camera > Shooting modes
55
Recognizable scenes
Icon Description
Landscapes
Scenes with bright white backgrounds
Landscapes at night
Portraits at night
Landscapes with backlighting
Portraits with backlighting
Portraits
Close-up photos of objects
Close-up photos of text
Sunsets
Indoors, dark
Partially lit
Close-up with spot lighting
Portraits with spot lighting
Icon Description
Blue skies
Forested areas typically consist of green-colored subjects
Close-up photos of colorful subjects
Camera is stabilized on a tripod and the subject is not moving for a
certain period of time. (when shooting in the dark)
Actively moving subjects
Fireworks (when using a tripod)
4 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo.
The camera may detect different scenes, even the same subjects, depending
on external factors such as camera shake, lighting, or distance to the subject.
If the camera does not recognize an appropriate scene mode, it uses the
default settings for the Auto mode.
Even if it detects a face, the camera may not select a portrait mode
depending on the subject's position or lighting.
Even if you use a tripod, the camera may not detect the tripod mode ( ) if
the subject is moving.
The camera consumes more battery power, because it changes settings often
to select appropriate scenes.
My Camera > Shooting modes
56
Smart mode
In Smart mode, you can capture photos with options that are preset for a
specific scene.
1 On the Mode screen, select Smart.
2 Select a scene.
Option Description
Beauty Face Capture a portrait using options to make the skin
tone softer and brighter.
Best Face Capture multiple photos and replace faces to
create the best possible image.
Continuous Shot Capture a series of photos of moving subjects.
Kids Shot Capture a photo with a funny sound to get a kid's
attention.
Landscape Capture still-life scenes and landscapes.
Macro Capture small or close-up subjects.
Food Capture a photo of food in more colorful tones.
Parties and
Indoors Capture a crisp indoor photos.
Action Freeze Capture subjects moving at high speed.
Rich Tones Capture a photo with vibrant colors.
Panorama Capture a wide panoramic scene in a single photo.
Waterfall Capture scenes with waterfalls.
Option Description
Silhouette Capture subjects as dark shapes against a light
background.
Sunset Capture scenes at sunset, with natural-looking
reds and yellows.
Night Capture a photo with less blurring and image
noise in low light conditions.
Fireworks Capture scenes with fireworks.
Light Trace Capture scenes with the light trailing in low-light
conditions.
3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture.
Using the Beauty Face mode
In Beauty Face mode, you can use options to make the skin tone softer and
brighter before capturing a portrait.
1 On the Mode screen, select Smart ĺ Beauty Face.
2 Press [m] ĺb ĺ Face Retouch.
3 Press [D/I] to select an option.
4 Press [C/F] to adjust the option.
You can also drag the sliders or touch +/- to adjust the options.
My Camera > Shooting modes
57
5 Press [o].
6 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter]
to focus.
7 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo.
Using the Best Face mode
In Best Face mode, you can capture multiple photos and replace faces to
create the best possible image. Use this mode to select the best image for
each individual when capturing group photos.
1 On the Mode screen, select Smart ĺ Best Face.
2 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter]
to focus.
3 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo.
The camera captures 5 photos consecutively.
The first photo is set as the background image.
The camera automatically detects faces after shooting.
4 Touch a face to replace.
Back Save
5 Touch the best image from the 5 faces that were captured.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to replace the rest of the faces in the photo.
The icon will appear on the image that the camera recommends.
6 Press [o] to save the photo.
Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking.
The resolution is set to 5.9M or less.
My Camera > Shooting modes
58
Capturing panoramic photos
In Panorama mode, you can capture a wide panoramic scene in a single
photo. Panorama mode captures and combines a series of photos to create
a panoramic image.
1 On the Mode screen, select Smart ĺ Panorama.
2 Press and hold [Shutter], and then slowly move the camera in
the direction you selected.
An arrow toward the direction of motion is displayed, and the entire
shooting image is displayed in the preview box.
When the scenes are aligned, the camera captures the next photo
automatically.
3 When you are finished, release [Shutter].
The camera will automatically save the shots into one photo.
If you release [Shutter] while shooting, the panoramic shooting
stops and photos that have been captured are saved.
The resolution varies depending on the panoramic photo you captured.
In Panorama mode, some shooting options are not available.
The camera may stop shooting due to the shooting composition or the
subject's movement.
In Panorama mode, your camera may not capture the entire last scene if you
stop moving the camera to improve the photo quality. To capture the entire
scene, move your camera slightly beyond the point where you want the
scene to end.
For best results when capturing panoramic photos, avoid the following:
- moving the camera too quickly or too slowly
- moving the camera too little to capture the next image
- moving the camera at irregular speeds
- shaking the camera
- shooting in dark places
- capturing moving subjects nearby
- shooting conditions where the brightness or color of light is changing
Photos taken are automatically saved, and shooting is stopped under the
following conditions:
- if you change the shooting direction while shooting
- if you move the camera too rapidly
- if you do not move the camera
My Camera > Shooting modes
59
Program mode
The camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture value so that
an optimal exposure value can be achieved.
This mode is useful when you want to capture shots of constant exposure
while being able to adjust other settings.
1 On the Mode screen, select Program.
2 Set the desired options.
3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture the photo.
My Camera > Shooting modes
60
Program Shift
Program Shift function lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture
value while the camera maintains the same exposure. Press [I] to
select the shutter speed and aperture value and press [C/F] to adjust
the aperture value. The shutter speed will change according to the
aperture value.
Minimum shutter speed
Set the shutter speed not to be slower than the selected speed. However, if
an optimal exposure value cannot be achieved because the ISO sensitivity
reached the maximum ISO value that is set by Auto ISO Range, shutter
speed may be slower than the selected minimum shutter speed.
To set the minimum
shutter speed,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Minimum
Shutter Speed ĺ an option.
This feature is available only when the ISO sensitivity is set to Auto.
This feature is available only in Program or Aperture Priority mode.
My Camera > Shooting modes
61
Aperture Priority mode
In Aperture Priority mode, the camera automatically calculates shutter
speed according to the aperture value you choose.
You can adjust the depth of field (DOF) by changing the aperture value.
This mode is useful for taking portraits, flowers, or landscape shots.
Large Depth of Field Small Depth of Field
1 On the Mode screen, select Aperture Priority.
2 Press [I] to select the aperture value.
3 Press [C/F] to adjust the aperture value.
4 Set the desired options.
5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture the photo.
In low-light settings, you may need to increase the ISO sensitivity to prevent
blurred photos.
To set the minimum shutter speed, in Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ
Minimum Shutter Speed ĺ an option.
You can also touch the aperture value on the screen to adjust it.
My Camera > Shooting modes
62
Shutter Priority mode
In Shutter Priority mode, the camera automatically adjusts the aperture
value according to the shutter speed you choose. This mode is useful for
capturing photos of fast-moving subjects or for creating tracer effects in a
photo.
For example, set the shutter speed to over 1/500 s to freeze the subject. To
make the subject appear blurred set the shutter speed to below 1/30 s.
Slow shutter speed Fast shutter speed
1 On the Mode screen, select Shutter Priority.
2 Press [I] to select the shutter speed.
3 Press [C/F] to adjust the shutter speed.
4 Set the desired options.
5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture the photo.
In order to compensate for the reduced amount of light allowed by fast
shutter speeds, open the aperture and let in more light. If your photos are still
too dark, increase the ISO value.
You can also touch the shutter speed on the screen to adjust it.
My Camera > Shooting modes
63
Manual mode
Manual mode lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture value
manually. In this mode, you can fully control the exposure of your photos.
This mode is useful in controlled shooting environments, such as a studio,
or when it is necessary to fine-tune camera settings. The Manual mode is
also recommended for shooting night scenes or fireworks.
1 On the Mode screen, select Manual.
2 Press [I] to select the aperture value or shutter speed.
3 Press [C/F] to adjust the aperture value or shutter speed.
4 Set the desired options.
5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture the photo.
You can also touch the aperture value or shutter speed on the screen to adjust it.
Using Framing Mode
When you adjust the aperture value or shutter speed, the exposure
changes according to the settings, so the display may darken. With this
function on, the brightness of the display is constant regardless of the
settings, so you can better frame your shot.
To use Framing
Mode,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Framing Mode
ĺ an option.
My Camera > Shooting modes
64
Using the Bulb function
Use the Bulb function to shoot night scenes or the night sky. While you are
pressing [Shutter], the shutter is left open so you can create moving light
effects.
To use a bulb,
In Shooting mode, press [I] to select the shutter speed ĺ
Press [C] repeatedly to set the shutter speed to Bulb ĺ
Press and hold [Shutter] for the desired time.
If you set a high ISO value or open the shutter for a long time, image noise
may increase.
Drive options, flash, and One touch shot cannot be used with the Bulb
function.
The Bulb function is available only in Manual mode.
Use a tripod and shutter release to prevent your camera from shaking.
The longer you open the shutter, the longer it takes to save a photo. Do not
turn the camera off while the camera saves a photo.
If you use this function for a long time, use a fully charged battery.
My Camera > Shooting modes
65
H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC) is the latest video coding format established
in 2003 collaboratively by ISO-IEC and ITU-T. Since this format uses a high
compression rate, more data can be saved in less memory space.
If you have the image stabilizer option on when shooting a movie, the
camera may record the image stabilizer sound.
If you remove the camera lens while recording a movie, the recording will be
interrupted. Do not change the lens while recording.
If you change the shooting angle of the camera suddenly while shooting a
movie, the camera may not be able to record images accurately. Use a tripod
to minimize camera shake.
The camera supports only the Multi AF function when recording a video. You
cannot use any other focus area setting functions.
When the size of a movie file exceeds 4 GB, the camera automatically stops
recording even if the maximum recording time (29 minutes and 59 seconds)
has not been reached.
If you use a slow writing memory card, the recording of your movie can
be interrupted because the card cannot process data at the rate the video
is being shot. If this occurs, replace the card with a faster memory card or
reduce the video size (for example, from 1280X720 to 640X480).
When formatting a memory card, always format using the camera. If you
format on another camera or a PC, you can lose files on the card or cause a
change in the capacity of the card.
While recording a video in the same ISO sensitivity, the screen may be darker
than taking a photo. Adjust the ISO sensitivity.
When you record a video in Program, Aperture Priority, or Shutter Priority
mode, ISO is automatically set to Auto.
Recording a video
In Shooting mode, you can record Full HD videos (1920X1080) by pressing
(Video recording). The camera lets you record a video up to 29 minutes
and 59 seconds in length at 30 fps, and saves the files in MP4 (H.264)
format. The sound is recorded via the camera's microphone.
Select Fader to fade in or out a scene. You can also select Voice or other
options to set recording options. (p. 101)
1 On the Mode screen, select a shooting mode.
This feature may not work in some modes.
2 Set the desired options.
3 Press (Video recording) to start recording.
The camera will retain the shutter speed and aperture value that
you have set before starting shooting.
4 Press (Video recording) again to stop.
You can also press [Shutter] to stop recording.
My Camera > Shooting modes
66
Available functions by shooting mode
For details about shooting functions, see Chapter 2.
Function Auto Smart Program Aperture Priority Shutter Priority Manual
Face Retouch (p. 56) - O ----
Photo Size (p. 69) OOOOOO
Quality (p. 70) - OOOOO
ISO (p. 71) - - OOOO
White Balance (p. 72) - - OOOO
Picture Wizard (p. 74) - - OOOO
Smart Filter (p. 96) - - OOOO
AF Mode (p. 75) - OOOOO
AF Area (p. 77) - OOOOO
Face Detection (p. 79) - - OOOO
Touch AF (p. 81) OOOOOO
MF Assist (p. 83) OOOOOO
Link AE to AF Point (p. 94) - - OOOO
Framing Mode (p. 63) - - OOOO
O: You can select options for the function. (Available options vary by shooting mode.)
-: The function is set to a certain option by default or the function is not available.
My Camera > Shooting modes
67
Function Auto Smart Program Aperture Priority Shutter Priority Manual
OIS (Anti-Shake) (p. 84) OOOOOO
Drive (Continuous/Burst/Timer/Bracket)
(p. 85) OOOOOO
Metering (p. 92) - - OOOO
Dynamic Range (p. 95) - - OOOO
Flash (p. 90) OOOOOO
Exposure compensation (p. 97) - - OOO -
Exposure lock (p. 98) - - OOO -
O: You can select options for the function. (Available options vary by shooting mode.)
-: The function is set to a certain option by default or the function is not available.
Chapter 2
Shooting Functions
Learn about the functions you can set in Shooting mode.
You can enjoy more customized photos and videos by using the shooting functions.
69
Shooting Functions > Size and Resolution ize and Resolution
Shooting Functions
Photo size
As you increase the resolution, your photo or video will include more
pixels, so it can be printed on larger paper or displayed on a larger screen.
When you use a high resolution, the file size will also increase. Select a low
resolution for photos that will be displayed in a digital picture frame or
uploaded to the web.
To set the size, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Photo Size ĺ
an option.
* Default
Icon Size Recommended for
(3:2) 5472x3648* Printing on A1 paper.
(3:2) 3888x2592 Printing on A2 paper.
(3:2) 2976x1984 Printing on A3 paper.
(3:2) 1728x1152 Printing on A5 paper.
(16:9) 5472x3080 Printing on A1 paper or viewing on an
HDTV.
(16:9) 3712x2088 Printing on A3 paper or viewing on an
HDTV.
(16:9) 2944x1656 Printing on A4 paper or viewing on an
HDTV.
(16:9) 1920x1080 Printing on A5 paper or viewing on an
HDTV.
(1:1) 3648x3648 Printing a square photo on A1 paper.
(1:1) 2640x2640 Printing a square photo on A3 paper.
(1:1) 2000x2000 Printing a square photo on A4 paper.
(1:1) 1024x1024 Attaching to an email.
Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
Size and Resolution
70
Shooting Functions > Size and Resolution
Quality
The camera saves photos in either the JPEG or RAW format.
Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to the JPEG format
and stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the
time of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to the JPEG format and are
stored in the memory without any changes.
RAW files have the file extension "SRW". To adjust and calibrate exposures,
White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors of the RAW files, or to convert
them into JPEG or TIFF format, use the Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
program found on the supplied DVD-ROM.
Ensure you have enough space on the memory card to save photos in the
RAW format.
To set the quality, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Quality ĺ
an option.
* Default
Icon Format Description
JPEG
Super Fine*:
Compressed for the best quality.
Recommended for printing in large size.
JPEG
Fine:
Compressed for better quality.
Recommended for printing in normal size.
* Default
Icon Format Description
JPEG
Normal:
Compressed for normal quality.
Recommended for printing in small size or
uploading to the web.
RAW
RAW:
Save a photo without data loss.
Recommended for editing after shooting.
RAW+JPEG RAW + S.Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG
(S.Fine quality) and RAW format.
RAW+JPEG RAW + Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG (Fine
quality) and RAW format.
RAW+JPEG RAW + Normal: Save a photo in both the JPEG
(Normal quality) and RAW format.
Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
71
Shooting Functions > ISO sensitivity SO sensitivity
Shooting Functions
The ISO sensitivity value represents the sensitivity of camera to light.
The larger the ISO value, the more sensitive the camera is to light.
Consequently, by selecting a higher ISO sensitivity value, you can capture
photos in dim or dark places at faster shutter speeds. However, this may
increase electronic noise and result in a grainy photo.
To set ISO sensitivity, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ ISO ĺ an
option.
Examples
ISO 160 ISO 400
ISO 800 ISO 3200
Increase the ISO value in places where flash use is prohibited. You can capture
a clear photo by setting a high ISO value without having to secure more light.
Use the Noise Reduction function in order to reduce the visual noise that can
appear on photos of a high ISO value. (p. 147)
Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions.
You can also touch the ISO value on the screen to adjust it.
ISO sensitivity
72
Shooting Functions > White Balance ite Balance
Shooting Functions
White Balance represents the light source that influences on the color of a
photo.
The color of a photo depends on the type and quality of the light source.
If you want the color of your photo to be realistic, select an appropriate
lighting condition to calibrate the White Balance, such as Auto WB,
Daylight, Cloudy, Tungsten, or adjust color temperature manually.
You can also adjust color for the preset light sources so that the colors of
the photo match the actual scene under mixed lighting conditions.
To set the White
Balance,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ White Balance ĺ
an option.
* Default
Icon Description
Auto WB*: Use automatic settings depending on the lighting
conditions.
Daylight: Select when taking outdoor photos on a sunny day. This
option results in photos closest to the natural colors of the scene.
Cloudy: Select when taking outdoor photos on a cloudy day or in
shadows. Photos captured on cloudy days tend to be more bluish
than on sunny days. This option offsets that effect.
Fluorescent White: Select when shooting under a daylight
fluorescent lamp, especially for white fluorescent light.
* Default
Icon Description
N
Fluorescent NW: Select when shooting under a daylight
fluorescent lamp, especially for white fluorescent light of very
white hues.
D
Fluorescent Daylight: Select when shooting under a daylight
fluorescent lamp, especially for white fluorescent light of slightly
bluish hue.
Tungsten: Select when taking indoor photos under incandescent
bulbs or halogen lamps. Incandescent tungsten bulbs tend to have
a reddish hue. This option offsets that effect.
Flash WB: Select when using a flash.
Custom Set: Use your pre-defined settings. You can manually set
the White Balance by pressing [D], and then shooting a white
sheet of paper. Fill the spot metering circle with the paper and set
the White Balance.
Color Temperature: Manually adjust the color temperature of
the light source. Color temperature is a measurement in degrees
Kelvin that indicates the specific type of light source. You can get a
warmer photo with a higher value, and a cooler photo with a lower
value. Press [D], and then adjust the color temperature.
Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
White Balance
73
Shooting Functions > White Balance
Customizing preset White Balance options
You can also customize preset White Balance options.
To customize
preset options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ White Balance ĺ
an option ĺ [D] ĺ press [D/I/C/F].
White Balance : Daylight
Back Set Reset
You can also touch an area on the screen.
Examples
Auto WB Daylight
Fluorescent Daylight Tungsten
74
Shooting Functions > Picture Wizard (photo styles) icture Wizard (photo styles)
Shooting Functions
Picture Wizard lets you apply different photo styles to your photo to create
various looks and emotional moods. You can also create and save your
own photo styles by adjusting color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast for
each style.
There is no rule for which style is suitable in which conditions. Experiment
with different styles and find your own settings.
To set a photo style, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Picture Wizard
ĺ an option.
Examples
Standard Vivid Portrait
Landscape Forest Retro
Cool Calm Classic
You can also adjust the value of the preset style settings. Select a Picture
Wizard option, press [D], and then adjust color, saturation, sharpness, or
contrast.
To customize your own picture wizard, select , , or , and then adjust
the color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast.
Picture Wizard options cannot be set with Smart Filter options at the same
time.
Picture Wizard (photo styles)
75
Shooting Functions > AF mode
Shooting Functions
AF mode
Learn how to adjust the camera’s focus according to the subjects.
You can select a focusing mode appropriate to the subject among Single
Auto Focus, Continuous Auto Focus, and Manual Focus. The AF function is
activated when you press [Shutter] halfway. In the MF mode, you have to
press [C/F] to focus manually.
In most cases, you can have a focus by selecting Single AF. Fast moving
subjects or subjects with small shading differences to the background are
difficult to focus. Select an appropriate focusing mode for such instances.
To set the auto
focus mode, In Shooting mode, press [F] ĺ an option.
You can also set the option by pressing [m] ĺb ĺ AF Mode ĺ
an option in Shooting mode.
The available options may differ depending on the lens in use.
Single AF
Single AF is appropriate for shooting a still subject. When you press
[Shutter] halfway, the focus fixes in the focus area. The area turns green
when the focus is achieved.
76
Shooting Functions > AF mode
Continuous AF
While you are pressing [Shutter] halfway, the camera continues to
automatic focusing. Once the focus area is fixed on the subject, the subject
is always in focus even when moving. This mode is recommended for
shooting a person on a bicycle, a running dog, or a car racing scene.
Manual focus
You can manually focus on a subject by pressing [C/F] on the
camera. The MF Assist function lets you easily achieve a focus. While
you are adjusting the focus, the focus area is magnified. This mode is
recommended for shooting an object similar in color to the background, a
night scene, or fireworks.
After capturing a photo with manual focus, press [o] ĺ [C/F] to manually
adjust the focus again.
If you use this function, you cannot set Touch AF, Face Detection, AF Area,
and Link AE to AF Point options.
While you are adjusting the focus, the manual focus scale
( ) appears.
77
Shooting Functions > AF area
Shooting Functions
The AF area function changes the positions of the focus area.
Generally, cameras focus on the nearest subject. When there are a lot of
subjects, however, unwanted subjects can be in focus. In order to prevent
unwanted subjects from being in focus, change the focus area so that
a desired subject is in focus. You can get a clearer and sharper photo by
selecting an appropriate focus area.
To set the auto
focus area,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ AF Area ĺ
an option.
Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
Selection AF
You can set the focus on an area you want. Apply an out-of-focus effect to
make the subject more distinguishable.
The focus on the photo below was repositioned and resized so that it fits
the subject’s face.
To resize or move the focus area, in Shooting mode, press [o]. Touch an area to
focus on it or press [D/I/C/F] to move the focus area, and pinch your
fingers together or spread them apart to resize the focus area.
AF area
78
Shooting Functions > AF area
Multi AF
The camera displays a green rectangle in places where focus is set
correctly. The photo is divided into two or more areas, and the camera
obtains focus points of each area. It is recommended for scenery photos.
When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera displays the focus areas as
shown in the photo below.
79
Shooting Functions > Face Detection ce Detection
Shooting Functions
Face Detection
Use Face Detection options to capture a self portrait or a smiling face.
To use the face
detection function,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Face Detection
ĺ an option.
When your camera detects a face, it tracks the detected face automatically.
When you use the Face Detection AF option, the camera focuses on the area
with the white frame automatically.
Depending on the Picture Wizard options, Face Detection may not be
effective.
When you set manual focus, Face Detection may not be available.
Face Detection may not be effective when:
- the subject is far from the camera
- it is too bright or too dark
- the subject is not facing the camera
- the subject is wearing sunglasses or a mask
- the subject’s facial expression changes drastically
- the subject is backlit or the lighting conditions are unstable
When you set Face Detection options, the AF area is automatically set to Multi
AF.
Depending on the Face Detection options you selected, some shooting
options may not be available.
Normal
The camera focuses on human faces preferentially. Faces of up to
10 people can be detected. This setting is recommended for shooting a
group of people.
When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera focuses on faces as shown
in the photo below. In cases of shooting a group of people, the camera
displays the focus on the nearest person’s face in white and the rest of the
people’s faces in gray.
80
Shooting Functions > Face Detection
Wink Shot
The camera automatically releases the shutter 2 seconds after it detects a
winking face.
Wink for more than 1 second for better detection.
Wink detection may fail when:
- the camera is below eye level
- the subject appears dark due to backlighting
- the subject is wearing glasses
- the subject is far from the camera
Smile Shot
The camera automatically releases the shutter when it detects a smiling
face.
When your subject smiles broadly, your camera can detect the smile more easily.
81
Shooting Functions > Touch AF
Shooting Functions
Tracking AF
Tracking AF allows you to track and automatically focus on your subject,
even when the subject is moving or when you change the shooting
composition.
White frame: Your camera is
tracking the subject.
Green frame: Your subject is
in focus when you half-press
[Shutter].
Red frame: Your camera failed to
focus.
Select or focus on an area that you touch on the screen. Additionally, focus
on the subject and capture a photo by touching on the screen.
To set Touch AF, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺTouch AF ĺ
an option.
Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions.
You can also touch on the screen and select an option in Shooting mode.
Touch AF
Touch AF allows you to select and focus on the focus area that you touch
on the screen.
AF Point
The focus area will correspond to the area you touch on the screen and the
focus will not be achieved.
Touch AF
82
Shooting Functions > Touch AF
One touch shot
You can capture a photo with the touch of your finger. As you touch a
subject, the camera focuses on the subject automatically and captures a
photo.
If you do not select a focus area, the Auto Focus function does not work.
Tracking a subject may fail when:
- the subject is too small
- the subject moves irregularly
- the subject is backlit or you are shooting in a dark place
- colors or patterns on the subject and the background are the same
- the subject includes horizontal patterns, such as blinds
- the camera shakes excessively
- you capture photos continuously
When tracking fails, the feature will be reset.
If the camera fails to track the subject, the focus area will be reset.
If the camera fails to focus, the focus frame will change to red and the focus
will be reset.
83
Shooting Functions > Shooting Functions > MF Assist F Assist
Shooting Functions
In the manual focus mode, you have to press [C/F] to focus. When
you use the MF Assist function, you can achieve a clearer focus because
the focus area is magnified. This function is only available on a lens that
supports manual focus.
To set the manual
focus assist,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ MF Assist ĺ
an option.
* Default
Option Description
Off Do not use the MF Assist function.
Enlarge x5*
The focus area is magnified by 5 times when you adjust the
focus.
Enlarge x8
The focus area is magnified by 8 times when you adjust the
focus.
MF Assist
84
Shooting Functions > Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) ptical Image Stabilization (OIS)
Shooting Functions
Use the Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) function to minimize camera
shake. OIS may not be available with some lenses.
Camera shake tends to occur in dark places or when shooting indoors.
In such cases, the camera uses slower shutter speeds in order to increase
the amount of light taken in, which can result in a blurry photo. You can
prevent this situation by using the OIS function.
To set OIS options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ OIS (Anti-Shake)
ĺ an option.
* Default
Icon Description
Mode 1*: The OIS function is applied only when you press
[Shutter] in full or half.
Mode 2: The OIS function is on.
Off: The OIS function is off.
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS)
Without OIS correction With OIS correction
OIS may not function properly when:
- you move your camera to follow a moving subject
- there is too much camera shake
- the shutter speed is slow (for example, when you select Night in
Smart mode)
- the battery is low
- you capture a close-up shot
If you use the OIS function with a tripod, your images may be blurred by
the vibration of the OIS sensor. Deactivate the OIS function when you use a
tripod.
If the camera is hit or dropped, the display will be blurry. If this occurs, turn off
the camera, and then turn it on again.
Use the OIS function only when needed because the function consumes
more battery power.
This option may not be available with some lenses.
85
Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) rive (shooting method)
Shooting Functions
You can set the shooting method, such as Continuous, Burst, Timer or
Bracketing.
Select Single to capture one photo at a time. Select Continuous Normal
or Burst to shoot fast moving subjects. Select AE Bracket, WB Bracket, P
Wiz Bracket, or Depth Bracket to adjust exposure, White Balance, apply
picture Wizard effects, or capture photos with different depths of field. You
can also select Timer to capture a photo automatically after a specified
time.
To change the
shooting method, In Shooting mode, press [C] ĺ an option.
You can also set the option by pressing [m] ĺb ĺ Drive ĺ
a shooting method in Shooting mode.
Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
Single
Capture one photo whenever you press [Shutter]. Recommended for
general conditions.
Drive (shooting method)
86
Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method)
Continuous Normal
Continuously capture photos while you are pressing [Shutter]. You can
capture up to 6 photos per second.
Maximum shooting speed is 6 frames per second. It will slow down after approx.
JPEG 11 shots, RAW 4 shots. (May vary depending on the spec of memory card.)
Burst
Consecutively capture up to 10 shots per second (3 seconds), 15 shots per
second (2 seconds), or 30 shots per second (1 second) when you press
[Shutter] once. It is recommended for shooting the rapid motion of fast
moving subjects such as racing cars.
• To set the number of shots, in Shooting mode, press [C] ĺ Burst, and then
press [D].
• The photo size is set to 5M.
• It may take longer to save a photo.
• You cannot use the flash with this option.
• Shutter speed must be faster than 1/30 second.
• Photos captured with this option may be slightly enlarged when saving.
• You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200.
• This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available
when the photo quality is set to RAW.
87
Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method)
Timer
Capture a photo after a specified time. You can set the Timer for 2 to 30
seconds.
Press [Shutter] to stop capturing.
To set the timer details, in Shooting mode, press [C] ĺTimer, and then press
[D].
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket)
When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos: the
original, one a step darker, and one a step lighter. Use a tripod to prevent
blurry photos as the camera captures three photos continuously. You can
adjust the settings in Bracket Settings menu.
Exposure -2
Original
Exposure +2
To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ
an option.
88
Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method)
White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket)
When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos:
the original and two more with different White Balance settings. The
original photo is captured when you press [Shutter]. The other two are
automatically adjusted according to the White Balance you have set. You
can adjust the settings in Bracket Settings menu.
WB-2
Original
WB+2
To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ
an option.
This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available
when the photo quality is set to RAW.
Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket)
When you press [Shutter], the camera captures three consecutive photos,
each with a different Picture Wizard setting. The camera captures a photo
and applies the three Picture Wizard options you have set to the image
captured. You can select three different settings in Bracket Settings menu.
Vivid
Standard
Retro
To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ
an option.
This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available
when the photo quality is set to RAW.
89
Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method)
Depth Bracketing
When you press [Shutter], the camera captures three consecutive photos,
each with a different depth of field by adjusting the aperture value. Use
a tripod to prevent blurry photos as the camera captures three photos
continuously. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Settings menu.
To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ
an option.
This feature is available only in Program or Aperture Priority mode.
If the aperture value is set to its maximum or minimum, two photos will be
captured with the maximum or minimum aperture value.
90
Shooting Functions > Flash
Shooting Functions
In order to capture a realistic photo of a subject, the amount of light
should be constant. When the light source varies, you can use a flash and
supply a constant amount of light. Select appropriate settings according to
a light source and a subject.
To set flash options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Flash ĺ
an option.
Icon Description
Off: Do not use the flash.
A
Smart Flash: The camera automatically adjusts the brightness
of the flash according to the amount of light in the surrounding
environment.
A Auto: The flash automatically fires in dark places.
Auto Red-eye: The flash automatically fires and reduces red-eyes.
Fill in: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo. (Brightness is
automatically adjusted.)
Fill-in Red: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo and
reduces red-eyes.
1st Curtain: The flash fires
immediately after the shutter opens.
The camera captures a photo of a
subject earlier in an action sequence
clearly. Ball moving direction
Icon Description
2nd Curtain: The flash fires just
before the shutter closes. The
camera captures a photo of a
subject later in an action sequence
clearly. Ball moving direction
The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the
flash fires a second time.
If you select Off, the flash does not fire even when an external flash is
attached.
For some lenses, the lens may block the light from the internal flash. If this
occurs, use an optional external flash.
If you attach a lens other than the one provided, using a lens mount adapter,
no flashes will fire.
Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible external flashes may
damage your camera.
Flash
91
Shooting Functions > Flash
Reducing the red-eye effect
If the flash fires when you capture a photo of a person in the dark, a red
glow may appear in the eyes. To reduce the red-eye effect, select Auto
Red-eye or Fill-in Red.
Without red-eye reduction With red-eye reduction
If the subject is too far from the camera or moves when the first flash fires, redeyes
may not be reduced.
Adjusting the flash intensity
When the flash is on, adjust the flash intensity ±2 levels.
To set the flash
intensity,
In Shooting mode, touch ĺ Flash ĺ move to a desired
option ĺ press [D] ĺ [C/F].
Back Set
Flash : Fill in
You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the intensity.
Adjusting the flash intensity may not be effective when:
- the subject is too close to the camera
- you set a high ISO sensitivity
- the exposure value is too big or too small
In some shooting modes, you cannot use this function.
If the subject is too close when you use the flash, some light may be blocked,
resulting in a dark photo. Ensure that the subject is within the recommended
range, which varies by lens.
92
Shooting Functions > Metering etering
Shooting Functions
The metering mode refers to the way in which a camera measures the
quantity of light.
The camera measures the amount of light in a scene, and in many of its
modes, uses the measurement to adjust various settings. For example,
if a subject looks darker than its actual color, the camera captures an
overexposed photo of it. If a subject looks lighter than its actual color, the
camera captures an underexposed photo of it.
The brightness and overall mood of the photo can also be affected by how
the camera measures the amount of light. Select an appropriate setting for
a shooting condition.
To set a metering
option,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Metering ĺ an
option.
Multi
The Multi mode calculates the amount of light in multiple areas. When
light is sufficient or insufficient, the camera adjusts the exposure by
averaging the overall brightness of the scene. This mode is suitable for
general photos.
Metering
93
Shooting Functions > Metering
Center-weighted
The Center-weighted mode calculates a broader area than the Spot mode
does. It sums up the amount of light in the center portion of the shot
(60–80%) and that of the rest of the shot (20–40%). It is recommended
for situations where there is a slight difference in brightness between a
subject and a background or an area of the subject is large compared to
the overall composition of the photo.
Spot
The Spot mode calculates the amount of light in the center. When you
capture a photo in conditions where there is a strong backlight behind a
subject, the camera adjusts the exposure so as to shoot a subject correctly.
For example, when you select the Multi mode in a strong backlight
condition, the camera calculates that the overall amount of light is
abundant, which results in a darker photo. The Spot mode can prevent this
situation as it calculates the amount of light in a designated area.
The subject is in bright color while the background is dark. The Spot mode
is recommended for a situation like this where a huge difference in the
exposure exists between a subject and a background.
94
Shooting Functions > Metering
Measuring the exposure value of the focus area
When this function is turned on, the camera automatically sets an optimal
exposure by calculating the brightness of the focus area. This function
is only available when you select Spot metering or Multi metering, and
Selection AF.
To set this
function,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Link AE to AF
Point ĺ an option.
95
Shooting Functions > Dynamic Range namic Range
Shooting Functions
This function automatically corrects the loss of bright detail that can occur
due to shading differences in the photo.
To set Dynamic Range
options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ
Dynamic Range ĺ an option.
Without Dynamic Range effect With Dynamic Range effect
* Default
Icon Description
Off*: Do not use Dynamic Range.
Smart Range+: Correct the loss of bright detail.
HDR: Capture 3 photos with different exposures, and then
combine them to create a single image automatically.
You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200.
Dynamic Range options cannot be set with drive options
other than Single or Timer.
Dynamic Range options cannot be set with Smart Filter or
Picture Wizard options at the same time.
Dynamic Range options cannot be set with the Bulb function.
Dynamic Range
96
Shooting Functions > Smart Filter mart Filter
Shooting Functions
Smart Filter lets you apply special effects to your photos or videos. You can
select various filter options to create special effects that are difficult to be
achieved with normal lenses.
To set Smart Filter
options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Smart Filter ĺ
an option.
* Default
Option Description
Off* No effect
Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong
vignette effect of Lomo cameras.
Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in
miniature.
Sketch Apply a pen sketch effect.
Fish Eye Distort close objects to imitate the visual effect of a
fisheye lens.
Smart Filter options cannot be set with Picture Wizard options at the same time.
Smart Filter
97
Shooting Functions > Exposure compensation xposure compensation
Shooting Functions
The camera automatically sets the exposure by measuring the levels of
light from the photo’s composition and the position of a subject. If the
exposure set by the camera is higher or lower than you expected, you can
adjust the exposure value manually. The exposure value is adjustable in ±3
increments. The camera displays the exposure warning in red for each step
beyond ±3 range.
To adjust the exposure value, touch the exposure level indicator on the
screen or touch ĺ EV and adjust the exposure value. You can also
press [I] to select the exposure value and press [C/F] to adjust it.
You can check the exposure value by the position of the exposure level
indicator.
Exposure level
indicator
Increased exposure
(brighter)
Decreased exposure
(darker)
Exposure warning Standard exposure index
-2
Original
+2
Exposure compensation
98
Shooting Functions > Exposure lock xposure lock
Shooting Functions
When you cannot achieve an appropriate exposure because of a strong
brightness contrast, lock the exposure and then capture a photo.
To lock the exposure, adjust the photo’s composition on which you want
to calculate the exposure, and then press the Custom button. (when the
function of the Custom button is set to AEL) (p. 151)
After locking the exposure, aim the lens where you desire, and then press
[Shutter].
Exposure lock
99
Shooting Functions > Video functions ideo functions
Shooting Functions
The functions available for video are explained below.
Movie size
Set the movie size.
To set movie size
options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Movie Size ĺ
an option.
When Video Out is set to NTSC
* Default
Icon Size Recommended for
* 1920X1080 (30 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV.
1280X720 (30 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV.
640X480 (30 fps) (4:3) View on a TV.
320X240 (30 fps) (4:3) Post on a website using the wireless
network (30 seconds maximum).
When Video Out is set to PAL
* Default
Icon Size Recommended for
* 1920X1080 (25 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV.
1280X720 (25 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV.
640X480 (25 fps) (4:3) View on a TV.
320X240 (25 fps) (4:3) Post on a website using the wireless
network (30 seconds maximum).
Video functions
100
Shooting Functions > Video functions
Movie quality
Set the Movie quality.
To set movie
quality options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Movie Quality ĺ
an option.
* Default
Icon Extension Description
MP4 (H.264) Normal: Record videos in normal quality.
MP4 (H.264) HQ*: Record videos in high quality.
Multi Motion
Set the playing speed of a video.
To set playing
speed options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺMulti Motion ĺ
an option.
* Default
Icon Description
x0.25: Record a video to view it at 1/4 normal speed during
playback. (Available only with 640x480 or 320x240)
x1*: Record a video to view it at normal speed during playback.
x5: Record a video to view it at 5X normal speed during playback.
x10: Record a video to view it at 10X normal speed during
playback.
x20: Record a video to view it at 20X normal speed during
playback.
If you select an option other than x1, the sound recording function and the
Distortion Correct function will not be supported.
The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
101
Shooting Functions > Video functions
Voice
Sometimes, a muted video is more appealing than the one with sound.
Turn the voice off to record a muted video.
To set voice
options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Voice ĺ
an option.
Fader
You can fade in or fade out a scene using the fader function on the camera
without having to do it on a PC. Set the fade in option to gradually fade in
at the start of the scene. Set the fade out option to gradually fade out the
scene. Use the function appropriately and add dramatic effects on your
videos.
To set fader
options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺFader ĺ
an option.
* Default
Icon Description
Off*: Fader function not used.
In: Scene gradually fades in.
Out: Scene gradually fades out.
In-Out: The fader function is applied at the start and end of the
scene.
When you use the fader function, it may take longer to save a file.
Chapter 3
Playback/Editing
Learn about how to play back and edit photos and videos.
Refer to chapter 6 for editing files on a PC.
103
Playback/Editing
Learn how to view photo and video thumbnails and how to protect or
delete files.
If you perform no operations for a while, information and icons on the screen
disappear. When you operate the camera again, they will reappear.
Viewing photos
1 Press [y].
The most recent file you captured will be displayed.
2 Press [C/F] to scroll through files.
You can also drag the image left or right to move to another file.
You may not be able to edit or play back files that were captured with other
cameras, due to unsupported sizes or codecs. Use a computer or another device
to edit or play back these files.
Viewing image thumbnails
In order to search for photos and videos you want, convert to the
thumbnail view by pressing [I] or touching in Playback mode.
The thumbnail view displays multiple images at a time so that you can
easily look through items you wish to find. You can also classify and display
files by category, such as date or file type.
In thumbnail view, press [m] ĺz ĺ View ĺ an item to select the
thumbnail view mode.
Searching and managing files
104
Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files
Viewing files by category
1 In the thumbnail view, press [m] ĺz ĺ Filter ĺ
a category.
* Default
Option Description
All* View files normally.
Date View files by the date they were saved.
File Type View files by the file type.
2 Select a list to open it.
3 Select a file to view it.
Viewing files as a folder
Continuous and burst shots appear as a folder. Selecting a folder will play
back all photos automatically. Deleting a folder will delete all photos in the
folder.
1 In Playback mode, press [C/F] to move to a desired folder.
You can also drag the image left or right to move to a desired folder.
The camera will automatically play back photos in the folder.
2 Press [o] to open the folder.
You can also touch the folder on the screen to open the folder.
105
Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files
3 Press [C/F] to move to another file.
You can also drag the image left or right to move to another file.
4 Press [o] to return to Playback mode.
You can also touch to return to Playback mode.
Protecting files
Protect your files from accidental deletion.
1 In Playback mode, scroll to a file.
2 Press [m] ĺz ĺ Protect ĺ On.
You cannot delete or rotate a protected file.
106
Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files
Deleting files
Delete files in Playback mode and secure more space on your memory
card. Protected files are not deleted.
Deleting a single file
You can select a single file and delete it.
1 In Playback mode, select a file, and then press [n].
2 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.
Deleting multiple files
You can select multiple files and delete them.
1 In Playback mode, press [m] ĺz ĺ Delete ĺ Multiple
Delete.
Alternatively, in thumbnails view, press [n], and then select files to
delete.
2 Select files you want to delete by pressing [C/F], and then
press [o].
Press [o] again to cancel your selection.
3 Press [n].
4 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.
Deleting all files
You can delete all files on the memory card at once.
1 In Playback mode, press [m].
2 Select z ĺ Delete ĺ Delete All.
3 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.
107
Playback/Editing
Enlarging a photo
You can enlarge photos when viewing them in Playback mode. Pinch your
fingers together or spread them apart on the screen to reduce or enlarge
a photo. Drag the photo to move the magnified area. You can also use the
Trim function to extract the portion of the image displayed on the screen
and save it as a new file.
Magnified area
Magnification (The maximum
magnification may differ by
resolution.)
Back Crop
To Do this
Move magnified area Press [D/I/C/F].
Crop the enlarged image Press [o]. (saved as a new file)
Return to the original image Press [m].
Double-tap an area to enlarge it quickly.
Viewing a slide show
You can view photos in a slide show and apply various effects to the slide
show.
1 In Playback mode, press [m].
2 Select z ĺ Slide Show Options.
3 Select a slide show effect option.
Skip to step 4 to start a slide show with no effects.
* Default
Option Description
Play Mode Set whether or not to repeat the slide show.
(One Play*, Repeat)
Interval
Set the interval between photos. (1 sec*, 3 sec, 5
sec, 10 sec)
Intervals can only be set when the scene change
effect is Off.
Effect Set a scene change effect between photos.
Select Off to cancel effects.
Viewing photos
108
Playback/Editing > Viewing photos
4 Press [m].
5 Select Start Slide Show.
6 View the slide show.
Press [o] to pause.
Press [o] again to resume.
Press [m] to stop the slide show and return to Playback mode.
Auto rotating
With Auto Rotate on, the camera automatically rotates photos you have
captured vertically so they fit the screen horizontally.
To set auto rotate
options,
In Playback mode, press [m] ĺz ĺ Auto Rotate ĺ
an option.
109
Playback/Editing
In Playback mode, you can play a video, capture an image from a video, or
crop a video to save as another file.
Stop
Icon Description
View previous file/Scan backward. (Each time you touch the icon
while playing the video, you change the scan speed in this order:
2X, 4X, 8X.)
Pause or resume playback.
View next file/Scan forward. (Each time you touch the icon while
playing the video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X,
4X, 8X.)
Adjust the volume or mute the sound.
Scanning backward or forward
To scan backwards or forwards through a video file while it is playing, use
one of the following methods.
Touch . Each time you touch the icon, you change the scan speed in
this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.
Press [C/F]. Each time you press the button, you change the scan
speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.
Drag the handles that appear on the progress bar to the left or right. You
can change the playback position in the video.
Drag an area on the screen to the left or right. You can change the
playback position in the video.
Playing videos
110
Playback/Editing > Playing videos
Adjusting the brightness of a video
Adjust the brightness of a video while playing it.
To adjust the
brightness of a video,
Touch the left half of the display ĺ drag upward or
downward.
Stop
Adjusting the volume of a video
Adjust the volume of a video while playing it.
To adjust the
volume of a video,
Touch the right half of the display ĺ drag upward or
downward.
Stop
You can also press [D/I] to adjust the volume of a video.
111
Playback/Editing > Playing videos
9 Touch Trim to trim a video.
You can adjust the scene to be cropped by dragging the handles
that appear on the progress bar.
10 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.
The original video should be at least 10 seconds long.
The camera will save the edited video as a new file and leave the original
video intact.
The point where you want the trimming to begin can be selected 2 seconds
after playback starts.
Capturing an image during playback
1 While viewing a video, press [o] or touch at the point where
you want to capture an image.
2 Touch Capture.
The resolution of the captured image will be the same as the original video.
The captured image is saved as a new file.
Trimming a video during playback
1 In Playback mode, scroll to a video, and then press [m].
2 Select Trim Movie.
3 Press [o] or touch to start playing the video.
4 Press [o] or touch at the point where you want the
trimming to begin.
5 Touch Start Point.
6 Press [o] or touch to resume playing the video.
7 Press [o] or touch at the point where you want the
trimming to end.
8 Touch End Point.
112
Playback/Editing
Edited photos are saved as new files under different file names. Photos
captured in some modes cannot be edited with the Image Edit function.
To edit images, In Playback mode, scroll to a photo, and then press [m] ĺ
z ĺ Edit Image ĺan option.
Some images may not be edited with the Image Edit function. In this case, use
the supplied image editing software.
RAW files cannot be edited with the Image Edit function. In this case, use the
supplied image editing software.
The camera will save edited photos as new files.
When you edit photos, the camera will automatically convert them to a lower
resolution. Photos that you rotate or resize manually are not automatically
converted to a lower resolution.
You cannot edit photos while viewing files as a folder. Open the folder and
select a photo to edit each photo.
Cropping a photo
1 Touch ĺ .
2 Drag the corner of the box to adjust the size of the area.
3 Drag the box to move the location of the area.
4 Press [o] or touch to save.
Editing photos
113
Playback/Editing > Editing photos
Rotating a photo
1 Touch ĺ .
2 Touch an option.
Rotate : Right 90˚
3 Press [o] or touch to save.
You can also rotate a photo in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then
selecting z ĺ Rotate ĺ a desired option.
The camera will overwrite the original file.
Resizing photos
Change the size of a photo and save it as a new file.
1 Touch ĺ .
2 Touch an option.
Resize : 3888 x 2592
3 Press [o] or touch to save.
Available resize options differ depending on the original size of the photo.
114
Playback/Editing > Editing photos
Adjusting your photos
You can correct captured photos by adjusting the brightness, contrast, or
color.
1 Touch .
2 Touch an adjusting option.
• If you selected (Auto adjustment), skip to step 6.
Icon Description
Original (Reset to the original image)
Auto adjustment
Brightness
Contrast
Saturation
RGB adjustment
Color Temperature
Exposure
3 Press [C/F] to adjust the option.
• You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the option.
4 Press [o] or touch .
5 Touch .
6 Press [o] or touch to save.
115
Playback/Editing > Editing photos
Retouching faces
1 Touch ĺ .
2 Press [C/F] to adjust the option.
You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the option.
As the number increases, the skin tone becomes brighter and
smoother.
3 Press [o] or touch to save.
116
Playback/Editing > Editing photos
Applying Smart Filter effects
Apply special effects to your photos.
1 Touch , and then touch an option.
Smart Filter : Vignetting
Option Description
Off No effect
Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast,
and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras.
Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject
appear in miniature.
Soft Focus Hide facial imperfections or apply dreamy
effects.
Sketch Apply a pen sketch effect.
Option Description
Fish-eye Distort close objects to imitate the visual effect
of a fisheye lens.
Classic Apply a black and white effect.
Retro Apply a sepia tone effect.
Oil Painting Apply an oil painting effect.
Cartoon Apply a cartoon effect.
Ink Painting Apply ink sketching effect.
Cross Filter
Add lines that radiate outward from bright
objects to imitate the visual effect of a cross
filter.
Zooming Shot Blur the edges of a photo to emphasize the
subjects in the center.
2 Press [o] or touch .
3 Touch to save.
Chapter 4
Wireless network
Learn how to connect to wireless local area networks (WLANs) and use functions.
118
Wireless network
Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Learn to connect via an access point (AP) when you are in a range of a
WLAN. You can also configure network settings.
Connecting to a WLAN
1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi.
2 Select , , , , or .
3 Follow the on-screen instructions until the Wi-Fi Setting screen
appears.
In some modes, press [m], and then select Wi-Fi Setting.
The camera automatically searches for available AP devices.
4 Select an AP.
Samsung1
Samsung2
Samsung3
Wi-Fi Setting
Refresh
Back
Select Refresh to refresh the list of connectable APs.
Select Add wireless network to add an AP manually. The AP name
must be in English to add the AP manually.
Icon Description
Ad hoc AP
Secured AP
WPS AP
Signal strength
Press [F] or touch to open network setting options.
When you select a secured AP, a pop-up window appears. Enter the
required passwords to connect to the WLAN. For information about
entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 122)
When a login page appears, refer to "Using the login browser".
(p. 120)
When you select an unsecured AP, the camera will connect to the
WLAN.
If you select a WPS profile supported AP, select ĺ WPS PIN
connection, and then enter a PIN on the AP device. You can also
connect to a WPS profile supported AP by selecting ĺ WPS
button connection on the camera, and then pushing the WPS
button on the AP device.
If a pop-up message about data collection regulations appears,
read and agree to it.
119
Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Setting network options
1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press
[F] or touch .
2 Select each option, and then enter the required information.
Option Description
Network Password Enter the network password.
IP Setting Set the IP address automatically or manually.
Manually setting the IP address
1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press
[F] or touch .
2 Select IP Setting ĺ Manual.
3 Select each option, and then enter the required information.
Option Description
IP Enter the static IP address.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask.
Gateway Enter the gateway.
DNS Server Enter the DNS address.
120
Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Using the login browser
You can enter your login information via the login browser when
connecting to some APs, sharing services, or cloud servers.
Icon Description
Close the login browser.
Move to the previous page.
Move to the next page.
Stop loading the page.
Reload the page.
You may not be able to select some items depending on the page you
connected to. This does not indicate a malfunction.
The login browser may not close automatically after you log into some pages.
If this occurs, close the login browser by touching , and then proceed with
the desired operation.
It may take longer to load the login page due to the page size or network
speed. If this occurs, wait until the login information input window appears.
121
Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Network connection tips
Some Wi-Fi features are not available if you do not insert a memory card.
The quality of the network connection will be determined by the AP.
The further the distance between your camera and the AP, the longer it
will take to connect to the network.
If a nearby device is using the same radio frequency signal as your
camera, it may interrupt your connection.
If your AP name is not in English, the camera may not be able to locate
the device or the name may appear incorrectly.
For network settings or a password, contact your network administrator
or network service provider.
If a WLAN requires authentication from the service provider, you may not
be able to connect to it. To connect to the WLAN, contact your network
service provider.
Depending on the encryption type, the number of digits in the password
may differ.
A WLAN connection may not be possible in all surroundings.
The camera may display a WLAN enabled printer on the AP List. You
cannot connect to a network via a printer.
You cannot connect your camera to a network and a TV simultaneously.
Connecting to a network may incur additional charges. Costs will vary
based on the conditions of your contract.
If you cannot connect to a WLAN, try another AP from the available AP
list.
A login page may appear when you select free WLANs provided by some
network service providers. Enter your ID and password to connect to
the WLAN. For information about registering or the service, contact the
network service providers.
Be cautious when you enter personal information for an AP connection.
Do not enter any payment or credit card information on your camera.
The manufacturer is not liable for any problem caused by entering such
information.
Available network connections may differ by country.
The WLAN feature of your camera must comply with radio transmission
laws in your region. To ensure compliance, use the WLAN feature only in
the country where you purchased the camera.
The process for adjusting network settings may differ, depending on
network conditions.
Do not access a network that you are not authorized to use.
Before you connect to a network, ensure your battery is fully charged.
You cannot upload or send files captured in some modes.
Files that you transfer to another device may not be supported by the
device. In this case, use a computer to play back the files.
122
Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Entering text
Learn how to enter text. The icons in the table let you move the cursor,
change the case, etc. Press [D/I/C/F] to scroll to a key and press
[o] to enter it. Or, touch a key to enter it.
X
Cancel Done
Icon Description
Move the cursor.
In ABC mode, change the case.
X Delete the last letter.
Cancel Stop entering text and return to the previous page.
Switch between Symbol mode and ABC mode.
Enter a space.
Done Save the displayed text.
You can use only the English alphabets in some modes, regardless of the
display language.
Press [y] to move to Done directly.
The number of characters you can enter varies depending on the situation.
The screen may differ depending on the input mode.
123
Wireless network
Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go)
Using NFC features in Playback mode
(Photo Beam)
In Playback mode, the camera transfers the current file to the smart phone
automatically when you read a tag from an NFC-enabled device.
To transfer multiple files, select files from the thumbnail view, and then
read a tag from an NFC-enabled device.
Using NFC features in Wi-Fi mode
Select MobileLink or Remote Viewfinder from the pop-up window that
appears by reading a tag from an NFC-enabled device. (p. 126, 130)
Place a smart phone's NFC antenna near the camera’s NFC tag to launch
the feature for saving photos to a smart phone automatically or the feature
for using a smart phone as a remote shutter. You can also transfer files to
an NFC-enabled device in Playback mode.
This feature is supported by NFC-enabled smart phones running Android OS.
It is recommended that you use the latest version. This feature is not available
for iOS devices.
You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device
before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung
Apps or the Google Play Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible
with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later.
For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART
CAMERA App from www.samsung.com.
To read an NFC tag, place the NFC-enabled device near the camera’s NFC tag
for more than 2 seconds.
You can set the size for transferred photos by pressing [m], and then
selecting d ĺ MobileLink/NFC Image Size ĺ an option.
Do not modify the NFC tag in any way.
Using NFC features in Shooting mode
Launch AutoShare or Remote Viewfinder by reading a tag from an NFCenabled
device. (p. 124, 130) Preset to launch the Wi-Fi function by reading
a tag on an NFC-enabled device. (p. 151)
124
Wireless network
Saving files to a smart phone automatically
The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the AutoShare
feature via a WLAN. When you capture a photo with your camera, the
photo is saved to a smart phone automatically.
The AutoShare feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running
Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.)
Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version.
If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform
properly.
You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device
before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung
Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART
CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in
2013 or later.
For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART
CAMERA App from www.samsung.com.
If you set this function, the setting is maintained even when you change the
Shooting mode.
This feature may not be supported in some modes or may not be available
with some shooting options.
1 In Shooting mode, touch ĺAutoShare.
You can also press [m] ĺb ĺ AutoShare ĺ On.
If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the
application appears, select Next.
To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the
camera, select Security Settings. (p. 155)
2 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the
application.
To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart
phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near
the NFC tag (p. 28) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is
connected to your camera, and then skip to step 5.
3 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone
to the camera.
The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time.
If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the
camera to the smart phone.
125
Wireless network > Saving files to a smart phone automatically
4 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your
camera.
If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is
connected automatically.
An icon that shows the connection status ( ) will appear on the
camera’s screen.
5 Capture a photo.
The captured photo is saved to the camera, and then transferred to
the smart phone. If a memory card is not inserted or the memory is
full, the captured photo is transferred to the smart phone without
being saved to the camera.
If you recorded a video, it is saved only to the camera.
The image file captured while recording a video is not saved on the
smart phone.
If the GPS feature is activated on the smart phone, the GPS
information will be saved with the captured photo.
126
Wireless network
The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the MobileLink
feature via a WLAN. You can easily send photos or videos to your smart
phone.
The MobileLink feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running
Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.)
Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version.
If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform
properly.
You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device
before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung
Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART
CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in
2013 or later.
For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART
CAMERA App from www.samsung.com.
When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
You can view up to 1,000 recent files and send up to 1,000 files at a time.
When you send Full HD videos using MobileLink feature, you may not be able
to play back files on some devices.
When using this feature on an iOS device, the device may lose its Wi-Fi
connection.
You cannot send RAW files.
You can set the size for transferred photos by pressing [m], and then
selecting d ĺ MobileLink/NFC Image Size ĺ an option.
You can also touch ĺ MobileLink on the screen in Shooting mode.
You can also send files in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then
selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ MobileLink or by selecting ĺ MobileLink.
The screen turns off if you perform no operations on the camera for
30 seconds.
1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi.
2 On the camera, select .
If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the
application appears, select Next.
To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the
camera, select Security Settings. (p. 155)
3 On the camera, select a sending option.
If you select Select Files from Smartphone, you can use your
smart phone to view and share files stored on the camera. The
screen turns off if you perform no operations on the smart phone
for 30 seconds.
If you select Select Files from Camera, you can select files to send
from the camera.
4 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the
application.
To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart
phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near
the NFC tag (p. 28) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is
connected to your camera, and then skip to step 7.
Sending photos or videos to a smart phone
127
Wireless network > Sending photos or videos to a smart phone
5 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone
to the camera.
The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time.
If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the
camera to the smart phone.
6 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your
camera.
If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is
connected automatically.
7 On the smart phone or camera, select files to transfer from the
camera.
8 On the smart phone, touch the copy button or on the camera,
select Send.
The camera will send the files to the smart phone.
128
Wireless network
Sending photos or videos to multiple smart phones
The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the Group Share
feature via a WLAN. You can easily send photos or videos to multiple smart
phones.
The Group Share feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running
Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.)
Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version.
If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform
properly.
You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device
before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung
Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART
CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in
2013 or later.
For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART
CAMERA App from www.samsung.com.
When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
Transferring files to multiple smart phones may take longer than transferring
files to one device.
When you send Full HD videos using Group Share feature, you may not be
able to play back files on some devices.
When using this feature on an iOS device, the device may lose its Wi-Fi
connection.
You cannot send RAW files.
You can set the size for transferred photos by pressing [m], and then
selecting d ĺ MobileLink/NFC Image Size ĺ an option.
You can also send files in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then
selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ Group Share or by selecting ĺ Group
Share.
1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi.
2 On the camera, select .
If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the
application appears, select Next.
To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the
camera, select Security Settings. (p. 155)
3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the
application.
To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart
phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near
the NFC tag (p. 28) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is
connected to your camera, and then skip to step 6.
129
Wireless network > Sending photos or videos to multiple smart phones
4 Touch Connect next to the desired smart phone listed on the
camera.
If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is
connected automatically.
You can connect to up to 4 smart phones.
If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the
camera to the smart phone.
5 Select Next.
6 On camera, select files to transfer from the camera.
7 On the camera, select Send.
The camera will send the files to the smart phone.
When you connect to multiple smart phones, the camera will send
the files to all devices at the same time.
130
Wireless network
The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the Remote
Viewfinder feature via a WLAN. Use the smart phone as a remote shutter
release with the Remote Viewfinder feature. The captured photo will
display on the smart phone.
The Remote Viewfinder feature is supported by smart phones or tablets
running Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some
models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest
version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not
perform properly.
You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device
before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung
Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART
CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in
2013 or later.
For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART
CAMERA App from www.samsung.com.
You can also touch ĺ Remote Viewfinder on the screen in Shooting
mode.
Continuously captured photos or videos will not display on the smart phone.
1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi.
2 On the camera, select .
If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the
application appears, select Next.
To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the
camera, select Security Settings. (p. 155)
3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the
application.
To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart
phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near
the NFC tag (p. 28) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is
connected to your camera, and then skip to step 6.
4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone
to the camera.
The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time.
If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the
camera to the smart phone.
Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release
131
Wireless network > Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release
5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your
camera.
If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is
connected automatically.
6 On the smart phone, select q to open the smart panel.
7 On the smart phone, set the shooting options.
While using this feature, some buttons are not available on your
camera.
With the smart phone, you can operate the camera only by
touching the screen.
Some shooting options are not supported.
Shooting options that you have set will remain on the camera after
the connection with the smart phone has ended.
8 Touch to return to the shooting screen.
9 On the smart phone, touch and hold to focus, and then
release it to capture the photo.
Touch to record a video and touch to stop a video.
If the GPS feature is activated on the smart phone, the GPS
information will be saved with the captured photo.
When you use this feature, the ideal distance between the camera and the
smart phone may vary, depending on your surroundings.
The smart phone must be within 7 m of the camera to use this feature.
It will take some time to capture the photo after you release on the smart
phone.
If the file save option is set to Smartphone + Camera, only photos will be
transferred to the smart phone. (Videos and RAW files will not be transferred.)
If you capture photos continuously when the file save option is set to
Smartphone + Camera, photos will not be transferred to the smart phone.
The smart phone's screen will not mirror the camera's display when recording
a video.
The Remote Viewfinder function will deactivate when:
- there is an incoming call on the smart phone
- either the camera or the smart phone turns off
- device loses its connection to the WLAN
- the Wi-Fi connection is poor or unstable
- you perform no operations for approximately 3 minutes while connected
- folder and file number are max values
The screen turns off if you perform no operations on the camera for
30 seconds.
132
Wireless network
Using the Baby Monitor
3 On the camera, select an AP from the list, and then position
the camera.
Place the camera in a safe location where children or pets cannot
reach it.
Point the camera lens at the subject.
We recommend you connect the camera to a power outlet with the
AC adapter.
4 On the smart phone, select the AP that the camera is
connected to.
For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the
application.
5 On the smart phone, turn on the Samsung Home Monitor
application.
Use the Baby Monitor feature to connect the camera to a smart phone on
which the Samsung Home Monitor is installed, and monitor a location.
The Baby Monitor feature is supported by smart phones that support WVGA
(800X480) or higher resolution and run the Android OS or iOS. (Some features
may not be supported by some models.) Before using this feature, update the
device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most
recent, this function may not perform properly.
You should install the Samsung Home Monitor application on your smart
phone before using this feature. You can download the application from
Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store.
Use this feature indoors only.
1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi.
2 On the camera, select .
If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the
application appears, select Next.
133
Wireless network > Using the Baby Monitor
6 Start live video or sound monitoring.
Watch live video from the camera on your smart phone. During
video monitoring, touch the Sound Monitoring Mode button on
the smart phone to stop the video stream. If the camera detects
noise, an alarm will notify you on the smart phone.
During live video monitoring via the smart phone, video is not saved on
the camera.
If the monitored location is dark, touch to turn on the AF-assist light.
During sound monitoring, alarms will sound on the smart phone if the
camera detects noise for a short period at a volume that is higher than
the designated level.
During live video monitoring, alarms will not sound on the smart phone
even if the camera detects noise.
7 Touch to exit the Samsung Home Monitor application.
Adjusting the noise level for alarm
activation
You can set the level of noise that will activate an alarm while using sound
monitoring. Press [D/I] to adjust the noise level.
Noise level for alarm
activation:
When the camera
detects noise that
exceeds the designated
level for a short period,
an alarm will sound.
Back Wi-Fi Setting
Sensor sensitivity
Do not use this feature for illegal purposes.
134
Wireless network
Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos
You can send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC
wirelessly.
Installing the program for Auto Backup on
your PC
1 Install i-Launcher on the PC. (p. 161)
2 Connect the camera to the PC with the USB cable.
3 When the Auto Backup program icon appears, click it.
The Auto Backup program is installed on the PC. Follow the onscreen
instructions to complete the installation.
4 Remove the USB cable.
Before installing the program, ensure that the PC is connected to a network.
Sending photos or videos to a PC
1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi.
2 Select .
If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the
application appears, select Next.
The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via
the most recently connected AP device.
If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will
search for available AP devices. (p. 118)
3 Select a backup PC.
135
Wireless network > Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos
4 Select OK.
To cancel sending, select Cancel.
You cannot select individual files to backup. This function backs up
only new files on the camera.
The backup's progress will be shown on the PC monitor.
When the transfer is completed, the camera will turn off
automatically in approximately 30 seconds. Select Cancel to return
to the previous screen and prevent the camera from turning off
automatically.
To turn off your PC automatically after the transfer is complete,
select Shut down PC after backup.
To change the backup PC, select Change PC.
When you connect the camera to the WLAN, select the AP that is connected
to the PC.
The camera will search for available access points even if you are connecting
to the same access point again.
If you turn off the camera or remove the battery while sending files, the file
transfer will be interrupted.
While you are using this feature, the shutter control is disabled on your
camera.
You can connect only one camera to the PC at a time for sending files.
The backup may be canceled due to network conditions.
When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
You must turn off Windows Firewall and any other firewalls before using this
feature.
You can send up to 1,000 recent files.
On the PC software, the server name must be entered in the Latin alphabet
and can contain no more than 48 characters.
136
Wireless network
5 Select the Name box, enter your name, and then touch Done.
Sender Setting
Name
Save
Email
Reset
6 Select the Email box, enter your email address, and then
touch Done.
7 Select Save to save your changes.
To delete your information, select Reset.
You can change settings in the email menu and send photos or videos
stored on the camera via email.
Changing email settings
In the email menu, you can change settings for storing your information.
You can also set or change the email password. For information about
entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 122)
Storing your information
1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi.
2 Select .
The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via
the most recently connected AP device.
If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will
search for available AP devices. (p. 118)
3 Press [m].
4 Select Sender Setting.
Sending photos or videos via email
137
Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email
Setting an email password
1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi.
2 Select .
The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via
the most recently connected AP device.
If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will
search for available AP devices. (p. 118)
3 Press [m].
4 Select Setting Password ĺ On.
To deactivate the password, select Off.
5 When the pop-up appears, select OK.
6 Enter a 4-digit password.
7 Enter the password again.
8 When the pop-up appears, select OK.
If you lost your password, you can reset it by selecting Reset on the password
setting screen. When you reset the information, the previously saved user’s
setting information and email address will be deleted.
138
Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email
Changing the email password
1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi.
2 Select .
The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via
the most recently connected AP device.
If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will
search for available AP devices. (p. 118)
3 Press [m].
4 Select Change Password.
5 Enter your current 4-digit password.
6 Enter a new 4-digit password.
7 Enter the new password again.
8 When the pop-up appears, select OK.
Sending photos or videos via email
You can send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. For
information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 122)
1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi.
2 Select .
3 Connect to a WLAN. (p. 118)
4 Select the Sender box, enter your email address, and then
touch Done.
If you have previously saved your information, it will be inserted
automatically. (p. 136)
To use an address from the list of previous senders, select ĺ
an address.
139
Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email
5 Select the Receiver box, enter an email address, and then
touch Done.
To use an address from the list of previous recipients, select ĺ
an address.
Select to add additional recipients. You can input up to
30 recipients.
Select to delete an address from the list.
6 Select Next.
7 Select files to send.
You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 7 MB or less.
8 Select Next.
9 Select the comment box, enter your comments, and then
touch Done.
10 Select Send.
The camera will send the email.
If an email fails to send, a message prompting you to send it again
appears.
Even if a photo appears to have transferred successfully, errors with the
recipient’s email account may cause the photo to be rejected or recognized
as spam.
You may not be able to send an email if no network connection is available or
if your email account settings are incorrect.
You cannot send an email if the combined file sizes exceed the 7 MB. The
maximum resolution of photos you can send is 2M. The maximum resolution
of videos you can send is . If the selected photo has a resolution higher
than 2M, it will be automatically resized to a lower resolution.
If you cannot send an email because of firewall or user authentication
settings, contact your network administrator or network service provider.
When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
You can also send an email in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then
selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ Email or by selecting ĺ Email.
140
Wireless network
Upload your photos or videos to file sharing services. Available sharing
services will be displayed on your camera. To upload files to some sharing
services, you must visit the website and register before connecting your
camera.
Accessing a sharing service
1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi.
2 Select .
3 Connect to a WLAN. (p. 118)
4 Select a sharing service.
If the pop-up message that prompts you to create an account
appears, select OK.
5 Enter your ID and password to log in.
For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text".
(p. 122)
If you connected to some sharing services, refer to "Using the login
browser". (p. 120)
To select an ID from the list, select ĺ an ID.
If you have previously logged in to the sharing service, you may be
logged in automatically.
You must have an existing account on the file sharing service to use this feature.
Using photo or video sharing services
141
Wireless network > Using photo or video sharing services
Uploading photos or videos
1 Access the sharing service with your camera.
2 Select files to upload.
You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 10 MB or less.
(On some sharing services, the total size or number of files may
vary.)
3 Select Upload.
The camera will upload photos or videos.
When an upload fails, a message prompting you to upload it again
appears.
On some sharing services, you can enter your comments by
selecting the comment box. For information about entering text,
refer to "Entering text". (p. 122)
You can set an upload folder for Facebook by pressing [m], and then
selecting Upload Folder (Facebook) on the sharing service's list screen.
You cannot upload files if the file size exceeds the limit. The maximum
resolution of photos you can upload is 2M. The maximum resolution of videos
you can upload is . If the selected photo has a resolution higher than 2M, it
will be automatically resized to a lower resolution. (On some sharing services,
the maximum photo resolution may vary.)
The method of uploading photos or videos may differ depending on the
selected sharing service.
If you cannot access a sharing service because of firewall or user
authentication settings, contact your network administrator or network
service provider.
Uploaded photos or videos may be automatically titled with the date they
were captured.
The speed of your internet connection may affect how quickly photos upload
or web pages open.
When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
You can also upload photos or videos to file sharing services in Playback
mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ a sharing
service or by selecting ĺ a sharing service.
You cannot upload videos to some sharing services.
When you upload photos to a file sharing service, the photo may be resized
to 2M or 1M depending on their policy.
142
Wireless network
Using Samsung Link to send files
You can upload files from your camera to the Samsung Link online storage
or view files on a Samsung Link device connected to the same AP.
Uploading photos to an online storage
1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi.
2 Select ĺWeb storage.
If the guide message appears, select OK.
The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via
the most recently connected AP device.
If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will
search for available AP devices. (p. 118)
To change the size for uploaded photos, press [m], and then
select Upload Image Size.
3 Enter your ID and password, and then select Login ĺ OK.
For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 122)
To select an ID from the list, select ĺ an ID.
If you have previously logged in to the website, you may be logged
in automatically.
To use this feature, you must create a Samsung Link account and an
account with an affiliated online storage service using your PC. After you
have finished creating the accounts, add your online storage account to
Samsung Link.
4 Select an online storage service.
Before you use this feature, you must visit the Samsung Link
website with your PC and register an online storage.
5 Select files to upload, and then select Upload.
You cannot upload video files to Samsung Link online storage.
When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
You can upload up to 20 files.
You can also upload photos in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then
selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ Samsung Link or by selecting ĺ Samsung
Link.
143
Wireless network > Using Samsung Link to send files
Viewing photos or videos on devices that
support Samsung Link
1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi.
2 Select ĺNearby devices.
The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via
the most recently connected AP device.
If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will
search for available AP devices. (p. 118)
You can set to allow only selected devices or all devices to connect
by pressing [m], and then selecting DLNA Access Control on
the screen.
A sharing file list is created. Wait until other devices can find your
camera.
3 Connect the Samsung Link device to a network, and then turn
on the Samsung Link feature.
Refer to your device's user manual for more information.
4 On the camera, allow the Samsung Link device to connect to
your camera.
5 On the Samsung Link device, select a camera to connect to.
6 On the Samsung Link device, browse the shared photos or
videos.
For information about searching for the camera and browsing the
photos or videos on the Samsung Link device, refer to the device's
user manual.
Videos may not play smoothly depending on the type of Samsung
Link device or the network condition.
AP
▲ The camera is connected to a TV that supports Samsung Link via WLAN.
144
Wireless network > Using Samsung Link to send files
You can share up to 1,000 recent files.
On a Samsung Link device, you can view only photos or videos captured with
your camera.
The range of the wireless connection between your camera and a Samsung
Link device may vary depending on the specifications of the AP.
If the camera is connected to 2 Samsung Link devices, playback may be
slower.
Photos or videos will be shared in their original sizes.
You can use this feature only with devices that support Samsung Link.
Shared photos or videos will not be stored on the Samsung Link device, but
they can be stored in the camera to meet the device's specifications.
Transferring photos or videos to the Samsung Link device may take some
time depending on the network connection, the number of files to be shared,
or the sizes of the files.
If you power off the camera abnormally while viewing photos or videos on
a Samsung Link device (for example, by removing the battery), the device
considers the camera to still be connected.
The order of photos or videos on the camera may be different than on the
Samsung Link device.
Depending on the number of photos or videos you want to share, it may
take some time to load your photos or videos and complete the initial set-up
process.
While viewing photos or videos on the Samsung Link device, continuously
using the device's remote or performing additional operations on the device
may prevent this feature from working properly.
If you reorder or sort files on the camera while viewing them on a Samsung
Link device, you must repeat the initial set-up process to update the list of
files on the device.
When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
We recommend you use a network cable to connect your Samsung
Link device to your AP. This will minimize any video ‘Stuttering’ you may
experience when streaming content.
To view files on a Samsung Link device using the Nearby devices feature,
enable multicast mode on your AP.
Chapter 5
Camera settings menu
Learn about the user settings and general settings menu.
You can adjust the settings to better suit your needs and preferences.
146
Camera settings menu
You can set the user environment with these settings.
To set user options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺ d ĺ an option.
Available items and the order of them may differ depending on shooting
conditions.
ISO Customizing
ISO Expansion
You can select ISO 100 and 25600.
ISO Step
You can set the size for the ISO sensitivity by either 1/3 or 1 step.
Auto ISO Range
You can set the maximum ISO value under which each EV step is chosen
when you set the ISO to Auto.
User settings
147
Camera settings menu > User settings
Noise Reduction
Use the Noise Reduction to reduce the visual noise in photos.
* Default
Option Description
High ISO NR This function reduces noise that may occur when you
set a high ISO sensitivity. (Off, High, Normal*, Low)
Long Term NR This function reduces noise when you set the camera
for a long exposure. (Off, On*)
Bracket Settings
You can set up the options for each bracketing.
* Default
Option Description
AE Bracket Settings
Set the exposure interval. (-/+0.3 EV*,
-/+0.7 EV, -/+1.0 EV, -/+1.3 EV, -/+1.7 EV,
-/+2.0 EV, -/+2.3 EV, -/+2.7 EV, -/+3.0 EV)
WB Bracket Settings
Adjust the White Balance interval range of the
3 bracketed photos. (AB-/+3*, AB-/+2, AB-/+1,
MG-/+3, MG-/+2, MG-/+1)
For example, AB-/+3 adjusts the Amber value plus
or minus three steps. MG-/+3 adjusts the Magenta
value the same amount.
P Wiz Bracket
Settings
Select 3 Picture Wizard settings the camera uses to
capture the 3 bracketed photos.
Depth Bracket
Settings
Set the depth interval. (-/+0.3, -/+0.7, -/+1.0*,
-/+1.3, -/+1.7, -/+2.0, -/+2.3, -/+2.7, -/+3.0)
148
Camera settings menu > User settings
Color Space
The color space option allows you to select methods for representing
colors. Digital imaging devices such as digital cameras, monitors, and
printers have their own methods for representing colors, which are called
color spaces.
* Default
Option Description
sRGB*
sRGB (Standard RGB) is an international specification
to define the color space created by IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission). It is widely used for
creating colors on PC monitors and is also the standard
color space for Exif. sRGB is recommended for regular
images and images you intend to publish on the
Internet.
Adobe RGB
Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a
larger color range than sRGB. Its wider range of colors
helps you to easily edit photos on a computer. Note
that individual programs are generally compatible
with a limited number of color spaces.
Adobe RGB
sRGB
When the color space is set to Adobe RGB, photos will be saved as
"_SAMXXXX.JPG".
149
Camera settings menu > User settings
Distortion Correct
You can correct lens distortion that might occur from lenses.
This feature is available with lenses that support it.
Touch Operation
Set to enable touch operation in Shooting mode.
* Default
Option Description
Off Do not use touch operations in Shooting mode. (You can use
touch operations in other situations.)
On* Use touch operations in Shooting mode.
iFn Customizing
You can select options that can be adjusted when you press [i-Function]
on an i-Function lens.
Option Description
Aperture Set to adjust the aperture value.
Shutter Speed Set to adjust the shutter speed.
EV Set to adjust the exposure value.
ISO Set to adjust ISO sensitivity.
White Balance Set to adjust the White Balance.
150
Camera settings menu > User settings
User Display
You can add or remove shooting information from the display.
1
2
3
No. Description
1 Icons
Set to display icons on the right in Shooting mode.
2 Date & Time
Set to display the date and time.
3
Histogram
Set the histogram on the display on or off.
About histogram
A histogram is a graph that shows the brightness distribution of a
photo. A histogram inclined to the left indicates a dark photo.
A histogram inclined to the right indicates a bright photo. The height
of the graph is related to color information. The graph gets higher if a
specific color is more common.
Insufficient exposure Balanced exposure Excessive exposure
151
Camera settings menu > User settings
Key Mapping
You can change the function assigned to the Custom button or the DIRECT
LINK button.
* Default
Button Function
Custom
Set the Custom button's function.
Optical Preview*: Execute the Depth of Field
Preview function for the current aperture value.
(p. 22)
One Touch WB (White Balance): Execute the Custom
White Balance function.
One Touch RAW +: Save a file in the RAW+JPEG
format. To save a file in JPEG format, press the button
again.
Reset: Reset some settings.
AEL: Execute the auto exposure lock function. (Halfpressing
[Shutter] executes the auto focus lock
function.)
AEL Hold: Keep executing the auto exposure lock
function after shooting. (The exposure remains
locked even after you capture a photo.)
DIRECT LINK
Set the DIRECT LINK button's function. (AutoShare,
MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Group Share,
Baby Monitor, Auto Backup, Email, SNS & Cloud,
Samsung Link)
Live view NFC
In Shooting mode, turn on the NFC feature on an NFC-enabled smart
phone and place the smart phone's NFC antenna near the camera’s NFC
tag to launch AutoShare or Remote Viewfinder. This feature is supported
by NFC-enabled smart phones running Android OS. It is recommended
that you use the latest version. This feature is not available for iOS devices.
MobileLink/NFC Image Size
Set the size of photos to transfer to a smartphone using the MobileLink or
NFC functions.
* Default
Option Description
Resize to 2M or lower If a photo's size is larger than 3M, it will be
transferred after resizing it to 2M or lower.
Original* The photo will be transferred in its original size.
Grid Line
Select a guide to help you compose a scene.
(Off*, 4 X 4, 3 X 3, Cross, Diagonal)
152
Camera settings menu > User settings
Lens Button Speed Settings
Set the zoom speed for the Power Zoom lens' buttons at either fast,
medium, or slow speed. At fast speed, zoom noise increases and can be
recorded in videos. This function is available only when you attach the
Power Zoom lens using the mount adapter.
AF Lamp
When shooting in dark places, turn the AF lamp on in order to have a
better auto focus. The Auto Focus functions more accurately in dark places
when the AF lamp is on.
Auto Self-Shot
Set to turn on the camera and enter Self shot mode automatically when
you flip the display upward. In Self shot mode, the timer (3 seconds),
one-touch shot, face detection, and beauty face options are automatically
activated.
153
Camera settings menu
Learn to configure your camera's settings.
To set Setting
options,
In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] ĺ q ĺ
an option.
* Default
Item Description
Sound
System Volume: Set the sound volume or turn all sound
off entirely. (Off, Low, Medium*, High)
Even if the system volume is turned off, the camera emits
the sound while playing a video or a slide show.
AF Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when you
half-press the shutter button on or off. (Off, On*)
Button Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when
you press the buttons or touch the screen on or off.
(Off, On*)
Quick View
Set the Quick View time length–the amount of time the
camera displays a photo immediately after you capture it.
(Off, 1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, Hold)
* Default
Item Description
Display
Adjust
Adjust the display brightness, auto brightness setting,
display color, or level gauge.
Display Brightness: You can adjust the display
brightness manually.
Auto Brightness: Turn auto brightness on or off.
(Off, On*)
Display Color: You can adjust the display color manually.
Horizontal Calibration: Calibrate the level gauge. If the
level gauge is not level, position the camera on the level
surface, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
You cannot access the Horizontal Calibration option
in Playback mode.
You cannot calibrate the level gauge in portrait
orientation.
Auto Display
Off
Set the display off time. The display turns off if you do not
use the camera for the time you set.
(Off, 30 sec*, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min)
Auto Power
Off
Set power shut off time. The camera shuts off if you do not
use it for the time you set. (Off, 1 min*, 3 min, 5 min,
10 min, 30 min)
The camera retains the power-off time setting even if
you replace the battery.
Auto Power Off may not work if the camera is
connected to a computer or a TV or playing a slide
show or a movie.
Setting
154
Camera settings menu > Setting
* Default
Item Description
Help Guide
Display
Set to display help text about menus and functions.
(Off, On*)
Press [n] to hide the help text.
Language Set a language the camera shows on the display.
Date & Time
Set date, time, date format, time zone and whether to
imprint the date on photos. (Time Zone, Date/Time Set,
Date Type, Time Type, Imprint)
The date appears on the lower right side of the photo.
When you print a photo, some printers may not print
the date appropriately.
Video Out
Set the video signal output appropriate for your country
when connecting the camera to an external video device
such as a monitor or HDTV.
NTSC: USA, Canada, Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Mexico, etc.
PAL (Supports only PAL B, D, G, H, or I): Australia, Austria,
Belgium, China, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany,
England, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Singapore,
Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, Norway, etc.
Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC)
When you connect the camera to an HDTV that supports
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), you can control the play function of
the camera with the TV remote control.
Off: You cannot control the play function of camera with
the TV remote control.
On*: You can control the play function of camera with the
TV remote control.
* Default
Item Description
HDMI Output
When you connect the camera to an HDTV with an HDMI
cable, you can change the resolution of the image.
NTSC: Auto*, 1080i, 720p, 480p,
576p (activates only when PAL is selected)
If the connected HDTV does not support the resolution
you select, the camera sets the resolution one level lower.
File Number
Set the method of numbering files and folders.
Reset: After using the reset function, the next file name is
started at 0001.
Series*: New file numbers continue the existing number
sequence, even if you have installed a new memory card,
formatted the card, or deleted all photos.
The first folder name is 100PHOTO, if you have selected
the sRGB color space and Standard file naming, the first
file name is SAM_0001.
File name numbers are increased by 1 from SAM_0001 to
SAM_9999.
Folder numbers are increased by 1 from 100PHOTO to
999PHOTO.
The maximum number of files that can be saved in one
folder is 9,999.
File numbers are assigned according to DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) specifications.
If you change a file name (for example, on a computer),
the camera will not be able to play the file.
155
Camera settings menu > Setting
* Default
Item Description
Format
Format the memory card. Formatting deletes all existing
files including protected files. (No*, Yes)
Errors can occur if you use a memory card formatted by
another brand of camera, a memory card reader, or a
computer. Please format memory cards in the camera
before using them to capture photos.
Device
Information
View the firmware version of the body and the lens, Mac
address, and network certification number, or update the
firmware.
Firmware Update: Update the firmware of the camera
body or lens. (Body Firmware, Lens Firmware)
You can update the firmware by connecting the camera
to the computer and starting i-Launcher. For more
details, refer to page 177.
You cannot run a firmware upgrade without a fully
charged battery. Recharge the battery fully before
running a firmware upgrade.
If you update the firmware, user settings and values will
be reset. (Date, time, language, and video out will not
change.)
Do not turn the camera off while the update is in
progress.
* Default
Item Description
Wi-Fi Privacy
lock
Set to require a PIN when connecting the camera and a
smart phone.
PIN: Enter a PIN before connecting.
None*: Allow a connection without requiring a PIN.
Connections will automatically be made without
requiring a PIN when using the NFC function.
PINs are automatically generated and renewed only
when you reset the camera settings or update the
firmware.
If you have previously connected your camera to a
smart phone via a PIN, they will connect automatically.
Reset
Reset the setup menu and shooting options to the factory
defaults. (Date, time, language, and video output settings
do not change.) (No*, Yes)
Open Source
License View open source licenses.
Chapter 6
Connecting to external devices
Make full use of the camera by connecting it to external devices such as a computer or HDTV.
157
Connecting to external devices
Play back photos or videos by connecting your camera to an HDTV using
an optional HDMI cable.
1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] ĺ q ĺ
HDMI Output ĺ an option. (p. 154)
2 Turn off your camera and HDTV.
3 Connect your camera to your HDTV with the optional HDMI
cable.
4 Turn on your HDTV, and then select the HDMI video source.
5 Turn on the camera.
The camera automatically enters into Playback mode when you
connect it to an HDTV.
6 View photos or play videos using the camera buttons.
When using the HDMI cable, you can connect the camera to an HDTV using
the Anynet+(CEC) method.
The Anynet+(CEC) functions allow you to control connected devices using the
TV remote control.
If the HDTV supports Anynet+(CEC), the TV turns on automatically when used
in conjunction with the camera. This feature may not be available on some
HDTVs.
When connected to an HDTV by an HDMI cable, the camera cannot capture a
photo or video.
When connected to an HDTV, some of the camera’s playback functions may
not be available.
The length of time after which the camera and an HDTV are connected may
vary depending on the memory card that you are using. As the main feature
of a memory card is to increase the transfer speed, it is not necessarily true
to say that a memory card with a faster transfer speed is also fast in using the
HDMI function.
Viewing files on an HDTV
158
Connecting to external devices
Transfer files on a memory card to your computer by connecting the
camera to the PC.
Transferring files to your Windows OS
computer
Connecting the camera as a removable disk
You can connect the camera to your computer as a removable disk. Open
the removable disk and transfer files to your computer.
1 Turn off the camera.
2 Connect the camera to your computer with the USB cable.
You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the
cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not
responsible for any loss of data.
If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not
work properly.
3 Turn on the camera.
The computer recognizes the camera automatically.
4 On your computer, select My Computer ĺ Removable Disk
ĺ DCIM ĺ 100PHOTO.
5 Select the files you want, and then drag or save them to your
computer.
Transferring files to your computer
159
Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer
Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP)
With Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 8, the methods for
disconnecting the camera are similar.
1 Ensure that no data is being transferred between the camera
and the computer.
If the status lamp on your camera is blinking, it means the data
transfer is in progress. Please wait until the status lamp stops
blinking.
2 Click on the tool bar at the bottom right of your computer
screen.
3 Click the pop-up message.
4 Click the message box indicating safely removed.
5 Remove the USB cable.
Transferring files to your Mac OS
Mac OS 10.5 or later is supported.
1 Turn off the camera.
2 Connect your camera to a Macintosh computer with the USB
cable.
You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the
cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not
responsible for any loss of data.
If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not
work properly.
160
Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer
3 Turn on the camera.
The computer recognizes the camera automatically and displays a
removable disk icon.
4 On your computer, open the removable disk.
5 Transfer photos or videos to the Mac OS computer.
161
Connecting to external devices
You can view and edit files using the provided programs. You can also send
the files to a PC wirelessly.
Installing programs from the provided CD
1 Insert the installation CD into your PC.
2 Select a language.
3 Select a program to install.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions.
5 Click Exit to complete the installation.
Available programs when using i-Launcher
Item Description
Firmware Upgrade You can download the firmware of your camera.
PC Auto Backup
i-Launcher provides a link for downloading the
PC Auto Backup program when you connect the
camera to a computer. You can send photos or
videos that you captured with the camera to a
PC wirelessly.
Using programs on a PC
162
Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC
Using i-Launcher
i-Launcher allows you update the firmware of the camera or the lens or
provides a link to download the PC Auto Backup program.
Requirements for Windows OS
Item Requirements
CPU Intel®
Core™ 2 Duo 1.66 GHz or higher/
AMD Athlon X2 Dual-Core 2.2 GHz or higher
RAM Minimum 512 MB RAM (1 GB or more recommended)
OS* Windows 7, Windows 8
Hard disk
capacity 250 MB or more (1 GB and above recommended)
Others
• CD-ROM drive
• 1024X768 pixels, 16-bit color display compatible
monitor (1280X1024 pixels, 32-bit color display
recommended)
• USB 2.0 port
• nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT or higher/
ATI X1600 series or higher
• Microsoft DirectX 9.0c or later
* A 32-bit version of i-Launcher will be installed—even on 64-bit editions of Windows 7 and
Windows 8.
• The requirements on the following page are recommendations only.
i-Launcher may not work properly even when the computer meets the
requirements, depending on the condition of your computer.
• If your computer does not meet the requirements, videos may not play
correctly.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage that results from using
unqualified computers such as a computer you assembled yourself.
Requirements for Mac OS
Item Requirements
OS Mac OS 10.5 or higher (except PowerPC)
RAM Minimum 256 MB RAM (512 MB or more
recommended)
Hard disk capacity Minimum 110 MB
Others USB 2.0 port, CD-ROM drive
Opening i-Launcher
On your computer, select Start ĺ All Programs ĺ Samsung ĺ
i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher. Or, click Applications ĺ Samsung
ĺ i-Launcher on your Mac OS computer.
163
Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC
Downloading the firmware
From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click Firmware Upgrade. For
information about updating the firmware, refer to page 177.
Downloading the PC Auto Backup program
From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click PC Auto Backup. For
information about installing the PC Auto Backup program, refer to page
134.
Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
1 Insert Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM into your PC.
2 Select a language.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to JPEG formats and
stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the time
of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to JPEG formats and are stored
in the memory without any changes. With Adobe Photoshop Lightroom,
you can calibrate exposures, White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors
of photos. You can also edit JPEG or TIFF files as well as RAW files. For more
information, refer to the program guide.
Depending on your version of Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, you may not
be able to open RAW files. In this case, update the program from the Adobe
website.
In Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, an image’s brightness, color and other effects
may be displayed differently. This occurs because the original camera settings
and options applied during image capture are removed, ready for it to be
processed in Adobe Photoshop Lightroom.
Chapter 7
Appendix
Get information about error messages, camera maintenance,
trouble shooting tips, specifications, and optional accessories.
165
Appendix
When the following error messages appear, try these remedies.
Error messages Suggested remedies
Lens is locked The lens is locked. Rotate the lens counterclockwise.
(p. 48)
Card Error
Turn off the camera, and then turn it on again.
Remove the memory card and insert it again.
Format the memory card.
Low Battery Insert a charged battery or recharge the battery.
No Image File Capture photos or insert a memory card that
contains photos.
Device disconnected.
Network connection disconnected while photos
are being transferred to supported devices.
Re-select a supported device.
File Error Delete the damaged file or contact a service
center.
Error messages Suggested remedies
Memory Full Delete unnecessary files or insert a new
memory card.
Transfer failed.
The camera has failed to send e-mails or files
to other devices. Try sending again.
Check the network connection and try again.
Unable to capture a
photo because folder
and file number on
the memory card
reached the maximum
values. Reset the folder
number?
File names do not match the DCF standard.
Follow the on-screen instructions to reset the
folder number.
Error 00
Turn off your camera and remount the lens.
If the message still appears, contact a service
center.
Error messages
166
Appendix
Cleaning the camera
Camera lens and display
Use a brush to remove dust and wipe the lens gently with a soft cloth.
If any dust remains, apply lens cleaning liquid to a piece of cleaning paper
and wipe gently.
Image sensor
Depending on different shooting conditions, dust may appear in photos
because the image sensor is exposed to the external environment. This
problem is normal, and the exposure to dust occurs in everyday use of the
camera. Avoid contact with the image sensor while using the blower.
Camera body
Wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth.
Never use benzene, thinners, or alcohol to clean the device. These solutions can
damage the camera or cause it to malfunction.
Maintaining the camera
167
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Using on beaches or shores
Protect your camera from sand and dirt when you use it on beaches or in
other similar areas.
Your camera is not waterproof. Do not handle the battery, adapter, or
memory card with wet hands. Operating the camera with wet hands
may cause damage to your camera.
Storing for extended period of time
When you store the camera for an extended period, place it in a sealed
container with an absorbent material, such as silica gel.
Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before
use.
The present date and time can be initialized when the camera is turned
on after the camera and battery have been separated for a prolonged
period.
Using or storing the camera
Inappropriate places to use or store the camera
Avoid exposing the camera to very cold or very hot temperatures.
Avoid using your camera in areas with extremely high humidity, or
where the humidity changes drastically.
Avoid exposing the camera to direct sunlight and storing it in hot, poorly
ventilated areas, such as in a car during summer time.
Protect your camera and the display from impact, rough handling, and
excessive vibration to avoid serious damage.
Avoid using or storing your camera in dusty, dirty, humid, or poorly
ventilated areas to prevent damage to moving parts and internal
components.
Do not use your camera near fuels, combustibles, or flammable
chemicals. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive
materials in the same compartment as the camera or its accessories.
Do not store the camera where there are mothballs.
168
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Using the camera with caution in humid environments
When you transfer the camera from a cold environment to a warm one,
condensation can form on the lens or internal components of the camera.
In this situation, turn off the camera and wait for at least 1 hour.
If condensation forms on the memory card, remove the memory card from
the camera and wait until all moisture has evaporated before reinserting it.
Other cautions
Do not swing your camera by the strap. This may cause injury to yourself
or others or damage to your camera.
Do not paint your camera, as paint can clog moving parts and prevent
proper operation.
Turn off the camera when not using it.
Your camera consists of delicate parts. Avoid impacts to the camera.
Protect the display from external force by keeping it in the case when
not in use. Protect the camera from scratches by keeping it away from
sand, sharp implements, or loose change.
Do not use the camera if the screen is cracked or broken. Broken glass or
acrylic could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the camera to a
Samsung service center to have it repaired.
Never place cameras, batteries, chargers, or accessories near, on, or in
heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Heat can
deform or overheat these devices, which can cause a fire or explosion.
Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight, as this may discolor the image
sensor or cause it to malfunction.
Protect your lens from fingerprints and scratches. Clean your lens with a
soft, clean, debris-free lens cloth.
The camera may turn off if impacted from the outside. This is to protect
the memory card. Turn on the camera to use it again.
While you use the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not
affect your camera’s lifespan or performance.
When you use the camera in low temperatures, it may take some time to
turn on, the color of the display may be changed temporarily, or afterimages
may appear. These conditions are not malfunctions and they will
correct themselves when the camera is returned to milder temperatures.
Paint or metal on the outside of the camera may cause allergies,
itchy skin, eczema, or swelling for people with sensitive skin.
If you experience any of these symptoms, stop using the camera
immediately and consult a doctor.
Do not insert foreign objects into any of your camera’s compartments,
slots, or access points. Damage due to improper use may not be covered
by your warranty.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to service the camera or attempt to
service the camera yourself. Any damage that results from unqualified
service is not covered by your warranty.
169
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
About memory card
Supported memory card
This product supports microSD, microSDHC, or microSDXC memory cards.
Memory card adapter
Memory card
To read data with a PC or memory card reader, insert the memory card into
a memory card adapter.
170
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Memory card capacity
The memory capacity may differ depending on shooting scenes or shooting conditions. These capacities are based on a 2 GB SD card.
Size Quality
Super Fine Fine Normal RAW RAW + S.Fine RAW + Fine RAW + Normal
Photo
20.0M (5472X3648) 160 290 398 55 35 44 48
10.1M (3888X2592) 288 486 630 - 44 51 53
5.9M (2976X1984) 435 679 835 - 49 54 56
2.0M (1728X1152) 831 1,081 1,201 - 56 58 57
Burst 489 743 899 - - - -
16.9M (5472X3080) 186 332 450 - 37 46 50
7.8M (3712X2088) 355 577 730 - 48 52 55
4.9M (2944X1656) 497 752 908 - 51 55 56
2.1M (1920X1080) 1,546 2,804 3,847 - 60 62 63
13.3M (3648X3648) 228 398 529 - 40 48 52
7.0M (2640X2640) 385 616 771 - 48 53 55
4.0M (2000X2000) 566 829 981 - 52 56 57
1.1M (1024X1024) 2,779 4,690 6,085 - 62 63 64
171
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Cautions when using memory cards
• Avoid memory cards to very cold or very hot temperatures (below
0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can cause
memory cards to malfunction.
• Insert a memory card in the correct direction. Inserting a memory card in
the wrong direction may damage your camera and memory card.
• Do not use memory cards that have been formatted by other cameras or
by a computer. Reformat the memory card with your camera.
• Turn off the camera when you insert or remove the memory card.
• Do not remove the memory card or turn off your camera while the lamp
is blinking, as this may damage your data.
• When the lifespan of a memory card has expired, you cannot store any
more photos on the card. Use a new memory card.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject memory cards to heavy impact or
pressure.
• Avoid using or storing memory cards near strong magnetic fields.
• Avoid using or keeping memory cards in areas with high temperature,
high humidity, or corrosive substances.
Size Quality
HQ Normal
Video
1920X1080 (30 fps) Approx. 17' Approx. 19' 51"
1280X720 (30 fps) Approx. 23' 46" Approx. 29' 38"
640X480 (30 fps) Approx. 52' 57" Approx. 69' 43"
For Sharing (30 fps) - Approx. 235' 48"
• The figures above are measured without using the zoom function.
• Available recording time may vary if you use the zoom.
• Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time.
• The maximum recording time is 29 minutes and 59 seconds per file.
• The maximum playback time of For Sharing videos is 30 seconds per file.
172
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
About the battery
Use only Samsung-approved batteries.
Battery specifications
Item Description
Model* B740AE/B740AC/B740AU/B740AK
Type Lithium-ion battery
Cell capacity 2,330 mAh
Voltage 3.8 V
Charging time** (When the
battery is completely discharged) Approx. 270 min
* The battery specifications or model may differ depending on your region.
** The figures above are based on when you use the provided USB cable and AC adapter.
Charging the battery by connecting it to a computer may take longer.
Prevent memory cards from making contact with liquids, dirt, or foreign
substances. If dirty, wipe the memory card clean with a soft cloth before
you insert the memory card in your camera.
Do not allow liquids, dirt, or foreign substances to come in contact with
memory cards or the memory card slot. Doing so may cause memory
cards or the camera to malfunction.
When you carry a memory card, use a case to protect the card from
electrostatic discharges.
Transfer important data to other media, such as a hard disk, CD, or DVD.
When you use the camera for an extended period, the memory card may
become warm. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
Use a memory card that meets the standard requirements.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data.
173
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Personal injury or death can occur if the battery is handled carelessly or
improperly. For your safety, follow these instructions for proper battery
handling:
The battery can ignite or explode if not handled properly. If you notice
any deformities, cracks, or other abnormalities in the battery, immediately
discontinue use of the battery and contact your manufacturer.
Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommend battery chargers and charge
the battery only by the method described in this user manual.
Do not place the battery near heating devices or expose to excessively warm
environments, such as the inside of an enclosed car in the summertime.
Do not place the battery in a microwave oven.
Avoid storing or using the battery in hot, humid places, such as spas or
shower enclosures.
Do not rest the device on flammable surfaces, such as bedding, carpets, or
electric blankets for a prolonged period.
When the device is switched on, do not leave it in any confined space for a
prolonged period.
Do not allow battery terminals to come in contact with metallic objects, such
as necklaces, coins, keys, or watches.
Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement
batteries.
Do not disassemble the battery or puncture it with any sharp object.
Avoid exposing the battery to high pressure or crushing forces.
Avoid exposing the battery to major impacts, such as dropping it from high
places.
Do not expose the battery to temperatures of 60 °C (140 °F) or above.
Do not allow the battery to come in contact with moisture or liquids.
Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, or the
like.
Disposal guidelines
Dispose of the battery with care.
Do not dispose of the battery in a fire.
Disposal regulations may differ by country or region. Dispose of the battery in
accordance with all local and federal regulations.
Guidelines for charging the battery
Charge the battery only by the method described in this user manual.
The battery can ignite or explode if not charged properly.
174
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Battery life
Shooting mode Average time / Number of photos
Photos
Approx. 325 min/Approx. 650 photos (When you
attach a 9 mm lens and use the internal flash)
Approx. 265 min/Approx. 530 photos (When you
attach a 9-27 mm lens and use the external flash)
Videos Approx. 190 min (Record videos at 1920X1080
resolution and 30 fps.)
The figures above are based on the CIPA test standards.
Your results may differ depending on your actual usage.
Available shooting time differs depending on background, shooting
interval, and use conditions.
Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total
recording time.
Low battery message
When the battery has fully discharged, the battery icon will turn red and
the "Low Battery" message will appear.
Notes about using the battery
Avoid exposing batteries to very cold or very hot temperatures (below
0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can reduce the
charging capacity of your batteries.
When you use the camera for an extended period, the area around the
battery chamber may become warm. This does not affect the normal use
of the camera.
Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the
power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock.
In temperatures below 0 °C/32 °F, battery capacity and battery life may
decrease.
Battery capacity may decrease in low temperatures, but will return to
normal in milder temperatures.
Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended
period. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause
serious damage to your camera. Storing the camera for extended
periods with the battery installed causes the battery to discharge. You
may not be able to recharge a fully discharged battery.
When you do not use the camera for an extended period (3 months or
more), check the battery and recharge it regularly. If you let the battery
discharge continually, its capacity and life may decrease, which can lead
to a malfunction, fire, or explosion.
175
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Cautions about using the battery
Protect batteries, chargers, and memory cards from damage.
Prevent batteries from making contact with metal objects, as this can
create a connection between the + and – terminals of your battery and
lead to temporary or permanent battery damage and may cause a fire or
electric shock.
Notes about charging the battery
If the status lamp is off, ensure that the battery is inserted correctly.
If the camera is on while charging, the battery may not fully charge. Turn
off the camera before charging the battery.
Do not use your camera when you are charging the battery. This may
cause a fire or electric shock.
Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the
power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock.
Let the battery charge for at least 10 minutes before turning on the
camera.
If you connect the camera to an external power source when the battery
is depleted, using high energy-consuming functions will cause the
camera to turn off. To use the camera normally, recharge the battery.
If you reconnect the power cable when the battery is fully charged, the
status lamp turns on for approximately 30 minutes.
Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Charge
the battery until the red status lamp turns off.
If the status lamp blinks in red, reconnect the cable, or remove the
battery and insert it again.
If you charge the battery when the cable is overheated or the
temperature is too high, the status lamp may blink in red. Charging will
start when the battery cools down.
Overcharging batteries may shorten battery life. After charging is
finished, disconnect the cable from your camera.
Do not bend or place heavy objects on the AC cable. Doing so may
damage the cable.
176
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Notes about charging with a computer connected
Use only the provided USB cable.
The battery may not charge when:
- you use a USB hub
- other USB devices are connected to your computer
- you connect the cable to the port on the front side of your computer
- the USB port of your computer does not support the power output standard
(5 V, 500 mA)
Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care
Never dispose of batteries in a fire. Follow all local regulations when you
dispose of used batteries.
Never place batteries or cameras on or in heating devices, such as
microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may explode when they
are overheated.
177
Appendix
Updating the firmware
Connect the camera to the computer and update the firmware of the
camera of the lens.
You cannot run a firmware upgrade without a fully charged battery. Recharge
the battery fully before running a firmware upgrade.
If you update the firmware, user settings and values will be reset. (Date, time,
language, and video out will not change.)
Do not turn the camera off while the update is in progress.
1 Turn off the camera.
2 Connect your camera to the computer with the USB cable.
You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the
cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not
responsible for any loss of data.
If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not
work properly.
3 Turn on the camera.
4 On the computer, select i-Launcher ĺ Firmware Upgrade.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions to download the firmware to
the camera.
You can download the firmware of the camera or the lens.
6 Turn off the camera when the download completes.
7 Remove the USB cable.
8 Turn on the camera.
9 Press [m] ĺ q ĺ Device Information ĺ Software
Update ĺ Body Firmware or Lens Firmware.
10 Select Yes from a pop-up window on the camera to update
the firmware.
178
Appendix
Before contacting a service center
If you are having trouble with your device, try these troubleshooting
solutions before contacting a service professional.
When you leave your camera at a service center, be sure to also leave the other
components that may have contributed to the malfunction, such as the memory
card and battery.
Situation Suggested remedies
Cannot turn on the
camera
Ensure that the battery is inserted.
Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly.
Charge the battery.
The power turns off
suddenly
Charge the battery.
Your camera may be in Auto power off mode or
the display turns off automatically. (p. 153)
The camera may be turned off automatically to
prevent the memory card from being damaged
due to excessive heat. Turn on your camera
again.
The camera is losing
battery power quickly
The battery may lose power more quickly in
low temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F). Keep the
battery warm by putting it into your pocket.
Using the flash or recording videos depletes the
battery quickly. Recharge if needed.
Batteries are consumable parts that must be
replaced over time. Get a new battery if the
battery life is diminishing quickly.
Situation Suggested remedies
Cannot capture
photos
There is no space on the memory card. Delete
unnecessary files or insert a new card.
Format the memory card.
The memory card is defective. Get a new
memory card.
Ensure that the camera is switched on.
Charge the battery.
Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly.
The camera freezes Remove the battery and insert it again.
The camera heats up
While using the camera, it may heat up.
This is normal and should not affect your camera’s
lifespan or performance.
The flash fires
unexpectedly
The flash may fire due to static electricity.
The camera is not malfunctioning.
The flash does not
work
The flash option may be set to Off. (p. 90)
You cannot use the flash in some modes.
The date and time are
incorrect
Set the date and time under the q menu.
(p. 154)
The display or buttons
do not work Remove the battery and insert it again.
179
Appendix > Before contacting a service center
Situation Suggested remedies
The memory card has
an error
Turn off the camera, and then turn it on again.
Remove the memory card, and then insert it
again.
Format the memory card.
See "Cautions when using memory cards" for
more details. (p. 171)
Your TV or computer
cannot display photos
and videos that are
stored on a microSDXC
memory card
microSDXC memory cards use the exFAT file
system. Ensure that the external device is
compatible with the exFAT file system before
connecting the camera to the device.
Your computer does
not recognize a
microSDXC memory
card
microSDXC memory cards use the exFAT file
system. To use microSDXC memory cards on a
Windows XP computer, download and update
the exFAT file system driver from the Microsoft
website.
Cannot display files
If you change the name of a file, your camera may
not play the file (the name of the file should meet
the DCF standard). If you encounter this situation,
display files on your computer.
Situation Suggested remedies
The photo is blurry
Ensure that the focus option you set is suitable
for the kind of shot you are capturing.
Use a tripod to prevent your camera from
shaking.
Ensure that the lens is clean. If not, clean the
lens. (p. 166)
The colors in the
photo do not match
the actual scene
An incorrect White Balance can create unrealistic
color. Select the proper White Balance option to
suit the light source. (p. 72)
The photo is too
bright or too dark
Your photo is overexposed or underexposed.
Adjust the aperture value or the shutter speed.
Adjust the ISO sensitivity. (p. 71)
Turn the flash off or on. (p. 90)
Adjust the exposure value. (p. 97)
Photos are distorted
This camera can have minute distortion when
using a wide-angle lens that enables shooting
with a wide angle of view. This is normal, and
does not cause malfunction.
Horizontal lines
appear on the photo
This may occur when the subject is exposed to a
fluorescent or mercury-vapor light source. Select
a slow shutter speed or set the shooting mode to
Auto.
180
Appendix > Before contacting a service center
Situation Suggested remedies
Playback screen does
not appear on the
connected external
device
Ensure that HDMI cable is properly connected
to the external monitor.
Ensure that the memory card is properly
recorded.
Your computer does
not recognize your
camera
Ensure that the USB cable is connected
correctly.
Ensure that the camera is switched on.
Ensure that you are using a supported
operating system.
Your computer
disconnects the
camera while
transferring files
The file transfer may be interrupted by static
electricity. Disconnect the USB cable and connect
it again.
i-Launcher is not
functioning properly
End i-Launcher and restart the program.
Depending on your computer's specifications
and environment, the program may not
launch automatically. In this case, click
Start ĺ All Programs ĺ Samsung ĺ
i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher on your
Windows computer. (For Windows 8, open
Start screen, and then select All apps ĺ
Samsung i-Launcher.) Or, click Applications
ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher on your Mac OS
computer.
Situation Suggested remedies
Auto Focus does not
work
Subject is not in focus. When the subject is
outside the AF area, shoot by moving the
subject inside the AF area and half-pressing
[Shutter].
Subject is too close. Step back from the subject
and shoot.
Lens does not work
Ensure that the lens is properly mounted.
Remove the lens from the camera and
remount it.
External flash does not
work
Ensure that the external flash is properly mounted
on the external flash port.
The date & time
settings screen
appears when you
power on the camera
Set the date and time again.
This screen appears when the camera’s internal
power source is completely discharged. Insert
a fully charged battery and wait at least 72
hours in power off status for the internal power
source to be recharged.
181
Appendix
Camera specifications
Image Sensor
Type BSI CMOS
Sensor size 13.2 X 8.8 mm
Effective pixels Approx. 20.5 mega-pixels
Total pixels Approx. 20.9 mega-pixels
Color filter RGB primary color filter
Lens Mount
Type Samsung NX-M Mount
Available lens Samsung NX-M Lenses
Image Stabilization
Type Lens shift (depends on lens)
Mode Off/Mode 1/Mode 2
Distortion Correct
Off/On (depends on lens)
i-Function
Supported (depends on lens)
Display
Type TFT LCD with Touch Panel (C-type Touch Control
Enabled)
Size 3.0" (Approx. 75.2 mm)
Resolution HVGA (320X480) 460.8 k dots
Field of view Approx. 100 %
Angle Flip up: 180°
User display Grid Line, Icons, Histogram, Level gauge
Focusing
Type Contrast AF
Focusing point
Selection: 1 point (Free selection)
Multi: Normal 21 points, Close up 35 points
Face detection: Max. 10 faces
Object tracking AF
Mode Single AF, Continuous AF, Manual Focus,
Touch AF & Shutter
AF Assist Lamp Green LED
182
Appendix > Camera specifications
Shutter
Type Electronic shutter
Speed
• Auto: 1/16,000–1/4 sec.
• Manual: 1/16,000–30 sec. (1/3 EV Step)
• Bulb (time limit: 4 min.)
Exposure
Metering system
TTL 221 (17X13) Block segment
Metering: Multi, Center-weighted, Spot
Metering range: EV 0–18 (ISO160 · 9 mm, F3.5)
Compensation ±3 EV (1/3 EV Step)
AE lock Custom button
ISO equivalent
Auto, 160, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400, 12800
(1 or 1/3 EV Step)
* Auto ISO settings are selectable up to ISO 3200. You can
select ISO 100 and 25600.
Drive Mode
Mode
Single, Continuous, Burst (5M only), Timer,
Bracket (Auto Exposure, White Balance,
Picture Wizard, Depth)
Continuous shooting
6 fps
* Maximum shooting speed is 6 frames per second. It will
slow down after approx. JPEG 11 shots, RAW 4 shots.
(May vary depending on the spec of memory card.)
Bracket shooting
Auto exposure bracketing (±3 EV),
White Balance bracketing,
Picture Wizard bracketing, Depth bracketing
Self-timer 2–30 sec. (1 second interval)
Shutter release via Micro USB port (optional)
Flash
Type Built-in flash
Mode Smart Flash, Auto, Auto Red-eye, Fill in,
Fill-in Red, 1st Curtain, 2nd Curtain, Off
Guide number 4.9 (based on ISO 160, 24 mm),
4 (based on ISO 100, 24 mm)
Angle of view 24 mm (35 mm film equivalent)
Sync speed Less than 1/200 sec.
Flash EV -2–+2 EV (1/2 EV Step)
External flash
Samsung NX mini external flash available
(SEF7A) (optional)
Guide number: 8 (Based on ISO 160, 24 mm),
7 (Based on ISO 100, 24 mm)
Sync terminal External flash port
183
Appendix > Camera specifications
White Balance
Mode
Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent White,
Fluorescent NW, Fluorescent Daylight, Tungsten,
Flash WB, Custom Set, Color Temperature
(Manual)
Micro adjustment Amber/Blue/Green/Magenta 7 steps respectively
Dynamic Range
Off/Smart Range+/HDR
Picture Wizard
Mode
Standard, Vivid, Portrait, Landscape, Forest,
Retro, Cool, Calm, Classic, Custom1, Custom2,
Custom3
Parameter Color, Saturation, Sharpness, Contrast
Shooting
Mode Auto, Smart, Program, Aperture Priority,
Shutter Priority, Manual
Smart mode
Beauty Face, Best Face, Continuous Shot, Kids
Shot, Landscape, Macro, Food, Parties and
Indoors, Action Freeze, Rich Tones, Panorama,
Waterfall, Silhouette, Sunset, Night, Fireworks,
Light Trace
Smart filter Vignetting, Miniature, Sketch, Fish Eye
Size
JPEG (3:2): 20.0M (5472X3648),
10.1M (3888X2592), 5.9M (2976X1984),
5.0M (2736X1824) (Burst mode only),
2.0M (1728X1152)
JPEG (16:9): 16.9M (5472X3080),
7.8M (3712X2088), 4.9M (2944X1656),
2.1M (1920X1080)
JPEG (1:1): 13.3M (3648X3648),
7.0M (2640X2640), 4.0M (2000X2000),
1.1M (1024X1024)
RAW: 20.0M (5472X3648)
Quality Super Fine, Fine, Normal, RAW, RAW + S.Fine,
RAW + Fine, RAW + Normal
RAW standard SRW (ver.3.0.0)
Color space sRGB, Adobe RGB
Video
Type MP4 (H.264)
Format Movie: H.264, Sound: AAC
Movie AE mode Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority,
Manual
Movie clip Audio on/off (Shooting time: Max. 29' 59'')
Smart filter Vignetting, Miniature, Sketch, Fish Eye
184
Appendix > Camera specifications
Size 1920X1080, 1280X720, 640X480, 320X240
(For Sharing)
Frame rate 30 fps
Multi Motion x0.25 (640X480, 320X240 only), x1, x5, x10, x20
Quality HQ, Normal
Sound Mono
Edit Still image capture, Time trimming
Playback
Type Single image, Thumbnails (15/28), Slide show,
Movie
Edit
Smart Filter, Crop, Resize, Rotate, Face Retouch,
Brightness, Contrast, Auto adjustment,
Saturation, RGB adjustment, Color Temperature,
Exposure
Smart filter
Vignetting, Miniature, Soft Focus, Sketch, Fish Eye,
Classic, Retro, Oil Painting, Cartoon, Ink Painting,
Cross Filter, Zooming Shot
Storage
Media
External memory (optional)*:
microSD card (2 GB guaranteed),
microSDHC card (up to 32 GB guaranteed),
microSDXC card (up to 64 GB guaranteed)
* Class 6 and above recommended
File format RAW (SRW (ver.3.0.0)), JPEG (EXIF 2.3), MP4
(Movie), DCF
Wireless network
Type IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Function
AutoShare, Remote Viewfinder, MobileLink,
Photo Beam, Auto Backup, Samsung Link,
SNS & Cloud, Email, Baby Monitor, Group Share
NFC
Yes
Interface
Digital output USB 2.0 (micro USB jack)
Video output NTSC, PAL (selectable)
HDMI
External release Yes
DC power input DC 5.0 V, 0.55 A via micro USB
185
Appendix > Camera specifications
Power Source
Type
Rechargeable battery: B740AE/B740AC/B740AU/
B740AK (2,330 mAh, 3.8 V)
* The battery specifications or model may differ
depending on your region.
Dimensions (W X H X D)
110.4 X 61.9 X 22.5 mm
Weight
158 g (without battery and memory card)
Operating Temperature
0–40 °C
Operating Humidity
5–85 %
Software
i-Launcher, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 5
* Specifications may change without notice to improve performance.
* Other brands and products names are trademarks of respective owners.
186
Appendix
Glossary
AP (Access Point)
An access point is a device that allows wireless devices to connect to a
wired network.
Ad-Hoc network
An ad-hoc network is a temporary connection for sharing files or an
internet connection and between computers and devices.
AdobeRGB
Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a larger color range
than sRGB. Its wider range of colors helps you to easily edit photos on a
computer.
AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket)
This feature automatically captures several images at different exposures
to help you capture a properly-exposed image.
AEL (Auto Exposure Lock)
These features help you lock the exposure on which you want to calculate
the exposure.
AF (Auto Focus)
A system that automatically focuses the camera lens on the subject. Your
camera uses the contrast to focus automatically.
AMOLED (Active-matrix organic light-emitting diode)/
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
AMOLED is a visual display that is very thin and light, as it does not
need backlighting. LCD is a visual display commonly used in consumer
electronics. This display needs a separate backlight, such as CCFL or LED, to
reproduce colors.
Aperture
The aperture controls the amount of light that reaches the camera’s sensor.
187
Appendix > Glossary
Composition
Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually,
abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition.
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)
A specification to define a file format and file system for digital cameras
created by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
Depth of field
The distance between the nearest and farthest points that can be
acceptably focused in a photograph. Depth of field varies with lens
aperture, focal length, and distance from the camera to the subject.
Selecting a smaller aperture, for example, will increase the depth of field
and blur the background of a composition.
Camera shake (Blur)
If the camera is moved while the shutter is open, the entire image may
appear blurred. This occurs more often when the shutter speed is slow.
Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, or using
a faster shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod or the OIS function to
stabilize the camera.
Cloud Computing
Cloud computing is a technology that allows you to store data on remote
servers and to use them from a device with internet access.
Color space
The range of colors that the camera can see.
Color temperature
Color Temperature is a measurement in degrees Kelvin (K) that indicates
the hue of a specific type of light source. As the color temperature
increases, the color of the light source has a more bluish quality. As the
color temperature decreases, the color of the light source has a more
reddish quality. At 5,500 degrees Kelvin, the color of the light source is
similar to the sun at midday.
188
Appendix > Glossary
Flash
A speed light that helps to create adequate exposure in low-light
conditions.
Focal length
The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in millimeters).
Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is
magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view.
Histogram
A graphical representation of the brightness of an image. The horizontal
axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents the number
of pixels. High points at the left (too dark) and right (too bright) on the
histogram indicate a photo that is improperly exposed.
H.264/MPEG-4
A high-compression video format established by international standard
organizations ISO-IEC and ITU-T. This codec is capable of providing good
video quality at low bit rates developed by the Joint Video Team (JVT).
EV (Exposure Value)
All the combinations of the camera’s shutter speed and lens aperture that
result in the same exposure.
EV Compensation
This feature allows you to quickly adjust the exposure value measured by
the camera, in limited increments, to improve the exposure of your photos.
Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format)
A specification to define an image file format for digital cameras created by
the Japan Electronic Industries Development Association (JEIDA).
Exposure
The amount of light allowed to reach the camera’s sensor. Exposure is
controlled by a combination of the shutter speed, the aperture value, and
ISO sensitivity.
189
Appendix > Glossary
Metering
The metering refers to the way in which the camera measures the quantity
of light to set the exposure.
MF (Manual Focus)
A system that manually focuses the camera lens on the subject.
You can use the focus ring to focus on a subject.
MJPEG (Motion JPEG)
A video format which is compressed as a JPEG image.
Image sensor
The physical part of a digital camera that contains a photosite for each
pixel in the image. Each photosite records the brightness of the light that
strikes it during an exposure. Common sensor types are CCD (Chargecoupled
Device) and CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor).
IP (Internet protocol) address
An IP address is a unique number that is assigned to every device that is
connected to the internet.
ISO sensitivity
The sensitivity of the camera to light, based on the equivalent film speed
used in a film camera. At higher ISO sensitivity settings, the camera uses a
higher shutter speed, which can reduce blur caused by camera shake and
low light. However, images with high sensitivity are more susceptible to
noise.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
A lossy method of compression for digital images. JPEG images are
compressed to reduce their overall file size with minimal deterioration of
the image resolution.
190
Appendix > Glossary
PAL (Phase Alternate Line)
A video color encoding standard used in numerous countries throughout
Africa, Asia, Europe, and the Middle East.
Quality
An expression of the rate of compression used in a digital image. Higher
quality images have a lower rate of compression, which usually results in a
larger file size.
RAW (CCD raw data)
The original, unprocessed data, collected directly from the camera’s image
sensor. White Balance, contrast, saturation, sharpness, and other data can
be manipulated with editing software before the image is compressed into
a standard file format.
Resolution
The number of pixels present in a digital image. High resolution images
contain more pixels and typically show more detail than low resolution
images.
Noise
Misinterpreted pixels in a digital image that may appear as misplaced or
random, bright pixels. Noise usually occurs when photos are shot with a
high sensitivity or when a sensitivity is automatically set in a dark place.
NFC (Near Field Communication)
NFC is a set of standards for radio communication at very close proximity.
You can use NFC-enabled devices to activate features or exchange data
with other devices.
NTSC (National Television System Committee)
A video color encoding standard used most commonly in Japan, North
America, the Philippines, South America, South Korea, and Taiwan.
Optical zoom
This is a general zoom which can enlarge images with a lens and does not
deteriorate quality of images.
191
Appendix > Glossary
Shutter speed
Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the
shutter, and it is an important factor in the brightness of a photo, as it
controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before
it reaches the image sensor. A fast shutter speed allows less time to let
light in and the photo becomes darker and more easily freezes subjects in
motion.
sRGB (Standard RGB)
International standard of color space established by the IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space for PC
monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif.
Vignetting
A reduction of an image’s brightness or saturation at the periphery (outer
edges) compared to the center of the image. Vignetting can draw interest
to subjects positioned in the center of an image.
White Balance (Color balance)
An adjustment of the intensities of colors (typically the primary colors red,
green, and blue), in an image. The goal of adjusting the White Balance, or
color balance, is to correctly render the colors in an image.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi is a technology that allows electronic devices to exchange data
wirelessly over a network.
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
WPS is a technology that secures wireless home networks.
192
Appendix
Optional accessories
You can purchase the following optional items:
Lens, External flash, Shutter release (micro USB type), Rechargeable
battery, Battery charger, Camera bag, Camera case, Memory card, Filter,
USB cable, HDMI cable, Strap
To locate the type, image and availability of accessories, visit the Samsung
website.
Before purchasing accessories, make sure they are compatible with your
camera. GPS10 and EM10 are not compatible with this camera.
Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Samsung is not responsible for
damage caused by using another manufacturer’s accessories.
The accessories supplied with each product may be different in type and
quantity.
193
Appendix A
Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 163
Aperture 15, 19
Auto Backup 134
Auto focus 75 B
Baby Monitor 132
Battery
Caution 172
Charging 35
Insert 32
Best Face mode 57
Bracketing 87 C
Camera
Connecting as removable disk 158
Connecting to PC 158
Disconnecting (Windows) 159
Layout 28
Camera specifications 181
Charging 35
Color space 148 D
Date & Time 154
Depth of Field (DOF) 16, 20
DIRECT LINK 30
Display brightness 153
Display type 46
Drive 85 E
Enlarging 107
Exposure Value (EV) 15, 97
F
Fader 101
Files
Deleting 106
Photo type 70
Protecting 105
Video type 100
Flash
Flash options 90
Guide number 25
Intensity 91
F-number 15
Focal length 20 I
Icons
Playback mode 45
Shooting mode 43
i-Launcher 162
Image adjustment
Adjusting photos 114
Retouching faces 115
ISO sensitivity 71 L
Lenses
Layout 47
Locking 48
Markings 49
Unlocking 48 M
Maintenance 166
Memory card
Caution 169
Insert 32
Metering 92
MobileLink 126
Index
194
Appendix > Index N
NFC (Tag & Go) 123 O
One touch shot 82
Optical Image Stabilization
(OIS) 84
Optional accessories
Attach the mount adapter 52
Connect the flash 51
Flash layout 50
Mount adapter layout 52
P
Panorama mode 58
Photos
Editing 112
Enlarging 107
Shooting options 69
Viewing on camera 103
Picture Wizard 74
Posture 13
Power save mode 153 R
Red-eye effect 91
Remote Viewfinder 130
Resolution
Playback mode 113
Shooting mode (Movie) 99
Shooting mode (Photo) 69
Retouching faces 115
Rotating 113
Rule of thirds 23 S
Samsung Link 142
Service center 178
Settings 153
Shooting modes
Aperture Priority 61
Auto 54
Manual 63
Program 59
Recording 65
Shutter Priority 62
Smart 56
Shutter speed 17, 19
Slide show 107
Smart filter
Playback mode 116
Shooting mode 96
Smart panel 40 T
Thumbnails 103
Timer 87
Touch AF 81
Touch screen 38
Tracking AF 81
Transferring files
Mac 159
Windows 158
TV 157 U
Unpacking 27 V
Video Out 154
Videos
Capturing 111
Options 99
Recording 65
Viewing 109 W
White balance 72
Wireless network 118
195
Correct Disposal of This Product
(Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)
(Applicable in countries with separate collection systems)
This marking on the product, accessories, or literature indicates that the
product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable)
should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their
working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human
health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items
from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the
sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased
this product or their local government office for details of where and how
they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and
conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic
accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for
disposal.
This product is RoHS compliant.
Correct disposal of batteries in this product
(Applicable in countries with separate collection systems)
This marking on the battery, manual, or packaging indicates that the
batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household
waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols
Hg, Cd, or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium, or
lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not
properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or
the environment.
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please
separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through
your local, free battery return system.
CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)
Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler.
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or call, (877) 278 - 0799
Appendix
196
Appendix
FCC notice
Caution:
Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which are
not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorientate, or relocate, the receiving antenna.
- Increase the distance between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for
an uncontrolled environment. This device and its antenna must not be colocated
or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Caution:
Any changes or modifications to the equipment not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IC: 649E-EVNXF1
FCC ID: A3L-EVNXF1
197
33258/SDPPI/2014
1258
TRC/SS/2014/39
TA-2013/2281
APPROVED
No.: ESD-1408453C
Model : EV-NXF1
Year of Manufacture : 2014
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY
AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING
TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
This equipment may be operated in all EU countries.
In France, this equipment may only be used indoors.
Declaration of Conformity
Trade Name : Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
Model No. : Samsung EV-NXF1
Responsible Party: Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
Address : 85 Challenger Road, Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660
Telephone No.: 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
This device complies with Industry Canada License-Exempt RSS standard (S)
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Complies with
IDA Standards
DA100790
Please refer to the warranty that came with your product
or visit our website www.samsung.com for after-sales service or inquiries.
Mode
d’emploi
FRE Ce mode d’emploi propose des
instructions détaillées pour l’utilisation de
l’appareil photo. Veuille le lire attentivement.
1
Informations sur les droits d’auteur
• Les caractéristiques de l’appareil photo ou le contenu de ce mode
d’emploi peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis, suite à
l’évolution des fonctions de l’appareil photo.
• La distribution ou la réutilisation du contenu de ce mode d’emploi,
même partielle, sans autorisation préalable, est interdite.
• Nous vous recommandons d’utiliser votre appareil photo dans le pays
où vous l’avez acheté.
• Utilisez l’appareil photo de manière responsable et veillez à respecter
toutes les législations et règlementations en vigueur.
PlanetFirst représente l’engagement de Samsung Electronics
à l’égard du développement durable et de la responsabilité
sociale, qui se traduit par des décisions et des activités
commerciales sous une optique écologique.
• Microsoft Windows et le logo Windows sont des marques déposées de
Microsoft Corporation.
• Mac et Apple App Store sont des marques déposées d’Apple
Corporation.
• Google Play Store est une marque déposée de Google, Inc.
• Adobe, le logo Adobe, Photoshop et Lightroom sont des marques
déposées ou des marques d’Adobe Systems Incorporated aux
Etats-Unis et / ou dans d’autres pays.
• microSD™, microSDHC™ et microSDXC™ sont des marques déposées de
la SD Association.
• HDMI, le logo HDMI et l’expression « High
Definition Multimedia Interface » sont des
marques commerciales ou des marques
déposées de HDMI Licensing LLC.
• Wi-Fi®, le logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques
déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance.
• Les marques commerciales mentionnées dans ce mode d’emploi
appartiennent à leurs propriétaires respectifs.
2
Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité
Tachez de ne pas éblouir les sujets photographiés.
N’utilisez pas le flash à proximité (à moins d’1 mètre) de personnes
ou d’animaux. L’utilisation du flash trop près des yeux du sujet peut
provoquer des lésions temporaires ou permanentes.
Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo à la portée d’enfants en bas âge
ou d’animaux domestiques.
Tenez l’appareil photo, ses pièces et ses accessoires, hors de portée des
enfants en bas âge et des animaux. L’ingestion de petites pièces peut
provoquer l’étouffement ou des blessures graves. Les parties détachables
et les accessoires représentent également un danger.
Evitez toute exposition prolongée de l’appareil photo à la
lumière directe du soleil ou à des températures élevées.
Une exposition prolongée à la lumière directe du soleil ou à des
températures très élevées peut endommager de manière permanente les
composants internes de l’appareil photo.
Evitez de couvrir l’appareil photo ou le chargeur avec des
couvertures ou des vêtements.
L’appareil photo risque de surchauffer, de se déformer ou de prendre feu.
Ne manipulez pas le cordon d’alimentation ou le chargeur lors
d’un orage.
Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique.
Respectez toujours les consignes et conseils d’utilisation suivants afin de
prévenir toute situation dangereuse et de garantir un fonctionnement
optimal de l’appareil photo.
Attention—situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de
blesser d’autres personnes
Ne démontez pas ou n’essayez pas de réparer vous-même
l’appareil photo.
Vous pouvez endommager l’appareil photo et vous exposer à un risque de
choc électrique.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de gaz ou de
liquides inflammables ou explosifs.
Un départ d’incendie ou une explosion risque de se produire.
N’introduisez pas de matériaux inflammables dans l’appareil
photo ou ne stockez pas de tels matériaux à proximité de
l’appareil photo.
Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge
électrique.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo avec les mains mouillées.
Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique.
3
Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité
Si du liquide ou des corps étrangers pénètrent dans l’appareil
photo, déconnectez toutes les sources d’alimentation comme
la batterie ou le chargeur, puis contactez le centre de service
après-vente de Samsung.
Respectez toutes les réglementations limitant l’utilisation des
appareils photo dans certaines zones.
• Evitez toute interférence avec d’autres appareils électroniques.
• Eteignez l’appareil photo lorsque vous voyagez en avion. Cet appareil
photo peut provoquer des interférences avec les équipements de
navigation aérienne. Respectez l’ensemble des réglementations
aériennes et éteignez l’appareil photo lorsque vous y êtes invité par le
personnel navigant.
• Eteignez l’appareil photo à proximité de tout équipement médical.
Cet appareil photo peut créer des interférences avec les équipements
médicaux des hôpitaux ou des établissements de santé. Respectez
l’ensemble des réglementations, avertissements affichés et
recommandations du personnel médical.
Evitez toute interférence avec les stimulateurs cardiaques.
Maintenez l’appareil photo à bonne distance des stimulateurs cardiaques
pour éviter toute interférence, comme recommandé par le fabricant et les
groupes de recherche. Si vous avez une quelconque raison de suspecter
que l’appareil photo provoque des interférences avec un stimulateur
cardiaque ou tout autre appareil médical, éteignez-le immédiatement et
contactez le fabricant du stimulateur cardiaque ou de l’appareil médical
pour en savoir plus.
Attention—situations susceptibles d’endommager
l’appareil photo ou d’autres équipements
Si vous rangez l’appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une période
de temps prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie.
Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se détériorer avec le temps, risquant
d’endommager gravement l’appareil photo.
Utilisez uniquement des batteries de remplacement lithiumion
originales recommandées par le fabricant. N’endommagez
pas ou ne chauffez pas la batterie.
Les batteries non homologuées, endommagées ou ayant été exposées à la
chaleur sont à même de produire une flamme ou une blessure.
Utilisez uniquement des batteries, des chargeurs et des
accessoires homologués par Samsung.
• L’utilisation de batteries, de chargeurs, de câbles ou d’accessoires
non homologués peut endommager l’appareil photo, provoquer leur
éclatement ou causer des blessures.
• Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommage ou blessure
résultant d’une utilisation inappropriée de batteries, chargeurs, câbles
ou accessoires.
Utilisez la batterie prévue uniquement pour l’appareil photo.
Une mauvaise utilisation de celle-ci risque de produire une flamme ou une
décharge électrique.
4
Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité
Ne touchez pas le flash en cours de déclenchement.
Le flash est très chaud lorsqu’il se déclenche et peut provoquer des
brûlures.
Lorsque vous utilisez le chargeur secteur, éteignez l’appareil
photo avant de couper l’alimentation du chargeur secteur.
Ne pas suivre ces instructions peut produire des flammes ou une
électrocution.
Débranchez le chargeur de la prise murale lorsque vous ne
l’utilisez pas.
Ne pas suivre ces instructions peut produire des flammes ou une
électrocution.
N’utilisez jamais de fiches et de cordons d’alimentation
endommagés ou de prises électriques mal fixées lorsque vous
rechargez la batterie.
Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge
électrique.
Le chargeur secteur ne doit jamais entrer en contact avec les
bornes +/- de la batterie.
Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge
électrique.
Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo tomber ou subir des chocs.
Cela peut endommager l’écran ou des composants, tant externes
qu’internes.
Effectuez les branchements des cordons, des adaptateurs et
l’insertion des batteries et des cartes mémoire avec précaution.
Enfoncer les cordons en forçant ou sans précaution et brancher les câbles
ou insérer les batteries et les cartes mémoire de manière incorrecte peut
endommager les ports, les prises et les accessoires.
Evitez tout contact des cartes mémoire avec l’étui de l’appareil
photo.
Vous risquez d’endommager ou d’effacer les données stockées sur la carte.
N’utilisez jamais de batterie ou de carte mémoire
endommagée.
Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique, d’endommager
l’appareil photo ou de provoquer une flamme.
Ne soumettez ou n’approchez pas l’appareil photo de champs
magnétiques.
Cela risque d’entraîner un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil photo.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est endommagé.
Si les parties en verre ou en acrylique sont brisées, apportez l’appareil
photo dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung afin de la faire
réparer.
5
Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité
Vérifiez que l’appareil photo fonctionne correctement avant de
l’utiliser.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de fichiers ou
de dégâts résultant d’un fonctionnement incorrect ou d’une mauvaise
utilisation de l’appareil photo.
Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB du câble USB sur
l’appareil photo.
Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données.
Ne jamais exposer l’objectif aux rayons directs du soleil.
Vous risquez de décolorer le capteur d’images ou d’entraîner des
dysfonctionnements.
Si l’appareil photo surchauffe, retirez la batterie jusqu’à ce
qu’elle refroidisse.
• Lors d’un usage prolongé, la batterie peut chauffer et augmenter
la température interne de l’appareil photo. Si l’appareil photo ne
fonctionne plus, retirez la batterie et laissez-lui le temps de refroidir.
• Des températures internes élevées peuvent entraîner l’apparition de
parasites sur vos photos. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas les
performances globales de l’appareil photo.
Evitez toute interférence avec d’autres appareils électroniques.
Votre appareil photo émet des signaux de radiofréquences (RF) qui
risquent d’interférer avec les équipements électroniques non blindés
ou blindés de façon incorrecte, comme les stimulateurs cardiaques, les
prothèses auditives et tout autre appareil électronique, que ce soit dans
les bâtiments ou les véhicules. Consultez les fabricants de vos appareils
électroniques pour résoudre tout problème d’interférence. Pour éviter
toute interférence indésirable, utilisez uniquement des appareils ou
accessoires approuvés par Samsung.
Utilisez l’appareil photo en position normale.
Evitez tout contact avec l’antenne interne de l’appareil photo.
Transfert des données et responsabilités
• Les données transférées via un réseau local sans fil pourraient être
divulguées. Evitez donc de transférer des données sensibles dans des
endroits publics ou via des réseaux ouverts.
• Le fabricant de l’appareil photo ne peut être tenu responsable des
transferts de données enfreignant les droits d’auteur, les législations
sur les marques commerciales et la propriété intellectuelle ou les
règlements concernant les outrages aux bonnes mœurs.
6
Icônes utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi
Icône Fonction
Informations complémentaires
Mises en garde et précautions
[ ] Touches de l’appareil photo. Par exemple, [Déclencheur] désigne
la touche du déclencheur/obturateur.
( ) Numéro de page où se trouve l’information correspondante
ĺ
Séquence d’options ou de menus à sélectionner pour accomplir
une procédure ; par exemple : sélectionnez b ĺ Qualité
(signifie que vous devez sélectionner b, puis Qualité).
* Annotation
Ce mode d’emploi est basé sur les objectifs NX-M. Lorsque vous fixez des
objectifs NX à l’aide de l’adaptateur de montage, il est possible que certaines
options ou fonctions de prises de vue ne soient pas prises en charge.
7
Table des matières
Chapitre 1
Mon appareil photo
Mise en route ............................................................................................... 27
Contenu du coffret ................................................................................................... 27
Présentation de l’appareil photo ............................................................. 28
Utilisation de la touche DIRECT LINK ................................................................. 30
Configuration de la touche DIRECT LINK ............................................................ 30
Utilisation de l’écran ................................................................................................. 31
Utilisation du mode Autoportrait .......................................................................... 31
Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire .................................... 32
Retrait de la batterie et de la carte mémoire................................................... 34
Utilisation de l’adaptateur de carte mémoire ................................................. 34
Mise en charge de la batterie et mise sous tension de
l’appareil photo ........................................................................................... 35
Chargement de la batterie ..................................................................................... 35
Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo ............................................................... 35
Configuration initiale ................................................................................. 36
Sélection de fonctions (options) .............................................................. 38
Sélection à l’aide des touches............................................................................... 38
Sélection à l’aide de l’écran tactile ...................................................................... 38
Utilisation de l’option m .................................................................................. 39
Ex. : définir le format photo en mode P .............................................................. 39
Utilisation du panneau intelligent ...................................................................... 40
Ex. : régler la valeur d’exposition en mode P ..................................................... 40
Sélection d’un mode .................................................................................. 41
Accès à l’écran Mode ................................................................................................ 41
Description des modes ........................................................................................... 41
Conseils
Concepts de photographie
Postures pour les prises de vue ................................................................ 13
Prise en main de l’appareil photo ........................................................................... 13
Photographie en position debout .......................................................................... 14
Photographie en position accroupie ..................................................................... 14
Ouverture ..................................................................................................... 15
Valeur d’ouverture et profondeur de champ ...................................................... 16
Vitesse d’obturation.................................................................................... 17
Sensibilité ISO .............................................................................................. 18
Contrôle de l’exposition par le réglage de l’ouverture,
de la vitesse d’obturation et de la sensibilité ISO ................................. 19
Corrélation entre la longueur de focale, l’angle et la perspective .... 20
Profondeur de champ ................................................................................ 20
Quels sont les éléments qui contrôlent les effets hors-mise au point ? .... 21
Aperçu de la profondeur de champ ....................................................................... 22
Composition ................................................................................................. 23
Règle des tiers ................................................................................................................ 23
Photos avec deux sujets ............................................................................................. 24
Flash ............................................................................................................... 25
Nombre guide du flash ............................................................................................... 25
8
Table des matières
Icônes affichées à l’écran ........................................................................... 43
En mode Prise de vue .............................................................................................. 43
Prise de photos ............................................................................................................. 43
Enregistrement de vidéos ......................................................................................... 44
A propos de l’indicateur de niveau ....................................................................... 44
En mode Lecture ....................................................................................................... 45
Affichage de photos ................................................................................................... 45
Lecture de vidéos ........................................................................................................ 45
Modification des informations affichées .......................................................... 46
Objectifs ........................................................................................................ 47
Présentation de l’objectif ........................................................................................ 47
Verrouillage et déverrouillage de l’objectif ........................................................ 48
Marquages de l’objectif ........................................................................................... 49
Accessoires ................................................................................................... 50
Présentation du flash externe ............................................................................... 50
Fixation du flash externe ........................................................................................... 51
Disposition de la bague d’adaptation ............................................................... 52
Montage de la bague d’adaptation ...................................................................... 52
Retrait de la bague d’adaptation ........................................................................... 53
Modes de prise de vue ............................................................................... 54
Mode Automatique .................................................................................................. 54
Mode intelligent ........................................................................................................ 56
Utilisation du mode Beauté ..................................................................................... 56
Utilisation du mode Meilleure photo ................................................................... 57
Prise de photos panoramiques ............................................................................... 58
Mode Programme ..................................................................................................... 59
Changement de programme .................................................................................. 60
Vitesse obturation minimum ................................................................................... 60
Mode Priorité ouverture ......................................................................................... 61
Mode Priorité Vitesse ............................................................................................... 62
Mode Manuel .............................................................................................................. 63
Utilisation du mode d’exposition ........................................................................... 63
Utilisation de la fonction Bulb ................................................................................. 64
Enregistrement d’une vidéo .................................................................................. 65
Fonctions disponibles en mode Prise de vue ................................................. 66
Chapitre 2
Fonctions de prise de vue
Format et résolution ................................................................................... 69
Format photo .............................................................................................................. 69
Qualité ........................................................................................................................... 70
Sensibilité ISO .............................................................................................. 71
Balance des blancs ...................................................................................... 72
Personnalisation des options de préréglage de la balance des blancs .... 73
Assistant photo (styles de photo) ............................................................ 74
9
Table des matières
Mode AF ........................................................................................................ 75
AF unique ..................................................................................................................... 75
AF continu .................................................................................................................... 76
Mise au point manuelle .......................................................................................... 76
Zone AF ......................................................................................................... 77
Mise au point sélection ........................................................................................... 77
Mise au point multiple ............................................................................................ 78
Détection des visages ................................................................................ 79
Normale ........................................................................................................................ 79
Sourire ........................................................................................................................... 80
Clin d’œil ....................................................................................................................... 80
Mise au point tactile ................................................................................... 81
Mise au point tactile ................................................................................................. 81
Point AF ......................................................................................................................... 81
Mise au point avec suivi .......................................................................................... 81
Déclenchement par sélection .............................................................................. 82
Aide mise au point manuelle .................................................................... 83
Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) .................................................... 84
Prise de vue (type) ...................................................................................... 85
Unique ........................................................................................................................... 85
Normal continu .......................................................................................................... 86
Mode Rafale ................................................................................................................ 86
Retardateur .................................................................................................................. 87
Bracketing Exposition automatique (BKT AE) ................................................. 87
Bracketing Balance des blancs (BKT NB) ........................................................... 88
Bracketing Assistant photo (A. photo Bracketing) ........................................ 88
Bracketing de profondeur de champ ................................................................ 89
Flash ............................................................................................................... 90
Réduction de l’effet yeux rouges ......................................................................... 91
Réglage de l’intensité du flash.............................................................................. 91
Mesure de l’exposition ............................................................................... 92
Multiple ......................................................................................................................... 92
Centrée .......................................................................................................................... 93
Sélective ....................................................................................................................... 93
Mesure de la valeur d’exposition de la zone de mise au point ................. 94
Plage dynamique ........................................................................................ 95
Filtre intelligent ........................................................................................... 96
Compensation de l’exposition .................................................................. 97
Verrouillage de l’exposition ...................................................................... 98
Fonctions vidéo ........................................................................................... 99
Format vidéo ............................................................................................................... 99
Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur NTSC ........................................................................ 99
Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur PAL ........................................................................... 99
Qualité vidéo ............................................................................................................ 100
Multi-mouvements ................................................................................................ 100
Fondu.......................................................................................................................... 101
Voix .............................................................................................................................. 101
10
Table des matières
Chapitre 3
Lecture / Retouche
Recherche et gestion de fichiers ............................................................ 103
Affichage de photos .............................................................................................. 103
Affichage des images sous forme de miniatures ........................................ 103
Affichage de fichiers par catégorie .................................................................. 104
Visionnage de fichiers sous forme de dossiers ............................................ 104
Protection de fichiers ............................................................................................ 105
Suppression de fichiers ........................................................................................ 106
Suppression d’un seul fichier ................................................................................ 106
Suppression de plusieurs fichiers ........................................................................ 106
Suppression de tous les fichiers ........................................................................... 106
Affichage de photos ................................................................................. 107
Agrandissement d’une photo ............................................................................ 107
Visionnage d’un diaporama ............................................................................... 107
Rotation automatique .......................................................................................... 108
Lecture de vidéos ...................................................................................... 109
Avance ou retour rapide de la lecture ............................................................ 109
Réglage de la luminosité d’une vidéo ............................................................ 110
Réglage du volume d’une vidéo ....................................................................... 110
Recadrage d’une vidéo au cours de la lecture ............................................. 111
Extraction d’une image pendant la lecture .................................................. 111
Retouche de photos ................................................................................. 112
Rognage d’une photo .......................................................................................... 112
Rotation d’une photo ........................................................................................... 113
Redimensionnement de photos ....................................................................... 113
Réglage des photos ............................................................................................... 114
Retouche de visages ............................................................................................. 115
Effets de filtre intelligent ..................................................................................... 116
Chapitre 4
Réseau sans fil
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration
des paramètres réseau ............................................................................. 118
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil................................................................ 118
Configuration des options de réseau ................................................................. 119
Configuration manuelle de l’adresse IP ............................................................. 119
Utilisation du navigateur de connexion ........................................................ 120
Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau ........................................................... 121
Saisie de texte .......................................................................................................... 122
Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact) ......................... 123
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Prise de vue ................................ 123
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Lecture
(Partage instantané) .............................................................................................. 123
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Wi-Fi ............................................... 123
Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone ......... 124
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone ................................ 126
11
Table des matières
Chapitre 5
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo
Paramètres utilisateur .............................................................................. 146
Personnalisation ISO ............................................................................................. 146
Extension ISO .............................................................................................................. 146
Palier ISO ....................................................................................................................... 146
Plage ISO auto ............................................................................................................. 146
Réducteur de bruit ................................................................................................. 147
Réglage Bracketing ................................................................................................ 147
Espace colorimétrique .......................................................................................... 148
Corriger distort. ....................................................................................................... 149
Fonctionnement tactile ....................................................................................... 149
Personnalisation iFn .............................................................................................. 149
Affichage utilisateur .............................................................................................. 150
Attribution touches ............................................................................................... 151
Vue Live NFC ............................................................................................................ 151
Taille de l’image MobileLink/NFC ..................................................................... 151
Grille ............................................................................................................................ 151
Voyant de mise au point ...................................................................................... 152
Autoportrait automatique .................................................................................. 152
Réglagle de la touche Vitesse sur l’objectif ................................................... 152
Paramètres .................................................................................................. 153
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à plusieurs smartphones .................. 128
Utilisation d’un smartphone pour le déclenchement
de l’obturateur à distance ........................................................................ 130
Utilisation de la fonction Baby Monitor ............................................... 132
Réglage du niveau de bruit pour l’activation de l’alarme ....................... 133
Utilisation de Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer
des photos ou des vidéos ........................................................................ 134
Installation du programme Sauvegarde automatique sur
votre ordinateur ...................................................................................................... 134
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un ordinateur ........................................... 134
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel .......................................... 136
Modification des paramètres de courriel ...................................................... 136
Enregistrement de vos informations .................................................................. 136
Création d’un mot de passe de courriel ............................................................ 137
Changement du mot de passe de courriel ....................................................... 138
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel ................................................... 138
Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou de vidéos ............ 140
Accès à un service de partage ........................................................................... 140
Téléchargement de photos ou de vidéos ...................................................... 141
Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de fichiers ......................... 142
Téléchargement de photos sur un système de stockage en ligne ....... 142
Visionnage de photos ou de vidéos sur des dispositifs compatibles
Samsung Link .......................................................................................................... 143
12
Table des matières
Usage et rangement de l’appareil photo....................................................... 168
Usage ou rangement inapproprié de l’appareil photo ................................ 168
Utilisation sur la plage ou en bord de mer ....................................................... 168
Rangement pour une durée prolongée ............................................................ 168
Usage avec précaution de l’appareil photo dans les environnements
humides .........................................................................................................................169
Autres avertissements .............................................................................................. 169
A propos des cartes mémoire ............................................................................ 170
Cartes mémoires prises en charge ...................................................................... 170
Capacité de la carte mémoire ............................................................................... 171
Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire ................................................. 172
A propos de la batterie ......................................................................................... 173
Caractéristiques de la batterie .............................................................................. 173
Autonomie de la batterie ........................................................................................ 175
Message de batterie faible ..................................................................................... 175
Remarques à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie ........................................ 175
Avertissements à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie ................................ 176
Remarques concernant la recharge de la batterie......................................... 176
Remarques à propos de la recharge avec raccordement
à un ordinateur ............................................................................................................177
Utilisation et recyclage consciencieux des batteries et des
chargeurs .......................................................................................................................177
Mise à jour du micrologiciel .................................................................... 178
Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente ....................... 179
Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo ..................................................... 182
Glossaire ...................................................................................................... 187
Accessoires en option............................................................................... 193
Index ............................................................................................................ 194
Chapitre 6
Connexion à des appareils externes
Affichage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD ........................................... 158
Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur ..................................................... 159
Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows ........................................ 159
Connexion de l’appareil photo en tant que disque amovible................... 159
Déconnexion de l’appareil photo (Windows XP) ........................................... 160
Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Mac .................................................. 160
Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur .................................... 162
Installation des programmes depuis le CD fourni ...................................... 162
Programmes disponibles lors de l’utilisation d’i-Launcher ........................ 162
Utilisation d’i-Launcher ........................................................................................ 163
Configuration requise pour Windows ................................................................ 163
Configuration requise pour Mac .......................................................................... 163
Ouverture d’i-Launcher ........................................................................................... 163
Téléchargement du firmware ................................................................................ 164
Téléchargement du programme PC Auto Backup ......................................... 164
Installation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ................................................. 164
Utilisation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ................................................... 164
Chapitre 7
Annexe
Messages d’erreur ..................................................................................... 166
Entretien de l’appareil photo .................................................................. 167
Nettoyage de l’appareil photo .......................................................................... 167
Objectif et écran de l’appareil photo .................................................................. 167
Capteur d’images ....................................................................................................... 167
Boîtier de l’appareil photo ...................................................................................... 167
13
Concepts de photographie
Prise en main de l’appareil photo
Tenez l’appareil photo et placez l’index sur la touche du déclencheur. Pour
des objectifs plus grands, soutenez l’appareil en plaçant la main gauche
sous l’objectif.
Postures pour les prises de vue
Pour stabiliser l’appareil photo et prendre une bonne photo, une posture
correcte est nécessaire. Même si vous tenez l’appareil photo correctement,
une mauvaise posture peut le faire bouger. Tenez-vous debout, bien droit
et restez immobile afin de stabiliser l’appareil photo. Afin de réduire les
mouvements du corps, retenez votre souffle lorsque vous effectuez une
prise de vue avec une vitesse d’obturation lente.
14
Concepts de photographie
Photographie en position debout
Composez votre prise de vue, tenez-vous debout, bien droit, les pieds
dans le prolongement de vos épaules, les coudes pointés vers le bas.
Photographie en position accroupie
Composez votre prise de vue, accroupissez-vous en plaçant un genou au
sol tout en vous tenant droit.
15
Concepts de photographie
Ouverture
L’ouverture fait partie des trois facteurs qui déterminent l’exposition.
L’intérieur de l’ouverture contient de fines lamelles de métal qui s’ouvrent
et se referment afin de laisser la lumière passer à travers l’ouverture et
pénétrer dans l’appareil photo. La taille de l’ouverture est liée à la quantité
de lumière : une ouverture plus grande laisse passer plus de lumière,
tandis qu’une ouverture plus petite laisse pénétrer moins de lumière.
Tailles d’ouverture
Ouverture minimum Ouverture moyenne Ouverture maximum
Ouverture réduite Ouverture large
La taille de l’ouverture est représentée par une valeur désignée par le
terme « nombre f ». Le nombre f se détermine par la longueur de focale
divisée par le diamètre de l’objectif. Par exemple, si un objectif avec
une longueur de focale de 50 mm a pour nombre f F2, le diamètre de
l’ouverture est de 25 mm. (50 mm/25 mm = F2) Plus le nombre f est faible,
plus la taille de l’ouverture est importante.
La taille de l’ouverture se définit par la valeur d’exposition (EV). Augmenter
la valeur d’exposition (+1 EV) signifie que la quantité de lumière double.
Baisser la valeur d’exposition (-1 EV) signifie que la quantité de lumière
est réduite de moitié. Vous pouvez également utiliser la fonction de
compensation de l’exposition afin d’effectuer un réglage de quantité de
lumière fin, en subdivisant les valeurs d’exposition par 1/2, 1/3 EV, et ainsi
de suite.
+1 EV
F1.4 F2 F2.8 F4 F5.6 F8
-1 EV
Niveaux de la valeur d’exposition
16
Concepts de photographie
Valeur d’ouverture et profondeur de champ
En contrôlant l’ouverture, vous pouvez rendre l’arrière plan d’une photo
plus flou ou plus net. Ceci est étroitement lié à la profondeur de champ
(DOF) qui peut être définie comme faible ou élevée.
Photo avec une profondeur de champ
élevée
Photo avec une profondeur de champ
faible
L’intérieur de l’ouverture contient plusieurs lamelles. Ces lamelles se déplacent
simultanément et contrôlent la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers le centre
de l’ouverture. Lors de prises de vues réalisées de nuit, le nombre de lamelles
joue sur l’aspect de la lumière. Pour un nombre donné de lamelles dans
l’ouverture, la lumière est divisée par le nombre de sections correspondant. Si le
nombre de lamelles est impair, le nombre de sections est double.
Par exemple, une ouverture disposant de 8 lamelles divise la lumière en
8 sections alors qu’une ouverture disposant de 7 lamelles la divise en
14 sections.
7 lamelles 8 lamelles
17
Concepts de photographie
Vitesse d’obturation
La vitesse d’obturation désigne l’intervalle de temps entre l’ouverture et la
fermeture de l’obturateur. Elle contrôle la quantité de lumière qui passe à
travers l’ouverture avant d’atteindre le capteur d’images.
Généralement, la vitesse d’obturation est réglable manuellement. La
mesure de la vitesse d’obturation est connue sous le nom de « Valeur
d’exposition » (EV), qui se caractérise par des intervalles de 1 s, 1/2 s, 1/4 s,
1/8 s, 1/15 s, 1/1 000 s, 1/2 000 s, et ainsi de suite.
Exposition
+1 EV
-1 EV
1 s 1/2 s 1/4 s 1/8 s 1/15 s 1/30 s
Vitesse d’obturation
Par conséquent, plus la vitesse d’obturation est élevée, moins la lumière
pénètre. De même, plus la vitesse d’obturation est faible, plus la lumière
pénètre.
Les photos représentées ci-dessous illustrent une vitesse d’obturation
lente laissant plus de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer dans l’objectif de
l’appareil photo. Cela engendre un effet de flou lié au mouvement des
objets. Par ailleurs, une vitesse d’obturation rapide accorde moins de
temps à la lumière pour pénétrer, ce qui tend à immobiliser un sujet en
mouvement sur la photo.
0,8 s 0,004 s
18
Concepts de photographie
Sensibilité ISO
L’exposition d’une image est déterminée par la sensibilité de l’appareil
photo. Cette sensibilité est basée sur des standards photographiques
internationaux, connus sous le nom de standards ISO. Sur les appareils
numériques, cette échelle de sensibilité est utilisée pour représenter la
sensibilité du mécanisme numérique qui capture l’image.
Lorsque le nombre double, la sensibilité ISO double également. Par
exemple, une sensibilité définie sur ISO 200 peut capturer des images
deux fois plus vite qu’une sensibilité définie sur ISO 100. Néanmoins, des
paramètres ISO élevés peuvent causer du « bruit », à savoir des petites
tâches, des points et autres phénomènes qui donnent à la photo une
apparence sale ou avec des parasites. En règle générale, il vaut mieux
utiliser une faible sensibilité ISO afin d’éviter la présence de bruit sur les
photos, sauf si vous effectuez une prise de vue dans un environnement
sombre ou de nuit.
Changements de la qualité et de la luminosité en fonction de la sensibilité ISO
Une faible sensibilité ISO signifie que l’appareil photo est moins sensible à
la lumière et que vous avez besoin de plus de lumière pour une exposition
optimale. Lorsque vous utilisez une faible sensibilité ISO, choisissez une
ouverture plus importante ou réduisez la vitesse d’obturation afin de
laisser plus de lumière pénétrer dans l’appareil photo. Par exemple, une
faible sensibilité ISO au cours d’une journée ensoleillée où la lumière est
abondante ne nécessite pas de vitesse d’obturation lente. Néanmoins,
dans un endroit sombre ou de nuit, une faible sensibilité ISO rendent les
photos floues. Il est donc recommandé d’augmenter la sensibilité ISO de
manière modérée.
Photo prise avec un trépied et une
sensibilité ISO élevée
Photo floue avec une faible sensibilité ISO
19
Concepts de photographie
Contrôle de l’exposition par le réglage de
l’ouverture, de la vitesse d’obturation et de
la sensibilité ISO
En photographie, les paramètres d’ouverture, de vitesse d’obturation et de
sensibilité ISO sont étroitement liés. Les paramètres d’ouverture contrôlent
et régulent la quantité de lumière qui pénètre dans l’appareil photo, alors
que la vitesse d’obturation détermine la durée au cours de laquelle la
lumière peut pénétrer. La sensibilité ISO correspond à la vitesse à laquelle
un appareil photo réagit à la lumière. Ces trois aspects sont désignés
globalement par le triangle d’exposition.
Un changement de la vitesse d’obturation, de la valeur d’ouverture ou de
la sensibilité ISO peut être compensé par un réglage des autres valeurs
pour maintenir la quantité de lumière. Néanmoins, les résultats varient en
fonction des paramètres utilisés. Par exemple, la vitesse d’obturation est
utile pour capturer des mouvements, l’ouverture permet de contrôler la
profondeur de champ et la sensibilité ISO le grain d’une photo.
Paramètres Résultats
Valeur
d’ouverture
Large ouverture
= plus de lumière
Ouverture étroite
= moins de lumière
Large = petite profondeur de
champ
Etroit = grande profondeur de
champ
Paramètres Résultats
Vitesse
d’obturation
Vitesse rapide
= moins de lumière
Vitesse lente
= plus de lumière
Rapide = image nette
Lente = image floue
Sensibilité ISO
Haute sensibilité
= plus de sensibilité à la
lumière
Basse sensibilité
= moins de sensibilité à
la lumière
Haute = plus de grain
Basse = moins de grain
20
Concepts de photographie
Corrélation entre la longueur de focale,
l’angle et la perspective
La longueur de focale, ou distance focale, exprimée en millimètres,
correspond à la distance séparant le milieu de l’objectif du foyer de mise
au point. Elle influe sur l’angle et la perspective des images prises. Une
longueur de focale courte génère un angle de vue étendu, ce qui permet
de photographier un plan large. Une longueur de focale longue génère un
angle de vue étroit, ce qui permet de photographier au téléobjectif.
Angle 9 mm Angle 27 mm
Profondeur de champ
Les plus belles photos de nature morte ou de portraits sont celles dont
l’arrière plan est flou et sur lesquelles le sujet ressort. En fonction des
zones mises au point, une photo peut être floue ou nette. Ceci est désigné
par « une profondeur de champ faible » ou « une profondeur de champ
élevée ».
La profondeur de champ est la zone mise au point autour du sujet. C’est
pourquoi, une faible profondeur de champ signifie que la zone mise au
point est étroite, tandis qu’une profondeur de champ élevée élargit la
zone mise au point.
Une photo avec une faible profondeur de champ, qui met le sujet en
évidence et dont le reste est flou, peut être obtenue en prenant une photo
à proximité du sujet ou en sélectionnant une faible valeur d’ouverture.
A l’opposé, une photo avec une profondeur de champ élevée et dont
chaque élément est nettement mis au point peut être obtenue en prenant
une photo en étant éloigné du sujet ou en sélectionnant une valeur
d’ouverture élevée.
Profondeur de champ réduite Profondeur de champ élevée
21
Concepts de photographie
Quels sont les éléments qui contrôlent les effets hors-mise au
point ?
La profondeur de champ dépend de la valeur d’ouverture
Plus l’ouverture est large (par définition, plus la valeur d’ouverture est
basse), plus la profondeur de champ est faible. Dans une situation où la
longueur de focale est égale, une faible valeur d’ouverture résulte en une
faible profondeur de champ sur une photo.
27 mm F3.5 27 mm F11
Profondeur de champ liée à la longueur de focale
Plus la longueur de focale est importante, plus la profondeur de champ est
faible.
Angle 9 mm
Angle 27 mm
22
Concepts de photographie
Profondeur de champ liée à la distance entre le sujet et
l’appareil photo
Plus la distance entre le sujet et l’appareil photo est courte, plus la
profondeur de champ est faible. C’est pourquoi, prendre une photo
rapprochée d’un sujet a pour conséquence une faible profondeur de
champ.
Photo prise en étant éloigné du sujet
Photo prise à proximité du sujet
Aperçu de la profondeur de champ
Afin d’obtenir un aperçu de l’aspect final de votre photo avant d’effectuer
la prise de vue, vous pouvez appuyer sur la touche de personnalisation.
L’appareil photo règle l’ouverture sur les paramètres prédéfinis et affiche
le résultat sur l’écran. Affectez la fonction Aperçu optique à la touche de
personnalisation (p. 151).
23
Concepts de photographie
Composition
La photographie est un art qui a pour raison d’être de capturer l’essence
même des merveilles du monde à l’aide d’un appareil photo. Néanmoins,
quand bien même le sujet présage d’une photo réussie, une mauvaise
composition ne peut en reproduire fidèlement l’aspect.
En matière de composition, il est très important de hiérarchiser les sujets.
En photographie, la composition signifie la disposition des éléments d’une
scène. En règle générale, une bonne composition doit obéir à la règle des
tiers.
Règle des tiers
La règle des tiers consiste à diviser l’image en un quadrillage de 3x3, formé
de rectangles de taille égale.
Pour composer des photos qui mettent le mieux en valeur le sujet, veillez
à ce que le sujet soit placé dans l’un des quatre coins du rectangle central.
L’utilisation de la règle des tiers permet de créer des photos avec une
composition équilibrée et saisissante. En voici quelques exemples.
24
Concepts de photographie
Photos avec deux sujets
Si votre sujet se trouve à l’un des coins de la photo, la composition semble
alors déséquilibrée. Vous pouvez équilibrer la photo en prenant un second
sujet placé à l’extrémité opposée.
Sujet 1
Sujet 2
Sujet 1
Sujet 2
Instable Stable
Le fait de centrer l’horizon sur une photo de paysage crée une impression
de déséquilibre. Equilibrez la photo en déplaçant l’horizon vers le haut ou
vers le bas.
Sujet 1
Sujet 2
Sujet 1
Sujet 2
Instable Stable
25
Concepts de photographie
Flash
La lumière est l’un des éléments les plus importants en photographie.
Il n’est, cependant, pas simple d’avoir la quantité de lumière suffisante
quel que soit le moment ou l’endroit. L’utilisation d’un flash vous permet
d’optimiser les paramètres de lumière et de créer différents effets.
Le flash, également appelé éclairage stroboscopique ou laser, permet de
créer un niveau d’exposition satisfaisant dans des conditions de faible
éclairage. Il est également utile dans des conditions de forte luminosité.
Par exemple, le flash peut être utilisé pour compenser l’exposition de
l’ombre d’un sujet ou pour saisir à la fois le sujet et l’arrière-plan en contre
jour.
Avant correction Après correction
Nombre guide du flash
Le numéro de modèle d’un flash indique la puissance du flash ; ainsi,
la quantité de lumière maximale créée est représentée par une valeur
appelée « nombre guide ». Plus le nombre est élevé, plus le flash est
puissant. Le nombre guide s’obtient en multipliant la distance entre le
flash et le sujet par la valeur d’ouverture, lorsque la sensibilité ISO est
définie sur 100.
Nombre guide = Distance flash-sujet X Valeur d’ouverture
Valeur d’ouverture = Nombre guide / Distance flash-sujet
Distance flash-sujet = Nombre guide / Valeur d’ouverture
Par conséquent, si vous connaissez le nombre guide d’un flash, vous
pouvez estimer la distance flash-sujet lorsque vous réglez le flash
manuellement. Par exemple, si un flash possède le nombre guide NG 20 et
est à 4 mètres de distance du sujet, la valeur d’ouverture optimale est de
F5.0.
Chapitre 1
Mon appareil photo
Découvrez les différents composants de l’appareil photo, les icônes affichées à l’écran, les différents
objectifs disponibles, les accessoires en option et les fonctions de base.
Mon appareil photo
27
Mise en route
Contenu du coffret
Sortez le téléphone de son coffret et vérifiez que tous les éléments suivants sont présents :
Appareil photo Adaptateur secteur / Câble USB Batterie rechargeable Dragonne
CD-ROM
(Mode d’emploi inclus)
DVD-ROM Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Guide de demarrage rapide Guide de référence rapide
• Les illustrations peuvent différer par rapport au produit fourni.
• Les éléments peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique.
• Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires en option auprès d’un revendeur ou d’un centre de service après-vente Samsung.
Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de problème consécutif à l’utilisation d’accessoires non autorisés. Pour en
savoir plus sur les accessoires, reportez-vous à la page 193.
Mon appareil photo
28
Présentation de l’appareil photo
N° Nom
1 Déclencheur
2 Touche Marche / Arrêt
3 Touche DIRECT LINK
Démarrez une fonction Wi-Fi prédéfinie (p. 30).
4 Cache du port du flash externe
5 Microphone
6 Repère d'installation de l'objectif
7 Antenne interne
* Eviter tout contact avec l’antenne interne lors de l’utilisation du réseau sans fil.
8 Touche de déverrouillage de l’objectif
9 Capteur d'images
* Ne touchez pas le capteur d’images.
10 Monture de l'objectif
11 Balise NFC
12 Voyant AF / Voyant du retardateur
13 Flash intégré
1 2 3 4 5
6
9
11 10 8
7
13
12
Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo
29
N° Nom
1 Haut-parleur
2 Anneau d'attache de la dragonne
3 Touche d’enregistrement vidéo
Démarrer un enregistrement vidéo.
4
Voyant d'état
Indiquer l’état de l’appareil photo.
• Clignotement : lors de l’enregistrement
d’une photo ou d’une vidéo, de l’envoi de
données vers un ordinateur, de la connexion
à un réseau local sans fil ou l’envoi d’une
photo.
• Fixe : en l’absence de transfert de
données ou lorsque la batterie est en
charge.
5 Touche f
Sélectionner un mode de Prise de vue.
6
Touche D
• En mode Prise de vue : modifier les
informations à l’écran.
• Dans d’autres cas : monter.
7
Touche F
• En mode Prise de vue : sélectionner un
mode AF.
• Dans d’autres cas : se déplacer vers la
droite.
8
Touche o
• Sur l’écran d’accueil : enregistrer les
options sélectionnées.
• En mode Prise de vue : sélectionner
manuellement une zone de mise au
point dans certains modes de prise de
vue.
N° Nom
9
Touche Supprimer / Personnaliser
• En mode Prise de vue : exécuter la
fonction assignée (p. 151).
• En mode Lecture : supprimer des
fichiers.
10
Touche I
• En mode Prise de vue : régler la vitesse
d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture,
la compensation d’exposition ou la
sensibilité ISO.
• En mode Lecture : afficher les
miniatures.
• Dans d’autres cas : descendre.
11
Touche Lecture
Activer le mode Lecture pour visualiser les
photos ou visionner des vidéos.
12
Touche C
• En mode Prise de vue : sélectionner la
méthode de prise de vue ou régler le
retardateur.
• Dans d’autres cas : se déplacer vers la
gauche.
13 Touche
Accéder aux options ou aux menus.
m
14
Affichage (tactile)
• Pour prendre un autoportrait en se
regardant dans l’écran, faire pivoter
l’écran vers le haut (p. 31).
• Appuyer sur l’écran pour sélectionner
un menu ou une option (p. 38).
3
2 1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
14 12 11 13
Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo
30
N° Nom
1 Douille pour trépied
2 Loquet de la batterie
3 Fente de carte mémoire
4
USB et port de déverrouillage du déclencheur
Brancher l’appareil photo sur un ordinateur, un téléviseur ou le port de déclenchement de
l’obturateur. Utiliser un câble de déclenchement de l’obturateur avec un trépied pour réduire le
bougé de l’appareil photo.
5 Port HDMI
6 Emplacement batterie
7 Cache batterie
Utilisation de la touche DIRECT LINK
La touche [DIRECT LINK] vous permet d’activer facilement la fonction Wi-Fi. Appuyez sur
[DIRECT LINK] pour revenir au mode précédent.
Configuration de la touche DIRECT LINK
Vous pouvez sélectionner une fonction Wi-Fi à exécuter au moment où vous appuyez sur la
touche [DIRECT LINK] (p. 151).
Pour définir une
option DIRECT
LINK
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ Attribution touches ĺDIRECT LINK
ĺ une option.
1
5 6 7
4 3
2
Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo
31
Utilisation de l’écran
Vous pouvez prendre un autoportrait en vous regardant dans l’écran en le
faisant pivoter vers le haut.
Utilisation du mode Autoportrait
Lorsque l’appareil photo est éteint et que vous avez activé l’option
Autoportrait (p. 152), basculer l’écran vers le haut allume l’appareil photo
qui passe en mode Autoportrait.
En mode Autoportrait, les fonctions de retardateur (3 secondes), OneTouch
Shot, détection des visages et beauté sont automatiquement
activées.
1 Faites pivoter l’écran vers le haut.
180˚
2 Appuyez sur .
3 Faites glisser le curseur ou appuyez sur les icônes +/- pour
régler la douceur et l’éclat du grain de peau.
4 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur Définir.
5 Appuyez sur le cadre de l’écran ou sur [Déclencheur].
• Après 3 secondes, l’appareil photo déverrouille automatiquement
le déclencheur.
• Lorsque l’appareil est éteint, la basculement de l’écran vers le haut allume
automatiquement l’appareil photo.
• Laissez l’écran fermé lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil photo.
• Faites pivoter l’écran en respectant scrupuleusement les angles autorisés. Le
non-respect de cette recommandation risque d’endommager l’appareil photo.
• Utilisez un trépied lorsque l’écran est incliné vers le haut et que vous ne
le tenez pas à la main. Si vous passez outre ces précautions, vous risquez
d’endommager votre appareil photo.
• Ne faites pas pivoter l’écran vers le haut lorsqu’un flash externe est monté
sur l’appareil photo. Si vous passez outre ces précautions, vous risquez
d’endommager votre appareil photo.
Mon appareil photo
32
Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire
Voici comment installer ou retirer la batterie et une carte mémoire en
option dans l’appareil photo.
1 Insérez le doigt dans la rainure et ouvrez le cache de la
batterie.
Faites attention à ne pas vous abîmer les ongles lorsque vous ouvrez le
cache de la batterie.
2 Insérez une carte mémoire dans la fente en orientant la puce
vers le haut.
• Insérez à fond la carte mémoire jusqu’à ce qu’elle se verrouille en
position.
3 Faites glisser le loquet de la batterie vers la gauche.
4 Insérez la batterie en orientant la puce vers la droite.
• Maintenez le cache de la batterie ouvert avec le doigt.
Mon appareil photo > Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire
33
5 Fermez le loquet de la batterie et faites-le glisser vers la droite.
6 Fermez le cache batterie.
7 Appuyez fermement sur le cache de la batterie afin de vous
assurer qu’il est bien fermé.
Mon appareil photo > Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire
34
Retrait de la batterie et de la carte mémoire
Batterie rechargeable
Loquet de la
batterie
Faites glisser le loquet de la batterie vers
la gauche pour libérer la batterie.
Carte mémoire
Appuyez doucement sur la carte
pour la faire sortir de l’appareil photo,
puis retirez-la entièrement de son
emplacement.
Utilisation de l’adaptateur de carte mémoire
Pour pouvoir lire des données sur un ordinateur ou par le biais d’un
lecteur de cartes, insérez la carte dans l’adaptateur approprié.
• Ne pliez pas ou ne tirez pas sur le loquet de la batterie. Vous risquez
d’endommager le loquet.
• Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire ou la batterie lorsque le voyant d’état de
l’appareil photo clignote. Vous risquez d’endommager les données stockées
sur la carte mémoire ou dans l’appareil photo.
Mon appareil photo
35
Mise en charge de la batterie et mise sous tension de l’appareil photo
Chargement de la batterie
Vous devez charger complètement la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil
photo pour la première fois. Branchez l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB
sur l’appareil photo, puis l’autre extrémité du câble USB sur un adaptateur
secteur.
Voyant d'état
• Voyant rouge allumé : en charge
• Voyant vert allumé : charge complète
• Voyant rouge clignotant : erreur de recharge
Utilisez uniquement l’adaptateur secteur et le câble USB fournis avec l’appareil
photo. Si vous utilisez un autre adaptateur secteur, la batterie de l’appareil photo
risque de ne pas se recharger ou de fonctionner correctement.
Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo
Pour allumer ou éteindre l’appareil photo, appuyez sur [ ].
• L’écran de configuration initiale apparaît lorsque vous allumez l’appareil
photo pour la première fois (p. 36).
Pour certains objectifs, lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo, l’objectif se
déplace automatiquement. N’appuyez pas ou ne forcez pas sur l’objectif, vous
risqueriez de l’abîmer.
Mon appareil photo
36
Configuration initiale
Lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo pour la première fois, l’écran de
configuration initiale s’affiche. La langue est réglée selon le pays ou la
région où l’appareil photo est vendu. Vous pouvez la changer pour celle de
votre choix. Vous pouvez également sélectionner un élément en appuyant
dessus à l’écran.
1 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Fuseau horaire, puis
appuyez sur [o].
2 Appuyez sur [D / I] pour sélectionner un fuseau
horaire, puis appuyez sur [o].
Retour Définir
Fuseau horaire
[GMT +00:00] Londres
[GMT -01:00] Cap Vert
[GMT -02:00] Açores
[GMT -03:00] Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo
[GMT -03:30] Terre-Neuve
3 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Configuration date/
heure, puis appuyez sur [o].
4 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour sélectionner un élément (Année/
Mois/Jour/Heure/Minute/Heure d’été).
5 Appuyez sur [D / I] pour définir une option, puis
appuyez sur [o].
Retour Définir
Année Mois Jour Heure Min Heure d'été
Configuration date/heure
• L’affichage peut différer en fonction de la langue sélectionnée.
6 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Type date, puis
appuyez sur [o].
7 Appuyez sur [D / I] pour sélectionner un format de
date, puis appuyez sur [o].
Retour Définir
Type date
AAAA/MM/JJ
MM/JJ/AAAA
JJ/MM/AAAA
Mon appareil photo > Configuration initiale
37
8 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Type d'heure, puis
appuyez sur [o].
9 Appuyez sur [D / I] pour sélectionner un format
d’heure, puis appuyez sur [o].
Retour Définir
Type d'heure
12 h
24 h
10 Appuyez sur [m] pour terminer la configuration.
Mon appareil photo
38
Sélection de fonctions (options)
Sélection à l’aide des touches
Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour vous déplacer, puis appuyez sur
[o] pour sélectionner une option.
Sélection à l’aide de l’écran tactile
N’utilisez pas d’objets pointus, comme des crayons ou des stylos, pour appuyer
sur l’écran. Vous risquez de l’endommager.
Faire glisser : maintenez une zone à
l’écran appuyée, puis faites glisser le
doigt pour la déplacer.
Appuyer : appuyez sur une icône
pour sélectionner un menu ou une
option.
Effleurer : faites glisser brièvement le
doigt sur l’écran.
Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options)
39
• Lorsque vous appuyez sur un élément à l’écran ou que vous le faites
glisser, cela peut entraîner des décolorations. Il ne s’agit pas d’un
dysfonctionnement, mais d’une caractéristique de l’écran tactile. N’appuyez
pas trop fort sur l’écran pour minimiser cet effet de décoloration.
• L’écran tactile peut ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous utilisez l’appareil
photo dans un environnement extrêmement humide.
• L’écran tactile peut ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous installez un film
protecteur ou tout autre accessoire sur l’écran.
• Selon l’angle de vue, la luminosité de l’écran peut parfois sembler insuffisante.
Réglez la luminosité ou l’angle de vue afin d’améliorer la luminosité.
Utilisation de l’option m
Appuyez sur [m] ou sur à l’écran, puis modifiez les options ou
les paramètres de prise de vue.
Ex. : définir le format photo en mode P
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Programme.
2 Appuyez sur [m] ou sur .
3 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour accéder à b, puis appuyez
sur [o].
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur b à l’écran.
4 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour accéder à Format photo, puis
appuyez sur [o].
• Vous pouvez également faire défiler la liste et appuyer sur une option.
AutoShare
Format photo
Qualité
ISO
Vitesse obturation minimum
Retour Sélectionner
Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options)
40
5 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner une option,
puis appuyez sur [o].
• Vous pouvez également faire défiler la liste et appuyer sur une
option.
• Appuyez sur [m] ou Retour pour revenir au menu précédent.
(3:2) (5472x3648)
(3:2) (3888x2592)
(3:2) (2976x1984)
(3:2) (1728x1152)
(16:9) (5472x3080)
Format photo
Retour Définir
6 Appuyez sur [m] ou Retour pour revenir au mode Prise de
vue.
Utilisation du panneau intelligent
Appuyez sur à l’écran pour accéder à certaines fonctions telles que
Exposition, ISO et Balance des blancs.
Ex. : régler la valeur d’exposition en mode P
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Programme.
2 Appuyez sur .
3 Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour accéder à l’option EV,
puis appuyez sur [o].
• Vous pouvez également sélectionner une option en appuyant
dessus.
4 Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour régler la valeur de
l’exposition, puis appuyez sur [o].
• Vous pouvez également faire glisser la molette sur l’écran pour
régler l’option.
EV : 0
Retour Régler
Vous pouvez également régler
certaines options en les faisant
glisser.
Mon appareil photo
41
Sélection d’un mode
Sélectionnez une variété de modes et de fonctions sur l’écran Mode.
Accès à l’écran Mode
En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [f]. Appuyez à
nouveau sur [f] pour revenir au mode précédent.
Automatique Intelligent
Priorité vitesse Manuel
Retour Définir
Programme Priorité
ouverture
Wi-Fi
Appuyez sur une icône pour sélectionner un mode ou une fonction. Vous
pouvez également appuyer sur [D/I/C/F] pour accéder à un
mode ou une fonction, puis appuyer sur [o] pour le/la sélectionner.
Description des modes
Mode Description
Automatique
Prendre une photo à l’aide d’un mode Scène sélectionné
automatiquement par l’appareil photo (p. 54).
Intelligent
Prendre une photo avec des options prédéfinies pour une
scène spécifique (p. 56).
Programme
Prenez une photo avec des paramètres réglés
manuellement, à l’exception de la vitesse d’obturation et de
la valeur d’ouverture (p. 59).
Priorité ouverture
Définir la valeur d’ouverture manuellement tandis que
l’appareil photo sélectionne automatiquement une vitesse
d’obturation appropriée (p. 61).
Priorité vitesse
Définir la vitesse d’obturation manuellement tandis que
l’appareil photo sélectionne automatiquement une valeur
d’ouverture appropriée (p. 62).
Manuel
Régler manuellement la valeur d’ouverture et la vitesse
d’obturation (p. 63).
Mon appareil photo > Sélection d’un mode
42
Mode Description
Wi-Fi
• MobileLink : envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à un
smartphone (p. 126).
• Remote Viewfinder : utiliser un smartphone comme
déclencheur distant de l’obturateur et afficher un aperçu
d’une image de votre appareil photo sur le smartphone
(p. 130).
• Group Share : envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à
plusieurs smartphones (p. 128).
• Baby Monitor : connecter l’appareil photo à un
smartphone pour surveiller un endroit (p. 132).
• Sauvegarde automatique : envoyer sur un ordinateur,
à l’aide de la fonction sans fil, les photos ou vidéos prises
avec l’appareil photo (p. 134).
• Courriel : envoyer par courriel des photos ou des vidéos
stockées sur l’appareil photo (p. 136).
• Réseaux sociaux et Cloud : publier vos photos ou vos
vidéos sur des sites Web de partage de fichiers (p. 140).
• Samsung Link : télécharger des photos vers le stockage
en ligne Samsung Link ou visionner des fichiers sur
d’autres appareils compatibles Samsung Link (p. 142).
Mon appareil photo
43
Icônes affichées à l’écran
Prise de photos
1
2
3
1. Informations de prise de vue
Icône Description
Mode de prise de vue
Date du jour
Heure du moment
Verrouillage automatique de
l’exposition (p. 98)
Nombre de photos disponibles
Carte mémoire insérée
Carte mémoire non insérée*
• : recharge complète
• : recharge partielle
• (Rouge) : vide (recharger la
batterie)
• : recharge en cours
Icône Description
Cadre de mise au point
automatique
Zone de mesure de l’exposition
sélective
Bougé de l’appareil photo
Indicateur de niveau (p. 44)
Histogramme (p. 150)
Mise au point
Vitesse d’obturation
Valeur d’ouverture
Valeur de réglage de l’exposition
Sensibilité ISO (p. 71)
* Les photos prises sans insérer de carte mémoire ne peuvent
pas être imprimées ou transférées sur une carte mémoire ou
sur un ordinateur.
2. Options de prise de vue
Icône Description
Format photo
Mode de sélection
Flash (p. 90)
Réglage de l’intensité du flash
Mesure de l’exposition (p. 92)
Mode AF (p. 75)
Zone de mise au point
Icône Description
Détection des visages
Balance des blancs (p. 72)
Réglage fin de la balance des blancs
Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS)
(p. 84)
Fichier RAW
Plage dynamique (p. 95)
3. Options de prise de vue (tactile)
Icône Description
Modifier le mode Intelligent**
Connexion mobile***
Options de mise au point tactile
Options de prise de vue
Panneau intelligent
** Cette icône s’affiche lorsque vous sélectionnez le mode
Intelligent.
*** Vous pouvez sélectionner directement une fonction Wi-Fi
qui se connecte à un smartphone.
Les icônes varient en fonction du mode
sélectionné ou des options choisies.
En mode Prise de vue
Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran
44
2. Options de prise de vue
Icône Description
Taille de la vidéo
Mode AF (p. 75)
Mesure de l’exposition (p. 92)
Balance des blancs (p. 72)
Réglage fin de la balance des blancs
Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS)
(p. 84)
Fondu (p. 101)
Enregistrement vocal désactivé (p. 101)
Les icônes varient en fonction du mode
sélectionné ou des options choisies.
A propos de l’indicateur de niveau
L’indicateur de niveau vous permet d’aligner
l’appareil photo par rapport aux lignes
horizontale et verticale à l’écran. Si l’indicateur
de niveau n’est pas droit, réglez-le à l’aide de la
fonction Calibrage horizontal (p. 153).
Vertical
Horizontal
Ÿ Aligné sur l’horizon Ÿ Non aligné sur l’horizon
Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser l’indicateur de
niveau lors d’une prise de vue en orientation
portrait.
Enregistrement de vidéos
1
2
1. Informations de prise de vue
Icône Description
Mode de prise de vue
Annuler la mise au point tactile.
(tactile)
Durée d’enregistrement actuelle /
Durée d’enregistrement
disponible
Carte mémoire insérée
• : recharge complète
• : recharge partielle
• (Rouge) : vide (recharger la
batterie)
• : recharge en cours
Valeur d’exposition
Sensibilité ISO (p. 71)
Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran
45
En mode Lecture
Affichage de photos
Informations
Mode
F No
Déclencheur
ISO
Mesure de l'exposition
Flash
Distance focale
Balance des blancs
EV
Format photo
Date
Icône Description
Fichier en cours / Nombre total de
fichiers
Numéro de dossier-Numéro de fichier
Fichier RAW
Fichier protégé
Photos prises en continu (elles
apparaissent sous forme de dossier)
(p. 104)
Menu Lecture / Edition / Paramétrage
(tactile)
Partager un fichier. (tactile)
Afficher les images sous forme de
miniatures. (tactile)
1
2
3
N° Description
1 Photo prise
2 Histogramme RGB (p. 150)
3
Mode Prise de vue, Mesure de
l’exposition, Flash, Balance des blancs,
Valeur d’ouverture, Vitesse d’obturation,
ISO, Distance focale, Valeur d’exposition,
Format photo, Date
Lecture de vidéos
Arrêter
Icône Description
Fichier en cours / Nombre total de fichiers
Vitesse de lecture
Numéro de dossier-Numéro de fichier
Multi-mouvements
Temps de lecture en cours
Durée de la vidéo
Afficher le fichier précédent / Retour
rapide. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur
l’icône de retour rapide, la vitesse de retour
change selon l’ordre suivant : 2X, 4X, 8X.)
Mettre une pause ou reprendre la
lecture.
Afficher le fichier suivant / Avance rapide.
(Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur l’icône
d’avance rapide, la vitesse d’avance
change selon l’ordre suivant : 2X, 4X, 8X.)
Régler le volume ou couper le son.
Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran
46
Modification des informations affichées
Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur [
D] pour changer de type
d’affichage.
Mode Type d’affichage
Prise de
vue
• Informations de base sur la prise de vue (Mode Prise de vue,
Vitesse d’obturation, Valeur d’ouverture, Valeur d’exposition,
Sensibilité ISO, etc.)
• Informations de base sur la prise de vue + Touches d’options
de prise de vue (MENU, Fn, Connexion mobile, Mise au point
tactile) + Indicateur de niveau
• Informations de base sur la prise de vue + Touches d’options de
prise de vue + Informations sur les options de la prise de vue
en cours (Format photo, Mode de sélection, Flash, Mesure de
l’exposition, Mode AF, etc.)
• Informations de base sur la prise de vue + Touches d’options de
prise de vue + Informations sur les options de la prise de vue en
cours + Histogramme + Date et heure
Lecture
• Informations de base
• Afficher toutes les informations sur le fichier en cours.
• Afficher toutes les informations sur la prise de vue, y compris
l’histogramme RGB.
• Aucune information (lorsque vous êtes connecté à un HDTV ou
un moniteur compatible HDMI)
Mon appareil photo
47
Objectifs
Vous pouvez acheter des objectifs NX-M en option.
Découvrez les fonctions de chaque objectif et choisissez-en un selon vos
besoins et vos préférences.
Présentation de l’objectif
Objectif SAMSUNG NX-M 9 mm F3.5 ED (exemple)
3
1 2
N° Description
1 Objectif
2 Repère d'installation de l'objectif
3 Contacts de l’objectif
Mon appareil photo > Objectifs
48
Objectif SAMSUNG NX-M 9-27 mm F3.5-5.6 ED OIS (exemple)
5
3
1
2
4
N° Description
1 Index de verrouillage du zoom
2 Objectif
3 Bague de zoom
4 Repère d'installation de l'objectif
5 Contacts de l’objectif
Verrouillage et déverrouillage de l’objectif
Pour verrouiller l’objectif, faites pivoter la bague de zoom et tirez
doucement dessus pour l’écarter l’appareil photo. Alignez les repères de
verrouillage du zoom sur LOCK, comme indiqué dans l’illustration.
Pour déverrouiller l’objectif, tournez la bague de zoom comme indiqué
dans l’illustration.
Il est impossible de prendre une photo si l’objectif est verrouillé.
Mon appareil photo > Objectifs
49
Marquages de l’objectif
Découvrez ce que les numéros inscrits sur l’objectif signifient.
Objectif SAMSUNG NX-M 9-27 mm F3.5-5.6 ED OIS (exemple)
3 4 5
1 2
2
N° Description
1
Valeur d’ouverture
Gamme de valeurs d’ouverture prises en charge. Par exemple,
1:3.5 – 5.6 correspond à une gamme de valeurs maximales
d’ouverture allant de 3,5 à 5,6.
2
Longueur de focale
Distance entre le centre de l’objectif et son point focal (en
millimètres). Cette valeur est exprimée sous forme de plage
(longueur minimum à maximum).
Des longueurs de focale plus importantes réduisent les angles de
vue et agrandissent le sujet. Des longueurs de focale moins élevées
agrandissent les angles de vue.
3
ED
ED signifie dispersion extra faible (Extra-low Dispersion). Un verre à
très faible dispersion assure une excellente correction de l’aberration
chromatique (déformation qui se produit lorsqu’un objectif ne
parvient pas à mettre au point toutes les couleurs vers le même
point de convergence).
4
OIS (p. 84)
Stabilisation optique de l’image. Les objectifs bénéficiant de cette
fonction détectent les mouvements internes de l’appareil photo et
les compensent efficacement.
5
Ø
Diamètre de l’objectif. Assurez-vous que le diamètre des filtres que
vous fixez sur l’objectif est égal au diamètre de ce dernier.
Mon appareil photo
50
Accessoires
Utilisez des accessoires comme un flash externe qui peut vous fournir une
quantité de lumière constante. Vous pouvez également utiliser la bague
d’adaptation pour fixer les objectifs NX.
Pour obtenir davantage d’informations sur les accessoires en option,
consultez le mode d’emploi de ceux-ci.
• Les illustrations peuvent différer par rapport au produit fourni.
• Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires agréés Samsung auprès d’un revendeur
ou d’un centre de service après-ventes Samsung. Samsung décline toute
responsabilité en cas de dommages causés par l’utilisation d’accessoires
fournis par d’autres fabricants.
Présentation du flash externe
SEF7A (exemple) (en option)
1
4
3
2
N° Description
1 Cadran de fixation du flash
2 Lampe
3 Connexion flash
4 Port du flash
Mon appareil photo > Accessoires
51
Fixation du flash externe
1 Ouvrez le cache du port du flash externe.
2 Montez le flash en l’insérant fermement dans le port du flash
externe.
• Maintenez le cache du port du flash externe ouvert avec le doigt.
3 Sécurisez le flash en tournant le cadran de fixation du flash
dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre.
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction du mode de prise de vue
sélectionné.
• Un court laps de temps se déroule entre les deux déclenchements du flash.
Ne bougez pas tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde fois.
• Ne forcez pas sur le flash pour le retirer. Vous risquez d’endommager le flash
et l’appareil photo.
• Utilisez uniquement des flashs homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de
flashs incompatibles peut endommager l’appareil photo.
Mon appareil photo > Accessoires
52
Montage de la bague d’adaptation
1 Retirez les caches de la bague d’adaptation et le cache du
boîtier.
2 Alignez les repères (blancs) sur l’appareil photo et la bague
d’adaptation. Tournez ensuite la bague d’adaptation comme
indiqué dans l’illustration jusqu’au déclic.
Disposition de la bague d’adaptation
Bague d’adaptation Samsung NX (exemple) (en option)
1
2
4
3
N° Description
1 Touche de déverrouillage de l’objectif
2 Repère de la monture d’objectif NX-M
3 Repère de la monture d’objectif NX
4 Douille pour trépied
Mon appareil photo > Accessoires
53
2 Maintenez enfoncée la touche de déverrouillage de l’objectif
sur l’appareil photo. Faites ensuite tourner l’objectif comme
indiqué dans l’illustration.
• Le flash n’est pas disponible lors de l’utilisation de la bague d’adaptation.
• L’option Continue dans le mode Prise de vue n’est pas disponible lors de
l’utilisation de la bague d’adaptation.
• Des lignes horizontales peuvent apparaître sur la photo lorsque vous utilisez
la bague d’adaptation et que le sujet est exposé à une source lumineuse
fluorescente ou une lampe au mercure. Pour résoudre ce problème,
sélectionnez b ĺ Réduction de l'effet de bandes ĺ Activé. Cette
fonction peut assombrir les bords du cadre.
3 Alignez les repères (rouges) sur l’objectif NX et la bague
d’adaptation. Tournez ensuite l’objectif comme indiqué dans
l’illustration jusqu’au déclic.
Retrait de la bague d’adaptation
1 Maintenez enfoncée la touche de déverrouillage de l’objectif
sur la bague d’adaptation. Faites ensuite tourner l’objectif
comme indiqué dans l’illustration.
Mon appareil photo
54
Modes de prise de vue
Deux modes de prise de vue simples, Automatique et Intelligent, vous
permettent de réaliser des prises de vue à l’aide de nombreux paramètres
automatiques. Des modes supplémentaires vous offrent de plus grandes
possibilités de personnalisation des paramètres.
Mode Automatique
En mode Automatique, l’appareil photo reconnaît l’environnement dans
lequel les prises de vue sont effectuées et règle automatiquement les
facteurs liés à l’exposition, comme par exemple la vitesse d’obturation, la
valeur d’ouverture, la mesure de l’exposition, la balance des blancs et la
compensation de l’exposition. L’appareil photo contrôlant la plupart de
ces fonctions, certaines fonctions de prise de vue sont limitées. Ce mode
est utile pour prendre rapidement des photos en effectuant le moins de
réglages possible.
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Automatique.
2 Cadrez le sujet.
3 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course.
• L’appareil photo sélectionne une scène. L’icône correspondante
apparaît à l’écran.
A
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
55
Scènes reconnaissables
Icône Description
Paysages
Scènes sur fonds blancs éclatants
Paysages de nuit
Portraits de nuit
Paysages à contre-jour
Portraits à contre-jour
Portraits
Plans rapprochés d’objets
Plans rapprochés de texte
Couchers de soleil
Intérieurs, endroits obscurs
Eclairage partiel
Plans rapprochés avec éclairage au spot
Portraits avec éclairage au spot
Icône Description
Ciel bleu
Zones boisées (couleur dominante verte)
Plans rapprochés de sujets colorés
Appareil photo stabilisé sur un trépied et sujet relativement
immobile pendant une durée donnée. (en cas de prise de vue dans
un endroit sombre)
Sujets en mouvement
Feux d’artifice (lors de l’utilisation d’un trépied)
4 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo.
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo détecte des scènes différentes ou des
sujets identiques, en fonction des conditions de prise de vue, telles que le
bougé de l’appareil photo, l’éclairage et la distance à laquelle se trouve le
sujet.
• Si l’appareil photo ne reconnaît pas de mode scénique, il utilise les
paramètres par défaut du mode Automatique.
• Même lorsqu’un visage est détecté, il est possible que l’appareil photo ne
sélectionne pas un mode Portrait, selon la position du sujet ou de l’éclairage.
• Même si vous utilisez un trépied, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne détecte
pas le mode Trépied ( ) si le sujet est en mouvement.
• La batterie de l’appareil photo se décharge plus rapidement, car l’appareil
change souvent les paramètres afin de capturer les scènes adéquates.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
56
Mode intelligent
En mode Intelligent, vous pouvez prendre une photo avec des options
prédéfinies pour une scène donnée.
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Intelligent.
2 Sélectionnez une scène.
Option Description
Beauté Réaliser un portrait à l’aide de diverses options qui
permettent d’adoucir et d’éclairer le grain de peau.
Meilleure
photo
Prendre plusieurs clichés et remplacer les visages pour
obtenir la meilleure photo possible.
Mode Continu Prendre une série de photos de sujets qui se déplacent.
Prise Enfants Prendre une photo avec un son amusant pour attirer
l’attention des enfants.
Paysage Réaliser des clichés de nature morte ou de paysage.
Macro Prendre en photo des petits sujets ou réaliser des gros
plans.
Nature morte Prendre en photo des aliments dans des tons plus
colorés.
Fêtes et
intérieurs Prendre des photos d’intérieur nettes.
Action Prendre en photo des sujets se déplaçant à grande
vitesse.
Ton riche Prendre une photo avec des couleurs dynamiques.
Panorama Prendre en photo une scène panoramique en un seul
cliché.
Cascade Prendre en photo des scènes avec des cascades.
Option Description
Silhouette Prendre en photo des sujets sous forme d’ombres
foncées se détachant sur un fond clair.
Coucher de
soleil
Prendre des photos de couchers du soleil avec des tons
rouges et jaunes naturels.
Nuit Prendre une photo d’une plus grande netteté et avec
un bruit réduit, dans des conditions d’éclairage faible.
Feux d'artifice Prendre en photo des scènes avec des feux d’artifice.
Lumière Prendre en photo des scènes avec des traînées
lumineuses dans des conditions de faible luminosité.
3 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour effectuer la
prise de vue.
Utilisation du mode Beauté
En mode Beauté, diverses options vous permettent d’adoucir et d’éclairer
le grain de peau avant de réaliser un portrait.
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Intelligent ĺ Beauté.
2 Appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Retouche des visages.
3 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner une option.
4 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’option.
• Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/-
pour régler les options.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
57
5 Appuyez sur [o].
6 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le
[Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point.
7 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo.
Utilisation du mode Meilleure photo
En mode Meilleure photo, vous pouvez prendre plusieurs clichés et
remplacer les visages pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible. Vous avez
alors la possibilité de choisir, pour chacun des individus d’une photo de
groupe, le meilleur cliché.
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Intelligent ĺ Meilleure
photo.
2 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le
[Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point.
3 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo.
• L’appareil photo prend 5 photos consécutives.
• La première est définie comme arrière-plan.
• Les visages sont automatiquement détectés après la mise au point
par l’appareil photo.
4 Appuyez sur un visage pour le remplacer.
Retour Enregistrer
5 Sélectionnez la meilleure pose pour les 5 visages photographiés.
• Répétez les étapes 4 et 5 pour remplacer le reste des visages de la
photo.
• L’icône apparaît sur l’image recommandée par l’appareil photo.
6 Appuyez sur [o] pour enregistrer la photo.
• Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil photo.
• La résolution photo est définie sur 5.9M ou à une valeur inférieure.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
58
Prise de photos panoramiques
En mode Panorama, vous pouvez prendre une large scène panoramique
sur une seule photo. Le mode Panorama permet de prendre une série de
photos puis de les combiner pour créer une image panoramique.
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Intelligent ĺ Panorama.
2 Maintenez le [Déclencheur] enfoncé, puis déplacez lentement
l’appareil photo dans la direction souhaitée.
• Une flèche indiquant la direction du mouvement apparaît et
l’intégralité de l’image prise est affichée dans le champ d’aperçu.
• Une fois les scènes alignées, l’appareil photo prend alors le cliché
suivant automatiquement.
3 Une fois terminé, relâchez le [Déclencheur].
• L’appareil photo enregistre automatiquement les photos en une
seule.
• Si vous relâchez le [Déclencheur] au cours de la prise de vue, la vue
panoramique s’interrompt et les photos prises sont enregistrées.
• La résolution varie en fonction de la photo panoramique que vous avez prise.
• En mode Panorama, certaines options de prise de vue ne sont pas
disponibles.
• L’appareil photo peut cesser de photographier du fait de la composition de la
prise de vue ou du déplacement du sujet.
• En mode Panorama, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne prenne pas l’intégralité
de la dernière scène si vous arrêtez le déplacement de l’objectif pour
améliorer la qualité de la photo. Pour prendre une scène entière, déplacez
l’appareil photo légèrement au-delà du point final.
• Pour optimiser les résultats lors de la prise de photos panoramiques, évitez :
- de déplacer l’appareil photo trop rapidement ou trop lentement ;
- d’interrompre le déplacement de l’appareil photo avant le cliché suivant ;
- de déplacer l’appareil photo à une vitesse irrégulière ;
- de secouer l’appareil photo ;
- d’effectuer la prise de vue dans un endroit sombre ;
- de prendre en photo des sujets en mouvement placés trop près de
l’objectif ;
- les conditions de prise de vue, où la luminosité et la couleur de la lumière,
ne cessent de changer.
• Les photos réalisées sont automatiquement sauvegardées et la prise de vue
est interrompue dans les circonstances suivantes :
- si vous changez de direction en pleine prise de vue ;
- si vous bougez l’appareil photo trop rapidement ;
- si vous ne bougez pas l’appareil photo.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
59
Mode Programme
L’appareil photo règle automatiquement la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur
d’ouverture afin d’atteindre une valeur d’exposition optimale.
Ce mode est pratique lorsque vous souhaitez réaliser des prises de vue
avec une exposition constante tout en ayant la possibilité de régler
d’autres paramètres.
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Programme.
2 Définissez les options de votre choix.
3 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la
photo.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
60
Changement de programme
La fonction Changement de programme vous permet de régler la vitesse
d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture tout en conservant la même valeur
d’exposition sur l’appareil photo. Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la
vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture, puis appuyez sur [C/F] pour
régler la valeur d’ouverture. La vitesse d’obturation change en fonction de
la valeur d’ouverture.
Vitesse obturation minimum
Réglez la vitesse d’obturation afin qu’elle ne soit pas plus lente que la
vitesse sélectionnée. Toutefois, si la valeur d’exposition optimale ne peut
être atteinte, car la sensibilité ISO est égale à la valeur ISO maximale définie
par l’option Plage ISO auto, la vitesse d’obturation doit être plus lente que
la vitesse d’obturation minimum sélectionnée.
Pour définir une
vitesse d’obturation
minimum
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Vitesse obturation minimum ĺ une option.
• Cette fonction est disponible uniquement si la sensibilité ISO est réglée sur
Automatique.
• Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode Programme ou Priorité
ouverture.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
61
Mode Priorité ouverture
En mode Priorité ouverture, l’appareil photo calcule automatiquement la
vitesse d’obturation en fonction de la valeur d’ouverture choisie.
Vous pouvez ajuster la profondeur de champ (DOF) en modifiant la valeur
d’ouverture. Ce mode est utile pour prendre des portraits ou des photos de
fleurs ou de paysages.
Profondeur de champ élevée Profondeur de champ réduite
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Priorité ouverture.
2 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la valeur d’ouverture.
3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler la valeur d’ouverture.
4 Définissez les options de votre choix.
5 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la
photo.
• En cas de faible luminosité, il peut s’avérer nécessaire d’augmenter la
sensibilité ISO afin d’éviter de prendre des photos floues.
• Pour régler la vitesse d’obturation minimum, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez
sur [m] ĺb ĺ Vitesse obturation minimum ĺ une option.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur la valeur d’ouverture à l’écran pour la
régler.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
62
Mode Priorité Vitesse
En mode Priorité Vitesse, l’appareil photo règle automatiquement la valeur
d’ouverture en fonction de la vitesse d’obturation choisie. Ce mode est
utile pour prendre des photos de sujets en mouvement ou pour créer des
effets de vitesse sur une photo.
Par exemple, définissez la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur supérieure
à 1/500 s afin d’immobiliser le sujet sur l’image. Pour rendre le sujet flou,
réglez la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur inférieure à 1/30 s.
Vitesse d’obturation lente Vitesse d’obturation rapide
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Priorité vitesse.
2 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la priorité vitesse.
3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour sélectionner la priorité vitesse.
4 Définissez les options de votre choix.
5 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la
photo.
• Afin de compenser le manque de lumière causé par des vitesses d’obturation
rapides, augmentez l’ouverture pour permettre à plus de lumière d’entrer. Si
vos photos sont toujours trop sombres, augmentez la valeur ISO.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur la vitesse d’obturation à l’écran pour la
régler.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
63
Mode Manuel
Le mode Manuel vous permet d’ajuster la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur
d’ouverture manuellement. Dans ce mode, vous pouvez entièrement
contrôler l’exposition de vos photos.
Ce mode est utile dans des environnements de prise de vue
professionnels, tel qu’un studio, ou lorsqu’il est nécessaire d’affiner
les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Le mode Manuel est également
recommandé pour les prises de vue de nuit ou les feux d’artifice.
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Manuel.
2 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la valeur d’ouverture ou
la priorité vitesse.
3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler la valeur d’ouverture ou la
priorité vitesse.
4 Définissez les options de votre choix.
5 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la
photo.
Vous pouvez également appuyer sur la valeur d’ouverture ou la vitesse
d’obturation à l’écran pour la régler.
Utilisation du mode d’exposition
Lorsque vous réglez la valeur d’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation,
l’exposition change en fonction des paramètres et l’affichage peut
s’assombrir. Lorsque cette fonction est activée, la luminosité de l’écran est
constante quels que soient les paramètres choisis, pour vous permettre de
mieux cadrer la prise de vue.
Pour utiliser le
mode d’exposition
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Mode
d'exposition ĺ une option.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
64
Utilisation de la fonction Bulb
Utilisez la fonction Bulb pour réaliser des prises de vue nocturnes ou
pour photographier des ciels étoilés. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le
[Déclencheur], l’obturateur reste ouvert de façon à vous permettre de
créer des effets de lumière animée.
Pour utiliser un
flash de type bulb
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner
la priorité vitesse ĺ Appuyez sur [C] de façon continue
pour régler la priorité vitesse sur Bulb ĺMaintenez le
[Déclencheur] enfoncé pendant la durée souhaitée.
• Si vous réglez une valeur ISO élevée ou si vous laissez l’obturateur ouvert
pendant longtemps, du bruit plus important risque d’apparaître sur l’image.
• Les options de prise de vue, le flash et la fonction Déclenchement par
sélection ne peuvent pas être utilisés avec la fonction Bulb.
• La fonction Bulb est disponible uniquement en mode Manuel.
• Utilisez un trépied et le déclenchement de l’obturateur pour stabiliser
l’appareil photo.
• Plus l’obturateur reste ouvert, plus l’enregistrement d’une photo est long.
N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque l’enregistrement d’une photo est en
cours.
• Si vous utilisez cette fonction pendant une durée prolongée, veillez à ce que
la batterie soit complètement rechargée.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
65
• Le format H.264 (MPEG-4 part10 / AVC) est l’un des derniers formats vidéo
mis au point par les organismes internationaux de normalisation ISO-IEC et
ITU-T et disponible depuis 2003. Sachant que ce format utilise un taux de
compression élevé, davantage de données peuvent être enregistrées dans un
espace mémoire plus restreint.
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo enregistre le son du stabilisateur d’image
si vous avez activé cette option ou bien lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo.
• Si vous retirez l’objectif de l’appareil photo lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo,
l’enregistrement est alors interrompu. Ne changez pas d’objectif lorsque vous
réalisez une vidéo.
• Si vous modifiez brusquement l’angle de prise de vue lorsque vous réalisez
une vidéo, il est possible que l’appareil photo ne puisse pas enregistrer les
images de façon précise. Utilisez un trépied pour réduire les mouvements de
l’appareil photo.
• L’appareil photo prend uniquement en charge la fonction Mise au point
multiple lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser
d’autres fonctions de réglage de la zone de mise au point.
• Lorsque la taille du fichier vidéo est supérieure à 4 Go, l’appareil photo
interrompt automatiquement l’enregistrement même si la durée maximale
d’enregistrement (29 minutes et 59 secondes) n’est pas atteinte.
• Si vous utilisez une carte mémoire à vitesse d’écriture lente, il est possible que
l’enregistrement de la vidéo en cours s’interrompe, car la carte ne parvient
pas à traiter un débit de données trop élevé. Si cela se produit, remplacez
la carte utilisée par une autre carte à vitesse d’écriture plus rapide, ou bien
réduisez la résolution de l’image (par exemple, de 1280X720 à 640X480).
• Utilisez toujours l’appareil photo pour formater une carte mémoire. Si vous
formatez les fichiers sur un autre appareil photo ou sur un ordinateur, cela
peut affecter la capacité d’enregistrement de la carte ou bien causer la perte
de fichiers.
• Lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo avec la même sensibilité ISO, l’écran
peut être plus sombre que lors de la prise d’une photo. Réglez la sensibilité
ISO.
• Lorsque vous enregistrez une vidéo en mode Programme, Priorité ouverture,
ou Priorité vitesse, le paramètre ISO est automatiquement défini sur
Automatique.
Enregistrement d’une vidéo
En mode Prise de vue, vous pouvez enregistrer des vidéos Full HD
(1920X1080) en appuyant sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo). L’appareil
photo vous permet de réaliser des vidéos d’une durée de 29 minutes et
59 secondes maximum, à 30 ips, et enregistre les fichiers au format MP4
(H.264). Le son est enregistré via le microphone de l’appareil photo.
Sélectionnez Fondu pour appliquer un fondu entrant ou sortant à la
scène. Vous pouvez également sélectionner l’option Voix ou toute autre
option permettant de paramétrer l’enregistrement (p. 101).
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez un mode Prise de vue.
• Il est possible que cette fonction soit inopérante dans certains modes.
2 Définissez les options de votre choix.
3 Appuyez sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo) pour lancer
l’enregistrement.
• L’appareil photo maintient la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur
d’ouverture définies avant la prise de vue.
4 Appuyez à nouveau sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo)
pour l’arrêter.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur le [Déclencheur] pour arrêter
l’enregistrement.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
66
Fonctions disponibles en mode Prise de vue
Pour obtenir plus d’informations à propos des fonctions de prise de vue, reportez-vous à la section 2.
Fonction Automatique Intelligent Programme Priorité ouverture Priorité vitesse Manuel
Retouche des visages (p. 56) -O- - - -
Format photo (p. 69) OOOOOO
Qualité (p. 70) - OOOOO
ISO (p. 71) - - OOOO
Balance des blancs (p. 72) - - OOOO
Assistant photo (p. 74) - - OOOO
Filtre intelligent (p. 96) - - OOOO
Mode AF (p. 75) - OOOOO
Zone AF (p. 77) - OOOOO
Détection des visages (p. 79) - - OOOO
Mise au point tactile (p. 81) OOOOOO
Aide mise au point manuelle (p. 83) OOOOOO
Lien AE à AF (p. 94) - - OOOO
Mode d'exposition (p. 63) - - OOOO
O : vous pouvez sélectionner les options de la fonction. (Les options disponibles varient selon le mode Prise de vue.)
- : la fonction est réglée sur une certaine option par défaut ou la fonction n’est pas disponible.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
67
Fonction Automatique Intelligent Programme Priorité ouverture Priorité vitesse Manuel
OIS (anti flou de bougé) (p. 84) OOOOOO
Prise de vue (Continue/Mode Rafale/
Retardateur/Bracketing) (p. 85) OOOOOO
Mesure de l'exposition (p. 92) - - OOOO
Plage dynamique (p. 95) - - OOOO
Flash (p. 90) OOOOOO
Compensation de l'exposition (p. 97) - - OOO -
Verrouillage de l’exposition (p. 98) - - OOO -
O : vous pouvez sélectionner les options de la fonction. (Les options disponibles varient selon le mode Prise de vue.)
- : la fonction est réglée sur une certaine option par défaut ou la fonction n’est pas disponible.
Chapitre 2
Fonctions de prise de vue
Découvrez les fonctions que vous pouvez définir en mode Prise de vue.
En utilisant les fonctions de prise de vue, vous pouvez personnaliser encore plus vos photos et vos vidéos.
Fonctions de prise de vue
69
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Format photo
Sélectionner une résolution plus élevée permet d’augmenter le nombre de
pixels des photos ou des vidéos afin de pouvoir les imprimer sur du papier
grand format ou de les visionner sur un grand écran. Si vous utilisez une
résolution élevée, la taille du fichier augmente également. Pour afficher
des photos dans un cadre numérique ou en télécharger vers le web,
sélectionnez une basse résolution.
Pour régler la taille En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Format
photo ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Taille Recommandé pour
(3:2) 5472x3648* Impression sur papier A1.
(3:2) 3888x2592 Impression sur papier A2.
(3:2) 2976x1984 Impression sur papier A3.
(3:2) 1728x1152 Impression sur papier A5.
(16:9) 5472x3080 Impression sur papier A1 ou affichage sur
un téléviseur HD.
(16:9) 3712x2088 Impression sur papier A3 ou affichage sur
un téléviseur HD.
(16:9) 2944x1656 Impression sur papier A4 ou affichage sur
un téléviseur HD.
(16:9) 1920x1080 Impression sur papier A5 ou affichage sur
un téléviseur HD.
(1:1) 3648x3648 Impression d’une photo carrée sur du
papier au format A1.
(1:1) 2640x2640 Impression d’une photo carrée sur du
papier au format A3.
(1:1) 2000x2000 Impression d’une photo carrée sur du
papier au format A4.
(1:1) 1024x1024 Pièce jointe à un courriel.
Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Format et résolution
70
Fonctions de prise de vue > Format et résolution
Qualité
L’appareil photo enregistre les photos au format JPEG ou RAW.
Les photos prises par un appareil numérique sont souvent converties
en format JPEG et stockées en mémoire selon les paramètres de
l’appareil photo au moment de la prise de vue. Les fichiers RAW ne sont
pas convertis au format JPEG et sont stockés en mémoire sans aucune
modification.
Les fichiers RAW ont pour extension « SRW ». Pour régler et étalonner
l’exposition, la balance des blancs, les tonalités, le contraste et les couleurs
des fichiers RAW, ou pour les convertir au format JPEG ou TIFF, utilisez le
programme Adobe Photoshop Lightroom fourni sur le DVD-ROM.
Pour enregistrer des photos en format RAW, assurez-vous que la carte
mémoire dispose d’un espace suffisant.
Pour définir la
qualité
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Qualité
ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Format Description
JPEG
Maximale* :
• Compressée afin d’obtenir la meilleure qualité
possible.
• Recommandé pour imprimer en grand format.
JPEG
Elevée :
• Compressé pour obtenir une meilleure qualité.
• Recommandé pour imprimer en format normal.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Format Description
JPEG
Normale :
• Compressé pour obtenir une qualité normale.
• Recommandé pour imprimer en petit format ou
pour envoyer sur le web.
RAW
RAW :
• Enregistrer une photo sans perte de données.
• Recommandé pour effectuer des modifications
après la prise de vue.
RAW+JPEG RAW + Très élevée : enregistrer une photo au
format JPEG (qualité maximale) et RAW.
RAW+JPEG RAW + Elevée : enregistrer une photo au format
JPEG (qualité Elevée) et RAW.
RAW+JPEG RAW + Normale : enregistrer une photo au format
JPEG (qualité normale) et RAW.
Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Fonctions de prise de vue
71
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
La sensibilité ISO désigne la sensibilité de l’appareil photo à la lumière.
Plus la valeur de la sensibilité ISO est importante, plus l’appareil photo
est sensible à la lumière. Par conséquent, en sélectionnant une valeur de
sensibilité ISO plus élevée, vous pouvez réaliser des prises de vue dans
des endroits sombres, en utilisant une vitesse d’obturation supérieure.
Néanmoins, il est possible que cela augmente les effets de bruit
électronique et donne un aspect granuleux à la photo.
Pour définir la
sensibilité ISO
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ ISO ĺ
une option.
Exemples
ISO 160 ISO 400
ISO 800 ISO 3200
• Augmentez la valeur ISO dans les endroits où l’utilisation du flash est
interdite. En définissant une valeur ISO élevée, vous pouvez obtenir des
photos d’une plus grande clarté sans avoir besoin de davantage de lumière.
• Afin de réduire le bruit visuel (parasites) qui peut apparaître sur des photos
prises avec une valeur ISO élevée, utilisez la fonction Réducteur de bruit
(p. 147).
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur la valeur ISO à l’écran pour la régler.
Sensibilité ISO
Fonctions de prise de vue
72
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
En photographie, la balance des blancs permet de corriger la dominante
de couleur en fonction de l’éclairage ambiant.
La couleur des photos dépend du type et de la qualité de la source
d’éclairage. Pour que les couleurs de vos photos soient le reflet de la
réalité, choisissez des conditions d’éclairage appropriées pour calibrer
la balance des blancs, par exemple Balance des blancs automatique,
Lumière du jour, Nuageux, Tungstène, ou bien réglez la température des
couleurs manuellement.
Vous pouvez également ajuster la couleur des sources de lumière
prédéfinies de façon à ce que les couleurs de la photo correspondent aux
couleurs véritables de la scène sous différentes conditions d’éclairage.
Pour définir une
balance des blancs
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Balance
des blancs ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Description
Balance des blancs automatique* : automatiser les paramètres en
fonction des conditions d’éclairage.
Lumière du jour : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en
extérieur par beau temps. Cette option permet d’obtenir des photos
reproduisant au mieux les couleurs naturelles d’une scène.
Nuageux : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en
extérieur par temps nuageux ou dans un endroit ombragé. Les
photos prises par temps nuageux ont tendance à présenter une
teinte plus bleutée que celles prises par beau temps. Cette option
permet de compenser cet effet.
Blanc fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de
vue sous un éclairage de type lumière naturelle fluorescente, en
particulier celle de couleur blanche.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Description
N
Blanc/Noir fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises
de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière naturelle fluorescente, en
particulier celle aux tonalités de blanc très prononcé.
D
Lumière du jour fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors
de prises de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière naturelle
fluorescente, en particulier celle de couleur blanche avec une teinte
légèrement bleue.
Tungstène : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en
intérieur avec des ampoules à incandescence ou des lampes
halogène. Les ampoules tungstène incandescentes ont tendance à
ajouter une tonalité rougeâtre. Cette option permet de compenser
cet effet.
Balance des blancs flash : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de
vue à l’aide d’un flash.
Réglage personnalisé : utiliser vos paramètres prédéfinis. Vous
pouvez définir manuellement la balance des blancs en appuyant sur
[D], et en prenant une feuille de papier blanc en photo. Remplir le
cercle de mesure de l’exposition sélective avec la feuille de papier et
définir la balance des blancs.
Température couleur : régler manuellement la température des
couleurs de la source lumineuse. La température des couleurs est une
mesure exprimée en degrés kelvins et qui indique spécifiquement
le type de source lumineuse. Il est possible d’obtenir une photo
plus chaleureuse à l’aide d’une valeur élevée, et une photo moins
chaleureuse à l’aide d’une valeur plus basse. Appuyez sur [D],
puis réglez la température de couleur.
Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Balance des blancs
73
Fonctions de prise de vue > Balance des blancs
Personnalisation des options de préréglage de la balance des
blancs
Vous pouvez également personnaliser les options prédéfinies de balance
des blancs.
Pour personnaliser
les options
prédéfinies
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Balance
des blancs ĺ une option ĺ [D] ĺ appuyez sur
[D/I/C/F].
Balance des blancs : Lumière du jour
Retour Définir Réinitialiser
Vous pouvez également appuyer sur une zone à l’écran.
Exemples
Balance des blancs automatique Lumière du jour
Lumière du jour fluorescent Tungstène
Fonctions de prise de vue
74
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
L’assistant photo vous permet d’appliquer des styles à vos photos afin de
leur faire adopter différents aspects et créer des impressions particulières.
Vous pouvez également créer et enregistrer vos propres styles de photos
en réglant la couleur, la saturation, la netteté et le contraste pour chacun
de ces styles.
L’application de différents styles ne suit aucune règle particulière, quelles
que soient les conditions. Essayez plusieurs styles différents et trouvez les
paramètres qui vous conviennent.
Pour définir un style
de photo
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Assistant photo ĺ une option.
Exemples
Standard Accentué Portrait
Paysage Naturel Rétro
Cool Calme Classique
• Vous pouvez également régler les valeurs des paramètres de styles prédéfinis.
Sélectionnez une option de l’Assistant photo, appuyez sur [D], puis réglez
la couleur, la saturation, la netteté ou le contraste.
• Pour personnaliser l’Assistant photo, sélectionnez , ou , puis réglez
la couleur, la saturation, la netteté et le contraste.
• Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options de l’Assistant photo et
les options de Filtre intelligent.
Assistant photo (styles de photo)
Fonctions de prise de vue
75
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Mode AF
Voici comment régler la mise au point de l’appareil photo en fonction des
sujets.
Vous pouvez sélectionner un mode de mise au point adapté au sujet,
parmi les modes de Mise au point automatique unique, Mise au
point automatique continue et Mise au point manuelle. Lorsque vous
appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, la fonction de mise au point
automatique s’active. En mode MF, vous devez appuyer sur [C/F] pour
effectuer manuellement la mise au point.
Dans la plupart des cas, vous pouvez effectuer une mise au point en
sélectionnant AF unique. Il est difficile d’effectuer une mise au point sur
des sujets se déplaçant rapidement ou ayant des effets d’ombre subtils
différents de ceux de l’arrière-plan. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez un mode de
mise au point approprié.
Pour définir le
mode de mise au
point automatique
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [F] ĺ une option.
• Vous pouvez également effectuer ce réglage en appuyant sur [m] ĺb
ĺ Mode AF ĺ option choisie en mode Prise de vue.
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction l’objectif utilisé.
AF unique
La fonction AF unique est appropriée pour les photos de sujets immobiles.
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, la mise au point
s’établit dans la zone correspondante. Une fois la mise au point effectuée,
la zone devient verte.
76
Fonctions de prise de vue > Mode AF
AF continu
Tant que vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo
continue d’effectuer la mise au point automatique. Une fois la zone
de mise au point établie, cette dernière reste active sur le sujet même
lorsque ce dernier est en mouvement. Ce mode est recommandé pour
photographier une personne sur une bicyclette, un chien qui court ou une
course automobile.
Mise au point manuelle
Vous pouvez effectuer la mise au point manuellement sur un sujet en
appuyant sur [C/F] sur l’appareil photo. La fonction Aide mise au point
manuelle vous permet d’effectuer facilement la mise au point. Lorsque
vous réglez la mise au point, la zone de mise au point est agrandie. Ce
mode est recommandé pour photographier un objet dont la couleur est
similaire à celle de l’arrière-plan, une scène de nuit ou un feu d’artifice.
• Après avoir pris une photo avec la mise au point manuelle, appuyez sur [o]
ĺ [C/F] pour régler de nouveau manuellement la mise au point.
• Si vous utilisez cette fonction, vous ne pouvez pas régler les options Mise au
point tactile, Détection des visages, Zone AF, et Lien AE à AF.
• Tandis que vous réglez la mise au point, l’échelle de la mise au point manuelle
( ) apparaît.
Fonctions de prise de vue
77
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
La fonction Zone AF permet de modifier l’emplacement de la zone de mise
au point.
D’une manière générale, les appareils photo effectuent une mise au point
sur le sujet le plus proche. En présence de plusieurs sujets, il arrive que
certains sujets soient involontairement mis au point. Vous pouvez modifier
l’emplacement de la zone de mise au point afin d’éviter qu’une mise au
point porte sur des sujets non choisis. En sélectionnant une zone de mise
au point appropriée, vous pouvez obtenir une photo plus claire et plus
nette.
Pour définir la
zone de mise au
point automatique
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Zone AF
ĺ une option.
Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Mise au point sélection
Vous pouvez définir la mise au point sur une zone en particulier. Appliquez
un effet hors-mise au point afin de faire ressortir le sujet.
La zone de mise au point de la photo ci-dessous a été repositionnée et sa
taille a été modifiée afin de l’adapter au visage du sujet.
En mode Prise de vue, afin de redimensionner ou de déplacer la zone de mise au
point, appuyez sur [o]. Appuyez sur une zone pour y effectuer la mise au point
ou appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour déplacer la zone de mise au point,
puis effectuez un mouvement de pincement avec deux doigts ou le mouvement
inverse pour redimensionner la zone de mise au point.
Zone AF
78
Fonctions de prise de vue > Zone AF
Mise au point multiple
L’appareil photo affiche un rectangle vert sur les zones de la photo où la
mise au point est correctement effectuée. La photo est divisée en au moins
deux zones et l’appareil photo effectue une mise au point sur chaque zone.
Ceci est recommandé pour les photos de paysages.
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo
affiche les zones de mise au point, comme illustré sur la photo ci-dessous.
Fonctions de prise de vue
79
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Détection des visages
Utilisez les options de Détection des visages pour faire un autoportrait ou
un visage souriant.
Pour utiliser
la fonction de
détection des
visages
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Détection
des visages ĺ une option.
• Lorsque l’appareil photo détecte un visage, il suit automatiquement le visage
détecté.
• Avec l’option AF Détection Visage, l’appareil photo effectue
automatiquement la mise au point sur le cadre blanc.
• Selon les options sélectionnées dans l’Assistant photo, la détection des
visages peut ne pas être efficace.
• Lors d’une mise au point manuelle, la détection des visages peut ne pas être
possible.
• La détection des visages risque de ne pas fonctionner lorsque :
- le sujet est éloigné de l’appareil photo ;
- la luminosité est trop forte ou trop faible ;
- le sujet n’est pas face à l’appareil photo ;
- le sujet porte des lunettes de soleil ou un masque ;
- les expressions faciales du sujet changent radicalement ;
- le sujet est à contre-jour ou les conditions d’éclairage sont instables.
• Lorsque vous définissez les options Détection des visages, la zone AF est
automatiquement réglée sur Mise au point multiple.
• Selon les options de Détection des visages que vous avez sélectionnées, il est
possible que certaines options de prise de vue ne soient pas disponibles.
Normale
L’appareil photo effectue une mise au point en priorité sur les visages. Il
peut détecter jusqu’à 10 visages. Ce paramètre est recommandé pour les
photos de groupe.
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo
effectue une mise au point sur les visages, comme cela est présenté sur
la photo ci-dessous. Lors d’une prise de vue d’un groupe de personnes, la
mise au point effectuée avec l’appareil photo sur le visage de la personne
la plus proche s’affiche en blanc tandis que celle effectuée sur les autres
personnes s’affiche en gris.
80
Fonctions de prise de vue > Détection des visages
Clin d’œil
L’appareil photo déverrouille automatiquement le déclencheur 2 secondes
après avoir détecté un clin d’œil.
• Clignez des yeux pendant plus de 1 seconde pour une meilleure détection.
• La détection des clignements des yeux peut échouer si :
- l’appareil photo n’est pas aligné par rapport au niveau des yeux ;
- le sujet est dans l’ombre ;
- le sujet porte des lunettes ;
- le sujet est éloigné de l’appareil photo.
Sourire
L’appareil photo déverrouille automatiquement le déclencheur lorsqu’il
détecte un visage souriant.
Lorsque votre sujet a un grand sourire, il est plus facile pour l’appareil photo de
le détecter.
Fonctions de prise de vue
81
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Mise au point avec suivi
La mise au point avec suivi permet de suivre un sujet et d’effectuer
automatiquement la mise au point, même si le sujet se déplace ou en cas
de changement de cadrage de la prise de vue.
Cadre blanc : l’appareil photo
effectue un suivi.
Cadre vert : la mise au point est
effectuée lorsque vous appuyez
sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course.
Cadre rouge : l’appareil photo ne
parvient pas à effectuer la mise
au point.
Sélectionnez ou effectuez la mise au point sur une zone en appuyant sur
l’écran. Effectuez ensuite la mise au point sur le sujet et prenez une photo
en appuyant sur l’écran.
Pour régler la mise
au point tactile
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺMise au
point tactile ĺ une option.
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur sur l’écran et sélectionner une
option en mode Prise de vue.
Mise au point tactile
La mise au point tactile vous permet de sélectionner une zone focale et
d’effectuer une mise au point en appuyant sur l’écran.
Point AF
La zone de mise au point correspond à celle sur laquelle vous appuyez à
l’écran tant que la mise au point n’est pas effectuée.
Mise au point tactile
82
Fonctions de prise de vue > Mise au point tactile
Déclenchement par sélection
Une simple pression du doigt suffit pour prendre une photo. Lorsque vous
appuyez sur un sujet, l’appareil photo effectue automatiquement la mise
au point sur lui et prend une photo.
• Si vous ne sélectionnez aucune zone de mise au point, la mise au point
automatique est inopérante.
• Le suivi peut s’avérer impossible si :
- le sujet est trop petit ;
- le sujet bouge de manière irrégulière ;
- le sujet est à contre-jour ou si la luminosité est insuffisante ;
- les couleurs ou les motifs sur le sujet et l’arrière-plan sont identiques ;
- des motifs horizontaux, tels que des stores, sont présents ;
- l’appareil photo n’est pas stable ;
- vous prenez des photos en continu.
• Lorsque le suivi ne parvient pas à s’effectuer, la fonctionnalité est réinitialisée.
• Si l’appareil photo ne parvient pas à suivre le sujet, la zone de mise au point
est réinitialisée.
• Si l’appareil photo ne réussit pas à effectuer la mise au point, le cadre de mise
au point devient rouge et la fonctionnalité est réinitialisée.
Fonctions de prise de vue
83
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
En mode mise au point manuelle, vous devez appuyer sur [C/F] pour
effectuer la mise au point. Lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Aide mise
au point manuelle, vous pouvez obtenir une meilleure mise au point
car la zone de mise au point est agrandie. Cette fonction est disponible
uniquement sur les objectifs avec lesquels la mise au point manuelle est
possible.
Pour définir l’aide
à la mise au point
manuelle
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Aide mise
au point manuelle ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Désactivé Ne pas utiliser la fonction Aide mise au point manuelle.
Agrandir x5*
Lorsque vous effectuez la mise au point, la zone de mise au
point est grossie jusqu’à 5 fois.
Agrandir x8
Lorsque vous effectuez la mise au point, la zone de mise au
point est grossie jusqu’à 8 fois.
Aide mise au point manuelle
Fonctions de prise de vue
84
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Utilisez la fonction OIS (stabilisation optique de l’image) pour réduire le
bougé de l’appareil photo. La fonction OIS peut ne pas être disponible
avec certains objectifs.
Le bougé de l’appareil photo tend à se produire dans les endroits sombres
ou lors de la prise de vue en intérieur. Dans ces cas-là, l’appareil photo
utilise une vitesse d’obturation plus lente afin d’augmenter la quantité de
lumière qui pénètre dans l’objectif, ce qui peut donner des photos floues.
Vous pouvez éviter ce type de situations en utilisant la fonction OIS.
Pour définir les
options OIS
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ OIS (anti
flou de bougé) ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Description
Mode 1* : la fonction OIS s’applique uniquement lorsque vous
enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à fond ou à mi-course.
Mode 2 : la fonction OIS est activée.
Désactivé : la fonction OIS est désactivée.
Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS)
Sans correction OIS Avec correction OIS
• L’option OIS risque de ne pas fonctionner si :
- vous bougez l’appareil photo pour suivre un sujet en mouvement ;
- l’appareil photo est instable ;
- la vitesse d’obturation est lente (par exemple, si vous sélectionnez Nuit
dans le mode Intelligent) ;
- le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible ;
- vous prenez une photo en gros plan.
• Si la fonction OIS est utilisée avec un trépied, les photos peuvent être floues
en raison des vibrations du capteur OIS. Désactivez la fonction OIS lorsque
vous utilisez un trépied.
• Si l’appareil photo est soumis à un choc, l’affichage devient flou. Si cela se
produit, éteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le.
• Utilisez la fonction OIS uniquement si cela est nécessaire, car la batterie se
décharge plus rapidement.
• Cette option peut ne pas être disponible avec certains objectifs.
Fonctions de prise de vue
85
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Il vous est possible de définir le type de prise de vue, par exemple
Continue, Mode Rafale, Retardateur ou Bracketing.
Sélectionnez Unique pour prendre une photo à la fois. Sélectionnez
Normal continu ou Mode Rafale pour prendre des photos de sujets
se déplaçant rapidement. Sélectionnez BKT AE, BKT NB, A. photo
Bracketing ou Bracketing de profondeur de champ pour régler
l’exposition, la balance des blancs, appliquer des effets de l’assistant
photo ou prendre des photos avec différentes profondeurs de champ.
Vous pouvez également sélectionner Retardateur pour prendre
automatiquement une photo à l’issue d’une durée particulière.
Pour modifier la
méthode de prise
de vue
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] ĺ une option.
• Vous pouvez également effectuer ce réglage en appuyant sur [m] ĺb
ĺ Prise de vue ĺ une option en mode Prise de vue.
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Unique
Prenez une photo à chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur].
Recommandé pour des conditions de prise de vue courantes.
Prise de vue (type)
86
Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type)
Normal continu
Prenez des photos en continu en appuyant sur le [Déclencheur]. Vous
pouvez prendre jusqu’à 6 photos par seconde.
La vitesse maximale de prise de vue est de 6 images par seconde. Elle ralentira
au bout environ de 11 clichés au format JPEG et de 4 clichés au format RAW.
(Cela peut varier en fonction des caractéristiques techniques de la carte
mémoire.)
Mode Rafale
Prenez successivement 10 photos par seconde (3 secondes), 15 photos
par seconde (2 secondes) ou 30 photos par seconde (1 seconde) lorsque
vous appuyez une fois sur le [Déclencheur]. Cette fonctionnalité est
recommandée pour prendre des photos de mouvements rapides ou de
sujets se déplaçant rapidement, par exemple lors de courses automobiles.
• Pour définir le nombre de clichés, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] →
Mode Rafale, puis appuyez sur [D].
• Le format photo est réglé sur 5M.
• L’enregistrement d’une photo peut prendre plus de temps.
• Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le flash avec cette option.
• La vitesse d’obturation doit être supérieure à 1/30 seconde.
• Les photos capturées avec cette option peuvent être légèrement agrandies
lors de l’enregistrement.
• Vous ne pouvez pas régler l’option ISO à une valeur supérieure à ISO 3200.
• Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est
pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW.
87
Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type)
Retardateur
Prenez une photo à l’issue d’une durée particulière. Vous pouvez régler le
retardateur sur un délai compris entre 2 et 30 secondes.
• Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour interrompre la prise de vue.
• Pour définir les détails du retardateur, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C]
ĺ Retardateur, puis appuyez sur [D].
Bracketing Exposition automatique (BKT AE)
Après avoir appuyé sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo prend 3 photos
consécutives : l’originale, une un peu plus sombre et une autre un peu plus
claire. Utilisez un trépied afin d’éviter d’obtenir un résultat flou lors de la
prise continue des trois clichés par l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez régler les
paramètres dans le menu Réglage Bracketing.
Exposition -2
Original
Exposition +2
Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ
Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option.
88
Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type)
Bracketing Balance des blancs (BKT NB)
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo prend
3 photos consécutives : l’originale et deux autres avec des paramètres
de balance des blancs différents. La photo originale est réalisée lorsque
vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. Les deux autres sont réglées
automatiquement en fonction de la balance des blancs que vous avez
définie. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu Réglage
Bracketing.
WB-2
Original
WB+2
• Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d
ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option.
• Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est
pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW.
Bracketing Assistant photo (A. photo
Bracketing)
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo réalise trois
clichés consécutifs, chacun avec différents paramètres de l’assistant photo.
L’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue et applique les trois options
de l’assistant photo que vous avez définies pour la photo prise. Vous
pouvez sélectionner trois paramètres différents dans le menu Réglage
Bracketing.
Accentué
Standard
Rétro
• Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d
ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option.
• Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est
pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW.
89
Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type)
Bracketing de profondeur de champ
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo réalise trois
clichés consécutifs, chacun avec une profondeur différente en ajustant la
valeur d’ouverture. Utilisez un trépied afin d’éviter d’obtenir un résultat
flou lors de la prise continue des trois clichés par l’appareil photo. Vous
pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu Réglage Bracketing.
• Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d
ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option.
• Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode Programme ou Priorité
ouverture.
• Si la valeur d’ouverture est réglée au maximum ou au minimum, deux photos
seront prises avec la valeur d’ouverture maximum ou minimum.
Fonctions de prise de vue
90
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Pour obtenir une photo réaliste du sujet, la quantité de lumière doit être
constante. Lorsque la source de luminosité varie, vous pouvez utiliser
un flash pour obtenir une quantité de lumière stable. Sélectionnez des
paramètres appropriés en fonction d’une source de lumière et d’un sujet.
Pour définir les
options du flash
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Flash
ĺune option.
Icône Description
Désactivé : ne pas utiliser le flash.
A
Flash intelligent : l’appareil photo règle automatiquement
l’intensité du flash en fonction de la quantité de lumière ambiante.
A
Automatique : le flash se déclenche automatiquement dans les
endroits sombres.
Yeux rouges auto : le flash se déclenche automatiquement et
réduit l’effet yeux rouges.
Contre jour : le flash se déclenche chaque fois que vous prenez
une photo. (La luminosité est automatiquement ajustée.)
Ctre jour + Yeux rouges : le flash se déclenche et réduit l’effet yeux
rouges chaque fois que vous prenez une photo.
1er Rideau : le flash se déclenche
immédiatement après l’ouverture
de l’obturateur. L’appareil photo
capture plus rapidement et plus
nettement la photo d’un sujet au
cours d’un mouvement. Direction du déplacement de la
boule
Icône Description
2e Rideau : le flash se déclenche
juste avant que l’obturateur ne se
referme. L’appareil photo prend
plus lentement et plus clairement
la photo d’un sujet au cours d’un
mouvement. Direction du déplacement de la
boule
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
• Un court laps de temps se déroule entre les deux déclenchements du flash.
Ne bougez pas tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde fois.
• Si vous sélectionnez Désactivé, le flash ne se déclenche pas même si un flash
externe est installé.
• Pour certains objectifs, l’objectif peut bloquer la lumière provenant du flash
interne. Si cela se produit, utilisez un flash externe en option.
• Si vous fixez un autre objectif que celui fourni à l’aide d’une bague
d’adaptation, le flash ne se déclenche pas.
Utilisez uniquement des flashs homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de flashs
externes incompatibles peut endommager l’appareil photo.
Flash
91
Fonctions de prise de vue > Flash
Réduction de l’effet yeux rouges
Si le flash se déclenche lorsque vous photographiez une personne dans
un endroit sombre, il est possible qu’une lueur rouge apparaisse dans ses
yeux. Pour réduire l’effet yeux rouges, sélectionnez Yeux rouges auto ou
Ctre jour + Yeux rouges.
Sans réduction des yeux rouges Avec réduction des yeux rouges
Si le sujet est trop éloigné de l’appareil photo ou se déplace lorsque le flash se
déclenche, il se peut que l’effet yeux rouges ne soit pas corrigé.
Réglage de l’intensité du flash
Lorsque le flash est activé, réglez son intensité de ±2 niveaux.
Pour définir
l’intensité du flash
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur ĺ Flash ĺ
sélectionnez l’option de votre choix ĺ appuyez sur [D] ĺ
[C/F].
Retour Définir
Flash : Contre jour
• Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/- pour régler
l’intensité.
• Le réglage de l’intensité du flash risque d’être sans effet si :
- le sujet est trop près de l’appareil photo ;
- vous avez sélectionné une sensibilité ISO élevée ;
- la valeur d’exposition est trop élevée ou trop faible.
• Dans certains modes de prise de vue, cette fonction n’est pas accessible.
• Si le sujet est trop rapproché lorsque vous utilisez le flash, cela peut refléter
la lumière et assombrir la photo. Vérifiez que le sujet est situé à la distance
recommandée, qui peut varier selon l’objectif utilisé.
Fonctions de prise de vue
92
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Le mode de mesure de l’exposition correspond à la manière dont l’appareil
photo mesure la quantité de lumière.
L’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière, puis utilise cette mesure
dans de nombreux modes afin de régler divers paramètres. Par exemple, si
un sujet semble plus foncé qu’il ne l’est en réalité, l’appareil photo effectue
une prise de vue surexposée de ce sujet. Si un sujet semble plus clair qu’il
ne l’est en réalité, l’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue sous-exposée
de ce sujet.
La luminosité et l’ambiance générale de la photo peuvent également être
affectées par la façon dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière.
Sélectionnez des paramètres appropriés pour chaque type de conditions
de prise de vue.
Pour définir une
option de mesure
de l’exposition
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Mesure de
l'exposition ĺ une option.
Multiple
Le mode Multiple calcule la quantité de lumière dans différentes zones.
Lorsque la lumière est suffisante, ou lorsqu’elle ne l’est pas, l’appareil photo
règle l’exposition en équilibrant la luminosité générale de la scène. Ce
mode est adapté aux photos courantes.
Mesure de l’exposition
93
Fonctions de prise de vue > Mesure de l’exposition
Centrée
Le mode Centrée effectue des calculs sur une zone plus large qu’en mode
Sélective. Il détermine la quantité de lumière dans la partie centrale de la
photo (60 – 80%) ainsi que sur le reste de la photo (20 – 40%). Ce mode est
recommandé dans les cas où la différence de luminosité entre un sujet et
un arrière-plan est faible, ou qu’une partie du sujet est grande au regard
de la composition générale de la photo.
Sélective
La mesure Sélective calcule la quantité de lumière au centre. Lorsque vous
réalisez une prise de vue dans des conditions de fort contre-jour derrière
un sujet, l’appareil photo règle l’exposition afin de capturer correctement
ce dernier. Par exemple, lorsque vous sélectionnez le mode Multiple
dans des conditions de fort contre-jour, l’appareil photo considère que la
quantité globale de lumière est élevée, ce qui assombrit la photo. Le mode
Sélective permet d’éviter cette situation, car la quantité de lumière est
calculée dans une zone définie.
Le sujet est clair alors que l’arrière plan est sombre. Le mode Sélective est
recommandé dans un cas comme celui-ci, qui présente une différence
d’exposition importante entre un sujet et un arrière-plan.
94
Fonctions de prise de vue > Mesure de l’exposition
Mesure de la valeur d’exposition de la zone de mise au point
Lorsque cette fonction est activée, l’appareil photo applique
automatiquement une exposition optimale en calculant la luminosité de
la zone de mise au point. Cette option est disponible uniquement si vous
sélectionnez la mesure de l’exposition Sélective ou Multiple, et l’option
Mise au point sélection.
Pour appliquer
cette fonction
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Lien AE à AF ĺ une option.
Fonctions de prise de vue
95
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Cette fonction corrige automatiquement la perte de luminosité due à des
différences de niveaux d’exposition sur la photo.
Pour définir les options
de Plage dynamique
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Plage
dynamique ĺ une option.
Sans effet de plage dynamique Avec effet de plage dynamique
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Description
Désactivé* : ne pas utiliser la Plage dynamique.
Plage intelligente+ : corriger la perte de luminosité.
HDR : prendre 3 photos avec différentes expositions, puis les
associer afin de créer automatiquement une image unique.
• Vous ne pouvez pas régler l’option ISO à une valeur supérieure
à ISO 3200.
• Les options Plage dynamique ne peuvent pas être définies
avec des options de prise de vue autres que Unique ou
Retardateur.
• Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options
de Plage dynamique avec les options Filtre intelligent ou
Assistant photo.
• Les options Plage dynamique ne peuvent pas être réglées
avec la fonction Bulb.
Plage dynamique
Fonctions de prise de vue
96
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Le filtre intelligent vous permet d’appliquer des effets spéciaux à vos
photos ou vidéos. Vous pouvez sélectionner diverses options de filtre pour
créer des effets spéciaux difficiles à obtenir avec des objectifs normaux.
Pour appliquer les
options de filtre
intelligent
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Filtre
intelligent ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Désactivé* Aucun effet
Vignettage Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un fort contraste et un effet
de dégradé intense, caractéristiques des appareils Lomo.
Miniature Appliquer un effet de plongée pour que le sujet
apparaisse plus petit.
Esquisse Appliquer un effet d’esquisse au crayon.
Œil de
poisson
Déformer les objets en gros plan pour imiter l’effet visuel
d’un objectif ultra grand angle.
Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options du Filtre intelligent et les
options de l’Assistant photo.
Filtre intelligent
Fonctions de prise de vue
97
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
L’appareil photo définit automatiquement l’exposition en mesurant
les niveaux de lumière à partir de la composition d’une photo et de la
position d’un sujet. Si la valeur d’exposition définie par l’appareil photo
est plus élevée ou plus basse que celle que vous attendiez, vous pouvez
alors la régler manuellement. La valeur d’exposition peut être réglée
en faisant varier les valeurs de ±3. L’appareil photo affiche un message
d’avertissement en rouge pour chaque niveau d’exposition au-delà d’une
plage de ±3.
Pour régler la valeur d’exposition, appuyez sur le voyant de niveau
d’exposition à l’écran ou sur ĺ EV et réglez la valeur d’exposition.
Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [I] pour sélectionner la valeur
d’exposition et appuyer sur [C/F] pour la régler.
Vous pouvez vérifier la valeur d’exposition par rapport à l’indicateur de
niveau d’exposition.
Indicateur de niveau
d’exposition
Exposition augmentée
(plus clair)
Exposition réduite
(plus sombre)
Mise en garde à propos de
l’exposition Indice d’exposition standard
-2
Original
+2
Compensation de l’exposition
Fonctions de prise de vue
98
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Si vous ne parvenez pas à obtenir une exposition adéquate à cause d’un
fort contraste de luminosité, verrouillez l’exposition, puis prenez la photo.
Pour verrouiller l’exposition, définissez les éléments de la photo sur
lesquels vous souhaitez calculer le niveau d’exposition et appuyez sur
la touche de personnalisation. (lorsque la fonction de la touche de
personnalisation est réglée sur AEL) (p. 151)
Une fois l’exposition verrouillée, pointez l’objectif sur le sujet et appuyez
sur le [Déclencheur].
Verrouillage de l’exposition
Fonctions de prise de vue
99
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Les fonctions vidéo disponibles sont présentées ci-dessous.
Format vidéo
Définissez le format vidéo.
Pour définir les
options du format
vidéo
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ Format
vidéo ĺ une option.
Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur NTSC
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Taille Recommandé pour
* 1920X1080 (30 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur Full HD.
1280X720 (30 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD.
640X480 (30 ips) (4:3) Visionner sur un téléviseur.
320X240 (30 ips) (4:3) Publier sur un site Web via un réseau
sans fil (30 secondes maximum).
Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur PAL
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Taille Recommandé pour
* 1920X1080 (25 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur Full HD.
1280X720 (25 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD.
640X480 (25 ips) (4:3) Visionner sur un téléviseur.
320X240 (25 ips) (4:3) Publier sur un site Web via un réseau
sans fil (30 secondes maximum).
Fonctions vidéo
100
Fonctions de prise de vue > Fonctions vidéo
Qualité vidéo
Définissez la qualité vidéo à utiliser.
Pour définir les
options de la
qualité vidéo
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ
Qualité vidéo ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Extension Description
MP4 (H.264) Normale : enregistrer des vidéos en qualité
normale.
MP4 (H.264) HQ* : enregistrer des vidéos en haute qualité.
Multi-mouvements
Régler la vitesse de lecture d’une vidéo.
Pour définir les
options de vitesse
de lecture
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺMultimouvements
ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Description
x0.25 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner au 1/4 de la vitesse
normale. (Disponible uniquement à la résolution 640x480 ou
320x240)
x1* : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale.
x5 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale X 5.
x10 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale X 10.
x20 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale X 20.
• Si vous sélectionnez une option différente de x1, les fonctions
d’enregistrement sonore et de correction des distorsions ne seront pas prises
en charge.
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
101
Fonctions de prise de vue > Fonctions vidéo
Voix
Il arrive parfois que certaines vidéos muettes soient plus attractives que
celles filmées avec le son. Désactivez l’enregistrement vocal afin de réaliser
une vidéo muette.
Pour définir les
options de voix
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ Voix ĺ
une option.
Fondu
Vous pouvez appliquer un fondu au début ou à la fin d’une scène en
utilisant la fonction de fondu sur l’appareil photo, sans avoir recours
à un ordinateur. Appliquez l’effet de fondu entrant pour qu’une scène
commence progressivement par cet effet. Appliquez l’effet de fondu
sortant pour qu’une scène se termine progressivement par cet effet.
Utilisez cette fonction de manière appropriée pour vous permettre
d’ajouter des effets spectaculaires à vos vidéos.
Pour définir les
options de fondu
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺFondu
ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Description
Désactivé* : fonction de fondu non utilisée.
Entrant : la scène est fondue progressivement en début de
séquence.
Sortant : la scène est fondue progressivement en fin de séquence.
Entrant-Sortant : le fondu est appliqué au début et à la fin de la
scène.
Lorsque la fonction de fondu est utilisée, l’enregistrement d’un fichier peut
prendre plus de temps.
Chapitre 3
Lecture / Retouche
Voici comment lire et retoucher des photos et des vidéos.
Pour retoucher des fichiers sur un ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section 6.
103
Lecture / Retouche
Voici comment afficher les miniatures de vos photos et vidéos, et comment
protéger ou supprimer des fichiers.
Si vous n’effectuez aucune opération pendant un certain temps, les informations
et icônes à l’écran disparaissent. Ces éléments réapparaissent lorsque vous
réutilisez l’appareil photo.
Affichage de photos
1 Appuyez sur [y].
• Le fichier capturé le plus récent s’affiche.
2 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour faire défiler les fichiers.
• Vous pouvez également faire glisser l’image vers la gauche ou la
droite pour passer à un autre fichier.
Il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas modifier ou reproduire des fichiers capturés
avec d’autres appareils photo en raison de tailles ou de codecs non pris en charge.
Utilisez un ordinateur ou un autre dispositif pour modifier ou reproduire ces fichiers.
Affichage des images sous forme de
miniatures
Pour rechercher des photos et des vidéos de votre choix, convertissezles
en vues Miniatures en appuyant sur [I] ou sur en mode
Lecture. L’affichage sous forme de miniatures permet de visionner
plusieurs images à la fois afin de parcourir et de trouver facilement les
éléments que vous recherchez. Vous pouvez également classer et afficher
les fichiers par catégorie, telles que la date ou le type de fichier.
En vue Miniatures, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Afficher ĺ un élément pour
sélectionner le mode vue Miniatures.
Recherche et gestion de fichiers
104
Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers
Affichage de fichiers par catégorie
1 En vue Miniatures, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Filtrer ĺune
catégorie.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Tout* Afficher les fichiers normalement.
Date Afficher les fichiers en fonction de leur date
d’enregistrement.
Type de
fichier Afficher les fichiers par type.
2 Sélectionnez une liste afin de l’ouvrir.
3 Sélectionnez un fichier afin de l’afficher.
Visionnage de fichiers sous forme de
dossiers
Les prises de vues en continue et en rafale apparaissent sous forme de
dossiers. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un dossier, toutes les photos sont
automatiquement lues. La suppression d’un dossier entraîne celle de
toutes les photos qu’il contient.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [C/F] pour accéder au
dossier voulu.
• Vous pouvez également faire glisser l’image vers la gauche ou la
droite pour accéder au dossier voulu.
• L’appareil photo lit automatiquement les photos contenues dans le
dossier.
2 Appuyez sur [o] pour ouvrir le dossier.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur le dossier à l’écran pour ouvrir
le dossier.
105
Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers
3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour accéder à un autre fichier.
• Vous pouvez également faire glisser l’image vers la gauche ou la
droite pour passer à un autre fichier.
4 Appuyez sur [o] pour revenir au mode Lecture.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur pour revenir au mode
Lecture.
Protection de fichiers
Protégez vos fichiers contre toute suppression accidentelle.
1 En mode Lecture, faites défiler l’affichage pour atteindre un
fichier.
2 Appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Protéger ĺ Activé.
Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer ou faire pivoter un fichier protégé.
106
Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers
Suppression de fichiers
En mode Lecture, supprimez des fichiers pour gagner de l’espace sur la
carte mémoire. Les fichiers protégés ne sont pas supprimés.
Suppression d’un seul fichier
Vous pouvez sélectionner un seul fichier et le supprimer.
1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez un fichier et appuyez sur [n].
2 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui.
Suppression de plusieurs fichiers
Vous pouvez effectuer une sélection multiple de fichiers pour les
supprimer.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Supprimer ĺ
Suppression multiple.
• Vous pouvez également, en mode Miniatures, appuyer sur [n], puis
sélectionner les fichiers à supprimer.
2 Sélectionnez les fichiers à supprimer, puis appuyez sur
[C/F], puis sur [o].
• Appuyez sur [o] à nouveau pour annuler votre sélection.
3 Appuyez sur [n].
4 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui.
Suppression de tous les fichiers
Vous pouvez supprimer tous les fichiers de la carte mémoire en même
temps.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m].
2 Sélectionnez z ĺ Supprimer ĺ Supprimer tout.
3 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui.
107
Lecture / Retouche
Agrandissement d’une photo
En mode Lecture, vous pouvez agrandir les photos lorsque vous les
visualisez. Effectuez un mouvement de pincement avec deux doigts sur
l’écran pour réduire une photo ou le mouvement inverse pour l’agrandir.
Faites glisser la photo pour déplacer la zone agrandie. Vous pouvez
également utiliser la fonction Recadrer afin d’extraire une partie de
l’image affichée sur l’écran et d’enregistrer la photo découpée en tant que
nouveau fichier.
Zone agrandie
Agrandissement (L’agrandissement
maximum possible peut varier en
fonction de la résolution.)
Retour Rogner
Pour Procédez comme suit
Déplacer la zone agrandie Appuyer sur [D/I/C/F].
Rogner la photo agrandie Appuyez sur [o]. (enregistrée en tant que
nouveau fichier)
Revenir à l’image originale Appuyez sur [m].
Appuyez deux fois sur une zone pour l’agrandir rapidement.
Visionnage d’un diaporama
Vous pouvez visionner les photos sous forme de diaporama et ajouter des
effets de transition entre chaque photo.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m].
2 Sélectionnez z ĺ Options diaporama.
3 Choisissez une option d’effet de diaporama.
• Passez à l’étape 4 pour démarrer le diaporama sans aucun effet.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Mode de
lecture
Activer une option de répétition du diaporama.
(Une lecture*, Répétition)
Intervalle
• Définir l’intervalle entre l’affichage des photos.
(1 s*, 3 s, 5 s, 10 s)
• Les intervalles peuvent uniquement être définis
si l’effet de changement de scène est réglé sur
Désactivé.
Effet • Définir un changement de scène entre les photos.
• Sélectionnez Désactivé pour annuler les effets.
Affichage de photos
108
Lecture / Retouche > Affichage de photos
4 Appuyez sur [m].
5 Sélectionnez Démarrer diaporama.
6 Visionnez le diaporama.
• Appuyez sur [o] pour mettre en pause.
• Appuyez à nouveau sur [o] pour reprendre la lecture.
• Appuyez sur [m] pour interrompre le diaporama et revenir au
mode Lecture.
Rotation automatique
En activant la fonction Rotation auto, l’appareil photo fait pivoter
automatiquement les photos prises verticalement afin qu’elles s’affichent
horizontalement à l’écran.
Pour définir les
options de rotation
automatique
En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Rotation auto
ĺ une option.
109
Lecture / Retouche
En mode Lecture, vous pouvez lire une vidéo, en extraire une image ou
encore la rogner et l’enregistrer en tant que nouveau fichier.
Arrêter
Icône Description
Afficher le fichier précédent / Retour rapide. (Chaque fois que
vous appuyez sur l’icône lors de la lecture d’une vidéo, la vitesse
de lecture change selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.)
Mettre une pause ou reprendre la lecture.
Afficher le fichier suivant / Avance rapide. (Chaque fois que vous
appuyez sur l’icône lors de la lecture d’une vidéo, la vitesse de
lecture change selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.)
Régler le volume ou couper le son.
Avance ou retour rapide de la lecture
Pour avancer ou rembobiner un fichier vidéo lors de sa lecture, utilisez
l’une des méthodes suivantes.
• Appuyez sur . Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur l’icône, la vitesse
de lecture change selon l’ordre suivant : 2X, 4X, 8X.
• Appuyez sur [C/F]. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la touche, la
vitesse de lecture change selon l’ordre suivant : 2X, 4X, 8X.
• Faites glisser les poignées qui apparaissent sur la barre de progression à
gauche ou à droite. Vous pouvez modifier la position de lecture dans la
vidéo.
• Faites glisser une zone de l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite. Vous pouvez
modifier la position de lecture dans la vidéo.
Lecture de vidéos
110
Lecture / Retouche > Lecture de vidéos
Réglage de la luminosité d’une vidéo
Réglez la luminosité d’une vidéo au cours de sa lecture.
Pour régler la
luminosité d’une
vidéo
Appuyez sur le côté gauche de l’écran ĺ faites glisser
l’affichage vers le haut ou le bas.
Arrêter
Réglage du volume d’une vidéo
Réglez le volume d’une vidéo au cours de sa lecture.
Pour régler le
volume d’une
vidéo
Touchez la moitié droite de l’afficheur ĺ faites-la glisser vers le
haut ou le bas.
Arrêter
Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [D/I] pour régler le volume d’une
vidéo.
111
Lecture / Retouche > Lecture de vidéos
9 Appuyez sur Recadrer pour raccourcir une vidéo.
• Vous pouvez définir la scène à rogner en faisant glisser les poignées
qui apparaissent sur la barre de progression.
10 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui.
• La durée de la vidéo d’origine doit être d’au moins 10 secondes.
• L’appareil photo enregistre la vidéo modifiée en tant que nouveau fichier et
conserve la vidéo d’origine intacte.
• L’endroit où vous souhaitez que le recadrage commence peut être sélectionné
2 secondes après le début de la lecture.
Extraction d’une image pendant la lecture
1 Lors du visionnage d’une vidéo, appuyez sur [o] ou à
l’endroit où vous souhaitez extraire une image.
2 Appuyez sur Enregistrer.
• La résolution de l’image extraite est la même que celle de la vidéo d’origine.
• L’image extraite est enregistrée en tant que nouveau fichier.
Recadrage d’une vidéo au cours de la
lecture
1 En mode Lecture, faites défiler l’affichage pour atteindre une
vidéo, puis appuyez sur [m].
2 Sélectionnez Recadrer la vidéo.
3 Appuyez sur [o] ou pour démarrer la lecture de la vidéo.
4 Appuyez sur [o] ou à l’endroit où le recadrage doit débuter.
5 Appuyez sur Point de départ.
6 Appuyez sur [o] ou pour reprendre la lecture de la vidéo.
7 Appuyez sur [o] ou à l’endroit où le recadrage doit se
terminer.
8 Appuyez sur Point final.
112
Lecture / Retouche
Les photos retouchées sont enregistrées en tant que nouveaux fichiers,
sous des noms de fichiers différents. Il est impossible de retoucher les
photos prises dans certains modes par le biais de la fonction Édition photo.
Pour retoucher des
images
En mode Lecture, faites défiler l’affichage pour atteindre une
photo, puis appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Retoucher l'image
ĺune option.
• Il est possible que certaines images ne puissent pas être retouchées à l’aide
de la fonction Édition photo. Dans ce cas, utilisez le logiciel de retouche
fourni.
• Les fichiers RAW ne peuvent pas être retouchés à l’aide la fonction Retoucher
l’image. Dans ce cas, utilisez le logiciel de retouche fourni.
• L’appareil photo enregistre les photos retouchées en tant que nouveau fichier.
• Lorsque vous retouchez des photos, l’appareil photo les enregistre
automatiquement à une résolution inférieure. Les photos pivotées ou
redimensionnées manuellement ne sont pas automatiquement converties à
une résolution inférieure.
• Les photos visionnées en tant que dossier ne peuvent pas être retouchées.
Ouvrez le dossier et sélectionnez une photo pour retoucher chacune des
photos.
Rognage d’une photo
1 Appuyez sur ĺ .
2 Faites glisser le coin du cadre pour redimensionner la zone.
3 Faites glisser le cadre pour déplacer la zone.
4 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur pour enregistrer.
Retouche de photos
113
Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos
Rotation d’une photo
1 Appuyez sur ĺ .
2 Appuyez sur une option.
Rotation : Droite (90°)
3 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur pour enregistrer.
• Vous pouvez également faire pivoter une photo en mode Lecture en
appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant z ĺ Rotation ĺ une option
voulue.
• L’appareil photo écrase le fichier d’origine.
Redimensionnement de photos
Modifiez la taille d’une photo pour l’enregistrer sous forme de nouveau
fichier.
1 Appuyez sur ĺ .
2 Appuyez sur une option.
Redimensionner : 3888 x 2592
3 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur pour enregistrer.
Les options de redimensionnement disponibles dépendent de la taille d’origine
de la photo.
114
Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos
Réglage des photos
Vous pouvez modifier les photos prises en réglant la luminosité, le
contraste ou la couleur.
1 Appuyez sur .
2 Appuyez sur une option de réglage.
• Si vous avez sélectionné (Réglage automatique), passez à
l’étape 6.
Icône Description
Original (revenir à l’image originale)
Réglage automatique
Luminosité
Contraste
Saturation
Réglage RVB
Température couleur
Exposition
3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’option.
• Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/-
pour régler l’option.
4 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur .
5 Appuyez sur .
6 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur pour enregistrer.
115
Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos
Retouche de visages
1 Appuyez sur ĺ .
2 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’option.
• Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/-
pour régler l’option.
• Au fur et à mesure que la valeur augmente, la couleur de la peau
devient plus lumineuse et plus douce.
3 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur pour enregistrer.
116
Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos
Effets de filtre intelligent
Appliquez des effets spéciaux à vos photos.
1 Appuyez sur , puis sur une option.
Filtre intelligent : Vignettage
Option Description
Désactivé Aucun effet
Vignettage
Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un fort contraste
et un effet de dégradé intense, caractéristiques
des appareils Lomo.
Miniature Appliquer un effet de plongée pour que le
sujet apparaisse plus petit.
Onirique Masquer les imperfections du visage ou
appliquer des effets doux.
Esquisse Appliquer un effet d’esquisse au crayon.
Option Description
Effet ultra grand
angle
Déformer les objets en gros plan pour imiter
l’effet visuel d’un objectif ultra grand angle.
Classique Appliquer un effet noir et blanc.
Rétro Appliquer un effet sépia.
Peinture à l'huile Appliquer un effet de peinture à l’huile.
Dessin Appliquer un effet de bande dessinée.
Peinture à l'encre Appliquer un effet d’esquisse à l’encre.
Filtre croisé
Ajouter des lignes qui irradient vers l’extérieur
depuis les objets brillants pour imiter l’effet
visuel d’un filtre croisé.
Prise de vue zoom Brouiller les bords d’une photo pour souligner
les sujets placés au milieu.
2 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur .
3 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer.
Chapitre 4
Réseau sans fil
Voici comment vous connecter à des réseaux locaux sans fil et à utiliser des fonctions de connectivité.
118
Réseau sans fil
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Cette section décrit comment se connecter via un point d’accès lorsqu’un
réseau local sans fil se trouve dans le champ de détection. Vous pouvez
également configurer les paramètres réseau.
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi.
2 Sélectionnez , , , , ou .
3 Suivre les instructions qui s’affichent jusqu’à l’apparition de
l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi.
• Dans certains modes, appuyez sur [m], puis sélectionnez
Paramètres Wi-Fi.
• L’appareil photo recherche automatiquement les points d’accès
disponibles.
4 Sélectionnez un point d’accès.
Samsung1
Samsung2
Samsung3
Paramètres Wi-Fi
Actualiser
Retour
• Sélectionnez Actualiser pour actualiser la liste des points d’accès
disponibles.
• Sélectionnez Ajouter mode sans fil pour ajouter un point d’accès
manuellement. Le nom du point d’accès doit être en anglais pour
ajouter le point d’accès manuellement.
Icône Description
Point d’accès Ad hoc
Point d’accès sécurisé
Point d’accès WPS
Force du signal
Appuyez sur [F] ou appuyez sur pour définir les options
de paramètres réseau.
• Lorsque vous choisissez un point d’accès sécurisé, une fenêtre
contextuelle apparaît. Saisissez le mot de passe requis pour vous
connecter au réseau local sans fil. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de
texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte » (p. 122).
• Lorsqu’une page de connexion apparaît, reportez-vous à la section
« Utilisation du navigateur de connexion » pour en savoir plus
(p. 120).
• Si vous choisissez un point d’accès non sécurisé, l’appareil photo se
connecte au réseau local sans fil.
• Si vous choisissez un point d’accès pris en charge par un profil
WPS, sélectionnez ĺ Connexion PIN WPS, puis saisissez le code
PIN sur le périphérique du point d’accès. Vous avez également la
possibilité de vous connecter à un point d’accès pris en charge par
un profil WPS en sélectionnant ĺ Connexion via la touche
WPS sur l’appareil photo et en appuyant sur la touche WPS sur le
périphérique du point d’accès.
• Si un message vous informe de la réglementation en vigueur sur la
collecte de données, lisez son contenu et acceptez ses conditions.
119
Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Configuration des options de réseau
1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis
appuyez sur [F] ou .
2 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises.
Option Description
Mot de passe réseau Saisir le mot de passe réseau.
Configuration IP Définir l’adresse IP automatiquement ou
manuellement.
Configuration manuelle de l’adresse IP
1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis
appuyez sur [F] ou .
2 Sélectionnez Configuration IP ĺ Manuel.
3 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises.
Option Description
IP Saisir l’adresse IP statique.
Masque sousréseau
Indiquer le masque sous-réseau.
Passerelle Indiquer la passerelle.
Serveur DNS Saisir l’adresse DNS.
120
Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Utilisation du navigateur de connexion
Vous pouvez saisir vos informations de session via le navigateur lors de la
connexion à certains points d’accès, services de partage ou serveurs Cloud.
Icône Description
Fermer le navigateur de connexion.
Accéder à la page précédente.
Accéder à la page suivante.
Arrêter le chargement de la page.
Recharger la page.
• Il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas sélectionner certaines options selon la
page à laquelle vous êtes connecté. Il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement.
• Le navigateur de connexion peut ne pas se fermer automatiquement après
la connexion à certaines pages. Si cela se produit, fermez le navigateur en
appuyant sur , puis poursuivez vos manipulations.
• La page de connexion peut s’avérer plus longue à charger en fonction de sa
taille ou du débit du réseau. Si cela se produit, patientez jusqu’à ce que la
fenêtre de connexion s’affiche.
121
Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau
• Certaines fonctions Wi-Fi ne sont pas disponibles si vous n’insérez pas de
carte mémoire.
• La qualité de la connexion réseau est déterminée par les points d’accès.
• Plus la distance entre l’appareil photo et le point d’accès est grande, plus ce
premier met du temps à se connecter au réseau.
• Si un périphérique à proximité utilise une fréquence radio identique à celle
de l’appareil photo, il se peut que votre connexion s’interrompe.
• Si le nom de votre point d’accès n’est pas en anglais, il se peut que l’appareil
photo ne puisse pas localiser le périphérique ou que son nom apparaisse de
façon incorrecte.
• Pour connaître les paramètres réseau et le mot de passe requis, contactez
votre administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau.
• Si un réseau local sans fil requiert l’authentification du fournisseur d’accès,
il se peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure de vous connecter audit réseau.
Pour vous connecter au réseau local sans fil, contactez votre fournisseur de
service réseau.
• En fonction du type de chiffrement, la longueur du mot de passe peut varier.
• En fonction des conditions environnantes, il peut s’avérer impossible
d’établir une connexion à un réseau local sans fil.
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo affiche une imprimante compatible avec les
réseaux locaux sans fil figurant dans la liste des points d’accès. Vous ne pouvez
cependant pas vous connecter au réseau par le biais d’une imprimante.
• Il est impossible de connecter l’appareil photo simultanément à un réseau
et à un téléviseur.
• La connexion à un réseau peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires. Ces
coûts varient en fonction des conditions de votre forfait.
• Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à un réseau local sans fil, essayez un
autre point d’accès dans la liste des points d'accès disponibles.
• Il se peut qu’une page de connexion apparaisse lorsque vous sélectionnez
des réseaux locaux sans fil gratuits mis à disposition par certains
fournisseurs d’accès réseau. Saisissez votre ID et votre mot de passe pour
vous connecter au réseau local sans fil. Pour en savoir plus sur l’inscription
à ces services ou à un service particulier, contactez les fournisseurs d’accès
réseau en question.
• Soyez prudent lors de la saisie d’informations personnelles pour vous
connecter à un point d’accès. Ne saisissez aucune information de paiement
sur l’appareil photo. Le fabricant ne peut être tenu responsable de tout
problème survenant suite à la saisie de telles informations.
• Les connexions réseau disponibles peuvent varier selon le pays.
• La fonction de réseau local sans fil de l’appareil photo doit être conforme
à la législation en matière de transmission par radiofréquences dans votre
pays ou région. Pour assurer une compatibilité totale, n’utilisez la fonction
de réseau local sans fil que dans le pays dans lequel vous avez acheté
l’appareil photo.
• Les opérations à suivre pour régler les paramètres réseau peuvent différer
en fonction des conditions du réseau.
• Ne tentez pas d’accéder à un réseau dont l’accès ne vous est pas autorisé.
• Avant de vous connecter à des réseaux, assurez-vous que la batterie est
entièrement rechargée.
• Vous ne pouvez pas télécharger ou envoyer des fichiers capturés dans
certains modes.
• Les fichiers transférés vers un autre appareil peuvent ne pas être pris en
charge par cet appareil. Dans ce cas, utilisez un ordinateur pour lire les
fichiers.
122
Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Saisie de texte
Cette section décrit comment saisir du texte. Les icônes dans le tableau
vous permettent de déplacer le curseur, de modifier la casse, etc. Appuyez
sur [D/I/C/F] pour faire défiler jusqu’à la touche souhaitée,
puis appuyez sur [o] pour la saisir. Ou appuyez sur une touche pour la
saisir.
X
Annuler Effectué
Icône Description
Déplacer le curseur.
En mode ABC, changer la casse.
X Supprimer la dernière lettre.
Annuler Arrêter la saisie de texte et revenir à la page précédente.
Passer du mode Symbole au mode ABC.
Ajouter un espace.
Effectué Enregistrer le texte à l’écran.
• Dans certains modes, vous pouvez saisir uniquement du texte exclusivement
à l’aide des caractères anglais, quelle que soit la langue d’affichage choisie.
• Appuyez sur [y] pour aller jusqu’à Effectué directement.
• Le nombre de caractères à saisir varie en fonction de la situation.
• L’affichage peut différer en fonction du mode de saisie.
123
Réseau sans fil
Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact)
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode
Lecture (Partage instantané)
En mode Lecture, l’appareil photo transfère automatiquement le fichier
actif sur le smartphone lorsque vous procédez à la lecture d’une balise
depuis un dispositif compatible NFC.
• Pour transférer plusieurs fichiers, sélectionnez des fichiers depuis l’écran
Miniatures, puis procédez à la lecture d’une balise depuis un dispositif
compatible NFC.
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Wi-Fi
Sélectionnez MobileLink ou Remote Viewfinder depuis la fenêtre qui
s’affiche en procédant à la lecture d’une balise depuis un dispositif
compatible NFC (p. 126, 130).
Placez l’antenne NFC du smartphone à proximité du symbole NFC de
l’appareil photo pour lancer la fonctionnalité d’enregistrement
automatique des photos sur le smartphone ou pour utiliser le smartphone
comme déclencheur à distance. Vous pouvez également transférer des
fichiers vers un dispositif compatible NFC en mode Lecture.
• Cette fonctionnalité est prise en charge par les smartphones compatibles
NFC fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android. Il est recommandé
d’utiliser la dernière version. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible pour les
appareils iOS.
• Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone
ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger
l’application depuis Samsung Apps ou Google Play Store. Samsung SMART
CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung
fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement.
• Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez
Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou
www.samsung.ca.
• Pour se connecter à une balise NFC, placez le dispositif compatible NFC à
proximité de la balise NFC de l’appareil photo pendant plus de 2 secondes.
• Vous pouvez définir la taille des photos transférées en appuyant sur [m],
puis en sélectionnant d ĺ MobileLink / Taille de l'image NFC ĺ une
option.
• Il ne faut en aucun cas modifier l’étiquette NFC.
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Prise
de vue
Lancez AutoShare ou Remote Viewfinder en procédant à la lecture d’une
balise depuis un dispositif compatible NFC (p. 124, 130). Configurez
la fonction Wi-Fi pour qu’elle se lance à la lecture d’une balise sur un
dispositif compatible NFC (p. 151)
124
Réseau sans fil
Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone
L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la
fonction AutoShare via un réseau local sans fil. Lorsque vous prenez une
photo à l’aide de l’appareil photo, la photo s’enregistre automatiquement
sur le smartphone.
• La fonctionnalité AutoShare est prise en charge par les smartphones ou
les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS.
(Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.)
Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus
récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que
cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement.
• Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone
ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger
l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store.
Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils
photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement.
• Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez
Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou
www.samsung.ca.
• Si vous activez cette fonction, les paramètres sont conservés même si vous
changez de mode Prise de vue.
• Il est possible que certains modes ne prennent pas en charge cette fonction
ou que cette dernière ne soit pas disponible avec certaines options de prise
de vue.
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur ĺAutoShare.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [m] ĺb ĺ AutoShare
ĺ Activé.
• Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît,
sélectionnez Suivant.
• Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque
vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez
Paramètres sécurité. (p. 156)
2 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer
l’application.
• Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone
compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à
proximité de la balise NFC (p. 28) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le
smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 5.
3 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et établissez la
connexion entre le smartphone et l’appareil photo.
• Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à
la fois.
• Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur
l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone.
125
Réseau sans fil > Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone
4 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez la connexion du smartphone.
• Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la
connexion est automatique.
• Une icône indiquant l’état de la connexion ( ) apparaît sur l’écran
de l’appareil photo.
5 Prenez une photo.
• La photo est enregistrée sur l’appareil photo, puis transférée
au smartphone. Si aucune carte mémoire n’est insérée ou si la
mémoire est insuffisante, la photo prise est alors transférée sur le
smartphone sans qu’elle soit enregistrée sur l’appareil photo.
• Tout enregistrement vidéo n’est conservé que sur l’appareil photo.
• Le fichier image généré au cours de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo
n’est pas sauvegardé sur le smartphone.
• Si la fonction GPS est activée sur le smartphone, les informations
GPS sont alors enregistrées avec la photo prise.
126
Réseau sans fil
L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la
fonction MobileLink via un réseau local sans fil. Vous pouvez facilement
envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à votre smartphone.
• La fonctionnalité MobileLink est prise en charge par les smartphones ou les
tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains
modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser
cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Si la version
du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette fonction ne
s’exécute pas correctement.
• Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone
ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger
l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store.
Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils
photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement.
• Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez
Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou
www.samsung.ca.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne
pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Vous pouvez visualiser jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents et envoyer jusqu’à
1 000 fichiers à la fois.
• Lorsque vous envoyez des vidéos Full HD à l’aide de la fonction MobileLink, il se
peut que vous ne puissiez pas lire ces fichiers sur certains appareils.
• Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction sur un appareil iOS, la connexion Wi-Fi
risque d’être désactivée.
• Il est impossible d’envoyer des fichiers RAW.
• Vous pouvez définir la taille des photos transférées en appuyant sur [m],
puis en sélectionnant dĺMobileLink / Taille de l'image NFCĺ une option.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur ĺMobileLink sur l’écran en mode
Prise de vue.
• Vous pouvez également envoyer des fichiers en mode Lecture en appuyant
sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi)ĺMobileLink ou en
sélectionnant ĺMobileLink.
• L’écran s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur l’appareil photo dans
les 30 secondes.
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi.
2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez .
• Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît,
sélectionnez Suivant.
• Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque
vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez
Paramètres sécurité. (p. 156)
3 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez une option d’envoi.
• Si l’option Sélectionner des fichiers du smartphone est
activée, vous pouvez utiliser votre smartphone pour afficher et
partager les fichiers stockés sur l’appareil photo. L’écran s’éteint
si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur le smartphone dans les
30 secondes.
• Si l’option Sélectionner des fichiers de l’appareil photo est
activée, vous pouvez sélectionner les fichiers à envoyer depuis
l’appareil photo.
4 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer
l’application.
• Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone
compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à
proximité de la balise NFC (p. 28) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le
smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 7.
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone
127
Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone
5 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et établissez la
connexion entre le smartphone et l’appareil photo.
• Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à
la fois.
• Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur
l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone.
6 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez la connexion du smartphone.
• Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la
connexion est automatique.
7 Sur le smartphone ou l’appareil photo, sélectionnez les fichiers
à transférer depuis l’appareil photo.
8 Sur le smartphone, appuyez sur la touche de copie ou, sur
l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Envoyer.
• L’appareil photo envoie les fichiers au smartphone.
128
Réseau sans fil
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à plusieurs smartphones
L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la
fonction Group Share via un réseau local sans fil. Vous pouvez facilement
envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à plusieurs smartphones.
• La fonctionnalité Group Share est prise en charge par les smartphones ou
les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS.
(Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.)
Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus
récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que
cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement.
• Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone
ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger
l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store.
Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils
photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement.
• Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez
Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou
www.samsung.ca.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne
pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Le transfert de fichiers vers plusieurs smartphones peut prendre plus de
temps que le transfert vers un seul appareil.
• Lorsque vous envoyez des vidéos Full HD à l’aide de la fonction Group Share,
il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas lire ces fichiers sur certains appareils.
• Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction sur un appareil iOS, la connexion Wi-Fi
risque d’être désactivée.
• Il est impossible d’envoyer des fichiers RAW.
• Vous pouvez définir la taille des photos transférées en appuyant sur [m],
puis en sélectionnant d ĺ MobileLink / Taille de l'image NFC ĺ une
option.
• Vous pouvez également envoyer des fichiers en mode Lecture en appuyant
sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ Group Share ou en
sélectionnant ĺ Group Share.
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi.
2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez .
• Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît,
sélectionnez Suivant.
• Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque
vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez
Paramètres sécurité. (p. 156)
3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer
l’application.
• Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone
compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à
proximité de la balise NFC (p. 28) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le
smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 6.
129
Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à plusieurs smartphones
4 Appuyez sur Connexion en regard du smartphone de votre
choix figurant dans la liste sur l’appareil photo.
• Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la
connexion est automatique.
• Vous pouvez connecter jusqu’à 4 smartphones.
• Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur
l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone.
5 Sélectionnez Suivant.
6 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez les fichiers à transférer
depuis l’appareil photo.
7 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Envoyer.
• L’appareil photo envoie les fichiers au smartphone.
• Lorsque vous établissez la connexion avec plusieurs smartphones,
l’appareil photo envoie les fichiers à tous les dispositifs en même
temps.
130
Réseau sans fil
L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge
la fonction Remote Viewfinder via un réseau local sans fil. Utilisez le
smartphone pour déclencher à distance l’obturateur à l’aide de la fonction
Remote Viewfinder. La photo ainsi prise s’affiche directement sur le
smartphone.
• La fonctionnalité Remote Viewfinder est prise en charge par les smartphones
ou les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS.
(Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.)
Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus
récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que
cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement.
• Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone
ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger
l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store.
Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils
photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement.
• Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez
Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou
www.samsung.ca.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur ĺ Remote Viewfinder sur l’écran
en mode Prise de vue.
• Les photos ou les vidéos prises en continu ne s’affichent pas sur le
smartphone.
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi.
2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez .
• Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît,
sélectionnez Suivant.
• Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque
vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez
Paramètres sécurité. (p. 156)
3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer
l’application.
• Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone
compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à
proximité de la balise NFC (p. 28) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le
smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 6.
4 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et établissez la
connexion entre le smartphone et l’appareil photo.
• Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à
la fois.
• Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur
l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone.
Utilisation d’un smartphone pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur à distance
131
Réseau sans fil > Utilisation d’un smartphone pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur à distance
5 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez la connexion du smartphone.
• Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la
connexion est automatique.
6 Sur le smartphone, sélectionnez q pour ouvrir le panneau
intelligent.
7 Sur le smartphone, définissez les options de prise de vue.
• Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction, certaines touches ne sont plus
disponibles sur l’appareil photo.
• Avec le smartphone, vous pouvez faire fonctionner l’appareil photo
uniquement en appuyant sur l’écran.
• Certaines options de prise de vue ne sont pas prises en charge.
• Les options de prise de vue réglées sont conservées sur l’appareil
photo même après la déconnexion avec le smartphone.
8 Appuyez sur pour revenir à l’écran de prise de vue.
9 Sur le smartphone, maintenez enfoncé pour effectuer la
mise au point, puis relâchez pour prendre la photo.
• Appuyer sur pour enregistrer une vidéo et sur pour arrêter
une vidéo.
• Si la fonction GPS est activée sur le smartphone, les informations
GPS sont alors enregistrées avec la photo prise.
• Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonctionnalité, la distance idéale entre l’appareil
photo et le smartphone peut varier, selon les conditions environnantes.
• Pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction, le smartphone doit se trouver dans un
périmètre de 7 m par rapport à l’appareil photo.
• Une fois relâché sur le smartphone, le déclenchement de la prise de vue
peut ne pas se faire immédiatement.
• Si l’option d’enregistrement du fichier est définie sur Smartphone + Appareil
photo, seules les photos seront transférées vers le Smartphone. (Les vidéos et
les fichiers RAW ne seront pas transférés.)
• Si vous prenez des photos en continu lorsque l’option d’enregistrement du
fichier est définie sur Smartphone + Appareil photo, les photos ne seront
pas transférées vers le Smartphone.
• Lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo, l’écran du smartphone ne reflète pas
l’écran de l’appareil photo.
• La fonction Remote Viewfinder se désactive si :
- le smartphone reçoit un appel ;
- l’appareil photo ou le smartphone est éteint ;
- l’appareil perd sa connexion au réseau local sans fil ;
- le signal de la connexion Wi-Fi est mauvais ou instable ;
- vous ne réalisez aucune opération dans les 3 minutes une fois la connexion
établie ;
- le nombre de dossiers et de fichiers a atteint le maximum.
• L’écran s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur l’appareil photo dans
les 30 secondes.
132
Réseau sans fil
Utilisation de la fonction Baby Monitor
3 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez un point d’accès dans la
liste, puis positionnez l’appareil photo.
• Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo à la portée d’enfants en bas âge ou
d’animaux domestiques.
• Pointez l’objectif de l’appareil photo sur le sujet.
• Il est recommandé de brancher l’appareil photo sur une prise de
courant par le biais d’un adaptateur secteur.
4 Sur le smartphone, sélectionnez le point d’accès auquel
l’appareil photo est connecté.
• Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer
l’application.
5 Sur le smartphone, démarrez l’application Samsung Home
Monitor.
Utilisez la fonction Baby Monitor pour établir la connexion entre l’appareil
photo et un smartphone où Samsung Home Monitor est installé pour
surveiller un lieu.
• La fonction Baby Monitor est prise en charge par les smartphones
compatibles avec les résolutions WVGA (800X480) ou supérieures et
fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains
modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant
d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente.
Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette
fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement.
• Vous devez installer l’application Samsung Home Monitor sur votre
smartphone avant d’utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger
l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store.
• N’utilisez cette fonction qu’en intérieur.
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi.
2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez .
• Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît,
sélectionnez Suivant.
133
Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de la fonction Baby Monitor
6 Démarrez la vidéo surveillance ou l’audio surveillance.
• Visionnez la vidéo live de l’appareil photo sur votre smartphone. Au
cours de la vidéo surveillance, appuyez sur Mode de surveillance
sonore sur le smartphone pour interrompre le flux vidéo. Si
l’appareil photo détecte du bruit, une alarme vous en informe sur le
smartphone.
• Au cours de la vidéo surveillance par le biais du smartphone, la vidéo
n’est pas enregistrée sur l’appareil photo.
• Si le lieu surveillé est sombre, appuyez sur pour activer le voyant AF.
• Au cours de la surveillance, une alarme retentit sur le smartphone si
l’appareil photo détecte du bruit sur une courte période à un volume
supérieur à un niveau indiqué.
• Au cours de la vidéo surveillance live, aucune alarme sonore ne retentit
sur le smartphone même si l’appareil photo détecte du bruit.
7 Appuyez sur pour fermer l’application Samsung Home
Monitor.
Réglage du niveau de bruit pour l’activation
de l’alarme
Vous pouvez définir le niveau du bruit entraînant l’activation d’une alarme
en cas d’audio surveillance. Appuyez sur [D/I] pour définir le
niveau de bruit.
Niveau de bruit
pour l’activation de
l’alarme :
quand l’appareil photo
détecte du bruit sur
une courte période à
un volume supérieur
au niveau indiqué, une
alarme retentit. Retour Paramètres Wi-Fi
Sensibilité du capteur
N’utilisez pas cette fonction à des fins illégales.
134
Réseau sans fil
Utilisation de Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos
A l’aide de la fonction sans fil, vous pouvez envoyer sur un ordinateur les
photos ou vidéos enregistrées avec l’appareil photo.
Installation du programme Sauvegarde
automatique sur votre ordinateur
1 Installez i-Launcher sur l’ordinateur (p. 162).
2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble
USB.
3 Lorsque l’icône du programme Sauvegarde automatique
apparaît, cliquez dessus.
• Le programme Sauvegarde automatique est alors installé sur
l’ordinateur. Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour terminer
l’installation.
4 Débranchez le câble USB.
Avant d’installer le programme, assurez-vous que l’ordinateur est connecté à un
réseau.
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un
ordinateur
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi.
2 Sélectionnez .
• Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît,
sélectionnez Suivant.
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un
réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est
connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il
recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 118).
3 Sélectionnez un ordinateur de sauvegarde.
135
Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos
4 Sélectionnez OK.
• Pour annuler l’envoi, sélectionnez Annuler.
• Il est impossible de sélectionner des fichiers précis à sauvegarder.
Cette fonction ne sauvegarde que les nouveaux fichiers de
l’appareil photo.
• La progression de la sauvegarde s’affiche sur l’écran de l’ordinateur.
• Lorsque le transfert est terminé, l’appareil photo s’éteint
automatiquement au bout d’environ 30 secondes. Sélectionnez
Annuler pour revenir à l’écran précédent et empêcher l’appareil
photo de s’éteindre automatiquement.
• Pour éteindre automatiquement votre ordinateur une fois le
transfert terminé, sélectionnez Eteindre PC après sauvegarde.
• Pour changer d’ordinateur de sauvegarde, sélectionnez Changer
de PC.
• Si vous connectez l’appareil photo au réseau local sans fil, sélectionnez le
point d’accès connecté à l’ordinateur.
• L’appareil photo recherche les points d’accès disponibles même si vous vous
reconnectez au même point d’accès.
• Si vous éteignez l’appareil photo ou retirez sa batterie lors de l’envoi de
fichiers, le transfert de fichiers est alors interrompu.
• Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction, la commande de l’obturateur se
désactive sur l’appareil photo.
• Vous ne pouvez connecter qu’un seul appareil photo à l’ordinateur à la fois
pour envoyer des fichiers.
• La sauvegarde peut être annulée en raison de l’état du réseau.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne
pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Avant d’utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez désactiver le pare-feu
Windows ou tout autre pare-feu.
• Vous pouvez envoyer jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents.
• Sur le logiciel PC, le nom du serveur doit être saisi en alphabet latin et ne peut
pas comporter plus de 48 caractères.
136
Réseau sans fil
5 Sélectionnez le champ Nom, indiquez votre nom, puis
appuyez sur Effectué.
Paramètres expéditeur
Nom
Enregistrer
Courriel
Réinitialiser
6 Sélectionnez le champ Courriel, indiquez votre adresse
électronique, puis appuyez sur Effectué.
7 Sélectionnez Enregistrer pour enregistrer les modifications.
• Pour supprimer vos coordonnées, sélectionnez Réinitialiser.
Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres du menu Courriel et envoyer par
courriel des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur l’appareil photo.
Modification des paramètres de courriel
Depuis le menu Courriel, il vous est possible de modifier les paramètres
pour le stockage de vos informations. Vous avez également la possibilité
de définir ou de changer le mot de passe de courriel. Pour en savoir plus
sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte » (p. 122).
Enregistrement de vos informations
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi.
2 Sélectionnez .
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un
réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est
connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil,
il recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 118).
3 Appuyez sur [m].
4 Sélectionnez Paramètres expéditeur.
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel
137
Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel
Création d’un mot de passe de courriel
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi.
2 Sélectionnez .
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un
réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est
connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il
recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 118).
3 Appuyez sur [m].
4 Sélectionnez Configurer mot de passe ĺ Activé.
• Pour désactiver le mot de passe, sélectionnez Désactivé.
5 Lorsque la fenêtre apparaît, sélectionnez OK.
6 Saisissez un mot de passe de 4 chiffres.
7 Confirmez-le en saisissant le mot de passe à nouveau.
8 Lorsque la fenêtre apparaît, sélectionnez OK.
Si vous avez perdu votre mot de passe, vous pouvez le réinitialiser en
sélectionnant Reset sur l’écran du paramètre du mot de passe. Lors de la
réinitialisation, vos paramètres personnels et votre adresse courriel sont alors
effacés.
138
Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel
Changement du mot de passe de courriel
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi.
2 Sélectionnez .
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un
réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est
connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il
recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 118).
3 Appuyez sur [m].
4 Sélectionnez Changer mot de passe.
5 Saisissez le mot de passe de 4 chiffres.
6 Saisissez un nouveau mot de passe de 4 chiffres.
7 Confirmez-le en saisissant le nouveau mot de passe.
8 Lorsque la fenêtre apparaît, sélectionnez OK.
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel
Vous pouvez envoyer par courriel des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur
l’appareil photo. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à
la section « Saisie de texte » (p. 122).
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi.
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Connectez-vous à un réseau local sans fil (p. 118).
4 Sélectionnez le champ Expéditeur, indiquez votre adresse
électronique, puis appuyez sur Effectué.
• Si vous avez préalablement enregistré vos informations, celles-ci
sont insérées automatiquement (p. 136).
• Pour utiliser une adresse figurant dans la liste des précédents
expéditeurs, sélectionnez ĺ une adresse.
139
Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel
5 Sélectionnez le champ Destinataire, indiquez une adresse
électronique, puis appuyez sur Effectué.
• Pour utiliser une adresse figurant dans la liste des précédents
destinataires, sélectionnez ĺ une adresse.
• Sélectionnez pour ajouter des destinataires. Vous pouvez entrer
jusqu’à 30 destinataires.
• Sélectionnez pour supprimer une adresse de la liste.
6 Sélectionnez Suivant.
7 Sélectionnez les fichiers à envoyer.
• Vous pouvez sélectionner jusqu’à 20 fichiers. La taille totale ne doit
pas dépasser 7 Mo.
8 Sélectionnez Suivant.
9 Sélectionnez le champ Commentaire, saisissez vos
commentaires, puis appuyez sur Effectué.
10 Sélectionnez Envoyer.
• L’appareil photo transmet alors le courriel.
• Si un courriel n’est pas envoyé, un message vous demande alors de
le renvoyer.
• Même si le transfert de la photo semble s’être déroulé correctement, celle-ci
peut être rejetée ou identifiée comme courrier indésirable en cas d’erreur sur
le compte de courriel du destinataire.
• Il se peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure d’envoyer de courriel si aucune
connexion réseau n’est disponible ou si les paramètres de votre compte de
courriel sont incorrects.
• Vous ne pouvez pas envoyer de courriel si la taille combinée des fichiers
est supérieure à 7 Mo. La résolution maximale des photos que vous pouvez
envoyer est de 2M. La résolution maximale des vidéos que vous pouvez
envoyer est de . Si la résolution photo sélectionnée est supérieure à 2M, la
photo est alors automatiquement redimensionnée à une résolution inférieure.
• Si vous ne pouvez pas envoyer de courriel en raison d’un pare-feu ou de
paramètres d’authentification utilisateur, contactez votre administrateur
réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne
pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Vous pouvez également envoyer un courriel en mode Lecture en appuyant
sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ Courriel ou en
sélectionnant ĺ Courriel.
140
Réseau sans fil
Envoyez vos photos ou vos vidéos sur des services de partage de fichiers.
Les services de partage disponibles s’affichent sur l’appareil photo. Pour
envoyer des fichiers à certains services de partage, vous devez vous
inscrire sur le site Web avant de connecter l’appareil photo.
Accès à un service de partage
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi.
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Connectez-vous à un réseau local sans fil (p. 118).
4 Sélectionnez un service de partage.
• Si une fenêtre vous invite à créer un compte, sélectionnez OK.
5 Saisissez votre ID et votre mot de passe pour vous connecter.
• Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section
« Saisie de texte » (p. 122).
• Si vous êtes connectés à des services de partage, veuillez-vous
reporter à « Utilisation du navigateur de connexion » (p. 120).
• Pour sélectionner un ID dans la liste, appuyez sur ĺ un ID.
• Si vous avez déjà ouvert une session sur le service de partage, il se
peut que la connexion s’établisse automatiquement.
Vous devez disposer d’un compte sur le service de partage de fichiers pour
utiliser cette fonction.
Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou de vidéos
141
Réseau sans fil > Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou de vidéos
Téléchargement de photos ou de vidéos
1 Accédez au service de partage à travers l’appareil photo.
2 Sélectionnez les fichiers à envoyer.
• Vous pouvez sélectionner jusqu’à 20 fichiers. La taille totale ne doit
pas dépasser 10 Mo. (Sur certains services de partage, la limite en
termes de taille totale ou de nombre de fichiers peut varier.)
3 Sélectionnez Envoyer.
• L’appareil photo envoie les photos ou les vidéos.
• Si un envoi ne se fait pas correctement, un message vous demande
de renvoyer les fichiers.
• Sur certains services de partage, vous pouvez saisir des remarques
en sélectionnant le champ de commentaire. Pour en savoir plus sur
la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte » (p. 122).
• Vous pouvez définir un dossier d’envoi pour Facebook en appuyant sur
[m], puis en sélectionnant Charger dossier (Facebook) dans l’écran du
service de partage.
• Vous ne pouvez pas envoyer de fichier si sa taille est supérieure à la limite
définie. La résolution maximale des photos que vous pouvez télécharger est
de 2M. La résolution maximale des vidéos que vous pouvez télécharger est
de . Si la résolution de la photo sélectionnée est supérieure à 2M, la photo
est alors automatiquement redimensionnée à une résolution inférieure. (Sur
certains services de partage, la résolution maximale d’une photo peut être
différente.)
• Le mode d’envoi des photos ou des vidéos peut varier en fonction du service
de partage sélectionné.
• Si vous ne parvenez pas à accéder à un service de partage en raison d’un
pare-feu ou de paramètres d’authentification utilisateur, contactez votre
administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau.
• Il se peut que la date de prise de vue apparaisse dans le titre des photos ou
des vidéos envoyées.
• Le débit de votre connexion Internet peut avoir une incidence sur le temps
d’envoi des photos ou d’ouverture des pages Web.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne
pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Vous pouvez également envoyer en mode Lecture des photos ou des vidéos
sur des services de partage de fichiers, en appuyant sur [m], puis en
sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ le service de partage de votre choix, ou en
sélectionnant ĺ le service de partage de votre choix.
• Sur certains services de partage, l’envoi de vidéos est impossible.
• En envoyant des photos à un service de partage de fichiers, il se peut qu’elles
soient redimensionnées au format 2M ou 1M en fonction de la politique du
service.
142
Réseau sans fil
Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de fichiers
Vous pouvez envoyer des fichiers de votre appareil photo vers le stockage
en ligne Samsung Link ou visionner des fichiers sur d’autres appareils
compatibles Samsung Link connectés au même point d’accès.
Téléchargement de photos sur un système
de stockage en ligne
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi.
2 Sélectionnez ĺStockage Web.
• Si le message guide apparaît, sélectionnez OK.
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un
réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est
connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il
recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 118).
• Pour modifier la taille des photos envoyées, appuyez sur [m],
puis sélectionnez Taille de l'image téléchargée.
3 Saisissez votre ID et votre mot de passe, puis sélectionnez
Connexion ĺ OK.
• Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section
« Saisie de texte » (p. 122).
• Pour sélectionner un ID dans la liste, appuyez sur ĺ un ID.
• Si vous avez déjà ouvert une session sur le site Web, il se peut que la
connexion s’établisse automatiquement.
Pour utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez créer à l’aide de votre
ordinateur un compte Samsung Link ainsi qu’un compte disposant d’un
service de stockage en ligne affilié. Une fois les comptes créés, ajoutez à
Samsung Link votre compte du système de stockage en ligne.
4 Sélectionnez un service de stockage en ligne.
• Avant d’utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez accéder au site
Web de Samsung Link avec votre ordinateur et vous inscrire à un
stockage en ligne.
5 Sélectionnez les fichiers à envoyer, puis appuyez sur Envoyer.
• L’envoi de fichiers vidéo au stockage en ligne Samsung Link est impossible.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne
pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Vous pouvez envoyer jusqu’à 20 fichiers.
• Vous pouvez également envoyer des photos en mode Lecture en appuyant
sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ Samsung Link ou en
sélectionnant ĺ Samsung Link.
143
Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de fichiers
Visionnage de photos ou de vidéos sur des
dispositifs compatibles Samsung Link
1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi.
2 Sélectionnez ĺAppareils à proximité.
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un
réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est
connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il
recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 118).
• Vous pouvez autoriser à se connecter uniquement les dispositifs
sélectionnés ou tous les dispositifs en appuyant sur [m], puis en
sélectionnant Contrôle d'accès DLNA à l’écran.
• Une liste de partage de fichiers est alors créée. Attendez que les
autres dispositifs aient détecté l’appareil photo.
3 Connectez le dispositif Samsung Link à un réseau, puis activez
la fonction Samsung Link.
• Reportez-vous au mode d’emploi de votre dispositif pour
davantage d’informations.
4 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez le dispositif Samsung Link à se
connecter à l’appareil photo.
5 Sur le dispositif Samsung Link, sélectionnez l’appareil photo
auquel se connecter.
6 Sur le dispositif Samsung Link, parcourez la liste des photos ou
vidéos partagées.
• Pour en savoir plus sur la manière de rechercher l’appareil photo et
de parcourir les photos ou les vidéos sur le dispositif Samsung Link,
consultez le mode d’emploi de l’appareil.
• Selon le type de dispositif Samsung Link ou l’état du réseau, il est
possible que les vidéos ne soient pas lues correctement.
Point d’accès
▲ L’appareil photo est raccordé à un téléviseur compatible Samsung Link via un
réseau local sans fil.
144
Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de fichiers
• Vous pouvez partager jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents.
• Vous ne pouvez afficher sur un dispositif Samsung Link que des photos ou
des vidéos prises avec l’appareil photo.
• La portée de la connexion sans fil entre l’appareil photo et un dispositif
Samsung Link peut varier en fonction des spécifications du point d’accès.
• Si l’appareil photo est connecté à 2 dispositifs Samsung Link, la lecture risque
d’être ralentie.
• Les photos ou les vidéos sont partagées dans leurs dimensions d’origine.
• Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonctionnalité avec des dispositifs prenant en
charge Samsung Link.
• Les photos ou vidéos partagées ne sont pas enregistrées sur le dispositif
Samsung Link, mais peuvent être stockées dans l’appareil photo afin de
respecter les caractéristiques de l’appareil photo.
• Le transfert de photos ou de vidéos sur le dispositif Samsung Link peut
prendre un certain temps selon la connexion réseau, le nombre de fichiers à
partager ou la taille des fichiers.
• Si vous éteignez l’appareil photo de façon inhabituelle pendant le visionnage
de photos ou de vidéos sur un dispositif Samsung Link (par exemple, en
retirant la batterie), le dispositif considère que l’appareil photo est toujours
connecté.
• Il se peut que l’ordre des photos ou des vidéos sur l’appareil photo diffère de
celui du dispositif Samsung Link.
• En fonction du nombre de photos ou de vidéos à partager, le chargement de
celles-ci et l’exécution du processus de configuration initial peuvent prendre
un certain temps.
• Lorsque vous visionnez des photos ou des vidéos sur le dispositif Samsung
Link, l’utilisation continue de la télécommande ou l’exécution d’opérations
supplémentaires sur le dispositif peut empêcher le bon fonctionnement de
cette fonction.
• Si vous réorganisez ou triez des fichiers sur l’appareil photo tout en les
visionnant sur un dispositif Samsung Link, vous devez procéder à nouveau
au processus initial de configuration pour actualiser la liste des fichiers sur le
dispositif.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne
pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Il est recommandé d’utiliser un câble réseau pour raccorder le dispositif
Samsung Link au point d’accès. Cela permet de réduire les interruptions du
son et de l’image lors de la diffusion de vidéo.
• Pour visionner des fichiers sur un appareil Samsung Link à l’aide de la
fonction Appareils à proximité, vous devez activer le mode Multidiffusion
sur votre point d’accès.
Chapitre 5
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo
Cette section présente les paramètres utilisateur et le menu général des réglages de l’appareil photo.
Vous pouvez régler les paramètres en fonction de vos besoins et de vos préférences.
146
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo
Vous pouvez définir la manière d’utiliser l’appareil grâce à ces paramètres.
Afin de paramétrer
les options
utilisateur
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ une
option.
Les options disponibles et leur ordre d’affichage peuvent différer selon les
conditions de prise de vue.
Personnalisation ISO
Extension ISO
Vous pouvez sélectionner ISO 100 et 25600.
Palier ISO
Vous pouvez régler la sensibilité ISO par paliers de 1/3 ou 1.
Plage ISO auto
Si vous réglez la plage ISO sur Automatique, vous pouvez définir la valeur
ISO maximale pour chaque palier EV sélectionné.
Paramètres utilisateur
147
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
Réducteur de bruit
Afin de réduire les parasites sur les photos, utilisez l’option Réducteur de
bruit.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Réduct. bruit ISO
élevé
Cette fonction réduit les parasites qui peuvent
apparaître lorsque vous utilisez une sensibilité ISO
élevée. (Désactivé, Elevé, Normale*, Bas)
Réduction bruit
long terme
Cette fonction réduit le bruit lorsque vous réglez
l’appareil photo sur une exposition prolongée.
(Désactivé, Activé*)
Réglage Bracketing
Vous pouvez configurer les options de chaque bracketing.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Réglage AE
Bracketing
Régler l’intervalle d’exposition. (-/+0.3 EV*, -/+0.7 EV,
-/+1.0 EV, -/+1.3 EV, -/+1.7 EV, -/+2.0 EV, -/+2.3 EV,
-/+2.7 EV, -/+3.0 EV)
Régler balance des
blancs Brack
Régler la gamme de balance des blancs des 3 photos
bracketing. (AB-/+3*, AB-/+2, AB-/+1, MG-/+3,
MG-/+2, MG-/+1)
Par exemple, AB-/+3 règle la valeur Orange sur
plus ou moins trois paliers. MG-/+3 règle la valeur
Magenta aux mêmes niveaux.
Réglage balance
des blancs mode
Braketing
Sélectionner 3 paramètres de l’assistant photo
que l’appareil photo utilise pour prendre 3 photos
bracketing.
Réglage de la
profondeur de
champ mode
Bracketing
Régler l’intervalle de profondeur. (-/+0.3, -/+0.7,
-/+1.0*, -/+1.3, -/+1.7, -/+2.0, -/+2.3, -/+2.7, -/+3.0)
148
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
Espace colorimétrique
L’espace colorimétrique vous permet de sélectionner les méthodes
de représentation des couleurs. Les appareils numériques d’imagerie,
comme les appareils photos numériques, les moniteurs et les imprimantes
disposent de leurs propres spécificités techniques pour représenter les
couleurs, que l’on nomme espaces colorimétriques.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
sRGB*
La norme sRGB (standard RGB) est une norme
internationale qui permet de définir l’espace
colorimétrique créé par l’IEC (commission
électrotechnique internationale). Cette norme est
couramment utilisée afin de recréer les couleurs sur
des moniteurs d’ordinateurs et constitue également
l’espace colorimétrique standard pour les données Exif.
sRGB est recommandé pour les images habituelles et
celles que vous souhaitez publier sur Internet.
Adobe RGB
Adobe RGB est utilisé pour des impressions
professionnelles et dispose d’une gamme de
couleurs plus importante que la norme sRGB. Il vous
permet ainsi de retoucher facilement des photos
sur un ordinateur. Notez que les divers programmes
disponibles sur le marché ne sont généralement
compatibles qu’avec un nombre limité d’espaces
colorimétriques.
Adobe RGB
sRGB
Lorsque l’espace colorimétrique est réglé sur Adobe RGB, les photos sont
enregistrées sous le nom « _SAMXXXX.JPG ».
149
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
Corriger distort.
Vous pouvez corriger la déformation qui peut se produire avec les
objectifs. Cette fonction est disponible avec les objectifs qui la prennent en
charge.
Fonctionnement tactile
Réglez cette option pour utiliser le fonctionnement tactile en mode Prise
de vue.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Désactivé
Ne pas utiliser le fonctionnement tactile en mode Prise de
vue. (Vous pouvez utiliser le fonctionnement tactile dans
d’autres cas.)
Activé* Utiliser le fonctionnement tactile en mode Prise de vue.
Personnalisation iFn
Vous pouvez sélectionner les options réglables prévues lorsque vous
appuyez sur [i-Function] sur un objectif compatible i-Function.
Option Description
Ouverture Permet de régler la valeur d’ouverture.
Vitesse
d'obturation Permet de régler la vitesse d’obturation.
EV Permet d’ajuster la valeur d’exposition.
ISO Définissez la sensibilité ISO.
Balance des
blancs Régler la balance des blancs.
150
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
Affichage utilisateur
Vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des informations de prise de vue sur
l’écran.
1
2
3
N° Description
1
Icônes
Activer l’affichage des icônes sur la partie de droite en mode Prise de
vue.
2 Date et heure
Activer l’affichage de la date et l’heure.
3
Histogramme
Activer ou désactiver l’histogramme sur l’écran.
Description des histogrammes
Un histogramme est la représentation graphique de la répartition de
la luminosité sur une photo. Un histogramme incliné vers la gauche
signifie que la photo est sombre. Un histogramme incliné vers la
droite signifie que la photo est claire. La hauteur des crêtes est liée
aux informations colorimétriques. Les crêtes du graphique sont plus
élevées si une couleur spécifique est prédominante.
Exposition insuffisante Exposition équilibrée Exposition excessive
151
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
Attribution touches
Vous pouvez modifier la fonction associée à la touche Personnalisé ou à la
touche DIRECT LINK.
* Paramètre par défaut
Bouton Fonction
Personnalisé
Définir la fonction de la touche Personnalisé.
• Aperçu optique* : exécuter la fonction de
prévisualisation de la profondeur de champ pour la
valeur d’ouverture (p. 22).
• Balance des blancs 1 touche (Balance des
blancs) : exécuter la fonction de balance des blancs
personnalisée.
• 1 touche RAW + : enregistrer un fichier au format
RAW+JPEG. Pour enregistrer un fichier au format
JPEG, appuyer à nouveau sur cette touche.
• Réinitialiser : réinitialiser certains paramètres.
• AEL : exécuter la fonction de verrouillage
automatique de l’exposition. (Appuyer sur le
[Déclencheur] à mi-course exécute la fonction de
verrouillage automatique de la mise au point.)
• Maintien AEL : continuer d’exécuter la fonction
de verrouillage automatique de l’exposition.
(L’exposition reste verrouillée même après la prise
de vue.)
DIRECT LINK
Définir la fonction de la touche DIRECT LINK.
(AutoShare, MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Group
Share, Baby Monitor, Sauvegarde automatique,
Courriel, Réseaux sociaux et Cloud, Samsung Link)
Vue Live NFC
En mode Prise de vue, activez la fonction NFC sur un smartphone
compatible, puis placez l’antenne NFC de ce dernier près de la balise
NFC de l’appareil photo pour lancer la fonction AutoShare ou Remote
Viewfinder. Cette fonctionnalité est prise en charge par les smartphones
compatibles NFC fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android. Il
est recommandé d’utiliser la dernière version. Cette fonctionnalité n’est
pas disponible pour les appareils iOS.
Taille de l’image MobileLink/NFC
Définir la taille des photos à transférer à un smartphone à l’aide des
fonctions MobileLink ou NFC.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Redimensionnez à 2M
ou moins.
Si la taille de la photo est supérieure à 3M, elle
sera transférée après avoir été redimensionnée à
une taille inférieure ou égale à 2M.
Original* La photo sera transférée dans sa taille originale.
Grille
Sélectionnez un guide pour vous aider à composer une scène.
(Désactivé*, 4 X 4, 3 X 3, Croix, Diagonale)
152
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
Réglagle de la touche Vitesse sur l’objectif
Réglez la vitesse du zoom des touches de l’objectif Power Zoom sur
la valeur rapide, moyenne ou lente. A vitesse rapide, le son du zoom
augmente et risque d’être capturé dans les enregistrements vidéo. Cette
fonction n’est disponible que lorsque l’objectif Power Zoom est fixé à l’aide
de la bague d’adaptation.
Voyant de mise au point
Afin d’optimiser la mise au point automatique dans les endroits sombres,
activez le voyant de mise au point. Cette fonction donne de meilleurs
résultats lorsque le voyant de mise au point est activé pour la prise de
photo dans les endroits sombres.
Autoportrait automatique
Réglez l’appareil pour qu’il s’allume et passe automatiquement en
mode Autoportrait lorsque vous inclinez l’écran vers le haut. En mode
Autoportrait, les options de retardateur (3 secondes), One-Touch Shot,
détection des visages et beauté sont automatiquement activées.
153
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo
Voici comment configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo.
Pour définir les
paramètres
En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺ q
ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Son
• Volume système : définir le volume sonore ou
désactiver complètement le son. (Désactivé, Bas,
Moyen*, Elevé)
Même si le volume système est désactivé, l’appareil photo
émet un son lors de la lecture vidéo ou d’un diaporama.
• Son de la mise au point : définir le son que l’appareil
photo émet en enfonçant le déclencheur à mi-course.
(Désactivé, Activé*)
• Son des touches : définir le son que l’appareil photo
émet en appuyant sur des touches ou sur l’écran pour
l’allumer ou l’éteindre. (Désactivé, Activé*)
Vue rapide
Définir la durée de la vue rapide – délai au cours duquel
l’appareil photo affiche la photo immédiatement après la
prise de vue. (Désactivé, 1 s*, 3 s, 5 s, Maintenir)
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Réglage
affichage
Régler la luminosité de l’écran, la luminosité automatique,
la couleur ou l’indicateur de niveau.
• Luminosité écran : régler la luminosité de l’écran
manuellement.
• Luminosité auto : activer ou désactiver la luminosité
automatique. (Désactivé, Activé*)
• Colorimétrie écran : régler manuellement la
colorimétrie de l’écran.
• Calibrage horizontal : étalonner l’indicateur de niveau.
Si l’indicateur de niveau n’est pas droit, positionnez
l’appareil photo sur une surface plane, puis suivez les
instructions à l’écran.
• Il est impossible d’accéder à l’option Calibrage
horizontal en mode Lecture.
• Il est impossible d’utiliser l’indicateur de niveau lors
d’une prise de vue en orientation portrait.
Désactivation
écran auto
Définir le délai de désactivation de l’écran. Après une durée
prédéfinie sans utiliser l’appareil photo, l’écran s’éteint.
(Désactivé, 30 s*, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min)
Paramètres
154
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Mise hors
tension auto
Définir le délai de mise hors tension. L’appareil photo
s’éteint lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant une période
prédéfinie. (Désactivé, 1 min*, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min,
30 min)
• L’appareil photo mémorise le délai d’extinction même si
vous remplacez la batterie.
• Si l’appareil photo est connecté à un ordinateur ou à
un téléviseur et qu’une vidéo ou un diaporama est en
cours de lecture, il est possible que la fonction Mise
hors tension auto ne fonctionne pas.
Affichage de
l'aide
Activer l’affichage de texte d’aide sur les menus et les
fonctions. (Désactivé, Activé*)
Appuyez sur [n] pour masquer le texte d’aide.
Language Sélectionnez une langue d’affichage sur l’écran de
l’appareil photo.
Date et heure
Définir la date, l’heure, le format de date, le fuseau horaire
et indiquer si la date doit être mentionnée sur les photos.
(Fuseau horaire, Configuration date/heure, Type date,
Type d'heure, Impression)
• La date apparaît en bas à droite de la photo.
• Lorsque vous imprimez une photo, il est possible
que certaines imprimantes n’impriment pas la date
correctement.
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Vidéo
Sélectionner la sortie des signaux vidéo appropriée à votre
pays lorsque l’appareil photo est raccordé à un appareil
vidéo externe, comme un moniteur ou un téléviseur HD.
• NTSC : États-Unis, Canada, Japon, Corée, Taïwan,
Mexique, etc.
• PAL (compatible uniquement avec PAL B, D, G, H ou I) :
Allemagne, Australie, Autriche, Belgique, Chine,
Danemark, Espagne, Finlande, France, Italie, Koweït,
Malaisie, Norvège, Nouvelle-Zélande, Royaume-Uni,
Singapour, Suède, Suisse, Thaïlande, etc.
Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC)
Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un téléviseur
HD compatible avec la fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), vous
pouvez contrôler la fonction de lecture de l’appareil photo
à l’aide d’une télécommande.
• Désactivé : il est impossible de contrôler la fonction de
lecture de l’appareil photo à l’aide de la télécommande
du téléviseur.
• Activé* : il est possible de contrôler la fonction de
lecture de l’appareil photo à l’aide de la télécommande
du téléviseur.
Sortie HDMI
Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un téléviseur
HD par le biais d’un câble HDMI, vous pouvez changer la
résolution de l’image.
• NTSC : Automatique*, 1080i, 720p, 480p, 576p (actif
uniquement lorsque le réglage PAL est sélectionné)
Si le téléviseur HD n’est pas compatible avec la résolution
sélectionnée, l’appareil photo définit la résolution au
niveau inférieur.
155
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Numéro
fichier
Définissez la méthode de création des noms de fichier et
de dossier.
• Réinitialiser : après utilisation de la fonction de
réinitialisation, la dénomination des nouveaux fichiers
débute à 0001.
• Série* : les nouveaux numéros de fichiers s’ajoutent à la
suite de ceux déjà existants, même si vous avez inséré ou
formaté une nouvelle carte mémoire ou que vous avez
supprimé toutes les photos existantes.
• Le nom du premier dossier est 100PHOTO. Si vous avez
sélectionné l’espace colorimétrique sRGB et la dénomination
standard des fichiers, le nom du premier fichier correspond à
SAM_0001.
• Les noms des fichiers vont progressivement de SAM_0001 à
SAM_9999 d’un incrément de 1.
• Les noms des dossiers vont progressivement de 100PHOTO à
999PHOTO d’un incrément de 1.
• Un même dossier peut contenir 9 999 fichiers maximum.
• Les numéros de fichiers sont attribués conformément aux
caractéristiques DCF (Design rule for Camera File system).
• Si vous modifiez le nom d’un fichier (par exemple sur un
ordinateur), l’appareil photo n’est alors pas en mesure de le lire.
Formater
Formater la carte mémoire. Le formatage supprime
l’ensemble des fichiers, y compris les fichiers protégés.
(Non*, Oui)
Il est possible que des erreurs se produisent si vous utilisez
une carte mémoire formatée à l’aide d’un appareil photo
d’une autre marque, d’un lecteur de cartes mémoire ou
d’un ordinateur. Veuillez formater la carte mémoire avec
l’appareil photo avant de l’utiliser pour la prise de photos.
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Informations
périphérique
Afficher la version du micrologiciel du boîtier et de l’objectif,
l’adresse Mac et le numéro de certification réseau, ou mettre
à jour le micrologiciel.
• Mise à jour firmware : mettre à jour le firmware du boîtier
de l’appareil photo ou de l’objectif. (Micrologiciel boîtier,
Micrologiciel objectif)
• Vous pouvez effectuer la mise à jour du firmware
en connectant l’appareil photo à l’ordinateur et en
démarrant le i-Launcher. Pour plus de détails, reportezvous
à la page 178.
• Vous ne pouvez pas lancer la mise à niveau du firmware
sans avoir complètement rechargé la batterie au
préalable. Rechargez entièrement la batterie avant
d’effectuer la mise à niveau du firmware.
• Si vous mettez le firmware à jour, les paramètres
utilisateur et les valeurs sont réinitialisés. (La date,
l’heure, la langue et la sortie vidéo ne sont pas
modifiées.)
• N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque la mise à jour
est en cours.
156
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Verrouillage
Wi-Fi
Demander la saisie d’un code PIN lors de la connexion de
l’appareil photo à un smartphone.
• PIN: saisir un code PIN avant la connexion.
• Aucun*: autoriser la connexion sans saisie d’un code PIN.
• La connexion est automatique et aucun code PIN n’est
demandé lors de l’utilisation de la fonction NFC.
• Dès que vous réinitialisez les paramètres de l’appareil
photo ou mettez à jour le micrologiciel, les codes PIN
sont automatiquement générés et renouvelés.
• Si vous avez déjà connecté votre appareil photo à un
smartphone à l’aide d’un code PIN, la connexion est
automatiquement établie.
Réinitialiser
Réinitialiser le menu de configuration et les options de
prises de vue aux paramètres par défaut. (Les paramètres
de la date, de l’heure, de la langue et de la sortie vidéo ne
sont pas modifiés.) (Non*, Oui)
Licence Open
Source Afficher les licences open source.
Chapitre 6
Connexion à des appareils externes
Tirez pleinement partie des fonctionnalités de l’appareil photo en le connectant à des appareils externes, par exemple un ordinateur ou un téléviseur HD.
158
Connexion à des appareils externes
Visionnez des photos ou vidéos en raccordant l’appareil photo à un
téléviseur HD à l’aide d’un câble HDMI vendu en option.
1 En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺ q ĺ
Sortie HDMI ĺ une option (p. 154).
2 Eteignez l’appareil photo et le téléviseur.
3 Branchez l’appareil photo sur le téléviseur HD à l’aide du câble
HDMI proposé en option.
4 Allumez le téléviseur HD et sélectionnez la source vidéo HDMI.
5 Allumez l’appareil photo.
• L’appareil photo passe automatiquement en mode Lecture lorsque
vous le raccordez à un téléviseur HD.
6 Utilisez les touches de l’appareil photo pour visualiser des
photos ou lire des vidéos.
• Grâce au câble HDMI, vous pouvez brancher l’appareil photo sur le téléviseur
HD en utilisant la méthode Anynet+(CEC).
• Les fonctions Anynet+(CEC) vous permettent de contrôler les appareils
connectés en utilisant la télécommande du téléviseur.
• Si le téléviseur HD est compatible Anynet+(CEC), il s’allume automatiquement
lorsqu’il est connecté à l’appareil photo. Il est possible que cette fonction ne
soit pas disponible sur certains téléviseurs HD.
• Vous ne pouvez pas prendre de photos ou de vidéos lorsque l’appareil photo
est branché sur le téléviseur HD à l’aide d’un câble HDMI.
• Il est possible que certaines fonctions de lecture de l’appareil photo ne soient
pas disponibles lorsque celui-ci est branché sur un téléviseur HD.
• Le délai de connexion de l’appareil photo à un téléviseur HD peut varier
en fonction de la carte mémoire utilisée. La fonction principale d’une
carte mémoire étant d’augmenter la vitesse de transfert, celle-ci n’est pas
nécessairement plus rapide lors de l’utilisation de fonctions HDMI, même si
elle dispose d’un taux de transfert plus élevé.
Affichage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD
159
Connexion à des appareils externes
Transférez les fichiers d’une carte mémoire sur votre ordinateur en
connectant l’appareil photo à ce dernier.
Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows
Connexion de l’appareil photo en tant que disque amovible
Vous pouvez connecter l’appareil photo à votre ordinateur en tant que
disque amovible. Ouvrez le disque amovible qui apparaît et transférez des
fichiers sur l’ordinateur.
1 Eteignez l’appareil photo.
2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB.
• Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB (extrémité la plus petite)
du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos
fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute
responsabilité en cas de perte de données.
• Si vous tentez de brancher le câble USB sur le port HDMI, l’appareil
photo risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement.
3 Allumez l’appareil photo.
• L’ordinateur détecte automatiquement l’appareil photo.
4 Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez Poste de travail ĺ
Disque amovible ĺ DCIM ĺ 100PHOTO.
5 Sélectionnez les fichiers de votre choix, puis faites-les glisser
ou enregistrez-les sur l’ordinateur.
Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur
160
Connexion à des appareils externes > Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur
Déconnexion de l’appareil photo (Windows XP)
La méthode pour déconnecter l’appareil photo est identique pour
Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows 8.
1 Assurez-vous qu’aucune donnée n’est en cours de transfert
entre l’appareil photo et l’ordinateur.
• Si le voyant d’état de l’appareil photo clignote, cela signifie que des
données sont en cours de transfert. Attendez que le voyant d’état
cesse de clignoter.
2 Cliquez sur dans la barre d’outils en bas à droite de l’écran
de l’ordinateur.
3 Cliquez sur le message qui apparaît.
4 Cliquez sur la zone du message indiquant que l’appareil photo
a été retiré en toute sécurité.
5 Débranchez le câble USB.
Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Mac
Mac OS 10.5 ou version ultérieure est pris en charge.
1 Eteignez l’appareil photo.
2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur Macintosh à l’aide
du câble USB.
• Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB (extrémité la plus petite)
du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos
fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute
responsabilité en cas de perte de données.
• Si vous tentez de brancher le câble USB sur le port HDMI, l’appareil
photo risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement.
161
Connexion à des appareils externes > Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur
3 Allumez l’appareil photo.
• L’ordinateur détecte automatiquement l’appareil photo et affiche
une icône de disque amovible.
4 Ouvrez le disque amovible.
5 Transférez vos photos ou vidéos sur l’ordinateur Mac.
162
Connexion à des appareils externes
Vous pouvez afficher et modifier les fichiers à l’aide des programmes
fournis. Vous pouvez envoyer des fichiers à l’ordinateur via le réseau sans fil.
Installation des programmes depuis le CD
fourni
1 Insérez le CD d’installation dans le lecteur de votre ordinateur.
2 Sélectionnez la langue.
3 Sélectionnez le programme à installer.
4 Suivez les instructions à l’écran.
5 Cliquez sur Exit pour terminer l’installation.
Programmes disponibles lors de l’utilisation d’i-Launcher
Elément Description
Firmware Upgrade Vous pouvez télécharger le firmware de
l’appareil photo.
PC Auto Backup
i-Launcher propose un lien pour télécharger
le programme PC Auto Backup lorsque vous
connectez l’appareil photo à un ordinateur.
A l’aide de la fonction sans fil, vous pouvez
envoyer sur un ordinateur les photos ou vidéos
enregistrées avec l’appareil photo.
Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur
163
Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur
Utilisation d’i-Launcher
i-Launcher vous permet de mettre à jour le micrologiciel de l’appareil
photo ou de l’objectif ou vous fournit un lien pour télécharger le
programme PC Auto Backup.
Configuration requise pour Windows
Elément Configuration requise
Processeur Intel® Core™ 2 Duo cadencé à 1,66 GHz ou plus puissant /
AMD Athlon X2 Dual-Core cadencé à 2,2 GHz ou plus puissant
Mémoire vive Minimum 512 Mo de RAM (1 Go ou plus recommandé)
Système
d’exploitation* Windows 7, Windows 8
Capacité du
disque dur 250 Mo minimum (1 Go et plus recommandé)
Divers
• Lecteur de CD-ROM
• Pour une résolution de 1024X768 pixels, un moniteur
couleur 16 bits compatible est recommandé (pour
une résolution de 1280X1024 pixels, un écran couleur
32 bits est recommandé)
• Port USB 2.0
• Carte vidéo nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT ou plus puissante /
ATI X1600 ou plus puissante
• Microsoft DirectX 9.0c ou version ultérieure
* Une version 32 bits de i-Launcher sera installée même sur les éditions 64 bits de Windows 7
et Windows 8.
• Les exigences de la page suivante sont uniquement des recommandations.
i-Launcher peut ne pas fonctionner correctement sur certains ordinateurs,
même si ceux-ci satisfont à la configuration requise.
• Si l’ordinateur ne répond pas à la configuration requise, un problème de
lecture vidéo risque de se produire.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages résultant de
l’utilisation d’ordinateurs non conformes, notamment les ordinateurs assemblés.
Configuration requise pour Mac
Elément Configuration requise
Système d’exploitation Mac OS 10.5 ou ultérieur (sauf PowerPC)
Mémoire vive Minimum 256 Mo de RAM (512 Mo ou plus
recommandé)
Capacité du disque dur 110 Mo minimum
Divers Port USB 2.0, lecteur de CD-ROM
Ouverture d’i-Launcher
Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez Démarrer Démarrer → Tous les
programmes → Samsung → i-Launcher → Samsung i-Launcher. Sinon,
cliquez sur Applications → Samsung → i-Launcher sur l'ordinateur Mac
OS.
164
Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur
Téléchargement du firmware
Depuis l’écran Samsung i-Launcher, cliquez sur Firmware Upgrade. Pour
plus de détails sur la mise à jour du micrologiciel, veuillez-vous reporter à
la page 178.
Téléchargement du programme PC Auto Backup
Depuis l’écran Samsung i-Launcher, cliquez sur PC Auto Backup.
Pour en savoir plus sur l’installation du programme PC Auto Backup,
reportez-vous à la page 134.
Installation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
1 Insérez le DVD-ROM Adobe Photoshop Lightroom dans
l’ordinateur.
2 Sélectionnez la langue.
3 Suivez les instructions à l’écran.
Utilisation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
Les photos prises par un appareil numérique sont souvent converties
aux formats JPEG et stockées en mémoire selon les réglages de l’appareil
photo au moment de la prise de vue. Les fichiers RAW ne sont pas
convertis au format JPEG et sont stockés dans la mémoire sans qu’aucune
modification ne soit effectuée. Adobe Photoshop Lightroom vous permet
d’étalonner le niveau d’exposition, la balance des blancs, les tonalités des
couleurs, les contrastes et les couleurs des photos. Vous pouvez également
retoucher les fichiers JPEG ou TIFF ainsi que les fichiers RAW. Pour
davantage d’informations, consultez le guide du programme en question.
• En fonction de votre version d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, il se peut que
vous ne puissiez pas ouvrir les fichiers RAW. Dans ce cas, mettez le programme
à jour depuis le site Web d’Adobe.
• Il se peut qu’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom affiche différemment les effets de
luminosité, de couleurs et autres d’une image. Cela est dû à la suppression des
paramètres et des options d’origine de l’appareil photo, appliqués au moment
de l’enregistrement de l’image, en vue du traitement dans Adobe Photoshop
Lightroom.
Chapitre 7
Annexe
Obtenez des informations concernant les messages d’erreur,
l’entretien de l’appareil photo, des conseils de dépannage, les caractéristiques et les accessoires en option.
166
Annexe
Lorsque l’un des messages d’erreur suivants apparaît, reportez-vous aux
solutions proposées pour tenter de résoudre le problème.
Messages d'erreur Solutions possibles
Objectif verrouillé
L’objectif est verrouillé. Faire pivoter l’objectif
dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d’une
montre (p. 48).
Erreur de carte
• Eteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le.
• Retirez la carte mémoire, puis insérez-la de
nouveau.
• Formatez la carte mémoire.
Batterie faible Insérez une batterie chargée ou rechargez celle
qui est déjà en place.
Aucun fichier image Prenez des photos ou insérez une carte
mémoire qui en contient.
Périphérique
déconnecté.
La connexion réseau s’est interrompue pendant
le transfert de photos vers des appareils pris en
charge. Sélectionnez de nouveau un appareil
pris en charge.
Erreur de fichier Supprimez le fichier endommagé ou contactez
le centre de service après-vente.
Messages d'erreur Solutions possibles
Mémoire pleine Supprimez les fichiers inutiles ou insérez une
nouvelle carte mémoire.
Échec transfert.
• L’appareil photo n’a pas pu envoyer d’e-mails
ou de fichiers à d’autres appareils. Ré-essayez
de l’envoyer.
• Vérifiez la connexion réseau et ré-essayez.
Impossible de prendre
une photo car le numéro
de dossier/fichier sur la
carte mémoire a atteint
les valeurs maximales.
Réinitialiser le numéro
de dossier ?
Les noms de fichier ne correspondent pas à la
norme DCF. Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour
réinitialiser le nombre de dossiers.
Error 00
Eteignez l’appareil photo avant de retirer
l’objectif. Si le message s’affiche toujours,
contactez le centre de service après-vente.
Messages d’erreur
167
Annexe
Nettoyage de l’appareil photo
Objectif et écran de l’appareil photo
Utilisez un pinceau pour éliminer la poussière et essuyez délicatement
l’objectif avec un chiffon doux. S’il reste de la poussière, humidifiez une
lingette avec du nettoyant liquide pour objectif et essuyez délicatement.
Capteur d’images
En fonction des conditions de prise de vue, de la poussière peut apparaître
sur les photos suite à l’exposition du capteur d’images à l’environnement
extérieur. Ce phénomène est normal et l’exposition à la poussière fait
partie de l’utilisation quotidienne de l’appareil photo. Évitez tout contact
avec le capteur d’images lors de l’utilisation de la soufflette.
Boîtier de l’appareil photo
Essuyez-le délicatement avec un chiffon doux et sec.
N’utilisez jamais de benzène, de diluants ou d’alcool pour nettoyer l’appareil.
Ces produits peuvent l’endommager ou entraîner un dysfonctionnement de
l’appareil photo.
Entretien de l’appareil photo
168
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Utilisation sur la plage ou en bord de mer
• Protégez l’appareil photo du sable et de la poussière lorsque vous
l’utilisez à la plage ou dans d’autres endroits similaires.
• L’appareil photo n’est pas étanche. Ne manipulez pas la batterie,
l’adaptateur ou la carte mémoire avec les mains humides. Cela peut
entraîner la détérioration de l’appareil photo.
Rangement pour une durée prolongée
• Lorsque vous rangez l’appareil photo pour une durée prolongée, placezle
dans un contenant clos avec un matériau absorbant comme du gel de
silice.
• Lorsqu’elle n’est pas utilisée pendant une période prolongée, une
batterie pleine se décharge progressivement et doit alors être rechargée
avant l’utilisation suivante.
• Il est possible de régler la date et l’heure lorsque l’appareil photo est
éteint et que la batterie ne se trouve pas dans l’appareil photo pendant
une durée prolongée.
Usage et rangement de l’appareil photo
Usage ou rangement inapproprié de l’appareil photo
• Evitez d’exposer l’appareil photo à des températures extrêmes.
• Evitez d’utiliser l’appareil photo dans des endroits très humides ou dans
lesquels le taux d’humidité varie beaucoup.
• Evitez d’exposer l’appareil photo à la lumière directe du soleil et de le
ranger dans des endroits chauds, mal ventilés, comme à l’intérieur d’une
voiture en été.
• Protégez l’appareil photo et son écran contre les chocs et les vibrations
excessives susceptibles de les endommager.
• Evitez d’utiliser et de ranger l’appareil photo dans un endroit
poussiéreux, mal entretenu, humide ou mal ventilé, afin de ne pas
endommager ses composants internes.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de combustibles ou de
produits chimiques inflammables. Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais
de liquides inflammables, de gaz ou de matériaux explosifs dans le
même compartiment que l’appareil photo ou ses accessoires.
• Ne rangez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de boules de naphtaline.
169
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Usage avec précaution de l’appareil photo dans les
environnements humides
Lorsque vous transférez l’appareil photo d’un environnement froid à un
environnement chaud, de la condensation peut se former sur l’objectif
et les composants internes de l’appareil photo. Si tel est le cas, éteignez
l’appareil photo et attendez au moins 1 heure. Si de la condensation s’est
formée sur la carte mémoire, retirez-la de l’appareil photo et attendez que
l’humidité se soit évaporée avant de la réinsérer.
Autres avertissements
• Ne faites pas tournoyer l’appareil photo par la dragonne. Vous risquez de vous
blesser, de blesser d’autres personnes ou d’endommager l’appareil photo.
• Ne peignez pas l’appareil photo, la peinture risquant de bloquer ses
pièces mobiles et de perturber son fonctionnement.
• Eteignez l’appareil photo si vous ne l’utilisez pas.
• L’appareil photo contient des pièces fragiles. Evitez de faire subir des
chocs à l’appareil photo.
• Protégez l’écran de toute pression extérieure en le conservant dans l’étui
lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Protégez l’appareil photo des rayures en le
tenant à l’écart du sable, des objets pointus ou des pièces de monnaie.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est fissuré ou endommagé. Des
morceaux de plastique ou d’acrylique risquent de vous blesser les mains
ou le visage. Apportez l’appareil photo dans un centre de service aprèsvente
Samsung afin de la faire réparer.
• Ne posez jamais l’appareil photo, sa batterie, son chargeur ou ses
accessoires à proximité, à l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’un dispositif
chauffant, tel qu’un four à micro-ondes, une cuisinière ou un radiateur.
La chaleur peut déformer ou faire surchauffer ces appareils et provoquer
une incendie ou une explosion.
• Evitez toute exposition de l’objectif à la lumière directe du soleil — ceci
risque d’entraîner une décoloration ou un mauvais fonctionnement du
capteur d’images.
• Protégez l’objectif des traces de doigt et des éraflures. Nettoyez l’objectif
à l’aide d’un chiffon doux et propre, exempt de poussière.
• L’appareil photo peut s’éteindre en cas de pression extérieure. Cela a
pour but de protéger la carte mémoire. Allumez l’appareil photo pour
l’utiliser à nouveau.
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo chauffe en cours d’utilisation.
Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ou les
performances de l’appareil photo.
• Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo à des températures faibles, il
peut mettre du temps à s’allumer, une décoloration peut se produire
temporairement ou des images persistantes peuvent apparaître. Il
ne s’agit en aucun cas d’un dysfonctionnement, et ces perturbations
momentanées se corrigent d’elles-mêmes une fois que l’appareil photo
retrouve à nouveau une température plus modérée.
• La peinture ou le métal sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut provoquer
des allergies, des démangeaisons, de l’eczéma ou des boursouflures pour
les personnes à peau sensible. Si vous présentez de tels symptômes,
arrêtez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil photo et consultez un
médecin.
• N’introduisez pas de corps étrangers dans les compartiments, les
logements ou les ouvertures de l’appareil photo. Il est possible que votre
garantie ne couvre pas les dommages provoqués par une mauvaise
utilisation.
• Ne confiez pas la réparation de l’appareil photo à un technicien non
agréé et ne tentez pas de le réparer vous-même. Votre garantie ne
couvre pas les dégâts résultant d’une réparation par un technicien non
agréé.
170
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
A propos des cartes mémoire
Cartes mémoires prises en charge
Ce produit prend en charge les cartes mémoire microSD, microSDHC ou
microSDXC.
Adaptateur de carte mémoire
Carte mémoire
Pour pouvoir lire des données sur un ordinateur ou par le biais d’un lecteur
de cartes, insérez la carte dans l’adaptateur approprié.
171
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Capacité de la carte mémoire
La capacité de la mémoire peut varier en fonction de la scène ou des conditions de prise de vue. Ces capacités sont données pour une carte SD de 2 Go.
Taille
Qualité
Maximale Elevée Normale RAW RAW + Très
élevée RAW + Elevée RAW + Normale
Photo
20.0M (5472X3648) 160 290 398 55 35 44 48
10.1M (3888X2592) 288 486 630 - 44 51 53
5.9M (2976X1984) 435 679 835 - 49 54 56
2.0M (1728X1152) 831 1 081 1 201 - 56 58 57
Mode Rafale 489 743 899 - - - -
16.9M (5472X3080) 186 332 450 - 37 46 50
7.8M (3712X2088) 355 577 730 - 48 52 55
4.9M (2944X1656) 497 752 908 - 51 55 56
2.1M (1920X1080) 1 546 2 804 3 847 - 60 62 63
13.3M (3648X3648) 228 398 529 - 40 48 52
7.0M (2640X2640) 385 616 771 - 48 53 55
4.0M (2000X2000) 566 829 981 - 52 56 57
1.1M (1024X1024) 2 779 4 690 6 085 - 62 63 64
172
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire
• Evitez d’exposer la carte mémoire à des températures extrêmes
(inférieures à 0 °C ou supérieures à 40 °C). Cela risque de provoquer des
dysfonctionnements de la carte mémoire.
• Introduisez la carte mémoire dans le bon sens. Dans le cas contraire,
vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil photo ainsi que la carte mémoire.
• N’utilisez pas de carte mémoire formatée avec un autre appareil photo
ou avec un ordinateur. Reformatez la carte mémoire sur l’appareil photo.
• Eteignez l’appareil photo avant d’introduire ou de retirer la carte
mémoire.
• Vous ne devez pas retirer la carte mémoire ou éteindre l’appareil photo
lorsque le voyant clignote. Vous risquez d’endommager vos données.
• Au terme de la durée de vie de la carte mémoire, vous ne pouvez plus
stocker de photos sur la carte. Utilisez une autre carte mémoire.
• Evitez de plier la carte mémoire, de la laisser tomber ou de la soumettre
à des chocs ou des pressions importantes.
• Evitez d’utiliser ou de ranger toute carte mémoire à proximité de champs
magnétiques.
• Evitez d’utiliser ou de ranger toute carte mémoire dans des
environnements chauds, très humides ou en contact avec des
substances corrosives.
Taille Qualité
HQ Normale
Vidéo
1920X1080 (30 ips)
Environ 17' Environ 19' 51"
1280X720 (30 ips)
Environ 23' 46" Environ 29' 38"
640X480 (30 ips)
Environ 52' 57" Environ 69' 43"
Pour partager (30 ips) - Environ 235' 48"
• Les valeurs précédentes sont mesurées sans utiliser la fonction de zoom.
• Le temps d’enregistrement disponible peut varier si le zoom est utilisé.
• Plusieurs vidéos ont été enregistrées successivement afin de déterminer la durée totale
d’enregistrement.
• La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 29 minutes et 59 secondes par fichier.
• La durée maximale de lecture de vidéos Pour partager est de 30 secondes par fichier.
173
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
A propos de la batterie
Utilisez uniquement des batteries homologuées par Samsung.
Caractéristiques de la batterie
Elément Description
Modèle* B740AE/B740AC/B740AU/B740AK
Type Batterie au lithium-ion
Capacité des cellules 2 330 mAh
Tension 3,8 V
Temps de charge** (Lorsque
la batterie est complètement
déchargée)
Environ 270 min
* Les caractéristiques de la batterie ou du modèle peuvent différer selon votre région.
** Les valeurs indiquées ci-dessus sont basées sur l’utilisation du câble de connexion USB et de
l’adaptateur secteur fournis. La recharge de la batterie en la raccordant à un ordinateur peut
s’avérer plus lente.
• Evitez tout contact de la carte mémoire avec des liquides, de la poussière
ou des corps étrangers. Si la carte mémoire est sale, nettoyez-la avec un
chiffon doux avant de l’introduire dans l’appareil photo.
• Evitez que la carte mémoire ou l’emplacement pour carte mémoire
n’entre en contact avec des liquides, de la poussière ou tout corps
étranger. Cela risque d’endommager l’appareil photo ou la carte
mémoire.
• Lorsque vous transportez une carte mémoire, rangez-la dans un étui afin
de la protéger de l’électricité statique.
• Transférez vos données importantes sur d’autres supports, tel qu’un
disque dur ou un CD ou DVD.
• Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo de manière prolongée, la
carte mémoire peut chauffer. Ceci est normal et n’entraîne aucun
dysfonctionnement.
• Utilisez une carte mémoire conforme aux normes en vigueur.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données.
174
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Des blessures pouvant s’avérer mortelles peuvent résulter d’une utilisation
imprudente ou inappropriée de la batterie. Pour votre sécurité, veuillez
suivre ces instructions destinées à utiliser la batterie correctement :
• La batterie peut s’enflammer ou bien éclater si celle-ci n’est pas manipulée
correctement. Si vous remarquez un quelconque défaut de fabrication,
une fêlure ou d’autres anomalies sur la batterie, cessez de l’utiliser
immédiatement et contactez votre fabricant.
• Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs de batterie originaux recommandés
par le fabricant, et rechargez la batterie en respectant scrupuleusement les
consignes décrites dans ce mode d’emploi.
• Ne placez pas la batterie à proximité d’appareils chauffants ou dans un
environnement soumis à des températures élevées, par exemple à l’intérieur
d’une voiture en été.
• Ne placez jamais la batterie dans un four à micro-ondes.
• Evitez de stocker ou d’utiliser la batterie dans des endroits chauds et humides
comme des spas ou des cabines de douche.
• Ne posez pas l’appareil sur des surfaces inflammables comme de la literie, des
couvertures, des tapis ou des couvertures électriques pendant des périodes
prolongées.
• Lorsque l’appareil est allumé, ne le laissez pas dans un espace confiné
pendant une période prolongée.
• Ne laissez pas les bornes de la batterie entrer en contact avec des objets
métalliques comme des colliers, des pièces de monnaie, des clés ou des
montres.
• Utilisez uniquement des batteries de remplacement lithium-ion originales
recommandées par le fabricant.
• Ne démontez ou ne perforez pas la batterie avec un objet tranchant.
• Evitez de soumettre la batterie à une pression élevée ou à des éléments
susceptibles de l’écraser.
• Evitez de soumettre la batterie à des chocs importants, par exemple la laisser
tomber de très haut.
• N’exposez pas la batterie à des températures d’au moins 60 °C.
• Evitez de mettre la batterie en contact avec des liquides ou de l’humidité.
• Evitez tout contact de la batterie avec des flammes et de l’exposer à une
chaleur intense ou au soleil de façon prolongée.
Informations sur le traitement des batteries usagées
• Portez une attention particulière à la façon dont vous jetez les batteries
usagées.
• Ne jetez pas la batterie au feu.
• Les consignes de traitement des batteries usagées peuvent varier d’un pays
à l’autre. Procédez à la mise au rebut de la batterie usagée en accord avec
toutes les réglementations locales et fédérales en vigueur.
Consignes relatives à la recharge de la batterie
Respectez les consignes de recharge indiquées dans ce mode d’emploi pour
recharger la batterie. La batterie peut s’enflammer ou éclater si celle-ci n’est pas
rechargée correctement.
175
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Autonomie de la batterie
Mode Prise de vue Durée moyenne / Nombre de photos
Photos
• Environ 325 min /Environ 650 photos (Si vous fixez un
objectif 9 mm et utilisez le flash interne)
• Environ 265 min /Environ 530 photos (Si vous fixez un
objectif entre 9 et 27 mm et utilisez le flash externe)
Vidéo Environ 190 min (Enregistrement de vidéos à une
résolution de 1920X1080 et à une fréquence de 30 ips.)
• Ces chiffres proviennent des normes de test CIPA.
Ils peuvent varier en fonction de votre utilisation réelle.
• Les temps de prise de vue disponibles varient en fonction de l’arrièreplan,
de l’intervalle de prise de vue et des conditions d’utilisation.
• Plusieurs vidéos ont été enregistrées successivement afin de déterminer
la durée totale d’enregistrement.
Message de batterie faible
Lorsque la batterie est complètement déchargée, l’icône de batterie
devient rouge et le message « Batterie faible » apparaît.
Remarques à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie
• Evitez d’exposer les cartes mémoire à des températures extrêmes
(inférieures à 0 °C ou supérieures à 40 °C). Les températures extrêmes
peuvent avoir pour effet de réduire la capacité de recharge des batteries.
• Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo de manière prolongée, la zone
située autour de la trappe batterie peut chauffer. Ceci n’affecte pas
l’utilisation normale de l’appareil photo.
• Ne tirez pas sur le cordon d’alimentation pour le débrancher de la prise
secteur, car vous risquez de provoquer des flammes ou de recevoir une
décharge électrique.
• A des températures inférieures à 0 °C, la capacité et la durée de vie de la
batterie peuvent diminuer.
• La capacité de la batterie peut diminuer à de faibles températures, mais
redevient normale à des températures plus modérées.
• Si vous rangez l’appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une période de temps
prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie. Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se
détériorer avec le temps, risquant d’endommager gravement l’appareil
photo. Si vous rangez l’appareil photo pendant une durée prolongée,
sans avoir retiré la batterie, celle-ci risque de se décharger. Lorsque la
batterie est complètement déchargée, il peut s’avérer impossible de la
recharger.
• Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil photo pendant une durée
prolongée (3 mois ou plus), vérifiez la batterie et rechargez-la
régulièrement. Si vous laissez continuellement la batterie se décharger,
sa capacité et sa durée de vie peuvent diminuer, ce qui peut entraîner
son dysfonctionnement, des flammes ou son éclatement.
176
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Avertissements à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie
Protégez la batterie, le chargeur et la carte mémoire de toute
détérioration.
Evitez tout contact de la batterie avec des objets métalliques, car
cela risque de provoquer un court-circuit entre les bornes + et - de la
batterie, de l’endommager de manière temporaire ou permanente, ou de
provoquer des flammes ou une électrocution .
Remarques concernant la recharge de la batterie
• Si le voyant d’état est éteint, assurez-vous que la batterie est
correctement mise en place.
• Si lors de la recharge l’appareil photo est allumé, la batterie peut ne
pas se recharger complètement. Eteignez l’appareil photo avant de
recharger la batterie.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo lors de la recharge de la batterie. Vous
risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge
électrique.
• Ne tirez pas sur le cordon d’alimentation pour le débrancher de la prise
secteur, car vous risquez de provoquer des flammes ou de recevoir une
décharge électrique.
• Laissez la batterie se recharger pendant au moins 10 minutes avant
d’allumer l’appareil photo.
• Si vous raccordez l’appareil photo à une source d’alimentation externe
alors que la batterie est déchargée, l’utilisation de fonctions à forte
consommation énergétique provoque l’extinction de l’appareil
photo. Rechargez la batterie pour pouvoir utiliser l’appareil photo
normalement.
• Si vous rebranchez le cordon d’alimentation alors que la batterie est
complètement rechargée, le voyant d’état s’allume pendant environ
30 minutes.
• L’utilisation du flash et l’enregistrement de vidéos déchargent
rapidement la batterie. Rechargez la batterie jusqu’à ce que le voyant
d’état rouge s’éteigne.
• Si le voyant d’état rouge clignote, rebranchez le cordon ou retirez la
batterie et réintroduisez-la.
• Si vous rechargez la batterie lorsque le cordon surchauffe ou lorsque la
température est trop élevée, le voyant d’état rouge peut clignoter. La
recharge démarre lorsque la batterie a refroidi.
• La recharge excessive des batteries peut raccourcir leur durée de vie. A la
fin de chaque recharge, débranchez le cordon de l’appareil photo.
• Ne tordez pas le cordon d’alimentation et ne placez pas d’objets lourds
dessus. Vous risquez d’endommager le cordon.
177
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Remarques à propos de la recharge avec raccordement à un
ordinateur
• Utilisez uniquement le câble USB fourni.
• La recharge de la batterie peut s’avérer impossible quand :
- vous utilisez un concentrateur USB ;
- d’autres appareils USB sont raccordés à votre ordinateur ;
- vous connectez le câble sur le port situé sur la face avant de votre ordinateur ;
- le port USB de votre ordinateur ne prend pas en charge un niveau standard de
puissance en sortie (5 V, 500 mA).
Utilisation et recyclage consciencieux des batteries et des
chargeurs
• Ne jetez jamais la batterie au feu. Respectez la réglementation en
vigueur concernant l’élimination des batteries usagées.
• Ne posez jamais les batteries ou l’appareil photo à l’intérieur ou audessus
d’un dispositif chauffant, tel qu’un four à micro-ondes, une
cuisinière ou un radiateur. En cas de surchauffe, les batteries risquent
d’éclater.
178
Annexe
Mise à jour du micrologiciel
Connectez l’appareil photo à l’ordinateur et procédez à la mise à jour du
micrologiciel de l’appareil photo ou de l’objectif.
• Vous ne pouvez pas lancer la mise à niveau du firmware sans avoir
complètement rechargé la batterie au préalable. Rechargez entièrement la
batterie avant d’effectuer la mise à niveau du firmware.
• Si vous mettez le firmware à jour, les paramètres utilisateur et les valeurs
sont réinitialisés. (La date, l’heure, la langue et la sortie vidéo ne sont pas
modifiées.)
• N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque la mise à jour est en cours.
1 Eteignez l’appareil photo.
2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB.
• Vous devez brancher l'extrémité la plus petite du câble USB sur l’appareil
photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble
à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de
données.
• Si vous tentez de brancher le câble USB sur le port HDMI, l’appareil photo
risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement.
3 Allumez l’appareil photo.
4 Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez i-Launcher ĺ Firmware
Upgrade.
5 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour télécharger le
micrologiciel dans l’appareil photo.
• Vous pouvez télécharger le micrologiciel de l’appareil photo ou de
l’objectif.
6 Éteignez l’appareil photo une fois le téléchargement terminé.
7 Débranchez le câble USB.
8 Allumez l’appareil photo.
9 Appuyez sur [m] ĺ q ĺ Informations périphérique
ĺ Mise à jour du logiciel ĺ Micrologiciel boîtier ou
Micrologiciel objectif.
10 Cliquez sur Oui sur une fenêtre contextuelle de l’appareil
photo pour la mise à jour du micrologiciel.
179
Annexe
Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente
Si l’appareil photo ne fonctionne pas correctement, vérifiez les éléments
suivants avant de contacter un représentant.
Lorsque vous apportez l’appareil photo dans un centre de service après-vente,
veillez à également fournir les autres composants qui ont pu contribuer au
dysfonctionnement, notamment la carte mémoire et la batterie.
Problème Solutions possibles
Impossible d’allumer
l’appareil photo
• Assurez-vous que la batterie est installée.
• Assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement
installée.
• Rechargez la batterie.
L’appareil photo
s’éteint de façon
inattendue
• Rechargez la batterie.
• L’appareil photo peut être réglé en mode
extinction automatique ou configuré afin que
l’écran s’éteigne automatiquement (p. 154).
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo s’éteigne
afin d’éviter que la carte mémoire ne soit
endommagée en raison d’une chaleur
excessive. Rallumez l’appareil photo.
La batterie de
l’appareil photo se
décharge rapidement
• La batterie peut se décharger plus rapidement
dans un environnement où les températures
sont basses (en dessous de 0 °C). Gardez la
batterie au chaud en la plaçant dans votre
poche.
• L’utilisation du flash et l’enregistrement de
vidéos déchargent rapidement la batterie.
Rechargez-la si nécessaire.
• La batterie est un consommable qui a une
durée de vie limitée et doit périodiquement
être remplacé. Remplacez-la si son autonomie
diminue rapidement.
Problème Solutions possibles
Impossible de prendre
des photos
• La carte mémoire est pleine. Supprimez les
fichiers inutiles ou insérez une nouvelle carte.
• Formatez la carte mémoire.
• La carte mémoire est défectueuse. Remplacez
la carte mémoire.
• Assurez-vous que l’appareil photo est allumé.
• Rechargez la batterie.
• Assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement
installée.
L’appareil photo ne
répond pas Retirez la batterie, puis replacez-la.
L’appareil photo
chauffe
Il est possible que l’appareil photo chauffe en
cours d’utilisation. Ce phénomène est normal et
n’affecte pas la durée de vie ou les performances
de l’appareil photo.
Le flash se déclenche
de façon inattendue
L’électricité statique peut provoquer le
déclenchement du flash. Il ne s’agit pas d’un
dysfonctionnement de l’appareil photo.
Le flash ne fonctionne
pas
• Le flash est peut-être réglé sur Désactivé (p. 90).
• Certains modes ne vous permettent pas
d’utiliser le flash.
La date et l’heure sont
incorrectes Réglez la date et l’heure dans le menu q (p. 154).
L’écran ou des touches
ne fonctionnent pas Retirez la batterie, puis replacez-la.
180
Annexe > Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente
Problème Solutions possibles
La carte mémoire
présente une erreur
• Eteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le.
• Retirez la carte mémoire, puis insérez-la de
nouveau.
• Formatez la carte mémoire.
Pour davantage d’informations, voir « Précautions
d’utilisation des cartes mémoire » (p. 172).
Le téléviseur ou
l’ordinateur ne
peuvent pas afficher
les photos et les
vidéos stockées sur
une carte mémoire
microSDXC.
Les cartes mémoire microSDXC utilisent le
système de fichiers exFAT. Assurez-vous que le
dispositif externe est compatible avec le système
de fichiers exFAT avant d’y connecter l’appareil
photo.
Votre ordinateur ne
reconnaît pas les
cartes mémoires
microSDXC.
Les cartes mémoire microSDXC utilisent le
système de fichiers exFAT. Pour utiliser une
carte mémoire microSDXC sur un ordinateur
Windows XP, téléchargez et effectuez la mise à
jour du pilote du système de fichiers exFAT, à
partir du site Web de Microsoft.
Impossible d’afficher
des fichiers
Si vous modifiez le nom d’un fichier, l’appareil
photo risque de ne plus pouvoir le lire (le nom de
fichier doit être conforme à la norme DCF). Si vous
rencontrez ce problème, affichez le fichier sur un
ordinateur.
Problème Solutions possibles
La photo est floue
• Assurez-vous d’avoir réglé l’option de mise au
point appropriée pour le type de prise de vue.
• Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil
photo.
• Assurez-vous que l’objectif est propre. Dans le
cas contraire, nettoyez-le (p. 167).
Les couleurs
de la photo ne
correspondent pas à
celles de la scène
Un réglage incorrect de la balance des blancs
peut provoquer un mauvais rendu des couleurs.
Sélectionnez l’option Balance des blancs
appropriée à la source de lumière (p. 72).
La photo est trop
claire ou trop sombre.
Votre photo est surexposée ou sous-exposée.
• Réglez la valeur d’ouverture ou la vitesse
d’obturation.
• Réglez la sensibilité ISO (p. 71).
• Activez ou désactivez le flash (p. 90).
• Réglez la valeur d’exposition (p. 97).
Les photos sont
déformées
L’objectif grand-angle, qui permet de
photographier avec un angle de vue large, peut
générer de très légères déformations de la photo
prise par l’appareil photo. Ceci est normal et
n’engendre pas de dysfonctionnement.
Des lignes
horizontales
apparaissent sur la
photo
Cela peut se produire lorsque le sujet est exposé à
une source lumineuse fluorescente ou une lampe
au mercure. Sélectionnez une vitesse d’obturation
lente ou réglez le mode de prise de vues sur
Automatique.
181
Annexe > Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente
Problème Solutions possibles
L’écran de lecture ne
s’affiche pas sur le
périphérique externe
connecté
• Vérifiez qu’un câble HDMI est correctement
branché sur l’écran externe.
• Assurez-vous que la carte mémoire est
reconnue.
L’ordinateur ne
reconnaît pas
l’appareil photo
• Vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement
branché.
• Assurez-vous que l’appareil photo est allumé.
• Assurez-vous d’utiliser un système
d’exploitation pris en charge.
L’appareil photo
se déconnecte de
l’ordinateur pendant
le transfert des fichiers
L’électricité statique peut interrompre la
transmission des fichiers. Débranchez le câble
USB, puis rebranchez-le.
i-Launcher ne
s’exécute pas
correctement
• Quittez i-Launcher et redémarrez l’application.
• Selon la configuration et l’environnement de
votre ordinateur, il est possible que l’application
ne démarre pas automatiquement. Si tel
est le cas, cliquez sur Démarrer ĺ Tous les
programmes ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher ĺ
Samsung i-Launcher sur votre ordinateur
Windows. (Dans le cas de Windows 8, ouvrez
l’écran d’accueil, puis sélectionnez Toutes les
applications ĺ Samsung i-Launcher.) Sinon,
cliquez sur Applications ĺ Samsung ĺ
i-Launcher sur votre ordinateur Mac OS.
Problème Solutions possibles
La fonction de mise au
point automatique ne
fonctionne pas
• La mise au point ne s’effectue pas sur le sujet.
Lorsque le sujet se trouve en dehors de la zone
AF, recadrez-le dans la zone AF, puis enfoncez le
[Déclencheur] à mi-course.
• Le sujet est trop proche. Eloignez-vous du sujet
et prenez la photo.
L’objectif est inopérant
• Vérifiez que l’objectif est correctement installé.
• Retirez l’objectif de l’appareil photo et
remettez-le en place.
Le flash externe ne
fonctionne pas
Assurez-vous que le flash externe est
correctement monté sur le port du flash externe.
Lorsque vous allumez
l’appareil photo,
l’écran de réglage de
la date et de l’heure
s’affiche
• Réglez de nouveau la date et l’heure.
• Cet écran apparaît lorsque la source
d’alimentation interne de l’appareil photo est
complètement déchargée. Insérez une batterie
pleine puis éteignez l’appareil photo pendant
au moins 72 heures afin d’assurer une recharge
complète.
182
Annexe
Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Capteur d’images
Type BSI CMOS
Dimensions du capteur 13,2 X 8,8 mm
Pixels effectifs Environ 20,5 mégapixels
Nombre total de pixels Environ 20,9 mégapixels
Filtre couleur Filtre RGB couleurs primaires
Monture de l’objectif
Type Monture Samsung NX-M
Objectif disponible Objectifs Samsung NX-M
Stabilisation de l’image
Type Décentrement (dépend de l’objectif)
Mode Désactivée/Mode 1/Mode 2
Correction des déformations
Activé / Désactivé (dépend de l’objectif)
i-Function
Pris en charge (en fonction de l’objectif)
Écran
Type TFT LCD avec volet tactile (compatible type C)
Taille 3,0" (Environ 75,2 mm)
Résolution HVGA (320X480) 460,8 k points
Champ de vision Environ 100 %
Angle Pivotement vers le haut : 180°
Affichage utilisateur Grille, Icônes, Histogramme, Indicateur de niveau
Mise au point
Type Contraste Mise au point automatique
Foyer de mise au point
automatique
• Sélection : 1 point (sélection libre)
• Multiple : Normal 21 points, Macro 35 points
• Détection des visages : max. 10 visages
• Mise au point avec suivi des objets
Mode AF unique, AF continu, Mise au point manuelle,
Mise au point tactile et Déclencheur
Voyant de mise au
point assistée LED verte
183
Annexe > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Obturateur
Type Obturateur électronique
Vitesse
• Automatique : 1/16 000 – 1/4 s
• Manuel : 1/16 000 – 30 s (Palier 1/3 EV)
• Bulb (limite de temps : 4 min)
Exposition
Système de mesure de
l’exposition
TTL 221 (17X13) Segment bloc
Mesure de l’exposition : Multiple, Centrée,
Sélective
Plage de la mesure de l’exposition :
EV 0–18 (ISO160 · 9 mm, F3.5)
Compensation ±3 EV (Palier 1/3 EV)
Verrouillage AE Touche de personnalisation
Equivalent ISO
Automatique, 160, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200,
6400, 12800 (1 ou Palier 1/3 EV)
* Vous pouvez sélectionner les paramètres ISO auto
jusqu’à ISO 3200. Vous pouvez sélectionner ISO 100 et
25600.
Mode de sélection
Mode
Unique, Continue, Mode Rafale (5M uniquement),
Retardateur, Bracketing (Exposition automatique,
Balance des blancs, Assistant photo, Profondeur)
Prise de vue en continu
6 ips
* La vitesse maximale de prise de vue est de 6 images par
seconde. Elle ralentira au bout environ de 11 clichés au
format JPEG et de 4 clichés au format RAW. (Cela peut
varier en fonction des caractéristiques techniques de la
carte mémoire.)
Prise de vue Bracketing
Bracketing Exposition automatique (±3 EV),
Bracketing Balance des blancs, Bracketing
Assistant photo, Bracketing de profondeur de
champ
Retardateur à distance 2–30 s (intervalle d’1 seconde)
Déclenchement de
l’obturateur via le port micro-USB (en, option)
Flash
Type Flash intégré
Mode
Flash intelligent, Automatique, Yeux rouges auto,
Contre jour, Ctre jour + Yeux rouges, 1er Rideau,
2e Rideau, Désactivée
Nombre guide 4,9 (sur base ISO 160, 24 mm),
4 (sur base ISO 100, 24 mm)
Angle de vue 24 mm (équivalent film 35 mm)
Vitesse de
synchronisation Inférieure à 1/200 s
Valeur d’exposition
Flash -2 – +2 EV (Palier 1/2 EV)
Flash externe
Flash externe Samsung NX mini disponible
(SEF7A) (en, option)
Nombre guide : 8 (sur base ISO 160, 24 mm),
7 (sur base ISO 100, 24 mm)
Terminal de
synchronisation Port du flash externe
184
Annexe > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Balance des blancs
Mode
Balance des blancs automatique,
Lumière du jour, Nuageux, Blanc fluorescent,
Blanc/Noir fluorescent, Lumière du jour
fluorescent, Tungstène, Balance des blancs flash,
Réglage personnalisé, Température couleur
(Manuel)
Ajustement micro Orange / Bleu / Vert / Magenta 7 paliers
respectivement
Plage dynamique
Désactivée/Plage intelligente+/HDR
Assistant photo
Mode
Standard, Accentué, Portrait, Paysage, Naturel,
Rétro, Cool, Calme, Classique, Personnalisé 1,
Personnalisé 2, Personnalisé 3
Paramètres Couleur, Saturation, Netteté, Contraste
Prise de vue
Mode Automatique, Intelligent, Programme,
Priorité ouverture, Priorité vitesse, Manuel
Mode intelligent
Beauté, Meilleure photo, Mode Continu,
Prise Enfants, Paysage, Macro, Nature morte,
Fêtes et intérieurs, Action, Ton riche, Panorama,
Cascade, Silhouette, Coucher de soleil, Nuit,
Feux d'artifice, Lumière
Filtre intelligent Vignettage, Miniature, Esquisse, Œil de poisson
Taille
• JPEG (3:2): 20.0M (5472X3648),
10.1M (3888X2592), 5.9M (2976X1984),
5.0M (2736X1824) (mode Rafale uniquement),
2.0M (1728X1152)
• JPEG (16:9): 16.9M (5472X3080),
7.8M (3712X2088), 4.9M (2944X1656),
2.1M (1920X1080)
• JPEG (1:1): 13.3M (3648X3648),
7.0M (2640X2640), 4.0M (2000X2000),
1.1M (1024X1024)
• RAW: 20.0M (5472X3648)
Qualité Maximale, Elevée, Normale, RAW, RAW + Très élevée,
RAW + Elevée, RAW + Normale
Norme RAW SRW (ver.3.0.0)
Espace colorimétrique sRGB, Adobe RGB
Vidéo
Type MP4 (H.264)
Format Vidéo : H.264, son : AAC
Mode vidéo AE Programme, Priorité ouverture, Priorité vitesse,
Manuel
Clip vidéo Son activé / désactivé (durée de prise de vue :
maxi. 29' 59'')
Filtre intelligent Vignettage, Miniature, Esquisse, Œil de poisson
185
Annexe > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Taille 1920X1080, 1280X720, 640X480, 320X240
(Pour partager)
Fréquence d’images 30 ips
Multi-mouvements x0.25 (640X480, 320X240 uniquement), x1, x5,
x10, x20
Qualité HQ, Normale
Son Mono
Retouche Découpage de la durée, Capture d’images fixes
Lecture
Type Image unique, Miniatures (15/28), Diaporama,
Vidéo
Retouche
Filtre intelligent, Rogner, Redimensionner,
Rotation, Retouche des visages, Luminosité,
Contraste, Réglage automatique, Saturation,
Réglage RVB, Température couleur, Exposition
Filtre intelligent
Vignettage, Miniature, Onirique, Esquisse,
Œil de poisson, Classique, Rétro, Peinture à l'huile,
Dessin, Peinture à l'encre, Filtre croisé,
Prise de vue zoom
Stockage
Support
Mémoire externe (en option)* :
carte microSD (jusqu’à 2 Go garantis),
carte microSDHC (jusqu’à 32 Go garantis),
carte microSDXC (jusqu’à 64 Go garantis)
* Classe 6 et supérieure recommandée
Format de fichier RAW (SRW (ver.3.0.0)), JPEG (EXIF 2.3),
MP4 (vidéo), DCF
Réseau sans fil
Type IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Fonction
AutoShare, Remote Viewfinder, MobileLink,
Partage instantané, Sauvegarde automatique,
Samsung Link, Réseaux sociaux et Cloud,
Courriel, Baby Monitor, Group Share
NFC
Oui
Interface
Sortie numérique USB 2.0 (prise micro-USB)
Sortie vidéo • NTSC, PAL (au choix)
• HDMI
Déclenchement externe Oui
Connecteur
d’alimentation CC 5,0 V, 0,55 A via micro USB
186
Annexe > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Source d'alimentation
Type
Batterie rechargeable : B740AE/B740AC/B740AU/
B740AK (2 330 mAh, 3,8 V)
* Les caractéristiques de la batterie ou du modèle peuvent
différer selon votre région.
Dimensions (L x H x P)
110,4 x 61,9 x 22,5 mm
Poids
158 g (sans batterie, ni carte mémoire)
Température de fonctionnement
0 – 40 °C
Humidité ambiante tolérée
5 – 85%
Logiciels
i-Launcher, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 5
* Ces caractéristiques peuvent changer sans préavis à des fins d’amélioration du rendement.
* Toutes les marques de commerce et noms de produits appartiennent à leurs détenteurs
respectifs.
187
Annexe
Glossaire
AP (Point d’accès)
Un point d’accès est un appareil qui permet aux appareils sans fil de se
connecter à un réseau câblé.
Réseau Ad-Hoc
Un réseau ad-hoc est une connexion temporaire permettant de partager
des fichiers ou une connexion Internet entre des ordinateurs et des
appareils.
Adobe RGB
Adobe RGB est utilisé pour des impressions professionnelles et dispose
d’une gamme de couleurs plus importante que la norme sRGB. Il vous
permet ainsi de retoucher facilement des photos sur un ordinateur.
AEB (Bracketing d’exposition automatique)
Cette fonctionnalité permet de prendre automatiquement plusieurs
photos à différentes expositions afin de vous aider à obtenir une
exposition correcte.
AEL (Verrouillage automatique de l’exposition)
Ces fonctions vous permettent de verrouiller l’exposition sur laquelle vous
souhaitez calculer celle-ci.
AF (Mise au point automatique)
Système qui permet à l’objectif de l’appareil photo d’effectuer une mise
au point automatique sur le sujet. L’appareil photo se base sur le contraste
pour opérer la mise au point automatique.
AMOLED (matrice active à diodes organiques
électroluminescentes) / LCD (Ecran à cristaux liquides)
L’écran AMOLED est très fin et très léger, car il ne nécessite aucun
rétro-éclairage. L’écran LCD est couramment utilisé dans le secteur de
l’électronique grand public. Ce type d’écran nécessite un rétro-éclairage
séparé, de type CCFL ou LED, pour reproduire les couleurs.
Ouverture
L’ouverture contrôle la quantité de lumière atteignant le capteur de
l’appareil photo.
188
Annexe > Glossaire
Composition
En photographie, la composition signifie la disposition des éléments d’une
scène. En règle générale, une bonne composition doit obéir à la règle des
tiers.
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)
Spécification créée par la Japan Electronics and Information Technology
Industries Association (JEITA) qui définit le format et le système de fichiers
pour les appareils photo.
Profondeur de champ
Zone de netteté acceptable entre le point de mise au point le plus proche
et celui le plus éloigné. La profondeur de champ varie selon la focale et
l’ouverture utilisées, ainsi que la distance entre l’appareil photo et le sujet.
Avec, par exemple, une ouverture inférieure, la profondeur de champ
augmente et l’arrière-plan de la composition devient flou.
Bougé de l’appareil photo (flou)
Si vous bougez l’appareil photo alors que l’obturateur est ouvert, l’image
risque d’être floue. Cela est d’autant plus vrai si la vitesse d’obturation est
lente. Vous pouvez éviter ce phénomène de bougé de l’appareil photo en
augmentant la sensibilité, en utilisant le flash ou en augmentant la vitesse
d’obturation. Pour stabiliser l’appareil photo, vous pouvez également
utiliser un trépied ou la fonction OIS.
Cloud
Le Cloud est une technologie permettant de stocker des données sur
des serveurs distants et de les utiliser à partir d’un appareil via un accès
Internet.
Espace colorimétrique
Gamme des couleurs « visibles » par l’appareil photo.
Température des couleurs
La température des couleurs est une mesure exprimée en Kelvin (K) qui
indique la tonalité chromatique d’un type spécifique de source de lumière.
Lorsque la température de couleur augmente, la couleur de la source
lumineuse devient bleutée. Lorsque la température de couleur diminue, la
couleur de la source lumineuse devient rougeâtre. A 5 500 degrés Kelvin,
la couleur de la source lumineuse est similaire celle de la lumière du soleil
à midi.
189
Annexe > Glossaire
Flash
Lumière brève et intense qui permet de créer une exposition adéquate
lorsque la luminosité est faible.
Longueur de focale
Distance entre le centre de l’objectif et son point focal (en millimètres).
Des longueurs de focale plus importantes réduisent les angles de vue et
agrandissent le sujet. Des longueurs de focale moins élevées agrandissent
les angles de vue.
Histogramme
Représentation graphique de la luminosité d’une image. L’axe des
abscisses représente la luminosité et l’axe des ordonnées le nombre de
pixels. Des points à l’extrême gauche (trop sombre) ou à l’extrême droite
(trop clair) signifient que la photo n’est pas correctement exposée.
H.264 / MPEG-4
Format vidéo à compression élevée mis au point par les organismes
internationaux de normalisation ISO-IEC et ITU-T. Ce codec permet
d’obtenir une bonne qualité vidéo avec des débits binaires faibles
développés par la Joint Video Team (JVT).
EV (Valeur d’exposition)
Ensemble des combinaisons de vitesses d’obturation et d’ouverture de
l’objectif de l’appareil photo pour une même exposition.
Compensation EV
Cette fonctionnalité permet de régler rapidement la valeur d’exposition
mesurée par l’appareil photo, selon des incréments restreints, afin
d’améliorer l’exposition des photos.
Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format)
Spécification créée par la Japan Electronics and Information Technology
Industries Association (JEITA) qui définit le format de fichiers pour les
appareils photo.
Exposition
Quantité de lumière atteignant le capteur de l’appareil photo. L’exposition
est contrôlée par la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture et la
sensibilité ISO.
190
Annexe > Glossaire
Mesure de l’exposition
La mesure de l’exposition correspond à la manière dont l’appareil photo
mesure la quantité de lumière nécessaire à la définition de l’exposition.
MF (Mise au point manuelle)
Système qui permet d’effectuer une mise au point manuelle sur le sujet à
travers l’objectif de l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez utiliser la bague de mise
au point en vue de la prise de vue d’un sujet.
MJPEG (Motion JPEG)
Format vidéo avec une compression d’images JPEG.
Capteur d’images
Partie physique de l’appareil photo qui comporte une cellule
photosensible pour chaque pixel de l’image. Chaque cellule photosensible
enregistre la valeur de la luminosité d’une exposition. Il existe deux types
de capteurs : CCD (Charge-Coupled Device) et CMOS (Complementary
Metal Oxide Semiconductor).
Adresse IP (protocole Internet)
Une adresse IP est un nombre unique affecté à chacun des appareils
raccordés à Internet.
Sensibilité ISO
Sensibilité de l’appareil photo à la lumière, mesurée d’après la sensibilité
du film utilisé dans un appareil photo à pellicule. A une sensibilité ISO
élevée, la vitesse d’obturation de l’appareil photo est plus grande, ce qui
réduit le flou causé par le bougé de l’appareil ou par une faible luminosité.
Toutefois, avec une sensibilité plus élevée, le risque de parasites est
également plus grand.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
Méthode de compression des images numériques avec pertes. Les images
JPEG sont compressées afin de réduire la taille de leur fichier avec une
dégradation minimale de la résolution.
191
Annexe > Glossaire
PAL (Phase Alternate Line)
Norme d’encodage couleur vidéo utilisée dans de nombreux pays
d’Afrique, d’Asie, d’Europe et du Moyen-Orient.
Qualité
Expression du taux de compression d’une image numérique. Lorsque la
qualité de l’image est élevée, le taux de compression est bas et la taille du
fichier plus importante.
RAW (données brutes CCD)
Données originales non traitées, capturées directement par le capteur
d’images de l’appareil photo. La balance des blancs, le contraste, la
saturation, la netteté et d’autres données peuvent être modifiées avec le
logiciel de retouche avant que l’image ne soit compressée dans un format
de fichier standard.
Résolution
Nombre de pixels d’une image numérique. Les images à résolution élevée
comportent plus de pixels et présentent généralement davantage de
détails que les images avec une faible résolution.
Parasite (ou bruit)
Problème d’affichage des pixels, au niveau de leur emplacement ou de leur
clarté, sur une image numérique. Des parasites peuvent apparaître si les
photos sont prises avec une sensibilité trop élevée ou avec un réglage de
sensibilité automatique dans un environnement sombre.
NFC (Near Field Communication)
La communication NFC est une technologie de communication sans-fil à
courte portée. Vous pouvez utiliser des appareils compatibles NFC pour
activer des fonctions ou échanger des données avec d’autres appareils.
NTSC (National Television System Committee)
Norme d’encodage couleur vidéo habituellement utilisée au Japon, en
Amérique du Nord, aux Philippines, en Amérique du Sud, en Corée du Sud
et à Taïwan.
Zoom optique
Zoom qui permet d’agrandir les images à l’aide de l’objectif sans dégrader
la qualité des images.
192
Annexe > Glossaire
Vitesse d’obturation
La vitesse d’obturation est définie par la durée nécessaire à l’ouverture et à
la fermeture de l’obturateur. Du point de vue de la luminosité d’une photo,
la vitesse d’obturation constitue un facteur important, car elle contrôle
la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers l’ouverture avant d’atteindre
le capteur d’images. Par ailleurs, une vitesse d’obturation rapide accorde
moins de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer. La photo devient plus sombre
et immobilise un sujet en mouvement plus facilement.
sRGB (RGB standard)
Norme internationale de l’espace colorimétrique établie par la CEI
(Commission électrotechnique internationale). Elle est définie d’après
l’espace colorimétrique des écrans informatiques et est également utilisée
comme espace colorimétrique standard pour Exif.
Vignettage
Réduction de la luminosité ou de la saturation d’une image à sa périphérie
(bords externes). Le vignettage permet de mettre en évidence les sujets
positionnés au centre de l’image.
Balance des blancs (équilibre des couleurs)
Réglage de l’intensité des couleurs (généralement les couleurs primaires
comme le rouge, le vert et le bleu) d’une image. La balance des blancs a
pour but d’obtenir un rendu fidèle des couleurs.
Wi-Fi
La technologie Wi-Fi permet aux appareils électroniques d’échanger des
données sans fil via un réseau.
WPS (configuration Wi-Fi protégée)
WPS est une technologie permettant de sécuriser les réseaux domestiques
sans fil.
193
Annexe
Accessoires en option
Les articles suivants vous sont proposés en option :
Objectif, Flash externe, Déclenchement de l’obturateur (de type microUSB),
Batterie rechargeable, Chargeur de batterie, Sac de transport de
l’appareil photo, Étui de l’appareil photo, Carte mémoire, Filtre, Câble USB,
Câble HDMI, Dragonne
• Pour connaître le type et la disponibilité, et obtenir une image, des
accessoires, rendez-vous sur le site Web de Samsung.
• Avant tout achat d’accessoire, vérifiez qu’il est bien compatible avec l’appareil
photo. GPS10 et EM10 sont incompatibles avec l’appareil photo.
• Utilisez uniquement des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Samsung
décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages causés par l’utilisation
d’accessoires fournis par d’autres fabricants.
• Les accessoires fournis avec chaque produit peuvent différer en type et en
quantité.
194
Annexe
A
Accessoires en option
Disposition de la bague
d’adaptation 52
Mise en place du flash 51
Monter la bague d’adaptation 52
Présentation du flash 50
Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 164
Agrandissement 107
Appareil photo
Connexion à l’ordinateur 159
Connexion en tant que disque
amovible 159
Déconnexion (Windows) 160
Disposition 28
Assistant photo 74
B
Baby Monitor 132
Balance des blancs 72
Batterie
Attention 173
En charge 35
Insérer 32
Bracketing 87
C
Caractéristiques de l’appareil
photo 182
Carte mémoire
Attention 170
Insérer 32
Centre de service après-vente 179
Contenu du coffret 27
D
Date et heure 154
Déclenchement par sélection 82
Diaporama 107
DIRECT LINK 30
E
Ecran tactile 38
Effet yeux rouges 91
En charge 35
Entretien 167
Espace colorimétrique 148
F
Fichiers
Protection 105
Suppression 106
Type de photo 70
Type de vidéo 100
Filtre intelligent
Mode de prise de vue 96
Mode Lecture 116
Flash
Intensité 91
Nombre guide 25
Options du Flash 90
Fondu 101
I
Icônes
Mode de prise de vue 43
Mode Lecture 45
i-Launcher 163
L
Longueur de focale 20
Luminosité écran 153
M
Mesure de l’exposition 92
Miniatures 103
Mise au point automatique 75
Mise au point avec suivi 81
Mise au point tactile 81
MobileLink 126
Mode Economie d’énergie 154
Index
195
Annexe > Index
Mode Meilleure photo 57
Mode Panorama 58
Modes de prise de vue
Automatique 54
Enregistrement 65
Intelligent 56
Manuel 63
Priorité ouverture 61
Priorité vitesse 62
Programme 59
N
NFC (Partage par contact) 123
Nombre f 15
O
Objectifs
Déverrouillage 48
Disposition 47
Marquages 49
Verrouillage 48
Ouverture 15, 19
P
Panneau intelligent 40
Paramètres 153
Photos
Affichage sur l’appareil photo 103
Agrandissement 107
Options de prise de vue 69
Retouche 112
Posture 13
Prise de vue 85
Profondeur de champ (DOF) 16, 20
R
Réglage de l’image
Réglage des photos 114
Retouche de visages 115
Règle des tiers 23
Remote Viewfinder 130
Réseau sans fil 118
Résolution
Mode Lecture 113
Mode Prise de vue (photo) 69
Mode Prise de vue (vidéo) 99
Retardateur 87
Retouche de visages 115
Rotation 113
S
Samsung Link 142
Sauvegarde automatique 134
Sensibilité ISO 71
Stabilisation optique de l’image
(OIS) 84
T
Téléviseur 158
Transfert de fichiers
Mac 160
Windows 159
Type d’affichage 46
V
Valeur d’exposition (EV) 15, 97
Vidéo 154
Enregistrement 65
Options 99
Prise de vue en cours 111
Visionnage 109
Vitesse d’obturation 17, 19
196
Annexe
Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit
(Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques)
(Applicable aux pays disposant de systèmes de collecte séparés)
Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique
que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur,
casque audio, câble USB, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres
déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets présentant
des risques environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer
vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets. Vous favoriserez
ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un
développement durable.
Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le
produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître
les procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur
recyclage.
Les entreprises et particuliers sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs
et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses
accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets.
Elimination des batteries de ce produit
(Applicable aux pays disposant de systèmes de collecte séparés)
Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l'emballage indique que les
batteries de ce produit ne doivent pas être éliminées en fin de vie avec les
autres déchets ménagers. L'indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques
Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure,
de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés
dans la directive CE 2006/66. Si les batteries ne sont pas correctement
éliminées, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou
à l'environnement.
Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et d'encourager la réutilisation
du matériel, veillez à séparer les batteries des autres types de déchets et à
les recycler via votre système local de collecte gratuite des batteries.
CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)
197
ATTENTION
RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACÉE PAR
UNE BATTERIE DE TYPE INCORRECT.
TRAITEZ LES BATTERIES USAGÉES SUIVANT LES INSTRUCTIONS.
Son utilisation est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférence nuisible et
(2) Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interférences reçues, y
compris celles qui peuvent entraîner un fonctionnement indésirable.
Attention:
Tout modification de l’équipement non expressément validée par la
partie responsable de la conformité pourraient annuler le droit de
l’utilisateur à faire fonctionner l’équipement.
IC: 649E-EVNXF1
Cet équipement peut fonctionner dans tous les pays de l’Union
européenne.
En France, toutefois, il ne peut être utilisé qu’à l’intérieur.
198
Pour les utilisateurs résidant en France
Service Consommateur
Contact téléphonique :
Du lundi au samedi de 9 h à 20 h
01 48 63 00 00
Adresse postale :
Samsung Service Consommateurs
BP 200
93404 SAINT OUEN CEDEX
199
Pour les utilisateurs résidant au Canada
SERVICE À LA CLIENTÈLE
Téléphone :
Du lundi au vendredi de 8 h 30 à 20 h (heure normale de l'Est)
1 800 726-7864
Adresse postale :
Samsung Electronics Canada Inc.
55 Standish Court, 10th Floor
Mississauga ON
L5R 4B2
Pour toute question ou demande de service après-vente, veuillez consulter les
conditions de garantie accompagnant votre produit ou rendez-vous sur le
www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca.
ENG This user manual includes detailed usage instructions
for your camera. Please read this manual thoroughly.
USER
MANUAL
1
Copyright information
• Camera specifications or contents of this manual may be changed
without prior notice due to upgrade of camera functions.
• You are not allowed to reuse or distribute any part of this manual
without prior permission.
• We recommend using your camera within the country where you
purchase it.
• Use this camera responsibly and adhere to all laws and regulations
concerning its use.
PlanetFirst represents Samsung Electronics' commitment to
sustainable development and social responsibility through
eco-driven business and management activities.
• Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of
the Microsoft Corporation.
• Mac and Apple App Store are registered trademarks of the Apple
Corporation.
• Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google, Inc.
• Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photoshop and Lightroom are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries.
• microSD™, microSDHC™, and microSDXC™ are registered trademarks of
the SD Association.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo, and the term “High
Definition Multimedia Interface” are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
• Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered
trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
• Trademarks and trade names used in this manual are the property of
their respective owners.
2
Health and safety information
Prevent damage to subjects’ eyesight.
Do not use the flash in close proximity (closer than 1 m/3 ft) to people or
animals. If you use the flash too close to your subject’s eyes, this can cause
temporary or permanent eyesight damage.
Keep your camera away from small children and pets.
Keep your camera and all accessories out of the reach of small children
and animals. Small parts may cause choking or serious injury if swallowed.
Moving parts and accessories may present physical dangers as well.
Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight or high
temperatures for an extended period of time.
Prolonged exposure to sunlight or extreme temperatures can cause
permanent damage to your camera’s internal components.
Avoid covering the camera or charger with blankets or clothes.
The camera may overheat, which may distort the camera or cause a fire.
Do not handle the power supply cord or go near the charger
during a thunderstorm.
This may result in electric shock.
Always comply with the following precautions and usage tips to avoid
dangerous situations and ensure peak performance of your camera.
Warning—situations that could cause injury to yourself
or others
Do not disassemble or attempt to repair your camera.
This may result in electric shock or damage to the camera.
Do not use your camera near flammable or explosive gases
and liquids.
This may cause a fire or explosion.
Do not insert flammable materials into the camera or store
these materials near the camera.
This may cause a fire or electric shock.
Do not handle your camera with wet hands.
This may result in electric shock.
3
Health and safety information
If liquid or foreign objects enter your camera, immediately
disconnect all power sources, such as the battery or charger,
and then contact a Samsung service center.
Comply with any regulations that restrict the use of a camera
in a certain area.
• Avoid interference with other electronic devices.
• Turn off the camera when in an aircraft. Your camera can cause
interference with aircraft equipment. Follow all airline regulations and
turn off your camera when directed by airline personnel.
• Turn off the camera near medical equipment. Your camera can interfere
with medical equipment in hospitals or health care facilities. Follow all
regulations, posted warnings, and directions from medical personnel.
Avoid interference with pacemakers.
Maintain the distance between this camera and all pacemakers to avoid
potential interference, as recommended by the manufacturer and
research groups. If you have any reason to suspect that your camera is
interfering with a pacemaker or other medical device, turn off the camera
immediately and contact the manufacturer of the pacemaker or medical
device for guidance.
Caution—situations that could cause damage to your
camera or other equipment
Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an
extended period of time.
Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious
damage to your camera.
Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended,
Lithium-ion replacement batteries. Do not damage or heat the
battery.
Inauthentic, damaged, or heated batteries may cause a fire or personal
injury.
Use only Samsung-approved batteries, chargers, cables and
accessories.
• Using unauthorized batteries, chargers, cables or accessories can cause
batteries to explode, damage your camera, or cause injury.
• Samsung is not responsible for damage or injuries caused by
unapproved batteries, chargers, cables or accessories.
Use the battery only for its intended purpose.
Misusing the battery may cause a fire or electric shock.
4
Health and safety information
Do not touch the flash while it fires.
The flash is very hot when fired and may burn your skin.
When you use the AC charger, turn off the camera before you
disconnect the power to the AC charger.
Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock.
Disconnect the charger from the wall socket when not in use.
Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock.
Do not use a damaged power supply cord, plug, or loose outlet
when you charge batteries.
This may cause a fire or electric shock.
Do not allow the AC charger to come in contact with the +/-
terminals on the battery.
This may cause a fire or electric shock.
Do not drop or subject the camera to strong impacts.
Doing so may damage the screen or external or internal components.
Exercise caution when you connect cables and install batteries
and memory cards.
If you force the connectors, improperly connect cables, or improperly
install batteries and memory cards, you can damage ports, connectors,
and accessories.
Keep cards with magnetic strips away from the camera case.
Information stored on the card may be damaged or erased.
Never use a damaged battery, or memory card.
This may result in electric shock or camera malfunction or cause a fire.
Do not place the camera in or near magnetic fields.
Doing so may cause the camera to malfunction.
Do not use the camera if the screen is damaged.
If the glass or acrylic parts are broken, visit a Samsung service center to
have the camera repaired.
5
Health and safety information
Check that the camera is operating properly before use.
The manufacturer takes no responsibility for any loss of files or damage
that may result from camera malfunction or improper use.
You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your
camera.
If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not
responsible for any loss of data.
Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight.
This may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction.
If the camera overheats, remove the battery and allow it to
cool down.
• Prolonged usage of the camera may overheat the battery and raise
the internal temperature of the camera. If the camera stops operating,
remove the battery and allow it to cool down.
• High internal temperatures may result in noise in your photos. This is
normal and does not affect your camera’s overall performance.
Avoid interference with other electronic devices.
Your camera emits radio frequency (RF) signals that may interfere
with unshielded or improperly shielded electronic equipment, such as
pacemakers, hearing aids, medical devices, and other electronic devices in
homes or vehicles. Consult the manufacturers of your electronic devices
to solve any interference problems you experience. To prevent unwanted
interference, use only Samsung-approved devices or accessories.
Use your camera in the normal position.
Avoid contact with your camera’s internal antenna.
Data transference and your responsibilities
• Data transferred via WLAN could be leaked, so avoid transferring
sensitive data in public areas or on open networks.
• The camera manufacturer is not liable for any data transfers that infringe
on copyrights, trademarks, intellectual property laws, or public decency
ordinances.
6
Indications used in this manual
Mode indications
Mode Indication
Smart Auto t
Program P
Aperture Priority A
Shutter Priority S
Manual M
Lens Priority i
Smart s
Wi-Fi B
Icons used in this manual
Icon Function
Additional information
Safety warnings and precautions
[ ] Camera buttons. For example, [Shutter] represents the
shutter button.
( ) Page number of related information
→
The order of options or menus you must select to perform
a step; for example: Select 1→ Quality (represents
select 1, and then Quality).
* Annotation
7
Contents
Chapter 1
My Camera
Getting started ............................................................................................ 29
Unpacking.................................................................................................................... 29
Camera layout .............................................................................................. 30
Using the DIRECT LINK button ................................................................................ 32
Inserting the battery and memory card ................................................. 33
Removing the battery and memory card ........................................................... 33
Using the memory card adapter ............................................................................. 33
Charging the battery and turning on your camera .............................. 34
Charging the battery................................................................................................ 34
Turning on your camera ......................................................................................... 34
Performing the initial setup ...................................................................... 35
Selecting functions (options) ................................................................... 36
Selecting with buttons ............................................................................................ 36
Selecting by touch .................................................................................................... 36
Using m .............................................................................................................. 37
E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode ............................................................. 37
Using the Smart panel ............................................................................................. 38
E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode ......................................................... 38
Tips
Concepts in Photography
Shooting postures....................................................................................... 13
Holding the camera ..................................................................................................... 13
Standing photography ............................................................................................... 13
Crouching photography ............................................................................................ 14
Using the display .......................................................................................................... 14
Low-angle shot .............................................................................................................. 15
High-angle shot ............................................................................................................. 15
Aperture ........................................................................................................ 16
Aperture value and the depth of field .................................................................. 17
Shutter speed ............................................................................................... 18
ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 19
How the aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity
control exposure ......................................................................................... 20
Correlation between focal length, angle, and perspective ................ 21
Depth of field ............................................................................................... 22
What controls out-of-focus effects? ....................................................................... 22
Optical preview ............................................................................................................. 24
Composition ................................................................................................. 24
Rule of Thirds .................................................................................................................. 24
Photos with two subjects .......................................................................................... 25
Flash ............................................................................................................... 26
Flash guide number ..................................................................................................... 26
Bounce Photography .................................................................................................. 27
8
Contents
Display icons ................................................................................................ 40
In Shooting mode ..................................................................................................... 40
Capturing photos ........................................................................................................ 40
Recording videos ......................................................................................................... 41
About the level gauge ............................................................................................... 41
In Playback mode ...................................................................................................... 42
Viewing photos ............................................................................................................ 42
Playing videos ............................................................................................................... 42
Changing the information displayed ................................................................. 43
Lenses ............................................................................................................ 44
Lens layout ................................................................................................................... 44
Locking or unlocking the lens ................................................................................. 45
Lens markings ............................................................................................................ 47
Accessories ................................................................................................... 48
External flash layout ................................................................................................. 48
Connecting the external flash ................................................................................. 49
GPS module layout (optional) .............................................................................. 51
Attaching the GPS module .................................................................................... 51
Shooting modes .......................................................................................... 53
t Smart Auto mode ..................................................................................... 53
P Program mode ....................................................................................................... 55
Program Shift ................................................................................................................ 56
Minimum shutter speed ............................................................................................ 56
A Aperture Priority mode ..................................................................................... 57
S Shutter Priority mode.......................................................................................... 58
M Manual mode ....................................................................................................... 59
Framing mode .............................................................................................................. 59
Using the Bulb function ............................................................................................ 60
i Lens Priority mode ............................................................................................. 60
Using E ............................................................................................................. 60
Using i-Function in P/A/S/M modes ................................................................ 61
Using Z .............................................................................................................. 63
s Smart mode ........................................................................................................ 64
Using the Best Face mode ........................................................................................ 65
Capturing panoramic photos .................................................................................. 66
Recording a video ..................................................................................................... 68
3D mode ....................................................................................................................... 69
Available functions by shooting mode ............................................................. 71
9
Contents
Chapter 2
Shooting Functions
Size and Resolution .................................................................................... 73
Photo size ..................................................................................................................... 73
Quality ........................................................................................................................... 74
ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 75
White Balance .............................................................................................. 76
Customizing preset White Balance options ....................................................... 77
Picture Wizard (photo styles) .................................................................... 79
AF mode ........................................................................................................ 80
Single AF ....................................................................................................................... 81
Continuous AF ............................................................................................................ 81
Manual focus ............................................................................................................... 82
AF area ........................................................................................................... 83
Selection AF ................................................................................................................ 83
Multi AF ......................................................................................................................... 84
Face detection AF ...................................................................................................... 84
Self-Portrait AF ........................................................................................................... 85
Touch AF ........................................................................................................ 86
Touch AF ....................................................................................................................... 86
AF Point ......................................................................................................................... 86
Tracking AF .................................................................................................................. 86
One touch shot .......................................................................................................... 87
Focus assist ................................................................................................... 88
MF Assist ....................................................................................................................... 88
Focus Peaking ............................................................................................................. 88
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) ............................................................. 89
Drive (shooting method) ........................................................................... 90
Single ............................................................................................................................. 90
Continuous .................................................................................................................. 90
Burst ............................................................................................................................... 91
Timer .............................................................................................................................. 91
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket) ............................................................. 92
White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket) ............................................................ 92
Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket) ........................................................ 93
Bracketing setting ..................................................................................................... 93
Flash ............................................................................................................... 94
Reducing the red-eye effect .................................................................................. 95
Adjusting the flash intensity ................................................................................. 95
Metering ........................................................................................................ 97
Multi ............................................................................................................................... 97
Spot ................................................................................................................................ 98
Center-weighted ....................................................................................................... 98
Measuring the exposure value of the focus area ........................................... 99
Dynamic Range ......................................................................................... 100
Smart Filter ................................................................................................. 101
Exposure compensation .......................................................................... 102
Exposure lock ............................................................................................. 103
Video functions ......................................................................................... 104
Movie size.................................................................................................................. 104
Movie quality ........................................................................................................... 104
Multi Motion ............................................................................................................ 105
Fader ........................................................................................................................... 105
Voice ............................................................................................................................ 106
Wind cut .................................................................................................................... 106
Mic Level .................................................................................................................... 106
10
Contents
Chapter 3
Playback/Editing
Searching and managing files ................................................................ 108
Viewing photos ....................................................................................................... 108
Viewing image thumbnails ................................................................................. 108
Viewing files by category .................................................................................... 109
Viewing files as a folder ........................................................................................ 109
Protecting files ........................................................................................................ 110
Lock/Unlock all files .................................................................................................. 110
Deleting files ............................................................................................................ 111
Deleting a single file ................................................................................................. 111
Deleting multiple files .............................................................................................. 111
Deleting all files .......................................................................................................... 112
Viewing photos .......................................................................................... 113
Enlarging a photo .................................................................................................. 113
Viewing a slide show ............................................................................................. 113
Auto rotating ........................................................................................................... 114
Creating a print order (DPOF) ............................................................................ 114
Playing videos ............................................................................................ 115
Trimming a video during playback .................................................................. 115
Capturing an image during playback ............................................................. 116
Editing photos ........................................................................................... 117
Cropping a photo ................................................................................................... 117
Rotating a photo .................................................................................................... 118
Resizing photos....................................................................................................... 118
Adjusting your photos .......................................................................................... 119
Retouching faces .................................................................................................... 120
Applying Smart Filter effects .............................................................................. 121
Chapter 4
Wireless network
Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings ............... 123
Connecting to a WLAN ......................................................................................... 123
Setting network options ......................................................................................... 124
Manually setting the IP address ........................................................................... 124
Using the login browser....................................................................................... 125
Network connection tips ..................................................................................... 126
Entering text ............................................................................................................ 127
Saving files to a smart phone automatically ....................................... 128
Sending photos or videos to a smart phone ....................................... 129
Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release .............................. 131
Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos ..................................... 133
Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC.................................. 133
Sending photos or videos to a PC .................................................................... 133
Sending photos or videos via email ...................................................... 135
Changing email settings ...................................................................................... 135
Storing your information ........................................................................................ 135
Setting an email password ..................................................................................... 136
Changing the email password .............................................................................. 137
Sending photos or videos via email ................................................................ 137
Using photo or video sharing websites ................................................ 139
Accessing a website .............................................................................................. 139
Uploading photos or videos............................................................................... 140
Using AllShare Play to send files ............................................................ 141
Uploading photos to online storage ............................................................... 141
Viewing photos or videos on devices that support AllShare Play ........ 142
Sending photos using Wi-Fi Direct ........................................................ 144
11
Contents
Chapter 6
Connecting to external devices
Viewing files on an HDTV or 3D TV ........................................................ 158
Viewing files on an HDTV .................................................................................... 158
Viewing files on a 3D TV ....................................................................................... 159
Transferring files to your computer ....................................................... 160
Transferring files to your Windows OS computer ....................................... 160
Connecting the camera as a removable disk ................................................... 160
Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP) .................................................. 161
Transferring files to your Mac OS ...................................................................... 161
Using programs on a PC........................................................................... 163
Installing programs from the provided CD ................................................... 163
Available programs when using i-Launcher .................................................... 163
Using i-Launcher .................................................................................................... 163
Requirements for Windows OS ............................................................................. 163
Requirements for Mac OS ....................................................................................... 164
Opening i-Launcher .................................................................................................. 164
Using Multimedia Viewer ........................................................................................ 165
Downloading the firmware .................................................................................... 166
Downloading the PC Auto Backup program ................................................... 166
Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ........................................................ 167
Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ............................................................... 167
Chapter 5
Camera settings menu
User settings ............................................................................................... 146
ISO Customizing ..................................................................................................... 146
ISO Step ......................................................................................................................... 146
Auto ISO Range .......................................................................................................... 146
Noise Reduction ..................................................................................................... 146
Bracket Set ................................................................................................................ 147
DMF (Direct Manual Focus) ................................................................................ 147
Color space ............................................................................................................... 148
Distortion Correct .................................................................................................. 149
Touch Operation ..................................................................................................... 149
iFn Customizing ...................................................................................................... 149
User Display .............................................................................................................. 149
Key Mapping ............................................................................................................ 150
Grid Line .................................................................................................................... 151
AF Lamp ..................................................................................................................... 151
Setting ......................................................................................................... 152
12
Contents
Before contacting a service center ........................................................ 181
Camera specifications .............................................................................. 184
Glossary ....................................................................................................... 189
Optional accessories ................................................................................. 195
Index ............................................................................................................ 197
FCC notice ................................................................................................... 200
Chapter 7
Appendix
Error messages .......................................................................................... 169
Maintaining the camera........................................................................... 170
Cleaning the camera ............................................................................................. 170
Camera lens and display ......................................................................................... 170
Image sensor ............................................................................................................... 170
Camera body ............................................................................................................... 170
Using or storing the camera ............................................................................... 171
Inappropriate places to use or store the camera ........................................... 171
Using on beaches or shores ................................................................................... 171
Storing for extended period of time ................................................................... 171
Using the camera with caution in humid environments ............................ 172
Other cautions ............................................................................................................ 172
About memory card .............................................................................................. 173
Supported memory card ........................................................................................ 173
Memory card capacity ............................................................................................. 174
Cautions when using memory cards .................................................................. 176
About the battery .................................................................................................. 177
Battery specifications ............................................................................................... 177
Battery life .................................................................................................................... 178
Low battery message ............................................................................................... 178
Notes about using the battery .............................................................................. 178
Cautions about using the battery ........................................................................ 179
Notes about charging the battery ....................................................................... 179
Notes about charging with a computer connected...................................... 180
Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care ............................ 180
13
Concepts in Photography
Standing photography
Compose your shot; stand up straight with your feet shoulder-length
apart, and keep your elbows pointed down.
Shooting postures
A correct posture for stabilizing the camera is necessary for taking a good
photo. Even if you hold a camera correctly, the wrong posture can cause
the camera to shake. Stand up straight and remain still to maintain a
steady base for your camera. When shooting with a slow shutter speed,
hold your breath to minimize body movement.
Holding the camera
Hold the camera with your right hand and place you right index finger on
the shutter button. Place your left hand under the lens for support.
14
Concepts in Photography
Crouching photography
Compose your shot, crouch with one knee touching the ground, and keep
a straight posture.
Using the display
To take photos at high or low angles, tilt the display up or down. You can
tilt the display up to 90° upwards ( ) or 45° downwards ( ).
• Keep the display closed ( ) when the camera is not in use.
• Tilt the display only within the angle allowed. Failing to do so may
damage your camera.
15
Concepts in Photography
Low-angle shot
A low-angle shot is a shot from a camera positioned below your eyeline,
looking up the subject.
High-angle shot
A high-angle shot is a shot from a camera positioned above your eyeline,
looking down on the subject.
16
Concepts in Photography
Aperture
The aperture, a hole that controls the amount of light that enters the
camera, is one of the three factors that determine the exposure. The
aperture housing contains thin, metal plates that open and close to let
light through the aperture and into the camera. The size of the aperture
is closely related to the brightness of a photo: the larger the aperture, the
brighter the photo; the smaller the aperture, the darker the photo.
Aperture sizes
Minimum aperture Medium aperture Maximum aperture
Darker photo
(aperture opened slightly)
Brighter photo
(aperture opened wide)
The size of the aperture is represented by a value known as an “F-number.”
The f-number represents the focal length divided by the diameter of the
lens. For example, if a lens with a 50 mm focal length has an f-number of
F2, the diameter of the aperture is 25 mm. (50 mm/25 mm=F2) The smaller
the f-number, the greater the size of the aperture.
The opening in the aperture is described as the Exposure Value (EV).
Increasing the Exposure Value (+1 EV) means the amount of light doubles.
Decreasing the Exposure Value (-1 EV) means the amount of light halves.
You can also use the exposure compensation feature to fine-tune the
amount of light by subdividing exposure values into 1/2, 1/3 EV, and so on.
+1 EV
F1.4 F2 F2.8 F4 F5.6 F8
-1 EV
Exposure Value Steps
17
Concepts in Photography
Aperture value and the depth of field
You can blur or sharpen the background of a photo by controlling the
aperture. It is closely related to the depth of field (DOF), which can be
expressed as small or large.
A photo with a large DOF A photo with a small DOF
The aperture housing contains several blades. These blades move together and
control the amount of light passing through the center of the aperture. The
number of blades also affects the shape of light when shooting night scenes. If
an aperture has an even number of blades, light divides into an equal number
of sections. If the number of blades is odd, the number of sections is double the
number of blades.
For example, an aperture with 8 blades divides light into 8 sections and an
aperture with 7 blades into 14 sections.
7 blades 8 blades
18
Concepts in Photography
Shutter speed
Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the
shutter, and it is an important factor in the brightness of a photo, as it
controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before it
reaches the image sensor.
Usually, the shutter speed is manually adjustable. The measurement of the
shutter speed is known as the “Exposure Value” (EV), which is marked in
intervals of 1 s, 1/2 s, 1/4 s, 1/8 s, 1/15 s, 1/1000 s, 1/2000 s, and so on.
Exposure
+1 EV
-1 EV
1s 1/2 s 1/4 s 1/8 s 1/15 s 1/30 s
Shutter Speed
Therefore, the faster the shutter speed, the less light will be let in. Likewise,
the slower the shutter speed, the more light will be let in.
As the photos below illustrate, a slow shutter speed allows more time
to let light in, so the photo becomes brighter. On the other hand, a fast
shutter speed allows less time to let light in and the photo becomes
darker and more easily freezes subjects in motion.
0.8 s 0.004 s
19
Concepts in Photography
ISO sensitivity
The exposure of an image is determined by the sensitivity of the camera.
This sensitivity is based on international film standards, known as ISO
standards. On digital cameras, this sensitivity rating is used to represent
the sensitivity of the digital mechanism that captures the image.
ISO sensitivity doubles as the number doubles. For example, an
ISO 200 setting is capable of capturing images at twice the speed of an
ISO 100 setting. However, higher ISO settings can result in “noise”—small
specks, spots, and other phenomena in a photo that give the shot a noisy
or dirty appearance. As a general rule, it is best to use a low ISO setting
to prevent noise in your photos, unless you are shooting in darkened
environments or at night.
Changes in the quality and brightness according to ISO sensitivity
Because a low ISO sensitivity means the camera will be less sensitive to
light, you need more light to have an optimal exposure. When using a low
ISO sensitivity, open the aperture more or reduce the shutter speed to
allow more light to enter the camera. For example, on a sunny day when
light is abundant, a low ISO sensitivity does not require a slow shutter
speed. However, in a dark place or at night, a low ISO sensitivity will
result in a blurry photo. Therefore, it is recommended to increase the ISO
sensitivity by a moderate amount.
A photo captured with a tripod and high
ISO sensitivity
A blurred photo with a low ISO sensitivity
20
Concepts in Photography
How the aperture setting, shutter speed,
and ISO sensitivity control exposure
The aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity are closely
interconnected in photography. The aperture setting controls the opening
that regulates the light that enters the camera, while the shutter speed
determines the length of time that light is allowed to enter. ISO sensitivity
determines the speed at which the film reacts to light. Together, these
three aspects are described as the triangle of exposure.
A change in shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO sensitivity can be offset
by adjustments to the others to maintain the amount of light. The results,
however, change according to the settings. For example, shutter speed is
useful in expressing movement, aperture can control the depth of field,
and ISO sensitivity can control the graininess of a photo.
Settings Results
Aperture
value
Wide aperture
= more light
Narrow aperture
= less light
Wide = small depth of field
Narrow = large depth of field
Settings Results
Shutter speed
Fast speed
= less light
Slow speed
= more light
Fast = still
Slow = blurry
ISO sensitivity
High sensitivity
= more sensitive to light
Low sensitivity
= less sensitive to light
High = more grainy
Low = less grainy
21
Concepts in Photography
Correlation between focal length, angle,
and perspective
Focal length, which is measured in millimeters, is the distance between
the middle of the lens to its focal point. It affects the angle and perspective
of captured images. A short focal length translates into a wide angle,
which allows you to capture a wide shot. A long focal length translates
into a narrow angle, which allows you to capture telephoto shots.
Short focal length
wide shot
wide angle
wide-angle lens
Long focal length
telephoto shot
narrow angle
telephoto lens
Look at these photos below and compare the changes.
18 mm angle 55 mm angle 200 mm angle
Normally, a lens with a wide angle is suitable for shooting landscapes and a lens
with a narrow angle is recommended for shooting sports events or portraits.
22
Concepts in Photography
Depth of field
Portraits or still-life photos mostly acclaimed by people are the ones on
which the background is out of focus so the subject looks pronounced.
Depending on the focused areas, a photo can be blurred or sharpened.
This is called ‘a low DOF’ or ‘a high DOF’.
The depth of field is the focused area around the subject. Therefore, a
small DOF signifies that the focused area is narrow and a large DOF means
the focused area is wide.
A photo with a small DOF, which stresses the subject and makes the rest
of it blurred, can be obtained by using a telescope lens or selecting a low
aperture value. Conversely, a photo with a large DOF which shows all the
elements on the photo sharply focused can be achieved by using a wide
angle lens or selecting a high aperture value.
Small Depth of Field Large Depth of Field
What controls out-of-focus effects?
DOF depends on aperture value
The wider the aperture is (namely the lower the aperture value), the lower
the DOF becomes. Under the condition where the other values including
shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are equal, a low aperture value leads to a
photo with a low DOF.
55 mm F5.7 55 mm F22
23
Concepts in Photography
DOF depends on focal length
The longer the focal length is, the lower the DOF gets. A telescope lens
with a longer focal length than a wide-angle lens with a short focal length
is better to capture a photo of a low DOF.
A photo captured with an 18 mm wideangle
lens
A photo captured with a 100 mm telescope
lens
DOF depends on the distance between the subject and the
camera
The shorter the distance between the subject and the camera is, the lower
the DOF gets. Therefore, taking a photo close to a subject can result in a
photo of low DOF.
A photo captured with a 100 mm telescope lens
A photo captured close to the subject
24
Concepts in Photography
Optical preview
You can press the Custom button to view the optical preview before
capturing a photo. The camera adjusts the aperture to the predefined
settings and shows the results on the screen. Set the Custom button to
Optical preview. (p. 150)
Composition
It is fun to capture a photo of the beauty of world with a camera. No
matter how the world is beautiful, however, a poor composition cannot
capture the beauty of it.
When it comes to composition, it is very important to prioritize subjects.
Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually,
abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition.
Rule of Thirds
To use the rule of thirds, divide the image into a 3x3 pattern of equal
rectangles.
To compose photos that best emphasize the subject, make sure the
subject is located at one of the corners of the center rectangle.
25
Concepts in Photography
Using the rule of thirds will create photos with stable and compelling
compositions. Below are a few examples.
Photos with two subjects
If your subject is in one corner of the photo, it creates an unbalanced
composition. You can stabilize the photo by capturing a second subject in
the opposite corner to balance the weight of the photo.
Subject 1
Subject 2
Subject 1
Subject 2
Unstable Stable
When taking landscape photos, centering the horizon will create an
unbalanced effect. Give more weight to the photo by moving the horizon
up or down.
Subject 1
Subject 2
Subject 1
Subject 2
Unstable Stable
26
Concepts in Photography
Flash guide number
The model number of a flash refers to the flash’s power, and the maximum
amount of light created is represented by a value known as a “guide
number.” The bigger the guide number, the more light is emitted from the
flash. The guide number is achieved by multiplying the distance from the
flash to the subject and the aperture value when the ISO sensitivity is set
to 100.
Guide number = Flash to Subject Distance X Aperture value
Aperture value = Guide number / Flash to Subject Distance
Flash to Subject Distance = Guide number / Aperture value
Therefore, if you know the guide number of a flash, you can estimate an
optimum flash to subject distance when setting the flash manually. For
example, if a flash has a guide number of GN 20 and is 4 meters away from
the subject, the optimal aperture value is F5.0.
Flash
Light is one of the most important components in photography. It is not
easy, however, to have an enough amount of light anytime and anywhere.
Making use of a flash allows you to optimize light settings and create a
variety of effects.
Flash, also known as strobe or speed light, helps to create adequate
exposure in low-light conditions. It is also useful in light-abundant
situations. For example, flash can be used in compensating the exposure
of a subject’s shadow or capturing clearly both the subject and the
background in backlit conditions.
Before correction After correction
27
Concepts in Photography
Bounce Photography
Bounce photography refers to the method of bouncing light off of the
ceiling or walls so that the light spreads evenly over the subject. Normally,
photos captured with flash may appear unnatural and cast shadows.
Subjects in photos captured with bounce photography cast no shadows
and look smooth due to evenly spread light.
Chapter 1
My Camera
Learn about your camera’s layout, display icons, lens, optional accessories,
and basic functions.
My Camera
29
Getting started
Unpacking
Check your product box for the following items.
Camera
(including the body cap and hot-shoe
cover)
AC adapter/USB cable Rechargeable battery External flash
Software CD-ROM
(User manual included)
Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM Quick Start Guide Strap
• The illustrations may differ from your actual items.
• You can purchase optional accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center. Samsung is not responsible for any
problems caused by using unauthorized accessories. For information about accessories, refer to page 195.
My Camera
30
Camera layout
No. Name
1
Mode dial
• t: Smart Auto mode (p. 53)
• P: Program mode (p. 55)
• A: Aperture Priority mode (p. 57)
• S: Shutter Priority mode (p. 58)
• M: Manual mode (p. 59)
• i: Lens Priority mode (p. 60)
• s: Smart mode (p. 64)
• B: Wi-Fi (p. 122)
2
Jog dial
• In the Menu screen: Move to a
desired menu item.
• In the Smart panel: Adjust a selected
option.
• In Shooting mode: Adjust shutter
speed or aperture value in some
shooting modes or change the size of
a focus area.
• In Playback mode: View thumbnails,
enlarge or reduce a photo, or open or
close a folder of continuous or burst
shots in Playback mode.
3 DIRECT LINK button: Start a preset Wi-Fi
function. (p. 32)
No. Name
4 Microphone
5 Hot-shoe cover
6 Hot-shoe
7 Eyelet for camera strap
8 Image sensor
9
Internal antenna/NFC tag
* Avoid contact with the internal
antenna while using the wireless
network.
10 Speaker
11 Lens release button
12 Lens mount
13 Lens mount index
14 AF-assist light/Timer lamp
15 Power switch
16 Shutter button
1 2 3 4 5
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
6 4
8
7
16
15
My Camera > Camera layout
31
No. Name
1 Video recording button
Start recording a video.
2
EV adjust button (p. 102)
Press and hold the button, and then scroll
the jog dial to adjust the exposure value.
In M mode, the aperture value will be
adjusted.
3
Fn button
Access the Smart panel and fine-tune
some settings.
4
o button
• In the Menu screen: Save the selected
options.
• In Shooting mode: Allow you to select
a focus area manually in some shooting
modes.
5
Navigation button
• In Shooting mode
- D: View camera settings and
change options.
- I: Select an ISO value.
- C: Select a drive option.
- F: Select an AF mode.
• In other situations
Move up, down, left, right, respectively.
No. Name
6
Delete/Custom button
• In Shooting mode: Perform the
assigned function. (p. 150)
• In Playback mode: Delete files.
7 Playback button
Enter Playback mode.
8
Status lamp
Indicate the status of the camera.
• Blinking: When saving a photo,
shooting a video, sending data to a
computer, connecting to WLAN, or
sending a photo.
• Steady: When there is no data transfer,
when data transfer to a computer is
complete, or charging the battery.
9 MENU button
Access options or menus.
5
6
1
2
3
4
7 8 9
My Camera > Camera layout
32
No. Name
1
USB and shutter release port
Connect the camera to a computer or shutter release. Use a shutter release cable with a tripod
to minimize camera movement.
2 HDMI port
3 Battery chamber/Memory card cover
Insert a memory card and battery.
4
Display
• To take photos at high or low angles, tilt the display up or down. (p. 14)
• Touch the screen to select a menu or an option. (p. 36)
5 Tripod mount
Using the DIRECT LINK button
You can turn on the Wi-Fi feature conveniently by pressing [DIRECT LINK].
Press [DIRECT LINK] again to return to the previous mode.
Setting the DIRECT LINK button
You can select a Wi-Fi function to launch when you press [DIRECT LINK]. (p. 150)
To set a DIRECT
LINK option, In Shooting mode, press [m] → 5 → Key Mapping → DIRECT LINK → an option.
4
5
1
2
3
My Camera
33
Inserting the battery and memory card
Learn how to insert the battery and an optional memory card into the
camera.
Memory card
Insert a memory card with the goldcolored
contacts facing down.
Rechargeable battery
Insert the battery with the Samsung logo
facing up.
Removing the battery and memory card
Rechargeable battery
Battery lock
Slide the lock up to release the
battery.
Memory card
Push the card gently until it disengages
from the camera, and then pull it out of the
slot.
Using the memory card adapter
To use micro memory cards with this product, a PC, or a memory
card reader, insert the card into an adapter.
While the status lamp of the camera is blinking, do not remove the memory card
or battery. Doing so may damage the data stored on the memory card or your
camera.
My Camera
34
Charging the battery and turning on your camera
Charging the battery
Before you use the camera for the first time, you must charge the battery.
Plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera, and then plug the
other end of the USB cable into the AC adapter.
Status lamp
• Red light on: Charging
• Red light off: Fully charged
• Red light blinking: Error
• Use only the AC adapter and USB cable supplied with your camera. If you use
another AC adapter, the camera battery may not charge or work properly.
• You can charge the battery with the USB cable only when the camera is turned
off.
Turning on your camera
Set the Power switch to ON.
• To turn your camera off, set the Power switch to OFF.
• The initial setup screen appears when you turn on the camera for the
first time. (p. 35)
My Camera
35
Performing the initial setup
When you turn on your camera for the first time, the initial setup screen
appears. The language is preset for the country or region where the
camera is sold. You can change the language as desired. You can also select
an item by touching it on the screen.
1 Press [I] to select Time Zone, and then press [F] or [o].
2 Press [D/I] to select a time zone, and then press [o].
Back Set
Time Zone
[GMT +00:00] London
[GMT -01:00] Cape Verde
[GMT -02:00] Mid-Atlantic
[GMT -03:00] Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo
[GMT -03:30] Newfoundland
3 Press [I] to select Date & Time, and then press [F] or [o].
Back Set
Date & Time
Year Month Day Hr Min DST
• The screen may differ depending on the language selected.
4 Press [C/F] to select an item (Year/Month/Day/Hr/Min/
DST).
5 Press [D/I] to set the option, and then press [o].
6 Press [I] to select Date Type, and then press [F] or [o].
7 Press [D/I] to select a date type, and then press [o].
8 Press [I] to select Time Type, and then press [F] or [o].
9 Press [D/I] to select a time type, and then press [o].
10 Press [m] to finish the initial setup.
My Camera
36
Selecting functions (options)
Selecting with buttons
Scroll the jog dial or press [D/I/C/F] to move, and then press [o]
to select an option.
Selecting by touch
Do not use sharp objects, such as pens or pencils, to touch the screen. You can
damage the screen.
Touching: Touch an icon to select a menu or an option.
AllShare
Play
MobileLink Remote
Viewfinder
Auto
Backup
Email
SNS &
Cloud
Dragging: Touch and hold an area on the screen, and then drag
your finger.
AutoShare
Photo Size
Quality
ISO
White Balance
Back Select
My Camera > Selecting functions (options)
37
Flicking: Gently flick your finger across the screen.
• The touch screen may not recognize your inputs if you touch multiple items
at the same time.
• When you touch or drag the screen, discolorations may occur. This is not a
malfunction, but a characteristic of the touch screen. Touch or drag lightly to
minimize the discolorations.
• The touch screen may not work properly if you use the camera in extremely
humid environments.
• The touch screen may not work properly if you apply screen protection film
or other accessories to the screen.
• Depending on the viewing angle, the screen may appear dim. Adjust the
brightness or viewing angle to improve the resolution.
Using
Press [m
m
] or touch on the screen, and then change shooting
options or settings.
E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode
1 Rotate the mode dial to P.
2 Press [m] or touch .
3 Press [C] → [D/I] to move to 1, and then press [o].
• You can also touch 1 on the screen.
4 Scroll the jog dial or press [D/I] to move to Photo Size,
and then press [o].
• You can also drag the option list, and then touch an option.
Back Select
AutoShare
Photo Size
Quality
ISO
White Balance
My Camera > Selecting functions (options)
38
5 Scroll the jog dial or press [D/I] to move to an option,
and then press [o].
• You can also drag the option list, and then touch an option.
• Press [m] or touch Back to go back to the previous menu.
Back Set
AutoShare
Photo Size
Quality
ISO
White Balance
5472x3648 (3:2)
3888x2592 (3:2)
2976x1984 (3:2)
1728x1152 (3:2)
5472x3080 (16:9)
6 Press [m] or touch Back to switch to Shooting mode.
Using the Smart panel
Press [f] or touch on the screen to access some functions such as
Exposure, ISO, and White Balance.
E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode
1 Rotate the mode dial to P.
2 Press [f] or touch .
My Camera > Selecting functions (options)
39
3 Press [D/I/C/F] to move to EV, and then press [o].
• You can directly select an option by scrolling the jog dial without
having to press [o].
• You can also select an option by touching it.
EV : 0.0
Adjust
You can adjust some options by
dragging them.
Back
4 Scroll the jog dial or press [C/F] to adjust the exposure
value, and then press [o].
• You can also drag the dial on the screen, and then select Set to
adjust the option.
EV : 0.0
Back Set
My Camera
40
Display icons
Capturing photos
1
2
3
London
1. Shooting information
Icon Description
Shooting mode
Current date
Current time
GPS activated*
London Location information*
Memory card not inserted**
Auto exposure lock (p. 103)
Available number of photos
• : Fully charged
• : Partially charged
• (Red): Empty (recharge
the battery)
Icon Description
Auto focus frame
Spot metering area
Camera shake
Manual focus scale
Level gauge (p. 41)
Histogram (p. 150)
Focus
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Exposure adjustment value
ISO sensitivity (p. 75)
* These icons appear when you attach an optional GPS
module.
** Photos that were captured without inserting a memory
card cannot be transferred to a memory card or a computer.
2. Shooting options
Icon Description
Photo size
Drive mode
Flash (p. 94)
Flash intensity adjustment
Metering (p. 97)
Icon Description
AF mode (p. 80)
Focus area
Face detection
White Balance (p. 76)
White Balance micro adjustment
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 89)
Z
Z
on
ratio
RAW file
Dynamic Range (p. 100)
3. Shooting options (Touch)
Icon Description
Change Smart mode***
AutoShare
Touch AF options
Shooting options
Smart panel
*** This icon appears only when you select Smart mode.
The icons displayed will change according to the
mode you select or the options you set.
In Shooting mode
My Camera > Display icons
41
2. Shooting options
Icon Description
Video size
AF mode (p. 80)
Metering (p. 97)
White Balance (p. 76)
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS)
(p. 89)
White Balance micro adjustment
Fader (p. 105)
Multi Motion (p. 105)
Voice recording off (p. 106)
The icons displayed will change according to the
mode you select or the options you set.
About the level gauge
The level gauge helps you align the camera with
the horizontal and vertical lines on the display.
If the level gauge is not level, calibrate the level
gauge using the Horizontal Calibration function.
(p. 152)
Vertical
Horizontal
▲ Level ▲ Unlevel
You cannot use the level gauge when you shoot
in portrait orientation.
Recording videos
1
2
1. Shooting information
Icon Description
Shooting mode
Current recording time/Available
recording time
• : Fully charged
• : Partially charged
• (Red): Empty (recharge the
battery)
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Exposure value
ISO sensitivity (p. 75)
My Camera > Display icons
42
In Playback mode
Viewing photos
London
Information
Mode
F No
Shutter
ISO
Metering
Flash
Focal Length
White Balance
EV
Photo Size
Date
Icon Description
Continuously captured file
Current file/The total number of files
Folder number - File number
File with location information
London Location information
RAW file
Protected file
Print information added to file (p. 114)
3D file
m Playback/Editing menu (Touch)
Editing photos (Touch)
Trimming a video (Touch)
Viewing image thumbnails (Touch)
1
2
3 London
No. Description
1 Captured photo
2 RGB histogram (p. 150)
3
Shooting mode, Metering, Flash,
White Balance, Aperture value, Shutter
speed, ISO, Focal length, Exposure value,
Photo size, Date, Location information
Playing videos
Stop Capture
Icon Description
Playback speed
Multi Motion
Current playback time
Video length
/
View previous file/Scan backward.
(Each time you touch the scan
backward icon, you change the scan
speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.)
/ Pause or resume playback.
/
View next file/Scan forward. (Each
time you touch the scan forward
icon, you change the scan speed in
this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.)
Adjust the volume or mute the
sound.
My Camera > Display icons
43
Changing the information displayed
Press [D] repeatedly to change the display type.
Mode Display type
Shooting
• Basic shooting information (Shooting mode, Shutter
speed, Aperture value, Exposure value, ISO sensitivity, etc.)
• Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons
(MENU, Fn, AutoShare, Touch AF) + Level gauge
• Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons +
Current shooting options information (Photo size, Drive
mode, Flash, Metering, AF mode, etc.)
• Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons +
Current shooting options information + Histogram + Date
and time
Playback
• Basic information
• Display all information about the current file.
• Display all information about the current file including
RGB histogram.
My Camera
44
Lenses
You can purchase optional lenses made exclusively for your NX series
camera.
Learn about the functions of each lens and select one that suits your needs
and preferences.
Lens layout
SAMSUNG 18-55 mm F3.5-5.6 OIS III lens (example)
1
2
3
5
4
6 7
8
No. Description
1 Lens mount index
2 Zoom ring
3 Focus ring (p. 88)
4 Lens hood mount index
5 Lens
6 i-Function button (p. 60)
7 AF/MF switch (p. 80)
8 Lens contacts
When not using the lens, attach the lens cap and lens mount cover to protect
the lens from dust and scratches.
My Camera > Lenses
45
SAMSUNG 20-50 mm F3.5-5.6 ED II lens (example)
7
1
2
3 5
6
4
No. Description
1 Lens mount index
2 Zoom lock switch
3 Lens
4 Focus ring (p. 88)
5 i-Function button (p. 60)
6 Zoom ring
7 Lens contacts
Locking or unlocking the lens
To lock the lens, pull and hold the zoom lock switch away from the camera
body and rotate the zoom ring as shown in the illustration.
My Camera > Lenses
46
To unlock the lens, rotate the zoom ring as shown in the illustration until
you hear the click.
You cannot capture a photo when the lens is locked.
SAMSUNG 16 mm F2.4 lens (example)
5
2
1
4
3
No. Description
1 i-Function button (p. 60)
2 Lens mount index
3 Focus ring (p. 88)
4 Lens
5 Lens contacts
My Camera > Lenses
47
Lens markings
Find out what the numbers on the lens signify.
SAMSUNG 18-200 mm F3.5-6.3 ED OIS lens (example)
1 2 345
No. Description
1
Aperture value
A range of supported aperture values. For example, 1:3.5–6.3 means
the maximum aperture value range from 3.5 to 6.3.
2
Focal length
The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in
millimeters). This figure is expressed in a range: minimum focal length
to maximum focal length of the lens.
Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject
is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view.
3
ED
ED stands for Extra-low Dispersion. Extra-low dispersion glass is
effective in minimizing chromatic aberration (a distortion that occurs
when a lens fails to focus all colors to the same convergence point).
4
OIS (p. 89)
Optical Image Stabilization. Lenses with this feature can detect
camera shake and effectively cancel out the movement inside the
camera.
5
Ø
The lens diameter. When you attach a filter to the lens, make sure that
the diameters of the lens and the filter are the same.
My Camera
48
Accessories
You can use accessories including external flash and GPS module that can
help you capture better and more convenient photos.
For more information about optional accessories, refer to the manual for
each accessory.
• The illustrations may differ from the actual items.
• You can purchase Samsung-approved accessories at a retailer or a Samsung
service center. Samsung is not responsible for damage caused by using
another manufacturer's accessories.
External flash layout
SEF8A (example)
1
2
3
No. Description
1 Bulb
2 Hot-shoe fastening dial
3 Hot-shoe connection
My Camera > Accessories
49
Connecting the external flash
1 Remove the hot-shoe cover from the camera.
2 Mount the flash by sliding it into the hot-shoe.
3 Lock the flash into place by turning the hot-shoe fastening dial
clockwise.
4 Lift up the flash for use.
My Camera > Accessories
50
• You can capture a photo with a flash that is not fully charged, but it is
recommended to use a fully charged flash.
• Refer to the optional accessories page for available external flashes. (p. 195)
• The available options may differ depending on the shooting mode.
• There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the
flash fires a second time.
• SEF8A may not be compatible with other NX series cameras.
• For more details about optional flashes, refer to the user manual for the flash.
Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible flashes may damage
your camera.
SEF220A (example) (optional)
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
No. Description
1 Display icons
2 READY lamp/Test button
3 MODE button
4 Flash release button
5 POWER button
6 Battery cover
7 Bulb
8 TELE/WIDE mode switch
9 Hot-shoe connection
My Camera > Accessories
51
GPS module layout (optional)
1
2
3
4
5
No. Description
1 Status lamp
2 POWER button
3 Hot-shoe fastening dial
4 Hot-shoe connection
5 Battery cover
Attaching the GPS module
1 Remove the hot-shoe cover from the camera.
2 Mount the GPS module by sliding it into the hot-shoe.
My Camera > Accessories
52
3 Lock the GPS module into place by turning the hot-shoe
fastening dial towards LOCK.
4 Press the power button of the GPS module.
My Camera
53
Shooting modes
Two simple shooting modes—Smart Auto and Smart mode—help you
capture photos with numerous automatic settings. Additional modes
allow for greater customization of settings.
Icon Description
t Smart Auto mode (p. 53)
P Program mode (p. 55)
A Aperture Priority mode (p. 57)
S Shutter Priority mode (p. 58)
M Manual mode (p. 59)
i Lens Priority mode (p. 60)
s Smart mode (p. 64)
B Wi-Fi features (p. 122)
t Smart Auto mode
In Smart Auto mode, the camera recognizes surrounding conditions
and automatically adjusts factors that contribute to exposure, including
shutter speed, aperture value, metering, White Balance, and exposure
compensation. As the camera controls most of the functions, some
shooting functions are limited. This mode is useful for capturing quick
snapshots with the least amount of adjustment.
My Camera > Shooting modes
54
1 Rotate the mode dial to t.
2 Align your subject in the frame.
3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus.
• The camera selects a scene. An appropriate scene icon appears at
the screen.
Recognizable scenes
Icon Description
Landscapes
Scenes with bright white backgrounds
Landscapes at night
Icon Description
Portraits at night
Landscapes with backlighting
Portraits with backlighting
Portraits
Close-up photos of objects
Close-up photos of text
Sunsets
Indoors, dark
Partially lit
Close-up with spot lighting
Portraits with spot lighting
Blue skies
Forested areas typically consist of green-colored subjects
Close-up photos of colorful subjects
Camera is stabilized on a tripod and the subject is not moving for a
certain period of time. (when shooting in the dark)
Actively moving subjects
Fireworks (when using a tripod)
4 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo.
My Camera > Shooting modes
55
• The camera may detect different scenes, even the same subjects, depending
on external factors such as camera shake, lighting, and distance to the
subject.
• If the camera does not recognize an appropriate scene mode, it uses the
default settings for the Smart Auto mode.
• Even if it detects a face, the camera may not select a portrait mode
depending on the subject's position or lighting.
• Even if you use a tripod, the camera may not detect the tripod mode ( ) if
the subject is moving.
• The camera consumes more battery power, because it changes settings often
to select appropriate scenes.
P Program mode
The camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture value so that
an optimal exposure value can be achieved.
This mode is useful when you want to capture shots of constant exposure
while being able to adjust other settings.
1 Rotate the mode dial to P.
2 Set the desired options.
3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture the photo.
My Camera > Shooting modes
56
Program Shift
Program Shift function lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture
value while the camera maintains the same exposure. When you scroll the
jog dial to the left, the shutter speed decreases and the aperture value
increases. When you scroll the jog dial to the right, the shutter speed
increases and the aperture value decreases.
Minimum shutter speed
Set the shutter speed not to be slower than the selected speed. However, if
an optimal exposure value cannot be achieved because the ISO sensitivity
reached the maximum ISO value that is set by Auto ISO Range, shutter
speed may be slower than the selected minimum shutter speed.
To set the minimum
shutter speed,
In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Minimum
Shutter Speed → an option.
• This feature is available only when the ISO sensitivity is set to Auto.
• This feature is available only in Program or Aperture priority mode.
My Camera > Shooting modes
57
A Aperture Priority mode
In Aperture Priority mode, the camera automatically calculates shutter
speed according to the aperture value you choose.
You can adjust the depth of field (DOF) by changing the aperture value.
This mode is useful for taking portraits, flowers, or landscape shots.
Large Depth of Field Small Depth of Field
1 Rotate the mode dial to A.
2 Scroll the jog dial to adjust the aperture value.
• You can also adjust the aperture value by pressing [f], moving to
the aperture value, and then scrolling the jog dial or dragging the
screen.
3 Set the desired options.
4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture the photo.
• In low-light settings, you may need to increase the ISO sensitivity to prevent
blurred photos.
• To set the minimum shutter speed, in Shooting mode, press [m] →1
→ Minimum Shutter Speed → an option.
My Camera > Shooting modes
58
S Shutter Priority mode
In Shutter Priority mode, the camera automatically adjusts the aperture
value according to the shutter speed you choose. This mode is useful for
capturing photos of fast-moving subjects or for creating tracer effects in a
photo.
For example, set the shutter speed to over 1/500 s to freeze the subject. To
make the subject appear blurred set the shutter speed to below 1/30 s.
Slow shutter speed Fast shutter speed
1 Rotate the mode dial to S.
2 Scroll the jog dial to adjust the shutter speed.
• You can also adjust the shutter speed by pressing [f], moving to
the shutter speed, and then scrolling the jog dial or dragging the
screen.
3 Set the desired options.
4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture the photo.
In order to compensate for the reduced amount of light allowed by fast shutter
speeds, open the aperture and let in more light. If your photos are still too dark,
increase the ISO value.
My Camera > Shooting modes
59
M Manual mode
Manual mode lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture value
manually. In this mode, you can fully control the exposure of your photos.
This mode is useful in controlled shooting environments, such as a studio,
or when it is necessary to fine-tune camera settings. The Manual mode is
also recommended for shooting night scenes or fireworks.
1 Rotate the mode dial to M.
2 Scroll the jog dial to adjust the shutter speed.
3 Press and hold [W], and then rotate the mode dial to adjust
the aperture value.
• You can also adjust the shutter speed or the aperture value by
pressing [f], moving to the shutter speed or the aperture value,
and then scrolling the jog dial or dragging the screen.
4 Set the desired options.
5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture the photo.
Framing mode
When you adjust the aperture value or shutter speed, the exposure
changes according to the settings, so the display may darken. With this
function on, the brightness of the display is constant regardless of the
settings, so you can better frame your shot.
To use Framing
Mode,
In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Framing Mode
→ an option.
My Camera > Shooting modes
60
Using the Bulb function
Use the Bulb function to shoot night scenes or the night sky. While you are
pressing [Shutter], the shutter is left open so you can create moving light
effects.
To use a bulb, Completely scroll the jog dial to the left to Bulb → Press and
hold [Shutter] for the desired time.
• If you set a high ISO value or open the shutter for a long time, image noise
may increase.
• Drive options, flash, and One touch shot cannot be used with the Bulb
function.
• The Bulb function is available only in Manual mode.
• Use a tripod and shutter release to prevent your camera from shaking.
• The longer you open the shutter, the longer it takes to save a photo. Do not
turn the camera off while the camera saves a photo.
• If you use this function for a long time, use a fully charged battery.
i Lens Priority mode
You can adjust the depth of field to blur or sharpen the background.
Using E
1 Rotate the mode dial to i.
2 Press [i-Function] on the lens to select E.
• You can also press [i-Function], and then press [C/F] or drag the
screen to select E.
My Camera > Shooting modes
61
3 Adjust the focus ring to select a value.
• You can also scroll the jog dial to adjust the value.
• You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the value.
Defocus
E
Sharpen
4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture the photo.
• As you sharpen photos, the aperture value Increases and the shutter speed
reduces. In dark places, photos may be blurry.
• This function is not available when you set 3D Auto Mode in 3D mode.
Using i-Function in P/A/S/M modes
When you use the i-Function button on an i-Function lens, you can
manually select and adjust shutter speed, aperture value, exposure value,
ISO sensitivity, and White Balance on the lens.
1 Rotate the mode dial to P, A, S, or M.
2 Press [i-Function] on the lens to select a setting.
• You can also press [i-Function], and then press [C/F] or drag the
screen to select a setting.
My Camera > Shooting modes
62
3 Adjust the focus ring to select an option.
• You can also scroll the jog dial or drag the screen to select an
option.
4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture the photo.
Available options
Shooting mode PASM 3D
Aperture -O-OShutter
Speed - - OO -
EV OOO - O
ISO OOOO -
White Balance OOOOO
Z OOOO -
• To select items to appear when you press [i-Function] on the lens in Shooting
mode, press [m] → 5 → iFn Customizing → an item.
• This function is not available when you set 3D Auto Mode in 3D mode.
My Camera > Shooting modes
63
Using Z
The Z allows you to zoom in on a subject with less degradation of
photo quality than the Digital zoom. However, the photo resolution may
change compared to when you zoom in by rotating the zoom ring.
1 Rotate the mode dial to P, A, S, M, or i.
2 Press [i-Function] on the lens to select Z.
• You can also press [i-Function], and then press [C/F] or drag the
screen to select Z.
3 Adjust the focus ring to select a zoom ratio.
• You can also scroll the jog dial or drag the screen to select an
option.
• Photo resolution varies according to the zoom ratio if you use the
Z.
3:2 16:9 1:1
x1.2 4560X3040 (13.9M) 4560X2568 (11.7M) 3040X3040 (9.2M)
x1.4 3888X2592 (10.1M) 3888X2184 (8.5M) 2592X2592 (6.7M)
x1.7 3264X2176 (7.1M) 3264X1840 (6.0M) 2176X2176 (4.7M)
x2 2736X1824 (5.0M) 2736X1536 (4.2M) 1824X1824 (3.3M)
These figures are based on the maximum resolution at each image ratio.
4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture the photo.
• Z is not available when you capture burst shots.
• Z is not available when you capture photos in the RAW file format.
• Z is deactivated when you record videos by pressing the video
recording button.
• This function is not available when you set 3D Auto Mode in 3D mode.
My Camera > Shooting modes
64
s Smart mode
In Smart mode, you can capture photos with options that are preset for a
specific scene.
1 Rotate the mode dial to s.
2 Select a scene.
• To select a shooting mode when the mode dial is set to s, press
[f] or touch , and then select a desired mode.
Smart : Beauty Face
Set
Option Description
Beauty Face Capture a portrait with options to hide facial
imperfections.
Best Face Capture multiple photos and replace faces to create
the best possible image.
Landscape Capture still-life scenes and landscapes.
Option Description
Macro Capture small or close-up subjects.
Action Freeze Capture subjects moving at high speed.
Rich Tones Capture a photo with vibrant colors.
Panorama Capture a wide panoramic scene in a single photo.
Waterfall Capture scenes with waterfalls.
Silhouette Capture subjects as dark shapes against a light
background.
Sunset Capture scenes at sunset, with natural-looking reds
and yellows.
Night
Capture multiple photos in low light conditions
without a flash. The camera combines them to create a
single image that is brighter and has less blurring.
Fireworks Capture scenes with fireworks.
Light Trace Capture scenes with the light trailing in low-light
conditions.
Creative Shot Capture photos with effects applied automatically.
3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture.
My Camera > Shooting modes
65
Using the Best Face mode
In Best Face mode, you can capture multiple photos and replace faces to
create the best possible image. Use this mode to select the best image for
each individual when capturing group photos.
1 Rotate the mode dial to s, and then select Best Face.
2 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter]
to focus.
3 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo.
• The camera captures 5 photos consecutively.
• The first photo is set as the background image.
• The camera automatically detects faces after shooting.
4 Touch a face to replace.
5 Touch the best image from the 5 faces that were captured.
• Repeat steps 4 and 5 to replace the rest faces of the photo.
• The icon will appear on the image that the camera recommends.
6 Touch to save the photo.
• Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking.
• The resolution is set to 5.9M or smaller.
My Camera > Shooting modes
66
Capturing panoramic photos
Capture a 2D or 3D panoramic photo. Captured 3D panoramic photos can
be viewed only on a 3D TV or 3D monitor.
1 Rotate the mode dial to s, and then select Panorama.
2 Press [m] →1→ Panorama → Live Panorama or 3D.
3 Press [m] to return to Shooting mode.
4 Press and hold [Shutter] to start shooting.
5 With [Shutter] pressed, slowly move the camera in the
direction you selected.
• In 3D Panorama mode, you can capture a scene only in horizontal
directions.
• An arrow toward the direction of motion is displayed, and the entire
shooting image is displayed in the preview box.
• When the scenes are aligned, the camera captures the next photo
automatically.
6 When you are finished, release [Shutter].
• The camera will automatically save the shots into one photo.
• If you release [Shutter] while shooting, the panoramic shooting
stops and photos that have been captured are saved.
My Camera > Shooting modes
67
• The resolution varies depending on the panoramic photo you captured.
• In Panorama mode, some shooting options are not available.
• The camera may stop shooting due to the shooting composition or the
subject's movement.
• In Panorama mode, your camera may not capture the entire last scene if you
stop moving the camera to improve the photo quality. To capture the entire
scene, move your camera slightly beyond the point where you want the
scene to end.
• In 3D Panorama mode, your camera may not capture the very beginning or
end of a scene due to the nature of the 3D effect. To capture the entire scene,
move slightly beyond the beginning and end points you want to capture.
• Photos captured with the 3D function are saved in JPEG (2D) and MPO (3D)
formats. On your camera's display, you can view only JPEG files.
• To view 3D files, connect your camera to a 3D TV or 3D monitor with an
optional HDMI cable. While viewing, wear proper 3D glasses.
• Capturing photos in 3D Panorama mode may result in a less pronounced 3D
effect than those captured with a 3D lens. To increase the 3D effect, attach
the optional 3D lens and use 3D mode. (p. 69)
• For best results when capturing panoramic photos, avoid the following:
- moving the camera too quickly or too slowly
- moving the camera too little to capture the next image
- moving the camera at irregular speeds
- shaking the camera
- shooting in dark places
- capturing moving subjects nearby
- shooting conditions where the brightness or color of light is changing
• Photos taken are automatically saved, and shooting is stopped under the
following conditions:
- if you change the shooting direction while shooting
- if you move the camera too rapidly
- if you do not move the camera
My Camera > Shooting modes
68
Recording a video
In Shooting mode, you can record Full HD videos (1920X1080) by pressing
(Video recording). The camera lets you record a video up to 29 minutes
and 59 seconds in length at 60, 30, 24, or 15 fps, and saves the files in
MP4 (H.264) format. 60 fps is available only with 1920X1080 and 1280X720
and 24 fps is available only with 1920X810. 15 fps is available only
with some Smart Filter options. The sound is recorded via the camera's
microphone.
You can set the exposure by adjusting the aperture value and shutter
speed for the mode you selected. When you use a lens that does not have
an AF/MF switch while recording a video, press [F] to deactivate or
activate the AF function. When you use the lens that has an AF/MF switch,
the AF function works according to the switch’s setting.
Select Fader to fade in or out a scene. You can also select Voice, Wind Cut,
or other options to set recording options. (p. 106)
1 Rotate the mode dial to t, P, A, S, M, i, or s.
• This feature may not work in some modes.
2 Set the desired options.
3 Press (Video recording) to start recording.
4 Press (Video recording) again to stop.
• H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC) is the latest video coding format established
in 2003 collaboratively by ISO-IEC and ITU-T. Since this format uses a high
compression rate, more data can be saved in less memory space.
• If you have the image stabilizer option on when shooting a movie, the
camera may record the image stabilizer sound.
• The zoom sound or other lens sounds may be recorded if you adjust the lens
while recording a video.
• When using an optional video lens, the autofocus noise is not recorded.
• If you remove the camera lens while recording a movie, the recording will be
interrupted. Do not change the lens while recording.
• If you attach an external microphone while recording a movie, sound will not
be recorded through the external microphone. (The previous settings are
maintained.) If you remove the external microphone while recording a movie,
sound will not be recorded. Turn off the camera before attaching or removing
the external microphone.
My Camera > Shooting modes
69
• If you change the shooting angle of the camera suddenly while shooting a
movie, the camera may not be able to record images accurately. Use a tripod
to minimize camera shake.
• The camera supports only the Multi AF function when recording a video. You
cannot use any other focus area setting functions, such as Face Detection AF.
• When the size of a movie file exceeds 4 GB, the camera automatically stops
recording even if the maximum recording time (29 minutes and 59 seconds)
has not been reached.
• If you use a slow writing memory card, the recording of your movie can
be interrupted because the card cannot process data at the rate the video
is being shot. If this occurs, replace the card with a faster memory card or
reduce the video size (for example, from 1280X720 to 640X480).
• When formatting a memory card, always format using the camera. If you
format on another camera or a PC, you can lose files on the card or cause a
change in the capacity of the card.
• When you press the video recording button, Z turns off.
• While recording a video in the same ISO sensitivity, the screen may be darker
than taking a photo. Adjust the ISO sensitivity.
• When you record a video in P, A, or S mode, ISO is automatically set to Auto.
3D mode
You can capture 3D photos or videos with an optional 3D lens.
SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 [T6] 2D/3D lens (example)
Set the 2D/3D switch on the lens to 3D, and then capture a photo or video
1.5-5 m away from the subject.
My Camera > Shooting modes
70
• 3D mode is always on, regardless of the mode dial of the camera, except
B.
• To use auto 3D options that enable the camera to set shooting options
automatically depending on shooting conditions in 3D mode, press
[m] →1→ 3D Auto Mode → On.
• To change the 3D recording option, press [m] →6→
3D REC Mode → a desired option.
* Default
Icon Description
Side by Side*: Displays two images next to each other.
Frame Packing: Displays the images for the left and right eye
alternately in frames.
• Available shooting options differ compared to other shooting modes.
• You can select either 4.1M (2688X1512) or 2.1M (1920X1080) photo size.
• The video resolution is set to 1920X1080.
• Videos recorded in 3D may be dark or playback may be jittery.
• Shooting in low temperatures may result in color distortion in images and
may consume more battery power.
• You may not be able to shoot properly in conditions below 8.5 LV/900 lux. For
best results, capture photos in places with sufficient light.
• When you photograph objects that contain polarizing material, such as a
display, sunglasses, or a polarizing filter, or use the polarizing material with
your lens, the images may appear dark or the 3D effect may not be applied
properly.
• Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking.
• If you rotate or tilt the camera vertically while shooting, the 3D effect may not
be applied properly. Capture images with the camera in the normal position.
• If you shoot in fluorescent lighting or capture images displayed by projectors
or TVs, the images may appear black due to the flicker effect.
• In 3D mode, the Enlarge x8 option of MF Assist may not be available.
• The camera's display shows 3D videos only in 2D.
• Photos captured with the 3D function are saved in JPEG (2D) and MPO (3D)
formats. On your camera's display, you can view only JPEG files.
• To view 3D files, connect your camera to a 3D TV or 3D monitor with an
optional HDMI cable. While viewing, wear proper 3D glasses.
• You cannot use the flash in 3D mode.
My Camera > Shooting modes
71
Available functions by shooting mode
For details about shooting functions, see Chapter 2.
Press a shortcut for each function.
Function Available in Shortcut
Photo Size (p. 73) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t/3D* -
Quality (p. 74) P/A/S/M/i/s* -
ISO (p. 75) P/A/S/M f/I
White Balance (p. 76) P/A/S/M f
Picture Wizard (p. 79) P/A/S/M f
Smart Filter (p. 101) P/A/S/M f
AF Mode (p. 80) P/A/S/M/i*/s*/3D* f
AF Area (p. 83) P/A/S/M/i*/s* f/F
Touch AF (p. 86) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t/3D* -
MF Assist (p. 88) P/A/S/M/i/s/t/3D* -
Focus Peaking (p. 88) P/A/S/M/i/s/t -
Link AE to AF Point
(p. 99) P/A/S/M -
Function Available in Shortcut
Framing Mode (p. 59) P/A/S/M -
OIS (Anti-Shake) (p. 89) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t* -
Drive (Continuous/
Burst/Timer/
Bracketing) (p. 90)
P/A/S/M/i*/s*/t*/3D* f/C
Metering (p. 97) P/A/S/M f
Dynamic Range
(p. 100) P/A/S/M -
Flash (p. 94) P*/A*/S*/M*/i*/s*/t* f
Exposure
compensation (p. 102) P/A/S f/W
Exposure lock (p. 103) P/A/S -
* Some functions are limited in these modes.
Chapter 2
Shooting Functions
Learn about the functions you can set in Shooting mode.
You can enjoy more customized photos and videos by using the shooting functions.
Shooting Functions
73
Shooting Functions
Photo size
As you increase the resolution, your photo or video will include more
pixels, so it can be printed on larger paper or displayed on a larger screen.
When you use a high resolution, the file size will also increase. Select a low
resolution for photos that will be displayed in a digital picture frame or
uploaded to the web.
To set the size, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Photo Size →
an option.
Icon Size Recommended for
5472x3648 (3:2) Printing on A1 paper.
3888x2592 (3:2) Printing on A2 paper.
2976x1984 (3:2) Printing on A3 paper.
1728x1152 (3:2) Printing on A5 paper.
5472x3080 (16:9) Printing on A1 paper or viewing on an
HDTV.
3712x2088 (16:9) Printing on A3 paper or viewing on an
HDTV.
2944x1656 (16:9) Printing on A4 paper or viewing on an
HDTV.
1920x1080 (16:9) Printing on A5 paper or viewing on an
HDTV.
3648x3648 (1:1) Printing a square photo on A1 paper.
2640x2640 (1:1) Printing a square photo on A3 paper.
2000x2000 (1:1) Printing a square photo on A4 paper.
1024x1024 (1:1) Printing a square photo on A5 paper.
Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
Size and Resolution
74
Shooting Functions > Size and Resolution
Quality
The camera saves photos in either the JPEG or RAW format.
Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to the JPEG format
and stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the
time of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to the JPEG format and are
stored in the memory without any changes.
RAW files have the file extension “SRW”. To adjust and calibrate exposures,
White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors of the RAW files, or to convert
them into JPEG or TIFF format, use the Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
program found on the supplied DVD-ROM.
Ensure you have enough space on the memory card to save photos in the
RAW format.
To set the quality, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Quality →
an option.
Icon Format Description
JPEG
Super Fine:
• Compressed for the best quality.
• Recommended for printing in large size.
JPEG
Fine:
• Compressed for better quality.
• Recommended for printing in normal size.
Icon Format Description
JPEG
Normal:
• Compressed for normal quality.
• Recommended for printing in small size or
uploading to the web.
RAW
RAW:
• Save a photo without data loss.
• Recommended for editing after shooting.
RAW+JPEG RAW + S.Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG
(S.Fine quality) and RAW format.
RAW+JPEG RAW + Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG (Fine
quality) and RAW format.
RAW+JPEG RAW + Normal: Save a photo in both the JPEG
(Normal quality) and RAW format.
Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
Shooting Functions
75
Shooting Functions
The ISO sensitivity value represents the sensitivity of camera to light.
The larger the ISO value, the more sensitive the camera is to light.
Consequently, by selecting a higher ISO sensitivity value, you can capture
photos in dim or dark places at faster shutter speeds. However, this may
increase electronic noise and result in a grainy photo.
To set ISO sensitivity, In Shooting mode, press [I] → an option.
Examples
ISO 100 ISO 400
ISO 800 ISO 3200
• You can also set the option by pressing [m] →1→ ISO → an option
in Shooting mode.
• Increase the ISO value in places where flash use is prohibited. You can capture
a clear photo by setting a high ISO value without having to secure more light.
• Use the Noise Reduction function in order to reduce the visual noise that can
appear on photos of a high ISO value. (p. 146)
• Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions.
ISO sensitivity
Shooting Functions
76
Shooting Functions
White Balance represents the light source that influences on the color of a
photo.
The color of a photo depends on the type and quality of the light source.
If you want the color of your photo to be realistic, select an appropriate
lighting condition to calibrate the White Balance, such as Auto WB,
Daylight, Cloudy, Tungsten, or adjust color temperature manually.
You can also adjust color for the preset light sources so that the colors of
the photo match the actual scene under mixed lighting conditions.
To set the White
Balance,
In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ White Balance →
an option.
Icon Description
Auto WB: Use automatic settings depending on the lighting
conditions.
Daylight: Select when taking outdoor photos on a sunny day. This
option results in photos closest to the natural colors of the scene.
Cloudy: Select when taking outdoor photos on a cloudy day or in
shadows. Photos captured on cloudy days tend to be more bluish
than on sunny days. This option offsets that effect.
Icon Description
Fluorescent White: Select when shooting under a daylight
fluorescent lamp. Especially for white fluorescent light with a color
temperature of about 4,200K.
Fluorescent NW: Select when shooting under a daylight
fluorescent lamp. Especially for white fluorescent light of very
white hues with a temperature of about 5,000K.
Fluorescent Daylight: Select when shooting under a daylight
fluorescent lamp. Especially for white fluorescent light of slightly
bluish hue with a temperature of about 6,500K.
Tungsten: Select when taking indoor photos under incandescent
bulbs or halogen lamps. Incandescent tungsten bulbs tend to have
a reddish hue. This option offsets that effect.
Flash WB: Select when using a flash.
Custom Set: Use your pre-defined settings. You can manually set
the White Balance by pressing [D], and then shooting a white
sheet of paper. Fill the spot metering circle with the paper and set
the White Balance.
White Balance
77
Shooting Functions > White Balance
Icon Description
Color Temperature: Manually adjust the color temperature of
the light source. Color temperature is a measurement in degrees
Kelvin that indicates the specific type of light source. As the color
temperature increases, the color distribution becomes cooler.
Alternatively, as the color temperature decreases, the color
distribution becomes warmer. Press [D], and then adjust the
color temperature.
Clear sky
Fluorescent H
Fluorescent L
Cloudy
Halogen lamp
Daylight
Tungsten
Candle light
Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
Customizing preset White Balance options
You can also customize preset White Balance options.
To customize
preset options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ White Balance
→ an option → [D] → scroll the jog dial, or press
[D/I/C/F].
White Balance : Daylight
Back Set Reset
You can also touch an area on the screen.
78
Shooting Functions > White Balance
Examples
Auto WB Daylight
Fluorescent Daylight Tungsten
Shooting Functions
79
Shooting Functions
Picture Wizard lets you apply different photo styles to your photo to create
various looks and emotional moods. You can also create and save your
own photo styles by adjusting color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast for
each style.
There is no rule for which style is suitable in which conditions. Experiment
with different styles and find your own settings.
To set a photo style, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Picture Wizard
→ an option.
Examples
Standard Vivid Portrait
Landscape Forest Retro
Cool Calm Classic
• You can also adjust the value of the preset style settings. Select a Picture
Wizard option, press [D], and then adjust color, saturation, sharpness, or
contrast.
• To customize your own picture wizard, select , , or , and then adjust
the color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast.
• Picture Wizard options cannot be set with Smart Filter options at the same
time.
Picture Wizard (photo styles)
Shooting Functions
80
Shooting Functions
AF mode
Learn how to adjust the camera’s focus according to the subjects.
You can select a focusing mode appropriate to the subject among Single
Auto Focus, Continuous Auto Focus, and Manual Focus. The AF function is
activated when you press [Shutter] halfway. In the MF mode, you have to
rotate the focus ring on the lens to focus manually.
In most cases, you can have a focus by selecting Single AF. Fast moving
subjects or subjects of a color similar to the background are difficult to
focus. Select an appropriate focusing mode for such instances.
If your lens has an AF/MF switch, you must set the switch according to
the selected mode. Set the switch to AF when you select Single AF or
Continuous AF. Set the switch to MF when you select Manual Focus.
When your lens has no AF/MF switch, press [F] to select a desired AF
mode.
To set the auto
focus mode, In Shooting mode, press [F] → an option.
• You can also set the option by pressing [m] →1→ AF Mode →
an option in Shooting mode.
• The available options may differ depending on the lens in use.
81
Shooting Functions > AF mode
Single AF
Single AF is appropriate for shooting a still subject. When you press
[Shutter] halfway, the focus fixes in the focus area. The area turns green
when the focus is achieved.
Continuous AF
While you are pressing [Shutter] halfway, the camera continues to
automatic focusing. Once the focus area is fixed on the subject, the subject
is always in focus even when moving. This mode is recommended for
shooting a person on a bicycle, a running dog, or a car racing scene.
82
Shooting Functions > AF mode
Manual focus
You can manually focus on a subject by rotating the focus ring on the
lens. The MF Assist function lets you easily achieve a focus. While you are
rotating the focus ring, the focus area is magnified. When you use the
Focus Peaking function, the color you selected appears on the focused
subject. This mode is recommended for shooting an object similar in color
to the background, a night scene, or fireworks.
If you use this function, you cannot set Touch AF, AF Area, and Link AE to AF
Point options.
Shooting Functions
83
Shooting Functions
The AF area function changes the positions of the focus area.
Generally, cameras focus on the nearest subject. When there are a lot of
subjects, however, unwanted subjects can be in focus. In order to prevent
unwanted subjects from being in focus, change the focus area so that
a desired subject is in focus. You can get a clearer and sharper photo by
selecting an appropriate focus area.
To set the auto
focus area,
In Shooting mode, press [m] → 1→ AF Area →
an option.
• Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
• When the AF/MF switch is set to MF, you cannot change the AF area from the
shooting menu.
• When you use the Face Detection AF option, the camera focuses on the area
with the white frame automatically.
• Depending on the Picture Wizard options, Face Detection may not be
effective.
• When you set manual focus, Face Detection may not be available.
• Face Detection may not be effective when:
- the subject is far from the camera
- it is too bright or too dark
- the subject is not facing the camera
- the subject is wearing sunglasses or a mask
- the subject’s facial expression changes drastically
- the subject is backlit or the lighting conditions are unstable
Selection AF
You can set the focus on an area you want. Apply an out-of-focus effect to
make the subject more distinguishable.
The focus on the photo below was repositioned and resized so that it fits
the subject’s face.
To resize or move the focus area, in Shooting mode, press [o]. Use the
navigation button to move the focus area. Scroll the jog dial to resize the focus
area.
AF area
84
Shooting Functions > AF area
Multi AF
The camera displays a green rectangle in places where focus is set
correctly. The photo is divided into two or more areas, and the camera
obtains focus points of each area. It is recommended for scenery photos.
When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera displays the focus areas as
shown in the photo below.
Face detection AF
The camera focuses on human faces preferentially. Faces of up to
10 people can be detected. This setting is recommended for shooting a
group of people.
When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera focuses on faces as shown
in the photo below. In cases of shooting a group of people, the camera
displays the focus on the nearest person’s face in white and the rest of the
people’s faces in gray.
85
Shooting Functions > AF area
Self-Portrait AF
It can be difficult to check whether your face is in focus when you are
taking a self-portrait. When this function is on, the beep from the camera
gets faster when your face is located at the center of the composition.
Shooting Functions
86
Shooting Functions
Tracking AF
Tracking AF allows you to track and automatically focus on your subject,
even when the subject is moving or when you change the shooting
composition.
White frame: Your camera is
tracking the subject.
Green frame: Your subject is
in focus when you half-press
[Shutter].
Red frame: Your camera failed to
focus.
Select or focus on a focal area that you touch on the screen. Additionally,
focus on the subject and capture a photo by touching on the screen.
To set Touch AF, In Shooting mode, press [m] → 1→ Touch AF →
an option.
Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions.
Touch AF
Touch AF allows you to select and focus on the focus area that you touch
on the screen.
AF Point
The focal area will correspond to the area you touch on the screen and the
focus will not be achieved.
Touch AF
87
Shooting Functions > Touch AF
One touch shot
You can capture a photo with the touch of your finger. As you touch on a
subject, the camera focuses on the subject automatically and captures a
photo.
• If you do not select a focus area, the Auto Focus function does not work.
• Tracking a subject may fail when:
- the subject is too small
- the subject moves excessively
- the subject is backlit or you are shooting in a dark place
- colors or patterns on the subject and the background are the same
- the subject includes horizontal patterns, such as blinds
- the camera shakes excessively
• When tracking fails, the feature will be reset.
• If the camera fails to track the subject, the focus area will be reset.
• If the camera fails to focus, the focus frame will change to red and the focus
will be reset.
Shooting Functions
88
Shooting Functions hooting Functions
In the manual focus mode, you have to rotate the focus ring on the lens to
focus. When you use the MF Assist function or the Focus Peaking function,
you can achieve a clearer focus. This function is only available on a lens
that supports manual focus.
MF Assist
In the manual focus mode, you can enlarge the scene and easily adjust the
focus while rotating the focus ring.
To set the manual
focus assist,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺ1ĺ MF Assist ĺ
an option.
* Default
Option Description
Off Do not use the MF Assist function.
Enlarge x5*
The focus area is magnified by 5 times when you rotate the
focus ring.
* Default
Option Description
Enlarge x8
The focus area is magnified by 8 times when you rotate the
focus ring.
Focus Peaking
In the manual focus mode, the color you selected appears on the focused
subject to help you focus while rotating the focus ring.
To set Focus
Peaking options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺ1ĺ Focus Peaking ĺ
an option.
* Default
Option Description
Level Set a sensitivity for detecting the focused subject.
(Off, High, Normal*, Low)
Color Set a color to appear on the focused subject.
(White*, Red, Green)
Focus assist
Shooting Functions
89
Shooting Functions
Use the Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) function to minimize camera
shake. OIS may not be available with some lenses.
Camera shake tends to occur in dark places or when shooting indoors.
In such cases, the camera uses slower shutter speeds in order to increase
the amount of light taken in, which can result in a blurry photo. You can
prevent this situation by using the OIS function.
If your lens has an OIS switch, you have set the switch to ON to use the OIS
function.
To set OIS options, In Shooting mode, press [m] → 1→ OIS (Anti-Shake)
→ an option.
* Default
Icon Description
Off: The OIS function is off. (This option may not be available with
some lenses.)
Mode 1*: The OIS function is applied only when you press
[Shutter] in full or half.
Mode 2: The OIS function is on.
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS)
Without OIS correction With OIS correction
• OIS may not function properly when:
- you move your camera to follow a moving subject
- there is too much camera shake
- the shutter speed is slow (for example, when you select Night in
s mode)
- the battery is low
- you capture a close-up shot
• If you use the OIS function with a tripod, your images may be blurred by
the vibration of the OIS sensor. Deactivate the OIS function when you use a
tripod.
• If the camera is hit or dropped, the display will be blurry. If this occurs, turn off
the camera, and then turn it on again.
• Use the OIS function only when needed because the function consumes
more battery power.
• To set an OIS option on the menu, set the OIS switch on your lens to ON.
• This option may not be available with some lenses.
• Off may not be available with some lenses.
Shooting Functions
90
Shooting Functions
You can set the shooting method such as Continuous, Burst, Timer and so
on.
Select Single to capture one photo at a time. Select Continuous or Burst
to shoot fast moving subjects. Select AE Bracket, WB Bracket, or P Wiz
Bracket to adjust exposure, White Balance, or apply Picture Wizard effects.
You can also select Timer to capture a photo of yourself.
To set the shooting
method, In Shooting mode, press [C] → an option.
• You can also set the option by pressing [m] →1→ Drive →
an option in Shooting mode.
• Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
Single
Capture one photo whenever you press [Shutter]. Recommended for
general conditions.
Continuous
Continuously capture photos while you are pressing [Shutter]. You can
capture up to 5 photos (Continuous Normal) or 8.6 photos (Continuous
High) per second.
If you select Continuous High, the noise reduction function is not available.
Drive (shooting method)
91
Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method)
Burst
Consecutively capture up to 10 shots per second (3 seconds), 15 shots per
second (2 seconds), or 30 shots per second (1 second) when you press
[Shutter] once. It is recommended for shooting the rapid motion of fast
moving subjects such as racing cars.
• To set the number of shots, in Shooting mode, press [C] → Burst, and then
press [D].
• The photo size is set to 5M.
• It may take longer to save a photo.
• You cannot use the flash with this option.
• Shutter speed must be faster than 1/30 second.
• Photos captured with this option may be slightly enlarged when saving.
• You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200.
• This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available
when the photo quality is set to RAW.
Timer
Capture a photo with a delay of 2 to 30 seconds. The delay is adjustable in
increments of 1 second.
To set the delay, in Shooting mode, press [C] → Timer, and then press [D].
92
Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method)
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket)
When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos: the
original, one a step darker, and one a step lighter. Use a tripod to prevent
blurry photos as the camera captures three photos continuously. You can
adjust the settings in Bracket Set menu.
Exposure -2
Original
Exposure +2
White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket)
When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos:
the original and two more with different White Balance settings. The
original photo is captured when you press [Shutter]. The other two are
automatically adjusted according to the White Balance you have set. You
can adjust the settings in Bracket Set menu.
WB-2
Original
WB+2
This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when
the photo quality is set to RAW.
93
Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method)
Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket)
When you press [Shutter], the camera captures three consecutive photos,
each with a different Picture Wizard setting. The camera captures a photo
and applies the three Picture Wizard options you have set to the image
captured. You can select three different settings in Bracket Set menu.
Vivid
Standard
Retro
This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when
the photo quality is set to RAW.
Bracketing setting
You can set up the options for AE Bracket, WB Bracket, and P Wiz Bracket.
(p. 147)
To set a bracketing
option,
In Shooting mode, press [m] → 5 → Bracket Set →
an option.
Shooting Functions
94
Shooting Functions
In order to capture a realistic photo of a subject, the amount of light
should be constant. When the light source varies, you can use a flash and
supply a constant amount of light. Select appropriate settings according to
a light source and a subject.
To set flash options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Flash →
an option.
Icon Description
Off: Do not use the flash.
Smart Flash: The camera automatically adjusts the brightness
of the flash according to the amount of light in the surrounding
environment.
Auto: The flash automatically fires in dark places.
Auto Red-eye: The flash automatically fires and reduces red-eyes.
Fill in: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo. (Brightness is
automatically adjusted.)
Fill-in Red: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo and
reduces red-eyes.
Icon Description
1st Curtain: The flash fires
immediately after the shutter opens.
The camera captures a photo of a
subject earlier in an action sequence
clearly. Ball moving direction
2nd Curtain: The flash fires just
before the shutter closes. The
camera captures a photo of a
subject later in an action sequence
clearly. Ball moving direction
• The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
• There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the
flash fires a second time.
• If you select Off, the flash does not fire even when an external flash is
attached.
Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible flashes may damage
your camera.
Flash
95
Shooting Functions > Flash
Reducing the red-eye effect
If the flash fires when you capture a photo of a person in the dark, a red
glow may appear in the eyes. To reduce the red-eye effect, select Auto
Red-eye or Fill-in Red.
Without red-eye reduction With red-eye reduction
If the subject is too far from the camera or moves when the first flash fires, redeyes
may not be reduced.
Adjusting the flash intensity
When the flash is on, adjust the flash intensity +/-2 levels.
To set the flash
intensity,
In Shooting mode, press [f] ĺ Flash ĺ an option ĺ [D]
ĺ scroll the jog dial or press [C/F] to adjust the flash
intensity.
Back Set
Flash : 0.0
96
Shooting Functions > Flash
• You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the intensity.
• Adjusting the flash intensity may not be effective when:
- the subject is too close to the camera
- you set a high ISO sensitivity
- the exposure value is too big or too small
• In some shooting modes, you cannot use this function.
• If you attach an intensity-adjustable external flash to the camera, the intensity
settings of the flash will be applied.
• If the subject is too close when you use the flash, some light may be blocked,
resulting in a dark photo. Ensure that the subject is within the recommended
range, which varies by lens.
• When a lens hood is attached, the light from the flash can be blocked by the
hood. Remove the hood to use the flash.
Shooting Functions
97
Shooting Functions
The metering mode refers to the way in which a camera measures the
quantity of light.
The camera measures the amount of light in a scene, and in many of its
modes, uses the measurement to adjust various settings. For example,
if a subject looks darker than its actual color, the camera captures an
overexposed photo of it. If a subject looks lighter than its actual color, the
camera captures an underexposed photo of it.
The brightness and overall mood of the photo can also be affected by how
the camera measures the amount of light. Select an appropriate setting for
a shooting condition.
To set a metering
option,
In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Metering →
an option.
Multi
The Multi mode calculates the amount of light in multiple areas. When
light is sufficient or insufficient, the camera adjusts the exposure by
averaging the overall brightness of the scene. This mode is suitable for
general photos.
Metering
98
Shooting Functions > Metering
Spot
The Spot mode calculates the amount of light in the center. When you
capture a photo in conditions where there is a strong backlight behind a
subject, the camera adjusts the exposure so as to shoot a subject correctly.
For example, when you select the Multi mode in a strong backlight
condition, the camera calculates that the overall amount of light is
abundant, which results in a darker photo. The Spot mode can prevent this
situation as it calculates the amount of light in a designated area.
The subject is in bright color while the background is dark. The Spot mode
is recommended for a situation like this where a huge difference in the
exposure exists between a subject and a background.
Center-weighted
The Center-weighted mode calculates a broader area than the Spot mode
does. It sums up the amount of light in the center portion of the shot
(60–80 %) and that of the rest of the shot (20–40 %). It is recommended
for situations where there is a slight difference in brightness between a
subject and a background or an area of the subject is large compared to
the overall composition of the photo.
99
Shooting Functions > Metering
Measuring the exposure value of the focus area
When this function is turned on, the camera automatically sets an optimal
exposure by calculating the brightness of the focus area.
This function is only available when you select Spot metering or Multi
metering, and Selection AF.
To set this
function,
In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Link AE to AF
Point → an option.
Shooting Functions
100
Shooting Functions
This function automatically corrects the loss of bright detail that can occur
due to shading differences in the photo.
To set Smart Range
options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→
Dynamic Range → an option.
Without Dynamic Range effect With Dynamic Range effect
Icon Description
Off: Do not use Dynamic Range.
Smart Range+: Correct the loss of bright detail.
You cannot set ISO 100.
HDR: Capture 2 photos with different exposures, and then
combine them to create a single image automatically.
• You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200.
• Dynamic Range options cannot be set at the same time as
Picture Wizard options.
Dynamic Range
Shooting Functions
101
Shooting Functions
Smart Filter lets you apply special effects to your photos. You can select
various filter options to create special effects that are difficult to be
achieved with normal lenses.
To set Smart Filter
options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Smart Filter →
an option.
Option Description
Off No effect
Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong
vignette effect of Lomo cameras.
Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in
miniature.
Colored Pencil Apply a colored pencil painting effect.
Watercolor Apply a watercolor painting effect.
Wash drawing Apply a washed-out effect.
Oil Sketch Apply an oil sketching effect.
Ink Sketch Apply an ink sketching effect.
Acryl Apply an acryl painting effect.
Option Description
Negative Apply a negative film effect.
Red Desaturate all colors but red.
Green Desaturate all colors but green.
Blue Desaturate all colors but blue.
Yellow Desaturate all colors but yellow.
Smart filter options cannot be set with Picture Wizard options at the same time.
Smart Filter
Shooting Functions
102
Shooting Functions
The camera automatically sets the exposure by measuring the levels of
light from the photo’s composition and the position of a subject. If the
exposure set by the camera is higher or lower than you expected, you can
adjust the exposure value manually. The exposure value is adjustable in ±3
increments. The camera displays the exposure warning in red for each step
beyond ±3 range.
To adjust the exposure value, while holding down [W], scroll the jog
dial. You can also adjust the exposure value by pressing [f], and then
selecting EV.
You can check the exposure value by the position of the exposure level
indicator.
Exposure level
indicator
Increased exposure
(brighter)
Decreased exposure
(darker)
Exposure warning Standard exposure index
-2
Original
+2
Exposure compensation
Shooting Functions
103
Shooting Functions
When you cannot achieve an appropriate exposure because of a strong
color contrast, lock the exposure, and then capture a photo.
To lock the exposure value, adjust the photo’s exposure, and then press the
custom button.
After locking the exposure, aim the lens where you desire, and then press
[Shutter].
• Set a function of the custom button to AEL to lock the current exposure
value. (p. 150)
• This feature is not available in Manual mode.
Exposure lock
Shooting Functions
104
Shooting Functions
The functions available for video are explained below.
Movie size
Set the movie size.
To set movie size
options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→ Movie Size →
an option.
Icon Size Recommended for
1920X1080 (60 fps) (16:9)
View on a Full HDTV. (Playable only
on full HDTVs capable of playback at
60 fps.)
1920X1080 (30 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV.
1920X1080 (15 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV. (Available only
with some Smart Filter options.)
1920X810 (24 fps)
(Approx. 2.35:1) View on an HDTV.
1280X720 (60 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV.
1280X720 (30 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV.
640X480 (30 fps) (4:3) View on a TV.
320X240 (30 fps) (4:3) Post on a website using the wireless
network (30 seconds maximum).
Movie quality
Set the Movie quality.
To set movie
quality options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→ Movie Quality →
an option.
Icon Extension Description
MP4 (H.264) Normal: Record videos in normal quality.
MP4 (H.264) HQ: Record videos in high quality.
Video functions
105
Shooting Functions > Video functions
Multi Motion
Set the playing speed of a video.
To set playing
speed options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] → 6→ Multi Motion →
an option.
Icon Description
x0.25: Record a video and play it at 1/4 normal speed. (Available
only with 640x480 or 320x240)
x0.5: Record a video and play it at 1/2 normal speed. (Available
only with 1280x720 (30 fps), 640x480, or 320x240)
x1: Record a video and play it at normal speed.
x5: Record a video and play it at 5X normal speed.
x10: Record a video and play it at 10X normal speed.
x20: Record a video and play it at 20X normal speed.
• If you select an option other than x1, sound will not be recorded.
• The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
Fader
You can fade in or fade out a scene using the fader function on the camera
without having to do it on a PC. Set the fade in option to gradually fade in
at the start of the scene. Set the fade out option to gradually fade out the
scene. Use the function appropriately and add dramatic effects on your
videos.
To set fader
options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→ Fader →
an option.
Icon Description
Off: Fader function not used.
In: Scene gradually fades in.
Out: Scene gradually fades out.
In-out: The fader function is applied at the start and end of the
scene.
When you use the fader function, it may take longer to save a file.
106
Shooting Functions > Video functions
Mic Level
Set the mic level for the shooting conditions.
To set the mic
level,
In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→ Mic Level →
an option.
Voice
Sometimes, a muted video is more appealing than the one with sound.
Turn the voice off to record a muted video.
To set voice
options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→ Voice →
an option.
Wind cut
When you record videos in noisy environments, unintended sounds can
be recorded in videos. In particular, severe wind noise recorded in videos
distracts you from enjoying your videos. Use the Wind Cut function to
remove some surrounding noise in addition to wind noise.
To reduce wind
sound,
In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→ Wind Cut →
an option.
Chapter 3
Playback/Editing
Learn about how to play back and edit photos and videos.
Refer to chapter 6 for editing files on a PC.
108
Playback/Editing
Learn how to view photo and video thumbnails and how to protect or
delete files.
If you perform no operations for a while, information and icons on the screen
disappear. When you operate the camera again, they will reappear.
Viewing photos
1 Press [y].
• The most recent file you captured will be displayed.
2 Press [C/F] to scroll through files.
• You can also drag the image left or right to move to another file.
You may not be able to edit or play back files that were captured with other
cameras, due to unsupported sizes or codecs. Use a computer or another device
to edit or play back these files.
Viewing image thumbnails
In order to search for photos and videos you want, convert to the
thumbnail view. The thumbnail view displays multiple images at a time
so that you can easily look through items you wish to find. You can also
classify and display files by category, such as date or file type.
Scroll the jog dial to the left to select the thumbnail view
mode.
(Scroll the jog dial to the right to return to the previous
mode.)
Searching and managing files
109
Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files
Viewing files by category
1 In the thumbnail view, press [m] →z→ Filter →
a category.
• You can also touch FILTER to select a category.
* Default
Option Description
All* View files normally.
Date View files by the date they were saved.
Type View files by the file type.
Location
View files by the place they were saved. (Only the
photos captured with an optional GPS module have
the location information.)
2 Select a list to open it.
3 Select a file to view it.
4 Touch to return to the previous view.
Viewing files as a folder
Continuous and burst shots appear as a folder. Selecting a folder will play
back all photos automatically. Deleting a folder will delete all photos in the
folder.
1 In Playback mode, press [C/F] or drag the image left or
right to move to a desired folder.
• The camera will automatically play back photos in the folder.
2 Scroll the jog dial to the right to open the folder.
• You can also touch the folder on the screen to open the folder.
3 Press [C/F] or drag the image left or right to move to
another file.
4 Scroll the jog dial to the left to return to Playback mode.
110
Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files
Protecting files
Protect your files from accidental deletion.
1 In Playback mode, press [m] →z→ Protect → Select.
2 Press [C/F] to select a file, and then press [o].
3 Press [f].
You cannot delete or rotate a protected file.
Lock/Unlock all files
Lock or unlock all files.
1 In Playback mode, press [m] →z→ Protect → All.
2 Select an option.
Option Description
Lock Lock all files.
Unlock Unlock all files.
Cancel Return to the previous menu.
111
Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files
Deleting files
Delete files in Playback mode and secure more space on your memory
card. Protected files are not deleted.
Deleting a single file
You can select a single file and delete it.
1 In Playback mode, select a file, and then press [n].
2 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.
Deleting multiple files
You can select multiple files and delete them.
1 In Playback mode, press [m] →z→ Delete → Select.
• Alternatively, in thumbnails view, press [n], and then select files to
delete.
2 Select files you want to delete by pressing [C/F], and then
press [o].
• Press [o] again to cancel your selection.
3 Press [n].
4 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.
112
Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files
Deleting all files
You can delete all files on the memory card at once.
1 In Playback mode, press [m].
2 Select z→ Delete → All.
3 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.
113
Playback/Editing
Enlarging a photo
You can enlarge photos when viewing them in Playback mode. You can
also use the Trim function to extract the portion of the image displayed on
the screen and save it as a new file.
Magnified area
Magnification (the maximum
magnification may differ by
resolution)
Full Image Crop
Scroll the jog dial to the right to enlarge a photo.
(Scroll the jog dial to the left to reduce a photo.)
To Do this
Move magnified area Press [D/I/C/F].
Crop the enlarged image Press [f]. (saved as a new file)
Return to the original image Press [o].
You can also pinch your fingers together or spread them apart on the screen to
reduce or enlarge a photo. You can also double-tap an area to enlarge it quickly.
Viewing a slide show
You can view photos in a slide show, apply various effects to the slide
show, and play background music.
1 In Playback mode, press [m].
2 Select z→ Slide Show Options.
3 Select a slide show effect option.
• Skip to step 4 to start a slide show with no effects.
* Default
Option Description
Play Mode Set whether or not to repeat the slide show.
(One Play*, Repeat)
Interval Set the interval between photos. (1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec,
10 sec)
Music Set background audio.
Effect • Set a scene change effect between photos.
• Select Off to cancel effects.
Viewing photos
114
Playback/Editing > Viewing photos
4 Press [m].
5 Select Start Slide Show.
6 View the slide show.
• Press [o] to pause.
• Press [o] again to resume.
• Press [m] to stop the slide show and return to Playback mode.
• Press [D/I] to adjust the volume level.
Auto rotating
With Auto Rotate on, the camera automatically rotates photos you have
captured vertically so they fit the screen horizontally.
To set auto rotate
options,
In Playback mode, press [m] →z→ Auto Rotate →
an option.
Creating a print order (DPOF)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) lets you set the number of copies to be
printed.
The camera saves the DPOF information in the MISC folder of your memory
card. If you have set DPOF information for your images, you can take the
memory card to a digital printing shop for printing. You cannot set the
print order of RAW format files.
Photos with dimensions that are wider than the paper may be cut off
on the left and right edges. Ensure that your photo dimensions are
compatible with the paper you select.
1 In Playback mode, select a photo, and then press [m].
2 Select z→ DPOF.
3 Press [D/I] to set the number of copies.
• To select another photo, press [C/F].
4 Press [o] to save.
115
Playback/Editing
In Playback mode, you can play a video, capture an image from a video, or
crop a video to save as another file.
Stop Capture
Video viewing controls
Icon/Button Description
/ /[C]
View previous file/Scan backward. (Each time you
touch the icon or press the button while playing the
video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X,
8X.)
/ /[o] Pause or resume playback.
/ /[F]
View next file/Scan forward. (Each time you touch the
icon or press the button while playing the video, you
change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.)
/[D/I] Adjust the volume or mute the sound.
Trimming a video during playback
1 In Playback mode, scroll to a video, and then touch .
2 Press [o] or touch to start playing the video.
3 Press [o] or touch at the point where you want the trimming
to begin.
4 Press [f] or touch Start Point.
5 Press [o] or touch to resume playing the video.
6 Press [o] or touch at the point where you want the trimming
to end.
Playing videos
116
Playback/Editing > Playing videos
7 Press [f] or touch End Point.
8 Press [f] or touch Trim to trim a video.
• You can adjust the scene to be cropped by dragging the handles
that appear on the progress bar.
9 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.
• You cannot trim a video recorded in 3D mode.
• The original video should be at least 10 seconds long.
• The camera will save the edited video as a new file and leave the original
video intact.
Capturing an image during playback
1 While viewing a video, press [o] or touch at the point where
you want to capture an image.
2 Press [f] or touch Capture.
• You cannot capture an image from a video recorded in 3D mode.
• The resolution of the captured image will be the same as the original video.
• The captured image is saved as a new file.
117
Playback/Editing
Edited photos are saved as new files under different file names. Photos
captured in some modes cannot be edited with the Image Edit function.
To edit images, In Playback mode, scroll to a photo, and then touch ĺ
an option.
You can also edit images in Playback mode by selecting a photo, and then
pressing [f] or [m] ĺ Edit Image.
Some images may not be edited with the Image Edit function. In this case, use
a supplied image editing software.
The camera will save edited photos as new files.
When you edit photos, the camera will automatically convert them to a lower
resolution. Photos that you rotate or resize manually are not automatically
converted to a lower resolution.
You cannot edit photos while viewing files as a folder. Open the folder and
select a photo to edit each photo.
Cropping a photo
1 Touch ĺ .
2 Drag the corners of the box to adjust the size of the area.
3 Drag the box to move the location of the area.
4 Touch OK.
5 Touch to save.
Editing photos
118
Playback/Editing > Editing photos
Rotating a photo
1 Touch → .
2 Touch an option.
Rotate : Right 90°
3 Touch OK.
4 Touch to save.
• You can also rotate a photo in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then
selecting z→ Rotate → a desired option.
• The camera will overwrite the original file.
Resizing photos
Change the size of a photo and save it as a new file.
1 Touch → .
2 Touch an option.
Resize : 10.1M 3:2
3 Touch OK.
4 Touch to save.
Available resize options differ depending on the original size of the photo.
119
Playback/Editing > Editing photos
Adjusting your photos
You can correct captured photos by adjusting the brightness, contrast, or
saturation.
1 Touch .
2 Touch an adjusting option.
Icon Description
Original (Reset to the original image)
Auto adjustment
Brightness
Contrast
Saturation
RGB adjustment
Color Temperature
Exposure
Hue
3 Press [C/F] to adjust the option.
• You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the option.
• If you selected , skip to step 4.
4 Touch OK.
5 Touch to save.
120
Playback/Editing > Editing photos
Retouching faces
1 Touch ĺ .
2 Press [C/F] to adjust the option.
You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the option.
As the number increases, the skin tone becomes brighter and
smoother.
3 Touch OK.
To cancel correction, touch .
4 Touch to save.
121
Playback/Editing > Editing photos
Applying Smart Filter effects
Apply special effects to your photos.
1 Touch , and then touch an option.
Smart Filter : Vignetting
Option Description
Original No effect
Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast,
and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras.
Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject
appear in miniature.
Colored Pencil Apply a colored pencil painting effect.
Watercolor Apply a watercolor painting effect.
Wash drawing Apply a washed-out effect.
Option Description
Oil Sketch Apply an oil sketching effect.
Ink Sketch Apply an ink sketching effect.
Acryl Apply an acryl painting effect.
Negative Apply a negative film effect.
Red Desaturate all colors but red.
Green Desaturate all colors but green.
Blue Desaturate all colors but blue.
Yellow Desaturate all colors but yellow.
2 Touch OK.
3 Touch to save.
Chapter 4
Wireless network
Learn how to connect to wireless local area networks (WLANs) and use functions.
123
Wireless network
Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Learn to connect via an access point (AP) when you are in a range of a
WLAN. You can also configure network settings.
Connecting to a WLAN
1 Rotate the mode dial to B.
2 Select , , , or .
3 Press [m], and then select Wi-Fi Setting.
• In some modes, follow the on-screen instructions until the Wi-Fi
Setting screen appears.
• The camera automatically searches for available AP devices.
4 Select an AP.
Back
Refresh
Samsung1
Samsung2
Samsung3
Samsung4
• Select Refresh to refresh connectable APs.
• Select Add wireless network to add an AP manually. Your AP name
must be in English to add the AP manually.
Icon/Option Description
Ad hoc AP
Secured AP
WPS AP
Signal strength
Press [F] or touch to open network setting options.
• When you select a secured AP, a pop-up window appears. Enter the
required passwords to connect to the WLAN. For information about
entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127)
• When a login page appears, refer to "Using the login browser".
(p. 125)
• When you select an unsecured AP, the camera will connect to the
WLAN.
• If you select a WPS profile supported AP, select → WPS PIN
connection, and then enter a PIN on the AP device. You can also
connect to a WPS profile supported AP by selecting → WPS
button connection on the camera, and then pushing the WPS
button on the AP device.
• The same AP may be listed twice, with different frequencies,
because your camera supports the dual band function.
124
Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Setting network options
1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press
[F] or touch .
2 Select each option, and then enter the required information.
Option Description
Network Password Enter the network password.
IP Setting Set the IP address automatically or manually.
Manually setting the IP address
1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press
[F] or touch .
2 Select IP Setting → Manual.
3 Select each option, and then enter the required information.
Option Description
IP Enter the static IP address.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask.
Gateway Enter the gateway.
DNS Server Enter the DNS address.
125
Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Using the login browser
You can enter your login information via the login browser when
connecting to some APs, sharing sites, or cloud servers.
Icon Description
Close the login browser.
Move to the previous page.
Move to the next page.
Stop loading the page.
Reload the page.
• You may not be able to select some items depending on the page you
connected to. This does not indicate a malfunction.
• The login browser may not close automatically after you log into some pages.
If this occurs, close the login browser by touching , and then proceed with
the desired operation.
• It may take longer to load the login page due to the page size or network
speed. If this occurs, wait until the login information input window appears.
126
Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Network connection tips
• You must insert a memory card to use the Wi-Fi features.
• The quality of the network connection will be determined by the AP.
• The further the distance between your camera and the AP, the longer it
will take to connect to the network.
• If a nearby device is using the same radio frequency signal as your
camera, it may interrupt your connection.
• If your AP name is not in English, the camera may not be able to locate
the device or the name may appear incorrectly.
• For network settings or a password, contact your network administrator
or network service provider.
• If a WLAN requires authentication from the service provider, you may
not be able to connect to it. To connect the WLAN, contact your network
service provider.
• Depending on the encryption type, the number of digits in the password
may differ.
• A WLAN connection may not be possible in all surroundings.
• The camera may display a WLAN enabled printer on the AP List. You
cannot connect to a network via a printer.
• You cannot connect your camera to a network and a TV simultaneously.
• Connecting to a network may incur additional charges. Costs will vary
based on the conditions of your contract.
• If you cannot connect to a WLAN, try another AP from the available AP
list.
• A login page may appear when you select free WLANs provided by some
network service providers. Enter your ID and password to connect to
the WLAN. For information about registering or the service, contact the
network service providers.
• Be cautious when you enter personal information for an AP connection.
Do not enter any payment or credit card information on your camera.
The manufacturer is not liable for any problem caused by entering such
information.
• Available network connections may differ by country.
• The WLAN feature of your camera must comply with radio transmission
laws in your region. To ensure compliance, use the WLAN feature only in
the country where you purchased the camera.
• The process for adjusting network settings may differ, depending on
network conditions.
• Do not access a network that you are not authorized to use.
• Before you connect to a network, ensure your battery is fully charged.
• You cannot upload or send files captured in some modes.
• Files that you transfer to another device may not be supported by the
device. In this case, use a computer to play back the files.
127
Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Entering text
Learn how to enter text. The icons in the table let you move the cursor,
change the case, etc. Touch a key to enter it.
Icon Description
Move the cursor.
Stop entering text and return to the previous page.
Change case.
Switch between Symbol/Number mode and the normal mode.
Change the input language.
Enter a space.
Save the displayed text.
Delete the last letter.
• You can use only the English alphabets in some modes, regardless of the
display language.
• You can enter up to 64 characters.
• The screen may differ depending on the input mode.
• Touch and hold a key to enter the character at the upper right corner of the
key.
128
Wireless network
Saving files to a smart phone automatically
The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the AutoShare
feature via a WLAN. When you capture a photo with your camera, the
photo is saved to the smart phone automatically.
• The AutoShare feature is supported by Galaxy series smart phones or Galaxy
Tab models with the Android 2.3 OS or higher or iOS devices with the iOS 6.0
or higher. Before using this feature, check the device’s firmware and update it
if needed.
• You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device
before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung
Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART
CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in
2013 or later.
• To install and launch Samsung SMART CAMERA App on an NFC-enabled
smart phone, turn on the NFC feature and place the smart phone near an NFC
tag (p. 30) on the camera. This feature is supported by smart phones running
Android OS 2.3 or higher. This feature is not available for iOS devices.
• You must insert a memory card to use this feature.
• If you set this function, the setting is maintained even when you change the
Shooting mode.
• This feature may not be supported in some modes or may not be available
with some shooting options.
1 On the camera, in Shooting mode, press [m].
2 On the camera, select 1→ AutoShare → On.
• If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the
application appears, select Next.
3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the
application.
• To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart
phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near
the NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is
connected to your camera, and then skip to step 6.
4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone
to the camera.
• The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time.
5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your
camera.
• If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is
connected automatically.
• An icon that shows the connection status ( ) will appear on the
camera’s screen.
6 On the camera, capture a photo.
• The captured photo is saved to the camera, and then transferred to
the smart phone.
• If you recorded a video, it is saved only to the camera.
129
Wireless network
The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the MobileLink
feature via a WLAN. You can easily send photos or videos to your smart
phone.
• The MobileLink feature is supported by Galaxy series smart phones or Galaxy
Tab models with the Android 2.3 OS or higher or iOS devices with the iOS 6.0
or higher. Before using this feature, check the device’s firmware and update it
if needed.
• You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device
before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung
Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART
CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in
2013 or later.
• To install and launch Samsung SMART CAMERA App on an NFC-enabled
smart phone, turn on the NFC feature and place the smart phone near an NFC
tag (p. 30) on the camera. This feature is supported by smart phones running
Android OS 2.3 or higher. This feature is not available for iOS devices.
• When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
• If you select files from the smart phone, you can view up to 1,000 recent files
and send up to 150 files at a time. If you select files from the camera, you can
view files that were selected from the camera. The maximum number of files
that can be sent varies depending on the storage space of the smart phone.
• When you send Full HD videos using MobileLink feature, you may not be able
to play back files on some devices.
• When using this feature on an iOS device, the device may lose its Wi-Fi
connection.
• You cannot send RAW files.
1 On the camera, rotate the mode dial to B.
2 On the camera, select .
• If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the
application appears, select Next.
3 On the camera, select a sending option.
• If you select Select Files from Smartphone, you can use your
smart phone to view and share files stored on the camera.
• If you select Select Files from Camera, you can select files to send
from the camera.
4 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the
application.
• To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart
phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near
the NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is
connected to your camera, and then skip to step 7.
Sending photos or videos to a smart phone
130
Wireless network > Sending photos or videos to a smart phone
5 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone
to the camera.
• The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time.
6 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your
camera.
• If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is
connected automatically.
7 On the smart phone or camera, select files to transfer from the
camera.
8 On the smart phone, touch the copy button or on the camera,
select Send.
• The camera will send the files.
131
Wireless network
The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the Remote
Viewfinder feature via a WLAN. Use the smart phone as a remote shutter
release with the Remote Viewfinder feature. The captured photo will
display on the smart phone.
• The Remote Viewfinder feature is supported by Galaxy series smart phones or
Galaxy Tab models with the Android 2.3 OS or higher or iOS devices with the
iOS 6.0 or higher. Before using this feature, check the device’s firmware and
update it if needed.
• You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device
before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung
Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART
CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in
2013 or later.
• To install and launch Samsung SMART CAMERA App on an NFC-enabled
smart phone, turn on the NFC feature and place the smart phone near an NFC
tag (p. 30) on the camera. This feature is supported by smart phones running
Android OS 2.3 or higher. This feature is not available for iOS devices.
• This function is not available in 3D mode.
1 On the camera, rotate the mode dial to B.
2 On the camera, select .
• If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the
application appears, select Next.
3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the
application.
• To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart
phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near
the NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is
connected to your camera, and then skip to step 6.
4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone
to the camera.
• The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time.
Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release
132
Wireless network > Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release
5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your
camera.
• If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is
connected automatically.
6 On the smart phone, set the following shooting options.
Icon Description
Flash option
Timer option
Photo size
Saving location
• While using this feature, some buttons are not available on your
camera.
• The zoom button and the shutter button on your smart phone will
not function when using this feature.
• Remote Viewfinder mode supports the and photo sizes only.
7 On the smart phone, touch and hold to focus.
• The focus is automatically set to Multi AF.
8 Release to capture the photo.
• Photos saved to the smart phone will be resized to 1616X1080
when shooting in and to 1920X1080 when shooting in
resolution.
• When you use this feature, the ideal distance between the camera and the
smart phone may vary, depending on your surroundings.
• The smart phone must be within 7 m of the camera to use this feature.
• It will take some time to capture the photo after you release on the smart
phone.
• The Remote Viewfinder function will deactivate when:
- there is an incoming call on the smart phone
- either the camera or the smart phone turns off
- the memory is full
- device loses its connection to the WLAN
- the Wi-Fi connection is poor or unstable
- you perform no operations for approximately 5 minutes while connected
133
Wireless network
Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos
You can send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC
wirelessly.
Installing the program for Auto Backup on
your PC
1 Install i-Launcher on the PC. (p. 163)
2 Connect the camera to the PC with the USB cable.
3 When the Auto Backup program icon appears, click it.
The Auto Backup program is installed on the PC and the
information about the PC will be stored to the camera. Follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
You can also save the information about the PC to the camera by
connecting the PC and the camera via Wi-Fi.
4 Remove the USB cable.
Before installing the program, ensure that the PC is connected to a network.
If no internet connection is available, you must install the program from the
provided CD.
Sending photos or videos to a PC
1 Rotate the mode dial to B.
2 Select .
If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the
application appears, select Next.
You must configure the backup PC information to use the Auto
Backup feature. For more details, refer to "Installing the program
for Auto Backup on your PC". (p. 133) If the Auto Backup program is
installed on your PC, save the PC information via USB cable or Wi-Fi
connection.
The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via
the most recently connected AP device.
If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will
search for available AP devices. (p. 123)
134
Wireless network > Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos
3 Select a backup PC.
• If you have performed a backup before, move to step 4.
4 Select OK.
• To cancel sending, select Cancel.
• You cannot select individual files to backup. This function backs up
only new files on the camera.
• The backup's progress will be shown on the PC monitor.
• When the transfer is completed, the camera will turn off
automatically in approximately 30 seconds. Select Cancel to return
to the previous screen and prevent the camera from turning off
automatically.
• To turn off your PC automatically after the transfer is complete,
select Shut down PC after backup.
• To change the backup PC, select .
• When you connect the camera to the WLAN, select the AP that is connected
to the PC.
• The camera will search for available access points even if you are connecting
to the same access point again.
• If you turn off the camera or remove the battery while sending files, the file
transfer will be interrupted.
• While you are using this feature, the shutter control is disabled on your
camera.
• You can connect only one camera to the PC at a time for sending files.
• The backup may be canceled due to network conditions.
• Photos or videos can be sent to a PC one time only. Files cannot be sent again
even if you reconnect your camera to another PC.
• When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
• You must turn off Windows Firewall and any other firewalls before using this
feature.
• You can send up to 1,000 recent files.
• On the PC software, the server name must be entered in the Latin alphabet
and can contain no more than 48 characters.
• When multiple file types are created at once, only the image files (JPG) will be
sent to the PC with this feature.
135
Wireless network
5 Select the Name box, enter your name, and then touch .
Sender Setting
Name
Save
Email
Reset
6 Select the Email box, enter your email address, and then
touch .
7 Select Save to save your changes.
• To delete your information, select Reset.
You can change settings in the email menu and send photos or videos
stored on the camera via email.
Changing email settings
In the email menu, you can change settings for storing your information.
You can also set or change the email password. For information about
entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127)
Storing your information
1 Rotate the mode dial to B.
2 Select .
• The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via
the most recently connected AP device.
• If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will
search for available AP devices. (p. 123)
3 Press [m].
4 Select Sender Setting.
Sending photos or videos via email
136
Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email
Setting an email password
1 Rotate the mode dial to B.
2 Select .
• The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via
the most recently connected AP device.
• If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will
search for available AP devices. (p. 123)
3 Press [m].
4 Select Setting Password → On.
• To deactivate the password, select Off.
5 When the pop-up appears, select OK.
6 Enter a 4-digit password.
7 Enter the password again.
8 When the pop-up appears, select OK.
If you lost your password, you can reset it by selecting RESET on the password
setting screen. When you reset the information, the previously saved user’s
setting information, email address, and recently sent email list will be deleted.
137
Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email
Changing the email password
1 Rotate the mode dial to B.
2 Select .
• The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via
the most recently connected AP device.
• If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will
search for available AP devices. (p. 123)
3 Press [m].
4 Select Change Password.
5 Enter your current 4-digit password.
6 Enter a new 4-digit password.
7 Enter the new password again.
8 When the pop-up appears, select OK.
Sending photos or videos via email
You can send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. For
information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127)
1 Rotate the mode dial to B.
2 Select .
• The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via
the most recently connected AP device.
• If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will
search for available AP devices. (p. 123)
3 Select the Sender box, enter your email address, and then
touch .
• If you have previously saved your information, it will be inserted
automatically. (p. 135)
• To use an address from the list of previous senders, select →
an address.
138
Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email
4 Select the Receiver box, enter an email address, and then
touch .
• To use an address from the list of previous recipients, select →
an address.
• Select to add additional recipients. You can input up to
30 recipients.
• Select to delete an address from the list.
5 Select Next.
6 Select files to send.
• You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 7 MB or less.
7 Select Next.
8 Select the comment box, enter your comments, and then
touch .
9 Select Send.
• The camera will send the email.
• Even if a photo appears to have transferred successfully, errors with the
recipient’s email account may cause the photo to be rejected or recognized
as spam.
• You may not be able to send an email if no network connection is available or
if your email account settings are incorrect.
• You cannot send an email if the file size exceeds the limit. The maximum
photo resolution you can send is 2M and the longest video you can upload is
a video recorded using . If the selected photo resolution is higher than 2M,
it will be automatically resized to a lower resolution.
• If you cannot send an email because of firewall or user authentication
settings, contact your network administrator or network service provider.
• When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
• You can also send an email in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then
selecting Share(Wi-Fi) → Email.
139
Wireless network
Upload your photos or videos to file sharing websites. Available websites
will be displayed on your camera. To upload files to some websites, you
must visit the website and register before connecting your camera.
Accessing a website
1 Rotate the mode dial to B.
2 Select .
3 Select a website.
• If the pop-up message that prompts you to create an account
appears, select OK.
• The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via
the most recently connected AP device.
• If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN,
it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123)
4 Enter your ID and password to log in.
• For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text".
(p. 127)
• If you connected to SkyDrive, refer to "Using the login browser".
(p. 125)
• To select an ID from the list, select → an ID.
• If you have previously logged in to the website, you may be logged
in automatically.
You must have an existing account on the file sharing website to use this feature.
Using photo or video sharing websites
140
Wireless network > Using photo or video sharing websites
Uploading photos or videos
1 Access the website with your camera.
2 Select files to upload.
• You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 10 MB or less.
(On some websites, the total size or number of files may vary.)
3 Select Upload.
• On some websites, you can enter your comments by selecting
the comment box. For information about entering text, refer to
"Entering text". (p. 127)
• You can set an upload folder for Facebook by pressing [m], and then
selecting Upload Folder (Facebook) on the website's list screen.
• You cannot upload files if the file size exceeds the limit. The maximum photo
resolution you can upload is 2M, and the longest video you can upload is a
video recorded using . If the selected photo resolution is higher than 2M,
it will be automatically resized to a lower resolution. (On some websites, the
maximum photo resolution may vary.)
• The method of uploading photos or videos may differ depending on the
selected website.
• If you cannot access a website because of firewall or user authentication
settings, contact your network administrator or network service provider.
• Uploaded photos or videos may be automatically titled with the date they
were captured.
• The speed of your internet connection may affect how quickly photos upload
or web pages open.
• When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
• You can also upload photos or videos to file sharing websites in Playback
mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) → a desired
website.
• You cannot upload videos to some websites.
• When you upload photos to SkyDrive, they will be resized to 2M while
maintaining their aspect ratios.
141
Wireless network
Using AllShare Play to send files
You can upload files from your camera to AllShare Play online storage or
view files on an AllShare Play device connected to the same AP.
Uploading photos to online storage
1 Rotate the mode dial to B.
2 Select → Web storage.
• If the guide message appears, select OK.
• The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via
the most recently connected AP device.
• If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will
search for available AP devices. (p. 123)
• To change the size for uploaded photos, press [m], and then
select Upload Image Size.
• If you have registered more than one web storage, you can select
from the list by pressing [m], and then selecting Change Web
storage.
3 Enter your ID and password, and then select Login → OK.
• For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127)
• To select an ID from the list, select → an ID.
• If you have previously logged in to the website, you may be logged
in automatically.
To use this feature, you must create an AllShare Play account and an
account with an affiliated online storage service using your PC. After
finishing creating accounts, add your online storage account to AllShare
Play.
4 Select files you want to upload, and then select Upload.
• If you have registered more than one web storage, select a web storage first.
• You cannot upload video files to AllShare Play online storage.
• When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
• You can upload up to 20 files.
• You can also upload photos in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then
selecting Share(Wi-Fi) → AllShare Play.
142
Wireless network > Using AllShare Play to send files
Viewing photos or videos on devices that
support AllShare Play
1 Rotate the mode dial to B.
2 Select ĺNearby devices.
If the guide message appears, select Yes.
The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via
the most recently connected AP device.
If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will
search for available AP devices. (p. 123)
You can set to allow only selected devices or all devices to connect
by pressing [m], and then selecting DLNA Access Control on
the screen.
A sharing file list is created. Wait until other devices can find your
camera.
3 Connect the AllShare Play device to a network, and then turn
on the AllShare Play feature.
Refer to your device's user manual for more information.
4 On the camera, allow the AllShare Play device to connect to
your camera.
5 On the AllShare Play device, select a camera to connect.
6 On the AllShare Play device, browse the shared photos or
videos.
For information about searching for the camera and browsing the
photos or videos on the AllShare Play device, refer to the device's
user manual.
Videos may not play smoothly depending on the type of AllShare
Play device or the network condition. For smooth playback, use a
5 GHz dual-band AP device.
AP
S A camera is connected to a TV that supports AllShare Play via WLAN.
143
Wireless network > Using AllShare Play to send files
• You can share up to 1,000 recent files.
• On an AllShare Play device, you can view only photos or videos captured with
your camera.
• The range of the wireless connection between your camera and an AllShare
Play device may vary depending on the specifications of the AP.
• If the camera is connected to 2 AllShare Play devices, playback may be slower.
• Photos or videos will be shared in their original sizes.
• You can use this feature only with devices that support AllShare Play.
• Shared photos or videos will not be stored on the AllShare Play device, but
they can be stored in the camera to meet the device's specifications.
• Transferring photos or videos to the AllShare Play device may take some time
depending on the network connection, the number of files to be shared, or
the sizes of the files.
• If you power off the camera abnormally while viewing photos or videos on
an AllShare Play device (for example, by removing the battery), the device
considers the camera to still be connected.
• The order of photos or videos on the camera may be different than on the
AllShare Play device.
• Depending on the number of photos or videos you want to share, it may
take some time to load your photos or videos and complete the initial set-up
process.
• While viewing photos or videos on the AllShare Play device, continuously
using the device's remote or performing additional operations on the device
may prevent this feature from working properly.
• If you reorder or sort files on the camera while viewing them on an AllShare
Play device, you must repeat the initial set-up process to update the list of
files on the device.
• When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
• We recommend you use a network cable to connect your AllShare Play device
to your AP. This will minimize any video ‘Stuttering’ you may experience when
streaming content.
• To view files on an AllShare Play device using the Nearby devices feature,
enable multicast mode on your AP.
• 1920X1080 (60 fps) videos can be played only on full HDTVs capable of
playback at 60 fps.
• You can view 3D files only on 3D-compatible TVs or monitors.
144
Wireless network
Sending photos using Wi-Fi Direct
When the camera connects via a WLAN to a device that supports the Wi-Fi
Direct function, you can send photos to the device. This feature may not be
supported on some devices.
1 On the device, turn on the Wi-Fi Direct option.
2 On the camera, in Playback mode, scroll to a photo.
3 Press [m], and then select Share(Wi-Fi) → Wi-Fi Direct.
• When in the single image view, you can send only one photo at a
time.
• When in thumbnails view, you can select multiple photos. Select
Upload when you are finished selecting photos.
4 Select the device from the camera’s list of Wi-Fi Direct devices.
• Ensure that the device's Wi-Fi Direct option is turned on.
• You can also select your camera from the device's list of Wi-Fi Direct
devices.
5 On the device, allow the camera to connect to the device.
• The photo will be sent to the device.
• You can send up to 20 files at a time.
• When there are no photos in the camera memory, you cannot use this
feature.
• If you cannot connect to a Wi-Fi Direct device, update the device with the
latest firmware. This feature may not be supported on some devices.
Chapter 5
Camera settings menu
Learn about the user settings and general settings menu.
You can adjust the settings to better suit your needs and preferences.
146
Camera settings menu
You can set the user environment with these settings.
To set user options, In Shooting mode, press [m] → 5 → an option.
Available items and the order of them may differ depending on shooting
conditions.
ISO Customizing
ISO Step
You can set the size for the ISO sensitivity by either 1/3 or 1 step.
Auto ISO Range
You can set the maximum ISO value under which each EV step is chosen
when you set the ISO to Auto.
* Default
Option Value
1/3 Step
ISO 125, ISO 160, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400,
ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600,
ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200*
1 Step ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200*
Noise Reduction
Use the Noise Reduction to reduce the visual noise in photos.
* Default
Option Description
High ISO NR This function reduces noise that may occur when you
set a high ISO sensitivity. (Off, High, Normal*, Low)
Long Term NR This function reduces noise when you set the camera
for a long exposure. (Off, On*)
User settings
147
Camera settings menu > User settings
Bracket Set
You can set up the options for AE Bracket, WB Bracket, and P Wiz Bracket.
Option Description
AE Bracket Set
Set the exposure interval. (-/+0.3 EV*, -/+0.7 EV,
-/+1 EV, -/+1.3 EV, -/+1.7 EV, -/+2 EV, -/+2.3 EV,
-/+2.7 EV, -/+3 EV)
WB Bracket Set
Adjust the White Balance interval range of the
3 bracketed photos. (AB-/+3*, AB-/+2, AB-/+1,
MG-/+3, MG-/+2, MG-/+1)
For example, AB-/+3 adjusts the Amber value plus
or minus three steps. MG-/+3 adjusts the Magenta
value the same amount.
P Wiz Bracket Set Select 3 Picture Wizard settings the camera uses to
capture the 3 bracketed photos.
DMF (Direct Manual Focus)
You can adjust the focus manually by rotating the focus ring after
achieving the focus by half-pressing [Shutter]. This feature may not be
available with some lenses.
148
Camera settings menu > User settings
Color space
The color space option allows you to select methods for representing
colors. Digital imaging devices such as digital cameras, monitors, and
printers have their own methods for representing colors, which are called
color spaces.
Option Description
sRGB
sRGB (Standard RGB) is an international specification
to define the color space created by IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission). It is widely used for
creating colors on PC monitors and is also the standard
color space for Exif. sRGB is recommended for regular
images and images you intend to publish on the
Internet.
Adobe RGB
Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a
larger color range than sRGB. Its wider range of colors
helps you to easily edit photos on a computer. Note
that individual programs are generally compatible
with a limited number of color spaces.
Adobe RGB
sRGB
When the color space is set to Adobe RGB, photos will be saved as
“_SAMXXXX.JPG”.
149
Camera settings menu > User settings
Distortion Correct
You can correct lens distortion that might occur from lenses.
This feature may not be available with some lenses.
Touch Operation
Set to enable touch operation in Shooting mode.
Option Description
On Use touch operations in Shooting mode.
Off Do not use touch operations in Shooting mode. (You can use
touch operations in other situations.)
iFn Customizing
You can select options that can be adjusted when you press [i-Function]
on an i-Function lens.
Option Description
Aperture Set to adjust the aperture value.
Shutter Speed Set to adjust the shutter speed.
EV Set to adjust the exposure value.
ISO Set to adjust ISO sensitivity.
White Balance Set to adjust the White Balance.
Z Set to adjust the zoom ratio.
User Display
You can add or remove shooting information from the display.
1
2
3
London
No. Description
1 Date & Time
Set to display the date and time.
2 Icons
Set to display icons on the right in Shooting mode.
150
Camera settings menu > User settings
No. Description
3
Histogram
Set the histogram on the display on or off.
About histogram
A histogram is a graph that shows the brightness distribution of a
photo. A histogram inclined to the left indicates a dark photo.
A histogram inclined to the right indicates a bright photo. The height
of the graph is related to color information. The graph gets higher if a
specific color is more common.
Insufficient exposure Balanced exposure Excessive exposure
Key Mapping
You can change the function assigned to the Custom button or DIRECT
LINK button.
* Default
Button Function
Custom
Set a function of the Custom button.
• Optical Preview*: Execute the Depth of Field
Preview function for the current aperture value.
(p. 24)
• One Touch WB (White Balance): Execute the Custom
White Balance function.
• One Touch RAW +: Save a file in the RAW+JPEG
format. To save a file in JPEG format, press the button
again.
• Reset: Reset some settings.
• AEL: Execute the auto exposure lock function.
• AEL Hold: Keep executing the auto exposure lock
function after shooting.
DIRECT LINK
Set a function of the DIRECT LINK button.
(AutoShare*, MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Auto
Backup, Email, SNS & Cloud, AllShare Play)
151
Camera settings menu > User settings
Grid Line
Select a guide to help you compose a scene.
(Off*, 3 X 3, 2 X 2, Cross, Diagonal)
AF Lamp
When shooting in dark places, turn the AF lamp on in order to have a
better auto focus. The Auto Focus functions more accurately in dark places
when the AF lamp is on.
152
Camera settings menu
Learn to configure your camera's settings.
To set Setting
options,
In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] →q→
an option.
* Default
Item Description
Sound
• System Volume: Set the sound volume or turn all sound
off entirely. (Off, Low, Medium*, High)
Even if the system volume is turned off, the camera emits
the sound while playing a video or a slide show.
• AF Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when you
half-press the shutter button on or off. (Off, On*)
• Button Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when
you press the buttons or touch the screen on or off. (Off,
On*)
Quick View
Set the Quick View time length – the amount of time the
camera displays a photo immediately after you capture it.
(Off, 1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, Hold)
* Default
Item Description
Display
Adjust
Adjust the display brightness, auto brightness setting,
display color, or level gauge.
• Display Brightness: You can adjust the display
brightness manually.
• Auto Brightness: Turn auto brightness on or off.
(Off, On*)
• Display Color: You can adjust the display color manually.
• Horizontal Calibration: Calibrate the level gauge. If the
level gauge is not level, position the camera on the level
surface, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
• You cannot access the Horizontal Calibration option
in Playback mode.
• You cannot calibrate the level gauge in portrait
orientation.
Auto Display
Off
Set the display off time. The display turns off if you do not
use the camera for the time you set.
(Off, 30 sec*, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min)
Setting
153
Camera settings menu > Setting
* Default
Item Description
Power Save
Set power shut off time. The camera shuts off if you do not
use it for the time you set. (30 sec, 1 min*, 3 min, 5 min,
10 min, 30 min)
• The camera retains the power-off time setting even if
you replace the battery.
• Power Save may not work if the camera is connected to
a computer or a TV or playing a slide show or a movie.
Help Guide
Display
• Mode Help Guide: Set to display help text about the
selected mode when changing shooting modes.
(Off, On*)
• Function Help Guide: Set to display help text about
menus and functions. (Off, On*)
Press [n] to hide the help text.
Language Set a language the camera shows on the display.
Date & Time
Set date, time, date format, time zone and whether to
imprint the date on photos. (Time Zone, Date & Time,
Date Type, Time Type, Imprint)
• The date appears on the lower right side of the photo.
• When you print a photo, some printers may not print
the date appropriately.
* Default
Item Description
Video Out
Set the video signal output appropriate for your country
when connecting the camera to an external video device
such as a monitor or HDTV.
• NTSC: USA, Canada, Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Mexico, etc
• PAL (Supports only PAL B, D, G, H, or I): Australia, Austria,
Belgium, China, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany,
England, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Singapore,
Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, Norway, etc
Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC)
When you connect the camera to an HDTV that supports
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), you can control the play function of
the camera with the TV remote control.
• Off: You cannot control the play function of camera with
the TV remote control.
• On*: You can control the play function of camera with the
TV remote control.
HDMI Output
When you connect the camera to an HDTV with an HDMI
cable, you can change the resolution of the image.
• NTSC: Auto*, 1080p, 720p, 480p,
576p (activates only when PAL is selected)
If the connected HDTV does not support the resolution
you select, the camera sets the resolution one level lower.
154
Camera settings menu > Setting
* Default
Item Description
3D HDMI
Output
Select an option for playing files on a 3D TV.
• Side by Side*: Displays two images next to each other.
• Frame Packing: Displays the images for the left and right
eye alternately in frames.
File Name
Set the method of creating file names.
• Standard*: SAM_XXXX.JPG (sRGB)/
_SAMXXXX.JPG (Adobe RGB)
• Date:
- sRGB files - MMDDXXXX.JPG. For example, for a photo
captured on Jan. 01, the file name would be
0101XXXX.jpg.
- Adobe RGB files - _MDDXXXX.JPG for the months Jan
through Sept. For the months Oct through Dec, the month
number is replaced by the letters A (Oct.), B (Nov.) and
C (Dec.).
For example, for a photo captured on Feb. 03, the file
name would be _203XXXX.jpg. For a photo captured on
Oct. 05, the file name would be _A05XXXX.jpg.
* Default
Item Description
File Number
Set the method of numbering files and folders.
• Reset: After using the reset function, the next file name is
started at 0001.
• Series*: New file numbers continue the existing number
sequence, even if you have installed a new memory card,
formatted the card, or deleted all photos.
• The first folder name is 100PHOTO, if you have selected
the sRGB color space and Standard file naming, the first
file name is SAM_0001.
• File name numbers are increased by 1 from SAM_0001 to
SAM_9999.
• Folder numbers are increased by 1 from 100PHOTO to
999PHOTO.
• The maximum number of files that can be saved in one
folder is 9,999.
• File numbers are assigned according to DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) specifications.
• If you change a file name (for example, on a computer),
the camera will not be able to play the file.
Folder Type
Set the type of folder.
• Standard*: XXXPHOTO
• Date: XXX_MMDD
155
Camera settings menu > Setting
* Default
Item Description
Format
Format the memory card. Formatting deletes all existing
files including protected files. (Yes, No)
Errors can occur if you use a memory card formatted by
another brand of camera, a memory card reader, or a
computer. Please format memory cards in the camera
before using them to capture photos.
Device
Information
View the firmware version of the body and the lens, Mac
address, and network certification number, or update the
firmware.
• Firmware Update: Update the firmware of the camera
body or lens. (Body Firmware, Lens Firmware)
• You can download firmware upgrades from
www.samsung.com.
• You cannot run a firmware upgrade without a fully
charged battery. Recharge the battery fully before
running a firmware upgrade.
• If you update the firmware, user settings and values will
be reset. (Date, time, language, and video out will not
change.)
• Do not turn the camera off while the update is in
progress.
* Default
Item Description
Dual-band
Mobile AP
Set a frequency for using the camera as an AP for the
AutoShare, MobileLink, or Remote Viewfinder feature.
(5 GHz, 2.4 GHz*)
If you use the camera in a country other than the one
where it was purchased, the 5 GHz Wi-Fi feature may not
function properly, due to differences in radio frequencies.
In this case, use the 2.4 GHz Wi-Fi feature instead.
GPS
• Geotagging: Set to capture photos with location
information using the Global Positioning System (GPS).
Location information is added to the Exif data associated
with the photo. (Off, On*)
• GPS Valid Time Settings: Set the time to use the last
location information when the camera fails to receive
GPS signals. If the camera fails to receive GPS signals after
the specified time, the location information will not be
recorded onto the photos. (15 sec*, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min,
10 min, 30 min)
• Location Display: Set to display the location information
on the screen in Shooting mode. The location information
will appear in Korean only when you are in Korea and
the display language is set to Korean. When another
language is set, the location information will appear in
English. (Off, On*)
• GPS Reset: Set to search for GPS satellites closest to your
current position. (Yes, No)
To use the GPS function, you must purchase an optional
GPS device.
156
Camera settings menu > Setting
* Default
Item Description
Sensor
Cleaning
• Sensor Cleaning: Remove dust from the sensor.
• Start-Up Action: When on, the camera performs sensor
cleaning each time you turn it on. (Off*, On)
As this product uses interchangeable lenses, the sensor
can get dust on it when you change lenses. This can lead
to dust particles appearing in the photos you capture. It
is recommended not to change lenses when you are in a
particularly dusty area. Also, make sure to attach the lens
cap to the lens when not using it.
Reset
Reset the setup menu and shooting options to the factory
defaults. (Date, time, language, and video output settings
do not change.) (Yes, No)
Open Source
Licenses View open source licenses.
Chapter 6
Connecting to external devices
Make full use of the camera by connecting it to external devices such as a computer, HDTV or 3D TV.
158
Connecting to external devices
Play back photos or videos by connecting your camera to an HDTV (3D TV)
using an optional HDMI cable.
Viewing files on an HDTV
1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] →q→
HDMI Output → an option. (p. 153)
2 Turn off your camera and HDTV.
3 Connect your camera to your HDTV with the optional HDMI
cable.
4 Turn on your HDTV, and then select the HDMI video source.
5 Turn on the camera.
• The camera automatically enters into Playback mode when you
connect it to an HDTV.
6 View photos or play videos using the camera buttons.
• When using the HDMI cable, you can connect the camera to an HDTV using
the Anynet+(CEC) method.
• The Anynet+(CEC) functions allow you to control connected devices using the
TV remote control.
• If the HDTV supports Anynet+(CEC), the TV turns on automatically when used
in conjunction with the camera. This feature may not be available on some
HDTVs.
• When connected to an HDTV by an HDMI cable, the camera cannot capture a
photo or video.
• When connected to an HDTV, some of the camera’s playback functions may
not be available.
• The length of time after which the camera and an HDTV are connected may
vary depending on the memory card that you are using. As the main feature
of a memory card is to increase the transfer speed, it is not necessarily true
to say that a memory card with a faster transfer speed is also fast in using the
HDMI function.
• 1920X1080 (60 fps) videos can be played only on full HDTVs capable of
playback at 60 fps.
Viewing files on an HDTV or 3D TV
159
Connecting to external devices > Viewing files on an HDTV or 3D TV
Viewing files on a 3D TV
You can view photos or videos captured in 3D mode or with the 3D
Panorama option in Smart mode on a 3D TV.
1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] →q→
HDMI Output → an option. (p. 153)
2 Select 3D HDMI Output → an option. (p. 154)
3 Turn off your camera and 3D TV.
4 Connect your camera to your 3D TV with the optional HDMI
cable.
5 Turn on your 3D TV, and then select the HDMI video source.
6 Turn on your camera.
• The camera automatically enters into Playback mode when you
connect it to a 3D TV.
7 Move to a 3D file, and then press [I] to switch to 3D mode.
• Press [I] again to switch to 2D Mode.
8 Turn on your TV's 3D function.
• Refer to your TV's user manual for more details.
9 View 3D photos or play 3D videos using the camera buttons.
• You cannot view an MPO file in 3D effect on TVs that do not support the file
format.
• Use proper 3D glasses when you view an MPO file or a 3D video file on a
3D TV.
• Capturing photos in 3D Panorama mode may result in a less pronounced 3D
effect than those captured in 3D mode with a 3D lens.
Do not view the 3D photos or videos captured by your camera on a 3D TV or
3D monitor for an extended period of time. It may cause unpleasant symptoms,
such as eyestrain, fatigue, nausea, and more.
160
Connecting to external devices
Transfer files on a memory card to your computer by connecting the
camera to the PC.
Transferring files to your Windows OS
computer
Connecting the camera as a removable disk
You can connect the camera to your computer as a removable disk.
1 Turn off the camera.
2 Connect the camera to your computer with the USB cable.
You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the
cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not
responsible for any loss of data.
If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not
work properly.
3 Turn on the camera.
The computer recognizes the camera automatically.
4 On your computer, select My Computer ĺ Removable Disk
ĺ DCIM ĺ 100PHOTO or 101_0101.
5 Select the files you want, and then drag or save them to your
computer.
If the Folder Type is set to Date, the folder name appears as “XXX_MMDD”.
For example, if you capture a photo on January 1, the folder name will be
"101_0101".
Transferring files to your computer
161
Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer
Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP)
With Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 8, the methods for
disconnecting the camera are similar.
1 Ensure that no data is being transferred between the camera
and the computer.
If the status lamp on your camera is blinking, it means the data
transfer is in progress. Please wait until the status lamp stops
blinking.
2 Click on the tool bar at the bottom right of your computer
screen.
3 Click the pop-up message.
4 Click the message box indicating safely removed.
5 Remove the USB cable.
Transferring files to your Mac OS
Mac OS 10.5 or later is supported.
1 Turn off the camera.
2 Connect your camera to a Macintosh computer with the USB
cable.
You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the
cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not
responsible for any loss of data.
If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not
work properly.
162
Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer
3 Turn on the camera.
• The computer recognizes the camera automatically and displays a
removable disk icon.
4 Open the removable disk.
5 Transfer photos or videos to the Mac OS computer.
163
Connecting to external devices
You can view and edit files using the provided programs. You can also send
the files to a PC wirelessly.
Installing programs from the provided CD
1 Insert the installation CD into your PC.
2 Select a language.
3 Select a program to install.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions.
5 Click Exit to complete the installation.
Available programs when using i-Launcher
Item Description
Multimedia Viewer You can view files with Multimedia Viewer.
Firmware Upgrade You can download the firmware of your camera.
PC Auto Backup You can send photos or videos that you
captured with the camera to a PC wirelessly.
Using i-Launcher
i-Launcher allows you to play back files with Multimedia Viewer and
provides a link to download the PC Auto Backup program.
Requirements for Windows OS
Item Requirements
CPU Intel® i5 3.3 GHz or higher/
AMD Phenom™ II x4 3.2 GHz or higher
RAM Minimum 512 MB RAM (1 GB or more recommended)
OS* Windows XP SP2, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8
Hard disk
capacity 250 MB or more (1 GB and above recommended)
Others
• CD-ROM drive
• 1024X768 pixels, 16-bit color display compatible
monitor (1280X1024 pixels, 32-bit color display
recommended)
• USB 2.0 port
• nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT or higher/
ATI X1600 series or higher
• Microsoft DirectX 9.0c or higher
* A 32-bit version of i-Launcher will be installed—even on 64-bit editions of Windows XP,
Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 8.
Using programs on a PC
164
Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC
• The requirements are recommendation only. i-Launcher may not work
properly even when the computer meets the requirements, depending on the
condition of your computer.
• If your computer does not meet the requirements, videos may not play
correctly.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage that results from using
unqualified computers such as a computer you assembled yourself.
Requirements for Mac OS
Item Requirements
OS Mac OS 10.5 or higher (except PowerPC)
RAM Minimum 256 MB RAM (512 MB or more
recommended)
Hard disk capacity Minimum 110 MB
Others USB 2.0 port, CD-ROM drive
Opening i-Launcher
On your computer, select Start → All Programs → Samsung →
i-Launcher → Samsung i-Launcher. Or, click Applications → Samsung
→ i-Launcher on your Mac OS computer.
165
Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC
Using Multimedia Viewer
Multimedia Viewer allows you to play back files. From the Samsung
i-Launcher screen, click Multimedia Viewer.
• Multimedia Viewer supports the following formats:
- Videos: MP4 (Video: H.264, Audio: AAC), WMV (WMV 7/8/9), AVI (MJPEG)
- Photos: JPG, GIF, BMP, PNG, TIFF, MPO
• Files that have been recorded with other manufacturers’ devices may not play
back smoothly.
Viewing photos
1
2
3
1011 456789
No. Description
1 File name
2 Enlarged area
3 Histogram
4 Open the selected file.
5 Histogram button
6 Rotate to the left/Rotate to the right.
7 Move to the previous file/Move to the next file.
8 Fit the photo to the screen.
9 View the photo in the original size.
10 Zoom in/Zoom out
11 Switches between 2D and 3D mode.
166
Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC
Viewing videos
1
2
8 4567 3
No. Description
1 File name
2 Adjust the volume.
3 Open the selected file.
4 Move to the next file.
5 Stop
No. Description
6 Pause
7 Move to the previous file.
8 Progress bar
Downloading the firmware
From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click Firmware Upgrade.
Downloading the PC Auto Backup program
From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click PC Auto Backup.
For information about installing the PC Auto Backup program,
refer to page 133.
167
Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC
Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
1 Insert Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM into your PC.
2 Select a language.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to JPEG formats and
stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the time
of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to JPEG formats and are stored
in the memory without any changes. With Adobe Photoshop Lightroom,
you can calibrate exposures, White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors
of photos. You can also edit JPEG or TIFF files as well as RAW files. For more
information, refer to the program guide.
Chapter 7
Appendix
Get information about error messages, camera maintenance,
trouble shooting tips, specifications, and optional accessories.
169
Appendix
When the following error messages appear, try these remedies.
Error messages Suggested remedies
Lens is locked The lens is locked. Rotate the lens counter-clockwise
until you hear a click. (p. 45)
Card Error
• Turn off your camera, and then turn it on again.
• Remove your memory card and insert it again.
• Format your memory card.
Low Battery Insert a charged battery or recharge the battery.
No Image File Capture photos or insert a memory card that contains
photos.
File Error Delete the damaged file or contact a service center.
Memory Full Delete unnecessary files or insert a new memory card.
Card Locked
You can lock SD, SDHC, SDXC, or UHS-1 card to
prevent files from being deleted. Unlock the card
when shooting. (p. 173)
Error messages Suggested remedies
Folder and file
number are max
values. Replace
the card
File names do not match the DCF standard. Transfer
the files on the memory card to your computer and
format the card. (p. 155)
Error 00 Turn off your camera and remount the lens. If the
message still appears, contact a service center.
Error 01/02
Turn off your camera, remove the battery, and insert
again. If the message still appears, contact a service
center.
Error messages
170
Appendix
Cleaning the camera
Camera lens and display
Use a brush to remove dust and wipe the lens gently with a soft cloth.
If any dust remains, apply lens cleaning liquid to a piece of cleaning paper
and wipe gently.
Image sensor
Depending on different shooting conditions, dust may appear in photos
because the image sensor is exposed to the external environment. This
problem is normal, and the exposure to dust occurs in everyday use
of the camera. You can remove dust from the sensor by operating the
sensor cleaning function. (p. 156) If dust remains after cleaning the sensor,
contact a service center. Do not insert the blower into the mounting
opening of the lens.
Camera body
Wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth.
Never use benzene, thinners, or alcohol to clean the device. These solutions can
damage the camera or cause it to malfunction.
Maintaining the camera
171
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Using on beaches or shores
• Protect your camera from sand and dirt when you use it on beaches or in
other similar areas.
• Your camera is not waterproof. Do not handle the battery, adapter, or
memory card with wet hands. Operating the camera with wet hands
may cause damage to your camera.
Storing for extended period of time
• When you store the camera for an extended period, place it in a sealed
container with an absorbent material, such as silica gel.
• Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before
use.
• The present date and time can be initialized when the camera is turned
on after the camera and battery have been separated for a prolonged
period.
Using or storing the camera
Inappropriate places to use or store the camera
• Avoid exposing the camera to very cold or very hot temperatures.
• Avoid using your camera in areas with extremely high humidity, or
where the humidity changes drastically.
• Avoid exposing the camera to direct sunlight and storing it in hot,
poorly ventilated areas, such as in a car during summer time.
• Protect your camera and the display from impact, rough handling, and
excessive vibration to avoid serious damage.
• Avoid using or storing your camera in dusty, dirty, humid, or
poorly ventilated areas to prevent damage to moving parts and
internal components.
• Do not use your camera near fuels, combustibles, or flammable
chemicals. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive
materials in the same compartment as the camera or its accessories.
• Do not store the camera where there are mothballs.
172
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Using the camera with caution in humid environments
When you transfer the camera from a cold environment to a warm one,
condensation can form on the lens or internal components of the camera.
In this situation, turn off the camera and wait for at least 1 hour.
If condensation forms on the memory card, remove the memory card from
the camera and wait until all moisture has evaporated before reinserting it.
Other cautions
• Do not swing your camera by the strap. This may cause injury to yourself
or others or damage to your camera.
• Do not paint your camera, as paint can clog moving parts and prevent
proper operation.
• Turn off the camera when not using it.
• Your camera consists of delicate parts. Avoid impacts to the camera.
• Protect the display from external force by keeping it in the case when
not in use. Protect the camera from scratches by keeping it away from
sand, sharp implements, or loose change.
• Do not use the camera if the screen is cracked or broken. Broken glass or
acrylic could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the camera to a
Samsung service center to have it repaired.
• Never place cameras, batteries, chargers, or accessories near, on, or
in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators.
These devices may be deformed and can overheat and cause a fire or
explosion.
• Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight, as this may discolor the image
sensor or cause it to malfunction.
• Protect your lens from fingerprints and scratches. Clean your lens with a
soft, clean, debris-free lens cloth.
• The camera may turn off if impacted from the outside. This is to protect
the memory card. Turn on the camera to use it again.
• While you use the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not
affect your camera’s lifespan or performance.
• When you use the camera in low temperatures, it may take some time to
turn on, the color of the display may be changed temporarily, or afterimages
may appear. These conditions are not malfunctions and they will
correct themselves when the camera is returned to milder temperatures.
• Paint or metal on the outside of the camera may cause allergies,
itchy skin, eczema, or swelling for people with sensitive skin.
If you experience any of these symptoms, stop using the camera
immediately and consult a doctor.
• Do not insert foreign objects into any of your camera’s compartments,
slots, or access points. Damage due to improper use may not be covered
by your warranty.
• Do not allow unqualified personnel to service the camera or attempt to
service the camera yourself. Any damage that results from unqualified
service is not covered by your warranty.
173
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
About memory card
Supported memory card
This product supports SD (Secure Digital), SDHC (Secure Digital High
Capacity), SDXC (Secure Digital eXtended Capacity), UHS-1 (Ultra High
Speed-1), microSD, microSDHC, microSDXC, or microUHS-1 memory cards.
Terminal
Write-protect switch
Label (front)
You can prevent files from being deleted by using the write-protect switch
on an SD, SDHC, SDXC, or UHS-1 card. Slide the switch down to lock or
slide it up to unlock. Unlock the card when capturing photos and videos.
Memory card adapter
Memory card
To use micro memory cards with this product, a PC, or a memory card
reader, insert the card into an adapter.
174
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Memory card capacity
The memory capacity may differ depending on shooting scenes or shooting conditions. These capacities are based on a 2 GB SD card.
Size Quality
Super Fine Fine Normal RAW RAW + S.Fine RAW + Fine RAW + Normal
Photo
20.0M (5472X3648) 151 179 218 69 47 49 52
10.1M (3888X2592) 276 321 384 - 62 64 66
5.9M (2976X1984) 423 484 565 - 71 72 74
2.0M (1728X1152) 845 923 1,016 - 82 83 84
Burst 479 545 631 - - - -
16.9M (5472X3080) 177 208 252 - 51 53 56
7.8M (3712X2088) 343 396 467 - 66 68 70
4.9M (2944X1656) 487 553 640 - 74 75 76
2.1M (1920X1080) 827 905 999 - 82 83 84
13.3M (3648X3648) 218 255 307 - 56 58 61
7.0M (2640X2640) 373 429 504 - 68 70 72
4.0M (2000X2000) 559 630 721 - 76 77 78
1.1M (1024X1024) 1,111 1,180 1,258 - 86 86 87
175
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Size Quality
HQ Normal
Video
1920X1080 (60 fps)
Approx. 10' 10" Approx. 12' 43"
1920X1080 (30 fps)
Approx. 17' 41" Approx. 22' 09"
*
1920X1080 (15 fps)
Approx. 23' 38" Approx. 29' 24"
1920X810 (24 fps)
Approx. 21' 35" Approx. 27' 02"
1280X720 (60 fps)
Approx. 16' 51" Approx. 21' 06"
1280X720 (30 fps) Approx. 29' 11" Approx. 36' 35"
640X480 (30 fps) Approx. 120' 47" Approx. 153' 30"
For Sharing (30 fps)
Approx. 218' 48" Approx. 278' 24"
* is available only with some Smart Filter options.
• The figures above are measured without using the zoom function.
• Available recording time may vary if you use the zoom.
• Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time.
• The maximum recording time is 29 minutes and 59 seconds per file.
• The maximum playback time of For Sharing videos is 30 seconds per file.
176
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
• Prevent memory cards from making contact with liquids, dirt, or foreign
substances. If dirty, wipe the memory card clean with a soft cloth before
you insert the memory card in your camera.
• Do not allow liquids, dirt, or foreign substances to come in contact with
memory cards or the memory card slot. Doing so may cause memory
cards or the camera to malfunction.
• When you carry a memory card, use a case to protect the card from
electrostatic discharges.
• Transfer important data to other media, such as a hard disk, CD, or DVD.
• When you use the camera for an extended period, the memory card may
become warm. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
• Use a memory card that meets the standard requirements.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data.
Cautions when using memory cards
• Avoid memory cards to very cold or very hot temperatures (below
0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can cause
memory cards to malfunction.
• Insert a memory card in the correct direction. Inserting a memory card in
the wrong direction may damage your camera and memory card.
• Do not use memory cards that have been formatted by other cameras or
by a computer. Reformat the memory card with your camera.
• Turn off the camera when you insert or remove the memory card.
• Do not remove the memory card or turn off your camera while the lamp
is blinking, as this may damage your data.
• When the lifespan of a memory card has expired, you cannot store any
more photos on the card. Use a new memory card.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject memory cards to heavy impact or
pressure.
• Avoid using or storing memory cards near strong magnetic fields.
• Avoid using or keeping memory cards in areas with high temperature,
high humidity, or corrosive substances.
177
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
• Do not rest the device on flammable surfaces, such as bedding, carpets, or
electric blankets for a prolonged period.
• When the device is switched on, do not leave it in any confined space for a
prolonged period.
• Do not allow battery terminals to come in contact with metallic objects, such
as necklaces, coins, keys, or watches.
• Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement
batteries.
• Do not disassemble the battery or puncture the battery with any sharp
object.
• Avoid exposing the battery to high pressure or crushing forces.
• Avoid exposing the battery to major impacts, such as dropping it from high
places.
• Do not expose the battery to temperatures of 60 °C (140 °F) or above.
• Do not allow the battery to come in contact with moisture or liquids.
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the
like.
Disposal guidelines
• Dispose of the battery with care.
• Do not dispose of the battery in a fire.
• Disposal regulations may differ by country or region. Dispose of the battery in
accordance with all local and federal regulations.
Guidelines for charging the battery
Charge the battery only by the method described in this user manual.
The battery can ignite or explode if not charged properly.
About the battery
Use only Samsung-approved batteries.
Battery specifications
Item Description
Model BP1130
Type Lithium-ion battery
Cell capacity 1,130 mAh
Voltage 7.6 V
Charging time* (When the battery
is completely discharged) Approx. 215 min
* Charging the battery by connecting it to a computer may take longer.
Personal injury or death can occur if the battery is handled carelessly or
improperly. For your safety, follow these instructions for proper battery
handling:
• The battery can ignite or explode if not handled properly. If you notice
any deformities, cracks, or other abnormalities in the battery, immediately
discontinue use of the battery and contact your manufacturer.
• Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommend battery chargers and charge
the battery only by the method described in this user manual.
• Do not place the battery near heating devices or expose to excessively warm
environments, such as the inside of an enclosed car in the summertime.
• Do not place the battery in a microwave oven.
• Avoid storing or using the battery in hot, humid places, such as spas or
shower enclosures.
178
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Battery life
Shooting mode Average time / Number of photos
Photos Approx. 165 min/Approx. 330 photos
Videos Approx. 110 min (Record videos at 1920X1080
resolution and 60 fps.)
• The figures above are based on the CIPA test standards.
Your results may differ depending on your actual usage.
• Available shooting time differs depending on background, shooting
interval, and use conditions.
• Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total
recording time.
Low battery message
When the battery has fully discharged, the battery icon will turn red and
the "Low Battery" message will appear.
Notes about using the battery
• Avoid exposing batteries to very cold or very hot temperatures (below
0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can reduce the
charging capacity of your batteries.
• When you use the camera for an extended period, the area around the
battery chamber may become warm. This does not affect the normal use
of the camera.
• Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the
power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock.
• In temperatures below 0 °C/32 °F, battery capacity and battery life may
decrease.
• Battery capacity may decrease in low temperatures, but will return to
normal in milder temperatures.
• Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended
period. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause
serious damage to your camera. Storing the camera for extended
periods with the battery installed causes the battery to discharge. You
may not be able to recharge a fully discharged battery.
• When you do not use the camera for an extended period (3 months or
more), check the battery and recharge it regularly. If you let the battery
discharge continually, its capacity and life may decrease, which can lead
to a malfunction, fire, or explosion.
179
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Cautions about using the battery
Protect batteries, chargers, and memory cards from damage.
Prevent batteries from making contact with metal objects, as this can
create a connection between the + and – terminals of your battery and
lead to temporary or permanent battery damage and may cause a fire or
electric shock.
Notes about charging the battery
• If the status lamp is off, make sure that the battery is inserted correctly.
• If the camera is on while charging, the battery may not fully charge. Turn
off the camera before charging the battery.
• Do not use your camera when you are charging the battery. This may
cause a fire or electric shock.
• Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the
power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock.
• Let the battery charge for at least 10 minutes before turning on the
camera.
• If you connect the camera to an external power source when the battery
is depleted, using high energy-consuming functions will cause the
camera to turn off. To use the camera normally, recharge the battery.
• If you reconnect the power cable when the battery is fully charged, the
status lamp turns on for approximately 30 minutes.
• Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Charge
the battery until the red status lamp turns off.
• If the status lamp blinks in red, reconnect the cable, or remove the
battery and insert it again.
• If you charge the battery when the cable is overheated or the
temperature is too high, the status lamp may blink in red. Charging will
start when the battery cools down.
• Overcharging batteries may shorten battery life. After charging is
finished, disconnect the cable from your camera.
• Do not bend or place heavy objects on the AC cable. Doing so may
damage the cable.
180
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Notes about charging with a computer connected
• Use only the provided USB cable.
• The battery may not charge when:
- you use a USB hub
- other USB devices are connected to your computer
- you connect the cable to the port on the front side of your computer
- the USB port of your computer does not support the power output standard
(5 V, 500 mA)
Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care
• Never dispose of batteries in a fire. Follow all local regulations when you
dispose of used batteries.
• Never place batteries or cameras on or in heating devices, such as
microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may explode when they
are overheated.
181
Appendix
Before contacting a service center
If you are having trouble with your device, try these troubleshooting
solutions before contacting a service professional.
When you leave your camera at a service center, be sure to also leave the other
components that may have contributed to the malfunction, such as the memory
card and battery.
Situation Suggested remedies
Cannot turn on the
camera
• Ensure that the battery is inserted.
• Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly.
• Charge the battery.
The power turns off
suddenly
• Charge the battery.
• Your camera may be in Power save mode or the
display turns off automatically. (p. 153)
• The camera may be turned off automatically to
prevent the memory card from being damaged
due to excessive heat. Turn on your camera
again.
The camera is losing
battery power quickly
• The battery may lose power more quickly in
low temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F). Keep the
battery warm by putting it into your pocket.
• Using the flash or recording videos depletes the
battery quickly. Recharge if needed.
• Batteries are consumable parts that must be
replaced over time. Get a new battery if the
battery life is diminishing quickly.
Situation Suggested remedies
Cannot capture
photos
• There is no space on the memory card. Delete
unnecessary files or insert a new card.
• Format the memory card.
• The memory card is defective. Get a new
memory card.
• The memory card is locked. Unlock the card.
(p. 173)
• Ensure that the camera is switched on.
• Charge the battery.
• Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly.
The camera freezes Remove the battery and insert it again.
The camera heats up
While using the camera, it may heat up.
This is normal and should not affect your camera’s
lifespan or performance.
The flash fires
unexpectedly
The flash may fire due to static electricity.
The camera is not malfunctioning.
The flash does not
work
• The flash option may be set to Off. (p. 94)
• You cannot use the flash in some modes.
The date and time are
incorrect
Set the date and time under the q menu.
(p. 153)
The display or buttons
do not work Remove the battery and insert it again.
182
Appendix > Before contacting a service center
Situation Suggested remedies
The memory card has
an error
• Turn off your camera, and then turn it on again.
• Remove your memory card, and then insert it
again.
• Format your memory card.
See "Cautions when using memory cards" for
more details. (p. 176)
Your computer does
not recognize an SDXC
or UHS-1 memory card
SDXC memory cards use the exFAT file system. To
use SDXC memory cards or UHS-1 memory cards
that are formatted with the exFAT file system on
a Windows XP computer, download and update
the exFAT file system driver from the Microsoft
website.
Your TV or computer
cannot display photos
and videos that are
stored on an SDXC or
UHS-1 memory card
SDXC memory cards use the exFAT file system. To
use SDXC memory cards or UHS-1 memory cards
that are formatted with the exFAT file system,
ensure that the external device is compatible
with the exFAT file system before connecting the
camera to the device.
Cannot display files
If you change the name of a file, your camera may
not play the file (the name of the file should meet
the DCF standard). If you encounter this situation,
display files on your computer.
The photo is blurry
• Ensure that the focus option you set is suitable
for the kind of shot you are capturing.
• Use a tripod to prevent your camera from
shaking.
• Ensure that the lens is clean. If not, clean the
lens. (p. 170)
Situation Suggested remedies
The colors in the
photo do not match
the actual scene
An incorrect White Balance can create unrealistic
color. Select the proper White Balance option to
suit the light source. (p. 76)
The photo is too
bright or too dark.
Your photo is overexposed or underexposed.
• Adjust the aperture value or the shutter speed.
• Adjust the ISO sensitivity. (p. 75)
• Turn off or on the flash. (p. 94)
• Adjust the exposure value. (p. 102)
Photos are distorted
This camera can have minute distortion when
using a wide-angle lens that enables shooting
with a wide angle of view. This is normal, and
does not cause malfunction.
Playback screen does
not appear on the
connected external
device
• Ensure that HDMI cable is properly connected
to the external monitor.
• Ensure that the memory card is properly
recorded.
Your computer does
not recognize your
camera
• Ensure that the USB cable is connected
correctly.
• Ensure that your camera is switched on.
• Ensure that you are using a supported
operating system.
Your computer
disconnects the
camera while
transferring files
The file transfer may be interrupted by static
electricity. Disconnect the USB cable and connect
it again.
183
Appendix > Before contacting a service center
Situation Suggested remedies
Your computer cannot
play videos
Videos may not play on some video player
programs. To play video files captured with your
camera, use the Multimedia Viewer program that
you can install with the i-Launcher program on
your computer.
i-Launcher is not
functioning properly
• End i-Launcher and restart the program.
• Depending on your computer's specifications
and environment, the program may not
launch automatically. In this case, click
Start ĺ All Programs ĺ Samsung ĺ
i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher on your
Windows computer. (For Windows 8, open
Start screen, and then select All apps ĺ
Samsung i-Launcher.) Or, click Applications
ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher on your Mac OS
computer.
Cannot set the DPOF
for RAW files You cannot set the DPOF for RAW files.
Auto Focus does not
work
• Subject is not in focus. When the subject is
outside the AF area, shoot by moving the
subject inside the AF area and half-pressing
[Shutter].
• Subject is too close. Step back from the subject
and shoot.
• The focus mode is set to MF. Switch the mode
to AF.
Situation Suggested remedies
AEL feature does not
work
AEL feature does not work in t, M, i,
and s modes. Select another mode to use this
feature.
Lens does not work
• Ensure that the lens is properly mounted.
• Remove the lens from the camera and
remount it.
External flash or GPS
does not work
Ensure that the external device is properly
mounted and turned on.
The date & time
settings screen
appears when you
power on the camera
• Set the date and time again.
• This screen appears when the camera’s internal
power source is completely discharged. Insert
a fully charged battery and wait at least 72
hours in power off status for the internal power
source to be recharged.
184
Appendix
Camera specifications
Image Sensor
Type CMOS
Sensor size 23.5 X 15.7 mm
Effective pixels Approx. 20.3 mega-pixels
Total pixels Approx. 21.6 mega-pixels
Color filter RGB primary color filter
Lens Mount
Type Samsung NX Mount
Available lens Samsung lenses
Image Stabilization
Type Lens shift (depends on lens)
Mode Off/Mode 1/Mode 2
Distortion Correct
Off/On (depends on lens)
i-Function
E, Z (X1.2, 1.4, 1.7, 2.0)
Dust Reduction
Type Super sonic drive
Display
Type AMOLED with Touch Panel (C-type Touch Control
Enabled)
Size 3.31" (Approx. 84.0 mm)
Resolution WVGA (800X480) 768 k dots (PenTile)
Field of view Approx. 100 %
Angle Tiltable (Up 90°, Down 45°)
User display Grid Line, Icons, Histogram, Distance Scale, Level
gauge
Focusing
Type Phase Detection & Contrast AF
Focusing point
• Total AF point: 105 points (Phase Detection
AF), 247 points (Contrast AF)
• Selection: 1 point (Free selection)
• Multi: Normal 21 (3 X 7) points (Cross point 1),
Close up 35 points
• Face detection: Max. 10 faces
Mode Single AF, Continuous AF, Manual Focus, Touch
AF & Shutter
AF Assist Lamp Green LED
185
Appendix > Camera specifications
Shutter
Type Electronically controlled vertical-run focal plane
shutter
Speed
• Auto: 1/6,000–30 sec.
• Manual: 1/6,000–30 sec. (1/3 EV Step)
• Bulb (time limit: 4 min)
Exposure
Metering system
TTL 221 (17 X 13) Block segment
Metering: Multi, Center-weighted, Spot
Metering range: EV 0–18 (ISO100 · 30 mm, F2)
Compensation ±3 EV (1/3 EV Step)
AE lock CUSTOM key
ISO equivalent
• 1 Step: Auto, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400,
ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200, ISO 6400,
ISO 12800, ISO 25600
• 1/3 Step: Auto, ISO 100, ISO 125, ISO 160,
ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO 500,
ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250,
ISO 1600, ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200,
ISO 4000, ISO 5000, ISO 6400, ISO 8000,
ISO 10000, ISO 12800, ISO 16000, ISO 20000,
ISO 25600
Drive Mode
Mode
Single, Continuous, Burst (5M only), Timer,
Bracket (Auto Exposure, White Balance, Picture
Wizard)
Continuous shooting • JPEG: High (8.6 fps), Normal (5 fps)
• RAW: High (8.6 fps), Normal (5 fps)
Burst shooting • 10, 15, or 30 frames per second
• Up to 30 shots per shutter-press
Bracket shooting
Auto exposure bracketing (±3 EV),
White Balance bracketing,
Picture Wizard bracketing
Self-timer 2–30 sec. (1 second interval)
Shutter release SR2NX02 (via Micro USB port) (optional)
Flash
Type External Flash (Bundle with SEF8A)
Mode Smart Flash, Auto, Auto Red-eye, Fill in,
Fill-in Red, 1st Curtain, 2nd Curtain, Off
Guide number 8 (based on ISO 100) (SEF8A)
Angle of view 28 mm (35 mm film equivalent)
Sync speed Less than 1/180 sec.
186
Appendix > Camera specifications
Flash EV -2–+2 EV (0.5 EV Step)
External flash Optional Samsung external flashes:
SEF42A, SEF220A
Sync terminal Hot-shoe
White Balance
Mode
Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent White,
Fluorescent NW, Fluorescent Daylight, Tungsten,
Flash WB, Custom Set, Color Temperature
(Manual)
Micro adjustment Amber/Blue/Green/Magenta 7 steps respectively
Dynamic Range
Off/Smart Range+/HDR
Picture Wizard
Mode
Standard, Vivid, Portrait, Landscape, Forest,
Retro, Cool, Calm, Classic, Custom1, Custom2,
Custom3
Parameter Color, Saturation, Sharpness, Contrast
Shooting
Mode Smart Auto, Program, Aperture Priority,
Shutter Priority, Manual, Lens Priority, Smart
Smart mode
Beauty Face, Best Face, Landscape, Macro,
Action Freeze, Rich Tones, Panorama, Waterfall,
Silhouette, Sunset, Night, Fireworks, Light Trace,
Creative Shot
Smart Filter
Vignetting, Miniature, Colored Pencil, Watercolor,
Wash drawing, Oil Sketch, Ink Sketch, Acryl,
Negative, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow
Size
• JPEG (3:2): 20.0M (5472X3648),
10.1M (3888X2592), 5.9M (2976X1984),
5.0M (2736X1824) (Burst mode only),
2.0M (1728X1152)
• JPEG (16:9): 16.9M (5472X3080),
7.8M (3712X2088), 4.9M (2944X1656),
2.1M (1920X1080)
• JPEG (1:1): 13.3M (3648X3648),
7.0M (2640X2640), 4.0M (2000X2000),
1.1M (1024X1024)
• RAW: 20.0M (5472X3648)
* 3D mode with 3D lens is available only with
JPEG (16:9) 4.1M (2688X1512) or 2.1M (1920X1080).
Quality Super Fine, Fine, Normal
RAW standard SRW (ver.2.0.0)
Color space sRGB, Adobe RGB
187
Appendix > Camera specifications
Video
Type MP4 (H.264)
Format Movie: H.264, Sound: AAC
Movie AE mode Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority,
Manual
Movie clip Audio on/off (Shooting time: Max. 29' 59'')
Smart Filter
Vignetting, Miniature, Colored Pencil, Watercolor,
Wash drawing, Oil Sketch, Ink Sketch, Acryl,
Negative, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow
Size 1920X1080, 1920X810, 1280X720, 640X480,
320X240 (For Sharing)
Frame rate
60 fps, 30 fps, 24 fps (available only with
1920X810), 15 fps (available only with some
Smart Filter options)
Multi Motion x0.25 (640X480, 320X240 only), x0.5 (1280X720
(30 fps), 640X480, 320X240 only), x1, x5, x10, x20
Quality HQ, Normal
Sound Stereo
Edit Still image capture, Time trimming
Playback
Type Single image, Thumbnails (15/28), Slide show,
Movie
Edit Smart Filter, Resize, Rotate, Face Retouch,
Brightness, Contrast
Smart filter
Vignetting, Miniature, Colored Pencil, Watercolor,
Wash drawing, Oil Sketch, Ink Sketch, Acryl,
Negative, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow
Smart filter size
JPEG (3:2): 5.9M (2976X1984),
5.0M (2736X1824), 2.0M (1728X1152)
JPEG (16:9): 6.2M (3328X1872),
4.9M (2944X1656), 2.1M (1920X1080)
JPEG (1:1): 6.0M (2448X2448),
4.0M (2000X2000), 1.1M (1024X1024)
Storage
Media
External memory (optional)*:
SD card (2 GB guaranteed),
SDHC card (up to 32 GB guaranteed),
SDXC card (up to 64 GB guaranteed), UHS-1 card
* Class 6 and above recommended
File format RAW (SRW (ver.2.0.0)), JPEG (EXIF 2.21),
MPO (3D), DCF, DPOF 1.1
GPS
Type Geo-tagging with an optional GPS Module
(WGS 84)
Feature Location name (English and Korean only)
188
Appendix > Camera specifications
Wireless network
Type IEEE 802.11b/g/n support Dual Band
Function
MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Auto Backup,
Email, SNS & Cloud, AllShare Play, AutoShare,
Wi-Fi Direct
NFC
Yes
Interface
Digital output USB 2.0 (micro USB jack)
Video output • NTSC, PAL (selectable)
• HDMI
External release Yes (micro USB)
External microphone Yes
DC power input DC 5.0V, 1A via micro USB
Power Source
Type Rechargeable battery: BP1130 (1,130 mAh)
* The power source may differ depending on your region.
Dimensions (W X H X D)
122 X 63.7 X 40.7 mm (without protrusions)
Weight
284 g (without battery and memory card)
Operating Temperature
0–40 °C
Operating Humidity
5–85 %
Software
i-Launcher, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
* Specifications may change without notice to improve performance.
* Other brands and products names are trademarks of respective owners.
189
Appendix
Glossary
AP (Access Point)
An access point is a device that allows wireless devices to connect to a
wired network.
Ad-Hoc network
An ad-hoc network is a temporary connection for sharing files or an
internet connection and between computers and devices.
AdobeRGB
Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a larger color range
than sRGB. Its wider range of colors helps you to easily edit photos on a
computer.
AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket)
This feature automatically captures several images at different exposures
to help you capture a properly-exposed image.
AEL/AFL (Auto Exposure Lock/Auto Focus Lock)
These features help you lock the exposure or focus on which you want to
focus or calculate the exposure.
AF (Auto Focus)
A system that automatically focuses the camera lens on the subject. Your
camera uses the contrast to focus automatically.
AMOLED (Active-matrix organic light-emitting diode) /
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
AMOLED is a visual display that is very thin and light, as it does not
need backlighting. LCD is a visual display commonly used in consumer
electronics. This display needs a separate backlight, such as CCFL or LED, to
reproduce colors.
Aperture
The aperture controls the amount of light that reaches the camera’s sensor.
190
Appendix > Glossary
Composition
Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually,
abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition.
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)
A specification to define a file format and file system for digital cameras
created by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
Depth of field
The distance between the nearest and farthest points that can be
acceptably focused in a photograph. Depth of field varies with lens
aperture, focal length, and distance from the camera to the subject.
Selecting a smaller aperture, for example, will increase the depth of field
and blur the background of a composition.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)
A format for writing printing information, such as selected images
and number of prints, on a memory card. DPOF-compatible printers,
sometimes available at photo shops, can read the information from the
card for convenient printing.
Camera shake (Blur)
If the camera is moved while the shutter is open, the entire image may
appear blurred. This occurs more often when the shutter speed is slow.
Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, or using
a faster shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod or the OIS function to
stabilize the camera.
Cloud Computing
Cloud computing is a technology that allows you to store data on remote
servers and to use them from a device with internet access.
Color space
The range of colors that the camera can see.
Color temperature
Color Temperature is a measurement in degrees Kelvin (K) that indicates
the hue of a specific type of light source. As the color temperature
increases, the color of the light source has a more bluish quality. As the
color temperature decreases, the color of the light source has a more
reddish quality. At 5,500 degrees Kelvin, the color of the light source is
similar to the sun at midday.
191
Appendix > Glossary
Flash
A speed light that helps to create adequate exposure in low-light
conditions.
Focal length
The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point(in millimeters).
Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is
magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view.
Histogram
A graphical representation of the brightness of an image. The horizontal
axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents the number
of pixels. High points at the left (too dark) and right (too bright) on the
histogram indicate a photo that is improperly exposed.
H.264/MPEG-4
A high-compression video format established by international standard
organizations ISO-IEC and ITU-T. This codec is capable of providing good
video quality at low bit rates developed by the Joint Video Team (JVT).
EV (Exposure Value)
All the combinations of the camera’s shutter speed and lens aperture that
result in the same exposure.
EV Compensation
This feature allows you to quickly adjust the exposure value measured by
the camera, in limited increments, to improve the exposure of your photos.
Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format)
A specification to define an image file format for digital cameras created by
the Japan Electronic Industries Development Association (JEIDA).
Exposure
The amount of light allowed to reach the camera’s sensor. Exposure is
controlled by a combination of the shutter speed, the aperture value, and
ISO sensitivity.
192
Appendix > Glossary
Metering
The metering refers to the way in which the camera measures the quantity
of light to set the exposure.
MF (Manual Focus)
A system that manually focuses the camera lens on the subject.
You can use the focus ring to focus on a subject.
MJPEG (Motion JPEG)
A video format which is compressed as a JPEG image.
MPO (Multi Picture Object)
An image file format that contains multiple images in a file. An MPO file
provides a 3D effect on MPO-compatible displays, such as 3D TVs or 3D
monitors.
Image sensor
The physical part of a digital camera that contains a photosite for each
pixel in the image. Each photosite records the brightness of the light that
strikes it during an exposure. Common sensor types are CCD (Chargecoupled
Device) and CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor).
IP (Internet protocol) address
An IP address is a unique number that is assigned to every device that is
connected to the internet.
ISO sensitivity
The sensitivity of the camera to light, based on the equivalent film speed
used in a film camera. At higher ISO sensitivity settings, the camera uses a
higher shutter speed, which can reduce blur caused by camera shake and
low light. However, images with high sensitivity are more susceptible to
noise.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
A lossy method of compression for digital images. JPEG images are
compressed to reduce their overall file size with minimal deterioration of
the image resolution.
193
Appendix > Glossary
PAL (Phase Alternate Line)
A video color encoding standard used in numerous countries throughout
Africa, Asia, Europe, and the Middle East.
Quality
An expression of the rate of compression used in a digital image. Higher
quality images have a lower rate of compression, which usually results in a
larger file size.
RAW (CCD raw data)
The original, unprocessed data, collected directly from the camera’s image
sensor. White Balance, contrast, saturation, sharpness, and other data can
be manipulated with editing software before the image is compressed into
a standard file format.
Resolution
The number of pixels present in a digital image. High resolution images
contain more pixels and typically show more detail than low resolution
images.
Noise
Misinterpreted pixels in a digital image that may appear as misplaced or
random, bright pixels. Noise usually occurs when photos are shot with a
high sensitivity or when a sensitivity is automatically set in a dark place.
NFC (Near Field Communication)
NFC is a set of standards for radio communication at very close proximity.
You can use NFC-enabled devices to activate features or exchange data
with other devices.
NTSC (National Television System Committee)
A video color encoding standard used most commonly in Japan, North
America, the Philippines, South America, South Korea, and Taiwan.
Optical zoom
This is a general zoom which can enlarge images with a lens and does not
deteriorate quality of images.
194
Appendix > Glossary
Shutter speed
Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the
shutter, and it is an important factor in the brightness of a photo, as it
controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before
it reaches the image sensor. A fast shutter speed allows less time to let
light in and the photo becomes darker and more easily freezes subjects in
motion.
sRGB (Standard RGB)
International standard of color space established by the IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space for PC
monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif.
Vignetting
A reduction of an image’s brightness or saturation at the periphery (outer
edges) compared to the center of the image. Vignetting can draw interest
to subjects positioned in the center of an image.
White Balance (Color balance)
An adjustment of the intensities of colors (typically the primary colors red,
green, and blue), in an image. The goal of adjusting the White Balance, or
color balance, is to correctly render the colors in an image.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi is a technology that allows electronic devices to exchange data
wirelessly over a network.
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
WPS is a technology that secures wireless home networks.
195
Appendix
Optional accessories
Lens
SAMSUNG 18-55 mm
F3.5-5.6 OIS III
SAMSUNG 20-50 mm
F3.5-5.6 ED II
SAMSUNG 16 mm F2.4 SAMSUNG 20 mm F2.8
SAMSUNG 30 mm F2 SAMSUNG 50-200 mm
F4-5.6 ED OIS III
SAMSUNG 60 mm F2.8
Macro ED OIS SSA
SAMSUNG 18-200 mm
F3.5-6.3 ED OIS
Lens
SAMSUNG 85 mm F1.4 ED SSA SAMSUNG 12-24 mm F4-5.6 ED
SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 [T6] 2D/3D
External flash
SEF42A SEF220A
GPS
GPS10
196
Appendix > Optional accessories
Shutter release (micro USB type) Microphone
SR2NX02 EM10
Rechargeable battery Battery charger
BP1130 BC3NX01
Camera bag Camera case
Memory card Filter
USB cable HDMI cable
Strap
• These illustrations may differ from your actual items. Refer to the user
manuals of these optional accessories for details.
• Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Samsung is not responsible for
damage caused by using another manufacturer’s accessories.
197
Appendix A
Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 167
AllShare Play 141
Aperture 16, 20
Auto Backup 133
Auto focus 80 B
Battery
Caution 177
Charging 34
Insert 33
Best Face mode 65
Bracketing 92 C
Camera
Connecting as removable disk 160
Connecting to PC 160
Disconnecting (Windows) 161
Layout 30
Camera specifications 184
Charging 34
Color space 148 D
Date & Time 153
Depth of Field (DOF) 17, 22
Digital Print Order Format
(DPOF) 114
DIRECT LINK 32
Display brightness 152
Display type 43
Drive 90 E
Enlarging 113
Exposure Value (EV) 16, 102
F
Fader 105
Files
Deleting 111
Photo type 74
Protecting 110
Video type 104
Flash
Bounce photography 27
Flash options 94
Guide number 26
Intensity 95
F-number 16
Focal length 21
Focus assist 88
Focus Peaking 88 I
Icons
Playback mode 42
Shooting mode 40
i-Function 61
i-Launcher 163
Image adjustment
Adjusting photos 119
Retouching faces 120
ISO sensitivity 75
i-Zoom 63 L
Lenses
Layout 44
Locking 45
Markings 47
Unlocking 46 M
Maintenance 170
Memory card
Caution 173
Insert 33
Metering 97
MobileLink 129
Index
198
Appendix > Index O
One touch shot 87
Optical Image Stabilization
(OIS) 89
Optional accessories
Attach the GPS module 51
Connect the flash 49
Flash layout 48
GPS module layout 51
P
Panorama mode 66
Photos
Editing 117
Enlarging 113
Shooting options 73
Viewing on 3D TV 159
Viewing on camera 108
Viewing on HDTV 158
Picture Wizard 79
Posture 13
Power save mode 153
R
Red-eye effect 95
Remote Viewfinder 131
Resolution
Playback mode 118
Shooting mode (Movie) 104
Shooting mode (Photo) 73
Retouching faces 120
Rotating 118
Rule of thirds 24 S
Service center 181
Settings 152
Shooting modes
Aperture Priority 57
Lens Priority 60
Manual 59
Program 55
Recording 68
Shutter Priority 58
Smart 64
Smart Auto 53
Shutter speed 18, 20
Slide show 113
Smart filter
Playback mode 121
Shooting mode 101
Smart panel 38 T
Thumbnails 108
Timer 91
Touch AF 86
Touch screen 36
Tracking AF 86
Transferring files
Mac 161
Windows 160
TV 158 U
Unpacking 29
V
Video Out 153
Videos
Capturing 116
Options 104
Recording 68
Viewing 115 W
White balance 76
Wireless network 123 3
3D mode 69
199
Correct Disposal of This Product
(Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)
(Applicable in countries with separate collection systems)
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the
product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable)
should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their
working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human
health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items
from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the
sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased
this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how
they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and
conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic
accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for
disposal.
Correct disposal of batteries in this product
(Applicable in countries with separate collection systems)
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the
batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household
waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols
Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead
above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not
properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or
the environment.
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please
separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through
your local, free battery return system.
CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)
Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler.
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or call, (877) 278 - 0799
Appendix
200
Appendix
FCC notice
Caution:
Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which are not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in
a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorientate or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the distance between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Declaration of Conformity
Trade Name : Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
Model No. : Samsung NX300
Responsible Party : Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
Address : 85 Challenger Road, Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660
Telephone No. : 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
RF exposure statements:
This device is for handheld operation only. The antenna(s) used for this
transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least
20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
FCC ID:A3LNX300
201
TA-2012/1802
APPROVED
Model : NX300
Year of Manufacture : 2013
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY
AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING
TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Caution:
Any changes or modifications to the equipment not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IC: 649E-NX300
This equipment may be operated in all EU countries.
In France, this equipment may only be used indoors.
Complies with
IDA Standards
DA100790
No.: ESD-1306913C
TRC/SS/2013/17
Please refer to the warranty that came with your product
or visit our website www.samsung.com for after-sales service or inquiries.
FRE Ce mode d’emploi propose des instructions
détaillées pour l’utilisation de l’appareil photo. Veuille le lire
attentivement.
Mode
d’emploi
1
Informations sur les droits d’auteurs
• Les caractéristiques de l’appareil ou le contenu de ce manuel
d’utilisation peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis, suite
à l’évolution des fonctions de l’appareil.
• Nous vous recommandons d’utiliser votre appareil photo dans le
pays dans lequel vous l’avez acheté.
• Utilisez cet appareil photo de manière responsable et veillez à
respecter toutes les législations et règlementations en vigueur.
• La distribution ou la réutilisation du contenu de ce manuel
d’utilisation, même partielle, sans autorisation préalable, est interdite.
PlanetFirst représente l’engagement de Samsung Electronics
à l’égard du développement durable et de la responsabilité
sociale, illustré à travers des activités commerciales
écologiques et contrôlées.
• Microsoft Windows et le logo Windows sont des marques déposées de
Microsoft Corporation.
• Mac et Apple App Store sont des marques déposées d’Apple
Corporation.
• Google Play Store est une marque déposée de Google, Inc.
• Adobe, le logo Adobe, Photoshop et Lightroom sont des marques
déposées ou des marques de Adobe Systems Incorporated aux
Etats-Unis et / ou dans d’autres pays.
• microSD™, microSDHC™ et microSDXC™ sont des marques deposees de
SD Association.
• HDMI, le logo HDMI et l’expression
« High-Definition Multimedia Interface » sont
des marques commerciales ou des marques
déposées de HDMI Licensing LLC.
• Wi-Fi®, le logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques
déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance.
• Les marques commerciales mentionnées dans ce manuel d’utilisation
appartiennent à leurs propriétaires respectifs.
2
Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité
Evitez d’endommager la vue des sujets photographiés.
N’utilisez pas le flash à proximité (à moins d’un mètre) de personnes
ou d’animaux. L’utilisation du flash trop près des yeux du sujet peut
provoquer des lésions temporaires ou permanentes.
Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo à la portée d’enfants en bas âge
ou d’animaux domestiques.
Tenez l’appareil, ses pièces et ses accessoires, hors de portée des enfants
en bas âge et des animaux. L’ingestion de petites pièces peut provoquer
un étouffement ou des blessures graves. Les composants et les accessoires
peuvent également présenter des risques de blessure.
Evitez toute exposition prolongée de l’appareil photo à la
lumière directe du soleil ou à des températures élevées.
Une exposition prolongée à la lumière directe du soleil ou à des
températures très élevées peut endommager de manière permanente les
composants internes de l’appareil photo.
Evitez de couvrir l’appareil photo ou le chargeur avec des
couvertures ou des vêtements.
L’appareil photo peut surchauffer, se déformer ou prendre feu.
Ne manipulez pas le cordon d’alimentation ou ne vous
approchez pas du chargeur lors d’un orage.
Vous pourriez recevoir une décharge électrique.
Respectez toujours les consignes et conseils d’utilisation suivants afin de
prévenir toute situation dangereuse et de garantir un fonctionnement
optimal de votre appareil photo.
Avertissement—situations susceptibles de vous blesser
ou de blesser d’autres personnes
Ne démontez pas ou n’essayez pas de réparer vous-même
votre appareil photo.
Vous pouvez recevoir une décharge électrique ou endommager l’appareil
photo.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de gaz ou de
liquides inflammables ou explosifs.
Vous risquez de provoquer une explosion ou un incendie.
Ne laissez pas pénétrer de matériaux inflammables dans
l’appareil photo ou ne stockez pas ces matériaux à proximité
de l’appareil photo.
Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique ou de provoquer un
incendie.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo avec les mains mouillées.
Vous pouvez recevoir une décharge électrique.
3
Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité
Si du liquide ou des corps étrangers pénètrent dans l’appareil
photo, déconnectez toutes les sources d’alimentation comme
la batterie ou le chargeur, puis contactez un service aprèsvente
de Samsung.
Respectez la réglementation interdisant l'utilisation des
appareils photo dans certaines zones spécifiques.
• Evitez les interférences avec d’autres appareils électroniques.
• Eteignez votre appareil photo à bord d’un avion. Il pourrait photo peut
provoquer des interférences avec l’équipement de bord. Respectez les
consignes de la compagnie aérienne et éteignez votre appareil photo
lorsque vous y êtes invité.
• Eteignez votre appareil photo à proximité de tout appareil médical. Il
pourrait causer des interférences avec le matériel médical utilisé dans les
hôpitaux et les centres de soins. Observez la réglementation en vigeur,
ainsi que les mises en garde affichées et les consignes du personnel
médical.
Évitez les interférences avec les stimulateurs cardiaques.
Maintenez l’appareil photo à distance des stimulateurs cardiaques pour
éviter toute interférence, comme recommandé par le fabricant et les
groupes de recherche. Si vous pensez que votre appareil photo interfère
avec un stimulateur cardiaque ou un appareil médical, éteignez-le
immédiatement et contactez le fabricant du stimulateur cardiaque ou de
l’appareil médical pour connaître la marche à suivre.
Attention—situations susceptibles d’endommager votre
appareil photo ou d’autres appareils
Si vous rangez votre appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une
période de temps prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie.
Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se détériorer avec le temps, risquant
d’endommager gravement l’appareil photo.
Utilisez uniquement des batteries de remplacement
lithium-ion authentiques recommandées par le fabricant.
N’endommagez pas ou ne chauffez pas la batterie.
Cela risque de provoquer un incendie ou des dommages corporels.
Utilisez uniquement des batteries, des chargeurs et des
accessoires homologués par Samsung.
• L’utilisation de batteries, chargeurs, câbles ou accessoires non
homologués peut endommager l’appareil photo, provoquer une
explosion ou causer des blessures.
• Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages ou blessures
résultant d’une utilisation inappropriée de batteries, chargeurs, câbles
ou accessoires.
N’utilisez la batterie que pour l’usage pour lequel elle a été
conçue.
Un usage non conforme risque de provoquer une décharge électrique ou
un incendie.
4
Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité
Ne touchez pas le flash en cours de déclenchement.
Le flash est très chaud lorsqu’il se déclenche et peut provoquer des
brûlures.
Lorsque vous utilisez un chargeur, éteignez toujours l’appareil
photo avant de débrancher le chargeur de la prise murale.
Si vous ne prenez pas cette précaution, vous risquez de recevoir une
décharge électrique ou de provoquer un incendie.
Débranchez le chargeur de la prise murale lorsque vous ne
l’utilisez pas.
Si vous ne prenez pas cette précaution, vous risquez de recevoir une
décharge électrique ou de provoquer un incendie.
N’utilisez jamais de fiches et de cordons d’alimentation
endommagés ou de prises électriques mal fixées lorsque vous
rechargez la batterie.
Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique ou de provoquer un
incendie.
Evitez tout contact du chargeur avec les bornes + et – de la
batterie.
Vous pouvez recevoir une décharge électrique ou provoquer un incendie.
Ne laissez pas tomber l’appareil photo et ne le soumettez pas à
des chocs violents.
Cela risquerait d’endommager l’écran ou les composants internes ou
externes.
Effectuez les manipulations de branchement des cordons, du
chargeur et d’insertion des batteries et des cartes mémoire
avec précaution.
Enfoncer les cordons en forçant ou sans précaution et brancher les câbles
ou insérer les batteries et les cartes mémoire de manière incorrecte peut
endommager les ports, les prises et les accessoires.
Evitez tout contact des cartes mémoire avec le boîtier de
l’appareil photo.
Vous risquez d’endommager ou d’effacer les données qui y sont stockées.
N’utilisez jamais une batterie, un chargeur ou une carte
mémoire endommagé.
Vous risqueriez de recevoir une décharge électrique, d’endommager
l’appareil photo ou de provoquer un incendie.
Ne pas positionner l’appareil photo à l’intérieur ou à proximité
d’un champ magnétique.
Cela risquerait de l’endommager.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est endommagé.
Si les parties en verre ou en acrylique sont brisées, apportez l’appareil
dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung afin de la faire réparer.
5
Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité
Vérifiez que l’appareil photo fonctionne correctement avant de
l’utiliser.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de fichiers ou
de dégâts résultant d’un fonctionnement incorrect ou d’une mauvaise
utilisation de l’appareil photo.
Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB du câble USB sur votre
appareil photo.
Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous inversez le sens de
connexion du câble. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de
pertes de données.
Ne jamais exposer l’objectif aux rayons directs du soleil.
Vous risquez de décolorer le capteur d’images ou d’entraîner des
dysfonctionnements.
Si l’appareil surchauffe, retirez la batterie jusqu’à ce qu’elle
refroidisse.
• Lors d’un usage prolongé, la batterie peut chauffer et augmenter la
température interne de l’appareil photo. Si l’appareil ne fonctionne plus,
retirez la batterie et laissez-lui le temps de refroidir.
• Des températures internes élevées peuvent entraîner l’apparition de
parasites sur vos photos. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas les
performances globales de votre appareil photo.
Evitez les interférences avec d’autres appareils électroniques.
Les signaux de fréquence radio émis par votre appareil photo peuvent
perturber le fonctionnement des systèmes électroniques mal installés
ou insuffisamment protégés, notamment les stimulateurs cardiaques,
les prothèses auditives, les appareils médicaux et les équipements
électroniques domestiques et automobiles. Contactez les fabricants de
ces appareils électroniques pour résoudre les problèmes d’interférences
éventuels. Pour éviter toute interférence involontaire, utilisez
exclusivement des appareils ou des accessoires homologués par Samsung.
Utilisez votre appareil photo dans la position normale.
Evitez tout contact avec l’antenne interne de votre appareil photo.
Transfert de données et responsabilités
• Afin d’empêcher tout risque de fuite des données transférées via le
réseau Wi-Fi, évitez de transférer des données sensibles dans des zones
publiques ou sur des réseaux ouverts.
• Le fabricant de l’appareil photo décline toute responsabilité en cas
de transferts de données qui porteraient atteinte aux droits d’auteur,
marques, lois sur la propriété intellectuelle ou qui seraient contraires aux
bonnes moeurs.
6
Indications utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi
Indications de mode
Mode Indication
Scènes Automatique t
Programme P
Priorité ouverture A
Priorité vitesse S
Manuel M
Priorité de l’objectif i
Intelligent s
Wi-Fi B
Icônes utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi
Icône Fonction
Informations complémentaires
Mises en garde et précautions
[ ] Touches de l’appareil photo. Par exemple, [Déclencheur]
désigne le déclencheur.
( ) Numéro de page où se trouve l’information
correspondante
ĺ
Séquence d’options ou de menus à sélectionner pour
accomplir une procédure. Exemple : sélectionnez 1ĺ
Qualité (signifie que vous devez sélectionner 1, puis
Qualité).
* Annotation
7
Table des matières
Section 1
Mon appareil photo
Mise en route ............................................................................................... 29
Contenu du coffret ................................................................................................... 29
Présentation de l’appareil photo ............................................................. 30
Utilisation de la touche DIRECT LINK .................................................................... 32
Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire .................................... 33
Retrait de la batterie et de la carte mémoire ..................................................... 33
Utilisation de l’adaptateur pour carte mémoire ................................................ 33
Mise en charge de la batterie et mise sous tension de l’appareil
photo ............................................................................................................. 34
Chargement de la batterie ..................................................................................... 34
Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo. .............................................................. 34
Configuration initiale ................................................................................. 35
Sélection de fonctions (options) .............................................................. 36
Sélection avec des touches ................................................................................... 36
Sélection à l’aide de l’écran tactile ...................................................................... 36
Utilisation de l’option m .............................................................................. 37
Ex. : définir la taille de la photo en mode P ....................................................... 37
Utilisation du panneau intelligent ...................................................................... 38
Ex. : régler la valeur d’exposition en mode P .................................................... 38
Conseils
Concepts de photographie
Postures pour les prises de vue ................................................................ 13
Prise en main de l’appareil photo ........................................................................... 13
Photographie debout ................................................................................................. 13
Photographie accroupi ............................................................................................... 14
Utilisation de l’écran .................................................................................................... 14
Photo en contre-plongée .......................................................................................... 15
Photo en plongée ......................................................................................................... 15
Ouverture ..................................................................................................... 16
Valeur d’ouverture et profondeur de champ ...................................................... 17
Vitesse d’obturation.................................................................................... 18
Sensibilité ISO .............................................................................................. 19
Façon dont le réglage de l’ouverture, de la vitesse d’obturation et
de la sensibilité ISO contrôlent l’exposition .......................................... 20
Corrélation entre la longueur de focale, l’angle et la perspective .... 21
Profondeur de champ ................................................................................ 22
Quels sont les éléments qui contrôlent les effets hors-mise au point ? .... 22
Aperçu optique ............................................................................................................. 24
Composition ................................................................................................. 24
Règle des tiers ................................................................................................................ 24
Photos avec deux sujets ............................................................................................. 25
Flash ............................................................................................................... 26
Nombre guide du flash ............................................................................................... 26
Prise de vue avec flash indirect ................................................................................ 27
8
Table des matières
Icônes affichées à l’écran ........................................................................... 40
En mode Prise de vue .............................................................................................. 40
Photographier ............................................................................................................... 40
Enregistrement de vidéos ......................................................................................... 41
A propos de l’indicateur de niveau ....................................................................... 41
En mode Lecture ....................................................................................................... 42
Lecture de vidéos ........................................................................................................ 42
Lire des vidéos .............................................................................................................. 42
Modification des informations affichées .......................................................... 43
Objectifs ........................................................................................................ 44
Présentation de l’objectif ........................................................................................ 44
Verrouillage et déverrouillage de l’objectif ........................................................ 45
Marquages de l’objectif ........................................................................................... 47
Accessoires ................................................................................................... 48
Présentation du flash ............................................................................................... 48
Fixation du flash externe ........................................................................................... 49
Description du module GPS (en option) ........................................................... 51
Mise en place du module GPS .............................................................................. 51
Modes de prise de vue ............................................................................... 53
t Mode Scènes automatiques ................................................................. 53
P Mode Programme ................................................................................................ 55
Déplacement de programme .................................................................................. 56
Vitesse obturation minimum .................................................................................. 56
A Mode Priorité ouverture.................................................................................... 57
S Mode Priorité Vitesse ........................................................................................... 58
M Mode Manuel ....................................................................................................... 59
Mode d’exposition ....................................................................................................... 59
Utilisation de la fonction Bulb ................................................................................. 60
i Mode Priorité de l’objectif ............................................................................... 60
Utilisation de l’option E .............................................................................. 60
Usage d’i-Function dans les modes P/A/S/M ................................................ 61
Utilisation de Z ............................................................................................... 63
s Mode Intelligent ................................................................................................ 64
Utilisation du mode Meilleures poses .................................................................. 65
Prise de photos panoramiques ............................................................................... 66
Enregistrement d’une vidéo .................................................................................. 68
Mode 3D ....................................................................................................................... 69
Fonctions disponibles en mode Prise de vue ................................................. 71
9
Table des matières
Section 2
Fonctions de prise de vue
Format et résolution ................................................................................... 73
Format photo .............................................................................................................. 73
Qualité ........................................................................................................................... 74
Sensibilité ISO .............................................................................................. 75
Balance des blancs ...................................................................................... 76
Personnalisation des options de préréglage de la balance des blancs ... 77
Assistant photo (styles de photo) ............................................................ 79
Mode AF ........................................................................................................ 80
AF unique ..................................................................................................................... 81
Mise au point continue ........................................................................................... 81
Mise au point manuelle .......................................................................................... 82
Zone AF ......................................................................................................... 83
Mise au point ciblée ................................................................................................. 83
Mise au point multiple ............................................................................................ 84
Mise au point avec détection de visage ............................................................ 84
AF autoportrait ........................................................................................................... 85
Mise au point tactile ................................................................................... 86
Mise au point tactile ................................................................................................. 86
Point AF ......................................................................................................................... 86
Mise au point avec suivi .......................................................................................... 86
Déclenchement par sélection .............................................................................. 87
Assistance à la mise au point .................................................................... 88
Aide M. au P. manuelle............................................................................................. 88
Assistance à la mise au point ................................................................................ 88
Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS, Optical Image Stabilization) ... 89
Prise de vue .................................................................................................. 90
Unique ........................................................................................................................... 90
Continue ....................................................................................................................... 90
Mode Rafale ................................................................................................................ 91
Retardateur .................................................................................................................. 91
Bracketing d’exposition automatique (BKT AE) ............................................. 92
Bracketing Balance des blancs (BKT NB) ........................................................... 92
Bracketing Assistant photo (A. photo Bracketing) ........................................ 93
Réglages de la fonction Bracketing .................................................................... 93
Flash ............................................................................................................... 94
Réduction de l’effet yeux rouges ......................................................................... 95
Réglage de l’intensité du flash.............................................................................. 95
Mesure de l’exposition ............................................................................... 97
Multiple ......................................................................................................................... 97
Sélective ....................................................................................................................... 98
Centrée .......................................................................................................................... 98
Mesure de la valeur d’exposition de la zone de mise au point ................... 99
Plage dynamique ...................................................................................... 100
Filtre intelligent ......................................................................................... 101
Compensation de l’exposition ................................................................ 102
Verrouillage de l’exposition .................................................................... 103
Fonctions vidéo ......................................................................................... 104
Format vidéo ............................................................................................................ 104
Qualité vidéo ............................................................................................................ 104
Multi-mouvements ................................................................................................ 105
Fondu.......................................................................................................................... 105
Voix .............................................................................................................................. 106
Réduction vent ........................................................................................................ 106
Niveau Mic ................................................................................................................ 106
10
Table des matières
Section 3
Lecture / Retouche
Recherche et gestion de fichiers ............................................................ 108
Visionnage de photos ........................................................................................... 108
Affichage des images sous forme de miniatures ........................................ 108
Affichage de fichiers par catégorie .................................................................. 109
Visionnage de fichiers sous forme de dossier .............................................. 109
Protection des fichiers .......................................................................................... 110
Verrouiller / Déverrouiller tous les fichiers ....................................................... 110
Suppression de fichiers ........................................................................................ 111
Suppression d’un seul fichier ................................................................................ 111
Suppression de plusieurs fichiers ........................................................................ 111
Suppression de tous les fichiers ........................................................................... 112
Visionnage de photos .............................................................................. 113
Agrandissement d’une photo ............................................................................ 113
Affichage d’un diaporama .................................................................................. 113
Rotation automatique .......................................................................................... 114
Création d’une commande d’impression (DPOF) ....................................... 114
Lecture de vidéos ...................................................................................... 115
Recadrage d’une vidéo au cours de la lecture ............................................. 115
Extraction d’une image pendant la lecture .................................................. 116
Retouche de photos ................................................................................. 117
Rognage d’une photo .......................................................................................... 117
Pivotement d’une photo ..................................................................................... 118
Redimensionnement de photos ....................................................................... 118
Réglage des photos ............................................................................................... 119
Retouche de visages ............................................................................................. 120
Effets de filtre intelligent ..................................................................................... 121
Section 4
Réseau sans fil
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des
paramètres réseau .................................................................................... 123
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil................................................................ 123
Configuration des options de réseau ................................................................. 124
Configuration manuelle de l’adresse IP ............................................................. 124
Utilisation du navigateur de connexion ........................................................ 125
Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau ........................................................... 126
Saisie de texte .......................................................................................................... 127
Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone ......... 128
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone ................................ 129
Utilisation d’un smartphone comme télécommande du
déclencheur ................................................................................................ 131
Utilisation de la Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des
photos ou des vidéos ............................................................................... 133
Installation du programme de Sauvegarde automatique sur votre
ordinateur ................................................................................................................. 133
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un ordinateur ........................................... 133
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel .......................................... 135
Modification des paramètres de courriel ...................................................... 135
Enregistrement de vos coordonnées ................................................................. 135
Création d’un mot de passe de courriel ............................................................ 136
Modification du mot de passe de courriel ........................................................ 137
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel ................................................... 137
Utilisation des sites Web de partage de photos ou de vidéos ......... 139
Accès à un site Web ............................................................................................... 139
Téléchargement de photos ou de vidéos ...................................................... 140
11
Table des matières
Section 6
Connexion à des appareils externes
Visionnage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD ou 3D ............................ 158
Visionnage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD ................................................. 158
Visionnage de fichiers sur un téléviseur 3D .................................................. 159
Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur ..................................................... 160
Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows ........................................ 160
Connexion de l’appareil photo en tant que disque amovible................... 160
Déconnexion de l’appareil photo (Windows XP) ........................................... 161
Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur Mac ...................................................... 161
Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur fonctionnant sous
Windows...................................................................................................... 163
Installation des programmes depuis le CD-ROM fourni .......................... 163
Programmes disponibles lors de l’utilisation de i-Launcher ...................... 163
Utilisation de i-Launcher ..................................................................................... 163
Configuration requise pour Windows ................................................................ 163
Configuration requise pour Mac .......................................................................... 164
Ouverture de i-Launcher ......................................................................................... 164
Utilisation de la fonction Multimedia Viewer .................................................. 165
Téléchargement du micrologiciel ........................................................................ 166
Téléchargement du programme PC Auto Backup ......................................... 166
Installation de Adobe Photoshop Lightroom .............................................. 167
Utilisation de Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ................................................ 167
Utilisation de AllShare Play pour l’envoi de fichiers ........................... 141
Stockage en ligne de photos ............................................................................. 141
Visionnage de photos ou de vidéos sur des appareils compatibles
AllShare Play ............................................................................................................. 142
Envoi de photos à l’aide de la fonction Wi-Fi Direct ........................... 144
Section 5
Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo
Paramètres utilisateur .............................................................................. 146
Personnalisation ISO ............................................................................................. 146
Palier ISO ....................................................................................................................... 146
Plage ISO auto ............................................................................................................. 146
Réducteur de bruit ................................................................................................. 146
Réglage du Bracketing ......................................................................................... 147
DMF (Direct Manual Focus) ................................................................................ 147
Espace colorimétrique .......................................................................................... 148
Correction des déformations ............................................................................. 149
Fonctionnement tactile ....................................................................................... 149
Personnalisation iFn .............................................................................................. 149
Affichage utilisateur .............................................................................................. 149
Attribution touches ............................................................................................... 150
Grille ............................................................................................................................ 151
Voyant de mise au point ...................................................................................... 151
Paramètres .................................................................................................. 152
12
Table des matières
Avant de contacter un centre de service .............................................. 181
Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo ..................................................... 184
Glossaire ...................................................................................................... 189
Accessoires en option............................................................................... 195
Index ............................................................................................................ 197
Section 7
Annexes
Messages d’erreur ..................................................................................... 169
Entretien de l’appareil photo .................................................................. 170
Nettoyage de l’appareil photo .......................................................................... 170
Objectif et écran de l’appareil photo .................................................................. 170
Capteur d’images ....................................................................................................... 170
Boîtier de l’appareil photo ...................................................................................... 170
Utilisation et rangement de l’appareil photo ............................................... 171
Usage ou rangement inapproprié de l’appareil photo ................................ 171
Utilisation sur la plage ou en bord de mer ....................................................... 171
Rangement pour une durée prolongée ............................................................ 171
Usage avec précaution de l’appareil photo dans les environnements
humides .........................................................................................................................172
Autres avertissements .............................................................................................. 172
A propos des cartes mémoire ............................................................................ 173
Cartes mémoires compatibles .............................................................................. 173
Capacité de la carte mémoire ............................................................................... 174
Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire ................................................. 176
A propos de la batterie ......................................................................................... 177
Caractéristiques de la batterie .............................................................................. 177
Autonomie de la batterie ........................................................................................ 178
Message de batterie faible ..................................................................................... 178
Remarques à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie ........................................ 178
Avertissements à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie ................................ 179
Remarques concernant le chargement de la batterie .................................. 179
Remarques à propos de la mise en charge avec raccordement
à un ordinateur ............................................................................................................180
Utilisez et recyclez les batteries et les chargeurs avec soin ........................ 180
13
Concepts de photographie
Photographie debout
Composez votre prise de vue. Tenez-vous debout, bien droit, les pieds
dans le prolongement de vos épaules et conservez vos coudes pointés
vers le bas.
Postures pour les prises de vue
Pour stabiliser l’appareil et prendre une bonne photo, une posture
correcte est nécessaire. Même si vous tenez l’appareil photo correctement,
une mauvaise posture peut le faire bouger. Tenez-vous debout, bien droit,
et restez immobile afin de maintenir l’appareil et l’empêcher de bouger.
Afin de réduire les mouvements du corps, retenez votre souffle lorsque
vous effectuez une prise de vue avec une vitesse d’obturation lente.
Prise en main de l’appareil photo
Tenez l’appareil photo de la main droite et placez l’index droit sur la
touche du déclencheur. Soutenez l’appareil en plaçant la main gauche
sous l’objectif.
14
Concepts de photographie
Photographie accroupi
Composez votre prise de vue. Accroupissez-vous en plaçant un genou au
sol tout en vous tenant droit.
Utilisation de l’écran
Pour prendre des photos en plongée ou en contre-plongée, inclinez
l’écran vers le haut ou le bas. Vous pouvez incliner l’écran jusqu’à 90° vers
le haut ( ) ou 45° vers le bas ( ).
• Laissez l’écran fermé ( ) lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil
photo.
• Inclinez l’écran en respectant scrupuleusement les angles
autorisés. Le non-respect de cette recommandation risque
d’endommager l’appareil photo.
15
Concepts de photographie
Photo en contre-plongée
Une photo en contre-plongée est prise par un appareil photo placé audessous
de la ligne de vision, en regardant le sujet de dessous.
Photo en plongée
Une photo en plongée est prise par un appareil photo placé au-dessus de
la ligne de vision, en regardant le sujet de dessus.
16
Concepts de photographie
Ouverture
L’ouverture, que l’on peut désigner par un trou qui contrôle la quantité
de lumière qui pénètre dans l’appareil photo, fait partie des trois facteurs
qui déterminent l’exposition. L’intérieur de l’ouverture contient de fines
lamelles de métal qui s’ouvrent et se referment afin de laisser la lumière
passer à travers l’ouverture et entrer dans l’appareil photo. La taille
de l’ouverture est étroitement liée à la luminosité d’une photo : plus
l’ouverture est importante, plus la photo est claire. Moins elle l’est, plus la
photo est foncée.
Tailles d’ouverture
Ouverture minimale Ouverture moyenne Ouverture maximum
Photo plus sombre
(ouverture réduite)
Photo plus claire
(ouverture large)
La taille de l’ouverture est représentée par une valeur désignée par
« nombre F ». Le nombre f se détermine par la distance focale divisée par
le diamètre de l’objectif. Par exemple, si un objectif avec une distance
focale de 50 mm a pour nombre f F2, le diamètre de l’ouverture est de
25 mm (50 mm ÷ 25 mm = F2).Plus le nombre f est faible, plus la taille de
l’ouverture est importante.
La taille de l’ouverture est définie en tant que valeur d’exposition (EV).
Augmenter la valeur d’exposition (+1 EV) signifie que la quantité de
lumière double. Baisser la valeur d’exposition (-1 EV) signifie que la
quantité de lumière est réduite de moitié. Vous pouvez également utiliser
la fonction de compensation de l’exposition afin d’effectuer un réglage de
quantité de lumière fin, en subdivisant les valeurs d’exposition par 1/2,
1/3 EV, et ainsi de suite.
+1 EV
F1.4 F2 F2.8 F4 F5.6 F8
-1 EV
Niveaux de la valeur d’exposition
17
Concepts de photographie
Valeur d’ouverture et profondeur de champ
En contrôlant l’ouverture, vous pouvez flouter l’arrière plan d’une photo
ou le rendre plus net. Ceci est étroitement lié à la profondeur de champ
(DOF) qui peut être définie comme faible ou élevée.
Une photo avec une profondeur de champ
(DOF)
Une photo avec une faible profondeur de
champ (DOF)
L’intérieur de l’ouverture contient plusieurs lamelles. Ces lamelles se déplacent
simultanément et contrôlent la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers le centre
de l’ouverture. Lors de prises de vues réalisées de nuit, le nombre de lamelles
joue sur l’aspect de la lumière. Pour un nombre donné de lamelles dans
l’ouverture, la lumière est divisée par le nombre de sections correspondant.
Si le nombre de lamelles est impair, le nombre de sections est double.
Par exemple, une ouverture disposant de 8 lamelles divise la lumière en
8 sections alors qu’une ouverture disposant de 7 lamelles la divise en
14 sections.
7 lamelles 8 lamelles
18
Concepts de photographie
Vitesse d’obturation
La vitesse d’obturation est définie par la durée nécessaire à l’ouverture et
à la fermeture de l’obturateur. Dans le cadre de la luminosité d’une photo,
la vitesse d’obturation constitue un facteur important car elle contrôle la
quantité de lumière qui passe à travers l’ouverture avant d’atteindre le
capteur d’images.
Généralement, la vitesse d’obturation est réglable manuellement. La
mesure de la vitesse d’obturation est connue sous le nom de « Valeur
d’exposition » (EV), qui se caractérise par des intervalles de 1 s, 1/2 s, 1/4 s,
1/8 s, 1/15 s, 1/1 000 s, 1/2 000 s, et ainsi de suite.
Exposition
+1 EV
-1 EV
1 s 1/2 s 1/4 s 1/8 s 1/15 s 1/30 s
Vitesse d’obturation
Par conséquent, plus la vitesse d’obturation est élevée, moins la lumière
pénètrera et plus la vitesse d’obturation est faible, plus la lumière
pénètrera.
Comme présenté sur la photo ci-dessous, une vitesse d’obturation lente
laisse plus de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer, la photo devient donc plus
claire. Par ailleurs, une vitesse d’obturation rapide accorde moins de temps
à la lumière pour pénétrer. La photo devient plus sombre et immobilise un
sujet en mouvement plus facilement.
0,8 s 0,004 s
19
Concepts de photographie
Sensibilité ISO
L’exposition d’une image est déterminée par la sensibilité de l’appareil.
Cette sensibilité est basée sur des standards photographiques
internationaux, connus sous le nom de standards ISO. Sur les appareils
numériques, cette échelle de sensibilité est utilisée pour représenter la
sensibilité du mécanisme numérique qui capture l’image.
Lorsque le nombre double, la sensibilité ISO double également. Par
exemple, une sensibilité définie sur ISO 200 peut capturer des images
deux fois plus vite qu’une sensibilité définie sur ISO 100. Néanmoins, des
paramètres ISO élevés peuvent causer du « bruit »—petites tâches, points,
et autres phénomènes qui donnent à la photo une apparence bruyante
ou sale. En règle générale, il vaut mieux utiliser une faible sensibilité ISO
afin d’éviter la présence de bruit sur vos photos, sauf si vous effectuez une
prise de vue dans un environnement sombre ou de nuit.
Changements de la qualité et de la luminosité en fonction de la sensibilité ISO
Une faible sensibilité ISO signifie que l’appareil photo est moins sensible à
la lumière et que vous avez besoin de plus de lumière pour une exposition
optimale. Lorsque vous utilisez une faible sensibilité ISO, choisissez une
ouverture plus importante ou réduisez la vitesse d’obturation afin de
laisser plus de lumière pénétrer dans l’appareil photo. Par exemple, une
faible sensibilité ISO au cours d’une journée ensoleillée où la lumière est
abondante ne nécessite pas une vitesse d’obturation lente. Néanmoins,
dans un endroit sombre ou de nuit, une faible sensibilité ISO rendent les
photos floues. Il est donc recommandé d’augmenter la sensibilité ISO de
manière modérée.
Photo prise avec un trépied et une
sensibilité ISO élevée
Une photo floue avec une faible sensibilité
ISO
20
Concepts de photographie
Façon dont le réglage de l’ouverture, de la
vitesse d’obturation et de la sensibilité ISO
contrôlent l’exposition
En photographie, les paramètres d’ouverture, de vitesse d’obturation et de
sensibilité ISO sont étroitement liés. Les paramètres d’ouverture contrôlent
et régulent la quantité de lumière qui pénètre dans l’appareil photo, alors
que la vitesse d’obturation détermine la durée au cours de laquelle la
lumière peut pénétrer. La sensibilité ISO correspond à la vitesse à laquelle
un appareil photo réagit à la lumière. Ensemble, ces trois aspects sont
désignés en tant que triangle d’exposition.
Un changement de la vitesse d’obturation, de la valeur d’ouverture ou de
la sensibilité ISO peut être compensé par un réglage des autres valeurs
pour maintenir la quantité de lumière. Néanmoins, les résultats varient en
fonction des paramètres utilisés. Par exemple, la vitesse d’obturation est
utile pour capturer des mouvements, l’ouverture permet de contrôler la
profondeur de champ et la sensibilité ISO le grain d’une photo.
Paramètres Résultats
Valeur
d’ouverture
Large ouverture
= plus de lumière
Ouverture étroite
= moins de lumière
Large = petite profondeur de
champ
Etroit = grande profondeur de
champ
Paramètres Résultats
Vitesse
d’obturation
Vitesse rapide
= moins de lumière
Vitesse lente
= plus de lumière
Rapide = image nette
Lente = image floue
Sensibilité ISO
Haute sensibilité
= plus de sensibilité à la
lumière
Basse sensibilité
= moins de sensibilité à
la lumière
Haute = plus de grain
Basse = moins de grain
21
Concepts de photographie
Corrélation entre la longueur de focale,
l’angle et la perspective
La distance focale, exprimée en millimètres, correspond à la distance
séparant le milieu de l’objectif du foyer de mise au point. Elle influe sur
l’angle et la perspective des images capturées. Une distance focale courte
génère un angle de vision étendu, ce qui permet de photographier un
plan large. Une distance focale longue génère un angle de vision étroit, ce
qui permet de photographier au téléobjectif.
Longueur de focale courte
plan large
angle large
objectif angle large
Longueur de focale longue
photo au téléobjectif
angle étroit
téléobjectif
Observez les photos ci-dessous et comparez les différences.
Angle 18 mm Angle 55 mm Angle 200 mm
En temps normal, un objectif grand angle convient pour réaliser des photos de
paysages, tandis qu’un objectif à angle étroit est recommandé pour les photos
d’évènements sportifs ou les portraits.
22
Concepts de photographie
Profondeur de champ
Les plus belles photos de nature morte ou de portraits sont celles dont
l’arrière plan est hors-mise au point et sur lesquelles le sujet ressort.
En fonction des zones mises au point, une photo peut être floue ou
nette. Ceci est désigné par « une faible profondeur de champ » ou « une
profondeur de champ élevée ».
La profondeur de champ est la zone mise au point autour du sujet. C’est
pourquoi, une faible profondeur de champ signifie que la zone mise au
point est étroite, tandis qu’une profondeur de champ élevée élargit la
zone mise au point.
Une photo avec une faible profondeur de champ, qui met le sujet en
évidence et dont le reste est flou, peut être obtenue en utilisant un
téléobjectif ou en sélectionnant une faible valeur d’ouverture. A l’opposé,
une photo avec une profondeur de champ élevée et dont chaque élément
est nettement mis au point peut être obtenue en utilisant un objectif
grand angle ou en sélectionnant une valeur d’ouverture élevée.
Profondeur de champ réduite Profondeur de champ élevée
Quels sont les éléments qui contrôlent les effets hors-mise au point ?
La profondeur de champ dépend de la valeur d’ouverture
Plus l’ouverture est large (par définition, plus la valeur d’ouverture est
basse), plus la profondeur de champ est faible. Dans une situation où les
autres valeurs telles que la vitesse d’obturation et la sensibilité ISO sont
égales, une faible valeur d’ouverture résulte en une faible profondeur de
champ sur une photo.
55 mm F5.7 55 mm F22
23
Concepts de photographie
La profondeur de champ dépend de la longueur de focale
Plus la longueur de focale est importante, plus la profondeur de champ est
faible. Pour réaliser une prise de vue avec une faible profondeur de champ,
un téléobjectif disposant d’une longueur de focale importante est mieux
adapté qu’un objectif grand angle à courte profondeur de champ.
Photo prise avec un objectif grand angle
18 mm
Photo prise avec un objectif télescopique
100 mm
La profondeur de champ dépend de la distance entre le sujet
et l’appareil photo
Plus la distance entre le sujet et l’appareil photo est courte, plus la
profondeur de champ est faible. C’est pourquoi, prendre une photo
rapprochée d’un sujet a pour conséquence une faible profondeur de
champ.
Photo prise avec un objectif télescopique 100 mm
Photo prise à proximité du sujet
24
Concepts de photographie
Aperçu optique
Vous pouvez appuyer sur la touche de personnalisation afin d’afficher
l’aperçu optique avant de prendre une photo. L’appareil photo règle
l’ouverture sur les paramètres prédéfinis et affiche le résultat sur l’écran.
Affectez la fonction Aperçu optique à la touche de personnalisation.
(p. 150)
Composition
Il est passionnant de prendre des photos des merveilles du monde à
l’aide d’un appareil photo. Néanmoins, et quelle que soit la beauté de ces
merveilles, une mauvaise composition ne peut en reproduire fidèlement
l’aspect.
En matière de composition, il est très important de hiérarchiser les sujets.
En photographie, la composition signifie la disposition des éléments
d’une scène. En règle générale, une bonne composition doit obéir à la
règle des tiers.
Règle des tiers
La règle des tiers consiste à diviser l’image en un quadrillage 3x3 formé de
rectangles de taille égale.
Pour composer des photos qui mettent le mieux en valeur le sujet, veillez à
ce que le sujet soit placé dans l’un des quatre coins du rectangle central.
25
Concepts de photographie
L’utilisation de la règle des tiers permet de créer des photos bénéficiant
d’une composition équilibrée et saisissante. Voir quelques exemples
ci-dessous.
Photos avec deux sujets
Si votre sujet se trouve à l’une des extrémités de la photo, la composition
semblera déséquilibrée. Vous pouvez équilibrer la photo en capturant un
second sujet placé à l’extrémité opposée.
Sujet 1
Sujet 2
Sujet 1
Sujet 2
Instable Stable
Le fait de centrer l’horizon sur une photo de paysage crée une impression
de déséquilibre. Equilibrez la photo en déplaçant l’horizon vers le haut ou
vers le bas.
Sujet 1
Sujet 2
Sujet 1
Sujet 2
Instable Stable
26
Concepts de photographie
Nombre guide du flash
Le numéro de modèle d’un flash indique la puissance du flash. Ainsi,
la quantité de lumière maximale créée est représentée par une valeur
appelée « nombre guide ». Plus le nombre est élevé, plus le flash est
puissant. Le nombre guide s’obtient en multipliant la distance entre le
flash et le sujet par la valeur d’ouverture, lorsque la sensibilité ISO est
définie sur 100.
Nombre guide = Distance flash-sujet X Valeur d’ouverture
Valeur d’ouverture = Nombre guide / Distance flash-sujet
Distance flash-sujet = Nombre guide / Valeur d’ouverture
Par conséquent, si vous connaissez le nombre guide d’un flash, vous
pouvez estimer la distance flash-sujet lorsque vous réglez le flash
manuellement. Par exemple, si un flash possède le nombre guide NG 20 et
est à 4 mètres de distance du sujet, la valeur d’ouverture optimale est de
F5.0.
Flash
La lumière est l’un des éléments les plus importants en photographie.
Il n’est, cependant, pas simple d’avoir la quantité de lumière suffisante
quel que soit le moment ou l’endroit. L’utilisation d’un flash vous permet
d’optimiser les réglages de lumière et de créer différents effets.
Le flash, également appelé éclairage stroboscopique ou laser, permet de
créer un niveau d’exposition satisfaisant dans des conditions de faible
éclairage. Il est également utile dans des conditions de fort éclairage. Par
exemple, le flash peut être utilisé pour compenser l’exposition de l’ombre
d’un sujet ou pour capturer à la fois le sujet et l’arrière-plan dans des
situations de contre jour.
Avant correction Après correction
27
Concepts de photographie
Prise de vue avec flash indirect
La prise de vue avec flash indirect se réfère à une méthode qui redirige
la lumière du sujet vers le plafond ou les murs de sorte que la lumière se
répartisse de manière égale autour du sujet. En règle générale, les prises
de vue réalisées avec le flash peuvent manquer de naturel et projettent
des ombres. Au contraire, les sujets sur les photos prises avec la prise de
vue avec flash indirect ne projettent pas d’ombres et apparaissent plus
douces car la lumière est plus diffuse.
Section 1
Mon appareil photo
Découvrez les différents composants de votre appareil photo, les icônes affichées à l’écran,
les différents objectifs disponibles, les accessoires en option et les fonctions de base.
Mon appareil photo
29
Mise en route
Contenu du coffret
Sortez le téléphone de son coffret et vérifiez que tous les éléments suivants sont présents :
Appareil photo
(y compris le capuchon et le cache de la
griffe porte-accessoire)
Adaptateur secteur / Câble USB Batterie rechargeable Flash externe
CD-ROM
(Mode d’emploi inclus)
DVD-ROM Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Guide de demarrage rapide Dragonne
• Les illustrations peuvent différer par rapport au produit fourni.
• Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires en option auprès d’un revendeur ou d’un centre de service Samsung.
Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de problème consécutif à l’utilisation d’accessoires non autorisés.
Pour en savoir plus sur les accessoires, consultez la page 195.
Mon appareil photo
30
Présentation de l’appareil photo
N°. Nom
1
Molette de sélection du mode
• t : mode Scènes automatiques
(p. 53)
• P : mode Programme (p. 55)
• A : mode Priorité ouverture (p. 57)
• S : mode Priorité Vitesse (p. 58)
• M : mode Manuel (p. 59)
• i : mode Priorité objectif (p. 60)
• s : mode Intelligent (p. 64)
• B : Wi-Fi (p. 122)
2
Molette de réglage
• Sur l’écran d’accueil : accéder à
l’élément de menu souhaité.
• Dans le panneau Intelligent : régler
une option sélectionnée.
• En mode Prise de vue : régler la
vitesse d’obturation ou la valeur
d’ouverture dans certains modes de
prise de vue et modifier la taille de la
zone de mise au point.
• En mode Lecture : afficher des
miniatures, agrandir ou réduire une
photo, ou ouvrir ou fermer un dossier
de clichés pris en mode Continu ou
Rafale en mode Lecture.
3 Touche DIRECT LINK : lancer une
fonction Wi-Fi prédéfinie. (p. 32)
N°. Nom
4 Microphone
5 Cache de la griffe porte-accessoire
6 Griffe porte-accessoire
7 Anneau d'attache de la dragonne
8 Capteur d'images
9
Antenne interne / Étiquette NFC
* Eviter tout contact avec l’antenne
interne lors de l’utilisation du réseau
sans fil.
10 Haut-parleur
11 Touche de déverrouillage de l’objectif
12 Monture de l'objectif
13 Repère d’installation de l’objectif
14 Voyant AF / Voyant du retardateur
15 Interrupteur Marche / Arrêt
16 Déclencheur
1 2 3 4 5
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
6 4
8
7
16
15
Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo
31
N°. Nom
1 Touche d’enregistrement vidéo
Démarrez un enregistrement vidéo.
2
Touche de réglage de la valeur
d’exposition (p. 102)
Maintenir la touche enfoncée, puis
tourner la molette de réglage pour régler
la valeur d’exposition. En mode M, la
valeur d’ouverture est ajustée.
3
Touche Fn
Accéder au panneau Intelligent et régler
certains paramètres.
4
o touche
• Sur l’écran d’accueil : enregistrer les
options sélectionnées.
• En mode Prise de vue : sélectionnez
une zone de mise au point
manuellement dans certains modes de
prise de vue.
5
Touche de navigation
• En mode Prise de vue
- D : afficher les paramètres de
l’appareil photo et modifier les options.
- I : sélectionner une sensibilité ISO.
- C : sélectionner une option de prise de
vue.
- F : sélectionner un mode de mise au
point automatique.
• Dans d’autres cas
Déplacer respectivement le point actif
vers le haut, le bas, la gauche, la droite.
N°. Nom
6
Touche Supprimer / Personnaliser
• En mode Prise de vue : exécuter la
fonction définie (p. 150).
• En mode Lecture : supprimez des
fichiers.
7 Touche Lecture
Activez le mode Lecture.
8
Voyant d'état
Indique l’état de l’appareil photo.
• Clignotement : lors de l’enregistrement
d’une photo, de la capture d’une
vidéo, de l’envoi de données vers un
ordinateur, de la connexion à un réseau
local sans fil ou l’envoi d’une photo.
• Fixe : en l’absence de transfert de
données, lorsque le transfert des
données vers un ordinateur est terminé
ou lors de la mise en charge de la
batterie.
9 Touche MENU
Accédez aux options ou aux menus.
5
6
1
2
3
4
7 8 9
Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo
32
N°. Nom
1
USB et port de déverrouillage du déclencheur
Brancher l’appareil photo sur un ordinateur, un téléviseur ou au port de déverrouillage de
l’obturateur. Utiliser un câble de déverrouillage de l’obturateur avec un trépied pour réduire le
bougé de l’appareil photo.
2 Port HDMI
3 Trappe batterie / carte mémoire
Insérez une carte mémoire et une batterie.
4
Écran
• Pour prendre des photos en plongée ou en contre-plongée, incliner l’écran vers le haut ou le
bas. (p. 14)
• Appuyez sur l’écran pour sélectionner un menu ou une option. (p. 36)
5 Douille pour trépied
Utilisation de la touche DIRECT LINK
La touche [DIRECT LINK] vous permet d’activer facilement la fonction Wi-Fi.
Appuyez sur [DIRECT LINK] pour revenir au mode précédent.
Configuration de la touche DIRECT LINK
Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche [DIRECT LINK] vous pouvez sélectionner la fonction Wi-Fi
souhaitée. (p. 150)
Pour définir une
option DIRECT LINK :
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ 5 ĺ Attribution touches ĺ
DIRECT LINKĺ une option.
4
5
1
2
3
Mon appareil photo
33
Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire
Découvrez comment installer la batterie et une carte mémoire en option
dans l’appareil photo.
Carte mémoire
Insérez une carte mémoire en orientant la
puce vers le bas.
Batterie rechargeable
Insérez la batterie en orientant le logo
Samsung vers le haut.
Retrait de la batterie et de la carte mémoire
Batterie rechargeable
Loquet de la
batterie
Faites glisser le verrou vers le haut
pour libérer la batterie.
Carte mémoire
Appuyez doucement sur la carte pour la
faire sortir de l’appareil photo, puis retirezla
entièrement de son emplacement.
Utilisation de l’adaptateur pour carte mémoire
Pour utiliser des cartes de type micro avec ce produit, un ordinateur
ou un lecteur de carte mémoire, insérez la carte dans un adaptateur.
Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire ou la batterie lorsque le voyant lumineux de
l’appareil photo clignote. Vous risquez d’endommager les données stockées sur
la carte mémoire ou dans votre l’appareil photo.
Mon appareil photo
34
Mise en charge de la batterie et mise sous tension de l’appareil photo
Chargement de la batterie
Vous devez charger complètement la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil
photo pour la première fois. Branchez l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB
sur l’appareil photo, puis l’autre extrémité du câble sur un adaptateur
secteur.
Voyant d’état
• Voyant rouge allumé : en charge
• Voyant rouge éteint : chargement éteint
• Voyant rouge clignotant : erreur
• Utilisez uniquement l’adaptateur secteur et le câble USB fournis avec votre
appareil photo. Dans le cas contraire, la batterie de l’appareil photo risque de
ne pas se recharger ou de fonctionner correctement.
• Vous pouvez recharger la batterie à l’aide du câble USB uniquement lorsque
l’appareil photo est allumé.
Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo.
Positionnez l’interrupteur Marche / Arrêt sur ON.
• Pour éteindre l’appareil photo, positionnez l’interrupteur Marche / Arrêt
sur OFF.
• L’écran de configuration initiale apparaît lorsque vous allumez l’appareil
photo pour la première fois. (p. 35)
Mon appareil photo
35
Configuration initiale
Lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo pour la première fois, l’écran
de configuration initiale s’affiche. La langue est réglée selon le pays
ou la région où l’appareil photo est vendu. Vous pouvez la modifier et
sélectionner la langue de votre choix. Vous pouvez également sélectionner
un élément en appuyant dessus à l’écran.
1 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Fuseau horaire, puis
appuyez sur [F] ou [o].
2 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner un fuseau horaire,
puis appuyez sur [o].
Retour Définir
Fuseau horaire
[GMT +00:00] Londres
[GMT -01:00] Cap Vert
[GMT -02:00] Açores
[GMT -03:00] Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo
[GMT -03:30] Terre-Neuve
3 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Date & heure, puis
appuyez sur [F] ou [o].
Retour Définir
Date & heure
Année Mois Jour Heure Min Heure d/'été
• L’affichage peut différer en fonction de la langue sélectionnée.
4 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour sélectionner un élément (Année /
Mois / Jour / Heure / Min / Heure d/'été).
5 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour définir une option, puis
appuyez sur [o].
6 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Type date, puis appuyez
sur [F] ou [o].
7 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner un format de date,
puis appuyez sur [o].
8 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Type d'heure, puis
appuyez sur [F] ou [o].
9 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner un format d’heure,
puis appuyez sur [o].
10 Appuyez sur [m] pour terminer la configuration initiale.
Mon appareil photo
36
Sélection de fonctions (options)
Sélection avec des touches
Tournez la molette de réglage ou appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour
vous déplacer, puis appuyez sur [o] pour sélectionner une option.
Sélection à l’aide de l’écran tactile
N’utilisez pas d’objets pointus, comme des crayons ou des stylos, pour appuyer
sur l’écran. Vous risqueriez de l’endommager.
Appuyer : appuyez sur une icône pour sélectionner un menu ou
une option.
AllShare
Play
MobileLink Remote
Viewfinder
Sauvegarde
automatique
Courriel
Réseaux sociaux
et Cloud
Faire glisser : maintenez une zone à l’écran appuyée, puis
déplacez-la à l’aide du doigt.
AutoShare
Format photo
Qualité
ISO
Bal. des blancs
Retour Sélect.
Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options)
37
Effleurer : faites glisser le doigt à travers l’écran.
• L’écran tactile peut ne pas reconnaître votre requête si vous appuyez sur
plusieurs éléments à la fois.
• Lorsque vous appuyez sur un élément à l’écran ou que vous le faites
glisser, cela peut entraîner des décolorations. Il ne s’agit pas d’un
dysfonctionnement, mais d’une caractéristique de l’écran tactile. N’appuyez
pas trop fort sur l’écran pour minimiser cet effet de décoloration.
• L’écran tactile peut ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous utilisez l’appareil
photo dans un environnement extrêmement humide.
• L’écran tactile peut ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous installez un film
protecteur ou tout autre accessoire sur l’écran.
• Selon l’angle de vue, la luminosité de l’écran peut parfois sembler insuffisante.
Réglez la luminosité ou l’angle de vue afin d’améliorer la luminosité.
Utilisation de l’option
Appuyez sur [m] ou sur à l’écran, puis modifiez les options ou
m
les paramètres de prise de vue.
Ex. : définir la taille de la photo en mode P
1 Passez au mode P à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Appuyez sur [m] ou .
3 Appuyez sur [C] ĺ [D/I] pour accéder à 1, puis
appuyez sur [o].
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur 1 à l’écran.
4 Tournez la molette de réglage ou appuyez sur [D/I]
pour accéder à l’option Format photo, puis appuyez sur [o].
• Vous pouvez également faire défiler la liste et appuyer sur une
option.
Retour Sélect.
AutoShare
Format photo
Qualité
ISO
Bal. des blancs
Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options)
38
5 Tournez la molette de réglage ou appuyez sur [D/I]
pour accéder à une option, puis appuyez sur [o].
• Vous pouvez également faire défiler la liste et appuyer sur une
option.
• Appuyez sur [m] ou Retour pour revenir au menu précédent.
Retour Définir
AutoShare
Format photo
Qualité
ISO
Bal. des blancs
5472x3648 (3:2)
3888x2592 (3:2)
2976x1984 (3:2)
1728x1152 (3:2)
5472x3080 (16:9)
6 Appuyez sur [m] ou Retour pour revenir au mode Prise
de vue.
Utilisation du panneau intelligent
Appuyez sur [f] ou à l’écran pour accéder à certaines fonctions
telles que Exposition, ISO et Balance des blancs.
Ex. : régler la valeur d’exposition en mode P
1 Passez au mode P à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Appuyez sur [f] ou .
Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options)
39
3 Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour accéder à l’option EV,
puis appuyez sur [o].
• Vous pouvez sélectionner directement une option en tournant la
molette de réglage sans appuyer sur [o].
• Vous pouvez également sélectionner une option en appuyant
dessus.
EV : 0.0
Régler
Vous pouvez également régler
certaines options en les faisant
glisser.
Retour
4 Tournez la molette de réglage ou appuyez sur [C/F] pour
régler la valeur d’exposition, puis appuyez sur [o].
• Vous pouvez également faire glisser la molette sur l’écran, puis
sélectionner Définir pour régler l’option.
EV : 0.0
Retour Définir
Mon appareil photo
40
Icônes affichées à l’écran
Photographier
1
2
3
London
1. Informations de prise de vue
Icône Description
Mode Prise de vue
Date actuelle
Heure actuelle
GPS activé*
London Informations de localisation*
Carte mémoire non insérée**
Verrouillage automatique de
l’exposition (p. 103)
Nombre de photos disponibles
• : chargement terminé
• : chargement partiel
• (rouge) : vide (recharger
la batterie)
Icône Description
Cadre de mise au point
automatique
Zone de mesure sélective
Mouvements de l’appareil
photo
Echelle de la mise au point
manuelle
Indicateur de niveau (p. 41)
Histogramme (p. 150)
Mise au point
Vitesse obturateur
Valeur d’ouverture
Valeur de réglage de l’exposition
Sensibilité ISO (p. 75)
* Ces icônes apparaissent lorsque vous utilisez un module GPS
en option.
** Les photos prises sans insérer de carte mémoire ne peuvent
pas être imprimées ou transférées sur une carte mémoire
ou sur un ordinateur.
2. Options de prise de vue
Icône Description
Taille de la photo
Mode de sélection
Flash (p. 94)
Réglage de l’intensité du flash
Mesure de l’exposition (p. 97)
Icône Description
Mode AF (p. 80)
Zone de mise au point
Détection des visages
Balance des blancs (p. 76)
Réglage fin de la balance des blancs
Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS)
(p. 89)
Z
Z
activé
Rapport de
Fichier RAW
Plage dynamique (p. 100)
3. Options de prise de vue (tactile)
Icône Description
Modification du mode Intelligent***
AutoShare
Options de mise au point tactile
Options de prise de vue
Panneau intelligent
*** Cette icône apparaît uniquement lorsque le mode
Intelligent est sélectionné.
Les icônes affichées varient en fonction du
mode sélectionné ou des options choisies.
En mode Prise de vue
Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran
41
2. Options de prise de vue
Icône Description
Taille de la vidéo
Mode AF (p. 80)
Mesure de l’exposition (p. 97)
Balance des blancs (p. 76)
Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS)
(p. 89)
Réglage fin de la balance des blancs
Fondu (p. 105)
Multi-mouvements (p. 105)
Enregistrement vocal désactivé
(p. 106)
Les icônes affichées varient en fonction du
mode sélectionné ou des options choisies.
A propos de l’indicateur de niveau
L’indicateur de niveau vous permet d’aligner
l’appareil photo par rapport aux lignes
horizontale et verticale à l’écran. Si l’indicateur
de niveau n’est pas droit, réglez-le à l’aide de la
fonction Calibrage horizontal. (p. 152)
au format vertical
au format horizontal
▲ Aligné ▲ Non aligné
Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser l’indicateur de
niveau lors d’une prise de vue en orientation
portrait.
Enregistrement de vidéos
1
2
1. Informations de prise de vue
Icône Description
Mode Prise de vue
Durée d’enregistrement actuelle /
Durée d’enregistrement disponible
• : chargement terminé
• : chargement partiel
• (rouge) : vide (recharger la
batterie)
Vitesse obturateur
Valeur d’ouverture
Valeur d’exposition
Sensibilité ISO (p. 75)
Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran
42
En mode Lecture
Lecture de vidéos
London
Informations
Mode
F No
Shutter
ISO
Metering
Flash
Focal Length
White Balance
EV
Photo Size
Date
Icône Description
Fichier extrait en continue
Fichier en Affichage de photos total de
fichiers
Numéro de dossier - Numéro de fichier
Fichier avec informations de localisation
London Informations de localisation
Fichier RAW
Fichier protégé
Informations d’impression ajoutées au
fichier (p. 114)
Fichier 3D
m Menu Lecture / Modifier (tactile)
Retouche de photos (tactile)
Recadrage d’une vidéo (tactile)
Affichage des images sous forme de
miniatures (tactile)
1
2
3 London
N°. Description
1 Photo capturée
2 Histogramme RGB (p. 150)
3
Mode Prise de vue, Mes. Exposition,
Flash, Balance des blancs, Valeur
d’ouverture, Vitesse obturateur, ISO,
Longueur de focale, Valeur d’exposition,
Format photo, Date, Position
Lire des vidéos
Arreter Enregistrer
Icône Description
Vitesse de lecture
Multi-mouvements
Temps de lecture en cours
Durée de la vidéo
/
Afficher le fichier précédent / Reculer.
(Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur
l’icône Reculer, la vitesse de balayage
change selon la séquence suivante :
2X, 4X, 8X.)
/ Pause ou reprise de la lecture.
/
Afficher le fichier suivant / Avancer.
(Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur
l’icône Avancer, la vitesse de balayage
change selon la séquence suivante :
2X, 4X, 8X.)
Régler le volume ou désactiver le son.
Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran
43
Modification des informations affichées
Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur [
D] pour changer le type
d’affichage.
Mode Type d’affichage
Prise de vue
• Informations de prise de vue de base (Mode Prise de
vue, Vitesse d’obturation, Valeur d’ouverture, Valeur
d’exposition, Sensibilité ISO, etc.)
• Informations de prise de vue de base + touches Options
de prise de vue (MENU, Fn, AutoShare, Mise au point
tactile) + Mesure de niveau
• Informations de prise de vue de base + touches Options
de prise de vue + Informations sur les options de prise de
vue actuelles (Format photo, Mode d’entraînement, Flash,
Mesure de l’exposition, Mode de mise au point, etc.)
• Informations de prise de vue de base + touches Options
de prise de vue + Informations sur les options de prise de
vue actuelles + Histogramme + Date et heure
Lecture
• Informations de base
• Afficher toutes les informations sur le fichier en cours.
• Afficher toutes les informations sur la prise de vue,
y compris l’histogramme RVB.
Mon appareil photo
44
Objectifs
Vous pouvez acheter en option des objectifs exclusivement fabriqués pour
votre appareil photo de la gamme NX.
Découvrez les fonctions de chaque objectif et sélectionnez-en un en
fonction de vos besoins et de vos préférences.
Présentation de l’objectif
Objectif SAMSUNG 18-55 mm F3.5-5.6 OIS III (exemple)
1
2
3
5
4
6 7
8
N°. Description
1 Repère d’installation de l’objectif
2 Bague de zoom
3 Bague de mise au point (p. 88)
4 Repère du parasoleil d’objectif
5 Objectif
6 Touche i-Function (p. 60)
7 Touche Mise au point automatique / Mise au point manuelle (p. 80)
8 Contacts de l’objectif
Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’objectif, installez le cache de l’objectif ainsi que le
cache de la monture afin de protéger l’objectif contre la poussière et les rayures.
Mon appareil photo > Objectifs
45
Objectif SAMSUNG 20-50 mm F3.5-5.6 ED II (exemple)
7
1
2
3 5
6
4
N°. Description
1 Repère d’installation de l’objectif
2 Bouton de verrouillage du zoom
3 Objectif
4 Bague de mise au point (p. 88)
5 Touche i-Function (p. 60)
6 Bague de zoom
7 Contacts de l’objectif
Verrouillage et déverrouillage de l’objectif
Pour verrouiller l’objectif, déplacez le bouton de verrouillage vers
l’extérieur du boîtier de l’appareil photo tout en le maintenant enfoncé,
puis tournez la bague de zoom comme indiqué dans l’illustration.
Mon appareil photo > Objectifs
46
Pour déverrouiller l’objectif, tournez la bague de zoom comme indiqué
dans l’illustration jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez le déclic.
Il est impossible de prendre une photo si l’objectif est verrouillé.
Objectif SAMSUNG 16 mm F2.4 (exemple)
5
2
1
4
3
N°. Description
1 Touche i-Function (p. 60)
2 Repère d’installation de l’objectif
3 Bague de mise au point (p. 88)
4 Objectif
5 Contacts de l’objectif
Mon appareil photo > Objectifs
47
Marquages de l’objectif
Découvrez ce que les numéros inscrits sur l’objectif signifient.
Objectif SAMSUNG 18-200 mm F3.5-6.3 ED OIS (exemple)
1 2 345
N°. Description
1
Valeur d’ouverture
Gamme de valeurs d’ouverture acceptées. Par exemple, 1:3.5–6.3
correspond à une gamme de valeurs maximale d’ouverture allant de
3,5 à 6,3.
2
Longueur de focale
Distance entre le centre de l’objectif et son point focal (en
millimètres). Cette valeur est exprimée sous forme de plage (longueur
minimale à maximale).
Des longueurs de focales plus importantes réduisent les angles de
vue et agrandissent le sujet. Des longueurs de focales moins élevées
agrandissent les angles de vue.
3
ED
ED signifie Dispersion extra faible. Un verre à très faible dispersion
assure une excellente correction de l’aberration chromatique
(déformation qui se produit lorsqu’un objectif ne parvient pas
à mettre au point toutes les couleurs vers le même point de
convergence).
4
OIS (p. 89)
Stabilisation optique de l’image Les objectifs bénéficiant de cette
fonction détectent les mouvements internes de l’appareil photo et les
suppriment efficacement.
5
Ø
Diamètre de l’objectif. Assurez-vous que le diamètre des filtres que
vous fixez sur l’objectif soit égal au diamètre de ce dernier.
Mon appareil photo
48
Accessoires
Vous pouvez utiliser des accessoires, parmi lesquels un flash externe et un
module GPS, afin de vous aider à prendre de meilleurs clichés, de façon
plus pratique.
Pour obtenir davantage d’informations sur les accessoires proposés en
option, consultez le mode d’emploi de ceux-ci.
• Les illustrations peuvent différer par rapport au produit fourni.
• Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires agréé Samsung auprès d’un revendeur
ou d’un centre de service Samsung. Samsung décline toute responsabilité en
cas de dommages causés par l’utilisation d’accessoires fournis par d’autres
fabricants.
Présentation du flash
SEF8A (exemple)
1
2
3
N°. Description
1 Flash
2 Cadran de fixation de la griffe porte-accessoire
3 Raccordement de la griffe porte-accessoire
Mon appareil photo > Accessoires
49
Fixation du flash externe
1 Retirez le cache de la griffe porte-accessoire de l’appareil
photo.
2 Fixez le flash en le faisant coulisser dans la griffe
porte-accessoire.
3 Sécurisez le flash en tournant le cadran de fixation de la griffe
porte-accessoire dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre.
4 Soulevez le flash pour l’utiliser.
Mon appareil photo > Accessoires
50
• Vous pouvez prendre une photo avec un flash non entièrement rechargé,
mais il est préférable d’utiliser un flash dont la charge est complète.
• Reportez-vous à la page concernant les accessoires en option pour connaître
les flashs externes disponibles. (p. 195)
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction du mode de prise de vue
sélectionné.
• Une pause est marquée entre deux déclenchements du flash. Ne bougez pas
tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde fois.
• Le flash SEF8A peut ne pas être compatible avec les autres appareils photo de
la série NX.
• Pour en savoir plus sur les flashs proposés en option, consultez le mode
d’emploi des dispositifs en question.
Utilisez uniquement des flashs homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de flashs
incompatibles peut endommager l’appareil photo.
SEF220A (exemple) (en option)
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
N°. Description
1 Icônes affichées à l’écran
2 READY / Touche de test
3 Touche MODE
4 Touche de déverrouillage du flash
5 Touche Marche / Arrêt
6 Cache batterie
7 Flash
8 Touche de changement de mode TELE / WIDE
9 Raccordement de la griffe porte-accessoire
Mon appareil photo > Accessoires
51
Description du module GPS (en option)
1
2
3
4
5
N°. Description
1 Voyant d'état
2 Touche Marche / Arrêt
3 Cadran de fixation de la griffe porte-accessoire
4 Raccordement de la griffe porte-accessoire
5 Cache batterie
Mise en place du module GPS
1 Retirez le cache de la griffe porte-accessoire de l’appareil
photo.
2 Installez le module GPS en le faisant glisser dans la griffe
porte-accessoire.
Mon appareil photo > Accessoires
52
3 Bloquez le module GPS en tournant le cadran de fixation du
sabot sur LOCK.
4 Appuyez sur la touche marche / arêt du module GPS.
Mon appareil photo
53
Modes de prise de vue
Deux modes de prise de vue simples—Scènes Automatique et
Intelligent—vous permettent de réaliser des prises de vue à l’aide de
nombreux paramètres automatiques. Des modes supplémentaires vous
offrent de plus grandes possibilités de personnalisation des paramètres.
Icône Description
t Mode Scènes automatiques (p. 53)
P Mode Programme (p. 55)
A Mode Priorité ouverture (p. 57)
S Mode Priorité Vitesse (p. 58)
M Mode Manuel (p. 59)
i Mode Priorité objectif (p. 60)
s Mode Intelligent (p. 64)
B Fonctions Wi-Fi (p. 122)
t Mode Scènes automatiques
En mode Scènes automatiques, l’appareil photo reconnaît l’environnement
dans lequel les prises de vue sont effectuées et règle automatiquement
les facteurs liés à l’exposition, comme par exemple la vitesse d’obturation,
la valeur d’ouverture, la mesure de l’exposition et la compensation de
l’exposition. L’appareil photo contrôlant la plupart de ces fonctions,
certaines fonctions de prise de vue sont limitées. Ce mode est utile pour
capturer rapidement des photos en effectuant le moins possible de
réglages.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
54
1 Passez au mode t à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Cadrez le sujet.
3 Enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise
au point.
• L’appareil photo sélectionne une scène. L’icône correspondante
apparaît à l’écran.
Scènes reconnaissables
Icône Description
Paysages
Scènes sur fonds blancs et éclatants
Paysages de nuit
Portraits de nuit
Icône Description
Paysages à contre-jour
Portraits à contre-jour
Portrait
Plans rapprochés d’objets
Plans rapprochés de texte
Couchers de soleil
Intérieurs, endroits obscurs
Eclairage partiel
Plans rapprochés avec éclairage aux spots
Portraits avec éclairage aux spots
Ciels bleus
Zones boisées, où la couleur dominante est le vert
Plans rapprochés d’objets colorés
L’appareil photo est stabilisé sur le trépied et le sujet ne bouge pas
pendant une durée déterminée (lors d’une prise de vue dans des
conditions de faible luminosité).
Sujets en mouvement
Feux d’artifice (lors de l’utilisation d’un trépied)
4 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
55
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo détecte des scènes différentes ou des
sujets identiques, en fonction des conditions de prise de vue, comme par
exemple les mouvements de l’appareil photo, l’éclairage et la distance à
laquelle se trouve le sujet.
• Si l’appareil photo ne reconnaît pas de mode scénique, il utilise les
paramètres par défaut du mode Scènes automatiques.
• Même lorsqu’un visage est détecté, il est possible que l’appareil photo ne
sélectionne pas un mode Portrait, selon la position du sujet ou l’éclairage.
• Même si vous utilisez un trépied, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne détecte
pas le mode Trépied ( ) si le sujet est en mouvement.
• La batterie de l’appareil photo se décharge plus rapidement, car l’appareil
modifie souvent les paramètres afin de capturer les scènes adéquates.
P Mode Programme
L’appareil photo règle automatiquement la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur
d’ouverture afin d’atteindre une valeur d’exposition optimale.
Ce mode est pratique lorsque vous souhaitez réaliser des prises de vue
avec une exposition constante tout en ayant la possibilité de régler
d’autres paramètres.
1 Passez au mode P à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Définissez les options de votre choix.
3 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre
une photo.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
56
Déplacement de programme
La fonction Dépl. Programme vous permet de régler la vitesse d’obturation
et la valeur d’ouverture tout en conservant la même valeur d’exposition.
Lorsque vous faites défiler la molette de réglage vers la gauche, la
vitesse d’obturation diminue alors que la valeur d’ouverture augmente.
Lorsque vous faites défiler la molette de réglage vers la droite, la vitesse
d’obturation augmente alors que la valeur d’ouverture diminue.
Vitesse obturation minimum
Régler la vitesse d’obturation afin qu’elle ne soit pas plus lente que la
vitesse sélectionnée. Toutefois, si la valeur d’exposition optimale ne peut
être atteinte, car la sensibilité ISO est égale à la valeur ISO maximale définie
par l’option Plage ISO auto, la vitesse d’obturation doit être plus lente que
la vitesse d’obturation minimum sélectionnée.
Pour régler la vitesse
d’obturation minimum
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ
Vitesse obturation minimum ĺ une option.
• Cette fonction est disponible uniquement si la Sensibilité ISO est réglée sur
Auto.
• Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode Programme ou Priorité
ouverture.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
57
A Mode Priorité ouverture
En mode Priorité ouverture, l’appareil photo calcule automatiquement la
vitesse d’obturation en fonction de la valeur d’ouverture choisie.
Vous pouvez ajuster la profondeur de champ (DOF) en modifiant la valeur
d’ouverture. Ce mode est utile pour prendre des portraits ou des photos de
fleurs ou de paysages.
Profondeur de champ élevée Faible profondeur de champ
1 Passez au mode A à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Faites défiler les options à l’aide de la molette de réglage pour
régler la valeur d’ouverture.
• Vous pouvez également régler la valeur d’ouverture en appuyant
sur [f] pour sélectionner la valeur d’ouverture, puis en faisant
défiler la molette de réglage ou en faisant glisser l’écran.
3 Définissez les options de votre choix.
4 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre
une photo.
• En situation de faible luminosité, il peut être nécessaire d’augmenter la
sensibilité ISO afin d’éviter de prendre des photos floues.
• Pour régler la vitesse d’obturation minimum, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez
sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Vitesse obturation minimum ĺ une option.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
58
S Mode Priorité Vitesse
En mode Priorité Vitesse, l’appareil photo règle automatiquement la
vitesse d’ouverture en fonction de la vitesse d’obturation choisie.
Ce mode est utile pour capturer des photo de sujets en mouvement ou
pour créer des effets de vitesse sur une photo.
Par exemple, définissez la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur supérieure à
1/500 s. afin d’immobiliser le sujet. Afin de flouter le sujet, réglez la vitesse
d’obturation sur une valeur inférieure à 1/30 s.
Vitesse d’obturation lente Vitesse d’obturation rapide
1 Passez au mode S à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Tournez la molette de réglage pour régler la vitesse
d’obturation.
• Vous pouvez également régler la vitesse d’obturation en appuyant
sur [f] pour sélectionner la vitesse d’obturation, puis en faisant
défiler la molette de réglage ou en faisant glisser l’écran.
3 Définissez les options de votre choix.
4 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre
une photo.
Afin de compenser le manque de lumière causé par des vitesses d’obturation
rapides, augmentez l’ouverture pour permettre à plus de lumière d’entrer.
Si vos photos sont toujours trop sombres, augmentez la valeur ISO.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
59
M Mode Manuel
Le mode Manuel vous permet d’ajuster la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur
d’ouverture manuellement. Dans ce mode, vous pouvez entièrement
contrôler l’exposition de vos photos.
Ce mode est utile dans des environnements de prise de vue
professionnels, comme un studio par exemple, ou lorsqu’il est nécessaire
d’affiner les réglages de l’appareil photo. Le mode Manuel est également
recommandé pour les prises de vue de nuit ou les feux d’artifice.
1 Passez au mode M à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Tournez la molette de réglage pour régler la vitesse
d’obturation.
3 Maintenez la touche [W] enfoncée, puis tournez la molette
de sélection pour régler la valeur d’ouverture.
• Vous pouvez également régler la vitesse d’obturation ou la valeur
d’ouverture en appuyant sur [f] pour sélectionner la vitesse
d’obturation ou la valeur d’ouverture, puis en faisant défiler la
molette de réglage ou en faisant glisser l’écran.
4 Définissez les options de votre choix.
5 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre
une photo.
Mode d’exposition
Lorsque vous réglez la valeur d’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation,
l’exposition change en fonction des réglages. L’écran peut donc
s’assombrir. Lorsque cette fonction est activée, la luminosité de l’écran est
constante quels que soient les réglages effectués, afin de vous permettre
de mieux cadrer votre photo.
Pour utiliser le
Mode expo.
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ
Mode expo. ĺ une option.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
60
Utilisation de la fonction Bulb
Utilisez la fonction Bulb pour réaliser des prises de vue nocturnes ou
pour photographier des ciels étoilés. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le
[Déclencheur], l’obturateur reste ouvert de façon à vous permettre de
créer des effets lumineux animés.
Pour utiliser la
fonction Bulb
Faites défiler la molette de réglage jusqu’à l’extrême gauche afin
de sélectionner la fonction Bulb ĺ Maintenez le [Déclencheur]
enfoncé pendant la durée souhaitée.
• Si vous réglez une valeur ISO élevée ou si vous laissez l’obturateur ouvert
pendant longtemps, du bruit risque d’apparaître sur l’image de façon accrue.
• Les options de prise de vue, le flash et la fonction Déclenchement par
sélection ne peuvent pas être utilisés avec la fonction Bulb.
• La fonction Bulb est disponible uniquement en mode Manuel.
• Utilisez un trépied et le déclenchement de l’obturateur pour stabiliser
l’appareil photo.
• Plus l’obturateur reste ouvert, plus l’enregistrement d’une photo est long.
N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque l’enregistrement d’une photo est en
cours.
• Si vous utilisez cette fonction pendant une durée prolongée, veillez à ce que
la batterie soit complètement chargée.
i Mode Priorité de l’objectif
Vous pouvez régler la profondeur de champ afin d’estomper ou
Utilisation de l’option E
d’accentuer l’arrière-plan.
1 Passez au mode i à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Appuyez sur [
E
i-Function] sur l’objectif pour sélectionner
.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [i-Function], puis sur [C/F]
ou faire glisser l’écran pour sélectionner E.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
61
3 Réglez la bague de mise au point pour sélectionner une
valeur.
• Pour définir cette valeur, vous pouvez également faire défiler la
molette de réglage.
• Pour définir cette valeur, vous pouvez également faire glisser le
curseur ou appuyer sur +/-.
Défocalisation Accentué
E
4 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre
une photo.
• Plus les photos sont nettes, plus la valeur d’ouverture augmente et la vitesse
d’obturation réduit. Dans les endroits sombres, les photos peuvent être
floues.
• Cette fonction n’est pas disponible lorsque vous réglez l’option Mode Auto
3D en mode 3D.
Usage d’i-Function dans les modes P/A/S/M
Vous pouvez faire appel à la touche i-Function sur un objectif compatible
pour sélectionner et régler manuellement la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur
d’ouverture, la valeur d’exposition, la sensibilité ISO ainsi que la balance
des blancs sur l’objectif.
1 Passez au mode P, A, S ou M à l’aide de la molette de
sélection.
2 Appuyez sur [i-Function] sur l’objectif pour sélectionner un
réglage.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [i-Function], puis sur [C/F]
ou faire glisser l’écran pour sélectionner un paramètre.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
62
3 Tournez la bague de mise au point pour sélectionner une
option.
• Vous pouvez également faire défiler la molette de réglage ou faire
glisser l’écran pour sélectionner une option.
4 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre
une photo.
Options disponibles
Mode Prise de vue PASM 3D
Ouverture -O-OVitesse
obturateur - - OO -
EV OOO - O
ISO OOOO -
Bal. des blancs OOOOO
Z OOOO -
• Pour sélectionner des éléments à afficher en mode Prise de vue lorsque vous
appuyez sur la touche [i-Function] située sur l’objectif, appuyez sur [m]
ĺ 5 ĺ Personnalisation iFn ĺ un élément.
• Cette fonction n’est pas disponible lorsque vous réglez l’option Mode Auto
3D en mode 3D.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
63
Utilisation de Z
La fonction Z vous permet de zoomer sur un sujet avec une
altération moindre de la qualité de la photo qu’avec le zoom numérique.
Cependant, la résolution des photos peut varier lorsque vous zoomez en
tournant la bague de zoom.
1 Passez au mode P, A, S, M ou i à l’aide de la molette de
sélection.
2 Appuyez sur [i-Function] sur l’objectif pour sélectionner Z.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [i-Function], puis sur [C/F]
ou faire glisser l’écran pour sélectionner Z.
3 Réglez la bague de mise au point pour sélectionner un rapport
de zoom.
• Vous pouvez également faire défiler la molette de réglage ou faire
glisser l’écran pour sélectionner une option.
• La résolution des photos varie selon le rapport de zoom lorsque
vous utilisez le Z.
3:2 16:9 1:1
x1.2 4560X3040 (13.9M) 4560X2568 (11.7M) 3040X3040 (9.2M)
x1.4 3888X2592 (10.1M) 3888X2184 (8.5M) 2592X2592 (6.7M)
x1.7 3264X2176 (7.1M) 3264X1840 (6.0M) 2176X2176 (4.7M)
x2 2736X1824 (5.0M) 2736X1536 (4.2M) 1824X1824 (3.3M)
Les présentes données s’appuient sur une résolution maximale pour chaque proportion
d’image.
4 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre
une photo.
• Z n’est pas disponible si vous réalisez des clichés en rafale.
• Z n’est pas disponible si vous prenez des photos au format de fichier
RAW.
• Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, la fonction Z est désactivé dès que
vous appuyez sur la touche d’enregistrement.
• Cette fonction n’est pas disponible lorsque vous réglez l’option Mode Auto
3D en mode 3D.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
64
s Mode Intelligent
En mode Intelligent, vous pouvez prendre une photo avec des options
prédéfinies pour une scène donnée.
1 Passez au mode s à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sélectionnez une scène.
• Pour sélectionner un mode de prise de vue lorsque la molette
de sélection est réglée sur s, appuyez sur [f] ou , puis
sélectionnez le mode souhaité.
Intelligent : Beauté
Définir
Option Description
Beauté Faire un portrait avec des options qui gomment les
imperfections du visage.
Meilleures poses Prendre plusieurs clichés et remplacer les visages pour
obtenir la meilleure photo possible.
Paysage Réaliser des clichés de nature morte ou de paysage.
Option Description
Macro Prendre en photo des petits sujets ou les prendre en
gros plan.
Action Prendre en photo des sujets se déplaçant à grande
vitesse.
Ton riche Prendre une photo avec des couleurs dynamiques.
Panorama Prendre en photo une scène panoramique en un seul
cliché.
Cascade Prendre en photo des scènes avec des cascades.
Silhouette Prendre en photo des sujets sous forme d’ombres
foncées se détachant sur un fond clair.
Coucher de soleil Prendre des photos de couchers du soleil avec des
tons rouges et jaunes naturels.
Nuit
Prendre plusieurs photos en conditions de faible
luminosité sans flash. L’appareil photo les associe pour
créer une image unique plus lumineuse et moins floue.
Feux d'artifice Prendre en photo des scènes avec des feux d’artifice.
Lumière Prendre en photo des scènes avec des traînées
lumineuses dans des conditions de faible luminosité.
Photo créative Prendre des photos avec des effets appliqués
automatiquement.
3 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre
une photo.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
65
Utilisation du mode Meilleures poses
En mode Meilleures poses, vous pouvez prendre plusieurs clichés et
remplacer les visages pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible. Vous avez
alors la possibilité de choisir, pour chacun des individus d’une photo de
groupe, le meilleur cliché.
1 Passez au mode s à l’aide de la molette de sélection, puis
sélectionnez Meilleures poses.
2 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le
[Déclencheur] pour effectuer la mise au point.
3 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo.
• L’appareil photo prend 5 photos consécutives.
• La première est définie comme arrière-plan.
• Les visages sont automatiquement détectés après la mise au point.
4 Appuyez sur un visage pour le remplacer.
5 Sélectionnez la meilleure pose pour les 5 visages
photographiés.
• Répétez les étapes 4 et 5 pour remplacer les autres visages de la
photo.
• L’icône apparaît sur l’image recommandée par l’appareil photo.
6 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer la photo.
• Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil.
• La résolution photo est définie à 5.9M ou à une valeur inférieure.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
66
Prise de photos panoramiques
Prenez une photo panoramique en 2D ou 3D. Il n’est possible de
visionner les photos panoramiques 3D que sur un téléviseur ou moniteur
compatible.
1 Passez au mode s à l’aide de la molette de sélection, puis
sélectionnez Panorama.
2 Appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Panorama ĺ Panorama Live
ou 3D.
3 Appuyez sur [m] pour revenir au mode Prise de vue.
4 Maintenez le [Déclencheur] enfoncé pour commencer la prise
de vue.
5 Tout en maintenant le [Déclencheur] enfoncé, déplacez
lentement l’appareil photo dans la direction souhaitée.
• En mode Panorama 3D, il ne vous est possible de prendre un cliché
que dans le sens horizontal.
• Une flèche indiquant la direction du mouvement apparaît et
l’intégralité de l’image prise est affichée dans le champ d’aperçu.
• Une fois les scènes alignées, l’appareil photo prend alors le prochain
cliché automatiquement.
6 Une fois terminé, relâchez le [Déclencheur].
• L’appareil photo enregistre automatiquement les deux photos en
une seule.
• Si vous relâchez le [Déclencheur] au cours de la prise de vue, la vue
panoramique s’interrompt et les photos prises sont enregistrées.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
67
• La résolution varie en fonction de la photo panoramique que vous avez prise.
• En mode Panorama, certaines options de prise de vue ne sont pas
disponibles.
• L’appareil photo peut cesser de photographier du fait de la composition de la
prise de vue ou du déplacement du sujet.
• En mode Panorama, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne prenne pas l’intégralité
de la dernière scène si vous arrêtez le déplacement de l’objectif pour
améliorer la qualité de la photo. Pour prendre une scène entière, déplacez
l’appareil photo légèrement au-delà du point final.
• En mode Panorama 3D, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne prenne pas le tout
début ou la toute fin d’une scène en raison de la nature de l’effet 3D. Pour
prendre l’intégralité d’un plan, déplacez légèrement l’objectif au-delà des
points de début et de fin de la prise de vue à réaliser.
• Les photos prises avec la fonction 3D sont enregistrées aux formats JPEG
(2D) et MPO (3D). L’écran de l’appareil photo vous permet uniquement de
visionner les fichiers au format JPEG.
• Pour visionner des fichiers 3D, raccordez votre appareil photo à un
téléviseur 3D ou à un moniteur 3D à l’aide d’un câble HDMI en option. Lors du
visionnage, portez des lunettes 3D adaptées.
• Si vous prenez des photos en mode Panorama 3D, l’effet 3D risque d’être
moins prononcé que sur les photos prises avec un objectif 3D. Pour accroître
l’effet 3D, fixez l’objectif 3D en option et utilisez le mode 3D. (p. 69)
• Pour optimiser les résultats lors de la prise de photos panoramiques, évitez :
- de déplacer l’appareil photo trop rapidement ou trop lentement ;
- d’interrompre le déplacement de l’appareil photo avant le prochain cliché ;
- de déplacer l’appareil photo à une vitesse irrégulière ;
- de secouer l’appareil photo ;
- d’effectuer la prise de vue dans un endroit sombre ;
- de prendre en photo des sujets en mouvement placés trop près de
l’objectif ;
- les conditions de prise de vue, où la luminosité et la couleur de la lumière,
ne cessent de changer.
• Les photos réalisées sont automatiquement sauvegardées et la prise de vue
est interrompue dans les circonstances suivantes :
- si vous changez de direction en pleine prise de vue ;
- si vous bougez l’appareil photo trop rapidement ;
- si vous ne bougez pas l’appareil photo.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
68
Enregistrement d’une vidéo
En mode Prise de vue, vous pouvez enregistrer des vidéos Full HD
(1920X1080) en appuyant sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo).
L’appareil photo vous permet de réaliser des vidéos d’une durée de
29 minutes et 59 secondes maximum à 60, 30, 24 ou 15 ips et enregistre
les fichiers au format MP4 (H.264). La fréquence de 60 ips n’est disponible
qu’aux résolutions 1920X1080 et 1280X720, et la fréquence de 24 ips
n’est disponible qu’en résolution 1920X810. La fréquence de 15 ips n’est
disponible qu’avec certaines options de filtre intelligent. Le son est
enregistré via le microphone de l’appareil photo.
Vous pouvez définir l’exposition en réglant la valeur d’ouverture et la
vitesse d’obturation pour le mode sélectionné. Si vous utilisez un objectif
dépourvu de commutateur AF / MF pendant l’enregistrement d’une vidéo,
appuyez sur [F] pour désactiver ou activer la fonction mise au point
automatique. Lorsque vous utilisez un objectif équipé d’un commutateur
AF / MF, la fonction de mise au point automatique (AF) fonctionne selon le
réglage du commutateur.
Sélectionnez Fondu pour appliquer un fondu entrant ou sortant à la
scène. Vous pouvez également sélectionner l’option Voix, Réduction vent
ou toute autre option permettant de paramétrer l’enregistrement. (p. 106)
1 Passez au mode t, P, A, S, M, i ou s à l’aide de la
molette de sélection.
• Il est possible que cette fonction soit inopérante dans certains
modes.
2 Définissez les options de votre choix.
3 Appuyez sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo) pour lancer
l’enregistrement.
4 Appuyez à nouveau sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo)
pour l’arrêter.
• Le format H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC) est l’un des derniers formats vidéo à mis au
point par les organismes internationaux de normalisation ISO-IEC et ITU-T. Etant
donné que ce format utilise un taux de compression élevé, davantage de données
peuvent être enregistrées dans un espace mémoire plus restreint.
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo enregistre le son du stabilisateur d’image si
vous avez activé cette option ou bien lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo.
• Si vous réglez l’objectif alors que l’enregistrement d’une vidéo est en cours, vous
risquez d’enregistrer le son émis par le zoom ou l’objectif.
• Lorsque vous utilisez un objectif vidéo en option, le son de la mise au point
automatique n’est pas enregistré.
• Si vous retirez l’objectif de l’appareil photo lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo,
l’enregistrement sera interrompu. Ne changez pas d’objectif lorsque vous réalisez
une vidéo.
• Si vous installez un microphone externe lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo,
le son n’est pas enregistré à partir du microphone externe. (les paramètres
précédents sont conservés). Si vous retirez le microphone externe lorsque
vous réalisez une vidéo, le son n’est pas enregistré. Eteignez l’appareil photo
avant d’installer ou de retirer le microphone.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
69
• Si vous modifiez brusquement l’angle de prise de vue lorsque vous réalisez une
vidéo, il est possibe que l’appareil photo ne puisse pas enregistrer les images
de façon précise. Utilisez un trépied pour réduire les mouvements de l’appareil
photo.
• L’appareil photo prend uniquement en charge la fonction Mise au point
multiple lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser
d’autres fonctions de paramétrage des zones de mise au point automatique,
comme par exemple la fonction MPA Détection des visages.
• Lorsque la taille du fichier vidéo est supérieure à 4 Go, l’appareil photo
interrompt automatiquement l’enregistrement même si la durée maximale
d’enregistrement (29 minutes et 59 secondes) n’est pas atteinte.
• Si vous utilisez une carte mémoire à vitesse d’écriture lente, il est possible que
l’enregistrement de votre vidéo en cours soit interrompu, car la carte ne peut
traiter un débit de données trop élevé. Si cela se produit, remplacez la carte
utilisée par une autre carte à vitesse d’écriture plus rapide, ou bien réduisez la
résolution de l’image (par exemple, de 1280X720 à 640X480).
• Utilisez toujours l’appareil photo pour formater une carte mémoire. Si vous
formatez les fichiers sur un autre appareil photo ou sur un PC, cela peut affecter la
capacité d’enregistrement de la carte ou bien causer la perte de fichiers.
• Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche d’enregistrement vidéo, le Z est
désactivé.
• Lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo avec la même sensibilité ISO, l’écran
peut être plus sombre que lors de la prise d’une photo. Réglez la sensibilité
ISO.
• Lorsque vous enregistrez une vidéo en mode P, A ou S, ISO est
automatiquement réglé sur Automatique.
Mode 3D
Vous pouvez prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos 3D avec un
objectif 3D en option.
Objectif SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 [T6] 2D/3D (exemple)
Réglez le commutateur 2D/3D de l’objectif en mode 3D, puis prenez une
photo ou enregistrez une vidéo à une distance située entre 1,5 et 5 mètres
du sujet.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
70
• Le mode 3D est toujours activé, quel que soit le réglage de la molette de
sélection du mode de l’appareil photo (sauf pour B).
• Pour utiliser des options 3D automatiques qui permettent à l’appareil
photo de régler automatiquement les options de prise de vue en
fonction des conditions de prise de vue en mode 3D, appuyez sur
[m] ĺ1ĺ Mode Auto 3D ĺ Activé.
• Pour modifier l’option d’enregistrement en 3D, appuyez sur [m] ĺ
6ĺ Mode REC 3D ĺ l’option souhaitée.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Description
Côte à côte* : affiche deux images côte à côte.
Compression d'images : affiche alternativement les images de
l’œil gauche et de l’œil droit dans des cadres différents.
• Les options de prise de vue disponibles diffèrent par rapport aux autres
modes de prise de vue.
• Vous pouvez sélectionner 4.1M (2688X1512) ou 2.1M (1920X1080) comme
format photo.
• La résolution vidéo est réglée sur 1920X1080.
• Il est possible que les vidéos enregistrées en 3D soient sombres ou la lecture
saccadée.
• Une prise de vue à des températures très basses peut entraîner une mauvaise
restitution des couleurs et une consommation excessive de la batterie.
• La prise de vue risque d’être impossible dans des conditions de luminosité
inférieures à 8,5 LV/900 lux. Pour de meilleurs résultats, procédez à la prise de
vue lorsque la luminosité est suffisante.
• Lorsque vous photographiez des objets contenant des matériaux polarisants,
tels que certains écrans, filtres ou lunettes, ou appliquez un matériau
polarisant sur votre objectif, les images risquent d’être assombries ou
l’effet 3D incorrect.
• Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil.
• Si vous pivotez l’appareil photo ou si vous l’inclinez verticalement lors de la
prise de vue, l’effet 3D risque d’être incorrect. Positionnez l’appareil photo
normalement.
• Si vous prenez en photo des lumières fluorescentes ou des images affichées
par des projecteurs ou des téléviseurs, ces images risquent d’apparaître en
noir en raison des effets de scintillement.
• En mode 3D, l’option Agrandir x8 de la fonction Aide M. au P. manuelle peut
ne pas être disponible.
• L’appareil photo affiche les vidéos 3D uniquement en 2D.
• Les photos prises avec la fonction 3D sont enregistrées aux formats JPEG
(2D) et MPO (3D). L’écran de l’appareil photo vous permet uniquement de
visionner les fichiers au format JPEG.
• Pour visionner des fichiers 3D, raccordez votre appareil photo à un
téléviseur 3D ou à un moniteur 3D à l’aide d’un câble HDMI en option. Lors du
visionnage, portez des lunettes 3D adaptées.
• Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le flash en mode 3D.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
71
Fonctions disponibles en mode Prise de vue
Pour obtenir des informations à propos des fonctions de prise de vue,
consultez le chapitre 2. Appuyez sur le raccourci correspondant à chacune
des fonctions.
Fonction Disponible en Raccourci
Format photo (p. 73) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t/3D* -
Qualité (p. 74) P/A/S/M/i/s* -
ISO (p. 75) P/A/S/M f/I
Bal. des blancs (p. 76) P/A/S/M f
Assistant photo (p. 79) P/A/S/M f
Filtre intelligent
(p. 101) P/A/S/M f
Mode AF (p. 80) P/A/S/M/i*/s*/3D* f
Zone AF (p. 83) P/A/S/M/i*/s* f/F
Mise au point tactile
(p. 86) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t/3D* -
Aide M. au P. manuelle
(p. 88) P/A/S/M/i/s/t/3D* -
Assistance à la mise au
point (p. 88) P/A/S/M/i/s/t -
Lien AE à AF (p. 99) P/A/S/M -
Fonction Disponible en Raccourci
Mode expo. (p. 59) P/A/S/M -
OIS (anti-bougé) (p. 89) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t* -
Prise de vue
(Continue / Mode
Rafale / Retardateur /
Bracketing) (p. 90)
P/A/S/M/i*/s*/t*/3D* f/C
Mesure de l’exposition
(p. 97) P/A/S/M f
Plage dynamique
(p. 100) P/A/S/M -
Flash (p. 94) P*/A*/S*/M*/i*/s*/t* f
Compensation de
l'exposition (p. 102) P/A/S f/W
Verrouillage de
l’exposition (p. 103) P/A/S -
* Dans ces modes, certaines fonctions sont limitées.
Section 2
Fonctions de prise de vue
Découvrez les fonctions que vous pouvez définir en mode Prise de vue.
En utilisant les fonctions de prise de vue, vous pouvez personnaliser encore plus vos photos et vos vidéos.
Fonctions de prise de vue
73
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Format photo
Sélectionner une résolution plus élevée permet d’augmenter le nombre de
pixels des photos ou des vidéos afin de pouvoir les imprimer sur du papier
grand format ou de les visionner sur un grand écran. Si vous utilisez une
résolution élevée, la taille du fichier augmente également. Pour afficher
des photos dans un cadre numérique ou en télécharger vers le web,
sélectionnez une basse résolution.
Pour régler la taille En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ
Format photo ĺ une option.
Icône Taille Recommandé pour
5472x3648 (3:2) Imprimez sur papier A1.
3888x2592 (3:2) Imprimez sur papier A2.
2976x1984 (3:2) Imprimez sur papier A3.
1728x1152 (3:2) Imprimez sur papier A5.
5472x3080 (16:9) Imprimez sur papier A1 ou visionnez sur un
téléviseur HD.
3712x2088 (16:9) Imprimez sur papier A3 ou visionnez sur un
téléviseur HD.
2944x1656 (16:9) Imprimez sur papier A4 ou visionnez sur un
téléviseur HD.
1920x1080 (16:9) Imprimez sur papier A5 ou visionnez sur un
téléviseur HD.
3648x3648 (1:1) Imprimez d’une photo carrée sur du papier
au format A1.
2640x2640 (1:1) Imprimez d’une photo carrée sur du papier
au format A3.
2000x2000 (1:1) Imprimez d’une photo carrée sur du papier
au format A4.
1024x1024 (1:1) Imprimez d’une photo carrée sur du papier
au format A5.
Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Format et résolution
74
Fonctions de prise de vue > Format et résolution
Qualité
L’appareil enregistre les photos au format JPEG ou RAW.
Les photos capturées par un appareil numérique sont souvent converties
en format JPEG et stockées dans la mémoire selon les réglages de
l’appareil photo au moment de la prise de vue. Les fichiers RAW ne sont
pas convertis au format JPEG et sont stockés dans la mémoire sans aucune
modification.
Les fichiers RAW ont pour extension « SRW ». Pour régler et étalonner
l’exposition, la balance des blancs, les tonalités, le contraste et les couleurs
des fichiers RAW, ou pour les convertir au format JPEG ou TIFF, utilisez le
programme Adobe Photoshop Lightroom fourni sur le DVD-ROM.
Pour enregistrer des photos en format RAW, assurez-vous que l’appareil
photo dispose de suffisamment de mémoire disponible.
Pour définir la
qualité
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Qualité
ĺ une option.
Icône Format Description
JPEG
Maximale :
• Compressée afin d’obtenir la meilleure qualité
possible.
• Recommandé pour une impression en grand
format.
JPEG
Elevée :
• Compressé pour obtenir une meilleure qualité.
• Recommandé pour une impression en format
normal.
Icône Format Description
JPEG
Normale :
• Compressé pour obtenir une qualité normale.
• Recommandé pour imprimer en petit format ou
pour télécharger vers le web.
RAW
RAW :
• Enregistrez une photo sans perdre de données.
• Recommandé pour effectuer des modifications
après la prise de vue.
RAW+JPEG RAW + Très élevé : enregistrez une photo au
format JPEG (qualité maximale) et RAW.
RAW+JPEG RAW + Elevé : enregistrez une photo au format
JPEG (qualité fine) et RAW.
RAW+JPEG RAW + Normal : enregistrer une photo au format
JPEG (qualité normale) et RAW.
Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Fonctions de prise de vue
75
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
La sensibilité ISO désigne la sensibilité de l’appareil photo à la lumière.
Plus la valeur de la sensibilité ISO est importante, plus l’appareil photo
est sensible à la lumière. Par conséquent, en sélectionnant une valeur
de sensibilité ISO plus élevée, vous pouvez réaliser des prises de vue
dans des endroits sombres, en utilisant une vitesse d’obturation plus
rapide. Néanmoins, il est possible que cela augmente les effets de bruit
électronique et donne un aspect granuleux à la photo.
Pour définir la
sensibilité ISO En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [I] ĺ une option.
Exemples
ISO 100 ISO 400
ISO 800 ISO 3200
• Vous pouvez également effectuer ce réglage en appuyant sur [m] ĺ
1ĺ ISO ĺ une option en mode Prise de vue.
• Augmentez la valeur ISO dans les endroits où l’utilisation du flash est
interdite. En définissant une valeur ISO élevée, vous pouvez obtenir des
photos d’une plus grande clarté sans avoir besoin de davantage de lumière.
• Afin de réduire le bruit visuel qui peut apparaître sur des photos prises avec
une valeur ISO élevée, utilisez la fonction de Réduction du bruit. (p. 146)
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Sensibilité ISO
Fonctions de prise de vue
76
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
En photographie, la balance des blancs permet de corriger la dominante
de couleur en fonction de l’éclairage ambiant.
La couleur des photos dépend du type et de la qualité de la source
d’éclairage. Pour que les couleurs de vos photos soient le reflet de la
réalité, choisissez des conditions d’éclairage appropriées pour calibrer
la balance des blancs, par exemple Bal. des blancs auto, Lumière du
jour, Nuageux, Tungstène, ou bien réglez la température des couleurs
manuellement.
Vous pouvez également régler la couleur des sources lumineuses
prédéfinies de façon à ce que les couleurs de la photo correspondent aux
véritables couleurs de la scène sous différentes conditions d’éclairage.
Pour définir une
balance des blancs,
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ
Bal. des blancs ĺ une option.
Icône Description
Bal. des blancs auto : automatiser les réglages en fonction des
conditions d’éclairage.
Lumière du jour : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue
en extérieur par beau temps. Cette option permet d’obtenir des
photos reproduisant au mieux les couleurs naturelles d’une scène.
Nuageux : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en
extérieur par temps nuageux ou dans un endroit ombragé. Les
photos prises par temps nuageux ont tendance à présenter un
aspect plus bleuté que celles prises par beau temps. Cette option
permet de compenser cet effet.
Icône Description
Blanc fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue
sous un éclairage de type lumière du jour fluorescent. Cette option
est particulièrement adaptée à un éclairage fluorescent avec une
température de couleurs d’environ 4 200 k.
Blanc/Noir fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises
de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière du jour fluorescent. Cette
option est particulièrement adaptée à un éclairage fluorescent très
blanc avec une température de couleurs d’environ 5 000 k.
Lumière du jour fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de
prises de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière du jour fluorescent.
Cette option est particulièrement adaptée à un éclairage
fluorescent légèrement bleuté avec une température de couleurs
d’environ 6 500 k.
Tungstène : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en
intérieur avec des ampoules à incandescence ou des lampes
halogène. Les ampoules tungstène incandescentes ont tendance à
créer un coloris rougeâtre. Cette option permet de compenser cet
effet.
Bal.Blancs flash : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue à
l’aide d’un flash.
Réglage personnalisé : utilisez vos paramètres prédéfinis. Vous
pouvez définir manuellement la balance des blancs en appuyant
sur [D], et en prenant une feuille de papier blanc en photo.
Remplir le cercle de mesure sélective avec la feuille de papier et
définir la balance des blancs.
Balance des blancs
77
Fonctions de prise de vue > Balance des blancs
Icône Description
Température couleur : régler manuellement la température des
couleurs de la source lumineuse. La température des couleurs
est une mesure exprimée en degrés kelvins et qui indique
spécifiquement le type de source lumineuse. Au fur et à mesure
que la température de la couleur augmente, la gamme de
répartition des couleurs devient plus froide. Inversement, au fur et
à mesure que la température des couleurs diminue, la gamme de
répartition des couleurs devient plus chaude. Appuyez sur [D],
puis réglez la température de couleur.
Ciel clair
Fluorescent haut
Fluorescent bas
Nuageux
Lampe halogène
Lumière naturelle
Tungstène
Lumière de bougie
Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Personnalisation des options de préréglage de la balance des blancs
Vous pouvez également personnaliser les options prédéfinies de balance
des blancs.
Pour personnaliser
les options
prédéfinies
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ
Bal. des blancs ĺ une option ĺ [D] ĺ tournez la
molette de réglage ou appuyez sur [D/I/C/F].
Bal. des blancs : Lumière du jour
Retour Définir Annuler
Vous pouvez également appuyer sur une zone à l’écran.
78
Fonctions de prise de vue > Balance des blancs
Exemples
Bal. des blancs auto Lumière du jour
Lumière du jour fluorescent Tungstène
Fonctions de prise de vue
79
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
L'Assistant photo vous permet d’appliquer des styles à vos photos afin de
leur faire adopter différents aspects et créer des impressions particulières.
Vous pouvez également créer et enregistrer vos propres styles de photos
en réglant la couleur, la saturation, la netteté, et le contraste pour chacun
de ces styles.
L’application de différents styles ne suit aucune règle particulière, quelles
que soient les conditions. Essayez plusieurs styles différents et trouvez les
paramètres qui vous conviennent.
Pour définir un style
de photo
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ
Assistant photo ĺ une option.
Exemples
Standard Accentué Portrait
Paysage Naturel Rétro
Cool Calme Classique
• Vous pouvez également régler les valeurs des paramètres de styles prédéfinis.
Sélectionnez une option Assistant photo, appuyez sur [D], puis réglez la
couleur, la saturation, la netteté ou le contraste.
• Pour personnaliser votre assistant photo, sélectionnez , ou , puis
réglez la couleur, la saturation, la netteté et le contraste.
• Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options de l’Assistant photo et
les options Filtre intelligent.
Assistant photo (styles de photo)
Fonctions de prise de vue
80
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Mode AF
Découvrez comment régler la mise au point de l’appareil photo en
fonction des sujets.
Vous pouvez sélectionner un mode de mise au point adapté au sujet,
parmi les modes de Mise au point automatique unique, Mise au
point automatique continue et Mise au point manuelle. Lorsque vous
appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, la fonction de mise au point
automatique s’active. En mode Mise au point manuelle, vous devez faire
pivoter la bague de mise au point sur l’objectif afin d’effectuer une mise au
point manuelle.
Dans la plupart des cas, vous pouvez effectuer une mise au point en
sélectionnant AF unique. Il est difficile d’effectuer une mise au point sur
des sujet se déplaçant rapidement ou ayant une couleur similaire à celle
de l’arrière-plan. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez un mode de mise au point
approprié.
Si votre objectif est équipé d’un commutateur AF / MF, vous devez le
régler en fonction du mode sélectionné. Réglez le commutateur sur AF
lorsque vous sélectionnez les options AF unique ou AF continu. Réglez le
commutateur sur MF lorsque vous sélectionnez l’option M.P. manuelle.
Si votre objectif est dépourvu d’une touche AF / MF, appuyez sur [F]
pour sélectionner le mode AF souhaité.
Pour définir le
mode Mise au
point automatique
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [F] ĺ une option.
• Vous pouvez également effectuer ce réglage en appuyant sur [m] ĺ
1ĺ Mode AF ĺ une option en mode Prise de vue.
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction l’objectif utilisé.
81
Fonctions de prise de vue > Mode AF
AF unique
La fonction AF unique est appropriée pour les photos de sujets immobiles.
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, la mise au point
s’établit dans la zone correspondante. Une fois la mise au point effectuée,
la zone devient verte.
Mise au point continue
Tant que vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo
continue d’effectuer la mise au point automatique. Une fois la zone
de mise au point établie, cette dernière reste active sur le sujet même
lorsque ce dernier est en mouvement. Ce mode est recommandé pour
photographier une personne sur une bicyclette, un chien qui court ou une
scène de course automobile.
82
Fonctions de prise de vue > Mode AF
Mise au point manuelle
Vous pouvez effectuer manuellement une mise au point sur un sujet en
faisant pivoter la bague de mise au point sur l’objectif. La fonction d’aide
M. au P. manuelle vous permet d’effectuer facilement la mise au point.
Lorsque vous tournez la bague de mise au point, la zone de mise au point
est agrandie. Avec la fonction Focus Peaking, la couleur sélectionnée
apparaît autour du sujet photographié. Avec la fonction Focus Peaking,
la couleur sélectionnée apparaît sur le sujet photographié. Ce mode est
recommandé pour photographier un objet dont la couleur est similaire à
celle de l’arrière-plan, une scène de nuit ou un feu d’artifice.
Si vous utilisez cette fonction, vous ne pouvez pas régler les options
Mise au point tactile, Zone AF et Lien AE à AF.
Fonctions de prise de vue
83
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
La fonction Zone AF permet de modifier l’emplacement de ladite zone.
D’une manière générale, les appareils photo effectuent une mise au point
sur le sujet le plus proche. En présence de plusieurs sujets, il arrive que
certains sujets soient involontairement mis au point. Vous pouvez modifier
l’emplacement de la zone de mise au point afin d’éviter qu’une mise au
point soit effectuée sur des sujets non choisis. En sélectionnant une zone
de mise au point appropriée, vous pouvez obtenir une photo plus claire et
plus nette.
Pour définir la
zone de mise au
point automatique
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ
Zone AF ĺ une option.
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
• Lorsque le commutateur AF / MF est réglé sur MF, vous ne pouvez pas
modifier l’option Zone AF à partir du menu Prise de vue.
• Avec l’option MPA Détection des visages, l’appareil photo effectue
automatiquement la mise au point sur le cadre blanc.
• La détection des visages peut ne pas être efficace selon les options Assistant
photo sélectionnées.
• Lors d’une mise au point manuelle, la détection des visages peut ne pas être
possible.
• La détection des visages risque de ne pas fonctionner lorsque :
- le sujet est éloigné de l’appareil photo ;
- la luminosité est trop forte ou trop faible ;
- le sujet n’est pas face à l’appareil photo ;
- le sujet porte des lunettes de soleil ou un masque ;
- les expressions faciales du sujet changent radicalement ;
- le sujet est à contre-jour ou si les conditions d’éclairage sont instables.
Mise au point ciblée
Vous pouvez définir la mise au point sur une zone en particulier. Appliquez
un effet hors-mise au point afin de faire ressortir le sujet.
La zone de mise au point de la photo ci-dessous a été repositionée et sa
taille a été modifiée afin de l’adapter au visage du sujet.
En mode Prise de vue, afin de redimensionner ou de déplacer la zone de mise
au point, appuyez sur [o]. Utilisez la touche de navigation pour déplacer la zone
de mise au point. Tournez la molette de réglage pour redimensionner la zone de
mise au point.
Zone AF
84
Fonctions de prise de vue > Zone AF
Mise au point multiple
L’appareil photo affiche un rectange vert sur les zones de la photo où la
mise au point est correctement effectuée. La photo est divisée en deux
zones ou plus et l’appareil photo effectue une mise au point sur chaque
zone. Ceci est recommandé pour les photos de paysages.
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo
affiche les zones de mise au point, comme illustré sur la photo ci-dessous.
Mise au point avec détection de visage
L’appareil photo effectue une mise au point sur les visages en priorité. Il
est possible de détecter jusqu’à 10 visages. Ce paramètre est recommandé
pour les photos de groupe.
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo
effectue une mise au point sur les visages, comme cela est présenté sur
la photo ci-dessous. Lors d’une prise de vue d’un groupe de personnes, la
mise au point effectuée sur le visage de la personne la plus proche s’affiche
en blanc tandis que celle effectuée sur les autres personnes s’affiche en
gris.
85
Fonctions de prise de vue > Zone AF
AF autoportrait
Lorsque vous réalisez un autoportrait, il peut être difficile de déterminer si
votre visage fait l’objet d’une mise au point ou non. Lorsque cette fonction
est activée, la fréquence du bip de l’appareil photo s’accélère lorsque vous
rapprochez votre visage du centre de la composition.
Fonctions de prise de vue
86
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Mise au point avec suivi
La mise au point avec suivi permet de suivre un sujet et d’effectuer
automatiquement la mise au point, même si le sujet se déplace ou en cas
de changement de cadrage de la prise de vue.
Cadre blanc : l’appareil photo
effectue un suivi.
Cadre vert : la mise au point est
effectuée lorsque vous appuyez
sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course.
Cadre rouge : la mise au point a
échoué.
Sélectionnez une zone focale ou effectuez une mise au point en appuyant
sur l’écran. Effectuez ensuite la mise au point sur le sujet et prenez une
photo en appuyant sur l’écran.
Pour régler la mise
au point tactile :
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ
Mise au point tactile ĺ une option.
Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Mise au point tactile
La mise au point tactile vous permet de sélectionner une zone focale et
d’effectuer une mise au point en appuyant sur l’écran.
Point AF
La zone focale correspond à la zone que vous touchez à l’écran et la mise
au point n’est pas effectuée.
Mise au point tactile
87
Fonctions de prise de vue > Mise au point tactile
Déclenchement par sélection
Un doigt suffit pour prendre une photo. Dès que vous appuyez sur un sujet
à l’écran, l’appareil photo effectue automatiquement la mise au point et
prend la photo.
• Si vous ne sélectionnez aucune zone de mise au point, la mise au point
automatique est inopérante.
• Le suivi peut s’avérer impossible si :
- le sujet est trop petit ;
- le sujet bouge de manière excessive ;
- le sujet est à contre-jour ou si la luminosité est insuffisante ;
- les couleurs ou les motifs sur le sujet et l’arrière-plan sont identiques ;
- des motifs horizontaux, tels que des stores, sont présents ;
- l’appareil photo n’est pas stable.
• En cas d’échec du suivi, la fonctionnalité est réinitialisée.
• Si l’appareil photo ne parvient pas à suivre le sujet, la zone de mise au point
est réinitialisée.
• Si l’appareil photo ne réussit pas à effectuer la mise au point, le cadre de mise
au point devient rouge et la fonctionnalité est réinitialisée.
Fonctions de prise de vue
88
Fonctions de Fonctions de prise de vue prise de vue
En mode Mise au point manuelle, vous devez faire pivoter la bague de
mise au point sur l’objectif afin d’effectuer la mise au point. Lorsque
vous utilisez la fonction Aide M. au P. manuelle ou Focus Peaking, vous
pouvez obtenir une mise au point plus claire. Cette fonction est disponible
uniquement sur les objectifs avec lesquels la mise au point manuelle est
possible.
Aide M. au P. manuelle
En mode Mise au point manuelle, vous pouvez agrandir la scène et
facilement effectuer la mise au point tout en tournant la bague de mise au
point.
Pour définir l’aide
à la mise au point
manuelle
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ
Aide M. au P. manuelle ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Désactivé La fonction Aide M. au P. manuelle n’est pas utilisée.
Agrandir
x5*
Lorsque vous faites pivoter la bague de mise au point, la zone
de mise au point est agrandie jusqu’à 5 fois.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Agrandir x8
Lorsque vous faites pivoter la bague de mise au point, la zone
de mise au point est agrandie jusqu’à 8 fois.
Assistance à la mise au point
En mode de mise au point manuelle, la couleur sélectionnée apparaît sur
le sujet photographié afin de vous aider à effectuer la mise au point alors
que vous tournez la bague de mise au point.
Pour définir les
options d'assistance
à la mise au point
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ
Assistance à la mise au point ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Niveau Définir une sensibilité pour détecter le sujet mis au point.
(Arrêt, Elevé, Normal*, Bas)
Couleur Définir une couleur pour qu'elle apparaisse sur le sujet mis au
point. (Blanc*, Rouge, Vert)
Assistance à la mise au point
Fonctions de prise de vue
89
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Utilisez la fonction de stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) afin de réduire
les mouvements de l’appareil photo. La fonction de stabilisation optique
de l’image n’est pas disponible avec tous les objectifs.
Les mouvements de l’appareil photo se produisent souvent dans
des endroits sombres ou lors de la prise de vue en intérieur. Dans ces
cas-là, l’appareil photo utilise une vitesse d’obturation plus lente afin
d’augmenter la quantité de lumière, ce qui peut donner des photos floues.
Vous pouvez éviter ce type de situations en utilisant la fonction OIS.
Si l’objectif est équipé d’un interrupteur OIS, positionnez l’interrupteur sur
ON pour utiliser la fonction OIS.
Pour définir les
options OIS
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ
OIS (anti-bougé) ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Description
Arrêt : la fonction OIS est désactivée. (Cette option peut ne pas être
disponible avec certains objectifs.)
Mode 1* : la fonction OIS s’applique uniquement lorsque vous
enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à fond ou à mi-course.
Mode 2 : la fonction OIS est toujours activée.
Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS, Optical Image Stabilization)
Sans correction OIS Avec correction OIS
• L’option OIS risque de ne pas fonctionner si :
- vous bougez l’appareil photo pour suivre un sujet en mouvement ;
- l’appareil photo est instable ;
- la vitesse d’obturation est lente (par exemple, si vous sélectionnez Nuit en
mode s) ;
- le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible ;
- vous prenez une photo en gros plan.
• Si la fonction OIS est utilisée avec un trépied, les photos peuvent être floues
en raison des vibrations du capteur OIS. Désactivez la fonction OIS lorsque
vous utilisez un trépied.
• Si l’appareil photo est soumis à un choc, l’écran sera flou. Si cela se produit,
éteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le.
• Utilisez la fonction OIS uniquement si cela est nécessaire, car la batterie se
décharge plus rapidement.
• Pour définir une option OIS dans le menu, réglez l’interrupteur OIS de
l’objectif sur ON.
• Cette option peut ne pas être disponible avec certains objectifs.
• La position Arrêt peut ne pas être disponible avec certains objectifs.
Fonctions de prise de vue
90
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Il vous est possible de définir le type de prise de vue, par exemple
Continue, Rafale, Retardateur, etc.
Sélectionnez Unique pour prendre une photo à la fois. Sélectionnez
Continue ou Mode Rafale pour prendre des photos de sujets se déplaçant
rapidement. Sélectionnez BKT AE, BKT NB ou A. photo Bracketing
pour régler l’exposition, la balance des blancs ou appliquer les effets de
l’assistant photo. Vous pouvez également sélectionner Retardateur pour
prendre une photo de vous-même.
Pour définir la
méthode de prise
de vue
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] ĺ une option.
• Vous pouvez également effectuer ce réglage en appuyant sur [m] ĺ
1ĺ Prise de vue ĺ une option en mode Prise de vue.
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Unique
Prenez une photo à chaque fois que vous appuyez sur [Déclencheur].
Recommandé pour des conditions de prise de vue courantes.
Continue
Prenez des photos en continu en appuyant sur le [Déclencheur]. Il vous
est possible de prendre jusqu’à 5 photos (Rafale faible) ou 8,6 photos
(Rafale élevée) par seconde.
Si vous sélectionnez Rafale élevée, la fonction de réduction du bruit n’est pas
disponible.
Prise de vue
91
Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue
Mode Rafale
Prenez successivement 10 photos par seconde (3 secondes), 15 photos
par seconde (2 secondes) ou 30 photos par seconde (1 seconde) lorsque
vous appuyez une fois sur le [Déclencheur]. Cette fonctionnalité est
recommandée pour prendre des photos de mouvements rapides ou de
sujets se déplaçant rapidement, comme par exemple lors de courses
automobiles.
• Pour définir le nombre de clichés, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] ĺ
Mode Rafale, puis sur [D].
• Le format de la photo est réglé sur 5M.
• L’enregistrement d’une photo peut prendre plus de temps.
• Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le flash avec cette option.
• La vitesse d’obturation doit être supérieure à 1/30 seconde.
• Les photos capturées avec cette option peuvent être légèrement agrandies
lors de l’enregistrement.
• Vous ne pouvez pas régler l’option ISO à une valeur supérieure à ISO 3200.
• Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est
pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW.
Retardateur
Capturez une photo après un délai de 2 à 30 secondes. Il est possible de
régler le délai par incréments d’une seconde.
Pour définir le délai avant le déclenchement, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur
[C] ĺ Retardateur, puis sur [D].
92
Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue
Bracketing d’exposition automatique
(BKT AE)
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo réalise
3 clichés consécutifs : l’original, un autre légèrement plus foncé, puis un
autre légèrement plus clair. Utilisez un trépied afin d’éviter d’obtenir un
résultat flou. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu
Réglage Bracketing.
Exposition -2
Original
Exposition +2
Bracketing Balance des blancs (BKT NB)
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo réalise
3 clichés consécutifs : l’original, puis deux autres avec différents
paramètres de balance des blancs. La photo originale est réalisée
lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. Les deux autres sont réglées
automatiquement en fonction de la balance des blancs que vous avez
définie. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu Réglage
Bracketing.
WB-2
Original
WB+2
Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est pas
disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW.
93
Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue
Bracketing Assistant photo
(A. photo Bracketing)
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo réalise trois
clichés consécutifs, chacun avec différents paramètres de l’Assistant photo.
L’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue et applique les trois options
de l’Assistant photo que vous avez définies pour la photo prise. Vous
pouvez sélectionner trois paramètres différents dans le menu Réglage
Bracketing.
Accentué
Standard
Rétro
Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est pas
disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW.
Réglages de la fonction Bracketing
Vous pouvez configurer les options BKT AE, BKT NB et A. photo Bracketing.
(p. 147)
Pour définir
une option de
bracketing
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ 5 ĺ
Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option.
Fonctions de prise de vue
94
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Pour obtenir une photo réaliste du sujet, le niveau de luminosité doit être
constant. Lorsque la source de luminosité varie, vous pouvez utiliser un
flash et créer ainsi un niveau de luminosité constant. Sélectionnez des
paramètres appropriés en fonction d’une source de luminosité et d’un
sujet.
Pour définir les
options du flash
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Flash
ĺune option.
Icône Description
Arrêt : ne pas utiliser le flash.
Flash intelligent : l’appareil photo règle automatiquement
l’intensité du flash en fonction du niveau de luminosité ambiant.
Automatique : le flash se déclenche automatiquement dans les
endroits sombres.
Yeux rouges auto : le flash se déclenche automatiquement et
réduit l’effet yeux rouges.
Contre jour : le flash se déclenche à chaque fois que vous réalisez
une prise de vue. (La luminosité est automatiquement ajustée.)
Ctre jour + Yeux rouges : le flash se déclenche à chaque fois que
vous réalisez une prise de vue et réduit l’effet yeux rouges.
Icône Description
1er Rideau : le flash se déclenche
immédiatement après ouverture
de l’obturateur. L’appareil photo
capture plus rapidement et
nettement la photo d’un sujet dans
une séquence d’actions. Direction du déplacement de
la balle
2e Rideau : le flash se déclenche
juste avant que l’obturateur ne se
referme. L’appareil photo capture
plus lentement et clairement la
photo d’un sujet dans une séquence
d’actions. Direction du déplacement de
la balle
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
• Une pause est marquée entre deux déclenchements du flash. Ne bougez pas
tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde fois.
• Si vous sélectionnez Arrêt, le flash ne se déclenche pas même si un flash
externe est installé.
Utilisez uniquement des flashs homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de flashs
incompatibles peut endommager l’appareil photo.
Flash
95
Fonctions de prise de vue > Flash
Réduction de l’effet yeux rouges
Si le flash se déclenche lorsque vous photographiez une personne dans un
endroit sombre, il est possible qu’un halo rouge apparaisse à la place de
ses yeux. Pour réduire l’effet yeux rouges, sélectionnez Yeux rouges auto
ou Ctre jour + Yeux rouges.
Sans réduction des yeux rouges Avec réduction des yeux rouges
Si le sujet est trop éloigné de l’appareil photo ou se déplace lorsque le flash se
déclenche, il se peut que l’effet yeux rouges ne soit pas corrigé.
Réglage de l’intensité du flash
Lorsque le flash est activé, réglez son intensité de +/-2 niveaux.
Pour définir
l’intensité du flash
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [f] ĺ Flash ĺ une option
ĺ [D] ĺ tournez la molette de réglage ou appuyez sur
[C/F] pour réglet l’intensité du flash.
Retour Définir
Flash : 0.0
96
Fonctions de prise de vue > Flash
• Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/- pour régler
l’intensité.
• Le réglage de l’intensité du flash risque d’être sans effet si :
- le sujet est trop près de l’appareil ;
- vous avez sélectionné une sensibilité ISO élevée ;
- la valeur d’exposition est trop élevée ou trop faible.
• Dans certains modes de prise de vue, cette fonction n’est pas accessible.
• Si vous avez installé sur l’appareil photo un flash externe à inténsité variable,
les réglages d’intensité du flash s’appliquent.
• Si le sujet est trop rapproché lorsque vous utilisez le flash, cela peut refléter
la lumière et assombrir la photo. Vérifiez que le sujet est situé à la distance
recommandée, qui peut varier selon l’objectif utilisé.
• L’utilisation d’un pare-soleil peut arrêter la lumière du flash. Retirez le
pare-soleil avant d’utiliser le flash.
Fonctions de prise de vue
97
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Le mode de mesure de l’exposition correspond à la manière dont l’appareil
photo mesure la quantité de lumière.
L’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière, puis utilise cette mesure
dans de nombreux modes afin de régler divers paramètres.
Par exemple, si un sujet semble plus foncé qu’il ne l’est en réalité, l’appareil
photo effectue une prise de vue surexposée de ce sujet. Si un sujet semble
plus clair qu’il ne l’est en réalité, l’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue
sous-exposée de ce sujet.
La luminosité et l’ambiance générale de la photo peuvent également être
affectées par la façon dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière.
Sélectionnez des paramètres appropriés pour chaque type de conditions
de prise de vue.
Pour définir une
option de mesure
de l’exposition
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ
Mesure de l’exposition ĺ une option.
Multiple
La mesure Multiple calcule la quantité de lumière dans plusieurs zones.
Lorsque la lumière est suffisante ou insuffisante, l’appareil photo règle
l’exposition en équilibrant la luminosité générale de la scène. Ce mode est
adapté aux photos courantes.
Mesure de l’exposition
98
Fonctions de prise de vue > Mesure de l’exposition
Sélective
La mesure Sélective calcule la quantité de lumière au centre. Lorsque vous
réalisez une prise de vue dans des conditions de fort contre-jour derrière
un sujet, l’appareil photo règle l’exposition afin de capturer correctement
ce dernier. Par exemple, lorsque vous sélectionnez la mesure Multiple
dans des conditions de fort contre-jour, l’appareil photo considère que
la quantité globale de lumière est élevée, ce qui rend par conséquent la
photo plus sombre. La mesure Sélective permet d’éviter cette situation, car
la quantité de lumière est calculée dans une zone définie.
Le sujet est clair alors que l’arrière plan est sombre. La mesure Sélective
est recommandée dans une situation comme celle-ci, qui présente une
différence d’exposition importante entre un sujet et un arrière-plan.
Centrée
Le mode Centrée effectue des calculs sur une zone plus large qu’en mode
Sélective. Il détermine la quantité de lumière dans la partie centrale de la
photo (60 à 80 %) ainsi que sur le reste de la photo (20 à 40 %). Ce mode
est recommandé dans des situations où la différence de luminosité entre
un sujet et un arrière-plan est faible, ou qu’une partie du sujet est grande
au regard de la composition générale de la photo.
99
Fonctions de prise de vue > Mesure de l’exposition
Mesure de la valeur d’exposition de la zone de mise au point
Lorsque cette fonction est activée, l’appareil photo applique
automatiquement une exposition optimale en calculant la luminosité de
la zone de mise au point. Cette option est disponible uniquement si vous
sélectionnez le mesure Sélective ou Multiple, et l’option Mise au point
sélection.
Pour appliquer
cette fonction
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ
Lien AE à AF ĺ une option.
Fonctions de prise de vue
100
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Cette fonction corrige automatiquement la perte de luminosité dûe à des
différences de niveaux d’exposition sur la photo.
Pour appliquer les
options de plage
intelligente
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ
Plage dynamique ĺ une option.
Sans effet de plage dynamique Avec effet de plage dynamique
Icône Description
Arrêt : ne pas utiliser la plage dynamique.
Plage intelligente+ : corriger la perte de luminosité.
Vous ne pouvez pas appliquer le réglage ISO 100.
HDR : prendre deux photos avec différentes expositions, puis les
associer afin de créer automatiquement une image unique.
• Vous ne pouvez pas régler l’option ISO à une valeur supérieure
à ISO 3200.
• Les options Plage dynamique ne peuvent pas être définies en
même temps que les options Assistant photo.
Plage dynamique
Fonctions de prise de vue
101
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Le Filtre intelligent vous permet d’appliquer des effets spéciaux à vos
photos. Vous pouvez sélectionner diverses options de filtre pour créer des
effets spéciaux difficiles à obtenir avec des objectifs normaux.
Pour appliquer les
options de filtre
intelligent
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ
Filtre intelligent ĺ une option.
Option Description
Désactivé Aucun effet
Vignettage
Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un fort contraste et
un effet de dégradé intense caractéristiques des
appareils Lomo.
Miniature Appliquer un effet de contre-plongée pour que le
sujet apparaisse plus petit.
Crayon de couleur Appliquer un effet de peinture au crayon de couleur.
Aquarelle Appliquer un effet de peinture à l’eau.
Dessin au lavis Appliquer un effet passé.
Esquisse à l'huile Appliquer un effet d'esquisse à l'huile.
Esquisse à l'encre Appliquer un effet d'esquisse à l'encre.
Acrylique Appliquer un effet de peinture acrylique.
Option Description
Négatif Appliquer un effet de film négatif.
Rouge Désaturer toutes les couleurs sauf le rouge.
Vert Désaturer toutes les couleurs sauf le vert.
Bleu Désaturer toutes les couleurs sauf le bleu.
Jaune Désaturer toutes les couleurs sauf le jaune.
Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options de l’Assistant photo et les
options Filtre intelligent.
Filtre intelligent
Fonctions de prise de vue
102
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
L’appareil photo définit automatiquement l’exposition en mesurant les
niveaux de lumière à partir de la composition d’une photo et de la position
d’un sujet. Si la valeur d’exposition définie par l’appareil photo est plus
élevée ou plus basse que celle que vous attendiez, vous pouvez alors la
régler manuellement. La valeur d’exposition peut être réglée en utilisant
±3 incréments. L’appareil photo affiche un message d’avertissement en
rouge pour chaque niveau au-delà de la plage ±3.
Pour régler la valeur d’exposition, tournez la molette de réglage tout en
maintenant la touche [W] enfoncée. Vous pouvez également régler la
valeur d’exposition en appuyant sur [f], puis en sélectionnant EV.
Vous pouvez vérifier la valeur d’exposition par rapport à l’indicateur de
niveau d’exposition.
Indicateur de niveau
d’exposition
Exposition augmentée
(plus clair)
Exposition baissée
(plus sombre)
Mise en garde à propos de l’exposition Indice d’exposition standard
-2
Original
+2
Compensation de l’exposition
Fonctions de prise de vue
103
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Si vous ne parvenez pas à obtenir une exposition adéquate à cause d’un
fort contraste des couleurs, verrouillez l’exposition, puis prenez la photo.
Pour verrouiller la valeur d’exposition, réglez l’exposition de la photo, puis
appuyez sur la touche de personnalisation.
Une fois l’exposition verrouillée, pointez l’objectif sur le sujet et appuyez
sur le [Déclencheur].
• Réglez une fonction de la touche de personnalisation sur AEL pour verrouiller
la valeur d’exposition. (p. 150)
• Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible en mode Manuel.
Verrouillage de l’exposition
Fonctions de prise de vue
104
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Les fonctions vidéo disponibles sont présentées ci-dessous.
Format vidéo
Définissez le format vidéo.
Pour définir les
options du format
vidéo
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ6ĺ
Format vidéo ĺ une option.
Icône Taille Recommandé pour
1920X1080 (60 ips) (16:9)
Visionner sur un téléviseur HD grand
écran. (Lecture possible uniquement
sur des téléviseurs haute définition
capables de lire des images à une
fréquence de 60 ips.)
1920X1080 (30 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD grand
écran.
1920X1080 (15 ips) (16:9)
Visionner sur un téléviseur HD grand
écran. (Disponible uniquement avec
certaines options Filtre intelligent.)
1920X810 (24 ips)
(Environ 2,35:1) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD.
1280X720 (60 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD.
1280X720 (30 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD.
640X480 (30 ips) (4:3) Visionner sur un téléviseur.
320X240 (30 ips) (4:3)
Publier sur un site Web à l’aide
du réseau sans fil (30 secondes
maximum).
Qualité vidéo
Définir la qualité vidéo.
Pour définir les
options de la
qualité vidéo
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ6ĺ
Qualité vidéo ĺ une option.
Icône Extension Description
MP4 (H.264) Normale : enregistrez des vidéos en qualité
normale.
MP4 (H.264) Haute qualité : enregistrez des vidéos en qualité
élevée.
Fonctions vidéo
105
Fonctions de prise de vue > Fonctions vidéo
Multi-mouvements
Réglez la vitesse de lecture d’une vidéo.
Pour définir les
options de vitesse
de lecture
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ6ĺ
Multi-mouvements ĺ une option.
Icône Description
x0.25 : enregistrer une vidéo et la lire à 1/4 de la vitesse normale.
(Disponible uniquement à la résolution 640x480 ou 320x240)
x0.5 : enregistrer une vidéo et la lire à 1/2 de la vitesse normale.
(Disponible uniquement à la résolution 1280x720 (30 ips), 640x480
ou 320x240)
x1 : enregistrer une vidéo et la lire en vitesse normale.
x5 : enregistrer une vidéo et la lire à une vitesse 5X supérieure.
x10 : enregistrer une vidéo et la lire à une vitesse 10X supérieure.
x20 : enregistrer une vidéo et la lire à une vitesse 20X supérieure.
• Si vous sélectionnez une option autre que x1, le son n’est alors pas enregistré.
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Fondu
Vous pouvez appliquer un fondu au début ou à la fin d’une scène en
utilisant la fonction de fondu sur l’appareil photo, sans avoir recours à
un PC. Appliquez l’effet de fondu entrant pour qu’une scène commence
progressivement par cet effet. Appliquez l’effet de fondu sortant pour
qu’une scène se termine progressivement par cet effet. Utilisez cette
fonction de manière appropriée pour vous permettre d’ajouter des effets
spectaculaires à vos vidéos.
Pour définir les
options de fondu
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ6ĺFondu
ĺ une option.
Icône Description
Désactivé : fonction de fondu non utilisée.
Entrant : la scène est fondue progressivement en début de
séquence.
Sortant : la scène est fondue progressivement en fin de séquence.
Entrant-Sortant : la fonction de fondu est appliquée au début et à
la fin de la scène.
Lorsque la fonction de fondu est utilisée, l’enregistrement d’un fichier peut être
plus long.
106
Fonctions de prise de vue > Fonctions vidéo
Niveau Mic
Régler le niveau du microphone en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Pour régler
le niveau du
microphone
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ6ĺ Niveau
Mic ĺ une option.
Voix
Il arrive parfois que certaines vidéos muettes soient plus attractives que
celles filmées avec le son. Désactivez la voix afin de réaliser une vidéo
muette.
Pour définir les
options de voix
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ6ĺ Voix ĺ
une option.
Réduction vent
Lorsque vous enregistrez des vidéos dans un environnement bruyant, il
est possible que des sons indésirables soient enregistrés. En particulier,
un bruit de vent intense enregistré dans les vidéos peut vous empêcher
d’apprécier pleinement ces dernières. Utilisez la fonction Réduction vent
afin de supprimer des bruits ambiants en plus de celui du vent.
Pour réduire le son
du vent
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ6ĺ
Réduction vent ĺ une option.
Section 3
Lecture / Retouche
Découvrez comment lire et retoucher vos photos et vos vidéos.
Pour retoucher des fichiers sur un ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section 6.
108
Lecture / Retouche
Découvrez comment afficher les miniatures de vos photos et vidéos, et
comment protéger ou supprimer des fichiers.
Si, pendant un certain temps, vous n’effectuez aucune opération, les
informations et icônes à l’écran disparaissent. Ces éléments réapparaissent
lorsque vous réutilisez l’appareil photo.
Visionnage de photos
1 Appuyez sur [y].
• Le fichier le plus récent que vous avez capturé s’affiche.
2 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour faire défiler les fichiers.
• Vous pouvez également faire glisser l’image vers la gauche ou la
droite pour accéder à un autre fichier.
Il se peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure de retoucher ou de visionner des
photos ou des vidéos prises par un autre appareil photo, si ceux-ci sont trop
volumineux ou s’ils comportent des codecs non pris en charge. Utilisez un
ordinateur ou un autre appareil pour les retoucher ou les visionner.
Affichage des images sous forme de
miniatures
Afin de rechercher des photos et des vidéos plus rapidement, définissez
l’affichage de ces dernières sous forme de miniatures. L’affichage sous
forme de miniatures permet de visionner plusieurs images à la fois afin de
parcourir et de trouver facilement les éléments que vous recherchez. Vous
pouvez également classer et afficher les fichiers par catégorie, telles que la
date ou le type de fichier.
Tournez la molette de réglage vers la gauche pour
sélectionner le mode Miniatures.
(Tournez la molette de réglage vers la droite pour revenir au
mode précédent.)
Recherche et gestion de fichiers
109
Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers
Affichage de fichiers par catégorie
1 En vue Miniatures, appuyez sur [m] ĺzĺ Filtrer ĺ
une catégorie.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur FILTER pour sélectionner une
catégorie.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Tout* Afficher les fichiers normalement.
Date Affichez les fichiers en fonction de leur date
d’enregistrement.
Type Afficher les fichiers par type.
Position
Afficher les fichiers en fonction du lieu où ils ont
été enregistrés. (Seules les photos prises avec un
module GPS en option indiquent les informations de
localisation.)
2 Sélectionnez une liste afin de l’ouvrir.
3 Sélectionnez un fichier afin de l’afficher.
4 Appuyez sur pour revenir à la vue précédente.
Visionnage de fichiers sous forme de dossier
Les prises de vues en continue et en rafale apparaissent sous forme de
dossier. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un dossier, toutes les photos sont
automatiquement lues. La suppression d’un dossier entraîne celle de
toutes les photos qu’il contient.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [C/F] ou faites glisser l’image
vers la gauche ou la droite afin d’accéder au dossier souhaité.
• L’appareil photo lit automatiquement les photos contenues dans le
dossier.
2 Faites défiler les options à l’aide de la molette de réglage en la
tournant sur la droite pour ouvrir le dossier.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur le dossier à l’écran pour ouvrir
le dossier.
3 Appuyez sur [C/F] ou faites glisser l’image vers la gauche
ou la droite pour accéder à un autre fichier.
4 Tournez la molette de réglage vers la gauche pour revenir en
mode Lecture.
110
Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers
Protection des fichiers
Vous pouvez protéger des fichiers pour éviter toute suppression
accidentelle.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺzĺ Protéger ĺ
Sélect..
2 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour sélectionner un fichier, puis
appuyez sur [o].
3 Appuyez sur [f].
Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer ou pivoter un fichier protégé.
Verrouiller / Déverrouiller tous les fichiers
Verrouillez ou déverrouillez tous les fichiers.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺzĺ Protéger ĺ
Tout.
2 Sélectionnez une option.
Option Description
Verrouiller Verrouiller tous les fichiers.
Déverrouiller Déverrouiller tous les fichiers.
Annuler Revenir au menu précédent.
111
Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers
Suppression de fichiers
En mode Lecture, supprimez des fichiers et assurez plus d’espace sur votre
carte mémoire. Les fichiers protégés ne sont pas supprimés.
Suppression d’un seul fichier
Vous pouvez sélectionner un seul fichier et le supprimer.
1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez un fichier et appuyez sur [n].
2 Lorsque la fenêtre en incrustation s’affiche, sélectionnez Oui.
Suppression de plusieurs fichiers
Vous pouvez effectuer une sélection multiple de fichiers et supprimer ces
derniers.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺzĺ Supprimer
ĺ Sélect..
• Vous pouvez également, en mode Miniatures, appuyer sur [n],
puis sélectionner les fichiers à supprimer.
2 Sélectionnez les fichiers à supprimer, puis appuyez sur
[C/F], puis sur [o].
• Appuyez à nouveau sur [o] pour annuler votre sélection.
3 Appuyez sur [n].
4 Lorsque la fenêtre en incrustation s’affiche, sélectionnez Oui.
112
Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers
Suppression de tous les fichiers
Vous pouvez supprimer tous les fichiers de la carte mémoire en même
temps.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m].
2 Sélectionnez zĺ Supprimer ĺ Tout.
3 Lorsque la fenêtre en incrustation s’affiche, sélectionnez Oui.
113
Lecture / Retouche
Agrandissement d’une photo
En mode Lecture, vous pouvez agrandir les photos lorsque vous les
visualisez. Vous pouvez également utiliser la fonction de recadrage afin
d’extraire une partie de l’image affichée sur l’écran et d’enregistrer la photo
découpée en tant que nouveau fichier.
Zone agrandie
Agrandissement (l’agrandissement
maximal possible peut varier en
fonction de la résolution).
Image pleine Rogner
Faites défiler les options à l’aide de la molette de réglage
en la tournant sur la droite pour agrandir une photo.
(Inversement, tournez la molette de réglage en la tournant
sur la gauche pour réduire la photo.)
Pour Procédez comme suit
Déplacez la zone agrandie Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F].
Recadrer la photo agrandie Appuyez sur [f] (enregistré en tant
que nouveau fichier).
Revenez à l’image originale Appuyez sur [o].
Vous pouvez également effectuer un mouvement de pincement avec deux
de vos doigts sur l’écran pour réduire une photo ou le mouvement inverse
pour l’agrandir. Vous pouvez également appuyer deux fois sur une zone pour
l’agrandir rapidement.
Affichage d’un diaporama
Vous pouvez visionner les photo dans un diaporama, en ajoutant des effets
de transition entre chaque photo ainsi qu’un fond sonore.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m].
2 Sélectionnez zĺ Options diaporama.
3 Choisissez une option d’effet de diaporama.
• Passez à l’étape 4 pour démarrer le diaporama sans aucun effet.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Mode de
lecture
Activer une option de répétition du diaporama.
(Une lecture*, Répétition)
Intervalle Définir l’intervalle entre l’affichage des photos.
(1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec)
Musique Définir une musique d’arrière-plan.
Effet • Définir un changement de scène entre les photos.
• Sélectionnez Désactivé pour annuler les effets.
Visionnage de photos
114
Lecture / Retouche > Visionnage de photos
4 Appuyez sur [m].
5 Sélectionnez Démarrer diaporama.
6 Affichez le diaporama.
• Appuyez sur [o] pour effectuer une pause.
• Appuyez à nouveau sur [o] pour reprendre la lecture.
• Appuyez sur [m] pour interrompre le diaporama et revenir au
mode Lecture.
• Appuyez sur [D/I] pour régler le volume.
Rotation automatique
En activant la fonction Rotation auto, l’appareil photo fait pivoter
automatiquement les photos prises verticalement afin qu’elles s’affichent
horizontalement à l’écran.
Afin de paramétrer les
options Rotation auto
En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺzĺ
Rotation auto ĺ une option.
Création d’une commande d’impression
(DPOF)
Le format de commande d’impression numérique (DPOF) vous permet de
définir le nombre d’exemplaires à imprimer.
L’appareil photo sauvegarde les informations DPOF dans le dossier MISC
de la carte mémoire. Lorsque vous avez défini les informations DPOF
de vos images, vous pouvez apporter votre carte mémoire chez votre
développeur de photos pour procéder à l’impression. Vous ne pouvez pas
définir l’ordre d’impression des fichiers au format RAW.
Lorsque les photos sont plus grandes que le papier d’impression, les
bords gauche et droit des photos peuvent être rognés. Vérifiez que les
dimensions de la photo correspondent à celles du papier sélectionné.
1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez une photo et appuyez sur
[m].
2 Sélectionnez zĺ DPOF.
3 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour définir le nombre de copies.
• Pour sélectionner une autre photo, appuyez sur [C/F].
4 Appuyez sur [o] pour enregistrer.
115
Lecture / Retouche
En mode Lecture, vous pouvez lire une vidéo, en extraire une image ou
encore la rogner et l’enregistrer en tant que nouveau fichier.
Arreter Enregistrer
Commandes d’affichage des vidéos
Icône / Bouton Description
/ /[C]
Afficher le fichier précédent / Reculer. (Chaque fois
que vous appuyez sur l’icône ou sur la touche lors de
la lecture d’une vidéo, la vitesse de balayage change
selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.)
/ /[o] Effectuer une pause ou reprendre la lecture.
/ /[F]
Afficher le fichier suivant / Avancer. (Chaque fois que
vous appuyez sur l’icône ou sur la touche lors de la
lecture d’une vidéo, la vitesse de balayage change
selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.)
/[D/I] Régler le volume ou désactiver le son.
Recadrage d’une vidéo au cours de la
lecture
1 En mode Lecture, faites défiler une vidéo et appuyez sur .
2 Appuyez sur [o] ou pour démarrer la lecture de la vidéo.
3 Appuyez sur [o] ou à l’endroit où le recadrage doit débuter.
4 Appuyez sur [f] ou sur Point de départ.
5 Appuyez sur [o] ou pour reprendre la lecture de la vidéo.
6 Appuyez sur [o] ou à l’endroit où le recadrage doit se
terminer.
Lecture de vidéos
116
Lecture / Retouche > Lecture de vidéos
7 Appuyez sur [f] ou sur Point final.
8 Appuyez sur [f] ou sur Recadrer pour effectuer le recadrage
d’une vidéo.
• Vous pouvez définir la scène à recadrer en faisant glisser les
poignées qui apparaissent sur la barre de progression.
9 Lorsque la fenêtre contextuelle s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui.
• Vous ne pouvez pas recadrer une vidéo enregistrée en mode 3D.
• La durée de la vidéo d’origine doit être d’au moins 10 secondes.
• L’appareil photo enregistre la vidéo modifiée en tant que nouveau fichier et
conserve la vidéo d’origine intacte.
Extraction d’une image pendant la lecture
1 Lors du visionnage d’une vidéo, appuyez sur [o] ou à
l’endroit où vous souhaitez extraire une image.
2 Appuyez sur [f] ou sur Enregistrer.
• Vous ne pouvez pas extraire d’images d’une vidéo enregistrée en mode 3D.
• La résolution de l’image extraite est la même que celle de la vidéo d’origine.
• L’image extraite est enregistrée en tant que nouveau fichier.
117
Lecture / Retouche
Les photos modifiées sont enregistrées en tant que nouveaux fichiers, sous
des noms de fichiers différents. Il est impossible de retoucher les photos
capturées dans certains modes par le biais de la fonction Édition photo.
Pour retoucher des
images
En mode Lecture, faites défiler une photo et appuyez sur ĺ
une option.
• Vous pouvez également retoucher des images en mode Lecture en
sélectionnant une photo, puis en appuyant sur [f] ou [m] ĺ
Édition photo.
• Il est possible que certaines images ne puissent pas être retouchées à l’aide
de la fonction Édition photo. Dans ce cas, utilisez le logiciel de retouche
fourni.
• L’appareil photo enregistre les photos retouchées en tant que nouveau fichier.
• Lorsque vous retouchez des photos, l’appareil photo les enregistre
automatiquement à une résolution inférieure. Les photos pivotées ou
redimensionnées manuellement ne sont pas automatiquement converties à
une résolution inférieure.
• Les photos visionnées en tant que dossier ne peuvent pas être retouchées.
Ouvrez le dossier et sélectionnez une photo pour retoucher chacune des
photos.
Rognage d’une photo
1 Appuyez sur ĺ .
2 Faites glisser les coins du cadre pour redimensionner la zone.
3 Faites glisser le cadre pour déplacer la zone.
4 Appuyez sur OK.
5 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer.
Retouche de photos
118
Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos
Pivotement d’une photo
1 Appuyez sur ĺ .
2 Appuyez sur une option.
Rotation : Droite (90°)
3 Appuyez sur OK.
4 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer.
• Vous pouvez également faire pivoter une photo en mode Lecture en
appuyant sur [m], puis sur zĺ Rotation ĺ une option souhaitée.
• L’appareil photo écrase le fichier d’origine.
Redimensionnement de photos
Modifiez la taille d’une photo pour l’enregistrer sous forme de nouveau
fichier.
1 Appuyez sur ĺ .
2 Appuyez sur une option.
Redimensionner : 10.1M 3:2
3 Appuyez sur OK.
4 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer.
Les options de redimensionnement disponibles dépendent de la taille d’origine
de la photo.
119
Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos
Réglage des photos
Vous pouvez modifier les photos capturées en réglant la luminosité,
le contraste ou la saturation.
1 Appuyez sur .
2 Appuyez sur une option de réglage.
Icône Description
Original (revenir à l’image originale)
Réglage automatique
Luminosité
Contraste
Saturation
Réglage RVB
Température couleur
Exposition
Tonalité
3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’option.
• Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur
+/- pour régler l’option.
• Si vous avez sélectionné , passez à l’étape 4.
4 Appuyez sur OK.
5 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer.
120
Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos
Retouche de visages
1 Appuyez sur ĺ .
2 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’option.
• Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur
+/- pour régler l’option.
• Au fur et à mesure que la valeur augmente, la couleur de la peau
devient plus lumineuse et plus douce.
3 Appuyez sur OK.
• Pour annuler la correction, appuyez sur .
4 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer.
121
Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos
Effets de filtre intelligent
Appliquez des effets spéciaux à vos photos.
1 Appuyez sur , puis sur une option.
Filtre intelligent : Vignettage
Option Description
Original Aucun effet
Vignettage
Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un fort contraste
et un effet de dégradé intense caractéristiques
des appareils Lomo.
Miniature Appliquer un effet de contre-plongée pour
faire apparaître le sujet plus petit.
Crayon de couleur Appliquer un effet de peinture au crayon de
couleur.
Aquarelle Appliquer un effet de peinture à l’eau.
Dessin au lavis Appliquer un effet passé.
Option Description
Esquisse à l'huile Appliquer un effet d'esquisse à l'huile.
Esquisse à l'encre Appliquer un effet d'esquisse à l'encre.
Acrylique Appliquer un effet de peinture acrylique.
Négatif Appliquer un effet de film négatif.
Rouge Désaturer toutes les couleurs sauf le rouge.
Vert Désaturer toutes les couleurs sauf le vert.
Bleu Désaturer toutes les couleurs sauf le bleu.
Jaune Désaturer toutes les couleurs sauf le jaune.
2 Appuyez sur OK.
3 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer.
Section 4
Réseau sans fil
Apprenez à vous connecter à des réseaux locaux sans fil et à en utiliser les fonctions.
123
Réseau sans fil
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Cette section décrit comment se connecter via un point d’accès (PA)
lorsqu’un réseau local sans fil se trouve dans le champ de détection. Vous
pouvez également configurer les paramètres réseau.
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil
1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sélectionnez , , ou .
3 Appuyez sur [m], puis sur Paramètres Wi-Fi.
• Dans certains modes, suivez les instructions qui s’affichent jusqu’à
l’apparition de l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi.
• L’appareil photo recherche automatiquement les points d’accès
disponibles.
4 Sélectionnez un point d’accès.
Retour
Actualiser
Samsung1
Samsung2
Samsung3
Samsung4
• Sélectionnez Actualiser pour actualiser les points d’accès
disponibles.
• Sélectionnez Ajouter mode sans fil pour ajouter un point d’accès
manuellement. Le nom de votre point d’accès doit être en anglais
pour l’ajouter manuellement.
Icône / Option Description
Point d’accès Ad hoc
Point d’accès sécurisé
Point d’accès WPS
Force du signal
Appuyez sur [F] pour définir les options de réglage
réseau.
• Lorsque vous choisissez un point d’accès sécurisé, une fenêtre
contextuelle apparaît. Saisissez les mots de passe requis pour vous
connecter au réseau local sans fil. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de
texte, consultez « Saisie de texte ». (p. 127)
• Lorsqu’une page de connexion apparaît, reportez-vous à la section
« Utilisation du navigateur de connexion ». (p. 125)
• Si vous choisissez un point d’accès non sécurisé, l’appareil photo se
connecte au réseau local sans fil.
• Si vous choisissez un point d’accès pris en charge par un profil WPS,
sélectionnez ĺ Connexion PIN WPS, puis saisissez le code
PIN sur le périphérique du point d’accès. Vous avez également la
possibilité de vous connecter à un point d’accès pris en charge par
un profil WPS en sélectionnant ĺ Connexion via la touche
WPS sur l’appareil photo et en appuyant sur la touche WPS sur le
périphérique du point d’accès.
• Un même point d’accès peut être répertorié deux fois avec
différentes fréquences, car votre appareil photo prend en charge les
communications bibandes.
124
Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Configuration des options de réseau
1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis
appuyez sur [F] ou .
2 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises.
Option Description
Mot de passe réseau Saisir le mot de passe réseau.
Config. IP Définir l’adresse IP automatiquement ou
manuellement.
Configuration manuelle de l’adresse IP
1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis
appuyez sur [F] ou .
2 Sélectionnez Config. IP ĺ Manuel.
3 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises.
Option Description
IP Saisir l’adresse IP statique.
Masque sous-ré. Indiquer le masque de sous-réseau.
Passerelle Indiquer la passerelle.
Serveur DNS Saisir l’adresse DNS.
125
Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Utilisation du navigateur de connexion
Vous pouvez saisir vos informations de session via le navigateur lors de la
connexion à certains points d’accès, sites de partage ou serveurs Cloud.
Icône Description
Fermer le navigateur de connexion.
Accéder à la page précédente.
Accéder à la page suivante.
Arrêter le chargement de la page.
Actualiser la page.
• Il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas sélectionner certaines options selon la
page à laquelle vous êtes connecté. Il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement.
• Le navigateur de connexion peut ne pas se fermer automatiquement après
la connexion à certaines pages. Si cela se produit, fermez le navigateur en
appuyant sur, , puis poursuivez vos manipulations.
• La page de connexion peut s’avérer plus longue à charger en fonction de sa
taille ou du débit du réseau. Si cela se produit, patientez jusqu’à ce que la
fenêtre de connexion s’affiche.
126
Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau
• Pour utiliser la fonction Wi-Fi, vous devez insérer une carte mémoire.
• La qualité de la connexion réseau est déterminée par les points d’accès.
• Plus la distance entre l’appareil photo et le point d’accès est grande, plus ce
premier mettra de temps à se connecter au réseau.
• Si un périphérique à proximité utilise une fréquence radio identique à celle de
votre appareil photo, il se peut que votre connexion s’interrompe.
• Si le nom de votre point d’accès n’est pas en anglais, il se peut que l’appareil
photo ne puisse pas localiser le périphérique ou que son nom apparaisse de
façon incorrecte.
• Pour connaître les paramètres réseau et le mot de passe requis, contactez
votre administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau.
• Si un réseau local sans fil requiert l’authentification du fournisseur d’accès, il se
peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure de vous connecter audit réseau. Pour
vous connecter au réseau local sans fil, contactez votre fournisseur d’accès
réseau.
• En fonction du type de cryptage, le nombre de chiffres qui composent le mot
de passe peut varier.
• En fonction des conditions environnantes, il peut s’avérer impossible d’établir
une connexion à un réseau local sans fil.
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo affiche une imprimante compatible avec les
réseaux locaux sans fil figurant dans la liste des points d’accès. Vous ne pouvez
cependant pas vous connecter au réseau par le biais d’une imprimante.
• Il est impossible de connecter l’appareil photo simultanément à un réseau et à
un téléviseur.
• La connexion à un réseau peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires. Ces coûts
varient en fonction des termes de votre contrat.
• Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à un réseau local sans fil, essayez un
autre point d’accès parmi la liste de ceux proposés.
• Il se peut qu’une page de connexion apparaisse lorsque vous sélectionnez
des réseaux locaux sans fil gratuits mis à disposition par certains fournisseurs
d’accès réseau. Saisissez votre identifiant et votre mot de passe pour vous
connecter au réseau local sans fil. Pour en savoir plus sur l’inscription à ces
services ou à un service particulier, contactez les fournisseurs d’accès réseau
en question.
• Soyez prudent lors de la saisie d’informations personnelles pour vous
connecter à un point d’accès. Ne saisissez aucune information de paiement
sur l’appareil photo. Le fabricant ne peut être tenu responsable de tout
problème survenant suite à la saisie de telles informations.
• Les connexions réseau disponibles peuvent varier selon le pays.
• La fonction de réseau local sans fil de l’appareil photo doit être conforme à la
législation en matière de transmission par radiofréquences dans votre pays ou
région. Pour assurer une compatibilité totale, n’utilisez la fonction de réseau
local sans fil que dans le pays dans lequel vous avez acheté l’appareil photo.
• Les opérations à suivre pour régler les paramètres réseau peuvent différer en
fonction des conditions du réseau.
• Ne tentez pas d’accéder à un réseau dont l’accès ne vous est pas autorisé.
• Avant de vous connecter à des réseaux, assurez-vous que la batterie est
entièrement rechargée.
• Vous ne pouvez pas télécharger ou envoyer des fichiers capturés dans certains
modes.
• Les fichiers transférés vers un autre appareil peuvent ne pas être pris en charge
par cet appareil. Dans ce cas, utilisez un ordinateur pour lire les fichiers.
127
Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Saisie de texte
Cette section décrit comment saisir du texte. Les icônes dans le tableau
vous permettent de déplacer le curseur, de modifier la casse, etc. Appuyez
sur une touche pour saisir le texte.
Icône Description
Déplacer le curseur.
Arrêter la saisie de texte et revenir à la page précédente.
Modifier la casse.
Passer du mode Symbole / Nombre au mode normal.
Modifier la langue de saisie.
Ajouter un espace.
Enregistrer le texte à l’écran.
Supprimer la dernière lettre.
• Dans certains modes, vous pouvez saisir uniquement du texte à l’aide de
caractères anglais, quelle que soit la langue d’affichage choisie.
• Vous pouvez saisir jusqu’à 64 caractères.
• L’affichage peut différer en fonction du mode de saisie.
• Maintenez une touche enfoncée pour saisir le caractère situé dans le coin
supérieur droit de la touche.
128
Réseau sans fil
Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone
L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la
fonction AutoShare via un réseau local sans fil. Lorsque vous prenez
une photo à l’aide de votre appareil photo, la photo est enregistrée
automatiquement sur le smartphone.
• La fonction AutoShare est prise en charge par les smartphones des séries
Galaxy ou les modèles Galaxy Tab dotés de la version Android 2.3 ou ultérieure,
ou des autres appareils équipés du système d’exploitation iOS 6.0 ou ultérieur.
Avant d’utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vérifiez le micrologiciel de votre appareil et
mettez-le à jour, si nécessaire.
• Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou
appareil avant d’utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application
depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung SMART
CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung
fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement.
• Pour installer et démarrer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur un smartphone
compatible NFC, activez la fonction NFC et placez le smartphone à proximité
de l'étiquette NFC (p. 30) de l’appareil photo. Cette fonctionnalité est prise en
charge par les smartphones fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3 ou toute version
ultérieure. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible pour les appareils iOS.
• Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez insérer une carte mémoire.
• Si vous paramétrez cette fonction, le paramétrage est conservé même si vous
changez de mode de prise de vue.
• Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas prise en charge dans certains
modes ou qu’elle ne soit pas disponible avec certaines options de prise de vue.
1 Sur l’appareil photo et en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur
[m].
2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez 1ĺ AutoShare ĺ
Marche.
• Si la fenêtre contextuelle qui vous invite à télécharger l’application
apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant.
3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer
l’application.
• Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone
compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à
proximité de l’étiquette NFC (p. 30) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que
le smartphone est connecté à votre appareil photo, puis passez à
l’étape 6.
4 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et connectez le
smartphone à l’appareil photo.
• Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à
la fois.
5 Autorisez la connexion du smartphone sur l’appareil photo.
• Si le smartphone a déjà été connecté à l’appareil photo, la
connexion est automatique.
• Une icône indiquant l’état de la connexion ( ) apparaît sur l’écran
de l’appareil photo.
6 Prenez une photo à l’aide de l’appareil photo.
• La photo est enregistrée sur l’appareil photo, puis transférée au
smartphone.
• Les vidéos sont uniquement enregistrées sur l’appareil photo.
129
Réseau sans fil
L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la
fonction MobileLink via un réseau local sans fil. Vous pouvez facilement
envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à votre smartphone.
• La fonction MobileLink est prise en charge par les smartphones des séries
Galaxy ou les modèles Galaxy Tab dotés de la version Android 2.3 ou
ultérieure, ou des autres appareils équipés du système d’exploitation iOS 6.0
ou ultérieur. Avant d’utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vérifiez le micrologiciel de
votre appareil et mettez-le à jour, si nécessaire.
• Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou
appareil avant d’utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application
depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung
SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo
Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement.
• Pour installer et démarrer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur un smartphone
compatible NFC, activez la fonction NFC et placez le smartphone à proximité
de l'étiquette NFC (p. 30) de l’appareil photo. Cette fonctionnalité est prise en
charge par les smartphones fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3 ou toute version
ultérieure. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible pour les appareils iOS.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez
pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Si vous sélectionnez des fichiers depuis le smartphone, vous pouvez visionner
jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents et envoyer jusqu’à 150 fichiers à la fois. Si vous
sélectionnez des fichiers depuis l’appareil photo, vous pouvez les visionner
sur l’appareil photo. Le nombre maximal de fichiers pouvant être envoyés
dépend de l’espace disponible sur le smartphone.
• Lorsque vous envoyez des vidéos Full HD à l’aide de la fonction MobileLink, il
se peut que vous ne puissiez pas lire ces fichiers sur certains appareils.
• Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction sur un appareil iOS, la connexion Wi-Fi
risque d’être désactivée.
• Il est impossible d’envoyer des fichiers RAW.
1 Sur l’appareil photo, passez au mode B à l’aide de la
molette de sélection.
2 Sur l’appareil photo, appuyez sur .
• Si la fenêtre contextuelle qui vous invite à télécharger l’application
apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant.
3 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez une option d’envoi.
• Si l’option Sélectionner des fichiers du smartphone est activée,
vous pouvez utiliser votre smartphone pour afficher et partager les
fichiers stockés sur l’appareil photo.
• Si l’option Sélectionner des fichiers de l’appareil photo est
activée, vous pouvez sélectionner les fichiers à envoyer depuis
l’appareil photo.
4 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer
l’application.
• Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone
compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à
proximité de l’étiquette NFC (p. 30) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que
le smartphone est connecté à votre appareil photo, puis passez à
l’étape 7.
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone
130
Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone
5 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et connectez le
smartphone à l’appareil photo.
• Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à
la fois.
6 Autorisez la connexion du smartphone sur l’appareil photo.
• Si le smartphone a déjà été connecté à l’appareil photo, la
connexion est automatique.
7 Sur le smartphone ou l’appareil photo, sélectionnez les fichiers
à transférer depuis l’appareil photo.
8 Sur le smartphone, appuyez sur la touche Copier ou, sur
l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Envoyer.
• L’appareil photo transmet alors les fichiers.
131
Réseau sans fil
L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge
la fonction Remote Viewfinder via un réseau local sans fil. Utilisez le
smartphone pour déclencher à distance l’obturateur à l’aide de la fonction
Remote Viewfinder. La photo ainsi prise s’affiche directement sur le
smartphone.
• La fonction Remote Viewfinder est prise en charge par les smartphones des
séries Galaxy ou les modèles Galaxy Tab dotés de la version Android 2.3 ou
ultérieure, ou des autres appareils équipés du système d’exploitation iOS 6.0
ou ultérieur. Avant d’utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vérifiez le micrologiciel de
votre appareil et mettez-le à jour, si nécessaire.
• Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou
appareil avant d’utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application
depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung
SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo
Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement.
• Pour installer et démarrer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur un smartphone
compatible NFC, activez la fonction NFC et placez le smartphone à proximité
de l'étiquette NFC (p. 30) de l’appareil photo. Cette fonctionnalité est prise en
charge par les smartphones fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3 ou toute version
ultérieure. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible pour les appareils iOS.
• Cette fonction n’est pas disponible en mode 3D.
1 Sur l’appareil photo, passez au mode B à l’aide de la
molette de sélection.
2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez .
• Si la fenêtre contextuelle qui vous invite à télécharger l’application
apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant.
3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer
l’application.
• Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone
compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à
proximité de l’étiquette NFC (p. 30) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que
le smartphone est connecté à votre appareil photo, puis passez à
l’étape 6.
4 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et connectez le
smartphone à l’appareil photo.
• Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à
la fois.
Utilisation d’un smartphone comme télécommande du déclencheur
132
Réseau sans fil > Utilisation d’un smartphone comme télécommande du déclencheur
5 Autorisez la connexion du smartphone sur l’appareil photo.
• Si le smartphone a déjà été connecté à l’appareil photo, la
connexion est automatique.
6 Sur le smartphone, définissez les options de prise de vue
suivantes.
Icône Description
Option Flash
Retardateur
Format photo
Enregistrement de la position
• Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction, certaines touches ne sont plus
disponibles sur l’appareil photo.
• La touche Zoom et le déclencheur du smartphone ne s’activent pas
lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction.
• Le mode Remote Viewfinder n’est compatible qu’avec les formats
photo et .
7 Sur le smartphone, maintenez le doigt sur pour effectuer la
mise au point.
• La mise au point est automatiquement définie sur Mise au point
multiple.
8 Relâchez pour prendre la photo.
• Les photos enregistrées sur le smartphone seront redimensionnées
à 1616X1080 lors d’une prise de vue à une résolution de et à
1920X1080 à une résolution de .
• Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonctionnalité, la distance idéale entre l’appareil
photo et le smartphone peut varier, selon l’environnement.
• Pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction, le smartphone doit se trouver dans un
périmètre de 7 m par rapport à l’appareil photo.
• Une fois la touche du smartphone relâchée, le déclenchement de la prise
de vue peut ne pas se faire immédiatement.
• La fonction Remote Viewfinder se désactive si :
- le smartphone reçoit un appel ;
- l’appareil photo ou le smartphone est éteint ;
- la mémoire est saturée ;
- l’appareil perd sa connexion au réseau local sans fil ;
- le signal de la connexion Wi-Fi est mauvais ou instable ;
- aucune opération n’est effectuée pendant environ 5 minutes alors que la
connexion est établie.
133
Réseau sans fil
Utilisation de la Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos
Vous pouvez envoyer sur un ordinateur, à l’aide de la fonction sans fil, les
photos ou vidéos prises avec l’appareil photo.
Installation du programme de Sauvegarde
automatique sur votre ordinateur
1 Installez i-Launcher sur l’ordinateur. (p. 163)
2 Branchez l’appareil sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB.
3 Lorsque l’icône du programme Sauvegarde automatique
apparaît, cliquez dessus.
• Le programme Sauvegarde automatique est installé sur l’ordinateur
et les informations le concernant sont stockées sur l’appareil photo.
Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour terminer l’installation.
• Vous pouvez également enregistrer les informations à propos
de l’ordinateur sur l’appareil photo en les raccordant via une
connexion Wi-Fi.
4 Débranchez le câble USB.
Avant d’installer le programme, assurez-vous que l’ordinateur est connecté à
un réseau. Si aucune connexion Internet n’est disponible, vous devez installer le
programme par le biais du CD fourni.
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un
ordinateur
1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sélectionnez .
• Si la fenêtre contextuelle qui vous invite à télécharger l’application
apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant.
• Vous devez configurer les informations de sauvegarde de
l’ordinateur afin d’utiliser le programme Sauvegarde automatique.
Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section « Installation du
programme de Sauvegarde automatique sur votre ordinateur ».
(p. 133) Si le programme Sauvegarde automatique est installé
sur votre ordinateur, enregistrez les informations concernant
l’ordinateur via un câble USB ou une connexion Wi-Fi.
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un
réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est
connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil,
il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles.
(p. 123)
134
Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de la Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos
3 Sélectionnez un ordinateur de sauvegarde.
• Si vous avez déjà effectué une sauvegarde, passez à l’étape 4.
4 Sélectionnez OK.
• Pour annuler l’envoi, sélectionnez Annuler.
• Il est impossible de sélectionner des fichiers précis à sauvegarder.
Cette fonction ne sauvegarde que les nouveaux fichiers de
l’appareil photo.
• La progression de la sauvegarde s’affiche sur l’écran de l’ordinateur.
• Lorsque le transfert est terminé, l’appareil photo s’éteint
automatiquement au bout d’environ 30 secondes. Sélectionnez
Annuler pour revenir à l’écran précédent et empêcher l’appareil
photo de s’éteindre automatiquement.
• Pour éteindre automatiquement votre ordinateur une fois le
transfert terminé, sélectionnez Eteindre PC après sauvegarde.
• Pour changer d’ordinateur de sauvegarde, sélectionnez .
• Si vous connectez l’appareil photo au réseau local sans fil, sélectionnez le
point d’accès connecté à l’ordinateur.
• L’appareil photo recherche les points d’accès disponibles même si vous vous
reconnectez au même point d’accès.
• Si vous éteignez l’appareil photo ou retirez sa batterie lors de l’envoi de
fichiers, le transfert de fichiers est alors interrompu.
• Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction, le contrôle de l’obturateur est désactivé
sur votre appareil photo.
• Vous ne pouvez connecter qu’un seul appareil photo à l’ordinateur à la fois
pour envoyer des fichiers.
• La sauvegarde peut être annulée en raison de l’état du réseau.
• Les photos ou les vidéos ne peuvent être envoyées qu’une seule fois vers
un ordinateur. Il est impossible de les envoyer à nouveau, même si vous
connectez l’appareil photo sur un autre ordinateur.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez
pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Avant d’utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez désactiver le pare-feu
Windows ou tout autre pare-feu.
• Vous pouvez envoyer jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents.
• Sur le logiciel PC, le nom du serveur doit être saisi en alphabet latin et ne peut
pas comporter plus de 48 caractères.
• Lorsque plusieurs types de fichiers sont créés simultanément, seuls les fichiers
images (JPG) sont transmis à l’ordinateur à l’aide de cette fonctionnalité.
135
Réseau sans fil
5 Sélectionnez le champ Nom, indiquez votre nom, puis
appuyez sur .
Paramètres expéditeur
Nom
Enregistrer
Courriel
Annuler
6 Sélectionnez le champ Courriel, indiquez votre adresse
électronique, puis appuyez sur .
7 Sélectionnez Enregistrer pour enregistrer les modifications.
• Pour supprimer vos coordonnées, sélectionner Annuler.
Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres du menu Courriel et envoyer par
courrier électronique des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur l’appareil
photo.
Modification des paramètres de courriel
Depuis le menu Courriel, il vous est possible de modifier les paramètres
pour le stockage de vos coordonnées. Vous avez également la possibilité
de définir ou de changer le mot de passe de courriel. Pour en savoir plus
sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte ». (p. 127)
Enregistrement de vos coordonnées
1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sélectionnez .
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un
réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est
connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil,
il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles.
(p. 123)
3 Appuyez sur [m].
4 Sélectionnez Paramètres expéditeur.
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel
136
Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel
Création d’un mot de passe de courriel
1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sélectionnez .
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un
réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est
connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil,
il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles.
(p. 123)
3 Appuyez sur [m].
4 Sélectionnez Config. mot de passe ĺ Marche.
• Pour désactiver le mot de passe, sélectionnez Arrêt.
5 Lorsque la fenêtre contextuelle apparaît, sélectionnez OK.
6 Saisissez un mot de passe de 4 chiffres.
7 Confirmez-le en le saisissant à nouveau.
8 Lorsque la fenêtre contextuelle apparaît, sélectionnez OK.
Si vous avez perdu votre mot de passe, vous pouvez le réinitialiser en
sélectionnant RESET sur l’écran de paramétrage du mot de passe. Lors de
la réinitialisation, vos paramètres personnels, votre adresse de messagerie
électronique et la liste des courriels récemment envoyés seront effacés.
137
Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel
Modification du mot de passe de courriel
1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sélectionnez .
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un
réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est
connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil,
il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles.
(p. 123)
3 Appuyez sur [m].
4 Sélectionnez Changer mot de passe.
5 Saisissez le mot de passe de 4 chiffres actuel.
6 Saisissez un nouveau mot de passe de 4 chiffres.
7 Confirmez-le en le saisissant à nouveau.
8 Lorsque la fenêtre contextuelle apparaît, sélectionnez OK.
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel
Vous pouvez envoyer par courriel des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur
l’appareil photo. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à
la section « Saisie de texte ». (p. 127)
1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sélectionnez .
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un
réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est
connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil,
il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles.
(p. 123)
3 Sélectionnez le champ Expéditeur, indiquez votre adresse
électronique, puis appuyez sur .
• Si vous avez préalablement enregistré vos coordonnées, celles-ci
sont insérées automatiquement. (p. 135)
• Pour utiliser une adresse figurant dans la liste des précédents
expéditeurs, sélectionnez ĺ une adresse.
138
Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel
4 Sélectionnez le champ Destinataire, indiquez une adresse
électronique, puis appuyez sur .
• Pour utiliser une adresse figurant dans la liste des précédents
destinataires, sélectionnez ĺ une adresse.
• Sélectionnez pour ajouter des destinataires. Vous pouvez entrer
jusqu’à 30 destinataires.
• Sélectionnez pour supprimer une adresse de la liste.
5 Sélectionnez Suivant.
6 Sélectionnez les fichiers à envoyer.
• Vous pouvez sélectionner jusqu’à 20 fichiers. La taille totale ne doit
pas dépasser 7 Mo.
7 Sélectionnez Suivant.
8 Sélectionnez le champ des commentaires, saisissez vos
commentaires, puis appuyez sur .
9 Sélectionnez Envoyer.
• L’appareil photo transmet alors le courriel.
• Même si le transfert de la photo semble s’être déroulé correctement, celle-ci
peut être rejetée ou identifiée comme courrier indésirable en cas d’erreur sur
le compte de courriel du destinataire.
• Il se peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure d’envoyer de courriel si aucune
connexion réseau n’est disponible ou si les paramètres de votre compte de
courriel sont incorrects.
• Vous ne pouvez pas envoyer de courriel si la taille du fichier est supérieure à
la limite définie. La résolution maximale des photos que vous pouvez envoyer
est de 2M, et pour envoyer une vidéo d’une durée maximale, vous devez
l’enregistrer à l’aide de l’option . Si la résolution de la photo sélectionnée
est supérieure à 2M, elle est alors automatiquement redimensionnée à une
résolution inférieure.
• Si vous ne pouvez pas envoyer de courriel en raison d’un pare-feu ou de
paramètres d’authentification utilisateur, contactez votre administrateur
réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez
pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Vous pouvez également envoyer un courriel en mode Lecture en appuyant
sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ Courriel.
139
Réseau sans fil
Publiez vos photos ou vos vidéos sur des sites Web de partage de fichiers.
Les sites Web disponibles s’affichent sur votre appareil photo. Pour envoyer
des fichiers à certains site Web, vous devez vous inscrire sur le site Web
avant de connecter l’appareil photo.
Accès à un site Web
1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Sélectionnez un site Web.
• Si la fenêtre contextuelle qui vous invite à créer un compte apparaît,
sélectionnez OK.
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un
réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est
connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil,
il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles.
(p. 123)
4 Saisissez votre identifiant et votre mot de passe pour vous
connecter.
• Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, consultez « Saisie de
texte ». (p. 127)
• Si vous êtes connecté à SkyDrive, reportez-vous à la section
« Utilisation du navigateur de connexion ». (p. 125)
• Pour sélectionner un identifiant dans la liste, appuyez sur ĺ
un identifiant.
• Si vous avez déjà visité ce site Web, il se peut que vous vous
connectiez automatiquement.
Vous devez disposer d’un compte sur le site Web de partage de fichiers pour
pouvoir exploiter cette fonction.
Utilisation des sites Web de partage de photos ou de vidéos
140
Réseau sans fil > Utilisation des sites Web de partage de photos ou de vidéos
Téléchargement de photos ou de vidéos
1 Accédez au site Web avec votre appareil photo.
2 Sélectionnez les fichiers à envoyer.
• Vous pouvez sélectionner jusqu’à 20 fichiers. La taille totale ne doit
pas dépasser 10 Mo. (Sur certains sites Web, la limite en termes de
taille totale ou de nombre de fichiers peut varier.)
3 Sélectionnez Publier.
• Sur certains sites Web, vous pouvez saisir des remarques en
sélectionnant le champ de commentaires. Pour en savoir plus sur la
saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte ». (p. 127)
• Vous pouvez définir un dossier d’envoi pour Facebook en appuyant sur
[m], puis en sélectionnant Charger dossier (Facebook) dans l’écran du
site Web.
• Vous ne pouvez pas envoyer de fichier si sa taille est supérieure à la limite
définie. La résolution maximale des photos que vous pouvez envoyer
est de 2M, et pour envoyer une vidéo d’une durée maximale, vous devez
l’enregistrer à l’aide de l’option . Si la résolution de la photo sélectionnée
est supérieure à 2M, elle est alors automatiquement redimensionnée à une
résolution inférieure. (Sur certains sites Web, la résolution maximale d’une
photo peut être différente.)
• Le mode de publication des photos ou des vidéos peut varier en fonction du
site Web sélectionné.
• Si vous ne parvenez pas à accéder à un site Web en raison d’un pare-feu ou
de paramètres d’authentification utilisateur, contactez votre administrateur
réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau.
• Il se peut que la date de prise de vue apparaisse dans le titre des photos ou
des vidéos publiées.
• Le débit de votre connexion Internet peut avoir une incidence sur le temps de
publication des photos ou d’ouverture des pages Web.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez
pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Vous pouvez également envoyer des photos ou des vidéos sur des sites Web
de partage de fichiers en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [m], puis en
sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ un site Web de votre choix.
• Sur certains sites Web, l’envoi de vidéos est impossible.
• Lors de l’envoi de photos sur SkyDrive, elles sont redimensionnées à 2M sans
aucune déformation.
141
Réseau sans fil
Utilisation de AllShare Play pour l’envoi de fichiers
Vous pouvez envoyer des fichiers de votre appareil photo vers le stockage
en ligne ou visionner des fichiers sur d’autres appareils compatibles
connectés au même point d’accès.
Stockage en ligne de photos
1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sélectionnez ĺStockage Web.
• Si le message du guide apparaît, sélectionnez OK.
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un
réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est
connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil,
il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles.
(p. 123)
• Pour modifier la taille des photos envoyées, appuyez sur [m],
puis sélectionnez Charger la résolution d'image.
• Si vous disposez de plusieurs espaces de stockage Web, vous
pouvez faire votre choix dans la liste en appuyant sur [m],
puis en sélectionnant Changer le stockage Web.
3 Saisissez votre identifiant et votre mot de passe, puis
sélectionnez Connexion ĺ OK.
• Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section
« Saisie de texte ». (p. 127)
• Pour sélectionner un identifiant dans la liste, appuyez sur ĺ
un identifiant.
• Si vous avez déjà visité ce site Web, il se peut que vous vous
connectiez automatiquement.
Pour utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez créer à l’aide de votre
ordinateur un compte AllShare Play disposant d’un service de stockage en
ligne. Une fois la création de comptes terminée, ajoutez-les à AllShare Play.
4 Sélectionnez les fichiers à envoyer, puis appuyez sur Publier.
• Si vous disposez de plusieurs espaces de stockage Web, commencez par en
choisir un.
• L’envoi de fichiers vidéo sur le système de stockage en ligne AllShare Play est
impossible.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez
pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Vous pouvez envoyer jusqu’à 20 fichiers.
• Vous pouvez également envoyer des photos en mode Lecture en appuyant
sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ AllShare Play.
142
Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de AllShare Play pour l’envoi de fichiers
Visionnage de photos ou de vidéos sur des
appareils compatibles AllShare Play
1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sélectionnez ĺAppareils à proximité.
• Si le message du guide apparaît, sélectionnez Oui.
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un
réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est
connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil,
il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles.
(p. 123)
• Vous pouvez autoriser à se connecter uniquement les appareils
sélectionnés ou tous les appareils en appuyant sur [m], puis
en sélectionnant Contrôle d'accès DLNA à l’écran.
• Une liste de partage est alors créée. Attendez que les autres
appareils aient détecté votre appareil photo.
3 Connectez l’appareil AllShare Play à un réseau, puis activez la
fonction AllShare Play.
• Reportez-vous au mode d’emploi de votre appareil pour en savoir
plus.
4 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez l’appareil AllShare Play à se
connecter à votre appareil photo.
5 Sur l’appareil AllShare Play, sélectionnez l’appareil photo
auquel se connecter.
6 Sur l’appareil AllShare Play, parcourez la liste des photos ou
vidéos partagées.
• Pour en savoir plus sur la manière de rechercher l’appareil photo
et de parcourir les photos ou les vidéos sur l’appareil AllShare Play,
consultez le mode d’emploi de l’appareil.
• Selon le type d’appareil AllShare Play ou l’état du réseau, il est
possible que les vidéos ne soient pas lues correctement. Pour une
lecture sans heurts, utilisez un appareil à point d'accès bibande de
5 GHz.
AP
S Appareil photo raccordé à un téléviseur compatible AllShare Play via le réseau
local sans fil.
143
Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de AllShare Play pour l’envoi de fichiers
• Vous pouvez partager jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents.
• Vous ne pouvez afficher sur un appareil AllShare Play que des photos ou des
vidéos prises avec l’appareil photo.
• La portée de la connexion sans fil entre l’appareil photo et un appareil
AllShare Play peut varier en fonction des spécifications du point d’accès.
• Si l’appareil photo est connecté à 2 appareils AllShare Play, la lecture risque
d’être ralentie.
• Les photos ou les vidéos sont partagées dans leurs dimensions d’origine.
• Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonctionnalité avec des appareils compatibles
AllShare Play.
• Les photos ou vidéos partagées ne sont pas enregistrées sur l’appareil
AllShare Play, mais peuvent être stockées dans l’appareil photo afin de
respecter les caractéristiques de l’appareil.
• Le transfert de photos ou de vidéos sur l’appareil AllShare Play peut prendre
un certain temps selon la connexion réseau, le nombre de fichiers à partager
ou la taille des fichiers.
• Si vous éteignez l’appareil photo de façon inhabituelle pendant le visionnage
de photos ou de vidéos sur un appareil AllShare Play (par exemple, en retirant
la batterie), l’appareil considère que l’appareil photo est toujours connecté.
• Il se peut que l’ordre des photos ou des vidéos sur l’appareil photo diffère de
celui de l’appareil AllShare Play.
• En fonction du nombre de photos ou de vidéos à partager, le chargement de
celles-ci et l’exécution du processus de configuration initial peuvent prendre
un certain temps.
• Lorsque vous visionnez des photos ou des vidéos sur l’appareil AllShare
Play, l’utilisation continue de la télécommande ou l’exécution d’opérations
supplémentaires sur l’appareil peut empêcher le bon fonctionnement de
cette fonction.
• Si vous réorganisez ou triez des fichiers sur l’appareil photo tout en les
visionnant sur un appareil AllShare Play, vous devez procéder à nouveau
au processus initial de configuration pour actualiser la liste des fichiers sur
l’appareil.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez
pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Nous vous recommandons l’utilisation d’un câble réseau pour raccorder
l’appareil AllShare Play au point d’accès. Cela permettra de réduire les
interruptions de son et d’image lors de la diffusion des vidéos.
• Pour visionner des fichiers sur un appareil AllShare Play à l’aide de la fonction
Appareils à proximité, vous devez activer le mode Multidiffusion sur votre
point d’accès.
• Les vidéos d’une résolution de 1920X1080 (60 ips) peuvent uniquement être
lues sur des téléviseurs haute définition capables de lire des images à une
fréquence de 60 ips.
• Vous pouvez visionner des fichiers 3D uniquement sur des moniteurs ou
téléviseurs 3D compatibles.
144
Réseau sans fil
Envoi de photos à l’aide de la fonction Wi-Fi Direct
Lorsque l’appareil photo se connecte à un réseau local sans fil prenant en
charge la fonction Wi-Fi Direct, vous pouvez envoyer des photos à l’autre
appareil. Il est possible que certains matériels ne soient pas compatibles
avec la fonction.
1 Depuis l’appareil, activez l’option Wi-Fi Direct.
2 Sur l’appareil photo, en mode Lecture, parcourez la liste pour
accéder à une photo.
3 Appuyez sur [m], puis sélectionnez Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ
Wi-Fi Direct.
• Lorsque la vue Image unique est activée, vous ne pouvez envoyer
qu’une photo à la fois.
• Dans la vue Miniatures, vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs photos.
Appuyez sur Publier lorsque vous avez terminé de sélectionner les
photos.
4 Sélectionnez l’appareil dans la liste des périphériques Wi-Fi
Direct de l’appareil photo.
• Vérifiez que l’option Wi-Fi Direct est activée sur l’appareil photo.
• Vous pouvez également sélectionner l’appareil photo dans la liste
des périphériques Wi-Fi Direct.
5 Sur l’appareil, autorisez l’appareil photo à se connecter.
• La photo sera envoyée à l’appareil.
• Vous pouvez envoyer jusqu’à 20 fichiers simultanément.
• Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonctionnalité lorsque la carte mémoire de
l’appareil photo ne comporte aucune photo.
• Si vous ne parvenez pas à vous connecter à un périphérique Wi-Fi Direct,
mettez-le à jour à l’aide de la dernière version du micrologiciel. Il est possible
que certains matériels ne soient pas compatibles avec la fonction.
Section 5
Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo
Cette section présente les paramètres utilisateur et le menu général des réglages de l’appareil photo.
Vous pouvez régler les paramètres en fonction de vos besoins et de vos préférences.
146
Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo
Vous pouvez définir la manière d’utiliser l’appareil grâce à ces paramètres.
Afin de paramétrer les
options utilisateur
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ 5 ĺ
une option.
Les options disponibles et leur ordre d’affichage peuvent différer selon les
conditions de Prise de vue.
Personnalisation ISO
Palier ISO
Vous pouvez régler la sensibilité ISO par palier de 1/3 ou 1.
Plage ISO auto
Si vous réglez la plage ISO sur Automatique, vous pouvez définir la valeur
ISO maximum pour chaque palier EV sélectionné.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Value
1/3 palier
ISO 125, ISO 160, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400,
ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600,
ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200*
1 palier ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200*
Réducteur de bruit
Afin de réduire les parasites sur les photos, utilisez l’option Réducteur de
bruit.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Réduct. bruit ISO
élevé
Cette fonction réduit les parasites qui peuvent
apparaître lorsque vous utilisez une sensibilité ISO
élevée. (Désactivé, Elevé, Normal*, Bas)
Réduc. bruit lg
terme
Cette fonction réduit le bruit lorsque vous réglez
l’appareil photo sur une exposition prolongée.
(Désactivé, Marche*)
Paramètres utilisateur
147
Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
Réglage du Bracketing
Vous pouvez configurer les options BKT AE, BKT NB et A. photo Bracketing.
Option Description
Réglage AE
Bracketing
Régler l’intervalle d’exposition. (-/+0.3 EV*,
-/+0.7 EV, -/+1 EV, -/+1.3 EV, -/+1.7 EV, -/+2 EV,
-/+2.3 EV, -/+2.7 EV, -/+3 EV)
Régler Bal.Blanc
Brack
Régler la gamme de balance des blancs des
3 photos bracketing. (AB-/+3*, AB-/+2, AB-/+1,
MG-/+3, MG-/+2, MG-/+1)
Par exemple, AB-/+3 règle la valeur Orange sur
plus ou moins trois niveaux. MG-/+3 règle la valeur
Magenta aux mêmes niveaux.
Réglage BKT A.
photo
Sélectionner 3 paramètres de l’assistant photo que
l’appareil utilise pour prendre 3 photos bracketing.
DMF (Direct Manual Focus)
Vous pouvez régler la mise au point manuellement en faisant tourner la
bague, une fois la mise au point effectuée en enfonçant le [Déclencheur]
à mi-course. Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible avec
certains objectifs.
148
Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
Espace colorimétrique
L’espace colorimétrique vous permet de sélectionner les méthodes
de représentation des couleurs. Les appareils numériques d’imagerie,
comme les appareils photos numériques, les moniteurs et les imprimantes
disposent de leurs propres spécificités techniques pour représenter les
couleurs, que l’on nomme espaces colorimétriques.
Option Description
sRGB
sRGB (standard RGB) est une spécification
internationale qui permet de définir l’espace
colorimétrique créé par la CEI (commission
électrotechnique internationale). Cette norme est
couramment utilisée afin de recréer les couleurs sur
des moniteurs d’ordinateurs et constitue également
l’espace colorimétrique standard pour les données Exif.
sRGB est recommandé pour les images habituelles et
celles que vous souhaitez publier sur Internet.
RGB Adobe
RGB Adobe est utilisé pour des impressions
professionnelles et dispose d’une gamme de
couleurs plus importante que la norme sRGB, vous
permettant ainsi de modifier facilement des photos
sur un ordinateur. Notez que les divers programmes
disponibles sur le marché ne sont généralement
compatibles qu’avec un nombre limité d’espaces
colorimétriques.
RGB Adobe
sRGB
Lorsque l’espace colorimétrique est réglé sur Adobe RGB, les photos sont
enregistrées sous le nom « _SAMXXXX.JPG ».
149
Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
Correction des déformations
Vous pouvez corriger la déformation qui peut se produire avec les
objectifs. Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible avec
certains objectifs.
Fonctionnement tactile
Régler cette option pour utiliser le fonctionnement tactile en mode Prise
de vue.
Option Description
Activé Utilisez le fonctionnement tactile en mode Prise de vue.
Désactivé
N’utilisez pas le fonctionnement tactile en mode Prise de vue.
(Vous pouvez utiliser le fonctionnement tactile dans d’autres
situations.)
Personnalisation iFn
Vous pouvez sélectionner les options réglables prévues lorsque vous
appuyez sur [i-Function] sur un objectif compatible i-Function.
Option Description
Ouverture Permet de régler la valeur d’ouverture.
Vitesse
obturateur Permet de régler la vitesse d’obturation.
EV Permet d’ajuster la valeur d’exposition.
ISO Définissez la sensibilité ISO.
Bal. des blancs Régler la balance des blancs.
Z Permet de régler le rapport de zoom.
Affichage utilisateur
Vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des informations de prise de vue sur
l’écran.
1
2
3
London
N°. Description
1 Date & heure
Activez l’affichage de la date et l’heure.
2
Icônes
Activez l’affichage des icônes sur la partie de droite en mode Prise de
vue.
150
Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
N°. Description
3
Histogramme
Activez ou désactivez l’histogramme sur l’écran.
Description des histogrammes
Un histogramme est un graphique qui présente la répartition de
la lumière sur une photo. Un histogramme incliné vers la gauche
signifie que la photo est sombre. Un histogramme incliné vers la
droite signifie que la photo est claire. La hauteur des pointes est liée
aux informations sur la couleur. Les pointes du graphique sont plus
élevées si une couleur spécifique est prédominante.
Exposition insuffisante Exposition équilibrée Exposition excessive
Attribution touches
Vous pouvez modifier la fonction associée à la touche Personnalisé ou
DIRECT LINK.
* Paramètre par défaut
Bouton Fonction
Personnalisé
Définir une fonction pour la touche de
personnalisation.
• Aperçu optique* : exécuter la fonction de
prévisualisation de la profondeur de champ pour la
valeur d’ouverture. (p. 24)
• Bal.Bl 1 touche (Balance des blancs) : exécuter la
fonction de balance des blancs personnalisée.
• 1 touche RAW+ : enregistrer un fichier au format
RAW+JPEG. Pour enregistrer un fichier au format
JPEG, appuyez à nouveau sur cette touche.
• Réinitialiser : réinitialiser certains paramètres.
• AEL : exécuter la fonction de verrouillage
automatique de l’exposition.
• Maintien AEL : continuer d’exécuter la fonction de
verrouillage automatique de l’exposition.
DIRECT LINK
Définir une fonction pour la touche DIRECT LINK.
(AutoShare*, MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder,
Sauvegarde automatique, Courriel, Réseaux
sociaux et Cloud, AllShare Play)
151
Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
Grille
Sélectionnez un guide qui vous aidera à composer une scène
(Désactivé*, 3 X 3, 2 X 2, Croix, Diagonale).
Voyant de mise au point
Afin d’optimiser la mise au point automatique dans les endroits sombres,
activez le Voyant M. au P.. La mise au point automatique donne de
meilleurs résultats dans des endroits sombres lorsque le Voyant M. au P. est
activé.
152
Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo
Découvrez comment configurer les paramètres de votre appareil photo.
Pour définir les
paramètres :
En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺ
qĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Son
• Volume Son : définissez le volume sonore ou désactivez
complètement le son. (Désactivé, Bas, Moyen*, Elevé)
Même si le volume système est désactivé, l’appareil émet
un son lors de la lecture d’une vidéo ou d’un diaporama.
• Son de la mise au point : définir le son émis par
l’appareil photo lorsque vous enfoncez le déclencheur à
mi-course. (Désactivé, Marche*)
• Son des touches : définir le son émis par l’appareil
photo lorsque vous appuyez sur des touches ou lorsque
vous touchez l’écran. (Désactivé, Activé*)
Affichage
rapide
Définir la durée de l’affichage rapide – délai au cours
duquel l’appareil photo affiche la photo immédiatement
après la prise de vue. (Désactivé, 1 s*, 3 s, 5 s, Conserver)
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Réglage
affichage
Réglez la luminosité de l’écran, la luminosité automatique,
la couleur ou l’indicateur de niveau.
• Luminosité écran : régler la luminosité de l’écran
manuellement.
• Luminosité auto : activez ou désactivez la luminosité
automatique. (Désactivé, Marche*)
• Colorimètrie écran : vous pouvez régler la couleur de
l’affichage manuellement.
• Calibrage horizontal: calibrer l’indicateur de niveau.
Si l’indicateur de niveau n’est pas droit, positionnez
l’appareil de photo sur une surface plane, puis suivez les
instructions à l’écran.
• Vous ne pouvez pas accéder à l’option Calibrage
horizontal en mode Lecture.
• Vous ne pouvez pas définir le niveau de l’orientation
portrait.
Désactivation
écran auto
Définissez le délai de désactivation de l’écran. Lorsque
vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil photo après une durée
prédéfinie, l’écran s’éteint. (Désactivé, 30 s*, 1 min, 3 min,
5 min, 10 min)
Paramètres
153
Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Economie
d'énergie
Définir le délai de mise hors tension. L’appareil photo
s’éteint lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant une période
prédéfinie. (30 s, 1 min*, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min)
• L’appareil photo mémorise le délai de mise hors
tension même si vous remplacez la batterie.
• Si l’appareil photo est connecté à un ordinateur ou
à un téléviseur et qu’une vidéo ou un diaporama est
en cours de lecture, il est possible que la fonction
Economie d'énergie ne fonctionne pas.
Affichage
guide aide
• Aide à la sélection de mode: activer l’affichage de texte
d’aide pour le mode sélectionné lors du changement de
mode de prise de vue. (Désactivé, Activé*)
• Aide à la sélection de fonction: activer l’affichage de
texte d’aide sur les menus et les fonctions. (Désactivé,
Activé*)
Appuyez sur [n] pour masquer le texte d’aide.
Language Sélectionnez une langue d’affichage.
Date et heure
Définissez la date, l’heure, le format de date, le fuseau
horaire et indiquez si la date doit être imprimée sur les
photos. (Fuseau horaire, Date & heure, Type date,
Type d'heure, Impression)
• La date apparaît en bas à droite de la photo.
• Lorsque vous imprimez une photo, il est possible
que certaines imprimantes n’impriment pas la date
correctement.
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Vidéo
Sélectionner la sortie des signaux vidéo appropriée à votre
pays lorsque l’appareil photo est raccordé à un appareil
vidéo externe, comme un moniteur ou un téléviseur HD.
• NTSC : États-Unis, Canada, Japon, Corée, Taïwan,
Mexique, etc.
• PAL (prend en charge uniquement PAL B, D, G, H ou
I) : Australie, Autriche, Belgique, Chine, Danemark,
Finlande, France, Allemagne, Royaume-Uni, Italie,
Koweït, Malaisie, Nouvelle-Zélande, Singapour, Espagne,
Suède, Suisse, Thaïlande, Norvège, etc.
Anynet+ (HDMICEC)
Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un téléviseur
HD compatible avec la fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC),
vous pouvez contrôler la fonction de lecture de l’appareil
photo avec une télécommande.
• Désactivé : vous ne pouvez contrôler la fonction de
lecture de l’appareil photo avec la télécommande du
téléviseur.
• Marche* : vous pouvez contrôler la fonction de lecture
de l’appareil photo avec la télécommande du téléviseur.
Sortie HDMI
Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un téléviseur
HD avec un câble HDMI, vous pouvez modifier la
résolution de l’image.
• NTSC : Automatique*, 1080p, 720p, 480p,
576p (actif uniquement lorsque le réglage PAL est
sélectionné)
Si le téléviseur HD n’est pas compatible avec la résolution
que vous avez sélectionné, l’appareil photo définit la
résolution au niveau inférieur.
154
Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Sortie HDMI
3D
Sélectionner une option pour la lecture de fichiers sur un
téléviseur 3D.
• Côte à côte* : affiche deux images côte à côte.
• Compression d'images : affiche alternativement les
images de l’œil gauche et de l’œil droit dans des cadres
différents.
Nom du
fichier
Définissez la méthode de création des noms de fichier.
• Standard* : SAM_XXXX.JPG (sRGB) /
_SAMXXXX.JPG (RGB Adobe)
• Date :
- fichiers sRGB - MMDDXXXX.JPG. Par exemple, pour une
photo prise le 1er janvier, le nom du fichier est
0101XXXX.jpg.
- fichiers RGB Adobe - _MDDXXXX.JPG pour les mois de
janvier à septembre. pour les mois d’octobre à décembre,
le numéro du mois est remplacé par les lettres A (oct.),
B (nov.) et C (déc.).
Par exemple, pour une photo prise le 3 février, le nom
du fichier est _203XXXX.jpg. Pour une photo prise le
5 octobre, le fichier est nommé _A05XXXX.jpg.
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Numéro
fichier
Définissez la méthode de création des noms de fichier et
de dossier.
• Réinitialiser : après utilisation de la fonction de
réinitialisation, la dénomination des nouveaux fichiers
débute à 0001.
• Série* : les nouveaux numéros de fichiers s’ajoutent à la
suite de ceux déjà existants, même si vous avez inséré
ou formaté une nouvelle carte mémoire ou que vous
avez supprimé toutes les photos existantes.
• Le nom du premier dossier est 100PHOTO.Si vous
avez sélectionné la gamme de couleurs sRGB et la
dénomination standard des fichiers, le nom du premier
fichier correspond à SAM_0001.
• Les noms de fichiers augmentent progressivement d’une
unité de SAM_0001 à SAM_9999.
• Les noms des dossiers augmentent progressivement
d’une unité de 100PHOTO à 999PHOTO.
• Un même dossier peut contenir 9 999 fichiers maximum.
• Les numéros de fichiers sont attribués conformément
aux spécifications DCF (Design rule for Camera File
system).
• Si vous modifiez le nom d’un fichier (par exemple sur un
ordinateur), l’appareil photo ne sera pas en mesure de
le lire.
Type dossier
Définissez un type de dossier.
• Standard* : XXXPHOTO
• Date : XXX_MMDD
155
Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Formater
Formater la carte mémoire. Le formatage supprime
l’ensemble des fichiers, y compris les fichiers protégés.
(Oui, Non)
Il est possible que des erreurs se produisent si vous
utilisez une carte mémoire qui a été formatée à l’aide
d’un appareil photo d’une autre marque, d’un lecteur de
cartes mémoire ou d’un ordinateur. Veuillez formater les
cartes mémoire dans l’appareil photo avant de les utiliser
pour effectuer des prises de vue.
Informations
périphérique
Afficher la version du micrologiciel du boîtier et de l’objectif,
l’adresse Mac et le numéro de certification réseau, ou mettre à
jour le micrologiciel.
• M. à J. firmware: mettre à jour le micrologiciel du boîtier de
l’appareil photo ou de l’objectif. (Boîtier, Objectif)
• Vous pouvez télécharger les mises à jour du
micrologiciel sur www.samsung.fr ou www.samsung.ca.
• Vous ne pouvez pas lancer la mise à jour du
micrologiciel sans avoir complètement rechargé
la batterie au préalable. Rechargez entièrement
la batterie avant d’effectuer la mise à niveau du
micrologiciel.
• Si vous mettez le micrologiciel à jour, les paramètres
utilisateur et les valeurs sont réinitialisés. (La date,
l’heure, la langue et la sortie vidéo ne sont pas
modifiées.)
• N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque la mise à jour
est en cours.
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Point d'accès
mobile bi-bande
Définissez une fréquence pour utiliser l'appareil photo comme
point d'accès pour la fonction AutoShare, MobileLink ou
Remote Viewfinder. (5 GHz, 2,4 GHz*)
Si vous utilisez l’appareil photo dans un pays autre que
celui dans lequel il a été acheté, la fonction Wi-Fi 5 GHz
risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement, en raison des
différences de fréquences radio. Si tel est le cas, utilisez
plutôt la fonction Wi-Fi 2,4 GHz.
GPS
• Géolocalisation : paramétrer l’appareil pour prendre des
photos en affichant les informations de localisation à l’aide de
la fonction GPS (Global Positioning System). Les informations
de localisation sont ajoutées aux données Exif associées à la
photo. (Désactivé, Activé*)
• Param. tps val. GPS : indiquer la durée d’utilisation des
dernières informations de localisation lorsque l’appareil
photo ne parvient pas à recevoir les signaux GPS. Si l’appareil
photo ne parvient toujours pas à capter les signaux GPS une
fois le délai spécifié écoulé, les informations de localisation ne
sont alors pas enregistrées sur les photos. (15 s*, 30 s, 1 min,
3 min, 10 min, 30 min)
• Affichage lieu : afficher les informations de localisation à
l’écran en mode Prise de vue. Les informations de localisation
s’affichent en coréen uniquement si vous résidez en Corée
et que la langue d’affichage est réglée sur le coréen. Si vous
définissez une autre langue, les informations de localisation
s’afficheront en anglais. (Désactivé, Activé*)
• Réinit. GPS : paramétrer l’appareil photo pour qu’il recherche
les satellites GPS autour de votre position actuelle. (Oui, Non)
Pour utiliser la fonction GPS, vous devez acheter un
appareil GPS en option.
156
Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Nettoyage du
capteur
• Nettoyage du capteur : enlevez la poussière du
capteur.
• Action de démarrage : l’appareil photo procède à un
nettoyage du capteur à chaque fois que vous le mettez
en marche. (Désactivé*, Marche)
Ce produit utilisant des objectifs interchangeables, il est
possible que de la poussière se dépose sur le capteur
lorsque vous changez les objectifs. Cela peut causer
l’apparition de particules de poussière sur les photos que
vous prenez. Il est recommandé de ne pas changer les
objectifs lorsque vous vous trouvez dans des endroits
particulièrement poussiéreux. Par ailleurs, assurez-vous
que le cache de l’objectif soit en place lorsque vous ne
vous en servez pas.
Réinitialiser
Réinitialisez le menu des paramètres et les options de
prises de vue sur les paramètres par défaut. (La date,
l’heure, la langue et la sortie vidéo ne sont pas modifiées.)
(Oui, Non)
Licences open
source Afficher les licences open source.
Section 6
Connexion à des appareils externes
Tirez pleinement partie des fonctionnalités de l’appareil photo en le connectant à des appareils externes comme,
par exemple, un ordinateur, un téléviseur HD ou un téléviseur 3D.
158
Connexion à des appareils externes
Visionnez les photos ou vidéos en raccordant l’appareil photo à un
téléviseur HD (ou téléviseur 3D) à l’aide d’un câble HDMI en option.
Visionnage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD
1 En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺ
qĺ Sortie HDMI ĺ une option. (p. 153)
2 Eteignez l’appareil photo et le téléviseur HD.
3 Reliez l’appareil photo au téléviseur HD à l’aide d’un câble
HDMI proposé en option.
4 Allumez votre téléviseur HD et sélectionnez la source vidéo
HDMI.
5 Allumez l’appareil photo.
• L’appareil photo passe automatiquement en mode Lecture lorsque
vous le raccordez à un téléviseur HD.
6 Utilisez les touches de l’appareil photo pour visualiser des
photos ou lire des vidéos.
• Grâce au câble HDMI, vous pouvez brancher l’appareil photo sur le téléviseur
HD en utilisant la méthode Anynet+(CEC).
• Les fonctions Anynet+(CEC) vous permettent de contrôler les appareils
connectés en utilisant la télécommande du téléviseur.
• Si le téléviseur HD est compatible avec Anynet+(CEC), il s’allume
automatiquement lorsqu’il est connecté à l’appareil photo. Il est possible que
cette fonction ne soit pas disponible sur certains téléviseurs HD.
• Vous ne pouvez pas prendre de photos ou de vidéos lorsque l’appareil photo
est branché sur le téléviseur HD à l’aide d’un câble HDMI.
• Il est possible que certaines fonctions de lecture de l’appareil photo ne soient
pas disponibles, lorsque celui-ci est branché sur un téléviseur HD.
• Le délai de connexion de l’appareil photo à un téléviseur HD peut varier
en fonction de la carte mémoire utilisée. La fonction principale d’une carte
mémoire étant d’augmenter la vitesse de transfert, celle-ci ne sera pas
nécessairement plus rapide lors de l’utilisation de fonctions HDMI, même si
elle dispose d’un taux de transfert plus élevé.
• Les vidéos d’une résolution de 1920X1080 (60 ips) peuvent uniquement être
lues sur des téléviseurs haute définition capables de lire des images à une
fréquence de 60 ips.
Visionnage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD ou 3D
159
Connexion à des appareils externes > Visionnage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD ou 3D
Visionnage de fichiers sur un téléviseur 3D
Vous pouvez visionner sur un téléviseur 3D les photos ou vidéos prises en
mode 3D ou à l’aide de la fonction Panorama 3D en mode Intelligent.
1 En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺ
qĺ Sortie HDMI ĺ une option. (p. 153)
2 Sélectionnez Sortie HDMI 3D ĺ une option. (p. 154)
3 Eteignez l’appareil photo et le téléviseur 3D.
4 Reliez l’appareil photo au téléviseur 3D à l’aide d’un câble
HDMI proposé en option.
5 Allumez votre téléviseur 3D et sélectionnez la source vidéo
HDMI.
6 Allumez l’appareil photo.
• L’appareil photo passe automatiquement en mode Lecture lorsque
vous le raccordez à un téléviseur 3D.
7 Accédez à un fichier 3D, puis appuyez sur [I] pour passer en
mode 3D.
• Appuyez à nouveau sur [I] pour repasser en mode 2D.
8 Activez la fonction 3D du téléviseur.
• Reportez-vous au mode d’emploi de votre téléviseur pour en savoir
plus.
9 Utilisez les touches de l’appareil photo pour visionner des
photos ou des vidéos 3D.
• Il est impossible de visionner un fichier MPO en 3D sur des téléviseurs non
compatibles avec ce format de fichier.
• Utilisez des lunettes 3D adaptées pour visionner un fichier MPO ou une
vidéo 3D sur un téléviseur 3D.
• Lorsque vous prenez des photos en mode Panorama 3D, l’effet 3D risque
d’être moins prononcé par rapport à des photos prises en mode 3D avec un
objectif 3D.
Ne visualisez pas les photos ou vidéos 3D prises avec l’appareil photo sur
un téléviseur ou un moniteur 3D pendant une durée prolongée. Cela risque
de provoquer des symptômes indésirables, tels qu’une fatigue oculaire, des
nausées ou des effets plus marqués.
160
Connexion à des appareils externes
Transférez les fichiers d’une carte mémoire sur votre ordinateur en
connectant l’appareil photo à ce dernier.
Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur
Windows
Connexion de l’appareil photo en tant que disque amovible
Vous pouvez connecter l’appareil photo à votre ordinateur en tant que
disque amovible.
1 Éteignez l’appareil photo.
2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble
USB.
• Vous devez brancher l’extrémité la plus petite du câble USB sur l’appareil
photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble
à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de
données.
• Si vous tentez de brancher le câble USB sur le port HDMI, l’appareil
photo risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement.
3 Allumez l’appareil photo.
• L’ordinateur détecte automatiquement l’appareil photo.
4 Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez Poste de travail ĺ
Disque amovible ĺ DCIM ĺ 100PHOTO ou 101_0101.
5 Sélectionnez les fichiers de votre choix, puis faites-les glisser
ou enregistrez-les sur l’ordinateur.
Si Type dossier est réglé sur Date, le nom du dossier apparaît comme suit :
« XXX_MMDD ». Par exemple, si vous capturez un fichier le 1er janvier, le nom du
fichier sera « 101_0101 ».
Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur
161
Connexion à des appareils externes > Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur
Déconnexion de l’appareil photo (Windows XP)
La méthode pour débrancher l’appareil photo est identique pour
Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows 8.
1 Assurez-vous qu’aucune donnée n’est en cours de transfert
entre l’appareil photo et l’ordinateur.
• Si le témoin lumineux de l’appareil photo clignote, cela signifie que
des données sont en cours de transfert. Attendez que le voyant
d’état cesse de clignoter.
2 Cliquez sur dans la barre d’outils en bas à droite de l’écran
de l’ordinateur.
3 Cliquez sur le message qui apparaît.
4 Cliquez sur la zone du message indiquant que l’appareil photo
a été retiré en toute sécurité.
5 Débranchez le câble USB.
Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur Mac
Mac OS 10.5 ou version ultérieure est pris en charge.
1 Eteignez l’appareil photo.
2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur Macintosh à l’aide
du câble USB.
• Vous devez brancher l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB sur l’appareil
photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble
à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de
données.
• Si vous tentez de brancher le câble USB sur le port HDMI, l’appareil
photo risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement.
162
Connexion à des appareils externes > Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur
3 Allumez l’appareil photo.
• L’ordinateur détecte automatiquement l’appareil photo et affiche
une icône de disque amovible.
4 Ouvrez le disque amovible.
5 Transférez vos photos ou vos vidéos sur l’ordinateur Mac.
163
Connexion à des appareils externes
Vous pouvez afficher et modifier les fichiers à l’aide des programmes
fournis. Vous pouvez envoyer des fichiers à l’ordinateur via le réseau sans
fil.
Installation des programmes depuis le
CD-ROM fourni
1 Insérez le CD-ROM d’installation dans le lecteur de votre
ordinateur.
2 Sélectionnez une langue.
3 Sélectionnez le programme à installer.
4 Suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran.
5 Cliquez sur Exit (Quitter) pour terminer l’installation.
Programmes disponibles lors de l’utilisation de i-Launcher
Elément Description
Multimedia Viewer Vous pouvez lire des fichiers avec le Multimedia Viewer.
Firmware Upgrade Vous pouvez télécharger le micrologiciel de votre
appareil photo.
PC Auto Backup
Vous pouvez envoyer sur un ordinateur, à l’aide de
la fonction sans fil, les photos ou vidéos prises avec
l’appareil photo.
Utilisation de i-Launcher
i-Launcher vous permet de lire des fichiers avec Multimedia Viewer et
propose un lien pour télécharger le programme PC Auto Backup.
Configuration requise pour Windows
Elément Configuration requise
Processeur Intel® i5 3,3 GHz or higherou plus puissant /
AMD Phenom™ II x4 3,2 GHz ou plus puissant
Mémoire vive Minimum 512 Mo de RAM (1 Go ou plus recommandé)
Système
d’exploitation* Windows XP SP2, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8
Capacité du
disque dur 250 Mo minimum (1 Go et plus recommandé)
Divers
• Lecteur de CD-ROM
• Pour une résolution de 1024 x 768, un moniteur
couleur 16 bits compatible est recommandé (pour
une résolution de 1280 x 1024 pixels, un écran couleur
32 bits est recommandé)
• Port USB 2.0
• Carte vidéo nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT ou plus récente /
ATI X1600 ou plus récente
• Microsoft DirectX 9.0c ou une version ultérieure
* Une version 32 bits de i-Launcher est installée—y compris sur les éditions 64 bits de
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows 8.
Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur fonctionnant sous Windows
164
Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur fonctionnant sous Windows
• La configuration indiquée ne constitue qu’une recommandation. i-Launcher
peut ne pas fonctionner correctement sur certains ordinateurs, même si
ceux-ci répondent aux spécifications.
• Si l’ordinateur ne répond pas aux spécifications requises, un problème de
lecture vidéo risque de survenir.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages résultant de
l’utilisation d’ordinateurs non conformes, notamment les ordinateurs assemblés.
Configuration requise pour Mac
Elément Configuration requise
Système d’exploitation Mac OS 10.5 ou ultérieur (à l’exception du
PowerPC)
Mémoire vive Minimum 256 Mo de RAM (512 Mo ou plus
recommandé)
Capacité du disque dur 110 Mo minimum
Divers Port USB 2.0, lecteur de CD-ROM
Ouverture de i-Launcher
Sur l’ordinateur Windows, sélectionnez démarrer ĺ Tous les
programmes ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher.
Ou, cliquez sur Applications ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher sur un ordinateur
Mac.
165
Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur fonctionnant sous Windows
Utilisation de la fonction Multimedia Viewer
La fonction Multimedia Viewer vous permet de lire des fichiers. Depuis
l’écran Samsung i-Launcher, cliquez sur Multimedia Viewer.
• Elle prend en charge les formats suivants :
- Vidéos : MP4 (Vidéo : H.264, Audio : AAC), WMV (WMV 7/8/9), AVI (MJPEG)
- Photos : JPG, GIF, BMP, PNG, TIFF, MPO
• Les fichiers enregistrés avec les appareils d’autres fabricants risquent de ne
pas être lus correctement.
Afficher des photos
1
2
3
1011 456789
N°. Description
1 Nom du fichier
2 Zone agrandie
3 HistogrammeHistogram
4 Ouvrir le fichier sélectionné.
5 Touche Histogramme
6 Faire pivoter vers la gauche ou vers la droite.
7 Passer au fichier suivant / revenir au précédent.
8 Dimensionner la photo à la taille de l’écran.
9 Afficher la photo à sa taille d’origine.
10 Zoom avant / arrière
11 Commuter entres les modes 2D et 3D.
166
Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur fonctionnant sous Windows
Lecture de vidéos
1
2
8 4567 3
N°. Description
1 Nom du fichier
2 Régler le volume.
3 Ouvrir le fichier sélectionné.
4 Accéder au fichier suivant.
5 Arrêter
N°. Description
6 Pause
7 Revenir au fichier précédent.
8 Barre de progression
Téléchargement du micrologiciel
Depuis l’écran Samsung i-Launcher, cliquez sur Firmware Upgrade.
Téléchargement du programme PC Auto Backup
Depuis l’écran Samsung i-Launcher, cliquez sur PC Auto Backup.
Pour en savoir plus sur l’installation du programme PC Auto Backup,
reportez-vous à la page 133.
167
Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur fonctionnant sous Windows
Installation de Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
1 Insérez le DVD-ROM Adobe Photoshop Lightroom dans votre
ordinateur.
2 Sélectionnez une langue.
3 Suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran.
Utilisation de Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
Les photos prises par un appareil numérique sont souvent converties en
format JPEG et stockées dans la mémoire en fonction des paramètres
de l’appareil au moment de la capture. Les fichiers RAW ne sont pas
convertis au format JPEG et sont stockés dans la mémoire sans qu’aucune
modification ne soit effectuée. Avec Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, vous
pouvez régler le niveau d’exposition, la balance des blancs, la tonalité, les
contrastes et les couleurs des photos. Vous pouvez également modifier
les fichiers JPEG ou TIFF ainsi que les fichiers RAW. Pour plus de détails,
consultez le guide des programmes.
Section 7
Annexes
Obtenez des informations concernant les messages d’erreur, l’entretien de l’appareil photo,
des conseils de dépannage, les caractéristiques et les accessoires en option.
169
Annexes
Lorsque l’un des messages d’erreur suivants apparaît, reportez-vous aux
solutions proposées pour tenter de résoudre le problème.
Messages d'erreur Solutions possibles
Objectif verrouillé
L’objectif est verrouillé. Tourner l’objectif dans le sens
contraire des aiguilles d’une montre jusqu’au déclic.
(p. 45)
Erreur de carte
• Eteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le.
• Retirez la carte mémoire, puis insérez-la de nouveau.
• Formatez la carte mémoire.
Batterie faible Insérez une batterie chargée ou rechargez celle qui
est déjà en place.
Aucun fichier
image
Prenez des photos ou insérez une carte mémoire qui
en contient.
Erreur de fichier Supprimez le fichier endommagé ou contactez le
centre de Service Après-Vente.
Mémoire pleine Supprimez les fichiers inutiles ou insérez une nouvelle
carte mémoire.
Carte verrouillée
Vous pouvez verrouiller la carte SD, SDHC, SDXC
ou UHS-1 pour éviter la suppression des fichiers.
Déverrouillez la carte pour prendre des photos.
(p. 173)
Messages d'erreur Solutions possibles
Nombre de
dossiers et fichiers
max. Remplacez la
carte.
Les noms de fichier ne correspondent pas à la norme
DCF. Transférez les fichiers de la carte mémoire vers
votre ordinateur et formatez-la. (p. 155)
Error 00
Eteignez l’appareil photo avant de retirer l’objectif. Si
le message continue de s’afficher, contactez le centre
de Service Après-Vente.
Error 01/02
Eteignez l’appareil photo, retirez la batterie et insérezla
de nouveau. Si le message continue de s’afficher,
contactez le centre de service.
Messages d’erreur
170
Annexes
Nettoyage de l’appareil photo
Objectif et écran de l’appareil photo
Utilisez un pinceau pour éliminer la poussière et essuyez délicatement
l’objectif avec un chiffon doux. S’il reste de la poussière, humidifiez une
lingette avec du nettoyant liquide pour objectif et essuyez délicatement.
Capteur d’images
En fonction des conditions de prise de vue, de la poussière peut apparaître
sur les photos suite à l’exposition du capteur d’images à l’environnement
extérieur. Ce phénomène est normal et l’exposition à la poussière fait
partie de l’utilisation quotidienne de l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez retirer
la poussière du capteur d’images en utilisant la fonction de nettoyage du
capteur (p. 156). S’il reste de la poussière après le nettoyage du capteur,
contactez un centre de service. N’introduisez pas la soufflette dans la
monture de l’objectif.
Boîtier de l’appareil photo
Essuyez-le délicatement avec un chiffon doux et sec.
N’utilisez jamais de benzène, de diluants ou d’alcool pour nettoyer l’appareil.
Ces produits peuvent l’endommager ou entraîner un dysfonctionnement.
Entretien de l’appareil photo
171
Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Utilisation sur la plage ou en bord de mer
• Protégez l’appareil photo du sable et de la terre lorsque vous l’utilisez à
la plage ou dans d’autres endroits similaires.
• L’appareil photo n’est pas étanche. Ne manipulez pas la batterie,
l’adaptateur ou la carte mémoire avec des mains humides. Cela pourrait
endommager l’appareil photo.
Rangement pour une durée prolongée
• Lorsque vous rangez l’appareil photo pour une durée prolongée, placezle
dans un récipient clos avec un matériau absorbant comme du gel de
silice.
• Lorsqu’elle n’est pas utilisée pendant une période prolongée, une
batterie pleine se décharge progressivement et doit alors être rechargée
avant l’utilisation suivante.
• Il est possible d’initialiser la date et l’heure actuelles lorsque l’appareil
photo est éteint et que la batterie est restée en dehors de l’appareil
photo pendant une durée prolongée.
Utilisation et rangement de l’appareil photo
Usage ou rangement inapproprié de l’appareil photo
• Evitez d’exposer l’appareil à des températures extrêmes.
• Evitez d’utiliser l’appareil photo dans des endroits très humides ou dans
lesquels le taux d’humidité varie beaucoup.
• Evitez d’exposer l’appareil photo à la lumière directe du soleil et de le
ranger dans des endroits chauds, mal ventilés, comme à l’intérieur d’une
voiture en été.
• Protégez l’appareil photo et son écran contre les chocs et les vibrations
excessives, qui risquent de les endommager.
• Evitez d’utiliser et de ranger l’appareil photo dans un endroit
poussiéreux, mal entretenu, humide ou peu ventilé, afin de ne pas
endommager ses composants internes.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de combustibles ou de
produits chimiques inflammables. Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais
de liquides inflammables, de gaz ou de matériaux explosifs dans le
même compartiment que l’appareil ou ses accessoires.
• Ne rangez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de boules de naphtaline.
172
Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Usage avec précaution de l’appareil photo dans les
environnements humides
Lorsque vous faites passer l’appareil photo d’un environnement froid à
un environnement chaud, de la condensation peut se former sur l’objectif
et les composants internes de l’appareil photo. Si tel est le cas, éteignez
l’appareil photo et attendez au moins 1 heure. Si de la condensation s’est
formée sur la carte mémoire, retirez-la et attendez que l’humidité se soit
évaporée avant de la réinsérer.
Autres avertissements
• Ne faites pas tournoyer l’appareil photo par la dragonne. Vous risquez de
vous blesser ou d’entrainer des blessures à d’autres personnes, ou même
d’endommager l’appareil photo.
• Evitez de peindre l’appareil photo, la peinture risquant de bloquer ses
pièces mobiles et de perturber son fonctionnement.
• Eteignez l’appareil photo si vous l’utilisez pas.
• L’appareil photo contient des pièces fragiles. Evitez de faire subir des
chocs à l’appareil photo.
• Protégez l’écran de toute pression extérieure en le conservant dans l’étui
lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Protégez l’appareil photo des rayures en le
tenant à l’écart du sable, des objets pointus ou des pièces de monnaie.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est fissuré ou brisé. Vous risquez
de vous blesser les mains ou le visage avec les morceaux de verre ou de
plastique. Rapportez votre appareil photo à un centre de service aprèsvente
Samsung pour le faire réparer.
• Ne posez jamais l’appareil photo, les batteries, le chargeur ou des
accessoires à l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’un dispositif chauffant, tel qu’un
four à micro-ondes, une cuisinière ou un radiateur. Cela pourrait entraîner
une déformation ou une surchauffe des matériaux, ou même provoquer
un incendie ou une explosion.
• Evitez toute exposition de l’objectif à la lumière directe du soleil - ceci
risque d’entraîner une décoloration ou un mauvais fonctionnement du
capteur d’images.
• Protégez l’objectif des traces de doigt et des éraflures. Nettoyez l’objectif
en utilisant un chiffon doux et propre, exempt de poussière.
• L’appareil photo peut s’éteindre en cas de pression extérieure. Cela a pour
but de protéger la carte mémoire. Allumez l’appareil photo pour l’utiliser
à nouveau.
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo chauffe en cours d’utilisation.
Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ou les
performances de l’appareil.
• Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo dans des températures faibles, il
peut mettre du temps à s’éteindre, une décoloration peut se produire
temporairement ou des images persistantes peuvent apparaître. Il ne
s’agit en aucun cas de dysfonctionnements. Ces perturbations sont
momentanées et se corrigent d’elles-mêmes une fois que l’appareil
retrouve à nouveau une température plus modérée.
• La peinture ou le métal du boîtier de l’appareil photo peut provoquer des
allergies, des démangeaisons, de l’eczéma ou des boursouflures pour les
personnes à peau sensible. Si vous présentez de tels symptômes, arrêtez
immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil photo et consultez un médecin.
• N’introduisez pas de corps étrangers dans les trappes, les logements
ou les ouvertures de l’appareil photo. Il est possible que les dommages
provoqués par une mauvaise utilisation ne soient pas couverts par votre
garantie.
• Ne confiez pas la réparation de l’appareil photo à un technicien non
agréé et ne tentez pas de le réparer vous-même. Votre garantie ne couvre
pas les dégâts résultant d’une réparation par un technicien non agréé.
173
Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo
A propos des cartes mémoire
Cartes mémoires compatibles
Ce produit est compatible avec les cartes mémoire SD (Secure Digital),
SDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity), SDXC (Secure Digital eXtended
Capacity), UHS-1 (Ultra High Speed-1), microSD, microSDHC, microSDXC
ou microUHS-1.
Contact
Loquet de protection
contre l’écriture
Étiquette (face avant)
Vous pouvez protéger les fichiers contre la suppression en utilisant le
loquet de verrouillage empêchant l’écriture sur les cartes SD, SDHC, SDXC
ou UHS-1. Faites glisser le loquet vers le bas pour verrouiller la carte ou
vers le haut pour la déverrouiller. Déverrouillez la carte lorsque vous
prenez des photos ou filmez des vidéos.
Adaptateur de carte mémoire
Carte mémoire
Pour utiliser des cartes de type micro avec ce produit, un ordinateur ou un
lecteur de carte mémoire, insérez la carte dans un adaptateur.
174
Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Capacité de la carte mémoire
La capacité de la mémoire peut varier en fonction de la scène ou des conditions de prise de vue. Ces capacités sont données pour une carte SD d’2 Go.
Taille Qualité
Maximale Elevée Normale RAW RAW + Très élevé RAW + Elevé RAW + Normal
Photo
20.0M (5472X3648) 151 179 218 69 47 49 52
10.1M (3888X2592) 276 321 384 - 62 64 66
5.9M (2976X1984) 423 484 565 - 71 72 74
2.0M (1728X1152) 845 923 1 016 - 82 83 84
Mode Rafale 479 545 631 - - - -
16.9M (5472X3080) 177 208 252 - 51 53 56
7.8M (3712X2088) 343 396 467 - 66 68 70
4.9M (2944X1656) 487 553 640 - 74 75 76
2.1M (1920X1080) 827 905 999 - 82 83 84
13.3M (3648X3648) 218 255 307 - 56 58 61
7.0M (2640X2640) 373 429 504 - 68 70 72
4.0M (2000X2000) 559 630 721 - 76 77 78
1.1M (1024X1024) 1 111 1 180 1 258 - 86 86 87
175
Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Taille Qualité
Haute qualité Normale
Vidéo
1920X1080 (60 ips)
Environ 10' 10" Environ 12' 43"
1920X1080 (30 ips)
Environ 17' 41" Environ 22' 09"
*
1920X1080 (15 ips)
Environ 23' 38" Environ 29' 24"
1920X810 (24 ips)
Environ 21' 35" Environ 27' 02"
1280X720 (60 ips)
Environ 16' 51" Environ 21' 06"
1280X720 (30 ips)
Environ 29' 11" Environ 36' 35"
640X480 (30 ips)
Environ 120' 47" Environ 153' 30"
Pour partager (30 ips)
Environ 218' 48" Environ 278' 24"
* est disponible uniquement avec certaines options de filtre intelligent.
• Les valeurs précédentes sont mesurées sans utiliser la fonction de zoom.
• Le temps d’enregistrement disponible peut varier si le zoom est utilisé.
• Plusieurs vidéos ont été enregistrées successivement afin de déterminer la durée totale d’enregistrement.
• La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 29 minutes et 59 secondes par fichier.
• La durée maximale de lecture de vidéos Pour partager est de 30 secondes par fichier.
176
Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo
• Evitez tout contact des cartes mémoire avec des liquides, de la poussière
ou des corps étrangers. Si la carte mémoire est sale, nettoyez-la avec un
chiffon doux avant de l’introduire dans l’appareil photo.
• Evitez que les cartes mémoire ou l’emplacement pour carte mémoire
n’entrent en contact avec des liquides, des poussières ou tout corps
étranger. Cela risque d’endommager l’appareil photo ou les cartes
mémoire.
• Lorsque vous transportez une carte mémoire, rangez-la dans un étui afin
de la protéger de l’électricité statique.
• Transférez vos données importantes sur d’autres supports, tel qu’un
disque dur ou un CD / DVD.
• Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo de manière prolongée, la
carte mémoire peut chauffer. Ceci est normal et n’engendre pas de
dysfonctionnement.
• Utilisez une carte mémoire conforme aux normes en vigueur.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données.
Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire
• Evitez d’exposer les cartes mémoire à des températures extrêmes
(inférieures à 0 °C ou supérieures à 40 °C). Cela risque de provoquer des
dysfonctionnements des cartes mémoire.
• Introduisez une carte mémoire dans le bon sens. Dans le cas contraire,
vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil photo ainsi que la carte mémoire.
• N’utilisez pas de carte mémoire qui a été formatée avec un autre appareil
photo ou avec un ordinateur. Reformatez la carte mémoire sur l’appareil
photo.
• Eteignez l’appareil photo avant d’introduire ou de retirer la carte
mémoire.
• Vous ne devez pas retirer la carte mémoire ou éteindre l’appareil photo
lorsque le voyant clignote. Vous risquez d’endommager vos données.
• Au terme de la durée de vie de la batterie, vous ne pouvez plus stocker
de photos sur la carte. Remplacez-la.
• Evitez de plier la carte mémoire, de la laisser tomber ou de la soumettre
à des chocs ou des pressions importantes.
• Evitez d’utiliser ou de ranger les cartes mémoire à proximité de champs
magnétiques.
• Evitez d’utiliser ou de ranger des cartes mémoire dans des
environnements chauds, très humides ou en contact avec des
substances corrosives.
177
Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo
• Ne posez pas l’appareil sur des surfaces inflammables comme de la literie, des
couvertures, des tapis ou des couvertures électriques pendant des périodes
prolongées.
• Lorsque l’appareil est allumé, ne le laissez pas dans un espace confiné pendant
une période prolongée.
• Ne laissez pas les bornes de la batterie entrer en contact avec des objets
métalliques comme des colliers, des pièces de monnaie, des clés ou bien des
montres.
• Utilisez uniquement d’authentiques batteries de remplacement Lithium-ion
recommandées par le fabricant.
• Ne démontez ou ne perforez pas la batterie avec un objet coupant, tel qu’il soit.
• Evitez de soumettre la batterie à une pression élevée ou bien à des éléments
susceptible de l’écraser.
• Evitez de soumettre la batterie à des chocs importants comme par exemple la
laisser tomber de très haut.
• N’exposez pas la batterie à des températures supérieures ou égales à 60 °C.
• Evitez de mettre la batterie en contact avec des liquides ou de l’humidité.
• Evitez de mettre la batterie en contact avec le feu et de l’exposer à une chaleur
extrême ou au soleil de façon prolongée.
Informations sur le traitement des batteries usagées.
• Portez une attention particulière à la façon dont vous traitez les batteries
usagées.
• Ne jetez pas la batterie au feu.
• Les consignes de traitement des batteries usagées peuvent varier d’un pays à
l’autre. Procédez au traitement de la batterie usagée en accord avec toutes les
réglementations locales et fédérales en vigueur à l’endroit où vous vous trouvez.
Consignes relatives au chargement de la batterie
Respectez les consignes de chargement indiquées dans ce mode d’emploi pour
charger la batterie. La batterie peut s’enflammer ou bien exploser si celle-ci n’est
pas chargée correctement.
A propos de la batterie
Utilisez uniquement des batteries homologuées par Samsung.
Caractéristiques de la batterie
Elément Description
Modèle BP1130
Type Batterie au lithium-ion
Capacité des cellules 1 130 mAh
Tension 7,6 V
Temps de charge* (lorsque la batterie
est complètement déchargée) Environ 215 min
* Le temps de chargement de la batterie lors de la connexion à un ordinateur peut être plus
long.
Des blessures pouvant s’avérer mortelles peuvent résulter d’une utilisation
imprudente ou inappropriée de la batterie. Pour votre sécurité, veuillez
suivre ces instructions destinées à utiliser la batterie correctement :
• La batterie peut s’enflammer ou bien exploser si celle-ci n’est pas manipulée
correctement. Si vous remarquez un quelconque défaut de fabrication,
une fêlure ou d’autres anomalies sur la batterie, cessez de l’utiliser
immédiatement et contactez votre fabricant.
• Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs de batterie authentiques recommandés
par le fabricant, et rechargez la batterie en respectant scrupuleusement les
consignes décrites dans ce mode d’emploi.
• Ne placez pas la batterie à proximité d’appareils chauffants ou dans un
environnement soumis à des températures élevées comme par exemple à
l’intérieur d’une voiture en été.
• Ne placez jamais la batterie dans un four à micro-ondes.
• Evitez de stocker ou d’utiliser la batterie dans des endroits chauds et humides
comme des spas ou des cabines de douche.
178
Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Autonomie de la batterie
Mode Prise de vue Durée moyenne / Nombre de photos
Photos Environ 165 min/Environ 330 photos
Vidéos Environ 110 min (enregistrement de vidéos à une
résolution de1920X1080 et 60 ips.)
• Ces chiffres proviennent des normes de test CIPA. Ils peuvent varier en
fonction de votre utilisation réelle.
• Les temps de prise de vue disponibles varient en fonction de l’arrièreplan,
de l’intervalle de prise de vue et des conditions d’utilisation.
• Plusieurs vidéos ont été enregistrées successivement afin de déterminer
la durée totale d’enregistrement.
Message de batterie faible
Lorsque la batterie est complètement déchargée, l’icône de batterie
devient rouge et le message « Batterie faible » apparaît.
Remarques à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie
• Evitez d’exposer les cartes mémoire à des températures extrêmes
(inférieures à 0 °C ou supérieures à 40 °C). Les températures extrêmes
peuvent avoir pour effet de réduire la capacité de chargement des
batteries.
• Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo de manière prolongée, la zone
située autour de la trappe batterie peut chauffer. Ceci n’affecte pas
l’utilisation normale de l’appareil photo.
• Ne tirez pas sur le cordon d’alimentation pour le débrancher de la prise
secteur, car vous risquez de provoquer un incendie ou de recevoir une
décharge électrique.
• A des températures inférieures à 0 °C, la capacité et la durée de vie de la
batterie peuvent diminuer.
• La capacité de la batterie peut diminuer à de faibles températures, mais
redevient normale à des températures plus modérées.
• Si vous rangez l’appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une période de temps
prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie. Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se
détériorer avec le temps, risquant d’endommager gravement l’appareil
photo. Si vous rangez l’appareil photo pendant une durée prolongée,
sans avoir retiré la batterie, celle-ci risque de se décharger. Lorsque la
batterie est complètement déchargée, il peut s’avérer impossible de la
recharger.
• Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil photo pendant une durée
prolongée (3 mois ou plus), vérifiez la batterie et rechargez-la
régulièrement. Si vous laissez continuellement la batterie se décharger,
sa capacité et sa durée de vie peuvent diminuer, ce qui peut entraîner un
dysfonctionnement, un incendie ou une explosion.
179
Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Avertissements à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie
Protégez les batteries, les chargeurs et les cartes mémoire de tout
dommage.
Evitez tout contact de la batterie avec des objets métalliques, car
cela risque de provoquer un court-circuit entre les bornes + et - de la
batterie, de l’endommager de manière temporaire ou permanente, ou de
provoquer un incendie ou un choc électrique.
Remarques concernant le chargement de la batterie
• Si le voyant d’état est éteint, assurez-vous que la batterie est installée
correctement.
• Si lors de la mise en charge l’appareil photo est allumé, la batterie peut
ne pas se recharger complètement. Eteignez l’appareil photo avant de
recharger la batterie.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo lors de la mise en charge de la batterie.
Vous risquez de provoquer un incendie ou de recevoir une décharge
électrique.
• Ne tirez pas sur le cordon d’alimentation pour le débrancher de la prise
secteur, car vous risquez de provoquer un incendie ou de recevoir une
décharge électrique.
• Laissez la batterie se recharger pendant au moins 10 minutes avant
d’allumer l’appareil photo.
• Si vous raccordez l’appareil photo à une source d’alimentation externe
alors que la batterie est déchargée, l’utilisation de fonctions à forte
consommation énergétique provoquera l’extinction de l’appareil
photo. Rechargez la batterie pour pouvoir utiliser l’appareil photo
normalement.
• Si vous rebranchez le cordon d’alimentation alors que la batterie est
complètement rechargée, le voyant d’état s’allume pendant environ
30 minutes.
• L’utilisation du flash et l’enregistrement de vidéos déchargent
rapidement la batterie. Rechargez la batterie jusqu’à ce que le voyant
d’état rouge s’éteigne.
• Si le voyant d’état clignote en rouge, rebranchez le cordon ou retirez la
batterie et réintroduisez-la.
• Si vous chargez la batterie lorsque le cordon surchauffe ou lorsque la
température est trop élevée, le voyant d’état peut clignoter en rouge.
Le chargement démarre lorsque la batterie a refroidi.
• Le chargement excessif des batteries peut raccourcir leur durée de vie.
A la fin de chaque chargement, débranchez le cordon de l’appareil
photo.
• Ne tordez pas le cordon d’alimentation et ne placez pas d’objets lourds
dessus. Vous risquez d’endommager le cordon.
180
Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Remarques à propos de la mise en charge avec raccordement
à un ordinateur
• Utilisez uniquement le câble USB fourni.
• La mise en charge de la batterie peut s’avérer impossible quand :
- vous utilisez un concentrateur USB ;
- d’autres appareils USB sont raccordés à votre ordinateur ;
- vous connectez le câble au port situé sur la face avant de votre ordinateur ;
- le port USB de votre ordinateur ne prend pas en charge un niveau standard de
puissance en sortie (5 V, 500 mA).
Utilisez et recyclez les batteries et les chargeurs avec soin
• Ne jetez jamais les batteries au feu. Respectez la réglementation en
vigueur dans votre pays concernant l’élimination des batteries usagées.
• Ne posez jamais les batteries ou l’appareil à l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’un
dispositif chauffant, tel qu’un four à micro-ondes, une cuisinière ou un
radiateur. En cas de surchauffe, les batteries risquent d’exploser.
181
Annexes
Avant de contacter un centre de service
Si l’appareil photo ne fonctionne pas correctement, vérifiez les éléments
suivants avant de contacter le service après-vente.
Lorsque vous apportez l’appareil photo dans un centre de service, veillez
également à fournir les autres composants qui ont pu contribuer au
dysfonctionnement, notamment la carte mémoire et la batterie.
Problème Solutions possibles
Impossible d’allumer
l’appareil photo
• Assurez-vous que la batterie est installée.
• Assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement
installée.
• Mettez la batterie en charge.
L’appareil photo
s’éteint de façon
inattendue.
• Mettez la batterie en charge.
• Votre appareil peut être réglé en mode
Economie d’énergie ou configuré afin que
l’écran s’éteigne automatiquement. (p. 153)
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo s’éteigne
afin d’éviter que la carte mémoire ne soit
endommagée en raison d’une chaleur
excessive. Rallumez l’appareil photo.
La batterie de
l’appareil photo se
décharge rapidement.
• La batterie peut se décharger plus rapidement
dans un environnement où les températures
sont basses (en dessous de 0 °C). Gardez la
batterie au chaud en la plaçant dans votre
poche.
• L’utilisation du flash et l’enregistrement de
vidéos déchargent rapidement la batterie.
Rechargez-la si nécessaire.
• La batterie est un consommable qui a une
durée de vie limitée et qui doit périodiquement
être remplacé. Remplacez-la si son autonomie
diminue rapidement.
Problème Solutions possibles
Impossible de prendre
des photos
• La carte mémoire est pleine. Supprimez les fichiers
inutiles ou insérez une nouvelle carte mémoire.
• Formatez la carte mémoire.
• La carte mémoire est défectueuse. Remplacez-la.
• La carte mémoire est verrouillée. Déverrouillez
la carte. (p. 173)
• Assurez-vous que l’appareil photo est allumé.
• Mettez la batterie en charge.
• Assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement
installée.
L’appareil photo ne
répond pas. Retirez la batterie, puis replacez-la.
L’appareil photo
chauffe.
Il est possible que l’appareil photo chauffe en cours
d’utilisation. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte
pas la durée de vie ou les performances de l’appareil.
Le flash se déclenche
de façon inattendue.
L’électricité statique peut provoquer le
déclenchement du flash. Il ne s’agit pas d’un
dysfonctionnement de l’appareil photo.
Le flash ne fonctionne
pas.
• Le flash est peut-être réglé sur Arrêt. (p. 94)
• Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le flash dans
certains modes.
La date et l’heure ne
sont pas correctes. Régler la date et l’heure dans le menu q. (p. 153)
L’écran ou des touches
ne fonctionnent pas. Retirez la batterie, puis replacez-la.
182
Annexes > Avant de contacter un centre de service
Problème Solutions possibles
La carte mémoire
présente une erreur.
• Eteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le.
• Retirez la carte mémoire, puis insérez-la de
nouveau.
• Formatez la carte mémoire.
Voir « Précautions d’utilisation des cartes
mémoire » pour en savoir plus. (p. 176)
L’ordinateur ne
reconnaît pas une
carte mémoire SDXC
ou UHS-1
Les cartes mémoire SDXC utilisent le système de
fichiers exFAT. Pour utiliser des cartes mémoire
SDXC ou UHS-1 formatées avec le système de
fichiers exFAT sur un ordinateur Windows XP,
téléchargez et effectuez la mise à jour du pilote
du système de fichiers exFAT à partir du site Web
Microsoft.
Le téléviseur ou
l’ordinateur ne peut
pas afficher les photos
et les vidéos stockées
sur une carte mémoire
SDXC ou UHS-1
Les cartes mémoire SDXC utilisent le système de
fichiers exFAT. Pour utiliser des cartes mémoire
SDXC ou UHS-1 formatées avec le système de
fichiers exFAT, assurez-vous que le périphérique
externe est compatible avec le système de fichiers
exFAT avant de raccorder l’appareil photo au
périphérique.
Impossible d’afficher
des fichiers.
Si vous modifiez le nom d’un fichier, l’appareil
photo risque de ne plus pouvoir le lire (le nom
des fichiers doit être conforme à la norme DCF).
Si vous rencontrez ce problème, affichez le fichier
sur un ordinateur.
La photo est floue.
• Assurez-vous d’avoir réglé l’option de mise au
point appropriée pour le type de prise de vue.
• Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil.
• S’assurer que l’objectif est propre. Dans le cas
contraire, le nettoyer. (p. 170)
Problème Solutions possibles
Les couleurs
de la photo ne
correspondent pas à
celles de la scène
Un réglage incorrect de la balance des blancs
peut provoquer un mauvais rendu des couleurs.
Sélectionner l’option Balance des blancs
appropriée à la source de lumière. (p. 76)
La photo est trop
claire ou trop sombre.
Votre photo est sur-exposée ou sous-exposée.
• Réglez la valeur d’ouverture ou la vitesse
d’obturation.
• Régler la sensibilité ISO. (p. 75)
• Activez ou désactivez le flash. (p. 94)
• Régler la valeur d’exposition. (p. 102)
Les photos sont
déformées.
L’objectif grand-angle, qui permet de
photographier avec un angle de vision étendu,
peut générer de très légères déformations de
la photo. Ceci est normal et n’engendre pas de
dysfonctionnement.
L’écran de lecture ne
s’affiche pas sur le
périphérique externe
connecté.
• Vérifiez qu’un câble HDMI est correctement
branché sur l’écran externe.
• Assurez-vous que la carte mémoire est
reconnue.
L’ordinateur ne
reconnaît pas
l’appareil photo.
• Vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement
branché.
• Assurez-vous que l’appareil photo est allumé.
• Assurez-vous d’utiliser un système
d’exploitation compatible.
L’appareil photo
se déconnecte de
l’ordinateur pendant
le transfert des
fichiers.
L’électricité statique peut interrompre la
transmission des fichiers. Débranchez le câble
USB, puis rebranchez-le.
183
Annexes > Avant de contacter un centre de service
Problème Solutions possibles
L’ordinateur ne
parvient pas à lire des
vidéos
Il est possible que les vidéos ne puissent pas
être lues sur certains lecteurs vidéo. Pour lire
les fichiers vidéo enregistrés par votre appareil
photo, utilisez le programme Multimedia Viewer
que vous pouvez installer à l’aide de l’application
i-Launcher située sur votre ordinateur.
i-Launcher ne
s’exécute pas
correctement
• Quittez i-Launcher et redémarrez l’application.
• Selon la configuration et l’environnement de
votre ordinateur, il est possible que l’application
ne démarre pas automatiquement. Si tel
est le cas, cliquez sur démarrer ĺ Tous les
programmes ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher ĺ
Samsung i-Launcher sur votre ordinateur
Windows. (Pour Windows 8, ouvrez l’écran
d’accueil, puis sélectionnez All apps (Toutes
les applications) ĺ Samsung i-Launcher.)
Ou, cliquez sur Applications ĺ Samsung ĺ
i-Launcher sur un ordinateur Mac OS.
Impossible de
configurer la fonction
DPOF pour les fichiers
RAW.
Vous ne pouvez pas régler la fonction DPOF pour
les fichiers RAW.
La fonction de mise au
point automatique ne
fonctionne pas.
• La mise au point ne s’effectue pas sur le sujet.
Lorsque le sujet se trouve en dehors de la
zone de mise au point automatique, placez-le
à l’intérieur de cette zone, puis enfoncez le
[Déclencheur] à mi-course.
• Le sujet est trop proche. Eloignez-vous-vous du
sujet et prenez la photo.
• Le mode de mise au point est réglé sur Mise au
point manuelle. Passez en mode Mise au point
automatique.
Problème Solutions possibles
La fonction de
verrouillage AEL ne
fonctionne pas.
La fonction AEL ne fonctionne pas avec les modes
t, M, i et s. Pour utiliser cette fonction,
sélectionner un autre mode.
L’objectif est
inopérant.
• Vérifiez que l’objectif est correctement installé.
• Retirer l’objectif de l’appareil photo et le
réinstaller.
Le flash externe ou
le GPS ne fonctionne
pas.
Vérifiez que le flash externe est correctement
installé et allumé.
Lorsque vous allumez
l’appareil photo,
l’écran de réglage de
la date et de l’heure
s’affiche
• Réglez de nouveau la date et l’heure.
• Cet écran apparaît lorsque la source
d’alimentation interne de l’appareil photo
est complètement déchargée. Insérez une
batterie pleine puis éteignez l’appareil photo
pendant 72 heures au moins afin d’assurer un
rechargement complet.
184
Annexes
Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Capteur d’images
Type CMOS
Dimensions du capteur 23,5 X 15,7 mm
Pixels effectifs Environ 20,3 mégapixels
Nombre total de pixels Environ 21,6 mégapixels
Filtre couleur Filtre RGB couleurs primaires
Monture de l’objectif
Type Monture Samsung NX
Objectif disponible Objectifs Samsung
Stabilisation de l’image
Type Décentrement (dépend de l’objectif)
Mode Désactivé / Mode 1 / Mode 2
Correction des déformations
Activé / Désactivé (dépend de l’objectif)
i-Function
E, Z (X1.2, 1.4, 1.7, 2.0)
Réduction de la poussière
Type Commande ultra-rapide
Écran
Type AMOLED avec le panneau tactile (panneau
tactile type C activé)
Taille 3,31" (Environ 84,0 mm)
Résolution WVGA (800X480) 768 000 pixels (PenTile)
Champ de vision Environ 100 %
Angle Inclinable (90° vers le haut, 45° vers le bas)
Affichage utilisateur Grille, Icônes, Histogramme, Échelle de distance,
Indicateur de niveau
Mise au point
Type Détection de phase et M. au P. contraste
Foyer de mise au point
automatique
• Total points AF : 105 points (mise au point à
détection de phase), 247 points (mise au point
à mesure du contraste)
• Sélection : 1 point (sélection libre)
• Multiple : Normale 21 (3 X 7) points (croisée 1),
Macro 35 points
• Détection des visages : 10 visages max.
Mode AF unique, AF continu, Mise au point manuelle,
Mise au point tactile et Déclencheur
Lampe d’assistance
de mise au point
automatique
LED verte
185
Annexes > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Obturateur
Type Obturateur à plan focal vertical à contrôle
électronique
Vitesse
• Automatique : 1/6 000 à 30 s
• Manuel : 1/6 000 à 30 s (Palier 1/3 EV)
• Bulb (durée limitée : 4 min)
Exposition
Système de mesure de
l’exposition
TTL 221 (17 X 13) segment bloc
Mesure de l’exposition : Multiple, Centrée,
Sélective
Plage de mesures : EV 0 à 18 (ISO100 · 30 mm, F2)
Compensation ±3 EV (Palier 1/3 EV)
Verrouillage AE Touche CUSTOM
Équivalent ISO
• 1 palier : Automatique, ISO 100, ISO 200,
ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200, ISO 6400,
ISO 12800, ISO 25600
• 1/3 palier : Automatique, ISO 100, ISO 125,
ISO 160, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400,
ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250,
ISO 1600, ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200,
ISO 4000, ISO 5000, ISO 6400, ISO 8000,
ISO 10000, ISO 12800, ISO 16000, ISO 20000,
ISO 25600
Mode de sélection
Mode
Unique, Continue, Mode Rafale (5M uniquement),
Retardateur, Bracketing (Exposition automatique,
Bal. des blancs, Assistant photo)
Prises de vue en
continu
• JPEG : Elevé (8,6 ips), Normal (5 ips)
• RAW : Elevé (8,6 ips), Normal (5 ips)
Rafale
• 10, 15 ou 30 images par seconde
• Jusqu’à 30 photos par pression sur le
déclencheur
Prise de vue Bracketing
Bracketing Exposition automatique (±3 EV),
Bracketing Balance des blancs,
Bracketing Assistant photo
Retardateur à distance 2 à 30 s (intervalle d’ 1 seconde)
Déclenchement de
l’obturateur SR2NX02 (via le port micro-USB) (en option)
Flash
Type Flash externe (livré avec SEF8A)
Mode
Flash intelligent, Automatique,
Yeux rouges auto, Contre jour,
Ctre jour + Yeux rouges, 1er Rideau,
2e Rideau, Arrêt
Nombre guide 8 (selon ISO 100) (SEF8A)
Angle de vue 28 mm (équivalent au format 35 mm)
Vitesse de
synchronisation Inférieure à 1/180 s.
186
Annexes > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Flash EV -2 à +2 EV (Palier 0,5 EV)
Flash externe Flash externes Samsung en option :
SEF42A, SEF220A
Terminal de
synchronisation Griffe porte-accessoire
Balance des blancs
Mode
Bal. des blancs auto, Lumière du jour, Nuageux,
Blanc fluorescent, Blanc/Noir fluorescent,
Lumière du jour fluorescent, Tungstène,
Bal.Blancs flash, Réglage personnalisé,
Température couleur (Manuel)
Ajustement micro Orange / Bleu / Vert / Magenta 7 paliers
respectivement
Plage dynamique
Arrêt / Plage intelligente+ / HDR
Assistant photo
Mode
Standard, Accentué, Portrait, Paysage, Naturel,
Rétro, Cool, Calme, Classique, Personnalisé 1,
Personnalisé 2, Personnalisé 3
Paramètres Couleur, Saturation, Netteté, Contraste
Prise de vue
Mode
Scènes Automatique, Programme, Priorité
ouverture, Priorité vitesse, Manuel,
Priorité de l’objectif, Intelligent
Mode Intelligent
Beauté, Meilleures poses, Paysage, Macro,
Action, Ton riche, Panorama, Cascade, Silhouette,
Coucher de soleil, Nuit, Feux d'artifice, Lumière,
Photo créative
Filtre intelligent
Vignettage, Miniature, Crayon de couleur,
Aquarelle, Dessin au lavis, Esquisse à l'huile,
Esquisse à l'encre, Acrylique, Négatif, Rouge, Vert,
Bleu, Jaune
Taille
• JPEG (3:2) : 20.0M (5472X3648),
10.1M (3888X2592), 5.9M (2976X1984),
5.0M (2736X1824) (mode Rafale uniquement),
2.0M (1728X1152)
• JPEG (16:9) : 16.9M (5472X3080),
7.8M (3712X2088), 4.9M (2944X1656),
2.1M (1920X1080)
• JPEG (1:1) : 13.3M (3648X3648),
7.0M (2640X2640), 4.0M (2000X2000),
1.1M (1024X1024)
• RAW : 20.0M (5472X3648)
* Le mode 3D avec l’objectif 3D est uniquement
disponible avec JPEG (16:9) 4.1M (2688X1512) ou
2.1M (1920X1080).
Qualité Maximale, Elevée, Normale
RAW standard SRW (ver.2.0.0)
Espace colorimétrique sRGB, RGB Adobe
187
Annexes > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Vidéo
Type MP4 (H.264)
Format Vidéo : H.264, Audio : AAC
Mode Vidéo AE Programme, Priorité ouverture,
Priorité vitesse, Manuel
Clip vidéo Son activé / désactivé (durée de prise de vue :
jusqu’à 29’ 59’’)
Filtre intelligent
Vignettage, Miniature, Crayon de couleur,
Aquarelle, Dessin au lavis, Esquisse à l'huile,
Esquisse à l'encre, Acrylique, Négatif, Rouge, Vert,
Bleu, Jaune
Taille 1920X1080, 1920X810, 1280X720, 640X480,
320X240 (Pour partager)
Fréquence d’images
60 ips, 30 ips, 24 ips (disponibles uniquement
avec 1920X810), 15 ips (disponible uniquement
avec certaines options de filtre intelligent)
Multi-mouvements
x0.25 (640X480, 320X240 uniquement),
x0.5 (1280X720 (30 ips), 640X480,
320X240 uniquement), x1, x5, x10, x20
Qualité Haute qualité, Normale
Son Stéréo
Retouche Découpage de la durée, Capture d’images fixes
Lecture
Type Image unique, Miniatures (15/28), Diaporama,
Vidéo
Retouche Filtre intelligent, Redimensionner, Rotation,
Retouche des visages, Luminosité, Contraste
Filtre intelligent
Vignettage, Miniature, Crayon de couleur,
Aquarelle, Dessin au lavis, Esquisse à l'huile,
Esquisse à l'encre, Acrylique, Négatif, Rouge, Vert,
Bleu, Jaune
Dimensions du filtre
intelligent
• JPEG (3:2) : 5.9M (2976X1984),
5.0M (2736X1824), 2.0M (1728X1152)
• JPEG (16:9) : 6.2M (3328X1872),
4.9M (2944X1656), 2.1M (1920X1080)
• JPEG (1:1) : 6.0M (2448X2448),
4.0M (2000X2000), 1.1M (1024X1024)
Stockage
Support
Mémoire externe (en option)* :
carte SD (2 Go garantis),
carte SDHC (jusqu’à 32 Go garantis),
carte SDXC (jusqu’à 64 Go garantis), carte UHS-1
* Classe 6 et ultérieure recommandée
Format de fichiers RAW (SRW (ver.2.0.0)), JPEG (EXIF 2.21),
MPO (3D), DCF, DPOF 1.1
GPS
Type Marquage géographique avec module GPS en
option (WGS 84)
Fonction Nom de l’emplacement (anglais et coréen
uniquement)
188
Annexes > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Réseau sans fil
Type IEEE 802.11b/g/n prise en charge double bande
Fonction
MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Sauvegarde
automatique, Courriel, Réseaux sociaux et Cloud,
AllShare Play, AutoShare, Wi-Fi Direct
NFC
Oui
Interface
Sortie numérique USB 2.0 (prise micro-USB)
Sortie vidéo • NTSC, PAL (possibilité de sélection)
• HDMI 1.4a
Déclenchement
externe Oui (micro-USB)
Microphone externe Oui
Connecteur
d’alimentation CC CC 5,0 V, 1 A via micro-USB
Source d'alimentation’Source d'alimentation
Type
Batterie rechargeable : BP1130 (1 130 mAh)
* La source d’alimentation peut varier en fonction de
votre zone géographique.
Dimensions (L x H x P)
122 x 63,7 x 40,7 mm (hors parties saillantes)
Poids
284 g (sans batterie, ni carte mémoire)
Température de fonctionnement
0 à 40 °C
Humidité ambiante tolérée
5 à 85 %
Logiciels
i-Launcher, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
* Afin d’améliorer les performances, les caractéristiques peuvent être modifiées sans préavis.
* Toutes les marques de commerce et noms de produits appartiennent à leurs détenteurs
respectifs.
189
Annexes
Glossaire
AP (Point d’accès)
Un point d’accès est un appareil qui permet aux appareils sans fil de se
connecter à un réseau câblé.
Réseau Ad-Hoc
Un réseau ad-hoc est une connexion temporaire permettant de partager
des fichiers ou une connexion Internet entre des ordinateurs et des
appareils.
AdobeRGB
Adobe RGB est utilisé pour des impressions professionnelles et dispose
d’une gamme de couleurs plus importante que sRGB. Sa gamme de
couleurs plus importante vous permet de modifier facilement des photos
sur un ordinateur.
AEB (Prise de vue en fourchette avec réglage automatique)
Cette fonctionnalité permet de prendre automatiquement plusieurs
photos avec différentes expositions afin de vous aider à obtenir une
exposition correcte.
AEL / AFL (Verrouillage de l’exposition automatique /
Verrouillage de la mise au point automatique)
Ces fonctions vous permettent de verrouiller l’exposition ou la mise au
point pour les calculer.
AF (Mise au point automatique)
Système qui permet d’effectuer une mise au point automatique sur le
sujet. L’appareil photo se base sur le contraste pour opérer la mise au point
automatique.
AMOLED (Matrice active à diodes organiques
électroluminescentes) / LCD (Ecran à cristaux liquides)
L’écran AMOLED est très fin et très léger car il ne nécessite aucun
rétroéclaraige. L’écran LCD est couramment utilisé dans le secteur de
l’électronique grand public. Ce type d’écran nécessite un rétroéclairage
séparé, de type CCFL ou LED, pour reproduire les couleurs.
Ouverture
L’ouverture contrôle la quantité de lumière atteignant le capteur de
l’appareil photo.
190
Annexes > Glossaire
Composition
En photographie, ce terme signifie la disposition des éléments d’une
scène. En règle générale, une bonne composition doit obéir à la règle des
tiers.
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)
Spécification créée par la Japan Electronics and Information Technology
Industries Association (JEITA) qui définit le format et le système de fichiers
pour les appareils photo.
Profondeur de champ
Zone de netteté acceptable entre le point de mise au point le plus proche
et le plus éloigné. Elle est variable selon la focale et l’ouverture utilisées,
ainsi que la distance entre l’appareil photo et le sujet. Avec, par exemple,
une ouverture inférieure, la profondeur de champ augmente et l’arrièreplan
de la composition devient flou.
DPOF (Format de commande d’impression numérique)
Format de commande d’impression numérique qui permet de sélectionner
les images ou le nombre de copies sur une carte mémoire. Les appareils
photo compatibles DPOF sont capables de lire les informations stockées
sur une carte, ce qui facilite l’impression.
Bougé de l’appareil photo (flou)
Si vous bougez l’appareil photo alors que l’obturateur est ouvert, l’image
risque d’être floue. Cela est plus fréquent si la vitesse de l’obturateur est
lente. Vous pouvez éviter cela en augmentant la sensibilité, en utilisant le
flash ou en augmentant la vitesse de l’obturateur. Pour stabiliser l’appareil
photo, vous pouvez également utiliser un trépied ou la fonction OIS.
Informatique dans les nuages
L’informatique dans les nuages (ou Cloud Computing) est une technologie
permettant de stocker des données sur des serveurs distants et de les
utiliser à partir d’un appareil distant via un accès Internet.
Espace colorimétrique
Gamme de couleurs visibles par l’appareil photo.
Température de couleur
La température de couleur est une mesure exprimée en kelvins (K) qui
indique la tonalité chromatique d’un type spécifique de source lumineuse.
Lorsque la température de couleur augmente, la couleur de la source
lumineuse devient bleutée. Lorsque la température de couleur diminue, la
couleur de la source lumineuse devient rougeâtre. A 5 500 degrés Kelvin,
la couleur de la source lumineuse est similaire celle de la lumière du soleil
à midi.
191
Annexes > Glossaire
Flash
Lumière brève et intense qui permet de créer une exposition adéquate
lorsque la luminosité est faible.
Longueur de focale
Distance entre le centre de l’objectif et son point focal (en millimètres).
Des longueurs de focales plus importantes réduisent les angles de vue et
agrandissent le sujet. Des longueurs de focales moins élevées agrandissent
les angles de vue.
Histogramme
Représentation graphique de la luminosité d’une image. L’axe horizontal
représente la luminosité et l’axe vertical le nombre de pixels. Des points à
l’extrême gauche (trop sombre) ou à l’extrême droite (trop clair) signifient
que la photo n’est pas correctement exposée.
H.264/MPEG-4
Format vidéo à compression élevée mis au point par les organismes
internationaux de normalisation ISO-IEC et ITU-T. Ce codec permet
d’obtenir une bonne qualité vidéo avec des débits binaires faibles
développés par la Joint Video Team (JVT).
EV (Valeur d’exposition)
Ensemble des combinaisons de vitesses de l’obturateur et d’ouverture de
l’objectif pour une même exposition.
Compensation EV
Cette fonctionnalité vous permet de régler rapidement la valeur
d’exposition mesurée par l’appareil photo, selon des incréments restreints,
afin d’améliorer l’exposition de vos photos.
Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format)
Spécification créée par la Japan Electronic Industries Development
Association (JEIDA) qui définit le format de fichiers pour les appareils
photo.
Exposition
Quantité de lumière atteignant le capteur de l’appareil photo. L’exposition
est contrôlée par la vitesse de l’obturateur, la valeur d’ouverture et la
sensibilité ISO.
192
Annexes > Glossaire
Mesure de l’exposition
Correspond à la manière dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de
lumière nécessaire à la définition de l’exposition.
MF (M.P. manuelle)
Système qui permet d’effectuer une mise au point manuellement sur le
sujet. Vous pouvez utiliser la bague de mise au point pour effectuer la mise
au point sur un sujet.
MJPEG (Motion JPEG)
Format vidéo avec une compression d’images JPEG.
MPO (Multi Picture Object)
Format de fichier d’image qui compile plusieurs images au sein d’un même
fichier. Un fichier MPO assure un effet 3D sur les écrans compatibles MPO,
tels que les téléviseurs et les moniteurs 3D.
Capteur d’image
Partie physique de l’appareil photo qui comporte une cellule
photosensible pour chaque pixel de l’image. Chaque cellule photosensible
enregistre la valeur de la luminosité d’une exposition. Il existe deux types
de capteurs : CCD (Charge-coupled Device) et CMOS (Complementary
Metal Oxide Semiconductor).
Adresse IP (Protocole Internet)
Une adresse IP est un nombre unique affecté à chacun des appareils
raccordés à Internet.
Sensibilité ISO
Sensibilité de l’appareil photo à la lumière basée sur la sensibilité du film
utilisé dans l’appareil photo. A une sensibilité ISO élevée, la vitesse de
l’obturateur de l’appareil photo est plus grande, ce qui réduit le flou causé
par le bougé de l’appareil ou une luminosité insuffisante. Toutefois, avec
une sensibilité plus élevée, le risque de parasites est également plus grand.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
Méthode de compression des images numériques avec pertes. Les images
JPEG sont compressées afin de réduire la taille de leur fichier avec une
dégradation minimale de la résolution.
193
Annexes > Glossaire
PAL (Phase Alternate Line)
Norme d’encodage couleur vidéo utilisée dans de nombreux pays
d’Afrique, d’Asie, d’Europe et du Moyen-Orient.
Qualité
Expression du taux de compression d’une image numérique. Lorsque la
qualité de l’image est élevée, le taux de compression est bas et la taille du
fichier plus importante.
RAW (Données raw CCD)
Données originales non traitées, capturées directement par le capteur
d’images de l’appareil photo. La balance des blancs, le contraste, la
saturation, la netteté et d’autres données peuvent être modifiées avec le
logiciel de retouche avant que l’image ne soit compressée dans un format
de fichier standard.
Résolution
Nombre de pixels d’une image numérique. Les images à résolution élevée
comportent plus de pixels et présentent généralement davantage de
détails que les images avec une faible résolution.
Parasite
Problème d’affichage des pixels sur une image numérique (pixels mal
placés, aléatoires ou lumineux). Des parasites peuvent apparaître si les
photos sont prises avec une sensibilité trop élevée ou avec un réglage de
sensibilité automatique dans un environnement sombre.
NFC (Near Field Communication)
La communication en champ proche (en anglais Near Field
Communication) est une technologie de communication sans-fil à courte
portée. Vous pouvez utiliser des appareils compatibles NFC pour activer
des fonctions ou échanger des données avec d’autres appareils.
NTSC (National Television System Committee)
Norme d’encodage couleur vidéo habituellement utilisée au Japon, en
Amérique du Nord, aux Philippines, en Amérique du Sud, en Corée du Sud
et à Taïwan.
Zoom optique
Zoom qui permet d’agrandir les images à l’aide de l’objectif sans dégrader
la qualité des images.
194
Annexes > Glossaire
Vitesse d’obturation
La vitesse d’obturation est définie par la durée nécessaire à l’ouverture et
à la fermeture de l’obturateur. Dans le cadre de la luminosité d’une photo,
la vitesse d’obturation constitue un facteur important car elle contrôle la
quantité de lumière qui passe à travers l’ouverture avant d’atteindre le
capteur d’images. Par ailleurs, une vitesse d’obturation rapide laisse moins
de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer. La photo devient plus sombre et
immobilise plus facilement un sujet en mouvement.
sRGB (RGB standard)
Norme internationale de l’espace colorimétrique établie par la CEI
(Commission électrotechnique internationale). Elle est définie d’après
l’espace colorimétrique des écrans d’ordinateur et est également utilisée
comme espace colorimétrique standard pour Exif.
Vignettage
Réduction de la luminosité ou de la saturation d’une image à sa périphérie
(bords externes). Cela permet de mettre en évidence les sujets positionnés
au centre de l’image.
Balance des blancs (équilibre des couleurs)
Réglage de l’intensité des couleurs (généralement les couleurs primaires
comme le rouge, le vert et le bleu) d’une image. L’objectif est un rendu
exact des couleurs.
Wi-Fi
La technologie Wi-Fi permet aux appareils électroniques d’échanger des
données sans fil via un réseau.
WPS (Configuration Wi-Fi protégée)
WPS est une technologie permettant de sécuriser les réseaux domestiques
sans fil.
195
Annexes
Accessoires en option
Objectif
SAMSUNG 18-55 mm
F3.5-5.6 OIS III
SAMSUNG 20-50 mm
F3.5-5.6 ED II
SAMSUNG 16 mm F2.4 SAMSUNG 20 mm F2.8
SAMSUNG 30 mm F2 SAMSUNG 50-200 mm
F4-5.6 ED OIS III
SAMSUNG 60 mm F2.8
Macro ED OIS SSA
SAMSUNG 18-200 mm
F3.5-6.3 ED OIS
Objectif
SAMSUNG 85 mm F1.4 ED SSA SAMSUNG 12-24 mm F4-5.6 ED
SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 [T6] 2D/3D
Flash externe
SEF42A SEF220A
GPS
GPS10
196
Annexes > Accessoires en option
Déclenchement de l'obturateur
(type micro-USB) Microphone
SR2NX02 EM10
Batterie rechargeable Chargeur de batterie
BP1130 BC3NX01
Etui Etui de l’appareil photo
Carte mémoire Filtre
Câble USB Câble HDMI
Dragonne
• Ces illustrations peuvent différer par rapport au produit fourni. Pour plus
d’informations, reportez-vous aux modes d’emploi de ces accessoires en
option.
• Utilisez uniquement des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Samsung
décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages causés par l’utilisation
d’accessoires fournis par d’autres fabricants.
197
Annexes
A
Accessoires en option
Description du module GPS 51
Mise en place du flash 49
Mise en place du module GPS 51
Présentation du flash 48
Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 167
Agrandissement 113
AllShare Play 141
Appareil photo
Connexion au PC 160
Connexion en tant que disque
amovible 160
Déconnexion (Windows) 161
Présentation 30
Assistance à la mise au point 88
Assistant photo 79
B
Balance des blancs 76
Batterie
Attention 177
En charge 34
Insérer 33
Bracketing 92
C
Caractéristiques de l’appareil
photo 184
Carte mémoire
Attention 173
Insérer 33
Centre de service 181
Contenu du coffret 29
D
Date & heure 153
Déclenchement par sélection 87
Diaporama 113
DIRECT LINK 32
DPOF (format de commande
d’impression numérique) 114
E
Ecran tactile 36
Effet yeux rouges 95
En charge 34
Entretien 170
Espace colorimétrique 148
F
Fichiers
Protection 110
Suppression 111
Type de photo 74
Type de vidéo 104
Filtre intelligent
Mode Lecture 121
Mode Prise de vue 101
Flash
Intensité 95
Nombre guide 26
Options du Flash 94
Prise de vue avec flash indirect 27
Focus Peaking 88
Fondu 105
I
Icônes
Mode Lecture 42
Mode Prise de vue 40
i-Function 61
i-Launcher 163
L
Longueur de focale 21
Luminosité 152
M
Mesure de l’exposition 97
Miniatures 108
Minuterie 91
Mise au point automatique 80
Mise au point avec suivi 86
Mise au point tactile 86
MobileLink 129
Mode 3D 69
Mode Economie d’énergie 153
Mode Meilleures poses 65
Mode Panorama 66
Index
198
Annexes > Index
Modes de prise de vue
Enregistrement 68
Intelligent 64
Manuel 59
Priorité déclencheur 58
Priorité de l’objectif 60
Priorité ouverture 57
Programme 55
Scènes automatiques 53
N
Nombre-F 16
O
Objectifs
Déverrouillage 46
Disposition 44
Marquages 47
Verrouillage 45
Ouverture 16, 20
P
Panneau intelligent 38
Paramètres 152
Photos
Affichage sur l’appareil photo 108
Agrandissement 113
Options de prise de vue 73
Retouche 117
Visionnage sur un téléviseur 3D 159
Visionnage sur un téléviseur HD 158
Pivotement 118
Posture 13
Prise de vue 90
Profondeur de champ (DoF) 17, 22
R
Réglage de l’image
Réglage des photos 119
Retouche de visages 120
Règle des tiers 24
Remote Viewfinder 131
Réseau sans fil 123
Résolution
Mode Lecture 118
Mode Prise de vue (photo) 73
Mode Prise de vue (vidéo) 104
Retouche de visages 120
S
Sauvegarde automatique 133
Sensibilité ISO 75
Stabilisation optique de l’image
(OIS, Optical Image
Stabilization) 89
T
Téléviseur 158
Transfert de fichiers
Mac 161
Windows 160
Type d’affichage 43
V
Valeur d’exposition (EV) 16, 102
Vidéo 153
Vidéos
Enregistrement 68
Options 104
Prise de vue 116
Visionnage 115
Vitesse d'obturation 18
Vitesse obturateur 20
199
Annexes
Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit
(Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques)
(Applicable aux pays disposant de systèmes de collecte séparés)
Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique
que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur,
casque audio, câble USB, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres
déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets présentant
des risques environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer
vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets. Vous favoriserez
ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un
développement durable.
Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le
produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître
les procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur
recyclage.
Les entreprises et particuliers sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs
et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses
accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets.
Elimination des batteries de ce produit
(Applicable aux pays disposant de systèmes de collecte séparés)
Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l'emballage indique que les
batteries de ce produit ne doivent pas être éliminées en fin de vie avec les
autres déchets ménagers. L'indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques
Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure,
de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés
dans la directive CE 2006/66. Si les batteries ne sont pas correctement
éliminées, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou
à l'environnement.
Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et d'encourager la réutilisation
du matériel, veillez à séparer les batteries des autres types de déchets et à
les recycler via votre système local de collecte gratuite des batteries.
CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)
200
ATTENTION
RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACÉE PAR
UNE BATTERIE DE TYPE INCORRECT.
TRAITEZ LES BATTERIES USAGÉES SUIVANT LES INSTRUCTIONS.
Son utilisation est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférence nuisible et
(2) Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interférences reçues, y
compris celles qui peuvent entraîner un fonctionnement indésirable.
Attention:
Tout modification de l’équipement non expressément validée par la
partie responsable de la conformité pourraient annuler le droit de
l’utilisateur à faire fonctionner l’équipement.
IC: 649E-NX300
Cet équipement peut fonctionner dans tous les pays de l’Union
européenne.
En France, toutefois, il ne peut être utilisé qu’à l’intérieur.
201
Pour les utilisateurs résidant en France
Service Consommateur
Contact téléphonique :
Du lundi au samedi de 9 h à 20 h
01 48 63 00 00
Adresse postale :
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS FRANCE
ZI Paris Nord II, BP 50116
95950 Roissy CDG FRANCE
202
Pour les utilisateurs résidant au Canada
SERVICE À LA CLIENTÈLE
Téléphone :
Du lundi au vendredi de 8 h 30 à 20 h (heure normale de l'Est)
1 800 726-7864
Adresse postale :
Samsung Electronics Canada Inc.
55 Standish Court, 10th Floor
Mississauga ON
L5R 4B2
Pour toute question ou demande de service après-vente, veuillez consulter les
conditions de garantie accompagnant votre produit ou rendez-vous sur le
www.samsung.fr ou www.samsung.ca
USER
MANUAL
ENG This user manual includes detailed usage instructions
for your camera. Please read this manual thoroughly.
1
Copyright information
• Camera specifications or contents of this manual may be changed
without prior notice due to upgrade of camera functions.
• You are not allowed to reuse or distribute any part of this manual
without prior permission.
• We recommend using your camera within the country where you
purchase it.
• Use this camera responsibly and adhere to all laws and regulations
concerning its use.
PlanetFirst represents Samsung Electronics' commitment to
sustainable development and social responsibility through
eco-driven business and management activities.
• Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of
the Microsoft Corporation.
• Mac and Apple App Store are registered trademarks of the Apple
Corporation.
• Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google, Inc.
• Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photoshop, and Lightroom are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries.
• microSD™, microSDHC™, and microSDXC™ are registered trademarks of
the SD Association.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo, and the term "High
Definition Multimedia Interface" are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
• Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered
trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
• Trademarks and trade names used in this manual are the property of
their respective owners.
2
Health and safety information
Prevent damage to subjects’ eyesight.
Do not use the flash in close proximity (closer than 1 m/3 ft) to people or
animals. If you use the flash too close to your subject’s eyes, this can cause
temporary or permanent eyesight damage.
Keep your camera away from small children and pets.
Keep your camera and all accessories out of the reach of small children
and animals. Small parts may cause choking or serious injury if swallowed.
Moving parts and accessories may present physical dangers as well.
Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight or high
temperatures for an extended period of time.
Prolonged exposure to sunlight or extreme temperatures can cause
permanent damage to your camera’s internal components.
Avoid covering the camera or charger with blankets or clothes.
The camera may overheat, which may distort the camera or cause a fire.
Do not handle the power supply cord or the charger during a
thunderstorm.
This may result in an electric shock.
Always comply with the following precautions and usage tips to avoid
dangerous situations and ensure peak performance of your camera.
Warning—situations that could cause injury to yourself
or others
Do not disassemble or attempt to repair your camera.
You can damage the camera and expose yourself to the risk of an electric
shock.
Do not use your camera near flammable or explosive gases
and liquids.
This may cause a fire or explosion.
Do not insert flammable materials into the camera or store
these materials near the camera.
This may cause a fire or electric shock.
Do not handle your camera with wet hands.
This may result in an electric shock.
3
Health and safety information
If liquid or foreign objects enter your camera, immediately
disconnect all power sources, such as the battery or charger,
and then contact a Samsung service center.
Comply with any regulations that restrict the use of a camera
in a certain area.
• Avoid interference with other electronic devices.
• Turn off the camera when in an aircraft. Your camera can cause
interference with aircraft equipment. Follow all airline regulations and
turn off your camera when directed by airline personnel.
• Turn off the camera near medical equipment. Your camera can interfere
with medical equipment in hospitals or health care facilities. Follow all
regulations, posted warnings, and directions from medical personnel.
Avoid interference with pacemakers.
Maintain a safe distance between this camera and all pacemakers to
avoid potential interference, as recommended by the manufacturer and
research groups. If you have any reason to suspect that your camera is
interfering with a pacemaker or other medical device, turn off the camera
immediately and contact the manufacturer of the pacemaker or medical
device for guidance.
Caution—situations that could cause damage to your
camera or other equipment
Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an
extended period of time.
Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious
damage to your camera.
Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended,
Lithium-ion replacement batteries. Do not damage or heat the
battery.
Inauthentic, damaged, or heated batteries may cause a fire or personal
injury.
Use only Samsung-approved batteries, chargers, cables, and
accessories.
• Using unauthorized batteries, chargers, cables, or accessories can cause
batteries to explode, damage your camera, or cause injury.
• Samsung is not responsible for damage or injuries caused by
unapproved batteries, chargers, cables, or accessories.
Use the battery only for its intended purpose.
Misusing the battery may cause a fire or electric shock.
4
Health and safety information
Do not touch the flash while it fires.
The flash is very hot when fired and may burn your skin.
When you use the AC charger, turn off the camera before you
disconnect the power to the AC charger.
Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock.
Disconnect the charger from the wall socket when not in use.
Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock.
Do not use a damaged power supply cord, plug, or loose outlet
when you charge batteries.
This may cause a fire or electric shock.
Do not allow the AC charger to come in contact with the +/-
terminals on the battery.
This may cause a fire or electric shock.
Do not drop or subject the camera to strong impacts.
Doing so may damage the screen or external or internal components.
Exercise caution when you connect cables and install batteries
and memory cards.
If you force the connectors, improperly connect cables, or improperly
install batteries and memory cards, you can damage ports, connectors,
and accessories.
Keep cards with magnetic strips away from the camera case.
Information stored on the card may be damaged or erased.
Never use a damaged battery or memory card.
This may result in electric shock or camera malfunction or cause a fire.
Do not place the camera in or near magnetic fields.
Doing so may cause the camera to malfunction.
Do not use the camera if the screen is damaged.
If the glass or acrylic parts are broken, visit a Samsung service center to
have the camera repaired.
5
Health and safety information
Check that the camera is operating properly before use.
The manufacturer takes no responsibility for any loss of files or damage
that may result from camera malfunction or improper use.
You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your
camera.
If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not
responsible for any loss of data.
Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight.
This may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction.
If the camera overheats, remove the battery and allow it to
cool down.
• Prolonged usage of the camera may overheat the battery and raise
the internal temperature of the camera. If the camera stops operating,
remove the battery and allow it to cool down.
• High internal temperatures may result in noise in your photos. This is
normal and does not affect your camera’s overall performance.
Avoid interference with other electronic devices.
Your camera emits radio frequency (RF) signals that may interfere
with unshielded or improperly shielded electronic equipment, such as
pacemakers, hearing aids, medical devices, and other electronic devices in
homes or vehicles. Consult the manufacturers of your electronic devices
to solve any interference problems you experience. To prevent unwanted
interference, use only Samsung-approved devices or accessories.
Use your camera in the normal position.
Avoid contact with your camera’s internal antenna.
Data transference and your responsibilities
• Data transferred via WLAN could be leaked, so avoid transferring
sensitive data in public areas or on open networks.
• The camera manufacturer is not liable for any data transfers that infringe
on copyrights, trademarks, intellectual property laws, or public decency
ordinances.
6
Icons used in this manual
Mode indications
Mode Indication
Smart Auto t
Program P
Aperture Priority A
Shutter Priority S
Manual M
Smart s
Panorama R
Wireless network B
Icons used in this manual
Icon Function
Additional information
Safety warnings and precautions
[ ] Camera buttons. For example, [Shutter] represents the
shutter button.
( ) Page number of related information
ĺ
The order of options or menus you must select to perform
a step; for example: Select b ĺ Quality (represents
select b, and then Quality).
* Annotation
7
Contents
Chapter 1
My Camera
Getting started ............................................................................................ 28
Unpacking.................................................................................................................... 28
Camera layout .............................................................................................. 29
Using the MOBILE button ....................................................................................... 31
Using the display ....................................................................................................... 32
Using the Self shot mode.......................................................................................... 32
Inserting the battery and memory card ................................................. 33
Removing the battery and memory card ......................................................... 33
Using the memory card adapter .......................................................................... 33
Charging the battery and turning on your camera .............................. 34
Charging the battery................................................................................................ 34
Turning on your camera ......................................................................................... 34
Performing the initial setup ...................................................................... 35
Selecting functions (options) ................................................................... 37
Using m ................................................................................................................. 37
E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode.............................................................. 37
Using the Smart panel ............................................................................................. 38
E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode .......................................................... 38
Using iFn ....................................................................................................................... 39
Display icons ................................................................................................ 41
In Shooting mode ..................................................................................................... 41
Capturing photos ........................................................................................................ 41
Recording videos ......................................................................................................... 42
About the level gauge ............................................................................................... 42
Tips
Concepts in Photography
Shooting postures....................................................................................... 13
Holding the camera ..................................................................................................... 13
Standing photography ............................................................................................... 14
Crouching photography ............................................................................................ 14
Aperture ........................................................................................................ 15
Aperture value and the depth of field .................................................................. 16
Shutter speed ............................................................................................... 17
ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 18
How the aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity
control exposure ......................................................................................... 19
Correlation between focal length, angle, and perspective ................ 20
Depth of field ............................................................................................... 21
What controls out-of-focus effects? ....................................................................... 21
DOF preview ................................................................................................................... 23
Composition ................................................................................................. 23
Rule of Thirds .................................................................................................................. 23
Photos with two subjects .......................................................................................... 24
Flash ............................................................................................................... 25
Flash guide number ..................................................................................................... 26
Bounce Photography .................................................................................................. 26
8
Contents
In Playback mode ...................................................................................................... 43
Viewing photos ............................................................................................................ 43
Playing videos ............................................................................................................... 43
Changing the information displayed ................................................................. 44
Lenses ............................................................................................................ 45
Lens layout ................................................................................................................... 45
Locking or unlocking the lens ................................................................................. 46
Lens markings ............................................................................................................ 48
Accessories ................................................................................................... 49
External flash layout ................................................................................................. 49
Connecting the external flash ................................................................................. 50
Shooting modes .......................................................................................... 51
t Smart Auto mode ......................................................................................... 52
P Program mode ....................................................................................................... 54
Program Shift ................................................................................................................ 55
Minimum shutter speed ............................................................................................ 55
A Aperture Priority mode...................................................................................... 56
S Shutter Priority mode .......................................................................................... 57
M Manual mode........................................................................................................ 58
Using Framing Mode .................................................................................................. 58
Using the Bulb function ............................................................................................ 59
s Smart mode .......................................................................................................... 60
Using the Best Face mode ........................................................................................ 61
R Panorama mode ................................................................................................. 62
Recording a video ..................................................................................................... 63
Available functions by shooting mode ............................................................. 65
Chapter 2
Shooting Functions
Size and Resolution .................................................................................... 67
Photo size ..................................................................................................................... 67
Quality ........................................................................................................................... 68
ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 69
White Balance .............................................................................................. 70
Customizing preset White Balance options ....................................................... 71
Picture Wizard (photo styles) .................................................................... 72
AF mode ........................................................................................................ 73
Single AF ....................................................................................................................... 74
Continuous AF ............................................................................................................ 74
Manual focus ............................................................................................................... 75
AF area ........................................................................................................... 76
Selection AF ................................................................................................................ 76
Multi AF ......................................................................................................................... 77
Tracking AF .................................................................................................................. 77
Face Detection ............................................................................................. 79
Normal........................................................................................................................... 79
Smile Shot .................................................................................................................... 80
Wink Shot ..................................................................................................................... 80
MF Assist ....................................................................................................... 81
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) ............................................................. 82
9
Contents
Drive (shooting method) ........................................................................... 83
Single ............................................................................................................................. 83
Continuous .................................................................................................................. 84
Burst ............................................................................................................................... 84
Timer .............................................................................................................................. 85
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket) ............................................................. 85
White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket) ............................................................ 86
Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket) ........................................................ 86
Depth Bracketing ...................................................................................................... 87
Flash ............................................................................................................... 88
Reducing the red-eye effect .................................................................................. 89
Adjusting the flash intensity ................................................................................. 89
Metering ........................................................................................................ 90
Multi ............................................................................................................................... 90
Center-weighted ....................................................................................................... 91
Spot ................................................................................................................................ 91
Measuring the exposure value of the focus area ........................................... 92
Dynamic Range ........................................................................................... 93
Smart Filter ................................................................................................... 94
Exposure compensation ............................................................................ 95
Exposure lock ............................................................................................... 96
Video functions ........................................................................................... 97
Movie size..................................................................................................................... 97
When Video Out is set to NTSC ............................................................................... 97
When Video Out is set to PAL .................................................................................. 97
Movie quality .............................................................................................................. 98
Multi Motion ............................................................................................................... 98
Fader .............................................................................................................................. 99
Voice ............................................................................................................................... 99
Chapter 3
Playback/Editing
Searching and managing files ................................................................ 101
Viewing photos ....................................................................................................... 101
Viewing image thumbnails ................................................................................. 101
Viewing files by category .................................................................................... 102
Viewing files as a folder ........................................................................................ 102
Protecting files ........................................................................................................ 103
Deleting files ............................................................................................................ 103
Deleting a single file ................................................................................................. 103
Deleting multiple files .............................................................................................. 104
Deleting all files .......................................................................................................... 104
10
Contents
Viewing photos .......................................................................................... 105
Enlarging a photo .................................................................................................. 105
Viewing a slide show ............................................................................................. 105
Auto rotating ........................................................................................................... 106
Playing videos ............................................................................................ 107
Trimming a video during playback .................................................................. 107
Capturing an image during playback ............................................................. 108
Editing photos ........................................................................................... 109
Rotating a photo .................................................................................................... 109
Resizing photos....................................................................................................... 110
Adjusting your photos .......................................................................................... 110
Retouching faces .................................................................................................... 111
Applying Smart Filter effects .............................................................................. 112
Chapter 4
Wireless network
Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings ............... 114
Connecting to a WLAN ......................................................................................... 114
Setting network options ......................................................................................... 115
Manually setting the IP address ........................................................................... 115
Network connection tips ..................................................................................... 116
Entering text ............................................................................................................ 117
Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go) ......................................................... 118
Using NFC features in Shooting mode ........................................................... 118
Using NFC features in Playback mode (Photo Beam)................................ 118
Using NFC features in Wi-Fi mode .................................................................... 118
Saving files to a smart phone automatically ....................................... 119
Sending photos or videos to a smart phone ....................................... 121
Sending photos or videos to multiple smart phones ........................ 123
Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release .............................. 125
Using the Home Monitor+ ...................................................................... 127
Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos ..................................... 129
Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC.................................. 129
Sending photos or videos to a PC .................................................................... 129
Using Samsung Link to view files .......................................................... 131
11
Contents
Chapter 6
Connecting to external devices
Viewing files on an HDTV ........................................................................ 146
Transferring files to your computer ....................................................... 147
Transferring files to your Windows OS computer ....................................... 147
Connecting the camera as a removable disk ................................................... 147
Disconnecting the camera (for Windows 7) ..................................................... 148
Transferring files to your Mac OS ...................................................................... 148
Using programs on a PC........................................................................... 150
Installing i-Launcher ............................................................................................. 150
Using Samsung i-Launcher .................................................................................... 151
Using i-Launcher .................................................................................................... 151
Requirements for Windows OS ............................................................................. 151
Requirements for Mac OS ....................................................................................... 152
Opening Samsung i-Launcher .............................................................................. 152
Downloading the firmware .................................................................................... 152
Downloading the PC Auto Backup program ................................................... 152
Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ....................................................... 153
Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ............................................................... 153
Chapter 5
Camera settings menu
User settings ............................................................................................... 134
ISO Customizing ..................................................................................................... 134
ISO Step ......................................................................................................................... 134
Auto ISO Range .......................................................................................................... 134
Noise Reduction ..................................................................................................... 134
Bracket Settings ...................................................................................................... 135
DMF (Direct Manual Focus) ................................................................................ 135
Color Space ............................................................................................................... 136
Distortion Correct .................................................................................................. 137
iFn Customizing ...................................................................................................... 137
User Display .............................................................................................................. 138
Key Mapping ............................................................................................................ 139
Live view NFC........................................................................................................... 139
MobileLink/NFC Image Size .............................................................................. 139
Grid Line .................................................................................................................... 140
AF Lamp ..................................................................................................................... 140
Auto Self-Shot ......................................................................................................... 140
Lens Button Speed Settings ............................................................................... 140
Setting ......................................................................................................... 141
12
Contents
About the battery .................................................................................................. 162
Battery specifications ............................................................................................... 162
Battery life .................................................................................................................... 164
Low battery message ............................................................................................... 164
Notes about using the battery .............................................................................. 164
Cautions about using the battery ........................................................................ 165
Notes about charging the battery ....................................................................... 165
Notes about charging with a computer connected...................................... 166
Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care ............................ 166
Updating the firmware ............................................................................. 167
Before contacting a service center ........................................................ 168
Camera specifications .............................................................................. 171
Glossary ....................................................................................................... 176
Optional accessories ................................................................................. 182
Index ............................................................................................................ 183
Chapter 7
Appendix
Error messages .......................................................................................... 155
Maintaining the camera........................................................................... 156
Cleaning the camera ............................................................................................. 156
Camera lens and display ......................................................................................... 156
Image sensor ............................................................................................................... 156
Camera body ............................................................................................................... 156
Using or storing the camera ............................................................................... 157
Inappropriate places to use or store the camera ........................................... 157
Using on beaches or shores ................................................................................... 157
Storing for extended period of time ................................................................... 157
Using the camera with caution in humid environments ............................ 158
Other cautions ............................................................................................................ 158
About memory card .............................................................................................. 159
Supported memory card ........................................................................................ 159
Memory card capacity ............................................................................................. 160
Cautions when using memory cards .................................................................. 161
13
Concepts in Photography
Holding the camera
Hold the camera with your right hand and place your right index finger on
the shutter button. Place your left hand under the lens for support.
Shooting postures
A correct posture for stabilizing the camera is necessary for taking a good
photo. Even if you hold a camera correctly, the wrong posture can cause
the camera to shake. Stand up straight and remain still to maintain a
steady base for your camera. When shooting with a slow shutter speed,
hold your breath to minimize body movement.
14
Concepts in Photography
Standing photography
Compose your shot, stand up straight with your feet shoulder-length
apart, and keep your elbows pointed down.
Crouching photography
Compose your shot, crouch with one knee touching the ground, and keep
a straight posture.
15
Concepts in Photography
Aperture
The aperture is one of the three factors that determine the exposure. The
aperture housing contains thin, metal plates that open and close to let
light through the aperture and into the camera. The size of the aperture
is related to the amount of light: a larger aperture allows more light and a
smaller aperture allows less light.
Aperture sizes
Minimum aperture Medium aperture Maximum aperture
Aperture opened slightly Aperture opened wide
The size of the aperture is represented by a value known as an "F-number."
The f-number represents the focal length divided by the diameter of the
lens. For example, if a lens with a 50 mm focal length has an f-number of
F2, the diameter of the aperture is 25 mm. (50 mm/25 mm = F2)
The smaller the f-number, the greater the size of the aperture.
The opening in the aperture is described as the Exposure Value (EV).
Increasing the Exposure Value (+1 EV) means the amount of light doubles.
Decreasing the Exposure Value (-1 EV) means the amount of light halves.
You can also use the exposure compensation feature to fine-tune the
amount of light by subdividing exposure values into 1/2, 1/3 EV, and so on.
+1 EV
F1.4 F2 F2.8 F4 F5.6 F8
-1 EV
Exposure Value Steps
16
Concepts in Photography
Aperture value and the depth of field
You can blur or sharpen the background of a photo by controlling the
aperture. It is closely related to the depth of field (DOF), which can be
expressed as small or large.
A photo with a large DOF A photo with a small DOF
The aperture housing contains several blades. These blades move together and
control the amount of light passing through the center of the aperture. The
number of blades also affects the shape of light when shooting night scenes. If
an aperture has an even number of blades, light divides into an equal number
of sections. If the number of blades is odd, the number of sections is double the
number of blades.
For example, an aperture with 8 blades divides light into 8 sections and an
aperture with 7 blades into 14 sections.
7 blades 8 blades
17
Concepts in Photography
Shutter speed
Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the
shutter. It controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture
before it reaches the image sensor.
Usually, the shutter speed is manually adjustable. The measurement of the
shutter speed is known as the "Exposure Value" (EV), which is marked in
intervals of 1 s, 1/2 s, 1/4 s, 1/8 s, 1/15 s, 1/1,000 s, 1/2,000 s, and so on.
Exposure
+1 EV
-1 EV
1 s 1/2 s 1/4 s 1/8 s 1/15 s 1/30 s
Shutter speed
Therefore, the faster the shutter speed, the less light will be let in. Likewise,
the slower the shutter speed, the more light will be let in.
The photos below illustrate that a slow shutter speed allows more time
for light to enter the camera. This adds a motion blurring effect to moving
objects. On the other hand, a fast shutter speed allows less time to let light
in and the photo more easily freezes subjects in motion.
0.8 s 0.004 s
18
Concepts in Photography
ISO sensitivity
The exposure of an image is determined by the sensitivity of the camera.
This sensitivity is based on international film standards, known as ISO
standards. On digital cameras, this sensitivity rating is used to represent
the sensitivity of the digital mechanism that captures the image.
ISO sensitivity doubles as the number doubles. For example, an
ISO 200 setting is capable of capturing images at twice the speed of an
ISO 100 setting. However, higher ISO settings can result in "noise"—small
specks, spots, and other phenomena in a photo that give the shot a noisy
or dirty appearance. As a general rule, it is best to use a low ISO setting
to prevent noise in your photos, unless you are shooting in darkened
environments or at night.
Changes in the quality and brightness according to ISO sensitivity
Because a low ISO sensitivity means the camera will be less sensitive to
light, you need more light to have an optimal exposure. When using a low
ISO sensitivity, open the aperture more or reduce the shutter speed to
allow more light to enter the camera. For example, on a sunny day when
light is abundant, a low ISO sensitivity does not require a slow shutter
speed. However, in a dark place or at night, a low ISO sensitivity will
result in a blurry photo. Therefore, it is recommended to increase the ISO
sensitivity by a moderate amount.
A photo captured with a tripod and high
ISO sensitivity
A blurred photo with a low ISO sensitivity
19
Concepts in Photography
How the aperture setting, shutter speed,
and ISO sensitivity control exposure
The aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity are closely
interconnected in photography. The aperture setting controls the opening
that regulates the light that enters the camera, while the shutter speed
determines the length of time that light is allowed to enter. ISO sensitivity
determines the speed at which the film reacts to light. Together, these
three aspects are described as the triangle of exposure.
A change in shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO sensitivity can be offset
by adjustments to the others to maintain the amount of light. The results,
however, change according to the settings. For example, shutter speed is
useful in expressing movement, aperture can control the depth of field,
and ISO sensitivity can control the graininess of a photo.
Settings Results
Aperture
value
Wide aperture
= more light
Narrow aperture
= less light
Wide = small depth of field
Narrow = large depth of field
Settings Results
Shutter speed
Fast speed
= less light
Slow speed
= more light
Fast = still
Slow = blurry
ISO sensitivity
High sensitivity
= more sensitive to light
Low sensitivity
= less sensitive to light
High = more grainy
Low = less grainy
20
Concepts in Photography
Correlation between focal length, angle,
and perspective
Focal length, which is measured in millimeters, is the distance between
the middle of the lens to its focal point. It affects the angle and perspective
of captured images. A short focal length translates into a wide angle,
which allows you to capture a wide shot. A long focal length translates
into a narrow angle, which allows you to capture telephoto shots.
Short focal length
wide shot
wide angle
wide-angle lens
Long focal length
telephoto shot
narrow angle
telephoto lens
Look at these photos below and compare the changes.
16 mm angle 50 mm angle 200 mm angle
Normally, a lens with a wide angle is suitable for shooting landscapes and a lens
with a narrow angle is recommended for shooting sports events or portraits.
21
Concepts in Photography
Depth of field
Portraits or still-life photos mostly acclaimed by people are the ones on
which the background is out of focus so the subject looks pronounced.
Depending on the focused areas, a photo can be blurred or sharpened.
This is called 'a low DOF' or 'a high DOF'.
The depth of field is the focused area around the subject. Therefore, a
small DOF signifies that the focused area is narrow and a large DOF means
the focused area is wide.
A photo with a small DOF, which stresses the subject and makes the rest
of it blurred, can be obtained by using a telescope lens or selecting a low
aperture value. Conversely, a photo with a large DOF which shows all the
elements on the photo sharply focused can be achieved by using a wide
angle lens or selecting a high aperture value.
Small Depth of Field Large Depth of Field
What controls out-of-focus effects?
DOF depends on aperture value
The wider the aperture is (namely the lower the aperture value), the lower
the DOF becomes. Under the condition where the focal length is equal, a
low aperture value leads to a photo with a low DOF.
50 mm F5.7 50 mm F22
22
Concepts in Photography
DOF depends on focal length
The longer the focal length is, the lower the DOF gets. A telescope lens
with a longer focal length than a wide-angle lens with a short focal length
is better to capture a photo of a low DOF.
A photo captured with a 16 mm wide-angle lens
A photo captured with a 100 mm telescope lens
DOF depends on the distance between the subject and the
camera
The shorter the distance between the subject and the camera is, the lower
the DOF gets. Therefore, taking a photo close to a subject can result in a
photo of low DOF.
A photo captured with a 100 mm telescope lens
A photo captured close to the subject
23
Concepts in Photography
DOF preview
You can press the Custom button to get an idea of what your shot will look
like before shooting. The camera adjusts the aperture to the predefined
settings and shows the results on the screen. Set the function of the
Custom button to Optical Preview. (p. 139)
Composition
It is fun to capture a photo of the beauty of world with a camera. No
matter how the world is beautiful, however, a poor composition cannot
capture the beauty of it.
When it comes to composition, it is very important to prioritize subjects.
Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually,
abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition.
Rule of Thirds
To use the rule of thirds, divide the image into a 3x3 pattern of equal
rectangles.
To compose photos that best emphasize the subject, make sure the
subject is located at one of the corners of the center rectangle.
24
Concepts in Photography
Using the rule of thirds will create photos with stable and compelling
compositions. Below are a few examples.
Photos with two subjects
If your subject is in one corner of the photo, it creates an unbalanced
composition. You can stabilize the photo by capturing a second subject in
the opposite corner to balance the weight of the photo.
Subject 1
Subject 2
Subject 1
Subject 2
Unstable Stable
25
Concepts in Photography
When taking landscape photos, centering the horizon will create an
unbalanced effect. Give more weight to the photo by moving the horizon
up or down.
Subject 1
Subject 2
Subject 1
Subject 2
Unstable Stable
Flash
Light is one of the most important components in photography. It is not
easy, however, to have an enough amount of light anytime and anywhere.
Making use of a flash allows you to optimize light settings and create a
variety of effects.
Flash, also known as strobe or speed light, helps to create adequate
exposure in low-light conditions. It is also useful in light-abundant
situations. For example, flash can be used in compensating the exposure
of a subject’s shadow or capturing clearly both the subject and the
background in backlit conditions.
Before correction After correction
26
Concepts in Photography
Flash guide number
The model number of a flash refers to the flash’s power, and the maximum
amount of light created is represented by a value known as a "guide
number". The bigger the guide number, the more light is emitted from the
flash. The guide number is achieved by multiplying the distance from the
flash to the subject and the aperture value when the ISO sensitivity is set
to 100.
Guide number = Flash to Subject Distance X Aperture value
Aperture value = Guide number/Flash to Subject Distance
Flash to Subject Distance = Guide number/Aperture value
Therefore, if you know the guide number of a flash, you can estimate an
optimum flash to subject distance when setting the flash manually. For
example, if a flash has a guide number of GN 20 and is 4 meters away from
the subject, the optimal aperture value is F5.0.
Bounce Photography
Bounce photography refers to the method of bouncing light off of the
ceiling or walls so that the light spreads evenly over the subject. Normally,
photos captured with flash may appear unnatural and cast shadows.
Subjects in photos captured with bounce photography cast no shadows
and look smooth due to evenly spread light.
Chapter 1
My Camera
Learn about your camera’s layout, display icons, lens, optional accessories,
and basic functions.
My Camera
28
Getting started
Unpacking
Check your product box for the following items.
Camera AC adapter/USB cable Rechargeable battery Strap
Quick Start Guide Quick Reference Guide Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM
• The illustrations may differ from your actual items.
• You can purchase optional accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center. Samsung is not responsible for any
problems caused by using unauthorized accessories. For information about accessories, refer to page 182.
My Camera
29
Camera layout
No. Name
1
Mode dial
• t: Smart Auto mode (p. 52)
• P: Program mode (p. 54)
• A: Aperture Priority mode (p. 56)
• S: Shutter Priority mode (p. 57)
• M: Manual mode (p. 58)
• s: Smart mode (p. 60)
• R: Panorama mode (p. 62)
• B: Wireless Network (p. 113)
2 Shutter button
3 Power button
4
MOBILE button
Select a Wi-Fi function to connect with
your mobile device. (p. 31)
5 Microphone
6 Hot-shoe
No. Name
7 Speaker
8 NFC tag
9 Lens release button
10 Image sensor
11 Lens mount
12 Lens mount index
13 AF-assist light/Timer lamp
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 7
9
10 13 12 11
8
My Camera > Camera layout
30
No. Name
1 Video recording button
Start recording a video.
2 Eyelet for camera strap
3
Internal antenna
* Avoid contact with the internal antenna while
using a wireless network.
4
f button
Access the Smart panel and fine-tune
some settings.
5
o button
• In the Menu screen: Save the selected
options.
• In Shooting mode: Allow you to select
a focus area manually in some shooting
modes.
6
Delete/Custom button
• In Shooting mode: Perform the
assigned function. (p. 139)
• In Playback mode: Delete files.
7
Playback button
Enter Playback mode to view pictures or
videos.
No. Name
8
Navigation button (Smart dial)
• In Shooting mode:
- D: Change the information on the
display.
- I: Select the shutter speed,
aperture value, exposure compensation,
or ISO sensitivity.
- C: Select a shooting method or set the
timer.
- F: Select an AF mode.
• In Playback mode:
- I: View thumbnails.
• In other situations: Move up, down,
left, right, respectively. (You can also
rotate the navigation button.)
9 m button
Access options or menus.
10
Status lamp
Indicate the status of the camera.
• Blinking: When saving a photo,
shooting a video, sending data to a
computer, connecting to WLAN, or
sending a photo.
• Steady: When there is no data transfer
or charging the battery.
11
Display
To take a self-portrait while looking at
yourself on the screen, flip the screen up.
(p. 32)
1
2
4
5
6
8 7 10 9 11
3
My Camera > Camera layout
31
No. Name
1 HDMI port
2 USB port
Connect the camera to a computer.
3 Battery chamber/Memory card cover
Insert a memory card and battery.
4 Tripod mount
Using the MOBILE button
Select a Wi-Fi function that connects to a smart phone by pressing [ ].
Press [ ] again to return to the previous mode.
1
2
4
3
My Camera > Camera layout
32
Using the display
You can take a self-portrait while looking at yourself on the display by
flipping the display up.
Using the Self shot mode
When the camera is off and you enabled the Self shot option (p. 140),
flipping the display upward turns the camera on and enters Self shot
mode.
In Self shot mode, the timer (3 seconds), face detection, and beauty face
functions are automatically activated.
Press [o] to change the face detection option. Press [n] to deactivate or
activate the beauty face function.
1 Flip the display upward.
180˚
2 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter].
• After 3 seconds, the camera automatically releases the shutter.
• When the camera is off, flipping the display upward automatically turns the
camera on.
• Keep the display closed when the camera is not in use.
• Flip the display only within the angle allowed. Failing to do so may damage
your camera.
• When the camera is not held and the display is flipped upward, use a tripod.
Otherwise, it may cause damage to your camera.
• Do not flip the display up when an external flash is mounted on the camera.
Otherwise, it may cause damage to your camera.
My Camera
33
Inserting the battery and memory card
Learn how to insert or remove the battery and an optional memory card
into the camera.
Memory card
Insert a memory card with the
gold-colored contacts facing up.
Rechargeable battery
Insert the battery with the goldcolored
contacts facing left.
Removing the battery and memory card
Rechargeable battery
Battery lock
Slide the lock up to release the
battery.
Memory card
Push the card gently until it
disengages from the camera, and
then pull it out of the slot.
Using the memory card adapter
To read data with a PC or memory card reader, insert the memory
card into a memory card adapter.
While the status lamp of the camera is blinking, do not remove the memory card
or battery. Doing so may damage the data stored on the memory card or your
camera.
My Camera
34
Charging the battery and turning on your camera
Charging the battery
Before you use the camera for the first time, you must charge the battery.
Plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera, and then plug the
other end of the USB cable into the AC adapter.
Status lamp
• Red light on: Charging
• Green light on: Fully charged
• Red light blinking: Charging error
Use only the AC adapter and USB cable supplied with your camera. If you use
another AC adapter, the camera battery may not charge or work properly.
Turning on your camera
To turn on or off the camera, press [ ].
• The initial setup screen appears when you turn on the camera for the
first time. (p. 35)
My Camera
35
Performing the initial setup
When you turn on your camera for the first time, the initial setup screen
appears. The language is preset for the country or region where the
camera is sold. You can change the language as desired.
1 Press [I] to select Time Zone, and then press [o].
2 Press [D/I] to select a time zone, and then press [o].
Back Set
Time Zone
[GMT +00:00] London
[GMT -01:00] Cape Verde
[GMT -02:00] Mid-Atlantic
[GMT -03:00] Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo
[GMT -03:30] Newfoundland
3 Press [I] to select Date/Time Set, and then press [o].
4 Press [C/F] to select an item (Year/Month/Day/Hour/
Minute/Summer time).
5 Press [D/I] to set the option, and then press [o].
Back Set
Year Month Day Hour Min DST
Date/Time Set
• The screen may differ depending on the language you selected.
6 Press [I] to select Date Type, and then press [o].
7 Press [D/I] to select a date type, and then press [o].
Back Set
Date Type
YYYY/MM/DD
MM/DD/YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY
My Camera > Performing the initial setup
36
8 Press [I] to select Time Type, and then press [o].
9 Press [D/I] to select a time type, and then press [o].
Back Set
Time Type
12 Hr
24 Hr
10 Press [m] to finish the initial setup.
My Camera
37
Selecting functions (options)
Rotate the navigation button or press [D/I/C/F] to move, and
then press [o] to select an option. Using m
Press [m], and then change shooting options or settings.
E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode
1 Rotate the mode dial to P.
2 Press [m].
3 Press [C], rotate the navigation button or press [D/I]
to move to b, and then press [o].
4 Rotate the navigation button or press [D/I] to move
to Photo Size, and then press [o].
AutoShare
Photo Size
Quality
ISO
Minimum Shutter Speed
Back Select
My Camera > Selecting functions (options)
38
5 Rotate the navigation button or press [D/I] to move
to an option, and then press [o].
• Press [m] to go back to the previous menu.
(3:2) (5472x3648)
(3:2) (3888x2592)
(3:2) (2976x1984)
(3:2) (1728x1152)
(16:9) (5472x3080)
Photo Size
Back Set
6 Press [m] to switch to Shooting mode.
Using the Smart panel
Press [f] to access some functions such as Exposure, ISO, and White
Balance.
E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode
1 Rotate the mode dial to P.
2 Press [f].
3 Press [D/I/C/F] to move to EV, and then press [o].
• You can directly select an option by rotating the navigation button
without having to press [o].
EV : 0
Back Adjust
4 Rotate the navigation button or press [C/F] to adjust the
exposure value, and then press [o].
My Camera > Selecting functions (options)
39
Using iFn
Press [i-Function] on an i-Function lens to manually select and adjust
shutter speed, aperture value, exposure value, ISO sensitivity, and White
Balance on the lens.
1 Rotate the mode dial to P, A, S, or M.
2 Press [i-Function] on the lens to select a setting.
• To select items to appear, select [m] ĺ d ĺ iFn Customizing
ĺ an item.
• You can also press [i-Function], and then press [D/I] to
select a setting.
Option Description
Aperture Adjust the aperture value.
Shutter Speed Adjust the shutter speed.
EV Adjust the exposure value.
ISO Adjust the ISO sensitivity.
White Balance Select a White Balance option.
3 Adjust the focus ring to select an option.
• You can also rotate the navigation button.
4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture the photo.
My Camera > Selecting functions (options)
40
Available options
Shooting mode PASM
Aperture -O-O
Shutter Speed - - OO
EV OOO -
ISO OOOO
White Balance OOOO
My Camera
41
Display icons
Capturing photos
1
2
1. Shooting information
Icon Description
Shooting mode
Current date
Current time
Focal length*
Auto exposure lock
(p. 96)
Available number of
photos
Memory card inserted
Memory card not
inserted**
Icon Description
• : Fully charged
• : Partially
charged
• (Red): Empty
(recharge the battery)
• : Charging
Auto focus frame
Spot metering area
Camera shake
Manual focus scale
Level gauge (p. 42)
Histogram (p. 138)
Focus
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Exposure adjustment
value
ISO sensitivity (p. 69)
* This icon appears when you attach the Power Zoom lens.
** Photos that were captured without inserting a memory
card cannot be transferred to a memory card or a computer.
2. Shooting options
Icon Description
Photo size
Drive mode
Flash (p. 88)
Flash intensity adjustment
Metering (p. 90)
AF mode (p. 73)
Face detection
Beauty face***
Focus area
White Balance (p. 70)
White Balance micro adjustment
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 82)
RAW file
Dynamic Range (p. 93)
*** This icon appears when the camera enters Self shot mode
by flipping the display upward.
The icons displayed will change according to the
mode you select or the options you set.
In Shooting mode
My Camera > Display icons
42
2. Shooting options
Icon Description
Video size
AF mode (p. 73)
Metering (p. 90)
White Balance (p. 70)
White Balance micro adjustment
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 82)
Fader (p. 99)
Voice recording off (p. 99)
The icons displayed will change according to the
mode you select or the options you set.
About the level gauge
The level gauge helps you align the camera with
the horizontal and vertical lines on the display.
If the level gauge is not level, calibrate the level
gauge using the Horizontal Calibration function.
(p. 141)
Vertical
Horizontal
Ÿ Level Ÿ Unlevel
You cannot use the level gauge when you shoot
in portrait orientation.
Recording videos
1
2
1. Shooting information
Icon Description
Shooting mode
Current recording time/
Available recording time
Multi Motion (p. 98)
Playback time after applying the
Multi Motion feature
Memory card inserted
• : Fully charged
• : Partially charged
• (Red): Empty (recharge
the battery)
• : Charging
Exposure value
ISO sensitivity (p. 69)
My Camera > Display icons
43
In Playback mode
Viewing photos
Information
Mode
F No
Shutter
ISO
Metering
Flash
Focal Length
White Balance
EV
Photo Size
Date
Icon Description
Current file/The total number of files
Folder number-File number
RAW file
Protected file
Continuously captured photos (they
will appear as a folder) (p. 102)
1
2
3
No. Description
1 Captured photo
2 RGB histogram (p. 138)
3
Shooting mode, Metering, Flash,
White Balance, Aperture value,
Shutter speed, ISO, Focal length,
Exposure value, Photo size, Date
Playing videos
Stop Play
Icon Description
Current file/The total number of files
Playback speed
Folder number-File number
Multi Motion
Current playback time
Video length
My Camera > Display icons
44
Changing the information displayed
Press [D] repeatedly to change the display type.
Mode Display type
Shooting
• Basic shooting information (Shooting mode, Shutter
speed, Aperture value, Exposure value, ISO sensitivity, etc.)
• Basic shooting information + Level gauge
• Basic shooting information + Current shooting options
information (Photo size, Drive mode, Flash, Metering, AF
mode, etc.)
• Basic shooting information + Current shooting options
information + Histogram + Date and time
Playback
• Basic information
• Display all information about the current file.
• Display all information about the current file including
RGB histogram.
My Camera
45
Lenses
You can purchase optional lenses made exclusively for your NX series
camera.
Learn about the functions of each lens and select one that suits your needs
and preferences.
Lens layout
SAMSUNG 16-50 mm F3.5-5.6 Power Zoom ED OIS lens (example)
1 6
2
3
4
5
No. Description
1 i-Function button (p. 39)
2 Lens mount index
3 Focus ring
4 Lens
5 Zoom button
• Press the zoom button to adjust the zoom ratio.
6 Lens contacts
When not using the lens, attach the lens cap and lens mount cover to protect
the lens from dust and scratches.
My Camera > Lenses
46
SAMSUNG 20-50 mm F3.5-5.6 ED II lens (example)
7
1
2
3 5
6
4
No. Description
1 Lens mount index
2 Zoom lock switch
3 Lens
4 Focus ring (p. 81)
5 i-Function button (p. 39)
6 Zoom ring
7 Lens contacts
Locking or unlocking the lens
To lock the lens, pull and hold the zoom lock switch away from the camera
body and rotate the zoom ring as shown in the illustration.
To unlock the lens, rotate the zoom ring as shown in the illustration until
you hear the click.
You cannot capture a photo when the lens is locked.
My Camera > Lenses
47
SAMSUNG 16 mm F2.4 lens (example)
5
2
1
4
3
No. Description
1 i-Function button (p. 39)
2 Lens mount index
3 Focus ring (p. 81)
4 Lens
5 Lens contacts
My Camera > Lenses
48
Lens markings
Find out what the numbers on the lens signify.
SAMSUNG 18-200 mm F3.5-6.3 ED OIS lens (example)
1 2 345
No. Description
1
Aperture value
A range of supported aperture values. For example, 1:3.5–6.3 means
the maximum aperture value range from 3.5 to 6.3.
2
Focal length
The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in
millimeters). This figure is expressed in a range: minimum focal length
to maximum focal length of the lens.
Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject
is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view.
3
ED
ED stands for Extra-low Dispersion. Extra-low dispersion glass is
effective in minimizing chromatic aberration (a distortion that occurs
when a lens fails to focus all colors to the same convergence point).
4
OIS (p. 82)
Optical Image Stabilization. Lenses with this feature can detect
camera shake and effectively cancel out the movement inside the
camera.
5
Ø
The lens diameter. When you attach a filter to the lens, make sure that
the diameters of the lens and the filter are the same.
My Camera
49
Accessories
You can use accessories such as external flash that can help you capture
better and more convenient photos.
For more information about optional accessories, refer to the manual for
each accessory.
• The illustrations may differ from the actual items.
• You can purchase Samsung-approved accessories at a retailer or a Samsung
service center. Samsung is not responsible for damage caused by using
another manufacturer's accessories.
External flash layout
SEF8A (example) (optional)
1
2
3
No. Description
1 Lamp
2 Hot shoe fastening dial
3 Hot shoe connection
My Camera > Accessories
50
Connecting the external flash
1 Mount the flash by sliding it into the hot-shoe.
2 Lock the flash into place by turning the hot-shoe fastening dial
clockwise.
3 Lift up the flash for use.
• You can capture a photo with a flash that is not fully charged, but it is
recommended to use a fully charged flash.
• The available options may differ depending on the shooting mode.
• There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the
flash fires a second time.
• SEF8A may not be compatible with other NX series cameras.
• For more details about optional flashes, refer to the user manual for the flash.
Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible flashes may damage
your camera.
My Camera
51
Shooting modes
Two simple shooting modes—Smart Auto and Smart mode—help you
capture photos with numerous automatic settings. Additional modes
allow for greater customization of settings.
Icon Description
t Smart Auto mode (p. 52)
P Program mode (p. 54)
A Aperture Priority mode (p. 56)
S Shutter Priority mode (p. 57)
M Manual mode (p. 58)
s Smart mode (p. 60)
R Panorama mode (p. 62)
B Wireless Network (p. 113)
My Camera > Shooting modes
52
t Smart Auto mode
In Smart Auto mode, the camera recognizes surrounding conditions
and automatically adjusts factors that contribute to exposure, including
shutter speed, aperture value, metering, White Balance, and exposure
compensation. As the camera controls most of the functions, some
shooting functions are limited. This mode is useful for capturing quick
snapshots with the least amount of adjustment.
1 Rotate the mode dial to t.
2 Align your subject in the frame.
3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus.
• The camera selects a scene. An appropriate scene icon appears at
the screen.
My Camera > Shooting modes
53
Recognizable scenes
Icon Description
Landscapes
Scenes with bright white backgrounds
Landscapes at night
Portraits at night
Landscapes with backlighting
Portraits with backlighting
Portraits
Close-up photos of objects
Close-up photos of text
Sunsets
Indoors, dark
Partially lit
Close-up with spot lighting
Portraits with spot lighting
Blue skies
Icon Description
Forested areas typically consist of green-colored subjects
Close-up photos of colorful subjects
Camera is stabilized on a tripod and the subject is not moving for a
certain period of time (when shooting in the dark).
Actively moving subjects
4 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo.
• The camera may detect different scenes, even the same subjects, depending
on external factors such as camera shake, lighting, or distance to the subject.
• If the camera does not recognize an appropriate scene mode, it uses the
default settings for t mode.
• Even if it detects a face, the camera may not select a portrait mode
depending on the subject's position or lighting.
• Even if you use a tripod, the camera may not detect the tripod mode ( ) if
the subject is moving.
• The camera consumes more battery power, because it changes settings often
to select appropriate scenes.
My Camera > Shooting modes
54
P Program mode
The camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture value so that
an optimal exposure value can be achieved.
This mode is useful when you want to capture shots of constant exposure
while being able to adjust other settings.
1 Rotate the mode dial to P.
2 Set the desired options.
3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture the photo.
My Camera > Shooting modes
55
Program Shift
Program Shift function lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture
value while the camera maintains the same exposure. Press [I] to
select the shutter speed and aperture value and rotate the navigation
button to adjust the aperture value. The shutter speed will change
according to the aperture value.
Minimum shutter speed
Set the shutter speed not to be slower than the selected speed. However, if
an optimal exposure value cannot be achieved because the ISO sensitivity
reached the maximum ISO value that is set by Auto ISO Range, shutter
speed may be slower than the selected minimum shutter speed.
To set the minimum
shutter speed,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Minimum
Shutter Speed ĺ an option.
• This feature is available only when the ISO sensitivity is set to Auto.
• This feature is available only in Program or Aperture Priority mode.
My Camera > Shooting modes
56
A Aperture Priority mode
In Aperture Priority mode, the camera automatically calculates shutter
speed according to the aperture value you choose.
You can adjust the depth of field (DOF) by changing the aperture value.
This mode is useful for taking portraits, flowers, or landscape shots.
Large Depth of Field Small Depth of Field
1 Rotate the mode dial to A.
2 Press [I] to select the aperture value.
3 Rotate the navigation button to adjust the aperture value.
4 Set the desired options.
5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture the photo.
• In low-light settings, you may need to increase the ISO sensitivity to prevent
blurred photos.
• To set the minimum shutter speed, in Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ
Minimum Shutter Speed ĺ an option.
My Camera > Shooting modes
57
S Shutter Priority mode
In Shutter Priority mode, the camera automatically adjusts the aperture
value according to the shutter speed you choose. This mode is useful for
capturing photos of fast-moving subjects or for creating tracer effects in a
photo.
For example, set the shutter speed to over 1/500 s to freeze the subject. To
make the subject appear blurred set the shutter speed to below 1/30 s.
Slow shutter speed Fast shutter speed
1 Rotate the mode dial to S.
2 Press [I] to select the shutter speed.
3 Rotate the navigation button to adjust the shutter speed.
4 Set the desired options.
5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture the photo.
In order to compensate for the reduced amount of light allowed by fast shutter
speeds, open the aperture and let in more light. If your photos are still too dark,
increase the ISO value.
My Camera > Shooting modes
58
M Manual mode
Manual mode lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture value
manually. In this mode, you can fully control the exposure of your photos.
This mode is useful in controlled shooting environments, such as a studio,
or when it is necessary to fine-tune camera settings. The Manual mode is
also recommended for shooting night scenes or fireworks.
1 Rotate the mode dial to M.
2 Press [I] to select the aperture value or shutter speed.
3 Rotate the navigation button to adjust the aperture value or
shutter speed.
4 Set the desired options.
5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture the photo.
Using Framing Mode
When you adjust the aperture value or shutter speed, the exposure
changes according to the settings, so the display may darken. With this
function on, the brightness of the display is constant regardless of the
settings, so you can better frame your shot.
To use Framing
Mode,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Framing Mode ĺ
an option.
My Camera > Shooting modes
59
Using the Bulb function
Use the Bulb function to shoot night scenes or the night sky. During the
interval between the first [Shutter] press and the second [Shutter] press,
the shutter is left open so you can create moving light effects.
To use a bulb,
In Shooting mode, press [I] to select the shutter speed ĺ
Completely rotate the navigation button counter-clockwise
to set the shutter speed to Bulb ĺ Press [Shutter] to start
shooting ĺ Press [Shutter] again to stop shooting.
• If you set a high ISO value or open the shutter for a long time, image noise
may increase.
• Drive options and flash options cannot be used with the Bulb function.
• The Bulb function is available only in Manual mode.
• Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking.
• The longer you open the shutter, the longer it takes to save a photo. Do not
turn the camera off while the camera saves a photo.
• If you use this function for a long time, use a fully charged battery.
My Camera > Shooting modes
60
s Smart mode
In Smart mode, you can capture photos with options that are preset for a
specific scene.
1 Rotate the mode dial to s.
2 Select a scene.
Option Description
Beauty Face Capture a portrait with options to hide facial
imperfections.
Best Face Capture multiple photos and replace faces to
create the best possible image.
Continuous Shot Capture a series of photos of moving subjects.
Kids Shot Capture a photo with a funny sound to get a kid's
attention.
Landscape Capture still-life scenes and landscapes.
Macro Capture small or close-up subjects.
Option Description
Food Capture a photo of food in more colorful tones.
Parties and
Indoors Capture a crisp indoor photos.
Action Freeze Capture subjects moving at high speed.
Rich Tones Capture a photo with vibrant colors.
Waterfall Capture scenes with waterfalls.
Silhouette Capture subjects as dark shapes against a light
background.
Sunset Capture scenes at sunset, with natural-looking
reds and yellows.
Night Capture a photo with less blurring and image
noise in low light conditions.
Fireworks Capture scenes with fireworks.
Light Trace Capture scenes with the light trailing in low-light
conditions.
3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to
capture.
My Camera > Shooting modes
61
Using the Best Face mode
In Best Face mode, you can capture multiple photos and replace faces to
create the best possible image. Use this mode to select the best image for
each individual when capturing group photos.
1 Rotate the mode dial to s, and then select Best Face.
2 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter]
to focus.
3 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo.
• The camera captures 5 photos consecutively.
• The first photo is set as the background image.
• The camera automatically detects faces after shooting.
4 Select a face to replace by using the navigation button.
Cancel Save
5 Select the best image from the 5 faces that were captured.
• Repeat steps 4 and 5 to replace the rest of the faces in the photo.
• The icon will appear on the image that the camera recommends.
Back Set
6 Press [f] to save the photo.
• Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking.
• The resolution is set to 5.9M or less.
My Camera > Shooting modes
62
3 When you are finished, release [Shutter].
• The camera will automatically save the shots into one photo.
• If you release [Shutter] while shooting, the panoramic shooting
stops and photos that have been captured are saved.
• The resolution varies depending on the panoramic photo you captured.
• In Panorama mode, some shooting options are not available.
• The camera may stop shooting due to the shooting composition or the
subject's movement.
• In Panorama mode, your camera may not capture the entire last scene if you
stop moving the camera to improve the photo quality. To capture the entire
scene, move your camera slightly beyond the point where you want the
scene to end.
• For best results when capturing panoramic photos, avoid the following:
- moving the camera too quickly or too slowly
- moving the camera too little to capture the next image
- moving the camera at irregular speeds
- shaking the camera
- shooting in dark places
- capturing moving subjects nearby
- shooting conditions where the brightness or color of light is changing
• Photos taken are automatically saved, and shooting is stopped under the
following conditions:
- if you change the shooting direction while shooting
- if you move the camera too rapidly
- if you do not move the camera
R Panorama mode
In Panorama mode, you can capture a wide panoramic scene in a single
photo. Panorama mode captures and combines a series of photos to create
a panoramic image.
1 Rotate the mode dial to R.
2 Press and hold [Shutter], and then slowly move the camera in
the direction you selected.
• An arrow toward the direction of motion is displayed, and the entire
shooting image is displayed in the preview box.
• When the scenes are aligned, the camera captures the next photo
automatically.
My Camera > Shooting modes
63
Recording a video
In Shooting mode, you can record Full HD videos (1920X1080) by pressing
(Video recording). The camera lets you record a video up to 20 minutes
in length at 30 fps, and saves the files in MP4 (H.264) format. The sound is
recorded via the camera's microphone.
When you use a lens that does not have an AF/MF switch while recording
a video, press [F] to deactivate or activate the AF function. When you use
the lens that has an AF/MF switch, the AF function works according to the
switch’s setting.
Select Fader to fade in or out a scene. You can also select Voice or other
options to set recording options. (p. 99)
1 Rotate the mode dial to t, P, A, S, M, or s.
• This feature may not work in some modes.
2 Set the desired options.
3 Press (Video recording) to start recording.
• The camera will retain the shutter speed and aperture value that
you have set before starting shooting.
4 Press (Video recording) again to stop.
• You can also press [Shutter] to stop recording.
My Camera > Shooting modes
64
• H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC) is the latest video coding format established
in 2003 collaboratively by ISO-IEC and ITU-T. Since this format uses a high
compression rate, more data can be saved in less memory space.
• If you have the image stabilizer option on when shooting a movie, the
camera may record the image stabilizer sound.
• The zoom sound or other lens sounds may be recorded if you adjust the lens
while recording a video.
• When using an optional video lens, the autofocus noise is not recorded.
• If you remove the camera lens while recording a movie, the recording will be
interrupted. Do not change the lens while recording.
• If you change the shooting angle of the camera suddenly while shooting a
movie, the camera may not be able to record images accurately. Use a tripod
to minimize camera shake.
• The camera supports only the Multi AF function when recording a video. You
cannot use any other focus area setting functions.
• When the size of a movie file exceeds 4 GB, the camera automatically stops
recording even if the maximum recording time (20 minutes) has not been
reached.
• If you use a slow writing memory card, the recording of your movie can
be interrupted because the card cannot process data at the rate the video
is being shot. If this occurs, replace the card with a faster memory card or
reduce the video size (for example, from 1280X720 to 640X480).
• When formatting a memory card, always format using the camera. If you
format on another camera or a PC, you can lose files on the card or cause a
change in the capacity of the card.
• While recording a video in the same ISO sensitivity, the screen may be darker
than taking a photo. Adjust the ISO sensitivity.
• When you record a video in Program, Aperture Priority, or Shutter Priority
mode, ISO is automatically set to Auto
.
My Camera > Shooting modes
65
Available functions by shooting mode
For details about shooting functions, see Chapter 2.
Function Available in
Photo Size (p. 67)
Quality (p. 68)
P/A/S/M/s*/t
P/A/S/M/s*/R
ISO (p. 69) P/A/S/M
White Balance (p. 70) P/A/S/M
Picture Wizard (p. 72) P/A/S/M
Smart Filter (p. 94) P/A/S/M
AF Mode (p. 73) P/A/S/M/s*/R
AF Area (p. 76) P/A/S/M/s*
MF Assist (p. 81)
Link AE to AF Point (p. 92)
P/A/S/M/s/R/t
P/A/S/M
Framing Mode (p. 58) P/A/S/M
Function Available in
OIS (Anti-Shake) (p. 82)
Drive (Single/Continuous/Burst/
P/A/S/M/s*/t
Timer/Bracket) (p. 83) P/A/S/M/s*/t*
Metering (p. 90) P/A/S/M
Dynamic Range (p. 93) P/A/S/M
Flash (p. 88) P*/A*/S*/M*/s*/t*
Exposure compensation (p. 95) P/A/S
Exposure lock (p. 96) P/A/S
* Some functions are limited in these modes.
Chapter 2
Shooting Functions
Learn about the functions you can set in Shooting mode.
You can enjoy more customized photos and videos by using the shooting functions.
67
Shooting Functions > Size and Resolution ize and Resolution
Shooting Functions
Photo size
As you increase the resolution, your photo or video will include more
pixels, so it can be printed on larger paper or displayed on a larger screen.
When you use a high resolution, the file size will also increase. Select a low
resolution for photos that will be displayed in a digital picture frame or
uploaded to the web.
To set the size, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Photo Size ĺ
an option.
* Default
Icon Size Recommended for
(3:2) 5472x3648* Printing on A1 paper.
(3:2) 3888x2592 Printing on A2 paper.
(3:2) 2976x1984 Printing on A3 paper.
(3:2) 1728x1152 Printing on A5 paper.
(16:9) 5472x3080 Printing on A1 paper or viewing on an
HDTV.
(16:9) 3712x2088 Printing on A3 paper or viewing on an
HDTV.
(16:9) 2944x1656 Printing on A4 paper or viewing on an
HDTV.
(16:9) 1920x1080 Printing on A5 paper or viewing on an
HDTV.
(1:1) 3648x3648 Printing a square photo on A1 paper.
(1:1) 2640x2640 Printing a square photo on A3 paper.
(1:1) 2000x2000 Printing a square photo on A4 paper.
(1:1) 1024x1024 Attaching to an email.
Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
Size and Resolution
68
Shooting Functions > Size and Resolution
Quality
The camera saves photos in either the JPEG or RAW format.
Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to the JPEG format
and stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the
time of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to the JPEG format and are
stored in the memory without any changes.
RAW files have the file extension "SRW". To adjust and calibrate exposures,
White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors of the RAW files, or to convert
them into JPEG or TIFF format, use the Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
program found on the supplied DVD-ROM.
Ensure you have enough space on the memory card to save photos in the
RAW format.
To set the quality, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Quality ĺ
an option.
* Default
Icon Format Description
JPEG
Super Fine*:
• Compressed for the best quality.
• Recommended for printing in large size.
JPEG
Fine:
• Compressed for better quality.
• Recommended for printing in normal size.
* Default
Icon Format Description
JPEG
Normal:
• Compressed for normal quality.
• Recommended for printing in small size or
uploading to the web.
RAW
RAW:
• Save a photo without data loss.
• Recommended for editing after shooting.
RAW+JPEG RAW + S.Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG
(S.Fine quality) and RAW format.
RAW+JPEG RAW + Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG (Fine
quality) and RAW format.
RAW+JPEG RAW + Normal: Save a photo in both the JPEG
(Normal quality) and RAW format.
Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
69
Shooting Functions > ISO sensitivity SO sensitivity
Shooting Functions
The ISO sensitivity value represents the sensitivity of camera to light.
The larger the ISO value, the more sensitive the camera is to light.
Consequently, by selecting a higher ISO sensitivity value, you can capture
photos in dim or dark places at faster shutter speeds. However, this may
increase electronic noise and result in a grainy photo.
To set ISO sensitivity, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ ISO ĺ an
option.
Examples
ISO 100 ISO 400
ISO 800 ISO 3200
• Increase the ISO value in places where flash use is prohibited. You can capture
a clear photo by setting a high ISO value without having to secure more light.
• Use the Noise Reduction function in order to reduce the visual noise that can
appear on photos of a high ISO value. (p. 134)
• Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions.
ISO sensitivity
70
Shooting Functions > White Balance ite Balance
Shooting Functions
White Balance represents the light source that influences on the color of a
photo.
The color of a photo depends on the type and quality of the light source.
If you want the color of your photo to be realistic, select an appropriate
lighting condition to calibrate the White Balance, such as Auto WB,
Daylight, Cloudy, Tungsten, or adjust color temperature manually.
You can also adjust color for the preset light sources so that the colors of
the photo match the actual scene under mixed lighting conditions.
To set the White
Balance,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ White Balance ĺ
an option.
* Default
Icon Description
Auto WB*: Use automatic settings depending on the lighting
conditions.
Daylight: Select when taking outdoor photos on a sunny day. This
option results in photos closest to the natural colors of the scene.
Cloudy: Select when taking outdoor photos on a cloudy day or in
shadows. Photos captured on cloudy days tend to be more bluish
than on sunny days. This option offsets that effect.
Fluorescent White: Select when shooting under a daylight
fluorescent lamp, especially for white fluorescent light.
* Default
Icon Description
N
Fluorescent NW: Select when shooting under a daylight
fluorescent lamp, especially for white fluorescent light of very
white hues.
D
Fluorescent Daylight: Select when shooting under a daylight
fluorescent lamp, especially for white fluorescent light of slightly
bluish hue.
Tungsten: Select when taking indoor photos under incandescent
bulbs or halogen lamps. Incandescent tungsten bulbs tend to have
a reddish hue. This option offsets that effect.
Flash WB: Select when using a flash.
Custom Set: Use your pre-defined settings. You can manually set
the White Balance by pressing [D], and then shooting a white
sheet of paper. Fill the spot metering circle with the paper and set
the White Balance.
Color Temperature: Manually adjust the color temperature of
the light source. Color temperature is a measurement in degrees
Kelvin that indicates the specific type of light source. You can get a
warmer photo with a higher value, and a cooler photo with a lower
value. Press [D], and then adjust the color temperature.
Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
White Balance
71
Shooting Functions > White Balance
Customizing preset White Balance options
You can also customize preset White Balance options.
To customize
preset options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ White Balance ĺ
an option ĺ [D] ĺ Press [D/I/C/F].
White Balance : Daylight
Back Reset
Examples
Auto WB Daylight
Fluorescent Daylight Tungsten
72
Shooting Functions > Picture Wizard (photo styles) icture Wizard (photo styles)
Shooting Functions
Picture Wizard lets you apply different photo styles to your photo to create
various looks and emotional moods. You can also create and save your
own photo styles by adjusting color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast for
each style.
There is no rule for which style is suitable in which conditions. Experiment
with different styles and find your own settings.
To set a photo style, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Picture Wizard ĺ
an option.
Examples
Standard Vivid Portrait
Landscape Forest Retro
Cool Calm Classic
• You can also adjust the value of the preset style settings. Select a Picture
Wizard option, press [D], and then adjust color, saturation, sharpness, or
contrast.
• To customize your own picture wizard, select , , or , and then adjust
the color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast.
• Picture Wizard options cannot be set with Smart Filter options at the same
time.
Picture Wizard (photo styles)
73
Shooting Functions > AF mode
Shooting Functions
AF mode
Learn how to adjust the camera’s focus according to the subjects.
You can select a focusing mode appropriate to the subject among Single
Auto Focus, Continuous Auto Focus, and Manual Focus. The AF function is
activated when you press [Shutter] halfway. In the MF mode, you have to
rotate the focus ring on the lens to focus manually.
In most cases, you can have a focus by selecting Single AF. Fast moving
subjects or subjects with small shading differences to the background are
difficult to focus. Select an appropriate focusing mode for such instances.
If your lens has an AF/MF switch, you must set the switch according to
the selected mode. Set the switch to AF when you select Single AF or
Continuous AF. Set the switch to MF when you select Manual Focus.
When your lens has no AF/MF switch, press [F] to select a desired AF
mode.
To set the auto
focus mode, In Shooting mode, press [F] ĺ an option.
• You can also set the option by pressing [m] ĺb ĺ AF Mode ĺ
an option in Shooting mode.
• The available options may differ depending on the lens in use.
74
Shooting Functions > AF mode
Single AF
Single AF is appropriate for shooting a still subject. When you press
[Shutter] halfway, the focus fixes in the focus area. The area turns green
when the focus is achieved.
Continuous AF
While you are pressing [Shutter] halfway, the camera continues to
automatic focusing. This mode is recommended for shooting a person on a
bicycle, a running dog, or a car racing scene.
75
Shooting Functions > AF mode
Manual focus
You can manually focus on a subject by rotating the focus ring on the
lens. The MF Assist function lets you easily achieve a focus. While you
are rotating the focus ring, the focus area is magnified. This mode is
recommended for shooting an object similar in color to the background, a
night scene, or fireworks.
• If you use this function, you cannot set Face Detection, AF Area, and Link AE
to AF Point options.
• While you are adjusting the focus, the manual focus scale
( ) appears.
76
Shooting Functions > AF area
Shooting Functions
The AF area function changes the positions of the focus area.
Generally, cameras focus on the nearest subject. When there are a lot of
subjects, however, unwanted subjects can be in focus. In order to prevent
unwanted subjects from being in focus, change the focus area so that
a desired subject is in focus. You can get a clearer and sharper photo by
selecting an appropriate focus area.
To set the auto
focus area,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ AF Area ĺ
an option.
• Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
• When the AF/MF switch is set to MF, you cannot change the AF area from the
shooting menu.
Selection AF
You can set the focus on an area you want. Apply an out-of-focus effect to
make the subject more distinguishable.
The focus on the photo below was repositioned and resized so that it fits
the subject’s face.
AF Size Move
To resize or move the focus area, in Shooting mode, press [o]. Press
[D/I/C/F] to move the focus area. Rotate the navigation button to
resize the focus area.
AF area
77
Shooting Functions > AF area
Multi AF
The camera displays a green rectangle in places where focus is set
correctly. The photo is divided into two or more areas, and the camera
obtains focus points of each area. It is recommended for scenery photos.
When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera displays the focus areas as
shown in the photo below.
Tracking AF
Compose your shot and press [o] to focus on the subject. Tracking AF
allows you to track and automatically focus on your subject, even when
the subject is moving or when you change the shooting composition.
White frame: Your camera is
tracking the subject.
Green frame: Your subject is
in focus when you half-press
[Shutter].
Red frame: Your camera failed to
focus.
78
Shooting Functions > AF area
• If you do not select a focus area, the focus frame will appear in the center of
the screen.
• Tracking a subject may fail when:
- the subject is too small
- the subject moves irregularly
- the subject is backlit or you are shooting in a dark place
- colors or patterns on the subject and the background are the same
- the subject includes horizontal patterns, such as blinds
- the camera shakes excessively
- you capture photos continuously
• When tracking fails, the feature will be reset.
• If the camera fails to track the subject, the focus area will be reset.
• If the camera fails to focus, the focus frame will change to red and the focus
will be reset.
79
Shooting Functions > Face Detection ce Detection
Shooting Functions
Face Detection
Use Face Detection options to capture a self portrait or a smiling face.
To use the face
detection function,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Face Detection ĺ
an option.
• When your camera detects a face, it tracks the detected face automatically.
• Depending on the Picture Wizard options, Face Detection may not be
effective.
• When you set manual focus, Face Detection may not be available.
• Face Detection may not be effective when:
- the subject is far from the camera
- it is too bright or too dark
- the subject is not facing the camera
- the subject is wearing sunglasses or a mask
- the subject’s facial expression changes drastically
- the subject is backlit or the lighting conditions are unstable
• When you set Face Detection options, the AF area is automatically set to Multi
AF.
• Depending on the Face Detection options you selected, some shooting
options may not be available.
Normal
The camera focuses on human faces preferentially. Faces of up to
10 people can be detected. This setting is recommended for shooting a
group of people.
When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera focuses on faces as shown
in the photo below. In cases of shooting a group of people, the camera
displays the focus on the nearest person’s face in white and the rest of the
people’s faces in gray.
80
Shooting Functions > Face Detection
Wink Shot
The camera automatically releases the shutter 2 seconds after it detects a
winking face.
• Wink for more than 1 second for better detection.
• Wink detection may fail when:
- the camera is below eye level
- the subject appears dark due to backlighting
- the subject is wearing glasses
- the subject is far from the camera
Smile Shot
The camera automatically releases the shutter when it detects a smiling
face.
When your subject smiles broadly, your camera can detect the smile more easily.
81
Shooting Functions > Shooting Functions > MF Assist F Assist
Shooting Functions
In the manual focus mode, you have to rotate the focus ring on the lens to
focus. When you use the MF Assist function, you can enlarge the scene and
easily adjust the focus while rotating the focus ring. This function is only
available on a lens that supports manual focus.
To set the manual
focus assist,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ MF Assist ĺ
an option.
* Default
Icon Description
Off: Do not use the MF Assist function.
Enlarge x5*: The focus area is magnified by 5 times when you
adjust the focus.
Enlarge x8: The focus area is magnified by 8 times when you
adjust the focus.
MF Assist
82
Shooting Functions > Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) ptical Image Stabilization (OIS)
Shooting Functions
Use the Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) function to minimize camera
shake. OIS may not be available with some lenses.
Camera shake tends to occur in dark places or when shooting indoors.
In such cases, the camera uses slower shutter speeds in order to increase
the amount of light taken in, which can result in a blurry photo. You can
prevent this situation by using the OIS function.
If your lens has an OIS switch, you have set the switch to ON to use the OIS
function.
To set OIS options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ OIS (Anti-Shake) ĺ
an option.
* Default
Icon Description
Mode 1*: The OIS function is applied only when you press
[Shutter] in full or half.
Mode 2: The OIS function is on.
Off: The OIS function is off.
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS)
Without OIS correction With OIS correction
• OIS may not function properly when:
- you move your camera to follow a moving subject
- there is too much camera shake
- the shutter speed is slow (for example, when you select Night in s mode)
- the battery is low
- you capture a close-up shot
• If you use the OIS function with a tripod, your images may be blurred by
the vibration of the OIS sensor. Deactivate the OIS function when you use a
tripod.
• If the camera is hit or dropped, the display will be blurry. If this occurs, turn off
the camera, and then turn it on again.
• Use the OIS function only when needed because the function consumes
more battery power.
• To set an OIS option on the menu, set the OIS switch on your lens to ON.
• This option may not be available with some lenses.
• Off may not be available with some lenses.
83
Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) rive (shooting method)
Shooting Functions
You can set the shooting method, such as Continuous, Burst, Timer, or
Bracketing.
Select Single to capture one photo at a time. Select Continuous or Burst
to shoot fast moving subjects. Select AE Bracket, WB Bracket, P Wiz
Bracket, or Depth Bracket to adjust exposure, White Balance, apply
picture Wizard effects, or capture photos with different depths of field. You
can also select Timer to capture a photo automatically after a specified
time.
To change the
shooting method, In Shooting mode, press [C] ĺ an option.
• You can also set the option by pressing [m] ĺb ĺ Drive ĺ
a shooting method in Shooting mode.
• Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
Single
Capture one photo whenever you press [Shutter]. Recommended for
general conditions.
Drive (shooting method)
84
Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method)
Continuous
Continuously capture photos while you are pressing [Shutter]. You can
capture up to 5 photos per second.
• If you select Continuous, the noise reduction function is not available.
• Maximum shooting speed is 5 frames per second. It will slow down after
approx. JPEG 13 shots, RAW 5 shots. (May vary depending on the spec of
memory card.)
Burst
Consecutively capture up to 10 shots per second (3 seconds), 15 shots per
second (2 seconds), or 30 shots per second (1 second) when you press
[Shutter] once. It is recommended for shooting the rapid motion of fast
moving subjects such as racing cars.
• To set the number of shots, in Shooting mode, press [C] ĺ Burst, and then
press [D].
• The photo size is set to 5M.
• It may take longer to save a photo.
• You cannot use the flash with this option.
• Shutter speed must be faster than 1/30 second.
• Photos captured with this option may be slightly enlarged when saving.
• You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200.
• This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available
when the photo quality is set to RAW.
85
Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method)
Timer
Capture a photo after a specified time. You can set the Timer for 2 to 30
seconds.
• Press [Shutter] to stop capturing.
• To set the timer details, in Shooting mode, press [C] ĺ Timer, and then
press [D].
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket)
When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos: the
original, one a step darker, and one a step lighter. Use a tripod to prevent
blurry photos as the camera captures three photos continuously. You can
adjust the settings in Bracket Settings menu.
Exposure -2
Original
Exposure +2
To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ an
option.
86
Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method)
White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket)
When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos:
the original and two more with different White Balance settings. The
original photo is captured when you press [Shutter]. The other two are
automatically adjusted according to the White Balance you have set. You
can adjust the settings in Bracket Settings menu.
WB-2
Original
WB+2
• To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ an
option.
• This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available
when the photo quality is set to RAW.
Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket)
When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos,
each with a different Picture Wizard setting. The camera captures a photo
and applies the three Picture Wizard options you have set to the image
captured. You can select three different settings in Bracket Settings menu.
Vivid
Standard
Retro
• To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ an
option.
• This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available
when the photo quality is set to RAW.
87
Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method)
Depth Bracketing
When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos,
each with a different depth of field by adjusting the aperture value. Use
a tripod to prevent blurry photos as the camera captures three photos
continuously. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Settings menu.
• To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ an
option.
• This feature is available only in Program or Aperture Priority mode.
• If the aperture value is set to its maximum or minimum, two photos will be
captured with the maximum or minimum aperture value.
88
Shooting Functions > Flash
Shooting Functions
In order to capture a realistic photo of a subject, the amount of light
should be constant. When the light source varies, you can use a flash and
supply a constant amount of light. Select appropriate settings according to
a light source and a subject.
To set flash options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Flash ĺ
an option.
Icon Description
Off: Do not use the flash.
A
Smart Flash: The camera automatically adjusts the brightness
of the flash according to the amount of light in the surrounding
environment.
A Auto: The flash automatically fires in dark places.
Auto Red-eye: The flash automatically fires and reduces red-eyes.
Fill in: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo. (Brightness is
automatically adjusted.)
Fill-in Red: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo and
reduces red-eyes.
1st Curtain: The flash fires
immediately after the shutter opens.
The camera captures a photo of a
subject earlier in an action sequence
clearly. Ball moving direction
Icon Description
2nd Curtain: The flash fires just
before the shutter closes. The
camera captures a photo of a
subject later in an action sequence
clearly. Ball moving direction
• The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
• There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the
flash fires a second time.
• If you select Off, the flash does not fire even when an external flash is
attached.
Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible external flashes may
damage your camera.
Flash
89
Shooting Functions > Flash
Reducing the red-eye effect
If the flash fires when you capture a photo of a person in the dark, a red
glow may appear in the eyes. To reduce the red-eye effect, select Auto
Red-eye or Fill-in Red.
Without red-eye reduction With red-eye reduction
If the subject is too far from the camera or moves when the first flash fires, redeyes
may not be reduced.
Adjusting the flash intensity
When the flash is on, adjust the flash intensity ±2 levels.
To set the flash
intensity,
In Shooting mode, select [m] ĺb ĺ Flash ĺ an option
ĺ [D] ĺ Rotate the navigation button or press [C/F] to
adjust the flash intensity.
Back Reset
Flash : Fill in
• Adjusting the flash intensity may not be effective when:
- the subject is too close to the camera
- you set a high ISO sensitivity
- the exposure value is too big or too small
- it is too bright or too dark
• In some shooting modes, you cannot use this function.
• If you attach an intensity-adjustable external flash to the camera, the intensity
settings of the flash will be applied.
• If the subject is too close when you use the flash, some light may be blocked,
resulting in a dark photo. Ensure that the subject is within the recommended
range, which varies by lens.
• When a lens hood is attached, the light from the flash can be blocked by the
hood. Remove the hood to use the flash.
90
Shooting Functions > Metering etering
Shooting Functions
The metering mode refers to the way in which a camera measures the
quantity of light.
The camera measures the amount of light in a scene, and in many of its
modes, uses the measurement to adjust various settings. For example,
if a subject looks darker than its actual color, the camera captures an
overexposed photo of it. If a subject looks lighter than its actual color, the
camera captures an underexposed photo of it.
The brightness and overall mood of the photo can also be affected by how
the camera measures the amount of light. Select an appropriate setting for
a shooting condition.
To set a metering
option,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Metering ĺ an
option.
Multi
The Multi mode calculates the amount of light in multiple areas. When
light is sufficient or insufficient, the camera adjusts the exposure by
averaging the overall brightness of the scene. This mode is suitable for
general photos.
Metering
91
Shooting Functions > Metering
Center-weighted
The Center-weighted mode calculates a broader area than the Spot mode
does. It sums up the amount of light in the center portion of the shot
(60–80 %) and that of the rest of the shot (20–40 %). It is recommended
for situations where there is a slight difference in brightness between a
subject and a background or an area of the subject is large compared to
the overall composition of the photo.
Spot
The Spot mode calculates the amount of light in the center. When you
capture a photo in conditions where there is a strong backlight behind a
subject, the camera adjusts the exposure so as to shoot a subject correctly.
For example, when you select the Multi mode in a strong backlight
condition, the camera calculates that the overall amount of light is
abundant, which results in a darker photo. The Spot mode can prevent this
situation as it calculates the amount of light in a designated area.
The subject is in bright color while the background is dark. The Spot mode
is recommended for a situation like this where a huge difference in the
exposure exists between a subject and a background.
92
Shooting Functions > Metering
Measuring the exposure value of the focus area
When this function is turned on, the camera automatically sets an optimal
exposure by calculating the brightness of the focus area. This function
is only available when you select Spot metering or Multi metering, and
Selection AF.
To set this
function,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Link AE to AF Point
ĺ an option.
93
Shooting Functions > Dynamic Range namic Range
Shooting Functions
This function automatically corrects the loss of bright detail that can occur
due to shading differences in the photo.
To set Dynamic Range
options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ
Dynamic Range ĺ an option.
Without Dynamic Range effect With Dynamic Range effect
* Default
Icon Description
Off*: Do not use Dynamic Range.
Smart Range+: Correct the loss of bright detail.
HDR: Capture 3 photos with different exposures, and then
combine them to create a single image automatically.
• You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200.
• This option cannot be set with drive options other than Single
or Timer.
Dynamic Range options cannot be set with the Bulb function.
Dynamic Range
94
Shooting Functions > Smart Filter mart Filter
Shooting Functions
Smart Filter lets you apply special effects to your photos or videos. You can
select various filter options to create special effects that are difficult to be
achieved with normal lenses.
To set Smart Filter
options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Smart Filter ĺ
an option.
* Default
Option Description
Off* No effect
Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong
vignette effect of Lomo cameras.
Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in
miniature.
Sketch Apply a pen sketch effect.
Fish Eye Distort close objects to imitate the visual effect of a
fisheye lens.
Smart Filter options cannot be set with Picture Wizard options at the same time.
Smart Filter
95
Shooting Functions > Exposure compensation xposure compensation
Shooting Functions
The camera automatically sets the exposure by measuring the levels of
light from the photo’s composition and the position of a subject. If the
exposure set by the camera is higher or lower than you expected, you can
adjust the exposure value manually. The exposure value is adjustable in ±3
increments. The camera displays the exposure warning in red for each step
beyond ±3 range.
To adjust the exposure value, press [f], and then select EV. You can also
press [I] to select the exposure value and rotate the navigation button
to adjust it.
You can check the exposure value by the position of the exposure level
indicator.
Exposure level
indicator
Increased exposure
(brighter)
Decreased exposure
(darker)
Exposure warning Standard exposure index
-2
Original
+2
Exposure compensation
96
Shooting Functions > Exposure lock xposure lock
Shooting Functions
When you cannot achieve an appropriate exposure because of a strong
brightness contrast, lock the exposure and then capture a photo.
To lock the exposure, adjust the photo’s composition on which you want
to calculate the exposure, and then press the Custom button. (when the
function of the Custom button is set to AEL) (p. 139)
After locking the exposure, aim the lens where you desire, and then press
[Shutter].
Exposure lock
97
Shooting Functions > Video functions ideo functions
Shooting Functions
The functions available for video are explained below.
Movie size
Set the movie size.
To set movie size
options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Movie Size ĺ
an option.
When Video Out is set to NTSC
* Default
Icon Size Recommended for
* 1920X1080 (30 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV.
1280X720 (30 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV.
640X480 (30 fps) (4:3) View on a TV.
320X240 (30 fps) (4:3) Post on a website using the wireless
network (30 seconds maximum).
When Video Out is set to PAL
* Default
Icon Size Recommended for
* 1920X1080 (25 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV.
1280X720 (25 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV.
640X480 (25 fps) (4:3) View on a TV.
320X240 (25 fps) (4:3) Post on a website using the wireless
network (30 seconds maximum).
Video functions
98
Shooting Functions > Video functions
Movie quality
Set the Movie quality.
To set movie
quality options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Movie Quality ĺ
an option.
* Default
Icon Extension Description
MP4 (H.264) Normal: Record videos in normal quality.
MP4 (H.264) HQ*: Record videos in high quality.
Multi Motion
Set the playing speed of a video.
To set playing
speed options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Multi Motion ĺ
an option.
* Default
Icon Description
x0.25: Record a video to view it at 1/4 normal speed during
playback. (Available only with 640x480 or 320x240)
x1*: Record a video to view it at normal speed during playback.
x5: Record a video to view it at 5X normal speed during playback.
x10: Record a video to view it at 10X normal speed during
playback.
x20: Record a video to view it at 20X normal speed during
playback.
• If you select an option other than x1, the sound recording function will not
be supported.
• The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions.
99
Shooting Functions > Video functions
Voice
Sometimes, a muted video is more appealing than the one with sound.
Turn the voice off to record a muted video.
To set voice
options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Voice ĺ
an option.
Fader
You can fade in or fade out a scene using the fader function on the camera
without having to do it on a PC. Set the fade in option to gradually fade in
at the start of the scene. Set the fade out option to gradually fade out the
scene. Use the function appropriately and add dramatic effects on your
videos.
To set fader
options,
In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Fader ĺ
an option.
* Default
Icon Description
Off*: Fader function not used.
In: Scene gradually fades in.
Out: Scene gradually fades out.
In-Out: The fader function is applied at the start and end of the
scene.
When you use the fader function, it may take longer to save a file.
Chapter 3
Playback/Editing
Learn about how to play back and edit photos and videos.
Refer to chapter 6 for editing files on a PC.
101
Playback/Editing
Learn how to view photo and video thumbnails and how to protect or
delete files.
If you perform no operations for a while, information and icons on the screen
disappear. When you operate the camera again, they will reappear.
Viewing photos
1 Press [y].
• The most recent file you captured will be displayed.
2 Rotate the navigation button or press [C/F] to scroll
through files.
You may not be able to edit or play back files that were captured with other
cameras, due to unsupported sizes or codecs. Use a computer or another device
to edit or play back these files.
Viewing image thumbnails
In order to search for photos and videos you want, convert to the
thumbnail view by pressing [I] in Playback mode. The thumbnail view
displays multiple images at a time so that you can easily look through
items you wish to find. You can also classify and display files by category,
such as date or file type.
7X4 Thumbnail View
In thumbnail view, press [f] to select the thumbnail view mode. You can also
press [m] ĺz ĺ View ĺ an item to select the thumbnail view mode.
Searching and managing files
102
Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files
Viewing files by category
1 In the thumbnail view, press [m] ĺz ĺ Filter ĺ
a category.
* Default
Option Description
All* View files normally.
Date View files by the date they were saved.
File Type View files by the file type.
2 Select a list to open it.
3 Select a file to view it.
Viewing files as a folder
Continuous and burst shots appear as a folder. Selecting a folder will play
back all photos automatically. Deleting a folder will delete all photos in the
folder.
1 In Playback mode, rotate the navigation button or press
[C/F] to move to a desired folder.
• The camera will automatically play back photos in the folder.
Single View
2 Press [o] to open the folder.
3 Rotate the navigation button or press [C/F] to move to
another file.
4 Press [f] to return to Playback mode.
103
Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files
Protecting files
Protect your files from accidental deletion.
1 In Playback mode, scroll to a file.
2 Press [m] ĺz ĺ Protect ĺ On.
• You cannot delete or rotate a protected file.
• For photos that are saved as a folder, protecting a folder will protect all photos
in the folder.
Deleting files
Delete files in Playback mode and secure more space on your memory
card. Protected files are not deleted.
Deleting a single file
You can select a single file and delete it.
1 In Playback mode, select a file, and then press [n].
2 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.
104
Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files
Deleting multiple files
You can select multiple files and delete them.
1 In Playback mode, press [m] ĺz ĺ Delete ĺ Multiple
Delete.
• Alternatively, in thumbnails view, press [n], and then select files to
delete.
2 Select files you want to delete by rotating the navigation
button or pressing [C/F], and then press [o].
• Press [o] again to cancel your selection.
3 Press [n].
4 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.
Deleting all files
You can delete all files on the memory card at once.
1 In Playback mode, press [m].
2 Select z ĺ Delete ĺ Delete All.
3 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.
105
Playback/Editing
Enlarging a photo
You can enlarge photos when viewing them in Playback mode. Press [o],
and then rotate the navigation button to enlarge or reduce a photo. Press
[D/I/C/F] to move the magnified area. You can also use the Trim
function to extract the portion of the image displayed on the screen and
save it as a new file.
Magnified area
Magnification (The maximum
magnification may differ by
resolution.)
Back Crop
To Do this
Move magnified area Press [D/I/C/F].
Crop the enlarged image Press [o]. (saved as a new file)
Return to the original image Press [m].
Viewing a slide show
You can view photos in a slide show and apply various effects to the slide
show.
1 In Playback mode, press [m].
2 Select z ĺ Slide Show Options.
3 Select a slide show effect option.
• Skip to step 4 to start a slide show with no effects.
* Default
Option Description
Play Mode Set whether or not to repeat the slide show.
(One Play*, Repeat)
Interval
• Set the interval between photos. (1 sec*, 3 sec,
5 sec, 10 sec)
• Intervals can only be set when the scene change
effect is Off.
Effect • Set a scene change effect between photos.
• Select Off to cancel effects.
Viewing photos
106
Playback/Editing > Viewing photos
4 Press [m].
5 Select Start Slide Show.
6 View the slide show.
• Press [o] to pause.
• Press [o] again to resume.
• Press [m] to stop the slide show and return to Playback mode.
Auto rotating
With Auto Rotate on, the camera automatically rotates photos you have
captured vertically so they fit the screen horizontally.
To set auto rotate
options,
In Playback mode, press [m] ĺz ĺ Auto Rotate ĺ an
option.
107
Playback/Editing
In Playback mode, you can play a video, capture an image from a video, or
crop a video to save as another file.
Stop Play
To Description
Rewind
• Press [C]. (Each time you press the button while
playing the video, you change the scan speed in this
order: 2X, 4X, 8X.)
• Rotate the navigation button counter-clockwise.
(Each time you rotate the navigation button while
playing the video, you change the scan speed in this
order: 2X, 4X, 8X.)
Pause/Play Press [o].
Fast forward
• Press [F]. (Each time you press the button while
playing the video, you change the scan speed in this
order: 2X, 4X, 8X.)
• Rotate the navigation button clockwise. (Each time
you rotate the navigation button while playing the
video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X,
4X, 8X.)
Volume control Press [D/I].
Stop Press [m].
Trimming a video during playback
1 In Playback mode, scroll to a video, and then press [m].
2 Select Trim Movie.
3 Press [o] to start playing the video.
4 Press [o] at the point where you want the trimming to begin.
5 Press [f].
6 Press [o] to resume playing the video.
7 Press [o] at the point where you want the trimming to end.
Playing videos
108
Playback/Editing > Playing videos
8 Press [f].
9 Press [f] to trim a video.
10 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.
• The original video should be at least 10 seconds long.
• The camera will save the edited video as a new file and leave the original
video intact.
• The point where you want the trimming to begin can be selected 2 seconds
after playback starts.
Capturing an image during playback
1 While viewing a video, press [o] at the point where you want
to capture an image.
2 Press [f].
• The resolution of the captured image will be the same as the original video.
• The captured image is saved as a new file.
109
Playback/Editing
Edited photos are saved as new files under different file names. Photos
captured in some modes cannot be edited with the Image Edit function.
To edit images, In Playback mode, scroll to a photo, and then press [m] ĺ
z ĺ Edit Image ĺ an option.
Some images may not be edited with the Edit Image function. In this case, use
other image editing software.
RAW files cannot be edited with the Edit Image function. In this case, use the
supplied image editing software.
The camera will save edited photos as new files.
When you edit photos, the camera will automatically convert them to a lower
resolution. Photos that you rotate or resize manually are not automatically
converted to a lower resolution.
You cannot edit photos while viewing files as a folder. Open the folder and
select a photo to edit each photo.
Rotating a photo
1 Select ĺ .
2 Select an option.
Rotate : Right 90˚
Cancel Save
3 Press [o] to save.
You can also rotate a photo in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then
selecting z ĺ Rotate ĺ a desired option.
The camera will overwrite the original file.
Editing photos
110
Playback/Editing > Editing photos
Resizing photos
Change the size of a photo and save it as a new file.
1 Select → .
2 Select an option.
Resize : 3888 x 2592
Cancel Save
3 Press [o] to save.
Available resize options differ depending on the original size of the photo.
Adjusting your photos
You can correct captured photos by adjusting the brightness, contrast, or
color.
1 Select .
2 Select an adjusting option.
• If you selected (Auto adjustment), the adjusted photo will be
saved automatically.
Icon Description
Original (Reset to the original image)
Auto adjustment
Brightness
Contrast
Saturation
RGB adjustment
Color Temperature
Exposure
111
Playback/Editing > Editing photos
3 Rotate the navigation button or press [C/F] to adjust the
option.
4 Press [o].
5 Press [m].
6 Press [f] to save.
Retouching faces
1 Select ĺ .
2 Rotate the navigation button or press [C/F] to adjust the
option.
As the number increases, the skin tone becomes brighter and
smoother.
3 Press [o] to save.
112
Playback/Editing > Editing photos
Applying Smart Filter effects
Apply special effects to your photos.
1 Select , and then select an option.
Smart Filter : Vignetting
Cancel Set
Option Description
Original No effect
Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast,
and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras.
Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject
appear in miniature.
Soft Focus Hide facial imperfections or apply dreamy
effects.
Sketch Apply a pen sketch effect.
Option Description
Fish-eye Distort close objects to imitate the visual effect
of a fisheye lens.
Classic Apply a black and white effect.
Retro Apply a sepia tone effect.
Oil Painting Apply an oil painting effect.
Cartoon Apply a cartoon effect.
Ink Painting Apply ink sketching effect.
Cross Filter
Add lines that radiate outward from bright
objects to imitate the visual effect of a cross
filter.
Zooming Shot Blur the edges of a photo to emphasize the
subjects in the center.
2 Press [o].
3 Press [f] to save.
Chapter 4
Wireless network
Learn how to connect to wireless local area networks (WLANs) and use functions.
114
Wireless network
Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Learn to connect via an access point (AP) when you are in a range of a
WLAN. You can also configure network settings.
Connecting to a WLAN
1 Rotate the mode dial to B.
2 Select , , or .
3 Follow the on-screen instructions until the Wi-Fi Setting screen
appears.
• The camera automatically searches for available AP devices.
4 Select an AP.
Samsung1
Samsung2
Samsung3
Wi-Fi Setting
Refresh
Back Manual
• Select Refresh to refresh the list of connectable APs.
• Select Add wireless network to add an AP manually. The AP name
must be in English to add the AP manually.
Icon Description
Ad hoc AP
Secured AP
WPS AP
Signal strength
• Press [F] to open network setting options.
• When you select a secured AP, a pop-up window appears. Enter the
required passwords to connect to the WLAN. For information about
entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 117)
• When you select an unsecured AP, the camera will connect to the
WLAN.
• If you select a WPS profile supported AP, select WPS PIN
connection, and then enter a PIN on the AP device. You can also
connect to a WPS profile supported AP by selecting WPS button
connection on the camera, and then pushing the WPS button on
the AP device.
• If a pop-up message about data collection regulations appears,
read and agree to it.
115
Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Setting network options
1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press
[F].
2 Select each option, and then enter the required information.
Option Description
Network Password Enter the network password.
IP Setting Set the IP address automatically or manually.
Manually setting the IP address
1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press
[F].
2 Select IP Setting ĺ Manual.
3 Select each option, and then enter the required information.
Option Description
IP Enter the static IP address.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask.
Gateway Enter the gateway.
DNS Server Enter the DNS address.
116
Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Network connection tips
• Some Wi-Fi features are not available if you do not insert a memory card.
• The quality of the network connection will be determined by the AP.
• The further the distance between your camera and the AP, the longer it
will take to connect to the network.
• If a nearby device is using the same radio frequency signal as your
camera, it may interrupt your connection.
• If your AP name is not in English, the camera may not be able to locate
the device or the name may appear incorrectly.
• For network settings or a password, contact your network administrator
or network service provider.
• Depending on the encryption type, the number of digits in the password
may differ.
• A WLAN connection may not be possible in all surroundings.
• The camera may display a WLAN enabled printer on the AP List. You
cannot connect to a network via a printer.
• You cannot connect your camera to a network and a TV simultaneously.
• If you cannot connect to a WLAN, try another AP from the available AP
list.
• Available network connections may differ by country.
• The WLAN feature of your camera must comply with radio transmission
laws in your region. To ensure compliance, use the WLAN feature only in
the country where you purchased the camera.
• The process for adjusting network settings may differ, depending on
network conditions.
• Do not access a network that you are not authorized to use.
• Before you connect to a network, ensure your battery is fully charged.
• Files that you transfer to another device may not be supported by the
device. In this case, use a computer to play back the files.
• If an AP requires you to enter log-in information, you will not be able to
connect to it.
117
Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Entering text
Learn how to enter text. Rotate the navigation button or press
[D/I/C/F] to scroll to a key and press [o] to enter it.
Backspace
Done
Back
Icon Description
Delete the last letter.
Move the cursor.
In ABC mode, change the case.
Switch between Symbol mode and ABC mode.
Enter a space.
Done Save the displayed text.
• Press [y] to move to Done directly.
• The number of characters you can enter varies depending on the situation.
• The screen may differ depending on the input mode.
118
Wireless network
Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go)
Using NFC features in Playback mode
(Photo Beam)
In Playback mode, the camera transfers the current file to the smart phone
automatically when you read a tag from an NFC-enabled device.
• To transfer multiple files, select files from the thumbnail view, and then
read a tag from an NFC-enabled device.
Using NFC features in Wi-Fi mode
Select MobileLink or Remote Viewfinder from the pop-up window that
appears by reading a tag from an NFC-enabled device. (p. 121, 125)
Place a smart phone's NFC antenna near the camera’s NFC tag to launch
the feature for saving photos to a smart phone automatically or the feature
for using a smart phone as a remote shutter. You can also transfer files to
an NFC-enabled device in Playback mode.
• This feature is supported by NFC-enabled smart phones running Android OS.
It is recommended that you use the latest version. This feature is not available
for iOS devices.
• You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device
before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung
Apps or the Google Play Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible
with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later.
• For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART
CAMERA App from www.samsung.com.
• To read an NFC tag, place the NFC-enabled device near the camera’s NFC tag
for more than 2 seconds.
• You can set the size for transferred photos by pressing [m], and then
selecting d ĺ MobileLink/NFC Image Size ĺ an option.
• Do not modify the NFC tag in any way.
Using NFC features in Shooting mode
Launch AutoShare or Remote Viewfinder by reading a tag from an NFCenabled
device. (p. 119, 125) Preset to launch the Wi-Fi function by reading
a tag on an NFC-enabled device. (p. 139)
119
Wireless network
Saving files to a smart phone automatically
The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the AutoShare
feature via a WLAN. When you capture a photo with your camera, the
photo is saved to a smart phone automatically.
• The AutoShare feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running
Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.)
Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version.
If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform
properly.
• You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device
before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung
Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART
CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in
2013 or later.
• For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART
CAMERA App from www.samsung.com.
• If you set this function, the setting is maintained even when you change the
Shooting mode.
• This feature may not be supported in some modes or may not be available
with some shooting options.
1 In Shooting mode, select [m] ĺb ĺ AutoShare ĺ On.
• If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the
application appears, select Next.
• To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the
camera, select Security Settings. (p. 144)
2 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the
application.
• To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart
phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near
the NFC tag (p. 29) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is
connected to your camera, and then skip to step 5.
3 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone
to the camera.
• The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time.
• If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the
camera to the smart phone.
120
Wireless network > Saving files to a smart phone automatically
4 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your
camera.
• If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is
connected automatically.
• An icon that shows the connection status ( ) will appear on the
camera’s screen.
5 Capture a photo.
• The captured photo is saved to the camera, and then transferred to
the smart phone. If a memory card is not inserted or the memory is
full, the captured photo is transferred to the smart phone without
being saved to the camera.
• If you recorded a video, it is saved only to the camera.
• The image file captured while recording a video is not saved on the
smart phone.
• If the GPS feature is activated on the smart phone, the GPS
information will be saved with the captured photo.
121
Wireless network
The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the MobileLink
feature via a WLAN. You can easily send photos or videos to your smart
phone.
• The MobileLink feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running
Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.)
Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version.
If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform
properly.
• You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device
before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung
Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART
CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in
2013 or later.
• For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART
CAMERA App from www.samsung.com.
• When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
• You can view up to 1,000 recent files and send up to 1,000 files at a time.
• When you send Full HD videos using MobileLink feature, you may not be able
to play back files on some devices.
• When using this feature on an iOS device, the device may lose its Wi-Fi
connection.
• You cannot send RAW files.
• You can set the size for transferred photos by pressing [m], and then
selecting d ĺ MobileLink/NFC Image Size ĺ an option.
• You can also send files in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then
selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ MobileLink.
• The screen turns off if you perform no operations on the camera for
30 seconds.
1 Rotate the mode dial to B.
2 On the camera, select .
• If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the
application appears, select Next.
• To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the
camera, select Security Settings. (p. 144)
3 On the camera, select a sending option.
• If you select Select Files from Smartphone, you can use your
smart phone to view and share files stored on the camera. The
screen turns off if you perform no operations on the smart phone
for 30 seconds.
• If you select Select Files from Camera, you can select files to send
from the camera.
4 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the
application.
• To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart
phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near
the NFC tag (p. 29) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is
connected to your camera, and then skip to step 7.
Sending photos or videos to a smart phone
122
Wireless network > Sending photos or videos to a smart phone
5 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone
to the camera.
• The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time.
• If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the
camera to the smart phone.
6 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your
camera.
• If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is
connected automatically.
7 On the smart phone or camera, select files to transfer from the
camera.
8 On the smart phone, touch the copy button or on the camera,
select Send.
• The camera will send the files to the smart phone.
123
Wireless network
Sending photos or videos to multiple smart phones
The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the Group Share
feature via a WLAN. You can easily send photos or videos to multiple smart
phones.
• The Group Share feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running
Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.)
Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version.
If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform
properly.
• You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device
before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung
Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART
CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in
2013 or later.
• For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART
CAMERA App from www.samsung.com.
• When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
• Transferring files to multiple smart phones may take longer than transferring
files to one device.
• When you send Full HD videos using Group Share feature, you may not be
able to play back files on some devices.
• When using this feature on an iOS device, the device may lose its Wi-Fi
connection.
• You cannot send RAW files.
• You can set the size for transferred photos by pressing [m], and then
selecting d ĺ MobileLink/NFC Image Size ĺ an option.
• You can also send files in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then
selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ Group Share.
1 Rotate the mode dial to B.
2 On the camera, select .
• If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the
application appears, select Next.
• To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the
camera, select Security Settings. (p. 144)
3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the
application.
124
Wireless network > Sending photos or videos to multiple smart phones
4 Select the smart phone from the list.
• If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is
connected automatically.
• You can connect to up to 4 smart phones.
• If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the
camera to the smart phone.
5 Select Next.
6 On camera, select files to transfer from the camera.
7 On the camera, select Send.
• The camera will send the files to the smart phone.
• When you connect to multiple smart phones, the camera will send
the files to all devices at the same time.
125
Wireless network
The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the Remote
Viewfinder feature via a WLAN. Use the smart phone as a remote shutter
release with the Remote Viewfinder feature. The captured photo will
display on the smart phone.
• The Remote Viewfinder feature is supported by smart phones or tablets
running Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some
models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest
version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not
perform properly.
• You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device
before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung
Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART
CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in
2013 or later.
• For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART
CAMERA App from www.samsung.com.
• Continuously captured photos or videos will not display on the smart phone.
1 Rotate the mode dial to B.
2 On the camera, select .
• If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the
application appears, select Next.
• To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the
camera, select Security Settings. (p. 144)
3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the
application.
• To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart
phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near
the NFC tag (p. 29) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is
connected to your camera, and then skip to step 6.
4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone
to the camera.
• The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time.
• If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the
camera to the smart phone.
Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release
126
Wireless network > Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release
5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your
camera.
• If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is
connected automatically.
6 On the smart phone, select q to open the smart panel.
7 On the smart phone, set the shooting options.
• While using this feature, some buttons are not available on your
camera.
• With the smart phone, you can operate the camera only by
touching the screen.
• Some shooting options are not supported.
• Shooting options that you have set will remain on the camera after
the connection with the smart phone has ended.
8 Touch to return to the shooting screen.
9 On the smart phone, touch and hold to focus, and then
release it to capture the photo.
• Touch to record a video and touch to stop a video.
• If the GPS feature is activated on the smart phone, the GPS
information will be saved with the captured photo.
• When you use this feature, the ideal distance between the camera and the
smart phone may vary, depending on your surroundings.
• The smart phone must be within 7 m of the camera to use this feature.
• It will take some time to capture the photo after you release on the smart
phone.
• If the file save option is set to Smartphone + Camera, only photos will be
transferred to the smart phone. (Videos and RAW files will not be transferred.)
• If you capture photos continuously when the file save option is set to
Smartphone + Camera, photos will not be transferred to the smart phone.
• The smart phone's screen will not mirror the camera's display when recording
a video.
• The Remote Viewfinder function will deactivate when:
- there is an incoming call on the smart phone
- either the camera or the smart phone turns off
- device loses its connection to the WLAN
- the Wi-Fi connection is poor or unstable
- you perform no operations for approximately 3 minutes while connected
- folder and file number are max values
• The screen turns off if you perform no operations on the camera for
30 seconds.
127
Wireless network
Using the Home Monitor+
3 On the camera, select an AP from the list, and then position
the camera.
• Place the camera in a safe location where children or pets cannot
reach it.
• Point the camera lens at the subject.
• We recommend you use a fully charged battery or connect the
camera to a power outlet with the AC adapter.
4 Enter your Samsung account ID and password to log in.
• For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 117)
• If you have previously logged in to the service, you may be logged
in automatically.
5 On the smart phone, turn on the Samsung Home Monitor+
application.
Use the Home Monitor+ feature to connect the camera to a smart phone
on which the Samsung Home Monitor+ is installed, and monitor a location.
• The Home Monitor+ feature is supported by smart phones that run the
Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.)
Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version.
The Android OS must be 4.1 or higher.
• You should install the Samsung Home Monitor+ application on your smart
phone before using this feature. You can download the application from
Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store.
1 Rotate the mode dial to B.
2 On the camera, select .
• If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the
application appears, select Next.
128
Wireless network > Using the Home Monitor+
6 Start monitoring on your smart phone.
• During live video monitoring via the smart phone, video is not saved on
the camera.
• If the monitored location is dark, touch to turn on the AF-assist light.
• If the camera is connected to the same wireless network as other
devices, videos may not play smoothly.
• Depending on network conditions, videos may delay or stop.
7 Touch to exit the Samsung Home Monitor+ application.
• The smart phone may not activate the alarm when it detects sound
depending on network conditions.
• The Home Monitor+ feature is not a professional security device. It is
recommended to use professional services for home security.
• Do not connect more than two cameras using the Home Monitor+ feature to
the same network. The Network may slow down.
• You may incur additional charges when using the Samsung Home Monitor+
app on a 3G or LTE network.
• The manufacturer is not responsible for any damages associated with the
leaking or distribution of personal information, such as streaming videos, to
other parties.
• The user is responsible for managing the ID and password for the Home
Monitor+ feature.
• Use this feature indoors only. Using it in public spaces may slow down
the network speed. The manufacturer is not responsible for any damages
associated with the use of this feature in public spaces.
• Do not use this feature for an extended period of more than a week.
• Do not use this feature for illegal purposes.
• A network delay or breakdown may occur depending on network conditions.
• The screen turns off if you perform no operations on the camera for
30 seconds.
129
Wireless network
Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos
You can send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC
wirelessly.
Installing the program for Auto Backup on
your PC
1 Install i-Launcher on the PC. (p. 150)
2 Connect the camera to the PC with the USB cable.
3 When the Auto Backup program icon appears, click it.
• The Auto Backup program is installed on the PC. Follow the onscreen
instructions to complete the installation.
4 Remove the USB cable.
Before installing the program, ensure that the PC is connected to a network.
Sending photos or videos to a PC
1 Rotate the mode dial to B.
2 Select .
• If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the
application appears, select Next.
• The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via
the most recently connected AP device.
• If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will
search for available AP devices. (p. 114)
3 Select a backup PC.
130
Wireless network > Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos
4 Select OK.
• To cancel sending, select Cancel.
• You cannot select individual files to backup. This function backs up
only new files on the camera.
• The backup's progress will be shown on the PC monitor.
• When the transfer is completed, the camera will turn off
automatically in approximately 30 seconds. Select Cancel to return
to the previous screen and prevent the camera from turning off
automatically.
• To turn off your PC automatically after the transfer is complete,
select Shut down PC after backup.
• To change the backup PC, select Change PC.
• When you connect the camera to the WLAN, select the AP that is connected
to the PC.
• The camera will search for available access points even if you are connecting
to the same access point again.
• If you turn off the camera or remove the battery while sending files, the file
transfer will be interrupted.
• While you are using this feature, the shutter control is disabled on your
camera.
• You can connect only one camera to the PC at a time for sending files.
• The backup may be canceled due to network conditions.
• When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
• You must turn off Windows Firewall and any other firewalls before using this
feature.
• You can send up to 1,000 recent files.
• On the PC software, the server name must be entered in the Latin alphabet
and can contain no more than 48 characters.
131
Wireless network
Using Samsung Link to view files
You can view files on a Samsung Link device connected to the same AP.
1 Rotate the mode dial to B.
2 Select .
• The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via
the most recently connected AP device.
• If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will
search for available AP devices. (p. 114)
• You can set to allow only selected devices or all devices to connect
by pressing [f], and then selecting DLNA Access Control on the
screen.
• A sharing file list is created. Wait until other devices can find your
camera.
3 Connect the Samsung Link device to a network, and then turn
on the Samsung Link feature.
• Refer to your device's user manual for more information.
4 On the camera, allow the Samsung Link device to connect to
your camera.
5 On the Samsung Link device, select a camera to connect to.
6 On the Samsung Link device, browse the shared photos or
videos.
• For information about searching for the camera and browsing the
photos or videos on the Samsung Link device, refer to the device's
user manual.
• Videos may not play smoothly depending on the type of Samsung
Link device or the network condition.
AP
▲ The camera is connected to a TV that supports Samsung Link via WLAN.
132
Wireless network > Using Samsung Link to view files
• You can share up to 1,000 recent files.
• On a Samsung Link device, you can view only photos or videos captured with
your camera.
• The range of the wireless connection between your camera and a Samsung
Link device may vary depending on the specifications of the AP.
• If the camera is connected to 2 Samsung Link devices, playback may be
slower.
• Photos or videos will be shared in their original sizes.
• You can use this feature only with devices that support Samsung Link.
• Shared photos or videos will not be stored on the Samsung Link device, but
they can be stored in the camera to meet the device's specifications.
• Transferring photos or videos to the Samsung Link device may take some
time depending on the network connection, the number of files to be shared,
or the sizes of the files.
• If you power off the camera abnormally while viewing photos or videos on
a Samsung Link device (for example, by removing the battery), the device
considers the camera to still be connected.
• The order of photos or videos on the camera may be different than on the
Samsung Link device.
• Depending on the number of photos or videos you want to share, it may
take some time to load your photos or videos and complete the initial set-up
process.
• While viewing photos or videos on the Samsung Link device, continuously
using the device's remote or performing additional operations on the device
may prevent this feature from working properly.
• If you reorder or sort files on the camera while viewing them on a Samsung
Link device, you must repeat the initial set-up process to update the list of
files on the device.
• When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
• We recommend you use a network cable to connect your Samsung
Link device to your AP. This will minimize any video ‘Stuttering’ you may
experience when streaming content.
• To view files on a Samsung Link device, enable multicast mode on your AP.
Chapter 5
Camera settings menu
Learn about the user settings and general settings menu.
You can adjust the settings to better suit your needs and preferences.
134
Camera settings menu
You can set the user environment with these settings.
To set user options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺ d ĺ an option.
Available items and the order of them may differ depending on shooting
conditions.
ISO Customizing
ISO Step
You can set the size for the ISO sensitivity by either 1/3 or 1 step.
Auto ISO Range
You can set the maximum ISO value under which each EV step is chosen
when you set the ISO to Auto.
Noise Reduction
Use the Noise Reduction to reduce the visual noise in photos.
* Default
Option Description
High ISO NR This function reduces noise that may occur when you
set a high ISO sensitivity. (Off, High, Normal*, Low)
Long Term NR This function reduces noise when you set the camera
for a long exposure. (Off, On*)
User settings
135
Camera settings menu > User settings
Bracket Settings
You can set up the options for each bracketing.
* Default
Option Description
AE Bracket Settings
Set the exposure interval. (-/+0.3 EV*,
-/+0.7 EV, -/+1.0 EV, -/+1.3 EV, -/+1.7 EV,
-/+2.0 EV, -/+2.3 EV, -/+2.7 EV, -/+3.0 EV)
WB Bracket Settings
Adjust the White Balance interval range of the
3 bracketed photos. (AB-/+3*, AB-/+2, AB-/+1,
MG-/+3, MG-/+2, MG-/+1)
For example, AB-/+3 adjusts the Amber value plus
or minus three steps. MG-/+3 adjusts the Magenta
value the same amount.
P Wiz Bracket
Settings
Select 3 Picture Wizard settings the camera uses to
capture the 3 bracketed photos.
Depth Bracket
Settings
Set the depth interval. (-/+0.3, -/+0.7, -/+1.0*,
-/+1.3, -/+1.7, -/+2.0, -/+2.3, -/+2.7, -/+3.0)
DMF (Direct Manual Focus)
You can adjust the focus manually by rotating the focus ring after
achieving the focus by half-pressing [Shutter]. This feature may not be
available with some lenses.
136
Camera settings menu > User settings
Color Space
The color space option allows you to select methods for representing
colors. Digital imaging devices such as digital cameras, monitors, and
printers have their own methods for representing colors, which are called
color spaces.
* Default
Option Description
sRGB*
sRGB (Standard RGB) is an international specification
to define the color space created by IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission). It is widely used for
creating colors on PC monitors and is also the standard
color space for Exif. sRGB is recommended for regular
images and images you intend to publish on the
Internet.
Adobe RGB
Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a
larger color range than sRGB. Its wider range of colors
helps you to easily edit photos on a computer. Note
that individual programs are generally compatible
with a limited number of color spaces.
Adobe RGB
sRGB
When the color space is set to Adobe RGB, photos will be saved as
"_SAMXXXX.JPG".
137
Camera settings menu > User settings
Distortion Correct
You can correct lens distortion that might occur from lenses.
This feature is available with lenses that support it.
iFn Customizing
You can select options that can be adjusted when you press [i-Function]
on an i-Function lens.
Option Description
Aperture Set to adjust the aperture value.
Shutter Speed Set to adjust the shutter speed.
EV Set to adjust the exposure value.
ISO Set to adjust ISO sensitivity.
White Balance Set to adjust the White Balance.
138
Camera settings menu > User settings
User Display
You can add or remove shooting information from the display.
1
2
3
No. Description
1 Icons
Set to display icons on the right in Shooting mode.
2 Date & Time
Set to display the date and time.
3
Histogram
Set the histogram on the display on or off.
About histogram
A histogram is a graph that shows the brightness distribution of a
photo. A histogram inclined to the left indicates a dark photo.
A histogram inclined to the right indicates a bright photo. The height
of the graph is related to color information. The graph gets higher if a
specific color is more common.
Insufficient exposure Balanced exposure Excessive exposure
139
Camera settings menu > User settings
Key Mapping
You can change the function assigned to the Custom button.
* Default
Button Function
Custom
Set the Custom button's function.
• Optical Preview*: Execute the Depth of Field
Preview function for the current aperture value.
(p. 23)
• One Touch WB (White Balance): Execute the Custom
White Balance function.
• One Touch RAW +: Save a file in the RAW+JPEG
format. To save a file in JPEG format, press the button
again.
• Reset: Reset some settings.
• AEL: Execute the auto exposure lock function. (Halfpressing
[Shutter] executes the auto exposure lock
function.)
• AEL Hold: Keep executing the auto exposure lock
function after shooting. (The exposure remains
locked even after you capture a photo.)
Live view NFC
In Shooting mode, turn on the NFC feature on an NFC-enabled smart
phone and place the smart phone's NFC antenna near the camera’s NFC
tag to launch AutoShare or Remote Viewfinder. This feature is supported
by NFC-enabled smart phones running Android OS. It is recommended
that you use the latest version. This feature is not available for iOS devices.
MobileLink/NFC Image Size
Set the size of photos to transfer to a smart phone using the MobileLink or
NFC functions.
* Default
Option Description
Resize to 2M or lower If a photo's size is larger than 3M, it will be
transferred after resizing it to 2M or lower.
Original* The photo will be transferred in its original size.
140
Camera settings menu > User settings
Auto Self-Shot
Set to turn on the camera and enter Self shot mode automatically when
you flip the display upward. In Self shot mode, the timer (3 seconds), face
detection, and beauty face options are automatically activated.
Lens Button Speed Settings
Set the zoom speed for the Power Zoom lens' buttons at either fast,
medium, or slow speed. At fast speed, zoom noise increases and can be
recorded in videos. This function is available only when you attach the
Power Zoom lens.
Grid Line
Select a guide to help you compose a scene.
(Off*, 4 X 4, 3 X 3, Cross, Diagonal)
AF Lamp
When shooting in dark places, turn the AF lamp on in order to have a
better auto focus. The Auto Focus functions more accurately in dark places
when the AF lamp is on.
141
Camera settings menu
* Default
Item Description
Display
Adjust
Adjust the display brightness, auto brightness setting,
display color, or level gauge.
Display Brightness: You can adjust the display
brightness manually.
Auto Brightness: Turn auto brightness on or off.
(Off, On*)
Display Color: You can adjust the display color manually.
Horizontal Calibration: Calibrate the level gauge. If the
level gauge is not level, position the camera on the level
surface, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
You cannot access the Horizontal Calibration option
in Playback mode.
You cannot calibrate the level gauge in portrait
orientation.
Auto Display
Off
Set the display off time. The display turns off if you do not
use the camera for the time you set.
(Off, 30 sec*, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min)
Learn to configure your camera's settings.
To set Setting
options,
In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] ĺ q ĺ
an option.
* Default
Item Description
Sound
System Volume: Set the sound volume or turn all sound
off entirely. (Off, Low, Medium*, High)
Even if the system volume is turned off, the camera emits
the sound while playing a video or a slide show.
AF Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when you
half-press the shutter button on or off. (Off, On*)
Button Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when
you press the buttons.(Off, On*)
Quick View
Set the Quick View time length-the amount of time the
camera displays a photo immediately after you capture it.
(Off, 1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, Hold)
Setting
142
Camera settings menu > Setting
* Default
Item Description
Date & Time
Set date, time, date format, time zone and whether to
imprint the date on photos. (Time Zone, Date/Time Set,
Date Type, Time Type, Imprint)
• The date appears on the lower right side of the photo.
• When you print a photo, some printers may not print
the date appropriately.
Video Out
Set the video signal output appropriate for your country
when connecting the camera to an external video device
such as a monitor or HDTV.
• NTSC: USA, Canada, Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Mexico, etc.
• PAL (Supports only PAL B, D, G, H, or I): Australia, Austria,
Belgium, China, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany,
England, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Singapore,
Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, Norway, etc.
Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC)
When you connect the camera to an HDTV that supports
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), you can control the play function of
the camera with the TV remote control.
• Off: You cannot control the play function of camera with
the TV remote control.
• On*: You can control the play function of camera with the
TV remote control.
* Default
Item Description
Auto Power
Off
Set power shut off time. The camera shuts off if you do not
use it for the time you set. (Off, 1 min*, 3 min, 5 min,
10 min, 30 min)
• The camera retains the power-off time setting even if
you replace the battery.
• Auto Power Off may not work if the camera is
connected to a computer or a TV or playing a slide
show or a movie.
Help Guide
Display
• Mode Help Guide: Set to display help text about the
selected mode when changing shooting modes.
(Off, On*)
• Function Help Guide: Set to display help text about
menus and functions. (Off, On*)
Press [n] to hide the help text.
Language Set a language the camera shows on the display.
143
Camera settings menu > Setting
* Default
Item Description
HDMI Output
When you connect the camera to an HDTV with an HDMI
cable, you can change the resolution of the image.
• NTSC: Auto*, 1080i, 720p, 480p,
576p (activates only when PAL is selected)
If the connected HDTV does not support the resolution
you select, the camera sets the resolution one level lower.
File Name
Set the method of creating file names.
• Standard*: SAM_XXXX.JPG (sRGB)/ _SAMXXXX.JPG
(Adobe RGB)
• Date:
- sRGB files - MMDDXXXX.JPG. For example, for a photo
captured on Jan. 01, the file name would be 0101XXXX.
jpg.
- Adobe RGB files - _MDDXXXX.JPG for the months Jan
through Sept. For the months Oct through Dec, the month
number is replaced by the letters A (Oct.), B (Nov.) and C
(Dec.). For example, for a photo captured on Feb. 03, the
file name would be _203XXXX.jpg. For a photo captured
on Oct. 05, the file name would be _A05XXXX.jpg.
* Default
Item Description
File Number
Set the method of numbering files and folders.
• Reset: After using the reset function, the next file name is
started at 0001.
• Series*: New file numbers continue the existing number
sequence, even if you have installed a new memory card,
formatted the card, or deleted all photos.
• The first folder name is 100PHOTO, if you have selected
the sRGB color space and Standard file naming, the first
file name is SAM_0001.
• File name numbers are increased by 1 from SAM_0001 to
SAM_9999.
• Folder numbers are increased by 1 from 100PHOTO to
999PHOTO.
• The maximum number of files that can be saved in one
folder is 9,999.
• File numbers are assigned according to DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) specifications.
• If you change a file name (for example, on a computer),
the camera will not be able to play the file.
Folder Type
Set the type of folder.
• Standard*: XXXPHOTO
• Date: XXX_MMDD
144
Camera settings menu > Setting
* Default
Item Description
Format
Format the memory card. Formatting deletes all existing
files including protected files. (No*, Yes)
Errors can occur if you use a memory card formatted by
another brand of camera, a memory card reader, or a
computer. Please format memory cards in the camera
before using them to capture photos.
Device
Information
View the firmware version of the body and the lens, Mac
address, and network certification number, or update the
firmware.
• Software Update: Update the firmware of the camera
body or lens. (Body Firmware, Lens Firmware)
• You can update the firmware by connecting the camera
to the computer and starting i-Launcher. For more
details, refer to page 167.
• You cannot run a firmware upgrade without a fully
charged battery. Recharge the battery fully before
running a firmware upgrade.
• If you update the firmware, user settings and values will
be reset. (Date, time, language, and video out will not
change.)
• Do not turn the camera off while the update is in
progress.
* Default
Item Description
Wi-Fi Privacy
lock
Set to require a PIN when connecting the camera and a
smart phone.
• PIN: Enter a PIN before connecting.
• None*: Allow a connection without requiring a PIN.
• Connections will automatically be made without
requiring a PIN when using the NFC function.
• PINs are automatically generated and renewed only
when you reset the camera settings or update the
firmware.
• If you have previously connected your camera to a
smart phone via a PIN, they will connect automatically.
Reset
Reset the setup menu and shooting options to the factory
defaults. (Date, time, language, and video output settings
do not change.) (No*, Yes)
Open Source
License View open source licenses.
Chapter 6
Connecting to external devices
Make full use of the camera by connecting it to external devices such as a computer or HDTV.
146
Connecting to external devices
Play back photos or videos by connecting your camera to an HDTV using
an optional HDMI cable.
1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] ĺ q ĺ
HDMI Output ĺ an option. (p. 143)
2 Turn off your camera and HDTV.
3 Connect your camera to your HDTV with the optional HDMI
cable.
4 Turn on your HDTV, and then select the HDMI video source.
5 Turn on the camera.
• The camera automatically enters into Playback mode when you
connect it to an HDTV.
6 View photos or play videos using the camera buttons.
• When using the HDMI cable, you can connect the camera to an HDTV using
the Anynet+(CEC) method.
• The Anynet+(CEC) functions allow you to control connected devices using the
TV remote control.
• If the HDTV supports Anynet+(CEC), the TV turns on automatically when used
in conjunction with the camera. This feature may not be available on some
HDTVs.
• When connected to an HDTV by an HDMI cable, the camera cannot capture a
photo or video.
• When connected to an HDTV, some of the camera’s playback functions may
not be available.
• The length of time after which the camera and an HDTV are connected may
vary depending on the memory card that you are using. As the main feature
of a memory card is to increase the transfer speed, it is not necessarily true
to say that a memory card with a faster transfer speed is also fast in using the
HDMI function.
Viewing files on an HDTV
147
Connecting to external devices
Transfer files on a memory card to your computer by connecting the
camera to the PC.
Transferring files to your Windows OS
computer
Connecting the camera as a removable disk
You can connect the camera to your computer as a removable disk. Open
the removable disk and transfer files to your computer.
1 Turn off the camera.
2 Connect the camera to your computer with the USB cable.
You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the
cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not
responsible for any loss of data.
If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not
work properly.
3 Turn on the camera.
The computer recognizes the camera automatically.
4 On your computer, select My Computer ĺ Removable Disk
ĺ DCIM ĺ 100PHOTO or 101_0101.
5 Select the files you want, and then drag or save them to your
computer.
If the Folder Type is set to Date, the folder name appears as "XXX_MMDD".
For example, if you capture a photo on January 1, the folder name will be
"101_0101".
Transferring files to your computer
148
Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer
Disconnecting the camera (for Windows 7)
With Windows 8, the methods for disconnecting the camera are similar.
1 Ensure that no data is being transferred between the camera
and the computer.
If the status lamp on your camera is blinking, it means the data
transfer is in progress. Please wait until the status lamp stops
blinking.
2 Click on the tool bar at the bottom right of your computer
screen.
3 Click the pop-up message.
4 Click the message box indicating safely removed.
5 Remove the USB cable.
Transferring files to your Mac OS
Mac OS 10.7 or later is supported.
1 Turn off the camera.
2 Connect your camera to a Macintosh computer with the USB
cable.
You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the
cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not
responsible for any loss of data.
If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not
work properly.
149
Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer
3 Turn on the camera.
• The computer recognizes the camera automatically and displays a
removable disk icon.
4 On your computer, open the removable disk.
5 Transfer photos or videos to the Mac OS computer.
150
Connecting to external devices
You can view and edit files using the provided programs. You can also send
the files to a PC wirelessly.
Installing i-Launcher
1 Turn off the camera.
2 Connect the camera to your computer with the USB cable.
You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable
is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible
for any loss of data.
3 Turn on the camera.
4 Install i-Launcher on the PC.
OS How to Install
Windows
When the pop-up window prompts you to install
i-Launcher, select Yes.
If the pop-up window does not appear, select My
Computer ĺ i-Launcher ĺ iLinker.exe.
If a pop-up window prompting you to run iLinker.exe
appears, run it first.
When you connect the camera to a computer
with i-Launcher installed, the program will launch
automatically.
Mac Click Devices ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Mac ĺ iLinker.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
Before installing the program, ensure that the PC is connected to a network.
Using programs on a PC
151
Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC
Using Samsung i-Launcher
Icon Description
You can download the firmware of your camera.
Download the User Manual.
Download this program to convert Samsung RAW files (SRW) to DNG
files.
i-Launcher provides a link for downloading the PC Auto Backup
program when you connect the camera to a computer. You can
send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC
wirelessly.
If you cannot open Samsung RAW files (SRW) with Adobe Photoshop Lightroom,
convert the file format to DNG with the Samsung DNG Converter or update the
Adobe Photoshop Lightroom program.
Using i-Launcher
i-Launcher allows you update the firmware of the camera or the lens or
provides a link to download the PC Auto Backup program.
Requirements for Windows OS
Item Requirements
CPU Intel® Core™ 2 Duo 1.66 GHz or higher/
AMD Athlon X2 Dual-Core 2.2 GHz or higher
RAM Minimum 512 MB RAM (1 GB or more recommended)
OS* Windows 7, Windows 8
Hard disk
capacity 250 MB or more (1 GB and above recommended)
Others
• CD-ROM drive
• 1024X768 pixels, 16-bit color display compatible
monitor (1280X1024 pixels, 32-bit color display
recommended)
• USB 2.0 port
• nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT or higher/
ATI X1600 series or higher
• Microsoft DirectX 9.0c or later
* A 32-bit version of i-Launcher will be installed—even on 64-bit editions of Windows 7 and
Windows 8.
152
Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC
• The requirements on the following page are recommendations only.
i-Launcher may not work properly even when the computer meets the
requirements, depending on the condition of your computer.
• If your computer does not meet the requirements, videos may not play
correctly.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage that results from using
unqualified computers such as a computer you assembled yourself.
Requirements for Mac OS
Item Requirements
OS Mac OS 10.5 or higher (except PowerPC)
RAM Minimum 256 MB RAM (512 MB or more
recommended)
Hard disk capacity Minimum 110 MB
Others • CD-ROM drive
• USB 2.0 port
Opening Samsung i-Launcher
On your computer, select Start ĺ All Programs ĺ Samsung ĺ
i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher. Or, click Applications ĺ Samsung
ĺ i-Launcher on your Mac OS computer.
Downloading the firmware
From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click . For information about
updating the firmware, refer to page 167.
Downloading the PC Auto Backup program
From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click . For information about
installing the PC Auto Backup program, refer to page 129.
153
Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC
Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
1 Insert Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM into your PC.
2 Select a language.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to JPEG formats and
stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the time
of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to JPEG formats and are stored
in the memory without any changes. With Adobe Photoshop Lightroom,
you can calibrate exposures, White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors
of photos. You can also edit JPEG or TIFF files as well as RAW files. For more
information, refer to the program guide.
• If you cannot open Samsung RAW files (SRW) with Adobe Photoshop
Lightroom, convert the file format to DNG with the Samsung DNG Converter
or update the Adobe Photoshop Lightroom program.
• In Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, an image’s brightness, color and other effects
may be displayed differently. This occurs because the original camera settings
and options applied during image capture are removed, ready for it to be
processed in Adobe Photoshop Lightroom.
Chapter 7
Appendix
Get information about error messages, camera maintenance,
trouble shooting tips, specifications, and optional accessories.
155
Appendix
When the following error messages appear, try these remedies.
Error messages Suggested remedies
Lens is locked The lens is locked. Rotate the lens counterclockwise
until you hear a click. (p. 46)
Card Error
• Turn off the camera, and then turn it on again.
• Remove the memory card and insert it again.
• Format the memory card.
Low Battery Insert a charged battery or recharge the battery.
No Image File Capture photos or insert a memory card that
contains photos.
Device disconnected.
Network connection disconnected while photos
are being transferred to supported devices.
Re-select a supported device.
File Error Delete the damaged file or contact a service
center.
Error messages Suggested remedies
Memory Full Delete unnecessary files or insert a new
memory card.
Transfer failed.
• The camera has failed to send e-mails or files
to other devices. Try sending again.
• Check the network connection and try again.
Unable to capture a
photo because folder
and file number on
the memory card
reached the maximum
values. Reset the folder
number?
File names do not match the DCF standard.
Follow the on-screen instructions to reset the
folder number.
Error 00
Turn off your camera and remount the lens.
If the message still appears, contact a service
center.
Error 01/02
Turn off your camera, remove the battery,
and insert again. If the message still appears,
contact a service center.
Error messages
156
Appendix
Cleaning the camera
Camera lens and display
Use a brush to remove dust and wipe the lens gently with a soft cloth.
If any dust remains, apply lens cleaning liquid to a piece of cleaning paper
and wipe gently.
Image sensor
Depending on different shooting conditions, dust may appear in photos
because the image sensor is exposed to the external environment. This
problem is normal, and the exposure to dust occurs in everyday use of the
camera. Do not insert the blower into the mounting opening of the lens.
Camera body
Wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth.
Never use benzene, thinners, or alcohol to clean the device. These solutions can
damage the camera or cause it to malfunction.
Maintaining the camera
157
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Using on beaches or shores
• Protect your camera from sand and dirt when you use it on beaches or in
other similar areas.
• Your camera is not waterproof. Do not handle the battery, adapter, or
memory card with wet hands. Operating the camera with wet hands
may cause damage to your camera.
Storing for extended period of time
• When you store the camera for an extended period, place it in a sealed
container with an absorbent material, such as silica gel.
• Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before
use.
• The present date and time can be initialized when the camera is turned
on after the camera and battery have been separated for a prolonged
period.
Using or storing the camera
Inappropriate places to use or store the camera
• Avoid exposing the camera to very cold or very hot temperatures.
• Avoid using your camera in areas with extremely high humidity, or
where the humidity changes drastically.
• Avoid exposing the camera to direct sunlight and storing it in hot, poorly
ventilated areas, such as in a car during summer time.
• Protect your camera and the display from impact, rough handling, and
excessive vibration to avoid serious damage.
• Avoid using or storing your camera in dusty, dirty, humid, or poorly
ventilated areas to prevent damage to moving parts and internal
components.
• Do not use your camera near fuels, combustibles, or flammable
chemicals. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive
materials in the same compartment as the camera or its accessories.
• Do not store the camera where there are mothballs.
158
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Using the camera with caution in humid environments
When you transfer the camera from a cold environment to a warm one,
condensation can form on the lens or internal components of the camera.
In this situation, turn off the camera and wait for at least 1 hour.
If condensation forms on the memory card, remove the memory card from
the camera and wait until all moisture has evaporated before reinserting it.
Other cautions
• Do not swing your camera by the strap. This may cause injury to yourself
or others or damage to your camera.
• Do not paint your camera, as paint can clog moving parts and prevent
proper operation.
• Turn off the camera when not using it.
• Your camera consists of delicate parts. Avoid impacts to the camera.
• Protect the display from external force by keeping it in the case when
not in use. Protect the camera from scratches by keeping it away from
sand, sharp implements, or loose change.
• Do not use the camera if the screen is cracked or broken. Broken glass or
acrylic could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the camera to a
Samsung service center to have it repaired.
• Never place cameras, batteries, chargers, or accessories near, on, or in
heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Heat can
deform or overheat these devices, which can cause a fire or explosion.
• Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight, as this may discolor the image
sensor or cause it to malfunction.
• Protect your lens from fingerprints and scratches. Clean your lens with a
soft, clean, debris-free lens cloth.
• The camera may turn off if impacted from the outside. This is to protect
the memory card. Turn on the camera to use it again.
• While you use the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not
affect your camera’s lifespan or performance.
• When you use the camera in low temperatures, it may take some time to
turn on, the color of the display may be changed temporarily, or afterimages
may appear. These conditions are not malfunctions and they will
correct themselves when the camera is returned to milder temperatures.
• Paint or metal on the outside of the camera may cause allergies,
itchy skin, eczema, or swelling for people with sensitive skin.
If you experience any of these symptoms, stop using the camera
immediately and consult a doctor.
• Do not insert foreign objects into any of your camera’s compartments,
slots, or access points. Damage due to improper use may not be covered
by your warranty.
• Do not allow unqualified personnel to service the camera or attempt to
service the camera yourself. Any damage that results from unqualified
service is not covered by your warranty.
159
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
About memory card
Supported memory card
This product supports microSD, microSDHC, or microSDXC memory cards.
Memory card adapter
Memory card
To read data with a PC or memory card reader, insert the memory card into
a memory card adapter.
160
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Memory card capacity
The memory capacity may differ depending on shooting scenes or shooting conditions. These capacities are based on a 2 GB SD card.
Size Quality
Super Fine Fine Normal RAW RAW + S.Fine RAW + Fine RAW + Normal
Photo
20.0M (5472X3648) 162 294 403 57 26 32 35
10.1M (3888X2592) 292 492 638 - 32 37 39
5.9M (2976X1984) 440 688 846 - 36 40 41
2.0M (1728X1152) 841 1,095 1,217 - 41 42 43
Burst 495 753 911 - - - -
16.9M (5472X3080) 188 337 456 - 27 34 37
7.8M (3712X2088) 359 585 739 - 34 38 40
4.9M (2944X1656) 503 762 919 - 37 40 41
2.1M (1920X1080) 1,566 2,840 3,897 - 44 45 46
13.3M (3648X3648) 231 403 536 - 30 35 38
7.0M (2640X2640) 390 624 781 - 35 39 40
4.0M (2000X2000) 573 839 993 - 38 41 42
1.1M (1024X1024) 2,814 4,750 6,163 - 45 46 46
161
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Cautions when using memory cards
• Avoid memory cards to very cold or very hot temperatures (below
0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can cause
memory cards to malfunction.
• Insert a memory card in the correct direction. Inserting a memory card in
the wrong direction may damage your camera and memory card.
• Do not use memory cards that have been formatted by other cameras or
by a computer. Reformat the memory card with your camera.
• Turn off the camera when you insert or remove the memory card.
• Do not remove the memory card or turn off your camera while the lamp
is blinking, as this may damage your data.
• When the lifespan of a memory card has expired, you cannot store any
more photos on the card. Use a new memory card.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject memory cards to heavy impact or
pressure.
• Avoid using or storing memory cards near strong magnetic fields.
• Avoid using or keeping memory cards in areas with high temperature,
high humidity, or corrosive substances.
Size Quality
HQ Normal
Video
1920X1080 (30 fps) Approx. 17' 02" Approx. 19' 50"
1280X720 (30 fps) Approx. 23' 46" Approx. 29' 37"
640X480 (30 fps) Approx. 58' 24" Approx. 77' 06"
For Sharing (30 fps) - Approx. 261' 21"
• The figures above are measured without using the zoom function.
• Available recording time may vary if you use the zoom.
• Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time.
• The maximum recording time is 20 minutes per file.
• The maximum playback time of For Sharing videos is 30 seconds per file.
162
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
About the battery
Use only Samsung-approved batteries.
Battery specifications
Item Description
Model* B740AE/B740AC/B740AU/B740AK
Type Lithium-ion battery
Cell capacity 2,330 mAh
Voltage 3.8 V
Charging time** (When the
battery is completely discharged) Approx. 270 min.
* The battery specifications or model may differ depending on your region.
** The figures above are based on when you use the provided USB cable and AC adapter.
Charging the battery by connecting it to a computer may take longer.
• Prevent memory cards from making contact with liquids, dirt, or foreign
substances. If dirty, wipe the memory card clean with a soft cloth before
you insert the memory card in your camera.
• Do not allow liquids, dirt, or foreign substances to come in contact with
memory cards or the memory card slot. Doing so may cause memory
cards or the camera to malfunction.
• When you carry a memory card, use a case to protect the card from
electrostatic discharges.
• Transfer important data to other media, such as a hard disk, CD, or DVD.
• When you use the camera for an extended period, the memory card may
become warm. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
• Use a memory card that meets the standard requirements.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data.
163
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Personal injury or death can occur if the battery is handled carelessly or
improperly. For your safety, follow these instructions for proper battery
handling:
• The battery can ignite or explode if not handled properly. If you notice
any deformities, cracks, or other abnormalities in the battery, immediately
discontinue use of the battery and contact your manufacturer.
• Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommend battery chargers and charge
the battery only by the method described in this user manual.
• Do not place the battery near heating devices or expose to excessively warm
environments, such as the inside of an enclosed car in the summertime.
• Do not place the battery in a microwave oven.
• Avoid storing or using the battery in hot, humid places, such as spas or
shower enclosures.
• Do not rest the device on flammable surfaces, such as bedding, carpets, or
electric blankets for a prolonged period.
• When the device is switched on, do not leave it in any confined space for a
prolonged period.
• Do not allow battery terminals to come in contact with metallic objects, such
as necklaces, coins, keys, or watches.
• Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement
batteries.
• Do not disassemble the battery or puncture it with any sharp object.
• Avoid exposing the battery to high pressure or crushing forces.
• Avoid exposing the battery to major impacts, such as dropping it from high
places.
• Do not expose the battery to temperatures of 60 °C (140 °F) or above.
• Do not allow the battery to come in contact with moisture or liquids.
• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, or the
like.
Disposal guidelines
• Dispose of the battery with care.
• Do not dispose of the battery in a fire.
• Disposal regulations may differ by country or region. Dispose of the battery in
accordance with all local and federal regulations.
Guidelines for charging the battery
Charge the battery only by the method described in this user manual.
The battery can ignite or explode if not charged properly.
164
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Battery life
Shooting mode Average time / Number of photos
Photos Approx. 185 min./Approx. 370 photos
Videos Approx. 135 min. (Record videos at 1920X1080
resolution and 30 fps.)
• The figures above are based on the CIPA test standards.
Your results may differ depending on your actual usage.
• Available shooting time differs depending on background, shooting
interval, and use conditions.
• Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total
recording time.
Low battery message
When the battery has fully discharged, the battery icon will turn red and
the "Low Battery" message will appear.
Notes about using the battery
• Avoid exposing batteries to very cold or very hot temperatures (below
0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can reduce the
charging capacity of your batteries.
• When you use the camera for an extended period, the area around the
battery chamber may become warm. This does not affect the normal use
of the camera.
• Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the
power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock.
• In temperatures below 0 °C/32 °F, battery capacity and battery life may
decrease.
• Battery capacity may decrease in low temperatures, but will return to
normal in milder temperatures.
• Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended
period. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause
serious damage to your camera. Storing the camera for extended
periods with the battery installed causes the battery to discharge. You
may not be able to recharge a fully discharged battery.
• When you do not use the camera for an extended period (3 months or
more), check the battery and recharge it regularly. If you let the battery
discharge continually, its capacity and life may decrease, which can lead
to a malfunction, fire, or explosion.
165
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Cautions about using the battery
Protect batteries, chargers, and memory cards from damage.
Prevent batteries from making contact with metal objects, as this can
create a connection between the + and – terminals of your battery and
lead to temporary or permanent battery damage and may cause a fire or
electric shock.
Notes about charging the battery
• If the status lamp is off, ensure that the battery is inserted correctly.
• If the camera is on while charging, the battery may not fully charge. Turn
off the camera before charging the battery.
• Do not use your camera when you are charging the battery. This may
cause a fire or electric shock.
• Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the
power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock.
• Let the battery charge for at least 10 minutes before turning on the
camera.
• If you connect the camera to an external power source when the battery
is depleted, using high energy-consuming functions will cause the
camera to turn off. To use the camera normally, recharge the battery.
• If you reconnect the power cable when the battery is fully charged, the
status lamp turns on for approximately 30 minutes.
• Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Charge
the battery fully before using the camera.
• If the status lamp blinks in red, reconnect the cable, or remove the
battery and insert it again.
• If you charge the battery when the cable is overheated or the
temperature is too high, the status lamp may blink in red. Charging will
start when the battery cools down.
• Overcharging batteries may shorten battery life. After charging is
finished, disconnect the cable from your camera.
• Do not bend or place heavy objects on the AC cable. Doing so may
damage the cable.
166
Appendix > Maintaining the camera
Notes about charging with a computer connected
• Use only the provided USB cable.
• The battery may not charge when:
- you use a USB hub
- other USB devices are connected to your computer
- you connect the cable to the port on the front side of your computer
- the USB port of your computer does not support the power output standard
(5 V, 500 mA)
Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care
• Never dispose of batteries in a fire. Follow all local regulations when you
dispose of used batteries.
• Never place batteries or cameras on or in heating devices, such as
microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may explode when they
are overheated.
167
Appendix
Updating the firmware
Connect the camera to the computer and update the firmware of the
camera of the lens.
You cannot run a firmware upgrade without a fully charged battery. Recharge
the battery fully before running a firmware upgrade.
If you update the firmware, user settings and values will be reset. (Date, time,
language, and video out will not change.)
Do not turn the camera off while the update is in progress.
1 Turn off the camera.
2 Connect your camera to the computer with the USB cable.
You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the
cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not
responsible for any loss of data.
If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not
work properly.
3 Turn on the camera.
4 On the computer, select i-Launcher ĺ .
5 Follow the on-screen instructions to download the firmware to
the camera.
You can download the firmware of the camera or the lens.
6 Turn off the camera when the download completes.
7 Remove the USB cable.
8 Turn on the camera.
9 Press [m] ĺ q ĺ Device Information ĺ Software
Update ĺ Body Firmware or Lens Firmware.
10 Select Yes from a pop-up window on the camera to update
the firmware.
168
Appendix
Before contacting a service center
If you are having trouble with your device, try these troubleshooting
solutions before contacting a service professional.
When you leave your camera at a service center, be sure to also leave the other
components that may have contributed to the malfunction, such as the memory
card and battery.
Situation Suggested remedies
Cannot turn on the
camera
• Ensure that the battery is inserted.
• Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly.
• Charge the battery.
The power turns off
suddenly
• Charge the battery.
• Your camera may be in Auto power off mode or
the display turns off automatically. (p. 142)
• The camera may be turned off automatically to
prevent the memory card from being damaged
due to excessive heat. Turn on your camera
again.
The camera is losing
battery power quickly
• The battery may lose power more quickly in
low temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F). Keep the
battery warm by putting it into your pocket.
• Using the flash or recording videos depletes the
battery quickly. Recharge if needed.
• Batteries are consumable parts that must be
replaced over time. Get a new battery if the
battery life is diminishing quickly.
Situation Suggested remedies
Cannot capture
photos
• There is no space on the memory card. Delete
unnecessary files or insert a new card.
• Format the memory card.
• The memory card is defective. Get a new
memory card.
• Ensure that the camera is switched on.
• Charge the battery.
• Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly.
The camera freezes Remove the battery and insert it again.
The camera heats up
While using the camera, it may heat up.
This is normal and should not affect your camera’s
lifespan or performance.
The flash fires
unexpectedly
The flash may fire due to static electricity.
The camera is not malfunctioning.
The flash does not
work
• The flash option may be set to Off. (p. 88)
• You cannot use the flash in some modes.
The date and time are
incorrect
Set the date and time under the q menu.
(p. 142)
The display or buttons
do not work Remove the battery and insert it again.
169
Appendix > Before contacting a service center
Situation Suggested remedies
The memory card has
an error
• Turn off the camera, and then turn it on again.
• Remove the memory card, and then insert it
again.
• Format the memory card.
See "Cautions when using memory cards" for
more details. (p. 161)
Your TV or computer
cannot display photos
and videos that are
stored on a microSDXC
memory card
microSDXC memory cards use the exFAT file
system. Ensure that the external device is
compatible with the exFAT file system before
connecting the camera to the device.
Your computer does
not recognize a
microSDXC memory
card
microSDXC memory cards use the exFAT file
system. To use microSDXC memory cards on a
Windows XP computer, download and update
the exFAT file system driver from the Microsoft
website.
Cannot display files
If you change the name of a file, your camera may
not play the file (the name of the file should meet
the DCF standard). If you encounter this situation,
display files on your computer.
Situation Suggested remedies
The photo is blurry
• Ensure that the focus option you set is suitable
for the kind of shot you are capturing.
• Use a tripod to prevent your camera from
shaking.
• Ensure that the lens is clean. If not, clean the
lens. (p. 156)
The colors in the
photo do not match
the actual scene
An incorrect White Balance can create unrealistic
color. Select the proper White Balance option to
suit the light source. (p. 70)
The photo is too
bright or too dark
Your photo is overexposed or underexposed.
• Adjust the aperture value or the shutter speed.
• Adjust the ISO sensitivity. (p. 69)
• Turn the flash off or on. (p. 88)
• Adjust the exposure value. (p. 95)
Photos are distorted
This camera can have minute distortion when
using a wide-angle lens that enables shooting
with a wide angle of view. This is normal, and
does not cause malfunction.
Horizontal lines
appear on the photo
This may occur when the subject is exposed to a
fluorescent or mercury-vapor light source. Select
a slow shutter speed.
Playback screen does
not appear on the
connected external
device
• Ensure that HDMI cable is properly connected
to the external monitor.
• Ensure that the memory card is properly
recorded.
170
Appendix > Before contacting a service center
Situation Suggested remedies
Your computer does
not recognize your
camera
• Ensure that the USB cable is connected
correctly.
• Ensure that the camera is switched on.
• Ensure that you are using a supported
operating system.
Your computer
disconnects the
camera while
transferring files
The file transfer may be interrupted by static
electricity. Disconnect the USB cable and connect
it again.
i-Launcher is not
functioning properly
• End i-Launcher and restart the program.
• Depending on your computer's specifications
and environment, the program may not
launch automatically. In this case, click
Start ĺ All Programs ĺ Samsung ĺ
i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher on your
Windows computer. (For Windows 8, open
Start screen, and then select All apps ĺ
Samsung i-Launcher.) Or, click Applications
ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher on your Mac OS
computer.
Situation Suggested remedies
Auto Focus does not
work
• Subject is not in focus. When the subject is
outside the AF area, shoot by moving the
subject inside the AF area and half-pressing
[Shutter].
• Subject is too close. Step back from the subject
and shoot.
• The focus mode is set to MF. Switch the mode
to AF.
AEL feature does not
work
AEL feature does not work in t, M, s,
and R modes. Select another mode to use this
feature.
Lens does not work
• Ensure that the lens is properly mounted.
• Remove the lens from the camera and
remount it.
External flash does not
work
Ensure that the external flash is properly mounted
on the external flash port.
The date & time
settings screen
appears when you
power on the camera
• Set the date and time again.
• This screen appears when the camera’s internal
power source is completely discharged. Insert
a fully charged battery and wait at least 72
hours in power off status for the internal power
source to be recharged.
171
Appendix
Camera specifications
Image Sensor
Type CMOS
Sensor size 23.5 X 15.7 mm
Effective pixels Approx. 20.3 mega-pixels
Total pixels Approx. 21.6 mega-pixels
Color filter RGB primary color filter
Lens Mount
Type Samsung NX Mount
Available lens Samsung NX Lenses (3D lens not supported)
Image Stabilization
Type Lens shift (depends on lens)
Mode Off/Mode 1/Mode 2
Distortion Correct
Off/On (depends on lens)
i-Function
Supported (Aperture value, Shutter speed, EV, ISO, White Balance)
Display
Type TFT LCD
Size 3.0" (Approx. 75.2 mm)
Resolution HVGA (320X480) 460.8 k dots
Field of view Approx. 100 %
Angle Flip up: 180°
User display Grid Line, Icons, Histogram, Level gauge
Focusing
Type Contrast AF
Focusing point
• Selection: 1 point (Free selection)
• Multi: Normal 21 points, Close up 35 points
• Face detection: Max. 10 faces
• Object tracking AF
Mode Single AF, Continuous AF, Manual Focus
AF Assist Lamp Yes
172
Appendix > Camera specifications
Shutter
Type Electronic front curtain shutter,
Focal plane shutter
Speed
• Auto: 1/4,000–1/4 sec.
• Manual: 1/4,000–30 sec. (1/3 EV Step)
• Bulb (time limit: 4 min.)
Exposure
Metering system
TTL 221 (17X13) Block segment
Metering: Multi, Center-weighted, Spot
Metering range: EV 0-18 (ISO 100 · 30 mm, F2)
Compensation ±3 EV (1/3 EV Step)
AE lock Custom button
ISO equivalent Auto, 100-25600 (1 or 1/3 EV Step)
Drive Mode
Mode
Single, Continuous, Burst (5M only), Timer,
Bracket (Auto Exposure, White Balance,
Picture Wizard, Depth)
Continuous shooting
5 fps
* Maximum shooting speed is 5 frames per second. It will
slow down after approx. JPEG 13 shots, RAW 5 shots.
(May vary depending on the spec of memory card.)
Bracket shooting
Auto exposure bracketing (±3 EV),
White Balance bracketing,
Picture Wizard bracketing, Depth bracketing
(Program and Aperture Priority mode only)
Self-timer 2–30 sec. (1 second interval)
Shutter release Supported (via smart phone)
Flash
Type External flash (optional)
Mode Smart Flash, Auto, Auto Red-eye, Fill in,
Fill-in Red, 1st Curtain, 2nd Curtain, Off
Sync speed Less than 1/180 sec.
Flash EV -2–+2 EV (0.5 EV Step)
External flash Optional Samsung external flashes
Sync terminal Hot-shoe
White Balance
Mode
Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent White,
Fluorescent NW, Fluorescent Daylight, Tungsten,
Flash WB, Custom Set, Color Temperature
(Manual)
Micro adjustment Amber/Blue/Green/Magenta 7 steps respectively
173
Appendix > Camera specifications
Dynamic Range
Off/Smart Range+/HDR
Picture Wizard
Mode
Standard, Vivid, Portrait, Landscape, Forest,
Retro, Cool, Calm, Classic, Custom1, Custom2,
Custom3
Parameter Color, Saturation, Sharpness, Contrast
Shooting
Mode Smart Auto, Smart, Program, Aperture Priority,
Shutter Priority, Manual, Panorama
Smart mode
Beauty Face, Best Face, Continuous Shot, Kids
Shot, Landscape, Macro, Food, Parties and
Indoors, Action Freeze, Rich Tones, Waterfall,
Silhouette, Sunset, Night, Fireworks, Light Trace
Smart filter Vignetting, Miniature, Sketch, Fish Eye
Size
• JPEG (3:2): 20.0M (5472X3648),
10.1M (3888X2592), 5.9M (2976X1984),
5.0M (2736X1824) (Burst mode only),
2.0M (1728X1152)
• JPEG (16:9): 16.9M (5472X3080),
7.8M (3712X2088), 4.9M (2944X1656),
2.1M (1920X1080)
• JPEG (1:1): 13.3M (3648X3648),
7.0M (2640X2640), 4.0M (2000X2000),
1.1M (1024X1024)
• RAW: 20.0M (5472X3648)
Quality Super Fine, Fine, Normal, RAW, RAW + S.Fine,
RAW + Fine, RAW + Normal
RAW standard SRW (ver.3.0.0)
Color space sRGB, Adobe RGB
Video
Type MP4 (H.264)
Format Movie: H.264, Sound: AAC
Movie AE mode Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority,
Manual
Movie clip Audio on/off (Shooting time: Max. 20')
Smart filter Vignetting, Miniature, Sketch, Fish Eye
174
Appendix > Camera specifications
Size 1920X1080, 1280X720, 640X480, 320X240
(For Sharing)
Frame rate 30 fps (NTSC), 25 fps (PAL)
Multi Motion x0.25 (640X480, 320X240 only), x1, x5, x10, x20
Quality HQ, Normal
Sound Stereo
Edit Still image capture, Time trimming
Playback
Type Single image, Thumbnails (15/28), Slide show,
Movie
Edit
Smart Filter, Resize, Rotate, Face Retouch,
Brightness, Contrast, Auto adjustment,
Saturation, RGB adjustment, Color Temperature,
Exposure
Smart filter
Vignetting, Miniature, Soft Focus, Sketch, Fish-eye,
Classic, Retro, Oil Painting, Cartoon, Ink Painting,
Cross Filter, Zooming Shot
Storage
Media
External memory (optional):
microSD card (2 GB guaranteed),
microSDHC card (up to 32 GB guaranteed),
microSDXC card (up to 64 GB guaranteed,
UHS-1 Supported)
- Class 6 and above recommended
File format RAW (SRW (ver.3.0.0)), JPEG (EXIF 2.3), DCF
Wireless network
Type IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Function
AutoShare, Remote Viewfinder, MobileLink,
Photo Beam, Auto Backup, Samsung Link,
Home Monitor+, Group Share
NFC
Yes
Interface
Digital output USB 2.0 (micro USB jack)
Video output NTSC, PAL (selectable)
HDMI
DC power input DC 5.0 V, 0.55 A via micro USB
175
Appendix > Camera specifications
Power Source
Type
Rechargeable battery: B740AE/B740AC/B740AU/
B740AK (2,330 mAh, 3.8 V)
* The battery specifications or model may differ
depending on your region.
Dimensions (W X H X D)
117.4 X 65.9 X 39.0 mm
Weight
230 g (without battery and memory card)
Operating Temperature
0–40 °C
Operating Humidity
5–85 %
Software
i-Launcher, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 5, Samsung DNG Converter
* Specifications may change without notice to improve performance.
* Other brands and products names are trademarks of respective owners.
176
Appendix
Glossary
AP (Access Point)
An access point is a device that allows wireless devices to connect to a
wired network.
Ad-Hoc network
An ad-hoc network is a temporary connection for sharing files or an
internet connection and between computers and devices.
AdobeRGB
Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a larger color range
than sRGB. Its wider range of colors helps you to easily edit photos on a
computer.
AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket)
This feature automatically captures several images at different exposures
to help you capture a properly-exposed image.
AEL (Auto Exposure Lock)
These features help you lock the exposure on which you want to calculate
the exposure.
AF (Auto Focus)
A system that automatically focuses the camera lens on the subject. Your
camera uses the contrast to focus automatically.
AMOLED (Active-matrix organic light-emitting diode)/
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
AMOLED is a visual display that is very thin and light, as it does not
need backlighting. LCD is a visual display commonly used in consumer
electronics. This display needs a separate backlight, such as CCFL or LED, to
reproduce colors.
Aperture
The aperture controls the amount of light that reaches the camera’s sensor.
177
Appendix > Glossary
Composition
Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually,
abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition.
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)
A specification to define a file format and file system for digital cameras
created by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
Depth of field
The distance between the nearest and farthest points that can be
acceptably focused in a photograph. Depth of field varies with lens
aperture, focal length, and distance from the camera to the subject.
Selecting a smaller aperture, for example, will increase the depth of field
and blur the background of a composition.
Camera shake (Blur)
If the camera is moved while the shutter is open, the entire image may
appear blurred. This occurs more often when the shutter speed is slow.
Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, or using
a faster shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod or the OIS function to
stabilize the camera.
Color space
The range of colors that the camera can see.
Color temperature
Color Temperature is a measurement in degrees Kelvin (K) that indicates
the hue of a specific type of light source. As the color temperature
increases, the color of the light source has a more bluish quality. As the
color temperature decreases, the color of the light source has a more
reddish quality. At 5,500 degrees Kelvin, the color of the light source is
similar to the sun at midday.
178
Appendix > Glossary
Flash
A speed light that helps to create adequate exposure in low-light
conditions.
Focal length
The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in millimeters).
Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is
magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view.
Histogram
A graphical representation of the brightness of an image. The horizontal
axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents the number
of pixels. High points at the left (too dark) and right (too bright) on the
histogram indicate a photo that is improperly exposed.
H.264/MPEG-4
A high-compression video format established by international standard
organizations ISO-IEC and ITU-T. This codec is capable of providing good
video quality at low bit rates developed by the Joint Video Team (JVT).
EV (Exposure Value)
All the combinations of the camera’s shutter speed and lens aperture that
result in the same exposure.
EV Compensation
This feature allows you to quickly adjust the exposure value measured by
the camera, in limited increments, to improve the exposure of your photos.
Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format)
A specification to define an image file format for digital cameras created by
the Japan Electronic Industries Development Association (JEIDA).
Exposure
The amount of light allowed to reach the camera’s sensor. Exposure is
controlled by a combination of the shutter speed, the aperture value, and
ISO sensitivity.
179
Appendix > Glossary
Metering
The metering refers to the way in which the camera measures the quantity
of light to set the exposure.
MF (Manual Focus)
A system that manually focuses the camera lens on the subject.
You can use the focus ring to focus on a subject.
MJPEG (Motion JPEG)
A video format which is compressed as a JPEG image.
Image sensor
The physical part of a digital camera that contains a photosite for each
pixel in the image. Each photosite records the brightness of the light that
strikes it during an exposure. Common sensor types are CCD (Chargecoupled
Device) and CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor).
IP (Internet protocol) address
An IP address is a unique number that is assigned to every device that is
connected to the internet.
ISO sensitivity
The sensitivity of the camera to light, based on the equivalent film speed
used in a film camera. At higher ISO sensitivity settings, the camera uses a
higher shutter speed, which can reduce blur caused by camera shake and
low light. However, images with high sensitivity are more susceptible to
noise.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
A lossy method of compression for digital images. JPEG images are
compressed to reduce their overall file size with minimal deterioration of
the image resolution.
180
Appendix > Glossary
PAL (Phase Alternate Line)
A video color encoding standard used in numerous countries throughout
Africa, Asia, Europe, and the Middle East.
Quality
An expression of the rate of compression used in a digital image. Higher
quality images have a lower rate of compression, which usually results in a
larger file size.
RAW (CCD raw data)
The original, unprocessed data, collected directly from the camera’s image
sensor. White Balance, contrast, saturation, sharpness, and other data can
be manipulated with editing software before the image is compressed into
a standard file format.
Resolution
The number of pixels present in a digital image. High resolution images
contain more pixels and typically show more detail than low resolution
images.
Noise
Misinterpreted pixels in a digital image that may appear as misplaced or
random, bright pixels. Noise usually occurs when photos are shot with a
high sensitivity or when a sensitivity is automatically set in a dark place.
NFC (Near Field Communication)
NFC is a set of standards for radio communication at very close proximity.
You can use NFC-enabled devices to activate features or exchange data
with other devices.
NTSC (National Television System Committee)
A video color encoding standard used most commonly in Japan, North
America, the Philippines, South America, South Korea, and Taiwan.
Optical zoom
This is a general zoom which can enlarge images with a lens and does not
deteriorate quality of images.
181
Appendix > Glossary
Shutter speed
Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the
shutter, and it is an important factor in the brightness of a photo, as it
controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before
it reaches the image sensor. A fast shutter speed allows less time to let
light in and the photo becomes darker and more easily freezes subjects in
motion.
sRGB (Standard RGB)
International standard of color space established by the IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space for PC
monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif.
Vignetting
A reduction of an image’s brightness or saturation at the periphery (outer
edges) compared to the center of the image. Vignetting can draw interest
to subjects positioned in the center of an image.
White Balance (Color balance)
An adjustment of the intensities of colors (typically the primary colors red,
green, and blue), in an image. The goal of adjusting the White Balance, or
color balance, is to correctly render the colors in an image.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi is a technology that allows electronic devices to exchange data
wirelessly over a network.
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
WPS is a technology that secures wireless home networks.
182
Appendix
Optional accessories
You can purchase the following optional items:
Lens, External flash, Rechargeable battery, Battery charger, Camera bag,
Camera case, Memory card, Filter, USB cable, HDMI cable, Strap
• To locate the type, image and availability of accessories, visit the Samsung
website.
• Before purchasing accessories, make sure they are compatible with your
camera. GPS10 and EM10 are not compatible with this camera.
• Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Samsung is not responsible for
damage caused by using another manufacturer’s accessories.
183
Appendix A
Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 153
Aperture 15, 19
Auto Backup 129
Auto focus 73 B
Battery
Caution 162
Charging 34
Insert 33
Best Face mode 61
Bracketing 85 C
Camera
Connecting as removable disk 147
Connecting to PC 147
Disconnecting (Windows) 148
Layout 29
Camera specifications 171
Charging 34
Color space 136 D
Date & Time 142
Depth of Field (DOF) 16, 21
Display brightness 141
Display type 44
Drive 83 E
Enlarging 105
Exposure Value (EV) 15, 95
F
Fader 99
Files
Deleting 103
Photo type 68
Protecting 103
Video type 98
Flash
Bounce photography 26
Flash options 88
Guide number 26
Intensity 89
F-number 15
Focal length 20 H
Home Monitor+ 127 I
Icons
Playback mode 43
Shooting mode 41
i-Launcher 151
Image adjustment
Adjusting photos 110
Retouching faces 111
ISO sensitivity 69 L
Lenses
Layout 45
Locking 46
Markings 48
Unlocking 46 M
Maintenance 156
Memory card
Caution 159
Insert 33
Metering 90
Mobile connection 31
MobileLink 121
Index
184
Appendix > Index N
NFC (Tag & Go) 118 O
Optical Image Stabilization
(OIS) 82
Optional accessories
Connect the flash 50
Flash layout 49
P
Panorama mode 62
Photos
Editing 109
Enlarging 105
Shooting options 67
Viewing on camera 101
Picture Wizard 72
Posture 13
Power save mode 142
R
Red-eye effect 89
Remote Viewfinder 125
Resolution
Playback mode 110
Shooting mode (Movie) 97
Shooting mode (Photo) 67
Retouching faces 111
Rotating 109
Rule of thirds 23 S
Samsung Link 131
Service center 168
Settings 141
Shooting modes
Aperture Priority 56
Auto 52
Manual 58
Program 54
Recording 63
Shutter Priority 57
Smart 60
Shutter speed 17, 19
Slide show 105
Smart filter
Playback mode 112
Shooting mode 94
Smart panel 38 T
Thumbnails 101
Timer 85
Tracking AF 77
Transferring files
Mac 148
Windows 147
TV 146
U
Unpacking 28 V
Video Out 142
Videos
Capturing 108
Options 97
Recording 63
Viewing 107 W
White balance 70
Wireless network 114
Please refer to the warranty that came with your product
or visit our website www.samsung.com for after-sales service or inquiries.
Mode
d’emploi
FRE Ce mode d’emploi propose des instructions
détaillées pour l’utilisation de l’appareil photo. Veuille le lire
attentivement.
1
Informations sur les droits d’auteur
• Les caractéristiques de l’appareil photo ou le contenu de ce mode
d’emploi peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis, suite à
l’évolution des fonctions de l’appareil photo.
• La distribution ou la réutilisation du contenu de ce mode d’emploi,
même partielle, sans autorisation préalable, est interdite.
• Nous vous recommandons d’utiliser votre appareil photo dans le pays
où vous l’avez acheté.
• Utilisez l’appareil photo de manière responsable et veillez à respecter
toutes les législations et règlementations en vigueur.
PlanetFirst représente l’engagement de Samsung Electronics
à l’égard du développement durable et de la responsabilité
sociale, qui se traduit par des décisions et des activités
commerciales sous une optique écologique.
• Microsoft Windows et le logo Windows sont des marques déposées de
Microsoft Corporation.
• Mac et Apple App Store sont des marques déposées d’Apple
Corporation.
• Google Play Store est une marque déposée de Google, Inc.
• Adobe, le logo Adobe, Photoshop et Lightroom sont des marques
déposées ou des marques d’Adobe Systems Incorporated aux
Etats-Unis et / ou dans d’autres pays.
• microSD™, microSDHC™ et microSDXC™ sont des marques déposées de
la SD Association.
• HDMI, le logo HDMI et l’expression « High
Definition Multimedia Interface » sont des
marques commerciales ou des marques
déposées de HDMI Licensing LLC.
• Wi-Fi®, le logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques
déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance.
• Les marques commerciales mentionnées dans ce mode d’emploi
appartiennent à leurs propriétaires respectifs.
2
Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité
Tachez de ne pas éblouir les sujets photographiés.
N’utilisez pas le flash à proximité (à moins d’1 mètre) de personnes
ou d’animaux. L’utilisation du flash trop près des yeux du sujet peut
provoquer des lésions temporaires ou permanentes.
Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo à la portée d’enfants en bas âge
ou d’animaux domestiques.
Tenez l’appareil photo, ses pièces et ses accessoires, hors de portée des
enfants en bas âge et des animaux. L’ingestion de petites pièces peut
provoquer l’étouffement ou des blessures graves. Les parties détachables
et les accessoires représentent également un danger.
Evitez toute exposition prolongée de l’appareil photo à la
lumière directe du soleil ou à des températures élevées.
Une exposition prolongée à la lumière directe du soleil ou à des
températures très élevées peut endommager de manière permanente les
composants internes de l’appareil photo.
Evitez de couvrir l’appareil photo ou le chargeur avec des
couvertures ou des vêtements.
L’appareil photo risque de surchauffer, de se déformer ou de prendre feu.
Ne manipulez pas le cordon d’alimentation ou le chargeur lors
d’un orage.
Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique.
Respectez toujours les consignes et conseils d’utilisation suivants afin de
prévenir toute situation dangereuse et de garantir un fonctionnement
optimal de l’appareil photo.
Attention—situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de
blesser d’autres personnes
Ne démontez pas ou n’essayez pas de réparer vous-même
l’appareil photo.
Vous pouvez endommager l’appareil photo et vous exposer à un risque de
choc électrique.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de gaz ou de
liquides inflammables ou explosifs.
Un départ d’incendie ou une explosion risque de se produire.
N’introduisez pas de matériaux inflammables dans l’appareil
photo ou ne stockez pas de tels matériaux à proximité de
l’appareil photo.
Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge
électrique.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo avec les mains mouillées.
Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique.
3
Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité
Si du liquide ou des corps étrangers pénètrent dans l’appareil
photo, déconnectez toutes les sources d’alimentation comme
la batterie ou le chargeur, puis contactez le centre de service
après-vente de Samsung.
Respectez toutes les réglementations limitant l’utilisation des
appareils photo dans certaines zones.
• Evitez toute interférence avec d’autres appareils électroniques.
• Eteignez l’appareil photo lorsque vous voyagez en avion. Cet appareil
photo peut provoquer des interférences avec les équipements de
navigation aérienne. Respectez l’ensemble des réglementations
aériennes et éteignez l’appareil photo lorsque vous y êtes invité par le
personnel navigant.
• Eteignez l’appareil photo à proximité de tout équipement médical.
Cet appareil photo peut créer des interférences avec les équipements
médicaux des hôpitaux ou des établissements de santé. Respectez
l’ensemble des réglementations, avertissements affichés et
recommandations du personnel médical.
Evitez toute interférence avec les stimulateurs cardiaques.
Maintenez l’appareil photo à bonne distance des stimulateurs cardiaques
pour éviter toute interférence, comme recommandé par le fabricant et les
groupes de recherche. Si vous avez une quelconque raison de suspecter
que l’appareil photo provoque des interférences avec un stimulateur
cardiaque ou tout autre appareil médical, éteignez-le immédiatement et
contactez le fabricant du stimulateur cardiaque ou de l’appareil médical
pour en savoir plus.
Attention—situations susceptibles d’endommager
l’appareil photo ou d’autres équipements
Si vous rangez l’appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une période
de temps prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie.
Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se détériorer avec le temps, risquant
d’endommager gravement l’appareil photo.
Utilisez uniquement des batteries de remplacement lithiumion
originales recommandées par le fabricant. N’endommagez
pas ou ne chauffez pas la batterie.
Les batteries non homologuées, endommagées ou ayant été exposées à la
chaleur sont à même de produire une flamme ou une blessure.
Utilisez uniquement des batteries, des chargeurs et des
accessoires homologués par Samsung.
• L’utilisation de batteries, de chargeurs, de câbles ou d’accessoires
non homologués peut endommager l’appareil photo, provoquer leur
éclatement ou causer des blessures.
• Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommage ou blessure
résultant d’une utilisation inappropriée de batteries, chargeurs, câbles
ou accessoires.
Utilisez la batterie prévue uniquement pour l’appareil photo.
Une mauvaise utilisation de celle-ci risque de produire une flamme ou une
décharge électrique.
4
Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité
Ne touchez pas le flash en cours de déclenchement.
Le flash est très chaud lorsqu’il se déclenche et peut provoquer des
brûlures.
Lorsque vous utilisez le chargeur secteur, éteignez l’appareil
photo avant de couper l’alimentation du chargeur secteur.
Ne pas suivre ces instructions peut produire des flammes ou une
électrocution.
Débranchez le chargeur de la prise murale lorsque vous ne
l’utilisez pas.
Ne pas suivre ces instructions peut produire des flammes ou une
électrocution.
N’utilisez jamais de fiches et de cordons d’alimentation
endommagés ou de prises électriques mal fixées lorsque vous
rechargez la batterie.
Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge
électrique.
Le chargeur secteur ne doit jamais entrer en contact avec les
bornes +/- de la batterie.
Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge
électrique.
Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo tomber ou subir des chocs.
Cela peut endommager l’écran ou des composants, tant externes
qu’internes.
Effectuez les branchements des cordons, des adaptateurs et
l’insertion des batteries et des cartes mémoire avec précaution.
Enfoncer les cordons en forçant ou sans précaution et brancher les câbles
ou insérer les batteries et les cartes mémoire de manière incorrecte peut
endommager les ports, les prises et les accessoires.
Evitez tout contact des cartes mémoire avec l’étui de l’appareil
photo.
Vous risquez d’endommager ou d’effacer les données stockées sur la carte.
N’utilisez jamais de batterie ou de carte mémoire
endommagée.
Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique, d’endommager
l’appareil photo ou de provoquer une flamme.
Ne soumettez ou n’approchez pas l’appareil photo de champs
magnétiques.
Cela risque d’entraîner un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil photo.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est endommagé.
Si les parties en verre ou en acrylique sont brisées, apportez l’appareil
photo dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung afin de la faire
réparer.
5
Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité
Vérifiez que l’appareil photo fonctionne correctement avant de
l’utiliser.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de fichiers ou
de dégâts résultant d’un fonctionnement incorrect ou d’une mauvaise
utilisation de l’appareil photo.
Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB du câble USB sur votre
appareil photo.
Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données.
Ne jamais exposer l’objectif aux rayons directs du soleil.
Vous risquez de décolorer le capteur d’images ou d’entraîner des
dysfonctionnements.
Si l’appareil photo surchauffe, retirez la batterie jusqu’à ce
qu’elle refroidisse.
• Lors d’un usage prolongé, la batterie peut chauffer et augmenter
la température interne de l’appareil photo. Si l’appareil photo ne
fonctionne plus, retirez la batterie et laissez-lui le temps de refroidir.
• Des températures internes élevées peuvent entraîner l’apparition de
parasites sur vos photos. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas les
performances globales de l’appareil photo.
Evitez toute interférence avec d’autres appareils électroniques.
Votre appareil photo émet des signaux de radiofréquences (RF) qui
risquent d’interférer avec les équipements électroniques non blindés
ou blindés de façon incorrecte, comme les stimulateurs cardiaques, les
prothèses auditives et tout autre appareil électronique, que ce soit dans
les bâtiments ou les véhicules. Consultez les fabricants de vos appareils
électroniques pour résoudre tout problème d’interférence. Pour éviter
toute interférence indésirable, utilisez uniquement des appareils ou
accessoires approuvés par Samsung.
Utilisez l’appareil photo en position normale.
Evitez tout contact avec l’antenne interne de l’appareil photo.
Transfert des données et responsabilités
• Les données transférées via un réseau local sans fil pourraient être
divulguées. Evitez donc de transférer des données sensibles dans des
endroits publics ou via des réseaux ouverts.
• Le fabricant de l’appareil photo ne peut être tenu responsable des
transferts de données enfreignant les droits d’auteur, les législations
sur les marques commerciales et la propriété intellectuelle ou les
règlements concernant les outrages aux bonnes mœurs.
6
Icônes utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi
Indications de mode
Mode Indication
Scènes Automatique t
Programme P
Priorité d’ouverture A
Priorité vitesse S
Manuel M
Intelligent s
Panorama R
Réseau sans fil B
Icônes utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi
Icône Fonction
Informations complémentaires
Mises en garde et précautions
[ ] Touches de l’appareil photo. Par exemple, [Déclencheur] désigne
la touche du déclencheur/obturateur.
( ) Numéro de page où se trouve l’information correspondante
ĺ
Séquence d’options ou de menus à sélectionner pour accomplir
une procédure ; par exemple : sélectionnez b ĺ Qualité
(signifie que vous devez sélectionner b, puis Qualité).
* Annotation
7
Table des matières
Chapitre 1
Mon appareil photo
Mise en route ............................................................................................... 28
Contenu du coffret ................................................................................................... 28
Présentation de l’appareil photo ............................................................. 29
Utilisation de la touche MOBILE .......................................................................... 31
Utilisation de l’écran ................................................................................................. 32
Utilisation du mode Autoportrait .......................................................................... 32
Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire .................................... 33
Retrait de la batterie et de la carte mémoire................................................... 33
Utilisation de l’adaptateur de carte mémoire ................................................. 33
Mise en charge de la batterie et mise sous tension de l’appareil
photo ............................................................................................................. 34
Chargement de la batterie ..................................................................................... 34
Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo ............................................................... 34
Configuration initiale ................................................................................. 35
Sélection de fonctions (options) .............................................................. 37
Utilisation de l’option m .................................................................................. 37
Ex. : définir le format photo en mode P .............................................................. 37
Utilisation du panneau intelligent ...................................................................... 38
Ex. : régler la valeur d’exposition en mode P ..................................................... 38
Utiliser iFn .................................................................................................................... 39
Icônes affichées à l’écran ........................................................................... 41
En mode Prise de vue .............................................................................................. 41
Prise de photos ............................................................................................................. 41
Enregistrement de vidéos ......................................................................................... 42
A propos de l’indicateur de niveau ....................................................................... 42
Conseils
Concepts de photographie
Postures pour les prises de vue ................................................................ 13
Prise en main de l’appareil photo ........................................................................... 13
Photographie en position debout .......................................................................... 14
Photographie en position accroupie ..................................................................... 14
Ouverture ..................................................................................................... 15
Valeur d’ouverture et profondeur de champ ...................................................... 16
Vitesse d’obturation.................................................................................... 17
Sensibilité ISO .............................................................................................. 18
Contrôle de l’exposition par le réglage de l’ouverture,
de la vitesse d’obturation et de la sensibilité ISO ................................. 19
Corrélation entre la longueur de focale, l’angle et la perspective .... 20
Profondeur de champ ................................................................................ 21
Quels sont les éléments qui contrôlent les effets hors-mise au point ? .... 21
Aperçu de la profondeur de champ ....................................................................... 23
Composition ................................................................................................. 23
Règle des tiers ................................................................................................................ 23
Photos avec deux sujets ............................................................................................. 24
Flash ............................................................................................................... 25
Nombre guide du flash ............................................................................................... 26
Prise de vue avec flash indirect ................................................................................ 26
8
Table des matières
En mode Lecture ....................................................................................................... 43
Affichage de photos ................................................................................................... 43
Lecture de vidéos ........................................................................................................ 43
Modification des informations affichées .......................................................... 44
Objectifs ........................................................................................................ 45
Présentation de l’objectif ........................................................................................ 45
Verrouillage et déverrouillage de l’objectif ........................................................ 46
Marquages de l’objectif ........................................................................................... 48
Accessoires ................................................................................................... 49
Présentation du flash externe ............................................................................... 49
Fixation du flash externe ........................................................................................... 50
Modes de prise de vue ............................................................................... 51
t Mode Scènes automatiques..................................................................... 52
P Mode Programme ................................................................................................. 54
Changement de programme .................................................................................. 55
Vitesse obturation minimum ................................................................................... 55
A Mode Priorité ouverture .................................................................................... 56
S Mode Priorité Vitesse ........................................................................................... 57
M Mode Manuel........................................................................................................ 58
Utilisation du mode d’exposition ........................................................................... 58
Utilisation de la fonction Bulb ................................................................................. 59
s Mode intelligent ................................................................................................. 60
Utilisation du mode Meilleure photo ................................................................... 61
R Mode Panorama ................................................................................................. 62
Enregistrement d’une vidéo .................................................................................. 63
Fonctions disponibles en mode Prise de vue ................................................. 65
Chapitre 2
Fonctions de prise de vue
Format et résolution ................................................................................... 67
Format photo .............................................................................................................. 67
Qualité ........................................................................................................................... 68
Sensibilité ISO .............................................................................................. 69
Balance des blancs ...................................................................................... 70
Personnalisation des options de préréglage de la balance des blancs .... 71
Assistant photo (styles de photo) ............................................................ 72
Mode AF ........................................................................................................ 73
AF unique ..................................................................................................................... 74
AF continu .................................................................................................................... 74
Mise au point manuelle .......................................................................................... 75
Zone AF ......................................................................................................... 76
Mise au point sélection ........................................................................................... 76
Mise au point multiple ............................................................................................ 77
Mise au point avec suivi .......................................................................................... 77
Détection des visages ................................................................................ 79
Normale ........................................................................................................................ 79
Sourire ........................................................................................................................... 80
Clin d’œil ....................................................................................................................... 80
Aide mise au point manuelle .................................................................... 81
Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) .................................................... 82
9
Table des matières
Prise de vue (type) ...................................................................................... 83
Unique ........................................................................................................................... 83
Continue ....................................................................................................................... 84
Mode Rafale ................................................................................................................ 84
Retardateur .................................................................................................................. 85
Bracketing Exposition automatique (BKT AE) ................................................. 85
Bracketing Balance des blancs (BKT NB) ........................................................... 86
Bracketing Assistant photo (A. photo Bracketing) ........................................ 86
Bracketing de profondeur de champ ................................................................. 87
Flash ............................................................................................................... 88
Réduction de l’effet yeux rouges ......................................................................... 89
Réglage de l’intensité du flash.............................................................................. 89
Mesure de l’exposition ............................................................................... 90
Multiple ......................................................................................................................... 90
Centrée .......................................................................................................................... 91
Sélective ....................................................................................................................... 91
Mesure de la valeur d’exposition de la zone de mise au point ................. 92
Plage dynamique ........................................................................................ 93
Filtre intelligent ........................................................................................... 94
Compensation de l’exposition .................................................................. 95
Verrouillage de l’exposition ...................................................................... 96
Fonctions vidéo ........................................................................................... 97
Format vidéo ............................................................................................................... 97
Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur NTSC ........................................................................ 97
Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur PAL ........................................................................... 97
Qualité vidéo ............................................................................................................... 98
Multi-mouvements ................................................................................................... 98
Fondu............................................................................................................................. 99
Voix ................................................................................................................................. 99
Chapitre 3
Lecture / Retouche
Recherche et gestion de fichiers ............................................................ 101
Affichage de photos .............................................................................................. 101
Affichage des images sous forme de miniatures ........................................ 101
Affichage de fichiers par catégorie .................................................................. 102
Visionnage de fichiers sous forme de dossiers ............................................ 102
Protection de fichiers ............................................................................................ 103
Suppression de fichiers ........................................................................................ 103
Suppression d’un seul fichier ................................................................................ 103
Suppression de plusieurs fichiers ........................................................................ 104
Suppression de tous les fichiers ........................................................................... 104
10
Table des matières
Affichage de photos ................................................................................. 105
Agrandissement d’une photo ............................................................................ 105
Visionnage d’un diaporama ............................................................................... 105
Rotation automatique .......................................................................................... 106
Lecture de vidéos ...................................................................................... 107
Recadrage d’une vidéo au cours de la lecture ............................................. 107
Extraction d’une image pendant la lecture .................................................. 108
Retouche de photos ................................................................................. 109
Rotation d’une photo ........................................................................................... 109
Redimensionnement de photos ....................................................................... 110
Réglage des photos ............................................................................................... 110
Retouche de visages ............................................................................................. 111
Effets de filtre intelligent ..................................................................................... 112
Chapitre 4
Réseau sans fil
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des
paramètres réseau .................................................................................... 114
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil................................................................ 114
Configuration des options de réseau ................................................................. 115
Configuration manuelle de l’adresse IP ............................................................. 115
Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau ........................................................... 116
Saisie de texte .......................................................................................................... 117
Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact) ......................... 118
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Prise de vue ................................ 118
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Lecture
(Partage instantané) .............................................................................................. 118
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Wi-Fi ............................................... 118
Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone ......... 119
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone ................................ 121
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à plusieurs smartphones .................. 123
Utilisation d’un smartphone pour le déclenchement de
l’obturateur à distance ............................................................................. 125
Utilisation de la fonction Home Monitor+ ........................................... 127
Utilisation de Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des
photos ou des vidéos ............................................................................... 129
Installation du programme Sauvegarde automatique sur votre
ordinateur ................................................................................................................. 129
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un ordinateur ........................................... 129
Utilisation de Samsung Link pour visionner des fichiers .................. 131
11
Table des matières
Chapitre 6
Connexion à des appareils externes
Affichage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD ........................................... 146
Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur ..................................................... 147
Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows ........................................ 147
Connexion de l’appareil photo en tant que disque amovible................... 147
Déconnexion de l’appareil photo (Windows 7) .............................................. 148
Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Mac .................................................. 148
Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur .................................... 150
Installation de i-Launcher ................................................................................... 150
Utilisation de Samsung i-Launcher ..................................................................... 151
Utilisation d’i-Launcher ........................................................................................ 151
Configuration requise pour Windows ................................................................ 151
Configuration requise pour Mac .......................................................................... 152
Ouverture de Samsung i-Launcher ..................................................................... 152
Téléchargement du firmware ................................................................................ 152
Téléchargement du programme PC Auto Backup ......................................... 152
Installation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ................................................ 153
Utilisation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ................................................... 153
Chapitre 5
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo
Paramètres utilisateur .............................................................................. 134
Personnalisation ISO ............................................................................................. 134
Palier ISO ....................................................................................................................... 134
Plage ISO auto ............................................................................................................. 134
Réducteur de bruit ................................................................................................. 134
Réglage Bracketing ................................................................................................ 135
DMF (Mise au point manuelle directe) ........................................................... 135
Espace colorimétrique .......................................................................................... 136
Corriger distort. ....................................................................................................... 137
Personnalisation iFn .............................................................................................. 137
Affichage utilisateur .............................................................................................. 138
Attribution touches ............................................................................................... 139
Vue Live NFC ............................................................................................................ 139
Taille de l’image MobileLink/NFC ..................................................................... 139
Grille ............................................................................................................................ 140
Voyant de mise au point ...................................................................................... 140
Autoportrait automatique .................................................................................. 140
Réglagle de la touche Vitesse sur l’objectif ................................................... 140
Paramètres .................................................................................................. 141
12
Table des matières
A propos de la batterie ......................................................................................... 162
Caractéristiques de la batterie .............................................................................. 162
Autonomie de la batterie ........................................................................................ 164
Message de batterie faible ..................................................................................... 164
Remarques à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie ........................................ 164
Avertissements à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie ................................ 165
Remarques concernant la recharge de la batterie......................................... 165
Remarques à propos de la recharge avec raccordement à un
ordinateur ......................................................................................................................166
Utilisation et recyclage consciencieux des batteries et des chargeurs ...166
Mise à jour du micrologiciel .................................................................... 167
Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente ....................... 168
Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo ..................................................... 171
Glossaire ...................................................................................................... 176
Accessoires en option............................................................................... 182
Index ............................................................................................................ 183
Chapitre 7
Annexe
Messages d’erreur ..................................................................................... 155
Entretien de l’appareil photo .................................................................. 156
Nettoyage de l’appareil photo .......................................................................... 156
Objectif et écran de l’appareil photo .................................................................. 156
Capteur d’images ....................................................................................................... 156
Boîtier de l’appareil photo ...................................................................................... 156
Usage et rangement de l’appareil photo....................................................... 157
Usage ou rangement inapproprié de l’appareil photo ................................ 157
Utilisation sur la plage ou en bord de mer ....................................................... 157
Rangement pour une durée prolongée ............................................................ 157
Usage avec précaution de l’appareil photo dans les environnements
humides .........................................................................................................................158
Autres avertissements .............................................................................................. 158
A propos des cartes mémoire ............................................................................ 159
Cartes mémoires prises en charge ...................................................................... 159
Capacité de la carte mémoire ............................................................................... 160
Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire ................................................. 161
13
Concepts de photographie
Prise en main de l’appareil photo
Tenez l’appareil photo de la main droite et placez l’index droit sur la
touche du déclencheur. Soutenez l’appareil en plaçant la main gauche
sous l’objectif.
Postures pour les prises de vue
Pour stabiliser l’appareil photo et prendre une bonne photo, une posture
correcte est nécessaire. Même si vous tenez l’appareil photo correctement,
une mauvaise posture peut le faire bouger. Tenez-vous debout, bien droit
et restez immobile afin de stabiliser l’appareil photo. Afin de réduire les
mouvements du corps, retenez votre souffle lorsque vous effectuez une
prise de vue avec une vitesse d’obturation lente.
14
Concepts de photographie
Photographie en position debout
Composez votre prise de vue, tenez-vous debout, bien droit, les pieds
dans le prolongement de vos épaules, les coudes pointés vers le bas.
Photographie en position accroupie
Composez votre prise de vue, accroupissez-vous en plaçant un genou au
sol tout en vous tenant droit.
15
Concepts de photographie
Ouverture
L’ouverture fait partie des trois facteurs qui déterminent l’exposition.
L’intérieur de l’ouverture contient de fines lamelles de métal qui s’ouvrent
et se referment afin de laisser la lumière passer à travers l’ouverture et
pénétrer dans l’appareil photo. La taille de l’ouverture est liée à la quantité
de lumière : une ouverture plus grande laisse passer plus de lumière,
tandis qu’une ouverture plus petite laisse pénétrer moins de lumière.
Tailles d’ouverture
Ouverture minimum Ouverture moyenne Ouverture maximum
Ouverture réduite Ouverture large
La taille de l’ouverture est représentée par une valeur désignée par le
terme « nombre f ». Le nombre f se détermine par la longueur de focale
divisée par le diamètre de l’objectif. Par exemple, si un objectif avec
une longueur de focale de 50 mm a pour nombre f F2, le diamètre de
l’ouverture est de 25 mm. (50 mm/25 mm = F2) Plus le nombre f est faible,
plus la taille de l’ouverture est importante.
La taille de l’ouverture se définit par la valeur d’exposition (EV). Augmenter
la valeur d’exposition (+1 EV) signifie que la quantité de lumière double.
Baisser la valeur d’exposition (-1 EV) signifie que la quantité de lumière
est réduite de moitié. Vous pouvez également utiliser la fonction de
compensation de l’exposition afin d’effectuer un réglage de quantité de
lumière fin, en subdivisant les valeurs d’exposition par 1/2, 1/3 EV, et ainsi
de suite.
+1 EV
F1.4 F2 F2.8 F4 F5.6 F8
-1 EV
Niveaux de la valeur d’exposition
16
Concepts de photographie
Valeur d’ouverture et profondeur de champ
En contrôlant l’ouverture, vous pouvez rendre l’arrière plan d’une photo
plus flou ou plus net. Ceci est étroitement lié à la profondeur de champ
(DOF) qui peut être définie comme faible ou élevée.
Photo avec une profondeur de champ
élevée
Photo avec une profondeur de champ
faible
L’intérieur de l’ouverture contient plusieurs lamelles. Ces lamelles se déplacent
simultanément et contrôlent la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers le centre
de l’ouverture. Lors de prises de vues réalisées de nuit, le nombre de lamelles
joue sur l’aspect de la lumière. Pour un nombre donné de lamelles dans
l’ouverture, la lumière est divisée par le nombre de sections correspondant. Si le
nombre de lamelles est impair, le nombre de sections est double.
Par exemple, une ouverture disposant de 8 lamelles divise la lumière en
8 sections alors qu’une ouverture disposant de 7 lamelles la divise en
14 sections.
7 lamelles 8 lamelles
17
Concepts de photographie
Vitesse d’obturation
La vitesse d’obturation désigne l’intervalle de temps entre l’ouverture et la
fermeture de l’obturateur. Elle contrôle la quantité de lumière qui passe à
travers l’ouverture avant d’atteindre le capteur d’images.
Généralement, la vitesse d’obturation est réglable manuellement. La
mesure de la vitesse d’obturation est connue sous le nom de « Valeur
d’exposition » (EV), qui se caractérise par des intervalles de 1 s, 1/2 s, 1/4 s,
1/8 s, 1/15 s, 1/1 000 s, 1/2 000 s, et ainsi de suite.
Exposition
+1 EV
-1 EV
1 s 1/2 s 1/4 s 1/8 s 1/15 s 1/30 s
Vitesse d’obturation
Par conséquent, plus la vitesse d’obturation est élevée, moins la lumière
pénètre. De même, plus la vitesse d’obturation est faible, plus la lumière
pénètre.
Les photos représentées ci-dessous illustrent une vitesse d’obturation
lente laissant plus de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer dans l’objectif de
l’appareil photo. Cela engendre un effet de flou lié au mouvement des
objets. Par ailleurs, une vitesse d’obturation rapide accorde moins de
temps à la lumière pour pénétrer, ce qui tend à immobiliser un sujet en
mouvement sur la photo.
0,8 s 0,004 s
18
Concepts de photographie
Sensibilité ISO
L’exposition d’une image est déterminée par la sensibilité de l’appareil
photo. Cette sensibilité est basée sur des standards photographiques
internationaux, connus sous le nom de standards ISO. Sur les appareils
numériques, cette échelle de sensibilité est utilisée pour représenter la
sensibilité du mécanisme numérique qui capture l’image.
Lorsque le nombre double, la sensibilité ISO double également. Par
exemple, une sensibilité définie sur ISO 200 peut capturer des images
deux fois plus vite qu’une sensibilité définie sur ISO 100. Néanmoins, des
paramètres ISO élevés peuvent causer du « bruit », à savoir des petites
tâches, des points et autres phénomènes qui donnent à la photo une
apparence sale ou avec des parasites. En règle générale, il vaut mieux
utiliser une faible sensibilité ISO afin d’éviter la présence de bruit sur les
photos, sauf si vous effectuez une prise de vue dans un environnement
sombre ou de nuit.
Changements de la qualité et de la luminosité en fonction de la sensibilité ISO
Une faible sensibilité ISO signifie que l’appareil photo est moins sensible à
la lumière et que vous avez besoin de plus de lumière pour une exposition
optimale. Lorsque vous utilisez une faible sensibilité ISO, choisissez une
ouverture plus importante ou réduisez la vitesse d’obturation afin de
laisser plus de lumière pénétrer dans l’appareil photo. Par exemple, une
faible sensibilité ISO au cours d’une journée ensoleillée où la lumière est
abondante ne nécessite pas de vitesse d’obturation lente. Néanmoins,
dans un endroit sombre ou de nuit, une faible sensibilité ISO rendent les
photos floues. Il est donc recommandé d’augmenter la sensibilité ISO de
manière modérée.
Photo prise avec un trépied et une
sensibilité ISO élevée
Photo floue avec une faible sensibilité ISO
19
Concepts de photographie
Contrôle de l’exposition par le réglage de
l’ouverture, de la vitesse d’obturation et de
la sensibilité ISO
En photographie, les paramètres d’ouverture, de vitesse d’obturation et de
sensibilité ISO sont étroitement liés. Les paramètres d’ouverture contrôlent
et régulent la quantité de lumière qui pénètre dans l’appareil photo, alors
que la vitesse d’obturation détermine la durée au cours de laquelle la
lumière peut pénétrer. La sensibilité ISO correspond à la vitesse à laquelle
un appareil photo réagit à la lumière. Ces trois aspects sont désignés
globalement par le triangle d’exposition.
Un changement de la vitesse d’obturation, de la valeur d’ouverture ou de
la sensibilité ISO peut être compensé par un réglage des autres valeurs
pour maintenir la quantité de lumière. Néanmoins, les résultats varient en
fonction des paramètres utilisés. Par exemple, la vitesse d’obturation est
utile pour capturer des mouvements, l’ouverture permet de contrôler la
profondeur de champ et la sensibilité ISO le grain d’une photo.
Paramètres Résultats
Valeur
d’ouverture
Ouverture large
= plus de lumière
Ouverture étroite
= moins de lumière
Large = petite profondeur de
champ
Etroit = grande profondeur de
champ
Paramètres Résultats
Vitesse
d’obturation
Vitesse rapide
= moins de lumière
Vitesse lente
= plus de lumière
Rapide = image nette
Lente = image floue
Sensibilité ISO
Sensibilité élevée
= plus sensible à la
lumière
Sensibilité faible
= moins sensible à la
lumière
Elevée = plus de grain
Faible = moins de grain
20
Concepts de photographie
Corrélation entre la longueur de focale,
l’angle et la perspective
La longueur de focale, ou distance focale, exprimée en millimètres,
correspond à la distance séparant le milieu de l’objectif du foyer de mise
au point. Elle influe sur l’angle et la perspective des images prises. Une
longueur de focale courte génère un angle de vue étendu, ce qui permet
de photographier un plan large. Une longueur de focale longue génère un
angle de vue étroit, ce qui permet de photographier au téléobjectif.
Longueur de focale courte
plan large
angle large
objectif angle large
Longueur de focale longue
photo au téléobjectif
angle étroit
téléobjectif
Observez les photos ci-dessous et comparez les différences.
Angle 16 mm Angle 50 mm Angle 200 mm
En temps normal, un objectif grand angle convient pour réaliser des photos de
paysages, tandis qu’un objectif à angle étroit est recommandé pour les photos
d’évènements sportifs ou les portraits.
21
Concepts de photographie
Profondeur de champ
Les plus belles photos de nature morte ou de portraits sont celles dont
l’arrière plan est flou et sur lesquelles le sujet ressort. En fonction des
zones mises au point, une photo peut être floue ou nette. Ceci est désigné
par « une profondeur de champ faible » ou « une profondeur de champ
élevée ».
La profondeur de champ est la zone mise au point autour du sujet. C’est
pourquoi, une faible profondeur de champ signifie que la zone mise au
point est étroite, tandis qu’une profondeur de champ élevée élargit la
zone mise au point.
Une photo avec une faible profondeur de champ, qui met le sujet en
évidence et dont le reste est flou, peut être obtenue en utilisant un
téléobjectif ou en sélectionnant une faible valeur d’ouverture. A l’opposé,
une photo avec une profondeur de champ élevée et dont chaque élément
est nettement mis au point peut être obtenue en utilisant un objectif
grand angle ou en sélectionnant une valeur d’ouverture élevée.
Profondeur de champ réduite Profondeur de champ élevée
Quels sont les éléments qui contrôlent les effets hors-mise au
point ?
La profondeur de champ dépend de la valeur d’ouverture
Plus l’ouverture est large (par définition, plus la valeur d’ouverture est
basse), plus la profondeur de champ est faible. Dans une situation où la
longueur de focale est égale, une faible valeur d’ouverture résulte en une
faible profondeur de champ sur une photo.
50 mm F5.7 50 mm F22
22
Concepts de photographie
Profondeur de champ liée à la longueur de focale
Plus la longueur de focale est importante, plus la profondeur de champ est
faible. Pour réaliser une prise de vue avec une faible profondeur de champ,
un téléobjectif disposant d’une longueur de focale importante est mieux
adapté qu’un objectif grand angle à courte profondeur de champ.
Photo prise avec un objectif grand angle 16 mm
Photo prise avec un objectif télescopique 100 mm
Profondeur de champ liée à la distance entre le sujet et
l’appareil photo
Plus la distance entre le sujet et l’appareil photo est courte, plus la
profondeur de champ est faible. C’est pourquoi, prendre une photo
rapprochée d’un sujet a pour conséquence une faible profondeur de
champ.
Photo prise avec un objectif télescopique 100 mm
Photo prise à proximité du sujet
23
Concepts de photographie
Aperçu de la profondeur de champ
Afin d’obtenir un aperçu de l’aspect final de votre photo avant d’effectuer
la prise de vue, vous pouvez appuyer sur la touche de personnalisation.
L’appareil photo règle l’ouverture sur les paramètres prédéfinis et affiche
le résultat sur l’écran. Affectez la fonction Aperçu optique à la touche de
personnalisation (p. 139).
Composition
La photographie est un art qui a pour raison d’être de capturer l’essence
même des merveilles du monde à l’aide d’un appareil photo. Néanmoins,
quand bien même le sujet présage d’une photo réussie, une mauvaise
composition ne peut en reproduire fidèlement l’aspect.
En matière de composition, il est très important de hiérarchiser les sujets.
En photographie, la composition signifie la disposition des éléments d’une
scène. En règle générale, une bonne composition doit obéir à la règle des
tiers.
Règle des tiers
La règle des tiers consiste à diviser l’image en un quadrillage de 3x3, formé
de rectangles de taille égale.
Pour composer des photos qui mettent le mieux en valeur le sujet, veillez
à ce que le sujet soit placé dans l’un des quatre coins du rectangle central.
24
Concepts de photographie
L’utilisation de la règle des tiers permet de créer des photos avec une
composition équilibrée et saisissante. En voici quelques exemples.
Photos avec deux sujets
Si votre sujet se trouve à l’un des coins de la photo, la composition semble
alors déséquilibrée. Vous pouvez équilibrer la photo en prenant un second
sujet placé à l’extrémité opposée.
Sujet 1
Sujet 2
Sujet 1
Sujet 2
Instable Stable
25
Concepts de photographie
Le fait de centrer l’horizon sur une photo de paysage crée une impression
de déséquilibre. Equilibrez la photo en déplaçant l’horizon vers le haut ou
vers le bas.
Sujet 1
Sujet 2
Sujet 1
Sujet 2
Instable Stable
Flash
La lumière est l’un des éléments les plus importants en photographie.
Il n’est, cependant, pas simple d’avoir la quantité de lumière suffisante
quel que soit le moment ou l’endroit. L’utilisation d’un flash vous permet
d’optimiser les paramètres de lumière et de créer différents effets.
Le flash, également appelé éclairage stroboscopique ou laser, permet de
créer un niveau d’exposition satisfaisant dans des conditions de faible
éclairage. Il est également utile dans des conditions de forte luminosité.
Par exemple, le flash peut être utilisé pour compenser l’exposition de
l’ombre d’un sujet ou pour saisir à la fois le sujet et l’arrière-plan en contre
jour.
Avant correction Après correction
26
Concepts de photographie
Nombre guide du flash
Le numéro de modèle d’un flash indique la puissance du flash ; ainsi,
la quantité de lumière maximale créée est représentée par une valeur
appelée « nombre guide ». Plus le nombre est élevé, plus le flash est
puissant. Le nombre guide s’obtient en multipliant la distance entre le
flash et le sujet par la valeur d’ouverture, lorsque la sensibilité ISO est
définie sur 100.
Nombre guide = Distance flash-sujet X Valeur d’ouverture
Valeur d’ouverture = Nombre guide / Distance flash-sujet
Distance flash-sujet = Nombre guide / Valeur d’ouverture
Par conséquent, si vous connaissez le nombre guide d’un flash, vous
pouvez estimer la distance flash-sujet lorsque vous réglez le flash
manuellement. Par exemple, si un flash possède le nombre guide NG 20 et
est à 4 mètres de distance du sujet, la valeur d’ouverture optimale est de
F5.0.
Prise de vue avec flash indirect
La prise de vue avec flash indirect se réfère à une méthode qui redirige
la lumière du sujet vers le plafond ou les murs de sorte que la lumière se
répartisse de manière uniforme sur le sujet. En règle générale, les prises de
vue réalisées avec le flash peuvent manquer de naturel et projettent des
ombres. Au contraire, les sujets sur les photos prises avec la prise de vue
avec flash indirect ne projettent pas d’ombres et apparaissent plus douces
car la lumière est plus diffuse.
Chapitre 1
Mon appareil photo
Découvrez les différents composants de l’appareil photo, les icônes affichées à l’écran,
les différents objectifs disponibles, les accessoires en option et les fonctions de base.
Mon appareil photo
28
Mise en route
Contenu du coffret
Sortez le téléphone de son coffret et vérifiez que tous les éléments suivants sont présents :
Appareil photo Adaptateur secteur / Câble USB Batterie rechargeable Dragonne
Guide de demarrage rapide Guide de référence rapide Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM
• Les illustrations peuvent différer par rapport au produit fourni.
• Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires en option auprès d’un revendeur ou d’un centre de service après-vente Samsung.
Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de problème consécutif à l’utilisation d’accessoires non autorisés. Pour en
savoir plus sur les accessoires, reportez-vous à la page 182.
Mon appareil photo
29
Présentation de l’appareil photo
N° Nom
1
Molette de sélection du mode
• t : Mode Scènes automatiques
(p. 52)
• P : Mode Programme (p. 54)
• A : Mode Priorité ouverture (p. 56)
• S : Mode Priorité Vitesse (p. 57)
• M : Mode Manuel (p. 58)
• s : Mode Scène (p. 60)
• R : Mode Panorama (p. 62)
• B : Réseau sans fil (p. 113)
2 Déclencheur
3 Touche Marche / Arrêt
4
Touche MOBILE
Sélectionner une fonction Wi-Fi pour
vous connecter à votre appareil mobile.
(p. 31)
5 Microphone
6 Griffe porte-accessoire
N° Nom
7 Haut-parleur
8 Balise NFC
9 Touche de déverrouillage de l’objectif
10 Capteur d'images
11 Monture de l'objectif
12 Repère d'installation de l'objectif
13 Voyant AF / Voyant du retardateur
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 7
9
10 13 12 11
8
Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo
30
N° Nom
1 Touche d’enregistrement vidéo
Démarrer un enregistrement vidéo.
2 Anneau d'attache de la dragonne
3
Antenne interne
* Eviter tout contact avec l’antenne interne lors de
l’utilisation du réseau sans fil.
4
Touche f
Accéder au panneau Intelligent et régler
certains paramètres.
5
Touche o
• Sur l’écran d’accueil : enregistrer les
options sélectionnées.
• En mode Prise de vue : sélectionner
manuellement une zone de mise au
point dans certains modes de prise de
vue.
6
Touche Supprimer / Personnaliser
• En mode Prise de vue : exécuter la
fonction assignée (p. 139).
• En mode Lecture : supprimer des
fichiers.
7
Touche Lecture
Activer le mode Lecture pour visualiser les
photos ou visionner des vidéos.
N° Nom
8
Touche de navigation (molette
intelligente)
• En mode Prise de vue :
- D : modifier les informations à l’écran.
- I : sélectionner la vitesse
d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture,
la compensation d’exposition ou la
sensibilité ISO.
- C : sélectionner la méthode de prise de
vue ou régler le retardateur.
- F : sélectionner un mode AF.
• En mode Lecture :
- I : afficher les miniatures.
• Dans d’autres cas : déplacer
respectivement vers le haut, le bas,
la gauche, la droite. (Vous pouvez
également tourner la touche de
navigation.)
9 Touche
Accéder aux options ou aux menus.
m
10
Voyant d'état
Indiquer l’état de l’appareil photo.
• Clignotement : lors de l’enregistrement
d’une photo ou d’une vidéo, de l’envoi de
données vers un ordinateur, de la connexion
à un réseau local sans fil ou l’envoi d’une
photo.
• Fixe : en l’absence de transfert de
données ou lorsque la batterie est en
charge.
11
Affichage
Pour prendre un autoportrait en se
regardant dans l’écran, faire pivoter l’écran
vers le haut (p. 32).
1
2
4
5
6
8 7 10 9 11
3
Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo
31
N° Nom
1 Port HDMI
2 Port USB
Brancher l’appareil photo sur un ordinateur.
3 Trappe batterie / Carte mémoire
Insérer une carte mémoire et une batterie.
4 Douille pour trépied
Utilisation de la touche MOBILE
Sélectionnez une fonction Wi-Fi qui se connecte à un smartphone en appuyant sur [ ].
Appuyez à nouveau sur [ ] pour revenir au mode précédent.
2
1
4
3
Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo
32
Utilisation de l’écran
Vous pouvez prendre un autoportrait en vous regardant dans l’écran en le
faisant pivoter vers le haut.
Utilisation du mode Autoportrait
Lorsque l’appareil photo est éteint et que vous avez activé l’option
Autoportrait (p. 140), basculer l’écran vers le haut allume l’appareil photo
qui passe en mode Autoportrait.
En mode Autoportrait, les fonctions de retardateur (3 secondes), détection
des visages et beauté sont automatiquement activées.
Appuyez sur [o] pour modifier l’option de détection des visages. Appuyez
sur [n] pour désactiver ou activer la fonction beauté.
1 Faites pivoter l’écran vers le haut.
180˚
2 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à micourse,
puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur].
• Après 3 secondes, l’appareil photo déverrouille automatiquement
le déclencheur.
• Lorsque l’appareil est éteint, la basculement de l’écran vers le haut allume
automatiquement l’appareil photo.
• Laissez l’écran fermé lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil photo.
• Faites pivoter l’écran en respectant scrupuleusement les angles autorisés. Le
non-respect de cette recommandation risque d’endommager l’appareil photo.
• Utilisez un trépied lorsque l’écran est incliné vers le haut et que vous ne
le tenez pas à la main. Si vous passez outre ces précautions, vous risquez
d’endommager votre appareil photo.
• Ne faites pas pivoter l’écran vers le haut lorsqu’un flash externe est monté
sur l’appareil photo. Si vous passez outre ces précautions, vous risquez
d’endommager votre appareil photo.
Mon appareil photo
33
Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire
Voici comment installer ou retirer la batterie et une carte mémoire en
option dans l’appareil photo.
Carte mémoire
Insérez une carte mémoire en
orientant la puce vers le haut.
Batterie rechargeable
Insérez la batterie en orientant
la puce vers la gauche.
Retrait de la batterie et de la carte mémoire
Batterie rechargeable
Loquet de la
batterie
Faites glisser le verrou vers le haut
pour libérer la batterie.
Carte mémoire
Appuyez doucement sur la carte
pour la faire sortir de l’appareil
photo, puis retirez-la entièrement de
son emplacement.
Utilisation de l’adaptateur de carte mémoire
Pour pouvoir lire des données sur un ordinateur ou par le biais d’un
lecteur de cartes, insérez la carte dans l’adaptateur approprié.
Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire ou la batterie lorsque le voyant d’état de
l’appareil photo clignote. Vous risquez d’endommager les données stockées sur
la carte mémoire ou dans l’appareil photo.
Mon appareil photo
34
Mise en charge de la batterie et mise sous tension de l’appareil photo
Chargement de la batterie
Vous devez charger complètement la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil
photo pour la première fois. Branchez l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB
sur l’appareil photo, puis l’autre extrémité du câble USB sur un adaptateur
secteur.
Voyant d'état
• Voyant rouge allumé : en charge
• Voyant vert allumé : charge complète
• Voyant rouge clignotant : erreur de charge
Utilisez uniquement l’adaptateur secteur et le câble USB fournis avec l’appareil
photo. Si vous utilisez un autre adaptateur secteur, la batterie de l’appareil photo
risque de ne pas se recharger ou de fonctionner correctement.
Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo
Pour allumer ou éteindre l’appareil photo, appuyez sur [ ].
• L’écran de configuration initiale apparaît lorsque vous allumez l’appareil
photo pour la première fois (p. 35).
Mon appareil photo
35
Configuration initiale
Lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo pour la première fois, l’écran de
configuration initiale s’affiche. La langue est réglée selon le pays ou la
région où l’appareil photo est vendu. Vous pouvez la changer pour celle de
votre choix.
1 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Fuseau horaire, puis
appuyez sur [o].
2 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner un fuseau
horaire, puis appuyez sur [o].
Retour Définir
Fuseau horaire
[GMT +00:00] Londres
[GMT -01:00] Cap Vert
[GMT -02:00] Açores
[GMT -03:00] Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo
[GMT -03:30] Terre-Neuve
3 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Configuration date/
heure, puis appuyez sur [o].
4 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour sélectionner un élément (Année/
Mois/Jour/Heure/Minute/Heure d’été).
5 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour définir une option, puis
appuyez sur [o].
Retour Définir
Année Mois Jour Heure Min Heure d'été
Configuration date/heure
• L’affichage peut différer en fonction de la langue sélectionnée.
6 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Type date, puis
appuyez sur [o].
7 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner un format de
date, puis appuyez sur [o].
Retour Définir
Type date
AAAA/MM/JJ
MM/JJ/AAAA
JJ/MM/AAAA
Mon appareil photo > Configuration initiale
36
8 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Type d'heure, puis
appuyez sur [o].
9 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner un format
d’heure, puis appuyez sur [o].
Retour Définir
Type d'heure
12 h
24 h
10 Appuyez sur [m] pour terminer la configuration.
Mon appareil photo
37
Sélection de fonctions (options)
Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour
vous déplacer, puis appuyez sur [o] pour sélectionner une option. Utilisation de l’option m
Appuyez sur [m], puis modifiez les options de prise de vue ou les
paramètres.
Ex. : définir le format photo en mode P
1 Passez au mode P à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Appuyez sur [m].
3 Appuyez sur [C], tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez
sur [D/I] pour accéder à l’option b, puis appuyez sur
[o].
4 Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [D/I]
pour accéder à l’option Format photo, puis appuyez sur [o].
AutoShare
Format photo
Qualité
ISO
Vitesse obturation minimum
Retour Sélectionner
Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options)
38
5 Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [D/I]
pour accéder à une option, puis appuyez sur [o].
• Appuyez sur [m] pour revenir au menu précédent.
(3:2) (5472x3648)
(3:2) (3888x2592)
(3:2) (2976x1984)
(3:2) (1728x1152)
(16:9) (5472x3080)
Format photo
Retour Définir
6 Appuyez sur [m] pour passer en mode Prise de vue.
Utilisation du panneau intelligent
Appuyez sur [f] pour accéder à certaines fonctions telles que Exposition,
ISO et Balance des blancs.
Ex. : régler la valeur d’exposition en mode P
1 Passez au mode P à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Appuyez sur [f].
3 Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour accéder à l’option EV,
puis appuyez sur [o].
• Vous pouvez sélectionner directement une option en tournant la
touche de navigation sans appuyer sur [o].
EV : 0
Retour Régler
4 Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [C/F] pour
régler la valeur d’exposition, puis appuyez sur [o].
Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options)
39
Utiliser iFn
Appuyez sur [i-Function] sur un objectif compatible i-Function pour
sélectionner et régler manuellement la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur
d’ouverture, la valeur d’exposition, la sensibilité ISO ainsi que la balance
des blancs sur l’objectif.
1 Passez au mode P, A, S ou M à l'aide de la molette de
sélection.
2 Appuyez sur [i-Function] sur l’objectif pour sélectionner un
paramètre.
• Pour sélectionner les éléments à afficher, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d
ĺ Personnalisation iFn ĺ un élément.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [i-Function], puis sur
[D/I] pour sélectionner un paramètre.
Option Description
Ouverture Régler la valeur d’ouverture.
Vitesse
d'obturation Régler la vitesse d’obturation.
EV Régler la valeur d’exposition.
ISO Réglez la sensibilité ISO.
Balance des
blancs Sélectionner une option de balance des blancs.
3 Tournez la bague de mise au point pour sélectionner une
option.
• Vous pouvez également tourner la touche de navigation.
4 Enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour faire la mise au
point, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la
photo.
Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options)
40
Options disponibles
Mode Prise de vue PASM
Ouverture -O-O
Vitesse d'obturation - - OO
EV OOO -
ISO OOOO
Balance des blancs OOOO
Mon appareil photo
41
Icônes affichées à l’écran
Prise de photos
1
2
1. Informations de prise de vue
Icône Description
Mode de prise de vue
Date du jour
Heure du moment
Longueur de focale*
Verrouillage automatique
de l’exposition (p. 96)
Nombre de photos
disponibles
Carte mémoire insérée
Carte mémoire non
insérée**
Icône Description
• : recharge
complète
• : recharge
partielle
• (Rouge) : vide
(recharger la batterie)
• : recharge en cours
Cadre de mise au point
automatique
Zone de mesure de
l’exposition sélective
Bougé de l’appareil
photo
Echelle de la mise au
point manuelle
Indicateur de niveau
(p. 42)
Histogramme (p. 138)
Mise au point
Vitesse d’obturation
Valeur d’ouverture
Valeur de réglage de
l’exposition
Sensibilité ISO (p. 69)
* Cette icône apparaît lorsque l’objectif Power Zoom est fixé.
** Les photos prises sans insérer de carte mémoire ne peuvent
pas être imprimées ou transférées sur une carte mémoire
ou sur un ordinateur.
2. Options de prise de vue
Icône Description
Format photo
Mode de sélection
Flash (p. 88)
Réglage de l’intensité du flash
Mesure de l’exposition (p. 90)
Mode AF (p. 73)
Détection des visages
Beauté***
Zone de mise au point
Balance des blancs (p. 70)
Réglage fin de la balance des blancs
Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS)
(p. 82)
Fichier RAW
Plage dynamique (p. 93)
*** Cette icône apparaît lorsque l’écran est incliné vers le haut
et que l’appareil photo passe en mode Autoportrait.
Les icônes varient en fonction du mode
sélectionné ou des options choisies.
En mode Prise de vue
Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran
42
2. Options de prise de vue
Icône Description
Taille de la vidéo
Mode AF (p. 73)
Mesure de l’exposition (p. 90)
Balance des blancs (p. 70)
Réglage fin de la balance des blancs
Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS)
(p. 82)
Fondu (p. 99)
Enregistrement vocal désactivé (p. 99)
Les icônes varient en fonction du mode
sélectionné ou des options choisies.
A propos de l’indicateur de niveau
L’indicateur de niveau vous permet d’aligner
l’appareil photo par rapport aux lignes
horizontale et verticale à l’écran. Si l’indicateur
de niveau n’est pas droit, réglez-le à l’aide de la
fonction Calibrage horizontal (p. 141).
Vertical
Horizontal
Ÿ Aligné sur l’horizon Ÿ Non aligné sur l’horizon
Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser l’indicateur de
niveau lors d’une prise de vue en orientation
portrait.
Enregistrement de vidéos
1
2
1. Informations de prise de vue
Icône Description
Mode de prise de vue
Durée d’enregistrement
actuelle / Durée
d’enregistrement disponible
Multi-mouvements (p. 98)
Durée de lecture après
application de la fonction Multimouvements
Carte mémoire insérée
• : recharge complète
• : recharge partielle
• (Rouge) : vide (recharger
la batterie)
• : recharge en cours
Valeur d’exposition
Sensibilité ISO (p. 69)
Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran
43
En mode Lecture
Affichage de photos
Informations
Mode
F No
Déclencheur
ISO
Mesure de l'exposition
Flash
Distance focale
Balance des blancs
EV
Format photo
Date
Icône Description
Fichier en cours / Nombre total de
fichiers
Numéro de dossier-Numéro de fichier
Fichier RAW
Fichier protégé
Photos prises en continu (elles
apparaissent sous forme de dossier)
(p. 102)
1
2
3
N° Description
1 Photo prise
2 Histogramme RGB (p. 138)
3
Mode Prise de vue, Mesure de
l’exposition, Flash, Balance des blancs,
Valeur d’ouverture, Vitesse d’obturation,
ISO, Longueur de focale, Valeur
d’exposition, Format photo, Date
Lecture de vidéos
Arrêter Lecture
Icône Description
Fichier en cours / Nombre total de fichiers
Vitesse de lecture
Numéro de dossier-Numéro de fichier
Multi-mouvements
Temps de lecture en cours
Durée de la vidéo
Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran
44
Modification des informations affichées
Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur [D] pour changer de type
d’affichage.
Mode Type d’affichage
Prise de
vue
• Informations de base sur la prise de vue (Mode Prise de vue,
Vitesse d’obturation, Valeur d’ouverture, Valeur d’exposition,
Sensibilité ISO, etc.)
• Informations de base sur la prise de vue + Indicateur de niveau
• Informations de base sur la prise de vue + Informations sur les
options de la prise de vue en cours (Format photo, Mode de
sélection, Flash, Mesure de l’exposition, Mode AF, etc.)
• Informations de base sur la prise de vue + Informations sur les
options de la prise de vue en cours + Histogramme + Date et
heure
Lecture
• Informations de base
• Afficher toutes les informations sur le fichier en cours.
• Afficher toutes les informations sur la prise de vue, y compris
l’histogramme RGB.
Mon appareil photo
45
Objectifs
Vous pouvez acheter en option des objectifs exclusivement fabriqués pour
l’appareil photo de la gamme NX.
Découvrez les fonctions de chaque objectif et choisissez-en un selon vos
besoins et vos préférences.
Présentation de l’objectif
Objectif SAMSUNG 16-50 mm F3.5-5.6 Power Zoom ED OIS (exemple)
1 6
2
3
4
5
N° Description
1 Touche i-Function (p. 39)
2 Repère d'installation de l'objectif
3 Bague de mise au point
4 Objectif
5 Touche de zoom
• Appuyez sur la touche de zoom pour régler le rapport de zoom.
6 Contacts de l’objectif
Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’objectif, installez le cache de l’objectif ainsi que le
cache de la monture afin de protéger l’objectif de la poussière et des rayures.
Mon appareil photo > Objectifs
46
Objectif SAMSUNG 20-50 mm F3.5-5.6 ED II (exemple)
7
1
2
3 5
6
4
N° Description
1 Repère d'installation de l'objectif
2 Bouton de verrouillage du zoom
3 Objectif
4 Bague de mise au point (p. 81)
5 Touche i-Function (p. 39)
6 Bague de zoom
7 Contacts de l’objectif
Verrouillage et déverrouillage de l’objectif
Pour verrouiller l’objectif, déplacez le bouton de verrouillage du zoom vers
l’extérieur du boîtier de l’appareil photo tout en le maintenant enfoncé,
puis tournez la bague de zoom comme indiqué dans l’illustration.
Pour déverrouiller l’objectif, tournez la bague de zoom comme indiqué
dans l’illustration jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez le déclic.
Il est impossible de prendre une photo si l’objectif est verrouillé.
Mon appareil photo > Objectifs
47
Objectif SAMSUNG 16 mm F2.4 (exemple)
5
2
1
4
3
N° Description
1 Touche i-Function (p. 39)
2 Repère d'installation de l'objectif
3 Bague de mise au point (p. 81)
4 Objectif
5 Contacts de l’objectif
Mon appareil photo > Objectifs
48
Marquages de l’objectif
Découvrez ce que les numéros inscrits sur l’objectif signifient.
Objectif SAMSUNG 18-200 mm F3.5-6.3 ED OIS (exemple)
1 2 345
N° Description
1
Valeur d’ouverture
Gamme de valeurs d’ouverture prises en charge. Par exemple,
1:3.5–6.3 correspond à une gamme de valeurs maximale d’ouverture
allant de 3,5 à 6,3.
2
Longueur de focale
Distance entre le centre de l’objectif et son point focal (en
millimètres). Cette valeur est exprimée sous forme de plage
(longueur minimum à maximum).
Des longueurs de focale plus importantes réduisent les angles de
vue et agrandissent le sujet. Des longueurs de focale moins élevées
agrandissent les angles de vue.
3
ED
ED signifie dispersion extra faible (Extra-low Dispersion). Un verre à
très faible dispersion assure une excellente correction de l’aberration
chromatique (déformation qui se produit lorsqu’un objectif ne
parvient pas à mettre au point toutes les couleurs vers le même
point de convergence).
4
OIS (p. 82)
Stabilisation optique de l’image. Les objectifs bénéficiant de cette
fonction détectent les mouvements internes de l’appareil photo et
les compensent efficacement.
5
Ø
Diamètre de l’objectif. Assurez-vous que le diamètre des filtres que
vous fixez sur l’objectif est égal au diamètre de ce dernier.
Mon appareil photo
49
Accessoires
Vous pouvez utiliser des accessoires, par exemple un flash externe, afin de
vous aider à prendre de meilleurs clichés, de façon plus pratique.
Pour obtenir davantage d’informations sur les accessoires en option,
consultez le mode d’emploi de ceux-ci.
• Les illustrations peuvent différer par rapport au produit fourni.
• Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires agréés Samsung auprès d’un revendeur
ou d’un centre de service après-ventes Samsung. Samsung décline toute
responsabilité en cas de dommages causés par l’utilisation d’accessoires
fournis par d’autres fabricants.
Présentation du flash externe
SEF8A (exemple) (en option)
1
2
3
N° Description
1 Lampe
2 Cadran de fixation de la griffe porte-accessoire
3 Raccordement de la griffe porte-accessoire
Mon appareil photo > Accessoires
50
Fixation du flash externe
1 Fixez le flash en le faisant coulisser dans la griffe porteaccessoire.
2 Sécurisez le flash en tournant le cadran de fixation de la griffe
porte-accessoire dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre.
3 Soulevez le flash pour l’utiliser.
• Vous pouvez prendre une photo avec un flash non entièrement rechargé,
mais il est préférable d’en utiliser un dont la charge est complète.
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction du mode de prise de vue
sélectionné.
• Un court laps de temps se déroule entre les deux déclenchements du flash.
Ne bougez pas tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde fois.
• Le flash SEF8A peut ne pas être compatible avec les autres appareils photo de
la série NX.
• Pour en savoir plus sur les flashs proposés en option, consultez le mode
d’emploi des dispositifs en question.
Utilisez uniquement des flashs homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de flashs
incompatibles peut endommager l’appareil photo.
Mon appareil photo
51
Modes de prise de vue
Deux modes de prise de vue simples, les modes Scènes automatiques
et Intelligent, vous permettent de réaliser des prises de vue à l’aide de
nombreux paramètres automatiques. Des modes supplémentaires vous
offrent de plus grandes possibilités de personnalisation des paramètres.
Icône Description
t Mode Scènes automatiques (p. 52)
P Mode Programme (p. 54)
A Mode Priorité ouverture (p. 56)
S Mode Priorité Vitesse (p. 57)
M Mode Manuel (p. 58)
s Mode Intelligent (p. 60)
R Mode Panorama (p. 62)
B Réseau sans fil (p. 113)
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
52
t Mode Scènes automatiques
En mode Scènes automatiques, l’appareil photo reconnaît l’environnement
dans lequel les prises de vue sont effectuées et règle automatiquement
les facteurs liés à l’exposition, notamment la vitesse d’obturation, la
valeur d’ouverture, la mesure de l’exposition, la balance des blancs et la
compensation de l’exposition. L’appareil photo contrôlant la plupart de
ces fonctions, certaines fonctions de prise de vue sont limitées. Ce mode
est utile pour prendre rapidement des photos en effectuant le moins de
réglages possible.
1 Passez au mode t à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Cadrez le sujet.
3 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course.
• L’appareil photo sélectionne une scène. L’icône correspondante
apparaît à l’écran.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
53
Scènes reconnaissables
Icône Description
Paysages
Scènes sur fonds blancs éclatants
Paysages de nuit
Portraits de nuit
Paysages à contre-jour
Portraits à contre-jour
Portraits
Plans rapprochés d’objets
Plans rapprochés de texte
Couchers de soleil
Intérieurs, endroits obscurs
Eclairage partiel
Plans rapprochés avec éclairage au spot
Portraits avec éclairage au spot
Ciel bleu
Icône Description
Zones boisées (couleur dominante verte)
Plans rapprochés de sujets colorés
Appareil photo stabilisé sur un trépied et sujet relativement
immobile pendant une durée donnée (lors d’une prise de vue dans
des conditions de faible éclairage).
Sujets en mouvement
4 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo.
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo détecte des scènes différentes ou des
sujets identiques, en fonction des conditions de prise de vue, telles que le
bougé de l’appareil photo, l’éclairage et la distance à laquelle se trouve le
sujet.
• Si l’appareil photo ne reconnaît pas de mode scénique, il utilise les
paramètres par défaut du mode t.
• Même lorsqu’un visage est détecté, il est possible que l’appareil photo ne
sélectionne pas un mode Portrait, selon la position du sujet ou de l’éclairage.
• Même si vous utilisez un trépied, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne détecte
pas le mode Trépied ( ) si le sujet est en mouvement.
• La batterie de l’appareil photo se décharge plus rapidement, car l’appareil
change souvent les paramètres afin de capturer les scènes adéquates.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
54
P Mode Programme
L’appareil photo règle automatiquement la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur
d’ouverture afin d’atteindre une valeur d’exposition optimale.
Ce mode est pratique lorsque vous souhaitez réaliser des prises de vue
avec une exposition constante tout en ayant la possibilité de régler
d’autres paramètres.
1 Passez au mode P à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Définissez les options de votre choix.
3 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la
photo.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
55
Changement de programme
La fonction Changement de programme vous permet de régler la vitesse
d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture tout en conservant la même valeur
d’exposition sur l’appareil photo. Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner
la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture, puis appuyez sur la touche
de navigation pour régler la valeur d’ouverture. La vitesse d’obturation
change en fonction de la valeur d’ouverture.
Vitesse obturation minimum
Réglez la vitesse d’obturation afin qu’elle ne soit pas plus lente que la
vitesse sélectionnée. Toutefois, si la valeur d’exposition optimale ne peut
être atteinte, car la sensibilité ISO est égale à la valeur ISO maximale définie
par l’option Plage ISO auto, la vitesse d’obturation doit être plus lente que
la vitesse d’obturation minimum sélectionnée.
Pour définir une
vitesse d’obturation
minimum
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Vitesse obturation minimum ĺ une option.
• Cette fonction est disponible uniquement si la sensibilité ISO est réglée sur
Automatique.
• Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode Programme ou Priorité
ouverture.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
56
A Mode Priorité ouverture
En mode Priorité ouverture, l’appareil photo calcule automatiquement la
vitesse d’obturation en fonction de la valeur d’ouverture choisie.
Vous pouvez ajuster la profondeur de champ (DOF) en modifiant la valeur
d’ouverture. Ce mode est utile pour prendre des portraits ou des photos de
fleurs ou de paysages.
Profondeur de champ élevée Profondeur de champ réduite
1 Passez au mode A à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la valeur d’ouverture.
3 Tournez la touche de navigation pour régler la valeur
d’ouverture.
4 Définissez les options de votre choix.
5 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la
photo.
• En cas de faible luminosité, il peut s’avérer nécessaire d’augmenter la
sensibilité ISO afin d’éviter de prendre des photos floues.
• Pour régler la vitesse d’obturation minimum, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez
sur [m] ĺb ĺ Vitesse obturation minimum ĺ une option.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
57
S Mode Priorité Vitesse
En mode Priorité Vitesse, l’appareil photo règle automatiquement la valeur
d’ouverture en fonction de la vitesse d’obturation choisie. Ce mode est
utile pour prendre des photos de sujets en mouvement ou pour créer des
effets de vitesse sur une photo.
Par exemple, définissez la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur supérieure
à 1/500 s afin d’immobiliser le sujet sur l’image. Pour rendre le sujet flou,
réglez la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur inférieure à 1/30 s.
Vitesse d’obturation lente Vitesse d’obturation rapide
1 Passez au mode S à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la priorité vitesse.
3 Faites pivoter la touche de navigation pour régler la valeur
d’obturation.
4 Définissez les options de votre choix.
5 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la
photo.
Afin de compenser le manque de lumière causé par des vitesses d’obturation
rapides, augmentez l’ouverture pour permettre à plus de lumière d’entrer. Si vos
photos sont toujours trop sombres, augmentez la valeur ISO.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
58
M Mode Manuel
Le mode Manuel vous permet d’ajuster la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur
d’ouverture manuellement. Dans ce mode, vous pouvez entièrement
contrôler l’exposition de vos photos.
Ce mode est utile dans des environnements de prise de vue
professionnels, tel qu’un studio, ou lorsqu’il est nécessaire d’affiner
les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Le mode Manuel est également
recommandé pour les prises de vue de nuit ou les feux d’artifice.
1 Passez au mode M à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la valeur d’ouverture ou
la priorité vitesse.
3 Faites pivoter la touche de navigation pour régler la valeur
d'ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation.
4 Définissez les options de votre choix.
5 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la
photo.
Utilisation du mode d’exposition
Lorsque vous réglez la valeur d’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation,
l’exposition change en fonction des paramètres et l’affichage peut
s’assombrir. Lorsque cette fonction est activée, la luminosité de l’écran est
constante quels que soient les paramètres choisis, pour vous permettre de
mieux cadrer la prise de vue.
Pour utiliser le
mode d’exposition
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Mode d'exposition ĺ une option.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
59
Utilisation de la fonction Bulb
Utilisez la fonction Bulb pour réaliser des prises de vue nocturnes ou
pour photographier des ciels étoilés. Pendant l’intervalle de temps entre
la première pression sur le [Déclencheur], et la seconde pression sur le
[Déclencheur], l’obturateur reste ouvert de façon à pouvoir créer des
effets de lumière en mouvement.
Pour utiliser un
flash de type bulb
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner
la vitesse d’obturation ĺ tournez complètement la touche
de navigation dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre
afin de régler la vitesse d’obturation sur Bulb ĺ appuyez sur
le [Déclencheur] pour démarrer la prise de vue ĺ appuyez à
nouveau sur le [Déclencheur] pour arrêter la prise de vue.
• Si vous réglez une valeur ISO élevée ou si vous laissez l’obturateur ouvert
pendant longtemps, du bruit plus important risque d’apparaître sur l’image.
• Les options de prise de vue et de flash ne peuvent pas être utilisées avec la
fonction Bulb.
• La fonction Bulb est disponible uniquement en mode Manuel.
• Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil photo.
• Plus l’obturateur reste ouvert, plus l’enregistrement d’une photo est long.
N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque l’enregistrement d’une photo est en
cours.
• Si vous utilisez cette fonction pendant une durée prolongée, veillez à ce que
la batterie soit complètement rechargée.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
60
s Mode intelligent
En mode Intelligent, vous pouvez prendre une photo avec des options
prédéfinies pour une scène donnée.
1 Passez au mode s à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sélectionnez une scène.
Option Description
Beauté Faire un portrait avec des options qui gomment
les imperfections du visage.
Meilleure photo Prendre plusieurs clichés et remplacer les visages
pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible.
Mode Continu Prendre une série de photos de sujets qui se
déplacent.
Prise Enfants Prendre une photo avec un son amusant pour
attirer l’attention des enfants.
Paysage Réaliser des clichés de nature morte ou de paysage.
Macro Prendre en photo des petits sujets ou réaliser des
gros plans.
Option Description
Nature morte Prendre en photo des aliments dans des tons plus
colorés.
Fêtes et intérieurs Prendre des photos d’intérieur nettes.
Action Prendre en photo des sujets se déplaçant à grande
vitesse.
Ton riche Prendre une photo avec des couleurs dynamiques.
Cascade Prendre en photo des scènes avec des cascades.
Silhouette Prendre en photo des sujets sous forme d’ombres
foncées se détachant sur un fond clair.
Coucher de soleil Prendre des photos de couchers du soleil avec des
tons rouges et jaunes naturels.
Nuit
Prendre une photo d’une plus grande netteté
et avec un bruit réduit, dans des conditions
d’éclairage faible.
Feux d'artifice Prendre en photo des scènes avec des feux
d’artifice.
Lumière
Prendre en photo des scènes avec des traînées
lumineuses dans des conditions de faible
luminosité.
3 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour effectuer la
prise de vue.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
61
Utilisation du mode Meilleure photo
En mode Meilleure photo, vous pouvez prendre plusieurs clichés et
remplacer les visages pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible. Vous avez
alors la possibilité de choisir, pour chacun des individus d’une photo de
groupe, le meilleur cliché.
1 Passez au mode s à l'aide de la molette de sélection, puis
sélectionnez Meilleure photo.
2 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le
[Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point.
3 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo.
• L’appareil photo prend 5 photos consécutives.
• La première est définie comme arrière-plan.
• Les visages sont automatiquement détectés après la mise au point
par l’appareil photo.
4 Sélectionnez un visage à remplacer à l’aide de la touche de
navigation.
Annuler Enregistrer
5 Sélectionnez la meilleure pose pour les 5 visages
photographiés.
• Répétez les étapes 4 et 5 pour remplacer le reste des visages de la
photo.
• L’icône apparaît sur l’image recommandée par l’appareil photo.
Retour Définir
6 Appuyez sur [f] pour enregistrer la photo.
• Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil photo.
• La résolution photo est définie sur 5.9M ou à une valeur inférieure.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
62
3 Une fois terminé, relâchez le [Déclencheur].
• L’appareil photo enregistre automatiquement les photos en une
seule.
• Si vous relâchez le [Déclencheur] au cours de la prise de vue, la vue
panoramique s’interrompt et les photos prises sont enregistrées.
• La résolution varie en fonction de la photo panoramique que vous avez prise.
• En mode Panorama, certaines options de prise de vue ne sont pas
disponibles.
• L’appareil photo peut cesser de photographier du fait de la composition de la
prise de vue ou du déplacement du sujet.
• En mode Panorama, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne prenne pas l’intégralité
de la dernière scène si vous arrêtez le déplacement de l’objectif pour
améliorer la qualité de la photo. Pour prendre une scène entière, déplacez
l’appareil photo légèrement au-delà du point final.
• Pour optimiser les résultats lors de la prise de photos panoramiques, évitez :
- de déplacer l’appareil photo trop rapidement ou trop lentement ;
- d’interrompre le déplacement de l’appareil photo avant le cliché suivant ;
- de déplacer l’appareil photo à une vitesse irrégulière ;
- de secouer l’appareil photo ;
- d’effectuer la prise de vue dans un endroit sombre ;
- de prendre en photo des sujets en mouvement placés trop près de
l’objectif ;
- les conditions de prise de vue, où la luminosité et la couleur de la lumière,
ne cessent de changer.
• Les photos réalisées sont automatiquement sauvegardées et la prise de vue
est interrompue dans les circonstances suivantes :
- si vous changez de direction en pleine prise de vue ;
- si vous bougez l’appareil photo trop rapidement ;
- si vous ne bougez pas l’appareil photo.
R Mode Panorama
En mode Panorama, vous pouvez prendre une large scène panoramique
sur une seule photo. Le mode Panorama permet de prendre une série de
photos puis de les combiner pour créer une image panoramique.
1 Passez au mode R à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Maintenez le [Déclencheur] enfoncé, puis déplacez lentement
l’appareil photo dans la direction souhaitée.
• Une flèche indiquant la direction du mouvement apparaît et
l’intégralité de l’image prise est affichée dans le champ d’aperçu.
• Une fois les scènes alignées, l’appareil photo prend alors le cliché
suivant automatiquement.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
63
Enregistrement d’une vidéo
En mode Prise de vue, vous pouvez enregistrer des vidéos Full HD
(1920X1080) en appuyant sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo). L’appareil
photo vous permet de réaliser des vidéos d’une durée de 20 minutes à
30 ips, et enregistre les fichiers au format MP4 (H.264). Le son est enregistré
via le microphone de l’appareil photo.
Si vous utilisez un objectif dépourvu de commutateur AF / MF pendant
l’enregistrement d’une vidéo, appuyez sur [F] pour désactiver ou
activer la fonction de mise au point automatique. Lorsque vous utilisez un
objectif équipé d’un commutateur AF / MF, la fonction de mise au point
automatique s’appuie sur le réglage du commutateur.
Sélectionnez Fondu pour appliquer un fondu entrant ou sortant à la
scène. Vous pouvez également sélectionner l’option Voix ou toute autre
option permettant de paramétrer l’enregistrement (p. 99).
1 Passez au mode t, P, A, S, M ou s à l'aide de la molette
de sélection.
• Il est possible que cette fonction soit inopérante dans certains modes.
2 Définissez les options de votre choix.
3 Appuyez sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo) pour lancer
l’enregistrement.
• L’appareil photo maintient la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur
d’ouverture définies avant la prise de vue.
4 Appuyez à nouveau sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo)
pour l’arrêter.
• Vous pouvez également appuyer sur le [Déclencheur] pour arrêter
l’enregistrement.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
64
• Le format H.264 (MPEG-4 part10 / AVC) est l’un des derniers formats vidéo mis
au point par les organismes internationaux de normalisation ISO-IEC et ITU-T et
disponible depuis 2003. Sachant que ce format utilise un taux de compression
élevé, davantage de données peuvent être enregistrées dans un espace mémoire
plus restreint.
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo enregistre le son du stabilisateur d’image si vous
avez activé cette option ou bien lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo.
• Si vous réglez l’objectif alors que l’enregistrement d’une vidéo est en cours, vous
risquez d’enregistrer le son émis par le zoom ou l’objectif.
• Lorsque vous utilisez un objectif vidéo en option, le son de la mise au point
automatique n’est pas enregistré.
• Si vous retirez l’objectif de l’appareil photo lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo,
l’enregistrement est alors interrompu. Ne changez pas d’objectif lorsque vous
réalisez une vidéo.
• Si vous modifiez brusquement l’angle de prise de vue lorsque vous réalisez une
vidéo, il est possible que l’appareil photo ne puisse pas enregistrer les images de
façon précise. Utilisez un trépied pour réduire les mouvements de l’appareil photo.
• L’appareil photo prend uniquement en charge la fonction Mise au point multiple
lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser d’autres fonctions
de réglage de la zone de mise au point.
• Lorsque la taille d’un fichier vidéo est supérieure à 4 Go, l’appareil photo interrompt
automatiquement l’enregistrement même si la durée maximale d’enregistrement
(20 minutes) n’est pas atteinte.
• Si vous utilisez une carte mémoire à vitesse d’écriture lente, il est possible que
l’enregistrement de la vidéo en cours s’interrompe, car la carte ne parvient pas à
traiter un débit de données trop élevé. Si cela se produit, remplacez la carte utilisée
par une autre carte à vitesse d’écriture plus rapide, ou bien réduisez la résolution de
l’image (par exemple, de 1280X720 à 640X480).
• Utilisez toujours l’appareil photo pour formater une carte mémoire. Si vous
formatez les fichiers sur un autre appareil photo ou sur un ordinateur, cela peut
affecter la capacité d’enregistrement de la carte ou bien causer la perte de fichiers.
• Lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo avec la même sensibilité ISO, l’écran peut être
plus sombre que lors de la prise d’une photo. Réglez la sensibilité ISO.
• Lorsque vous enregistrez une vidéo en mode Programme, Priorité ouverture, ou
Priorité vitesse, le paramètre ISO est automatiquement défini sur Automatique
.
Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue
65
Fonctions disponibles en mode Prise de vue
Pour obtenir plus d’informations à propos des fonctions de prise de vue,
reportez-vous à la section 2.
Fonction Disponible en
Format photo (p. 67)
Qualité (p. 68)
P/A/S/M/s*/t
P/A/S/M/s*/R
ISO (p. 69) P/A/S/M
Balance des blancs (p. 70) P/A/S/M
Assistant photo (p. 72) P/A/S/M
Filtre intelligent (p. 94) P/A/S/M
Mode AF (p. 73) P/A/S/M/s*/R
Zone AF (p. 76) P/A/S/M/s*
Aide mise au point manuelle
(p. 81) P/A/S/M/s/R/t
Lien AE à AF (p. 92) P/A/S/M
Mode d'exposition (p. 58) P/A/S/M
Fonction Disponible en
OIS (anti flou de bougé) (p. 82)
Prise de vue (Unique/Continue/
P/A/S/M/s*/t
Mode Rafale/Retardateur/
Bracketing) (p. 83)
P/A/S/M/s*/t*
Mesure de l'exposition (p. 90) P/A/S/M
Plage dynamique (p. 93) P/A/S/M
Flash (p. 88) P*/A*/S*/M*/s*/t*
Compensation de l'exposition
(p. 95) P/A/S
Verrouillage de l’exposition
(p. 96) P/A/S
* Dans ces modes, certaines fonctions sont limitées.
Chapitre 2
Fonctions de prise de vue
Découvrez les fonctions que vous pouvez définir en mode Prise de vue.
En utilisant les fonctions de prise de vue, vous pouvez personnaliser encore plus vos photos et vos vidéos.
Fonctions de prise de vue
67
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Format photo
Sélectionner une résolution plus élevée permet d’augmenter le nombre de
pixels des photos ou des vidéos afin de pouvoir les imprimer sur du papier
grand format ou de les visionner sur un grand écran. Si vous utilisez une
résolution élevée, la taille du fichier augmente également. Pour afficher
des photos dans un cadre numérique ou en télécharger vers le web,
sélectionnez une basse résolution.
Pour régler la taille En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Format photo ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Taille Recommandé pour
(3:2) 5472x3648* Impression sur papier A1.
(3:2) 3888x2592 Impression sur papier A2.
(3:2) 2976x1984 Impression sur papier A3.
(3:2) 1728x1152 Impression sur papier A5.
(16:9) 5472x3080 Impression sur papier A1 ou affichage sur
un téléviseur HD.
(16:9) 3712x2088 Impression sur papier A3 ou affichage sur
un téléviseur HD.
(16:9) 2944x1656 Impression sur papier A4 ou affichage sur
un téléviseur HD.
(16:9) 1920x1080 Impression sur papier A5 ou affichage sur
un téléviseur HD.
(1:1) 3648x3648 Impression d’une photo carrée sur du
papier au format A1.
(1:1) 2640x2640 Impression d’une photo carrée sur du
papier au format A3.
(1:1) 2000x2000 Impression d’une photo carrée sur du
papier au format A4.
(1:1) 1024x1024 Pièce jointe à un courriel.
Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Format et résolution
68
Fonctions de prise de vue > Format et résolution
Qualité
L’appareil photo enregistre les photos au format JPEG ou RAW.
Les photos prises par un appareil numérique sont souvent converties
en format JPEG et stockées en mémoire selon les paramètres de
l’appareil photo au moment de la prise de vue. Les fichiers RAW ne sont
pas convertis au format JPEG et sont stockés en mémoire sans aucune
modification.
Les fichiers RAW ont pour extension « SRW ». Pour régler et étalonner
l’exposition, la balance des blancs, les tonalités, le contraste et les couleurs
des fichiers RAW, ou pour les convertir au format JPEG ou TIFF, utilisez le
programme Adobe Photoshop Lightroom fourni sur le DVD-ROM.
Pour enregistrer des photos en format RAW, assurez-vous que la carte
mémoire dispose d’un espace suffisant.
Pour définir la
qualité
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Qualité ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Format Description
JPEG
Maximale* :
• Compressée afin d’obtenir la meilleure qualité
possible.
• Recommandé pour imprimer en grand format.
JPEG
Elevée :
• Compressé pour obtenir une meilleure qualité.
• Recommandé pour imprimer en format normal.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Format Description
JPEG
Normale :
• Compressé pour obtenir une qualité normale.
• Recommandé pour imprimer en petit format ou
pour envoyer sur le web.
RAW
RAW :
• Enregistrer une photo sans perte de données.
• Recommandé pour effectuer des modifications
après la prise de vue.
RAW+JPEG RAW + Très élevée : enregistrer une photo au
format JPEG (qualité maximale) et RAW.
RAW+JPEG RAW + Elevée : enregistrer une photo au format
JPEG (qualité Elevée) et RAW.
RAW+JPEG RAW + Normale : enregistrer une photo au format
JPEG (qualité normale) et RAW.
Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Fonctions de prise de vue
69
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
La sensibilité ISO désigne la sensibilité de l’appareil photo à la lumière.
Plus la valeur de la sensibilité ISO est importante, plus l’appareil photo
est sensible à la lumière. Par conséquent, en sélectionnant une valeur de
sensibilité ISO plus élevée, vous pouvez réaliser des prises de vue dans
des endroits sombres, en utilisant une vitesse d’obturation supérieure.
Néanmoins, il est possible que cela augmente les effets de bruit
électronique et donne un aspect granuleux à la photo.
Pour définir la
sensibilité ISO
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ ISO ĺ
une option.
Exemples
ISO 100 ISO 400
ISO 800 ISO 3200
• Augmentez la valeur ISO dans les endroits où l’utilisation du flash est
interdite. En définissant une valeur ISO élevée, vous pouvez obtenir des
photos d’une plus grande clarté sans avoir besoin de davantage de lumière.
• Afin de réduire le bruit visuel (parasites) qui peut apparaître sur des photos
prises avec une valeur ISO élevée, utilisez la fonction Réducteur de bruit
(p. 134).
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Sensibilité ISO
Fonctions de prise de vue
70
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
En photographie, la balance des blancs permet de corriger la dominante
de couleur en fonction de l’éclairage ambiant.
La couleur des photos dépend du type et de la qualité de la source
d’éclairage. Pour que les couleurs de vos photos soient le reflet de la
réalité, choisissez des conditions d’éclairage appropriées pour calibrer
la balance des blancs, par exemple Balance des blancs automatique,
Lumière du jour, Nuageux, Tungstène, ou bien réglez la température des
couleurs manuellement.
Vous pouvez également ajuster la couleur des sources de lumière
prédéfinies de façon à ce que les couleurs de la photo correspondent aux
couleurs véritables de la scène sous différentes conditions d’éclairage.
Pour définir une
balance des blancs
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Balance des blancs ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Description
Balance des blancs automatique* : automatiser les paramètres
en fonction des conditions d’éclairage.
Lumière du jour : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en
extérieur par beau temps. Cette option permet d’obtenir des photos
reproduisant au mieux les couleurs naturelles d’une scène.
Nuageux : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en
extérieur par temps nuageux ou dans un endroit ombragé. Les
photos prises par temps nuageux ont tendance à présenter une
teinte plus bleutée que celles prises par beau temps. Cette option
permet de compenser cet effet.
Blanc fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de
vue sous un éclairage de type lumière naturelle fluorescente, en
particulier celle de couleur blanche.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Description
N
Blanc/Noir fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises
de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière naturelle fluorescente, en
particulier celle aux tonalités de blanc très prononcé.
D
Lumière du jour fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors
de prises de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière naturelle
fluorescente, en particulier celle de couleur blanche avec une teinte
légèrement bleue.
Tungstène : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en
intérieur avec des ampoules à incandescence ou des lampes
halogène. Les ampoules tungstène incandescentes ont tendance à
ajouter une tonalité rougeâtre. Cette option permet de compenser
cet effet.
Balance des blancs flash : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de
vue à l’aide d’un flash.
Réglage personnalisé : utiliser vos paramètres prédéfinis. Vous
pouvez définir manuellement la balance des blancs en appuyant sur
[D], et en prenant une feuille de papier blanc en photo. Remplir le
cercle de mesure de l’exposition sélective avec la feuille de papier et
définir la balance des blancs.
Température couleur : régler manuellement la température des
couleurs de la source lumineuse. La température des couleurs est une
mesure exprimée en degrés kelvins et qui indique spécifiquement
le type de source lumineuse. Il est possible d’obtenir une photo
plus chaleureuse à l’aide d’une valeur élevée, et une photo moins
chaleureuse à l’aide d’une valeur plus basse. Appuyez sur [D],
puis réglez la température de couleur.
Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Balance des blancs
71
Fonctions de prise de vue > Balance des blancs
Personnalisation des options de préréglage de la balance des
blancs
Vous pouvez également personnaliser les options prédéfinies de balance
des blancs.
Pour personnaliser
les options
prédéfinies
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Balance des blancs ĺ une option ĺ [D] ĺ appuyez sur
[D/I/C/F].
Balance des blancs : Lumière du jour
Retour Réinitialiser
Exemples
Balance des blancs automatique Lumière du jour
Lumière du jour fluorescent Tungstène
Fonctions de prise de vue
72
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
L’assistant photo vous permet d’appliquer des styles à vos photos afin de
leur faire adopter différents aspects et créer des impressions particulières.
Vous pouvez également créer et enregistrer vos propres styles de photos
en réglant la couleur, la saturation, la netteté et le contraste pour chacun
de ces styles.
L’application de différents styles ne suit aucune règle particulière, quelles
que soient les conditions. Essayez plusieurs styles différents et trouvez les
paramètres qui vous conviennent.
Pour définir un style
de photo
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Assistant photo ĺ une option.
Exemples
Standard Accentué Portrait
Paysage Naturel Rétro
Cool Calme Classique
• Vous pouvez également régler les valeurs des paramètres de styles prédéfinis.
Sélectionnez une option de l’Assistant photo, appuyez sur [D], puis réglez
la couleur, la saturation, la netteté ou le contraste.
• Pour personnaliser l’Assistant photo, sélectionnez , ou , puis réglez
la couleur, la saturation, la netteté et le contraste.
• Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options de l’Assistant photo et
les options de Filtre intelligent.
Assistant photo (styles de photo)
Fonctions de prise de vue
73
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Mode AF
Voici comment régler la mise au point de l’appareil photo en fonction des
sujets.
Vous pouvez sélectionner un mode de mise au point adapté au sujet,
parmi les modes de Mise au point automatique unique, Mise au
point automatique continue et Mise au point manuelle. Lorsque vous
appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, la fonction de mise au point
automatique s’active. En mode Mise au point manuelle, vous devez
tourner la bague de mise au point sur l’objectif.
Dans la plupart des cas, vous pouvez effectuer une mise au point en
sélectionnant AF unique. Il est difficile d’effectuer une mise au point sur
des sujets se déplaçant rapidement ou ayant des effets d’ombre subtils
différents de ceux de l’arrière-plan. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez un mode de
mise au point approprié.
Si votre objectif est équipé d’un commutateur AF / MF, vous devez le
régler en fonction du mode sélectionné. Réglez le commutateur sur AF
lorsque vous sélectionnez les options AF unique ou AF continu. Réglez
le commutateur sur MF lorsque vous sélectionnez l’option Mise au point
manuelle.
Si votre objectif est dépourvu de commutateur AF / MF, appuyez sur [F]
pour sélectionner le mode AF souhaité.
Pour définir le
mode de mise au
point automatique
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [F] ĺ une option.
• Vous pouvez également effectuer ce réglage en appuyant sur [m] ĺ
b ĺ Mode AF ĺ option choisie en mode Prise de vue.
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction l’objectif utilisé.
74
Fonctions de prise de vue > Mode AF
AF unique
La fonction AF unique est appropriée pour les photos de sujets immobiles.
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, la mise au point
s’établit dans la zone correspondante. Une fois la mise au point effectuée,
la zone devient verte.
AF continu
Tant que vous enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil
photo continue d’effectuer la mise au point automatique. Ce mode est
recommandé pour photographier une personne sur une bicyclette, un
chien qui court ou une course automobile.
75
Fonctions de prise de vue > Mode AF
Mise au point manuelle
Vous pouvez effectuer manuellement la mise au point sur un sujet en
tournant la bague de mise au point sur l’objectif. La fonction Aide mise
au point manuelle vous permet d’effectuer facilement la mise au point.
Lorsque vous tournez la bague de mise au point, la zone de mise au point
est agrandie. Ce mode est recommandé pour photographier un objet dont
la couleur est similaire à celle de l’arrière-plan, une scène de nuit ou un feu
d’artifice.
• Si vous utilisez cette fonction, vous ne pouvez pas régler les options
Détection des visages, Zone AF et Lien AE à AF.
• Tandis que vous réglez la mise au point, l’échelle de la mise au point manuelle
( ) apparaît.
Fonctions de prise de vue
76
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
La fonction Zone AF permet de modifier l’emplacement de la zone de mise
au point.
D’une manière générale, les appareils photo effectuent une mise au point
sur le sujet le plus proche. En présence de plusieurs sujets, il arrive que
certains sujets soient involontairement mis au point. Vous pouvez modifier
l’emplacement de la zone de mise au point afin d’éviter qu’une mise au
point porte sur des sujets non choisis. En sélectionnant une zone de mise
au point appropriée, vous pouvez obtenir une photo plus claire et plus
nette.
Pour définir la
zone de mise au
point automatique
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Zone AF ĺ une option.
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
• Lorsque le commutateur AF / MF est réglé sur MF, vous ne pouvez pas
modifier l’option Zone AF à partir du menu Prise de vue.
Mise au point sélection
Vous pouvez définir la mise au point sur une zone en particulier. Appliquez
un effet hors-mise au point afin de faire ressortir le sujet.
La zone de mise au point de la photo ci-dessous a été repositionnée et sa
taille a été modifiée afin de l’adapter au visage du sujet.
Taille AF Déplacer
En mode Prise de vue, afin de redimensionner ou de déplacer la zone de mise au
point, appuyez sur [o]. Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour déplacer la zone
de mise au point. Tournez la touche de navigation pour redimensionner la zone
de mise au point.
Zone AF
77
Fonctions de prise de vue > Zone AF
Mise au point multiple
L’appareil photo affiche un rectangle vert sur les zones de la photo où la
mise au point est correctement effectuée. La photo est divisée en au moins
deux zones et l’appareil photo effectue une mise au point sur chaque zone.
Ceci est recommandé pour les photos de paysages.
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo
affiche les zones de mise au point, comme illustré sur la photo ci-dessous.
Mise au point avec suivi
Composez votre prise de vue et appuyez sur [o] pour effectuer la mise au
point sur le sujet. La mise au point avec suivi permet de suivre un sujet et
d’effectuer automatiquement la mise au point, même si le sujet se déplace
ou en cas de changement de cadrage de la prise de vue.
Cadre blanc : l’appareil photo
effectue un suivi.
Cadre vert : la mise au point est
effectuée lorsque vous appuyez
sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course.
Cadre rouge : l’appareil photo ne
parvient pas à effectuer la mise
au point.
78
Fonctions de prise de vue > Zone AF
• Si aucune zone de mise au point n’a été sélectionnée, le cadre apparaît au
centre de l’écran.
• Le suivi peut s’avérer impossible si :
- le sujet est trop petit ;
- le sujet bouge de manière irrégulière ;
- le sujet est à contre-jour ou si la luminosité est insuffisante ;
- les couleurs ou les motifs sur le sujet et l’arrière-plan sont identiques ;
- des motifs horizontaux, tels que des stores, sont présents ;
- l’appareil photo n’est pas stable ;
- vous prenez des photos en continu.
• Lorsque le suivi ne parvient pas à s’effectuer, la fonctionnalité est réinitialisée.
• Si l’appareil photo ne parvient pas à suivre le sujet, la zone de mise au point
est réinitialisée.
• Si l’appareil photo ne réussit pas à effectuer la mise au point, le cadre de mise
au point devient rouge et la fonctionnalité est réinitialisée.
Fonctions de prise de vue
79
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Détection des visages
Utilisez les options de Détection des visages pour faire un autoportrait ou
un visage souriant.
Pour utiliser
la fonction de
détection des
visages
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Détection des visages ĺ une option.
• Lorsque l’appareil photo détecte un visage, il suit automatiquement le visage
détecté.
• Selon les options sélectionnées dans l’Assistant photo, la détection des
visages peut ne pas être efficace.
• Lors d’une mise au point manuelle, la détection des visages peut ne pas être
possible.
• La détection des visages risque de ne pas fonctionner lorsque :
- le sujet est éloigné de l’appareil photo ;
- la luminosité est trop forte ou trop faible ;
- le sujet n’est pas face à l’appareil photo ;
- le sujet porte des lunettes de soleil ou un masque ;
- les expressions faciales du sujet changent radicalement ;
- le sujet est à contre-jour ou les conditions d’éclairage sont instables.
• Lorsque vous définissez les options Détection des visages, la zone AF est
automatiquement réglée sur Mise au point multiple.
• Selon les options de Détection des visages que vous avez sélectionnées, il est
possible que certaines options de prise de vue ne soient pas disponibles.
Normale
L’appareil photo effectue une mise au point en priorité sur les visages. Il
peut détecter jusqu’à 10 visages. Ce paramètre est recommandé pour les
photos de groupe.
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo
effectue une mise au point sur les visages, comme cela est présenté sur
la photo ci-dessous. Lors d’une prise de vue d’un groupe de personnes, la
mise au point effectuée avec l’appareil photo sur le visage de la personne
la plus proche s’affiche en blanc tandis que celle effectuée sur les autres
personnes s’affiche en gris.
80
Fonctions de prise de vue > Détection des visages
Clin d’œil
L’appareil photo déverrouille automatiquement le déclencheur 2 secondes
après avoir détecté un clin d’œil.
• Clignez des yeux pendant plus de 1 seconde pour une meilleure détection.
• La détection des clignements des yeux peut échouer si :
- l’appareil photo n’est pas aligné par rapport au niveau des yeux ;
- le sujet est dans l’ombre ;
- le sujet porte des lunettes ;
- le sujet est éloigné de l’appareil photo.
Sourire
L’appareil photo déverrouille automatiquement le déclencheur lorsqu’il
détecte un visage souriant.
Lorsque votre sujet a un grand sourire, il est plus facile pour l’appareil photo de
le détecter.
Fonctions de prise de vue
81
Fonctions de Fonctions de prise de vue prise de vue
En mode Mise au point manuelle, vous devez tourner la bague de mise
au point sur l’objectif afin d’effectuer la mise au point. Avec la fonction
Aide mise au point manuelle, vous pouvez agrandir la scène et facilement
effectuer la mise au point tout en tournant la bague de mise au point.
Cette fonction est disponible uniquement sur les objectifs avec lesquels la
mise au point manuelle est possible.
Pour définir l’aide
à la mise au point
manuelle
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Aide mise au point manuelle ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Description
Désactivé : ne pas utiliser la fonction Aide mise au point
manuelle.
Agrandir x5* : lorsque vous effectuez la mise au point, la zone
de mise au point est grossie jusqu’à 5 fois.
Agrandir x8 : lorsque vous effectuez la mise au point, la zone
de mise au point est grossie jusqu’à 8 fois.
Aide mise au point manuelle
Fonctions de prise de vue
82
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Utilisez la fonction OIS (stabilisation optique de l’image) pour réduire le
bougé de l’appareil photo. La fonction OIS peut ne pas être disponible
avec certains objectifs.
Le bougé de l’appareil photo tend à se produire dans les endroits sombres
ou lors de la prise de vue en intérieur. Dans ces cas-là, l’appareil photo
utilise une vitesse d’obturation plus lente afin d’augmenter la quantité de
lumière qui pénètre dans l’objectif, ce qui peut donner des photos floues.
Vous pouvez éviter ce type de situations en utilisant la fonction OIS.
Si l’objectif est équipé d’un interrupteur OIS, positionnez-le sur ON pour
utiliser la fonction OIS.
Pour définir les
options OIS
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
OIS (anti flou de bougé) ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Description
Mode 1* : la fonction OIS s’applique uniquement lorsque vous
enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à fond ou à mi-course.
Mode 2 : la fonction OIS est activée.
Désactivé : la fonction OIS est désactivée.
Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS)
Sans correction OIS Avec correction OIS
• L’option OIS risque de ne pas fonctionner si :
- vous bougez l’appareil photo pour suivre un sujet en mouvement ;
- l’appareil photo est instable ;
- la vitesse d’obturation est lente (par exemple, si vous sélectionnez Nuit en
mode s) ;
- le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible ;
- vous prenez une photo en gros plan.
• Si la fonction OIS est utilisée avec un trépied, les photos peuvent être floues
en raison des vibrations du capteur OIS. Désactivez la fonction OIS lorsque
vous utilisez un trépied.
• Si l’appareil photo est soumis à un choc, l’affichage devient flou. Si cela se
produit, éteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le.
• Utilisez la fonction OIS uniquement si cela est nécessaire, car la batterie se
décharge plus rapidement.
• Pour définir une option OIS dans le menu, réglez l’interrupteur OIS de
l’objectif sur ON.
• Cette option peut ne pas être disponible avec certains objectifs.
• La position Désactivé peut ne pas être disponible avec certains objectifs.
Fonctions de prise de vue
83
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Il vous est possible de définir le type de prise de vue, par exemple
Continue, Mode Rafale, Retardateur ou Bracketing.
Sélectionnez Unique pour prendre une photo à la fois. Sélectionnez
Continue ou Mode Rafale pour prendre des photos de sujets se déplaçant
rapidement. Sélectionnez BKT AE, BKT NB, A. photo Bracketing ou
Bracketing de profondeur de champ pour régler l’exposition, la balance
des blancs, appliquer des effets de l’assistant photo ou prendre des
photos avec différentes profondeurs de champ. Vous pouvez également
sélectionner Retardateur pour prendre automatiquement une photo à
l’issue d’une durée particulière.
Pour modifier la
méthode de prise
de vue
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] ĺ une option.
• Vous pouvez également effectuer ce réglage en appuyant sur [m] ĺb
ĺ Prise de vue ĺ une option en mode Prise de vue.
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
Unique
Prenez une photo à chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur].
Recommandé pour des conditions de prise de vue courantes.
Prise de vue (type)
84
Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type)
Continue
Prenez des photos en continu en appuyant sur le [Déclencheur]. Vous
pouvez prendre jusqu’à 5 photos par seconde.
• Si vous sélectionnez Continue, la fonction de réduction du bruit n’est pas
disponible.
• La vitesse maximale de prise de vue est de 5 images par seconde. Elle
ralentira au bout environ de 13 clichés au format JPEG et de 5 clichés au
format RAW. (Cela peut varier en fonction des caractéristiques techniques de
la carte mémoire.)
Mode Rafale
Prenez successivement 10 photos par seconde (3 secondes), 15 photos
par seconde (2 secondes) ou 30 photos par seconde (1 seconde) lorsque
vous appuyez une fois sur le [Déclencheur]. Cette fonctionnalité est
recommandée pour prendre des photos de mouvements rapides ou de
sujets se déplaçant rapidement, par exemple lors de courses automobiles.
• Pour définir le nombre de clichés, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] →
Mode Rafale, puis appuyez sur [D].
• Le format photo est réglé sur 5M.
• L’enregistrement d’une photo peut prendre plus de temps.
• Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le flash avec cette option.
• La vitesse d’obturation doit être supérieure à 1/30 seconde.
• Les photos capturées avec cette option peuvent être légèrement agrandies
lors de l’enregistrement.
• Vous ne pouvez pas régler l’option ISO à une valeur supérieure à ISO 3200.
• Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est
pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW.
85
Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type)
Retardateur
Prenez une photo à l’issue d’une durée particulière. Vous pouvez régler le
retardateur sur un délai compris entre 2 et 30 secondes.
• Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour interrompre la prise de vue.
• Pour définir les détails du retardateur, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C]
ĺ Retardateur, puis appuyez sur [D].
Bracketing Exposition automatique (BKT AE)
Après avoir appuyé sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo prend 3 photos
consécutives : l’originale, une un peu plus sombre et une autre un peu plus
claire. Utilisez un trépied afin d’éviter d’obtenir un résultat flou lors de la
prise continue des trois clichés par l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez régler les
paramètres dans le menu Réglage Bracketing.
Exposition -2
Original
Exposition +2
Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ
Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option.
86
Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type)
Bracketing Balance des blancs (BKT NB)
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo prend
3 photos consécutives : l’originale et deux autres avec des paramètres
de balance des blancs différents. La photo originale est réalisée lorsque
vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. Les deux autres sont réglées
automatiquement en fonction de la balance des blancs que vous avez
définie. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu Réglage
Bracketing.
WB-2
Original
WB+2
• Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d
ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option.
• Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est
pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW.
Bracketing Assistant photo (A. photo
Bracketing)
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo réalise trois
clichés consécutifs, chacun avec différents paramètres de l’assistant photo.
L’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue et applique les trois options
de l’assistant photo que vous avez définies pour la photo prise. Vous
pouvez sélectionner trois paramètres différents dans le menu Réglage
Bracketing.
Accentué
Standard
Rétro
• Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d
ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option.
• Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est
pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW.
87
Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type)
Bracketing de profondeur de champ
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo réalise trois
clichés consécutifs, chacun avec une profondeur différente en ajustant la
valeur d’ouverture. Utilisez un trépied afin d’éviter d’obtenir un résultat
flou lors de la prise continue des trois clichés par l’appareil photo. Vous
pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu Réglage Bracketing.
• Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d
ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option.
• Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode Programme ou Priorité
ouverture.
• Si la valeur d’ouverture est réglée au maximum ou au minimum, deux photos
seront prises avec la valeur d’ouverture maximum ou minimum.
Fonctions de prise de vue
88
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Pour obtenir une photo réaliste du sujet, la quantité de lumière doit être
constante. Lorsque la source de luminosité varie, vous pouvez utiliser
un flash pour obtenir une quantité de lumière stable. Sélectionnez des
paramètres appropriés en fonction d’une source de lumière et d’un sujet.
Pour définir les
options du flash
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Flash
ĺ une option.
Icône Description
Désactivé : ne pas utiliser le flash.
A
Flash intelligent : l’appareil photo règle automatiquement
l’intensité du flash en fonction de la quantité de lumière ambiante.
A
Automatique : le flash se déclenche automatiquement dans les
endroits sombres.
Yeux rouges auto : le flash se déclenche automatiquement et
réduit l’effet yeux rouges.
Contre jour : le flash se déclenche chaque fois que vous prenez
une photo. (La luminosité est automatiquement ajustée.)
Ctre jour + Yeux rouges : le flash se déclenche et réduit l’effet yeux
rouges chaque fois que vous prenez une photo.
1er Rideau : le flash se déclenche
immédiatement après l’ouverture
de l’obturateur. L’appareil photo
capture plus rapidement et plus
nettement la photo d’un sujet au
cours d’un mouvement. Direction du déplacement de la
boule
Icône Description
2e Rideau : le flash se déclenche
juste avant que l’obturateur ne se
referme. L’appareil photo prend
plus lentement et plus clairement
la photo d’un sujet au cours d’un
mouvement. Direction du déplacement de la
boule
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
• Un court laps de temps se déroule entre les deux déclenchements du flash.
Ne bougez pas tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde fois.
• Si vous sélectionnez Désactivé, le flash ne se déclenche pas même si un flash
externe est installé.
Utilisez uniquement des flashs homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de flashs
externes incompatibles peut endommager l’appareil photo.
Flash
89
Fonctions de prise de vue > Flash
Réduction de l’effet yeux rouges
Si le flash se déclenche lorsque vous photographiez une personne dans
un endroit sombre, il est possible qu’une lueur rouge apparaisse dans ses
yeux. Pour réduire l’effet yeux rouges, sélectionnez Yeux rouges auto ou
Ctre jour + Yeux rouges.
Sans réduction des yeux rouges Avec réduction des yeux rouges
Si le sujet est trop éloigné de l’appareil photo ou se déplace lorsque le flash se
déclenche, il se peut que l’effet yeux rouges ne soit pas corrigé.
Réglage de l’intensité du flash
Lorsque le flash est activé, réglez son intensité de ±2 niveaux.
Pour définir
l’intensité du flash
En mode Prise de vue, sélectionnez [m] ĺb ĺ Flash ĺ
une option ĺ [D] ĺ tournez la touche de navigation ou
appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’intensité du flash.
Retour Réinitialiser
Flash : Contre jour
• Le réglage de l’intensité du flash risque d’être sans effet si :
- le sujet est trop près de l’appareil photo ;
- vous avez sélectionné une sensibilité ISO élevée ;
- la valeur d’exposition est trop élevée ou trop faible;
- la luminosité est trop forte ou trop faible.
• Dans certains modes de prise de vue, cette fonction n’est pas accessible.
• Si vous fixez sur l’appareil photo un flash externe à intensité variable, les
paramètres d’intensité de ce dernier s’appliquent.
• Si le sujet est trop rapproché lorsque vous utilisez le flash, cela peut refléter
la lumière et assombrir la photo. Vérifiez que le sujet est situé à la distance
recommandée, qui peut varier selon l’objectif utilisé.
• L’utilisation d’un parasoleil peut bloquer la lumière du flash. Retirez le
parasoleil pour utiliser le flash.
Fonctions de prise de vue
90
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Le mode de mesure de l’exposition correspond à la manière dont l’appareil
photo mesure la quantité de lumière.
L’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière, puis utilise cette mesure
dans de nombreux modes afin de régler divers paramètres. Par exemple, si
un sujet semble plus foncé qu’il ne l’est en réalité, l’appareil photo effectue
une prise de vue surexposée de ce sujet. Si un sujet semble plus clair qu’il
ne l’est en réalité, l’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue sous-exposée
de ce sujet.
La luminosité et l’ambiance générale de la photo peuvent également être
affectées par la façon dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière.
Sélectionnez des paramètres appropriés pour chaque type de conditions
de prise de vue.
Pour définir une
option de mesure
de l’exposition
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Mesure de l'exposition ĺ une option.
Multiple
Le mode Multiple calcule la quantité de lumière dans différentes zones.
Lorsque la lumière est suffisante, ou lorsqu’elle ne l’est pas, l’appareil photo
règle l’exposition en équilibrant la luminosité générale de la scène. Ce
mode est adapté aux photos courantes.
Mesure de l’exposition
91
Fonctions de prise de vue > Mesure de l’exposition
Centrée
Le mode Centrée effectue des calculs sur une zone plus large qu’en mode
Sélective. Il détermine la quantité de lumière dans la partie centrale de la
photo (60 – 80%) ainsi que sur le reste de la photo (20 – 40%). Ce mode est
recommandé dans les cas où la différence de luminosité entre un sujet et
un arrière-plan est faible, ou qu’une partie du sujet est grande au regard
de la composition générale de la photo.
Sélective
La mesure Sélective calcule la quantité de lumière au centre. Lorsque vous
réalisez une prise de vue dans des conditions de fort contre-jour derrière
un sujet, l’appareil photo règle l’exposition afin de capturer correctement
ce dernier. Par exemple, lorsque vous sélectionnez le mode Multiple
dans des conditions de fort contre-jour, l’appareil photo considère que la
quantité globale de lumière est élevée, ce qui assombrit la photo. Le mode
Sélective permet d’éviter cette situation, car la quantité de lumière est
calculée dans une zone définie.
Le sujet est clair alors que l’arrière plan est sombre. Le mode Sélective est
recommandé dans un cas comme celui-ci, qui présente une différence
d’exposition importante entre un sujet et un arrière-plan.
92
Fonctions de prise de vue > Mesure de l’exposition
Mesure de la valeur d’exposition de la zone de mise au point
Lorsque cette fonction est activée, l’appareil photo applique
automatiquement une exposition optimale en calculant la luminosité de
la zone de mise au point. Cette option est disponible uniquement si vous
sélectionnez la mesure de l’exposition Sélective ou Multiple, et l’option
Mise au point sélection.
Pour appliquer
cette fonction
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Lien AE à AF ĺ une option.
Fonctions de prise de vue
93
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Cette fonction corrige automatiquement la perte de luminosité due à des
différences de niveaux d’exposition sur la photo.
Pour définir les options
de Plage dynamique
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Plage dynamique ĺ une option.
Sans effet de plage dynamique Avec effet de plage dynamique
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Description
Désactivé* : ne pas utiliser la Plage dynamique.
Plage intelligente+ : corriger la perte de luminosité.
HDR : prendre 3 photos avec différentes expositions, puis les
associer afin de créer automatiquement une image unique.
• Vous ne pouvez pas régler l’option ISO à une valeur supérieure
à ISO 3200.
• Cette option ne peut pas être définie avec des options de prise
de vue autres que Unique ou Retardateur.
Les options Plage dynamique ne peuvent pas être réglées avec la fonction Bulb.
Plage dynamique
Fonctions de prise de vue
94
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Le filtre intelligent vous permet d’appliquer des effets spéciaux à vos
photos ou vidéos. Vous pouvez sélectionner diverses options de filtre pour
créer des effets spéciaux difficiles à obtenir avec des objectifs normaux.
Pour appliquer les
options de filtre
intelligent
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ
Filtre intelligent ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Désactivé* Aucun effet
Vignettage Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un fort contraste et un effet
de dégradé intense, caractéristiques des appareils Lomo.
Miniature Appliquer un effet de plongée pour que le sujet
apparaisse plus petit.
Esquisse Appliquer un effet d’esquisse au crayon.
Œil de
poisson
Déformer les objets en gros plan pour imiter l’effet visuel
d’un objectif ultra grand angle.
Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options du Filtre intelligent et les
options de l’Assistant photo.
Filtre intelligent
Fonctions de prise de vue
95
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
L’appareil photo définit automatiquement l’exposition en mesurant
les niveaux de lumière à partir de la composition d’une photo et de la
position d’un sujet. Si la valeur d’exposition définie par l’appareil photo
est plus élevée ou plus basse que celle que vous attendiez, vous pouvez
alors la régler manuellement. La valeur d’exposition peut être réglée
en faisant varier les valeurs de ±3. L’appareil photo affiche un message
d’avertissement en rouge pour chaque niveau d’exposition au-delà d’une
plage de ±3.
Pour régler la valeur d’exposition, appuyez sur [f], puis sélectionnez EV.
Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [I] pour sélectionner la valeur
d’exposition et tournez la touche de navigation pour effectuer le réglage.
Vous pouvez vérifier la valeur d’exposition par rapport à l’indicateur de
niveau d’exposition.
Indicateur de niveau
d’exposition
Exposition augmentée
(plus clair)
Exposition réduite
(plus sombre)
Mise en garde à propos de l’exposition Indice d’exposition standard
-2
Original
+2
Compensation de l’exposition
Fonctions de prise de vue
96
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Si vous ne parvenez pas à obtenir une exposition adéquate à cause d’un
fort contraste de luminosité, verrouillez l’exposition, puis prenez la photo.
Pour verrouiller l’exposition, définissez les éléments de la photo sur
lesquels vous souhaitez calculer le niveau d’exposition et appuyez sur
la touche de personnalisation. (lorsque la fonction de la touche de
personnalisation est réglée sur AEL) (p. 139)
Une fois l’exposition verrouillée, pointez l’objectif sur le sujet et appuyez
sur le [Déclencheur].
Verrouillage de l’exposition
Fonctions de prise de vue
97
Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue
Les fonctions vidéo disponibles sont présentées ci-dessous.
Format vidéo
Définissez le format vidéo.
Pour définir les
options du format
vidéo
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ
Format vidéo ĺ une option.
Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur NTSC
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Taille Recommandé pour
* 1920X1080 (30 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur Full HD.
1280X720 (30 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD.
640X480 (30 ips) (4:3) Visionner sur un téléviseur.
320X240 (30 ips) (4:3) Publier sur un site Web via un réseau
sans fil (30 secondes maximum).
Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur PAL
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Taille Recommandé pour
* 1920X1080 (25 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur Full HD.
1280X720 (25 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD.
640X480 (25 ips) (4:3) Visionner sur un téléviseur.
320X240 (25 ips) (4:3) Publier sur un site Web via un réseau
sans fil (30 secondes maximum).
Fonctions vidéo
98
Fonctions de prise de vue > Fonctions vidéo
Qualité vidéo
Définissez la qualité vidéo à utiliser.
Pour définir les
options de la
qualité vidéo
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ
Qualité vidéo ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Extension Description
MP4 (H.264) Normale : enregistrer des vidéos en qualité
normale.
MP4 (H.264) HQ* : enregistrer des vidéos en haute qualité.
Multi-mouvements
Régler la vitesse de lecture d’une vidéo.
Pour définir les
options de vitesse
de lecture
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ
Multi-mouvements ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Description
x0.25 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner au 1/4 de la vitesse
normale. (Disponible uniquement à la résolution 640x480 ou
320x240)
x1* : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale.
x5 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale X 5.
x10 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale X 10.
x20 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale X 20.
• Si vous sélectionnez une option différente de x1, la fonction d’enregistrement
audio n’est pas prise en charge.
• Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de
vue.
99
Fonctions de prise de vue > Fonctions vidéo
Voix
Il arrive parfois que certaines vidéos muettes soient plus attractives que
celles filmées avec le son. Désactivez l’enregistrement vocal afin de réaliser
une vidéo muette.
Pour définir les
options de voix
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ Voix ĺ
une option.
Fondu
Vous pouvez appliquer un fondu au début ou à la fin d’une scène en
utilisant la fonction de fondu sur l’appareil photo, sans avoir recours
à un ordinateur. Appliquez l’effet de fondu entrant pour qu’une scène
commence progressivement par cet effet. Appliquez l’effet de fondu
sortant pour qu’une scène se termine progressivement par cet effet.
Utilisez cette fonction de manière appropriée pour vous permettre
d’ajouter des effets spectaculaires à vos vidéos.
Pour définir les
options de fondu
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ Fondu
ĺ une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Icône Description
Désactivé* : fonction de fondu non utilisée.
Entrant : la scène est fondue progressivement en début de
séquence.
Sortant : la scène est fondue progressivement en fin de séquence.
Entrant-Sortant : le fondu est appliqué au début et à la fin de la
scène.
Lorsque la fonction de fondu est utilisée, l’enregistrement d’un fichier peut
prendre plus de temps.
Chapitre 3
Lecture / Retouche
Voici comment lire et retoucher des photos et des vidéos.
Pour retoucher des fichiers sur un ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section 6.
101
Lecture / Retouche
Voici comment afficher les miniatures de vos photos et vidéos, et comment
protéger ou supprimer des fichiers.
Si vous n’effectuez aucune opération pendant un certain temps, les informations
et icônes à l’écran disparaissent. Ces éléments réapparaissent lorsque vous
réutilisez l’appareil photo.
Affichage de photos
1 Appuyez sur [y].
• Le fichier capturé le plus récent s’affiche.
2 Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [C/F] pour
parcourir les fichiers.
Il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas modifier ou reproduire des fichiers capturés
avec d’autres appareils photo en raison de tailles ou de codecs non pris en charge.
Utilisez un ordinateur ou un autre dispositif pour modifier ou reproduire ces fichiers.
Affichage des images sous forme de
miniatures
Pour rechercher des photos et des vidéos de votre choix, convertissez-les
en vues Miniatures en appuyant sur [I] en mode Lecture. L’affichage
sous forme de miniatures permet de visionner plusieurs images à la
fois afin de parcourir et de trouver facilement les éléments que vous
recherchez. Vous pouvez également classer et afficher les fichiers par
catégorie, telles que la date ou le type de fichier.
7X4 Miniature
En vue Miniatures, appuyez sur [f] pour sélectionner le mode vue Miniatures.
Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [m] ĺz ĺ Afficher ĺ un élément,
pour sélectionner le mode vue Miniatures.
Recherche et gestion de fichiers
102
Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers
Affichage de fichiers par catégorie
1 En vue Miniatures, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Filtrer ĺ une
catégorie.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Tout* Afficher les fichiers normalement.
Date Afficher les fichiers en fonction de leur date
d’enregistrement.
Type de fichier Afficher les fichiers par type.
2 Sélectionnez une liste afin de l’ouvrir.
3 Sélectionnez un fichier afin de l’afficher.
Visionnage de fichiers sous forme de
dossiers
Les prises de vues en continue et en rafale apparaissent sous forme de
dossiers. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un dossier, toutes les photos sont
automatiquement lues. La suppression d’un dossier entraîne celle de
toutes les photos qu’il contient.
1 En mode Lecture, tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez
sur [C/F] pour accéder au dossier voulu.
• L’appareil photo lit automatiquement les photos contenues dans le
dossier.
Vue unique
2 Appuyez sur [o] pour ouvrir le dossier.
3 Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [C/F] pour
passer à un autre fichier.
4 Appuyez sur [f] pour revenir au mode Lecture.
103
Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers
Protection de fichiers
Protégez vos fichiers contre toute suppression accidentelle.
1 En mode Lecture, faites défiler l’affichage pour atteindre un
fichier.
2 Appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Protéger ĺ Activé.
• Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer ou faire pivoter un fichier protégé.
• Pour les photos enregistrées sous forme de dossier, protéger un dossier
permet également de protéger les photos qu’il contient.
Suppression de fichiers
En mode Lecture, supprimez des fichiers pour gagner de l’espace sur la
carte mémoire. Les fichiers protégés ne sont pas supprimés.
Suppression d’un seul fichier
Vous pouvez sélectionner un seul fichier et le supprimer.
1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez un fichier et appuyez sur [n].
2 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui.
104
Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers
Suppression de plusieurs fichiers
Vous pouvez effectuer une sélection multiple de fichiers pour les
supprimer.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Supprimer ĺ
Suppression multiple.
• Vous pouvez également, en mode Miniatures, appuyer sur [n], puis
sélectionner les fichiers à supprimer.
2 Sélectionnez les fichiers à supprimer en faisant tourner la
touche de navigation ou en appuyant sur [C/F], puis en
appuyant sur [o].
• Appuyez sur [o] à nouveau pour annuler votre sélection.
3 Appuyez sur [n].
4 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui.
Suppression de tous les fichiers
Vous pouvez supprimer tous les fichiers de la carte mémoire en même
temps.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m].
2 Sélectionnez z ĺ Supprimer ĺ Supprimer tout.
3 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui.
105
Lecture / Retouche
Agrandissement d’une photo
En mode Lecture, vous pouvez agrandir les photos lorsque vous les
visualisez. Appuyez sur [o], puis tournez la touche de navigation pour
agrandir ou réduire une photo. Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour
déplacer la zone d’agrandissement. Vous pouvez également utiliser la
fonction Recadrer afin d’extraire une partie de l’image affichée sur l’écran
et d’enregistrer la photo découpée en tant que nouveau fichier.
Zone agrandie
Agrandissement (L’agrandissement
maximum possible peut varier en
fonction de la résolution.)
Retour Rogner
Pour Procédez comme suit
Déplacer la zone agrandie Appuyer sur [D/I/C/F].
Rogner la photo agrandie Appuyez sur [o]. (enregistrée en tant que
nouveau fichier)
Revenir à l’image originale Appuyez sur [m].
Visionnage d’un diaporama
Vous pouvez visionner les photos sous forme de diaporama et ajouter des
effets de transition entre chaque photo.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m].
2 Sélectionnez z ĺ Options diaporama.
3 Choisissez une option d’effet de diaporama.
• Passez à l’étape 4 pour démarrer le diaporama sans aucun effet.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Mode de
lecture
Activer une option de répétition du diaporama.
(Une lecture*, Répétition)
Intervalle
• Définir l’intervalle entre l’affichage des photos.
(1 s*, 3 s, 5 s, 10 s)
• Les intervalles peuvent uniquement être définis
si l’effet de changement de scène est réglé sur
Désactivé.
Effet • Définir un changement de scène entre les photos.
• Sélectionnez Désactivé pour annuler les effets.
Affichage de photos
106
Lecture / Retouche > Affichage de photos
4 Appuyez sur [m].
5 Sélectionnez Démarrer diaporama.
6 Visionnez le diaporama.
• Appuyez sur [o] pour mettre en pause.
• Appuyez à nouveau sur [o] pour reprendre la lecture.
• Appuyez sur [m] pour interrompre le diaporama et revenir au
mode Lecture.
Rotation automatique
En activant la fonction Rotation auto, l’appareil photo fait pivoter
automatiquement les photos prises verticalement afin qu’elles s’affichent
horizontalement à l’écran.
Pour définir les
options de rotation
automatique
En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Rotation auto
ĺ une option.
107
Lecture / Retouche
En mode Lecture, vous pouvez lire une vidéo, en extraire une image ou
encore la rogner et l’enregistrer en tant que nouveau fichier.
Arrêter Lecture
Pour Description
Revenir en arrière
• Appuyez sur [C]. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur
la touche lors de la lecture d’une vidéo, la vitesse de
lecture change selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.)
• Tournez la touche de navigation dans le sens inverse
des aiguilles d’une montre. (Chaque fois que vous
appuyez sur la touche de navigation lors de la lecture
d’une vidéo, la vitesse de lecture change selon la
séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.)
Pause/Lecture Appuyez sur [o].
Avance rapide
• Appuyez sur [F]. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur
la touche lors de la lecture d’une vidéo, la vitesse de
lecture change selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.)
• Tournez la touche de navigation dans le sens des
aiguilles d’une montre. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez
sur la touche de navigation lors de la lecture d’une
vidéo, la vitesse de lecture change selon la séquence
suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.)
Contrôle du volume Appuyez sur [D/I].
Arrêter Appuyez sur [m].
Recadrage d’une vidéo au cours de la
lecture
1 En mode Lecture, faites défiler l’affichage pour atteindre une
vidéo, puis appuyez sur [m].
2 Sélectionnez Recadrer la vidéo.
3 Appuyez sur [o] pour lancer la lecture de la vidéo.
4 Appuyez sur [o] à l’endroit où vous souhaitez que le
recadrage débute.
5 Appuyez sur [f].
6 Appuyez sur [o] pour arrêter la lecture de la vidéo.
7 Appuyez sur [o] à l’endroit où vous souhaitez que le
recadrage s’arrête.
Lecture de vidéos
108
Lecture / Retouche > Lecture de vidéos
8 Appuyez sur [f].
9 Appuyez sur [f] pour recadrer une vidéo.
10 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui.
• La durée de la vidéo d’origine doit être d’au moins 10 secondes.
• L’appareil photo enregistre la vidéo modifiée en tant que nouveau fichier et
conserve la vidéo d’origine intacte.
• L’endroit où vous souhaitez que le recadrage commence peut être sélectionné
2 secondes après le début de la lecture.
Extraction d’une image pendant la lecture
1 Lors du visionnage d’une vidéo, appuyez sur [o] à l’endroit où
vous souhaitez capturer une image.
2 Appuyez sur [f].
• La résolution de l’image extraite est la même que celle de la vidéo d’origine.
• L’image extraite est enregistrée en tant que nouveau fichier.
109
Lecture / Retouche
Les photos retouchées sont enregistrées en tant que nouveaux fichiers,
sous des noms de fichiers différents. Il est impossible de retoucher les
photos prises dans certains modes par le biais de la fonction Édition photo.
Pour retoucher des
images
En mode Lecture, faites défiler l’affichage pour atteindre une
photo, puis appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Retoucher l'image
ĺ une option.
• Il est possible que certaines images ne puissent pas être modifiées à l’aide
de la fonction Retoucher l’image. Dans ce cas, utilisez un autre logiciel de
retouche.
• Les fichiers RAW ne peuvent pas être retouchés à l’aide la fonction Retoucher
l’image. Dans ce cas, utilisez le logiciel de retouche fourni.
• L’appareil photo enregistre les photos retouchées en tant que nouveau fichier.
• Lorsque vous retouchez des photos, l’appareil photo les enregistre
automatiquement à une résolution inférieure. Les photos pivotées ou
redimensionnées manuellement ne sont pas automatiquement converties à
une résolution inférieure.
• Les photos visionnées en tant que dossier ne peuvent pas être retouchées.
Ouvrez le dossier et sélectionnez une photo pour retoucher chacune des
photos.
Rotation d’une photo
1 Sélectionnez ĺ .
2 Sélectionnez une option.
Rotation : Droite (90°)
Annuler Enregistrer
3 Appuyez sur [o] pour enregistrer.
• Vous pouvez également faire pivoter une photo en mode Lecture en
appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant zĺ Rotation ĺ une option
voulue.
• L’appareil photo écrase le fichier d’origine.
Retouche de photos
110
Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos
Redimensionnement de photos
Modifiez la taille d’une photo pour l’enregistrer sous forme de nouveau
fichier.
1 Sélectionnez → .
2 Sélectionnez une option.
Redimensionner : 3888 x 2592
Annuler Enregistrer
3 Appuyez sur [o] pour enregistrer.
Les options de redimensionnement disponibles dépendent de la taille d’origine
de la photo.
Réglage des photos
Vous pouvez modifier les photos prises en réglant la luminosité, le
contraste ou la couleur.
1 Sélectionnez .
2 Sélectionnez une option de réglage.
• Si vous avez sélectionné (Réglage automatique), la photo ainsi
paramétrée est automatiquement enregistrée.
Icône Description
Original (revenir à l’image originale)
Réglage automatique
Luminosité
Contraste
Saturation
Réglage RVB
Température couleur
Exposition
111
Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos
3 Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [C/F] pour
régler l’option.
4 Appuyez sur [o].
5 Appuyez sur [m].
6 Appuyez sur [f] pour enregistrer.
Retouche de visages
1 Sélectionnez ĺ .
2 Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [C/F] pour
régler l’option.
• Au fur et à mesure que la valeur augmente, la couleur de la peau
devient plus lumineuse et plus douce.
3 Appuyez sur [o] pour enregistrer.
112
Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos
Effets de filtre intelligent
Appliquez des effets spéciaux à vos photos.
1 Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez une option.
Filtre intelligent : Vignettage
Annuler Définir
Option Description
Original Aucun effet
Vignettage
Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un fort contraste
et un effet de dégradé intense, caractéristiques
des appareils Lomo.
Miniature Appliquer un effet de plongée pour que le
sujet apparaisse plus petit.
Onirique Masquer les imperfections du visage ou
appliquer des effets doux.
Esquisse Appliquer un effet d’esquisse au crayon.
Option Description
Effet ultra grand
angle
Déformer les objets en gros plan pour imiter
l’effet visuel d’un objectif ultra grand angle.
Classique Appliquer un effet noir et blanc.
Rétro Appliquer un effet sépia.
Peinture à l'huile Appliquer un effet de peinture à l’huile.
Dessin Appliquer un effet de bande dessinée.
Peinture à l'encre Appliquer un effet d’esquisse à l’encre.
Filtre croisé
Ajouter des lignes qui irradient vers l’extérieur
depuis les objets brillants pour imiter l’effet
visuel d’un filtre croisé.
Prise de vue zoom Brouiller les bords d’une photo pour souligner
les sujets placés au milieu.
2 Appuyez sur [o].
3 Appuyez sur [f] pour enregistrer.
Chapitre 4
Réseau sans fil
Voici comment vous connecter à des réseaux locaux sans fil et à utiliser des fonctions de connectivité.
114
Réseau sans fil
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Cette section décrit comment se connecter via un point d’accès lorsqu’un
réseau local sans fil se trouve dans le champ de détection. Vous pouvez
également configurer les paramètres réseau.
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil
1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sélectionnez , , ou .
3 Suivre les instructions qui s’affichent jusqu’à l’apparition de
l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi.
• L’appareil photo recherche automatiquement les points d’accès
disponibles.
4 Sélectionnez un point d’accès.
Samsung1
Samsung2
Samsung3
Paramètres Wi-Fi
Actualiser
Retour Manuel
• Sélectionnez Actualiser pour actualiser la liste des points d’accès
disponibles.
• Sélectionnez Ajouter mode sans fil pour ajouter un point d’accès
manuellement. Le nom du point d’accès doit être en anglais pour
ajouter le point d’accès manuellement.
Icône Description
Point d’accès Ad hoc
Point d’accès sécurisé
Point d’accès WPS
Force du signal
• Appuyez sur [F] pour définir les options de réglage réseau.
• Lorsque vous choisissez un point d’accès sécurisé, une fenêtre
contextuelle apparaît. Saisissez le mot de passe requis pour vous
connecter au réseau local sans fil. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de
texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte » (p. 117).
• Si vous choisissez un point d’accès non sécurisé, l’appareil photo se
connecte au réseau local sans fil.
• Si vous choisissez un point d’accès pris en charge par un profil WPS,
sélectionnez Connexion PIN WPS, puis saisissez le code PIN sur le
périphérique du point d’accès. Vous avez également la possibilité
de vous connecter à un point d’accès pris en charge par un profil
WPS en sélectionnant Connexion via la touche WPS sur l’appareil
photo et en appuyant sur la touche WPS sur le périphérique du
point d’accès.
• Si un message vous informe de la réglementation en vigueur sur la
collecte de données, lisez son contenu et acceptez ses conditions.
115
Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Configuration des options de réseau
1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis
appuyez sur [F].
2 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises.
Option Description
Mot de passe réseau Saisir le mot de passe réseau.
Configuration IP Définir l’adresse IP automatiquement ou
manuellement.
Configuration manuelle de l’adresse IP
1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis
appuyez sur [F].
2 Sélectionnez Configuration IP ĺ Manuel.
3 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises.
Option Description
IP Saisir l’adresse IP statique.
Masque sous-réseau Indiquer le masque sous-réseau.
Passerelle Indiquer la passerelle.
Serveur DNS Saisir l’adresse DNS.
116
Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau
• Certaines fonctions Wi-Fi ne sont pas disponibles si vous n’insérez pas de
carte mémoire.
• La qualité de la connexion réseau est déterminée par les points d’accès.
• Plus la distance entre l’appareil photo et le point d’accès est grande, plus ce
premier met du temps à se connecter au réseau.
• Si un périphérique à proximité utilise une fréquence radio identique à celle
de l’appareil photo, il se peut que votre connexion s’interrompe.
• Si le nom de votre point d’accès n’est pas en anglais, il se peut que l’appareil
photo ne puisse pas localiser le périphérique ou que son nom apparaisse de
façon incorrecte.
• Pour connaître les paramètres réseau et le mot de passe requis, contactez
votre administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau.
• En fonction du type de chiffrement, la longueur du mot de passe peut varier.
• En fonction des conditions environnantes, il peut s’avérer impossible
d’établir une connexion à un réseau local sans fil.
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo affiche une imprimante compatible avec les
réseaux locaux sans fil figurant dans la liste des points d’accès. Vous ne pouvez
cependant pas vous connecter au réseau par le biais d’une imprimante.
• Il est impossible de connecter l’appareil photo simultanément à un réseau
et à un téléviseur.
• Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à un réseau local sans fil, essayez un
autre point d’accès dans la liste des points d'accès disponibles.
• Les connexions réseau disponibles peuvent varier selon le pays.
• La fonction de réseau local sans fil de l’appareil photo doit être conforme
à la législation en matière de transmission par radiofréquences dans votre
pays ou région. Pour assurer une compatibilité totale, n’utilisez la fonction
de réseau local sans fil que dans le pays dans lequel vous avez acheté
l’appareil photo.
• Les opérations à suivre pour régler les paramètres réseau peuvent différer
en fonction des conditions du réseau.
• Ne tentez pas d’accéder à un réseau dont l’accès ne vous est pas autorisé.
• Avant de vous connecter à des réseaux, assurez-vous que la batterie est
entièrement rechargée.
• Les fichiers transférés vers un autre appareil peuvent ne pas être pris en
charge par cet appareil. Dans ce cas, utilisez un ordinateur pour lire les
fichiers.
• Si un point d’accès requiert la saisie de vos informations de session, vous
ne pourrez pas vous y connecter.
117
Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Saisie de texte
Cette section décrit comment saisir du texte. Tournez la touche de
navigation ou appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour accéder à une touche
et appuyez sur [o] pour saisir le caractère correspondant.
Retour arrière
Effectué
Retour
Icône Description
Supprimer la dernière lettre.
Déplacer le curseur.
En mode ABC, changer la casse.
Passer du mode Symbole au mode ABC.
Ajouter un espace.
Effectué Enregistrer le texte à l’écran.
• Appuyez sur [y] pour aller jusqu’à Effectué directement.
• Le nombre de caractères à saisir varie en fonction de la situation.
• L’affichage peut différer en fonction du mode de saisie.
118
Réseau sans fil
Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact)
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode
Lecture (Partage instantané)
En mode Lecture, l’appareil photo transfère automatiquement le fichier
actif sur le smartphone lorsque vous procédez à la lecture d’une balise
depuis un dispositif compatible NFC.
• Pour transférer plusieurs fichiers, sélectionnez des fichiers depuis l’écran
Miniatures, puis procédez à la lecture d’une balise depuis un dispositif
compatible NFC.
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Wi-Fi
Sélectionnez MobileLink ou Remote Viewfinder depuis la fenêtre qui
s’affiche en procédant à la lecture d’une balise depuis un dispositif
compatible NFC (p. 121, 125).
Placez l’antenne NFC du smartphone à proximité du symbole NFC de
l’appareil photo pour lancer la fonctionnalité d’enregistrement
automatique des photos sur le smartphone ou pour utiliser le smartphone
comme déclencheur à distance. Vous pouvez également transférer des
fichiers vers un dispositif compatible NFC en mode Lecture.
• Cette fonctionnalité est prise en charge par les smartphones compatibles
NFC fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android. Il est recommandé
d’utiliser la dernière version. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible pour les
appareils iOS.
• Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone
ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger
l’application depuis Samsung Apps ou Google Play Store. Samsung SMART
CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung
fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement.
• Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez
Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou
www.samsung.ca.
• Pour se connecter à une balise NFC, placez le dispositif compatible NFC à
proximité de la balise NFC de l’appareil photo pendant plus de 2 secondes.
• Vous pouvez définir la taille des photos transférées en appuyant sur [m],
puis en sélectionnant d ĺ MobileLink / Taille de l'image NFC ĺ une
option.
• Il ne faut en aucun cas modifier l’étiquette NFC.
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Prise
de vue
Lancez AutoShare ou Remote Viewfinder en procédant à la lecture d’une
balise depuis un dispositif compatible NFC (p. 119, 125). Configurez
la fonction Wi-Fi pour qu’elle se lance à la lecture d’une balise sur un
dispositif compatible NFC (p. 139).
119
Réseau sans fil
Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone
L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la
fonction AutoShare via un réseau local sans fil. Lorsque vous prenez une
photo à l’aide de l’appareil photo, la photo s’enregistre automatiquement
sur le smartphone.
• La fonctionnalité AutoShare est prise en charge par les smartphones ou
les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS.
(Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.)
Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus
récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que
cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement.
• Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone
ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger
l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store.
Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils
photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement.
• Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez
Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou
www.samsung.ca.
• Si vous activez cette fonction, les paramètres sont conservés même si vous
changez de mode Prise de vue.
• Il est possible que certains modes ne prennent pas en charge cette fonction
ou que cette dernière ne soit pas disponible avec certaines options de prise
de vue.
1 En mode Prise de vue, sélectionnez [m] ĺb ĺ
AutoShare ĺ Activé.
• Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît,
sélectionnez Suivant.
• Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque
vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez
Paramètres sécurité. (p. 144)
2 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer
l’application.
• Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone
compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à
proximité de la balise NFC (p. 29) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le
smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 5.
3 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et établissez la
connexion entre le smartphone et l’appareil photo.
• Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à
la fois.
• Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur
l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone.
120
Réseau sans fil > Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone
4 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez la connexion du smartphone.
• Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la
connexion est automatique.
• Une icône indiquant l’état de la connexion ( ) apparaît sur l’écran
de l’appareil photo.
5 Prenez une photo.
• La photo est enregistrée sur l’appareil photo, puis transférée
au smartphone. Si aucune carte mémoire n’est insérée ou si la
mémoire est insuffisante, la photo prise est alors transférée sur le
smartphone sans qu’elle soit enregistrée sur l’appareil photo.
• Tout enregistrement vidéo n’est conservé que sur l’appareil photo.
• Le fichier image généré au cours de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo
n’est pas sauvegardé sur le smartphone.
• Si la fonction GPS est activée sur le smartphone, les informations
GPS sont alors enregistrées avec la photo prise.
121
Réseau sans fil
L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la
fonction MobileLink via un réseau local sans fil. Vous pouvez facilement
envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à votre smartphone.
• La fonctionnalité MobileLink est prise en charge par les smartphones ou les
tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains
modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser
cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Si la version
du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette fonction ne
s’exécute pas correctement.
• Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone
ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger
l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store.
Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils
photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement.
• Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez
Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou
www.samsung.ca.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne
pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Vous pouvez visualiser jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents et envoyer jusqu’à
1 000 fichiers à la fois.
• Lorsque vous envoyez des vidéos Full HD à l’aide de la fonction MobileLink, il se
peut que vous ne puissiez pas lire ces fichiers sur certains appareils.
• Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction sur un appareil iOS, la connexion Wi-Fi
risque d’être désactivée.
• Il est impossible d’envoyer des fichiers RAW.
• Vous pouvez définir la taille des photos transférées en appuyant sur [m],
puis en sélectionnant d ĺ MobileLink / Taille de l'image NFC ĺ une
option.
• Vous pouvez également envoyer des fichiers en mode Lecture en appuyant
sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ MobileLink.
• L’écran s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur l’appareil photo dans
les 30 secondes.
1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez .
• Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît,
sélectionnez Suivant.
• Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque
vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez
Paramètres sécurité. (p. 144)
3 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez une option d’envoi.
• Si l’option Sélectionner des fichiers du smartphone est
activée, vous pouvez utiliser votre smartphone pour afficher et
partager les fichiers stockés sur l’appareil photo. L’écran s’éteint
si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur le smartphone dans les
30 secondes.
• Si l’option Sélectionner des fichiers de l’appareil photo est
activée, vous pouvez sélectionner les fichiers à envoyer depuis
l’appareil photo.
4 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer
l’application.
• Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone
compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à
proximité de la balise NFC (p. 29) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le
smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 7.
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone
122
Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone
5 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et établissez la
connexion entre le smartphone et l’appareil photo.
• Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à
la fois.
• Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur
l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone.
6 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez la connexion du smartphone.
• Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la
connexion est automatique.
7 Sur le smartphone ou l’appareil photo, sélectionnez les fichiers
à transférer depuis l’appareil photo.
8 Sur le smartphone, appuyez sur la touche de copie ou, sur
l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Envoyer.
• L’appareil photo envoie les fichiers au smartphone.
123
Réseau sans fil
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à plusieurs smartphones
L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la
fonction Group Share via un réseau local sans fil. Vous pouvez facilement
envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à plusieurs smartphones.
• La fonctionnalité Group Share est prise en charge par les smartphones ou
les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS.
(Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.)
Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus
récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que
cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement.
• Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone
ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger
l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store.
Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils
photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement.
• Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez
Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou
www.samsung.ca.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne
pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Le transfert de fichiers vers plusieurs smartphones peut prendre plus de
temps que le transfert vers un seul appareil.
• Lorsque vous envoyez des vidéos Full HD à l’aide de la fonction Group Share,
il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas lire ces fichiers sur certains appareils.
• Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction sur un appareil iOS, la connexion Wi-Fi
risque d’être désactivée.
• Il est impossible d’envoyer des fichiers RAW.
• Vous pouvez définir la taille des photos transférées en appuyant sur [m],
puis en sélectionnant d ĺ MobileLink / Taille de l'image NFC ĺ une
option.
• Vous pouvez également envoyer des fichiers en mode Lecture en appuyant
sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ Group Share.
1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez .
• Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît,
sélectionnez Suivant.
• Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque
vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez
Paramètres sécurité. (p. 144)
3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer
l’application.
124
Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à plusieurs smartphones
4 Sélectionnez le smartphone dans la liste.
• Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la
connexion est automatique.
• Vous pouvez connecter jusqu’à 4 smartphones.
• Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur
l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone.
5 Sélectionnez Suivant.
6 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez les fichiers à transférer
depuis l’appareil photo.
7 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Envoyer.
• L’appareil photo envoie les fichiers au smartphone.
• Lorsque vous établissez la connexion avec plusieurs smartphones,
l’appareil photo envoie les fichiers à tous les dispositifs en même
temps.
125
Réseau sans fil
L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge
la fonction Remote Viewfinder via un réseau local sans fil. Utilisez le
smartphone pour déclencher à distance l’obturateur à l’aide de la fonction
Remote Viewfinder. La photo ainsi prise s’affiche directement sur le
smartphone.
• La fonctionnalité Remote Viewfinder est prise en charge par les smartphones
ou les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS.
(Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.)
Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus
récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que
cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement.
• Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone
ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger
l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store.
Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils
photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement.
• Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez
Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou
www.samsung.ca.
• Les photos ou les vidéos prises en continu ne s’affichent pas sur le
smartphone.
1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez .
• Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît,
sélectionnez Suivant.
• Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque
vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez
Paramètres sécurité. (p. 144)
3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer
l’application.
• Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone
compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à
proximité de la balise NFC (p. 29) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le
smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 6.
4 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et établissez la
connexion entre le smartphone et l’appareil photo.
• Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à
la fois.
• Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur
l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone.
Utilisation d’un smartphone pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur à distance
126
Réseau sans fil > Utilisation d’un smartphone pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur à distance
5 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez la connexion du smartphone.
• Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la
connexion est automatique.
6 Sur le smartphone, sélectionnez q pour ouvrir le panneau
intelligent.
7 Sur le smartphone, définissez les options de prise de vue.
• Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction, certaines touches ne sont plus
disponibles sur l’appareil photo.
• Avec le smartphone, vous pouvez faire fonctionner l’appareil photo
uniquement en appuyant sur l’écran.
• Certaines options de prise de vue ne sont pas prises en charge.
• Les options de prise de vue réglées sont conservées sur l’appareil
photo même après la déconnexion avec le smartphone.
8 Appuyez sur pour revenir à l’écran de prise de vue.
9 Sur le smartphone, maintenez enfoncé pour effectuer la
mise au point, puis relâchez pour prendre la photo.
• Appuyer sur pour enregistrer une vidéo et sur pour arrêter
une vidéo.
• Si la fonction GPS est activée sur le smartphone, les informations
GPS sont alors enregistrées avec la photo prise.
• Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonctionnalité, la distance idéale entre l’appareil
photo et le smartphone peut varier, selon les conditions environnantes.
• Pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction, le smartphone doit se trouver dans un
périmètre de 7 m par rapport à l’appareil photo.
• Une fois relâché sur le smartphone, le déclenchement de la prise de vue
peut ne pas se faire immédiatement.
• Si l’option d’enregistrement du fichier est définie sur Smartphone + Appareil
photo, seules les photos seront transférées vers le Smartphone. (Les vidéos et
les fichiers RAW ne seront pas transférés.)
• Si vous prenez des photos en continu lorsque l’option d’enregistrement du
fichier est définie sur Smartphone + Appareil photo, les photos ne seront
pas transférées vers le Smartphone.
• Lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo, l’écran du smartphone ne reflète pas
l’écran de l’appareil photo.
• La fonction Remote Viewfinder se désactive si :
- le smartphone reçoit un appel ;
- l’appareil photo ou le smartphone est éteint ;
- l’appareil perd sa connexion au réseau local sans fil ;
- le signal de la connexion Wi-Fi est mauvais ou instable ;
- vous ne réalisez aucune opération dans les 3 minutes une fois la connexion
établie ;
- le nombre de dossiers et de fichiers a atteint le maximum.
• L’écran s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur l’appareil photo dans
les 30 secondes.
127
Réseau sans fil
Utilisation de la fonction Home Monitor+
3 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez un point d’accès dans la
liste, puis positionnez l’appareil photo.
• Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo à la portée d’enfants en bas âge ou
d’animaux domestiques.
• Pointez l’objectif de l’appareil photo sur le sujet.
• Il est recommandé d’utiliser une batterie entièrement rechargée ou
de brancher l’appareil photo sur une prise de courant par le biais
d’un adaptateur secteur.
4 Saisissez l’identifiant et le mot de passe de votre compte
Samsung pour vous connecter.
• Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section
« Saisie de texte » (p. 117).
• Si vous avez déjà ouvert une session sur le service, il se peut que la
connexion s’établisse automatiquement.
5 Sur le smartphone, démarrez l’application Samsung Home
Monitor+.
Utilisez la fonction Home Monitor+ pour établir la connexion entre
l’appareil photo et un smartphone où Samsung Home Monitor+ est
installé pour surveiller un lieu.
• La fonction Home Monitor+ est prise en charge par les smartphones
fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains
modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant
d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente.
Vous devez disposer de la version 4.1 ou ultérieure du système d’exploitation
Android.
• Vous devez installer l’application Samsung Home Monitor+ sur votre
smartphone avant d’utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger
l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store.
1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez .
• Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît,
sélectionnez Suivant.
128
Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de la fonction Home Monitor+
6 Procédez à la surveillance sur votre smartphone.
• Au cours de la vidéo surveillance par le biais du smartphone, la vidéo
n’est pas enregistrée sur l’appareil photo.
• Si le lieu surveillé est sombre, appuyez sur pour activer le voyant AF.
• Si l’appareil photo est connecté au même réseau sans fil que les autres
appareils, des problèmes de lecture des vidéos peuvent survenir.
• Selon les conditions du réseau, les vidéos peuvent être ralenties ou
s’arrêter.
7 Appuyez sur pour fermer l’application Samsung Home
Monitor+.
• Selon les conditions du réseau, le smartphone peut ne pas activer l’alarme
lors de la détection d’un son.
• La fonction Home Monitor+ ne peut remplacer un dispositif de sécurité
professionnel. Pour garantir la sécurité de votre domicile, nous vous
recommandons de recourir à des services professionnels.
• Ne connectez pas plus de deux appareils photo utilisant la fonction Home
Monitor+ au même réseau. Le réseau peut être ralenti.
• L’utilisation de l’application Samsung Home Monitor+ sur un réseau 3G ou LTE
peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires.
• Le fabricant ne peut être tenu responsable de tout dommage en relation avec
la divulgation ou la distribution d’informations personnelles, telles que des
vidéos en streaming, à d’autres parties.
• L’utilisateur est responsable de la gestion des identifiants et mots de passe de
la fonction Home Monitor+.
• N’utilisez cette fonction qu’en intérieur. L’utilisation de cette fonction dans les
espaces publics peut ralentir la vitesse du réseau. Le fabricant ne peut être
tenu responsable de tout dommage en relation avec l’utilisation de cette
fonction dans les espaces publics.
• N’utilisez pas cette fonction pendant une période prolongée, c’est-à-dire
pendant plus d’une semaine.
• N’utilisez pas cette fonction à des fins illégales.
• Selon les conditions du réseau, un ralentissement ou une interruption de la
connexion peut se produire.
• L’écran s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur l’appareil photo dans
les 30 secondes.
129
Réseau sans fil
Utilisation de Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos
A l’aide de la fonction sans fil, vous pouvez envoyer sur un ordinateur les
photos ou vidéos enregistrées avec l’appareil photo.
Installation du programme Sauvegarde
automatique sur votre ordinateur
1 Installez i-Launcher sur l’ordinateur (p. 150).
2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble
USB.
3 Lorsque l’icône du programme Sauvegarde automatique
apparaît, cliquez dessus.
• Le programme Sauvegarde automatique est alors installé sur
l’ordinateur. Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour terminer
l’installation.
4 Débranchez le câble USB.
Avant d’installer le programme, assurez-vous que l’ordinateur est connecté à un
réseau.
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un
ordinateur
1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sélectionnez .
• Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît,
sélectionnez Suivant.
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un
réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est
connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il
recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 114).
3 Sélectionnez un ordinateur de sauvegarde.
130
Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos
4 Sélectionnez OK.
• Pour annuler l’envoi, sélectionnez Annuler.
• Il est impossible de sélectionner des fichiers précis à sauvegarder.
Cette fonction ne sauvegarde que les nouveaux fichiers de
l’appareil photo.
• La progression de la sauvegarde s’affiche sur l’écran de l’ordinateur.
• Lorsque le transfert est terminé, l’appareil photo s’éteint
automatiquement au bout d’environ 30 secondes. Sélectionnez
Annuler pour revenir à l’écran précédent et empêcher l’appareil
photo de s’éteindre automatiquement.
• Pour éteindre automatiquement votre ordinateur une fois le
transfert terminé, sélectionnez Eteindre PC après sauvegarde.
• Pour changer d’ordinateur de sauvegarde, sélectionnez Changer
de PC.
• Si vous connectez l’appareil photo au réseau local sans fil, sélectionnez le
point d’accès connecté à l’ordinateur.
• L’appareil photo recherche les points d’accès disponibles même si vous vous
reconnectez au même point d’accès.
• Si vous éteignez l’appareil photo ou retirez sa batterie lors de l’envoi de
fichiers, le transfert de fichiers est alors interrompu.
• Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction, la commande de l’obturateur se
désactive sur l’appareil photo.
• Vous ne pouvez connecter qu’un seul appareil photo à l’ordinateur à la fois
pour envoyer des fichiers.
• La sauvegarde peut être annulée en raison de l’état du réseau.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne
pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Avant d’utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez désactiver le pare-feu
Windows ou tout autre pare-feu.
• Vous pouvez envoyer jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents.
• Sur le logiciel PC, le nom du serveur doit être saisi en alphabet latin et ne peut
pas comporter plus de 48 caractères.
131
Réseau sans fil
Utilisation de Samsung Link pour visionner des fichiers
Vous pouvez visionner des fichiers sur un appareil Samsung Link connecté
au même point d’accès.
1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection.
2 Sélectionnez .
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un
réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est
connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il
recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 114).
• Vous pouvez autoriser à se connecter uniquement les dispositifs
sélectionnés ou tous les dispositifs en appuyant sur [f], puis en
sélectionnant Contrôle d'accès DLNA à l’écran.
• Une liste de partage de fichiers est alors créée. Attendez que les
autres dispositifs aient détecté l’appareil photo.
3 Connectez le dispositif Samsung Link à un réseau, puis activez
la fonction Samsung Link.
• Reportez-vous au mode d’emploi de votre dispositif pour
davantage d’informations.
4 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez le dispositif Samsung Link à se
connecter à l’appareil photo.
5 Sur le dispositif Samsung Link, sélectionnez l’appareil photo
auquel se connecter.
6 Sur le dispositif Samsung Link, parcourez la liste des photos ou
vidéos partagées.
• Pour en savoir plus sur la manière de rechercher l’appareil photo et
de parcourir les photos ou les vidéos sur le dispositif Samsung Link,
consultez le mode d’emploi de l’appareil.
• Selon le type de dispositif Samsung Link ou l’état du réseau, il est
possible que les vidéos ne soient pas lues correctement.
Point d’accès
▲ L’appareil photo est raccordé à un téléviseur compatible Samsung Link via un
réseau local sans fil.
132
Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de Samsung Link pour visionner des fichiers
• Vous pouvez partager jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents.
• Vous ne pouvez afficher sur un dispositif Samsung Link que des photos ou des
vidéos prises avec l’appareil photo.
• La portée de la connexion sans fil entre l’appareil photo et un dispositif
Samsung Link peut varier en fonction des spécifications du point d’accès.
• Si l’appareil photo est connecté à 2 dispositifs Samsung Link, la lecture risque
d’être ralentie.
• Les photos ou les vidéos sont partagées dans leurs dimensions d’origine.
• Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonctionnalité avec des dispositifs prenant en charge
Samsung Link.
• Les photos ou vidéos partagées ne sont pas enregistrées sur le dispositif
Samsung Link, mais peuvent être stockées dans l’appareil photo afin de
respecter les caractéristiques de l’appareil photo.
• Le transfert de photos ou de vidéos sur le dispositif Samsung Link peut prendre
un certain temps selon la connexion réseau, le nombre de fichiers à partager ou
la taille des fichiers.
• Si vous éteignez l’appareil photo de façon inhabituelle pendant le visionnage
de photos ou de vidéos sur un dispositif Samsung Link (par exemple, en retirant
la batterie), le dispositif considère que l’appareil photo est toujours connecté.
• Il se peut que l’ordre des photos ou des vidéos sur l’appareil photo diffère de
celui du dispositif Samsung Link.
• En fonction du nombre de photos ou de vidéos à partager, le chargement de
celles-ci et l’exécution du processus de configuration initial peuvent prendre un
certain temps.
• Lorsque vous visionnez des photos ou des vidéos sur le dispositif Samsung Link,
l’utilisation continue de la télécommande ou l’exécution d’opérations
supplémentaires sur le dispositif peut empêcher le bon fonctionnement de
cette fonction.
• Si vous réorganisez ou triez des fichiers sur l’appareil photo tout en les
visionnant sur un dispositif Samsung Link, vous devez procéder à nouveau
au processus initial de configuration pour actualiser la liste des fichiers sur le
dispositif.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne
pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Il est recommandé d’utiliser un câble réseau pour raccorder le dispositif
Samsung Link au point d’accès. Cela permet de réduire les interruptions du
son et de l’image lors de la diffusion de vidéo.
• Pour visionner des fichiers sur un appareil Samsung Link, vous devez activer
le mode Multidiffusion sur votre point d’accès.
Chapitre 5
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo
Cette section présente les paramètres utilisateur et le menu général des réglages de l’appareil photo.
Vous pouvez régler les paramètres en fonction de vos besoins et de vos préférences.
134
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo
Vous pouvez définir la manière d’utiliser l’appareil grâce à ces paramètres.
Afin de paramétrer
les options
utilisateur
En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ une option.
Les options disponibles et leur ordre d’affichage peuvent différer selon les
conditions de prise de vue.
Personnalisation ISO
Palier ISO
Vous pouvez régler la sensibilité ISO par paliers de 1/3 ou 1.
Plage ISO auto
Si vous réglez la plage ISO sur Automatique, vous pouvez définir la valeur
ISO maximale pour chaque palier EV sélectionné.
Réducteur de bruit
Afin de réduire les parasites sur les photos, utilisez l’option Réducteur de
bruit.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Réduct. bruit ISO
élevé
Cette fonction réduit les parasites qui peuvent
apparaître lorsque vous utilisez une sensibilité ISO
élevée. (Désactivé, Elevé, Normale*, Bas)
Réduction bruit
long terme
Cette fonction réduit le bruit lorsque vous réglez
l’appareil photo sur une exposition prolongée.
(Désactivé, Activé*)
Paramètres utilisateur
135
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
Réglage Bracketing
Vous pouvez configurer les options de chaque bracketing.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Réglage AE
Bracketing
Régler l’intervalle d’exposition. (-/+0.3 EV*, -/+0.7 EV,
-/+1.0 EV, -/+1.3 EV, -/+1.7 EV, -/+2.0 EV, -/+2.3 EV,
-/+2.7 EV, -/+3.0 EV)
Régler balance des
blancs Brack
Régler la gamme de balance des blancs des 3 photos
bracketing. (AB-/+3*, AB-/+2, AB-/+1, MG-/+3,
MG-/+2, MG-/+1)
Par exemple, AB-/+3 règle la valeur Orange sur
plus ou moins trois paliers. MG-/+3 règle la valeur
Magenta aux mêmes niveaux.
Réglage balance
des blancs mode
Braketing
Sélectionner 3 paramètres de l’assistant photo
que l’appareil photo utilise pour prendre 3 photos
bracketing.
Réglage de la
profondeur de
champ mode
Bracketing
Régler l’intervalle de profondeur. (-/+0.3, -/+0.7,
-/+1.0*, -/+1.3, -/+1.7, -/+2.0, -/+2.3, -/+2.7, -/+3.0)
DMF (Mise au point manuelle directe)
Vous pouvez régler la mise au point manuellement en faisant tourner la
bague, une fois la mise au point effectuée en enfonçant le [Déclencheur]
à mi-course. Il se peut que la fonction ne soit pas disponible avec certains
objectifs.
136
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
Espace colorimétrique
L’espace colorimétrique vous permet de sélectionner les méthodes
de représentation des couleurs. Les appareils numériques d’imagerie,
comme les appareils photos numériques, les moniteurs et les imprimantes
disposent de leurs propres spécificités techniques pour représenter les
couleurs, que l’on nomme espaces colorimétriques.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
sRGB*
La norme sRGB (standard RGB) est une norme
internationale qui permet de définir l’espace
colorimétrique créé par l’IEC (commission
électrotechnique internationale). Cette norme est
couramment utilisée afin de recréer les couleurs sur
des moniteurs d’ordinateurs et constitue également
l’espace colorimétrique standard pour les données Exif.
sRGB est recommandé pour les images habituelles et
celles que vous souhaitez publier sur Internet.
Adobe RGB
Adobe RGB est utilisé pour des impressions
professionnelles et dispose d’une gamme de
couleurs plus importante que la norme sRGB. Il vous
permet ainsi de retoucher facilement des photos
sur un ordinateur. Notez que les divers programmes
disponibles sur le marché ne sont généralement
compatibles qu’avec un nombre limité d’espaces
colorimétriques.
Adobe RGB
sRGB
Lorsque l’espace colorimétrique est réglé sur Adobe RGB, les photos sont
enregistrées sous le nom « _SAMXXXX.JPG ».
137
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
Corriger distort.
Vous pouvez corriger la déformation qui peut se produire avec les
objectifs. Cette fonction est disponible avec les objectifs qui la prennent en
charge.
Personnalisation iFn
Vous pouvez sélectionner les options réglables prévues lorsque vous
appuyez sur [i-Function] sur un objectif compatible i-Function.
Option Description
Ouverture Permet de régler la valeur d’ouverture.
Vitesse d'obturation Permet de régler la vitesse d’obturation.
EV Permet d’ajuster la valeur d’exposition.
ISO Définissez la sensibilité ISO.
Balance des blancs Régler la balance des blancs.
138
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
Affichage utilisateur
Vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des informations de prise de vue sur
l’écran.
1
2
3
N° Description
1
Icônes
Activer l’affichage des icônes sur la partie de droite en mode Prise de
vue.
2 Date et heure
Activer l’affichage de la date et l’heure.
3
Histogramme
Activer ou désactiver l’histogramme sur l’écran.
Description des histogrammes
Un histogramme est la représentation graphique de la répartition de
la luminosité sur une photo. Un histogramme incliné vers la gauche
signifie que la photo est sombre. Un histogramme incliné vers la
droite signifie que la photo est claire. La hauteur des crêtes est liée
aux informations colorimétriques. Les crêtes du graphique sont plus
élevées si une couleur spécifique est prédominante.
Exposition insuffisante Exposition équilibrée Exposition excessive
139
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
Attribution touches
Vous pouvez modifier la fonction affectée à la touche de personnalisation.
* Paramètre par défaut
Bouton Fonction
Personnalisé
Définir la fonction de la touche Personnalisé.
• Aperçu optique* : exécuter la fonction de
prévisualisation de la profondeur de champ pour la
valeur d’ouverture (p. 23).
• Balance des blancs 1 touche (Balance des
blancs) : exécuter la fonction de balance des blancs
personnalisée.
• 1 touche RAW + : enregistrer un fichier au format
RAW+JPEG. Pour enregistrer un fichier au format
JPEG, appuyer à nouveau sur cette touche.
• Réinitialiser : réinitialiser certains paramètres.
• AEL : exécuter la fonction de verrouillage
automatique de l’exposition. (Appuyer sur le
[Déclencheur] à mi-course exécute la fonction de
verrouillage automatique de l’exposition.)
• Maintien AEL : continuer d’exécuter la fonction
de verrouillage automatique de l’exposition.
(L’exposition reste verrouillée même après la prise
de vue.)
Vue Live NFC
En mode Prise de vue, activez la fonction NFC sur un smartphone
compatible, puis placez l’antenne NFC de ce dernier près de la balise
NFC de l’appareil photo pour lancer la fonction AutoShare ou Remote
Viewfinder. Cette fonctionnalité est prise en charge par les smartphones
compatibles NFC fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android. Il
est recommandé d’utiliser la dernière version. Cette fonctionnalité n’est
pas disponible pour les appareils iOS.
Taille de l’image MobileLink/NFC
Définir la taille des photos à transférer à un smartphone à l’aide des
fonctions MobileLink ou NFC.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Redimensionnez à 2M
ou moins.
Si la taille de la photo est supérieure à 3M, elle
sera transférée après avoir été redimensionnée à
une taille inférieure ou égale à 2M.
Original* La photo sera transférée dans sa taille originale.
140
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur
Autoportrait automatique
Réglez l’appareil pour qu’il s’allume et passe automatiquement en
mode Autoportrait lorsque vous inclinez l’écran vers le haut. En mode
Autoportrait, les fonctions de retardateur (3 secondes), détection des
visages et beauté sont automatiquement activées.
Réglagle de la touche Vitesse sur l’objectif
Réglez la vitesse du zoom des touches de l’objectif Power Zoom sur
la valeur rapide, moyenne ou lente. A vitesse rapide, le son du zoom
augmente et risque d’être capturé dans les enregistrements vidéo. Cette
fonction n’est disponible que lorsque l’objectif Power Zoom est fixé.
Grille
Sélectionnez un guide pour vous aider à composer une scène.
(Désactivé*, 4 X 4, 3 X 3, Croix, Diagonale)
Voyant de mise au point
Afin d’optimiser la mise au point automatique dans les endroits sombres,
activez le voyant de mise au point. Cette fonction donne de meilleurs
résultats lorsque le voyant de mise au point est activé pour la prise de
photo dans les endroits sombres.
141
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Réglage
affichage
Régler la luminosité de l’écran, la luminosité automatique,
la couleur ou l’indicateur de niveau.
• Luminosité écran : régler la luminosité de l’écran
manuellement.
• Luminosité auto : activer ou désactiver la luminosité
automatique. (Désactivé, Activé*)
• Colorimétrie écran : régler manuellement la
colorimétrie de l’écran.
• Calibrage horizontal : étalonner l’indicateur de niveau.
Si l’indicateur de niveau n’est pas droit, positionnez
l’appareil photo sur une surface plane, puis suivez les
instructions à l’écran.
• Il est impossible d’accéder à l’option Calibrage
horizontal en mode Lecture.
• Il est impossible d’utiliser l’indicateur de niveau lors
d’une prise de vue en orientation portrait.
Désactivation
écran auto
Définir le délai de désactivation de l’écran. Après une durée
prédéfinie sans utiliser l’appareil photo, l’écran s’éteint.
(Désactivé, 30 s*, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min)
Voici comment configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo.
Pour définir les
paramètres
En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺ q ĺ
une option.
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Son
• Volume système : définir le volume sonore ou désactiver
complètement le son. (Désactivé, Bas, Moyen*, Elevé)
Même si le volume système est désactivé, l’appareil photo
émet un son lors de la lecture vidéo ou d’un diaporama.
• Son de la mise au point : définir le son que l’appareil
photo émet en enfonçant le déclencheur à mi-course.
(Désactivé, Activé*)
• Son des touches : définissez le son que l’appareil photo
doit émettre lorsque vous appuyez sur des touches.
(Désactivé, Activé*)
Vue rapide
Définir la durée de la vue rapide – délai au cours duquel
l’appareil photo affiche la photo immédiatement après la
prise de vue. (Désactivé, 1 s*, 3 s, 5 s, Maintenir)
Paramètres
142
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Date et heure
Définir la date, l’heure, le format de date, le fuseau horaire
et indiquer si la date doit être mentionnée sur les photos.
(Fuseau horaire, Configuration date/heure, Type date,
Type d'heure, Impression)
• La date apparaît en bas à droite de la photo.
• Lorsque vous imprimez une photo, il est possible
que certaines imprimantes n’impriment pas la date
correctement.
Vidéo
Sélectionner la sortie des signaux vidéo appropriée à votre
pays lorsque l’appareil photo est raccordé à un appareil
vidéo externe, comme un moniteur ou un téléviseur HD.
• NTSC : États-Unis, Canada, Japon, Corée, Taïwan,
Mexique, etc.
• PAL (compatible uniquement avec PAL B, D, G, H ou I) :
Allemagne, Australie, Autriche, Belgique, Chine,
Danemark, Espagne, Finlande, France, Italie, Koweït,
Malaisie, Norvège, Nouvelle-Zélande, Royaume-Uni,
Singapour, Suède, Suisse, Thaïlande, etc.
Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC)
Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un téléviseur
HD compatible avec la fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), vous
pouvez contrôler la fonction de lecture de l’appareil photo
à l’aide d’une télécommande.
• Désactivé : il est impossible de contrôler la fonction de
lecture de l’appareil photo à l’aide de la télécommande
du téléviseur.
• Activé* : il est possible de contrôler la fonction de
lecture de l’appareil photo à l’aide de la télécommande
du téléviseur.
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Mise hors
tension auto
Définir le délai de mise hors tension. L’appareil photo
s’éteint lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant une période
prédéfinie. (Désactivé, 1 min*, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min,
30 min)
• L’appareil photo mémorise le délai d’extinction même
si vous remplacez la batterie.
• Si l’appareil photo est connecté à un ordinateur ou à
un téléviseur et qu’une vidéo ou un diaporama est en
cours de lecture, il est possible que la fonction Mise
hors tension auto ne fonctionne pas.
Affichage de
l'aide
• Aide à la sélection de mode : activer l’affichage de texte
d’aide relatif au mode sélectionné lors du changement
de mode de prise de vue. (Désactivé, Activé*)
• Aide à la sélection de fonction : activer l’affichage de
texte d’aide sur les menus et les fonctions. (Désactivé,
Activé*)
Appuyez sur [n] pour masquer le texte d’aide.
Language Sélectionnez une langue d’affichage sur l’écran de
l’appareil photo.
143
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Sortie HDMI
Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un téléviseur
HD par le biais d’un câble HDMI, vous pouvez changer la
résolution de l’image.
• NTSC : Automatique*, 1080i, 720p, 480p,
576p (actif uniquement lorsque le réglage PAL est
sélectionné)
Si le téléviseur HD n’est pas compatible avec la résolution
sélectionnée, l’appareil photo définit la résolution au
niveau inférieur.
Nom de fichier
Définir le type de création des noms de fichier.
• Standard* : SAM_XXXX.JPG (sRGB)/ _SAMXXXX.JPG
(Adobe RGB)
• Date :
- Fichiers sRGB - MMJJXXXX.JPG. Par exemple, pour une
photo prise le 1er janvier, le nom du fichier est
0101XXXX.jpg.
- Fichiers Adobe RGB - _MJJXXXX.JPG pour les mois de
janvier à septembre. Pour les mois d’octobre à décembre,
le numéro du mois est remplacé par les lettres A (oct.),
B (nov.) et C (déc.). Par exemple, pour une photo prise le
3 février, le nom du fichier est _203XXXX.jpg. Pour une
photo prise le oct. 05, le fichier s’intitule _A05XXXX.jpg.
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Numéro
fichier
Définissez la méthode de création des noms de fichier et
de dossier.
• Réinitialiser : après utilisation de la fonction de
réinitialisation, la dénomination des nouveaux fichiers
débute à 0001.
• Série* : les nouveaux numéros de fichiers s’ajoutent à la
suite de ceux déjà existants, même si vous avez inséré ou
formaté une nouvelle carte mémoire ou que vous avez
supprimé toutes les photos existantes.
• Le nom du premier dossier est 100PHOTO. Si vous avez
sélectionné l’espace colorimétrique sRGB et la dénomination
standard des fichiers, le nom du premier fichier correspond à
SAM_0001.
• Les noms des fichiers vont progressivement de SAM_0001 à
SAM_9999 d’un incrément de 1.
• Les noms des dossiers vont progressivement de 100PHOTO à
999PHOTO d’un incrément de 1.
• Un même dossier peut contenir 9 999 fichiers maximum.
• Les numéros de fichiers sont attribués conformément aux
caractéristiques DCF (Design rule for Camera File system).
• Si vous modifiez le nom d’un fichier (par exemple sur un
ordinateur), l’appareil photo n’est alors pas en mesure de le lire.
Type dossier
Définir le type d’un dossier.
• Standard* : XXXPHOTO
• Date : XXX_MMJJ
144
Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Formater
Formater la carte mémoire. Le formatage supprime
l’ensemble des fichiers, y compris les fichiers protégés.
(Non*, Oui)
Il est possible que des erreurs se produisent si vous
utilisez une carte mémoire formatée à l’aide d’un appareil
photo d’une autre marque, d’un lecteur de cartes
mémoire ou d’un ordinateur. Veuillez formater la carte
mémoire avec l’appareil photo avant de l’utiliser pour la
prise de photos.
Informations
périphérique
Afficher la version du micrologiciel du boîtier et de l’objectif,
l’adresse Mac et le numéro de certification réseau, ou mettre
à jour le micrologiciel.
• Mise à jour du logiciel : mettre à jour le firmware du
boîtier de l’appareil photo ou de l’objectif.
(Micrologiciel boîtier, Micrologiciel objectif)
• Vous pouvez effectuer la mise à jour du firmware
en connectant l’appareil photo à l’ordinateur et en
démarrant le i-Launcher. Pour plus de détails, reportezvous
à la page 167.
• Vous ne pouvez pas lancer la mise à niveau du firmware
sans avoir complètement rechargé la batterie au
préalable. Rechargez entièrement la batterie avant
d’effectuer la mise à niveau du firmware.
• Si vous mettez le firmware à jour, les paramètres
utilisateur et les valeurs sont réinitialisés. (La date,
l’heure, la langue et la sortie vidéo ne sont pas
modifiées.)
• N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque la mise à jour
est en cours.
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Verrouillage
Wi-Fi
Demander la saisie d’un code PIN lors de la connexion de
l’appareil photo à un smartphone.
• PIN: saisir un code PIN avant la connexion.
• Aucun*: autoriser la connexion sans saisie d’un code PIN.
• La connexion est automatique et aucun code PIN n’est
demandé lors de l’utilisation de la fonction NFC.
• Dès que vous réinitialisez les paramètres de l’appareil
photo ou mettez à jour le micrologiciel, les codes PIN
sont automatiquement générés et renouvelés.
• Si vous avez déjà connecté votre appareil photo à un
smartphone à l’aide d’un code PIN, la connexion est
automatiquement établie.
Réinitialiser
Réinitialiser le menu de configuration et les options de
prises de vue aux paramètres par défaut. (Les paramètres
de la date, de l’heure, de la langue et de la sortie vidéo ne
sont pas modifiés.) (Non*, Oui)
Licence Open
Source Afficher les licences open source.
Chapitre 6
Connexion à des appareils externes
Tirez pleinement partie des fonctionnalités de l’appareil photo en le connectant à des appareils externes, par exemple un ordinateur ou un téléviseur HD.
146
Connexion à des appareils externes
Visionnez des photos ou vidéos en raccordant l’appareil photo à un
téléviseur HD à l’aide d’un câble HDMI vendu en option.
1 En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺ q ĺ
Sortie HDMI ĺ une option (p. 143).
2 Eteignez l’appareil photo et le téléviseur.
3 Branchez l’appareil photo sur le téléviseur HD à l’aide du câble
HDMI proposé en option.
4 Allumez le téléviseur HD et sélectionnez la source vidéo HDMI.
5 Allumez l’appareil photo.
• L’appareil photo passe automatiquement en mode Lecture lorsque
vous le raccordez à un téléviseur HD.
6 Utilisez les touches de l’appareil photo pour visualiser des
photos ou lire des vidéos.
• Grâce au câble HDMI, vous pouvez brancher l’appareil photo sur le téléviseur
HD en utilisant la méthode Anynet+(CEC).
• Les fonctions Anynet+(CEC) vous permettent de contrôler les appareils
connectés en utilisant la télécommande du téléviseur.
• Si le téléviseur HD est compatible Anynet+(CEC), il s’allume automatiquement
lorsqu’il est connecté à l’appareil photo. Il est possible que cette fonction ne
soit pas disponible sur certains téléviseurs HD.
• Vous ne pouvez pas prendre de photos ou de vidéos lorsque l’appareil photo
est branché sur le téléviseur HD à l’aide d’un câble HDMI.
• Il est possible que certaines fonctions de lecture de l’appareil photo ne soient
pas disponibles lorsque celui-ci est branché sur un téléviseur HD.
• Le délai de connexion de l’appareil photo à un téléviseur HD peut varier
en fonction de la carte mémoire utilisée. La fonction principale d’une
carte mémoire étant d’augmenter la vitesse de transfert, celle-ci n’est pas
nécessairement plus rapide lors de l’utilisation de fonctions HDMI, même si
elle dispose d’un taux de transfert plus élevé.
Affichage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD
147
Connexion à des appareils externes
Transférez les fichiers d’une carte mémoire sur votre ordinateur en
connectant l’appareil photo à ce dernier.
Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows
Connexion de l’appareil photo en tant que disque amovible
Vous pouvez connecter l’appareil photo à votre ordinateur en tant que
disque amovible. Ouvrez le disque amovible qui apparaît et transférez des
fichiers sur l’ordinateur.
1 Eteignez l’appareil photo.
2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB.
• Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB (extrémité la plus petite)
du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos
fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute
responsabilité en cas de perte de données.
• Si vous tentez de brancher le câble USB sur le port HDMI, l’appareil
photo risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement.
3 Allumez l’appareil photo.
• L’ordinateur détecte automatiquement l’appareil photo.
4 Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez Poste de travail ĺ
Disque amovible ĺ DCIM ĺ 100PHOTO ou 101_0101.
5 Sélectionnez les fichiers de votre choix, puis faites-les glisser
ou enregistrez-les sur l’ordinateur.
Si Type dossier est réglé sur Date, le nom du dossier apparaît comme suit :
« XXX_MMJJ ». Par exemple, si vous capturez un fichier le 1er janvier, le nom du
fichier sera « 101_0101 ».
Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur
148
Connexion à des appareils externes > Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur
Déconnexion de l’appareil photo (Windows 7)
La méthode pour déconnecter l’appareil photo est identique pour
Windows 8.
1 Assurez-vous qu’aucune donnée n’est en cours de transfert
entre l’appareil photo et l’ordinateur.
• Si le voyant d’état de l’appareil photo clignote, cela signifie que des
données sont en cours de transfert. Attendez que le voyant d’état
cesse de clignoter.
2 Cliquez sur dans la barre d’outils en bas à droite de l’écran
de l’ordinateur.
3 Cliquez sur le message qui apparaît.
4 Cliquez sur la zone du message indiquant que l’appareil photo
a été retiré en toute sécurité.
5 Débranchez le câble USB.
Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Mac
Mac OS 10.7 ou version ultérieure est pris en charge.
1 Eteignez l’appareil photo.
2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur Macintosh à l’aide
du câble USB.
• Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB (extrémité la plus petite)
du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos
fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute
responsabilité en cas de perte de données.
• Si vous tentez de brancher le câble USB sur le port HDMI, l’appareil
photo risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement.
149
Connexion à des appareils externes > Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur
3 Allumez l’appareil photo.
• L’ordinateur détecte automatiquement l’appareil photo et affiche
une icône de disque amovible.
4 Ouvrez le disque amovible.
5 Transférez vos photos ou vidéos sur l’ordinateur Mac.
150
Connexion à des appareils externes
Vous pouvez afficher et modifier les fichiers à l’aide des programmes
fournis. Vous pouvez envoyer des fichiers à l’ordinateur via le réseau sans fil.
Installation de i-Launcher
1 Eteignez l’appareil photo.
2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble
USB.
Vous devez brancher l'extrémité la plus petite du câble USB sur l’appareil
photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble
à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de
données.
3 Allumez l’appareil photo.
4 Installez i-Launcher sur l’ordinateur.
Système
d’exploitation Comment procéder à l’installation
Windows
Lorsque la fenêtre contextuelle vous demande d’installer
i-Launcher, sélectionnez Oui.
• Si aucune fenêtre contextuelle n’apparaît, sélectionnez
Poste de travail ĺ i-Launcher ĺ iLinker.exe.
• Si une fenêtre contextuelle vous demandant
d’exécuter iLinker.exe apparaît, lancez d’abord
l’exécutable.
• Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un
ordinateur où i-Launcher est installé, le programme
démarre automatiquement.
Mac Cliquez sur Appareils ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Mac ĺ iLinker.
5 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour terminer l’installation.
Avant d’installer le programme, assurez-vous que l’ordinateur est connecté à un
réseau.
Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur
151
Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur
Utilisation de Samsung i-Launcher
Icône Description
Vous pouvez télécharger le firmware de l’appareil photo.
Télécharger le mode d’emploi.
Télécharger ce programme pour convertir les fichiers Samsung RAW
(SRW) en fichiers DNG.
i-Launcher propose un lien pour télécharger le programme PC Auto
Backup lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un ordinateur. A
l’aide de la fonction sans fil, vous pouvez envoyer sur un ordinateur
les photos ou vidéos enregistrées avec l’appareil photo.
Si vous ne pouvez pas ouvrir les fichiers Samsung RAW (SRW) avec Adobe
Photoshop Lightroom, convertissez le format de fichier au format DNG avec
le Samsung DNG Converter ou mettez à jour le programme Adobe Photoshop
Lightroom.
Utilisation d’i-Launcher
i-Launcher vous permet de mettre à jour le micrologiciel de l’appareil
photo ou de l’objectif ou vous fournit un lien pour télécharger le
programme PC Auto Backup.
Configuration requise pour Windows
Elément Configuration requise
Processeur Intel® Core™ 2 Duo 1,66 GHz ou plus /
AMD Athlon X2 Dual-Core 2,2 GHz ou plus
Mémoire vive Minimum 512 Mo de RAM (1 Go ou plus recommandé)
Système
d’exploitation* Windows 7, Windows 8
Capacité du
disque dur 250 Mo minimum (1 Go et plus recommandé)
Divers
• Lecteur de CD-ROM
• Pour une résolution de 1024X768 pixels, un moniteur
couleur 16 bits compatible est recommandé (pour
une résolution de 1280X1024 pixels, un écran couleur
32 bits est recommandé)
• Port USB 2.0
• nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT ou plus puissante /
ATI X1600 ou plus puissante
• Microsoft DirectX 9.0c ou version ultérieure
* Une version 32 bits de i-Launcher sera installée même sur les éditions 64 bits de Windows 7
et Windows 8.
152
Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur
• Les exigences de la page suivante sont uniquement des recommandations.
i-Launcher peut ne pas fonctionner correctement sur certains ordinateurs,
même si ceux-ci satisfont à la configuration requise.
• Si l’ordinateur ne répond pas à la configuration requise, un problème de
lecture vidéo risque de se produire.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages résultant de
l’utilisation d’ordinateurs non conformes, notamment les ordinateurs assemblés.
Configuration requise pour Mac
Elément Configuration requise
Système d’exploitation Mac OS 10.5 ou version ultérieure (sauf PowerPC)
Mémoire vive Minimum 256 Mo de RAM (512 Mo ou plus
recommandé)
Capacité du disque dur 110 Mo minimum
Divers • Lecteur de CD-ROM
• Port USB 2.0
Ouverture de Samsung i-Launcher
Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez Démarrer Démarrer → Tous les programmes
→ Samsung → i-Launcher → Samsung i-Launcher. Sinon, cliquez sur
Applications → Samsung → i-Launcher sur l'ordinateur Mac OS.
Téléchargement du firmware
Depuis l’écran de Samsung i-Launcher, cliquez sur . Pour plus de détails
sur la mise à jour du micrologiciel, veuillez-vous reporter à la page 167.
Téléchargement du programme PC Auto Backup
Depuis l’écran de Samsung i-Launcher, cliquez sur . Pour en savoir
plus sur l’installation du programme PC Auto Backup, reportez-vous à la
page 129.
153
Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur
Installation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
1 Insérez le DVD-ROM Adobe Photoshop Lightroom dans
l’ordinateur.
2 Sélectionnez la langue.
3 Suivez les instructions à l’écran.
Utilisation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom
Les photos prises par un appareil numérique sont souvent converties
aux formats JPEG et stockées en mémoire selon les réglages de l’appareil
photo au moment de la prise de vue. Les fichiers RAW ne sont pas
convertis au format JPEG et sont stockés dans la mémoire sans qu’aucune
modification ne soit effectuée. Adobe Photoshop Lightroom vous permet
d’étalonner le niveau d’exposition, la balance des blancs, les tonalités des
couleurs, les contrastes et les couleurs des photos. Vous pouvez également
retoucher les fichiers JPEG ou TIFF ainsi que les fichiers RAW. Pour
davantage d’informations, consultez le guide du programme en question.
• Si vous ne pouvez pas ouvrir les fichiers Samsung RAW (SRW) avec Adobe
Photoshop Lightroom, convertissez le format de fichier au format DNG avec
le Samsung DNG Converter ou mettez à jour le programme Adobe Photoshop
Lightroom.
• Il se peut qu’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom affiche différemment les effets de
luminosité, de couleurs et autres d’une image. Cela est dû à la suppression des
paramètres et des options d’origine de l’appareil photo, appliqués au moment
de l’enregistrement de l’image, en vue du traitement dans Adobe Photoshop
Lightroom.
Chapitre 7
Annexe
Obtenez des informations concernant les messages d’erreur, l’entretien de l’appareil photo, des conseils de
dépannage, les caractéristiques et les accessoires en option.
155
Annexe
Lorsque l'un des messages d'erreur suivants apparaît, reportez-vous aux
solutions proposées pour tenter de résoudre le problème.
Messages d'erreur Solutions possibles
Objectif verrouillé
L’objectif est verrouillé. Tourner l’objectif dans
le sens contraire des aiguilles d’une montre
jusqu’au déclic (p. 46).
Erreur de carte
• Eteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le.
• Retirez la carte mémoire, puis insérez-la de
nouveau.
• Formatez la carte mémoire.
Batterie faible Insérez une batterie chargée ou rechargez celle
qui est déjà en place.
Aucun fichier image Prenez des photos ou insérez une carte
mémoire qui en contient.
Périphérique
déconnecté.
La connexion réseau s’est interrompue pendant
le transfert de photos vers des appareils pris en
charge. Sélectionnez de nouveau un appareil
pris en charge.
Erreur de fichier Supprimez le fichier endommagé ou contactez
le centre de service après-vente.
Messages d'erreur Solutions possibles
Mémoire pleine Supprimez les fichiers inutiles ou insérez une
nouvelle carte mémoire.
Échec transfert.
• L’appareil photo n’a pas pu envoyer d’e-mails
ou de fichiers à d’autres appareils. Ré-essayez
de l’envoyer.
• Vérifiez la connexion réseau et ré-essayez.
Impossible de prendre
une photo car le numéro
de dossier/fichier sur la
carte mémoire a atteint
les valeurs maximales.
Réinitialiser le numéro
de dossier ?
Les noms de fichier ne correspondent pas à la
norme DCF. Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour
réinitialiser le nombre de dossiers.
Error 00
Eteignez l’appareil photo avant de retirer
l’objectif. Si le message s’affiche toujours,
contactez le centre de service après-vente.
Error 01 / 02
Eteignez l’appareil photo, retirez la batterie, puis
insérez-la de nouveau. Si le message s’affiche
toujours, contactez le centre de service aprèsvente.
Messages d’erreur
156
Annexe
Nettoyage de l’appareil photo
Objectif et écran de l’appareil photo
Utilisez un pinceau pour éliminer la poussière et essuyez délicatement
l’objectif avec un chiffon doux. S’il reste de la poussière, humidifiez une
lingette avec du nettoyant liquide pour objectif et essuyez délicatement.
Capteur d’images
En fonction des conditions de prise de vue, de la poussière peut apparaître
sur les photos suite à l’exposition du capteur d’images à l’environnement
extérieur. Ce phénomène est normal et l’exposition à la poussière fait
partie de l’utilisation quotidienne de l’appareil photo. N’introduisez pas la
soufflette dans la monture de l’objectif.
Boîtier de l’appareil photo
Essuyez-le délicatement avec un chiffon doux et sec.
N’utilisez jamais de benzène, de diluants ou d’alcool pour nettoyer l’appareil.
Ces produits peuvent l’endommager ou entraîner un dysfonctionnement de
l’appareil photo.
Entretien de l’appareil photo
157
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Utilisation sur la plage ou en bord de mer
• Protégez l’appareil photo du sable et de la poussière lorsque vous
l’utilisez à la plage ou dans d’autres endroits similaires.
• L’appareil photo n’est pas étanche. Ne manipulez pas la batterie,
l’adaptateur ou la carte mémoire avec les mains humides. Cela peut
entraîner la détérioration de l’appareil photo.
Rangement pour une durée prolongée
• Lorsque vous rangez l’appareil photo pour une durée prolongée, placezle
dans un contenant clos avec un matériau absorbant comme du gel de
silice.
• Lorsqu’elle n’est pas utilisée pendant une période prolongée, une
batterie pleine se décharge progressivement et doit alors être rechargée
avant l’utilisation suivante.
• Il est possible de régler la date et l’heure lorsque l’appareil photo est
éteint et que la batterie ne se trouve pas dans l’appareil photo pendant
une durée prolongée.
Usage et rangement de l’appareil photo
Usage ou rangement inapproprié de l’appareil photo
• Evitez d’exposer l’appareil photo à des températures extrêmes.
• Evitez d’utiliser l’appareil photo dans des endroits très humides ou dans
lesquels le taux d’humidité varie beaucoup.
• Evitez d’exposer l’appareil photo à la lumière directe du soleil et de le
ranger dans des endroits chauds, mal ventilés, comme à l’intérieur d’une
voiture en été.
• Protégez l’appareil photo et son écran contre les chocs et les vibrations
excessives susceptibles de les endommager.
• Evitez d’utiliser et de ranger l’appareil photo dans un endroit
poussiéreux, mal entretenu, humide ou mal ventilé, afin de ne pas
endommager ses composants internes.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de combustibles ou de
produits chimiques inflammables. Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais
de liquides inflammables, de gaz ou de matériaux explosifs dans le
même compartiment que l’appareil photo ou ses accessoires.
• Ne rangez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de boules de naphtaline.
158
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Usage avec précaution de l’appareil photo dans les
environnements humides
Lorsque vous transférez l’appareil photo d’un environnement froid à un
environnement chaud, de la condensation peut se former sur l’objectif
et les composants internes de l’appareil photo. Si tel est le cas, éteignez
l’appareil photo et attendez au moins 1 heure. Si de la condensation s’est
formée sur la carte mémoire, retirez-la de l’appareil photo et attendez que
l’humidité se soit évaporée avant de la réinsérer.
Autres avertissements
• Ne faites pas tournoyer l’appareil photo par la dragonne. Vous risquez de vous
blesser, de blesser d’autres personnes ou d’endommager l’appareil photo.
• Ne peignez pas l’appareil photo, la peinture risquant de bloquer ses
pièces mobiles et de perturber son fonctionnement.
• Eteignez l’appareil photo si vous ne l’utilisez pas.
• L’appareil photo contient des pièces fragiles. Evitez de faire subir des
chocs à l’appareil photo.
• Protégez l’écran de toute pression extérieure en le conservant dans l’étui
lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Protégez l’appareil photo des rayures en le
tenant à l’écart du sable, des objets pointus ou des pièces de monnaie.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est fissuré ou endommagé. Des
morceaux de plastique ou d’acrylique risquent de vous blesser les mains
ou le visage. Apportez l’appareil photo dans un centre de service aprèsvente
Samsung afin de la faire réparer.
• Ne posez jamais l’appareil photo, sa batterie, son chargeur ou ses
accessoires à proximité, à l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’un dispositif
chauffant, tel qu’un four à micro-ondes, une cuisinière ou un radiateur.
La chaleur peut déformer ou faire surchauffer ces appareils et provoquer
une incendie ou une explosion.
• Evitez toute exposition de l’objectif à la lumière directe du soleil — ceci
risque d’entraîner une décoloration ou un mauvais fonctionnement du
capteur d’images.
• Protégez l’objectif des traces de doigt et des éraflures. Nettoyez l’objectif
à l’aide d’un chiffon doux et propre, exempt de poussière.
• L’appareil photo peut s’éteindre en cas de pression extérieure. Cela a
pour but de protéger la carte mémoire. Allumez l’appareil photo pour
l’utiliser à nouveau.
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo chauffe en cours d’utilisation.
Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ou les
performances de l’appareil photo.
• Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo à des températures faibles, il
peut mettre du temps à s’allumer, une décoloration peut se produire
temporairement ou des images persistantes peuvent apparaître. Il
ne s’agit en aucun cas d’un dysfonctionnement, et ces perturbations
momentanées se corrigent d’elles-mêmes une fois que l’appareil photo
retrouve à nouveau une température plus modérée.
• La peinture ou le métal sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut provoquer
des allergies, des démangeaisons, de l’eczéma ou des boursouflures pour
les personnes à peau sensible. Si vous présentez de tels symptômes,
arrêtez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil photo et consultez un
médecin.
• N’introduisez pas de corps étrangers dans les compartiments, les
logements ou les ouvertures de l’appareil photo. Il est possible que votre
garantie ne couvre pas les dommages provoqués par une mauvaise
utilisation.
• Ne confiez pas la réparation de l’appareil photo à un technicien non
agréé et ne tentez pas de le réparer vous-même. Votre garantie ne
couvre pas les dégâts résultant d’une réparation par un technicien non
agréé.
159
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
A propos des cartes mémoire
Cartes mémoires prises en charge
Ce produit prend en charge les cartes mémoire microSD, microSDHC ou
microSDXC.
Adaptateur de carte mémoire
Carte mémoire
Pour pouvoir lire des données sur un ordinateur ou par le biais d’un lecteur
de cartes, insérez la carte dans l’adaptateur approprié.
160
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Capacité de la carte mémoire
La capacité de la mémoire peut varier en fonction de la scène ou des conditions de prise de vue. Ces capacités sont données pour une carte SD de 2 Go.
Taille
Qualité
Maximale Elevée Normale RAW RAW + Très
élevée RAW + Elevée RAW + Normale
Photo
20.0M (5472X3648) 162 294 403 57 26 32 35
10.1M (3888X2592) 292 492 638 - 32 37 39
5.9M (2976X1984) 440 688 846 - 36 40 41
2.0M (1728X1152) 841 1 095 1 217 - 41 42 43
Mode Rafale 495 753 911 - - - -
16.9M (5472X3080) 188 337 456 - 27 34 37
7.8M (3712X2088) 359 585 739 - 34 38 40
4.9M (2944X1656) 503 762 919 - 37 40 41
2.1M (1920X1080) 1 566 2 840 3 897 - 44 45 46
13.3M (3648X3648) 231 403 536 - 30 35 38
7.0M (2640X2640) 390 624 781 - 35 39 40
4.0M (2000X2000) 573 839 993 - 38 41 42
1.1M (1024X1024) 2 814 4 750 6 163 - 45 46 46
161
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire
• Evitez d’exposer la carte mémoire à des températures extrêmes
(inférieures à 0 °C ou supérieures à 40 °C). Cela risque de provoquer des
dysfonctionnements de la carte mémoire.
• Introduisez la carte mémoire dans le bon sens. Dans le cas contraire,
vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil photo ainsi que la carte mémoire.
• N’utilisez pas de carte mémoire formatée avec un autre appareil photo
ou avec un ordinateur. Reformatez la carte mémoire sur l’appareil photo.
• Eteignez l’appareil photo avant d’introduire ou de retirer la carte
mémoire.
• Vous ne devez pas retirer la carte mémoire ou éteindre l’appareil photo
lorsque le voyant clignote. Vous risquez d’endommager vos données.
• Au terme de la durée de vie de la carte mémoire, vous ne pouvez plus
stocker de photos sur la carte. Utilisez une autre carte mémoire.
• Evitez de plier la carte mémoire, de la laisser tomber ou de la soumettre
à des chocs ou des pressions importantes.
• Evitez d’utiliser ou de ranger toute carte mémoire à proximité de champs
magnétiques.
• Evitez d’utiliser ou de ranger toute carte mémoire dans des
environnements chauds, très humides ou en contact avec des
substances corrosives.
Taille Qualité
HQ Normale
Vidéo
1920X1080 (30 ips)
Environ 17' 02" Environ 19' 50"
1280X720 (30 ips)
Environ 23' 46" Environ 29' 37"
640X480 (30 ips)
Environ 58' 24" Environ 77' 06"
Pour partager (30 ips)
- Environ 261' 21"
• Les valeurs précédentes sont mesurées sans utiliser la fonction de zoom.
• Le temps d’enregistrement disponible peut varier si le zoom est utilisé.
• Plusieurs vidéos ont été enregistrées successivement afin de déterminer la durée totale
d’enregistrement.
• La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 20 minutes par fichier.
• La durée maximale de lecture de vidéos Pour partager est de 30 secondes par fichier.
162
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
A propos de la batterie
Utilisez uniquement des batteries homologuées par Samsung.
Caractéristiques de la batterie
Elément Description
Modèle* B740AE/B740AC/B740AU/B740AK
Type Batterie au lithium-ion
Capacité des cellules 2 330 mAh
Tension 3,8 V
Temps de charge** (Lorsque
la batterie est complètement
déchargée)
Environ 270 min.
* Les caractéristiques de la batterie ou du modèle peuvent différer selon votre région.
** Les valeurs indiquées ci-dessus sont basées sur l’utilisation du câble de connexion USB et de
l’adaptateur secteur fournis. La recharge de la batterie en la raccordant à un ordinateur peut
s’avérer plus lente.
• Evitez tout contact de la carte mémoire avec des liquides, de la poussière
ou des corps étrangers. Si la carte mémoire est sale, nettoyez-la avec un
chiffon doux avant de l’introduire dans l’appareil photo.
• Evitez que la carte mémoire ou l’emplacement pour carte mémoire
n’entre en contact avec des liquides, de la poussière ou tout corps
étranger. Cela risque d’endommager l’appareil photo ou la carte
mémoire.
• Lorsque vous transportez une carte mémoire, rangez-la dans un étui afin
de la protéger de l’électricité statique.
• Transférez vos données importantes sur d’autres supports, tel qu’un
disque dur ou un CD ou DVD.
• Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo de manière prolongée, la
carte mémoire peut chauffer. Ceci est normal et n’entraîne aucun
dysfonctionnement.
• Utilisez une carte mémoire conforme aux normes en vigueur.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données.
163
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Des blessures pouvant s’avérer mortelles peuvent résulter d’une utilisation
imprudente ou inappropriée de la batterie. Pour votre sécurité, veuillez
suivre ces instructions destinées à utiliser la batterie correctement :
• La batterie peut s’enflammer ou bien éclater si celle-ci n’est pas manipulée
correctement. Si vous remarquez un quelconque défaut de fabrication,
une fêlure ou d’autres anomalies sur la batterie, cessez de l’utiliser
immédiatement et contactez votre fabricant.
• Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs de batterie originaux recommandés
par le fabricant, et rechargez la batterie en respectant scrupuleusement les
consignes décrites dans ce mode d’emploi.
• Ne placez pas la batterie à proximité d’appareils chauffants ou dans un
environnement soumis à des températures élevées, par exemple à l’intérieur
d’une voiture en été.
• Ne placez jamais la batterie dans un four à micro-ondes.
• Evitez de stocker ou d’utiliser la batterie dans des endroits chauds et humides
comme des spas ou des cabines de douche.
• Ne posez pas l’appareil sur des surfaces inflammables comme de la literie, des
couvertures, des tapis ou des couvertures électriques pendant des périodes
prolongées.
• Lorsque l’appareil est allumé, ne le laissez pas dans un espace confiné
pendant une période prolongée.
• Ne laissez pas les bornes de la batterie entrer en contact avec des objets
métalliques comme des colliers, des pièces de monnaie, des clés ou des
montres.
• Utilisez uniquement des batteries de remplacement lithium-ion originales
recommandées par le fabricant.
• Ne démontez ou ne perforez pas la batterie avec un objet tranchant.
• Evitez de soumettre la batterie à une pression élevée ou à des éléments
susceptibles de l’écraser.
• Evitez de soumettre la batterie à des chocs importants, par exemple la laisser
tomber de très haut.
• N’exposez pas la batterie à des températures d’au moins 60 °C.
• Evitez de mettre la batterie en contact avec des liquides ou de l’humidité.
• Evitez tout contact de la batterie avec des flammes et de l’exposer à une
chaleur intense ou au soleil de façon prolongée.
Informations sur le traitement des batteries usagées
• Portez une attention particulière à la façon dont vous jetez les batteries
usagées.
• Ne jetez pas la batterie au feu.
• Les consignes de traitement des batteries usagées peuvent varier d’un pays
à l’autre. Procédez à la mise au rebut de la batterie usagée en accord avec
toutes les réglementations locales et fédérales en vigueur.
Consignes relatives à la recharge de la batterie
Respectez les consignes de recharge indiquées dans ce mode d’emploi pour
recharger la batterie. La batterie peut s’enflammer ou éclater si celle-ci n’est pas
rechargée correctement.
164
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Autonomie de la batterie
Mode Prise de vue Durée moyenne / Nombre de photos
Photos Environ 185 min./Environ 370 photos
Vidéo
Environ 135 min. (Enregistrement de vidéos à une
résolution de 1920X1080 et à une fréquence de
30 ips.)
• Ces chiffres proviennent des normes de test CIPA. Ils peuvent varier en
fonction de votre utilisation réelle.
• Les temps de prise de vue disponibles varient en fonction de l’arrièreplan,
de l’intervalle de prise de vue et des conditions d’utilisation.
• Plusieurs vidéos ont été enregistrées successivement afin de déterminer
la durée totale d’enregistrement.
Message de batterie faible
Lorsque la batterie est complètement déchargée, l’icône de batterie
devient rouge et le message « Batterie faible » apparaît.
Remarques à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie
• Evitez d’exposer les cartes mémoire à des températures extrêmes
(inférieures à 0 °C ou supérieures à 40 °C). Les températures extrêmes
peuvent avoir pour effet de réduire la capacité de recharge des batteries.
• Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo de manière prolongée, la zone
située autour de la trappe batterie peut chauffer. Ceci n’affecte pas
l’utilisation normale de l’appareil photo.
• Ne tirez pas sur le cordon d’alimentation pour le débrancher de la prise
secteur, car vous risquez de provoquer des flammes ou de recevoir une
décharge électrique.
• A des températures inférieures à 0 °C, la capacité et la durée de vie de la
batterie peuvent diminuer.
• La capacité de la batterie peut diminuer à de faibles températures, mais
redevient normale à des températures plus modérées.
• Si vous rangez l’appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une période de temps
prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie. Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se
détériorer avec le temps, risquant d’endommager gravement l’appareil
photo. Si vous rangez l’appareil photo pendant une durée prolongée,
sans avoir retiré la batterie, celle-ci risque de se décharger. Lorsque la
batterie est complètement déchargée, il peut s’avérer impossible de la
recharger.
• Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil photo pendant une durée
prolongée (3 mois ou plus), vérifiez la batterie et rechargez-la
régulièrement. Si vous laissez continuellement la batterie se décharger,
sa capacité et sa durée de vie peuvent diminuer, ce qui peut entraîner
son dysfonctionnement, des flammes ou son éclatement.
165
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Avertissements à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie
Protégez la batterie, le chargeur et la carte mémoire de toute
détérioration.
Evitez tout contact de la batterie avec des objets métalliques, car
cela risque de provoquer un court-circuit entre les bornes + et - de la
batterie, de l’endommager de manière temporaire ou permanente, ou de
provoquer des flammes ou une électrocution .
Remarques concernant la recharge de la batterie
• Si le voyant d’état est éteint, assurez-vous que la batterie est
correctement mise en place.
• Si lors de la recharge l’appareil photo est allumé, la batterie peut ne
pas se recharger complètement. Eteignez l’appareil photo avant de
recharger la batterie.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo lors de la recharge de la batterie. Vous
risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge
électrique.
• Ne tirez pas sur le cordon d’alimentation pour le débrancher de la prise
secteur, car vous risquez de provoquer des flammes ou de recevoir une
décharge électrique.
• Laissez la batterie se recharger pendant au moins 10 minutes avant
d’allumer l’appareil photo.
• Si vous raccordez l’appareil photo à une source d’alimentation externe
alors que la batterie est déchargée, l’utilisation de fonctions à forte
consommation énergétique provoque l’extinction de l’appareil
photo. Rechargez la batterie pour pouvoir utiliser l’appareil photo
normalement.
• Si vous rebranchez le cordon d’alimentation alors que la batterie est
complètement rechargée, le voyant d’état s’allume pendant environ
30 minutes.
• L’utilisation du flash et l’enregistrement de vidéos déchargent
rapidement la batterie. Rechargez complètement la batterie avant
d’utiliser l’appareil photo.
• Si le voyant d’état rouge clignote, rebranchez le cordon ou retirez la
batterie et réintroduisez-la.
• Si vous rechargez la batterie lorsque le cordon surchauffe ou lorsque la
température est trop élevée, le voyant d’état rouge peut clignoter. La
recharge démarre lorsque la batterie a refroidi.
• La recharge excessive des batteries peut raccourcir leur durée de vie. A la
fin de chaque recharge, débranchez le cordon de l’appareil photo.
• Ne tordez pas le cordon d’alimentation et ne placez pas d’objets lourds
dessus. Vous risquez d’endommager le cordon.
166
Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo
Remarques à propos de la recharge avec raccordement à un
ordinateur
• Utilisez uniquement le câble USB fourni.
• La recharge de la batterie peut s’avérer impossible quand :
- vous utilisez un concentrateur USB ;
- d’autres appareils USB sont raccordés à votre ordinateur ;
- vous connectez le câble sur le port situé sur la face avant de votre ordinateur ;
- le port USB de votre ordinateur ne prend pas en charge un niveau standard de
puissance en sortie (5 V, 500 mA).
Utilisation et recyclage consciencieux des batteries et des
chargeurs
• Ne jetez jamais la batterie au feu. Respectez la réglementation en
vigueur concernant l’élimination des batteries usagées.
• Ne posez jamais les batteries ou l’appareil photo à l’intérieur ou audessus
d’un dispositif chauffant, tel qu’un four à micro-ondes, une
cuisinière ou un radiateur. En cas de surchauffe, les batteries risquent
d’éclater.
167
Annexe
Mise à jour du micrologiciel
Connectez l’appareil photo à l’ordinateur et procédez à la mise à jour du
micrologiciel de l’appareil photo ou de l’objectif.
• Vous ne pouvez pas lancer la mise à niveau du firmware sans avoir
complètement rechargé la batterie au préalable. Rechargez entièrement la
batterie avant d’effectuer la mise à niveau du firmware.
• Si vous mettez le firmware à jour, les paramètres utilisateur et les valeurs
sont réinitialisés. (La date, l’heure, la langue et la sortie vidéo ne sont pas
modifiées.)
• N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque la mise à jour est en cours.
1 Eteignez l’appareil photo.
2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB.
• Vous devez brancher l'extrémité la plus petite du câble USB sur l’appareil
photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble
à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de
données.
• Si vous tentez de brancher le câble USB sur le port HDMI, l’appareil photo
risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement.
3 Allumez l’appareil photo.
4 Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez i-Launcher → .
5 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour télécharger le
micrologiciel dans l’appareil photo.
• Vous pouvez télécharger le micrologiciel de l’appareil photo ou de
l’objectif.
6 Éteignez l’appareil photo une fois le téléchargement terminé.
7 Débranchez le câble USB.
8 Allumez l’appareil photo.
9 Appuyez sur [m] → q → Informations périphérique
→ Mise à jour du logiciel → Micrologiciel boîtier ou
Micrologiciel objectif.
10 Sélectionnez Oui sur une fenêtre contextuelle de l’appareil
photo pour la mise à jour du micrologiciel.
168
Annexe
Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente
Si l’appareil photo ne fonctionne pas correctement, vérifiez les éléments
suivants avant de contacter un représentant.
Lorsque vous apportez l’appareil photo dans un centre de service après-vente,
veillez à également fournir les autres composants qui ont pu contribuer au
dysfonctionnement, notamment la carte mémoire et la batterie.
Problème Solutions possibles
Impossible d’allumer
l’appareil photo
• Assurez-vous que la batterie est installée.
• Assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement
installée.
• Rechargez la batterie.
L’appareil photo
s’éteint de façon
inattendue
• Rechargez la batterie.
• L’appareil photo peut être réglé en mode
extinction automatique ou configuré afin que
l’écran s’éteigne automatiquement (p. 142).
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo s’éteigne
afin d’éviter que la carte mémoire ne soit
endommagée en raison d’une chaleur
excessive. Rallumez l’appareil photo.
La batterie de
l’appareil photo se
décharge rapidement
• La batterie peut se décharger plus rapidement
dans un environnement où les températures
sont basses (en dessous de 0 °C). Gardez la
batterie au chaud en la plaçant dans votre
poche.
• L’utilisation du flash et l’enregistrement de
vidéos déchargent rapidement la batterie.
Rechargez-la si nécessaire.
• La batterie est un consommable qui a une
durée de vie limitée et doit périodiquement
être remplacé. Remplacez-la si son autonomie
diminue rapidement.
Problème Solutions possibles
Impossible de prendre
des photos
• La carte mémoire est pleine. Supprimez les
fichiers inutiles ou insérez une nouvelle carte.
• Formatez la carte mémoire.
• La carte mémoire est défectueuse. Remplacez
la carte mémoire.
• Assurez-vous que l’appareil photo est allumé.
• Rechargez la batterie.
• Assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement
installée.
L’appareil photo ne
répond pas Retirez la batterie, puis replacez-la.
L’appareil photo
chauffe
Il est possible que l’appareil photo chauffe en
cours d’utilisation. Ce phénomène est normal et
n’affecte pas la durée de vie ou les performances
de l’appareil photo.
Le flash se déclenche
de façon inattendue
L’électricité statique peut provoquer le
déclenchement du flash. Il ne s’agit pas d’un
dysfonctionnement de l’appareil photo.
Le flash ne fonctionne
pas
• Le flash est peut-être réglé sur Désactivé
(p. 88).
• Certains modes ne vous permettent pas
d’utiliser le flash.
La date et l’heure sont
incorrectes Réglez la date et l’heure dans le menu q (p. 142).
L’écran ou des touches
ne fonctionnent pas Retirez la batterie, puis replacez-la.
169
Annexe > Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente
Problème Solutions possibles
La carte mémoire
présente une erreur
• Eteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le.
• Retirez la carte mémoire, puis insérez-la de
nouveau.
• Formatez la carte mémoire.
Pour davantage d’informations, voir « Précautions
d’utilisation des cartes mémoire » (p. 161).
Le téléviseur ou
l’ordinateur ne
peuvent pas afficher
les photos et les
vidéos stockées sur
une carte mémoire
microSDXC
Les cartes mémoire microSDXC utilisent le
système de fichiers exFAT. Assurez-vous que le
dispositif externe est compatible avec le système
de fichiers exFAT avant d’y connecter l’appareil
photo.
Votre ordinateur ne
reconnaît pas les
cartes mémoires
microSDXC
Les cartes mémoire microSDXC utilisent le
système de fichiers exFAT. Pour utiliser une
carte mémoire microSDXC sur un ordinateur
Windows XP, téléchargez et effectuez la mise à
jour du pilote du système de fichiers exFAT, à
partir du site Web de Microsoft.
Impossible d’afficher
des fichiers
Si vous modifiez le nom d’un fichier, l’appareil
photo risque de ne plus pouvoir le lire (le nom de
fichier doit être conforme à la norme DCF). Si vous
rencontrez ce problème, affichez le fichier sur un
ordinateur.
Problème Solutions possibles
La photo est floue
• Assurez-vous d’avoir réglé l’option de mise au
point appropriée pour le type de prise de vue.
• Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil
photo.
• Assurez-vous que l’objectif est propre. Dans le
cas contraire, nettoyez-le (p. 156).
Les couleurs
de la photo ne
correspondent pas à
celles de la scène
Un réglage incorrect de la balance des blancs
peut provoquer un mauvais rendu des couleurs.
Sélectionnez l’option Balance des blancs
appropriée à la source de lumière (p. 70).
La photo est trop
claire ou trop sombre
Votre photo est surexposée ou sous-exposée.
• Réglez la valeur d’ouverture ou la vitesse
d’obturation.
• Réglez la sensibilité ISO (p. 69).
• Activez ou désactivez le flash (p. 88).
• Réglez la valeur d’exposition (p. 95).
Les photos sont
déformées
L’objectif grand-angle, qui permet de
photographier avec un angle de vue large, peut
générer de très légères déformations de la photo
prise par l’appareil photo. Ceci est normal et
n’engendre pas de dysfonctionnement.
Des lignes
horizontales
apparaissent sur la
photo
Cela peut se produire lorsque le sujet est exposé à
une source lumineuse fluorescente ou une lampe
au mercure. Sélectionnez une vitesse d’obturation
lente.
L’écran de lecture ne
s’affiche pas sur le
périphérique externe
connecté
• Vérifiez qu’un câble HDMI est correctement
branché sur l’écran externe.
• Assurez-vous que la carte mémoire est
reconnue.
170
Annexe > Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente
Problème Solutions possibles
L’ordinateur ne
reconnaît pas
l’appareil photo
• Vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement
branché.
• Assurez-vous que l’appareil photo est allumé.
• Assurez-vous d’utiliser un système
d’exploitation pris en charge.
L’appareil photo
se déconnecte de
l’ordinateur pendant
le transfert des fichiers
L’électricité statique peut interrompre la
transmission des fichiers. Débranchez le câble
USB, puis rebranchez-le.
i-Launcher ne
s’exécute pas
correctement
• Quittez i-Launcher et redémarrez l’application.
• Selon la configuration et l’environnement de votre
ordinateur, il est possible que l’application ne
démarre pas automatiquement. Si tel est le cas,
cliquez sur Démarrer ĺ Tous les programmes
ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Samsung
i-Launcher sur votre ordinateur Windows. (Dans
le cas de Windows 8, ouvrez l’écran d’accueil,
puis sélectionnez Toutes les applications
ĺ Samsung i-Launcher.) Sinon, cliquez sur
Applications ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher sur
votre ordinateur Mac OS.
Problème Solutions possibles
La fonction de mise au
point automatique ne
fonctionne pas
• La mise au point ne s’effectue pas sur le sujet.
Lorsque le sujet se trouve en dehors de la zone
AF, recadrez-le dans la zone AF, puis enfoncez le
[Déclencheur] à mi-course.
• Le sujet est trop proche. Eloignez-vous du sujet
et prenez la photo.
• Le mode de mise au point est réglé sur MF.
Passez en mode AF.
La fonction de
verrouillage AEL ne
fonctionne pas
La fonction AEL ne fonctionne pas avec les modes
t, M, s et R. Pour utiliser cette fonction,
sélectionnez un autre mode.
L’objectif est inopérant
• Vérifiez que l’objectif est correctement installé.
• Retirez l’objectif de l’appareil photo et
remettez-le en place.
Le flash externe ne
fonctionne pas
Assurez-vous que le flash externe est
correctement monté sur le port du flash externe.
Lorsque vous allumez
l’appareil photo,
l’écran de réglage de
la date et de l’heure
s’affiche
• Réglez de nouveau la date et l’heure.
• Cet écran apparaît lorsque la source
d’alimentation interne de l’appareil photo est
complètement déchargée. Insérez une batterie
pleine puis éteignez l’appareil photo pendant
au moins 72 heures afin d’assurer une recharge
complète.
171
Annexe
Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Capteur d’images
Type CMOS
Dimensions du capteur 23,5 X 15,7 mm
Pixels effectifs Environ 20,3 mégapixels
Nombre total de pixels Environ 21,6 mégapixels
Filtre couleur Filtre RGB couleurs primaires
Monture de l’objectif
Type Monture Samsung NX
Objectif disponible Objectifs Samsung NX (les objectifs 3D ne sont
pas pris en charge)
Stabilisation de l’image
Type Décentrement (dépend de l’objectif)
Mode Désactivée/Mode 1/Mode 2
Correction des déformations
Activé / Désactivé (dépend de l’objectif)
i-Function
Prise en charge (Valeur d’ouverture, Vitesse d’obturation, EV, ISO,
Balance des blancs)
Écran
Type TFT LCD
Taille 3,0" (Environ 75,2 mm)
Résolution HVGA (320X480) 460,8 k points
Champ de vision Environ 100%
Angle Pivotement vers le haut : 180°
Affichage utilisateur Grille, Icônes, Histogramme, Indicateur de niveau
Mise au point
Type Contraste Mise au point automatique
Foyer de mise au point
automatique
• Sélection : 1 point (sélection libre)
• Multiple : Normal 21 points, Macro 35 points
• Détection des visages : max. 10 visages
• Mise au point avec suivi des objets
Mode AF unique, AF continu, Mise au point manuelle
Voyant de mise au
point assistée Oui
172
Annexe > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Obturateur
Type Obturateur avec premier rideau électronique,
Obturateur à plan focal
Vitesse
• Automatique : 1/4 000 – 1/4 s
• Manuel : 1/4 000 – 30 s (Palier 1/3 EV)
• Bulb (limite de temps : 4 min.)
Exposition
Système de mesure de
l’exposition
TTL 221 (17X13) Segment bloc
Mesure de l’exposition : Multiple, Centrée,
Sélective
Plage de la mesure d’exposition :
EV 0–18 (ISO 100 · 30 mm, F2)
Compensation ±3 EV (Palier 1/3 EV)
Verrouillage AE Touche de personnalisation
Equivalent ISO Automatique, 100–25600 (1 ou Palier 1/3 EV)
Mode de sélection
Mode
Unique, Continue, Mode Rafale (5M uniquement),
Retardateur, Bracketing (Exposition automatique,
Balance des blancs, Assistant photo, Profondeur)
Prise de vue en continu
5 ips
* La vitesse maximale de prise de vue est de 5 images par
seconde. Elle ralentira au bout environ de 13 clichés au
format JPEG et de 5 clichés au format RAW. (Cela peut
varier en fonction des caractéristiques techniques de la
carte mémoire.)
Prise de vue Bracketing
Bracketing Exposition automatique (±3 EV),
Bracketing Balance des blancs,
Bracketing Assistant photo, Bracketing de
profondeur de champ (uniquement en mode
Programme et Priorité ouverture)
Retardateur à distance 2 – 30 s (intervalle d’1 seconde)
Déclenchement de
l’obturateur Prise en charge (via smartphone)
Flash
Type Flash externe (en option)
Mode
Flash intelligent, Automatique, Yeux rouges auto,
Contre jour, Ctre jour + Yeux rouges, 1er Rideau,
2e Rideau, Désactivée
Vitesse de
synchronisation Inférieure à 1/180 s
Valeur d’exposition
Flash -2 – +2 EV (Palier 0,5 EV)
Flash externe Flash externes Samsung en option
Terminal de
synchronisation Griffe porte-accessoire
173
Annexe > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Balance des blancs
Mode
Balance des blancs automatique,
Lumière du jour, Nuageux, Blanc fluorescent,
Blanc/Noir fluorescent,
Lumière du jour fluorescent, Tungstène,
Balance des blancs flash, Réglage personnalisé,
Température couleur (Manuel)
Ajustement micro Orange / Bleu / Vert / Magenta 7 paliers
respectivement
Plage dynamique
Désactivée/Plage intelligente+/HDR
Assistant photo
Mode
Standard, Accentué, Portrait, Paysage, Naturel,
Rétro, Cool, Calme, Classique, Personnalisé 1,
Personnalisé 2, Personnalisé 3
Paramètres Couleur, Saturation, Netteté, Contraste
Prise de vue
Mode
Scènes Automatique, Intelligent, Programme,
Priorité ouverture, Priorité vitesse, Manuel,
Panorama
Mode intelligent
Beauté, Meilleure photo, Mode Continu,
Prise Enfants, Paysage, Macro, Nature morte,
Fêtes et intérieurs, Action, Ton riche, Cascade,
Silhouette, Coucher de soleil, Nuit, Feux d'artifice,
Lumière
Filtre intelligent Vignettage, Miniature, Esquisse, Œil de poisson
Taille
• JPEG (3:2) : 20.0M (5472X3648),
10.1M (3888X2592), 5.9M (2976X1984),
5.0M (2736X1824) (mode Rafale uniquement),
2.0M (1728X1152)
• JPEG (16:9) : 16.9M (5472X3080),
7.8M (3712X2088), 4.9M (2944X1656),
2.1M (1920X1080)
• JPEG (1:1) : 13.3M (3648X3648),
7.0M (2640X2640), 4.0M (2000X2000),
1.1M (1024X1024)
• RAW: 20.0M (5472X3648)
Qualité Maximale, Elevée, Normale, RAW, RAW + Très élevée,
RAW + Elevée, RAW + Normale
Norme RAW SRW (ver.3.0.0)
Espace colorimétrique sRGB, Adobe RGB
Vidéo
Type MP4 (H.264)
Format Vidéo : H.264, son : AAC
Mode vidéo AE Programme, Priorité ouverture, Priorité vitesse,
Manuel
Clip vidéo Son activé / désactivé (durée de prise de vue :
maxi. 20')
Filtre intelligent Vignettage, Miniature, Esquisse, Œil de poisson
174
Annexe > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Taille 1920X1080, 1280X720, 640X480, 320X240
(Pour partager)
Fréquence d’images 30 ips (NTSC), 25 ips (PAL)
Multi-mouvements x0.25 (640X480, 320X240 uniquement), x1, x5,
x10, x20
Qualité HQ, Normale
Son Stéréo
Retouche Découpage de la durée, Capture d’images fixes
Lecture
Type Image unique, Miniatures (15/28), Diaporama,
Vidéo
Retouche
Filtre intelligent, Redimensionner, Rotation,
Retouche des visages, Luminosité, Contraste,
Réglage automatique, Saturation, Réglage RVB,
Température des couleurs, Exposition
Filtre intelligent
Vignettage, Miniature, Onirique, Esquisse,
Effet ultra grand angle, Classique, Rétro,
Peinture à l'huile, Dessin, Peinture à l'encre,
Filtre croisé, Prise de vue zoom
Stockage
Support
Mémoire externe (en option) :
carte microSD (jusqu’à 2 Go garantis),
microSDHC (jusqu’à 32 Go garantis),
microSDXC (jusqu’à 64 Go garantis,
UHS-1 pris en charge)
- Classe 6 et supérieure recommandée
Format de fichier RAW (SRW (ver.3.0.0)), JPEG (EXIF 2.3), DCF
Réseau sans fil
Type IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Fonction
AutoShare, Remote Viewfinder, MobileLink,
Partage instantané, Sauvegarde automatique,
Samsung Link,Home Monitor+, Group Share
NFC
Oui
Interface
Sortie numérique USB 2.0 (prise micro-USB)
Sortie vidéo • NTSC, PAL (au choix)
• HDMI
Connecteur
d’alimentation CC 5,0 V, 0,55 A via micro USB
175
Annexe > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Source d'alimentation
Type
Batterie rechargeable : B740AE/B740AC/
B740AU/B740AK (2 330 mAh, 3,8 V)
* Les caractéristiques de la batterie ou du modèle
peuvent différer selon votre région.
Dimensions (L x H x P)
117,4 x 65,9 x 39,0 mm
Poids
230 g (sans batterie, ni carte mémoire)
Température de fonctionnement
0 – 40 °C
Humidité ambiante tolérée
5 – 85%
Logiciels
i-Launcher, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 5, Samsung DNG Converter
* Ces caractéristiques peuvent changer sans préavis à des fins d’amélioration du rendement.
* Toutes les marques de commerce et noms de produits appartiennent à leurs détenteurs
respectifs.
176
Annexe
Glossaire
AP (Point d’accès)
Un point d’accès est un appareil qui permet aux appareils sans fil de se
connecter à un réseau câblé.
Réseau Ad-Hoc
Un réseau ad-hoc est une connexion temporaire permettant de partager
des fichiers ou une connexion Internet entre des ordinateurs et des
appareils.
Adobe RGB
Adobe RGB est utilisé pour des impressions professionnelles et dispose
d’une gamme de couleurs plus importante que la norme sRGB. Il vous
permet ainsi de retoucher facilement des photos sur un ordinateur.
AEB (Bracketing d’exposition automatique)
Cette fonctionnalité permet de prendre automatiquement plusieurs
photos à différentes expositions afin de vous aider à obtenir une
exposition correcte.
AEL (Verrouillage automatique de l’exposition)
Ces fonctions vous permettent de verrouiller l’exposition sur laquelle vous
souhaitez calculer celle-ci.
AF (Mise au point automatique)
Système qui permet à l’objectif de l’appareil photo d’effectuer une mise
au point automatique sur le sujet. L’appareil photo se base sur le contraste
pour opérer la mise au point automatique.
AMOLED (matrice active à diodes organiques
électroluminescentes) / LCD (Ecran à cristaux liquides)
L’écran AMOLED est très fin et très léger, car il ne nécessite aucun
rétro-éclairage. L’écran LCD est couramment utilisé dans le secteur de
l’électronique grand public. Ce type d’écran nécessite un rétro-éclairage
séparé, de type CCFL ou LED, pour reproduire les couleurs.
Ouverture
L’ouverture contrôle la quantité de lumière atteignant le capteur de
l’appareil photo.
177
Annexe > Glossaire
Composition
En photographie, la composition signifie la disposition des éléments d’une
scène. En règle générale, une bonne composition doit obéir à la règle des
tiers.
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)
Spécification créée par la Japan Electronics and Information Technology
Industries Association (JEITA) qui définit le format et le système de fichiers
pour les appareils photo.
Profondeur de champ
Zone de netteté acceptable entre le point de mise au point le plus proche
et celui le plus éloigné. La profondeur de champ varie selon la focale et
l’ouverture utilisées, ainsi que la distance entre l’appareil photo et le sujet.
Avec, par exemple, une ouverture inférieure, la profondeur de champ
augmente et l’arrière-plan de la composition devient flou.
Bougé de l’appareil photo (flou)
Si vous bougez l’appareil photo alors que l’obturateur est ouvert, l’image
risque d’être floue. Cela est d’autant plus vrai si la vitesse d’obturation est
lente. Vous pouvez éviter ce phénomène de bougé de l’appareil photo en
augmentant la sensibilité, en utilisant le flash ou en augmentant la vitesse
d’obturation. Pour stabiliser l’appareil photo, vous pouvez également
utiliser un trépied ou la fonction OIS.
Espace colorimétrique
Gamme des couleurs « visibles » par l’appareil photo.
Température des couleurs
La température des couleurs est une mesure exprimée en Kelvin (K) qui
indique la tonalité chromatique d’un type spécifique de source de lumière.
Lorsque la température de couleur augmente, la couleur de la source
lumineuse devient bleutée. Lorsque la température de couleur diminue, la
couleur de la source lumineuse devient rougeâtre. A 5 500 degrés Kelvin,
la couleur de la source lumineuse est similaire celle de la lumière du soleil
à midi.
178
Annexe > Glossaire
Flash
Lumière brève et intense qui permet de créer une exposition adéquate
lorsque la luminosité est faible.
Longueur de focale
Distance entre le centre de l’objectif et son point focal (en millimètres).
Des longueurs de focale plus importantes réduisent les angles de vue et
agrandissent le sujet. Des longueurs de focale moins élevées agrandissent
les angles de vue.
Histogramme
Représentation graphique de la luminosité d’une image. L’axe des
abscisses représente la luminosité et l’axe des ordonnées le nombre de
pixels. Des points à l’extrême gauche (trop sombre) ou à l’extrême droite
(trop clair) signifient que la photo n’est pas correctement exposée.
H.264 / MPEG-4
Format vidéo à compression élevée mis au point par les organismes
internationaux de normalisation ISO-IEC et ITU-T. Ce codec permet
d’obtenir une bonne qualité vidéo avec des débits binaires faibles
développés par la Joint Video Team (JVT).
EV (Valeur d’exposition)
Ensemble des combinaisons de vitesses d’obturation et d’ouverture de
l’objectif de l’appareil photo pour une même exposition.
Compensation EV
Cette fonctionnalité permet de régler rapidement la valeur d’exposition
mesurée par l’appareil photo, selon des incréments restreints, afin
d’améliorer l’exposition des photos.
Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format)
Spécification créée par la Japan Electronics and Information Technology
Industries Association (JEITA) qui définit le format de fichiers pour les
appareils photo.
Exposition
Quantité de lumière atteignant le capteur de l’appareil photo. L’exposition
est contrôlée par la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture et la
sensibilité ISO.
179
Annexe > Glossaire
Mesure de l’exposition
La mesure de l’exposition correspond à la manière dont l’appareil photo
mesure la quantité de lumière nécessaire à la définition de l’exposition.
MF (Mise au point manuelle)
Système qui permet d’effectuer une mise au point manuelle sur le sujet à
travers l’objectif de l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez utiliser la bague de mise
au point en vue de la prise de vue d’un sujet.
MJPEG (Motion JPEG)
Format vidéo avec une compression d’images JPEG.
Capteur d’images
Partie physique de l’appareil photo qui comporte une cellule
photosensible pour chaque pixel de l’image. Chaque cellule photosensible
enregistre la valeur de la luminosité d’une exposition. Il existe deux types
de capteurs : CCD (Charge-Coupled Device) et CMOS (Complementary
Metal Oxide Semiconductor).
Adresse IP (protocole Internet)
Une adresse IP est un nombre unique affecté à chacun des appareils
raccordés à Internet.
Sensibilité ISO
Sensibilité de l’appareil photo à la lumière, mesurée d’après la sensibilité
du film utilisé dans un appareil photo à pellicule. A une sensibilité ISO
élevée, la vitesse d’obturation de l’appareil photo est plus grande, ce qui
réduit le flou causé par le bougé de l’appareil ou par une faible luminosité.
Toutefois, avec une sensibilité plus élevée, le risque de parasites est
également plus grand.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
Méthode de compression des images numériques avec pertes. Les images
JPEG sont compressées afin de réduire la taille de leur fichier avec une
dégradation minimale de la résolution.
180
Annexe > Glossaire
PAL (Phase Alternate Line)
Norme d’encodage couleur vidéo utilisée dans de nombreux pays
d’Afrique, d’Asie, d’Europe et du Moyen-Orient.
Qualité
Expression du taux de compression d’une image numérique. Lorsque la
qualité de l’image est élevée, le taux de compression est bas et la taille du
fichier plus importante.
RAW (données brutes CCD)
Données originales non traitées, capturées directement par le capteur
d’images de l’appareil photo. La balance des blancs, le contraste, la
saturation, la netteté et d’autres données peuvent être modifiées avec le
logiciel de retouche avant que l’image ne soit compressée dans un format
de fichier standard.
Résolution
Nombre de pixels d’une image numérique. Les images à résolution élevée
comportent plus de pixels et présentent généralement davantage de
détails que les images avec une faible résolution.
Parasite (ou bruit)
Problème d’affichage des pixels, au niveau de leur emplacement ou de leur
clarté, sur une image numérique. Des parasites peuvent apparaître si les
photos sont prises avec une sensibilité trop élevée ou avec un réglage de
sensibilité automatique dans un environnement sombre.
NFC (Near Field Communication)
La communication NFC est une technologie de communication sans-fil à
courte portée. Vous pouvez utiliser des appareils compatibles NFC pour
activer des fonctions ou échanger des données avec d’autres appareils.
NTSC (National Television System Committee)
Norme d’encodage couleur vidéo habituellement utilisée au Japon, en
Amérique du Nord, aux Philippines, en Amérique du Sud, en Corée du Sud
et à Taïwan.
Zoom optique
Zoom qui permet d’agrandir les images à l’aide de l’objectif sans dégrader
la qualité des images.
181
Annexe > Glossaire
Vitesse d’obturation
La vitesse d’obturation est définie par la durée nécessaire à l’ouverture et à
la fermeture de l’obturateur. Du point de vue de la luminosité d’une photo,
la vitesse d’obturation constitue un facteur important, car elle contrôle
la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers l’ouverture avant d’atteindre
le capteur d’images. Par ailleurs, une vitesse d’obturation rapide accorde
moins de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer. La photo devient plus sombre
et immobilise un sujet en mouvement plus facilement.
sRGB (RGB standard)
Norme internationale de l’espace colorimétrique établie par la CEI
(Commission électrotechnique internationale). Elle est définie d’après
l’espace colorimétrique des écrans informatiques et est également utilisée
comme espace colorimétrique standard pour Exif.
Vignettage
Réduction de la luminosité ou de la saturation d’une image à sa périphérie
(bords externes). Le vignettage permet de mettre en évidence les sujets
positionnés au centre de l’image.
Balance des blancs (équilibre des couleurs)
Réglage de l’intensité des couleurs (généralement les couleurs primaires
comme le rouge, le vert et le bleu) d’une image. La balance des blancs a
pour but d’obtenir un rendu fidèle des couleurs.
Wi-Fi
La technologie Wi-Fi permet aux appareils électroniques d’échanger des
données sans fil via un réseau.
WPS (configuration Wi-Fi protégée)
WPS est une technologie permettant de sécuriser les réseaux domestiques
sans fil.
182
Annexe
Accessoires en option
Les articles suivants vous sont proposés en option :
Objectif, Flash externe, Batterie rechargeable, Chargeur de batterie, Sac
de transport de l’appareil photo, Étui de l’appareil photo, Carte mémoire,
Filtre, Câble USB, Câble HDMI, Dragonne
• Pour connaître le type et la disponibilité, et obtenir une image, des
accessoires, rendez-vous sur le site Web de Samsung.
• Avant tout achat d’accessoire, vérifiez qu’il est bien compatible avec l’appareil
photo. GPS10 et EM10 sont incompatibles avec l’appareil photo.
• Utilisez uniquement des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Samsung
décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages causés par l’utilisation
d’accessoires fournis par d’autres fabricants.
183
Annexe
A
Accessoires en option
Mise en place du flash 50
Présentation du flash 49
Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 153
Agrandissement 105
Appareil photo
Connexion à l’ordinateur 147
Connexion en tant que disque
amovible 147
Déconnexion (Windows) 148
Disposition 29
Assistant photo 72
B
Balance des blancs 70
Batterie
Attention 162
En charge 34
Insérer 33
Bracketing 85
C
Caractéristiques de l’appareil
photo 171
Carte mémoire
Attention 159
Insérer 33
Centre de service après-vente 168
Connexion mobile 31
Contenu du coffret 28
D
Date et heure 142
Diaporama 105
E
Effet yeux rouges 89
En charge 34
Entretien 156
Espace colorimétrique 136
F
Fichiers
Protection 103
Suppression 103
Type de photo 68
Type de vidéo 98
Filtre intelligent
Mode de prise de vue 94
Mode Lecture 112
Flash
Intensité 89
Nombre guide 26
Options du Flash 88
Prise de vue avec flash indirect 26
Fondu 99
H
Home Monitor+ 127
I
Icônes
Mode de prise de vue 41
Mode Lecture 43
i-Launcher 151
L
Longueur de focale 20
Luminosité écran 141
M
Mesure de l’exposition 90
Miniatures 101
Mise au point automatique 73
Mise au point avec suivi 77
MobileLink 121
Mode Economie d’énergie 142
Mode Meilleure photo 61
Mode Panorama 62
Modes de prise de vue
Automatique 52
Enregistrement 63
Intelligent 60
Manuel 58
Priorité d’ouverture 56
Priorité vitesse 57
Programme 54
Index
184
Annexe > Index N
NFC (Partage par contact) 118
Nombre f 15 O
Objectifs
Déverrouillage 46
Disposition 45
Marquages 48
Verrouillage 46
Ouverture 15, 19 P
Panneau intelligent 38
Paramètres 141
Photos
Affichage sur l’appareil photo 101
Agrandissement 105
Options de prise de vue 67
Retouche 109
Posture 13
Prise de vue 83
Profondeur de champ (DOF) 16, 21 R
Réglage de l’image
Réglage des photos 110
Retouche de visages 111
Règle des tiers 23
Remote Viewfinder 125
Réseau sans fil 114
Résolution
Mode Lecture 110
Mode Prise de vue (photo) 67
Mode Prise de vue (vidéo) 97
Retardateur 85
Retouche de visages 111
Rotation 109
S
Samsung Link 131
Sauvegarde automatique 129
Sensibilité ISO 69
Stabilisation optique de l’image
(OIS) 82 T
Téléviseur 146
Transfert de fichiers
Mac 148
Windows 147
Type d’affichage 44 V
Valeur d’exposition (EV) 15, 95
Vidéo 142
Enregistrement 63
Options 97
Prise de vue en cours 108
Visionnage 107
Vitesse d’obturation 17, 19
185
Pour les utilisateurs résidant en France
Service Consommateur
Contact téléphonique :
Du lundi au samedi de 9 h à 20 h
01 48 63 00 00
Adresse postale :
Samsung Service Consommateurs
BP 200
93404 SAINT OUEN CEDEX
186
Pour les utilisateurs résidant au Canada
SERVICE À LA CLIENTÈLE
Téléphone :
Du lundi au vendredi de 8 h 30 à 20 h (heure normale de l'Est)
1 800 726-7864
Adresse postale :
Samsung Electronics Canada Inc.
55 Standish Court, 10th Floor
Mississauga ON
L5R 4B2
Pour toute question ou demande de service après-vente, veuillez consulter les
conditions de garantie accompagnant votre produit ou rendez-vous sur le
www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca.
Click a topic This user manual includes detailed usage instructions for
your camera. Please read this manual thoroughly.
USER
MANUAL
Basic troubleshooting
Basic functions
Playback/Editing
Appendixes
Quick reference
Extended functions
Wireless network
Index
Contents
Shooting options
Settings
WB35F/WB36F/WB37F
1
Warning—situations that could cause injury to yourself or others
Do not disassemble or attempt to repair your camera.
You can damage the camera and expose yourself to the risk of an electric shock.
Do not use your camera near flammable or explosive gases and liquids.
This may cause a fire or explosion.
Do not insert flammable materials into the camera or store these materials
near the camera.
This may cause a fire or electric shock.
Do not handle your camera with wet hands.
This may result in an electric shock.
Prevent damage to subjects’ eyesight.
Do not use the flash in close proximity (closer than 1 m/3 ft) to people or animals.
If you use the flash too close to your subject’s eyes, you can cause temporary or
permanent eyesight damage.
Keep your camera away from small children and pets.
Keep your camera and all accessories out of the reach of small children and animals.
Small parts may cause choking or serious injury if swallowed. Moving parts and
accessories may present physical dangers as well.
Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight or high temperatures for an
extended period of time.
Prolonged exposure to sunlight or extreme temperatures can cause permanent
damage to your camera’s internal components.
Health and safety information
Always comply with the following precautions and usage tips to avoid dangerous situations and ensure peak performance of your camera.
2
Health and safety information
Avoid covering the camera or charger with blankets or clothes.
The camera may overheat, which may distort the camera or cause a fire.
Do not handle the power supply cord or the charger during a thunderstorm.
This may result in electric shock.
If liquid or foreign objects enter your camera, immediately disconnect all
power sources, such as the battery or charger, and then contact a Samsung
service center.
Comply with any regulations that restrict the use of a camera in a certain area.
• Avoid interference with other electronic devices.
• Turn off the camera when in an aircraft. Your camera can cause interference with
aircraft equipment. Follow all airline regulations and turn off your camera when
directed by airline personnel.
• Turn off the camera near medical equipment. Your camera can interfere with
medical equipment in hospitals or health care facilities. Follow all regulations,
posted warnings, and directions from medical personnel.
Avoid interference with pacemakers.
Maintain a safe distance between this camera and all pacemakers to avoid potential
interference, as recommended by the manufacturer and research groups. If you
have any reason to suspect that your camera is interfering with a pacemaker
or other medical device, turn off the camera immediately and contact the
manufacturer of the pacemaker or medical device for guidance.
3
Health and safety information
Caution—situations that could cause damage to your camera or other
equipment
Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period
of time.
Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your
camera.
Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement
batteries. Do not damage or heat the battery.
Inauthentic, damaged, or heated batteries may cause a fire or personal injury.
Use only Samsung-approved batteries, chargers, cables, and accessories.
• Using unauthorized batteries, chargers, cables, or accessories can cause batteries
to explode, damage your camera, or cause injury.
• Samsung is not responsible for damage or injuries caused by unapproved
batteries, chargers, cables, or accessories.
Use the battery only for its intended purpose.
Misusing the battery may cause a fire or electric shock.
Do not touch the flash while it fires.
The flash is very hot when fired and may burn your skin.
When you use the AC charger, turn off the camera before you disconnect the
power to the AC charger.
Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock.
Disconnect the charger from the wall socket when not in use.
Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock.
Do not use a damaged power supply cord, plug, or loose outlet when you
charge batteries.
This may cause a fire or electric shock.
Do not allow the AC charger to come in contact with the +/- terminals on the
battery.
This may cause a fire or electric shock.
4
Health and safety information
Do not drop or subject the camera to strong impacts.
Doing so may damage the screen or external or internal components.
Exercise caution when you connect cables or adapters and install batteries and
memory cards.
If you force the connectors, improperly connect cables, or improperly install
batteries and memory cards, you can damage ports, connectors, and accessories.
Keep cards with magnetic strips away from the camera case.
Information stored on the card may be damaged or erased.
Never use a damaged charger, battery, or memory card.
This may result in electric shock or camera malfunction or cause a fire.
Do not place the camera in or near magnetic fields.
Doing so may cause the camera to malfunction.
Do not use the camera if the screen is damaged.
If the glass or acrylic parts are broken, visit a Samsung Electronics Service Center to
have the camera repaired.
Check that the camera is operating properly before use.
The manufacturer takes no responsibility for any loss of files or damage that may
result from camera malfunction or improper use.
You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera.
If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not
responsible for any loss of data.
Avoid interference with other electronic devices.
Your camera emits radio frequency (RF) signals that may interfere with unshielded
or improperly shielded electronic equipment, such as pacemakers, hearing aids,
medical devices, and other electronic devices in homes or vehicles. Consult the
manufacturers of your electronic devices to solve any interference problems you
experience. To prevent unwanted interference, use only Samsung-approved devices
or accessories.
Use your camera in the normal position.
Avoid contact with your camera’s internal antenna.
Data transference and your responsibilities
• Data transferred via WLAN can be hacked, so avoid transferring sensitive data in
public areas or on open networks.
• The camera manufacturer is not liable for any data transfers that infringe on
copyrights, trademarks, intellectual property laws, or public decency ordinances.
5
Copyright information
• Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of the
Microsoft Corporation.
• Mac and Apple App Store are registered trademarks of the Apple
Corporation.
• Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google, Inc.
• microSD™, microSDHC™, and microSDXC™ are registered trademarks of the
SD Association.
• Wi-Fi®
, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered
trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
• Trademarks and trade names used in this manual are the property of their
respective owners.
• Camera specifications or contents of this manual may be changed
without prior notice due to an upgrade of the camera's functions.
• We recommend using your camera within the country where you
purchased it.
• Use this camera responsibly and adhere to all laws and regulations
concerning its use.
• You are not allowed to reuse or distribute any part of this manual
without prior permission.
Outline of the User Manual
Basic functions 13
Learn about what is in the product box, the camera’s layout, what the
icons mean, and basic shooting functions.
Extended functions 37
Learn how to capture a photo and record a video by selecting a mode.
Shooting options 48
Learn how to set the options in Shooting mode.
Playback/Editing 69
Learn how to play back photos or videos, and edit photos. Also, learn how
to connect your camera to your computer or TV.
Wireless network 88
Learn how to connect to wireless local area networks (WLANs) and use
functions.
Settings 105
Refer to options to configure your camera’s settings.
Appendixes 111
Get information about error messages, specifications, and maintenance.
6
Icons used in this manual
Icon Function
Additional information
Safety warnings and precautions
[ ] Camera buttons. For example, [Shutter] represents the shutter button.
( ) Page number of related information
→
The order of options or menus you must select to perform a step; for
example: Select Face Detection → Normal (represents Select Face
Detection, and then select Normal).
* Annotation
Expressions used in this manual
Pressing the shutter
• Half-press [Shutter]: Press the shutter halfway down
• Press [Shutter]: Press the shutter all the way down
Half-press [Shutter] Press [Shutter]
Subject, background, and composition
• Subject: The main object in a scene, such as a person, animal, or still life
• Background: The objects around the subject
• Composition: The combination of a subject and background
Composition
Background
Subject
Exposure (Brightness)
The amount of light that enters your camera determines the exposure. You can alter
the exposure by changing the shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO sensitivity.
By altering the exposure, your photos will be darker or lighter.
Normal exposure Overexposure (too bright)
7
Basic troubleshooting
Learn to solve common problems by setting shooting options.
The subject’s eyes
appear red.
Red eye occurs when the subject's eyes reflect light from the camera flash.
• Set the flash option to Red-eye or Red-eye Fix. (p. 52)
• If the photo has already been captured, select Red-eye Fix in Photo Editor mode. (p. 81)
Photos have dust spots. If dust particles are present in the air, you may capture them in photos when you use the flash.
• Turn off the flash or avoid capturing photos in a dusty place.
• Set ISO sensitivity options. (p. 54)
Photos are blurred. Blurring can occur if you capture photos in low light conditions or hold the camera incorrectly.
Use the OIS function or half-press [Shutter] to ensure the subject is in focus. (p. 35)
Photos are blurred when
shooting at night.
As the camera tries to let in more light, the shutter speed slows. This can make it difficult to hold the camera steady long
enough to capture a clear photo and may result in camera shake.
• Select Night in Smart mode. (p. 42)
• Turn on the flash. (p. 52)
• Set ISO sensitivity options. (p. 54)
• Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking.
Subjects come out
too dark because of
backlighting.
When the light source is behind the subject or when there is a high contrast between light and dark areas, the subject may
appear too dark.
• Avoid shooting toward the sun.
• Set the flash option to Fill in. (p. 52)
• Adjust the exposure. (p. 61)
• Set the Auto Contrast Balance (ACB) option. (p. 62)
• Set the metering option to Spot if a subject is in the center of the frame. (p. 62)
8
Quick reference
Capturing photos of people
• Smart mode > Beauty Face 42
• Red-eye/Red-eye Fix (to prevent or correct red-eye)
52
• Face Detection/Self-Portrait 58
• Smile Shot/Blink Detection 59
Capturing photos at night or in the dark
• Smart mode > Silhouette, Sunset, Night, Fireworks,
Light Trace 42
• Flash options 52
• ISO sensitivity (to adjust the sensitivity to light) 54
Capturing action photos
• Smart mode > Action Freeze 42
• Continuous, Motion Capture 65
Capturing photos of text, insects, or
flowers
• Smart mode > Macro 42
• Macro 55
Adjusting the exposure (brightness)
• ISO sensitivity (to adjust the sensitivity to light) 54
• EV (to adjust exposure) 61
• ACB (to compensate for subjects against bright
backgrounds) 62
• Metering 62
• AEB (to capture 3 photos of the same scene with
different exposures) 65
Capturing photos of scenery
• Smart mode > Landscape 42
• Magic mode > Live Panorama 44
Applying effects to photos
• Magic mode > Photo Filter 45
• Image Adjust (to adjust Sharpness, Contrast, or
Saturation) 66
Applying effects to videos
• Magic mode > Movie Filter 46
Reducing camera shake
• Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) 34
Transferring and sharing files
• Sending photos or videos to a smart phone 95
• Sending photos or videos via email 98
• Using photo or video sharing services 101
• Uploading photos to an online storage or registered
devices 103
• Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go) 93
• Viewing files as thumbnails 71
• Viewing files by category 72
• Deleting all files on the memory 74
• Viewing files as a slide show 76
• Viewing files on a TV 83
• Connecting your camera to a computer 84
• Adjusting sound and volume 107
• Adjusting the brightness of the display 108
• Changing the display language 109
• Setting the date and time 109
• Before contacting a service center 123
9
Contents
Basic functions ............................................................................................................... 13
Unpacking ................................................................................................................... 14
Camera layout............................................................................................................ 15
Using the DIRECT LINK button ............................................................................. 17
Inserting the battery and memory card ......................................................... 18
Charging the battery and turning on your camera ..................................... 19
Charging the battery ............................................................................................. 19
Turning on your camera ........................................................................................ 19
Performing the initial setup ................................................................................ 20
Learning icons ........................................................................................................... 22
Using the Home screen .......................................................................................... 23
Accessing the Home screen .................................................................................. 23
Icons on the Home screen .................................................................................... 24
Selecting options or menus .................................................................................. 27
Setting the display and sound ............................................................................. 29
Setting the display type ........................................................................................ 29
Setting the sound ................................................................................................... 30
Capturing photos ..................................................................................................... 31
Zooming .................................................................................................................. 32
Reducing camera shake (OIS) ............................................................................... 34
Tips for getting a clearer photo ........................................................................... 35
Extended functions ..................................................................................................... 37
Using Basic modes ................................................................................................... 38
Using the Smart Auto mode ................................................................................. 38
Using the Program mode ...................................................................................... 39
Using the Smart Movie mode .............................................................................. 40
Using the Movie mode ........................................................................................ 41
Using the Smart mode .......................................................................................... 42
Using the Album ..................................................................................................... 43
Using the Settings menu ....................................................................................... 43
Using Magic modes ................................................................................................. 44
Using the Live Panorama mode ........................................................................... 44
Using the Photo Filter mode ................................................................................ 45
Using the Movie Filter mode ............................................................................... 46
Editing a photo ....................................................................................................... 47
10
Contents
Shooting options .......................................................................................................... 48
Selecting a resolution and quality ..................................................................... 49
Selecting a resolution ............................................................................................ 49
Selecting a photo quality ...................................................................................... 50
Using the timer .......................................................................................................... 51
Shooting in the dark ................................................................................................ 52
Preventing red-eye ................................................................................................. 52
Setting a flash option ............................................................................................. 52
Adjusting the ISO sensitivity ................................................................................. 54
Changing the camera’s focus ............................................................................... 55
Using macro ............................................................................................................ 55
Using auto focus ..................................................................................................... 55
Adjusting the focus area ....................................................................................... 56
Using Face Detection .............................................................................................. 58
Detecting faces ....................................................................................................... 58
Capturing a self portrait shot .............................................................................. 58
Capturing a smile shot .......................................................................................... 59
Detecting eye blinking ......................................................................................... 59
Tips for detecting faces ......................................................................................... 60
Adjusting brightness and color ........................................................................... 61
Adjusting the exposure manually (EV) ............................................................... 61
Compensating for backlighting (ACB) ................................................................ 62
Changing the metering option ............................................................................ 62
Selecting a White Balance setting ....................................................................... 63
Using burst modes ................................................................................................... 65
Adjusting images ..................................................................................................... 66
Reducing the sound of the zoom ....................................................................... 67
Available shooting options by shooting mode ............................................. 68
11
Contents
Playback/Editing ........................................................................................................... 69
Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode ................................................. 70
Starting Playback mode ........................................................................................ 70
Viewing photos ....................................................................................................... 74
Playing a video ........................................................................................................ 77
Editing a photo .......................................................................................................... 78
Resizing photos ...................................................................................................... 78
Rotating a photo .................................................................................................... 78
Applying Smart Filter effects ................................................................................ 79
Adjusting brightness, contrast, saturation or dark subjects ........................... 80
Adjusting portrait photos ..................................................................................... 80
Editing a video ........................................................................................................... 82
Trimming a video ................................................................................................... 82
Capturing an image from video .......................................................................... 82
Viewing files on a TV ............................................................................................... 83
Transferring files to a computer .......................................................................... 84
Transferring files to your Windows OS computer ............................................. 84
Transferring files to your Mac OS computer ..................................................... 85
System Requirements ............................................................................................. 87
Wireless network .......................................................................................................... 88
Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings ....................... 89
Connecting to a WLAN .......................................................................................... 89
Using the login browser ........................................................................................ 90
Network connection tips ...................................................................................... 91
Entering text ............................................................................................................ 92
Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go) ...................................................................... 93
Using NFC features in Shooting mode ............................................................... 93
Using NFC features in Playback mode(Photo Beam) ........................................ 93
Using NFC features in Wi-Fi mode ....................................................................... 93
Saving files to a smart phone automatically .................................................. 94
Sending photos or videos to a smart phone .................................................. 95
Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release ........................................ 96
Sending photos or videos via email .................................................................. 98
Changing email settings ....................................................................................... 98
Sending photos or videos via email .................................................................. 100
Using photo or video sharing services ........................................................... 101
Accessing a sharing service ................................................................................ 101
Uploading photos or videos ............................................................................... 101
Using Samsung Link to send files ..................................................................... 103
Viewing photos or videos on devices that support Samsung Link .............. 103
12
Contents
Settings ........................................................................................................................... 105
Settings menu ......................................................................................................... 106
Accessing the settings menu ............................................................................. 106
Sound ..................................................................................................................... 107
Display .................................................................................................................... 107
Connectivity .......................................................................................................... 108
General ................................................................................................................... 109
Appendixes ................................................................................................................... 111
Error messages ........................................................................................................ 112
Camera maintenance ............................................................................................ 113
Cleaning your camera .......................................................................................... 113
Using or storing the camera ............................................................................... 114
About memory cards ........................................................................................... 115
About the battery ................................................................................................. 118
Upgrading the firmware ...................................................................................... 122
Before contacting a service center................................................................... 123
Camera specifications ........................................................................................... 126
Glossary ..................................................................................................................... 130
Index ........................................................................................................................... 135
Basic functions
Learn about what is in the product box, the camera’s layout, what the icons mean, and basic shooting functions.
Unpacking ……………………………………… 14
Camera layout …………………………………… 15
Using the DIRECT LINK button ………………… 17
Inserting the battery and memory card ……… 18
Charging the battery and turning on
your camera ……………………………………… 19
Charging the battery …………………………… 19
Turning on your camera ……………………… 19
Performing the initial setup …………………… 20
Learning icons …………………………………… 22
Using the Home screen ………………………… 23
Accessing the Home screen …………………… 23
Icons on the Home screen ……………………… 24
Selecting options or menus …………………… 27
Setting the display and sound ………………… 29
Setting the display type ………………………… 29
Setting the sound ……………………………… 30
Capturing photos ……………………………… 31
Zooming ……………………………………… 32
Reducing camera shake (OIS) ………………… 34
Tips for getting a clearer photo ………………… 35
Basic functions 14
Unpacking
The following items are included in your product box.
Camera AC adapter/USB cable
Rechargeable battery Strap
Quick Start Guide
Optional accessories
Camera case A/V cable
Battery charger Memory card/Memory card adapter
• The illustrations may differ slightly from the items shipped with your product.
• The items included in the box may differ depending on the model.
• You can purchase optional accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center.
Samsung is not responsible for any problems caused by using unauthorized
accessories.
Basic functions 15
Camera layout
Before you start, familiarize yourself with your camera’s parts and their functions.
Flash
AF-assist light/Timer lamp
Lens
Speaker Shutter button
Microphone
Power button
Internal antenna*
* Avoid contact with the internal antenna while using a
wireless network.
Tripod mount
USB and A/V port
Accepts USB cable and A/V cable
Battery chamber cover
Insert a memory card and battery
Attaching the strap
Camera layout
Basic functions 16
Button Description
Access the Home screen. (p. 23)
Access options or menus.
Enter Playback mode.
Delete files in Playback mode.
Button Description
Basic functions Other functions
Change the display option. Move up
Change the macro option. Move down
Change the flash option. Move left
Change the timer option. Move right
Confirm the highlighted option or menu.
Buttons
(See the table below)
Status lamp
• Blinking: When the camera is saving a photo
or video, being read by a computer, when the
image is out of focus, or when the camera is
connecting to WLAN or sending a photo
• Steady: When the camera is connected to a
computer, charging the battery, or when the
image is in focus
Display
Zoom button
• In Shooting mode: Zoom in or out
• In Playback mode: Zoom in on part of a photo
or view files as thumbnails, or adjust the volume
DIRECT LINK button
Start a preset Wi-Fi function. (p. 17)
NFC tag
Launch an NFC feature by reading a tag
from an NFC-enabled device. (p. 93)
Camera layout
Basic functions 17
Using the DIRECT LINK button
You can turn on the Wi-Fi feature conveniently with [ ].
Press [ ] to activate the Wi-Fi function that you have designated.
Press [ ] again to return to the previous mode.
Setting a DIRECT LINK button option
You can select a Wi-Fi function to launch when you press [ ].
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Select General → DIRECT LINK (Wi-Fi Button).
4 Select a Wi-Fi feature. (p. 110)
Basic functions 18
Inserting the battery and memory card
Learn how to insert the battery and an optional memory card into the camera.
Removing the battery and memory card
Rechargeable battery
Battery lock Slide the lock to the right to
release the battery.
Memory card
Push the card gently until it disengages
from the camera, and then pull it out of
the slot.
Insert a memory card with the goldcolored
contacts facing up.
Insert the battery with the Samsung
logo facing up.
Basic functions 19
Charging the battery and turning on your camera
Turning on your camera
Press [ ] to turn your camera on or off.
• The initial setup screen appears when you turn on
the camera for the first time. (p. 20)
Turning on your camera in Playback mode
Press [ ]. The camera turns on and immediately
accesses Playback mode.
If you turn on your camera by pressing and holding [ ], the camera does not
emit any sounds.
Charging the battery
Before you use the camera for the first time, you must charge the battery. Plug the
small end of the USB cable into your camera, and then plug the other end of the
USB cable into the AC adapter.
Status lamp
• Red light on: Charging
• Red light off: Fully charged
Use only the AC adapter and USB cable supplied with your camera. If you use
another AC adapter (such as SAC-48), the camera battery may not charge or work
properly.
Basic functions 20
Performing the initial setup
When you turn on your camera for the first time, the initial setup screen appears. Follow the steps below to configure the camera’s basic settings. The language is preset for the
country or region where the camera is sold. You can change the language as desired.
3 Press [ ] to select Date/Time Set, and then press [ ] or [ ].
Cancel Set
Date/Time Set
Year Month Day Hour Min DST
• The screen may differ depending on the language you selected.
4 Press [ / ] to select an item.
5 Press [ / ] to set the date, time, and daylight-saving time, and
then press [ ].
1 Press [ ] to select Time Zone, and then press [ ] or [ ].
2 Press [ / ] to select a time zone, and then press [ ].
Home
Cancel Set
London
Performing the initial setup
Basic functions 21
6 Press [ ] to select Date Type, and then press [ ] or [ ].
7 Press [ / ] to select a date type, and then press [ ].
8 Press [ ] to select Time Type, and then press [ ] or [ ].
9 Press [ / ] to select a time type, and then press [ ].
10 Press [ ] to finish the initial setup.
Basic functions 22
Learning icons
The icons the camera displays on the screen change according to the mode you select or the options you set. If you change a shooting option, the corresponding icon will blink
briefly in yellow.
3 Shooting information
Icon Description
Current date
Current time
Available number of photos
Memory card inserted
• : Fully charged
• : Partially charged
• : Empty (Recharge)
• : Charging (Connected with the
charger)
Aperture value
Shutter speed
Available recording time
Auto focus frame
Camera shake
Zoom indicator
Photo resolution when the
Intelli zoom is on
Zoom ratio
2 Shooting option (right)
Icon Description
Intelli zoom on
Continuous auto focus activated
Photo resolution
Video resolution
Metering
Frame rate (per second)
Flash
Zoom Mute on
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS)
Focus Option
Image adjustment (sharpness, contrast,
and saturation)
Timer
1 Shooting options (left)
Icon Description
Shooting mode
Exposure value adjusted
ISO sensitivity
White balance
Face detection
Burst option
AutoShare On
1
2
3
Basic functions 23
Using the Home screen
You can select a shooting mode or access the settings menu by selecting the icons on the Home screen.
No. Description
1
Current Home screen
• Rotate [Zoom] to the left or right to switch to another Home screen.
• Press [ ] to scroll to the Home screen name, and then press [ / ]
to switch to another Home screen.
• Press [ / ] repeatedly to switch to another Home screen.
2
Mode icons
• Press [ / / / ] to scroll to a desired mode, and then press [ ]
to access the mode.
Accessing the Home screen
In Shooting or Playback mode, press [ ]. Press [ ] again to return to the previous
mode.
Smart Auto Program Movie
Magic Basic Wi-Fi
Smart Album Settings
Smart
Movie 2
1
Back Page Move
Using the Home screen
Basic functions 24
Icon Description
MobileLink: Send photos or videos to a smart phone. (p. 95)
Remote Viewfinder: Use a smart phone as a remote shutter release
and see a preview of an image from your camera on your smart phone.
(p. 96)
Email: Send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. (p. 98)
SNS & Cloud: Upload photos or videos to file sharing services. (p. 101)
Samsung Link: View files on a Samsung Link device connected to the
same AP. (p. 103)
Icons on the Home screen
Icon Description
Smart Auto: Capture a photo with a scene mode selected
automatically by the camera. (p. 38)
Program: Capture a photo with settings you have adjusted manually.
(p. 39)
Smart Movie: Record a video with a scene mode selected
automatically by the camera. (p. 40)
Movie: Record a video. (p. 41)
Smart: Capture a photo with options that are preset for a specific scene.
(p. 42)
Album: View files as thumbnails. (p. 71)
Settings: Adjust settings to match your preferences. (p. 105)
Using the Home screen
Basic functions 25
Icon Description
Live Panorama: Capture and combine a series of photos to create a
panoramic image. (p. 44)
Photo Filter: Capture a photo with various filter effects. (p. 45)
Movie Filter: Record a video with various filter effects. (p. 46)
Photo Editor: Edit photos with various effects. (p. 78)
Using the Home screen
Basic functions 26
5 Scroll to the desired wallpaper, and then press [ ].
• If you select a photo you have captured, you can set a specified area as
wallpaper. Rotate [Zoom] to the left or right to reduce or enlarge the area.
Press [ / / / ] to move the area.
6 Press [ ] to save.
• If you select a photo you have captured, press [ ], and then select Yes.
You can also set the photo you are viewing as wallpaper by pressing [ ],
and then selecting Set Wallpaper in Playback mode.
Setting Wallpaper
Set wallpaper for the Home screen with the desired image.
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Select Display → Wallpapers.
4 Select an option.
Option Description
Wallpaper Gallery Select the desired wallpaper from the default gallery.
Album Set a photo you have captured as a wallpaper.
Basic functions 27
Selecting options or menus
To select an option or a menu, press [ ], and then press [ / / / ] or [ ].
Going back to the previous menu
Press [ ] to go back to the previous menu.
Half-press [Shutter] to return to Shooting mode.
1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [ ].
2 Scroll to an option or a menu.
• To move up or down, press [ ] or [ ].
• To move left or right, press [ ] or [ ].
3 Press [ ] to confirm the highlighted option or menu.
Selecting options or menus
Basic functions 28
For example, to select a White Balance option in Program mode:
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Press [ ].
Exit Select
AutoShare
EV
White Balance
ISO
Flash
Focus
4 Press [ / ] to select White Balance, and then press [ ] or [ ].
Exit Select
AutoShare
EV
White Balance
ISO
Flash
Focus
5 Press [ / ] to select a White Balance option.
Back Set
White Balance : Daylight
6 Press [ ] to save your settings.
Basic functions 29
Setting the display type
You can select a display type for the Shooting or Playback mode. Each type displays
different shooting or playback information. See the table below.
Press [ ] repeatedly to change the display type.
Mode Display type
Shooting • Hide all information about shooting options.
• Show all information about shooting options.
Playback
• Hide all information about the current file.
• Hide all information about the current file except basic information.
• Show all information about the current file.
Setting the option display view
You can hide or show the option display appearing in some modes.
Press [ ] repeatedly.
• Hide the option display.
• Show the option display.
Option display
Panel off
Beauty Face
▲ An example in Smart mode
Setting the display and sound
Learn how to change the basic display information and sound settings.
Setting the display and sound
Basic functions 30
Setting the sound
Turn the sound your camera emits when you perform functions on or off.
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Select Sounds → Beep Sound.
4 Select an option.
Option Description
Off The camera does not emit any sounds.
On The camera emits sounds.
Basic functions 31
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Align your subject in the frame.
4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus.
• A green frame means the subject is in focus.
• A red frame means the subject is out of focus.
5 Press [Shutter] to capture a photo.
6 Press [ ] to view the captured photo.
• To delete the photo, press [ ], and then select Yes.
7 Press [ ] to return to Shooting mode.
See page 35 for tips to get clearer photos.
Capturing photos
Learn how to capture photos easily and quickly in Smart Auto mode.
Capturing photos
Basic functions 32
Zooming
You can capture close-up photos by adjusting the zoom.
Zoom out Zoom in
Zoom ratio
When you rotate the zoom button, the zoom ratio shown on the screen may
change inconsistently.
Digital zoom
Digital zoom is supported by default in Shooting mode. If you zoom in on a subject
in Shooting mode and the zoom indicator is in the digital range, your camera is
using Digital zoom. By using both the 12X Optical zoom and 2X Digital zoom, you
can zoom in up to 24 times.
Zoom indicator
Optical range
Digital range
• Depending on the shooting options you selected, Digital zoom may not be
available.
• If you capture a photo with Digital zoom, the photo quality may be lower than
normal.
Capturing photos
Basic functions 33
Intelli zoom
If the zoom indicator is in the Intelli range, your camera is using Intelli zoom. Photo
resolution varies according to the zoom ratio if you use Intelli zoom. By using both
Optical zoom and Intelli zoom, you can zoom in up to 24 times.
Zoom indicator
Optical range
Intelli range
Photo resolution
when the Intelli
zoom is on
• Depending on the shooting options you selected, Intelli zoom may not be
available.
• Intelli zoom helps you capture a photo with less quality deterioration than
Digital zoom. However, the photo quality may be lower than when you use
Optical zoom.
• Intelli zoom is available only when you set a 4:3 resolution ratio. If you set
another resolution ratio with Intelli zoom on, Intelli zoom will be turned off
automatically.
• Intelli zoom is always on in Smart Auto mode.
Setting Intelli zoom
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select Intelli Zoom.
3 Select an option.
Icon Description
Off: The Intelli zoom is deactivated.
On: The Intelli zoom is activated.
Capturing photos
Basic functions 34
Reducing camera shake (OIS)
Reduce camera shake optically in Shooting mode.
Before correction After correction
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select OIS.
3 Select an option.
Icon Description
Off: OIS is deactivated.
On: OIS is activated.
• OIS may not function properly when:
- you move your camera to follow a moving subject
- you use Digital zoom
- there is too much camera shake
- the shutter speed is slow (for example, when you capture night scenes)
- the battery is low
- you capture a close-up shot
• If you use the OIS function with a tripod, your images may be blurred by the
vibration of the OIS sensor. Deactivate the OIS function when you use a tripod.
• If the camera is hit or dropped, the display will be blurry. If this occurs, turn off
the camera, and then turn it on again.
Basic functions 35
Holding your camera correctly
Ensure nothing is blocking the lens,
flash, or microphone.
Half-pressing the shutter button
Half-press [Shutter] and adjust the focus. The camera
adjusts the focus and exposure automatically.
The camera sets the aperture value and shutter
speed automatically.
Focus frame
• Press [Shutter] to capture the photo if the
focus frame appears in green.
• Change the composition and half-press
[Shutter] again if the focus frame appears in red.
Reducing camera shake
Set the Optical Image Stabilization option to reduce camera
shake optically. (p. 34)
When is displayed
Camera shake
When you shoot in the dark, avoid setting the flash option to Slow Sync or Off.
The aperture remains open longer and it may be harder to hold the camera steady
long enough to capture a clear photo.
• Use a tripod or set the flash option to Fill in. (p. 52)
• Set ISO sensitivity options. (p. 54)
Tips for getting a clearer photo
Basic functions 36
Preventing your subject from being out of focus
It may be difficult to get your subject in focus when:
- there is little contrast between the subject and background (for example,
when your subject is wearing clothing that is similar in color to the
background)
- the light source behind the subject is too bright
- the subject is shiny or reflective
- the subject includes horizontal patterns, such as blinds
- the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame
• When you capture photos in low light
Turn on the flash.
(p. 52)
• When subjects are moving rapidly
Use the Continuous
or Motion Capture
function. (p. 65) Using the focus lock
Half-press [Shutter] to focus. When the subject is in focus, you can
reposition the frame to change the composition. When you are ready,
press [Shutter] to capture your photo.
Extended functions
Learn how to capture a photo and record a video by selecting a mode.
Using Basic modes ……………………………… 38
Using the Smart Auto mode …………………… 38
Using the Program mode ……………………… 39
Using the Smart Movie mode ………………… 40
Using the Movie mode ………………………… 41
Using the Smart mode ………………………… 42
Using the Album ……………………………… 43
Using the Settings menu ……………………… 43
Using Magic modes ……………………………… 44
Using the Live Panorama mode ……………… 44
Using the Photo Filter mode …………………… 45
Using the Movie Filter mode ………………… 46
Editing a photo ………………………………… 47
Extended functions 38
Using the Smart Auto mode
In Smart Auto mode, your camera automatically chooses the appropriate camera
settings based on the type of scene it detects. The Smart Auto mode is helpful if you
are not familiar with the camera settings for various scenes.
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Align your subject in the frame.
• The camera automatically selects a scene. An appropriate scene icon appears
at the top left of the screen. The icons are listed below.
Icon Description
Landscapes
Scenes with bright white backgrounds
Landscapes at night
Portraits at night
Landscapes with backlighting
Portraits with backlighting
Portraits
Close-up photos of objects
Close-up photos of text
Sunsets
Indoors, dark
Partially lit
Close-up with spot lighting
Portraits with spot lighting
Blue skies
Forested areas
Close-up photos of colorful subjects
Using Basic modes
Capture photos or record videos using basic modes. You can also use the Smart mode.
Using Basic modes
Extended functions 39
Icon Description
Camera is stabilized or on a tripod (when shooting in the dark)*
Actively moving subjects*
* This icon appears next to the scene icon.
4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus.
5 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo.
• If the camera does not recognize an appropriate scene mode, it uses the default
settings for the Smart Auto mode.
• Even if it detects a face, the camera may not select a portrait mode depending
on the subject's position or lighting.
• The camera may not select the correct scene depending on the shooting
conditions, such as camera shake, lighting, or distance to the subject.
• Even if you use a tripod, the camera may not detect the mode if the subject
is moving.
• The camera consumes more battery power, because it changes settings often to
select appropriate scenes.
Using the Program mode
In Program mode, you can set most options, except the shutter speed and aperture
value, which the camera sets automatically.
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Set the desired options.
• For a list of options, refer to "Shooting options". (p. 48)
4 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to
focus.
5 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo.
Using Basic modes
Extended functions 40
Using the Smart Movie mode
In Smart Movie mode, your camera automatically chooses the appropriate camera
settings based on the scene it has detected.
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Align your subject in the frame.
• The camera automatically selects a scene. An appropriate scene icon will
appear at the top left of the screen.
Icon Description
Landscapes
Sunsets
Blue skies
Forested areas
4 Press [Shutter] to start recording.
5 Press [Shutter] again to stop recording.
• If the camera does not recognize an appropriate scene mode, it uses the default
settings for Smart Movie mode.
• The camera may not select the correct scene depending on the shooting
conditions, such as camera shake, lighting, and distance to the subject.
Using Basic modes
Extended functions 41
Using the Movie mode
In Movie mode, you can customize settings to record HD videos (1280x720) of up to
20 minutes in length. The camera saves recorded videos as MP4 (H.264) files.
• H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC) is a high-compression video format established by
the international standards organizations ISO-IEC and ITU-T.
• If you use memory cards with slow write speeds, the camera may not save
videos properly. Video recordings may be corrupted or fail to play back
correctly.
• Memory cards with slow writing speeds will not support high-resolution videos.
To record high-resolution videos, use memory cards with faster write speeds.
• If you activate the Image Stabilization function while recording a video, the
camera may record the operating sound of the Image Stabilization function.
• If you use the zoom function when recording a video, the camera may record
the noise of the zoom operating. In this case, use the Zoom Mute function.
(p. 67)
• (Continuous AF): Use this function to shoot by changing composition
while automatically focusing on the center area.
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Set desired options.
• For a list of options, refer to "Shooting options". (p. 48)
4 Press [Shutter] to start recording.
• While recording a video, press [ ] once to cancel the continuous auto focus
function and once again to activate the function.
5 Press [Shutter] again to stop recording.
Using Basic modes
Extended functions 42
Pause recording
The camera allows you to temporarily pause a video while recording. With this
function, you can record separate scenes as a single video.
OK : Pause : Continuous AF Off
• Press [ ] to pause while recording.
• Press [ ] to resume.
Using the Smart mode
In Smart mode, you can capture a photo with options that are preset for a specific
scene.
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Select a scene.
Panel off
Beauty Face
Using Basic modes
Extended functions 43
Option Description
Beauty Face Capture a portrait with options to hide facial imperfections.
Landscape Capture still-life scenes and landscapes.
Macro Capture small or close-up subjects.
Action Freeze Capture subjects moving at high speed.
Silhouette Capture subjects as dark shapes against a light background.
Sunset Capture scenes at sunset, with natural-looking reds and
yellows.
Night Capture scenes at night or in low lighting (using a tripod is
recommended).
Fireworks Capture scenes with fireworks.
Light Trace Capture scenes with the light trailing in low-light conditions.
4 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to
focus.
5 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo.
Using the Album
You can view files as thumbnails.
Refer to "Viewing files as thumbnails". (p. 71)
Using the Settings menu
You can set or change the camera settings.
Refer to "Settings". (p. 105)
Extended functions 44
Using Magic modes
Capture a photo or record a video by selecting appropriate modes for various scenes or effects.
Using the Live Panorama mode
In Live Panorama mode, you can capture a wide panoramic scene in a single photo.
Capture and combine a series of photos to create a panoramic image.
Shooting example
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to
focus.
• Align the camera with the far left or the far right, or very top or bottom, of the
scene you want to capture.
4 Press and hold [Shutter] to start shooting.
5 With [Shutter] pressed, slowly move the camera in the direction that
will let it capture the rest of the panorama.
• Arrows pointing in the direction of motion are displayed, and the entire
shooting image is displayed in the preview box.
• When the viewfinder is aligned with the next scene, the camera captures the
next photo automatically.
Stability: A flatter line represents
less camera shake.
6 When you are finished, release [Shutter].
• When you have captured all the necessary shots, the camera combines them
into one panoramic photo.
Using Magic modes
Extended functions 45
• For best results when capturing panoramic photos, avoid the following:
- moving the camera too quickly or too slowly
- moving the camera too little to capture the next image
- moving the camera at irregular speeds
- shaking the camera
- shooting in dark places
- capturing moving subjects nearby
- shooting conditions where the brightness or color of light is changing
• Photos taken are automatically saved, and shooting is stopped under the
following conditions:
- if you change the shooting direction while shooting
- if you move the camera too rapidly
- if you don't move the camera
• Selecting Live Panorama mode will disable the digital and optical zoom
functions. If you select Live Panorama mode while the lens is zoomed in, the
camera automatically zooms out to the default position.
• Some shooting options are not available.
• The camera may stop shooting due to the shooting composition or movement
within the scene.
• Your camera may not capture the last scene in its entirety if you stop moving
the camera exactly where you want the scene to end. To capture the entire
scene, move your camera slightly beyond the point where you want the scene
to end.
Using the Photo Filter mode
Apply various filter effects to your photos to create unique images.
Miniature Vignetting
Fish-eye
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
Using Magic modes
Extended functions 46
3 Select an effect.
Option Description
Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in
miniature.
Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong
vignette effect of Lomo cameras.
Cross Filter Add lines that radiate outward from bright objects to
imitate the visual effect of a cross filter.
Fish-eye Distort close objects to imitate the visual effect of a
fisheye lens.
Classic Apply a black and white effect.
Retro Apply a sepia tone effect.
4 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to
focus.
5 Press [Shutter] to capture a photo.
• Depending on the option you select, the resolution may change to or less
automatically.
• To apply filter effects to saved photos, press [ ] and then select Open
Image → an image.
Using the Movie Filter mode
Apply various filter effects to your videos to create unique images.
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Select an effect.
Option Description
Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in
miniature.
Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong
vignette effect of Lomo cameras.
Fish-eye Distort close objects to imitate the visual effect of a
fisheye lens.
Classic Apply a black and white effect.
Retro Apply a sepia tone effect.
Palette Effect 1 Create a vivid look with sharp contrast and strong color.
Palette Effect 2 Make scenes clean and clear.
Palette Effect 3 Apply a soft brown tone.
Palette Effect 4 Create a cold and monotone effect.
Using Magic modes
Extended functions 47
4 Press [Shutter] to start recording.
5 Press [Shutter] again to stop recording.
• If you select Miniature, playback speed will increase.
• If you select Miniature, you cannot record sound in the video.
• Depending on the option you select, the recording resolution may change to
or less automatically.
Editing a photo
You can edit a photo in multiple ways.
Scroll to on the Home screen, and then select .
Refer to "Editing a photo". (p. 78)
Selecting a resolution and quality …………… 49
Selecting a resolution ………………………… 49
Selecting a photo quality ……………………… 50
Using the timer ………………………………… 51
Shooting in the dark …………………………… 52
Preventing red-eye …………………………… 52
Setting a flash option …………………………… 52
Adjusting the ISO sensitivity …………………… 54
Changing the camera’s focus …………………… 55
Using macro …………………………………… 55
Using auto focus ……………………………… 55
Adjusting the focus area ……………………… 56
Using Face Detection …………………………… 58
Detecting faces ………………………………… 58
Capturing a self portrait shot ………………… 58
Capturing a smile shot ………………………… 59
Detecting eye blinking ………………………… 59
Tips for detecting faces ………………………… 60
Adjusting brightness and color ………………… 61
Adjusting the exposure manually (EV) ………… 61
Compensating for backlighting (ACB) ………… 62
Changing the metering option ………………… 62
Selecting a White Balance setting ……………… 63
Using burst modes ……………………………… 65
Adjusting images………………………………… 66
Reducing the sound of the zoom ……………… 67
Available shooting options by shooting mode … 68
Shooting options
Learn how to set the options in Shooting mode.
Shooting options 49
Selecting a resolution and quality
Learn how to change the image resolution and quality settings.
Setting the video resolution
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select Movie Size.
3 Select an option.
Icon Description
1280 X 720: HD files to play back on an HDTV.
640 X 480: SD files to play back on an analog TV.
For Sharing: Post to a sharing service via a wireless network
(30 seconds maximum).
Selecting a resolution
As you increase the resolution, your photo or video will include more pixels, so it
can be printed on larger paper or displayed on a larger screen. When you use a high
resolution, the file size will also increase.
Setting the photo resolution
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select Photo Size.
3 Select an option.
Icon Description
4608 X 3456: Print on A1 paper.
4608 X 3072: Print on A1 paper in wide ratio (3:2).
4608 X 2592 : Print on A1 paper in panorama ratio (16:9) or play
back on an HDTV.
3648 X 2736: Print on A2 paper.
2592 X 1944: Print on A4 paper.
1984 X 1488: Print on A5 paper.
1920 X 1080: Print on A5 paper in panorama ratio (16:9) or play
back on an HDTV.
1024 X 768: Attach to an email.
Selecting a resolution and quality
Shooting options 50
Selecting a photo quality
Set a photo quality setting. Higher image quality settings will result in larger file
sizes. The camera compresses and saves the photos you capture in the JPEG format.
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select Quality.
3 Select an option.
Icon Description
Super Fine: Capture photos in super high quality.
Fine: Capture photos in high quality.
Normal: Capture photos in normal quality.
Shooting options 51
Using the timer
Learn how to set the timer to delay shooting.
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
Exit Set
Off
10 sec
2 sec
Double
Timer
2 Select an option.
Icon Description
Off: The timer is not active.
10 sec: Capture a photo after a 10-second delay.
2 sec: Capture a photo after a 2-second delay.
Double: Capture one photo after a 10-second delay and another
photo after a 2-second delay.
Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions.
3 Press [Shutter] to start the timer.
• The AF-assist light/timer lamp blinks. The camera will automatically capture a
photo after the specified time has elapsed.
• Press [Shutter] or [ ] to cancel the timer.
• Depending on the Face Detection options you selected, the timer function may
not be available.
• Timer options are not available if you set burst options.
• In some modes, you can also set the timer option by pressing [ ], and
then selecting Timer.
Shooting options 52
Shooting in the dark
Learn how to capture photos at night or in low light conditions.
Setting a flash option
Use the flash when you capture photos in the dark or when you need more light in
your photos.
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
Exit Set
Off
Auto
Red-eye
Fill in
Slow Sync
Red-eye Fix
Flash
2 Select an option.
Icon Description
Off:
• The flash will not fire.
• The camera will display the shake warning when you are
shooting in low light.
Auto: The flash will fire automatically when the subject or
background is dark.
Preventing red-eye
When the flash fires when you capture a photo of a person in the dark, a red glow
may appear in the person’s eyes. To prevent this, select Red-eye or Red-eye Fix.
Refer to flash options in “Setting a flash option.”
Before correction After correction
Shooting in the dark
Shooting options 53
Icon Description
Red-eye:
• The flash will fire twice when the subject or background is dark to
reduce the red-eye effect.
• There is an interval between the 2 bursts of the flash. Do not move
until the flash fires a second time.
Fill in:
• The flash always fires.
• The camera automatically adjusts the intensity of the flash.
Slow Sync:
• The flash fires and the shutter stays open longer.
• This option is recommended when you want to capture more
ambient light to reveal more details in the background.
• Use a tripod to prevent your photos from blurring.
• The camera will display the shake warning when you are
shooting in low light.
Red-eye Fix:
• The flash fires twice when the subject or background is dark. The
camera corrects red-eye through its advanced software analysis.
• There is an interval between the 2 bursts of the flash. Do not move
until the flash fires a second time.
Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions.
• Flash options are not available if you set burst options or select Self-Portrait,
Blink Detection.
• Make sure that your subjects are within the recommended distance from the
flash. (p. 127)
• If light from the flash is reflected or there is a substantial amount of dust in the
air, tiny spots may appear in your photo.
• In some modes, you can also set the flash option by pressing [ ], and
then selecting Flash.
Shooting in the dark
Shooting options 54
Adjusting the ISO sensitivity
The ISO sensitivity is the measure of a film’s sensitivity to light as defined by the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO). The higher ISO sensitivity you
select, the more sensitive to light your camera becomes. Use a higher ISO sensitivity
to capture better photos and reduce camera shake when not using the flash.
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select ISO.
3 Select an option.
• Select to use an appropriate ISO sensitivity based on the brightness of
the subject and lighting.
Higher ISO sensitivities may result in more image noise.
Shooting options 55
Using macro
Use macro to capture close-up photos of subjects, such as flowers or insects.
(Refer to "Using auto focus".)
• Try to hold the camera firmly to prevent blurry photos.
• Turn off the flash if the distance to the subject is less than 15.7 in. (40 cm).
Using auto focus
To capture sharp photos, select the appropriate focus option according to your
distance from the subject.
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
Exit Set
Normal (AF)
Macro
Focus
Changing the camera’s focus
Learn how to adjust the camera’s focus to suit the subject and the shooting conditions.
Changing the camera’s focus
Shooting options 56
Adjusting the focus area
You can get clearer photos by selecting an appropriate focus area according to your
subject's location in the scene.
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select Focus Area.
3 Select an option.
Icon Description
Center AF: Focus on the center of the frame (suitable when subjects
are located at or near the center).
Multi AF: Focus on one or more of 9 possible areas.
Tracking AF: Focus on and track the subject. (p. 57)
Available shooting options may differ depending on the shooting mode.
2 Select an option.
Icon Description
Normal (AF): Focus on a subject farther than 31 in. (80 cm) away.
Farther than 98 in. (250 cm) away when you use the zoom.
Macro: Focus on a subject that is 2-31 in. (5-80 cm) from the camera.
51-98 in. (130-250 cm) when you use the zoom.
Auto Macro:
• Focus on a subject farther than 2 in. (5 cm) away. Farther than
51 in. (130 cm) away when you use the zoom.
• Auto Macro is set automatically in some modes. You cannot set it
manually.
Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions.
In some modes, you can also set the focus option by pressing [ ], and then
selecting Focus.
Changing the camera’s focus
Shooting options 57
Using tracking auto focus
Tracking AF allows you to track and automatically focus on your subject, even when
you are moving.
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select Focus Area → Tracking AF.
3 Focus on the subject you want to track, and then press [ ].
• A focus frame appears on the subject and follows the subject as you move
the camera.
Tracking AF
• The white frame means that your camera is tracking the subject.
• When you half-press [Shutter], the green frame means that your subject is in
focus.
• The red frame means that your camera failed to focus.
4 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo.
• If you do not select a focus area, the focus frame will appear in the center of the
screen.
• Tracking a subject may fail when:
- the subject is too small
- the subject moves excessively
- the subject is backlit or you are shooting in a dark place
- colors or patterns on the subject and the background are the same
- the subject includes horizontal patterns, such as blinds
- the camera shakes excessively
• When tracking fails, the feature will be reset.
• If the camera fails to track the subject, you must reselect the subject to track.
• If the camera fails to focus, the focus frame will change to red and the focus will
be reset.
• If you use this function, you cannot set Face Detection options, Timer options,
Burst options, and Intelli zoom.
Shooting options 58
Detecting faces
Your camera automatically detects up to 10 human faces in one scene.
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select Face Detection → Normal.
The face nearest the camera or nearest
the center of the scene appears in a
white focus frame and the rest of the
faces appear in gray focus frames.
The closer you are to the subjects, the quicker your camera will detect faces.
Capturing a self portrait shot
Capture photos of yourself. The camera sets the focus distance to close-up, and then
emits a beep when ready.
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select → Beauty Face.
3 Press [ ].
4 Select Face Detection → Self-Portrait.
5 Compose your shot with the lens facing you.
6 When you hear a quick beep, press [Shutter].
When faces are located in the
center, the camera beeps rapidly.
If you turn Volume off in the sound settings, the camera will not emit a beep.
(p. 107)
Using Face Detection
If you use Face Detection options, your camera can automatically detect a human face. When you focus on a human face, the camera adjusts the exposure automatically. Use
Blink Detection to detect closed eyes or Smile Shot to capture a smiling face.
Using Face Detection
Shooting options 59
Capturing a smile shot
The camera automatically releases the shutter when it detects a smiling face.
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select Face Detection → Smile Shot.
3 Compose your shot.
• The camera automatically releases the shutter when it detects a smiling face.
When your subject smiles
broadly, your camera can detect
the smile more easily.
Detecting eye blinking
If your camera detects closed eyes, it will automatically capture 2 photos in
succession.
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select Face Detection → Blink Detection.
Using Face Detection
Shooting options 60
Tips for detecting faces
• When your camera detects a face, it tracks the detected face automatically.
• Face Detection may not be effective when:
- the subject is far from the camera
- it is too bright or too dark
- the subject is not facing the camera
- the subject is wearing sunglasses or a mask
- the subject’s facial expression changes drastically
- the subject is backlit or the lighting conditions are unstable
• When you set Face Detection options, the AF area is automatically set to Multi AF.
• Depending on the Face Detection options you selected, some Shooting options
may not be available.
• Depending on the shooting options you selected, Face Detection options may
not be available.
Shooting options 61
Adjusting brightness and color
Learn how to adjust the brightness and color for better image quality.
3 Press [ / ] to adjust the exposure.
• The photo will be brighter as the exposure value increases.
Cancel Set
EV : 0
4 Press [ ] to save your settings.
• Once you adjust the exposure, the setting will be stored automatically. You
may need to change the exposure value later to avoid overexposure or
underexposure.
• If you cannot decide on an appropriate exposure, select the AEB (Auto
Exposure Bracket) option. The camera will capture 3 consecutive photos, each
with a different exposure: normal, underexposed, and overexposed. (p. 65)
Adjusting the exposure manually (EV)
Depending on the intensity of the ambient light, your photos may be too bright or
dark. In these cases, you can adjust the exposure to get a better photo.
Darker (-) Neutral (0) Brighter (+)
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select EV.
Adjusting brightness and color
Shooting options 62
Compensating for backlighting (ACB)
When the light source is behind your subject or there is high contrast between your
subject and the background, your subject is likely to appear dark in the photo. In
this case, set the Auto Contrast Balance (ACB) option.
▲ Without ACB ▲ With ACB
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select ACB.
3 Select an option.
Icon Description
Off: ACB (Auto Contrast Balance) is deactivated.
On: ACB (Auto Contrast Balance) is activated.
• The ACB feature is always on in Smart Auto mode.
• The ACB feature is not available when you set Burst options.
Changing the metering option
The metering mode refers to the way in which a camera measures the quantity
of light. The brightness and lighting of your photos will vary depending on the
metering mode you select.
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select Metering.
3 Select an option.
Icon Description
Multi:
• Your camera divides the frame into several areas, and then
measures the light intensity of each area.
• Suitable for general photos.
Spot:
• Your camera measures only the light intensity at the very center of
the frame.
• If a subject is not in the center of the frame, your photo may be
improperly exposed.
• Suitable for a subject with backlighting.
Center-weighted:
• Your camera averages the meter reading of the entire frame with
emphasis placed on the center.
• Suitable for photos with subjects in the center of the frame.
Adjusting brightness and color
Shooting options 63
Selecting a White Balance setting
The color of your photo depends on the type and quality of the light source. If you
want the color of your photo to be realistic, select a White Balance setting that
is appropriate for the lighting conditions, such as Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, or
Tungsten.
Auto WB Daylight
Cloudy Tungsten
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select White Balance.
3 Select an option.
Icon Description
Auto WB: Automatically set the White Balance based on the lighting
conditions.
Daylight: For outdoor photos on a sunny day.
Cloudy: For outdoor photos on a cloudy day or in shadows.
Fluorescent_H: For shooting under a daylight fluorescent or 3-way
fluorescent light.
Fluorescent_L: For shooting under white fluorescent light.
Tungsten: For shooting indoor photos under incandescent bulbs or
halogen lamps.
Custom Set: To use White Balance settings that you define. (p. 64)
Color Temp.: To adjust the color temperature of the light source.
(p. 64)
Adjusting brightness and color
Shooting options 64
Defining your own White Balance
You can customize the White Balance by capturing a photo of a white surface, such
as a piece of paper, under the lighting conditions in which you intend to capture a
photo. The White Balance feature will help you to match the colors in your photo
with the actual scene.
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select White Balance → Custom Set.
3 Aim the lens at a piece of white paper, and then press [Shutter].
A piece of white paper
Adjusting color temperature
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select White Balance → Color Temp..
3 Press [ / ] to adjust the color temperature to match your light
source.
• You can get a warmer photo with a higher value, and a cooler photo with a
lower value.
Color Temp. : 3000K
Back Set
4 Press [ ] to save your settings.
Shooting options 65
Using burst modes
It can be difficult to capture photos of fast-moving subjects or capture natural facial expressions and gestures of your subjects in photos. Also, it can be difficult to adjust the
exposure correctly and select a proper light source. In these cases, select one of the burst modes.
Icon Description
AEB:
• Capture 3 consecutive photos, each with a different exposure:
normal, underexposed, and overexposed.
• It may take longer to capture the photo. Use a tripod for best
results.
4 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to
focus.
5 Press and hold [Shutter].
• While you are pressing [Shutter], the camera captures photos continuously.
• Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions.
• When you select Motion Capture, your camera will set the resolution to
and set the ISO sensitivity to Auto.
• Depending on the Face Detection options you selected, some Shooting options
may not be available.
• It may take longer to save the photos depending on the memory card capacity
and performance.
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select Drive.
3 Select an option.
Icon Description
Single: Capture a single photo. (Single is not a burst option.)
Continuous:
• While you are pressing [Shutter], the camera continuously
captures photos.
• The maximum number of photos depends on the capacity of your
memory card.
Motion Capture: While you are pressing [Shutter], the camera
captures photos (5 photos per second; maximum of 30
photos).
Shooting options 66
Adjusting images
Adjust the sharpness, contrast, or saturation of your photos.
4 Press [ / ] to adjust each value.
Sharpness Description
– Soften the edges on your photos (suitable for editing the
photos on your computer).
+ Sharpen the edges to improve the clarity of your photos.
(This may also increase the noise in your photos.)
Contrast Description
– Decrease the color and brightness.
+ Increase the color and brightness.
Saturation Description
– Decrease the saturation.
+ Increase the saturation.
5 Press [ ] to save your settings.
Select 0 if you do not want to apply any effects (suitable for printing).
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select Image Adjust.
3 Select an option.
• Sharpness
• Contrast
• Saturation
Image Adjust
Back Set
Sharpness
Contrast
Saturation
Shooting options 67
Reducing the sound of the zoom
When you use the zoom while recording videos, the camera can record the sound of the zoom. In this case, use the Zoom Mute function.
1 In Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Select Voice.
3 Select an option.
Icon Description
Zoom Mute: The camera stops recording sound temporarily when
you use the zoom.
Off: Record a video without sound.
On: Record a video with sound.
• Do not block the microphone when you use the Zoom Mute function.
• Recordings made with Zoom Mute may differ from actual sounds.
Shooting options 68
Available shooting options by shooting mode
For details about shooting options, refer to "Shooting options". (p. 48)
Smart Auto Program Smart Movie Movie Smart Live Panorama Photo Filter Movie Filter
Resolution O O O O O - O O
Quality - O - - - - O -
Timer O O O O O - O O
Flash O O - - O - O -
ISO sensitivity - O - - - - - -
Macro - O - O O - - -
Focus area - O - - O - - -
Face detection - O - - O - - -
EV - O - O - - - -
ACB - O - - - - - -
Metering - O - O - - - -
White balance - O - O - - - -
Drive - O - - - - - -
Image adjust - O - - - - - -
Voice - - O O - - - O
Digital zoom - O - - O - - -
Intelli zoom O O - - - - - -
OIS - O - O - - - -
O: The option is available. Some options may be limited or may not be changeable.
-: The option is not available.
Playback/Editing
Learn how to play back photos or videos, and edit photos. Also, learn how to connect your camera to your
computer or TV.
Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode … 70
Starting Playback mode ……………………… 70
Viewing photos ………………………………… 74
Playing a video ………………………………… 77
Editing a photo ………………………………… 78
Resizing photos ………………………………… 78
Rotating a photo ……………………………… 78
Applying Smart Filter effects …………………… 79
Adjusting brightness, contrast, saturation or
dark subjects …………………………………… 80
Adjusting portrait photos ……………………… 80
Editing a video …………………………………… 82
Trimming a video ……………………………… 82
Capturing an image from video ……………… 82
Viewing files on a TV …………………………… 83
Transferring files to a computer ……………… 84
Transferring files to your Windows OS computer … 84
Transferring files to your Mac OS computer …… 85
System Requirements …………………………… 87
Playback/Editing 70
Starting Playback mode
View photos or play videos stored in your camera.
1 Press [ ].
• The most recent file will be displayed.
• If the camera is off, it will turn on and display the most recent file.
2 Press [ / ] to scroll through files.
• Press and hold [ / ] to scroll through files quickly.
• You may not be able to edit or play back files that were captured with other
cameras, due to unsupported sizes (image size, etc) or codecs. Use a computer
or another device to edit or play back these files.
• Photos or videos captured in portrait orientation do not rotate automatically
and are displayed in landscape orientation by the camera and other devices.
Photo file information
File Information
Memory in use
Album/Zoom In
Icon Description
Current file/Total files
Folder name-File name
Protected file
To display file information on the screen, press [ ].
Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode
Learn how to play back photos or videos and how to manage files.
Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode
Playback/Editing 71
Video file information
File Information
Play
Album
Capture
Icon Description
Current file/Total files
Folder name-File name
Current playback time
Video length
Protected file
To display file information on the screen, press [ ].
Viewing files as thumbnails
Scan thumbnails of files.
In Playback mode, rotate [Zoom] to the left to view thumbnails
(12 at a time). Rotate [Zoom] to the left once more to display more
thumbnails (24 at a time). Rotate [Zoom] to the right to return to
the previous view.
Menu
• You can also view files as thumbnails by scrolling to on the Home screen,
and then selecting .
Press [ / / / ] to scroll through files.
Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode
Playback/Editing 72
Viewing files by category
View files by category, such as date or file type.
1 In Playback mode, rotate [Zoom] to the left.
• You can also view files as thumbnails by scrolling to on the Home
screen, and then selecting .
2 Press [ ], and then select Filter → a category.
All
Date
File Type
Filter
Back Set
Icon Description
All: View files normally.
Date: View files by the date they were saved.
File Type: View files by the file type.
3 Scroll to a desired list, and then press [ ] to open the list.
4 Scroll to a desired file, and then press [ ] to view the file.
5 Rotate [Zoom] to the left, and then press [ ] to return to the
previous view.
• If you change the category, it may take some time for the camera to reorganize
files depending on the number of files.
• If you delete a category classified by Date or File Type, all files in the category
will be deleted.
Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode
Playback/Editing 73
Protecting a file
Protect a file from accidental deletion.
1 In Playback mode, select a file to protect.
2 Press [ ], and then select Protect → On.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to protect additional files.
You cannot resize, delete, or rotate a protected file.
Deleting files
Select files to delete in Playback mode.
Deleting a single file
You can select one file, and then delete it.
1 In Playback mode, select a file, and then press [ ].
2 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.
You can also delete files in Playback mode by pressing [ ], and then
selecting Delete → Delete → Yes.
Deleting multiple files
You can select multiple files, and then delete them at once.
1 In Playback mode, press [ ].
• When in thumbnails view, press [ ], select Delete → Select, and then
skip to step 3, or press [ ], select Select, and then skip to step 3.
2 When the pop-up message appears, select Multiple Delete.
3 Scroll to each file you want to delete, and then press [ ].
• Press [ ] again to cancel your selection.
4 Press [ ].
5 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.
Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode
Playback/Editing 74
Deleting all files
You can select all files, and then delete them at once.
1 In Playback mode, press [ ].
• When in thumbnails view, press [ ], select Delete → Delete All, and
then skip to step 3, or press [ ], select Delete All, and then skip to step 3.
2 Select Delete → Delete All.
3 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.
• All unprotected files are deleted.
Viewing photos
Enlarge part of a photo or view photos as a slide show.
Enlarging a photo
In Playback mode, rotate [Zoom] to the right to enlarge a portion of
the photo. Rotate [Zoom] to the left to zoom out.
Enlarged area
Back Crop
Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode
Playback/Editing 75
To Description
Move the enlarged area Press [ / / / ].
Trim the enlarged photo
Press [ ], and then select Yes. (The trimmed photo
will be saved as a new file. The original photo is
retained in its original form.)
When you view photos that were captured by another camera, the zoom ratio
may differ.
Viewing panoramic photos
View photos captured in Live Panorama mode.
1 In Playback mode, press [ / ] to scroll to a desired panoramic
photo.
• The entire panoramic photo appears on the screen.
2 Press [ ].
• The camera automatically scrolls through the photo from left to right for a
horizontal panoramic photo and from top to bottom for a vertical panoramic
photo. The camera then switches to Playback mode.
• While playing back a panoramic photo, press [ ] to pause or resume.
• After you have paused the playback of a panoramic photo, press
[ / / / ] to move the photo horizontally or vertically, depending on
the direction you moved when capturing the photo.
3 Press [ ] to return to Playback mode.
The camera automatically scrolls through the panoramic photo only if the longest
side of the photo is two or more times longer than the shortest side.
Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode
Playback/Editing 76
Playing a slide show
Apply effects and audio to a slide show of your photos. The slide show function
does not work for videos.
1 In Playback mode, press [ ].
2 Select Slide Show Options.
3 Select a slide show effect option.
• Skip to step 4 to start a slide show with no effects.
* Default
Option Description
Play Mode Set whether or not to repeat the slide show. (One Play*, Repeat)
Interval • Set the interval between photos. (1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec)
• You must set the Effect option to Off to set the interval.
Music Set background audio.
Effect
• Set a scene change effect between photos. (Off, Calm*, Relax,
Lively, Sweet, Shine)
• Select Off to cancel effects.
• When you use the Effect option, the interval between photos
will be set to 1 second.
4 Press [ ].
5 Select Start Slide Show.
6 View the slide show.
• Press [ ] to pause the slide show.
• Press [ ] again to resume the slide show.
• Press [ ] to stop the slide show and return to Playback mode.
• Rotate [Zoom] to the left or right to adjust the volume level.
Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode
Playback/Editing 77
Playing a video
In Playback mode, you can view a video.
1 In Playback mode, select a video, and then press [ ].
2 View the video.
Current playback time/
Video length
Pause Stop
To Description
Scan backward Press [ ]. Each time you press [ ], you change the scan
speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.
Pause or resume
playback Press [ ].
Scan forward Press [ ]. Each time you press [ ], you change the
scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.
Adjust the volume
level Rotate [Zoom] to the left or right.
When playing a movie, you can begin using features such a scanning backward,
scanning forward, or pausing after the video has run for 2 seconds.
Playback/Editing 78
Resizing photos
Change the size of a photo and save it as a new file.
1 In Playback mode, select a photo, and then press [ ].
2 Select Resize.
3 Select an option.
Back Set
Resize
2592 X 1944
1984 X 1488
1024 X 768
4 Press [ ] to save.
Available resize options differ depending on the original size of the photo.
Rotating a photo
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Rotate [Zoom] to the left, and then select a photo.
4 Select Rotate → an option.
5 Press [ ] to save.
Rotate : Right 90˚
Cancel Save
• The camera will overwrite the original file.
• In Playback mode, press [ ], and then select Rotate to rotate a photo.
Editing a photo
Learn how to edit photos.
• The camera will save edited photos as new files.
• When you edit photos, the camera will automatically convert them to a lower resolution. Photos that you rotate manually are not automatically converted to a lower resolution.
• Photos captured in some modes cannot be edited.
Editing a photo
Playback/Editing 79
Applying Smart Filter effects
Apply special effects to your photos.
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Rotate [Zoom] to the left, and then select a photo.
4 Select Smart Filter → an option.
Smart Filter : Normal
Back Set
Option Description
Normal No effect
Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in
miniature. (The top and bottom of the image will be unclear.)
Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong
vignette effect of Lomo cameras.
Cross Filter Add lines that radiate outward from bright objects to imitate
the visual effect of a cross filter.
Fish-eye Distort close objects to imitate the visual effect of a fisheye
lens.
Classic Apply a black and white effect.
Retro Apply a sepia tone effect.
5 Press [ ] to save.
Editing a photo
Playback/Editing 80
Adjusting portrait photos
Learn how to correct red-eye and retouch faces. The camera will save an edited
photo as a new file, but may convert it to a lower resolution.
Retouching faces
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Rotate [Zoom] to the left, and then select a photo.
4 Select Face Retouch.
5 Press [ / ] to adjust the option.
• As the number increases, the skin tone becomes brighter and smoother.
6 Press [ ] to save.
Adjusting brightness, contrast, saturation or dark subjects
Learn how to adjust the brightness, contrast, or saturation. If the center of a photo is
dark, you can adjust it to be brighter. The camera will save an edited photo as a new
file, but may convert it to a lower resolution.
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Rotate [Zoom] to the left, and then select a photo.
4 Select an adjusting option.
Icon Description
Brightness
Contrast
Saturation
ACB (Adjust dark subjects)
• If you selected , skip to step 7.
5 Press [ / ] to adjust the option.
6 Press [ ].
7 Press [ ] to save.
Editing a photo
Playback/Editing 81
Removing red-eye
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Rotate [Zoom] to the left, and then select a photo.
4 Select Red-eye Fix.
5 Press [ ] to save.
Playback/Editing 82
Editing a video
While playing back a video, you can trim the video or capture an image from the video.
Trimming a video
1 In Playback mode, select a video, and then press [ ].
2 Select Trim Movie.
3 Press [ ] to start playing the video.
4 Press [ ] → [ ] at the point where you want the trimming to
begin.
5 Press [ ] to resume playing the video.
6 Press [ ] → [ ] at the point where you want the trimming to end.
7 Press [ ] to trim.
8 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes.
• The original video should be at least 10 seconds long.
• You can trim videos anywhere between 2 seconds from the beginning and 2
seconds from the end of the video.
• The camera will save the edited video as a new file and leave the original video
intact.
Capturing an image from video
1 While viewing a video, press [ ] at the point where you want to
capture an image.
2 Press [ ].
• The resolution of the captured image will be the same as the original video.
• The captured image is saved as a new file.
Playback/Editing 83
Viewing files on a TV
Play back photos or videos by connecting your camera to a TV with the A/V cable.
7 Turn on your TV, and then select the A/V video source with the TV
remote control.
8 Turn on your camera.
• The camera automatically enters Playback mode when you connect it to a TV.
9 View photos or play videos using the camera buttons.
• Depending on the TV model, you may see some digital noise or part of an
image may not appear.
• Images may not be centered on the TV screen depending on your TV settings.
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Select Connectivity → Video Out.
4 Select the video signal output for your country or region. (p. 108)
5 Turn off your camera and TV.
6 Connect your camera to your TV with the A/V cable.
Audio Video
Playback/Editing 84
Transferring files to your Windows OS computer
Connect the camera to your computer as a removable disk.
Your computer must be running Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, or
Windows 8 for you to connect the camera as a removable disk.
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Select Connectivity → i-Launcher → Off.
4 Turn off the camera.
5 Connect the camera to your computer with the USB cable.
You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable
is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for
any loss of data.
6 Turn on the camera.
• The computer recognizes the camera automatically.
7 On your computer, select My Computer → Removable Disk →
DCIM → 100PHOTO.
8 Drag or save files to your computer.
Transferring files to a computer
Connect the camera to a computer to transfer files from the camera's memory card to the computer.
Transferring files to a computer
Playback/Editing 85
Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP)
With Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 8, the methods for disconnecting the
camera are similar.
1 If the status lamp on your camera is blinking, wait until it stops.
2 Click on the tool bar at the bottom right of your computer
screen.
3 Click the pop-up message.
4 Click the message box that indicates the camera can be removed
safely.
5 Remove the USB cable.
Transferring files to your Mac OS computer
When you connect the camera to your Mac OS computer, the computer will
automatically recognize the device. You can transfer files directly from the camera to
the computer without installing any programs.
Mac OS 10.5 or later is supported.
1 Turn off the camera.
2 Connect your camera to your Mac OS computer with the USB cable.
You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable
is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for
any loss of data.
Transferring files to a computer
Playback/Editing 86
3 Turn on the camera.
• The computer recognizes the camera automatically and displays a removable
disk icon.
4 On your computer, open the removable disk.
5 Drag or save files to your computer.
Playback/Editing 87
System Requirements
Recommended system requirements to play videos on a PC or run the i-Launcher application.
Mac OS requirements
Item Requirements
OS Mac OS 10.5 or higher (except PowerPC)
RAM Minimum 256 MB RAM (512 MB or more recommended)
Hard disk
capacity Minimum 110 MB
Others USB 2.0 port
• The requirements are recommendations only. It may not work properly even
when the computer meets the requirements, depending on the condition of
your computer.
• The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage that results from using
unqualified computers such as a computer you assembled yourself.
Windows OS Requirements
Item Requirements
CPU Intel Pentium®4, 3.2 GHz or higher/
AMD Athlon™ FX D2.6 GHz or higher
RAM Minimum 512 MB RAM (1 GB or more recommended)
OS* Windows 7, or Windows 8
Hard disk
capacity 250 MB or more (1 GB and above recommended)
Others
• 1024 X 768 pixels, 16-bit color display compatible monitor
(1280 X 1024 pixels, 32-bit color display recommended)
• USB 2.0 port
• nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT or higher/
ATI X1600 series or higher
* A 32-bit version of i-Launcher will be installed—even on 64-bit editions of Windows 7, and
Windows 8.
Wireless network
Learn how to connect to wireless local area networks (WLANs) and use functions.
Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network
settings …………………………………………… 89
Connecting to a WLAN ………………………… 89
Using the login browser ……………………… 90
Network connection tips ……………………… 91
Entering text …………………………………… 92
Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go) ……………… 93
Using NFC features in Shooting mode ………… 93
Using NFC features in Playback mode
(Photo Beam) …………………………………… 93
Using NFC features in Wi-Fi mode ……………… 93
Saving files to a smart phone automatically … 94
Sending photos or videos to a smart phone … 95
Using a smart phone as a remote shutter
release …………………………………………… 96
Sending photos or videos via email …………… 98
Changing email settings ……………………… 98
Sending photos or videos via email …………… 100
Using photo or video sharing services ………… 101
Accessing a sharing service …………………… 101
Uploading photos or videos …………………… 101
Using Samsung Link to send files ……………… 103
Viewing photos or videos on devices that support
Samsung Link …………………………………… 103
Wireless network 89
Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Learn to connect via an access point (AP) when you are in a range of a WLAN. You can also configure network settings.
Icon Description
Ad hoc AP
Secured AP
WPS AP
Signal strength
Press [ ] to open network setting options.
• When you select a secured AP, a pop-up window appears. Enter the required
passwords to connect to the WLAN. For information about entering text, refer
to "Entering text". (p. 92)
• When a login page appears, refer to "Using the login browser". (p. 90)
• When you select an unsecured AP, the camera will automatically connect to
the WLAN.
• If you select a WPS profile supported AP, select → WPS PIN connection,
and then enter a PIN on the AP device. You can also connect to a WPS
profile supported AP by selecting → WPS button connection on the
camera, and then pushing the WPS button on the AP device.
• If a pop-up message about data collection regulations appears, read and
agree to it.
Connecting to a WLAN
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select , , or .
3 Follow the on-screen instructions until the Wi-Fi Setting screen
appears.
• The camera automatically searches for available AP devices.
• In some modes, press [ ], and then select Wi-Fi Setting.
4 Select an AP.
Wi-Fi Setting
Back Manual
Refresh
Samsung 1
Samsung 2
Samsung 3
Samsung 4
• Select Refresh to refresh the list of connectable APs.
• Select Add wireless network to add an AP manually. The AP name must be
in English to add the AP manually.
Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Wireless network 90
Setting network options
1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press [ ].
2 Select each option, and then enter the required information.
Option Description
Network Password Enter the network password.
IP Setting Set the IP address automatically or manually.
Manually setting the IP address
1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press [ ].
2 Select IP Setting → Manual.
3 Select each option, and then enter the required information.
Option Description
IP Enter the static IP address.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask.
Gateway Enter the gateway.
DNS Server Enter the DNS address.
Using the login browser
You can enter your login information via the login browser when connecting to
some APs, sharing sites, or cloud servers.
Button/Icon Description
[ / / / ] Move to an item or scroll the page.
[ ] Select an item.
[ ]
Access the following options:
• Previous Page: Move to the previous page.
• Next Page: Move to the next page.
• Reload: Reload the page.
• Stop: Stop loading the page.
• Exit: Close the login browser.
[ ] Close the login browser.
• You may not be able to select some items depending on the page you
connected to. This does not indicate a malfunction.
• The login browser may not close automatically after you log into some pages.
In this case, close the login browser by pressing [ ], and then proceed with the
desired operation.
• It may take longer to load the login page due to the page size or network speed.
If this occurs, wait until the login information input window appears.
Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Wireless network 91
Network connection tips
• Some Wi-Fi features are not available if you do not insert a memory card.
• The quality of the network connection will be determined by the AP.
• The further the distance between your camera and the AP, the longer it will take
to connect to the network.
• If a nearby device is using the same radio frequency signal as your camera, it may
interrupt your connection.
• If your AP name is not in English, the camera may not be able to locate the device
or the name may appear incorrectly.
• For network settings or a password, contact your network administrator or
network service provider.
• If a WLAN requires authentication from the service provider, you may not be able
to connect to it. To connect to the WLAN, contact your network service provider.
• Depending on the encryption type, the number of digits in the password may
differ.
• A WLAN connection may not be possible in all surroundings.
• The camera may display a WLAN enabled printer on the AP List. You cannot
connect to a network via a printer.
• You cannot connect your camera to a network and a TV simultaneously.
• Connecting to a network may incur additional charges. Costs will vary based on
the conditions of your contract.
• If you cannot connect to a WLAN, try another AP from the available AP list.
• A login page may appear when you select free WLANs provided by some
network service providers. Enter your ID and password to connect to the WLAN.
For information about registering or the service, contact the network service
providers.
• Be cautious when you enter personal information for an AP connection. Do not
enter any payment or credit card information on your camera. The manufacturer
is not liable for any problem caused by entering such information.
• Available network connections may differ by country.
• The WLAN feature of your camera must comply with radio transmission laws in
your region. To ensure compliance, use the WLAN feature only in the country
where you purchased the camera.
• The process for adjusting network settings may differ, depending on network
conditions.
• Do not access a network that you are not authorized to use.
• Before you connect to a network, ensure your battery is fully charged.
• You cannot upload or send files captured in some modes.
• Files that you transfer to another device may not be supported by the device. In
this case, use a computer to playback the files.
Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings
Wireless network 92
Entering text
Learn how to enter text. The icons in the table below let you move the cursor,
change the case, etc. Press [ / / / ] to move to a desired key, and then press
[ ] to enter the key.
Done
Cancel Backspace
Icon Description
Delete the last letter.
Move the cursor.
In ABC mode, change the case.
Enter ".com".
Icon Description
Switch between Symbol mode and ABC mode.
Enter a space.
Done Save the displayed text.
View the entering text guide.
• You can use only the English alphabets in some modes, regardless of the display
language.
• To move to Done directly, press [ ].
• You can enter up to 64 characters.
• The screen may differ depending on the input mode.
Wireless network 93
Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go)
Place a smart phone's NFC antenna near the camera’s NFC tag to launch the feature for saving photos to a smart phone automatically or the feature for using a smart phone as a
remote shutter. You can also transfer files to an NFC-enabled device in Playback mode.
• This feature is supported by NFC-enabled smart phones running Android OS. It is recommended that you use the latest version. This feature is not available for iOS devices.
• You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps or the Google Play Store.
Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later.
• To read an NFC tag, place the NFC-enabled device near the camera’s NFC tag for more than 2 seconds.
• Do not modify the tag information in any way.
Using NFC features in Wi-Fi mode
Select MobileLink or Remote Viewfinder from the pop-up window that appears by
reading a tag from an NFC-enabled device. (p. 95, 96)
Using NFC features in Shooting mode
Launch AutoShare or Remote Viewfinder by reading a tag from an NFC-enabled
device. (p. 94, 96)
Preset to launch the Wi-Fi function by reading a tag on an NFC-enabled device.
(p. 110)
Using NFC features in Playback mode(Photo Beam)
In Playback mode, the camera transfers the current file to the smart phone
automatically when you read a tag from an NFC-enabled device.
• To transfer multiple files, read a tag from an NFC-enabled device from the
thumbnail view, and then select files.
Wireless network 94
Saving files to a smart phone automatically
The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the AutoShare feature via a WLAN. When you capture a photo with your camera, the photo is saved to the smart phone
automatically.
• The AutoShare feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. Some features may not be supported by some models. Before using this feature, update
the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly.
• You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or
the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later.
• If you set this function, the setting is maintained even when you change the Shooting mode.
• This feature may not be supported in some modes.
5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera.
• If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected
automatically.
• An icon that shows the connection status ( ) will appear on the camera’s
screen.
6 On the camera, capture a photo.
• The captured photo is saved to the camera, and then transferred to the smart
phone.
• If the GPS feature is activated on the smart phone, the GPS information will
be saved with the captured photo.
1 On the camera, in Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 On the camera, select AutoShare → On.
• If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application
appears, select Next.
3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application.
• To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn
on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 16) on the
camera.
4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the
camera.
• The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time.
Wireless network 95
Sending photos or videos to a smart phone
The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the MobileLink feature via a WLAN. You can easily send photos or videos to your smart phone.
• The MobileLink feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. Some features may not be supported by some models. Before using this feature, update
the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly.
• You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or
the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later.
• When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
• If you select files from the smart phone, you can view up to 1,000 recent files and send up to 1,000 files at a time. If you select files from the camera, you can view files that were
selected from the camera and the maximum number of files you can send varies depending on the storage space of the smart phone.
• When using this feature on an iOS device, the device may lose its Wi-Fi connection.
5 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the
camera.
• The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time.
6 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera.
• If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected
automatically.
• The application on the smart phone can be closed if no operations are
performed on the camera for 30 seconds.
7 On the smart phone or camera, select files to transfer from the
camera.
8 On the smart phone, touch the copy button or on the camera, select
Send.
• The camera will send the files.
The camera screen turns off if you perform no operations on the camera for
30 seconds.
1 On the camera’s Home screen, scroll to .
2 On the camera, select .
• If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application
appears, select Next.
3 On the camera, select a sending option.
• If you select Select Files from Smartphone, you can use your smart phone
to view and share files stored on the camera.
• If you select Select Files from Camera, you can select files to send from the
camera.
4 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application.
• To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn
on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 16) on the
camera.
Wireless network 96
1 On the camera’s Home screen, scroll to .
2 On the camera, select .
• If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application
appears, select Next.
3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application.
• To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn
on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 16) on the
camera.
4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the
camera.
• The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time.
5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera.
• If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected
automatically.
6 On the smart phone, set the following shooting options.
• While using this feature, some buttons are not available on your camera.
• With the smart phone, you can operate the camera only by touching the
screen.
• Remote Viewfinder mode supports the 10M and 3M photo sizes only.
Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release
The camera connects to a smart phone via a WLAN. Use the smart phone as a remote shutter release with the Remote Viewfinder feature. The captured photo will display on the
smart phone.
• The Remote Viewfinder feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. Some features may not be supported by some models. Before using this feature,
update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly.
• You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or
the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later.
Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release
Wireless network 97
7 On the smart phone, touch and hold to focus.
• The focus is automatically set to Multi AF.
8 Release to capture the photo.
• If the GPS feature is activated on the smart phone, the GPS information will
be saved with the captured photo.
• When you use this feature, the ideal distance between the camera and the
smart phone may vary, depending on your surroundings.
• We recommend you keep the distance between the smart phone and the
camera within 23 feet (7 m) when you use this feature.
• It will take some time to capture the photo after you release on the smart
phone.
• The Remote Viewfinder function will deactivate when:
- either the camera or the smart phone turn off
- either device loses its connection to the WLAN
- the Wi-Fi connection is poor or unstable
- you perform no operations for approximately 3 minutes while connected
• The camera screen turns off if you perform no operations on the camera for
30 seconds.
Wireless network 98
Changing email settings
In the email menu, you can change settings for storing your information. You can
also set or change the email password. For information about entering text, refer to
"Entering text". (p. 92)
Storing your information
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Press [ ].
4 Select Sender Setting.
5 Select the Name box, enter your name, and then select Done.
Sender Setting
Name
Email
Save Reset
Back
6 Select the Email box, enter your email address, and then select
Done.
7 Select Save to save your changes.
• To delete your information, select Reset.
Sending photos or videos via email
You can change settings in the email menu and send photos or videos stored on the camera via email.
Sending photos or videos via email
Wireless network 99
Setting an email password
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Press [ ].
4 Select Setting Password → On.
• To deactivate the password, select Off.
5 When the pop-up appears, select OK.
6 Enter a 4-digit password.
7 Enter the password again.
8 When the pop-up appears, select OK.
If you forget your password, you can reset it by selecting Reset on the password
setting screen. When you reset the information, the previously saved user’s setting
information, email address, and recently sent email list will be deleted.
Changing the email password
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Press [ ].
4 Select Change Password.
5 Enter your current 4-digit password.
6 Enter a new 4-digit password.
7 Enter the new password again.
8 When the pop-up appears, select OK.
Sending photos or videos via email
Wireless network 100
Sending photos or videos via email
You can send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. For information
about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 92)
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Connect to a WLAN. (p. 89)
4 Select the Sender box, enter your email address, and then select
Done.
• If you have previously saved your information, it will be inserted
automatically. (p. 98)
• To use an address from the list of previous senders, select → an address.
5 Select the Receiver box, enter an email address, and then select
Done.
• To use an address from the list of previous recipients, select → an address.
• Select to add additional recipients. You can input up to 30 recipients.
• Select to delete an address from the list.
6 Select Next.
7 Scroll to files to send, and then press [ ].
• You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 7 MB or less.
8 Select Next.
9 Select the comment box, enter your comments, and then select
Done.
10 Select Send.
• The camera will send the email.
• If an email fails to send, a message prompting you to send it again appears.
• Even if a photo appears to have transferred successfully, errors with the
recipient’s email account may cause the photo to be rejected or recognized as
spam.
• You may not be able to send an email if no network connection is available or if
your email account settings are incorrect.
• You cannot send an email if the combined file sizes exceed the 7MB. The
maximum resolution of photos you can send is 2M. The maximum resolution
of videos you can send is . If the selected photo has a resolution higher than
2M, it will be automatically resized to a lower resolution.
• If you cannot send an email because of firewall or user authentication settings,
contact your network administrator or network service provider.
• When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
• You can also send an email in Playback mode by pressing [ ], and then
selecting Share(Wi-Fi) → Email.
Wireless network 101
Accessing a sharing service
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Select a sharing service.
• If the pop-up message that prompts you to create an account appears, select
OK.
4 Connect to a WLAN. (p. 89)
5 Enter your ID and password to log in.
• For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 92)
• To select an ID from the list, select → an ID.
• If you have previously logged in to the sharing service, you may be logged in
automatically.
You must have an existing account with the file sharing service to use this feature.
Uploading photos or videos
1 Access the sharing service with your camera.
2 Scroll to files to upload, and then press [ ].
• You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 10 MB or less.
(On some sharing services, the total size or number of files may vary.)
3 Select Upload.
• The camera will upload photos or videos.
• On some sharing services, you can enter your comments by selecting the
comment box. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text".
(p. 92)
Using photo or video sharing services
Upload your photos or videos to file sharing services. Available sharing services will be displayed on your camera. To upload files to some websites, you must visit the website
and register before connecting your camera.
Using photo or video sharing services
Wireless network 102
• You can set an upload folder for Facebook by pressing [ ], and then
selecting Upload Folder (Facebook) on the sharing service's list screen.
• You cannot upload files if the file size exceeds the limit. The maximum
resolution of photos you can upload is 2M. The maximum resolution of videos
you can upload is . If the selected photo has a resolution higher than 2M, it
will be automatically resized to a lower resolution. (On some sharing services,
the maximum photo resolution may vary.)
• The method of uploading photos or videos may differ depending on the
selected sharing service.
• If you cannot access a sharing service because of firewall or user authentication
settings, contact your network administrator or network service provider.
• Uploaded photos or videos may be automatically titled with the date they were
captured.
• The speed of your internet connection may affect how quickly photos upload or
web pages open.
• When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
• You can also upload photos or videos to file sharing services in Playback mode
by pressing [ ], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) → a sharing service.
• You cannot upload videos to some sharing services.
Wireless network 103
Using Samsung Link to send files
You can view files on a Samsung Link device connected to the same AP.
6 On the Samsung Link device, browse the shared photos or videos.
• For information about searching for the camera and browsing the photos or
videos on the Samsung Link device, refer to the device's user manual.
• Videos may not play smoothly depending on the type of Samsung Link
device or the network condition. If this happens, re-record the video in
or smaller quality and play it again. If videos do not play smoothly on your
device over the wireless connection, try connecting the camera to the device
with an A/V cable.
AP
▲ The camera is connected to a TV that supports Samsung Link via WLAN.
Viewing photos or videos on devices that support
Samsung Link
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select → Nearby devices.
• If the guide message appears, press [ ].
• The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most
recently connected AP device.
• If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for
available AP devices. (p. 89)
• You can set to allow only selected devices or all devices to connect by
pressing [ ], and then selecting DLNA Access Control on the screen.
• A sharing file list is created. Wait until other devices can find your camera.
3 Connect the Samsung Link device to a network, and then turn on
the Samsung Link feature.
• Refer to your device's user manual for more information.
4 On the camera, allow the Samsung Link device to connect to your
camera.
5 On the Samsung Link device, select a camera to connect to.
Using Samsung Link to send files
Wireless network 104
• You can share up to 1,000 recent files.
• On an Samsung Link device, you can view only photos or videos captured with
your camera.
• The range of the wireless connection between your camera and an Samsung
Link device may vary depending on the specifications of the AP.
• If the camera is connected to 2 Samsung Link devices, playback may be slower.
• Photos or videos will be shared in their original sizes.
• You can use this feature only with devices that support Samsung Link.
• Shared photos or videos will not be stored on the Samsung Link device, but
they can be stored in the camera to meet the device's specifications.
• Transferring photos or videos to the Samsung Link device may take some time
depending on the network connection, the number of files to be shared, or the
sizes of the files.
• If you power off the camera abnormally while viewing photos or videos on
an Samsung Link device (for example, by removing the battery), the device
considers the camera to still be connected.
• The order of photos or videos on the camera may be different than on the
Samsung Link device.
• Depending on the number of photos or videos you want to share, it may
take some time to load your photos or videos and complete the initial set-up
process.
• While viewing photos or videos on the Samsung Link device, continuously
using the device's remote or performing additional operations on the device
may prevent this feature from working properly.
• If you reorder or sort files on the camera while viewing them on an Samsung
Link device, you must repeat the initial set-up process to update the list of files
on the device.
• When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature.
• We recommend you use a network cable to connect your Samsung Link device
to your AP. This will minimize any video ‘Stuttering’ you may experience when
streaming content.
• To view files on an Samsung Link device using the Nearby devices feature,
enable multicast mode on your AP.
Settings
Refer to options to configure your camera’s settings.
Settings menu …………………………………………………… 106
Accessing the settings menu ……………………………… 106
Sound ………………………………………………………… 107
Display ……………………………………………………… 107
Connectivity ………………………………………………… 108
General ……………………………………………………… 109
Settings 106
Settings menu
Learn to configure your camera's settings.
4 Select an item.
Back Select
Medium
On
Sound 1
Off
On
Sounds
Volume
Beep Sound
Shutter Sound
Start Sound
AF Sound
5 Select an option.
Back Set
Volume
Off
Low
Medium
High
6 Press [ ] to return to the previous screen.
Accessing the settings menu
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Select a menu.
Sounds
Display
Connectivity
General
Settings
Icon Description
Sounds: Set various camera sounds and the volume. (p. 107)
Display: Customize the display settings. (p. 107)
Connectivity: Set the connection options. (p. 108)
General: Change the settings for the camera system such as
memory format and default file name. (p. 109)
Settings menu
Settings 107
Sound
* Default
Item Description
Volume Set the volume of all sounds. (Off, Low, Medium*, High)
Beep Sound Set the sound the camera emits when you press the buttons or
switch modes on or off. (Off, On*)
Shutter
Sound
Set the sound the camera emits when you press the shutter
button. (Off, Sound 1*, Sound 2, Sound 3)
Start Sound Set the sound the camera emits when you turn on your camera.
(Off*, Star Flight, Laser Show, Cloud)
AF Sound Set the sound the camera emits when you half-press the shutter
button on or off. (Off, On*)
Display
* Default
Item Description
Start Image
Set a start image to display when the camera turns on.
• Off*: Display no start image.
• Logo: Display a default image stored in the internal memory.
• User Image: Select User Image from the photos you captured
in the memory.
If you select a new photo as a User Image or reset your camera,
the camera will delete the current image.
Wallpapers Set wallpaper for the Home screen with the desired image.
(Wallpaper Gallery, Album)
Guide Line Select a guide to help you compose a scene. (Off*, 3 X 3, 2 X 2,
Cross, Diagonal)
Date/Time
Display
Set whether or not to display the date and time on the camera's
display. (Off*, On)
Help Display Display a brief description of an option or menu. (Off, On*)
Settings menu
Settings 108
* Default
Item Description
Display
Brightness
Adjust the brightness of the screen. (Auto*, Dark, Normal,
Bright)
Normal is fixed in Playback mode even if you have selected
Auto.
Quick View
Set whether or not to review a captured image before returning
to the Shooting mode. (Off, On*)
This feature does not work in some modes.
Auto Display
Off
If you perform no operations for 30 seconds, the camera
automatically switches to Power save mode. (Off*, On)
In Power save mode, press any button other than [ ] to resume
using the camera.
Connectivity
* Default
Item Description
Video Out
Set the video signal output for your region.
• NTSC: USA, Canada, Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Mexico, etc
• PAL (supports only BDGHI): Australia, Austria, Belgium, China,
Denmark, England, Finland, France, Germany, Italy, Kuwait,
Malaysia, Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, Singapore, Spain,
Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, etc
i-Launcher Set i-Launcher to launch automatically when you connect your
camera to your computer. (Off, On*)
Settings menu
Settings 109
General
* Default
Item Description
Network
Information
View the Mac address and network certification number of
your camera.
Language Set a language for the display text.
Time Zone
Set the time zone for your location. When you travel to
another country, select Visit, and then select the appropriate
time zone. (Home*, Visit)
Date/Time Set Set the date and time.
Date Type
Set a date format. (YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY,
DD/MM/YYYY)
The default date type may differ depending on the
language selected.
Time Type
Set the time format. (12 Hr, 24 Hr)
The default time type may differ depending on the
language selected.
* Default
Item Description
File No.
Specify how to name files.
• Reset: Set the file number to start from 0001 when you
insert a new memory card, format a memory card, or
delete all files.
• Series*: Set the file number to resume from the previous
file number when you insert a new memory card, format a
memory card, or delete all files.
• The default name of the first folder is 100PHOTO and the
default name of the first file is SAM_0001.
• The file number increases by one, from SAM_0001 to
SAM_9999, each time you capture a photo or record a
video.
• The folder number increases by one, from 100PHOTO to
999PHOTO, each time a folder is full.
• The maximum number of files that can be stored in one
folder is 9,999.
• The camera defines file names according to the Design
rule for Camera File system (DCF) standard. If you
intentionally change file names, the camera may not play
back the files.
Settings menu
Settings 110
* Default
Item Description
Imprint
Set whether or not to display the date and time on captured
photos. (Off*, Date, Date & Time)
• The date and time will be displayed on the bottom right
corner of the photo.
• Some printer models may not print the date and time
properly.
• The photo will not display the date and time if:
- you select Live Panorama in Magic mode
Auto Power Off
Set the camera to turn off automatically when you perform
no operations for a specified period.
(Off, 1 min, 3 min*, 5 min, 10 min)
• Your settings will not change when you replace the
battery.
• The camera will not turn off automatically when the
camera is connected to a computer or WLAN or when
you are playing a slide show or videos.
DIRECT LINK
(Wi-Fi Button)
Start a preset Wi-Fi function by pressing [ ].
(AutoShare, MobileLink*, Remote Viewfinder, Email,
SNS & Cloud, Samsung Link)
Live view NFC
Set a Wi-Fi function to launch by reading a tag from an
NFC-enabled device in Shooting mode. (AutoShare,
Remote Viewfinder*)
* Default
Item Description
AF Lamp Set a light to turn on automatically in dark places to help you
focus. (Off, On*)
Format
Format the memory. Formatting will delete all files, including
protected files. (Yes, No)
Errors can occur if you use a memory card formatted by
another brand of camera, a memory card reader, or a
computer. Please format memory cards in the camera
before using them to capture photos.
Reset Reset menus and shooting options. Date and time, language,
and video output settings will not be reset. (Yes, No)
Open Source
License View open source licenses.
Appendixes
Get information about error messages, specifications, and maintenance.
Error messages …………………………………………………… 112
Camera maintenance …………………………………………… 113
Cleaning your camera ……………………………………… 113
Using or storing the camera ………………………………… 114
About memory cards ………………………………………… 115
About the battery …………………………………………… 118
Upgrading the firmware …………………………………… 122
Before contacting a service center …………………………… 123
Camera specifications …………………………………………… 126
Glossary ………………………………………………………… 130
Index ……………………………………………………………… 135
Appendixes 112
Error messages
When the following error messages appear, try these remedies.
Error message Suggested remedies
File system not
supported.
Your camera does not support the FAT file structure of
the inserted memory card. Format the memory card on
the camera.
Initialization failed.
The camera has failed to locate a device that supports
Samsung Link. Turn on devices on the network that
support Samsung Link.
Low Battery Insert a charged battery or recharge the battery.
Memory Full Delete unnecessary files or insert a new memory card.
No Image File Capture photos or insert a memory card that contains
some photos.
Password Incorrect The password for transferring files to another camera is
wrong. Enter the correct password.
Transfer failed.
• The camera has failed to send e-mails or files to other
devices.Try sending again.
• Check the network connection and try again.
Error message Suggested remedies
Cannot read file
content Delete the damaged file or contact a service center.
Card Error
• Turn off your camera, and then turn it on again.
• Remove your memory card, and then insert it again.
• Format your memory card.
Card not supported.
The inserted memory card is not supported by your
camera. Insert a microSD, microSDHC, or microSDXC
memory card.
Connection failed.
• The camera cannot connect to the network using the
selected access point. Select another AP and try again.
• The camera has failed to connect to the other devices.
Try connecting again.
DCF Full Error
File names do not match the DCF standard. Transfer
the files from the memory card to your computer and
format the card. Then, open the Settings menu and
select File No. → Reset. (p. 109)
Device disconnected.
Network connection disconnected while photos are
being transferred to supported devices. Re-select a
supported device.
Appendixes 113
Camera maintenance
Camera body
Wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth.
• Never use benzene, thinners, or alcohol to clean the device. These solutions can
damage the camera or cause it to malfunction.
• Do not press on or use a blower brush on the lens cover. This can damage the
camera.
Cleaning your camera
Camera lens and display
Use a blower brush to remove dust and wipe the lens gently with a soft cloth. If any
dust remains, apply lens cleaning liquid to a piece of lens cleaning paper and wipe
gently.
Camera maintenance
Appendixes 114
Using or storing the camera
Inappropriate places to use or store the camera
• Avoid exposing the camera to very cold or very hot temperatures.
• Avoid using your camera in areas with extremely high humidity, or where the
humidity changes drastically.
• Avoid exposing the camera to direct sunlight and storing it in hot, poorlyventilated
areas, such as in a car during summer time.
• Protect your camera and the display from impact, rough handling, and excessive
vibration to avoid serious damage.
• Avoid using or storing your camera in dusty, dirty, humid, or poorly-ventilated
areas to prevent damage to moving parts and internal components.
• Do not use your camera near fuels, combustibles, or flammable chemicals. Do
not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same
compartment as the camera or its accessories.
• Do not store the camera where there are mothballs.
Using on beaches or shores
• Protect your camera from sand and dirt when you use it on beaches or in similar
areas.
• Your camera is not waterproof. Do not handle the battery, adapter, or memory
card with wet hands. Operating the camera with wet hands may cause damage to
your camera.
Storing for extended period of time
• When you store the camera for an extended period, place it in a sealed container
with an absorbent material, such as silica gel.
• Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before use.
• You must reset the date and time when you turn the camera on after the camera
and battery have been separated for a prolonged period.
Using the camera with caution in humid environments
When you transfer the camera from a cold environment to a warm one,
condensation can form on the lens or internal components of the camera. In this
situation, turn off the camera and wait for at least 1 hour. If condensation forms
on the memory card, remove the memory card from the camera and wait until all
moisture has evaporated before reinserting it.
Other cautions
• Do not swing your camera by the strap. This may cause injury to yourself or others
or damage to your camera.
• Do not paint your camera, as paint can clog moving parts and prevent proper
operation.
• Turn off the camera when not using it.
Camera maintenance
Appendixes 115
• Your camera contains delicate parts. Avoid impacts to the camera.
• Protect the display from external force by keeping it in the case when not in
use. Protect the camera from scratches by keeping it away from sand, sharp
implements, or loose change.
• Do not use the camera if the screen is cracked or broken. Broken glass or acrylic
could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the camera to a Samsung service
center to have it repaired.
• Never place cameras, batteries, chargers, or accessories near, on, or in heating
devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Heat can deform or
overheat these devices, which can cause a fire or explosion.
• Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight, as this may discolor the image sensor or
cause it to malfunction.
• Protect the lens from fingerprints and scratches. Clean the lens with a soft, clean,
debris-free lens cloth.
• The camera may turn off if struck or dropped. This is to protect the memory card.
Turn on the camera to use it again.
• While you use the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect
your camera’s lifespan or performance.
• When you use the camera in low temperatures, it may take some time to turn on,
the color of the display may be changed temporarily, or after-images may appear.
These conditions are not malfunctions and they will correct themselves when the
camera is returned to milder temperatures.
• Paint or metal on the outside of the camera may cause allergies, itchy skin,
eczema, or swelling for people with sensitive skin. If you experience any of these
symptoms, stop using the camera immediately and consult a doctor.
• Do not insert foreign objects into any of your camera’s compartments, slots, or
access points. Damage due to improper use may not be covered by your warranty.
• Do not allow unqualified personnel to service the camera or attempt to service
the camera yourself. Any damage that results from unqualified service is not
covered by your warranty.
About memory cards
Supported memory cards
Your camera supports microSD (Secure Digital), microSDHC (Secure Digital High
Capacity), or microSDXC (Secure Digital eXtended Capacity) memory cards.
Memory card
Memory card adapter
To read data with a PC or memory card reader, insert the memory card into a
memory card adapter.
Camera maintenance
Appendixes 116
Memory card capacity
The memory capacity may differ depending on the scenes you shoot or shooting
conditions. These capacities are based on a 2 GB microSD card:
Photo
Size Super Fine Fine Normal
231 485 669
262 525 719
303 606 808
359 719 969
669 1139 1486
969 1609 1927
1381 2262 2738
2628 3185 3806
Video
Size 30fps
1280 X 720
Approx. 15' 35"
640 X 480
Approx. 30' 44"
For Sharing
Approx. 90' 03"
• The figures above are measured without using the zoom function.
• Available recording time may vary if you use the zoom.
• Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time.
Camera maintenance
Appendixes 117
Cautions when using memory cards
• Avoid exposing memory cards to very cold or very hot temperatures (below
0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can cause memory cards
to malfunction.
• Insert a memory card in the correct direction. Inserting a memory card in the
wrong direction may damage your camera and memory card.
• Do not use memory cards that have been formatted by other cameras or by a
computer. Reformat the memory card with your camera.
• Turn off the camera before you insert or remove the memory card.
• Do not remove the memory card or turn off your camera while the lamp is
blinking, as this may damage your data.
• When the lifespan of a memory card has expired, you cannot store any more
photos on the card. Use a new memory card.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject memory cards to heavy impact or pressure.
• Avoid using or storing memory cards near strong magnetic fields.
• Avoid using or keeping memory cards in areas with high temperatures, high
humidity, or corrosive substances.
• Prevent memory cards from making contact with liquids, dirt, or foreign
substances. If dirty, wipe the memory card clean with a soft cloth before you
insert the memory card into your camera.
• Do not allow liquids, dirt, or foreign substances to come in contact with memory
cards or the memory card slot. Doing so may cause memory cards or the camera
to malfunction.
• When you carry a memory card, use a case to protect the card from electrostatic
discharges.
• Transfer important data to other media, such as a hard disk, CD, or DVD.
• When you use the camera for an extended period, the memory card may become
warm. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data.
Camera maintenance
Appendixes 118
About the battery
Use only Samsung-approved batteries.
Battery specifications
Specification Description
Model BP70A
Type Lithium-ion battery
Cell capacity 700 mAh
Voltage 3.7 V
Charging time* (when the camera is
switched off) Approximately 150 min
* Charging the battery by connecting it to a computer may take longer.
Battery life
Average shooting time/
Number of photos
Test conditions
(when the battery is fully charged)
Photos
Approximately
100 min/
Approximately
200 photos
The battery life was measured under the
following conditions: in Program mode, in
darkness, resolution, Fine quality, OIS on.
1. Set the flash option to Fill in, take a single shot,
and zoom in or out.
2. Set the flash option to Off, take a single shot,
and zoom in or out.
3. Perform steps 1 and 2, waiting 30 seconds
between each step. Repeat the process for
5 minutes, and then turn off the camera for
1 minute.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3.
Videos Approximately
70 min Record videos at resolution and 30 FPS.
• The figures above are based on the CIPA test standards. Your results may differ depending
on your actual usage.
• Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time.
• When using network functions, the battery will be depleted more quickly.
Camera maintenance
Appendixes 119
Low battery message
When the battery has fully discharged, the battery icon will turn red and the
"Low Battery" message will appear.
Notes about using the battery
• Avoid exposing batteries to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F
or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can reduce the charging capacity of
your batteries.
• When you use the camera for an extended period, the area around the battery
chamber may become warm. This does not affect the normal use of the camera.
• Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet,
as this may cause a fire or electric shock.
• In temperatures below 0 °C/32 °F, battery capacity and battery life may decrease.
• Battery capacity may decrease in low temperatures, but will return to normal in
milder temperatures.
• Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period.
Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage
to your camera. Storing the camera for extended periods with the battery
installed causes the battery to discharge. You may not be able to recharge a fully
discharged battery.
• When you do not use the camera for an extended period (3 months or more),
check the battery and recharge it regularly. If you let the battery discharge
continually, its capacity and life may decrease, which can lead to a malfunction,
fire, or explosion.
Cautions about using the battery
Protect batteries, chargers, and memory cards from damage
Prevent batteries from making contact with metal objects, as this can create a
connection between the + and – terminals of your battery and lead to temporary or
permanent battery damage and may cause a fire or electric shock.
Notes about charging the battery
• If the status lamp is off, make sure that the battery is inserted correctly.
• If the camera is on while charging, the battery may not fully charge. Turn off the
camera before charging the battery.
• Do not use your camera when you are charging the battery. This may cause a fire
or electric shock.
• Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet,
as this may cause a fire or electric shock.
• When the battery is fully discharged, allow it to charge for a while before turning
the camera on. Let the battery charge for at least 10 minutes before turning on
the camera.
• If you connect the camera to an external power source when the battery is
depleted, using high energy-consuming functions will cause the camera to turn
off. To use the camera normally, recharge the battery.
Camera maintenance
Appendixes 120
• If you reconnect the power cable when the battery is fully charged, the status
lamp turns on for approximately 30 minutes.
• Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Charge the
battery until the red status lamp turns off.
• If the indicator light does not illuminate, reconnect the cable, or remove the
battery and insert it again.
• Overcharging batteries may shorten battery life. After charging is finished,
disconnect the cable from your camera.
• Do not bend or place heavy objects on the AC cable. Doing so may damage the
cable.
Notes about charging with a computer connected
• Use only the provided USB cable.
• The battery may not charge when:
- you use a USB hub
- other USB devices are connected to your computer
- you connect the cable to the port on the front side of your computer
- the USB port of your computer does not support the power output standard
(5 V, 500 mA)
Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care
• Never dispose of batteries in a fire. Follow all local regulations when you dispose
of used batteries.
• Never place batteries or cameras on or in heating devices, such as microwave
ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may explode when they are overheated.
Camera maintenance
Appendixes 121
Personal injury or death can occur if the battery is handled
carelessly or improperly. For your safety, follow these instructions
for proper battery handling:
• The battery can ignite or explode if not handled properly.
If you notice any deformities, cracks, or other abnormalities in the
battery, immediately discontinue use of the battery and contact a
service center.
• Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommend battery chargers and
adapters and charge the battery only by the methods described in this
user manual.
• Do not place the battery near heating devices or expose it to
excessively warm environments, such as the inside of an enclosed car
in the summertime.
• Do not place the battery in a microwave oven.
• Avoid storing or using the battery in hot, humid places, such as spas or
shower enclosures.
• Do not rest the camera on flammable surfaces, such as bedding,
carpets, or electric blankets for a prolonged period.
• When the camera is switched on, do not leave it in any confined space
for a prolonged period.
• Do not allow battery terminals to come in contact with metallic
objects, such as necklaces, coins, keys, or watches.
• Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion
replacement batteries.
• Do not disassemble the battery or puncture it with any sharp object.
• Avoid exposing the battery to high pressure or crushing forces.
• Avoid exposing the battery to major impacts, such as dropping it from
high places.
• Do not expose the battery to temperatures of 60 °C (140 °F) or above.
• Do not allow the battery to come in contact with moisture or liquids.
• Do not expose the battery to sources of excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire, or the like.
Disposal guidelines
• Dispose of the battery with care.
• Do not dispose of the battery in a fire.
• Disposal regulations may differ by country or region.Dispose of the
battery in accordance with all local and federal regulations.
Guidelines for charging the battery
Charge the battery only by the methods described in this user manual.
The battery can ignite or explode if not charged properly.
Camera maintenance
Appendixes 122
Upgrading the firmware
i-Launcher allows you to upgrade the firmware of your camera.
1 On the Home screen, scroll to .
2 Select .
3 Select Connectivity → i-Launcher → On.
4 Turn off the camera.
5 Connect the camera to your computer with the USB cable.
You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable
is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for
any loss of data.
6 Turn on the camera.
7 Install i-Launcher on the PC.
OS How to Install
Windows
When the pop-up window prompts you to install i-Launcher,
select Yes.
• If a pop-up window prompting you to run iLinker.exe appears,
run it first.
• If the pop-up window does not appear, select My Computer
→ i-Launcher → iLinker.exe.
• When you connect the camera to a computer with i-Launcher
installed, the program will launch automatically.
Mac Click Devices → i-Launcher → Mac → iLinker.
8 Upgrade the firmware to the latest version following the on-screen
instructions.
• Select Firmware Upgrader on the screen of i-Launcher.
• Before upgrading the firmware, ensure that the PC is connected to a network.
• Do not power off during the firmware upgrade.
Appendixes 123
Before contacting a service center
If you are having trouble with your camera, try these troubleshooting procedures before you contact a service center. If you have attempted the suggested remedy and are still
having problems with your device, contact your local dealer or service center.
When you leave your camera at a service center, be sure to also leave the other components that may have contributed to the malfunction, such as the memory card and battery.
Situation Suggested remedies
Cannot capture photos
• There is no space on the memory card. Delete
unnecessary files or insert a new card.
• Format the memory card.
• The memory card is defective. Get a new
memory card.
• Make sure that the camera is switched on.
• Charge the battery.
• Make sure that the battery is inserted correctly.
The camera freezes Remove the battery and insert it again.
The camera heats up
While you use the camera, it may heat up. This
is normal and should not affect your camera’s
lifespan or performance.
The flash does not work • The flash option may be set to Off. (p. 52)
• You cannot use the flash in some modes.
Situation Suggested remedies
Cannot turn on the camera
• Ensure that the battery is inserted.
• Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly.
(p. 18)
• Charge the battery.
The power turns off suddenly
• Charge the battery.
• Your camera may be in Auto Power Off mode.
(p. 110)
• The camera may turn off to prevent the
memory card from being damaged due to an
impact. Turn on your camera again.
The camera is losing battery
power quickly
• The battery may lose power more quickly in
low temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F). Keep the
battery warm by putting it into your pocket.
• Using the flash or recording videos depletes the
battery quickly. Recharge if needed.
• Batteries are consumable parts that must be
replaced over time. Get a new battery if the
battery life is diminishing quickly.
Before contacting a service center
Appendixes 124
Situation Suggested remedies
The flash fires unexpectedly The flash may fire due to static electricity. The
camera is not malfunctioning.
The date and time are
incorrect
Set the date and time in the display settings.
(p. 109)
The display or buttons do not
work Remove the battery, and then insert it again.
The camera display responds
poorly
If you use your camera at very low temperatures,
it may cause the camera screen to malfunction
or discolor. For better performance of your
camera screen, use your camera in moderate
temperatures.
The memory card has an error
• Turn off your camera, and then turn it on again.
• Remove your memory card, and then insert it
again.
• Format your memory card.
See “Cautions when using memory cards” for
more detail. (p. 117)
Situation Suggested remedies
Cannot play back files
If you change the name of a file, your camera may
not play the file (the name of the file should meet
the DCF standard). If you encounter this situation,
play back the files on your computer.
The photo is blurry
• Make sure that the focus option you set is
suitable for close-up shots. (p. 55)
• Make sure that the lens is clean. If not, clean the
lens. (p. 113)
• Make sure that the subject is within range of
the flash. (p. 127)
The colors in the photo do not
match the actual scene
An incorrect White Balance can create unrealistic
color. Select the proper White Balance option to
suit the light source. (p. 63)
The photo is too bright or too
dark
Your photo is overexposed or underexposed.
• Turn the flash off or on. (p. 52)
• Adjust the ISO sensitivity. (p. 54)
• Adjust the exposure value. (p. 61)
Before contacting a service center
Appendixes 125
Situation Suggested remedies
The TV does not display your
photos
• Make sure that the camera is correctly
connected to the TV with the A/V cable.
• Make sure that your memory card contains
photos.
Your computer does not
recognize your camera
• Make sure that the USB cable is connected
correctly.
• Make sure that your camera is switched on.
• Make sure that you are using a supported
operating system.
Your computer disconnects
the camera while transferring
files
The file transmission may be interrupted by static
electricity. Disconnect the USB cable and connect
it again.
Situation Suggested remedies
i-Launcher is not functioning
properly
• End i-Launcher and restart the program.
• Make sure that i-Launcher is set to On in the
settings menu. (p. 108)
• Depending on your computer's specifications
and environment, the program may not launch
automatically. In this case, click Start →
All Programs → Samsung → i-Launcher →
Samsung i-Launcher on your Windows
computer. (For Windows 8, open Start screen,
and then select All apps → Samsung
i-Launcher.) Or, click Applications →
Samsung → i-Launcher on your Mac OS
computer.
Your TV or computer
cannot display photos and
videos that are stored on a
microSDXC memory card.
microSDXC memory cards use the exFAT file
system. Ensure that the external device is
compatible with the exFAT file system before
connecting the camera to the device.
Your computer does not
recognize a microSDXC
memory card.
microSDXC memory cards use the exFAT file
system. To use microSDXC memory cards on a
Windows XP computer, download and update
the exFAT file system driver from the Microsoft
website.
Appendixes 126
Image sensor
Type 1/2.3" (Approximately 7.76 mm) CCD
Effective pixels Approximately 16.2 mega-pixels
Total pixels Approximately 16.6 mega-pixels
Lens
Focal length Samsung Lens 12x Zoom Lens f = 4.3–51.6 mm
(35 mm film equivalent: 24–288 mm)
F-stop range F3.1(W)–F6.3(T)
Digital zoom
• Still image mode: 1.0–2.0X
• Playback mode: 1.0–14.4X (depending on image size)
• Intelli zoom: 2.0X
Display
Type TFT LCD
Feature 2.7" (67.5 mm) QVGA(230K)
Focusing
Type TTL auto focus (Center AF, Multi AF, Tracking AF,
Face Detection AF, Video continuous auto focus (CAF))
Range
Wide (W) Tele (T)
Normal (AF) 31 in. (80 cm)-
infinity
98 in. (250 cm)-
infinity
Macro 2-31 in. (5-80 cm) 51-98 in.
(130-250 cm)
Auto Macro 2 in. (5 cm) -infinity 51 in. (130 cm)-
infinity
Shutter speed
• Smart Auto: 1/8–1/2,000 sec.
• Program: 1–1/2,000 sec.
• Night: 8–1/2,000 sec.
• Fireworks: 2 sec.
Exposure
Control Program AE
Metering Multi, Spot, Center-weighted, Face Detection
Metering range EV 2–17 (Wide, ISO Auto), EV 4–19 (Tele, ISO Auto)
Compensation ±2EV (1/3 EV Step)
ISO equivalent Auto, ISO 80, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600,
ISO 3200
Camera specifications
Camera specifications
Appendixes 127
Flash
Mode Auto, Red-eye, Fill in, Slow Sync, Off, Red-eye Fix
Range • Wide: 7.87-157.48 in. (0.2-4.0 m) (ISO Auto)
• Tele: 19.69-62.99 in. (0.5-1.6 m) (ISO Auto)
Recharging time Approximately 5 sec.
Shake reduction
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS)
Effect
Photo Shooting
mode
• Photo Filter (Smart Filter): Miniature, Vignetting, Cross Filter,
Fish-eye, Classic, Retro
• Image Adjust: Sharpness, Contrast, Saturation
Video Shooting
mode
Movie Filter: Miniature, Vignetting, Fish-eye, Classic, Retro,
Palette Effect 1, Palette Effect 2, Palette Effect 3, Palette Effect 4
White Balance
Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent_H, Fluorescent_L, Tungsten, Custom Set,
Color Temp.
Date Imprinting
Date & Time, Date, Off
Shooting
Photos
• Modes: Smart Auto (Portrait, Night Portrait, Backlight
Portrait, Night, Backlight, Landscape, White, Natural Green,
Blue Sky, Sunset, Macro, Macro text, Macro Color, Tripod,
Action, Low Light, Spotlight, Spotlight (Macro), Spotlight
(Portrait)), Program, Smart (Beauty Face, Landscape, Macro,
Action Freeze, Silhouette, Sunset, Night, Fireworks, Light
Trace), Live Panorama, Photo Filter
• Burst: Single, Continuous, Motion Capture, AEB
• Timer: Off, 10 Sec, 2 Sec, Double (10 Sec, 2 Sec)
Videos
• Modes: Smart Scene Detection (Landscape, Blue Sky,
Natural Green, Sunset), Movie Filter
• Format: MP4 (H.264) (Max recording time: 20 min)
• Size: 1280 X 720, 640 X 480, 240 Web
• Voice: On, Off, Zoom Mute
• Continuous AF: Continuous AF On, Continuous AF Off
Camera specifications
Appendixes 128
Playback
Photos
• Type: Single image, Thumbnails, Multi Slide Show with Music
and Effect, Smart Album*
* Smart Album category: All, Date, File Type
• Edit: Rotate, Smart Filter, Brightness, Contrast, Saturation,
ACB, Face Retouch, Red-eye Fix, Resize, Crop
• Effect: Smart Filter (Normal, Miniature, Vignetting, Cross
Filter, Fish-eye, Classic, Retro)
Videos Video editing: Still image capture, Time trimming
Storage
Media
External memory (Optional):
microSD card (2 GB guaranteed),
microSDHC card (up to 32 GB guaranteed),
microSDXC card (up to 64 GB guaranteed)
- Class 6 and above recommended
File format • Still Image: JPEG (DCF), EXIF 2.3
• Movie Clip: MP4 (Video: MPEG-4.AVC/H.264, Audio: AAC)
Image size
Icon Size
4608 X 3456
4608 X 3072
4608 X 2592
3648 X 2736
2592 X 1944
1984 X 1488
1920 X 1080
1024 X 768
Wireless network
MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Email, SNS & Cloud, Samsung Link, AutoShare,
S/W Upgrade Notifier
Camera specifications
Appendixes 129
NFC
Yes
Interface
Digital output
connector USB 2.0
Audio input/
output Internal speaker (Mono), Microphone (Mono)
Video output A/V: NTSC, PAL (selectable)
DC power input
connector 5.0 V
Power source
Rechargeable
battery Lithium-ion battery (BP70A, 700 mAh)
Connector type Micro USB (5 pin)
The power source may differ depending on your region.
Dimensions (W X H X D)
3.97 X 2.40 X 0.81 in. (100.9 X 61.2 X 20.7 mm) (without protrusions)
Weight
5.11 oz (145 g) (without battery and memory card)
Operating Temperature
0–40 °C (32-104 °F)
Operating Humidity
5–85 %
Software
i-Launcher
Specifications may change without notice to improve performance.
Appendixes 130
ACB (Auto Contrast Balance)
This feature automatically improves the contrast of your images when the subject is
backlit or when there is a high contrast between your subject and the background.
AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket)
This feature automatically captures several images at different exposures to help
you capture a properly-exposed image.
AF (Auto Focus)
A system that automatically focuses the camera lens on the subject. Your camera
uses the contrast to focus automatically.
Aperture
The aperture controls the amount of light that reaches the camera’s sensor.
Camera shake (Blur)
If the camera is moved while the shutter is open, the entire image may appear
blurred. This occurs more often when the shutter speed is slow. Prevent camera
shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, or using a faster shutter speed.
Alternately, use a tripod or the OIS function to stabilize the camera.
Composition
Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually, abiding
by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition.
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)
A specification to define a file format and file system for digital cameras created by
the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).
Depth of field
The distance between the nearest and farthest points that can be acceptably
focused in a photograph. Depth of field varies with lens aperture, focal length, and
distance from the camera to the subject. For example, using a smaller f-number will
create a large depth of field and blur the background in the composition.
Digital zoom
A feature that artificially increases the amount of zoom available with a zoom lens
(Optical zoom). When using the Digital zoom, the image quality will deteriorate as
the magnification increases.
Glossary
Glossary
Appendixes 131
EV Compensation
This feature allows you to quickly adjust the exposure value measured by the
camera, in limited increments, to improve the exposure of your photos. Set the EV
compensation to -1.0 EV to adjust the value one step darker and 1.0 EV to one step
brighter.
EV (Exposure Value)
All the combinations of the camera’s shutter speed and lens aperture that result in
the same exposure.
Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format)
A specification to define an image file format for digital cameras created by the
Japan Electronic Industries Development Association (JEIDA).
Exposure
The amount of light allowed to reach the camera’s sensor. Exposure is controlled by
a combination of the shutter speed, the aperture value, and ISO sensitivity.
Flash
A speed light that helps to create adequate exposure in low-light conditions.
Focal length
The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in millimeters). Longer
focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is magnified. Shorter
focal lengths result in wider angles of view.
H.264/MPEG-4
A high-compression video format established by international standard
organizations ISO-IEC and ITU-T and developed by the Joint Video Team (JVT). This
codec is capable of providing good video quality at low bit rates.
Image sensor
The physical part of a digital camera that contains a photosite for each pixel in
the image. Each photosite records the brightness of the light that strikes it during
an exposure. Common sensor types are CCD (Charge-coupled Device) and CMOS
(Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor).
Glossary
Appendixes 132
ISO sensitivity
The sensitivity of the camera to light, based on the equivalent film speed used in
a film camera. At higher ISO sensitivity settings, the camera uses a higher shutter
speed, which can reduce blur caused by camera shake and low light. However,
images with high sensitivity are more susceptible to noise.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
A lossy method of compression for digital images. JPEG images are compressed to
reduce their overall file size with minimal deterioration of the image resolution.
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
A visual display commonly used in consumer electronics. This display needs a
separate backlight, such as CCFL or LED, to reproduce colors.
Macro
This feature allows you to capture close-up photos of very small objects. When
using the macro feature, the camera can maintain a sharp focus on small objects at
a near life-size ratio (1:1).
Metering
The metering refers to the way in which the camera measures the quantity of light
to set the exposure.
MJPEG (Motion JPEG)
A video format which is compressed as a JPEG image.
NFC (Near Field Communication)
NFC is a set of standards for radio communication at very close proximity. You can
use NFC-enabled devices to activate features or exchange data with other devices.
Noise
Misinterpreted pixels in a digital image that may appear as misplaced or random,
bright pixels. Noise usually occurs when photos are shot with a high sensitivity or
when a sensitivity is automatically set in a dark place.
OIS (Optical Image Stabilization)
This feature compensates in real-time for shaking and vibrating while shooting.
There is no image degradation compared to Digital Image Stabilization feature.
Glossary
Appendixes 133
Optical zoom
This is a general zoom which can enlarge images with a lens and does not degrade
the quality of images.
Quality
An expression of the rate of compression used in a digital image. Higher quality
images have a lower rate of compression, which usually results in a larger file size.
Resolution
The number of pixels present in a digital image. High resolution images contain
more pixels and typically show more detail than low resolution images.
Shutter speed
Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the shutter,
and it is an important factor in the brightness of a photo, as it controls the amount
of light which passes through the aperture before it reaches the image sensor. A
fast shutter speed allows less time to let light in and the photo becomes darker and
more easily freezes subjects in motion.
Vignetting
A reduction of an image’s brightness or saturation at the periphery (outer edges)
compared to the center of the image. Vignetting can draw interest to subjects
positioned in the center of an image.
White balance (color balance)
An adjustment of the intensities of colors (typically the primary colors red, green,
and blue) in an image. The goal of adjusting the white balance, or color balance, is
to correctly render the colors in an image.
Appendixes 134
Correct Disposal of This Product
Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)
(Applicable in countries with separate collection systems)
This marking on the product, accessories, or literature indicates that the product
and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be
disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent
possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste
disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them
responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this
product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take
these items for environmentally safe recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions
of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be
mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.
PlanetFirst represents Samsung Electronics' commitment to
sustainable development and social responsibility through ecodriven
business and management activities.
Correct disposal of batteries in this product
(Applicable in countries with separate collection systems)
This marking on the battery, manual, or packaging indicates that the batteries in
this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of
their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd, or Pb indicate that
the battery contains mercury, cadmium, or lead above the reference levels in EC
Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can
cause harm to human health or the environment.
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate
batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free
battery return system.
Appendixes 135
A
AF-assist light
Location 15
Settings 110
AF Sound 107
Auto Contrast Balance (ACB)
Playback mode 80
Shooting mode 62
Auto Exposure Bracket (AEB) 65
AutoShare 94
A/V port 15
B
Battery
Caution 119
Charging 19
Inserting 18
Blink Detection 59
Brightness
Playback mode 80
Shooting mode 61
Burst modes
Auto Exposure Bracket (AEB) 65
Continuous 65
Motion Capture 65
C
CAF (Continuous AF) 41
Camera maintenance 113
Camera specifications 126
Capturing an image from video 82
Charging 19
Cleaning
Camera body 113
Display 113
Lens 113
Connecting to your Mac
computer 85
Contrast
Playback mode 80
Shooting mode 66
D
Date/Time Set 109
Deleting files 73
Digital zoom 32
DIRECT LINK button 17
Disconnecting the camera 85
Display brightness 108
Display type 29
E
Editing photos 78
Editing videos
Capturing 82
Trimming 82
Enlarging 74
Error messages 112
Exposure 61
Index
Appendixes 136
F
Face Detection 58
Flash
Auto 52
Fill in 53
Off 52
Red-eye 53
Red-eye Fix 53
Slow Sync 53
Focus area
Center AF 56
Multi AF 56
Tracking AF 56
Formatting 110
Function button 16
G
Guide Line 107 H
Half-press shutter 35
Home screen 23 I
Icons
Playback mode 70
Shooting mode 22
Image Adjustment
ACB 80
Brightness
Playback mode 80
Shooting mode 61
Contrast
Playback mode 80
Shooting mode 66
Red-eye 81
Saturation
Playback mode 80
Shooting mode 66
Sharpness 66
Imprint 110
Intelli zoom 33
ISO sensitivity 54 L
Language settings 109
Live Panorama mode 44 M
Macro
Auto Macro 56
Macro 56
Memory card
Caution 117
Insert 18
Menu button 16
Metering
Center-weighted 62
Multi 62
Spot 62
MobileLink 95
Motion Capture 65
Movie Filter mode 46
Movie mode 41 N
NFC (Tag & Go) 93 O
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) 34
Optional accessories 14
Index
Appendixes 137
P
Photo Filter mode 45
Playback button 16
Playback mode 70
Power button 15
Power save mode 108
Program mode 39
Protecting files 73
Q
Quick view 108
R
Red-eye
Playback mode 81
Shooting mode 52
Remote Viewfinder 96
Reset 110
Resolution
Playback mode 78
Shooting mode 49
Retouching faces
Playback mode 80
Rotating 78
S
Samsung Link 103
Saturation
Playback mode 80
Shooting mode 66
Self-Portrait 58
Service center 123
Settings 109
Sharing service
Accessing 101
Uploading photos or videos 101
Sharpness 66
Shooting portraits
Blink Detection 59
Face Detection 58
Self-Portrait 58
Smile Shot 59
Shutter button 15
Slide show 76
Smart Auto mode 38
Smart Filter
Photo shooting mode 45
Playback mode 79
Video recording mode 46
Smart mode 42
Smart Movie mode 40
Smile Shot 59
Sound settings 30
Start Image 107
Status lamp 16
T
Thumbnails 71
Timer
Shooting mode 51
Timer lamp 15
Time settings 20
Time zone settings 20, 109
Tracking AF 57
Index
Appendixes 138
Transferring files
Email 98
Mac 85
Windows 84
Tripod mount 15
U
Unpacking 14
USB port 15
V
Video
Playback mode 77
Shooting mode 41
Video out 108
Viewing files
Category 72
Panoramic photos 75
Slide show 76
Thumbnails 71
TV 83
W
White Balance 63
Wireless network 89
Z
Zoom
Using the zoom 32
Zoom button 16
Zoom sound settings 67
Index
Please refer to the warranty that came with your product or
visit our website, www.samsung.com, for after-sales service or inquiries.
Cliquez sur
une rubrique
Ce manuel d’utilisation propose des instructions
détaillées pour l’utilisation de votre appareil
photo. Veuillez le lire attentivement.
Manuel
d’utilisation
Questions fréquentes
Fonctions de base
Lecture/Retouche
Annexes
Référence rapide
Fonctions avancées
Réseau sans fil
Index
Table des matières
Options de prise de vue
Paramètres
WB35F/WB36F/WB37F
1
Evitez d’endommager la vue des sujets photographiés.
N’utilisez pas le flash à proximité (à moins d’un mètre) de personnes ou d’animaux.
L’utilisation du flash trop près des yeux du sujet peut provoquer des lésions
temporaires ou permanentes.
Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo à la portée d’enfants en bas âge ou d’animaux
domestiques.
Tenez l’appareil, ses pièces et ses accessoires, hors de portée des enfants en bas âge
et des animaux. L’ingestion de petites pièces peut provoquer un étouffement ou des
blessures graves. Les composants et les accessoires peuvent également présenter
des risques de blessure.
Evitez toute exposition prolongée de l’appareil photo à la lumière directe du
soleil ou à des températures élevées.
Une exposition prolongée à la lumière directe du soleil ou à des températures très
élevées peut endommager de manière permanente les composants internes de
l’appareil photo.
Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité
Respectez toujours les consignes et conseils d’utilisation suivants afin de prévenir toute situation dangereuse et de garantir un fonctionnement optimal de votre appareil photo.
Avertissement—situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser
d’autres personnes
Ne démontez pas ou n’essayez pas de réparer vous-même votre appareil
photo.
Vous pouvez endommager l’appareil photo et vous exposer à un risque de choc
électrique.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de gaz ou de liquides inflammables
ou explosifs.
Vous risquez de provoquer une explosion ou un incendie.
Ne laissez pas pénétrer de matériaux inflammables dans l’appareil photo ou
ne stockez pas ces matériaux à proximité de l’appareil photo.
Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique ou de provoquer un incendie.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo avec les mains mouillées.
Vous pouvez recevoir une décharge électrique.
2
Evitez de couvrir l’appareil photo ou le chargeur avec des couvertures ou des
vêtements.
L’appareil photo peut surchauffer, se déformer ou prendre feu.
Ne manipulez pas le cordon d’alimentation ou le chargeur lors d’un orage.
Vous pourriez recevoir une décharge électrique.
Si du liquide ou des corps étrangers pénètrent dans l’appareil photo,
déconnectez toutes les sources d’alimentation comme la batterie ou le
chargeur, puis contactez un service après-vente de Samsung.
Respectez la réglementation interdisant l'utilisation des appareils photo dans
certaines zones spécifiques.
• Evitez les interférences avec d'autres appareils électroniques.
• Eteignez votre appareil photo à bord d'un avion. Il pourrait photo peut provoquer
des interférences avec l'équipement de bord. Respectez les consignes de la
compagnie aérienne et éteignez votre appareil photo lorsque vous y êtes invité.
• Eteignez votre appareil photo à proximité de tout appareil médical. Il pourrait
causer des interférences avec le matériel médical utilisé dans les hôpitaux et les
centres de soins. Observez la réglementation en vigeur, ainsi que les mises en
garde affichées et les consignes du personnel médical.
Évitez les interférences avec les stimulateurs cardiaques.
Maintenez l’appareil photo à bonne distance des stimulateurs cardiaques pour
éviter toute interférence, comme recommandé par le fabricant et les groupes de
recherche. Si vous pensez que votre appareil photo interfère avec un stimulateur
cardiaque ou un appareil médical, éteignez-le immédiatement et contactez le
fabricant du stimulateur cardiaque ou de l'appareil médical pour connaître la
marche à suivre.
Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité
3
Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité
Attention—situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil photo ou
d’autres appareils
Si vous rangez votre appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une période de temps
prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie.
Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se détériorer avec le temps, risquant d’endommager
gravement l’appareil photo.
Utilisez uniquement des batteries de remplacement lithium-ion authentiques
recommandées par le fabricant. N’endommagez pas ou ne chauffez pas la
batterie.
Cela risque de provoquer un incendie ou des dommages corporels.
Utilisez uniquement des batteries, des chargeurs et des accessoires
homologués par Samsung.
• L’utilisation de batteries, chargeurs, câbles ou accessoires non homologués peut
endommager l’appareil photo, provoquer une explosion ou causer des blessures.
• Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages ou blessures résultant
d’une utilisation inappropriée de batteries, chargeurs, câbles ou accessoires.
N’utilisez la batterie que pour l’usage pour lequel elle a été conçue.
Un usage non conforme risque de provoquer une décharge électrique ou un
incendie.
Ne touchez pas le flash en cours de déclenchement.
Le flash est très chaud lorsqu’il se déclenche et peut provoquer des brûlures.
Lorsque vous utilisez un chargeur, éteignez toujours l’appareil photo avant de
débrancher le chargeur de la prise murale.
Si vous ne prenez pas cette précaution, vous risquez de recevoir une décharge
électrique ou de provoquer un incendie.
Débranchez le chargeur de la prise murale lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas.
Si vous ne prenez pas cette précaution, vous risquez de recevoir une décharge
électrique ou de provoquer un incendie.
N’utilisez jamais de fiches et de cordons d’alimentation endommagés ou de
prises électriques mal fixées lorsque vous rechargez la batterie.
Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique ou de provoquer un incendie.
Evitez tout contact du chargeur avec les bornes + et – de la batterie.
Vous pouvez recevoir une décharge électrique ou provoquer un incendie.
4
Ne laissez pas tomber l’appareil photo et ne le soumettez pas à des chocs
violents.
Cela risquerait d’endommager l’écran ou les composants internes ou externes.
Effectuez les manipulations de branchement des cordons, du chargeur et
d’insertion des batteries et des cartes mémoire avec précaution.
Enfoncer les cordons en forçant ou sans précaution et brancher les câbles ou insérer
les batteries et les cartes mémoire de manière incorrecte peut endommager les
ports, les prises et les accessoires.
Evitez tout contact des cartes mémoire avec le boîtier de l’appareil photo.
Vous risquez d’endommager ou d’effacer les données qui y sont stockées.
N’utilisez jamais une batterie, un chargeur ou une carte mémoire endommagé.
Vous risqueriez de recevoir une décharge électrique, d’endommager l’appareil
photo ou de provoquer un incendie.
Ne pas positionner l’appareil photo à l’intérieur ou à proximité d’un champ
magnétique.
Cela risquerait de l’endommager.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est endommagé.
Si des parties en verre ou en acrylique sont brisées, rapportez votre appareil photo à
un centre de service Samsung pour le faire réparer.
Vérifiez que l’appareil photo fonctionne correctement avant de l’utiliser.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de fichiers ou de dégâts
résultant d’un fonctionnement incorrect ou d’une mauvaise utilisation de l’appareil
photo.
Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB du câble USB sur votre appareil photo.
Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous inversez le sens de connexion du
câble. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de pertes de données.
Evitez les interférences avec d'autres appareils électroniques.
Les signaux de fréquence radio émis par votre appareil photo peuvent perturber
le fonctionnement des systèmes électroniques mal installés ou insuffisamment
protégés, notamment les stimulateurs cardiaques, les prothèses auditives, les
appareils médicaux et les équipements électroniques domestiques et automobiles.
Contactez les fabricants de ces appareils électroniques pour résoudre les problèmes
d'interférences éventuels. Pour éviter toute interférence involontaire, utilisez
exclusivement des appareils ou des accessoires homologués par Samsung.
Utilisez votre appareil photo dans la position normale.
Evitez tout contact avec l'antenne interne de votre appareil photo.
Transfert de données et responsabilités
• Afin d'empêcher tout risque de fuite des données transférées via le réseau WLAN,
évitez de transférer des données sensibles dans des zones publiques ou sur des
réseaux ouverts.
• Le fabricant de l'appareil photo décline toute responsabilité en cas de transferts
de données qui porteraient atteinte aux droits d'auteur, marques, lois sur la
propriété intellectuelle ou qui seraient contraires aux bonnes moeurs.
Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité
5
Informations sur les droits d’auteur
• Microsoft Windows et le logo Windows sont des marques déposées de
Microsoft Corporation.
• Mac et Apple App Store sont des marques déposées d’Apple Corporation.
• Google Play Store est une marque déposée de Google, Inc.
• microSD™, microSDHC™ et microSDXC™ sont des marques deposees de SD
Association.
• Wi-Fi®, le logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées
de Wi-Fi Alliance.
• Les marques commerciales mentionnées dans ce manuel d’utilisation
appartiennent à leurs propriétaires respectifs.
• Les caractéristiques de l’appareil ou le contenu de ce manuel
d’utilisation peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis, suite à
l’évolution des fonctions de l’appareil.
• Nous vous recommandons d’utiliser votre appareil photo dans le pays
dans lequel vous l’avez acheté.
• Utilisez cet appareil photo de manière responsable et veillez à respecter
toutes les législations et règlementations en vigueur.
• La distribution ou la réutilisation du contenu de ce manuel d’utilisation,
même partielle, sans autorisation préalable, est interdite.
Organisation du manuel d’utilisation
Fonctions de base 13
Cette section décrit le contenu du coffret du produit, la présentation
de l’appareil photo, la signification des icônes et les fonctions de base
de la prise de vue.
Fonctions avancées 37
Découvrez comment prendre une photo et enregistrer de la vidéo en
sélectionnant un mode.
Options de prise de vue 48
Cette section explique comment définir les options en mode Prise de
vue.
Lecture/Retouche 69
Cette section décrit comment visionner des prises d’images ou de
vidéos et retoucher des photos. Vous apprendrez également comment
connecter votre appareil photo à un ordinateur ou à un téléviseur.
Réseau sans fil 88
Apprenez à vous connecter à des réseaux locaux sans fil et à utiliser
les fonctions.
Paramètres 105
Cette section décrit les différentes options qui permettent de
configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo.
Annexes 111
Cette section reprend les messages d’erreur, les caractéristiques de
l’appareil et des conseils pour l’entretien.
6
Icônes reprises dans ce manuel d’utilisation
Icône Fonction
Informations complémentaires
Mises en garde et précautions
[ ] Touches de l’appareil photo. Par exemple, [Déclencheur] représente la
touche de l’obturateur.
( ) Numéro de page où se trouve l’information correspondante
→
Séquence d’options ou de menus à sélectionner pour effectuer une
manipulation. Exemple : Appuyez sur Détection des visages →
Normale (signifie que vous devez Appuyer sur Détection des visages,
puis sur Normale).
* Annotation
Expressions reprises dans ce manuel d’utilisation
Pression sur le déclencheur
• Enfoncer le [Déclencheur] à mi-course : enfoncez à moitié le déclencheur.
• Appuyer sur le [Déclencheur] : enfoncez entièrement le déclencheur.
Enfoncer le [Déclencheur]
à mi-course
Appuyer sur le [Déclencheur]
Sujet, arrière-plan et composition
• Sujet : le principal objet d’une scène, qu’il s’agisse d’une personne, d’un animal ou
d’un objet inanimé.
• Arrière-plan : l’environnement qui entoure le sujet.
• Cadrage : la combinaison d’un sujet et d’un arrière-plan.
Cadrage
Arrière-plan
Sujet
Exposition (luminosité)
L’exposition correspond à la quantité de lumière perçue par l’appareil photo. Vous
pouvez modifier l’exposition en réglant la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture
et la sensibilité ISO. Modifier l’exposition permet d’obtenir des photos plus sombres
ou plus claires.
Exposition normale Surexposition (trop lumineux)
7
Questions fréquentes
Cette section propose des réponses à des questions fréquentes.
Les yeux du sujet sont
rouges.
Un reflet de l’appareil provoque ce désagrément.
• Définissez l’option du flash sur Anti yeux rouges ou Correction des yeux rouges. (p. 52)
• Si la photo a déjà été prise, sélectionnez Correction des yeux rouges depuis le mode Éditeur photos. (p. 81)
Les photos présentent
des traces de poussière.
En utilisant le flash, il est possible que l’appareil capture des particules de poussière en suspension dans l’air.
• Désactivez le flash ou évitez de prendre des photos dans un lieu poussiéreux.
• Réglez les options de sensibilité ISO. (p. 54)
Les photos sont floues. Si vous prenez des photos dans des conditions de faible luminosité ou si vous tenez l’appareil photo de façon incorrecte, il se
peut que vos photos soient flous. Utilisez la fonction OIS ou enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au
point du sujet. (p. 35)
Les photos sont floues
lorsqu’elles sont prises
dans l’obscurité.
L’appareil tente de faire pénétrer plus de lumière, par conséquent la vitesse d’obturation ralentit. Il devient alors difficile de tenir
l’appareil immobile et cela provoque un effet de bougé de l’appareil photo.
• Sélectionnez Nuit depuis le Mode intelligent. (p. 42)
• Activez le flash. (p. 52)
• Réglez les options de sensibilité ISO. (p. 54)
• Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil.
Les sujets sont trop
sombres à cause du
contre-jour.
Lorsque la source de lumière se trouve derrière le sujet ou lorsqu’il existe un fort contraste entre les zones lumineuses et les
zones sombres, le sujet peut apparaître trop sombre.
• Evitez de prendre des photos face au soleil.
• Réglez l'option du flash sur Contre jour. (p. 52)
• Réglez l’exposition. (p. 61)
• Réglez l’option de réglage automatique du contraste (ACB). (p. 62)
• Réglez l’option de mesure de l’exposition sur Sélective lorsqu’un sujet se trouve au centre du cadre. (p. 62)
8
Référence rapide
Photographie de personnes
• Mode Intelligent > Beauté 42
• Anti yeux rouges / Correction des yeux rouges
(prévention ou correction des yeux rouges) 52
• Détection des visages / Auto portrait 58
• Détection des sourires / Détection des regards 59
Photographie de nuit ou dans un endroit
sombre
• Mode Intelligent > Silhouette, Coucher de soleil,
Nuit, Feux d'artifice, Lumière 42
• Options du flash 52
• Sensibilité ISO (pour régler la sensibilité à la lumière)
54
Photographie en pleine action
• Mode Intelligent > Action 42
• Continue, Rafale 65
Photographie de texte, d’insectes ou de
fleurs
• Mode Intelligent > Macro 42
• Macro 55
Réglage de l’exposition (luminosité)
• Sensibilité ISO (pour régler la sensibilité à la lumière)
54
• EV (pour régler l’exposition) 61
• ACB (pour corriger le contraste entre un sujet et un
arrière-plan lumineux) 62
• Mesure de l’exposition 62
• AEB (pour prendre 3 photos de la même scène avec
différentes expositions) 65
Prise de photos de paysages
• Mode Intelligent > Paysage 42
• Mode Magic > Panorama Live 44
Application d’effets aux photos
• Mode Magic > Filtre photos 45
• Réglage des images (pour ajuster les options Netteté,
Contraste ou Saturation) 66
Appliquer des effets aux vidéos
• Mode Magic > Filtre vidéos 46
Réduction des tremblements de l’appareil
photo
• Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) 34
Transfert et partage de fichiers
• Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone 95
• Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel 98
• Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou de
vidéos 101
• Publication de photos vers un stockage en ligne ou des
appareils inscrits 103
• Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact) 93
• Affichage de fichiers sous forme de vignettes 71
• Affichage des fichiers par catégorie 72
• Suppression de tous les fichiers de la mémoire 74
• Visionnage de fichiers sous forme de diaporama 76
• Visionnage de fichiers sur un téléviseur 83
• Branchement de l’appareil photo sur un ordinateur 84
• Réglage du son et du volume 107
• Réglage de la luminosité de l’écran 108
• Changement de la langue d’affichage 109
• Réglage de la date et de l’heure 109
• Avant de contacter le service après-vente 123
9
Table des matières
Prise de photos .......................................................................................................... 31
Zoom ........................................................................................................................ 32
Réduction des mouvements de l’appareil photo (fonction OIS) .................... 34
Conseils pour obtenir des photos plus nettes ............................................... 35
Fonctions avancées ..................................................................................................... 37
Modes de base ........................................................................................................... 38
Mode Scènes automatiques ................................................................................. 38
Mode Programme .................................................................................................. 39
Mode Vidéo intelligente ........................................................................................ 40
Mode Vidéo ............................................................................................................. 41
Mode Intelligent ..................................................................................................... 42
Utiliser l'album ........................................................................................................ 43
Utiliser le menu Paramètres .................................................................................. 43
Modes Magic .............................................................................................................. 44
Mode Panorama Live ............................................................................................. 44
Mode Filtre Photo .................................................................................................. 45
Mode Filtre vidéos ................................................................................................. 46
Retouche de photo ................................................................................................ 47
Fonctions de base ........................................................................................................ 13
Contenu du coffret ................................................................................................... 14
Présentation de l’appareil photo ........................................................................ 15
Utilisation du bouton DIRECT LINK ..................................................................... 17
Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire ............................................. 18
Chargement de la batterie et mise en route de l’appareil ......................... 19
Chargement de la batterie .................................................................................... 19
Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo ................................................................ 19
Configuration initiale .............................................................................................. 20
Description des icônes ........................................................................................... 22
Écran d’accueil ........................................................................................................... 23
Accès à l’écran d’accueil ........................................................................................ 23
Icônes du menu ...................................................................................................... 24
Sélection d’options ou de menus ....................................................................... 27
Réglage de l’affichage et du son ......................................................................... 29
Réglages du type d’affichage ............................................................................... 29
Réglage du son ....................................................................................................... 30
10
Table des matières
Options de prise de vue ............................................................................................. 48
Sélection de la résolution et de la qualité ....................................................... 49
Sélection d’une résolution .................................................................................... 49
Sélection d’une qualité photo .............................................................................. 50
Utilisation du retardateur...................................................................................... 51
Prise de photo dans un endroit sombre .......................................................... 52
Correction des yeux rouges .................................................................................. 52
Configuration d'une option du flash ................................................................... 52
Réglage de la sensibilité ISO ................................................................................. 54
Mise au point de l’appareil photo ...................................................................... 55
Fonction Macro ....................................................................................................... 55
Mise au point automatique .................................................................................. 55
Réglage de la zone de mise au point .................................................................. 56
Fonction de Détection des visages .................................................................... 58
Détection des visages ............................................................................................ 58
Réalisation d’un auto portrait .............................................................................. 58
Détection des sourires ........................................................................................... 59
Détection des regards ........................................................................................... 59
Conseils pour la détection des visages ............................................................... 60
Réglage de la luminosité et des couleurs ........................................................ 61
Réglage manuel de l’exposition (EV) ................................................................... 61
Compensation du contre-jour (ACB) ................................................................... 62
Modification de la mesure de l’exposition ......................................................... 62
Sélection d’un réglage de la balance des blancs .............................................. 63
Utilisation des modes Rafale ................................................................................ 65
Réglage des images ................................................................................................. 66
Réduction du bruit du zoom ................................................................................ 67
Options de prise de vue disponibles en fonction du mode de prise de
vue ................................................................................................................................. 68
11
Table des matières
Lecture/Retouche ......................................................................................................... 69
Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture .................................. 70
Activation du mode Lecture ................................................................................. 70
Affichage des photos ............................................................................................. 74
Lecture d’une vidéo ............................................................................................... 77
Retouche de photo .................................................................................................. 78
Redimensionnement des photos ........................................................................ 78
Rotation d’une photo ............................................................................................ 78
Effets de filtre intelligent ....................................................................................... 79
Réglages de la luminosité, du contraste, de la saturation ou des sujets en
contre-jour .............................................................................................................. 80
Réglage des portraits ............................................................................................. 80
Montage vidéo .......................................................................................................... 82
Recadrage d’une vidéo .......................................................................................... 82
Extraction d’une image d’une vidéo ................................................................... 82
Affichage des fichiers sur un téléviseur ........................................................... 83
Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur ................................................................. 84
Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows .............................................. 84
Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur Mac ........................................................... 85
Configuration système ........................................................................................... 87
Réseau sans fil ................................................................................................................ 88
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres
réseau ........................................................................................................................... 89
Connexion automatique à un réseau local sans fil ........................................... 89
Utilisation du navigateur de connexion ............................................................. 90
Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau ............................................................... 91
Saisie du texte ......................................................................................................... 92
Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact) ................................... 93
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Prise de vue ........................................ 93
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Lecture (Partage instantané) ........... 93
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Wi-Fi ..................................................... 93
Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone ................. 94
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone .......................................... 95
Utilisation d’un smartphone comme télécommande pour le
déclenchement de l’obturateur .......................................................................... 96
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel ..................................................... 98
Modification des paramètres de courriel ........................................................... 98
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel ...................................................... 100
Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou de vidéos .................. 101
Accès à un service de partage ............................................................................ 101
Publication de photos ou de vidéos ................................................................. 101
Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de fichiers ................................ 103
Affichage de photos ou de vidéos sur des appareils compatibles
Samsung Link ........................................................................................................ 103
12
Table des matières
Paramètres ..................................................................................................................... 105
Menu Paramètres ................................................................................................... 106
Accès au menu des paramètres ......................................................................... 106
Son .......................................................................................................................... 107
Affichage ................................................................................................................ 107
Connectivité .......................................................................................................... 108
Général ................................................................................................................... 109
Annexes .......................................................................................................................... 111
Messages d’erreur .................................................................................................. 112
Entretien de l’appareil photo ............................................................................. 113
Nettoyage de l’appareil photo ........................................................................... 113
Usage et rangement de l’appareil photo ......................................................... 114
Concernant les cartes mémoire ......................................................................... 115
Concernant la batterie ......................................................................................... 118
Mise à niveau du micrologiciel ........................................................................... 122
Avant de contacter le service après-vente .................................................... 123
Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo ............................................................... 126
Glossaire .................................................................................................................... 130
Index ........................................................................................................................... 135
Contenu du coffret ……………………………… 14
Présentation de l’appareil photo ……………… 15
Utilisation du bouton DIRECT LINK …………… 17
Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire … 18
Chargement de la batterie et mise en route de
l’appareil ………………………………………… 19
Chargement de la batterie …………………… 19
Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo ………… 19
Configuration initiale …………………………… 20
Description des icônes ………………………… 22
Écran d’accueil …………………………………… 23
Accès à l’écran d’accueil ………………………… 23
Icônes du menu ………………………………… 24
Sélection d’options ou de menus ……………… 27
Réglage de l’affichage et du son ……………… 29
Réglages du type d’affichage ………………… 29
Réglage du son ………………………………… 30
Prise de photos ………………………………… 31
Zoom …………………………………………… 32
Réduction des mouvements de l’appareil photo
(fonction OIS) …………………………………… 34
Conseils pour obtenir des photos plus nettes … 35
Fonctions de base
Cette section décrit le contenu du coffret du produit, la présentation de l’appareil photo, la signification des icônes
et les fonctions de base de la prise de vue.
Fonctions de base 14
Contenu du coffret
Votre coffret comprend les éléments suivants :
Appareil photo Adaptateur secteur/Câble USB
Batterie rechargeable Dragonne
Guide de prise en main rapide
Accessoires en option
Etui de l’appareil photo Câble audio / vidéo
Chargeur de batterie Carte mémoire/
Adaptateur de carte mémoire
• Il se peut que les illustrations diffèrent du produit fourni.
• Selon modèle, les éléments inclus dans la boîte peuvent être différents.
• Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires en option auprès d’un revendeur ou d’un
centre de service Samsung. Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de
problème consécutif à l’utilisation d’accessoires non autorisés.
Fonctions de base 15
Présentation de l’appareil photo
Avant de commencer, prenez connaissance des éléments de l’appareil photo et de leurs fonctions.
Flash
Voyant AF / Voyant du retardateur
Objectif
Haut-parleur Déclencheur
Microphone
Touche Marche / Arrêt
Antenne interne*
* Évitez tout contact avec l’antenne interne si vous utilisez le
réseau sans fil.
Douille pour trépied
Port USB et port audio / vidéo
Compatible avec un câble USB ou un
câble audio / vidéo
Trappe batterie
Emplacement pour carte mémoire et batterie
Fixation de la dragonne
Présentation de l’appareil photo
Fonctions de base 16
Bouton Description
Accéder à l’écran d’accueil. (p. 23)
Accéder aux options ou aux menus.
Activer le mode Lecture.
Supprimer des fichiers en mode Lecture.
Bouton Description
Fonctions de base Autres fonctions
Changer l’option d’affichage. Déplacement vers le haut
Changer l’option macro. Déplacement vers le bas
Changer l’option du flash. Déplacement vers la
gauche
Changer l’option du retardateur. Déplacement vers la droite
Confirmer l’option ou le menu en surbrillance.
Touches
(Voir tableau ci-dessous)
Voyant d’état
• Clignotant : lorsque l'appareil photo
sauvegarde une photo ou une vidéo, lorsqu'un
ordinateur accède aux fichiers de l'appareil
photo, quand l'image est floue ou lorsque
l'appareil photo se connecte à un réseau sans
fil ou envoie une photo
• Fixe : lorsque l’appareil photo est relié à un
ordinateur, lors du rechargement de la batterie
ou quand l’image est au point
Affichage
Touche Zoom
• En mode Prise de vue : zoom avant ou arrière
• En mode Lecture : agrandissez une partie d’une
photo, visualisez des photos sous forme de
miniatures ou réglez le volume
Touche DIRECT LINK
Lancer une fonction Wi-Fi prédéfinie. (p. 17)
Balise NFC
Exécuter une fonction NFC en lisant une
balise sur l’appareil compatible NFC. (p. 93)
Présentation de l’appareil photo
Fonctions de base 17
Utilisation du bouton DIRECT LINK
Vous pouvez facilement activer la fonction Wi-Fi avec l’option [ ].
Appuyez sur [ ] pour activer la fonction Wi-Fi indiquée.
Appuyez de nouveau sur [ ] pour revenir au mode précédent.
Configuration d’une option de bouton DIRECT LINK
Vous pouvez sélectionner une fonction Wi-Fi à lancer lorsque vous appuyez sur
[ ].
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Appuyez sur Général → DIRECT LINK (bouton Wi-Fi).
4 Sélectionnez une fonction Wi-Fi. (p. 110)
Fonctions de base 18
Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire
Cette section décrit comment insérer la batterie et une carte mémoire en option dans l’appareil photo.
Retrait de la batterie et de la carte mémoire
Batterie rechargeable
Loquet de
la batterie Faites glisser le loquet vers la
droite pour libérer la batterie.
Carte mémoire
Appuyez légèrement sur la carte pour
qu’elle se libère de son logement, puis
retirez-la.
Insérez la carte mémoire, contacts dorés
orientés vers le haut.
Insérez la batterie en orientant le logo
Samsung vers le haut.
Fonctions de base 19
Chargement de la batterie et mise en route de l’appareil
Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo
Appuyez sur [ ] pour allumer ou éteindre l’appareil
photo.
• Lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo pour la
première fois, l’écran de configuration initiale
s’affiche. (p. 20)
Activation du mode Lecture de l’appareil photo
Appuyez sur [ ]. L’appareil photo s’allume et accède
immédiatement au mode Lecture.
Si vous appuyez sur la touche [ ] et la maintenez enfoncée pour mettre
l'appareil photo sous tension, celui-ci n'émettra aucun son.
Chargement de la batterie
Vous devez charger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil photo pour la première
fois. Branchez l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB sur l’appareil photo, puis l’autre
extrémité du câble sur un adaptateur secteur.
Voyant d’état
• Voyant rouge allumé : chargement en cours
• Voyant rouge éteint : chargement terminé
Utilisez l’adaptateur secteur et le câble USB fournis avec l’appareil photo. Si
vous faites appel à un autre adaptateur secteur (tel qu’un SAC-48), la batterie de
l’appareil photo risque de ne pas se charger ou fonctionner correctement.
Fonctions de base 20
Configuration initiale
Lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo pour la première fois, l’écran de configuration initiale s’affiche. Suivez les étapes répertoriées ci-après pour configurer les paramètres de
base de l’appareil photo. La langue est réglée selon le pays où l’appareil photo est vendu. Vous pouvez modifier la langue à votre convenance.
3 Appuyez sur [ ] pour sélectionner Configuration date/heure, puis
sur [ ] ou sur [ ].
Annuler Définir
Configuration date/heure
Année Mois Jour Heure Min Heure d’été
• L’affichage peut différer en fonction de la langue sélectionnée.
4 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour sélectionner un élément.
5 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour régler la date, l’heure et l’heure d’été,
puis appuyez sur [ ].
1 Appuyez sur [ ] pour sélectionner Fuseau horaire, puis sur [ ] ou
sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour sélectionner un fuseau horaire, puis
appuyez sur [ ].
Domicile
Annuler Définir
Londres
Configuration initiale
Fonctions de base 21
6 Appuyez sur [ ] pour sélectionner Type date, puis sur [ ] ou sur
[ ].
7 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour sélectionner un format de date, puis
appuyez sur [ ].
8 Appuyez sur [ ] pour sélectionner Type d'heure, puis sur [ ] ou
sur [ ].
9 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour sélectionner un type d’heure, puis
appuyez sur [ ].
10 Appuyez sur [ ] pour terminer la configuration initiale.
Fonctions de base 22
Description des icônes
Les icônes affichées sur l’écran varient en fonction du mode sélectionné ou des options choisies. Si vous changez une option de prise de vue, l’icône correspondante clignotera
brièvement en jaune.
3 Informations de prise de vue
Icône Description
Date
Heure
Nombre de photos disponibles
Carte mémoire insérée
• : chargement terminé
• : chargement partiel
• : vide (recharger)
• : chargement en cours (connecté
au chargeur)
Valeur d’ouverture
Vitesse d’obturation
Durée d’enregistrement restante
Cadre de mise au point automatique
Tremblements de l’appareil photo
Indicateur de zoom
Résolution des photos lorsque la
fonction lntelli Zoom est activée
Niveau de zoom
2 Options de prise de vues (droite)
Icône Description
Intelli Zoom activé
Mise au point automatique continue
activée
Résolution photo
Résolution vidéo
Mesure de l'exposition
Fréquence d’images (par seconde)
Flash
Zoom silencieux activé
Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS,
Optical Image Stabilization)
Option de mise au point
Réglage de l’image
(netteté, contraste et saturation)
Retardateur
1 Options de prise de vues (gauche)
Icône Description
Mode Prise de vue
Valeur d’exposition
Sensibilité ISO
Balance des blancs
Détection des visages
Option de prise de vue en rafale
AutoShare activé
1
2
3
Fonctions de base 23
Écran d’accueil
Vous pouvez sélectionner un mode de prise de vue ou accéder au menu des paramètres en appuyant sur les icônes de l’écran d’accueil.
N° Description
1
Ecran d’accueil actif
• Faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour passer à
un autre écran d’accueil.
• Appuyez sur [ ] jusqu’à atteindre le nom de l’écran d’accueil voulu,
puis appuyez sur [ / ] pour passer à un autre écran d’accueil.
• Appuyez plusieurs fois sur [ / ] pour passer à un autre écran d’accueil.
2
Icônes du menu
• Appuyez sur [ / / / ] jusqu’à atteindre le mode voulu, puis
appuyez sur [ ] pour accéder au mode.
Accès à l’écran d’accueil
En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [ ]. Appuyez à nouveau sur [ ]
pour revenir au mode précédent.
Scènes
Automatique
Programme Film
Magique Basique Wi-Fi
Intelligent Album Paramètres
Vidéo
intelligente 2
1
Retour Déplacement de la page
Écran d’accueil
Fonctions de base 24
Icône Description
MobileLink : envoyer des photos ou des vidéos vers un smartphone.
(p. 95)
Remote Viewfinder : utiliser un smartphone comme déclencheur à
distance et y visionner l’image prise sur l’appareil photo. (p. 96)
Courriel : envoyer par courriel des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur
l’appareil photo. (p. 98)
Réseaux sociaux et Cloud : envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à des
services de partage de fichiers. (p. 101)
Samsung Link : affichez les fichiers sur un appareil Samsung Link
connecté au même point d’accès. (p. 103)
Icônes du menu
Icône Description
Scènes Automatique : prendre une photo dans un mode Scène
sélectionné automatiquement par l’appareil photo. (p. 38)
Programme : prendre une photo avec les réglages adaptés
manuellement. (p. 39)
Vidéo intelligente : enregistrez une vidéo dans un mode de scène
sélectionné automatiquement par l’appareil photo. (p. 40)
Film : enregistrer une vidéo. (p. 41)
Intelligent : prendre une photo avec des options prédéfinies pour une
scène spécifique. (p. 42)
Album : afficher des fichiers sous forme de miniatures. (p. 71)
Paramètres : régler les paramètres selon vos préférences. (p. 105)
Écran d’accueil
Fonctions de base 25
Icône Description
Panorama Live : prenez une série de photos puis
combinez-les pour créer une image panoramique. (p. 44)
Filtre photos : prendre une photo avec différents effets de filtre. (p. 45)
Filtre vidéos : enregistrer une vidéo avec différents effets de filtre.
(p. 46)
Éditeur photos : retoucher des photos en leur appliquant différents
effets. (p. 78)
Écran d’accueil
Fonctions de base 26
Configurer le fond d’écran
Choisissez l’image souhaitée pour le fond d’écran de l’écran d’accueil.
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Sélectionnez Affichage → Fonds d'écran.
4 Sélectionnez une option.
Option Description
Galerie de fonds
d'écran
Sélectionnez le fond d’écran souhaité dans la galerie par
défaut.
Album Indiquez une photo prise pour servir de fonds d’écran.
5 Faites défiler les options jusqu’au fond d’écran voulu, puis appuyez
sur [ ].
• Si vous sélectionnez une photo que vous avez prise, il vous est possible
d’indiquer une zone donnée pour servir de fonds d’écran. Faites tourner le
[Zoom] vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour réduire ou agrandir cette zone.
Appuyez sur [ / / / ] pour déplacer la zone.
6 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer.
• Si vous sélectionnez une photo que vous avez prise, appuyez sur [ ], puis
sélectionnez Oui.
Vous pouvez également définir la photo active à l’écran en tant que fond d’écran
en appuyant sur [ ], puis en sélectionnant Configurer le fond d'écran en
mode Lecture.
Fonctions de base 27
Sélection d’options ou de menus
Pour sélectionner une option ou un menu, appuyez sur [ ], puis sur [ / / / ] ou [ ].
Retour au menu précédent
Appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir au menu précédent.
Pour revenir en mode Prise de vue, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course.
1 En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Faites défiler les options ou les menus pour effectuer votre choix.
• Pour vous déplacer vers le haut ou vers le bas, appuyez sur [ ] ou sur
[ ].
• Pour vous déplacer à gauche ou à droite, appuyez sur [ ] ou sur [ ].
3 Pour confirmer le menu ou l’option en surbrillance, appuyez sur
[ ] .
Sélection d’options ou de menus
Fonctions de base 28
Ex : sélection d’une option de balance des blancs en mode Programme :
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Appuyez sur [ ].
Quitter Sélectionner
AutoShare
EV
Balance des blancs
ISO
Flash
Mise au point
4 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour sélectionner Balance des blancs, puis
sur [ ] ou sur [ ].
Quitter Sélectionner
AutoShare
EV
Balance des blancs
ISO
Flash
Mise au point
5 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour sélectionner une option de Balance des
blancs.
Retour Définir
Balance des blancs : Lumière du jour
6 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer vos paramètres.
Fonctions de base 29
Réglages du type d’affichage
Il vous est possible de sélectionner un type d’affichage pour le mode Prise de vue
ou Lecture. Chaque type reprend des informations de prise de vue ou de lecture
différentes. Voir tableau ci-dessous.
Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur [ ] pour changer de type d’affichage.
Mode Type d’affichage
Prise de vue • Masquez toutes les informations sur les options de prise de vue.
• Affichez toutes les informations sur les options de prise de vue.
Lecture
• Masquer les informations sur le fichier actif.
• Masquez les informations sur le fichier actif hormis les
informations de base.
• Affichez les informations sur le fichier actif.
Réglage de l’affichage des options
Vous pouvez masquer ou afficher l’affichage des options apparaissant dans certains
modes.
Appuyez sur [ ] à plusieurs reprises.
• Masquez les options.
• Affichez les options.
Affichage des options
Panneau fermé
Beauté
▲ Exemple en Mode intelligent
Réglage de l’affichage et du son
Cette section décrit comment modifier les informations d’affichage de base et les réglages du son.
Réglage de l’affichage et du son
Fonctions de base 30
Réglage du son
Activez ou désactivez le son que l’appareil photo émet lors de l’exécution de
fonctions.
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Appuyez sur Sons → Bip sonore.
4 Sélectionnez une option.
Option Description
Désactivé L’appareil photo n’émet aucun son.
Activé L’appareil photo émet les sons.
Fonctions de base 31
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Cadrez le sujet.
4 Enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au
point.
• Un cadre vert indique que le sujet est mis au point.
• Un cadre rouge équivaut à un sujet flou.
5 Pour prendre la photo, appuyez sur le [Déclencheur].
6 Appuyez sur [ ] pour visionner la photo prise.
• Pour supprimer la photo, appuyez sur [ ], puis sélectionnez Oui.
7 Appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir au mode Prise de vue en cours.
Pour obtenir des conseils pour réaliser des photos plus nettes, reportez-vous à la
page 35.
Prise de photos
Cette section présente les actions de base pour prendre des photos en mode Scènes automatiques en toute simplicité.
Prise de photos
Fonctions de base 32
Zoom
La fonction de zoom vous permet de prendre des photos en gros plan.
Zoom arrière Zoom avant
Niveau de zoom
Lorsque vous faites tourner la touche Zoom, il est possible que le taux affiché à
l'écran change de façon incohérente.
Zoom numérique
Le mode Prise de vue accepte par défaut le zoom numérique. Si vous zoomez sur
un sujet en mode Prise de vue et que le voyant se trouve dans la plage numérique,
l’appareil photo utilise alors le zoom numérique. L’utilisation conjointe du zoom
optique de 12X et du zoom numérique de 2X permet un agrandissement jusqu’à
24 fois.
Indicateur de
zoom
Plage optique
Plage numérique
• Selon les options de prise de vue sélectionnées, il est possible que le zoom
numérique ne soit pas disponible.
• Si vous prenez une photo à l’aide du zoom numérique, la qualité de la photo
risque de s’avérer inférieure à une qualité normale.
Prise de photos
Fonctions de base 33
Intelli Zoom
Si l’indicateur de zoom se trouve dans la plage Intelli, l’appareil photo utilise
le zoom Intelli. Dans ce cas, la résolution des photos varie selon le niveau de
zoom. L’utilisation conjointe du zoom optique et de l’Intelli Zoom permet un
agrandissement jusqu’à 24 fois.
Indicateur de
zoom
Plage optique
Plage Intelli
Résolution des
photos lorsque
la fonction lntelli
Zoom est activée
• Selon les options de prise de vue sélectionnées, il est possible qu'Intelli Zoom
ne soit pas disponible.
• Cette fonction permet de prendre une photo avec une dégradation moindre de
la qualité qu’avec le zoom numérique. Cependant, la qualité des photos peut
être inférieure à celle des photos prises avec le zoom optique.
• Il est disponible uniquement lorsque vous utilisez une résolution de
proportions 4:3. Si vous optez pour d’autres proportions alors que la fonction
Intelli Zoom est activée, cette dernière se désactive automatiquement.
• La fonction Intelli Zoom est toujours activée en mode Scènes automatiques.
Réglage de l’Intelli Zoom
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Intelli Zoom.
3 Sélectionnez une option.
Icône Description
Désactivé : l’Intelli Zoom est désactivé.
Activé : l’Intelli Zoom est activé.
Prise de photos
Fonctions de base 34
Réduction des mouvements de l’appareil photo
(fonction OIS)
Réduisez à l’aide d’une fonction optique les effets du tremblement en mode Prise
de vue.
Avant correction Après correction
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur OIS.
3 Sélectionnez une option.
Icône Description
Désactivé : la fonction OIS est désactivée.
Activé : la fonction OIS est activée.
• L’option OIS risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si :
- vous suivez un sujet en mouvement avec l’appareil photo ;
- vous utilisez le zoom numérique ;
- les mouvements de l’appareil photo sont trop importants ;
- la vitesse d’obturation est faible (par exemple, lorsque vous photographiez
de nuit) ;
- le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible ;
- vous prenez une photo en gros plan.
• Si la fonction OIS est utilisée avec un trépied, les photos peuvent être floues en
raison des vibrations du capteur OIS. Désactivez la fonction OIS lorsque vous
utilisez un trépied.
• Si l’appareil photo est soumis à un choc, l’affichage s’en trouve flou. Dans ce cas,
éteignez l’appareil photo et rallumez-le.
Fonctions de base 35
Tenue en main correcte de l’appareil photo
Vérifiez qu’aucun objet n’obstrue
l’objectif, le flash ou le microphone.
Enfoncez le déclencheur à mi-course
Enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour
régler la mise au point. L’appareil photo règle
automatiquement la mise au point et l’exposition.
L’appareil photo définit automatiquement
l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation.
Cadre de mise au point
• Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre
la photo lorsque le cadre de mise au point
devient vert.
• Si le cadre apparaît en rouge, recadrez, puis
enfoncez à nouveau le [Déclencheur] à mi-course.
Réduction des tremblements de l’appareil photo
Configurez les options OIS de stabilisation optique de l’image
pour réduire les effets dus aux mouvements de l’appareil photo.
(p. 34)
Si s’affiche
Tremblements de l’appareil photo
Si vous effectuez des prises de vues dans un endroit sombre, évitez de régler
l’option du flash sur Synchronisation lente ou sur Désactivé. L’ouverture est
conservée pendant une durée plus longue, et il peut s’avérer plus difficile de
stabiliser l’appareil photo suffisamment longtemps pour prendre une photo nette.
• Utilisez un trépied ou réglez le flash sur Contre jour. (p. 52)
• Réglez les options de sensibilité ISO. (p. 54)
Conseils pour obtenir des photos plus nettes
Fonctions de base 36
Vérification que la mise au point sur le sujet est correcte
Il est difficile d’obtenir une bonne mise au point si :
- il existe peu de contraste entre le sujet et l’arrière-plan (par exemple, si votre
sujet porte des vêtements de la même couleur que l’arrière-plan) ;
- la source de lumière derrière le sujet est trop intense ;
- le sujet est clair ou présente des reflets ;
- le sujet inclut des motifs horizontaux, tels que des stores ;
- le sujet n’est pas centré sur l’image.
• Lorsque vous prenez des photos dans des conditions d’éclairage insuffisant
Activez le flash.
(p. 52)
• Lorsque les sujets se déplacent rapidement
Utilisez la fonction
Continue ou Rafale.
Usage du verrouillage de mise au point (p. 65)
Enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au
point. Une fois le sujet mis au point, vous pouvez le recadrer pour
modifier la composition. Lorsque vous êtes prêt, appuyez sur le
[Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo.
Modes de base …………………………………… 38
Mode Scènes automatiques …………………… 38
Mode Programme ……………………………… 39
Mode Vidéo intelligente ……………………… 40
Mode Vidéo …………………………………… 41
Mode Intelligent ……………………………… 42
Utiliser l'album ………………………………… 43
Utiliser le menu Paramètres …………………… 43
Modes Magic …………………………………… 44
Mode Panorama Live …………………………… 44
Mode Filtre Photo ……………………………… 45
Mode Filtre vidéos ……………………………… 46
Retouche de photo …………………………… 47
Fonctions avancées
Découvrez comment prendre une photo et enregistrer de la vidéo en sélectionnant un mode.
Fonctions avancées 38
Mode Scènes automatiques
En mode Scènes automatiques, votre appareil photo choisit automatiquement les
réglages appropriés au type de scène détecté. Ce mode est particulièrement utile si
vous ignorez comment régler l’appareil photo pour les différentes scènes.
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Cadrez le sujet.
• L’appareil photo sélectionne automatiquement une scène. L’icône de la scène
appropriée s’affiche en haut à gauche de l’écran. Les icônes sont décrites
ci-dessous.
Icône Description
Paysages
Vues comportant des arrière-plans lumineux
Paysages de nuit
Portraits de nuit
Paysages en contre jour
Portraits en contre jour
Portraits
Gros plans d’objets
Gros plans de texte
Couchers de soleil
Intérieur sombre
Éclairage partiel
Gros plans avec un éclairage de spots
Portraits avec un éclairage de spots
Ciel dégagé
Zones boisées
Gros plans de sujets colorés
Modes de base
Prenez des photos ou enregistrez des séquences vidéo sous les modes de base. Vous pouvez également utiliser le mode Intelligent.
Modes de base
Fonctions avancées 39
Icône Description
L’appareil photo est stabilisé ou installé sur un trépied
(pour une prise de vue dans un endroit sombre)*
Sujets très mobiles*
* Cette icône s’affiche en regard de celle de la scène.
4 Enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au
point.
5 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo.
• Si l’appareil photo ne reconnaît pas de mode scénique, il utilise les paramètres
par défaut du mode Scènes automatiques.
• Même s’il détecte un visage, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne sélectionne pas le
mode Portrait en fonction de la position du sujet ou de l’éclairage.
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo ne sélectionne pas le bon mode de plan en
fonction, par exemple, des conditions de prise de vue, des tremblements de
l’appareil photo, de l’éclairage et de la distance du sujet.
• Même si vous utilisez un trépied, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne détecte pas
le mode si le sujet est en mouvement.
• La batterie de l’appareil photo se décharge plus rapidement, car l’appareil
modifie souvent les paramètres afin de capturer les scènes adéquates.
Mode Programme
Le mode Programme permet de régler diverses options, à l’exception de la vitesse
d’obturation et de l’ouverture que l’appareil photo règle automatiquement.
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Réglez les options voulues.
• Reportez-vous à la liste des options de la section « Options de prise de vue ».
(p. 48)
4 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point.
5 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo.
Modes de base
Fonctions avancées 40
Mode Vidéo intelligente
En mode Vidéo auto, votre appareil photo choisit automatiquement les réglages
appropriés au type de scène détecté.
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Cadrez le sujet.
• L’appareil photo sélectionne automatiquement une scène. L’icône de la scène
appropriée s’affiche en haut à gauche de l’écran.
Icône Description
Paysages
Couchers de soleil
Ciel dégagé
Zones boisées
4 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour lancer l’enregistrement.
5 Appuyez à nouveau sur le [Déclencheur] pour arrêter
l’enregistrement.
• Si l’appareil photo ne reconnaît pas un mode scène, il utilise les paramètres par
défaut du mode Vidéo Auto.
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo ne sélectionne pas le bon mode de plan en
fonction, par exemple, des conditions de prise de vue, des tremblements de
l’appareil photo, de l’éclairage et de la distance du sujet.
Modes de base
Fonctions avancées 41
Mode Vidéo
Le mode Vidéo vous permet de personnaliser les réglages afin d’enregistrer des
vidéos haute définition (1280x720) d’une durée maximale de 20 minutes. Les vidéos
sont enregistrées sous forme de fichiers MP4 (H.264).
• Le H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC) constitue un format vidéo à compression élevée
mis au point par les organismes internationaux de normalisation ISO-IEC et ITU-T.
• Si vous utilisez des cartes mémoire dont la vitesse d’écriture est faible, l’appareil
photo risque de ne pas enregistrer les vidéos correctement. Les enregistrements
vidéo risquent d’être endommagés ou la lecture de ne pas être correcte.
• Les cartes mémoire dont la vitesse d’écriture est faible ne sont pas compatibles
avec les vidéos à résolution élevée. Pour enregistrer des vidéos en haute
résolution, utilisez des cartes mémoire dont le débit d’écriture est supérieur.
• Si vous avez activé la fonction Stabilisation d’image et procédé à
l’enregistrement d’une vidéo, il se peut que l’appareil photo enregistre le son de
fonctionnement de la fonction.
• En utilisant la fonction de zoom lors de l’enregistrement vidéo, il se peut que
l’appareil photo enregistre les sons du mécanisme du zoom. Dans ce cas,
utilisez la fonction Zoom silencieux. (p. 67)
• (AF continu): Utilisez cette fonction pour réaliser des photos en
changeant le cadrage tout en faisant automatiquement la mise au point sur la
zone centrale.
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Définissez les options de votre choix.
• Reportez-vous à la liste des options de la section « Options de prise de vue ».
(p. 48)
4 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour lancer l’enregistrement.
• Pendant l'enregistrement d'une vidéo, appuyez une fois sur [ ] pour
annuler la fonction de mise au point automatique continue, puis encore une
fois pour activer la fonction.
5 Appuyez à nouveau sur le [Déclencheur] pour arrêter
l’enregistrement.
Modes de base
Fonctions avancées 42
Suspension de l’enregistrement
L’appareil photo vous permet d’interrompre temporairement l’enregistrement
vidéo. Grâce à cette fonction, vous pouvez enregistrer plusieurs scènes en une
même vidéo.
OK : Pause : AF continu Désactivé
• Appuyez sur [ ] pour mettre l’enregistrement en pause.
• Appuyez sur [ ] pour reprendre l’enregistrement.
Mode Intelligent
Le mode Intelligent permet de prendre une photo avec des options prédéfinies
pour une scène spécifique.
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Sélectionnez un plan.
Panneau fermé
Beauté
Modes de base
Fonctions avancées 43
Option Description
Beauté Réaliser un portrait en appliquant des options permettant de
masquer les imperfections du visage.
Paysage Prendre des scènes ou des paysages en nature morte.
Macro L’appareil prend des sujets petits ou en gros plan.
Action Photographier des sujets se déplaçant rapidement.
Silhouette Photographier des formes sombres sur fond clair.
Coucher de
soleil
Prendre des scènes au coucher du soleil avec des tons rouges
et jaunes naturels.
Nuit Réalisez des prises de vue de nuit ou en situation de faible
luminosité (l’usage d’un trépied est alors recommandé).
Feux d'artifice Photographier des feux d’artifice.
Lumière Photographier des traces lumineuses dans des conditions de
faible luminosité.
4 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point.
5 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo.
Utiliser l'album
Vous pouvez afficher les fichiers sous forme de vignettes.
Reportez-vous à la section « Affichage de fichiers sous forme de vignettes » (p. 71).
Utiliser le menu Paramètres
Vous pouvez régler ou modifier les paramètres de l'appareil photo.
Reportez-vous à la section « Paramètres » (p. 105).
Fonctions avancées 44
Modes Magic
Prenez une photo ou enregistrez une vidéo en sélectionnant les modes appropriés en fonction de la scène et des effets souhaités.
5 Avec le [Déclencheur] enfoncé, déplacez doucement l’appareil
photo dans la direction où il doit capturer le reste du panorama.
• Les flèches indiquant la direction des déplacements sont affichées et
l’intégralité de la prise de vue apparaît dans la fenêtre d’aperçu.
• Une fois le guide aligné sur l’image suivante, l’appareil photo prend alors le
cliché automatiquement.
Stabilité : un ligne plus plate
représente moins de bougé de
l’appareil photo.
6 Une fois terminé, relâchez le [Déclencheur].
• Lorsque tous les clichés nécessaires sont pris, l’appareil photo les combine en
une photo panoramique.
Mode Panorama Live
En mode Panorama Live, vous pouvez prendre une scène panoramique large en une
seule photo. Prenez une série de photos puis combinez-les pour créer une image
panoramique.
Exemple de prise de vue
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point.
• Pointez l’appareil photo en calant la prise sur la limite gauche, droite,
supérieure ou inférieure de la scène à prendre.
4 Maintenez le [Déclencheur] enfoncé pour commencer la prise de
vue.
Modes Magic
Fonctions avancées 45
• Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats possibles lors de la prise de photos
panoramiques, évitez de :
- déplacer l’appareil photo trop rapidement ou trop lentement ;
- déplacer insuffisamment le point de vue pour prendre l’image suivante ;
- déplacer l’appareil photo à vitesse irrégulière entre les prises ;
- faire trembler l’appareil photo ;
- prendre des clichés dans des endroits sombres ;
- capturer des sujets hors-cadre en mouvement proches de la prise de vue ;
- prendre ou filmer dans des conditions de luminosité ou de couleurs de
lumières changeantes.
• Les photos réalisées sont automatiquement sauvegardées et la prise de vue est
interrompue dans les circonstances suivantes :
- si vous changez de direction en pleine prise de vue ;
- si vous bougez l’appareil photo trop rapidement ;
- si vous ne bougez pas l’appareil photo.
• La sélection du mode Panorama Live entraîne la désactivation des fonctions
de zoom numérique et optique. Si vous sélectionnez le mode Panorama
et que l’objectif est en position de zoom avant, l’appareil photo effectue
automatiquement un zoom arrière pour reprendre la position par défaut.
• Certaines options de prise de vue peuvent ne pas être disponibles.
• Il se peut que l’appareil photo interrompe la prise de vue à cause de la
composition de la prise ou en cas de mouvement du sujet.
• L’appareil photo peut ne pas prendre l’intégralité de la dernière scène si vous
arrêtez le déplacement de l’appareil photo exactement à l’endroit où vous
souhaitez que la scène se termine. Pour prendre une scène dans son intégralité,
déplacez l’appareil photo légèrement au-delà du point final.
Mode Filtre Photo
Appliquez divers effets de filtre à vos photos pour créer des images uniques.
Miniature Vignettage
Effet ultra grand angle
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
Modes Magic
Fonctions avancées 46
3 Sélectionnez un effet.
Option Description
Miniature Appliquez un effet d’objectif à décentrement pour faire
apparaître le sujet en miniature.
Vignettage
Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un contraste marqué et un
effet de dégradé intense, caractéristiques des appareils
Lomo.
Filtre croisé Ajoutez des lignes irradiant d’objets brillants pour imiter
l’effet visuel d’un filtre croisé.
Effet ultra grand
angle
Déformer les objets photographiés de façon rapprochée
afin de créer un effet de grand angle.
Classique Appliquer un effet noir et blanc.
Rétro Appliquer un effet de ton sépia.
4 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point.
5 Pour prendre la photo, appuyez sur le [Déclencheur].
• Selon l’option sélectionnée, la résolution peut passer automatiquement à
ou à une valeur inférieure.
• Pour appliquer des effets de filtre aux photos enregistrées, appuyez sur
[ ], puis sur Sélect. image → une image.
Mode Filtre vidéos
Appliquez divers effets de filtre à vos vidéos pour créer des images uniques.
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Sélectionnez un effet.
Option Description
Miniature Appliquez un effet d’objectif à décentrement pour faire
apparaître le sujet en miniature.
Vignettage Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un contraste marqué et un effet
de dégradé intense, caractéristiques des appareils Lomo.
Effet ultra grand
angle
Déformer les objets photographiés de façon rapprochée
afin de créer un effet de grand angle.
Classique Appliquer un effet noir et blanc.
Rétro Appliquer un effet de ton sépia.
Effet palette 1 Crée un cliché lumineux présentant un fort contraste et
des couleurs vives.
Effet palette 2 Eclaircit la scène et la rend plus nette.
Effet palette 3 Appliquer une légère tonalité brune.
Effet palette 4 Créer un effet froid et monotone.
Modes Magic
Fonctions avancées 47
4 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour lancer l’enregistrement.
5 Appuyez à nouveau sur le [Déclencheur] pour arrêter
l’enregistrement.
• Si vous sélectionnez Miniature, la vitesse de lecture augmente.
• Si vous appuyez sur Miniature, vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer le son vidéo.
• Selon l’option sélectionnée, la résolution peut passer automatiquement à
ou à une valeur inférieure.
Retouche de photo
Vous pouvez retoucher une photo de plusieurs façons.
Depuis l'écran d'accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu'à , puis
sélectionnez .
Reportez-vous à la section « Retouche de photo » (p. 78).
Sélection de la résolution et de la qualité …… 49
Sélection d’une résolution …………………… 49
Sélection d’une qualité photo ………………… 50
Utilisation du retardateur ……………………… 51
Prise de photo dans un endroit sombre ……… 52
Correction des yeux rouges …………………… 52
Configuration d'une option du flash …………… 52
Réglage de la sensibilité ISO …………………… 54
Mise au point de l’appareil photo ……………… 55
Fonction Macro ………………………………… 55
Mise au point automatique …………………… 55
Réglage de la zone de mise au point ………… 56
Fonction de Détection des visages …………… 58
Détection des visages ………………………… 58
Réalisation d’un auto portrait ………………… 58
Détection des sourires ………………………… 59
Détection des regards ………………………… 59
Conseils pour la détection des visages ………… 60
Réglage de la luminosité et des couleurs …… 61
Réglage manuel de l’exposition (EV) …………… 61
Compensation du contre-jour (ACB) …………… 62
Modification de la mesure de l’exposition …… 62
Sélection d’un réglage de la balance des blancs … 63
Utilisation des modes Rafale …………………… 65
Réglage des images …………………………… 66
Réduction du bruit du zoom …………………… 67
Options de prise de vue disponibles en fonction
du mode de prise de vue ……………………… 68
Options de prise de vue
Cette section explique comment définir les options en mode Prise de vue.
Options de prise de vue 49
Sélection de la résolution et de la qualité
Découvrez comment modifier la résolution de l’image et les réglages de la qualité.
Sélection de la résolution vidéo
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Format vidéo.
3 Sélectionnez une option.
Icône Description
1280 X 720 : fichiers haute définition reproductibles sur un
téléviseur HD.
640 X 480 : fichiers définition standard reproductibles sur un
téléviseur analogique.
Pour partager : publier sur un service de partage par le biais du
réseau sans fil (30 secondes maximum).
Sélection d’une résolution
Augmenter la résolution permet d’augmenter le nombre de pixels des photos ou
des vidéos afin de pouvoir les imprimer sur du papier grand format ou les visionner
sur un grand écran. Si vous utilisez une résolution élevée, la taille du fichier
augmente également.
Sélection de la résolution photo
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Format photo.
3 Sélectionnez une option.
Icône Description
4608 X 3456 : imprimer sur une feuille A1.
4608 X 3072 : imprimer sur une feuille A1 dans le sens paysage (3:2).
4608 X 2592 : imprimer sur une feuille A1 en panorama (16:9) ou lire
sur un téléviseur HD.
3648 X 2736 : imprimer sur une feuille A2.
2592 X 1944 : imprimer sur une feuille A4.
1984 X 1488 : imprimer sur une feuille A5.
1920 X 1080 : imprimer sur une feuille A5 en panorama (16:9) ou lire
sur un téléviseur HD.
1024 X 768 : envoyer en tant que pièce jointe à un courriel.
Sélection de la résolution et de la qualité
Options de prise de vue 50
Sélection d’une qualité photo
Définissez les paramètres de qualité photo. Augmenter la qualité des images accroît
également la taille des fichiers. Les photos prises avec l’appareil sont compressées
et enregistrées au format JPEG.
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Qualité.
3 Sélectionnez une option.
Icône Description
Maximale : prendre des photos en très haute qualité.
Elevée : prendre des photos en haute qualité.
Normale : prendre des photos en qualité normale.
Options de prise de vue 51
Utilisation du retardateur
Cette section décrit comment régler le retardateur afin de retarder la prise de vue.
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
Quitter Définir
Désactivé
10 s
2 s
Double
Retardateur
2 Sélectionnez une option.
Icône Description
Désactivé : le retardateur est désactivé.
10 s : prendre une photo après un délai de 10 secondes.
2 s : prendre une photo après un délai de 2 secondes.
Double : permet de prendre une photo après un délai de 10
secondes, puis une autre après 2 secondes.
Les options proposées peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue.
3 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour lancer le retardateur.
• Le voyant AF/voyant du retardateur clignote. L’appareil prend
automatiquement une photo après le délai indiqué.
• Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] ou sur [ ] pour annuler le retardateur.
• Selon les options de détection des visages choisies, la fonction du retardateur
peut ne pas être disponible.
• Les options du retardateur ne sont pas disponibles si vous avez activé une
option Prise de vue en rafale.
• Dans certains modes, vous pouvez également régler l’option retardateur en
appuyant sur [ ], puis sur Retardateur.
Options de prise de vue 52
Prise de photo dans un endroit sombre
Découvrez comment prendre des photos de nuit ou dans des conditions d’éclairage très faible.
Configuration d'une option du flash
Utilisez le flash pour prendre des photos dans un endroit sombre ou si vous avez
besoin de photos plus claires.
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
Quitter Définir
Désactivée
Automatique
Anti yeux rouges
Contre jour
Synchronisation lente
Correction des yeux rouges
Flash
2 Sélectionnez une option.
Icône Description
Désactivée :
• Le flash ne se déclenche pas.
• Un message d’avertissement de bougé de l’appareil photo
s’affiche si vous prenez une photo dans un endroit sombre.
Automatique : le flash se déclenche automatiquement lorsque le
sujet ou l’arrière-plan est sombre.
Correction des yeux rouges
Si le flash se déclenche lorsque vous photographiez une personne dans un
endroit sombre, il est possible qu’une lueur rouge apparaisse dans ses yeux. Pour
éviter ce problème, sélectionnez Anti yeux rouges ou Correction des yeux
rouges. Reportez-vous aux options du flash mentionnées au paragraphe suivant,
« Configuration d'une option du flash ».
Avant correction Après correction
Prise de photo dans un endroit sombre
Options de prise de vue 53
Icône Description
Anti yeux rouges :
• Le flash se déclenche deux fois lorsque le sujet ou l’arrière-plan est
sombre dans le but de limiter l’effet yeux rouges.
• Un intervalle est prévu entre chaque déclenchement du flash. Ne
bougez pas tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde
fois.
Contre jour :
• Le flash se déclenche systématiquement.
• L’intensité lumineuse se règle automatiquement.
Synchronisation lente :
• Le flash se déclenche et l’obturateur reste ouvert plus longtemps.
• Sélectionnez cette option pour capturer la lumière ambiante afin
de révéler plus de détails en arrière-plan.
• Il est recommandé d’utiliser un trépied pour éviter que les photos
soient floues.
• Un message d’avertissement de bougé de l’appareil photo
s’affiche si vous prenez une photo dans un endroit sombre.
Correction des yeux rouges :
• Le flash se déclenche lorsque le sujet ou l’arrière-plan est sombre
et que l’appareil photo corrige les yeux rouges par le biais d’un
logiciel d’analyse avancée.
• Un intervalle est prévu entre chaque déclenchement du flash. Ne
bougez pas tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde
fois.
Les options proposées peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue.
• Les options du flash ne sont pas disponibles si vous avez activé une option de
prise de vue en rafale ou les options Auto portrait, Détection des regards.
• Assurez-vous que le sujet se trouve à la distance recommandée du flash. (p. 127)
• Des petites traces peuvent apparaître sur la photo si la lumière se reflète ou si
de la poussière se trouve en suspension.
• Dans certains modes, vous pouvez également régler l’option flash en appuyant
sur [ ], puis sur Flash.
Prise de photo dans un endroit sombre
Options de prise de vue 54
Réglage de la sensibilité ISO
La sensibilité ISO est la mesure de la sensibilité d’un film à la lumière, telle que
définie par l’Organisation internationale de normalisation (ISO). Plus cette sensibilité
ISO est élevée, plus l’appareil photo est sensible à la lumière. Utilisez une sensibilité
ISO plus élevée pour prendre de meilleures photos et réduire l’effet de tremblement
de l’appareil photo si vous n’utilisez pas le flash.
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur ISO.
3 Sélectionnez une option.
• Sélectionnez pour utiliser une sensibilité ISO appropriée, en fonction de
la luminosité du sujet et de l’éclairage.
Plus la sensibilité ISO est élevée, plus le risque de parasites présents sur les photos
augmente.
Options de prise de vue 55
Fonction Macro
Utilisez la fonction Macro pour photographier en gros plan des sujets tels que des
fleurs ou des insectes. (Reportez-vous à la section « Mise au point automatique ».)
• Tâchez de ne pas faire bouger l’appareil afin d’éviter que les photos soient
floues.
• Désactivez le flash si la distance qui vous sépare du sujet est inférieure à 40 cm.
Mise au point automatique
Pour prendre des photos nettes, sélectionnez l’option de mise au point qui convient
en fonction de la distance qui vous sépare du sujet.
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
Quitter Définir
Normale (AF)
Macro
Mise au point
Mise au point de l’appareil photo
Cette section explique comment régler la mise au point de l’appareil photo en fonction des sujets et des conditions de prise de vue.
Mise au point de l’appareil photo
Options de prise de vue 56
Réglage de la zone de mise au point
Vous pouvez obtenir des photos plus nettes en sélectionnant une zone de mise au
point appropriée en fonction de l’emplacement du sujet dans le décor.
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Zone de mise au point.
3 Sélectionnez une option.
Icône Description
Mise au point au centre : mettre au point sur le centre (lorsque les
sujets sont placés au centre de la scène).
Mise au point multiple : mettre au point sur une ou plusieurs zones
parmi les 9 zones possibles.
Mise au point avec suivi : faire une mise au point avec repérage du
sujet. (p. 57)
Les options de prise de vue proposées peuvent varier en fonction du mode de prise de
vue choisi.
2 Sélectionnez une option.
Icône Description
Normale (AF) : mise au point sur un sujet se trouvant à plus de
80 cm, et à plus de 250 cm lorsque vous utilisez le zoom.
Macro : mise au point manuelle sur un sujet se trouvant entre
5 et 80 cm de l’appareil photo, et entre 130 et 250 cm lorsque vous
utilisez le zoom.
Macro automatique :
• Mise au point sur un sujet se trouvant à plus de 5 cm et à plus de
130 cm lorsque vous utilisez le zoom.
• Dans certains modes, cette option est automatiquement définie.
Vous ne pouvez pas la régler manuellement.
Les options proposées peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue.
Dans certains modes, vous pouvez également régler l’option de mise au point en
appuyant sur [ ], puis sur Mise au point.
Mise au point de l’appareil photo
Options de prise de vue 57
Utilisation de la mise au point automatique avec repérage
La mise au point avec suivi vous permet d’effectuer le repérage et la mise au point
automatiquement sur le sujet, même si vous êtes en mouvement.
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Sélectionnez Zone de mise au point → Mise au point avec suivi.
3 Effectuez la mise au point sur le sujet à suivre, puis appuyez sur [ ].
• Un cadre de mise au point apparaît autour du sujet et le suit lorsque vous
déplacez l’appareil photo.
Mise au point avec suivi
• Un cadre blanc signifie que l’appareil photo suit le sujet.
• Lorsque vous enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, le cadre vert signifie
que le sujet est mis au point.
• Le cadre rouge indique un échec de mise au point de l’appareil photo.
4 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo.
• Si vous ne sélectionnez pas de zone à mettre au point, le cadre apparaît alors au
centre de l’écran.
• Le suivi d’un sujet peut ne pas fonctionner si :
- le sujet est trop petit ;
- il se déplace de manière excessive ;
- il se trouve à contre-jour ou vous photographiez dans un endroit sombre ;
- des couleurs ou des motifs présents sur le sujet et à l’arrière-plan se
confondent ;
- le sujet inclut des motifs horizontaux, tels que des stores ;
- l’appareil photo tremble de manière excessive.
• En cas d’échec du suivi, la fonction est réinitialisée.
• Si l’appareil photo ne parvient pas à suivre le sujet, vous devez sélectionner de
nouveau ce dernier.
• En cas d’échec de la mise au point, le cadre de mise au point passe au rouge et
la fonction est réinitialisée.
• Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction, vous ne pouvez pas régler les options de
détection des visages, les options de retardateur, de prise de vue en rafale et
d’Intelli Zoom.
Options de prise de vue 58
Détection des visages
L’appareil photo détecte automatiquement jusqu’à 10 visages dans une scène.
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Détection des visages → Normale.
Le visage le plus proche de l’appareil
photo ou du centre de la prise apparaît
dans un cadre de mise au point tandis
que les autres sont encadrés en gris.
L’appareil détecte plus rapidement les visages si vous vous rapprochez des sujets.
Réalisation d’un auto portrait
Cette option vous permet de vous photographier. L’appareil photo règle la distance
de mise au point pour les plans rapprochés, puis émet un court signal sonore une
fois l’appareil prêt pour la prise de vue.
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Appuyez sur → Beauté.
3 Appuyez sur [ ].
4 Appuyez sur Détection des visages → Auto portrait.
5 Réalisez la photo une fois l’objectif face à vous.
6 Lorsque vous entendez un signal sonore court, appuyez sur le [Déclencheur].
Lorsque les visages se trouvent
au centre, l’appareil photo émet
un bref signal sonore.
Si vous désactivez le Volume dans les paramètres de son, l’appareil photo n’émet
alors aucun signal sonore. (p. 107)
Fonction de Détection des visages
Les options de Détection des visages permettent à l’appareil photo de détecter automatiquement les visages. Lorsque vous effectuez la mise au point sur un visage, l’appareil
photo ajuste automatiquement l’exposition. Utilisez les options Détection des regards ou Détection des sourires pour prendre des photos en laissant l’appareil détecter les
yeux fermés ou les visages souriants.
Fonction de Détection des visages
Options de prise de vue 59
Détection des sourires
L'appareil photo déclenche automatiquement l'obturateur lorsqu'il détecte un
visage souriant.
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Détection des visages → Détection des sourires.
3 Préparez la prise de vue.
• L’appareil photo déclenche automatiquement l’obturateur lorsqu’il détecte
un sourire.
L’appareil photo peut
détecter plus facilement les
sourires lorsque le sujet sourit
franchement.
Détection des regards
Si l’appareil détecte des yeux fermés, il prend automatiquement 2 photos
successives.
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Détection des visages → Détection des regards.
Fonction de Détection des visages
Options de prise de vue 60
Conseils pour la détection des visages
• Si votre appareil photo détecte un visage, il en effectue le repérage
automatiquement.
• La détection des visages peut se révéler inefficace lorsque :
- le sujet est éloigné de l’appareil photo ;
- il est trop éclairé ou trop sombre ;
- le sujet ne se trouve pas face à l’appareil photo ;
- le sujet porte des lunettes de soleil ou un masque ;
- l’expression faciale du sujet change d’un extrême à l’autre ;
- le sujet se trouve en contre-jour ou la luminosité change.
• Une fois les options de détection des visages réglées, la zone de mise au point
automatique se définit automatiquement sur Mise au point multiple.
• En fonction de l’option Détection des visages sélectionnée, certaines options de
prise de vue peuvent ne pas être disponibles.
• Selon les options de prise de vue sélectionnées, la détection des visages peut être
impossible.
Options de prise de vue 61
Réglage de la luminosité et des couleurs
Découvrez comment régler la luminosité et les couleurs afin d’obtenir une meilleure qualité d’image.
3 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour régler l’exposition.
• La photo s’éclaircit à mesure que la valeur d’exposition augmente.
Annuler Définir
EV : 0
4 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer vos paramètres.
• Une fois la valeur d’exposition modifiée, le réglage s’enregistre
automatiquement. Il peut s’avérer nécessaire de la modifier afin d’éviter toute
sur ou sous-exposition.
• Si vous ne parvenez pas à choisir une valeur d’exposition, sélectionnez
l’option AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket). L’appareil photo prend alors 3 photos
consécutives, avec différentes valeurs d’exposition : normale, sous-exposée et
surexposée. (p. 65)
Réglage manuel de l’exposition (EV)
En fonction de l’intensité de l’éclairage ambiant, les photos peuvent parfois être trop
claires ou trop sombres. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez régler la valeur d’exposition pour
obtenir de meilleurs clichés.
Plus sombre (-) Neutre (0) Plus clair (+)
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur EV.
Réglage de la luminosité et des couleurs
Options de prise de vue 62
Compensation du contre-jour (ACB)
Si la source de lumière se trouve derrière le sujet ou en cas de contraste important
entre le sujet et l’arrière-plan, le sujet risque d’être sombre sur la photo. Dans ce cas,
sélectionnez l’option de réglage automatique des contrastes (ACB).
▲ Sans ACB ▲ Avec ACB
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur ACB.
3 Sélectionnez une option.
Icône Description
Désactivé : le réglage automatique du contraste (ACB) est désactivé.
Activé : le réglage automatique du contraste (ACB) est activé.
• La fonction ACB est toujours activée en mode Scènes Automatique.
• La fonction ACB n’est pas disponible lorsque vous activez les options de prise de
vue en rafale.
Modification de la mesure de l’exposition
Le mode de mesure correspond à la manière dont l’appareil photo mesure la
quantité de lumière. La luminosité et la clarté des photos varient selon le mode de
mesure sélectionné.
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Mesure de l’exposition.
3 Sélectionnez une option.
Icône Description
Multiple :
• L’appareil photo divise le plan en plusieurs zones, puis mesure
l’intensité de lumière de chacune d’elles.
• Ce mode s’adapte aux photos habituelles.
Sélective :
• L’appareil photo mesure uniquement l’intensité de la lumière au
centre du cadre.
• Si le sujet ne se trouve pas au centre de la scène, la photo peut
s’avérer trop claire ou trop sombre.
• Ce mode s’adapte plus volontiers aux sujets à contre-jour.
Centrée :
• L’appareil photo mesure la luminosité moyenne sur l’ensemble du
cadre en mettant l’accent sur le centre.
• Ce mode s’adapte aux photos dont les sujets se trouvent au centre
de l’image.
Réglage de la luminosité et des couleurs
Options de prise de vue 63
Sélection d’un réglage de la balance des blancs
Les couleurs des photos dépendent du type et de la qualité de la source d’éclairage.
Pour que vos photos soient le reflet de la réalité, choisissez des conditions
d’éclairage appropriées pour calibrer la balance des blancs, par exemple Balance
des blancs automatique, Lumière du jour, Nuageux ou Tungstène.
Balance des blancs
automatique
Lumière du jour
Nuageux Tungstène
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Balance des blancs.
3 Sélectionnez une option.
Icône Description
Balance des blancs automatique : régler automatiquement la
balance des blancs en fonction des conditions d’éclairage.
Lumière du jour : prendre des photos en extérieur et par beau
temps.
Nuageux : prendre des photos en extérieur par temps nuageux ou
dans un endroit ombragé.
Fluorescent haut : prendre des photos avec un éclairage
fluorescent de type lumière du jour ou un éclairage fluorescent à
trois degrés d’intensité.
Fluorescent bas : prendre des clichés avec un éclairage fluorescent
blanc.
Tungstène : prendre des photos en intérieur avec des ampoules à
incandescence ou des lampes halogène.
Réglage personnalisé : pour utiliser les paramètres de balance des
blancs que vous définissez. (p. 64)
Temp. couleur : régler la température des couleurs de la source de
lumière. (p. 64)
Réglage de la luminosité et des couleurs
Options de prise de vue 64
Personnalisation de la balance des blancs
Vous pouvez personnaliser la balance des blancs en prenant des photos d’une
surface blanche, telle qu’une feuille de papier, dans les conditions d’éclairage
auxquelles l’objet doit être exposé pour la prise de vue. Ceci permet d’adapter les
couleurs de votre photo aux conditions d’éclairage réelles.
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Balance des blancs → Réglage personnalisé.
3 Orientez l’objectif vers une feuille de papier blanc, puis appuyez sur
le [Déclencheur].
Feuille de papier blanc
Réglage de la température des couleurs
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Sélectionnez Balance des blancs → Temp. couleur.
3 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour régler la température des couleurs en
fonction de la source d’éclairage.
• Il est possible d’obtenir une photo plus chaleureuse à l’aide d’une valeur
élevée, et une photo moins chaleureuse à l’aide d’une valeur plus basse.
Temp. couleur : 3000K
Retour Définir
4 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer les paramètres.
Options de prise de vue 65
Utilisation des modes Rafale
Il peut être difficile de photographier un sujet qui se déplace rapidement ou de capturer des expressions faciales et des gestes naturels. Il peut également s’avérer compliqué de
régler correctement l’exposition et de choisir une source adaptée de lumière. Dans de tels cas de figure, sélectionnez l’un des modes de prise de vue en rafale.
Icône Description
AEB:
• Prend 3 photos consécutives sous différentes expositions :
normale, sous-exposée et surexposée.
• La prise de la photo peut prendre plus de temps. Utilisez un
trépied pour obtenir de meilleurs résultats.
4 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à
mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point.
5 Maintenez le [Déclencheur] enfoncé.
• Pendant toute la durée de la pression sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil prend
des photos en continu.
• Les options proposées peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue.
• Lorsque vous sélectionnez l’option Rafale, la résolution est réglée sur et la
sensibilité ISO sur Automatique.
• En fonction de l’option Détection des visages sélectionnée, certaines options de
prise de vue en rafale peuvent ne pas être disponibles.
• Selon la capacité de la carte mémoire et de ses performances, l’enregistrement
des photos peut prendre plus de temps.
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Prise de vue.
3 Sélectionnez une option.
Icône Description
Unique : prendre une seule photo. (L’option Unique ne correspond
pas à une option de prise de vue en rafale.)
Continue:
• Pendant que vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil prend
des photos en continu.
• Le nombre maximal de photos dépend de la capacité de votre
carte mémoire.
Rafale: pendant que vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil
photo prend des photos (5 photos par seconde avec un
maximum de 30 photos).
Options de prise de vue 66
Réglage des images
Vous pouvez modifier la netteté, le contraste ou la saturation de vos photos.
4 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour régler chaque valeur.
Netteté Description
– Adoucir les contours des photos (adapté pour la retouche de
photos sur ordinateur).
+
Rendre les contours des photos plus nets. (Cette option
augmente aussi le risque d’affichage de parasites sur les
photos.)
Contraste Description
– Diminuer l’intensité des couleurs et la luminosité.
+ Augmenter l’intensité des couleurs et la luminosité.
Saturation Description
– Réduire la saturation.
+ Augmenter la saturation.
5 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer les paramètres.
Sélectionnez 0 si vous ne souhaitez appliquer aucun effet (adapté à l’impression).
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Réglage des images.
3 Sélectionnez une option.
• Netteté
• Contraste
• Saturation
Réglage des images
Retour Définir
Netteté
Contraste
Saturation
Options de prise de vue 67
Réduction du bruit du zoom
Lorsque vous utilisez le zoom pour enregistrer des vidéos, l’appareil photo peut enregistrer le bruit du zoom. Dans ce cas, utilisez la fonction Zoom silencieux.
1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Voix.
3 Sélectionnez une option.
Icône Description
Zoom silencieux : Lorsque vous utilisez le zoom, tout
enregistrement sonore est temporairement interrompu.
Désactivé : Enregistrer une vidéo sans son.
Activé : Enregistrer une vidéo avec son.
• Ne bloquez pas le micro lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Zoom silencieux.
• Quand le Zoom silencieux est activé, les enregistrements sonores peuvent
être altérés.
Options de prise de vue 68
Options de prise de vue disponibles en fonction du mode de prise de vue
Pour plus de détails sur les options de prise de vue, reportez-vous au chapitre « Options de prise de vue ». (p. 48)
Scènes
Automatique Programme Vidéo
intelligente Film Intelligent Panorama Live Filtre photos Filtre vidéos
Résolution O O O O O - O O
Qualité - O - - - - O -
Retardateur O O O O O - O O
Flash O O - - O - O -
Sensibilité ISO - O - - - - - -
Macro - O - O O - - -
Zone de mise au point - O - - O - - -
Détection des visages - O - - O - - -
EV - O - O - - - -
ACB - O - - - - - -
Mesure de l’exposition - O - O - - - -
Balance des blancs - O - O - - - -
Prise de vue - O - - - - - -
Réglage de l’image - O - - - - - -
Voix - - O O - - - O
Zoom numérique - O - - O - - -
Intelli Zoom O O - - - - - -
OIS - O - O - - - -
O : l’option est disponible. Certaines options peuvent être limitées ou ne peuvent pas être modifiées.
- : l’option n’est pas disponible.
Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode
Lecture …………………………………………… 70
Activation du mode Lecture …………………… 70
Affichage des photos …………………………… 74
Lecture d’une vidéo …………………………… 77
Retouche de photo ……………………………… 78
Redimensionnement des photos ……………… 78
Rotation d’une photo ………………………… 78
Effets de filtre intelligent ……………………… 79
Réglages de la luminosité, du contraste, de la
saturation ou des sujets en contre-jour ……… 80
Réglage des portraits …………………………… 80
Montage vidéo …………………………………… 82
Recadrage d’une vidéo ………………………… 82
Extraction d’une image d’une vidéo …………… 82
Affichage des fichiers sur un téléviseur ……… 83
Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur …………… 84
Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows … 84
Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur Mac ……… 85
Configuration système ………………………… 87
Lecture/Retouche
Cette section décrit comment visionner des prises d’images ou de vidéos et retoucher des photos. Vous
apprendrez également comment connecter votre appareil photo à un ordinateur ou à un téléviseur.
Lecture/Retouche 70
Activation du mode Lecture
Visionnez des photos ou des vidéos enregistrées dans l’appareil photo.
1 Appuyez sur [ ].
• Le fichier le plus récent que vous avez capturé s’affiche.
• Si l’appareil photo est éteint, ce dernier s’allume et affiche le fichier le plus
récent.
2 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour parcourir les fichiers.
• Maintenez appuyé [ / ] pour un défilement rapide des fichiers.
• Il se peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure de retoucher ou de visionner des
photos ou des vidéos prises par un autre appareil photo, si certaines résolutions
ou codecs ne sont pas pris en charge. Utilisez un ordinateur ou un autre
appareil pour les retoucher ou les visionner.
• Les photos ou les vidéos prises en orientation portrait ne pivotent pas
automatiquement et s'affichent en orientation paysage sur l'appareil photo et
les autres appareils.
Informations sur les fichiers photos
Informations sur le fichier
Mémoire en cours d’utilisation
Album/Zoom avant
Icône Description
Fichier en cours/Total des fichiers
Nom du dossier – Nom du fichier
Fichier protégé
Pour afficher les informations relatives au fichier à l’écran, appuyez sur [ ].
Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture
Cette section décrit comment visionner des photos et des vidéos et comment manipuler les fichiers.
Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture
Lecture/Retouche 71
Informations sur les fichiers vidéo
Informations sur le fichier
Lecture
Album
Capture
Icône Description
Fichier en cours/Total des fichiers
Nom du dossier – Nom du fichier
Durée de la lecture en cours
Durée de la vidéo
Fichier protégé
Pour afficher les informations relatives au fichier à l’écran, appuyez sur [ ].
Affichage de fichiers sous forme de miniatures
Parcourez les fichiers sous forme de miniatures.
En mode Lecture, tournez [Zoom] vers la gauche pour afficher les
vignettes (12). Tournez à nouveau le [Zoom] vers la gauche pour
afficher d’autres miniatures (24 à la fois). Tournez le [Zoom] vers la
droite pour revenir au mode d’affichage précédent.
Menu
• Vous pouvez également consulter les fichiers sous forme de vignettes en
parcourant les options jusqu’à dans l’écran d’accueil, puis en
sélectionnant .
Appuyez sur [ / / / ] pour parcourir les fichiers.
Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture
Lecture/Retouche 72
Affichage des fichiers par catégorie
Affichez les fichiers par catégorie, par exemple, par date ou type de fichier.
1 En mode Lecture, faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche.
• Vous pouvez également consulter les fichiers sous forme de vignettes en
parcourant les options jusqu’à dans l’écran d’accueil, puis en
sélectionnant .
2 Appuyez sur [ ], puis sélectionnez Filtrer → une catégorie.
Tout
Date
Type de fichier
Filtrer
Retour Définir
Icône Description
Tout : visionnez les fichiers normalement.
Date : afficher les fichiers par date d’enregistrement.
Type de fichier : affichage des fichiers par type.
3 Recherchez la liste de votre choix, puis appuyez sur [ ] pour ouvrir
la liste.
4 Recherchez le fichier de votre choix, puis appuyez sur [ ] pour
visionner le fichier.
5 Tournez le [Zoom] vers la gauche, puis appuyez sur [ ] pour
revenir au mode d’affichage précédent.
• Si vous changez de catégorie, le temps de réorganisation des fichiers par
l’appareil photo peut être plus ou moins long selon le nombre de fichiers
concernés.
• Si vous supprimez une catégorie classée par Date ou Type de fichier, tous les
fichiers de la catégorie sont également supprimés.
Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture
Lecture/Retouche 73
Protection de fichiers
Vous pouvez protéger des fichiers pour éviter toute suppression involontaire.
1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez un fichier à protéger.
2 Appuyez sur [ ], puis sélectionnez Protéger → Activé.
3 Répétez les étapes 1 et 2 afin de protéger d’autres fichiers.
Il est impossible de redimensionner, de supprimer ou de faire pivoter un fichier
protégé.
Suppression de fichiers
Sélectionnez les fichiers à supprimer en mode Lecture.
Suppression d’un seul fichier
Vous pouvez sélectionner un seul fichier pour le supprimer.
1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez un fichier, puis appuyez sur [ ].
2 Lorsque la fenêtre en incrustation s’affiche, sélectionnez Oui.
Il vous est également possible de supprimer des fichiers en mode Lecture en
appuyant sur [ ], puis sur Supprimer → Supprimer → Oui.
Suppression de plusieurs fichiers
Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs fichiers et les supprimer simultanément.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [ ].
• En affichage vignettes, appuyez sur [ ], sélectionnez Supprimer
→ Sélectionner, puis passez à l'étape 3 ou appuyez sur [ ], sélectionnez
Sélectionner, puis passez à l'étape 3.
2 Lorsque la fenêtre en incrustation s’affiche, sélectionnez
Suppr. multiple.
3 Faites défiler la liste pour accéder à chacun des fichiers que vous
souhaitez supprimer, puis appuyez sur [ ].
• Appuyez à nouveau sur [ ] pour annuler votre sélection.
4 Appuyez sur [ ].
5 Lorsque la fenêtre en incrustation s’affiche, sélectionnez Oui.
Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture
Lecture/Retouche 74
Suppression de tous les fichiers
Vous pouvez sélectionner tous les fichiers pour les supprimer en une seule fois.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [ ].
• En affichage vignettes, appuyez sur [ ], sélectionnez Supprimer →
Supprimer tout, puis passez à l'étape 3 ou appuyez sur [ ], sélectionnez
Supprimer tout, puis passez à l'étape 3.
2 Appuyez sur Supprimer → Supprimer tout.
3 Lorsque la fenêtre en incrustation s’affiche, sélectionnez Oui.
• Tous les fichiers non protégés sont alors supprimés.
Affichage des photos
Effectuez un zoom avant sur une partie d’une photo ou affichez les photos sous
forme de diaporama.
Agrandissement d’une photo
En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [Zoom] vers la droite pour agrandir
une partie de la photo Tournez la touche [Zoom] vers la gauche
pour effectuer un zoom arrière.
Zone agrandie
Retour Rogner
Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture
Lecture/Retouche 75
Pour Description
Déplacer la zone agrandie Appuyez sur [ / / / ].
Recadrer la photo
agrandie
Appuyez sur [ ], puis choisissez Oui. (La photo
recadrée est alors enregistrée sous forme de nouveau
fichier. La photo originale est conservée dans son
format d’origine.)
Lors du visionnage de photos prises avec un autre appareil photo, le niveau de
zoom peut différer.
Affichage de photos en panorama
Regardez des photos réalisées en mode Panorama Live.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [ / ] pour accéder au panoramique
voulu.
• L’intégralité du panoramique s’affiche à l’écran.
2 Appuyez sur [ ].
• L’appareil photo fait automatiquement défiler la photo de gauche à droite
pour une vue panoramique horizontale ou de haut en bas pour une vue
panoramique verticale. L’appareil photo passe ensuite au mode Lecture.
• Lors de la lecture d’un panoramique, appuyez sur [ ] pour mettre en pause
ou pour reprendre la lecture.
• En cas de pause d’un panoramique, appuyez sur [ / / / ] pour
déplacer horizontalement ou verticalement l’affichage, en fonction du sens
dans lequel vous avez déplacé l’appareil photo lors de la prise de la photo.
3 Appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir au mode Lecture.
L’appareil photo ne fait automatiquement défiler le panoramique que lorsque le
bord le plus long de la photo représente au moins le double du bord le plus court.
Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture
Lecture/Retouche 76
Lecture d’un diaporama
Appliquez des effets et du son à un diaporama. La fonction de diaporama ne
fonctionne pas avec les vidéos.
1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Options diaporama.
3 Choisissez une option d’effet de diaporama.
• Passez à l’étape 4 pour démarrer le diaporama sans appliquer d’effet.
* Paramètre par défaut
Option Description
Mode de
lecture
Activer une option de répétition du diaporama.
(Une lecture*, Répétition)
Intervalle
• Définissez l’intervalle entre l’affichage de chaque photo.
(1 s*, 3 s, 5 s, 10 s)
• Pour marquer l’intervalle, vous devez définir l’option Effet sur
Désactivé.
Musique Choisir une musique d’arrière-plan.
Effet
• Définir un effet de transition entre les photos.
(Désactivé, Calme*, Décontracté, Vif, Doux, Brillant)
• Sélectionnez Désactivé pour annuler les effets.
• Lorsque vous utilisez l’option Effet, l’intervalle entre l’affichage
des photos est alors défini sur 1 seconde.
4 Appuyez sur [ ].
5 Appuyez sur Démarrer diaporama.
6 Visionnez le diaporama.
• Appuyez sur [ ] pour mettre en pause le diaporama.
• Rappuyez sur [ ] pour reprendre la lecture du diaporama.
• Appuyez sur [ ] pour interrompre le diaporama et repasser en mode Lecture.
• Faites tourner [Zoom] de gauche à droite pour régler le niveau de volume.
Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture
Lecture/Retouche 77
Lecture d’une vidéo
Le mode Lecture vous permet de visionner une vidéo.
1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez une vidéo et appuyez sur [ ].
2 Visionnez la vidéo.
Temps de lecture en cours/
Durée de la vidéo
Pause Arreter
Pour Description
Revenir en arrière
Appuyer sur [ ]. En appuyant sur [ ], l’appareil photo
effectue un rembobinage de la lecture par incréments
de 2X, 4X, et 8X.
Mettre en pause ou
reprendre la lecture
après une pause
Appuyer sur [ ].
Avancer rapidement
Appuyer sur [ ]. En appuyant sur [ ], l’appareil photo
effectue une lecture rapide en avant par incréments de
2X, 4X, et 8X.
Régler le volume Faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche ou vers la
droite.
Lors de la lecture d’une vidéo, les fonctionnalités comme le rembobinage,
l’avance rapide ou la pause peuvent être utilisées au bout de 2 secondes.
Lecture/Retouche 78
Redimensionnement des photos
Modifiez la taille d’une photo pour l’enregistrer sous forme de nouveau fichier.
1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez une photo et appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Redimensionner.
3 Sélectionnez une option.
Retour Définir
Redimensionner
2592 X 1944
1984 X 1488
1024 X 768
4 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer.
Les options disponibles varient en fonction des dimensions originales de la photo
sélectionnée.
Rotation d’une photo
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche, puis sélectionnez une photo.
4 Appuyez sur Rotation → une option.
5 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer.
Rotation : Droite (90°)
Annuler Enregistrer
• L’appareil photo remplace la photo originale.
• En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [ ], puis sur Rotation pour faire pivoter
une photo.
Retouche de photo
Cette section décrit comment retoucher des photos.
• Les photos retouchées s’enregistrent sous forme de nouveaux fichiers.
• Lorsque vous retouchez des photos, l’appareil photo les convertit automatiquement en résolution inférieure. Les photos que vous faites pivoter ne sont pas automatiquement
converties dans une résolution inférieure.
• Les photos prises dans certains modes ne peuvent pas être modifiées.
Retouche de photo
Lecture/Retouche 79
Effets de filtre intelligent
Appliquez des effets à vos photos.
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche, puis sélectionnez une
photo.
4 Appuyez sur Filtre intelligent → une option.
Filtre intelligent : Normal
Retour Définir
Option Description
Normal Aucun effet
Miniature Appliquez un effet d’objectif à décentrement pour faire apparaître
le sujet en miniature. (Le haut et le bas de la photo sont flous.)
Vignettage Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un contraste marqué et un effet
de dégradé intense, caractéristiques des appareils Lomo.
Filtre croisé Ajoutez des lignes irradiant d’objets brillants pour imiter
l’effet visuel d’un filtre croisé.
Effet ultra
grand angle
Déformer les objets photographiés de façon rapprochée afin
de créer un effet de grand angle.
Classique Appliquer un effet noir et blanc.
Rétro Appliquer un effet de ton sépia.
5 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer.
Retouche de photo
Lecture/Retouche 80
Réglages de la luminosité, du contraste, de la saturation ou
des sujets en contre-jour
Cette section présente le réglage de la luminosité, du contraste ou de la saturation.
Si le centre d’une photo s’avère sombre, vous pouvez l’éclaircir. La photo retouchée
s’enregistre sous forme de nouveau fichier, mais peut se voir convertie à une
résolution inférieure.
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche, puis sélectionnez une
photo.
4 Sélectionnez une option de réglage.
Icône Description
Luminosité
Contraste
Saturation
ACB (Réglage des sujets en contre-jour)
• Si vous avez sélectionné , passez à l’étape 7.
5 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour régler l’option.
6 Appuyez sur [ ].
7 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer.
Réglage des portraits
Cette section présente la correction de l’effet yeux rouges et de la retouche de
visages. La photo retouchée s’enregistre sous forme de nouveau fichier, mais peut se
voir convertie à une résolution inférieure.
Retouche des visages
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche, puis sélectionnez une
photo.
4 Appuyez sur Retouche des visages.
5 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour régler l’option.
• Augmentez la valeur pour obtenir un ton de peau plus clair et plus lisse.
6 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer.
Retouche de photo
Lecture/Retouche 81
Élimination de l’effet yeux rouges
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche, puis sélectionnez une
photo.
4 Appuyez sur Correction des yeux rouges.
5 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer.
Lecture/Retouche 82
Montage vidéo
Lorsque vous visionnez une vidéo, vous pouvez recadrer la vidéo ou enregistrer une image fixe tirée de la vidéo.
Recadrage d’une vidéo
1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez une vidéo et appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Recadrer la vidéo.
3 Appuyez sur [ ] pour lire la vidéo.
4 Appuyez sur [ ] → [ ] à l’endroit où vous souhaitez que le
recadrage commence.
5 Appuyez sur [ ] pour reprendre la lecture de la vidéo.
6 Appuyez sur [ ] → [ ] à l’endroit où vous souhaitez que le
recadrage se termine.
7 Appuyez sur [ ] pour recadrer.
8 Lorsque la fenêtre en incrustation s’affiche, sélectionnez Oui.
• La vidéo d’origine doit durer au moins 10 secondes.
• Il vous est possible de recadrer la vidéo à n’importe quel point depuis 2
secondes à partir du début jusqu’à 2 secondes avant la fin de la vidéo.
• La vidéo modifiée s’enregistre sous forme de nouveau fichier.
Extraction d’une image d’une vidéo
1 Lors du visionnage d’une vidéo, appuyez sur [ ] au point où vous
souhaitez enregistrer l’image.
2 Appuyez sur [ ].
• La résolution de l’image capturée reprend celle de la vidéo originale.
• L’image s’enregistre sous forme de nouveau fichier.
Lecture/Retouche 83
Affichage des fichiers sur un téléviseur
Pour afficher des photos ou des vidéos sur un téléviseur, branchez l’appareil photo en utilisant le câble audio / vidéo fourni.
7 Allumez le téléviseur et sélectionnez le mode d’entrée vidéo A/V à
l’aide de la télécommande.
8 Allumez l’appareil photo.
• L’appareil photo passe automatiquement en mode Lecture lorsque vous le
raccordez à un téléviseur.
9 Utilisez les boutons de l’appareil photo pour visualiser des photos
ou lire des vidéos.
• Sur certains téléviseurs, du bruit numérique (parasites) peut apparaître sur
l’image ou une partie de celle-ci peut ne pas s’afficher.
• En fonction des réglages du téléviseur, il est possible que l’image apparaisse
décentrée sur l’écran.
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Appuyez sur Connectivité → Vidéo.
4 Sélectionnez le signal vidéo en sortie correspondant à votre pays ou
votre région. (p. 108)
5 Eteignez l’appareil photo et le téléviseur.
6 Branchez l’appareil photo sur le téléviseur à l’aide du câble audio /
vidéo.
Audio Vidéo
Lecture/Retouche 84
Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows
Vous pouvez connecter l’appareil photo à votre ordinateur en tant que disque
amovible.
L’ordinateur doit fonctionner sous Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 ou
Windows 8 afin que vous puissiez connecter l’appareil photo en tant que disque
amovible.
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Sélectionnez Connectivité → i-Launcher → Désactivée.
4 Eteignez l’appareil photo.
5 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB.
Vous devez brancher l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB sur l’appareil photo.
Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous branchez le câble à l’envers.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données.
6 Allumez l’appareil photo.
• L’ordinateur détecte automatiquement l’appareil photo.
7 Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez Poste de travail → Disque amovible
→ DCIM → 100PHOTO.
8 Faites glisser les fichiers ou enregistrez-les sur l’ordinateur.
Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur
Raccordez l’appareil photo à l’ordinateur pour transférer les fichiers de la carte mémoire vers l’ordinateur.
Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur
Lecture/Retouche 85
Déconnexion de l’appareil photo (Windows XP)
La méthode pour débrancher l’appareil photo est identique pour Windows Vista,
Windows 7 et Windows 8.
1 Si le voyant lumineux de l’appareil photo clignote, attendez qu’il
s’éteigne.
2 Cliquez sur dans la barre d’outils en bas à droite de l’écran de
l’ordinateur.
3 Cliquez sur le message qui apparaît.
4 Cliquez sur la boîte de dialogue indiquant que l’appareil photo peut
être retiré en toute sécurité.
5 Débranchez le câble USB.
Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur Mac
Lorsqu’il est connecté à un ordinateur Mac, l’appareil photo est automatiquement
reconnu. Vous pouvez directement transférer des fichiers de l’appareil photo vers
l’ordinateur sans installer de logiciel.
Mac OS 10.5 ou version ultérieure est pris en charge.
1 Éteignez l’appareil photo.
2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur Mac par le biais du câble
USB.
Vous devez brancher l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB sur l’appareil photo.
Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous branchez le câble à l’envers.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données.
Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur
Lecture/Retouche 86
3 Allumez l’appareil photo.
• L’ordinateur détecte automatiquement l’appareil photo et affiche l’icône d’un
disque amovible.
4 Sur votre ordinateur, ouvrez le disque amovible.
5 Faites glisser les fichiers ou enregistrez-les sur l’ordinateur.
Lecture/Retouche 87
Configuration système
Configuration recommandée pour visionner des vidéos sur un PC ou démarrer l'application i-Launcher.
Spécifications du système d’exploitation Mac
Elément Configuration requise
Système
d’exploitation Mac OS 10.5 ou une version ultérieure (à l’exception du PowerPC)
Mémoire vive Minimum 256 Mo de RAM (512 Mo ou plus recommandé)
Capacité du
disque dur 110 Mo minimum
Divers Port USB 2.0
• Ces informations ne sont qu'à but informatif. Il est possible que les
performances ne soient pas optimales, même si les caractéristiques de
votre ordinateur sont égales ou supérieures à celles de la configuration
recommandée.
• Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages résultant
de l’utilisation d’ordinateurs non conformes, notamment les ordinateurs
assemblés.
Spécifications du système d’exploitation Windows
Elément Configuration requise
Processeur Intel Pentium®4, 3.2 GHz ou plus puissant/
AMD Athlon™ FX 2.6 GHz ou plus puissant
Mémoire vive 512 Mo de RAM minimum (1 Go et plus recommandé)
Système
d’exploitation* Windows 7 ou Windows 8
Capacité du
disque dur 250 Mo minimum (1 Go et plus recommandé)
Divers
• Résolution minimale de 1024 X 768 pixels, affichage couleur
16 bits recommandé (résolution de 1280 X 1024 pixels,
affichage couleur 32 bits recommandés)
• Port USB 2.0
• Carte vidéo nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT ou plus récente,
ou ATI X1600 ou plus récente
* Une version 32 bits de i-Launcher s’installera, y compris sur les éditions 64 bits de
Windows 7 et Windows 8.
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et
configuration des paramètres réseau ………… 89
Connexion automatique à un réseau local sans fil … 89
Utilisation du navigateur de connexion ……… 90
Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau ………… 91
Saisie du texte ………………………………… 92
Utilisation de la fonction NFC
(Partage par contact) …………………………… 93
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Prise de
vue ……………………………………………… 93
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Lecture
(Partage instantané) …………………………… 93
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Wi-Fi … 93
Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un
smartphone ……………………………………… 94
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone … 95
Utilisation d’un smartphone comme télécommande
pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur ………… 96
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel …… 98
Modification des paramètres de courriel ……… 98
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel …… 100
Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou
de vidéos ………………………………………… 101
Accès à un service de partage ………………… 101
Publication de photos ou de vidéos …………… 101
Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de
fichiers …………………………………………… 103
Affichage de photos ou de vidéos sur des
appareils compatibles Samsung Link ………… 103
Réseau sans fil
Apprenez à vous connecter à des réseaux locaux sans fil et à utiliser les fonctions.
Réseau sans fil 89
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Cette section décrit comment se connecter via un point d’accès (PA) lorsqu’un réseau local sans fil se trouve dans le champ de détection. Vous pouvez également configurer les
paramètres réseau.
Icône Description
Point d’accès Ad hoc
Point d’accès sécurisé
Point d’accès WPS
Force du signal
Appuyez sur [ ] pour ouvrir les options de paramétrage réseau.
• Lorsque vous choisissez un point d’accès sécurisé, une fenêtre contextuelle
apparaît. Saisissez les mots de passe requis pour vous connecter au réseau
local sans fil. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, consultez « Saisie du
texte ». (p. 92)
• Lorsqu’une page de connexion apparaît, reportez-vous à la section
« Utilisation du navigateur de connexion ». (p. 90)
• Si vous choisissez un point d’accès non sécurisé, l’appareil photo se connecte
automatiquement au réseau local sans fil.
• Si vous sélectionnez le point d’accès pris en charge par un profil WPS,
sélectionnez → Connexion PIN WPS, puis tapez le code PIN sur l’appareil
du point d’accès. Vous avez également la possibilité de vous connecter à un
point d’accès pris en charge, à profil WPS, en sélectionnant → Connexion
via la touche WPS sur l’appareil photo et en appuyant sur le bouton WPS sur
le dispositif du point d’accès.
• Si un message mentionne la réglementation sur la collecte de données,
veuillez le lire et l’accepter.
Connexion automatique à un réseau local sans fil
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez , ou .
3 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent jusqu’à l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi.
• L’appareil photo recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles.
• Dans certains modes, appuyez sur [ ], puis sélectionnez Paramètres
Wi-Fi.
4 Sélectionnez un point d’accès.
Paramètres Wi-Fi
Retour Manuel
Actualiser
Samsung 1
Samsung 2
Samsung 3
Samsung 4
• Sélectionnez Actualiser actualiser la liste des PA connectables.
• Appuyez sur Ajouter mode sans fil pour ajouter un point d’accès
manuellement. Le nom du point d’accès (PA) doit être en anglais pour ajouter
le PA manuellement.
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Réseau sans fil 90
Configuration des options de réseau
1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis
appuyez sur [ ].
2 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises.
Option Description
Mot de passe réseau Saisissez le mot de passe réseau.
Configuration IP Définissez l’adresse IP automatiquement ou
manuellement.
Configuration manuelle de l’adresse IP
1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis
appuyez sur [ ].
2 Appuyez sur Configuration IP → Manuel.
3 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises.
Option Description
IP Saisissez l’adresse IP statique.
Masque sous-réseau Indiquez le masque de sous-réseau.
Passerelle Indiquez la passerelle.
Serveur DNS Saisissez l’adresse DNS.
Utilisation du navigateur de connexion
Vous pouvez saisir vos informations de session via le navigateur lors de la connexion
à certains points d’accès, sites de partage ou serveurs cloud.
Bouton/Icône Description
[ / / / ] Accéder à un élément ou faire défiler la page.
[ ] Sélectionner un élément.
[ ]
Accéder aux options suivantes :
• Page précédente : Accéder à la page précédente.
• Page suivante : Accéder à la page suivante.
• Recharger : Actualiser la page.
• Arrêter : Arrêter le chargement de la page.
• Quitter : Fermer navigateur de connexion.
[ ] Fermer navigateur de connexion.
• Selon la page activée, il est possible que vous ne puissiez pas sélectionner
certaines options. Il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement.
• Le navigateur de connexion peut ne pas se fermer automatiquement après la
connexion sur certaines pages. Dans ce cas, fermez le navigateur en appuyant
sur [ ], puis poursuivez vos manipulations.
• La page de connexion peut s’avérer plus longue à charger en fonction de sa
taille ou du débit du réseau. Dans ce cas, patientez jusqu’à ce que la fenêtre de
connexion s’affiche.
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Réseau sans fil 91
Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau
• Certaines fonctions Wi-Fi ne sont pas disponibles si vous n’insérez pas de carte
mémoire.
• La qualité de la connexion réseau se détermine d’après les points d’accès.
• Plus la distance entre votre appareil photo et le point d’accès est grande, plus ce
premier mettra de temps à se connecter au réseau.
• Si un dispositif à proximité utilise une fréquence radio identique à celle de votre
appareil photo, il se peut que votre connexion s’interrompe.
• Si le nom de votre point d’accès n’est pas en anglais, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne
puisse pas localiser le périphérique ou que son nom apparaisse de façon incorrecte.
• Pour connaître les paramètres réseau et le mot de passe requis, contactez votre
administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau.
• Si le fournisseur de service d’un réseau local sans fil requiert l’identification de
l’utilisateur, il se peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure de vous connecter audit
réseau. Pour vous connecter au réseau local sans fil, contactez votre fournisseur
de service réseau.
• En fonction du type de cryptage, le nombre de chiffres qui composent le mot de
passe peut varier.
• En fonction des conditions environnantes, il peut s’avérer impossible d’établir une
connexion à un réseau local sans fil.
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo affiche une imprimante compatible avec les
réseaux locaux sans fil figurant dans les listes des points d’accès. Vous ne pouvez
cependant pas vous connecter au réseau par le biais d’une imprimante.
• Il est impossible de connecter votre appareil photo simultanément à un réseau et
à un téléviseur.
• La connexion à un réseau peut supposer des frais supplémentaires. Les coûts
varient en fonction des conditions de votre contrat.
• Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à un réseau Wi-Fi, essayez un autre point
d’accès parmi la liste de ceux proposés.
• Il se peut qu’une page de connexion apparaisse lorsque vous sélectionnez des
réseaux Wi-Fi gratuits assurés par certains fournisseurs de service réseau. Saisissez
votre identifiant et votre mot de passe pour vous connecter au réseau local sans
fil. Pour en savoir plus sur l’inscription ou sur un service particulier, contactez les
fournisseurs de service réseau en question.
• Soyez prudent lors de la saisie d’informations personnelles pour vous connecter à
un point d’accès. Ne saisissez aucune information de paiement sur votre appareil
photo. Le fabricant ne peut être tenu responsable de tout problème survenant
suite à la saisie de telles informations.
• Les connexions réseau disponibles peuvent varier selon le pays.
• La fonction de réseau local sans fil de votre appareil photo doit être conforme à
la législation en matière de transmission par hyperfréquences dans votre pays ou
région. Pour assurer une compatibilité totale, n’utilisez la fonction de réseau local
sans fil que dans le pays dans lequel vous avez acheté l’appareil photo.
• Les opérations à suivre pour régler les paramètres réseau peuvent différer en
fonction des conditions du réseau.
• Ne tentez pas d’accéder à un réseau dont l’accès ne vous est pas autorisé.
• Avant de vous connecter à des réseaux, assurez-vous que la batterie est
entièrement rechargée.
• Certains modes de capture empêchent la publication ou l’envoi de fichiers.
• Les fichiers transférés vers un autre appareil peuvent ne pas être pris en charge
par cet appareil. Si tel est le cas, utilisez un ordinateur pour les lire.
Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau
Réseau sans fil 92
Saisie du texte
Cette section décrit comment saisir du texte. Les icônes dans le tableau ci-dessous
vous permettent de déplacer le curseur, de modifier la casse, etc. Appuyez sur
[ / / / ] pour vous déplacer jusqu’à la touche souhaitée, puis appuyez sur
[ ] pour saisir la touche.
Effectué
Annuler Retour arrière
Icône Description
Supprimer la dernière lettre.
Déplacer le curseur.
En mode ABC, changer la casse.
Saisir « .com ».
Icône Description
Passez du mode Symbole au mode ABC.
Ajouter un espace.
Effectué Enregistrer le texte à l’écran.
Afficher le guide de saisie de texte.
• Dans certains modes, vous pouvez uniquement utiliser l’alphabet anglais,
quelle que soit la langue d’affichage choisie.
• Pour passer directement à Effectué, appuyez sur [ ].
• Vous pouvez saisir jusqu’à 64 caractères.
• L’écran peut différer selon la langue sélectionnée.
Réseau sans fil 93
Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact)
Placez l’antenne NFC du smartphone à proximité du symbole NFC de l’appareil photo pour lancer la fonctionnalité d’enregistrement automatique des photos sur le smartphone
ou pour utiliser le smartphone comme déclencheur à distance. Vous pouvez aussi transférer des fichiers vers un dispositif compatible NFC en mode Lecture.
• La fonction est prise en charge par les smartphones compatibles NFC- avec le système d’exploitation Android. Il est conseillé d’utiliser la dernière version disponible. Cette fonction
n’est pas disponible pour les dispositifs iOS.
• Vous devez installer l’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur le téléphone ou l’appareil afin de pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis
Samsung Apps ou Google Play Store. L’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareil photo Samsung fabriqués à partir de 2013.
• Pour lire le symbole NFC, placez l’appareil compatible NFCà proximité du symbole NFC de l’appareil photo pendant plus de 2 secondes.
• Il ne faut pas modifier l’information de l’étiquette de quelque manière que ce soit.
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Wi-Fi
Sélectionnez MobileLink ou Remote Viewfinder dans la fenêtre qui s’affiche après
avoir lu la balise NFC d’un dispositif compatible. (p. 95, 96)
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Prise de vue
Lancez le programme AutoShare ou Remote Viewfinder en lisant une balise sur un
appareil compatible NFC. (p. 94, 96)
Activez la fonction Wi-Fi de façon prédéfinie en lisant une balise sur un appareil
compatible NFC. (p. 110)
Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Lecture
(Partage instantané)
En mode Lecture, l’appareil photo transfère automatiquement le fichier en cours
vers le smartphone lorsque vous lisez le symbole d’un appareil compatible NFC.
• Pour transférer plusieurs fichiers, lisez une étiquette avec un appareil compatible
NFC sous forme de vignette, puis sélectionnez les fichiers.
Réseau sans fil 94
Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone
L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction AutoShare via un réseau local sans fil. Lorsque vous prenez une photo avec l'appareil photo, celle-ci
est automatiquement enregistrée sur le smartphone.
• La fonction AutoShare est prise en charge par les smartphones et tablettes avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. Il est possible que certains modèles ne prennent pas en
charge des fonctions particulières. Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez le micrologiciel de l’appareil à jour. Si la version du micrologiciel n’est pas la plus récente, il se peut que cette
fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement.
• Vous devez installer l’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur le téléphone ou l’appareil afin de pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung
Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. L’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareil photo Samsung fabriqués à partir de 2013.
• Si vous paramétrez cette fonction, le réglage est conservé même lorsque vous modifiez le mode Prise de vue.
• Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas prise en charge dans certains modes.
5 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez le smartphone à se connecter à votre
appareil photo.
• Si le smartphone a déjà été connecté à votre appareil photo, la procédure est
automatique.
• Une icône indiquant l'état de la connexion ( ) apparaît sur l'écran de
l'appareil photo.
6 Prenez une photo à l’aide de l’appareil photo.
• La photo est sauvegardée sur l'appareil photo, puis transférée sur le
smartphone.
• Si la fonction GPS est activée sur le smartphone, les informations GPS sont
alors enregistrées avec la photo prise.
1 Sur l’appareil photo, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ].
2 Sur l’appareil photo, appuyez sur AutoShare → Activé.
• Si le message contextuel qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît,
appuyez sur Suivant.
3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez l’application Samsung SMART CAMERA
App.
• Pour les appareils iOS, démarrez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de démarrer
l'application.
• Pour lancer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible
NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC
désignée (p. 16) sur l’appareil photo.
4 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et raccordez le
smartphone à l’appareil photo.
• Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois.
Réseau sans fil 95
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone
L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction MobileLink via un réseau local sans fil. Vous pouvez facilement envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à
votre smartphone.
• La fonction MobileLink est prise en charge par les smartphones et tablettes avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. Il est possible que certains modèles ne prennent pas en
charge des fonctions particulières. Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez le micrologiciel de l’appareil à jour. Si la version du micrologiciel n’est pas la plus récente, il se peut que cette
fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement.
• Vous devez installer l’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur le téléphone ou l’appareil afin de pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung
Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. L’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareil photo Samsung fabriqués à partir de 2013.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Si vous sélectionnez des fichiers dans le smartphone, vous pouvez afficher jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents et envoyer jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers à la fois. Si vous sélectionnez des fichiers dans
l'appareil photo, vous pouvez afficher des fichiers sélectionnés dans l'appareil photo et le nombre de fichiers maximum pouvant être envoyés dépend de l'espace de stockage du smartphone.
• Au cours de l’utilisation de cette fonction sur un appareil iOS, il se peut que ce dernier perde sa connexion Wi-Fi.
5 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et raccordez le
smartphone à l’appareil photo.
• Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois.
6 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez le smartphone à se connecter à votre
appareil photo.
• Si le smartphone a déjà été connecté à votre appareil photo, la procédure est automatique.
• Il est possible que l'application du smartphone se ferme si l'appareil photo
reste inactif pendant 30 secondes.
7 Sur le smartphone ou l’appareil photo, sélectionnez les fichiers à
transférer depuis l’appareil photo.
8 Sur le smartphone, appuyez sur le bouton copier ou, sur l'appareil
photo, sélectionnez Send.
• L’appareil photo transmet alors les fichiers.
L’écran de l’appareil photo s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur
l’appareil photo dans les 30 secondes.
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil de l’appareil photo, faites défiler les options
jusqu’à .
2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez .
• Si le message contextuel qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît,
appuyez sur Suivant.
3 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez une option d’envoi.
• Si vous choisissez l’option Sélectionner des fichiers du smartphone, vous
pouvez utiliser votre smartphone pour visualiser et partager les fichiers
stockés sur l’appareil photo.
• Si vous sélectionnez Sélectionner des fichiers de l’appareil photo, vous
pouvez sélectionner des fichiers à envoyer depuis l'appareil photo.
4 Sur le smartphone, démarrez l’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• Pour les appareils iOS, démarrez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de démarrer l'application.
• Pour lancer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible
NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC
désignée (p. 16) sur l’appareil photo.
Réseau sans fil 96
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil de l’appareil photo, faites défiler les options
jusqu’à .
2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez .
• Si le message contextuel qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît,
appuyez sur Suivant.
3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez l’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App.
• Pour les appareils iOS, démarrez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de démarrer
l'application.
• Pour lancer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible
NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC
désignée (p. 16) sur l’appareil photo.
4 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et raccordez le
smartphone à l’appareil photo.
• Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois.
5 Sur votre appareil photo, autorisez le smartphone à se raccorder à
votre appareil photo.
• Si le smartphone a déjà été raccordé à votre appareil photo, il se connecte
automatiquement.
6 Sur le smartphone, définissez les options de prise de vue suivantes.
• Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction, certaines touches ne sont plus
disponibles sur votre appareil photo.
• Vous pouvez utiliser l'appareil photo depuis l'écran tactile de votre
smartphone.
• Le mode Remote Viewfinder n’est compatible qu’avec les formats photo 10M
et 3M.
Utilisation d’un smartphone comme télécommande pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur
L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone via le réseau local sans fil. Utilisez le smartphone comme télécommande du déclencheur par le biais de la fonction Remote
Viewfinder. La photo ainsi prise s’affiche directement sur le smartphone.
• La fonction Remote Viewfinder est prise en charge par les smartphones et tablettes avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. Il est possible que certains modèles ne prennent pas
en charge des fonctions particulières. Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez le micrologiciel de l’appareil à jour. Si la version du micrologiciel n’est pas la plus récente, il se peut que cette
fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement.
• Vous devez installer l’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur le téléphone ou l’appareil afin de pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung
Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. L’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareil photo Samsung fabriqués à partir de 2013.
Utilisation d’un smartphone comme télécommande pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur
Réseau sans fil 97
7 Sur l’écran d’accueil du smartphone, maintenez le doigt sur pour
effectuer la mise au point.
• Le mode Mise au point multiple s’active automatiquement.
8 Relâchez le pour prendre la photo.
• Si la fonction GPS est activée sur le smartphone, les informations GPS sont
alors enregistrées avec la photo prise.
• Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonctionnalité, la distance idéale entre l’appareil
photo et le smartphone peut varier, selon l’environnement.
• Il est recommandé de conserver une distance de 7 m entre l’appareil photo et le
smartphone lorsque vous utilisez la fonctionnalité.
• La prise de photo prend un certain temps après avoir relâché la touche sur
le smartphone.
• La fonction Remote Viewfinder se désactive si :
- l’appareil photo ou le smartphone est éteint ;
- l’un des appareils connectés perd sa connexion au réseau local sans fil ;
- le signal de la connexion Wi-Fi est mauvais ou instable ;
- vous n’effectuez aucune opération pendant environ 3 minutes lorsque
l’appareil est branché.
• L’écran de l’appareil photo s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur
l’appareil photo dans les 30 secondes.
Réseau sans fil 98
Modification des paramètres de courriel
Depuis le menu Courriel, il vous est possible de modifier les paramètres pour le
stockage de vos coordonnées. Vous avez également la possibilité de définir ou
de changer le mot de passe de courriel. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte,
consultez « Saisie du texte ». (p. 92)
Enregistrement de vos coordonnées
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Appuyez sur [ ].
4 Appuyez sur Paramètres expéditeur.
5 Sélectionnez le champ Nom, indiquez votre nom, puis sélectionnez
Effectué.
Paramètres expéditeur
Nom
Courriel
Enregistrer Réinitialiser
Retour
6 Sélectionnez le champ Courriel, indiquez votre adresse de courriel,
puis appuyez sur Effectué.
7 Appuyez sur Enregistrer pour enregistrer les modifications.
• Pour supprimer vos coordonnées, appuyez sur Réinitialiser.
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel
Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres du menu Courriel et envoyer par courriel des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur l’appareil photo.
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel
Réseau sans fil 99
Création d’un mot de passe de courriel
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Appuyez sur [ ].
4 Sélectionnez Configurer mot de passe → Activé.
• Pour désactiver le mot de passe, appuyez sur Arrêt.
5 Lorsque le message contextuel s’affiche, sélectionnez OK.
6 Saisissez un mot de passe de 4 chiffres.
7 Confirmez-le en le saisissant à nouveau.
8 Lorsque le message contextuel s’affiche, sélectionnez OK.
Si vous avez perdu votre mot de passe, vous pouvez le réinitialiser en
sélectionnant Reset depuis le menu de configuration du mot de passe. Lorsque
vous réinitialisez ces informations, toutes données préalablement sauvegardées,
ainsi que l'adresse de courrier électronique et la liste de courriels récemment
envoyés seront supprimées.
Modification du mot de passe de courriel
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Appuyez sur [ ].
4 Appuyez sur Changer mot de passe.
5 Saisissez le mot de passe de 4 chiffres actuel.
6 Saisissez un nouveau mot de passe de 4 chiffres.
7 Confirmez-le en le saisissant à nouveau.
8 Lorsque le message contextuel s’affiche, sélectionnez OK.
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel
Réseau sans fil 100
Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel
Il vous est possible d’envoyer par courriel des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur
l’appareil photo. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, consultez « Saisie du texte ».
(p. 92)
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Connectez-vous à un réseau local sans fil. (p. 89)
4 Sélectionnez le champ Expéditeur, indiquez votre adresse de
courriel, puis sélectionnez Effectué.
• Si vous avez préalablement enregistré vos coordonnées, celles-ci sont insérées
automatiquement. (p. 98)
• Pour utiliser une adresse figurant dans la liste des précédents destinataires,
sélectionnez → une adresse.
5 Sélectionnez le champ Destinataire, saisissez une adresse de
courriel, puis sélectionnez Effectué.
• Pour utiliser une adresse figurant dans la listes des précédents destinataires,
sélectionnez → une adresse.
• Sélectionnez pour ajouter des destinataires. Vous pouvez en saisir
jusqu’à 30.
• Sélectionnez pour supprimer une adresse de la liste.
6 Appuyez sur Suivant.
7 Trouvez les fichiers à envoyer, puis appuyez sur [ ].
• Vous pouvez sélectionner jusqu’à 20 fichiers. La taille totale ne doit pas
dépasser 7 Mo.
8 Appuyez sur Next.
9 Sélectionnez le champ Commentaire, saisissez vos commentaires,
puis appuyez sur Effectué.
10 Appuyez sur Envoyer.
• L’appareil photo envoie le courriel.
• Si un courriel n’est pas envoyé, un message vous demande alors de le renvoyer.
• Même si le transfert de la photo semble s’être déroulé correctement, celle-ci
peut-être rejetée ou identifiée comme courrier indésirable en cas d’erreur sur le
compte e-mail du destinataire.
• Il se peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure d’envoyer de courriel si aucune connexion
réseau n’est disponible ou si les paramètres de votre compte de courriel sont incorrects.
• Vous ne pouvez pas envoyer de courriel si la taille combinée du fichier dépasse
7 Mo. La résolution maximale des photos que vous pouvez envoyer est de 2M.
La résolution maximale des vidéos que vous pouvez envoyer est de .
Si la photo sélectionnée a une résolution supérieure à 2M, la photo est alors
automatiquement redimensionnée à une résolution inférieure.
• Si vous ne pouvez pas envoyer de courriel en raison d’un pare-feu ou de
paramètres d’authentification utilisateur, contactez votre administrateur réseau
ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez pas
utiliser cette fonction.
• Vous pouvez également envoyer un courriel en mode Lecture. Il vous suffit
d'appuyer sur [ ], puis de sélectionner Partager (Wi-Fi) → Courriel.
Réseau sans fil 101
Accès à un service de partage
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Sélectionnez un service de partage.
• Si la fenêtre en incrustation qui vous invite à créer un compte apparaît,
appuyez sur OK.
4 Connectez-vous à un réseau local sans fil. (p. 89)
5 Saisissez votre identifiant et mot de passe pour vous connecter.
• Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, consultez « Saisie du texte ». (p. 92)
• Pour sélectionner un identifiant dans la liste, sélectionnez → un
identifiant.
• Si vous avez déjà visité le services de partage, il se peut que vous soyez en
mesure de vous connecter automatiquement.
Vous devez disposer d’un compte sur le service de partage de fichiers pour
pouvoir exploiter cette fonction.
Publication de photos ou de vidéos
1 Accédez au services de partage par le biais de l’appareil photo.
2 Faites défiler les fichiers jusqu'à ceux que vous souhaitez envoyer,
puis appuyez sur [ ].
• Vous pouvez sélectionner jusqu’à 20 fichiers. (Selon le service de partage, la
taille ou le nombre total de fichiers peut différer.)
3 Sélectionnez Upload.
• L’appareil photo envoie des photos ou des vidéos.
• Sur certains services de partage, vous pouvez saisir vos commentaires en
sélectionnant le champ Commentaire. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de
texte, consultez « Saisie de texte ». (p. 92)
Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou de vidéos
Publiez vos photos ou vos vidéos à travers des services de partage de fichiers. Les services de partage disponibles s’affichent sur l’appareil photo. Pour publier des fichiers sur
certains services de partage, vous devez vous y inscrire avant de connecter l’appareil photo.
Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou de vidéos
Réseau sans fil 102
• Vous pouvez configurer un dossier de publication pour Facebook en appuyant
sur [ ], puis en sélectionnant Charger dossier (Facebook) sur la page du
service de partage.
• Vous ne pouvez pas télécharger de fichiers si la taille du fichier dépasse la limite
autorisée. La résolution maximale des photos que vous pouvez télécharger est
de 2M. La résolution maximale des vidéos que vous pouvez télécharger est de
. Si la photo sélectionnée a une résolution supérieure à 2M, la photo est alors
automatiquement redimensionnée à une résolution inférieure. (Selon le service
de partage, la résolution maximale des photos peut varier.)
• Le mode de publication des photos ou des vidéos peut varier en fonction du
service de partage sélectionné.
• Si vous ne parvenez pas à accéder à un service de partage en raison d’un
pare-feu ou de paramètres d’authentification utilisateur, contactez votre
administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur de service réseau.
• Il se peut que la date de prise de vue apparaisse dans le titre des photos ou des
vidéos publiées.
• Le débit de votre connexion Internet peut avoir une incidence sur le temps de
publication des photos ou d’ouverture des pages Web.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez pas
utiliser cette fonction.
• Vous pouvez également envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à des services de
partage de fichiers. Il vous suffit d'appuyer sur [ ], puis de sélectionner
Partager (Wi-Fi) → le service de partage souhaité.
• Sur certains services de partage, il est impossible de publier des vidéos.
Réseau sans fil 103
Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de fichiers
Vous pouvez également accéder à un périphérique Samsung Link connecté au même appareil photo.
6 Sur l’appareil Samsung Link, parcourez la liste des photos ou vidéos
partagées.
• Pour en savoir plus sur la manière de rechercher l’appareil photo et de
parcourir les photos ou les vidéos sur l’appareil Samsung Link, consultez le
mode d’emploi de l’appareil.
• Selon le type d’appareil Samsung Link ou l’état du réseau, il est possible que les
vidéos ne soient pas lues correctement. Si tel est le cas, ré-enregistrez la vidéo
au format ou à une qualité inférieure, et relancez la lecture. Si la lecture
des vidéos ne fonctionne pas correctement sur votre appareil via la connexion
sans fil, connectez l’appareil photo à l’appareil à l’aide d’un câble audio / vidéo.
PA
▲ Un appareil photo est raccordé à un téléviseur compatible Samsung Link via
un réseau sans fil.
Affichage de photos ou de vidéos sur des appareils
compatibles Samsung Link
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez → Appareils à proximité.
• Si le message du guide apparaît, appuyez sur [ ].
• L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local
sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté.
• Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il
recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles. (p. 89)
• Vous pouvez autoriser la connexion des seuls appareils sélectionnés ou tous
les appareils en appuyant sur [ ], puis en sélectionnant Contrôle
d'accès DLNA à l’écran.
• Une liste des fichiers partagés est créée. Patientez jusqu’à ce que les autres
appareils localisent votre appareil photo.
3 Connectez l’appareil Samsung Link à un réseau, puis activez la
fonction Samsung Link.
• Reportez-vous au mode d’emploi de votre appareil pour en savoir plus.
4 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez l’appareil Samsung Link à se
connecter à votre appareil photo.
5 Sur l'appareil Samsung Link, sélectionnez un appareil photo à
raccorder.
Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de fichiers
Réseau sans fil 104
• Vous pouvez partager jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents.
• Sur un appareil Samsung Link, vous pouvez uniquement afficher les photos ou
vidéos prises avec votre appareil photo.
• Le champ de détection de la connexion sans fil entre votre appareil photo et
un appareil Samsung Link peut varier en fonction des spécifications du point
d’accès.
• Si l’appareil photo est connecté à 2 appareils Samsung Link, la lecture risque
d’être ralentie.
• Les photos ou les vidéos sont partagées dans leurs dimensions d’origine.
• Cette fonction est uniquement disponible sur les appareils compatibles
Samsung Link.
• Les photos ou vidéos partagées ne sont pas enregistrées sur l’appareil Samsung
Link, mais peuvent être stockées dans l’appareil photo en respectant les
caractéristiques de l’appareil.
• Le transfert de photos ou de vidéos sur l’appareil Samsung Link peut prendre
un certain temps selon la connexion réseau, le nombre de fichiers à partager ou
la taille des fichiers.
• Si vous éteignez l’appareil photo de façon inhabituelle pendant le visionnage
de photos ou de vidéos sur un appareil Samsung Link (par exemple, en retirant
la batterie), l’appareil considère que l’appareil photo est toujours connecté.
• Il se peut que l’ordre des photos ou des vidéos sur l’appareil photo diffère de
celui sur l’appareil Samsung Link.
• En fonction du nombre de photos ou de vidéos à partager, le chargement de cellesci
et l’exécution du processus de configuration initial peuvent prendre un certain
temps.
• Lorsque vous visionnez des photos ou des vidéos sur l’appareil Samsung
Link, l’utilisation continue de la télécommande ou l’exécution d’opérations
supplémentaires sur l’appareil peut empêcher le bon fonctionnement de cette
fonction.
• Si vous réorganisez ou triez des fichiers sur l’appareil photo tout en les
visionnant sur un appareil Samsung Link, vous devez procéder à nouveau
au processus initial de configuration pour actualiser la liste des fichiers sur
l’appareil.
• Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne
pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction.
• Il est recommandé d’utiliser un câble réseau pour connecter votre appareil
Samsung Link au point d’accès. Cela permet de réduire les désagréments que
vous pourriez rencontrer lors de la diffusion en continu de contenus.
• Pour afficher des fichiers sur un appareil Samsung Link utilisant la fonction
Appareils à proximité, activez le mode Multidiffusion sur votre point d’accès.
Menu Paramètres ……………………………………………… 106
Accès au menu des paramètres …………………………… 106
Son …………………………………………………………… 107
Affichage …………………………………………………… 107
Connectivité ………………………………………………… 108
Général ……………………………………………………… 109
Paramètres
Cette section décrit les différentes options qui permettent de configurer les
paramètres de l’appareil photo.
Paramètres 106
Menu Paramètres
Découvrez comment configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo.
4 Sélectionnez un élément.
Retour Sélectionner
Moyen
Activé
Son 1
Désactivé
Activé
Sons
Volume
Bip sonore
Son de l’obturateur
Son de démarrage
Son de la mise au point
5 Sélectionnez une option.
Retour Définir
Volume
Désactivé
Bas
Moyen
Elevé
6 Appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir à l’écran précédent.
Accès au menu des paramètres
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Sélectionnez un menu.
Sons
Affichage
Connectivité
Général
Paramètres
Icône Description
Sons : régler le volume et les sons émis par l’appareil photo.
(p. 107)
Affichage : personnaliser les paramètres d’affichage. (p. 107)
Connectivité : configurer les options de connexion. (p. 108)
Général : modifier les réglages du système de l’appareil photo,
tels que le format de la mémoire et le nom des fichiers par défaut.
(p. 109)
Menu Paramètres
Paramètres 107
Son
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Volume Réglez le volume de tous les sons.
(Désactivé, Bas, Moyen*, Elevé)
Bip sonore
Définir le son émis par l’appareil photo lorsque vous appuyez
sur l’une des touches ou que vous passez d’un mode à l’autre.
(Désactivé, Activé*)
Son de
l’obturateur
Définir le son émis par l’appareil photo lorsque vous appuyez
sur le déclencheur. (Désactivé, Son 1*, Son 2, Son 3)
Son de
démarrage
Définir le son émis par l’appareil photo lorsque vous allumez
l’appareil photo. (Désactivé*, Volant, Show laser, Cloud)
Son de la mise
au point
Définir le son émis par l’appareil photo lorsque vous appuyez à
mi-course sur le déclencheur. (Désactivé, Activé*)
Affichage
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Image de
démarrage
Sélectionner l’image qui s’affiche après la mise en marche de
l’appareil photo.
• Désactivée* : aucune image n’est affichée.
• Logo : afficher une image enregistrée par défaut dans la
mémoire interne.
• Image personnalisée : Sélectionnez Image personnalisée
parmi les photos prises et stockées en mémoire.
Si vous sélectionnez une nouvelle photo comme image de
démarrage ou que vous réinitialisez l’appareil photo, l’image
actuelle sera supprimée.
Fonds d'écran Choisissez l’image souhaitée pour le fond d’écran de l’écran
d’accueil. (Galerie de fonds d'écran, Album)
Aide à la prise
de vue
Sélectionnez un guide pour vous aider à composer une scène
(Désactivée*, 3 X 3, 2 X 2, Croix, Diagonale)
Affichage
date/heure
Indiquez si vous voulez afficher la date et l’heure sur l’écran de
l’appareil photo. (Désactivé*, Activé)
Affichage
aide
Affichez une brève description d’une option ou d’un menu.
(Désactivé, Activé*)
Menu Paramètres
Paramètres 108
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Luminosité
écran
Régler la luminosité de l’écran. (Automatique*, Faible, Normale,
Forte)
En mode Lecture, l’option Normale est automatiquement
sélectionnée, même si vous choisissez l’option Automatique.
Vue rapide
Définissez si la photo prise doit être vérifiée avant de revenir en
mode Prise de vue. (Désactivé, Activé*)
Cette fonctionnalité est inopérante dans certains modes.
Désactivation
écran auto
L’appareil photo passe automatiquement en mode Economie
d’énergie si vous n’effectuez aucune manipulation dans un délai
de 30 secondes. (Désactivée*, Activée)
En mode Economie d’énergie, appuyez sur n’importe quelle
touche autre que [ ] pour utiliser à nouveau l’appareil photo.
Connectivité
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Vidéo
Sélectionner la sortie du signal vidéo correspondant à votre lieu
géographique.
• NTSC : États-Unis, Canada, Japon, Corée, Taïwan, Mexique, etc.
• PAL (prend en charge uniquement BDGHI) : Australie, Autriche,
Belgique, Chine, Danemark, Royaume-Uni, Finlande, France,
Allemagne, Italie, Koweït, Malaisie, Pays-Bas, Nouvelle-Zélande,
Norvège, Singapour, Espagne, Suède, Suisse, Thaïlande, etc.
i-Launcher
Configurer i-Launcher pour que le logiciel se lance
automatiquement lors de la connexion de l’appareil photo à
l’ordinateur. (Désactivé, Activé*)
Menu Paramètres
Paramètres 109
Général
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Informations
réseau
Afficher l’adresse MAC et le numéro de certification réseau
de l’appareil photo.
Language Choisir la langue d’affichage.
Fuseau horaire
Indiquer le fuseau horaire correspondant à votre lieu
géographique. Lorsque vous voyagez, appuyez sur Extérieur,
puis choisissez le fuseau horaire. (Domicile*, Extérieur)
Configuration
date/heure Régler la date et l’heure.
Type date
Sélectionnez un format de date.
(AAAA/MM/JJ, MM/JJ/AAAA, JJ/MM/AAAA)
Le type de date par défaut peut différer en fonction de la
langue sélectionnée.
Type d'heure
Sélectionnez le format de l’heure. (12 h, 24 h)
Le type d’heure par défaut peut différer en fonction de la
langue sélectionnée.
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Numérotation des
fichiers
Définir les règles de création des noms de fichier.
• Réinitialiser : les fichiers sont numérotés à partir de 0001
lorsque vous insérez une nouvelle carte mémoire, formatez
une carte mémoire ou supprimez tous les fichiers.
• Série* : lorsque vous insérez une nouvelle carte mémoire,
que vous formatez la carte mémoire ou supprimez tous les
fichiers, les fichiers sont numérotés en continuant à partir
du dernier numéro de fichier.
• Par défaut, le nom du premier dossier est 100PHOTO et le
nom du premier fichier correspond à SAM_0001.
• Le numéro de fichier incrémente d'une unité, de
SAM_0001 à SAM_9999, chaque fois que vous prenez
une photo ou que vous enregistrez une vidéo.
• Le numéro de dossier s’incrémente chaque fois d’une
unité, de 100PHOTO à 999PHOTO.
• Un même dossier peut contenir jusqu’à 9 999 fichiers.
• L’appareil photo nomme les fichiers conformément
à la norme DCF (Design rule for Camera File). Si vous
modifiez le nom d’un fichier, il risque de ne plus pouvoir
être lu par l’appareil photo.
Menu Paramètres
Paramètres 110
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Impression
Définir si l’appareil photo ajoute la date et l’heure sur les
photos. (Désactivée*, Date, Date et heure)
• La date et l’heure s’affichent en jaune dans l’angle
inférieur droit de la photo.
• Il est possible que certains modèles d’imprimante
n’impriment pas correctement la date et l’heure.
• La photo n’affiche pas la date et l’heure si:
- vous sélectionnez Panorama Live en mode Magique.
Mise hors tension
auto
Paramétrez l’appareil photo pour qu’il s’éteigne
automatiquement lorsque vous n’effectuez aucune
opération après une période d’inactivité définie.
(Désactivée, 1 min, 3 min*, 5 min, 10 min)
• Ces paramètres ne sont pas modifiés si vous changez de
batterie.
• L’appareil photo ne s’éteint pas automatiquement
lorsqu’il est connecté à un ordinateur ou à un réseau sans
fil et si vous visionnez un diaporama ou des vidéos.
DIRECT LINK
(bouton Wi-Fi)
Lancer une fonction Wi-Fi prédéfinie en appuyant sur [ ].
(AutoShare, MobileLink*, Remote Viewfinder, Courriel,
Réseaux sociaux et Cloud, Samsung Link)
Vue Live NFC
Régler une fonction Wi-Fi de sorte qu’elle se lance à la lecture
d’une balise reçue d’un dispositif compatible NFC en mode
Prise de vue. (AutoShare, Remote Viewfinder*)
* Paramètre par défaut
Elément Description
Voyant de mise au
point
Paramétrer l’appareil photo pour qu’il s’allume
automatiquement dans les endroits sombres pour faciliter la
mise au point. (Désactivé, Activé*)
Formater
Formater la mémoire. Le formatage supprime tous les
fichiers, y compris les fichiers protégés. (Oui, Non)
Il est possible que des erreurs se produisent si vous utilisez
une carte mémoire qui a été formatée à l’aide d’un appareil
photo d’une autre marque, d’un lecteur de cartes mémoire
ou d’un ordinateur. Veuillez formater les cartes mémoire
dans l’appareil photo avant de les utiliser pour effectuer
des prises de vue.
Réinitialiser
Réinitialisez les menus et les options de prise de vue. Les
réglages de la date et de l’heure, de la langue et de la sortie
vidéo ne sont pas remis à zéro. (Oui, Non)
Licence Open
Source Afficher les informations sur la licence Open Source.
Messages d’erreur ……………………………………………… 112
Entretien de l’appareil photo …………………………………… 113
Nettoyage de l’appareil photo ……………………………… 113
Usage et rangement de l’appareil photo …………………… 114
Concernant les cartes mémoire …………………………… 115
Concernant la batterie ……………………………………… 118
Mise à niveau du micrologiciel ……………………………… 122
Avant de contacter le service après-vente …………………… 123
Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo ………………………… 126
Glossaire ………………………………………………………… 130
Index ……………………………………………………………… 135
Annexes
Cette section reprend les messages d’erreur, les caractéristiques de
l’appareil et des conseils pour l’entretien.
Annexes 112
Messages d’erreur
Lorsque l’un des messages d’erreur suivants apparaît, reportez-vous aux solutions proposées pour tenter de résoudre le problème.
Message d’erreur Solutions possibles
Fichier système
incompatible.
L’appareil photo ne prend pas en charge la structure de
fichiers FAT de la carte mémoire insérée. Formatez cette
carte mémoire dans l’appareil photo.
Échec initialisation.
L’appareil photo n’est pas parvenu à localiser un appareil
compatible Samsung Link. Allumer les appareils
compatibles Samsung Link présents sur le réseau.
Batterie faible Insérez une batterie chargée ou rechargez celle déjà en
place.
Mémoire pleine Supprimez les fichiers inutiles ou insérez une nouvelle
carte mémoire.
Aucun fichier image Prenez des photos ou insérez une carte mémoire qui en
contient.
Mot de passe incorrect
Le mot de passe qui permet de transférer des fichiers
vers un autre appareil photo est incorrect. Saisissez le
bon mot de passe.
Échec transfert.
• L'appareil photo n'est pas parvenu à envoyer des
e-mails ou des fichiers aux autres périphériques.
Essayez à nouveau de l’envoyer.
• Vérifiez la connexion au réseau et réessayez.
Message d’erreur Solutions possibles
Lecture du contenu du
fichier impossible
Supprimez le fichier endommagé ou contactez le service
après-vente.
Erreur de carte
• Eteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le.
• Retirez la carte mémoire, puis insérez-la de nouveau.
• Formatez la carte mémoire.
Carte incompatible
La carte mémoire insérée ne fonctionne pas avec
l’appareil photo. Insérez une carte mémoire microSD,
microSDHC ou microSDXC.
Echec connexion
• L’appareil photo ne peut pas se connecter au réseau
à l’aide du point d’accès sélectionné. Sélectionnez un
autre point d’accès et réessayez.
• L’appareil photo n’est pas parvenu à se connecter aux
autres appareils. Essayez à nouveau de vous connecter.
DCF Full Error
Les noms de fichier ne répondent pas à la norme DCF.
Transférez les fichiers de la carte mémoire vers un
ordinateur et formatez la carte. Accédez ensuite au menu
Paramètres et sélectionnez Numérotation des fichiers
→ Réinitialiser. (p. 109)
Périphérique
déconnecté.
La connexion au réseau a été interrompue pendant le
transfert des photos vers des périphériques compatibles.
Sélectionnez de nouveau un périphérique compatible.
Annexes 113
Entretien de l’appareil photo
Boîtier de l’appareil photo
Essuyez-le délicatement avec un chiffon doux et sec.
• N’utilisez jamais de benzène, de diluants ou d’alcool pour nettoyer l’appareil.
Ces produits peuvent l’endommager ou entraîner un dysfonctionnement.
• N’appuyez pas et n’utilisez pas de soufflette sur le cache de l’objectif. Cela peut
détériorer l’appareil photo.
Nettoyage de l’appareil photo
Objectif et écran de l’appareil photo
Utilisez une soufflette pour éliminer la poussière et passez délicatement un chiffon
doux sur l’objectif. S’il reste de la poussière, humidifiez une lingette avec du
nettoyant liquide pour objectif et essuyez délicatement.
Entretien de l’appareil photo
Annexes 114
Usage et rangement de l’appareil photo
Usage ou rangement inapproprié de l’appareil photo
• Evitez d’exposer l’appareil à des températures extrêmes.
• Evitez d’utiliser l’appareil photo dans des endroits très humides ou dans lesquels
le taux d’humidité varie beaucoup.
• Evitez d’exposer l’appareil photo à la lumière directe du soleil et de le ranger dans
des endroits chauds, mal ventilés, comme à l’intérieur d’une voiture en été.
• Protégez l’appareil photo et son écran contre les chocs et les vibrations excessives,
qui risqueraient de les endommager.
• Evitez d’utiliser et de ranger votre appareil dans un endroit poussiéreux, mal
entretenu, humide ou peu ventilé, afin de ne pas endommager ses composants
internes.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de combustibles ou de produits
chimiques inflammables. Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais de liquides
inflammables, de gaz ou de matériaux explosifs dans le même compartiment que
l’appareil ou ses accessoires.
• Ne rangez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de boules de naphtaline.
Utilisation sur la plage ou en bord de mer
• Protégez l’appareil photo du sable et de la terre lorsque vous l’utilisez à la plage
ou dans d’autres endroits similaires.
• L’appareil photo n’est pas étanche. Ne manipulez pas la batterie, l’adaptateur ou
la carte mémoire avec les mains humides. Cela pourrait endommager l’appareil
photo.
Rangement pour une durée prolongée
• Lorsque vous rangez l’appareil photo pour une durée prolongée, placez-le dans
un récipient clos avec un matériau absorbant comme du gel de silice.
• Lorsqu’elle n’est pas utilisée pendant une période prolongée, une batterie pleine
se décharge progressivement et doit alors être rechargée avant l’utilisation
suivante.
• La date et l’heure peuvent être initialisées lorsque l’appareil photo est allumé
après avoir été séparé de la batterie pendant une longue période.
Utilisation de l’appareil photo avec précaution dans les environnements
humides
Lorsque vous faites passer l’appareil photo d’un environnement froid à un
environnement chaud, de la condensation peut se former sur l’objectif et les
composants internes de l’appareil photo. Si tel est le cas, éteignez l’appareil photo et
attendez au moins 1 heure. Si de la condensation s’est formée sur la carte mémoire,
retirez-la et attendez que l’humidité se soit évaporée avant de la réinsérer.
Autres avertissements
• Ne faites pas tournoyer l’appareil photo par la dragonne. Vous risqueriez de
vous blesser ou d’entrainer des blessures à d’autres personnes, ou même
d’endommager l’appareil photo.
• Evitez de peindre l’appareil photo, la peinture risquant de bloquer ses pièces
mobiles et de perturber son fonctionnement.
• Eteignez l’appareil photo lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas.
Entretien de l’appareil photo
Annexes 115
• L’appareil photo contient des pièces fragiles. Evitez de faire subir des chocs à
l’appareil photo.
• Protégez l’écran de toute pression extérieure en le conservant dans l’étui lorsque
vous ne l’utilisez pas. Protégez l’appareil photo des rayures en le tenant à l’écart
du sable, des objets pointus ou des pièces de monnaie.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est fissuré ou brisé. Vous risquez de
vous blesser les mains ou le visage avec les morceaux de verre ou de plastique.
Rapportez votre appareil photo à un centre de service après-vente Samsung pour
le faire réparer.
• Ne posez jamais l’appareil photo, les batteries, le chargeur ou des accessoires à
l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’un dispositif chauffant, tel qu’un four à micro-ondes,
une cuisinière ou un radiateur. La chaleur peut déformer ou faire surchauffer ces
appareils et provoquer une incendie ou une explosion.
• Evitez toute exposition de l’objectif à la lumière directe du soleil - ceci risquerait
d’entraîner une décoloration ou un mauvais fonctionnement du capteur d’image.
• Protégez l’objectif des traces de doigt et des éraflures. Nettoyez l’objectif en
utilisant un chiffon doux et propre, exempt de poussière.
• L’appareil photo peut s’éteindre en cas de pression extérieure. Cela a pour but de
protéger la carte mémoire. Allumez l’appareil photo pour l’utiliser à nouveau.
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo chauffe en cours d’utilisation. Ce phénomène
est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ou les performances de l’appareil.
• Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo à de faibles températures, il peut mettre
du temps à s’éteindre, une décoloration peut se produire temporairement
ou des images persistantes peuvent apparaître. Il ne s’agit en aucun cas de
dysfonctionnements. Ces perturbations sont momentanées et se corrigent d’ellesmêmes
une fois que l’appareil retrouve à nouveau une température normale.
• La peinture ou le métal sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut provoquer
des allergies, des démangeaisons, de l’eczéma ou des boursouflures pour
les personnes à peau sensible. Si vous présentez de tels symptômes, arrêtez
immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil photo et consultez un médecin.
• N’introduisez pas de corps étrangers dans les compartiments, les logements ou
les ouvertures de l’appareil photo. Il est possible que les dommages provoqués
par une mauvaise utilisation ne soient pas couverts par la garantie.
• Ne confiez pas la réparation de l’appareil photo à un technicien non agréé et
ne tentez pas de le réparer vous-même. Votre garantie ne couvre pas les dégâts
résultant d’une réparation par un technicien non agréé.
Concernant les cartes mémoire
Cartes mémoires compatibles
Votre appareil photo est compatible avec les cartes mémoire suivantes : microSD
(Secure Digital), microSDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity) ou microSDXC (Secure
Digital eXtended Capacity).
Carte mémoire
Adaptateur de carte mémoire
Pour pouvoir lire des données sur un ordinateur ou par le biais d’un lecteur de
cartes, insérez la carte dans l’adaptateur approprié.
Entretien de l’appareil photo
Annexes 116
Capacité de la carte mémoire
La capacité de la mémoire peut varier en fonction de la scène et des conditions de
prise de vue. Ces capacités sont données pour une carte microSD de 2 Go :
Photo
Taille Maximale Elevée Normale
231 485 669
262 525 719
303 606 808
359 719 969
669 1 139 1 486
969 1 609 1 927
1 381 2 262 2 738
2 628 3 185 3 806
Vidéo
Taille 30 ips
1280 X 720
Environ 15' 35"
640 X 480
Environ 30' 44"
Pour partager
Environ 90' 03"
• Les chiffres mentionnés ci-dessus sont mesurés sans la fonction de zoom.
• Le temps d’enregistrement disponible peut varier si le zoom est utilisé.
• Plusieurs vidéos ont été enregistrées successivement afin de déterminer la durée totale
d’enregistrement.
Entretien de l’appareil photo
Annexes 117
Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire
• Evitez d’exposer les cartes mémoire à des températures extrêmes (inférieures à
0 °C ou supérieures à 40 °C). Cela risque de provoquer des dysfonctionnements
des cartes mémoire.
• Introduisez une carte mémoire dans le bon sens. Dans le cas contraire, vous
risquez d’endommager l’appareil photo ainsi que la carte mémoire.
• N’utilisez pas de carte mémoire qui a été formatée avec un autre appareil photo
ou avec un ordinateur. Reformatez la carte mémoire sur l’appareil photo.
• Eteignez l’appareil photo avant d’introduire ou de retirer la carte mémoire.
• Vous ne devez pas retirer la carte mémoire ou éteindre l’appareil photo lorsque le
voyant clignote. Vous risquez d’endommager vos données.
• Au terme de la durée de vie de la batterie, vous ne pouvez plus stocker de photos
sur la carte. Remplacez-la.
• Evitez de plier la carte mémoire, de la laisser tomber ou de la soumettre à des
chocs ou des pressions importantes.
• Evitez d’utiliser ou de ranger les cartes mémoire à proximité de champs
magnétiques.
• Evitez d’utiliser ou de ranger des cartes mémoire dans des environnements
chauds, très humides ou en contact avec des substances corrosives.
• Evitez tout contact des cartes mémoire avec des liquides, de la poussière ou des
corps étrangers. Si la carte mémoire est sale, nettoyez-la avec un chiffon doux
avant de l’introduire dans l’appareil photo.
• Evitez que les cartes mémoire ou l’emplacement pour carte mémoire n’entrent
en contact avec des liquides, des poussières ou tout corps étranger. Cela risque
d’endommager l’appareil photo ou les cartes mémoire.
• Lorsque vous transportez une carte mémoire, rangez-la dans un étui afin de la
protéger de l’électricité statique.
• Transférez vos données importantes sur d’autres supports, tel qu’un disque dur
ou un CD/DVD.
• Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo de manière prolongée, la carte mémoire
peut chauffer. Ceci est normal et n’engendre pas de dysfonctionnement.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données.
Entretien de l’appareil photo
Annexes 118
Concernant la batterie
Utilisez uniquement des batteries homologuées par Samsung.
Caractéristiques de la batterie
Caractéristiques Description
Modèle BP70A
Type Batterie au lithium-ion
Capacité des cellules 700 mAh
Tension 3,7 V
Temps de charge*
(lorsque l’appareil photo est éteint) Environ 150 min.
* Le temps de chargement de la batterie lors de la connexion à un ordinateur peut être plus
long.
Autonomie de la batterie
Durée moyenne /
Nombre de photos
Conditions de test
(lorsque la batterie est entièrement chargée)
Photos Environ 100 min. /
Environ 200 photos
La durée de vie de la batterie a été mesurée dans
les conditions suivantes : mode Programme,
dans l’obscurité, avec une résolution de , en
Elevée qualité, avec la fonctionOIS activée.
1. Option du flash sur Contre jour, une seule
photo, puis zoom avant ou arrière.
2. Option du flash sur Désactivée, une seule
photo, puis zoom avant ou arrière.
3. Exécutez les tâches 1 et 2, en attendant
30 secondes entre chaque étape. Répétez le
processus pendant 5 minutes, puis éteignez
l’appareil photo pendant 1 minute.
4. Répétition des étapes 1 à 3.
Vidéos Environ 70 min. Enregistrement de vidéos à une résolution de
et à une fréquence de 30 ips.
• Les chiffres ci-dessus s’appuient sur les normes de test de la CIPA. Votre propre usage peut
influer sur ces valeurs de façon significative.
• Plusieurs vidéos ont été enregistrées successivement afin de déterminer la durée totale
d’enregistrement.
• Lorsque vous utilisez les fonctions réseau, la batterie se décharge plus rapidement.
Entretien de l’appareil photo
Annexes 119
Message de batterie faible
Lorsque la batterie s’est complètement déchargée, l’icône de batterie devient rouge et
le message « Batterie faible » s’affiche.
Remarques à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie
• Evitez d’exposer la batterie à des températures extrêmes (inférieures à 0 °C ou
supérieures à 40 °C). Ceci est à même de réduire la capacité de charge de celle-ci.
• Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo de manière prolongée, la zone située autour
de la trappe batterie peut chauffer. 4Ceci n’affecte pas l’utilisation normale de
l’appareil photo.
• Ne tirez pas sur le cordon d’alimentation pour débrancher le chargeur de la prise
murale, au risque de provoquer un incendie ou de recevoir une décharge électrique.
• A des températures inférieures à 0 °C, la capacité et la durée de vie de la batterie
peuvent diminuer.
• La capacité de la batterie peut diminuer à de faibles températures, mais redevient
normale à des températures plus modérées.
• Si vous rangez l’appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une durée prolongée, retirez
d’abord la batterie. Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se détériorer avec le temps,
risquant d’endommager gravement l’appareil photo. Le stockage de l’appareil photo
pendant une période prolongée, alors que la batterie est installée, peut entraîner le
déchargement de la batterie. Il est possible que vous ne puissiez pas recharger une
batterie complètement déchargée.
• Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil photo pendant une période prolongée
(3 mois ou plus), vérifiez la batterie et rechargez-la régulièrement. Si vous laissez
continuellement la batterie se décharger, sa capacité et sa durée de vie risquent
de décroître, ce qui peut entraîner un dysfonctionnement, un incendie ou une
explosion.
Précautions d’utilisation de la batterie
Protégez les batteries, les chargeurs et les cartes mémoire des chocs
Évitez tout contact de la batterie avec des objets métalliques, car cela risque de
provoquer un court-circuit entre les bornes + et - de la batterie et de l’endommager
de manière temporaire ou permanente. Vous risquez également de provoquer un
incendie ou une décharge électrique.
Remarques concernant le chargement de la batterie
• Si le voyant d’état est éteint, assurez-vous que la batterie est installée
correctement.
• Si l’appareil photo est toujours en chargement, la batterie peut ne pas être
complètement chargée. Eteignez l’appareil photo avant de charger la batterie.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo lorsqu’il est en charge. Vous risquez de provoquer
un incendie ou un choc électrique.
• Ne tirez pas sur le cordon d’alimentation pour débrancher le chargeur de la
prise murale, au risque de provoquer un incendie ou de recevoir une décharge
électrique.
• Attendez que la batterie ait rechargé au moins 10 minutes avant d’allumer
l’appareil photo.
• Si vous branchez l’appareil photo sur une source d’alimentation externe lorsque la
batterie est déchargée, l’utilisation de certaines fonctions gourmandes en énergie
peut entraîner la mise hors tension de l’appareil photo. Pour utiliser l’appareil
photo normalement, rechargez la batterie.
Entretien de l’appareil photo
Annexes 120
• Si vous rebranchez le cordon d’alimentation alors que la batterie est
complètement chargée, le voyant d’état s’allume pendant environ 30 minutes.
• L’utilisation du flash et l’enregistrement de vidéos déchargent rapidement la
batterie. Chargez la batterie jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état rouge s’éteigne.
• Si le voyant ne s'allume pas, rebranchez le câble ou retirez les piles, puis remettezles.
• Le chargement excessif des batteries peut raccourcir leur durée de vie. A la fin de
chaque chargement, débranchez le câble de l’appareil photo.
• Ne tordez pas le cordon d’alimentation et ne placez pas d’objets lourds dessus.
Vous risquez d’endommager le cordon.
Remarques concernant le chargement avec un ordinateur connecté
• Utilisez uniquement le câble USB fourni.
• La batterie peut ne pas se recharger dans les cas suivants :
- vous utilisez un concentrateur USB ;
- d’autres périphériques USB sont connectés à l’ordinateur ;
- le câble est branché sur le port situé sur la façade avant de l’ordinateur ;
- le port USB de l’ordinateur n’est pas compatible avec la norme d’alimentation
électrique (5 V, 500 mA).
Précautions relatives à l’utilisation et à la mise au rebut de batteries et de
chargeurs
• Ne jetez jamais les batteries au feu. Respectez la réglementation en vigueur dans
votre pays concernant l’élimination des batteries usagées.
• Ne posez jamais les batteries ou l’appareil à l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’un dispositif
chauffant, tel qu’un four à micro-ondes, une cuisinière ou un radiateur. En cas de
surchauffe, les batteries risquent d’exploser.
Entretien de l’appareil photo
Annexes 121
Des blessures pouvant s’avérer mortelles peuvent résulter d’une
utilisation imprudente ou inappropriée de la batterie. Pour votre
sécurité, veuillez suivre ces instructions relatives à l’utilisation
correcte de la batterie :
• La batterie peut s’enflammer ou bien exploser si celle-ci n’est pas
manipulée correctement. Si vous remarquez un quelconque défaut de
fabrication, une fêlure ou d’autres anomalies sur la batterie, cessez de
l’utiliser immédiatement et contactez le service après-vente.
• Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs de batterie et des adaptateurs
authentiques recommandés par le fabricant et rechargez la batterie
en respectant scrupuleusement les consignes décrites dans ce manuel
d’utilisation.
• Ne placez pas la batterie à proximité d’appareils chauffants ou dans
un environnement soumis à des températures élevées comme par
exemple à l’intérieur d’une voiture en été.
• Ne placez jamais la batterie dans un four à micro-ondes.
• Evitez de stocker ou d’utiliser la batterie dans des endroits chauds et
humides comme des spas ou des cabines de douche.
• Ne posez pas l’appareil sur des surfaces inflammables comme de
la literie, des couvertures, des tapis ou des couvertures électriques
pendant des périodes prolongées.
• Lorsque l’appareil est allumé, ne le laissez pas dans un espace confiné
pendant une période prolongée.
• Ne laissez pas les bornes de la batterie entrer en contact avec des
objets métalliques comme des colliers, des pièces de monnaie, des clés
ou bien des montres.
• Utilisez uniquement des batteries de remplacement lithium-ion
authentiques recommandées par le fabricant.
• Ne démontez ou ne perforez pas la batterie avec un objet coupant,
quel qu’il soit.
• Evitez de soumettre la batterie à une pression élevée ou bien à des
éléments susceptible de l’écraser.
• Evitez de soumettre la batterie à des chocs importants comme par
exemple la laisser tomber de très haut.
• N’exposez pas la batterie à des températures supérieures ou égales
à 60 °C.
• Evitez de mettre la batterie en contact avec des liquides ou de
l’humidité.
• Evitez de mettre la batterie en contact avec le feu et de l’exposer à une
chaleur extrême ou au soleil de façon prolongée.
Informations sur le traitement des batteries usagées
• Portez une attention particulière à la façon dont vous traitez les
batteries usagées.
• Ne jetez pas la batterie au feu.
• Les réglementations de mise au rebut peuvent différer selon le pays ou
la région. Observez les réglementations locales et fédérales en matière
de traitement des batteries usagées.
Consignes relatives au chargement de la batterie
Respectez les consignes de chargement indiquées dans ce manuel
d’utilisation pour charger la batterie. La batterie peut s’enflammer ou
bien exploser si celle-ci n’est pas chargée correctement.
Entretien de l’appareil photo
Annexes 122
Mise à niveau du micrologiciel
i-Launcher vous permet de mettre à niveau le micrologiciel de votre appareil photo.
1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à .
2 Sélectionnez .
3 Sélectionnez Connectivité → i-Launcher → Activé.
4 Éteignez l’appareil photo.
5 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB.
Vous devez brancher l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB sur l’appareil photo.
Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous branchez le câble à l’envers.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données.
6 Allumez l’appareil photo.
7 Installez i-Launcher sur l’ordinateur.
Système
d’exploitation Méthode d’installation
Windows
Lorsque la fenêtre contextuelle vous invite à installer
i-Launcher, sélectionnez Oui.
• Si une fenêtre vous invite à exécuter iLinker.exe, exécutez le
programme.
• Si la fenêtre ne s’affiche pas, sélectionnez Poste de travail
→ i-Launcher → iLinker.exe.
• Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un ordinateur
sur lequel i-Launcher est installé, le programme se lance
automatiquement.
Mac Cliquez sur Appareils → i-Launcher → Mac → iLinker.
8 Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour mettre à niveau le micrologiciel
et installer ainsi la version la plus récente.
• Sélectionnez Firmware Upgrader depuis l'écran de i-Launcher.
• Avant de démarrer la mise à niveau du micrologiciel, vérifiez que le PC est
connecté à un réseau.
• Pendant toute la durée de la mise à niveau, ne mettez pas hors tension les
appareils connectés.
Annexes 123
Avant de contacter le service après-vente
Si l’appareil photo ne fonctionne pas correctement, vérifiez les éléments suivants avant de contacter le service après-vente. Si la solution de dépannage proposée ne permet pas
de résoudre le problème, veuillez contacter votre revendeur local ou le service après-vente.
Lorsque vous apportez l’appareil photo dans un service après-vente, veillez à également fournir les autres composants qui ont pu contribuer au dysfonctionnement, notamment la
carte mémoire et la batterie.
Problème Solutions possibles
Impossible de prendre
des photos
• La carte mémoire est pleine. Supprimez les fichiers
inutiles ou insérez une nouvelle carte mémoire.
• Formatez la carte mémoire.
• La carte mémoire est défectueuse. Remplacez-la.
• Assurez-vous que l’appareil photo est allumé.
• Mettez la batterie en charge.
• Assurez-vous que la batterie est installée
correctement.
L’appareil photo ne
répond pas. Retirez la batterie, puis replacez-la.
L’appareil photo
chauffe
Il est possible que l’appareil photo chauffe en cours
d’utilisation. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas
la durée de vie ou les performances de l’appareil.
Le flash ne fonctionne
pas.
• Il se peut que le flash soit désactivé par l’option
Désactivée. (p. 52)
• Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le flash dans certains
modes.
Problème Solutions possibles
Impossible d’allumer
l’appareil photo
• Assurez-vous que la batterie est installée.
• Assurez-vous que la batterie est bien en place. (p. 18)
• Mettez la batterie en charge.
L’appareil photo s’éteint
de façon inattendue.
• Mettez la batterie en charge.
• L’appareil photo est peut-être en mode Mise hors
tension auto. (p. 110)
• Il est possible que l’appareil photo s’éteigne afin
d’éviter que la carte mémoire ne soit endommagée
après un choc. Rallumez l’appareil photo.
La batterie de l’appareil
photo se décharge
rapidement
• La batterie peut se décharger plus rapidement dans
un environnement de basse température (en dessous
de 0 °C). Gardez la batterie au chaud en la plaçant
dans votre poche.
• L’utilisation du flash et l’enregistrement de vidéos
déchargent rapidement la batterie. Rechargez-la si
nécessaire.
• La batterie est un consommable qui possède une
durée de vie limitée et qui doit périodiquement être
remplacée. Remplacez-la si son autonomie diminue
rapidement.
Avant de contacter le service après-vente
Annexes 124
Problème Solutions possibles
Le flash se déclenche
de façon inattendue.
L’électricité statique peut provoquer le déclenchement
du flash. Il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement de
l’appareil photo.
La date et l’heure ne
sont pas correctes
Réglez la date et l’heure dans les paramètres
d’affichage. (p. 109)
L’écran ou des touches
ne fonctionnent pas Retirez la batterie, puis replacez-la.
L’écran de l’appareil
photo fonctionne mal
Si vous utilisez l’appareil photo à des températures
extrêmement basses, un dysfonctionnement ou une
décoloration de l’écran de l’appareil photo peut se
produire. Pour bénéficier de performances optimales,
utilisez l’appareil photo à des températures de
fonctionnement modérées.
La carte mémoire
présente une erreur.
• Eteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le.
• Retirez la carte mémoire, puis insérez-la de nouveau.
• Formatez la carte mémoire.
Pour plus de détails, voir « Précautions d’utilisation des
cartes mémoire ». (p. 117)
Problème Solutions possibles
Impossible de lire des
fichiers
Si vous modifiez le nom d’un fichier, l’appareil photo
risque de ne plus pouvoir le lire (le nom des fichiers doit
être conforme à la norme DCF). Si vous rencontrez ce
problème, lisez les fichiers sur un ordinateur.
La photo est floue
• Vérifiez que l’option choisie pour la mise au point
convient aux photos prises en gros plan. (p. 55)
• Assurez-vous que l’objectif est propre. Dans le cas
contraire, nettoyez-le. (p. 113)
• Vérifiez que le sujet est placé à la bonne distance du
flash. (p. 127)
Les couleurs
de la photo ne
correspondent pas à
celles de la scène
Un réglage incorrect de la balance des blancs peut
provoquer un mauvais rendu des couleurs. Sélectionnez
l’option de balance des blancs qui s’adapte à la source
de lumière. (p. 63)
La photo est trop claire
ou trop sombre.
La photo s’avère surexposée ou sous-exposée.
• Désactivez ou activez le flash. (p. 52)
• Réglez la sensibilité ISO. (p. 54)
• Réglez la valeur d’exposition. (p. 61)
Avant de contacter le service après-vente
Annexes 125
Problème Solutions possibles
Les photos ne
s’affichent pas sur le
téléviseur.
• Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est correctement
branché sur le téléviseur avec le câble audio / vidéo.
• Vérifiez que la carte mémoire contient des photos.
Votre ordinateur ne
reconnaît pas l’appareil
photo
• Vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement branché.
• Assurez-vous que l’appareil photo est allumé.
• Assurez-vous d’utiliser un système d’exploitation pris
en charge.
L’appareil photo
se déconnecte de
l’ordinateur pendant le
transfert des fichiers.
L’électricité statique peut interrompre la transmission
des fichiers. Débranchez le câble USB, puis rebranchezle.
Problème Solutions possibles
i-Launcher ne
fonctionne pas
correctement
• Fermez i-Launcher et redémarrez-le.
• Vérifiez que i-Launcher est activé Activé dans le
menu des paramètres. (p. 108)
• En fonction des spécifications de votre ordinateur
et de l’environnement dans lequel il se trouve, le
lancement du programme peut ne pas se faire
automatiquement. Dans ce cas, cliquez sur démarrer
→ Tous les programmes → Samsung → i-Launcher
→ Samsung i-Launcher sur votre ordinateur.
(Pour Windows 8, ouvrez l'écran d'accueil, puis
sélectionnez Toutes les All apps (applications) →
Samsung i-Launcher.) Vous pouvez aussi cliquer
sur Applications → Samsung → i-Launcher sur un
ordinateur Mac.
Le téléviseur ou
l’ordinateur ne peuvent
pas afficher les photos
et les vidéos stockées
sur une carte mémoire
microSDXC.
Les cartes mémoire microSDXC utilisent le système de
fichier exFAT. Assurez-vous que le dispositif externe est
compatible avec le système de fichier exFAT avant d’y
connecter l’appareil photo.
Votre ordinateur ne
reconnaît pas la carte
mémoire microSDXC
Les cartes mémoire microSDXC utilisent le système
de fichier exFAT. Pour utiliser une carte mémoire
microSDXC sur un ordinateur Windows XP, téléchargez
et effectuez la mise à jour du pilote du système de
fichier exFAT, à partir du site Web de Microsoft.
Annexes 126
Capteur d’image
Type 1/2,3'' (environ 7,76 mm) CCD
Pixels effectifs Environ 16,2 mégapixels
Nombre total de
pixels Environ 16,6 mégapixels
Objectif
Distance focale Objectif Samsung 12x Zoom optique f = 4,3 à 51,6 mm
(équivalent film de 35 mm : 24 à 288 mm)
Plage
d’ouverture de
l’objectif
F3.1(GA) à F6.3(T)
Zoom
numérique
• Mode d’images fixes : 1,0 à 2,0X
• Mode Lecture : 1,0 à 14,4X (en fonction de la taille de l’image)
• Intelli Zoom : 2,0X
Affichage
Type LCD TFT
Caractéristiques 2,7 pouces (67,5 mm) QVGA(230K)
Mise au point
Type
Mise au point automatique TTL (Mise au point au centre,
Mise au point multiple, Mise au point avec suivi,
MPA Détection des visages, Mise au point vidéo automatique
continue (CAF))
Plage
Grand angle (GA) Téléobjectif (T)
Normale (AF) 80 cm à infini 250 cm à infini
Macro 5 à 80 cm 130 à 250 cm
Macro
automatique 5 cm à infini 130 cm à infini
Vitesse d’obturation
• Scènes Automatique : 1/8 à 1/2 000 s.
• Programme : 1 à 1/2 000 s.
• Nuit : 8 à 1/2 000 s.
• Feux d’artifice : 2 s.
Exposition
Contrôle AES Programme
Mesure de
l’exposition Multiple, Sélective, Centrée, Détection des visages
Plage de
mesures EV 2 – 17 (Large, ISO Auto), EV 4 – 19 (Télé, ISO Auto)
Compensation ±2EV (Palier 1/3 EV)
Equivalent ISO Automatique, ISO 80, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800,
ISO 1600, ISO 3200
Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Annexes 127
Flash
Mode Automatique, Anti yeux rouges, Contre jour, Synchronisation
lente, Désactivé, Correction des yeux rouges
Plage • Large : 0,2 à 4,0 m (ISO Auto)
• Télé : 0,5 à 1,6 m (ISO Auto)
Durée de
rechargement Environ 5 s.
Réduction des tremblements de l’appareil photo
Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS)
Effet
Mode Photo
• Filtre photos (Filtre intelligent) : Miniature, Vignettage,
Filtre croisé, Effet ultra grand angle, Classique, Rétro
• Réglage des images : Netteté, Contraste, Saturation
Mode
Enregistrement
vidéo
Filtre vidéos : Miniature, Vignettage, Effet ultra grand angle,
Classique, Rétro, Effet palette 1, Effet palette 2, Effet palette 3,
Effet palette 4
Balance des blancs
Balance des blancs automatique, Lumière du jour, Nuageux, Fluorescent haut,
Fluorescent bas, Tungstène, Réglage personnalisé, Temp. couleur
Impression de la date
Date & heure, Date, Désactivée
Prise de vue
Photos
• Modes : Scènes Automatique (Portrait, Portrait de nuit,
Portrait en contre jour, Nuit, Contre jour, Paysage, Blanc, Vert
naturel, Ciel Bleu, Coucher de Soleil, Macro, Texte Macro,
Macro couleur, Trépied, Sport, Faible luminosité, Projecteur,
Projecteur (Macro), Projecteur (Portrait)), Programme,
Intelligent (Beauté, Paysage, Macro, Action, Silhouette,
Coucher de soleil, Nuit, Feux d'artifice, Lumière),
Panorama Live, Filtre photos
• Rafale : Unique, Continue, Rafale, AEB
• Retardateur : Désactivé, 10 s, 2 s, Double (10 s, 2 s)
Vidéos
• Modes : Détection intelligente de scène (Paysage, Ciel Bleu,
Vert naturel, Coucher de Soleil), Filtre vidéos
• Format : MP4 (H.264) (durée d’enregistrement max. : 20 min)
• Taille : 1280 X 720, 640 X 480, 240 Web
• Voix : Activée, Désactivée, Zoom silencieux
• AF continu : AF continu Activé, AF continu Désactivé
Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Annexes 128
Lecture
Photos
• Type : Image unique, Vignettes, Diaporama avec musique et
effets, Album Photo intelligent*
* Catégorie Album intelligent : Tout, Date, Type de fichier
• Modifier : Rotation, Filtre intelligent, Luminosité, Contraste,
Saturation, ACB, Retouche des visages, Correction des yeux
rouges, Redimensionner, Rogner
• Effet : Filtre intelligent (Normal, Miniature, Vignettage, Filtre
croisé, Effet ultra grand angle, Classique, Rétro)
Vidéos Retouche vidéo : Extraction d’images fixes, Réglage de la durée
Stockage
Support
Mémoire externe (option) :
carte microSD (2 Go garantis),
carte microSDHC (jusqu’à 32 Go garanti),
carte microSDXC (jusqu’à 64 Go garanti)
- Classe 6 et plus recommandé
Format de
fichiers
• Image fixe : JPEG (DCF), EXIF 2.3
• Clip vidéo : MP4 (vidéo : MPEG-4.AVC/H.264, audio : AAC)
Format de
l’image
Icône Taille
4608 X 3456
4608 X 3072
4608 X 2592
3648 X 2736
2592 X 1944
1984 X 1488
1920 X 1080
1024 X 768
Réseau sans fil
MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Courriel, Réseaux sociaux et Cloud, Samsung Link,
AutoShare, Notification mise à niveau logicielle
Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
Annexes 129
NFC
Oui
Interface
Câble de sortie
numérique USB 2.0
Entrée /
sortie audio Haut-parleur intégré (Mono), Microphone (Mono)
Sortie vidéo A/V : NTSC, PAL (sélectionnable)
Connecteur
d’alimentation
CC
5,0 V
Source d’alimentation
Batterie
rechargeable Batterie lithium-ion (BP70A, 700 mAh)
Type de
connecteur Micro USB (5 broches)
La source d’alimentation peut varier en fonction de votre région.
Dimensions (L x H x P)
100,9 X 61,2 X 20,7 mm (hors éléments en saillie)
Poids
145 g (sans batterie, ni carte mémoire)
Température de fonctionnement
0 à 40 °C
Humidité en fonctionnement
5 à 85 %
Logiciel
i-Launcher
En vue d’améliorer le produit, ces caractéristiques peuvent changer sans avis préalable.
Annexes 130
ACB (Réglage automatique du contraste)
Cette fonctionnalité améliore automatiquement le contraste de vos images lorsque
le sujet est rétroéclairé ou en cas de contraste lumineux entre le sujet et l'arrièreplan.
AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket)
Cette fonctionnalité permet de prendre automatiquement plusieurs photos à
différentes expositions afin de vous aider à obtenir une exposition correcte.
AF (Mise au point automatique)
Système qui permet d’effectuer une mise au point automatique sur le sujet.
L’appareil photo se base sur le contraste pour opérer la mise au point automatique.
Ouverture
L’ouverture contrôle la quantité de lumière atteignant le capteur de l’appareil photo.
Bougé de l’appareil photo (flou)
Si vous bougez l’appareil photo alors que l’obturateur est ouvert, l’image risque
d’être floue. Cela est d’autant plus vrai si la vitesse de l’obturateur est lente. Vous
pouvez éviter ce problème en augmentant la sensibilité, en utilisant le flash ou en
augmentant la vitesse de l’obturateur. Vous pouvez également utiliser un trépied ou
la fonction OIS pour stabiliser l'appareil photo.
Composition
En photographie, ce terme signifie la disposition des éléments d’une scène. En règle
générale, une bonne composition doit obéir à la règle des tiers.
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)
Spécification créée par la Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA) qui définit le format et le système de fichiers des appareils photo.
Profondeur de champ
Zone de netteté acceptable entre le point de mise au point le plus proche et celui
le plus éloigné. Elle est variable et dépend de la distance focale et de l’ouverture
utilisées, mais aussi de la distance entre l’appareil photo et le sujet. Par exemple,
l’utilisation d’une valeur d’ouverture plus petite créé une grande profondeur de
champ et brouille l’arrière-plan de la composition.
Zoom numérique
Fonctionnalité qui augmente artificiellement le zoom disponible de l’objectif du
zoom (zoom optique). Le zoom numérique dégrade la qualité de l’image au fur et à
mesure que ce type de grossissement augmente.
Glossaire
Glossaire
Annexes 131
EV (Valeur d’exposition)
Cette fonctionnalité vous permet de régler rapidement la valeur d’exposition
mesurée par l’appareil photo, selon des incréments restreints, afin d’améliorer
l’exposition de vos photos. Réglez la compensation EV sur -1,0 EV pour obtenir une
valeur plus sombre d’un pas et sur 1,0 EV pour une valeur plus claire d’un pas.
Compensation EV
Ensemble des combinaisons de vitesses de l’obturateur et d’ouverture de l’objectif
pour une même exposition.
Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format)
Spécification créée par la Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEIDA) qui définit le format de fichiers pour les appareils photo.
Exposition
Quantité de lumière atteignant le capteur de l’appareil photo. L’exposition est
contrôlée par la vitesse de l’obturateur, la valeur d’ouverture et la sensibilité ISO.
Flash
Lumière brève et intense qui permet de créer une exposition adéquate lorsque la
luminosité est faible.
Longueur de focale
Distance entre le centre de l’objectif et son point focal (exprimée en millimètres).
Des distances focales plus importantes réduisent les angles de vue et agrandissent
le sujet. Celles moins élevées agrandissent à l’inverse les angles de vue.
H.264/MPEG-4
Format vidéo de compression élevée établi par les organisations normatives
internationales ISO-IEC et ITU-T. Ce codec, développé par la Joint Video Team (JVT),
améliore la qualité vidéo même lorsque le débit binaire est faible.
Capteur d’image
Partie physique de l’appareil photo qui comporte une cellule photosensible pour
chaque pixel de l’image. Chaque cellule photosensible enregistre la valeur de la
luminosité d’une exposition. Il existe deux types de capteurs : CCD (Charge-coupled
Device) et CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor).
Glossaire
Annexes 132
Sensibilité ISO
Sensibilité de l’appareil photo à la lumière basée sur la sensibilité du film utilisé dans
l’appareil photo. A une sensibilité ISO élevée, la vitesse de l’obturateur de l’appareil
photo est plus grande, ce qui réduit le flou causé par les tremblements de l’appareil
ou une luminosité insuffisante. Toutefois, avec une sensibilité plus élevée, le risque
de parasites s’avère également plus grand.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
Méthode de compression des images numériques avec pertes. Les images JPEG
sont compressées afin de réduire la taille de leur fichier avec une dégradation
minimale de la résolution.
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
Ecran d’affichage couramment utilisé dans le secteur de l’électronique grand public.
Ce type d’écran nécessite un rétroéclairage séparé, de type CCFL ou LED, pour
reproduire les couleurs.
Macro
Cette fonctionnalité permet de prendre des photos en gros plan ou de
photographier de petits objets. Cela permet à l’appareil photo d’effectuer une mise
au point nette à une échelle proche de la réalité (1/1).
Mesure de l’exposition
Correspond à la manière dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière
nécessaire à la définition de l’exposition.
MJPEG (Motion JPEG)
Format vidéo avec une compression d’images JPEG.
NFC (Near Field Communication, Communication en champ proche)
NFC représente un ensemble de normes de transmission radio de proximité très
réduite. Vous pouvez utiliser des dispositifs compatibles NFC pour activer des
fonctionnalités ou échanger des données entre appareils.
Parasite
Problème d’affichage des pixels sur une image numérique. Des parasites peuvent
apparaître si les photos sont prises avec une sensibilité trop élevée ou avec un
réglage de sensibilité automatique dans un environnement sombre.
OIS (Stabilisation optique de l’image)
Cette fonction permet de compenser en temps réel tout mouvement ou toute
vibration lors de la prise de vue. Aucune dégradation de l’image par comparaison
avec la fonction Stabilisation optique de l’image.
Glossaire
Annexes 133
Zoom optique
Zoom qui permet d’agrandir les images à travers l’objectif, sans dégrader la qualité
des images.
Quality
Expression du taux de compression d’une image numérique. Lorsque la qualité
de l’image est élevée, le taux de compression est faible et la taille du fichier plus
importante.
Résolution
Nombre de pixels d’une image numérique. Les images à résolution élevée
comportent plus de pixels et présentent généralement davantage de détails que les
images avec une faible résolution.
Vitesse d’obturation
La vitesse d’obturation est définie par la durée nécessaire à l’ouverture et à la
fermeture de l’obturateur. Dans le cadre de la luminosité d’une photo, la vitesse
d’obturation constitue un facteur important, car elle contrôle la quantité de lumière
qui passe à travers l’ouverture avant d’atteindre le capteur d’images. Par ailleurs, une
vitesse d’obturation rapide accorde moins de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer. La
photo devient plus sombre et immobilise un sujet en mouvement plus facilement.
Vignettage
Réduction de la luminosité ou de la saturation d’une image à sa périphérie (bords
externes). Cela permet de mettre en évidence les sujets positionnés au centre de
l’image.
Balance des blancs (équilibre des couleurs)
Réglage de l’intensité des couleurs (généralement les couleurs primaires comme le
rouge, le vert et le bleu) d’une image. L’objectif est un rendu exact des couleurs.
Annexes 134
Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit
(Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques)
(Applicable aux pays disposant de systèmes de collecte séparés)
Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni
le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble
USB, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut
incontrôlée des déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé
publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets.
Vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un
développement durable.
Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou
à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et les
points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage.
Les entreprises et particuliers sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à
consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne
peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets.
PlanetFirst représente l’engagement de Samsung Electronics à l’égard
du développement durable et de la responsabilité sociale, illustré à
travers des activités commerciales écologiques et contrôlées.
Elimination des batteries de ce produit
(Applicable aux pays disposant de systèmes de collecte séparés)
Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l'emballage indique que les batteries
de ce produit ne doivent pas être éliminées en fin de vie avec les autres déchets
ménagers. L'indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie
que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb
supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive CE 2006/66. Si
les batteries ne sont pas correctement éliminées, ces substances peuvent porter
préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l'environnement.
Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et d'encourager la réutilisation du
matériel, veillez à séparer les batteries des autres types de déchets et à les recycler
via votre système local de collecte gratuite des batteries.
Annexes 135
A
Accessoires en option 14
Affichage rapide 108
Agrandissement 74
Aide à la prise de vue 107
Anti yeux rouges
Mode Lecture 81
Mode Prise de vue 52
Auto Exposure Bracket (AEB) 65
Auto portrait 58
AutoShare 94
B
Balance des blancs 63
Batterie
Attention 119
Chargement en cours 19
Insertion 18
Bouton DIRECT LINK 17
C
CAF (AF continu) 41
Capteur de mise au point
Emplacement 15
Paramètres 110
Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo
126
Carte mémoire
Insérer 18
Précautions 117
Chargement en cours 19
Configuration date/heure 109
Connexion à votre ordinateur Mac
85
Contenu du coffret 14
Contraste
Mode Lecture 80
Mode Prise de vue 66
D
Déclencheur 15
Déconnexion de l'appareil photo 85
Détection des regards 59
Détection des sourires 59
Détection des visages 58
Diaporama 76
Douille pour trépied 15
E
Ecran d’accueil 23
Enfoncer le déclencheur à mi-course
35
Entretien de l’appareil photo 113
Exposition 61
Extraction d’une image d’une vidéo
82
F
Filtre intelligent
Mode d’enregistrement vidéo 46
Mode Lecture 79
Mode Photo 45
Flash
Anti yeux rouges 53
Automatique 52
Contre jour 53
Correction des yeux rouges 53
Désactivé 52
Synchronisation lente 53
Formatage 110
Index
Annexes 136
I
Icônes
Mode Lecture 70
Mode Prise de vue 22
Image de démarrage 107
Impression 110
Intelli Zoom 33
L
Luminosité 108
Mode Lecture 80
Mode Prise de vue 61
M
Macro
Macro 56
Macro automatique 56
Messages d'erreur 112
Mesure de l'exposition
Centrée 62
Multiple 62
Sélective 62
Miniatures 71
Mise au point avec suivi 57
MobileLink 95
Mode Détection intelligente de
scène 40
Mode Economie d'énergie 108
Mode Filtre photos 45
Mode Filtre vidéos 46
Mode intelligent 42
Mode Lecture 70
Mode Panorama Live 44
Mode Programme 39
Mode Scènes automatiques 38
Modes Rafale
Auto Exposure Bracket (AEB) 65
Continue 65
Rafale 65
Mode Vidéo 41
N
Netteté 66
Nettoyage
Boîtier de l’appareil photo 113
Ecran 113
Objectif 113
NFC (Tag & Go) 93
P
Paramètres 109
Paramètres de fuseau horaire 20,
109
Paramètres linguistiques 109
Pivotement 78
Port audio / vidéo 15
Portraits
Auto portrait 58
Détection des regards 59
Détection des sourires 59
Détection des visages 58
Port USB 15
Protection de fichiers 73
R
Rafale 65
Réglage automatique du contraste
(ACB)
Mode Lecture 80
Mode Prise de vue 62
Réglage de l’heure 20
Index
Annexes 137
Réglage des images
ACB 80
Anti yeux rouges 81
Contraste
Mode Lecture 80
Mode Prise de vue 66
Luminosité
Mode Lecture 80
Mode Prise de vue 61
Netteté 66
Saturation
Mode Lecture 80
Mode Prise de vue 66
Réglages du son 30
Remise à zéro 110
Réseau sans fil 89
Résolution
Mode Lecture 78
Mode Prise de vue 49
Retardateur
Mode Prise de vue 51
Voyant du retardateur 15
Retouche de photos 78
Retouche des visages
Mode Lecture 80
Retouche de vidéos
Extraction 82
Recadrage 82
S
Samsung Link 103
Saturation
Mode Lecture 80
Mode Prise de vue 66
Sensibilité ISO 54
Service après-vente 123
Service de partage
Accès 101
Publication de photos ou de vidéos
101
Son de la mise au point 107
Sortie vidéo 108
Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS)
34
Suppression de fichiers 73
T
Touche de fonction 16
Touche Lecture 16
Touche Marche / Arrêt 15
Touche Menu 16
Transfert de fichiers
Email 98
Mac 85
Windows 84
Type d'affichage 29
V
Vidéo
Mode Lecture 77
Mode Prise de vue 41
Viseur à distance 96
Index
Annexes 138
Visionnage de fichiers
Catégorie 72
Diaporama 76
Miniatures 71
Photos panoramiques 75
Téléviseur 83
Voyant d'état 16
Z
Zone de mise au point
Mise au point au centre 56
Mise au point avec suivi 56
Mise au point multiple 56
Zoom
Réglages sonores du zoom 67
Touche Zoom 16
Utilisation du zoom 32
Zoom numérique 32
Index
Annexes 139
Pour les utilisateurs résidant en France
Service Consommateur
Contact téléphonique :
Du lundi au samedi de 9 h à 20 h
01 48 63 00 00
Adresse postale :
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS FRANCE
ZI Paris Nord II, BP 50116
95950 Roissy CDG FRANCE
Annexes 140
Pour les utilisateurs résidant au Canada
SERVICE À LA CLIENTÈLE
Téléphone :
Du lundi au vendredi de 8 h 30 à 20 h (heure normale de l'Est)
1 800 726-7864
Adresse postale :
Samsung Electronics Canada Inc.
55 Standish Court, 10th Floor
Mississauga ON
L5R 4B2
Pour toute question ou demande de service après-vente, veuillez
consulter les conditions de garantie accompagnant votre produit ou
rendez-vous sur le www.samsung.fr ou www.samsung.ca
HMX-F90/HMX-F91
HMX-F900/HMX-F910
HMX-F920
Digital Camcorder
www.samsung.com/register
USER
MANUAL
For video recording, use a memory card that supports faster write speeds.
- Recommended Memory Card: 6MB/s (Class 6) or above.
2
SAFETY WARNINGS
What the icons and signs in this user manual mean:
Safety Icon Meaning
WARNING
There is a potential risk of death or serious injury.
CAUTION
There is a potential risk of personal injury or damage to the
product.
To reduce the risk of fire, explosion, electric shock, or personal
injury when using your camcorder, follow these basic safety
precautions.
Here are hints or page number references you will find helpful
when you operate the camcorder.
Settings required before using a function.
These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others.
Please follow them explicitly. After reading this section, keep it in a
safe place for future reference.
PRECAUTIONS
Warning!
• When using the AC power adaptor with your camcorder, connect the
adaptor to an outlet with protective grounding.
• Do not expose the camcorder battery to direct sunlight, heaters,
radiators, fire, or any source of excessive heat.
Caution
If you replace the battery with the wrong battery, you can cause an
explosion. Replace only with the same battery or an equivalent type.
To disconnect the apparatus from the mains, the plug must be pulled out
from the mains socket, therefore the mains plug shall be readily operable.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON USE
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung Camcorder. Please read
this user manual carefully before you use the camcorder and keep
it handy for future reference. Should your camcorder fail to operate
correctly, refer to Troubleshooting. pages 93~102
This User Manual covers models HMX-F90, HMX-F91,
HMX-F900, HMX-F910, and HMX-F920.
• Illustrations of model HMX-F90 are used in this user manual.
• The displays in this user manual may not be exactly the same as
those you see on the LCD screen.
• Designs and specifications of the camcorder and other
accessories are subject to change without notice.
• Before using the camcorder, read the Safety information carefully
and then use the product properly.
• Samsung is not responsible for any injury or damage caused by
not following the instructions in the user manual.
• In this manual, a ‘memory card’ or ‘card’ means an SD, SDHC,
or SDXC memory card.
• In this user manual’s function description tables, the icon shown
in the on-screen display column will appear on the screen when
you set the corresponding function.
Example: 720X576/50p (16:9) - Video Resolution Submenu
item page 53
Item Use On-screen
display
720X576/50p
(16:9)
Records in 720x576 (50p) resolution
with 16:9 aspect ratio.
If you set the video resolution to 720X576/50p (16:9), the
corresponding icon ( ) will appear on the screen.
Before reading this user manual
About this user manual
3
Before reading this user manual
The following terms are used in this manual:
• ‘Scene’ refers to the point where you press the [Recording
start/stop] button to start recording until you press it again to
stop recording.
• The terms ‘photo’ and ‘still image’ are used interchangeably with
the same meaning.
• This camcorder records video in H.264 (MPEG4/AVC) format.
• You can play back and edit the video recorded by the
camcorder on a personal computer using the internal
software of this camcorder.
• Please note that this camcorder is not compatible with other
digital video formats.
• Before recording important video, make a trial recording.
Play back your trial recording to make sure the video and audio
have been recorded properly.
• Recorded contents may be lost due to a mistake when handling
this camcorder or memory card, etc. Samsung will not provide
compensation for damages due to the loss of recorded contents.
• Make a backup of important recorded data.
Protect your important recorded data by copying the files to
a PC. We also recommend you copy it from your PC to other
recording media for storage. Refer to the software installation and
USB connection guide.
• Copyrights: Please note that this camcorder is intended for
individual use only.
Data recorded on the storage media in this camcorder using
other digital/analogue media or devices is protected by the
Copyright Act and cannot be used without permission of the
owner of the copyright, except for personal enjoyment. Even if
you record an event such as a show, performance, or exhibition
for personal enjoyment, we strongly recommend that you obtain
permission beforehand.
Notes regarding trademarks
• All the trade names and registered trademarks mentioned in this
manual or other documentation provided with your Samsung
product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders. Furthermore, ‘
TM’ and ‘
®’ are not mentioned in
each case in this manual.
• SD, SDHC and SDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
• Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, and
DirectX® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Intel®, Core™, Core 2 Duo®, and Pentium® are the registered
trademarks or trademarks of the Intel Corporation in the United
States and other countries.
• AMD and Athlon™ are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of AMD in the United States and other countries.
• Macintosh, Mac OS are either registered trademarks or trademarks
of Apple Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
• YouTube is a trademark of Google Inc.
• Flickr is a trademark of Yahoo.
• Facebook is a trademark of Facebook Inc.
• Twitter is a trademark of Twitter Inc.
• Picasa is a trademark of Google Inc.
• Adobe, the Adobe logo, and Adobe Acrobat are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
United States and/or other countries.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and the term
“High Definition Multimedia Interface”
are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Proper recording etiquette
• Do not record videos or photos of people without their
authorisation or consent.
• Do not record videos or photos in forbidden recording places.
• Do not record videos or photos in private places.
Before using this camcorder
4
The safety precautions illustrated below are to prevent personal injury or material damages. Heed all instructions carefully.
WARNING
Means that there is a potential
risk of serious personal injury.
Prohibited action. Do not touch the product.
CAUTION
Means that there is a potential
risk of personal injury or damage
to the product.
Do not disassemble the product. Unplug from the power supply. This precaution must be
followed.
WARNING
Do not overload outlets or extension
cords as this may result in abnormal
heat or fire.
Using the camcorder at temperatures
over 60˚C (140˚F) may result in
fire. Keeping the battery at a high
temperature may cause an explosion.
Do not allow water, metal, or
inflammable material to enter the
camcorder or power adaptor. Doing
so may pose a fire hazard.
No sand or dust! Fine sand or dust
entering the camcorder or power
adaptor could cause malfunctions or
defects.
L I O
No oil! Oil entering the camcorder or
power adaptor could cause electric
shock, malfunctions or defects.
Do not aim the camcorder directly
into the sun. Doing so could cause
eye injuries, as well as lead to
malfunctioning of internal parts of the
product.
Do not bend the USB cable or damage
the power adaptor by pressing on it
with a heavy object. There is a risk of
fire or an electric shock.
Do not disconnect the adaptor by
pulling on its USB cable, as this could
damage the cable.
Safety information
5
Safety information
diulf gninaelc
Do not use the power adaptor if it
has damaged, split or broken cords
or wires. Doing so may cause fire or
electric shock.
Do not connect the power adaptor
unless the plug can be fully inserted
with no part of the blades exposed.
Do not dispose of the battery in a fire
as it may explode.
Never use cleaning fluid or similar
chemicals to clean the camcorder.
Do not spray cleaners directly on the
camcorder.
Keep the camcorder away from water
when using it near the beach or pool
or when it rains. There is a risk of a
malfunction or an electric shock.
Keep the used lithium battery or
memory card out of the reach of
children. If the lithium battery or
memory card is swallowed by a child,
consult a physician immediately.
Do not plug or unplug the power
adaptor with wet hands. There is a risk
of electric shock.
Keep the power adaptor unplugged
when not in use or during lightning
storms. There is a risk of fire.
Unplug the power adaptor before you
clean it. If you leave it plugged in, there
is a risk of a malfunction or an electric
shock.
If the camcorder emits an abnormal
sound or smell, or smokes, unplug
the power adaptor immediately and
request service from a Samsung
service centre. There is a risk of fire or
personal injury.
If the camcorder malfunctions,
immediately detach the power adaptor
or battery from the camcorder.
There is a risk of fire or injury.
Do not attempt to disassemble, repair,
or modify the camcorder or the power
adaptor. There is a risk of fire or an
electric shock.
6
Safety information
CAUTION
Do not press the surface of the LCD
with force, or hit it with a sharp object.
If you push the LCD surface, display
unevenness may occur.
Do not drop or expose the camcorder,
battery, power adaptor or other
accessories to severe vibrations or
impact. This may cause a malfunction or
injury.
Do not use the camcorder on a tripod
(not supplied) in a place where it is
subject to severe vibrations or impact.
Do not use the camcorder near direct
sunlight or heating equipment. This may
cause a malfunction or injury.
EDICITCESNI
Do not leave the camcorder in a closed
vehicle for a long time where the
temperature is very high.
Do not expose the camcorder to soot
or steam. Thick soot or steam could
damage the camcorder case or cause a
malfunction.
Do not use the camcorder near dense
exhaust gas generated by gasoline or
diesel engines, or corrosive gas such
as hydrogen sulphide. Doing so may
corrode the external or internal terminals,
disabling normal operation.
Do not expose the camcorder to
insecticide. Insecticide entering the
camcorder could cause the product
to fail to operate normally. Turn the
camcorder off and cover it with vinyl
sheet, etc. before using insecticide.
Do not expose the camcorder to sudden
changes in temperature or high humidity.
There is also a risk of defect or electric
shock when using outdoors during
lightning storms.
Do not place the camcorder down on
the open LCD screen.
Do not wipe the camcorder body with
benzene or thinner. The exterior coating
could peel off or the case surface could
deteriorate.
Do not leave the LCD screen open when
not using the camcorder.
7
Safety information
Do not hold the camcorder by the LCD
screen when lifting it. The LCD screen
could detach and the camcorder may
fall.
Do not use the camcorder near a TV or
radio. Interference from the camcorder
could cause noise on the TV or in the
radio broadcast.
Do not use the camcorder near
sources of strong radio waves or
magnetic fields such as speakers
and large motors. Noise from these
sources could distort the video or
audio you are recording.
Use Samsung-approved accessories
only. Using products from other
manufacturers may cause overheating,
fire, explosion, electric shock or
personal injuries caused by abnormal
operation.
Place the camcorder on a stable
surface that is well ventilated.
Keep important data separately.
Samsung is not responsible for data
loss.
Only plug the power adaptor plug into
a socket that is easily accessible. If any
problem occurs with the product, you
must pull the plug out of the socket
to disconnect the power completely.
Turning off the power button on
the product does not turn off the
camcorder completely.
Other manufacturers of optional
accessories compatible with this
camcorder are responsible for their
own products. Use the optional
accessories according to the safety
instructions. Samsung is not
responsible for any malfunction, risk of
fire, electric shock, or damages
caused by using unauthorised
accessories.
8
Before reading this user manual ....................... 2
SAFETY WARNINGS..................................................................... 2
PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................. 2
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON USE ........................................... 2
Safety information............................................ 4
Quick start guide ........................................... 10
Getting to know the camcorder...................... 13
UNPACKING ............................................................................... 13
LOCATION OF CONTROLS......................................................... 14
IDENTIFIYING THE SCREEN DISPLAYS...................................... 16
Getting started .............................................. 19
INSERTING/EJECTING THE BATTERY........................................ 19
CHARGING THE BATTERY ......................................................... 20
CHECKING THE BATTERY STATE............................................... 21
Basic operation of the camcorder................... 24
TURNING YOUR CAMCORDER ON/OFF .................................... 24
SWITCHING TO THE POWER SAVING MODE ............................ 24
SETTING THE DATE/TIME FOR THE FIRST TIME........................ 25
SETTING THE OPERATION MODES ........................................... 26
SWITCHING THE INFORMATION DISPLAY MODE...................... 26
USING THE SHORTCUT MENU (OK GUIDE)............................... 27
SELECTING THE LANGUAGES................................................... 29
Getting ready to start recording ...................... 30
INSERTING AND EJECTING A MEMORY CARD (NOT SUPPLIED)... 30
SELECTING A SUITABLE MEMORY CARD
(NOT SUPPLIED)......................................................................... 31
RECORDABLE TIME AND CAPACITY ......................................... 33
ATTACHING THE STRAP............................................................. 34
ADJUSTING THE LCD SCREEN.................................................. 34
Basic recording ............................................. 35
RECORDING VIDEOS.................................................................. 35
RecordING pause/RESUME .................................................. 36
TAGGING AND CAPTURING GREAT MOMENTS WHILE
RECORDING (MY CLIP FUNCTION)............................................ 37
RECORDING PHOTOS................................................................ 38
RECORDING WITH EASE FOR BEGINNERS (SMART AUTO)...... 39
Zooming in/out....................................................................... 40
USING THE BACK LIGHT BUTTON............................................. 41
Basic playback.............................................. 42
CHANGING THE PLAYBACK MODE ........................................... 42
PLAYING BACK VIDEOS ............................................................. 43
PLAYING BACK My Clip............................................................ 45
USING THE SMART BGM FUNCTION......................................... 45
TAGGING and capturing great moments while
playing back video ............................................................... 46
VIEWING PHOTOS...................................................................... 47
ZOOMING DURING PHOTO PLAYBACK..................................... 48
Using the menu items.................................... 49
HANDLING MENUS .................................................................... 49
MENU ITEMS .............................................................................. 50
Contents
9
Contents
Advanced recording ...................................... 52
iSCENE ....................................................................................... 52
Video Resolution.......................................................................... 53
Photo Resolution......................................................................... 54
White Balance ............................................................................. 54
Face Detection ............................................................................ 56
EV (Exposure Value)..................................................................... 57
C.Nite.......................................................................................... 58
Focus .......................................................................................... 58
Anti-Shake(HDIS)......................................................................... 60
Digital Special Effect .................................................................... 61
Zoom Type .................................................................................. 62
Cont. Shot................................................................................... 63
Time Lapse REC ......................................................................... 64
Guideline ..................................................................................... 66
Advanced playback ....................................... 67
Thumbnail View Option................................................................ 67
PlayOption .................................................................................. 68
Smart BGM Option...................................................................... 68
Delete.......................................................................................... 70
Delete My Clip ............................................................................. 71
Protect ........................................................................................ 72
Share Mark ................................................................................. 73
Slide Show .................................................................................. 74
File Info........................................................................................ 74
Other settings................................................ 75
Storage Info................................................................................. 75
File No......................................................................................... 75
Date/Time Set ............................................................................. 76
Date/Time Display ....................................................................... 76
LCD Brightness ........................................................................... 77
Auto LCD Off............................................................................... 77
Beep Sound ................................................................................ 78
Shutter Sound ............................................................................. 78
Auto Power Off............................................................................ 79
PC Software ................................................................................ 79
Format......................................................................................... 80
Default Set................................................................................... 80
Language .................................................................................... 80
Open source licences .................................................................. 80
Connecting to a TV........................................ 81
Connecting to a high definition TV with HDMI.............. 81
CONNECTING TO A REGULAR TV ............................................. 82
VIEWING ON A TV SCREEN........................................................ 83
Dubbing videos ............................................. 84
DUBBING TO VCR OR DVD/HDD RECORDERS......................... 84
Using with a windows computer..................... 85
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH A WINDOWS COMPUTER ............... 85
USING THE Intelli-studio programme...................................... 86
Upload your videos directly to YouTube! .................... 90
USING AS A REMOVABLE STORAGE DEVICE............................ 91
Troubleshooting............................................. 93
WARNING INDICATORS AND MESSAGES ................................. 93
Symptoms and solutions................................................... 96
Maintenance & additional information............ 103
MAINTENANCE......................................................................... 103
USING YOUR CAMCORDER ABROAD ..................................... 104
GLOSSARY............................................................................... 105
Specifications.............................................. 106
10
Quick start guide
STEP 1: Get ready
1 Insert the battery into the battery slot. page 19
2 Charge the battery fully. page 20
3 Insert a memory card. page 30
CARD
CARD
STEP 2: Record videos and photos
1 Open the LCD screen and press the [Power ( )] button to turn
on the camcorder.
• Set the [Lens cover open/close] switch to open ( ).
page 15
2 To record videos, press the [Recording start/stop] button or,
to record photos, press the [PHOTO] button. pages 35, 38
This quick start guide introduces the basic operation and features of your camcorder. See the reference pages for more information.
[Recording
start/stop]
button
[Recording
start/stop]
button
11
Quick start guide
STEP 3: Play back videos or photos
Viewing videos or photos on the LCD screen
You can find recordings quickly by using the thumbnail view.
1 Press the [MODE] button to select the playback ( ) mode.
2 Select the video or photo thumbnail view by using the [Zoom]
lever.
3 Use the [Control (Up/Down/Left/Right)] button to select a
desired video or photo, and then press the [Control (OK)]
button.
Normal
1/10
Photo Move Play
0:00:55
Viewing on a TV
You can enjoy detailed, brilliant quality videos on a connected TV.
pages 81~83
CARD
CARD
STEP 4: Save recorded videos / photos
Using the Intelli-studio programme built in to your camcorder, you
can import videos and photos into your computer and edit or share
the videos and photos with your friends and family. For details, see
pages 86~89.
CARD
12
Quick start guide
Importing and viewing videos/photos to your PC from
the camcorder
1 Start the Intelli-studio programme by connecting the camcorder
to your PC with a USB cable.
• A new file saving screen appears with the Intelli-studio main
window. Click Yes, and the uploading procedure starts.
2 Any new files are saved to your PC and registered to
Contents Manager in the Intelli-studio programme.
• You can arrange the files by different criteria such as Face,
Date, Location, etc.
Contents Manager Saved files in your PC
Folders directory on your PC
3 Double-click the file you would like to play back.
Sharing videos/photos on Web sites
Share your contents with the world by uploading photos and
videos directly to a web site with a single click.
Click the Share ( ) Upload tab on the Intelli-studio browser.
page 89
Intelli-studio runs automatically when you connect the
camcorder to a Windows computer (if you have set PC
Software: On). page 79
STEP 5: Delete videos or photos
If the camcorder’s storage media is full, you cannot record new
videos or photos. Delete videos or photos you have saved to your
computer from the camcorder’s storage media. Then you can
record new videos or photos on newly freed up space.
[MODE] button Playback ( ) mode [MENU] button
Delete page 70
13
UNPACKING
Your new camcorder comes with the accessories shown on this
page. If any of these items is missing from your box, call Samsung’s
Customer Care Centre.
Model name Internal memory Lens
HMX-F90
HMX-F91
HMX-F900
HMX-F910
HMX-F920
-
52x (Optical),
70x (Intelli),
130x (Digital)
• Although the models have some features that are different, they
operate in the same way.
• The exact appearance of each item may vary by model.
• The contents may vary depending on the sales region.
• You can purchase parts and accessories after consulting with your
local Samsung dealer. SAMSUNG is not responsible for reduced
battery life time or malfunctions caused by any unauthorised use of
accessories such as the power adaptor or the batteries.
• A memory card is not included. See page 31 for memory cards
compatible with your camcorder.
Check your accessories
Battery Power adaptor USB cable
Audio/Video cable Quick start guide
Micro HDMI cable Carrying case
External battery charger Memory card/
Memory card adaptor
Optional accessories
Getting to know the camcorder
14
Getting to know the camcorder
LOCATION OF CONTROLS
Front & Left
1 Lens
2 MENU button
3 Control (Up/Down/Left/Right/OK) button /
Zoom (T/W) button
4 Recording start/stop button
5 LCD screen
6 Memory card/Jack cover
ⓐ USB jack ( )
ⓑ Memory card slot ( )
ⓒ AV jack ( )
ⓓ CHG (charging) indicator
ⓔ HDMI jack ( )
7 Internal speaker
8 Display ( ) button
9 Recording pause/resume ( ) button
10 Back light ( ) button / SMART BGM button
11 SMART AUTO ( ) button / Share ( ) button
12 Power ( ) button
2
3
4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12
1
7
ⓑ
CARD
ⓐ ⓒ ⓓ ⓔ
15
Getting to know the camcorder
Right/Top & Bottom
1 MODE button
2 Zoom lever (T/W)
3 PHOTO / My Clip button
4 Strap
5 Strap hook
6 Lens cover open ( )/close ( ) switch
7 Internal microphone
8 Battery release switch (BATT.)
9 Tripod receptacle
Rear
1 Mode indicator
: Recording mode (Video/Photo)
: Playback mode
2 Recording start/stop button
3 Battery slot
Be careful not to cover the internal microphone and lens during
recording.
8
9
2
3
1
7
6
4 5
1
3
2
16
Getting to know the camcorder
1/50
STBY 0:00:00 [220Min]
+0.3
01/JAN/2013 00:00
1 Sec/ 24 Hr 9999
• This camcorder provides one combined
video and photo recording mode. You can
easily record videos or photos in the same
mode without having to change it.
• The on-screen indicators are based on a 16GB
SDHC memory card.
• The settings of functions marked with a are
lost when the camcorder turns off.
• For enhanced performance, the display
indications and their order are subject to change
without prior notice.
• The total number of recordable photos is based
on the available space on the storage media.
• The maximum number the photo counter can
display is 9,999.
Left of the LCD screen
Indicator Meaning
/ Recording mode (Video/Photo)
STBY// / Operating status (standby/
recording/pause/photo capturing)
0:00:00 [220Min] Time counter (video recording
time, remaining recordable time)
/ iSCENE / Smart Auto
Time Lapse REC
My Clip
9999 Photo image counter
(total number of recordable photos)
White Balance
Manual focus
1/50 C.Nite
+0.3 EV (Exposure Value)
Zoom (optical zoom / intelli zoom
/ digital zoom)
Digital Special Effect
01/JAN/2013 00:00 Date/Time Display
Right of the LCD screen
Indicator Meaning
Storage media (memory card)
Battery info.
(remaining battery level)
, Photo Resolution, Video Resolution
Anti-Shake (HDIS)
Back light
Continuous shot
Face Detection
IDENTIFIYING THE SCREEN DISPLAYS
The available functions vary depending on the selected operation mode. Different indicators appear depending on the setting values.
• The On Screen Display (OSD) below appears when the camcorder is in the recording ( ) mode only.
• Press the [MODE] button to select the recording ( ) mode. page 26
Video and Photo recording mode
17
Getting to know the camcorder
• The On Screen Display (OSD) below appears in the video playback ( ) mode only.
• Press the [MODE] button to select the playback ( ) mode. page 26
Video playback mode: Thumbnail view
Video playback mode: Single view
0:00:00/0:00:55
Thumbnail View 100-0001
Top of the LCD screen
Indicator Meaning
Video playback mode
/ / / Playback status (playback/pause/
search)
0:00:00/0:00:55 Time code (elapsed time /
recorded time)
Storage media (memory card)
Battery info
(remaining battery level)
PlayOption
Video Resolution
Indicator Meaning
My Clip
Share Mark
Protect
Shortcut menu
Bottom of the LCD screen
Indicator Meaning
Button guide
100-0001 File name (file number)
Normal
1/10
Photo Move Play
0:00:55
Top of the LCD screen
Indicator Meaning
Video playback mode
Storage media (memory card)
Battery info
(remaining battery level)
Bottom of the LCD screen
Indicator Meaning
Button guide
Centre of the LCD screen
Indicator Meaning
0:00:55 Recorded time
1/10 Current video / total number of
recorded videos
Protect
Share Mark
My Clip
Error file
Scroll bar
18
Getting to know the camcorder
• This On Screen Display (OSD) below appears in the photo playback ( ) mode only.
• Press the [MODE] button to select the playback ( ) mode. page 26
Photo playback mode: Thumbnail view
Photo playback mode: Single view
1/10
Thumbnail View 100-0001
Top of the LCD screen
Indicator Meaning
Photo playback mode
Slide Show
1/10 Current photo / total number of
recorded photos
Storage media (memory card)
Battery info
(remaining battery level)
Photo Resolution
Indicator Meaning
Protect
Shortcut menu
Bottom of the LCD screen
Indicator Meaning
Button guide
100-0001 File name (file number)
Normal
1/10
Movie Move Play
Top of the LCD screen
Indicator Meaning
Photo playback mode
Storage media (memory card)
Battery info
(remaining battery level)
Bottom of the LCD screen
Indicator Meaning
Button guide
Centre of the LCD screen
Indicator Meaning
1/10 Current photo / total number of
recorded photos
Protect
Error file
Scroll bar
19
To insert the battery
Insert the battery into the battery slot until it softly clicks.
• Make sure that the SAMSUNG logo on the battery is facing you
when the camcorder is placed as shown in the figure.
Getting started
To eject the battery
1 Gently push the [Battery release (BATT.)] switch in the direction
shown in the figure to eject the battery.
2 Push down, and then lift the battery out in the direction shown in
the figure.
[Battery release (BATT.)] switch
• Use only Samsung-approved batteries. Do not use batteries from other manufacturers. Otherwise, there is a danger of overheating, fire, or explosion.
• Samsung is not responsible for the problems caused by unapproved batteries.
• Remove the battery from the camcorder when the camcorder is not in use.
• We recommend you purchase one or more additional batteries to allow continuous use of your camcorder.
INSERTING/EJECTING THE BATTERY
20
Getting started
CHARGING THE BATTERY
You can charge the battery with the USB cable and power adaptor.
Make sure that you use the supplied USB cable or power adapter
to charge the battery. If you use any other power adapter for the
camcorder, it will not work properly or the battery may not be
charged. It may also cause an electric shock or result in a fire.
1 Insert the battery into the camcorder. page 19
2 Open the jack cover of the camcorder.
3 Charge the battery using the USB cable and power adaptor.
• The CHG (charge) indicator lights up and charging starts.
When the battery is fully charged, the charging (CHG)
indicator turns green. page 21
• Charging the battery at low temperature may take longer or the
battery may not charge fully (The green indicator will not turn on).
• Make sure that there are no foreign substances on the plug or in the
socket when you connect the power adaptor to the camcorder.
• When using the power adaptor, place it close to the wall outlet. If
you experience a malfunction while using the camcorder, separate
the power adaptor immediately from the wall outlet.
• Do not use the power adaptor in a tight space, such as between
furnishings.
• Make sure to turn off the camcorder before disconnecting the power
adaptor. Otherwise, you can damage the storage media or data.
• When recording indoors with a wall outlet available, it is convenient to use
the power adaptor instead of the battery.
• We recommend you charge the battery in a place with an ambient
temperature between 50˚F and 86˚F (10°C~30°C).
• If the camcorder is turned on, the battery will still charge, but more
charging time will be needed. We recommend you keep the camcorder
turned off while it charges.
• You cannot operate the camcorder using USB power only. Use the
power adaptor or battery to power the camcorder.
• If you use the camcorder while you are charging the battery, charging
may take longer.
• An AC plug adaptor is required in some foreign countries. If you need
one, purchase it from your distributor.
To charge the battery with the power adaptor
CARD
To charge the battery by connecting to a PC
CARD
21
Getting started
CHECKING THE BATTERY STATE
You can check the charging state and remaining battery capacity.
To check the charging state
The colour of the CHG lamp indicates the charging state.
Charging (CHG) lamp
Charging
state Charging Fully charged Error
LED colour (Orange) (Green)
(Orange blink)
Battery level display
The battery level display shows the amount of battery power
remaining in the battery.
Battery Level
Indicator State Message
Fully charged -
75%~50% -
50%~25% -
25%~5% -
less than 5% -
Exhausted (flickers): The device will soon turn off.
Charge the battery as soon as possible. -
- The device will be forced to turn off after 3 seconds. Low
battery
The figures above are based on a fully charged battery at normal
temperature. Low ambient temperature may affect the use time.
CARD
STBY [220Min]
9999
22
Getting started
Available charging and running time for the battery
Battery Type IA-BP105R IA-BP210R
Charging time
To charge the battery with the power adaptor approx. 160 min. approx. 300 min.
To charge the battery by connecting to a PC approx. 160 min. approx. 300 min.
Resolution HD SD HD SD
Continuous recording time approx. 100 min. approx. 80 min. approx. 200 min. approx. 160 min.
Playback time approx. 200 min. approx. 400 min.
• Charging time: Approximate time in minutes required to fully charge a completely exhausted battery.
• Recording/Playback time: Approximate time available when you have fully charged the battery.
• The time is only for reference. Times shown above are measured under Samsung’s test conditions. Your times may differ, depending on
your usage and conditions.
• The recording and playback times will be shorter when you use your camcorder in low temperatures.
• We recommend using the power adaptor when using the Time Lapse REC function.
Continuous Recording (without zoom)
The continuous recording time shows the available recording time
when you record without using any other function after recording
starts.
The battery may discharge 1.5 times faster than this reference if you
use the record start/stop, the zoom, and the playback functions.
Prepare additional batteries with the expectation that the actual
recording time is about 60% of the times listed above.
Using an AC power source
We recommend that you use the power adaptor to power the
camcorder from a household AC outlet when recording and playing
back the camcorder indoors. The connection is the same as that for
battery charging. page 20
• The charging time will vary depending on the amount of charge left in
the battery.
• Depending on your PC specifications, the charging time can be
prolonged.
23
Getting started
About the battery
• Battery properties
A lithium-ion battery is small-sized and has a high capacity. Low
ambient temperature (below 50ºF (10ºC)) may shorten its usage
time and affect its function. Before recording in low temperatures,
put the battery into your pocket to warm it, then install it in the
camcorder.
• Make sure to store the battery separately after use.
- A small amount of battery power is consumed when the
battery is stored in the camcorder even if the camcorder
power is off.
- The battery may be completely discharged, if it has been
installed and left in the camcorder for a long period of time.
If this occurs, the battery may not fully operate even if you
charge it.
- If the battery is not used for a long time, fully charge the
battery and then, using your camcorder, drain the charge
completely. Do this once every 3 months to keep the battery
functioning properly. To store the battery, remove it from your
camcorder and put it in a cool, dry place.
• Charge an extra battery before using the camcorder
outdoors in cold temperatures.
- The cold temperature may shorten the length of time you can
use the battery before needing to recharge it.
- Carry the supplied USB cable and power adaptor to charge
the battery while travelling.
• Check whether the battery terminal is damaged if the battery
falls or is dropped.
- If you install a battery with the damaged terminal into the
camcorder, you can damage the camcorder.
• Remove the battery and the memory card from the
camcorder and disconnect the power adaptor after use.
- Store the battery in a stable, cool, and dry place.
(Recommended temperature : 59ºF~77ºF (15ºC~25ºC),
recommended humidity: 40%~60%)
- Temperatures that are too high or too low shorten the battery
lifetime.
- The battery terminals can become rusty or malfunction if the
battery is stored in a smoky or dusty location.
• Recycle or dispose of your dead batteries properly.
• The battery lifetime is limited.
- Battery capacity decreases over time and through repeated
use. If decreased usage time between charges becomes
significant, it is probably time to replace the battery with a new
one.
- Each battery’s life is affected by storage, and operating and
environmental conditions.
24
Basic operation of the camcorder
TURNING YOUR CAMCORDER ON/OFF
1 Open the LCD screen and press the [Power ( )] button to turn
on the camcorder.
• Set the [Lens cover open/close] switch to open ( ).
2 To turn off the camcorder, press the [Power ( )] button.
LCD screen Power( ) button
The camcorder operates the self-diagnosis function when powered on.
If a warning message appears, refer to ‘warning indicators and
messages’ (pages 93~95) and take corrective action.
When using this camcorder for the first time
When you use your camcorder for the first time or reset it, the Date/
Time Set screen appears at start-up.
Set the date and time. page 25
SWITCHING TO THE POWER SAVING MODE
If you need to use camcorder for the extended time, the following
functions enable you to prevent unnecessary energy consumption.
Sleep mode
The camcorder switches to the sleep mode when the LCD screen
is closed, and then, if idle for more than 20 minutes, the camcorder
turns off. However, if Auto Power Off: 5 Min is set, the camcorder
turns off in 5 minutes.
If you open the LCD screen during sleep mode, the sleep mode
ends and the camcorder returns to the last operation mode used.
After 20 minutes
LCD screen is closed
• The power saving mode does not work in the following situations:
- While recording, playing back, or displaying a slide show.
- When the LCD screen is opened.
• The camcorder consumes less battery power in the power saving
mode. However, if you plan to use the camcorder for an extended
time, we recommend you turn off the camcorder by pressing the
[Power ( )] button when not using it.
25
Basic operation of the camcorder
SETTING THE DATE/TIME FOR THE FIRST
TIME
You can set the date and time of your local area when you turn on
this camcorder for the first time.
1 Open the LCD screen and press the
[Power ( )] button to turn on the
camcorder.
• The Date/Time Set screen
appears.
2 Select the date and time information,
and change the setting values by using the [Control (Up/Down/
Left/Right)] button.
3 Make sure the clock is correctly set, and then press the [Control
(OK)] button.
• The year can be set up to 2037.
• Set Date/Time Display to On. page 76
• After setting, the date and time are automatically recorded on a
special data area of the storage media.
Internal rechargeable battery
• Your camcorder includes a internal rechargeable battery that retains the
date and time settings even after the power is turned off.
• Once this battery is depleted, the current date/time values are all reset
to defaults, and you need to recharge the internal rechargeable battery.
The date/time must be set again.
Charging the internal rechargeable battery
• The internal battery is always recharged while your camcorder is
connected to the power adaptor or while the battery is attached.
• If you do not connect the camcorder to power adaptor or do not attach
the battery for about 48 hours, the internal battery fully discharges. If
this occurs, charge the internal battery by connecting to the supplied
USB cable and power adaptor for 12 hours.
Date/Time Set
Move OK
2013 00 00
Year
01
Day Month Hr Min
JAN
26
Basic operation of the camcorder
SETTING THE OPERATION MODES
You can switch the operation mode in the following order each time
you press the [MODE] button.
Recording mode ( ) Playback mode ( )
• Each time the operation mode changes, the respective mode
indicator light turns on.
Mode Indicator Functions
Recording
mode To record videos or photos.
Playback
mode To play back videos or photos.
This camcorder provides one recording mode for both video and photo
recordings. You can easily record videos or photos in the same mode
without having to switch modes.
SWITCHING THE INFORMATION DISPLAY
MODE
You can switch the on-screen information display mode.
Press the [Display ( )] button.
• The full and minimum display modes will alternate.
• Warning indicators and messages may appear depending on the
recording conditions.
• In the menu screen, the [Display ( )] button will be deactivated.
STBY [220Min] STBY
9999
27
Basic operation of the camcorder
USING THE SHORTCUT MENU (OK GUIDE)
The shortcut menu (OK guide) contains the most frequently
accessed functions for the selected mode. Pressing the [Control
(OK)] button will display the shortcut menu of frequently used
functions on the LCD screen.
An example: Setting EV (Exposure Value) in the recording mode
using the shortcut menu (OK guide).
1 Press the [Control (OK)] button in
STBY mode.
• The shortcut menu (OK guide)
appears.
2 Press the [Control (Left)] button to
select EV function.
• Press the [Control (Left/Right)]
button to adjust the exposure
while viewing the image on the
LCD screen.
3 Press the [Control (OK)] button to
confirm your selection.
• Press the [Control (OK)] button
to exit the shortcut menu.
• The exposure value setting is
applied and the indicator ( )
and setting value appear.
• The shortcut menu (OK guide) cannot be used in the SMART AUTO
mode.
• The example above shows how to set EV in the recording mode
using the shortcut menu. The setting procedure could be different for
other menu items.
• The shortcut menu appears briefly. The shortcut menu reappears
when you press the [Control (OK)] button.
STBY [220Min]
9999
STBY [220Min]
9999
0.0
EV
STBY [220Min]
+1.0
9999
28
Basic operation of the camcorder
Controlling the shortcut functions using the control buttons
Button Recording ( ) mode
Playback ( ) mode Menu selection Video playback ( ) mode Photo playback ( ) mode
OK
- Access the shortcut menu
- Confirm selection
- Exit the shortcut menu
- Access the shortcut menu
- Playback / Pause
- Access the shortcut menu
- Playback zoom
Confirms selection
UP
- iSCENE
- Zoom (tele) Increases the volume - Moves the cursor up
DOWN
- Focus
- Zoom (wide) Decreases the volume - Moves the cursor
down
LEFT
EV
- Search playback RPS (Reverse
Playback Search) rate:
x2→x4→x8→x16
- Previous skip playback
Previous image Moves to the previous
menu
RIGHT
Face Detection
- Search playback FPS (Forward
Playback Search) rate:
x2→x4→x8→x16
- Next skip playback
Next image Moves to the next
menu
29
Basic operation of the camcorder
SELECTING THE LANGUAGES
You can select the language that appears on the LCD screen.
1 Press the [MENU] button
[Control (Left/Right)] button
Settings.
2 Press the [Control (Up/Down)]
button to select Language, and
then press the [Control (OK)]
button.
3 Press the [Control (Up/Down)]
button to select the desired OSD
language, and then press the
[Control (OK)] button.
4 Press the [MENU] button to exit the menu.
• The OSD language appears in the selected language.
• Language options may be changed without prior notice.
• The selected language remains even if you remove the battery.
• The date and time format may change depending on the language
you selected.
STBY [220Min]
Exit
Settings
Default Set
Language
Format
STBY [220Min]
Exit
Settings
Default Set
Language
Format English
Français
한국어
30
Getting ready to start recording
INSERTING AND EJECTING A MEMORY CARD (NOT SUPPLIED)
• To avoid data loss, turn off the camcorder by pressing the [Power ( )] button before inserting or ejecting the memory card.
• Be careful not to push the memory card too hard. The memory card may suddenly pop out.
• If you eject the memory card from the camcorder while it is on, the camcorder turns off.
Your camcorder supports only SD, SDHC, and SDXC cards.
Card compatibility with this camcorder may vary depending on the card manufacturer and type.
To insert a memory card
1 Turn the camcorder off.
2 Open the memory card cover as shown in the figure.
3 Insert the memory card into the card slot until it softly clicks.
• Make sure that the camcorder is placed as shown above and
the terminal portion of the card is facing up.
4 Close the cover.
To eject a memory card
1 Turn the camcorder off.
2 Open the memory card cover as shown in the figure.
3 Gently push the memory card to eject it.
4 Pull the memory card out of the memory card slot and close the
cover.
CARD
CARD
31
Getting ready to start recording
SELECTING A SUITABLE MEMORY CARD
(NOT SUPPLIED)
Compatible memory cards
• You can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC cards with this camcorder.
We recommend you use an SDHC card. This camcorder
supports SD cards up to 2GB. We cannot guarantee normal
operation with SD cards bigger than 2GB.
• MMC (Multi Media Card) and MMC Plus are not supported.
• Compatible memory card capacity:
- SD: 1GB~2GB
- SDHC: 4GB~32GB
- SDXC: ~up to 64GB
• When you use unauthorised memory cards, the camcorder can
not record videos correctly and your recordings may be lost.
• The memory cards released after this camcorder was released
may not be compatible with the camcorder.
• To ensure stable recording and playback, use 6MB/s (Class 6) or
higher memory cards.
• SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards have a mechanical writeprotection
switch. Setting the switch prevents accidental erasure
of files recorded on the card. To enable writing, move the switch
up in the direction of the terminals. To set write protection, move
the switch down.
• SDHC/SDXC cards are a higher version of SD memory cards and
support higher capacities than SD memory cards.
• SD cards can be used with current SD enabled host devices.
Using the memory card adaptor
To use a micro memory card with a computer or a card
reader you must attach it to or insert it into an adaptor.
SDHC
(4GB~32GB)
Usable memory card
SDXC
(Up to 64GB)
SD
(1GB~2GB)
Protection tab
Terminals
32
Getting ready to start recording
Handling a memory card
• Damaged data may not be recoverable. We recommend you
make a back-up of important data separately on the hard disk of
your PC.
• Turning the power off or removing a memory card during an
operation such as formatting, deleting, recording, and playback
may cause data loss.
• If you modify the name of a file or folder stored in the memory
card with your PC, your camcorder may not recognise the
modified file.
• The memory card does not support any data recovery mode.
Therefore, care should be taken to prevent the memory card from
being damaged while recording.
• Make sure to format the memory card on this camcorder. If the
memory card had been formatted by a PC or other device, using
it on this camcorder without re-formatting may cause trouble
with recording and/or playback. Samsung is not responsible for
damage to recorded contents caused by improper formatting.
• You have to format newly-purchased memory cards, memory
cards with data that your camcorder cannot recognise, or cards
with data saved by other devices. Note that formatting erases all
data on the memory card. Erased data cannot be recovered.
• A memory card has a certain life span. If you cannot record new
data, you have to purchase a new memory card.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject the card to strong impacts.
• Do not place foreign substances on the memory card terminals.
Use a soft dry cloth to clean the terminals if required.
• Do not paste anything other than the label provided with the card
on the label pasting area of the card.
• Do not use a damaged memory card.
• Be careful to keep the memory card out of the reach of children,
who might swallow it.
• Samsung is not responsible for data loss due to misuse, including
loss caused by any PC virus.
• We recommend using a memory card case to avoid data loss that
can be caused by moving the card or by static electricity.
• After a period of use, the memory card may get warm. This is normal
and is not a malfunction.
The camcorder supports SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory
cards, giving you a wider choice of cards!
The data storage speed of cards may differ, depending on the
manufacturer and production system.
• SLC (single level cell) system: faster write speed enabled.
• MLC (multi level cell) system: only lower write speed is
supported.
For best results, we recommend using a memory card that
supports a faster write speed.
Using a lower write speed memory card for recording video may
cause difficulties when storing.
You may even lose your video data during the recording. In an
attempt to preserve every bit of the recorded video on a low
speed card, the camcorder forcibly stores the video on the
memory card and displays a warning:
Low speed card. Please record at a lower resolution.
If you are unavoidably using a low speed memory card, the
resolution and quality of the recording may be lower than the
value you set. page 53
The higher the video resolution and quality, the more memory the
camcorder uses.
33
Getting ready to start recording
RECORDABLE TIME AND CAPACITY
Recordable time available for video
Resolution Storage media capacity
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 64GB
1280X720/25p 13 27 55 110 220 440 890
720X576/50p (16:9) 13 27 55 110 220 440 890
720X576/50p (4:3) 13 27 55 110 220 440 890
(Unit: Approximate minutes of recording)
Recordable number of photos
Resolution Storage media capacity
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 64GB
1696x954 (16:9) 1,650 3,290 6,630 9,999 9,999 9,999 9,999
1280x720 (16:9) 2,270 4,550 9,160 9,999 9,999 9,999 9,999
1600x1200 (4:3) 1,520 3,030 6,110 9,999 9,999 9,999 9,999
800x600 (4:3) 2,990 5,970 9,999 9,999 9,999 9,999 9,999
(Unit: Approximate number of images)
1GB ≒ 1,000,000,000 bytes : Actual formatted capacity may be
less as the internal firmware uses a portion of the memory.
• Your recordable time and capacity and recordable number of photos
may differ from the figures in the tables depending on your subject
and actual recording conditions.
• The higher the resolution, the more memory is used.
• Lower resolution increases the recording time, but the image quality
may suffer.
• The bit rate automatically adjusts to the recording image.
Accordingly, the recording time may vary.
• Memory cards bigger than 64GB may not operate normally.
• The recording length of a Time Lapse REC may vary depending on
settings.
• A memory card that is used to store a video can have un-writable
areas, which may result in reduced recording time and free memory
space.
• The maximum continuous recording time is under 20 minutes. The
maximum video file size is 1.8GB. When a video recording time is
more than 20 minutes or a video file exceeds 1.8GB, a new video file
is created automatically.
• The maximum number of recordable photo and video files is 9,999,
respectively.
• Resolutions marked with are the resolutions of photos you record
when you set video resolution to 720X576/50p (4:3).
34
Getting ready to start recording
ATTACHING THE STRAP
Adjust the length of strap so that the camcorder is stable when you
press the [Recording start/stop] button with your thumb.
If you adjust the strap too tightly and use excessive force to insert your
hand, the strap hook of the camcorder may be damaged.
ADJUSTING THE LCD SCREEN
The wide LCD screen on your camcorder offers high quality image
viewing.
1 Open the LCD screen with your finger.
• The screen opens up to 90°.
2 Rotate the LCD screen towards the lens.
• You can rotate it up to 180° towards the lens and up to
90° backwards. To view recordings more conveniently, rotate
the screen by 180° towards the lens, and then fold it back to
the body.
Excessive rotation may damage the connective hinge between the
screen and the camcorder.
• When the LCD screen is rotated by 150°~180°, the left and right
sides of the subject are shown in reverse, which produces a
horizontally flipped image.
• Remove fingerprints or dust on the screen with a soft cloth.
• To adjust the LCD brightness, see page 77.
1 2
35
Basic recording
RECORDING VIDEOS
Set the desired resolution before recording. page 53
• Insert a memory card. page 30
• Open the Lens cover by using the [Lens cover open/close]
switch. page 15
• Press the [Power ( )] button to turn on the camcorder.
• Select the recording ( ) mode by pressing the [MODE]
button. page 26
This camcorder features two [Recording start/stop] buttons. One
is on the rear side of the camcorder and the other is on the LCD
screen. Select the one that works best for you.
1 Select a subject to record.
• Adjust the LCD screen to the
best angle for recording.
• Use the [Zoom] lever or [Zoom]
button to adjust the size of the
subject. page 40
2 Press the [Recording start/stop] button.
• The recording () indicator appears and recording starts.
3 To stop recording, press the [Recording start/stop] button
again.
• If power is interrupted or an error occurs during recording, the video
may not be recorded.
• Samsung is not responsible for any damage caused by a failure of
normal recording or playback operations caused by memory card
error.
• Note that damaged data cannot be recovered.
• Do not turn off the camcorder or remove the memory card while
accessing the storage media. Doing so may damage the storage
media or the data in the storage media.
0:00:00 [220Min]
0005
36
Basic recording
• For on-screen information display, see pages 16~18.
• For approximate recording times, see page 33.
• Eject the battery when you have finished recording to prevent
unnecessary battery power consumption.
• For various functions available when you record videos, see pages
52~66.
• During recording, some button operations are unavailable. ([MODE]
button, [MENU] button, etc.)
• Sound is recorded from the internal stereo microphone on the
top-front of the camcorder. Take care that this microphone is not
blocked.
• Before recording an important video, make sure to test the recording
function to check if there is any problem with the audio or video
recording.
• You can adjust the brightness of the LCD screen in the menu
options. Adjusting the LCD screen does not affect the image being
recorded. page 77
• You cannot use a locked memory card for recording. You will see a
message saying recording is disabled due to the lock.
• Recording videos in a quiet environment increases microphone
sensitivity. This increased sensitivity may cause the microphone
to record surrounding ambient noise. The increased microphone
sensitivity may also cause the camcorder to record the noise the
zoom mechanism makes if you use the zoom while recording.
• When you record indoors or in the dark places, ISO sensitivity is
automatically adjusted. In very dark places, the ISO adjustment
can cause interference effects on images and prevent you from
recording these images correctly. We recommend you use a
professional, infrared camcorder when recording in dark places or at
night.
• An image can be blurred when the Anti-Shake(HDIS) function is
enabled and the camcorder is mounted on a tripod or fixed in place.
Release the Anti-Shake(HDIS) function when the camcorder is
mounted on a tripod.
RecordING pause/RESUME
The camcorder allows you to pause temporarily while recording a
video. With this function, you can record separate scenes as a single
video.
1 Press the [Recording start/stop]
button.
• The recording () indicator
appears and recording starts.
2 Press the [Recording pause/
resume ( )] button.
• The recording pauses and the indicator ( ) appears.
• To continue the recording, press the [Recording pause/
resume ( )] button.
• If you connect your camcorder to a PC using a USB cable when
recording is paused, the camcorder will connect to the PC after it
saves the video it has recorded up to the pause.
• If you remove the memory card when the camcorder is in Pause
mode, the camcorder turns off the power and will not save any of the
video it has recorded.
0:01:24 [220Min]
0005
Resume Stop
37
Basic recording
TAGGING AND CAPTURING GREAT
MOMENTS WHILE RECORDING
(MY CLIP FUNCTION)
My Clip lets you tag good scenes with the My Clip icon ( ) by
pressing the [PHOTO] button while you are recording a video, and
then lets you extract those clips from the video and watch them
separately. The camcorder also captures photos at the same time.
1 Press the [Recording start/stop] button.
• The recording () indicator appears and recording starts.
2 Press the [PHOTO] button at each
great moment while recording.
• The camcorder tags the scenes
as My Clip ( ) and captures
photos at the same time.
3 To stop recording, press the
[Recording start/stop] button again.
Understanding My Clip function
During a video
recording
Captured photos are saved in the photo thumbnail view.
You can extract and play back the scenes tagged as
‘My Clip’( ) from a video. page 45
• The camcorder can tag up to 5 moments as ‘My Clip’ and capture
up to 5 photos while recording a video.
• When you use the My Clip function, the camcorder tags the scene
so that it starts 3 seconds before you pressed the [PHOTO] button
and ends five seconds after you pressed the [PHOTO] button.
• Photos are captured in the video recording resolution.
• When you use time lapse recording, the My Clip function does not
operate.
• You can also tag any scenes in a video by pressing the [PHOTO]
button during video playback. page 46
• The captured photos are not recorded if an error occurs during
video recording or the camcorder does not complete recording
successfully.
[220Min]
0005
38
Basic recording
RECORDING PHOTOS
Set the desired resolution before recording. page 54
• Insert a memory card. page 30
• Open the Lens cover by using the [Lens cover open/close]
switch. page 15
• Press the [Power ( )] button to turn on the camcorder.
• Select the recording ( ) mode by pressing the [MODE]
button. page 26
1 Select a subject to record.
• Adjust the LCD screen to the best angle for capturing.
• Use the [Zoom] lever or [Zoom] button to adjust the size of
the subject. page 40
2 Centre the subject in the LCD
screen.
3 Fully press the [PHOTO] button.
• The shutter sound is heard
(when Shutter Sound: On is
set).
• To continue capturing, wait until the current photo is
completely saved on the storage media.
Do not turn off the camcorder or remove the memory card when taking
photos as it may damage the storage media or data.
• This camcorder provides one combined video and photo
recording mode. You can easily record videos or photos in the
same mode without having to change it.
• The recordable number of photos varies depending on the photo
resolution. page 33
• Audio is not recorded when you take photos.
• For the on-screen display information, see pages 16~18.
• You can adjust the brightness of the LCD screen in the menu
options. Adjusting the LCD screen does not affect the image being
recorded. page 77
• For various functions available during recording, see pages 52~66.
• Photo files conform to the DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)
standard, established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information
Technology Industries Association).
39
Basic recording
RECORDING WITH EASE FOR BEGINNERS
(SMART AUTO)
User-friendly SMART AUTO optimises your camcorder for the
recording conditions automatically, providing you with the best
performance.
1 Press the [SMART AUTO] button.
• The SMART AUTO ( ) and
Anti-Shake(HDIS) ( ) icons
appear on the screen at the same
time.
2 Centre the subject in the LCD
screen.
• The camcorder automatically detects the scene (Landscape,
etc.) and adjusts the camcorder settings accordingly.
• The appropriate scene icon appears on the LCD screen.
Scene icons Meaning
Appears when recording a night scene.
Appears when recording with a very bright background.
Appears when recording indoors.
Appears when recording a close-up.
Appears when recording a landscape.
Appears when recording a portrait.
Appears when recording a portrait outdoors at night.
3 Press the [Recording start/stop] button or [PHOTO] button.
pages 35, 38
4 To cancel the SMART AUTO mode, press the [SMART AUTO]
button again.
• The SMART AUTO ( ) and Anti-Shake(HDIS) ( ) icons
disappear from the screen.
• When there is no detected scene, the ( ) icon appears.
• The camcorder may not detect the Portrait mode when recording a
face, depending on the position of the face or brightness.
• Depending on conditions such as lighting, shaking of the camcorder,
or distance to the subject, the camcorder may detect the image you
see on the LCD screen as a different scene type each time you apply
SMART AUTO.
• The Portrait and Night portrait modes work only when Face
Detection is set to On. page 56
• Buttons unavailable during SMART AUTO operation:
[MENU] button, [Control (OK)] button, etc. Most settings are
automatically adjusted in SMART AUTO mode. To set or adjust
functions on your own, release the SMART AUTO mode first.
• SMART AUTO must be set before recording.
STBY [220Min]
9999
40
Basic recording
Zooming in/out
Use the zoom function for close-up or wide-angle recording. This
camcorder allows you to record using 52x optical power zoom, 70x
Intelli-zoom and 130x digital zoom.
To zoom in (T)
Slide the [Zoom] lever towards [T] (telephoto).
(Or press the [Control (Up)] button on the LCD screen.)
• The distant subject is gradually magnified.
To zoom out (W)
Slide the [Zoom] lever towards [W] (wide-angle).
(Or press the [Control (Down)] button on the LCD screen.)
• The subject gets smaller and further away.
• The smallest zoom ratio is the subject’s original size in the zoomout.
W: Wide-angle T: Telephoto
• Zoom magnification over 70x is done through digital image
processing, and is therefore called digital zoom. Digital zooming is
possible up to 130x. page 62
• To maintain sharp focus, the minimum possible distance between
the camcorder and subject is about 1cm for wide-angle and 1m for
telephoto.
• Optical zoom preserves image quality, but the image quality may
suffer when you use digital zoom.
• Fast zooming or zooming in a subject that is a good distance away
may cause the camcorder to focus slowly. If this occurs, use Focus:
Manual. page 58
• We recommend you use Anti-Shake(HDIS) for handheld recording
when the subject is zoomed in and enlarged.
• Frequent use of the zoom function consumes more power.
• If you zoom when recording, the camcorder may record the sound
of the [Zoom] lever or [Zoom] button operating.
• When you use the zoom function, you can decrease its speed by
slowly moving the [Zoom (T/W)] lever. Moving the lever quickly
increases the zoom speed. However, you cannot use the [Zoom
(T/W)] button on the display to adjust the zoom speed.
• When Video Resolution is set to 1280x720/25p, the Intelli Zoom
function does not operate.
41
Basic recording
USING THE BACK LIGHT BUTTON
When a subject is lit from behind, this function compensates for
lighting so that the subject is not too dark.
Press the [Back light ( )] button to toggle the back light mode
between On and Off.
Back lighting influences recording when the subject is
darker than the background:
• The subject is in front of a window.
• The subject is against a snowy background.
• The subject is outdoors and the background is overcast.
• The light sources are too bright.
• The person to be recorded is wearing white or shiny clothes and
is placed against a bright background.
• The person’s face is too dark to distinguish his/her features.
42
Basic playback
CHANGING THE PLAYBACK MODE
• You can switch to the playback mode by pressing the [MODE] button.
• The recorded videos or photos appear in thumbnail view and the most recently created file is highlighted.
• The camcorder selects the thumbnail display options based on the standby mode you used the last time. However, you can choose the
video or photo thumbnail view display options by using the [Zoom] lever.
Understanding how to change the operation modes
You can easily change the playback mode by using the buttons as shown in the following figures:
Normal
1/10
Movie Move Play
Normal
1/10
Photo Move Play
0:00:55
